the 

university  of 

Connecticut 

libraries 


X 


3  =1153  01155035  1 


3 


u> 


^J<^J 


/ 


LIB  RAE  Y 


ppa 


«# 


PSYCHOLOGY. 


IN    TWO    VOLUMES. 


COMPRISING 

Philosophy  of  Mesmerism,     j       Electrical  Psychology, 
On  Fascination,  *       The  Macrocosm, 

Science  of  the  Soni. 


Ail  are  th<3  parts  of  one  stupendous  whole, 
Whose  Body  Xature  is,  and  God  the  Soni" 


VOL      I. 


NEW  YORK : 
S.     R .     WELLS     &     CO 
737  Broadway. 


THE 


MACROCOSM  AND  MICROCOSM ; 


UNIVERSE  WITHOUT  AND  THE  UNIVERSE  WITHIN 


<VN    UNFOLDING   OF   THE    PLAN    OF   CREATION    AND   THE    CORRESPOND- 
ENCE   OF    TRUTHS,    BOTH    IN 


THE  WORLD  OF  SENSE  AND  THE  WORLD  OF  SOUL. 
En  £too  Starts 

BY  WILLIAM  FISHBOUGH. 


PART     I  . 

THE   MACROCOSM;   OR,   THE   UNIVERSE   WITHOUT 


Natore  is  a  harp  of  beven  times  sbvew  strings 
On  which,  by  God's  own  hand,  is  gently  Dlaved 
The  ever-varied  music  of  the  spheres. 


NEW  YORK : 

S.     R.     WELLS    &    CO.,    PUBLISHERS 

No.    737   Broadway. 

1876. 


8F 


o 


L53 


Eatered,  8cct  jing  to  Act  cl  Congress,  in  the  year  1852.  hy 
WILLIAM  FISIIBOUGH, 
Clerk's  Offiee  of  the  District  Court  of  the  butted  States  for  the  S<  flthorn  DJi^ia 
of  New  York. 


PREFACE, 


In  submitting  the  accompanying  Treatise  to  the  public,  it  may  be 
proper  to  precede  it  by  a  few  facts  and  remarks  relative  to  its  origin, 
plan,  and  purpose.  In  the  summer  of  1849,  on  retiring  from  the  edi- 
torial charge  of  a  Philosophical  Journal,  the  writer  announced  his 
intention  to  prepare  and  publish,  as  soon  as  convenient,  a  work  on 
Psychology — a  subject  then,  as  now,  exciting  much  interest  among  a 
class  of  readers  with  whom  he  had  been  holding  weekly  communion. 
A  manuscript  of  such  a  work  was,  during  the  few  ensuing  months, 
nearly  finished  ;  but  various  circumstances  and  considerations  arose  to 
prevent  its  publication,  among  the  chief  of  which  were,  first,  that  with 
the  materials  of  psychological  science  then  unfolded,  I  found  it  impos- 
sible to  bring  the  work  to  a  desired  state  of  perfection ;  and;  secondly, 
that  facts  and  principles  such  I  was  then  able,  only,  to  set  forth,  were 
already  rapidly  forcing  themselves  into  general  notice  in  another  way. 
I  concluded,  therefore,  to  await  the  unfolding  of  further  light  upon  a 
subject  of  which,  at  that  time,  no  one  could  claim  more  than  a  very 
superficial  knowledge,  and  to  postpone  the  publication  of  the  results 
of  my  investigations  until  they  were  further  matured,  and  until  the 
state  of  the  public  mind,  upon  questions  to  which  they  related,  gave  a 
fair  indication  that  some  particular  use,  not  accomplished  by  other  de- 
velopments, might  be  possibly  subserved  in  submitting  them  to  general 
perusal.  These  statements  involve  an  explanation  and  apology  to  a 
large  portion  of  my  former  readers,  who,  as  I  learn,  felt  disappointed 
at  the  non-appearance  of  the  announced  publication  at  the  time  it  was 
expected,  and  whose  letters  of  inquiry  respecting  it  I  have,  in  some 
instances,  been  reluctantly  compelled  to  leave  unanswered. 

As  investigations  have  been  continued  upon  the  great  subject  of 
Psychology,  together  with  its  cognate  and  still  higher  themes,  it  has, 
of  course,  greatly  expanded;  until,  in  the  aspect  which  the  ques- 
tion finally  assumed,  it  was  perceived  to  be  impossible  to  give  any  ade- 
quate exposition  of  the  great  realm  of  being  within  man,  without  the 


IV  PREFACE. 

aid  of  some  rmre  enlarged,  systematic,  and  interior  exposition  than  anj 
which  was  yet  generally  extant,  of  the  great  realm  of  being  without 
which  serves  to  the  former  as  a>  natural  counterpart  and  exponent. 

Feeling,  therefore,  an  embarrassment  at  the  thought  of  writing  upon 
the  interior  constitution,  laws,  and  susceptibilities  of  man,  without  the 
comprehensive  basis  of  a  general  material  philosophy  so  universally 
harmonized  and  compacted,  as  to  bring  nature  without  into  the  ob- 
vious analogy  of  a  single  human  being,  and  thus  into  an  aspect  in 
which  it  might  be  constantly  drawn  upon  for  comparisons  and  illustra- 
tions, I  accordingly  determined  to  precede  my  proposed  anthropological 
Treatise  by  a  general  disquisition  upon  the  realm  of  exterior  being, 
which  I  have  called  the  "  Macrocosm,"  in  contradistinction  to  the 
human  physical  and  psychical  constitution,  which  I  have  called  the 
"  Microcosm."  Both  Treatises  were,  at  first,  designed  to  be  submitted 
in  one  volume ;  but  as  it  was  perceived  that  each  Avould  embrace  a  sub- 
ject which  is  complete  in  itself,  though  intimately  connected  with  the 
other,  it  was  finally  determined  to  issue  them  separately. 

In  speaking  briefly  of  the  further  objects  and  general  plan  of  the  pres- 
ent work,  I  will  premise  that  the  whole  realm  of  created  being,  natural, 
psychological,  and  even  spiritual,  forms  (at  least  in  the  general  sense) 
one  perfectly  united  System,  consistent  and  harmonious  in  all  its  parts 
and  interactivities.  To  this  proposition  the  reason  and  intuition  of  every 
well-constituted  human  mind  responds  an  instant  assent.  But  a  reli- 
able conception  of  the  universal  p/an  of  this  complex  unity  of  created 
being,  has  hitherto  undeniably  been  a  grand  desideratum  of  philos- 
ophy ;  and,  reasoning  superficially  only  from  the  objects  which  come 
within  the  scope  of  the  five  exterior  senses,  and  without  the  aid  of  any 
grand  fundamental  and  interior  Principle  to  connect  and  harmonize  all 
things,  in  serial  and  graduated  orders,  from  the  common  primary  cause 
to  ultimate  eifects — men  have  cherished  theories  ever  conflicting,  ever 
varying,  and  necessarily  ever  disfigured,  more  or  less,  with  essential 
errors  and  imperfections.  I  have  ventured  to  hope  that  this  defect  in 
the  mode  of  philosophizing  might  prove  to  be  in  some  good  degree  sup- 
plied by  a  discovery,  the  fundamental  principles  of  which  came  into 
my  mind  some  four  j-ears  ago,  in  a  manner  quite  extraordinary,  but  of 
which  I  need  not  now  speak  particularly.  This  discovery,  which  I  have 
called  "  the  law  of  the  seven-fold  correspondential  series"  or  "  tki 
\annonial    scale   of   creation"   is,   to    some    extent,   unfolded   and 


PREFACE  V 

applied  in  the  present  volume,  though  but  a  smal.  portion  f  the  3V.  • 
donees  of  its  truth,  and  the  instances  of  its  applicability,  are  herein 
exhibited. 

The  main  idea  embraced  in  the  discovery  referred  to  is,  that  each 
complete  system,  or  sub-system  of  creation,  however  great  or  small,  ia 
resolvable  into  seven  serial  parts  or  elemental  degrees,  corresponding 
to  the  seven  notes  of  the  diatonic  scale  ;  that,  as  composed  of  such  parts, 
the  systems  are  arranged  side  by  side,  or  one  above  another,  as  so 
many  octaves,  corresponding  to  the  octaves  in  music ;  and  that,  like 
them,  each  one  serves  as  a  general  exponent  of  all  the  others,  whether 
on  a  higher  or  lower  scale.  This  idea,  with  its  natural  adjuncts,  of 
which  I  can  not  here  speak  particularly,  by  harmonizing  and  unitizing 
all  natural  series  and  degrees  of  creation,  also  clearly  illustrates  the 
fact  that  all  truths  are  involved  in,  and  evolved  from,  one  grand  cen- 
tral Truth  ;  that  they  are,  indeed,  but  parts  and  degrees  of  that  one 
fundamental  truth,  which  are  ultimated  in  the  various  forms  of  em- 
bodiment which  compose  the  sum  total  of  created  existence.  By  pur- 
suing the  method  of  reasoning  which  this  idea  unfolds,  I  have  endeav- 
ored to  make  one  portion  of  the  system  of  nature  expose  the  secrets  of 
another,  and  caused  visible  facts  and  invisible  principles  to  mutually 
cast  their  light  upon  each  other. 

That  this  method  might  be  pursued  in  the  most  reliable  manner,  ob- 
servations are  commenced  upon  the  surface  of  the  system  of  things, 
composed  of  those  objects  which  are  appreciable  to  the  outer  senses, 
and  thence,  by  facts  known  particularly  to  geological  and  astronomi- 
cal science,  I  have  endeavored  to  rationally  trace  the  system  of  outer 
being  to  its  origin,  to  the  primal  condition  of  its  materials,  and  to  its 
Divine  Cause.  Assuming,  thus,  a  position  at  the  center  of  the  uni- 
versal field  of  thought,  where  all  principles  converge  to  a  common 
focus,  I  have  endeavored  to  survey,  so  far  as  possible,  the  vistas  of 
creative  development  which  thence  diverge  in  all  directions,  and  t<i 
observe  truth  in  its  progressive,  serial,  and  orderly  unfoldings,  from 
center  to  superfices,  from  generals  to  particulars,  from  causes  to  eflectSj 
from  origins  to  ultimates.  Finding  at  this  central  position,  the  princi. 
pies  and  germs  of  general  unity  and  systematic  order,  which  mast  oj 
necessity  be  perpetual  throughout  all  subsequent  unfoldings,  I  havfe 
attempted,  through  a  unitary  and  systematic  order  of  combined  analysis 
»nd  synthesis,  to  show  how  the  system  of  creation  must  have  been 


Vl  PREFACE. 

gradually  unfolded  into  its  present  form,  and  to  illustrate  the  harmo- 
nious principles,  forms,  movements,  laws,  and  interactivities  which 
now  characterize  it  as  a  whole  and  in  all  its  parts. 

It  has  thus  been  the  object  to  draw  the  bold  outlines  of  a  comprehen- 
sive primordial  philosophy,  and  to  contribute,  so  far  as  possible,  to  the 
establ'ihment  of  a  system  of  thought,  in  which  all  truths  may  be  viewed 
in  tin  r  serial,  orderly,  and  mutually  explanatory  relations,  from  gen- 
erals to  particulars — a  system  whose  internal,  vitalizing  principle  will 
constantly  tend  to  the  absorption  of  all  truths,  and  the  elimination  of 
all  errors,  in  the  same  way  in  which  the  principles  of  music  constantly 
tend  to  the  appropriation  of  harmonies,  and  the  elimination  of  discords 
If  I  have  succeeded  even  to  the  extent  of  unfolding,  with  general  cor- 
rectness,  the  most  general  principles  of  such  a  philosophy,  the  sure 
guide-boards  and  indices  to  something  vastly  more  perfect  of  the  same 
kind  may  be  considered  as  established ;  and  the  key  to  all  conceivable 
truth,  whether  relating  to  nature  without,  the  soul  within,  the  spirit 
world  above,  or  to  the  Divine  Author  and  Governor  of  all  things,  may, 
in  some  sense,  be  considered  as  in  our  possession  ;  for  no  one  can  essen- 
tially err  in  regard  to  either  of  these  subjects,  so  long  as  he  stands  in 
the  light  of  a  system  which  makes  all  truths  the  clear  and  certain  ex- 
ponents of  each  other. 

I  would  invite  particular  attention  to  that  feature  of  the  present 
volume,  by  which  the  fundamentals  of  an  elevated  theology  are  pre- 
served and  established  upon  the  very  basis  of  those  facts  in  science 
which  have  been  thought  to  be  rather  pantheistic  in  their  intimations. 

Following,  as  it  does,  in  some  respects,  a  comparatively  unbeaten 
path,  this  Treatise  can  not,  of  course,  reasonably  claim  entire  exemp- 
tion from  errors  and  imperfections.  Such  as  it  is,  however,  it  is  re- 
spectfully submitted  to  a  candid  and  discerning  public,  with  the  hope 
that  any  criticism  it  may  excite  may  not  be  exclusively  destructive,  but 
in  some  degree  also  constructive — that  it  may  not  only  expose  errors 
and  imperfections  (which  should  be  faithfully  done),  but  suggest  im- 
provements— so  that  by  the  combined  intelligence  of  many,  some 
closer  approximations  to  the  truth  may  be  made  than  I  dare  presume 
\o  have  yet  attained,  notwithstanding  the  degree  of  confidence  I  maj 
have  in  the  general  correctness  of  the  method  which  has  been  pur 
sued,  and  the  results  to  which  it  has  conduced.  W.  F. 

Williamsburgh,  September  1th,  1852. 


CONTENTS. 


fRKFAOH     , , PagcS 

CHAPTER  I. 

THE    COGNIZABLE    AND    THE    COGNIZING. 
Interior  Faculties — Exterior  Objects — At  Equipoise— Correspondence  of  Outer  and 
Inner — Course  to  be  Pursued 11 

CHAPTER  II. 

DESCENDING    SCALE    OF    TERRESTRIAL    FORMS. 

The  Three  Kingdoms— Geological  Formations— Descent  through  the  Strata— Alluvial, 
Diluvial,  Tertiary,  Secondary,  and  Transition  Formations — Thickness  of  Strata 
— Simplicity  of  Older  Fossils — Primary  Pocks — Original  Fluidity  from  Heat — Pres- 
ent State  of  the  Earth's  Center— Primitive  State  of  the  Earth's  Materials 14 

CHAPTER  III. 

THE  NATURAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  SOLAR  SYSTEM  ANALOGICALLY 
RETRACED. 

Connection  of  Geology  and  Astronomy— Common  Source  of  the  Planets — Nebular 
Theory — its  Conception  by  Herschel— Nebulous  Stars— Further  Proofs  of  the  Theory 
— Oblately  Spheroidal  Forms  and  their  Signification — Gradation  of  Densities — Re- 
sidual Nebulous  Matter — "  Zodiacal  Light" — Comets — Compte's  Calculations — Kirk- 
wood's  Law — The  Conclusion 22 

CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  NATURAL  HISTORY  OF  THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE  ANALOGI- 
CALLY   RETRACED. 

Stars  are  Suns — Clusters — The  Milky  Way — The  Heavens  Sounded— Clusters  beyond 
Clusters — Their  Shapes  and  Densities — Gravitation  indicated — Proof  of  other  Laws 
— Variable  Stars — Revolving  Double  Stars — Immense  Periods  of  some  of  them — 
Universality  of  Revolutionary  Motion— Motion  of  the  whole  Solar  System— Maedler's 
Central  Sun — Still  higher  Systems — "Magellan's  Clouds'' — The  System  of  all  Sys- 
tems— The  Infinite  and  the  Infinitesimal — Nebular  Theory  universally  Applied — ■ 
Primeval  Universal  Chaos 31 

CHAPTER  V. 

MATERIAL  BEGINNINGS  AS  POINTING  TO  A  SUPER-MATERIAL  CAUSE. 

Matter,  as  Physical  Substance,  not  Eternal — Logical  Evidences  of  a  Spiritual  Cause- 
That  this  Spiritual  Cause  was  Uncaused,  Personal,  and  Divinf. — Matter  Formed  from 
Spiritual  Substance — Motion  not  Inherent  in  Matter— Must  have  its  Origin  in  Spirit 
—In  God 44 


7111  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

PRINCIPLES  OF  UNIVERSAL  SYNTHESIS. 

Practicability  of  a  Synthesis— Effects  contained  in  Causes — Material  Genes  and  thea 
Developments — Universal  Materiality  and  Infinite  Spirit — Reclamation  of  Science 
from  Pantheistic  Tendencies — Dirine  Thoughts  as  Archetypes — Theory  of  Creation 
thence  deducible — What  Man  may  know  concerning  God — The  "  Seven  Spirits  of 
God" — Creations  hence  Seven-fold — Universal  Correspondences — The  Harmonial 
Scale  of  Creation,  and  great  Musical  Organ— The  Timbers  and  the  Temple 51 

CHAPTER  VII. 

THE     SEVEN    FUNDAMENTAL    LAWS,    AND    THEIR    INTIMATIONS    RE 
SPECTING  THE  ORIGIN  AND  STRUCTURE  OF  TH1?  UNIVERSE. 

Primordial  Matter— Origin  of  Motion— Its  Seven  Laws— Divine  Love,  Heat,  and  Ex 
pansion — Divine  Wisdom,  Light,  and  Attraction — Origin  of  Central  Sun— Origin 
of  Rotary  Motion — Emanation — Law  of  Circulation — Law  of  Aggregation — Con- 
centric Nebulous  Rings — Their  Existing  Analogues — Law  of  Segregation — Segre- 
gated Masses — Stellar  Clusters  formed  from  these — Confirmatory  Celestial  Appear- 
ances— Immensity  of  Creation — Analogy  of  Asteroids — General  Formation  of  Sun* 
— Formation  of  Planets — Summary  of  Evidences 65 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  SEVEN    DYNAMIC  AGENTS,  OR    POTENTIAL    MEDIA   OF  NATURE. 

Hoat,  Light,  and  Electricity — A  Corresponding  Trinity  Inferred — Proved  by  Eeiehcn 
bach's  Experiments — Flames  from  Magnets,  Crystals,  etc. — Seven  Colors  of  their 
Light — Explains  the  Aurora  Borealis— Heat  Inferred— Ethereal  Emanations,  and 
their  Singular  Effects — "Odic''  Heat,  and  its  Offices — "Odic"  Light,  and  its  Offices — 
"Odic"  Aura,  and  its  Offices — The  Latter  a  Universal  Sympathetic  Medium — Its 
Identity  with  "Animal  Magnetism"1 — Medium  of  Divine  Action — Divine  Embodi- 
ment —Distinction  between  Nature  and  God 91 

CHAPTER  IX. 

DEFECTS  OF  PREVAILING  COSMOLOGICAL  THEORIES. 

Newton's  Idea  of  a  Primary  Impulse — Of  Centrifugal  and  Centripetal  Forces— Diffi- 
culties in  respect  to  the  Stability  of  the  System — Their  Solution— Lifelessness  of  New- 
ton's System — It  is  a  Dangerous  Machine 113 

CHAPTER  X. 

GROUNDS    OF    STABILITY  AND    GENERAL    ECONOMY  OF  THE    COSMI 
CAL  STRUCTURE. 

Kew  Theory  Propounded — Illustrations — Life  of  the  System — No  Vacuity  in  Space- 
Equilibrium — Recuperative  Force,  etc 113 


CONTENTS.  IX 

CHAPTER  XI. 

PARTICULAR     CONSIDERATIONS     CONCERNING     THE     GENESIS    AND 

MODUS  OPERANDI   OF  THE   SOLAR  SYSTEM. 
The  Solar  and  the  Universal  Systems — Origin  of  Comets — The  Zodiacal  Light 123 

CHAPTER  XII. 

SYNTHETICAL  VIEW  OF  THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  EARTH,  AND  ITS 
GEOLOGICAL  FORMATIONS. 

Beven  Stages  of  Progress — The  Chaotic  Sta.ge — Xucleation  of  Earth  and  Moon — 
Polar  opposition — Analogy  of  Binary  Stellar  Systems — Common  Ethereal  Envelopa 
— Effects  on  Somnambulists,  etc. — Common  Center — Modified  Theory  of  Tides — Sec- 
ond Stage — Third  Stage— Fourth  Stage — Atmospheric  Conditions — Early  Scenery 
Described— Fifth  Stage— New  Red  Sandstone — Frost-marks,  Bird-tracks,  etc. — 
Diversity  of  Seasons — Marsupials — Sixth  Stage— Inorganic  and  Organic  Progress— 
Seventh  Stage,  and  Completion 131 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

THE  GEOLOGICAL  AND  THE  MOSAIC  REVELATIONS. 
Antiquity  of  our  Globe — Alarm  of  Theologians— Truths  must  Harmonize— Theology 
and  Science — Principles  of  Interpretation — Meaning  of  "Day" — Work  of  First  Day 
—Second  Day— Third  Day— Fourth  Day— Fifth  Day— Sixth  Day— Sabbatic  Period- 
Coincidences — Correspondential  Classification 148 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

THE  MINERAL  KINGDOM,  OR  THE  KINGDOM  OF  CHEMICAL  FORMS. 
Its  Seven  Divisions 169 

CHAPTER  XV. 

THE  VEGETABLE  KINGDOM. 
Its  Seven  Divisions 178 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

THE     ANIMAL    KINGDOM. 
Its  Seven  Divisions 175 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

THE  WHOLE  AND  ITS  PARTS. 
Generals  and  Particulars — Comprehensive  Classification — Illustration  by  Prismatic 
Colors— The  Temple  Erected 177 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

DUALISM  OF  PRODUCTIVE  FORCES,  OR  THE  DIASTOLE  AND  SYSTOLE 
OF  NATURE. 

l'he  Two  Fundamental  Forces— Examples  in  the  Cosmical,  Mineral,  Vegetable,  and 
Animal  Creations— Facts  in  Embryology— Progress  of  Organization— The  Principle 
Generalized— The  Diastole  and  Systole— Ultcricr  Laws 185 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

CIRCLES. 

The  Principle  of  the  Circle  applicable  to  all  Things— Wheek  within  Wheels— The 
Machine  not  Self-propelling 194 

CHAPTER  XX. 

THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES. 

ftwedenborg's  Philosophy — Degrees  "Continuous"  and  "Discreet"  —  Improvement 
suggested — Facilitates  Investigation 200 

CHAPTER  XXI. 

THE  DOCTRINE  OF  CORRESPONDENCES. 
Foundation  and  Laws  of  Correspondences — Importance  of  the  Doctrine 208 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE  DOCTRINE  OF  PROGRESSIVE  DEVELOPMENT. 

A  pending  Controversy — Theory  of  the  "  Vestiges  of  Creation"— Arguments  for  Law. 
Creations — The  Nebular  Hypothesis— Chemistry—  Geology — Fossilology — riant-like 
Crystallizations — Arbor  Diana' — Spontaneous  Germination— Transmutation  of  Vege- 
table  Species— Entozoa— Animals  Developed  by  Electricity — Rudimentary  and  Inci- 
dental Organs— Analogy  of  Human  Fcetal  and  Zoological  Developments— Theory 
Deduced— Opposition  Excited— Its  Grounds— Aspects  of  the  Question 211 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

FURTHER  VIEW  OF  THE    SYSTEM    OF    LIVING    FORMS,  AS    SUGGEST- 
ING ITS  MODE   OF  DEVELOPMENT. 

The  Light  of  our  Philosophy— Progression  and  Retrogression— Embryonic  Forms— 
Their  Progress  and  Significance — The  Great  Tree — Genesis  of  Animal  Kingdom  224 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

LAW  AGENCY  AND  DIVINE  AGENCY. 

Law  Defined— Ita  Universality— It  is  not  Force—  Archetypes  and  their  Clothing— Hu- 
man and  Divine  Builder — Divine  Dwelling-places — Creation  did  not  Develop  itself 
— Diagrainatic  Illustration — Overthrow  of  Pantheistic  Speculations 234 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

PROVIDENCES. 

Providences  are  Law-governed — Media  determine  Modes  of  Divine  Action — Recep- 
tacles modify  Influence— The  "  Light  of  the  World"— New  Beginning  Principle- 
Miracles — Truths  Sacred  wherever  found 249 

CONCLUSION  OF  TUE  VOLUME 868 


THE    M  ACROCOSM; 


THE     UNIVERSE     WITHOUT 


CHAPTER    I. 

THE    COGNIZABLE    AND    THE    COGNIZING 

The  starting  point  of  all  thought  and  investigation  with 
every  human  being,  is  his  own  interior  consciousness.  This, 
to  every  one,  is  the  most  absolutely  fixed  of  all  facts — the 
most  positively  certain  of  all  certainties ;  and  it  is  hence  the 
position  from  which  all  other  certainties  and  uncertainties, 
probabilities  and  improbabilities,  possibilities  and  impossibili- 
ties, are  estimated.  But  as  from  our  individual  centers  of 
consciousness  and  intellection,  we  open  our  eyes  and  Iook 
without  us,  we  find  ourselves  surrounded  by  appearances  ot 
various  forms  and  conditions,  near  and  remote,  which  act 
upon  our  physical,  intellectual,  and  moral  natures,  and  are  re- 
acted upon  by  us ;  and  these  active  and  re-active  influences 
are,  in  some  sense,  at  a  constant  equipoise.  There  is  thus 
a  universe  without,  and  a  universe  within  us — a  universe  of 
cognizable  forms,  principles,  and  conditions,  and  a  umvrrse 


12       THE     COGNIZABLE     AND     THE     COGNIZING. 

of  cognizing  faculties,  the  one  being  related  to,  and  corre* 
sponding  with,  the  other.  It  is  a  legitimate  object  and  privi- 
lege of  every  inquiring  mind  to  understand,  in  some  degree, 
both  of  these  universes;  and  in  order  to  do  this  to  the  fullest 
extent,  one  must  investigate  each  with  a  constant  regard  to 
its  analogies  with,  and  relations  to,  the  other.  For  the  pur- 
pose of  mapping  out,  if  possible,  certain  great  outlines  of 
the  one  united  and  harmonious  system  of  truth  as  embracing 
both  of  these  departments,  an  investigation  of  this  kind  is 
now  proposed. 

The  forms  of  the  outer  universe  are  included  in  a  few  sim- 
ple and  comprehensive  classifications,  as  they  are  arranged 
above  or  beneath  each  other  in  the  scale  of  creation.  Those 
beneath  man,  and  which  at  present  form  the  special  subject 
of  investigation,  are  embraced  in  the  comprehensive  divisions 
of  animal,  vegetable,  mineral,  geological,  and  astronomical  or 
cosmical  forms.  Of  these,  singularly  and  in  united  groups, 
together  with  their  more  superficial  properties,  the  interior 
soul  .gains  a  perception  through  some  one  or  more  of  the 
sensational  channels,  known  as  Touch,  Taste,  Sight,  Hearing, 
and  Smell.  Proceeding  upon  the  basis  of  the  impressions 
received  through  these  avenues  of  sense,  the  ratiocinative 
faculty  becomes  the  medium  of  some  knowledge  of  the  pur- 
poses and  mutual  relations  of  these,  and  of  the  laws  by  which 
they  are  governed;  and,  availing  itself  of  the  contributions  of 
both  Sense  and  Reason,  at  the  same  time  that  it  draws,  from 
its  own  interior  and  independent  resources,  the  faculty  of 
Intuition  decides  upon  their  causes,  their  life  forces,  and  ';heir 
more  interior  significations. 

Conforming,  therefore,  to  what,  in  this  work,  will  be  recog- 
nized as  the  true  method  of  reasoning,  it  shall   be  our  first 


COUESE     TO     BE     PUESEED.  13 

endeavor,  oy  the  aid  of  Sense.  Reason,  and  Intuition,  to  trace 
analytically  the  descending  scale  of  creation,  from  exteriors  to 
interiors,  from  effects  to  causes,  from  ulti mates  to  origins.  If 
we  can  succeed  by  this  process  in  establishing  any  reliable 
conclusions  relative  to  the  first,  the  elemental,  and  hence 
germinal  form  and  condition  whence  sprang  this  universal 
system  of  things,  we  may  then,  in  the  light  of  these  con- 
clusions, proceed  to  retrace  our  steps  synthetically  upward 
through  the  successive  .-.cries  and  degrees  of  natural  unfolding, 
and  in  a  general  way  discover  how  the  system  of  creation,  in 
fits  present  completed  form,  came  to  exist,  and  also  what  are 
Uie  prominent  principles  of  its  constitution  and  government, 
It  is  obvious  that  these  combined  processes  of  Analysis  and 
Synthesis,  if  correctly  pursued,  will  be  far  more  efficient  in 
unfolding  the  principles  and  laws  harmoniously  pervading  and 
governing  all  parts  of  the  united  system  of  things,  and  in 
exhibiting  the  vital  relations  and  sympathies  subsisting  be- 
tween  all  forms  and  kingdoms  of  nature,  than  either  one  of 
these  processes  pursued  singly,  and  without  reference  to  the 
other. 

In  pursuing  this  process  of  inquiry,  strict  attention,  of 
course,  shall  be  paid  to  facts  and  principles  already  firmly 
fixed  upon  a  true  scientific  basis:  but  so  long  as  these  are 
made  the  basis  of  further  reasoning,  and  the  line  of  investi- 
gation is  pursued  in  strict  obedience  to  the  established  laws 
of  induction  and  the  intuitions  of  the  interior  mind,  I  shall 
not  consider  myself  restricted  from  exhibiting,  and,  in  some 
instances,  perhaps,  even  insisting  upon,  the  conclusions  to 
which  this  process  may  conduct,  even  though  these  may.  iu 
laai.y  cases,  be  unknown  to  the  prevailing  philosophy. 

2 


CHAPTER    II. 

DESCENDING    SCALE    CF    TEEBEBTBIAL   F0KMS. 

Among  the  systems  of  forms  which  surround  man  in  the 
outer  world,  that  most  immediately  related  to  him,  and  next 
below  him  in  the  scale  of  creation,  is  the  Animal  Kingdom. 
Immediately  beneath  this,  serving  as  a  substratum  on  which 
it  rests,  and  the  source  from  which  it  derives  its  subsistence,  is 
the  Vegetable  Kingdom.  This,  again,  rests  upon  the  Mineral 
Kingdom,  from  which,  as  the  next  degree  below  it  in  the 
scaie  of  existence,  it  derives  its  nourishment  and  physical 
support. 

Then,  beneath  all  these  kingdoms,  as  an  anterior  condition 
on  which  their  physical  developments,  as  complete  systems. 
necessarily  depend,  is  the  system  of  Geological  Formations. 
These  consist  of  various  gradations,  or  of  lower  and  highei 
stratifications,  which  were  developed  by  degrees,  and  in  suc- 
cessive periods  of  time.  Each  geological  formation  above  the 
primary,  contains  petrifactions  of  plants  and  animals  of  a  de- 
gree of  organization  corresponding  to  the  degree  of  progression 
in  the  earth's  crust  marked  by  the  particular  stratification  in 
which  they  are  found,  the  lowest  organizations  being  associated 
with  the  most  ancient  fossiliferous  rocks,  and  the  highest  with 
the  most  recent,  showing  a  coincident  progress  in  the  inorganic 
and  organic  developments.  Let  us  now  trace  dow  iward  the 
various  geological  stratifications,  from  highest  to  lowest,  in 
order  that  our  minds  may,  by  successive  steps,  be   conducted 


D  E  S  C  E  K  D  I  X  G      VIEW.  15 

to  the  terrestrial  conditions  which   preceded  them    all,  and 
served  as  the  material  Germ  of  their  unfolding. 

If  we  could  find  a  section  of  the  earth's  crust  in  which  all 
the  geological  stratifications  existed  in  their  completeness,  and 
were  arranged  on  horizontal  planes,  in  their  natural  order  of 
superposition,  and  if  we  should  then  proceed  to  dig  vertically 
downward  through  the  strata,  we  would  first  pass  through 
layers  of  loam,  fine  sand,  and  gravel,  of  no  very  great  or  very 
definite  thickness.  We  might  find  in  this  deposit  the  re- 
mains of  plants  and  animals  of  existing  species,  together  with 
the  remains  of  man  and  of  his  works.  This  is  the  most  recent, 
or  what  is  called  the  Alluvial  Formation.  Next  we  would 
penetrate  an -irregular  deposit  of  clay,  sand,  gravel,  and  small 
and  large  stones,  more  or  less  rounded  by  friction,  and  which 
is  called  the  Diluvial  Formation.  We  wrould  next  pass 
through  layers  of  clay,  sand,  gravel,  marl,  etc.,  in  greater  or 
less  degrees  of  consolidation,  portions  of  which  abound  with 
the  remains  of  animals  and  plants  of  species  now  mostly  ex- 
tinct. These  deposits  have  been  roughly  estimated  as  having 
the  aggregate  thickness  of  about  thirteen  hundred  feet,  and 
constitute  what  is  called  the  Tertiary  Formation.  Next  we 
would  penetrate  through  deposits  of  chalk,  and  strata  of  marl- 
stone,  ironstone,  red  sandstone,  etc.,  to  the  depth  of  not  less 
than  five  thousand  feet,  exhuming,  as  we  proceeded,  the 
remains  of  huge  saurians  and  other  animals  of  a  comparatively 
low  organization,  and  which  became  entirely  extinct  before 
the  next  superior  formation  commenced.  These  strata,  with 
their  distinctive  fossils,  are  comprised  in  what  is  called  the 
Secondary  Formation.  We  would  then  descend  through  a 
system  of  deposites  of  not  less  than  three  thousand  feet  in 
thickness,  consisting  of  strata  of  limestone,  slate,  ironstone, 
Tad  mineral  coal,  constituting  what  is  called  the   Coal  Fyr- 


16  GEOLOGICAL     FORMATIONS. 

mation.  We  would  after  this  descend,  in  succession,  through 
strata  of  limestone,  called  the  mountain  or  carboniferous 
limestone  ;  through  what  is  called  the  Old  Red  Sandstone,  and 
thence  through  what  is  known  as  the  Silurian  and  Cambrian 
systems  of  deposits.  These  stratifications,  taken  together, 
have  been  estimated  by  Dr.  John  Pye  Smith,  as  measuring  a 
thickness  of  not  less  than  one  hundred  and  thirty  thousand 
feet.  They  abound  with  fossils  which,  with  perhaps  slight 
exceptions,  and  these  confined  to  their  higher  portions,  are 
exclusively  marine;  and  the  character  and  magnitude  of  some 
of  these,  and  their  invariableness  of  size  and  constitution  as 
they  occur  in  all  latitudes,  show  that  a  high  and  unvarying 
temperature  prevailed  on  all  parts  of  our  globe  during  the 
period  when  they  flourished,  which  could  not  have  depended, 
in  any  great  degree,  upon  the  solar  rays,  but  is  generally  sup- 
posed to  have  been  caused  by  radiations  from  subterranean 
fire,  then  more  intense  than  at  subsequent  periods.  This 
whole  series  of  stratifications  has  been  called  the  Transition 
Formation,  comprising,  in  the  period  of  its  production,  those 
changes  in  the  physical  conditions  of  the  earth's  surface,  which 
were  necessary  to  qualify  it  for  the  production  of  terrestrial 
vegetation  and  the  healthy  sustenance  of  air-breathing  animals. 
This  completes  the  enumeration  of  the  fossiliferous  stratifi- 
cations, which,  according  to  some  estimates,  are  of  an  aggre- 
gate thickness  exceeding  twenty  miles  !  These  all,  including 
the  remains  of  the  plants  and  animals  which  subsisted  during 
their  respective  epochs,  were  quietly  deposited  at  the  bottoms 
of  oceans,  estuaries,  and  lakes,  and  subsequently  consolidated 
and  petrified,  and  thus,  as  faithful  records  of  the  natural  his- 
to-y  of  our  planet,  they  have  been  preserved  through  the 
untold  ages  which  have  elapsed  from  the  period  of  their  living 
existence  until  present  time ! 


DISTURBANCES      OF     THE      STRATA.  l'i 

As  -\ve  have  thus  proceeded  through  the  descending  scale  of 
geological  and  pafteontological  creations,  we  have  seen  that 
animal  and  vegetable  organisms,  whose  remains  are  entombed 
in  the  rocks,  become  more  and  more  simple.  In  the  lowest 
of  the  fossil iferous  rocks,  the  principal  animal  remains  are  of 
the  class  called  the  Radiata,  which  somewhat  resemble  plants, 
and  form  the  connecting  link  with  the  Vegetable  Kingdom  ; 
while  the  plants  are  mainly  of  a  simple  species  of  sea-weed, 
called  fucoides.  It  is,  however,  presumable  that  more  minute, 
and  still  more  simple  species  preceded  these,  but  of  which,  in 
consequence  of  the  delicacy  of  their  texture,  all  traces  have 
become  obliterated. 

Immediately  beneath  the  fossiliferous  rocks,  we  came  to 
thick  strata  of  clay  slate,  hornblende  slate,  mica  slate,  gneis-s, 
etc.,  which  contain  no  organic  remains,  and  are  called  the 
Primary  Stratified  Rocks.  Immediately  beneath  these  last 
strata,  lies  the  Granite,  which  is  unstratified,  and  appears  to 
be  the  original  and  parent  rock,  from  the  comminuted  and 
pulverized  materials  of  which,  combined  with  material,* 
descending  from  the  atmosphere,  and  evolved  from  the  central 
mass  of  the  earth,  all  the  stratified  rocks  were  subsequently 
formed. 

Some  of  my  readers,  who  have  not  made  geology  a  par- 
ticular subject  of  study,  may  be  disposed  to  inquire  whether 
any  one  has  thus  actually  digged  into  the  earth  to  the  depth 
of  over  twenty  miles,  and  ascertained  the  character  and  order 
of  geological  formations  to  be  as  I  have  described  them  %  I 
answer,  no ;  nor  would  such  a  mode  of  exploration  have  been 
necessary.  Owing  to  the  immense  and  frequent  disturbances 
to  which  the  earth's  crust  has  been  subjected,  in  different 
ages,  from  the  explosive  forces  of  internal  fires,  all  the  older 
strata  have,  in  various  places,  been  broken,  and  their  upheaved 


L8  GEOLOGICAL     FORMATIONS. 

edges  have  thus  been  exposed  at  the  surface  of  the  earth,  and 
may  he  measured  "with  little  difficulty.  And,  although  in 
most,  if  not  all,  places,  some  of  the  strata  are  wanting,  yetA 
by  observing  a  number  of  the  associated  links  in  tlu  chain  of 
development  in  one  place,  and  connecting  and  matching  them 
with  corresponding  sections  of  the  chain  found  in  other  places, 
and  which  extend  higher  or  lower,  the  whole  series  may  be, 
and  has  been,  re-constructed  with  approximate  accuracy  and 
certainty.  And  by  comparing  the  lithological  characters  of 
rocks,  and  especially  the  fossils  which  they  contain,  it  is 
found  that  the  order  of  development  is  invariably  such  as 
I  have  described,  and  is  the  same  in  all  parts  of  the 
world. 

It  was  said  that  the  Granite,  which  seems  to  be  the  oldest 
of  the  rocks,  underlying,  as  it  does,  all  the  stratified  series,  is 
itself  unstratijied.  This  is  true,  also,  of  its  various  modifica- 
tions in  the  Porphyry,  Basalt,  and  Greenstone.  These  rocks, 
therefore,  could  not  have  been  formed,  as  other  rocks  were, 
by  sedimentary  deposits  at  the  bottom  of  oceans  and  lakes. 
On  the  contrary,  they  bear  unmistakable  evidences  of  having 
been  originally  in  a  molten  state  from  the  action  of  intense 
heat.  That  no  links  may  be  wanting  in  the  chain  of  our 
further  inductions,  some  of  these  evidences  require  to  be 
briefly  stated,  as  follows : 

It  appears  that,  in  many  instances,  after  thick  beds  of 
stratified  rocks,  including  some  of  the  older  members  of  the 
fossiliferous  series,  were  formed  immediately  over  the  granitic 
rocks,  the  latter  have  flown  upward,  not  only  in  hemispherical 
and  conical,  but  sometimes  m  sharply  angular  forms,  displac- 
ing the  superincumbent  strata,  and  producing  mountain  eleva- 
tions. In  the  upheaving  effort  it  has,  apparently  by  injection, 
tilled  up  the  smiillest  crevices  of  the  contiguous  rocks,  fre* 


FUSION    BY    HEAT.  15 

quently  bursting  through  them  in  various  directions,  foiming 
"  dykes  "  and  veins  with  numerous  branches,  from  an  inch  to 
hundreds  of  feet  in  diameter ;  and,  coming  up  frequently 
through  the  entire  thickness  of  the  strata,  it  has  flown  over 
the  top;  where  it  has,  often  in  large  masses,  subsequently  con 
solidated.  These  dykes  are  often  found  to  contain  imbedded 
fragments  of  the  identical  rocks  through  which  they  appear 
to  have  forced  their  passage  in  their  upward  movement.  The 
manner  in  which  these  fragments  are  imbedded,  proves  to  a 
demonstration,  that  the  mass  by  which  they  are  surrounded 
was  once  in  a  fluid  state,  and  that  it  subsequently  became 
solid,  as  we  now  find  it. 

That  the  original  fluidity  of  these  injected  rocks  was  pro 
duced  by  heat,  is  evident  from  the  following,  among  other 
considerations:  1.  The  crystaline  character  of  some  of  these 
rocks  is  such  as  could  have  been  produced  only  by  heat.  2. 
The  chemical  effects  produced  upon  the  stratified  rocks  by 
contact  of  the  unstratified  ones,  are  similar  to  those  produced 
by  dykes  of  recent  lava.  3.  The  different  unstratified  rocks 
insensibly  pass  into  each  ether,  and  indeed  into  modern  lavas. 
Besides,  the  mineral  composition  of  the  rocks,  as  well  as  the 
form  and  position  of  the  dykes,  shows  that  their  original 
fluidity  could  not  have  been  the  result  of  water,  which  is  the 
only  known  natural  element  besides  fire,  to  which  their  solu- 
tion could  possibly  be  attributed  in  any  case. 

But  as  the  rocks  of  which  we  have  spoken  are  primary 
rocks,  and  serve  as  the  basis  of  all  stratified  rocks  in  all  places, 
and  as  they  must,  therefore,  have  universally  prevailed  ove* 
the  surface  of  the  earth  before  any  other  rocks  were  formed, 
if  their  original  state  was  that  of  igneous  fluidity,  it  may  be 
assumed  that  such  was  the  condition  of  the  whole  globe — ■ 
that  it  was  one  vast  ball  of  molten  lava !     This  is  now  gener* 


^0  geological    formations. 

ally  the  opinion  of  geologists,  and  is  confirmed  by  the  follow 
ing,  among  other  considerations : 

1.  The  earth  is  not  a  perfect  globe,  but  an  oblate  spheroid, 
flattened  at  the  poles — the  polar  diameter  being  about  twenty- 
six  miles  shorter  than  the  equatorial.  This  is  the  form  which 
it  would  necessarily  have  assumed  from  the  centrifugal  force 
caused  by  diurnal  revolution,  supposing  it  to  have  been  orig- 
inally in  a  fluid  state. 

2.  There  is  good  evidence  that  our  planet  is  still  a  vast  ball 
of  liquid  fire,  surrounded  by  a  thin  crust,  which,  in  thickness, 
bears  no  greater  proportion  to  the  general  mass  of  the  earth, 
than  the  egg-shell  bears  to  the  general  mass  of  the  egg.  From 
careful  observations  which  have  been  made  during  many 
years,  upon  the  temperature  of  deep  mines  a-nd  the  waters  of 
artesian  wells,  in  various  parts  of  the  world,  it  is  found  that, 
after  descending  beyond  the  reach  of  solar  influence,  the  tem- 
perature invariably  increases,  in  all  places,  at  the  average  rate 
of  about  one  degree  Fahrenheit  for  every  forty-five  or  fifty 
feet  of  descent.  And  this  rule  uniformly  holds  good  to  the 
greatest  depths  to  which  the  earth  has  been  penetrated. 

Now,  assuming  fifty  degrees  as  the  average  temperature  at 
the  surface  of  the  earth,  and  taking  the  mean  ratio  of  increase 
at  one  degree  for  every  fifty  feet  of  descent,  we  should,  at  this 
rate,  at  a  depth  of  a  little  more  than  sixty-five  miles,  reach  a 
temperature  of  seven  thousand  degrees,  which  would  be  suffi- 
cient to  melt  all  known  rocks.  Supposing  this  state  of  igneous 
fusion  to  extend  from  the  comparatively  thin  crust  of  the  earth 
on  all  sides,  to  the  center,  we  have  still  a  mass  of  molten  lava 
of  more  than  seven  thousand  miles  in  diameter.  If  we  suppose 
this  mass  to  become  sometimes  agitated  in  its  higher  portions 
by  internal  gasses,  or  by  the  percolation  of  water  through 
fissures  in  the  superincumbent  strata,  we  have  a  sufficient  ex- 


THE     PRIMITIVE     STATE.  21 

planation  of  earthquakes,  volcanic  eruptions,  and  of  the  im- 
mense mountain  upheavels  which  have  occurred  at  different 
epochs  during  the  geological  formations;  while,  aside  from 
the  hypothesis  of  internal  fusion,  the  solution  of  these  latter 
phenomena  would  be  extremely  difficult,  if  not  impossible. 

Thus  have  geologists  reasoned,  frcm  substantial  data,  con- 
cerning  the  early  state  of  our  planet.  But,  though  at  this  point 
the  data  of  retrospective  reasonings  become  less  certain  than 
those  which  have  hitherto  guided  us,  we  may  presume,  as 
highly  probable,  not  to  say  absolutely  certain,  that  not  even 
this  was  strictly  the  primitive  state  of  our  planet — that  the 
matter  which  composes  it  was  in  conditions  anterior  and  ger- 
minal even  to  this ;  and  'if  we  extend  backward  our  chain  of 
analogical  inductions  in  a  direct  line,  it  will  lead  us  to  a  con- 
dition of  still  more  intense  heat — heat  that  would  be  compat- 
ible only  with  the  existence  of  matter  in  the  form  of  vapor. 
It  is,  then,  to  say  the  least,  an  hypothesis  certainly  not  unrea- 
sonable,  that  the  matter  of  our  earth  was  once  in  the  state  of 
igneous  gas,  from  the  cooling  and  condensation  of  which  it 
assumed  successively  the  fluid,  and  then  its  present  superfici- 
ally solid  state.  But  for  the  present  we  offer  this  only  as  an 
hypothesis  to  which  analogies  thus  for  developed,  directly 
point.  Such  further  and  more  conclusive  evidences  of  its 
truth,  as  scientific  data  now  afford,  will  be  incidentally  brought 
into  view  as  we  proceed. 


CHAPTEB   III. 

THE    NATU3AL    HISTOET     OF    THE    SOLAE    SYSTEM   ANA 
LOGICALLY    EETEACED. 

Admitting  that  the  foregoing  hypothesis  as  to  the  original 
condition  of  the  earth's  materials  has  any  foundation  in  truth, 
we  find  in  it  the  link  which  connects  geology  with  astronomy. 
It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  earth  is  only  one  member 
of  the  great  family  of  planets  belonging  to  the  solar  system  ; 
and  it  is  fair  to  presume  that  the  brothers  and  sisters  of  the 
same  planetary  family  have  the  same,  or  a  similar,  origin — 
especially  as  they  have  the  same  oblately  spheroidal  form, 
and  observe  the  same  laws  of  diurnal  and  orbitual  rovolution. 
If  the  earth,  then,  was  originally  in  a  state  of  igneous  gas,  so 
(we  may  suppose)  were  ikey ;  and  before  the  incipient  pro 
cesses  of  spheroidation  commenced,  the  materials  of  all  of 
them  may  have  commingled,  and  probably  did  commingle, 
together  in  one  undistinguishable  mass. 

Though  this  hypothesis  of  an  original  gaseous  state  of  the 
earth  and  planets  rests  upon  a  foundation  of  its  own  (being  a 
portion  of  the  chain  of  analogous  developments  prolonged 
directly  backward  from  the  links  of  substantial  geological 
facts),  it  is  precisely  in  accordance  with  the  nebular  theory  of 
the  origin  of  worlds  and  systems,  which  theory  also  rests  upon 
independent  grounds  of  reasoning.  As  a  conviction  of  the 
general  truthfulness  of  this  theory  is  important  as  a  basis  of 
ulterior  ideas  tf    be  presented   in   this   treatise,   the  patient 


RESOLUTION     OF     NEBULJE.  2d 

attention  of  the  reader  is  solicited  while  we  briefly  explain 
its  nature,  and  unfold  a  summary  of  the  evidences  on  which 
it  is  founded. 

The  idea  that  nebulae,  or  loose  masses  of  fiery  vapor,  which 
seemed  to  be  floating  in  the  depths  of  immensity,  might  form 
the  materials  out  of  which  nature  elaborated  suns  and  planets, 
was  originally  propounded  as  a  conjecture,  by  Sir  William 
Herschel ;  but  it  was  subsequently  brought  into  more  definite 
and  tangible  form  by  Laplace,  Comte,  Nichol,  and  others. 
The  theory  supposes  that  loose  masses  of  nebulous  vapor,  at 
first  without  definite  form  or  movement,  gradually  assumed, 
by  virtue  of  gravitation,  a  regular  spheroidal  and  rotating  form, 
lightest  at  the  circumference,  and  gradually  increasing  in  den- 
sity toward  the  center,  at  which  point  the  greatest  density  is 
attained.  It  supposes  that  such  forms  were  the  original  forms 
of  suns — that  the  substance  of  these,  in  this  diffused  state, 
originally  extended  from  their  present  condensed,  solar  spheres, 
to  the  outermost  limits  of  the  planetary  systems  which  now 
revolve  about  them  ;  and  that  by  the  combined  processes  of 
rotation  and  further  condensation,  successive  and  concentric 
rings  were  formed  on  the  outer  limits  of  the  nebulous  disks, 
of  which  we  have  a  faint  illustration  in  the  rings  of  Saturn. 
These  rings,  it  is  thought,  subsequently  became  broken  up, 
when  the  matter  composing  them  naturally  agglomerated  into 
spheres,  which,  by  an  analogous  process  of  condensation  and 
evolution  of  rings,  produced  planets  and  their  satellites. 

Ii  is  but  just  to  remark  that  many  of  the  supposed  nebidce 
which  Herschel  thought  might  form  the  materials  of  future 
suns  and  systems,  have  subsequently,  by  the  application  of 
powerful  telescopes,  and  especially  that  of  Lord  Ross,  been 
resolved  into  stars,  apparently  so  close  together  as  to  cause 
the  general  hazy  appearance  which  they  present  wher.  viewed 


24  THE      NEBULAR      HYPOTHESIS. 

with  the  naked  eye,  or  through  a  telescope  :>f  low  power, 
It  is  reasonably  suspected  that  many  of  the  stall  unresolved 
nebulas  might  yield  to  a  still  higher  telescopic  power,  were, 
such  available  to  science  and  art ;  and  acting  upon  this  sup- 
position, some  few  astronomers  have  abandoned  the  nebular 
theory,  in  which  they  previously  believed,  and  attempted  to 
prove  its  impossibility.  But  in  reference  to  this  change  of 
astronomical  faith  from  such  a  cause,  Professor  Michell 
forcibly  remarks,  that  "  Herschel  only  adopted  the  [nebular] 
theory  after  he  had  resolved  many  hundred  of  the  nebulae  into 
stars;  and,  if  there  ever  existed  a  reason  for  accepting  the 
truth  of  this  remarkable  speculation,  that  reason  has  been 
scarcely  affected  in  any  degree,  by  recent  discoveries." 

The  phenomenon  of  nebulous  stars,  especially,  still  remains 
in  its  unimpaired  force,  as  an  argument  for  the  probable  truth 
of  the  theory  in  question.  These  stars  are  spherical  bodies, 
bright  in  the  center,  from  which  there  is  a  gradual  shading 
off  into  undistinguishable  dimness  as  the  circumference  is  ap 
proached.  They  exist  in  all  degrees  of  apparent  concentration, 
from  a  diffused  blur  with  a  no  very  distinct  nucleus,  to  a  well 
defined  star  surrounded  by  a  haze.  What  can  these  bodies  be 
but  masses  of  primeval  matter,  in  various  degrees  of  pro- 
gression between  their  original,  or  most  chaotic  state,  and  that 
of  fully  developed  suns  and  planets?  But  these  are  pre- 
cisely the  various  conditions  which  the  nebular  theory  sup- 
poses to  take  place  during  the  different  and  progressive 
stages  of  the  process  by  which  suns  and  planets  are  ultimately 
formed. 

A  brief  summary  of  the  further  proofs  of  the  nebular  theory 
may  be  presented  as  follows : 

1.  It  has  already  been  remarked  that  the  earth  is  an  oblatG 
spheroid,  flattened  ar.  the  poles  and  bulged  at  the  equator. 


FORM     OF     PLANETS.  20 

This  same  fact  is  also  observed  in  relation  to  other  planet^ 
the  outer  ones,  owing  to  the  greater  rapidity  of  their  rotatory 
motions,  being  much  more  bulged  and  flattened  than  the  inner 
ones.  To  the  writer  it  is  not  a  little  surprising  that  this  form 
of  planetary  bodies  has  not,  o£  itsalf,  established  among 
astronomers  the  universal  conviction  that  these  bodies  were 
formed  by  a  contraction  of  their  materials  from  a  previously 
diffused  state.  Such,  it  appears,  must  necessarily  have  been 
the  case,  if  their  superior  equatorial  diameter  had,  in  its  origin, 
any  connection  with  the  centrifugal  force  produced  by  rotatory 
motion.  For  if  the  materials  of  the  planet,  while  in  an 
originally  globular  form,  had  commenced  being  thrown  outward 
at  the  equator,  by  the  centrifugal  force  generated  by  revo- 
lution, no  known  counter-force  could  have  prevented  them 
from  being  all,  or  nearly  all,  thrown  outward,  and  continually 
farther  and  farther  from  the  center,  until  the  planet  would 
have  lost  its  identity.  Especially  would  this  have  been  the 
result,  if  the  original  velocity  of  revolution  had  continued  un- 
diminished. For  it  is  evident  that  the  farther  a  particle,  or 
collection  of  particles,  is  thrown  from  an  axis  around  which 
they,  in  a  given  period,  may  revolve,  the  greater  is  the  centri- 
fugal force  generated  by  the  rotation,  and  hence  the  greater 
is  its  tendency  to  fly  off  still  farther;  while,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  farther  a  particle  is  thrown  from  a  center  of 
attraction,  the  less  becomes  the  attractive  or  centripetal  force 
to  retain  it  from  flying  off  still  farther. 

The  forces  which  produced  the  bulged  form  of  planets  at 
the  equator  are  undoubtedly  the  same  as  those  which  pro- 
duced the  rings  of  Saturn.  Now,  the  rings  of  Saturn  com- 
plete a  revolution  in  10  hours  32  minutes  and  15  seconds, 
vhile  the  primary  itself  revolves  in  10  hours  16  minutes  and 
I  second,  or  in  a  period  of  only  16  minutes  and  14  seconds 

3 


26  THE     NEBULAE     HYPOTHESIS. 

less,  if,  therefore,  there  was  originally  generated,  by  rotatory 
motion,  at  Saturn's  equator,  an  amount  of  centrifugal  force 
sufficient  to  throw  off  particles  to  the  present  position  of  the 
rings  of  that  body,  certainly  the  immensely  increased  centrifu- 
gal force  generated  by  the  revolution  of  those  rings  in  about 
the  same  period,  would  have  thrown  the  same  particles  still 
farther,  and  would  probably  have  dissipated  them  into  chaos — 
especially  as  the  attractive  force  of  the  primary,  at  that  dis- 
tance, must  have  exerted  considerably  less  influence  upon 
them. 

The  same  reasoning  applies  with  equal  force  to  that  ring,  or 
circle  of  attached  matter,  which  rises  above  the  line  of  sphe- 
ricity at  Saturn's  equator,  and  also  at  the  equators  of  other 
planets,  and  of  the  earth.  The  acting  forces  are  of  the  same 
nature,  and  bear  similar  relations  to  each  other  in  both  places, 
the  only  difference  being  a  difference  in  the  degrees  of  in- 
tensity with  which  they  act  in  the  different  positions. 

These  considerations  show  that  in  all  stages  of  the  process 
by  which  planetary  bodies  were  formed,  the  attractive,  co?i- 
Jractive,  or  centripetal  force,  had  decided  predominance  over  the 
centrifugal.  Supposing  the  two  forces  to  have  always  acted 
together  after  both  became  established,  the  centrifugal  force, 
it  is  true,  must  have  always  restrained  and  modified  the 
intensity  of  the  centripetal,  in  the  direction  of  the  plane  of 
rotation,  but  could  never  throw  farther  into  space  a  particle 
which  the  centripetal  or  attractive,  had  succeeded,  in  defiance 
of  the  opposing,  force,  in  bringing  from  a  greater  to  a  less 
distance  from  the  center. 

The  bulged  form  of  the  earth  and  other  planets,  therefore, 
could  not  have  been  produced  by  a  throwing  cut  of  particles 
af  the  equator,  but  rather  by  a  drawing  in  of  particles  from 
the  poles,  where  the  attract  ive  force  was  comparatively  uure 


GRADATION     OF     DENSITIES.  27 

strained  by  the  centiifugal;  while  this  latter  force,  attaining 
its  maximum  at  the  equator,  meets  and  wards  off  the  gravi- 
tating particles  in  their  rush  toward  the  center,  and  thus  the 
two  forces  finally  settle  into  an  exact  equipoise,  of  which  the 
oblately  spheroidal  form  of  the  planet  is  an  equally  exact 
expression. 

These  considerations  seem  to  sufficiently  prove  that  the 
earth  (before  shown  to  have  been  originally  in  a  state  of 
igneous,  if  not  gaseous  fluid)  was  formed  by  the  predominat- 
ing force  of  attraction,  and  hence  contraction,  acting  upon 
materials  in  a  rarer  state,  and  reducing  them  to  their  present 
dense  form.  The  attractive  and  contractive  operation  must, 
of  course,  have  proceeded  through  a  progressive  series  of 
analogous  stages,  which  somewhere  must  have  had  a  begin- 
mng  ;  and  we  can  not  conceive  of  any  possible  beginning  short 
of  the  greatest  possible  diffusion — a  state  of  diffusion  which, 
originally  applying  to  the  materials  of  all  planets,  must  have 
brought  them  all  into  the  form  of  one  common  vapory 
mass. 

Though  this  argument,  in  proof  of  the  nebular  theory, 
seems  hitherto  to  have  generally  escaped  the  notice  of 
astronomical  writers,  it  is  one  which,  nevertheless,  deserves  to 
be  pondered  and  borne  in  mind. 

2.  Another  argument  for  the  same  theory,  is  derived  from 
the  regular  gradations  of  densities  of  planets,  from  innermost 
to  outermost.  Thus  it  is  stated,  on  the  basis  of  mathematical 
calculations,  that  Mercury  must  be  about  the  weight  of  so 
much  lead ;  Venus  is  nearly  six  times  the  weight  of  so  much 
water;  the  Earth,  as  a  whole,  is  four  and  a  half  times  the 
weight  of  water ;  Mars  is  a  little  over  three  times  the  weight 
of  water ;  Jupiter  is  a  small  fraction  over  the  weight  of  so 
much  water  j  Saturn  is  less  than  half  that  specific  weight,  01 


28  THE     NEBULAE     HYPOTHESIS. 

about  the  weight  of  so  much  cork ;  and  Herschel  manifests  a 
corresponding  decrease  of  density.  This  regular  gradation  in 
the  specific  densities  of  the  planets,  in  the  order  of  their 
occurrence,  from  innermost  to  outermost,  is  precisely  what  it 
should  be,  supposing  that  they  were  all  formed  by  the  oper- 
ations of  a  common  law,  from  an  original  sphere  of  fluid 
matter,  which  must  have  been  most  dense  near  the  center, 
and  most  rare  on  its  outer  extremities. 

There  is  a  similar  relation  between  the  distances  of  the 
different  planets;  for,  proceeding  outward  from  Mercury,  each 
successive  planet  (including  the  asteroids  as  equivalent  to  one 
planet)  is  about  double  the  distance  of  the  previous  planet 
from  the  sun.  This  curious  relation  of  distances  seems,  in 
like  manner,  to  argue  their  production  by  a  common  cause, 
and  by  the  operations  of  a  common  law,  of  which  the  only 
explanation  yet  found  seems  to  be  given  in  the  nebular 
theory. 

3.  If  the  theory  in  question  is  admitted  as  the  true  one,  it 
might  accordingly  be  supposed,  that  after  the  evolution  of 
Mercury,  which  is  the  planet  nearest  the  sun,  there  would  still 
be  a  residuum  of  nebulous  or  planetary  matter  in  an  unformed 
state,  surrounding  the  more  dense  mass  of  the  sun.  Accord- 
ingly there  actually  appears  to  be  an  extensive  mass  of  attenu- 
ated matter  surrounding  the  sun,  and  is  sometimes  visible 
immediately  after  sunset,  or  before  sunrise,  as  a  conic,  lumin- 
ous streak,  projected  from  the  horizon  in  the  direction  of  the 
path  of  the  sun,  and  which  is  called  the  "Zodiacal  light," 

4.  There  are  still  many  planets,  or  ivandering  celestial 
bodies,  in  a  nebulous  state,  in  which  state  they  are  called 
"comets."  These  appear  to  have  been  formed  from  a  re- 
siduum of  attenuated  matter,  after  the  agglomeration  of  the 
denser  materials  took  place 


kirk  wood's    .law.  29 

5.  M.  Comte,  of  Paris,  has  proved,  according  to  principles 
by  which  periods  of  rotation  maintain  a  relation  to  the  mass 
of  the  given  rotating  body,  that  the  sidereal  year  of  each  planet 
actually  corresponds  to  the  period  in  which  the  sun  must  have 
rotated  on  his  axis,  supposing  his  mass  to  have  extended  to 
the  orbits  of  such  planets ;  and  he  also  ascertained  that  the 
periods  of  rotation  of  the  primary  j)lanets  with  their  mass,  in 
a  state  of  vapor,  extending  to  the  orbits  of  their  satellites, 
must,  in  like  manner,  have  corresponded  with  the  present  or- 
bitual  periods  of  those  satellites. 

6.  A  new  planetary  law  has  recently  been  discovered  by 
Mr.  Kirkwood,  which  seems  to  have  an  important  bearing  on 
the  question  at  issue.  This  law,  as  I  understand  it,  is,  that 
the  square  of  the  number  of  rotations  of  any  given  planet  in  its 
year,  is  to  the  square  of  the  number  of  rotations  of  any  other 
planet  in  its  year,  as  the  cube  of  the  diameter  of  the  sphere 
of  attraction  of  the  first  planet,  is  to  the  cube  of  the  diameter 
of  the  sphere  of  attraction  of  the  second  planet.*  Thus,  for 
instance,  the  number  of  rotations  of  the  earth  in  its  year,  bears 
a  definite  relation  to  the  quantity  of  matter  (or  the  amount  of 
attractive  force)  in  the  Earth,  in  Mars,  and  in  Venus. 

Here,  then,  is  an  indication  of  another  relation  existing  be- 
tween the  forces  and  movements  of  the  different  planets,  so 
definite  as  to  preclude  every  reasonable  supposition  that  it 
came  by  chance,  and  a  relation  which,  in  common  with  facts 
before  noticed,  seems  to  refer  all  the  planets  to  a  common 
parentage,  and  common  law  of  production,  which  is  accounted 
for  only  by  the  nebular  theoiy.     Certainly  so  many  remark- 

*  The  sphere  of  attraction  of  a  planet,  is  a  circle  whose  radius  is  determined  by  the 
point  between  two  contiguous  planets  in  conjunction,  where  an  object  would  bo  at- 
tracted to  neither  of  them,  but  would  be  exactly  poised  between  the  two  contending 
forces.  For  an  account  of  Kirkwood's  discovery,  see  Silli-ian's  American  Journal  o/ 
Science,  Vol.  ix.  Second  Serks,  p.  395. 


30  THE     NEBULAR     HYPOTHESIS. 

ably  concurrent  facts,  pointing  to  the  same  conclusion  as  ta 
the  origin  of  our  planetary  system,  can  not  reasonably  be  set 
down  as  so  many  mere  fortuitous  coincidences. 

Finally,  the  theory  in  question  is  the  only  one  which  does 
not  either  involve  inexplicable  and  inconceivable  mysteries,  or 
suppositions  totally  unfounded  in  any  of  the  known  laws  of 
causation.  This  theory,  on  the  other  hand,  commends  itself 
to  human  reason  and  intuition,  without  being  encumbered  with 
any  serious  difficulties ;  and,  as  it  is  confessedly  unphilosophi- 
cal  to  look  for  an  explanation  of  a  phenomenon  without  the 
sphere  of  known  natural  laws,  when  a  full  explanation  may 
be  found  within  the  sphere  of  those  laws,  the  nebular  theory 
may  be  considered  as  established,  at  least  until  it  is  invalidated 
by  further  disc,  veries. 


CHAPTER    IY. 

THE  HATUBAL   HISTORY    OF    THE    SIDEEEAL  UNIVERSfc 
ANALOGICALLY    EETEACED. 

From  contemplations  of  our  own  solar  system,  let  us  now 
extend  our  observations  and  reflections  into  the  immeasurable 
realms  of  the  stellar  universe  beyoud,  and  see  what  gleams  of 
light  we  can  obtain  in  reference  to  the  natural  history  of  that 
grand  System  of  systems,  of  which  our  own  congeries  of 
worlds  forms,  as  it  were,  but  an  atom.  Facts  and  analogies 
which  need  not  here  be  particularized,  have  established  the 
universal  belief  among  astronomers  that  the  so-called  "  fixed" 
stars  are  but  so  many  remote  suns  shining  to  other  systems. 
These  are  not  distributed  equally  through  the  celestial  spaces, 
as  though  they  had  been  scattered  at  random  from  an  Omnip- 
otent hand  ;  but  they  are  arranged  in  distinct  clusters,  or  firma- 
ments, so  called,  which  have  little  or  no  apparent  connection 
with  each  other.  Telescopic  observations  have  proved  that 
the  bright  girdle  called  the  "  Milky  Way,"  which  surrounds 
our  heavens,  is  only  a  grand  congeries  of  stars,  so  remote,  and 
owing  to  their  remoteness  from  us,  apparently  so  near  to  each 
other,  that  their  intermingling  rays  reach  us  only  in  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  confused  whitish  light.  Of  this  vast  zone  of 
shining  orbs,  all  the  less  remote  stars,  including  our  own  sun, 
are  members,  their  varying  directions  being,  in  a  measure,  the 
result  of  differences  in  their  distances  from  the  point  of  obscrva* 
fon,  and  hence,  of  the  different  angles  at  which  they  are  viewed 


32  THE     SIDEEEAL     UNIVERSE, 

Not  only  have  the  relative  distances  of  various  portions  of 
this  grand  cluster  been  proximately  determined,  but  the  spaces 
beyond  have  been  sounded.  The  process  by  which  these  re- 
sults have  been  accomplished,  may  be  easily  brought  within 
the  reader's  comprehension  by  the  following  illustrations . 
Suppose  any  given  object  is  removed  from  a  point  of  observa- 
tion to  a  distance  at  which  it  is  barely  discernible  by  the 
naked  eye.  Now,  a  telescope  which  has  the  power  of  pene- 
trating space  to  ten  times  the  distance  that  can  be  reached 
with  the  naked  eye,  would  show  that  same  object,  witn  the 
same  degree  of  distinctness,  ten  times  as  far  off.  Take,  then. 
a  telescope  of  twenty  degrees  of  space-penetrating  power,  and 
remove  the  object  twenty  times  its  first  distance,  and  it  will 
still  be  seen  with  equal  distinctness  and  apparent  nearness. 
And  so  also  of  still  larger  telescopes  and  correspondingly 
farther  distances. 

Now,  when  we  gaze  into  the  heavens  on  a  clear  night,  with 
the  naked  eye,  we  observe,  in  any  given  portion  of  the  Milky 
Way  a  distinct  number  of  stars,  the  faintest  of  which  are 
barely  discernible.  If  the  astronomer,  then,  takes  a  telescope 
of  ten  powers,  as  compared  with  the  unassisted  eye,  and  sur- 
veys the  same  field,  all  the  stars  before  observed  will  appear 
with  increased  brilliancy,  besides  which  many  more  will  be 
visible,  the  remotest  and  faintest  of  which  may  be  presumed 
to  be  ten  times  as  far  off  as  the  farthest  ones  which  previously 
appeared.  He  then  takes  a  still  larger  telescope,  and  still 
more  objects  appear,  the  remotest  of  which  may,  in  like  man- 
ner, be  presumed  to  be  situated  in  a  relative  depth  of  space 
proportioned  to  the  increased  degree  of  telescopic  power.  So 
correspondingly  of  a  larger,  and  still  larger,  instrument,  until 
one  is  obtained  which  reveals  no  more  stars,  but  only  shows 
those  in  the  same  field  of  view,  in  increased  brightness.     The 


THE      HEAVENS      SOUNDED.  06 

space-penetrating  power  is  again  augmented,  and  still  no  more 
•tars  are  brought  into  view.  The  observer,  therefore,  legiti 
nmtely  concludes  that  he  has  reached  the  outer  limits  of  the 
great  cluster  to  which  we  belong,  and  is  now  traversing  the 
blank  void  beyond. 

But  is  he  to  conclude  that  he  has  sounded  the  system  of 
stellar  creations  to  its  remotest  depths,  and  that  beyond  these 
boundaries,  there  are  no  more  vestiges  of  the  Creator's 
energy  1  Let  him  augment  the  optical  power  but  one  degree 
more,  and  perhaps  in  the  dim  and  awful  distance  he  will  be- 
hold a  faint  and  scarcely  discernible  speck  or  streak  of  whitish 
light.  In  the  excitement  of  irrepressible  curiosity,  he  hastens 
to  direct  to  the  spot  the  largest  telescope  the  observatory 
affords,  and  that  same  whitish  spot  glows  into  myriads  of  beau- 
tiful' stars — another  galaxy  or  Milky  Way — another  firma- 
ment, perchance,  displaying  its  glories  to  its  own  unnumbered 
worlds,  and  pealing  its  own  notes  of  silent  harmony,  respon« 
sive  to  the  movements  of  all  kindred  systems ! 

As  by  the  indefatigable  exertions  of  the  two  Herschels,  th 
heavens  have  been  swept  by  the  telescope  in  all  directions, 
more  than  two  thousand  five  hundred  of  these  isolated  stellar 
systems  have  been  brought  to  light,  some  smaller  and  some 
larger  than  the  grand  cluster  in  the  midst  of  which  our  owr 
sun  and  system  are  situated. 

Let  us  now  look  at  some  of  the  phenomena  which  these  vast 
starry  congregations  present,  and  from  which  inference  may 
be  drawn  as  to  whether,  in  regard  to  their  internal  structure 
an*r  laws,  and  hence  their  modes  of  origiu,  they  have  any  thing 
in  common  witn  our  own  solar  system,  and  whether  the  anal- 
ogies of  one  may  be  applied  in  unfolding  the  mysteries  of  the 
other. 

And  the  first  thing  that  naturally  attracts  attention  in  such 


34  THE     SIDEEEAL     UNIVERSE. 

an  investigation,  is  the  shapes  and  apparent  relative  densities 
of  these  starry  clusters.  By  telescopic  measurements  of  rela- 
tive distances  in  relative  directions,  accomplished  in  the  man 
ner  before  illustrated,  Sir  William  Herschel  decided  that  the 
great  cluster,  of  which  our  own  sun  is  a  member,  and  of  which 
the  greater  portion  of  stars,  owing  to  their  immense  distances, 
seem  to  rest  on  one  general  plain,  and  surround  us  in  the 
great  zone  called  the  "  Milky  Way,"  is  of  an  irregular  form, 
approaching  that  of  a  circle,  but  thick  in  the  middle,  and  thin 
toward  the  edges,  in  one  of  which  there  is  a  horizontal  split 
or  opening.  Other  clusters  are  of  all  conceivable  forms,  but 
of  these  fonns  the  round,  or  oblately  spheroidal,  most  pre- 
vails. Even  in  elongated,  curved,  angular,  and  branching 
clusters,  there  are  often  apparently  several  centers  of  incipi- 
ent rotundity.  Generally  these  centers  are  well  denned,  and 
toward  them  the  stars,  though  with  an  inappreciable  motion, 
are  apparently  flowing  from  all  directions,  becoming  thicker 
and  more  compressed  as  they  approach,  and  being  thinner, 
and  gradually  shading  off  into  invisibility,  at  more  distant 
removes. 

The  general  uniformity  in  the  appearances  of  these  spherical 
aggregations,  and  especially  of  their  comparative  denseness  in 
the  center,  which  thence  gradually  and  regularly  diminishes, 
in  all  directions,  toward  the  circumference,  shows  that  theii 
aggregation  is  governed  by  some  grand  law;  and  what  can 
this  be  but  the  familiar  law  of  Gravitation — that  identical  law 
which,  in  the  same  form  of  action,  is  so  potent  in  our  own 
system,  giving  sphericity  to  every  collection  of  fluid  particles, 
from  those  which  compose  the  planet,  to  those  which  form  the 
dew-drop  %  It  is  gratifying  to  find  in  those  remote  creations 
such  distinct  indications  of  a  property  which  is  possessed  in 
common  with  our  own  system,  and  which  binds  the  nearest 


VARIABLE     STARS.  35 

and  remotest  forms  in  the  celestial  spaces,  in  one  common 
bond  of  sympathy  and  brotherhood. 

But  the  discovery  of  the  law  of  gravitation,  as  applicable  tc 
these  distant  worlds  as  well  as  to  the  orbs  of  our  cwn  planetary 
system,  naturally  engenders  the  presumption  that  the  whole 
series  of  laws  and  general  operations  with  which  gravitation  is 
here  necessarily  connected,  applies  to  them  also,  with  little  or 
no  modification.  And  a  further  inquiry  will  disclose  celestial 
phenomena  which  tend  greatly  to  strengthen  this  presumption, 
if  not  to  convert  it  into  a  positive  conviction. 

Contemplating  our  own  solar  system,  we  are  struck  with 
the  fact  that  revolutionary  motion  every  where  prevails.  The 
planets  are  constantly  whirling  upon  their  axes,  and  perform- 
ing their  grand  orbitual  circuits  in  the  heavens.  The  sun  him- 
self rotates  upon  his  own  center,  once  in  about  twenty-seven 
days.  This  revolution  has  been  ascertained  by  the  periodical 
variation  of  the  position  of  spots  on  his  disk. 

But  several  of  the  stars  of  our  firmament  exhibit  a  phe- 
nomenon similar  to  this,  from  which  our  sun's  rotatory  motion 
has  been  inferred.  That  is,  they  alternately,  and  in  regular 
periods,  give  forth  a  greater  and  a  less  degree  of  light,  as 
though  they  had  a  brightest  side  and  a  side  of  a  less  degree  of 
brightness,  which  were  alternately,  and  at  regular  intervals, 
presented  to  us  by  a  revolution  upon  their  axes.  This  is  one 
of  the  facts  which  have  confirmed  astronomers  in  the  otherwise 
very  natural  presumption,  that  the  stars  are  suns  like  our  own, 
and  whose  apparent  diminutiveness  is  only  owing  to  their 
immense  distances. 

There  are  also  many  instances  in  which  the  varying  relative 
positions  of  two  or  more  stars  are  such  as  to  indicate  a  revo- 
lution around  each  other,  and  around  a  common  center.  Some 
of  these  stars  have  vast  periods,  as,  fcr  instance,  the  double 


36  HIE     SIDEEEAL     UNIVERSE. 

star  Castor,  whose  constituents  revolve  around  each  other  in 
215  years;  Gamma,  in  the  constellation  of  the  Virgin,  whose 
constituents  revolve  in  628  years ;  Gamma  of  the  Lion,  whose 
constituents  revolve  in  1200  years ;  and  Mizar  and  Alcor,  in 
the  tail  of  the  Great  Bear,  which,  according  to  Professor 
Nichol,  would  probably  consume  not  much  less  than  the  in- 
conceivable period  of  190,000  years  in  completing  a  single 
revolution  around  each  other !  Others  accomplish  their  revo- 
lutions in  much  less  than  100  years. 

By  establishing  the  fact  that  rotatory  and  orbitual  motions 
are  experienced  by  many  of  the  stars,  the  extreme  probability 
is  at  the  same  time  established  on  analogical  grounds,  that 
similar  motions  are  experienced,  with,  perhaps,  some  modifi- 
cations, by  all  stars.  We  are,  at  least,  not  without  strong, 
not  to  say  demonstrative  evidence,  that  motions  of  this  kind 
are  going  on  in  the  celestial  spaces,  on  a  much  grander  scale 
than  any  we  have  yet  described.  By  comparing  the  positions 
of  the  stars  in  the  modern  heavens  with  their  positions  as  rep- 
resented in  ancient  catalogues,  Sir  William  Herschel  found 
that  in  one  quarter  of  the  firmament,  they  were  apparently 
drawing  nigher  together,  while  in  the  opposite  quarter  they 
were  apparently  receding  from  each  other.  To  account  for 
these  changing  appearances,  Herschel  conjectured  that  our  own 
sun,  with  all  his  retinue  of  planets,  was  moving  in  some  grand 
path  toward  a  point  in  the  constellation  Hercules.  After 
much  doubt  and  many  critical  examinations,  subsequent 
investigators  have  succeeded  in  establishing  this  opinion  on 
an  indubitable  basis. 

But  in  the  hands  of  A  'gelander,  Struve,  Peters,  and  especi- 
ally of  Maedler,  the  theory  of  this  solar  motion  was  made  to 
assume  still  more  definite  form.  Inferring,  with  others,  from 
analogy,  that  the  path  described  by  our  luminary  must  be  thn 


CENTRAL     SUN.  31 

curve  of  an  orbit  around  some  remote  center,  the  latter  of 
these  astronomers  betook  himself  to  the  examination  of 
ancient  catalogues  of  stars,  with  a  view  to  ascertain  if  there 
was  any  discoverable  district  in  the  heavens  where  all  the  ap- 
parent motions  of  the  stars  were  such  as  to  comply  with  the 
conditions  which  must  necessarily  characterize  a  central  region. 
Such  a  district  was  found;  and  the  star  Alcyone,  in  the 
cluster  Pleiades,  was  decided  to  be  its  center.  Around  this 
point,  therefore,  our  own  sun,  and  the  whole  firmamental 
cluster  to  which  it  belongs,  were  supposed  to  be  revolving 
with  immense  velocity,  in  orbits  coincident  with  the  general 
plane  of  the  Milky  Way,  and  requiring  no  less  than  eighteen 
millions  of  years  to  accomplish  a  single  revolution  ! 

Whatever  diversity  of  opinion  there  may  exist  relative  to 
the  legitimacy  of  the  conclusion  of  Maedler,  which  locates  the 
center  of  alleged  orbitual  motion  at  the  point  occupied  by  the 
star  Alcyone,  I  believe  it  is  now  generally,  if  not  universally 
admitted  by  astronomers,  that  such  orbitual  motion  does  exist 
around  some  center,  not  very  remote  from  that  region. 

The  evidence  upon  this  point  greatly  strengthens  the 
nnalogy  which,  of  itself,  points  to  the  conclusion  that  those 
isolated  globular  and  other  clusters  of  stars,  situated  in  the  re- 
moter realms  of  space,  and  which  appear  to  have  been  aggre- 
gated by  internal  power  of  gravitation,  are  also  scenes  of  per- 
petual rotatory  and  orbitual  motion.  Did  not  these  motions, 
with  their  resultant  centrifugal  forces,  exist  to  countervail,  in 
some  degree,  the  force  of  internal  gravity,  those  firmamental 
clusters  would  doubtless  exist  in  much  more  dense  massea 
than  those  in  which  they  now  appear. 

But  if  this  conclusion  thus  approximates  to  a  certainty, 
there  are  tacts  which  point  to  a  still  more  extended  appli- 
cation of  its  principles.     In  the  southern  heavens,  and  quits 

4 


88  THE      SIDEREAL      UNIVERSE. 

detached  from  the  Milky  Way,  are  two  bright  spots  whicK 
southern  navigators  have  designated  by  the  name  of  "  Magel 
fan's  Clouds."  During  his  astronomical  residence  at  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope  some  years  ago,  Sir  John  Herschel,  by  the  aid 
of  his  twenty  feet  telescope,  succeeded  in  analyzing  these  ob- 
jects,  and  found  that  each  of  them,  and  especially  the  larger 
one,  was  a  system  of  firmaments,  combining  many  extensive 
clusters  into  one !  Of  these,  as  systems,  analogy  would 
authorize  us  to  predicate  internal  gravity  and  general  and  par- 
ticular rotatory  and  orbitual  motions.  But  the  magnitude  of 
this  complex  unity,  however  inconceivably  great,  may,  after 
all,  be  but  an  atom  in  the  immensity  of  ulterior  creations  to 
which  it  belongs ;  and,  on  the  bases  of  its  analogies,  we  may 
rise  to  the  ideal  of  a  still  higher  system — a  system  which  may 
be  supposed  to  embrace  in  its  structure  all  the  firmameutal 
clusters,  nebulas,  and  systems  of  systems  heretofore  known  to 
telescopic  observers,  and  countless  more  besides. 

Nor  is  the  idea  of  such  an  all-comprehensive  system  of  sys- 
tems without  the  support  of  facts,  as  well  as  of  analogies.  It  is 
said  that  although  nebulas,  resolvable  and  irresolvable,  appear 
in  every  quarter  of  the  heavens,  they  appear  in  greatest 
abundance  in  a  comparatively  narrow  zone  which  encircles 
the  heavens,  cutting  the  plane  of  the  Milky  Way  at  right 
angles.  This  arrangement  goes  far  to  establish  the  idea  of  a 
Frimament  of  firmaments,  a  Galaxy  of  galaxies,  in  which  all 
sidereal  creations  which  have  come  within  the  reach  of  the 
most  powerful  telescopes,  are  bound  together  in  one  common 
structure,  brought  within  the  sphere  of  the  same  common  laws, 
and  made  to  observe  throughout,  similar  rotatory  and  orbituaJ 
motions  with  those  which  prevail  in  our  own  solar  sys- 
tem, which  latter  may  be  considered  as  an  epitome  and 
representative  of  the  whole  ! 


THE     GREAT     CENTER.  39 

We  have  thus  seen  that  wherever  the  wonders  of  the 
celestial  spaces  have  been  distinctly  unfolded,  the  revolution 
of  satellites  around  planets,  of  planets  around  suns,  of  suns 
around  still  greater  suns,  of  systems  around  still  greater 
systems,  of  clusters  around  still  greater  clusters,  is  revealed 
as  an  omniprevalent  law.  And  seeing  the  complete  unity  of 
plan  and  harmony  of  operations  so  far  as  we  have  gone — see- 
ing the  affectionate  co-relations  which  are  exhibited  between 
molecules,  and  worlds,  and  systems,  and  all  stellar  congre- 
gations, with  all  their  included  parts — may  we  not  prolong 
the  chain  of  analogy  one  link  farther,  and  conclude  that  they 
all,  together  with  the  myriads  of  similar  creations  which  dwell 
in  depths  of  space  which  no  optical  power  can  ever  penetrate, 
owe  the  bond  of  unity  which  connects  them,  and  the  har- 
monial  influence  which  wields  them  in  their  mighty  courses, 
to  one  grand  Source  of  central  power,  whose  attractions  they 
all  implicitly  obey,  and  from  whose  genial  radiations  all 
receive  their  life  1  If  the  links  of  the  analogical  chain  have 
been  found  to  closely  adhere  through  all  the  labyrinths  of 
every  realm  of  being  whose  existence  may  be  verified  by 
other  processes,  who  shall  begin  to  distrust  that  chain  for  the 
first  time,  after  it  has  conducted  us  safely  thus  far  1 

Though  the  hypothesis  of  a  common  Pivot  and  Center  of 
gravity  of  the  whole  universe  may  not,  in  the  nature  of 
things,  be  susceptible  of  an  ocular  or  complete  mathematical 
demonstration,  yet  there  is  interior  evidence — I  had  almost 
said  even  the  evidence  of  intuition — that  it  is  true  in  seme 
form ;  and  believe  this  idea  is  now  extensively  received  as 
an  article  of  astronomical  faith. 

Let  no  one  suppose  that  amid  these  inconceivable  dis- 
tances and  magnitudes,  the  fixed  principles  of  reasoning  lose 
their  validity  and  become  untrustworthy.     It  is  true  that  in 


4:0  THE     SIDEREAL      UNIVERSE. 

these  giddy  flights,  the  imagination  and  conceptive  powers 
become  lost  and  bewildered ;  but  so  they  do,  in  a  great  de- 
gree, before  we  have  traveled  beyond  the  immediate  neigh- 
borhood of  our  own  mundane  sphere.  The  distance  from  the 
earth  to  our  own  sun  is  measured  by  millions  of  miles;  and 
even  this,  as  one  of  the  shortest  of  astronomical  distances,  the 
magination  can  but  faintly  conceive.  The  distance  from  the 
sun  to  the  stars  is  measured  by  millions  of  diameters  of  the 
earth's  orbit ;  the  distance  from  firmament  to  firmament  is 
measured  by  millions  of  interstellar  spaces;  the  distance 
even  of  the  most  interior  firmament  from  the  great  Center  of 
all  centers,  may,  in  the  efforts  of  the  imagination,  be  measured 
by  millions,  or  even  billions  of  inter-firmamental  spaces;  and 
the  circumference  of  the  whole  Grand  Structure,  may  even 
transcend  all  human  conceptions  of  infinitude;  yet  form, 
locality,  relative  position,  center,  circumference,  and  hence 
limits,  must  exist  as  absolutely  as  they  exist  in  the  smallest 
spherule  of  matter  visible  to  the  human  eye;  and  to  the  view 
of  an  absolutely  infinite  Being,  the  whole  Universe  of  uni- 
verses may  be  of  comparative  dimensions  not  greater  than  a 
single  grain  of  sand !  And  if  Ehrenberg  could,  by  the  aid  of 
the  microscope,  descry  a  whole  animal  kingdom  in  a  single 
drop  of  water,  each  individual  of  the  myriads  of  whose  ani- 
mated forms  must  have  had  eyes,  teeth,  stomach,  intestines, 
and  all  the  appurtenances  of  a  complete  anatomical  structure, 
governed  by  unvarying  physiological  laws ;  and  if  by  the 
same  means  he  could  demonstrate  that  a  particular  geological 
deposit,  fourteen  feet  thick  and  miles  in  extent,  was  made  uje 
almost  exclusively  of  the  skeletons  of  animals,  forty-one  bil- 
lions of  which  could  exist  in  a  single  cubic  inch,  then  we  may 
rest  assured  that  the  principles  of  nature  exist  in  no  greater 
completeness,  and  in  no  higher  rr  more  inconceivable  corn  pi  i 


A     GENERALIZATION.  41 

cations,  in  infinites  than  they  do  in  Infinitesimals.  We  may. 
then,  without  crowding  out  any  natural  principle,  or  doing 
violence  to  any  just  method  of  reasoning,  reduce  the  scale  of 
the  universe,  in  our  imagination,  to  dimensions  convenient  to 
be  contemplated  on  all  sides,  and  follow  out  our  reasonings 
with  ease  and  comparative  certainty  respecting  its  properties, 
forces,  laws,  internal  arrangements,  and  progressive  processes 
of  formation,  from  beginnings  to  ulti mates. 

Considering,  then,  all  general  natural  principles  as  applying 
equally  to  greatest  and  to  smallest  analogous  cosmical  forms, 
and  to  the  whole  universal  structure  as  well  as  to  its  indi- 
vidual parts,  we  proceed  to  another  branch  of  the  chain  of 
analogical  reasoning,  which  will  speedily  conduct  us  to  the 
primal  condition  of  the  substance  from  which  the  material  uni- 
verse and  all  it  contains,  was  organized. 

The  nebular  theory  of  planetary  and  solar  formations,  as 
applying  to  our  solar  system,  has  been  shown  to  rest  on  so 
many  probabilities  as  seemingly  to  justify  the  undoubting 
conviction  of  its  truth.  But  if  this  theory  is  admitted  as  ap- 
plicable to  our  own  solar  system,  its  applicability  to  forma- 
tions in  the  sidereal  realms  will,  after  the  foregoing  system  of 
universal  analogies  has  been  traced  out,  scarcely  be  disputed, 
especially  as  it  was  in  the  sidereal  realms  that  the  first  facts 
were  observed  which  seemed  to  intimate  its  truth.  And  if  all 
planetary  and  solar  agglomerations  originated  from  previously 
diffused  nebulous  masses,  then,  in  view  of  the  unbroken  chain 
which,  we  have  seen,  binds  all  systems  together  as  one  system, 
the  following  statement  is  its  own  sufficient  proof: 

As  the  satellites  were  formed  from  the  same  original  nebu- 
lous mass  from  which  the  planets  originated,  so  a  prior  state- 
of  that  mass  was  a  state  of  unity  and  interdiffusion  with  the 
mass  which  composed  the  sun.     The  materials  of  that  mass, 


42         THE  SIDEREAL  UNIVERSE. 

in  like  manner,  were  previously  connected  and  interdiifuse^ 
with  the  mass  which  formed  the  more  interior  sun  around 
which  it  revolves,  and  out  of  which  were  formed  all  such  other 
ultimate  suns  as,  in  common  with  our  own,  now  revolve  around 
the  same  center.  The  substance  of  all  suns  and  systems  com- 
posing our  firmament,  may  be  supposed  also  to  have  been 
previously  interdiffused  in  one  amorphous,  undistinguishable 
mass.  So  the  substance  of  the  suns  and  systems  of  all  other 
firmaments,  together  with  the  substance  of  the  great  central 
sphere  of  universal  attraction  which  binds  and  subordinates 
them  all,  was,  in  like  manner,  in  an  original  nebulous  and 
formless  state;  and  the  whole  universal  substance  was  then 
but  one  substance,  so  highly  attenuated  and  expanded  as  to  be 
without  definite  forms,  divisions,  or  compartments — an  in- 
definable, universal  Monad  !  In  short,  as  our  own  solar  sys- 
tem is  a  child  of  the  great  Universal  System,  and  is  formed  in 
the  image  of  its  parent,  the  primal  condition  of  the  materials 
of  one,  must  have  been  precisely  analogous  to  that  of  the 
other;  and  if  the  solar  system  germinated  from  an  original 
nebulae,  so  did  the  system  of  the  whole  universe. 

But  in  thus  unraveling  the  complexity  of  all  material  for- 
mations, and  tracing  them  all  to  an  original,  unitary,  and 
chaotic  state,  we  at  the  same  time  unravel  the  complexity  of 
motion,  and  not  only  arrive  at  its  original  and  simplest  form, 
but  at  a  state  in  which  it  must  necessarily  have  had  no  form — 
a  state  in  which  its  principles  were  as  chaotic  as  original  mat- 
ter itself,  or,  what  is  the  same  thing,  at  a  state  in  which  no 
established  motion  existed. 

We  hare  thus  arrived  by  an  easy,  and,  admitting  our  pre- 
mises, an  apparently  certain,  process,  at  the  very  root  of  the 
Tree  of  universal  material  creations — at  the  great  unitary 
Germ  of  all  firmaments,  suns,  systems,  and  worlds,  with  the 


ANALYSIS     AND     SYNTHESIS.  43 

mineral,  vegetable,  animal,  and  human  forms  -which  dwell 
upon  their  surfaces.  If  there  has  been  any  error  in  the  fore- 
going reasonings,  it  has  probably  been  an  error  in  the  form 
rather  than  in  the  principles  of  our  conclusions,  and  the  error 
therefore  does  not  essentially  effect  the  main  object  contem 
plated  in  this  disquisition.  But  of  the  truth  of  the  position  t<j 
which  we  have  arrived  by  this  analytical  process,  from  ulti 
mates  to  origins,  or  from  effects  to  causes,  additional  evidences* 
will  hereafter  incidentally  occur  as  we  proceed,  by  an  opposite 
and  synthetical  process,  from  causes  to  effects.  The  two  pro- 
cesses will  serve  as  mutual  correctives  of  each  other ;  and  by 
the  aid  of  both  united,  we  hope  to  somewhat  enlarge  our 
truthful  conceptions  in  relation  to  those  principles,  laws,  and 
operations  of  the  universe  without,  which  naturally  lie  beyond 
the  province  of  mathematics  and  ocular  demonstration,  but 
which,  nevertheless,  have  their  counterparts,  representatives, 
and  exponents  in  the  universe  within. 


CHATTEE   V. 

MATEEIiL    BEGINNINGS    AS     POINTING    TO    A 
SUPEE-MATEEIAL    CAUSE. 

Having  thus  traced  the  system  of  material  creation  through 
a  series  of  anterior  conditions,  comprehending  periods  which, 
perhaps,  no  assemblage  of  arithmetical  figures  could  express, 
to  a  state  in  which  the  materials  of  all  worlds,  systems,  and 
firmaments,  were  in  a  condition  of  diffused  attenuated  vapor, 
with  no  definite  or  established  motions,  the  inquiry  next 
arises,  Was  even  this  the  absolutely  primitive  state  of  material 
things'?  Did  matter  ever  exist  in  any  fonn  or  forms  previous 
to  this  state  of  chaos  1  or,  if  not,  was  it,  in  this  state,  eternal  1 
or,  if  not  absolutely  eternal  either  in  the  state  of  forms  or  of 
',haos,  whence  and  how  did  it  originate? 

The  idea  that  matter  ever  existed  in  any  mundane  forms 
previous  to  this,  and  became  subsequently  dissolved,  not  only 
has  no  analogy  to  support  it,  but  seems  to  be  contradicted  by 
an  established  law  of  nature.  I  refer  to  that  law  by  which 
amorphous  or  chaotic  matter  in  motion  has  the  general  and 
predominant  tendency  to  assume  and  multiply  forms.  It  h 
not  denied  that  motion  of  particles  tends  also  to  the  dissolu- 
tion of  material  forms,  but  that  dissolution  is  always  subser- 
vient to  immediate  and  higher  recombinations.  The  kingdom 
of  motion  and  forms,  therefore,  have  ever  been,  and  still  are 
(and  we  may  confidently  believe  ever  will  be),  making  farther 
acd  farther   encroachments  upoi.    the    realms  of  chaos  and 


B UPEK- M A  f  EBI AL     CiLrSE.  45 

inertia;  and  whatever  is  conquered  by  the  former  can  never 
be  fully  reconquered  by  the  latter.  And  this  is  because  the 
former  power  is  positive,  and  the  latter  is  negative. 

If  matter,  therefore,  was  ever  in  a  state  of  mundane  or  or 
ganized  forms  previous  to  the  chaotic  state  now  under  contem 
plation,  it  must  have  for  ever  continued  in  that  same  general 
state,  and  even  to  progressively  unfold  the  tendencies  by  which 
its  forms  were  assumed ;  and  no  natural  power  could  have 
brought  it  back  again  to  the  formless  state.  The  chaotic  or 
nebulous  state  in  which  we  have  seen  it  must  necessarily  havB 
existed  at  the  beginning  of  the  cosmical  creation,  may,  there- 
fore, be  inferred  to  be  its  primitive  state. 

But  that  matter,  even  in  this  indefinite  state,  was  absolutely 
eternal,  is  an  idea  which  analogy,  so  far  as  it  speaks  upon  the 
subject,  distinctly  contradicts.*  The  material  of  each  form 
and  kingdom  in  nature  may  be  traced  backward  from  highest 
to  lowest  developments,  immediately  beyond  which  latter  it 
loses  itself  in  a  more  rudimental  creation,  which  serves  as  itn 
groundwork.  Thus  the  animal  kingdom,  traced  downward  to 
its  lowest  and  simplest  forms,  finally  loses  its  character  as 
animal,  and  merges  into  the  vegetable;  the  vegetable,  in  like 
manner,  finally  loses  itself  in  the  mineral ;  the  mineral  or 
crystalline  forms  pass  downward  into  the  general  amorphous 
mass  of  planstary  matter;  planetary  matter  may  be  traced 
downward  through  more  rudimental  geological  conditions,  and 
through  igneous  liquid,  and  aeriform  fluid,  until  its  distinction 
is  lost  in  planetary  nebula;  this,  in  imagination,  may  be 
traced,  in  like  manner,  until  it  is  lost  in  the  general  gaseous 
mass  of  the  uncondensed  sun  ;  and  so  we  may  proceed,  in  re- 
t.rograde  steps,  until  we  find  the  materials  of  all  forms  and 

*  Let  it  be  remarked,  once  for  all,  Hint  by  "  matter,"  I  mean  physical  sulMan-ce  is 
eontradistinction  to  spiritual  substance. 


46  MATERIAL     BEGINNINGS      iND 

kingdoms  are  lost  in  the  great  common  mass  of  original  cha. 
otic  matter. 

But  in  thus  tracing  back  all  forms  and  kingdoms  to  their 
respective  and  immediate  predecessors,  we  at  the  same  time 
trace  backward  the  one  and  analogous  kingdom  of  Universes 
Matter  as  such  (which  includes  all  the  other  kingdoms),  from 
its  highest  to  its  lowest  forms ;  and  as  there  is  a  point  beneath 
which  all  kingdoms  lose  their  identity,  and  their  essences  are 
merged  in  an  anterior  kingdom,  so  analogy  would  seem  to  in- 
dicate that  there  is  a  prior  point  of  attenuation  and  refinement 
at  which  the  great  kingdom  of  Matter  also  loses  its  character 
as  matter  or  physical  substance,  and  thus  that  it  originated  as 
matter,  from  a  prior  source,  as  did  all  its  included  sub-king- 
doms. This  idea  would  appear  in  greater  clearness  and  force 
of  probability,  if  contemplated  in  the  light  of  the  doctrine  of 
Series,  Degrees,  and  Correspondences,  hereafter  to  be  brought 
into  view  ;  and  it  will  receive  incidental  confirmation  as  we 
proceed  to  consider  the  origin  of  Motion. 

If  (contrary  to  an  extreme  probability,  not  to  say  absolute 
certainty,  established  in  previous  remarks)  the  hypothesis  is 
still  insisted  upon,  that  the  chaotic  matter  of  which  this  uni 
verse  is  composed,  consists  of  the  dissolved  elements  of  a  pre- 
vious material  universe,  the  question  will  still  arise,  Whence 
originated  the  matter  composing  that  universe  1  And  so  we 
may  extend  our  inquiries  back  through  a  thousand  imagined 
pre-existent  universes ;  but  the  mind  must  come  to  a  resting- 
place  soineivhere.  It  is  logically  just  as  certain  that  there  was 
a  first  universe  (if  we  are  mistaken  in  supposing  that  this  is 
the  first),  as  it  is  that  there  was  a  first  vegetable  form  or  class 
of  forms,  which  latter  proposition  is  positively  demonstrated 
by  facts  in  geology.  And  after  we  have  gone  back  in  imagi- 
nation, to  an  absolutely  first  universe,  the  question  will  still 


6CPEE-MATEEIAL      CAUSE.  47 

return  unanswered,  Whence  originated  the  physical  substance 
composing  that  universe? 

As  thcline  of  progression  traced  backward  necessarily  leads 
to  a  beginning  of  the  system  of  developments  to  which  it 
applies,  so  the  line  of  causation,  inversely  traced,  necessarily 
leads  to  a  First  Cause,  which  is  itself  uncaused,  though  contain- 
ing in  itself  the  elements  of  all  causes,  and  hence  all  exist- 
ences. And  as  the  whole  Animal  Kingdom,  for  example, 
necessarily  rests  upon  the  basis  of  a  prior  and  immediately 
corelated  and  correspondent  Kingdom — the  Kingdom  of  Veg- 
etation— so  the  whole  Kingdom  of  universal  materiality,  so  to 
speak,  as  necessarily  rests  upon  the  basis  of  a  prior  and  imme- 
diately corelated  and  correspondent  Kingdom.  This  King- 
dom, then,  must  be  vZtfra-physical,  in  the  same  way  as  the 
Vegetable  Kingdom  is  ultra-animal ;  and  it  must  differ  in  na- 
ture and  constitution  from  the  whole  Kingdom  of  physical 
substance,  at  least  as  much  as  the  Vegetable  Kingdom  differs 
from  the  Animal,  or  as  the  impelling  and  moving  essence  of 
the  human  mind  differs  from  the  impelled  and  moved  essence 
of  the  human  body. 

Now.  unless  we  suppose  this  ultra-physical  (and  hence  un- 
physical)  Kingdom  to  be  a  Kingdom  of  Spirituality,  there  is 
no  conceptive  power  corresponding  to  it  in  the  human  mind, 
and  hence  it  is  to  the  human  mind  a  'nothing,  and  can  not  even 
be  an  object  of  thought,  much  less  of  faith. 

But  it  may  be  asked,  "  Whence  originated  this  Kingdom  of 
Spirituality,  which  it  is  here  alleged  must  have  served  as  the 
basis  of  physical  creation  V  If  we  should  answer  that  it 
originated  in  a  higher  and  ulterior  spirituality,  and  that  that 
originated  in  a  still  higher,  and  that  in  a  still  higher ;  and  if 
we  could  thus  prolong  our  thoughts  to  an  absolute  eternity 
and  in  search  of  the  Origin  of  origins,  we  would  still  have  onlj 


48  MATERIAL     BEGINNINGS     AND 

spirituality — an  Infinite  Eealm  of  Spirituality,  beyond  the 
idea  of  which  our  thoughts  couid  not  possibly  go.  We  may 
set  it  down,  then,  as  a  conclusion  which  all  analogy  affirm  3, 
and  which  there  is  no  conceivable  reason  to  doubt,  that  this 
whole  realm  of  Materiality,  originated  in  this  prior  and  cor- 
respondent Realm  of  Spirituality. 

Now,  spirituality,  in  its  interior  nature,  possesses  the  prop- 
erties of 'affection,  thought,  and  volition,  and  these,  again,  are 
the  attributes  of  personality.  This  ultimate,  and  hence  infinite, 
Realm  of  Spirituality,  therefore,  involves  the  idea  which  we 
mean  to  convey  by  the  term  God  :  and  the  infinite  series  of 
degrees  of  spirituality  of  which  the  mind  has  just  conceived  in 
its  search  after  the  Origin  of  origins,  may  be  supposed  to  cor- 
respond to  the  infinite  series  of  degrees  of  the  harmonious 
faculties  of  the  one  Infinite  God,  as  these  may  be  supposed  to 
be  represented  in  their  ascending  scale,  from  the  most  exterior 
portion  of  the  Divine  nature  which  connects  with  Materiality, 
to  the  most  interior  portions  of  the  Divine  Soul,  which  pro- 
jects, generates,  and  vitalizes  all  things. 

In  saying,  therefore,  that  the  whole  Kingdom  of  Physical 
Substance  as  such,  originated  in  a  prior  and  corresponding 
Kingdom  of  Spirituality,  we,  in  effect,  say  that  it  originated 
In  a  Source  possessing  affection,  intelligence,  volition,  and  hence 
'personality — in  a  Being,  who,  without  any  restraint  or  constraint 
from  outer  and  physical  influences  (which  did  not  then  exist), 
could  freely  create,  or  abstain  from  creating,  according  to  the 
internal  promptings  of  his  own  Infinite  Mind. 

But  let  me  not  be  understood  as  arguing  that  the  matter  of 
this  universe  was  created  by  God  out  of  nothing.  The  mind 
can  not  conceive  of  any  such  thing  as  nothing,  or  of  something 
coming  out  of  nothing ;  and  therefore  the  idea  may  be  at  ouce 
dismissed  from  the  mind  as  being  itself  a  mental  nothing.    Bui 


SUPEK  -MATERIAL  CAUSE.  49 

if  we  suppose  that  spirit  is  an  essence,  and  that  matter,  as  such, 
was  created  out  of  this  essence,  there  will  at  least  in  this 
be  no  violation  of  the  laws  of  thought;  and  the  reasons  on 
which  such  suppositions  may  he  grounded  will  incidentally  and 
more  distinctly  appear  as  we  proceed. 

There  is  a  philosophy  extant  which  insists  that  matter  has 
of  itself  an  inherent  power  of  motion,  and  that  matter  (or  phys« 
ical  substance)  is  eternal.  But  that  this  assumption  is  unten- 
able, is  obvious  from  the  following  considerations :  Motion  in 
matter,  as  shown  before,  necessarily  tends  to  bring  matter 
into  forms;  and  if  motion  was  from  eternity  in  eternal  matter, 
then  matter  must  from  eternity  have  been  brought  into  forms 
— nay,  into  the  ultimate  and  highest  forms  which  that  motion 
is  qualified  to  engender.  But  as  it  is  sensibly  certain  that 
these  highest  forms  did  not  exist  forever,  and  rationally  cer 
tain  that  they  must  have  ultimately  sprung  from  a  state  of 
primeval  chaos,  it  follows,  of  necessity,  that  motion  in  matte.' 
could  not  have  been  from  eternity. 

Moreover,  if  motion  is  an  inherent  property  of  master,  that 
motion  must  be  the  result  of  a  force  adequate  to  produce  it  t 
and  that  force  must  be  either  mechanical  or  chemical.  But 
that  matter  contains  of  itself,  and  in  itself,  no  mechanical  force, 
is  self-evident.  Conceive  of  any  body  of  matter,  whether  an 
atom  or  a  world,  being  in  a  state  of  perfect  rest :  it  is  evident 
that  that  body  has  within  itself  no  mechanical  force  adequate 
to  move  itself  much  less  to  act  upon  kindred  bodies.  It  is 
clear,  therefore,  that  matter  has  within  itself,  and  originally  of 
itself,  no  mechanical  force  adequate  to  produce  motion  in 
any  case ;  and,  therefore,  if  a  body  at  rest  is  not  acted  upon 
by  an  extraneous  moving  force,  it  will  necessarily  remain,  for 
aught  mechanical  forces  can  do,  in  precisely  the  same  place, 
and  will  possess  precisely  the  same  bulk  and  constituents,  to 

5 


50  MATERIAL     BEGINNINGS. 

all  eternity.  This  self-evident  and  generally  recognized  prop> 
erty  of  matter  is  called  its  inertia. 

It  is  not  denied  that  a  chemical  power — a  power  of  expan.. 
sion  and  condensation,  or  of  altering  the  internal  arrangement? 
of  particles — may  be  lodged  in  bodies  of  matter;  but  this 
power  is  only  the  striving  of  particles  for  an  equilibrium.  But 
unless  there  is  a  constantly  active  influence  received  from  a 
foreign  source,  the  equilibrium  must  necessarily  be  finally  at- 
tained, and  all  action  would  then  cease,  never  to  be  renewed 
by  any  inherent  force,  simply  because  such  force  is  exhausted. 

If  we  then  consider  the  whole  universal  mass  of  physical 
substance,  as  the  mass  of  particles  supposed  to  be  subject  to 
this  internal  chemical  action,  that  action,  and  its  producing 
force,  could  not  be  eternal  and  unoriginated,  because  in  that 
case  it  would  manifestly,  from  eternity,  have  attained  to  an 
internal  equilibrium,  and  all  action  would  have  ceased.  These 
considerations  show  that  even  chemical  action,  and  therefore 
chemical  force,  must  have  had  a  beginning,  and  therefore  a 
cause,  in  some  power  or  contriving  agent  beyond  themselves, 
and  outside  of  the  matter  in  which  they  inhere.*  But  as  there 
was  no  other  realm  of  physical  matter  from  which  they  could 
be  supplied,  we  are  driven  to  the  only  other  alternative  of  sup- 
posing that  they  were  supplied  from  a  Spiritual  Source — from 
the  personal  Realm  of  affection,  intelligence,  and  volition,  which 
we  have  before  proved  to  be  unoriginated,  and  hence  infinite. 

If  this  reasoning  is  correct,  then  the  conclusion  is  obvious, 
that  all  motion  of  whatever  kind,  as  well  as  the  physical  sub- 
stance acted  upon  by  it,  must  have  had  an  ultimate  origin  in 
Spirit — in  God  ! 

*  It  may  be  added,  tha',  chemical  forces,  as  inherent  properties  of  original,  amor- 
phous, nebulous  matter,  must  hare  been  exceedingly  weak,  if  in  such  matter  such  in« 
her ent  forces  could  have  exrste*!  at  all,  which  is  extremely  doubtful. 


CHAPTER   VI. 

PRINCIPLES    OF    UNIVERSAL   SYNTHESIS 

We  have  now  completed  our  descending  view  of  the  realm 
of  Being  without  us,  and  traced  the  material  creation  to  ita 
super-material — hence  spiritual — hence  Divine,  Cause.  The 
completion  of  this  general  analysis  unfolds  to  us  the  true  basis 
of  all  synthesis ;  and,  keeping  in  view  the  Spirituality,  Self- 
existence,  and  Divinity  of  the  Original  Cause,  we  may  now 
proceed  to  inquire,  what  may  be  known,  or  legitimately 
believed,  in  relation  to  the  origin,  modus  operandi,  and  govern- 
ment of  Matter  and  Motion,  and  of  all  the  subsequently 
established  creations,  systems,  and  kingdoms  now  comprised 
in  the  general  fabric  of  outer  Being? 

I  am  aware,  however,  that  many  will  be  likely  to  consider 
questions  of  this  nature  as  too  far  above  the  sphere  of  the  hu- 
man intellect,  to  justify  an  attempt  even  at  the  most  general 
solution.  But  let  us  not  be  discouraged.  It  was  intimated  in 
the  outset  of  the  present  treatise,  that  nothing  exists  in  the 
realm  of  being  without  man,  which  has  not  an  antitype  and 
correspondent  in  the  realm  of  being  within  him,  and  that  all 
which  exists  without,  and  all  which  exists  within,  possess 
toward  each  other  the  relations  of  cognizable  objects  and 
principles,  and  cognizing  faculties.  Besides,  we  have  already 
found  reason  to  believe  that  Law  is  unvarying;  and  if  so,  it 
may  be  traced  in  its  operations,  not  only  inversely  from  inti- 
mates to   origins   of  creation's  unfoldings,  but  also  directly 


52  PRINCIPLES     OF     SYNTHESIS. 

from  origins  to  ultimates.  And  as  the  wonderful  powers 
of  analogy  have  conducted  us  with  apparent  safety  through 
the  immense  labyrinths  of  the  stellar  creations,  in  our  efforts 
to  trace  them  downward  to  their  common  source,  we  should 
not  despair  of  deriving  some  substantial  aid  from  the  same 
mode  of  reasoning,  when  applied  to  the  solution  of  those  more 
profound  and  important  questions  which  are  embraced  in  a 
synthetical  investigation  of  the  system  of  Being. 

As  forming  the  basis  of  the  process  of  investigation  now  to 
be  pursued,  we  here  lay  it  down,  as  a  self-evident  proposition, 
that  each  and  every  effect  is  germinally  contained  in  its  cause, 
and  hence,  when  developed,  necessarily  corres2)onds  to  its  cause. 
Were  this  not  the  case,  neither  cause  nor  effect  could  properly 
be  called  such,  and  there  could  be  no  conceivable  sequential 
relation  between  the  two. 

For  example,  in  the  order  of  tangible  developments  by 
which  man  is  surrounded,  the  Vegetable  Kingdom  precedes, 
and  serves  as  the  material  source,  of  the  Animal  Kingdom.  It 
therefore  forms  the  material  element  of  the  cause  of  the 
Animal  Kingdom,  though  a  more  essential  element  of  the 
cause  of  this  and  all  other  creations,  is  of  a  spiritual  character, 
supplied  from  a  source  that  is  above  the  particular  creation  to 
which  it  applies,  as  will  be  further  illustrated  hereafter.  But 
the  two  kingdoms,  sustaining  toward  each  other,  as  they  do, 
the  relations  of  the  material  element  of  a  cause,  and  the 
material  element  of  an  effect,  stand,  thus  far,  as  mutual  cor- 
respondents and  exponents  of  each  other.  In  like  manner,  the 
Vegetable  Kingdom  stands  as  a  material  correspondent  and 
exponent  of  the  Mineral  Kingdom,  which  is  its  material  source 
and  cause,  and  contains  the  fundamental  principles  of  its  com. 
position  and  physical  properties,  though  in  a  lower  degree.  So 
the  Mineral  Kingdom,  in  like  manner,  has  its  physical  corre- 


V  PRINCIPLES     OF     SYNTHESIS.  53 

spondent  in  the  mass  of  amorphous  planetary  matter  which 
served  as  its  source ;  and  so,  by  like  gradations,  the  chain  of 
analogy  carries  our  minds  backward  through  planetary  nebula?, 
solar  nebulae,  etc.,  until  we  come  to  the  one  great,  universal, 
undivided  mass  of  chaotic  matter,  which  must  necessarily 
have  contained  within  itself,  undeveloped,  the  material  ele- 
ments of  stellar  systems,  solar  systems,  planets,  minerals, 
vegetables,  animals,  and  even  the  physical  elements  of  the 
human  constitution.  Though  indefinite  in  the  extreme,  this, 
in  its  occult  properties  and  adaptations,  must,  as  a  universal 
material  Germ,  have  involved  the  physical  correspondences  of 
all  the  creations  which  subsequently  sprang  from  it,  in  the 
same  way  as  the  acorn  involves  the  physical  correspondences 
of  the  future  oak ;  and  by  an  intelligence  capable  of  perceiv- 
ing its  interior  properties  and  adaptations,  it  might  have  been 
predicted,  in  a  general  way,  what  kind  of  creations  were  des- 
tined to  spring  from  it. 

But  as  the  Animal  Kingdom,  physically  speaking,  was 
previously  contained  in  the  Vegetable,  and  the  Vegetable 
Kingdom  was  contained  in  the  Mineral,  and  so  on  throughout 
the  descending  scale,  so  the  great  original,  universal  Kingdom 
of  unformed  matter,  and  whose  undeveloped  properties  and 
principles  were  typical  of  all  subsequent  and  subordinate 
Kingdoms,  was  itself  as  one  Kingdom,  previously  involved 
in  the  infinite,  eternal,  and  unoriginated  Kingdom  of  Spirit- 
uality, which,  as  before  shown,  constitutes  the  Divine  Per- 
sonality. This  Kingdom  of  Spirituality — in  other  words, 
the  Divine  Personal  Being — comprises,  therefore,  not  only  the 
material  (or  substantial),  but  the  spiritual  and  volitional,  and 
hence  the  entire  elements  of  the  Cause  of  all  things  in  universal 
creation ;  and  hence  the  Creator  and  the  created  must  stand  as 
mutual  exponents  of  each  other. 


54  PRINCIPLES     OF     SYNTHESIS. 

That  the  great  Kingdom  of  universal  matter,  and  what,  for 
the  sake  of  perspicuity,  we  have  called  the  great  Kingdom  of 
universal  Spirit,  stand  in  relations  to  each  other  similar  to 
(though  more  comprehensive  and  perfect  than)  the  relations 
subsisting  between  any  two  conjoined  subordinate  kingdoms 
in  nature,  is  an  idea  which  it  is  desired  the  reader  should  dis 
tinctly  comprehend,  as  it  lies  at  the  foundation  of  all  true, 
material,  and  spiritual  philosophy,  and  will,  as  it  is  believed, 
tend  to  entirely  reclaim  science  from  the  general  ten- 
dency winch  it;  has  long  apparently  had,  to  Pantheism  and 
Atheism. 

Considering  that  matter,  as  such,  originated  in  the  creative 
efforts  of  Spirit,  and  hence  Mind,  there  is  another  point  of 
view,  from  whicn  it  will  appear  that  matter,  both  in  its 
primeval  state,  and  in  all  its  subsequent  states  of  mundane 
forms,  must  necessarily  have  been  in  exact  correspondence 
with  its  Source  and  producing  Cause.  We  know  something 
of  the  nature  and  operations  of  Mind,  by  experience  and  con- 
sciousness. We  know  that  the  mind  of  the  architect,  for 
instance,  constructs  an  edifice  within  itself,  or  within  its  own 
conceptions  and  thoughts — constructs  it  as  an  invisible  and 
sprritual  edifice — before  proceeding  to  give  it  a  physical 
form  in  the  outer  world.  After  the  building  is  physically 
erected,  therefore,  it  stands  as  a  precise  image  and  corre- 
spondent of  its  archetype  or  conception  which  first  existed  in 
the  mind. 

Applying  these  principles  to  the  subject  under  present  in- 
vestigation, we  may  consider  the  Divine  Thought  as  the  Archi- 
tect, and  the  universe,  or  any  of  its  systematically  organized 
stages  of  development,  as  the  Edifice.  Not  only,  then,  must 
the  archetype  of  the  universe  in  its  matuiity,  with  all  its  har- 
monious  worlds  ar*3  systems,  but   even  the  archetypes  of 


PRINCIPLES      OF     SYNTHESIS.  5  J 

those  atomic  and  infinitesimal  forms  constituting  original 
diaotic  matter,  have  distinctly  pre-existed  in  the  Divine, 
spiritual,  and  mental  constitution.* 

The  Deity  and  the  universe — the  realm  of  Spirit  and  the 
realm  of  Matter — therefore,  stand  to  each  other  in  the  relation 
of  Archetype  and  Antitype — of  Cause  and  Effect — and  there- 
fore the  two.  as  before  remarked,  stand  as  mutual  exponents 
of  each  other.  In  order,  therefore,  to  arrive  at  some  general 
conclusions  in  reference  to  the  constitution  and  principles  of 
creation  as  a  whole,  and  also  in  respect  to  the  constitution  and 
principles  of  its  included  and  correspondent  sub-systems,  let 
us  first  briefly  interrogate  Reason  and  Intuition  in  reference  to 
some  such  general  facts  as  we  can  comprehend,  respecting  the 
constitution  of  the  Divine  Being. 

The  only  way  in  which  we  can  obtain  any  definite  and  p co- 
per conception  of  the  Divine  Being,  is  by  first  conceiving  of 
a  true  and  undegenerated  human  being — such  being  the  culrai- 
nating  point  of  all  Divine  creations,  and  hence  the  embodied 
representative  of  all  the  Divine  affections.  Although  it  is  not 
the  intention  to  base  the  propositions  of  this  work  on  the  au- 
thority of  inspired  writings  (whatever  confirmations  of  such 
writings  may  be  incidentally  developed  in  the  course  of  our 
'philosophical  investigations),  we  can  not,  in  this  place,  avoid 
noticing  the  biblical  declaration  that  "  God  created  man  in  his 
own  image,"  as  impliedly  sanctioning  an  endeavor  on  our  part 
to  understand  all  that  we  may  comprehend  of  God,  by  a  com- 
parison of  the  knowledge  we  have  of  man.  Spirit,  indeed,  is 
essentially  of  the  same  nature  wherever  found,  whether  exist- 
ing in  a  finite  or  an  infinite  degree,  though  it  is  acknowledged 

*  The  idea  of  Archetypes,  a3  here  presented,  was  originally  conceived  by  Flalo, 
nnd  formed  a  prominent  feature  of  his  philosophy;  though  the  author  here  derives  il 
ftorr  *)urces  independent  of  Plato's  teachings. 


56  PRINCIPLES     OF     SYNTHESIS. 

that  it  may  exist  in  different  shades  of  moral  character  ai 
resulting  from  different  combinations,  developments,  and  direc- 
tions of  the  faculties.  Conceive,  then,  of  a  perfectly  consti- 
tuted man — a  man  whose  physical,  intellectual,  and  moral 
natures  are  in  harmonious  development,  and  then  conceive 
this  man  to  be  expanded  to  infinitude,  and  you  have  the  truest 
and  highest  conception,  of  God  of  which  the  human  mind  is 
capable. 

But  it  would  be  diverting  the  reader  too  far  from  the  object 
of  this  portion  of  our  treatise,  to  enter  at  present  into  an 
elaborate  discussion  of  the  question,  What  is  man1?  This 
question  shall  be  discussed  at  length  in  the  second  part  of  this 
work.  But  for  the  present  we  must  confine  ourselves  to  a  few 
propositions  which,  to  intelligent  minds,  will  appear  more  or 
less  self-evident,  and  of  the  truth  of  which,  as  well  as  of  the 
ulterior  positions  which  they  will  serve  to  illustrate,  confirma- 
tion will  accumulate  as  we  proceed,,  until  any  reasonable 
doubts  with  which  some  minds  may  at  first  regard  them,  will, 
it  is  believed,  be  either  greatly  diminished  or  entirely  dissi- 
pated. 

Let  it  be  apprehended,  then,  that  the  most  general  constitu- 
ents of  human  personality,  are  three;  viz.,  1.  Soul,  or  interior 
vitality,  which  is  the  seat  of  the  affections  ;  2.  Spirit,  or  the 
organized,  pervading  nerve-element,  which,  in  its  lower  de- 
grees, is  the  vehicle  of  sensation,  and  in  its  higher  degrees,  is 
the  seat  of  the  understanding ;  and  3.  Body,  or  vehicle  of 
outer  manifestation  and  action. 

Precisely  corresponding  to  these  are  tne  three  most  compre- 
hensive constituents  of  the  Divine  Being;  viz.,  1.  Interior 
Soul.  Life,  or  Love ;  2.  Spirit  or  Wisdom  ;  3.  Outer  sphere 
or  vehicle  of  operative  Energy,  the  latter  corresponding  to  the 
lod</  in  man. 


THE     SEVEN-FOLD     SERIES.  57 

But  the  constituents,  both  of  the  human  and  Divine  person- 
alky,  considered  in  more  detailed  reference  to  elements.,  forms, 
and  outer  objectivities,  are  also,  in  each  case,  susceptible  of  a 
seven-fold  division,  which  may  be  briefly  stated  as  follows:  1. 
Subjective  Love,  or  Love  as  an  abstract  quality  of  the  personal 
essence ;  2.  Subjective  Wisdom,  or  Wisdom  as  an  abstract 
quality  of  the  personal  essence ;  3.  Subjective  volition,  or 
volition  as  an  abstract  power  of  the  two  previous  elements  com- 
bined, and  a  procedure  from  them  both  ;  4.  The  essences 
having  the  properties  of  Love,  Wisdom,  and  Volition,  em- 
bodied in  personal  organism  ;  5.  Objective  Love,  or  Love  as 
related  to  outer  forms  ;  G.  Objective  Wisdom,  or  Wisdom  as 
related  to  outer  forms;  7.  Habitation,  or  a  complete  system 
of  outer  objects  and  conditions  related  to  the  whole  personal 
nature  and  desires,  and  in  which  such  nature  and  desires  be 
come  embodied  and  represented. 

In  man  the  elements  of  this  seven-fold  classification  con- 
tain within  themselves  many  corresponding  sub-divisions, 
some  of  which  are  much  more  obvious  than  the  foregoing 
general  divisions,  as  will  be  seen  when,  in  the  course  of  our 
inquiries  respecting  the  Microcosm  or  the  universe  within,  it 
comes  in  order  to  discuss  them.  In  God  the  elements  of  this 
seven-fold  division  may  be  presumed  to  contain  an  infinite 
number  of  sub-divisions,  all  of  which  are,  in  like  manner,  sus- 
ceptible of  corresponding  seven-fold  classifications  ;  and  their 
co-relations  and  inter-communications  may  be  supposed  to 
constitute  the  infinite  harmonies  and  beatitudes  of  the  Divine 
soul !  Our  object  at  this  stage  of  our  treatise,  however,  is 
little  more  than  to  unfold  the  idea  of  these  classifications  as  a 
basis  on  which  the  great  plan-work  of  creation  may  be  con 
ceived,  leaving  such  evidences  of  their  truthfulness  as  exist  in 
the  nature  of  things  to  :e  incidentally  developed  as  we  proceed. 


58  PRINCIPLES     OF     SYNTHESIS. 

This  seven-fold  classification  of  the  principles  of  the  Divine 
constitution,  is  probably  what  the  inspired  seer  St.  John  had 
reference  to  when  he  spoke  of  the  "  seven  Spirits  of  God  which 
go  out  into  all  the  earth."  And  it  was  undoubtedly  the  out- 
goings and  efficient  operations  of  these  which  produced  the 
various  seven-fold  Divine  antitypes  which  were  shown  to  the 
same  inspired  seer  under  the  forms  of  the  seven  churches  of 
Asia  Minor  ;  the  Lamb  with  seven  horns  and  seven  eyes ;  the 
book  with  seven  seals,  and  their  successive  openings  at  seven 
different  epochs ;  the  seven  angels  with  seven  trumpets ;  the 
seven  thunders ;  the  seven  last  plagues,  etc.* 

If  it  be  true,  then,  that  there  are  these  seven  natural 
divisions  in  the  constituents  of  the  one  Divine  Being,  it  is 
obvious  that  any  system  of  creation  or  operation  which 
presents  a  complete  reflex  of  what  is  contained  in  the 
Divine  Source  from  which  it  sprang,  must  contain  a  re- 
presentation and  outer  expression  of  each  one  of  these  Di- 
vine constituents,  and  must  therefore,  as  a  whole,  be  also 
seven-fold. 

But  we  have  seen  that  Nature,  as  a  Whole,  is  divided  into 
many  Systems,  Kingdoms,  or  more  properly  speaking,  Dis- 
creet Degrees,  rising  one  above  another.  Each  one  of  these 
Kingdoms  or  Degrees  (as  will  gradually  be  illustrated  in  what 
follows)  contains  within  itself  the  seven-fold  series  of  parts, 
as  the  natural  evolution,  and  reproduction,  on  a  higher  scale, 


*  The  number  seven  appears  to  have  been  anciently  recognized  as  a  general  number 
of  completeness,  and  as  such  it  appears  to  have  been  habitually  employed  by  the 
eacred  -writers.  Thus,  in  their  classifications,  there  were  seven  nays  (or  periods)  ot 
creation ;  seven  days  ot  the  week  ;  seven  years  from  one  sabbatic  year  to  another ;  sever* 
times  seven  years  from  one  jubilee  to  another,  etc.,  (see  by  the  aid  of  the  concordance. 
the  numerous  instances  in  which  the  number  seven  occurs  in  the  Old  and  New  Testa- 
ments). Some  of  the  ancient  heathen  nations,  also,  adopted  the  seven-fold  classifies- 
tion  as  of  extensive  application,  especially  to  spiritual  and  Divine  things ;  and  it  was 
Introduced  by  Pythagoras  from  India  into  Greece. 


HARMONIAL     SCALE     OF     CREATION.  59 

of  the  seven-fold  series  of  the  Degree  or  Kingdom  im 
mediately  below  it  in  the  order  of  development;  and  all  of 
these,  separately  and  collectively,  are  evolutions  from,  and 
correspondents  of,  the  Divine  seven-fold  Constitution,  which 
is  the  Originator  and  Cause  of  all.  Each  one  of  these  seven- 
fold series,  moreover,  corresponds  to  the  diatonic  scale  in 
music,  and  which,  with  its  seven  constituent  notes,  is  therefore 
its  natural  oral  interpreter  and  exponent.  Thus  the  various 
Degrees  or  Kingdoms  of  natural  developments,  may  be  con- 
sidered as  octaves,  rising  one  above  another,  the  same  as  the 
octaves  in  music.  Each  octave  exactly  corresponds  to,  and 
harmonizes,  note  by  note,  with  all  other  octaves,  whether  they 
be  on  a  higher  or  lower  sccfle ;  so  that  if  we  fully  understand 
any  octave,  Degree,  or  Kingdom  of  natural  development,  we 
have  in  it  a  measure  and  exponent  of  all  others.  Thus  the 
system  of  nature,  as  a  Whole,  may  be  considered  as  one 
grand  Musical  Organ,  compassing  all  these  octaves,  and  which, 
in  the  hands  of  the  Great  Organist,  the  Divine  Being,  in 
whose  infinite  series  of  octaves  of  Love  and  Wisdom,  exists 
the  very  soul  and  origin  of  all  harmony,  is  capable  of 
sending  forth  every  where  those  silent  notes  of  harmony 
and  music  which  have  been  perceived  and  deeply  felt, 
by  every  truly  elevated  and  interiorly  developed  human 
soul ! 

The  idea  of  the  "  music  of  the  spheres,"  therefore,  is  not 
merely  a  poetic  fancy,  but  a  sublime  reality,  wdiose  basis  and 
origin  are  exhibited  in  the  foregoing  simple  principles. 

That  this  harmonial  scale  of  creation,  as  corresponding  to 
the  harmonial  scale  of  degrees  of  Love  and  Wisdom  of  the 
Divine  Mind,  is  not  a  mere  fanciful  conception,  will  become 
more  and  more  obvious  as  we  proceed.  It  will  be  shown 
tha4  not  only  does  each  one  of  these  degrees  or  octaves  of 


60  PRINCIPLES     OF   SYNTHESIS. 

creation,  by  its  correspondence  with  all  others,  serve  as  theii 
natural  exponent,  but  that  each  octave,  if  its  constituents 
are  correctly  classified,  rests  upon  internal  evidence  of  its 
own.  And  if  this  serial  order  of  graduated  progression  is 
duly  recognized,  and  its  laws  are  properly  understood,  we 
may  use  any  seven-fold  classification,  known  to  be  correct,  in 
correcting  the  errors  of  others,  just  as  the  musician  would 
correct  the  discords  of  one  octave  by  the  harmonies  of 
another. 

But  before  proceeding  further,  we  must  speak  briefly  of 
the  laws  which,  as  we  proceed,  will  be  seen  to  govern  the 
septinary  classifications,  and  by  which  it  may  be  generally 
known  whether  any  classification  is  correct.  In  each  correct 
classification,  the  members,  in  their  numerical  order,  may,  in 
general  ter?ns,  be  distinguished  as  follows : 

Number  One  is  the  number  of  simple  unity. 

Two  is  the  number  of  productive  unity,  and  in  general 
terms  comprises  positive  and  negative,  active  and  passive,  or 
male  and  female,  principles. 

Three  is  the  number  of  self-sustaining  unity. 

Four  is  the  number  of  Organization. 

Five  is  the  number  of  exterior  completeness.  There  being 
five  exterior  properties  to  outer  things,  man,  hence,  has  five 
exterior  senses,  whose  object  is  to  give  information  of  them  to 
the  interior  soul.  As  the  five  exterior  properties  also  exist, 
with  express  reference  to  two  interior  and  higher  properties 
the  number  five  is  also  a  number  of  aspiration,  as  will  b€ 
better  understood  hereafter. 

Six  is  the  number  of  subordinal  association,  and  of 
harmonial,  peripheral  revolution,  as  around  a  governing 
center. 

Seven  is  the  number  of  final  completeness,  embracing  both 


NUMERICAL     CLASSIFICATION.  61 

exteriors  and  interiors.  Hence  it  is  the  pivotal  and  governing 
number  of  the  series.* 

This  septinary  classification  may  also  be  embodied  in  the 
triad.  Thus  the  first,  second,  and  third  members  of  any 
seven-fold  series,  form  one  trinity,  and  therefore  may  count  as 
a  unit;  the  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  members  form  a  second 
trinity,  and  «ount  another  unit;  while  the  seventh  member, 
which  is  always  equal,  or  rather  superior,  to  all  the  rest  put 
together,  forms  a  third  unit,  and  completes  a  general  trinity. 
As  a  guide  to  correctness  in  any  septinary  classification,  it  is 
important  to  observe  that  the  first  and  second  trinities  in  the 
series,  should  bear  a  certain  general  and  particular  correspond- 
ence with  each  other. 

Whatever  obscurities  may  at  first  exist  in  the  foregoing 
statement,  will  be  abundantly  clarified  by  the  illustrative 
examples  which  will  incidentally  occur  as  we  proceed.  It  is  here 
given  mainly  as  a  hint  to  the  reader,  that  the  classifications  in 
which  we  shall  have  to  deal,  are  not  arbitrary,  but  founded 
in  the  nature  of  things.  Considering,  therefore,  that  each 
natural  seven-fold  series  corresponds  to,  and  illustrates  every 
other,  and  that  this  septinary  arrangement  runs  through  every 
complete  creation,  system,  and  Kingdom  in  nature,  the  degree 
of  reliance  which  may  be  placed  on  the  legitimate  results  of 
the  method  of  investigation  now  proposed,  as  well  as  the 
character  and  extent  of  those  results,  as  compared  with  what 
may  be  obtained  by  other  processes,  may  be  illustrated  as 
follows:  Suppose  there  are  a  large  number  of  timbers, 
hewn,  squared,  morticed,  etc.,  and  piled  confusedly  together. 

*  The  ancient  inspired  records  also  deal  largely  in  the  number  ticelve  and  i±a 
multiples,  as  an  interiorly  significant  number.  It  may  be  remarked  that  (be  munbe* 
twelve  is  evolved  from  the  seven-fold  series,  and  is  simply  the  number  of  six  pro- 
ductive unities,  or  positive  and  negative,  active  and  passive,  or  male  and  female, 
orinciples.    It  is  therefore,  also,  a  number  of  subordinal  association. 

6 


62  PRINCIPLES     OF     SYNTHESIS. 

The  superficial  observer,  uninstructed  in  the  synthetical 
principles  of  architecture,  may  take  most  accurate  measure- 
ments of  each  of  those  timbers,  and  may  give  most  correct 
descriptions  of  their  shapes,  abstract  qualities,  etc.,  just  as 
science,  as  ordinarily  pursued,  gives  accurate  descriptions  of 
abstract  facts  which  constitute  the  timbers  of  the  great  temple 
of  Nature.  Such  an  observer,  however,  may  not  be  able  to 
discover  any  intended  connection  between  many  of  those 
timbers ;  may  be  able  to  form  little  or  no  idea  of  the  form, 
proportions,  or  correlative  parts  of  the  building  which  they 
would  constitute,  if  all  put  together,  and  may  even  doubt  that 
ihey  were  ever  all  intended  to  go  together  in  any  definite 
form ;  and  that  science  which  merely  analyzes,  but  does  not 
synthesize,  experiences  much  the  same  difficulty  in  viewing 
the  timbers  of  the  temple  of  Nature.  But  suppose,  now,  that 
a  skillful  architect  comes  on  the  ground :  he  views  those  ap- 
parently heterogeneous  timbers,  not  only  analytically  (or  in 
isolated  detail),  but  also  synthetically,  or  in  their  relations  to 
each  other;  and,  by  the  observance  of  simple  rules,  he  pro- 
ceeds— without  any  paring  or  forcing — perhaps  without  even 
the  "  noise  of  the  hammer " — to  erect  a  magnificent  and 
glorious  temple,  in  which  there  is  a  place  for  every  timber, 
from  greatest  to  smallest,  and  a  timber  for  every  place  which 
requires  one.  Then  even  the  previous  superficial  and  merely 
analytical  observer  of  the  timbers  will  know,  if  he  surveys 
the  edifice,  that  those  timbers  were  intended  to  go  together 
precisely  in  the  relations  in  which  he  now  finds  them ;  and 
that  the  rule  or  theory  by  which  they  are  brought  together, 
is  true. 

Suppose  the  observer  noticed,  however,  that  in  the  erection 
of  the  building,  some  of  the  timbers  were  a  little  pared, 
or    forced,    or   warped,   in    order   to    make   them   join   with 


THE     TEMPLE     AND     ITS     PARTS.  63 

others :  still,  if  the  building,  when  erected,  exhibits  unmis- 
takable indications  of  order,  and  symmetry,  and  harmony 
of  its  numerous  parts,  it  stands  as  evidence  of  general  truth- 
fulness of  the  architectural  rules  by  which  it  was  erected ; 
and,  if  it  is  then  known  that  the  hewer  of  those  timbers  was 
absolutely  perfect  in  his  art,  the  inference  would  be  legitimate, 
that  the  paring  and  distortion  used  in  putting  them  together,  - 
were  owing  to  the  ignorance  or  unskillfulness  on  the  part 
of  the  builder,  by  which  a  joist  or  a  post  was  occasionally 
inverted,  or  made  to  take  the  intended  place  of  another  of 
somewhat  similar  form. 

Now,  all  natural  facts  (which,  it  must  be  confessed, 
the  science  and  philosophy  of  the  clay  view  in  an  aspect 
somewhat  heterogeneous)  are  timbers  of  the  great  temple  of 
Nature.  If  we  can  find  a  method  of  classification,  therefore 
by  which  these  various  facts,  as  timbers,  may  be,  without 
any  warping  or  forcing,  brought  into  the  form  of  one 
grand  system,  among  the  myriads  of  the  complicated  parts 
of  which  there  may  be  observed  a  mutual  dependence  and 
harmony  so  perfect,  that  the  loss  of  a  single  part  would 
sensibly  mar  the  symmetry  of  the  whole ;  then  we  may  be 
assured  that  this  method  is  the  true  one,  and  that  the 
structure  erected  by  it  is  a  structure  of  truth.  Now,  a 
system  of  classification  of  this  kind  must  exist  somewhere  in 
nature,  if  it  be  admitted  that  nature  is  not,  after  all,  a  more  or 
less  heterogeneous  and  disconnected  mass.  If  the  reader  can 
not  believe,  with  me,  that  the  doctrine  of  the  seven-fold  series 
and  its  natural  adjuncts,  as  herein  briefly  unfolded,  constitutes 
that  system,  it  is  confidently  believed  that  he  will  at  least  find  it 
immensely  suggestive,  compelling  nature,  in  many  instances, 
to  tell  her  own  story,  and  to  give  up  secrets  which  science 
and  philosophy  have  hitherto  been  inadequate  to  wrest  from 


64  PBINCIPLES      OF     SYNTHESIS. 

her  grasp.  For  the  several  years  which  have  elapsed  since  I 
was  so  fortunate  as  to  be  led  to  the  discovery  of  this  method 
of  correspondential  reasoning,  I  have  pursued  it  with  results 
which,  to  my  own  mind,  at  least,  have  been  intensely  satis- 
factory ;  and,  I  confess,  that  without  its  aid  I  could  not  have 
had  any  conceptions  which  might  have  been  regarded  even  as 
an  approximation  to  a  solution  of  many  of  the  questions 
discussed  in  this  work. 


CIIAPTEE    YL1. 

THE  SEVEN  FUNDAMENTAL  LAWS,  AND  THEIR   INTIMATIONS  Efi- 
SPECTING  THE   ORIGIN   AND   STRUCTURE   OF  THE   UNIVERSE. 

Deeming  the  foregoing  a  sufficient  exposition  of  the  prin- 
ciples which  shall  guide  us  in  our  further  inquiries,  we  now 
proceed  to  our  proposed  synthetical  investigation  of  the  system 
of  being  without  us.  Pursuing  the  natural  order  of  pro- 
gression, from  fundamentals  and  generals  to  ultimates  and 
particulars,  we  will  first  institute  some  comprehensive  in- 
quiries respecting  the  origin,  structure,  government,  etc.,  of 
the  physical  universe  as  a  whole ;  and  afterward,  similar 
inquiries  shall  be  pursued  in  relation  to  the  Solar  System,  the 
planet  on  which  we  dwell,  and  the  various  systems  of  inani- 
mate and  animate  creation  which  exist  upon  its  surface,  of 
which  the  ultimate  and  highest  is  the  human  organization. 

And,  in  view  of  the  new  method  of  reasoning  which  we 
have  unfolded,  let  it  be  borne  in  mind  that  if  the  origin,  con- 
stitution, laws,  functional  operations,  etc.,  of  any  one  of  the 
systematic  creations  proposed  for  investigation,  can  be  eluci- 
dated directly  and  more  clearly  than  any  other,  it  will  serve 
as  a  correspondential  guide  to  the  further  elucidation  of  all  the 
others.  Thus,  with  a  proper  classification  of  the  correspond- 
ing series  and  degrees  of  nature's  unfoldings  and  operations, 
the  known  will  cast  the  whole  light  of  its  analogies  upon  the 
unknown — just  as  each  timber  of  a  temple  hints  the  shape  and 
nature  of  the  timbers  with  which  it  is  to  be  conjoined,  and 


66  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

thus  serves  as  a  guide  to  the  erection  of  the  edifice ;  or,  as  a 
single  fossil  bone  of  an  extinct  and  previously  unknown 
animal,  enables  the  comparative  anatomist  to  describe  with 
accuracy,  the  animal  as  it  lived  and  moved  upon  the  earth  in 
its  organic  completeness.  Our  method,  if  successfully  pur- 
sued, will,  moreover,  develop  the  unity  of  principle  pervading, 
fn  different  degrees,  all  creations,  from  lowest  to  highest — the 
unity  and  harmony,  therefore,  of  the  one  and  only  system  of 
universal  truth ;  and,  as  we  pursue  the  revelations  of  the 
physical  universe,  from  its  rudiments  to  its  higher  unfoldings, 
our  thoughts,  from  the  accumulating  analogies,  will  gain  such 
an  upward  impetus  as  may  hereafter  carry  them  directly 
through  the  line  of  those  higher  and  corresponding  truths, 
which  relate  to  man  physiologically,  psychologically,  spiritu- 
ally— socially,  politically,  and  religiously. 

With  respect  to  the  origin,  structure,  laws,  etc.,  of  the  uni- 
versal cosmical  system,  we  commence  our  reasonings  with  a 
postulate  which,  whether  strictly  true  or  not,  can  not  lead  us 
into  important  error  in  our  subsequent  deductions,  since  we 
have  so  many  correctives  of  inharmony,  as  involved  in  the 
general  series  of  corresponding  and  harmonious  octaves  of 
developments  through  which  the  path  of  our  investigations 
will  lead  us.  The  postulate  is,  That  God,  from  the  prompt 
ings  of  his  own  interior  soul,  which  is  Love,  under  the 
direction  of  his  Wisdom,  which  gave  order  and  form  to  the 
operations  of  Love,  formed  from  the  most  exterior,  or,  if  the 
expression  may  be  allowed,  the  least  Divine  and  most  nearly 
physical,  portion  of  his  own  personal  emanations,  as  many  de- 
grees, varieties,  or  perhaps  classes  of  atomic  particles,  as  cor- 
responded to  the  general  seven-fold  harmonies  of  his  own 
Infinite  nature.  The  supposition  that  the  varieties  of  the.se 
primitive  atoms  are,  in  number,  just  seven,  or  a  multiple  of 


PRIMORDIAL     MATTER.  67 

seven,  is  admitted  to  be  purely  a  priori,  but  is  a  legitimate 
deduction  from  principles  before  established :  it  is  here 
offered  as  an  introduction  to  propositions  more  certain,  and 
from  which  it,  in  its  turn,  will  receive  confirmation ;  though, 
if  it  could  be  proved  to  be  untrue,  it  would  not  essentially 
affeot  our  main  argument.  These  varieties  of  atoms,  then 
(whatever  their  number  may  have  been),  may  be  supposed  to 
have  constituted  Matter  in  its  primitive  state,  which  probably 
was  characterized  by  none  of  the  distinctive  properties  of  oxy-- 
gen,  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  calcium,  potassium,  or  any  others  of 
the  so-called  "  elements "  known  to  chemistry.  In  being 
evolved,  in  particleized  form,  from  the  emanated  personal 
Essence  of  the  Divine  Being,  the  substance  thus  particleized 
ceased  to  constitute  any  necessary  portion  of  the  Divine 
Person,  and  formed  a  Realm  or  degree  of  Being  by  itself,  but 
still  a  Realm  of  Being  corresponding  to,  immediately  connected 
with,  and  capable  of  receiving  direct  influx  of  vital  energy  from, 
the  great  Personal  Realm  of  Spirit  from  which  it  proceeded. 
This  vital  influx,  however,  may  be  supposed  to  have  been 
altogether  optional  on  the  part  of  the  great  Generative  Spirit, 
even  as  was  the  evolution  and  particleization  of  essence 
itself;  and,  without  the  direct  communication  to  it,  of  an  im- 
pelling energy  from  the  Divine  source  of  all  energy,  matter, 
thus  constituted,  would,  as  before  shown,  have  forever  re- 
mained inert. 

We  are  next,  therefore  to  inquire  into  the  origin  and  laws 
of  Motion  in  this  primeval  chaotic  mass. 

Admitting,  what  was  before  proved,  that  inertia  is  an 
inseparable  property  of  matter  left  solely  to  itself,  it  is  self 
evident  that  Motion  could  have  been  the  product  only  of  a 
Force  adequate  to  overcome  the  tendency  of  matter  to  remain 
fixed.     Though  force  is  essentially  of  the  same  general  nature 


68  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

ill  whatsoever  direction  it  may  act,  there  are  several  modifica- 
tions of  the  dynamic  agents  in  which  force  originates.  These 
requiring,  as  they  do,  a  separate  chapter  for  their  proper  eluci- 
dation, shall  only  receive  such  allusions  in  this  place  as  will 
be  necessary  to  the  explication  of  the  laws  by  which  force 
acts  in  producing  motion,  aggregation,  segregation,  reciprocal 
transference,  and  structural  stability. 

It  has  before  been  repeatedly  remarked,  that  the  universe 
without  corresponds  to  the  universe  within  man,  and  that 
therefore  all  principles  and  developments  of  the  outer  universe 
may  be  conceived  of  by  the  fully  unfolded  human  faculties. 
This  is  because  man  is,  physically  and  spiritually,  an  epitome 
of  all  previous  Divine  unfoldings,  and  therefore  is  a  microcosm 
or  little  universe  of  himself.  Though  it  is  proposed  to  con- 
sider the  discreet  degrees  of  creation  in  their  natural  order  of 
unfolding,  tracing  each  octave  as  it  passes  upward  and  merges 
into  a  higher  and  corresponding  one,  until  the  whole  merge 
(loosely  speaking)  into  man;  yet.  for  the  purpose  of  illustrat- 
ing the  foices  and  laws  of  the  physical  universe  by  the  same 
forces  and  laws  which,  in  an  ultimately  sublimated  degree,  ap- 
ply to  man,  we  will  here  so  far  anticipate  the  appropriate 
subject  of  the  second  part  of  this  work,  as  to  exhibit  the  fol- 
lowing self-evident  truths  respecting  the  human  economy. 

In  man  (the  microcosm  or  little  universe)  there  is,  1.  Pas- 
sion or  Love,  which  corresponds  to  Heat ;  2.  Intelligence  or 
Wisdom,  which  corresponds  to  light ;  3.  Nerve-essence,  which 
corresponds  to  electricity  (these  three  forming  a  trinity)  ;  4. 
The  agent  which  attracts  circulating  particles,  and  deposits 
them  in  the  solid  portions  of  the  organism  ;  5.  The  agent 
which  removes  particles  from  lower  tissues,  and  deposits  them 
in  higher;  6.  The  agent  which  acts  and  re-acts  sympathetically 
Between  one  organ  and  another  (these  three  forming  a  second 


DYNAMIC     AGEXTS     AND      LAWS.        ■         bb 

and  corresponding  trinity  of  dynamic  agents) ;  and.  7.  The 
interior,  unitizing,  and  vital  agent,  which  pervades  and  governs 
all  the  preceding. 

Accompanying,  and  precisely  answering  to,  these  seven 
dynamic  agents  in  man,  are  seven  laws,  or  modes,  by  which  the 
former  operate.  These  are,  I.  Expansion,  governing  all  dias- 
tolic movements ;  2.  Contraction,  governing  all  systolic  move- 
ments; 3.  Circulation,  governing  all  rudimentally  reciprocat- 
ing movements  (first  trinity)  ;  4.  Aggregation,  governing  all 
depositing  and  organizing  operations ;  5.  Segregation,  governing 
all  ascending  movements ;  6.  The  law  governing  all  sympa- 
thetic movements  (second  trinity)  ;  7.  The  law  of  all  vital, 
unitizing,  and  governing  operations,  the  vital  and  spiritual 
constitution  as  a  whole  being  here  the  mover. 

Now,  in  the  macracosm,  or  great  universe,  we  have,  1. 
Heat,  which  corresponds  to  Passion  or  Love ;  2.  Light,  wrhich 
corresponds  to  Intelligence  or  Wisdom  ;  and  3.  Electricity, 
which  corresponds  to  nerve-essence,  in  the  little  universe — 
these  forming  a  fundamental  trinity  of  dynamic  agents  as 
operative  in  outer  nature.  There  is  also  a  second  and  corre- 
sponding trinity  of  dynamic  agents  in  nature,  and  also  a  seventh 
and  vitalizing  agent,  as  corresponding  to  the  same  in  man ; 
but  these  important  agents  shall  be  illustrated  hereafter. 
Assuming  their  existence  for  the  present,  however,  we  may 
remark,  that,  corresponding  to  these  seven  dynamic  agents, 
there  are  also  seven  laws  which  govern  the  outer  universe,  and 
all  its  correspondent  sub-creations,  whether  in  the  animate  or 
inanimate  departments  of  being.  These  laws,  indeed,  are  the 
same  through  Dirt  with  those  which  we  have  seen  to  apply  to 
man,  though  in  lower  creations  they  exist  in  lower  degrees  of 
development.  They  may  be  exhibited,  with  th^ix  ternary  re» 
lations,  in  the  following  table 


10  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS 


Primary  Trinity. 

1.  Expansion. 

2.  Contraction  or  Attraction. 

3.  Circulation. 


Secondary  Trinity. 

4.  Aggregation. 

5.  Segregation. 

6.  Sympathetic  reciprocatiou 


7.  Vital  complex  unity 

Here,  it  will  be  perceived,  is  a  regularly  graduated  progres- 
sion in  the  order  o^  elements,  ascending  from  first  to  last,  as 
it  were,  through  the  different  stratifications  of  one  complete 
system.  They  maintain  relations  to  each  other  similar  to  the 
relations  of  the  different  parts  of  a  tree ;  viz.,  the  first  is  the 
root  of  the  series ;  the  second  is  the  trunk ;  the  third  is  the 
branches ;  the  fourth  the  leaves,  and  the  completion  of  the 
organic  form  of  the  tree  (wherefore,  No  4.  in  any  sevei<  fold 
series  always  corresponds  to  aggregation,  organization,  or  as- 
sociation) ;  No.  5  commences  the  segregative  or  reproductive 
process,  and  corresponds  to  the  flower  buck;  No.  6  corre- 
sponds to  the  flowers,  and  No.  7  always  corresponds  to  the 
fruit,  embodying  in  itself  the  sublimated  elements  of  the  whole 
tree,  together  with  the  seed  or  germ  of  a  future  and  corre- 
spond, ng  creation. 

The  first  trinity  in  the  series  approximately  corresponds  to 
the  second,  but  the  correspondence  is  rather  by  way  of  coun- 
terpart, or  antithesis,  than  in  any  other  way  which  may  be 
easily  defined  ;  and  in  the  general  trinity,  comprehending  the 
whole  septinity,  may  be  observed  a  general  correspondence 
with  the  sub-trinities.* 

These,  let  it  be  borne  in  mind,  are  claimed  simply  as  the 
fundamental  and  all-comprehensive  laws  of  natural  and  moral 

*  These  general  principles  of  classification,  not  only  in  respect  to  dynamic  agentt 
and  laws,  but  their  corresponding  forms  and  developments,  are  applicable  to  all  natural 
feries  or  octaves,  and  by  duly  comprehending  and  observing  them,  with  the  peeirtrar 
andrelatire  characteristic?  of  their  parts,  we  may  be  able  always  to  distinguish  tfu» 
*om  fab*  classifications 


PRIMEVAL      OPERATIONS.  71 

existence,  saying  nothing  of  those  numerous  si&6-modes  of  ope- 
ration, commonly  called  laws,  which  grow  out  of  them.  The 
essential  principles  of  these  general  laws,  in  their  simple  and 
combined  states,  and  in  their  various  degrees  of  sublimation 
and  ascension,  as  applicable  to  the  different  degrees  of  creation, 
will,  we  apprehend,  be  found  to  involve  a  sufficient  explanation 
of  every  mode  in  which  original  Divine  Force  operates  in  the 
production  of  the  various  phenomena  of  creation. 

Considering,  then,  that  tho  primeval  chaotic  materials,  out 
of  which  the  universe  was  formed,  did  not  originally,  and  of 
themselves,  possess  any  force  or  motion,  we  proceed,  m  the 
light  of  the  foregoing  principles,  to  inquire  more  particularly 
Whence,  and  how,  originated  the  forces,  laws,  and  motions 
from  whose  diversified  operations  has  resulted  the  stupendous 
system  of  being  by  which  we  are  surrounded,  and  of  which 
we  are  a  part  1 — and  what  was  the  order  of  progressive  devel- 
opment, and  what  is  the  general  structural  form  of  the  cosmi- 
cal  universe,  which  must  have  legitimately  resulted  from  these 
causes'?  And,  as  it  has  been  before  shown  tkat  all  the^raa- 
ciples  that  are  involved  in  the  infinite,  may  be  epitomized  in 
the  infinitesimal,  we  may,  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  and 
without  injury  to  the  argument,  reduce  the  subject  of  our  con- 
templations to  an  imaginary  scale  of  magnitude  which  may. 
easily  be  conceived  by  the  human  mind,  and  which  will  allow 
of  all  progressive  operations  being  surveyed  as  from  a  single 
stand-point. 

The  influence  which  may  most  naturally  be  conceived  to 
have  first  acted  upon  primordial  matter  to  impel  it  to  ascending 
developments,  was  Divine  Love.  Now,  Divine  Love  corre- 
♦ponds  to  Heat — is,  indeed,  spiritual  heat  itself,  and  thus  is  the 
first  expansive  impulse  of  mind.    It  is  so  in  man,  as  well  as  in 


72  LAWS     AND     DEYELOPMENTS. 

the  Deity ;  and  its  correspondence  with  physical  heat  is  instmcfc 
ively  recognized  by  the  human  mind,  and  is  implied  in  the 
phraseology  w/th  which  men  naturally  speak  of  it.  Thus  we 
speak  of  one  in  whom  the  love  or  passional  principle  predom- 
inates, as  a  "  tuarm-hearted  man,"  as  an  "ardent  enthusiast," 
or  as  a  man  of  "fiery  disposition."  On  the  principle,  there- 
fore, that  all  bodies  are  developments  from  an  interior  soul, 
and  all  natural  phenomena  have  an  ultimate  spiritual  origin,  we 
may  conceive  that  while  the  great  Kingdom  of  Matter  was  in 
such  immediate  relation  and  juxtaposition  to  the  great  King- 
dom of  Spirit,  its  Cause,  Divine  Love  (or  Divine  Spiritual  Heat) 
flowed  directly  into  the  Realm  of  Matter,  and  especially  into 
its  seventh  or  highest  and  proximately  vital  degree  as  being 
most  in  affinity  with  the  Divine  Spirit  itself,  and  that  the 
effect  of  this  influx  was  an  immediate  generation  of  a  corre- 
sponding natural  heat.*  This  heat  must  necessarily  have  been 
attended  by  an  immediate  expansion  of  the  recipient  particle 
or  collection  of  particles,  and  by  the  evolution  of  a  magnetic 
or  magnetoid  atmosphere  partaking  of  the  nature  of  the  parti- 
cle's interior  vitality.  Divine  Wisdom  (or  spiritual  light) 
entering  with,  and  acting  through,  the  Love,  pervades  this 
atmosphere,  and  brings  it  into  the  nature  of  physical  light,  to 
which  wisdom  corresponds. f 

The  expansion  resulting  from  the  heat  must  necessarily  have 

*  That  natural  heat  may  be  produced  by  what  we  hare  here  termed  sjjiritual  heat, 
is  shown  by  the  fact,  that  when  passion  flows  from  the  interior  soul  into  the  nervous 
tissues  of  the  human  body,  it  raises  the  general  temperature  of  the  body,  quickens  the 
circulations,  produces  a  flush  of  the  countenance,  and  a  burning  of  the  cheeks,  and,  ir- 
general,  greatly  increases  the  physical  powers.  It  may  be  remarked,  that  the  genera* 
principles  of  this  portion  of  our  theory  were  taught  by  the  celebrated  Swedenborg,  thocgb 
we  have  arrived  at  them  by  an  independent  process  of  induction. 

t  It  is  well  known  that  natural  light  consists  of  Seven  prismatic  rays ;  and  this  fed 
hints  at  the  corresponding  sevan-fold  nature  of  Divine  Wisdom,  and  hence,  also,  ol 
Divine  Dove,  its  inseparable  associate. 


ORIGIN     OF     CENTRAL     SUN.  73 

produced  a  comparative  vacuum — that  is,  a  vacuum  in  respect 
to  those  5ssences  which  were  subjected  to  the  expansion,  and 
therefore  produced  a  tendency  to  an  absorption  or  rushing  in 
of  corresponding  essences  composing  neighboring  particles, 
and  which  had  not  yet,  in  the  same  degree,  been  acted  upon 
by  the  expansive  force.  Moreover,  the  active  light-sphere  (or 
Wisdom-principle)  which  is  an  orderly  procedure  from  Heat, 
(or  Love),  or  accompaniment  of,  and  the  administrator  ito,  its 
wants,  formed  a  recognizing  and  sympathetic  connection  be- 
tween the  particle  first  acted  upon  and  the  particle  immedi- 
ately conterminous;  and  by  an  envelopment  of  the  relatively 
passive  particle  in  the  light-sphere  of  the  relatively  active  one, 
the  former  would  become  assimilated  to  the  latter,  and,  float- 
ing to  it  through  the  circulating  currents  of  the  enveloping 
light-sphere,  in  the  same  way  that  the  particle  of  iron  float:! 
to  the  magnet  through  currents  of  the  magnetic  essence,  if. 
would  become  incorporated  with  it  as  a  part  of  the  same 
body.  Thus,  as  each  particle  is  made  the  recipient  of  the 
essence  of  Divine  Love,  it  lovingly  opens  its  heart,  and  ex- 
tends its  ethereal  arms  to  receive  and  embrace  its  brother,  and 
the  two  thus  become  one.  And  being  thus  united,  and  be- 
coming recipients  for  a  further  influx  of  heat,  the  same  opera- 
tion that  before  took  place,  is  now  repeated  on  a  little  larger 
scale,  and  more  particles  are  attracted.  And  so  the  process 
continues  to  be  repeated,  until  the  minute  nucleus  of  a  Cen- 
tral Sun  is  fully  established,  which,  by  a  continuation  of  the 
same  process  of  unfolding,  goes  on  to  complete  development, 
forming  the  whole  universal  mass  of  physical  substance  into 
one  coherent  and  undivided  Body,  dense  in  the  center,  and 
gradually  shading  off  into  extreme  levity  toward  the  circum- 
ference. 

If,  instead  of  supposing  this  operation  to  commence  in  in 

7 


4  4  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

finitesimal  particles,  we  suppose  it  to  commence  in  a  few 
cubic  feet,  or  in  hundreds,  or  thousands,  or  millions  of  cubic 
miles  of  central  matter,  or  if  we  suppose  (what  is  protabl} 
more  nearly  the  truth)  that  all  particles  in  the  universal  mass 
were  simultaneously  vitalized,  but  in  different  degrees,  by  the 
influx  of  Divine  spiritual  heat,  and  that  each  commenced 
forthwith,  a  tendency  toward  particles  more  vitalized  than 
themselves,  and  all  a  tendency  toward  the  particle  most  vital- 
ized, the  principle  involved  will  be  the  same,  and  the  ultimate 
result  of  the  operation  will  be  the  same. 

If  the  foregoing  theory  of  the  initial  steps  of  the  creative  pro- 
cess is  true,  it  not  only  affords  us  an  example  of  the  incipient 
operations,  but  an  illustration  of  the  very  cause  of  gravitation, 
of  which  latter  I  believe  no  adequate  explanation  has  yet  been 
afforded  by  any  of  the  common  philosophies  of  the  day. 
There  are,  however,  in  subsequent  stages  of  the  creative  un- 
folding, higher  elements  and  forces  which  enter  into,  modify, 
and  render  more  definite,  the  phenomenon  of  gravitation,  as 
will  be  seen. 

The  manner  in  which  two  streams  of  particles  flowing  from 
opposite  directions  toward  a  common  center,  tend  to  produce 
a  rotatory  motion  in  any  collection  of  central  particles,  has  been 
explained  by  those  who  have  written  on  the  uebular  theory  of 
the  origin  of  worlds  and  their  motions.*  The  idea  may  be 
apprehended  from  the  following  illustration :  Suppose  that 
two  balls  of  equal  weight,  are  rolled  with  equal  velocity,  over 
the  floor  from  opposite  sides  of  a  room,  and  that  they  at  the 
same  instant  impinge  upon  a  third  ball  lying  at  rest  in  the 
center  of  the  floor.  If  the  two  strike  the  ball  at  rest  in  a  line 
exactly  cutting  its  center,  no  motion  will  be  generated  in  the 

*  See  partic;  \arly  Nichol's  "  Architecture  cf  the  Ileavenai" 


ORIGIN     OF     BOTAKr     MOTION.  73 

latter  ball.  But  there  are  a  great  many  chances  against  bo  A 
balls  striking  in  such  a  line,  and  if  we  suppose  a  constant  stream 
of  balls  (corresponding  to  particles)  flowing  inward  toward  the 
central  ball,  the  probability  of  the  latter  being  soon  struck  a 
little  out  of  the  line  of  its  center,  would  amount  to  an  almost 
absolute  certainty.  In  case  this  should  happen,  a  rotary  mo- 
tion of  the  central  body  would  necessarily  take  place  as  a  re- 
sult of  the  momentum  of  the  body  or  bodies  impinging  upon 
it,  especially  if  the  latter  bodies,  as  a  result  of  magnetic  or 
other  attraction,  attach  themselves  permanently  to  the  surface 
of  the  former  while  still  under  the  influence  of  this  mo- 
mentum. 

Suppose,  then,  there  is  a  constant  stream  of  bodies  flowing 
inward  from  all  directions  toward  the  central  body,  as  is  sup- 
posed to  be  the  case  with  particles  of  nebulous  matter  flowing 
inward  toward  a  common  center ;  the  rotation  of  the  central 
mass  itself  when  once  established,  will,  by  the  friction  of  its 
revolving  atmosphere,  if  from  no  other  cause,  be  sufficient  to 
throw  the  approaching  end  of  every  radial  line  of  gravitating 
particles  out  in  the  same  direction  from  its  center,  and  thus  the 
momentum  of  every  impinging  particle  will  add  to  the  ten- 
dency to  central  rotation.  As  the  particles  gradually  estab- 
lish relations  with  each  other,  through  their  Tarious  degrees 
of  attenuation  from  center  to  circumference,  rotation  will 
gradually  be  established  throughout  the  whole  mass,  the  mo- 
tion being  relatively  swift  at  the  center,  and  gradually  grow- 
ing slower  at  every  remove  toward  the  circumference,  where 
it  is  the  slowest. 

The  idea  has  been  illustrated  by  a  reference  to  the  effect 
produced  by  different  currents  of  water  flowing  toward  a  com- 
mon center,  which  effect  is  well  knowTn  to  be  that  of  a  whirl, 
rapid  at  the  poin<-  of  meeting,  and  growing  more  tardy  at 


76  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

every  remove  from  said  point,  until  it  dies  upon  the  shore,  or 
is  lost  in  the  general  motion  of  the  stream. 

If  we  have  in  these  principles,  as  we  appear  to  have,  a  suf 
ficient  account  for  the  origin  of  all  rotatory  motion  in  the 
celestial  spaces,  it  were  certainly  unphilosophical  to  look  for 
its  origin  in  any  foreign  or  arbitrary  impulse. 

All  the  phenomena  we  have  thus  far  considered,  therefore, 
may  be  traced  to  the  operations  of  two  laws,  viz.,  Expansion 
and  Attraction — the  first  being  based  upon  Heat,  and  th 
second  upon  Heat  and  Light  combined — which  elements,  agaiii 
owe  their  origin  to  the  corresponding  principles  of  Divin* 
Love  and  Wisdom,  or  spiritual  Heat  and  Light.  We  come 
now  to  consider  the  operations  and  results  of  a  third  law — the 
law  of  Circulation. 

While  men  of  science  have  minutely  traced  the  operations 
and  phenomena  of  gravitation,  they  have  taken  comparatively 
little  cognizance  of  any  reactive  force  from  the  attracting 
body.  Yet,  without  the  aid  of  a  reactive  or  emanative  force, 
to  counterbalance,  in  some  measure,  the  gravitative  power,  it 
would  be  impossible  to  conceive,  on  rational  principles,  of  the 
formation  of  any  other  body  than  the  first  and  universal  Body, 
which  would  selfishly  absorb  all  materials,  and  give  forth  none. 
But  it  would  only  be  in  accordance  with  universal  analogy,  to 
suppose  that  while  this  constant  secretion  was  going  on,  there 
was  also  as  constantly  kept  up  a  countervailing  process  of  ex- 
cretion. Particles  absorbed  into  the  cential  mass  (or,  what  is 
the  same  thing,  the  denser  portion  of  the  whole  united  mass), 
would,  by  the  action  of  its  superior  vitality,  undergo  a  quasi 
process  of  digestion,  and  portions  of  their  essence  would  be- 
come refined  and  sublimated,  and  would  be  sent  off  again  into 
space,  to  the  opposite  materials  of  which  they  would  in  theii 
turn  be  attracted,  Sft  the  same  way  as  positive  and  negative 


LAW     OF     CIRCULATION.  77 

electricities  arc  mutually  attracted.  As  all  gravitating  parti- 
cles con  not  go  absolutely  to  the  center  (some  being  crowded 
out  by  others),  and  all  emanated  particles  can  not,  for  a  similar 
reason,  recede  to  the  circumference,  so  each  finds  an  equilib- 
rium, and  takes  a  position,  between  center  and  circumference; 
according  to  its  specific  density  or  levity.  And  now,  a  similar 
process  of  digestion  necessarily  goes  on  among  gravitating 
and  emanating  particles  which  find  their  common  equilibrium 
at  any  given  distance  from  the  center,  and  by  their  mutual 
action  and  reaction,  another  change  and  excretion  takes  place, 
and  the  rejected  particles,  being  in  a  state  exactly  opposite  to 
that  of  the  particles  thrown  oft'  from  the  great  Center,  now 
gravitate  again  toward  that  Center,  there  to  experience  and 
produce  still  further  changes.  Thus  there  is  a  constant  action 
and  reaction,  flux  and  reflux,  between  center  and  circumfer- 
ence, and  between  all  intermediate  parts  of  the  great  mass ; 
and  the  law  governing  this  reciprocating  movement  is  what  we 
mean  by  the  law  of  Circulation.  It  corresponds  to  circulation, 
or  to  the  flux  and  reflux  of  venous  and  arterial  blood  to  and 
from  the  heart  in  the  little  universe,  or  the  human  system, 
even  as  the  laws  of  -Expansion  and  Attraction  (or  contraction), 
before  considered,  correspond  respectively  to  the  diastolic  and 
systolic  motions  of  the  heart,  lungs,  and  perhaps  the  minute 
vesicles,  or  "  corcula,"  of  the  brain.  Being  the  third  law  of 
the  universe,  it  corresponds  to  the  third  element  of  the  Divine 
essential  Constitution,  which  is  the  Divine  Sphere  of  operative' 
Energy,  which,  again,  corresponds  to  the  nerve-essence  in  man, 
*nd  which  latter  corresponds  to  Electricity  in  the  universe 
— this  being  actually  the  agent  mainly  concerned  in  the  pro- 
duction of  the  phenomenon  now  under  special  consideration. 

The  laws  of  Expansion,  Contraction,  and  Circulation,  there- 
fore, form  a  trinity,  as  dependent  upon  the  triune  elements 


78  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

of  He.it,  Light,  and  Electricity ;  and  which  latter  are  related 
to  the  corresponding  three-fold  Divine  spiritual  elements  of 
Love,  Wisdom,  and  Vehicle  of  operative  Energy. 

The  Fourth  law,  is  a  law  of  Organization,  and  brings  the 
elements  and  motions  previously  developed,  into  a  state  of 
systematic  and  serial  Aggregation. 

Before  rotatory  motion  is  fully  established  in  the  mass  of 
matter,  the  gravitating  and  emanating  particles  w^uld  proceed 
toward,  and  from,  the  center,  in  nearly  straight  lines.  But 
after  said  motion  is  fully  established,  and  becomes  general 
throughout  the  mass,  both  kinds  of  particles  would  proceed  in 
aberrent  or  curved  lines,  the  curves  corresponding  to  the  direc- 
tion of  motion  in  the  revolving  .matter — in  the  same  manner 
in  which  a  person  attempting  to  row  a  boat  in  the  direction  of 
a  radius  of  a  circle  or  vortex  of  water  flowing  round  a  center, 
would,  if  he  kept  the  side  of  his  boat  always  square  to  the  stream, 
be  carried  out  of  a  direct  line  a  distance  proportioned  to  the 
rapidity  of  the  current,  and  would  thus  describe  a  curved  path. 

But  it  is  evident,  for  reasons  already  intimated,  that  neither 
can  all  the  gravitating  particles  take,  at  any  one  time,  a 
position  entirely  at  the  center,  nor  can  all  the  emanating 
particles  take  a  simultaneous  position  entirely  at  the  circum- 
ference, but  that  each  will  assume  a  position  with  reference  to 
the  two  extremes,  where  it  finds  an  equilibrium,  and  will  keep 
this  position  until  a  change  fits  it  for  another.  Suppose,  then, 
that  a  gravitating  and  emanating  particle  are  in  exactly  op. 
posite  states  to  each  other  in  respect  to  their  degrees  of 
2)ositiveness  or  negativeness :  it  is  evident  that  both  particles 
would  find  a  common  equilibrium  only  at  the  same  distance 
And  position  between  the  center  and  circumference.  They 
would  there  meet,  and  by  virtue  of  their  elective  affinities, 
form  a  union  as  male  and  female  particles,  and  would  assume 


CONCENT EI C     EIF3S.  79 

a  circular  or  orbitual  motion,  coincident  with  the  rotating 
motion  of  the  general  mass,  which  motion  the  united  mo- 
menta of  their  previously  gravitative  and  emanative  movements 
would  tend  to  mis  tain. 

Now,  supposing  that  there  were  originally  just  seven  kinds 
or  classes  of  atomic  particles  (no  matter  into  how  many  more 
kinds  or  classes  these  were  susceptible  of  being  subdivided), 
it  is  easy  to  perceive  that  the  foregoing  principles  would 
probably  involve,  something  like  the  following  results:  cne  class 
of  atoms,  rejecting  the  immediate  companionship  of  all  others, 
would  cluster  around  a  central  point,  and  form  a  sun.  Each 
of  the  other  six  classes  of  atoms,  in  like  manner,  rejecting  the 
immediate  companionship  of  other  atoms,  while  obeying  the 
impulses  of  its  internal  and  strongest  affinities,  would  assume 
a  general  distance  from  the  center  determined  by  its  specific 
point  of  equilibrium,  and  there,  contracting  upon  itself, 
would  form  a  mass  of  its  own,  in  the  general  shape  of  a  ring, 
surrounding  the  interior  solar  mass.  Here  we  have  a  law  of 
deposition  and  aggregation,  corresponding  to  the  law  by  which 
particles,  circulating  in  the  human  blood,  are  deposited  and 
aggregated  in  the  form  of  muscle,  cellular  tissues,  etc. 

The  universal  system,  as  thus  definitely  organized,  would, 
therefore,  supposing  that  there  are  seven  general  varieties  of 
matter,  present  the  form  of  six  concentric  rings  of  nebulous 
matter,  surrounding  the  seventh  formation,  which  is  the  central 
sun.  But  if  there  were  a  greater  or  less  number  of  kinds  of 
matter,  there  would  be  a  correspondingly  greater  or  less  num. 
per  of  rings,  but  all  constructed  on  the  same  principle.  Of 
this  annular  structure  we  have  a  general  analogue,  though  on 
a  small  scale,  in  the  rings  of  the  planet  Saturn,  and  also  on  a 
larger  scale,  in  the  annular  nebulae,  of  which  there  are  a  few 
examples  in  the  heavens. 


80  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

It  should  be  added,  however,  that  the  idea  of  this  concentric 
annular  form  of  structure  can  only  hold  when  associated  with 
the  supposition,  that  the  primitive  point  of  general  gravitation 
was  at,  or  near,  the  center  of  the  chaotic  mass.  If  the  gravi- 
tative  point  was  far  out  of  the  center,  then  the  evolved 
masses,  instead  of  assuming  the  forms  of  circles,  would  assume 
the  form  of  ellipses,  having  a  preponderance  of  their  materials 
on  one  side  of  the  sun,  where,  indeed,  the  whole  might  be  sub- 
sequently drawn*  by  the  superior  gravitating  force  of  their 
major  quantity,  and  form  a  separate  revolving  mass.  In 
either  case,  however,  the  fundamental  principles  involved 
would  be  the  same.  But  of  the  general  prevalence  of  the 
annular,  or,  at  least,  elliptical  form  of  structure,  in  the  sidereal 
realms,  there  is  a  sufficiency  of  ocular  proof,  as  incidentally 
exhibited  in  a  previous  chapter. 

The  Fifth  law,  governing  a  corresponding  fifth  develop- 
ment, is  the  law  of  Segregation,  by  which  the  materials  of 
the  previous  annular  formations,  obeying  higher  and  more 
specific  elective  affinities,  separate  into  different  masses,  of 
higher  and  lower  degrees  of  refinement. 

The  nature  and  modus  operandi  of  this  law,  may  be  under- 
stood by  the  following  considerations :  The  completion  of  the 
last  or  circular  formation,  brings  the  materials  of  the  universe 
to  a  triune  degree  above  their  primeval  or  chaotic  state.  Of 
course,  therefore,  not  only  the  essences,  but  the  activities  and 
inter-activities  of  the  whole  structure,  are  more  refined, 
diversified,  and  systematic.  Each  nebulous  ring  is  now  itself 
a  comparatively  independent  theater  of  molecular  force  and 
motion,  and  all  of  them  act  upon  each  other  by  their  gravi 
tative  and  eman?*ive  forces,  while  the  central  sun,  as  the 
great  heart  of  the  system,  continues  to  send  forth  his  vivify 
ing  and  generative  influence  to  alL 


SEGREGATED     MASSES,  81 

It  is  easy  to  conceive  that  the  annular  masses,  being  not 
only  internally  active,  but  penetrated  in  various  directions  by 
the  refracted  emanations  from  the  central  sun,  would  be 
liable  to  be  rarefied  at  particular  points  and  condensed  at 
others,  and  thus  to  be  shrunken  and  cleft  apart,  at  particular 
lines  and  angles,  and  that  by  inherent  action  of  the  particles 
of  the  rings  themselves,  contraction  would  take  place  from 
these  lines  of  cleavage,  and  that  the  materials  previously 
united,  would  thus  be  segregated  into  separate  masses.  These 
masses  would,  on  the  same  principle,  be  liable  to  be  sub- 
divided into  inferior  masses  of  greater  or  less  number,  in 
proportion  to  their  respective  original  magnitudes.  This 
whole  process  of  segregation  or  fragmentation,  is  faintly 
illustrated  by  the  breaking  up  of  the  clouds  after  a  storm,  and 
their  resolution  into  separate  masses. 

According  to  principles  before  explained,  each  general 
mass,  owing  to  its  particles  gravitating  to  a  common  center 
within  itself,  would  assume  a  general  rotatory  motion  which. 
for  reasons  which  mathematicians  will  readily  conceive,  would 
necessarily  conform  in  its  direction  to  the  revolution  of  the 
great  ring  of  mundane  materials  to  which  it  belonged,  and 
each  sub-mass  would  have  a  particular  rotating  motion  of  its 
own,  which  would  conform  to  the  motion  of  the  general  mass 
to  which  it  belonged,  i.  e.,  supposing  that  there  were  not  in 
either  case  any  particular  or  incidental  causes  of  disturbance. 
Thus  general  masses  and  their  included  s?^-masses,  with  their 
general  and  particular  centers  of  gravitation  and  revolution, 
would,  by  further  progression,  form  general  stellar  systems, 
and  their  included  sub-systems,  and  finally,  also,  systems  of 
planets  and  satellites,  all  of  which  latter  would  be  evolved  by 
the  progressive  unfoldings  of  the  same  principles  heretofore  ex- 
plained as  governing  the  formation  S  the  universal  structure. 


82  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

In  this  way,  therefore,  as  may  be  rationally  supposed, 
originated  all  the  nebulas,  clusters,  stellar  systems,  or  firma 
merits,  whteh  the  telescope  has  revealed,  together  with  untold 
millions  of  others  of  like  nature,  which  lie  forever  concealed 
from  mortal  vision !  hi  other  words,  each  one  of  these 
originated  from  a  fragment  of  the  periphery  of  a  great  wheel 
or  circle  of  nebulous  materials,  surrounding  the  great  Center 
of  all  centers. 

This  hypothesis,  relative  to  the  origin  of  the  stellar  clusters, 
is  not  without  strong  confirmatory  evidence  in  celestial  ap- 
pearances. I  have  suggested  that  the  vivifying  emanations 
from  the  central  sun,  acting  upon  the  angular  masses  of 
nebulous  matter,  would  produce  planes  of  rarefaction  and 
cleavage  in  various  directions,  from  which  planes  each  result- 
ant insulated  mass,  as  also  each  of  its  subordinate  and  in- 
eluded  masses,  would  contract  upon  its  own  center.  It  is 
evident,  therefore,  that  each  general  mass,  with  its  included 
sub-masses,  would  first  be  of  an  angular  form — on  the  same 
principle  on  which  any  cooling  and  contracting  substance 
tends  to  separate  into  angular  masses,  and  as  is  sometimes 
exemplified  in  the  cleavages  of  igneous  rocks.  But,  by  the 
force  of  internal  gravity,  and  the  rotatory  motion  which, 
according  to  principles  before  explained,  would  naturally 
result  therefrom,  these  nebulous  masses  would  all  tend,  as 
they  progressed,  to  assume  the  elliptical  or  spherical  form. 
Now,  this  is  precisely  what  is  observed  in  relation  to  the 
nebulous  and  stellar  masses  of  space.  Some  are  of  exceed- 
ingly irregular  form,  having  long  and  sharp  projections  from 
their  sides,  and  are  of  irregularly  alternating  degrees  of  density 
in  their  centers,  as  though  they  had,  by  variously  intersecting 
forces,  been  subdivided  into  numerous  inferior  compartments. 
Commencing  at  these  extreme   irregularities,   there  are    all 


PTJOG  RESSION     OF     FORMS.  83 

intermediate  degrees  of  symmetry  in  shape,  down  to  the  per- 
fectly  globular  shape,  to  which  the  prevailing  forms  of  these 
stellar  masses  manifest  more  or  less  approximation.  Judging 
from  appearances,  therefore,  one  would  say  that  these  masses 
are  evidently  in  all  degrees  of  progression,  between  rudi- 
mental  and  ultimate  forms,  and  that,  in  general,  those  of  the 
most  angular  forms  are  the  least,  while  those  of  the  globular 
form  are  the  most,  progressed.*  This  is  all  manifestly  in 
exact  harmony  with  the  hypothesis  of  nebular  and  angular 
segregation,  and  subsequent  firmamental,  solar,  and  planetary 
conglobation,  which  we  have  proposed. 

Moreover,  these  nebular  or  stellar  masses,  although  they 
appear  in  all  directions  in  the  heavens,  arc  said  to  appear,  as 
already  intimated,  in  greatest  abundance  in  the  direction  of  a 
particular  plane,  which  cuts  the  plane  of  our  Milky  Way  at 
right  angles.  In  the  direction,  perpendicular  to  this  plane, 
they  grow  comparatively  thin  (as  do  the  stars  in  the  direction 


*  In  illustration  of  the  progression  from  angularity  and  ellipticity  to  sphericity  ia 
these  bodies,  I  may  quote  the  following  from  the  splendid  work  of  Sir  John  Herschel, 
embodying  the  results  of  his  observations  at  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  Writh  reference 
to  the  engraved  figures  of  two  particular  nebulae  existing  in  the  southern  heavens,  he 
says:  "These  figures  exhibit  elliptical  nebula?,  normal  in  their  character— that  is  to 
say,  in  which,  as  the  condensation  increases  toward  the  middle,  the  ellipticity  of  the 
strata  diminishes,  or  in  which  the  interior  and  denser  portions  are  obviously  more 
nearly  spherical  than  the  exterior  and  rarer.  A  great  number  of  such  nebulas,  of  every 
variety  of  ellipticity  and  central  condensation,  are  figured  in  my  northern  catalogue. 
Regarding  the  spherical  as  only  a  particular  case  of  the  elliptic  form,  and  a  stellar 
nucleus  as  only  the  extreme  stage  of  condensation,  at  least  nine-tenths  of  the  whole 
nebulous  contents  of  the  heavens  will  be  found  to  belong  to  this  class;  so  that,  as 
regards  a  law  and  a  structure,  the  induction  which  refers  them,  as  a  class,  to  the 
operation  of  similar  causes,  and  assumes  the  prevalence  within  them,  of  similar 
dynamical  conditions,  is  most  full  and  satisfactory.  To  abstain  altogether  from  specu- 
lation as  to  what  may  be  the  nature  of  those  causes  and  conditions,  and  to  refuse  al! 
attempts  to  reconcile  the  phenomena  of  so  large  and  so  definite  a  class  of  cosmiea] 
existences,  with  mechanical  lavvs,  taken  in  their  most  general  acceptation,  would  be  to 
err  on  the  s.;de  of  excessive  c-aution  and  philosophical  timidity."— IlEiiscHm.'s  ResiUU 
&  ike  Cape  of  Good  Rope,  p  22. 


84  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  the  Milky  Way),  suggesting  the 
idea  of  a  very  remote  approximation  to  the  horizontal 
boundary  of  the  stratum.  Though  it  is  a  thought  bordering 
on  the  confines  of  the  human  conceptive  powers,  and  thus 
penetrating  somewhat  into  the  realms  of  uncertainty  and  doubt, 
it  may  still  be  propounded  as  a  query — Whether  the  plane  of 
this  grand  stratum  of  sub-universes,  may  not  indicate  the 
direction  of  the  plane  of  the  great  Ring  of  original  nebulous 
materials,  from  which  these  nebulae  and  stellar  systems  be- 
came segregated  and  resolved  into  their  present  forms,  and 
whether  all  firmamental  creations,  revealed  by  the  telescope, 
may  not  thus  be  included  within  a  comparatively  small 
fraction  of  a  segment  of  one  of  the  great  cosmical  rings  which 
surround  the  Center  of  all  centers?  Though  a  question  so 
profound  can  probably  never  be  finally  decided  by  the  human 
intellect,  the  indication  of  this  grand  plane  of  cosmical  for- 
mations, tends,  so  far  as  it  bears  upon  the  subject,  to  confirm 
our  hypothesis,  that  all  visible  nebulas  and  stellar  systems, 
are  segregations  from  one  general  mass  of  nebulous  matter, 
originally  existing  on  one  general  plane;  and  the  analogies  of 
all  known  definite  motions  and  formations  in  the  stellar 
spaces,  point  to  the  idea  of  a  circular  or  elliptical  form  as 
characterizing  this  grand  plane  of  creations. 

While  this  theory  gives  definite  form  and  order  to  the  sub- 
ject of  our  contemplations,  it  opens  the  mind  to  the  most 
sublime  conceptions  of  magnitudes  and  distances.  Hersehel 
estimated  that  his  great  telescope  would  reveal  the  existence 
of  a  star  so  far  removed  into  space  that  light,  traveling  at 
the  rate  of  twelve  millions  of  miles  in  a  minute,  would  require 
three  thousand  five  hundred  and  forty-one  years  to  pass  from 
that  star  to  our  earth.  Such,  therefore,  may  be  supposed  to 
be  the  approximate  distar.ee  of  the  remotest  of  tho?^  luminous 


IMMENSITY     OF     CREATION.  85 

masses  whhh  wore  resolvable  into  stars  by  his  telescope. 
He,  however,  computed  that  his  large  telescope  would  follow 
one  of  those  large  clusters,  as  a  general  mass,  if  plunged  so 
deep  into  space  that  its  light  would  require  three  hundred 
and  fifty  thousand  years  to  reach  us ;  and,  it  is  thought  that 
the  great  telescope  of  Lord  Ross  would  pursue  the  same 
object  to  ten  times  that  distance,  or  a  distance  which  light, 
with  its  inconceivable  velocity  of  motion,  would  consume 
more  than  three  millions  of  years  in  traversing!*  This, 
therefore,  may  be  assumed  as  the  proximate  distance  of  the 
.remotest  nebula?  rendered  visible  by  Lord  Ross's  instrument. 
If,  as  is  probable,  all  stellar  creations,  included  in  a  sphere 
bounded  on  all  sides  by  this  enormous  distance,  constitute 
only  a  small  fraction  of  a  segment  of  one  such  circle  of 
creations  as  we  have  supposed  to  surround  the  great  common 
Center  of  attraction,  it  would  not  be  advisable  for  the  reader 
to  attempt  to  conceive  of  the  dimensions  even  of  one  of  those 
whole  circles,  much  less  of  the  whole  universe;  which  latter, 
however,  if  created,  must  be  inferior  to  the  Creator,  and  thus 
finite. 

But,  applying  the  same  general  laws  to  the  creation  of  the 
solar,  and  the  creation  of  the  universal,  system,  it  may  be 
asked,  "  Why  is  it  that  either  the  unitary  agglomeration  repre- 
sented by  single  planets,  or  the  multiplied  segregated  division 
which  we  have  supposed  to  be  represented  by  nebula?  and 
stellar  clusters,  did  not  take  place  uniformly  in  both  systems 
as  the  formation  from  the  materials  of  the  nebulous  rings  ?" 
The  answer,  I  apprehend,  may  be  found  in  the  different  co'tdl- 
tionx  of  the  rings  in  the  two  systems,  as  involve  I  in  Lneir 
different  magnitudes.    In  the  great  system  of  systems,  the  dis- 


*  See  Mitcli ell's    Planetary  and  Stellar  World,"  p.  28&-7. 

8 


BG  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

tance  of  particles  at  any  two  extremes,  must  have  been  so 
great  as  to  prevent  then,  from  having  any  ajtyrcciable  attrac- 
tion for  each  other.  Some  tendency  to  draw  together  and  form 
a  single  permanent  mass,  indeed  there  must  have  been ;  but 
this  tendency  at  the  more  distant  points  in  the  mass,  must 
have  been  so  small,  and  the  activity  of  particular  districts,  es- 
pecially after  incipient  nucleation,  must  have  been  so  great, 
and  so  rapidly  increasing,  as  to  give  rise  to  subsequent  and 
numerous  mundane  forms  and  systems — the  very  thing  pro 
posed  in  our  theory  of  segregation,  and  confirmed  by  appear- 
ances in  the  heavens. 

But  in  the  solar  system,  the  distance  from  one  extreme  of 
the  annular  formation  to  the  other,  was  comparatively  small ; 
and  besides  this,  we  may  suppose  that  the  varieties  of  matter 
in  so  small  a  mass,  were  less  extreme,  and  that  their  affinities 
were  more  intimate,  than  in  the  universal  mass  previously 
spoken  of.  There  was,  therefore,  not  only  a  possibility,  but  a 
high  degree  of  probability,  that  the  materials  of  each  of  the 
rings  of  nebulous  matter  formed  around  our  sun,  would  assume 
the  form  of  one  mass,  which  would  subsequently  move  in  an 
orbit  whose  plane  and  distance  would  be  coincident  with  the 
previous  ring. 

But,  admitting  the  nebular  hypothesis,  the  multipled  segre- 
gative process  actually  does  seem  to  have  taken  place  in  one 
instance  even  in  our  solar  system,  and  given  rise  to  several 
planetary  bodies  as  the  products  of  one  ring.  It  i-s  scarcely 
necessary  to  say  that  we  refer  to  those  strange  bodies  called 
the  asteroids,  which  revolve  at  almost  equal  distances  from 
the  sun,  between  the  orbits  of  Mars  and  Jupiter,  and  of  which 
there  is  now  known  to  be  fifteen  or  sixteen  in  number.  That 
these  bodies  must  have  origmated  from  one  primitive  mass  of 
planetary  matter,  there  can  be  but  little  doubt,  as  such   ar; 


ASTEROIDS.       SOLAEIZATION.  .87 

hypothesis  is  necessary  to  preserve  the  uniformity  of  the  sys- 
tem, and  to  supply  the  vacuity  that  would  otherwise  have 
existed  between  the  orbits  of  Mars  and  Jupiter. 

If,  therefore,  instead  of  being  without  progeny,  and  1  evolv- 
ing in  solitude  (which  can  only  be  owing  to  their  diminutive- 
ness),  each  asteroid  were  attended  by  a  numerous  family  of 
children  and  grand-children  (or  satellites  and  sub  satellites), 
and  revolved  around  one  of  their  number,  while  performing 
their  general  circuit  around  a  superior  center,  they  would  ex- 
actly  illustrate,  on  a  small  scale,  our  idea  of  the  segregated 
stellar  clusters  of  the  universe — each  of  which  latter  may  be 
supposed  to  revolve,  as  one  general  body,  like  the  asteroids,  in 
an  orbit  generally  coinciding  as  to  plane,  and  distance  from  the 
great  and  common  Center,  with  the  plane  and  distance  of  the 
great  ring  of  nebulous  materials  in  which  it  had  its  parentage. 

But  it  should  be  understood,  that  the  fifth  stage  in  the  pro- 
cess of  creation,  considered  merely,  as  a  process  of  segregation. 
is  complete  with  the  formation  simply  of  separate  angular 
masses  and  sub-masses,  from  the  general  materials  of  the  neb- 
ulous rings. 

The  sixth  process  in  the  creative  procedure,  is  a  process  of 
solar iza Hon,  or  one  by  which  these  previously  segregated  and 
indefinitely  formed  masses  and  their  sub-divisions,  become 
established  suns.  This  process  is  accomplished  by  gravita- 
tions to,  and  emanations  from,  central  points  in  the  segregated 
masses,  on  principles  essentially  the  same  with  those  previ- 
ously explained  as  applying  to  the  formation  of  the  first  great 
central  Body ;  but  in  this  higher  process,  the  operations  may 
be  supposed  to  be  more  refined  and  regular  in  proportion  to 
the  superior  refinement  of  the  elements  and  dynamic  agenta 
which  are  involved.  These  suns  assume  specific  distances  and 
orbits    determined   by   the    laws  of  equilibrium,   and    com- 


88  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

inence  their  harmonious  actions  and  reactions  upon  each  othbf 
developing  a  sixth  law — the  law  of  universal  cosmical  sympa. 
thy  and  reciprocation — corresponding  to  the  nervous  sympathy 
and  reciprocal  action  existing  between  the  different  organs  of 
the  human  body,  the  little  universe. 

The  seventh  and  last  law  and  process  in  this  series  of  uni- 
versal creations,  is  that  by  which  planetary  masses — bodies 
destined  to  become  ultimately  habitable — were  evolved  from 
the  previous  solar  masses.  Of  course  it  is  to  be  supposed 
that  these  bodies  were  produced  from  the  solar  masses  by  evo- 
lutions of  nebulous  rings,  and  by  agglomeration  of  the  materials 
of  tKese,  according  to  principles  before  explained.  This  de- 
velopment completes  the  fundamental  structure  of  the  material 
universe  as  such,  and  serves  as  the  Basis  and  material  Germ 
of  all  subsequent  and  more  refined  unfoldings. 

The  different  stages  through  which  the  universal  mass  of 
materials  have  passed,  from  germinal  to  ultimate  forms,  may 
therefore  be  summarily  represented  in  the  following  formula  : 


Primary  Trinity. 

1.  Heat-pervaded  chaos. 

2.  Luminous  attractive  nucleus. 

3.  Electro-interactive  spheroid. 


Secondary  Trinity. 

4.  Concentric  nebulous  rings. 

5.  Segregated  masses  (from  rings) 

6.  Suns  and  clusters  of  suns. 


Ultimate 
7.  Habitable  worlds. 

It  is  true  that  we  can  have  no  final  and  absolutely  sensuous 
demonstration  that  such  is  the  structure  of  the  universe,  be- 
cause the  telescope,  with  all  its  magic  powers,  has  probably 
revealed,  as  it  were,  but  an  infinitesimal  fragment  of  the  great 
united  Sj  stem.  Yet,  considering  that  the  telescope  has  expli- 
citly revealed  that  the  same  laws  of  gravitation  and  revolution- 
ary  motion  which  apply  to  our  own  planetary  worlds,  applv 


SUMMARY     OF     EVIDENCES.  89 

rIso  to  the  most  distant  clusters  of  stars,  thus  binding  all  sys- 
tems and  firmaments  together  in  one  family  relation,  and  re« 
ferring  them  to  a  common  parentage — considering,  therefore, 
that  our  own  solar  system  is  of  itself  a  Vrttle  universe,  exem- 
plifying all  the  principles  involved  in  the  great  universe,  of 
which  it  is  a  child  and  antitype — and  considering,  as  we  may 
now  well  do,  that  the  nebular  hypothesis  of  creation  is  the 
correct  one,  and  that  laws  are  uniform  throughout  the  whole 
realm  of  being — the  preponderance  of  analogical  evidence 
must,  we  think,  be  admitted  to  be  in  favor  of  the  genera* 
truthfulness  of  the  theory  here  propounded.  For,  in  the  first 
place  (admitting  the  nebular  hypothesis),  our  own  sun,  en 
throned  in  the  midst  of  our  system,  affords  an  ocular  proof 
that  matter  in  a  primitively  diffused  state,  and  obeying  the  im- 
pulses breathed  into  it  from  the  Divine  spiritual  source,  will 
assume  a  central,  gravitating,  and  rotating  Nucleus;  and  this 
hints  at  the  great  Nucleus,  which,  on  the  same  principles,  seem 
ingly  must  have  necessarily  been  formed  in  the  midst  of  the 
originally  chaotic  materials  of  the  whole  universe.  Moreover, 
the  rings  of  Saturn  show  the  forms  naturally  first  assumed  by 
the  attracted  and  emanated  materials  of  a  central  body,  which 
lorms  will  be  of  varying  distances  from  the  central  body,  ac- 
cording to  their  specific  degrees  of  density  or  levity.  Some 
such  forms  seemingly  must  have  necessarily  been  elaborated, 
not  only  by  our  own  central  sun,  but  by  all  other  suns  of  suf- 
ficient magnitude  and  activity,  and  especially  by  the  great  Sun 
of  all  suns.  But  such  annular  forms,  of  course,  can  be  pre- 
served through  subsequent  condensation,  only  in  case  of  the 
nicest  equilibrium  in  their  materials  and  motions,  such  as  19 
characteristic  of  Saturn's  rings.  If  there  is  any  considerable 
inequality  in  either  of  these  particulars  the  annular  mass,  in 
contracting,  will  inevitably  resolve  itself  into  the  form  of  on* 


90  LAWS     AND     DEVELOPMENTS. 

or  more  bod'es,  whose  orbit  of  revolution  will  be  such  as  was 
described  by  the  position  of  the  previous  ring. 

This  consideration  not  only  explains  the  origin  of  the  planets 
satellites,  and  asteroids,  of  our  own  solar  system,  from  the 
materials  of  previous  nebulous  rings,  but  suggests  that  anal- 
ogous  singular  and  multiple  conglobations  must,  seemingly  of 
necessity,  have,  in  like  manner,  been  formed  in  the  sidereal 
spaces,  from  the  materials  of  nebulous  rings  surrounding  their 
respective  centers,  these  all  being  subordinate  to  a  final  and 
common  Center,  as  all  created  things  proceed  from  a  final  and 
common  Cause. 

We  may,  therefore,  say,  that  there  are  many  avenues  open 
toward  the  hypothesis  we  have  propounded  respecting  the 
origin  and  structure  of  the  universe,  and  many  guide-boards 
(or  facts  and  principles),  pointing  along  these  avenues,  all  in  the 
same  direction  ;  while,  if  the  mind  attempts  to  travel  in  a  dif- 
ferent direction,  and  in  quest  of  other  conclusions,  it  not  only 
finds  no  such  guide-boards  to  direct  it.  and  no  such  avenues 
open  for  its  passage,  but  it  is  constantly  obstructed  by  barriers 
of  philosophical  difficulty,  and  each  of  the  steps  of  its  progress 
is  planted  only  on  the  miry  and  treacherous  ground  of  assump 
tion.  While,  therefore,  the  mind  is  ever  held  open  to  the  re- 
ception of  new  light,  and  a  willingness  is  preserved  to  abandon, 
any  present  errors  for  the  sake  of  subsequently  unfolded 
truths,  it  would  seem  that  we  might,  without  subjecting  our- 
selves to  any  just  charge  of  philosophical  rashness,  settle  in 
the  present  conviction  that  the  foregoing  hypothesis,  at  least 
as  to  its  general  and  most  essential  princioles,  can  not  vary 
much  from  the  truth. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

THE    SEYErf    DYNAMIC    AGENTS    0E    POTENTIAL    MEDIA 
OF    NATUEE. 

To  facilitate  a  clear  conception  of  the  relations  of  the  Deity 
to,  and  his  mode  of  acting  upon,  the  universe,  as  well  for 
other  important  uses,  we  will  now  endeavor  to  attain  to 
some  further  conceptions  of  the  dynamic  agents  immediately 
-connected  with  the  seven  general  laws,  and  their  correspond- 
ing seven-fold  developments,  considered  in  the  foregoing 
chapter. 

It  was  before  intimated,  on  grounds  which  appear  even  to 
transcend  mere  probability,  that  the  agents  immediately  con- 
cerned in  generating  in  the  universal  chaotic  mass,  the  first 
three  phenomena  of  Expansion,  Contraction,  and  Circulation, 
were  Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity.  By  the  agency  of  these 
three  principles,  we  have  supposed  that  the  mass  was  suc- 
cessively developed  from  a  chaotic,  to  a  nucleated,  and 
spheroidal  form.  Another  and  corresponding  trinity  of  agents 
was  hinted  at,  which  will  now  form  the  subject  of  special  con- 
sideration and  illustration. 

In  unfolding  the  doctrine  of  the  seven-fold  series,  it  was 
shown  that  the  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  members  of  such  a 
series,  composing  a  Secondary  Trinity,  bear  a  certain  corre- 
spondence, respectively,  to  the  first,  second,  and  third  mem- 
bers,  which  compose  a  Primary  Trinity.  Thus,  as  the  Pri- 
mary Trinity  of  conditions  in  the  universal  material  mass. 


92  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

consisted  of  the  chaotic,  the  nucleated,  and  the  spheroidal,  sa 
the  Secondary  Trinity  (comprising  nebulous  rings,  segregated 
and  contracting  fragments,  and  developed  solar  forms)  may 
be  characterized  as  secondary  chaos,  secondary  nucleation,  and 
secondary  spheroidation.  This  being  so,  and  the  dynamic 
elements  of  the  first  Trinity  being  Heat,  Light,  and  Elec- 
tricity (each  probably  in  a  gross  degree  of  development),  a 
carrying  out  of  identical  principles  will  lead  to  the  supposition 
that  the  dynamic  agents  peculiar  to  the  Secondary  Trinity, 
are  such  as  would  correspond  to  Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity, 
in  a  secondary  degree  of  development,  so  to  speak,  without, 
however,  supposing  that  they  are  absolutely  identical  with 
Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity,  as  these  terms  would  ordinarily 
be  understood.  This,  however,  is  a  mere  deduction  from 
principles  and  correspondences ;  let  us  now  see  if  there  are 
any  substantial  facts  to  support  it. 

Such  facts  are  involved  in  a  series  of  interesting  and  most 
important  discoveries,  made  by  Baron  Von  Reichenbach,  a 
[e\v  years  ago,  and  of  which  we  will  now  speak  briefly.  The 
course  of  experiments  which  led  this  ingenious  philosopher  to 
the  discoveries  in  question,  was  commenced  by  testing  the 
properties  of  magnets.  By  the  assistance  of  a  number  of 
delicately  organized  persons,  mainly  cataleptic  patients,  in 
whom  the  senses,  especially  sight  and  feeling,  were  in  an  un- 
common degree  of  exaltation,  he  ascertained  that  from  either 
pole  of  an  open  magnet,  there  was  constantly  given  forth  a 
luminous,  flame-like  appearance,  visible  in  a  dark  room,  but 
only  to  such  as  possessed  this  uncommon  acuteness  of  vision. 
The  flames  sent  forth  from  the  poles  of  a  large  horse-shoe 
magnet,  capable  of  supporting  ninety  pounds,  were  described 
us  about  eight  inches  in  mean  length,  mingled  writh  irride-cent 
colors,   and   gently    flickering    and   waving,    shortening    %nd 


REICIIENBACII    S      EXPERIMENTS.  93 

elonga'  ing,  and  yielding  when  blown  upon,  and  when  the 
hand  or  any  other  solid  body  was  passed  through  them. 
The  whole  appearance  was  described  as  being  exceedingly 
beautiful. 

This  experiment  was  repeated  with  many  different  observ 
ers,  from  all  of  whom  the  same  general  description  was  ob 
tained — the  accuracy  of  which  was  further  tested  by  varying 
the  experiments  without  the  knowledge  of  the  observers,  and 
noting  the  corresponding  and  uniform  variations  of  the  ap- 
pearances described. 

But,  in  order  to  obtain  still  further  assurance  that  those 
luminous  appearances  described  by  others  were  real,  though 
invisible  to  himself,  the  experimenter,  by  the  aid  of  another 
scientific  gentleman,  instituted  the  following  additional  test : 
A  very  sensitive  daguerreotype  plate  was  prepared  and  placed 
opposite  to  a  large  open  magnet,  in  a  closed  box,  enveloped 
in  thick  bed-clothes,  so  that  not  a  particle  of  ordinary  lighl 
could  enter  it.  After  the  lapse  of  sixty-four  hours,  the  plate, 
when  exposed  to  mercurial  vapor,  was  found  to  be  distinctly 
affected,  as  by  light.  Another  plate  had  been,  at  the  same 
time,  similarly  prepared,  and  inclosed  in  a  dark  box,  without 
a  magnet,  and  after  a  similar  length  of  time  this  was  found  to 
be  entirely  unaffected. 

The  light  was  also  subjected  to  the  test  of  the  convex  lens, 
and  was  found  to  be  converged  and  thrown  upon  the  wall  in 
the  same  way  as  any  other  light,  but  at  a  considerably  greater 
focal  distance,  which  fact  of  itself  proves  that  the  luminous  sub- 
stance was  different  from  ordinary  light. 

By  tests  similar  to  those  which  were  employed  with  the 
magnet,  it  was  subsequently  ascertained,  with  equal  certainty, 
that  similar  lights  were  also  emitted  from  crystals.  The  flames 
issuing  from  the  points  of  large  crystals  were  described  by 


9i  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

those  who  could  see  them,  as  being  somewhat  in  the  shape  of 
a  tulip,  and  singularly  beautiful.  One  young  lady  used,  whec 
ill,  to  lie  awake  nights  enjoying  the  sight  of  the  beautiful  flame 
emitted  from  a  large  rock  crystal  which  had  been  left  in  her 
room.  But  bodies  confusedly  crystalline  exhibited  but  little  of 
this  phenomenon,  and  bodies  entirely  amorphous  exhibited 
none,  but  nevertheless  gave  forth,  in  common  with  crystals, 
magnets,  and  other  things,  a  still  more  subtle  influence,  which 
will  hereafter  be  described. 

Our  experimenter  subsequently  introduced  other  tests  with 
the  view  of  ascertaining  to  what  extent  this  newly-discovered 
force  prevailed  in  nature.  He  extended  the  end  of  a  wire 
through  the  keyhole  of  the  door  of  a  perfectly  darkened  room, 
in  which  he  placed  a  person  whose  senses  were  sufficiently 
acute  to  detect  any  luminous  or  other  phenomena  which  might 
present  itself  as  the  result  of  any  experiment.  The  other 
end  of  the  wire  he  attached  to  a  metallic  plate,  which,  without 
letting  the  observer  placed  in  the  room  know  what  he  was 
doing,  he  would  push  out  into  the  rays  of  the  sun,  or  of  the 
moon,  or  of  the  planets,  or  fixed  stars  ;  or  would  place  an 
animal,  a  plant,  or  his  own  hands,  upon  its  surface;  or  would 
subject  it  to  chemical  action,  or  the  action  of  heat,  cold,  or 
electricity.  He  found  the  results  of  all  these  experiments 
nearly  uniform  in  one  particular,  viz.,  in  respect  to  the  emis- 
sion of  a  narrow  tuft  of  light  several  inches  in  length,  from 
the  end  of  the  wire,  which  would  begin  to  be  visible  soon 
after  the  agent  experimented  upon  was  brought  to  bear  upon 
the  plate.  Indeed,  whatever  possessed  in  itself  the  least  mo- 
lecular force  or  action,  was  found  to  be  capable  of  evolving  a 
greater  or  less  degree  of  this  luminosity. 

Other  processes  gave  an  analysis  of  these  lights,  and  showed 
remarkable  relations  in  their  constituents,  to  different  points 


SEYEA'-FOLD      LUMINOSI  T  Y  .  1)5 

in  the  terrestrial  and  celestial  spheres.  It  was  found,  for  example, 
that  the  flames  from  the  poles  of  a  large  electro-magnet  (which 
wore  much  larger  and  brighter  than  those  emitted  from  the 
permanent  steel  magnet)  would,  after  the  galvanic  circuit  was 
completed,  slowly  and  gradually  resolve  themselves  into  dis- 
tinct stratifications  of  color,  presenting,  in  fact,  the  seven-fold 
luminosity  of  the  rainbow,  with  the  red  below  and  the  violet 
above.  These  colors,  again,  were  found  to  vary  with  the 
varying  distances  at  which  they  were  viewed — the  whole  of 
the  appearances,  when  taken  together,  showing  that  each  one 
of  the  differently  colored  radiations  terminated,  for  the  most 
part,  at  a  certain  distance  from  the  common  center  of  lumin- 
osity. This  distance,  though  Reichenbach  did  not  remark  it, 
was  probably  nearly  the  same  all  around ;  the  differently 
colored  rays  thus  forming  a  system  of  concentric  spheres  of 

light 

Guarding  against  errors  which  might  arise  from  variations 
in  these  colors  as  resulting  from  the  varying  distances  at  which 
they  were  viewed,  our  philosopher  was  now  prepared  for 
another  interesting  step.  Having  previously  found  that  a  mag- 
netic bar,  with  poles  in  the  direction  of  the  dip,  always  emitted 
different  colors  frcrn  those  it  gave  in  the  meridian,  he  pro- 
ceeded to  ascertain  what  effect  other  positions  of  the  pole 
would  have  upon  the  character  of  the  luminosity.  For  this 
purpose  he  caused  a  magnetic  bar  to  revolve  lengthwise,  first 
in  a  vertical  circle  in  the  direction  of  the  magnetic  meridian, 
then  in  a  vertical  circle  in  a  direction  east  and  west,  and  lastly, 
in  a  horizontal  circle.  He  found  that  in  each  case  different 
colors  were  evolved  according  as  the  magnet  was  pointed  in 
different  directions,  and  that  ai  it  passed,  in  each  case,  through 
a  com'plete  circle,  it  evolved,  in  regular  succession,  all  the  colon 
of  the  rainbow! 


96  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

By  subsequent  electro-magnetic  experiments  with  an  am 
ficial  globe  called  the  tcrrelle,  Iteichenbach  succeeded  in  pre- 
cisely reproducing  the  appearances  of  the.  aurora  borealis,  and 
may  be  considered  as  having  probably  afforded  a  complete 
solution  of  that  interesting  phenomenon. 

We  find  in  these  remarkable  facts  a  complete  verification  of 
our  previous  hypothesis,  so  far  as  it  relates  to  an  essence 
which  may  be  called  secondary  light.  While  this  light  is,  in 
some  particulars,  similar  to  ordinary  light,  it  differs  from  it 
totally  in  others,  as  the  foregoing  description  renders  obvious  ; 
and  it  therefore  may  be  judged  to  belong  to  a  somewhat  differ- 
ent degree  of  natural  developments.  Considering  this,  there- 
fore, as  one  of  the  members  of  our  supposed  Secondary  Trinity 
of  imponderables,  we  shall  now  see  lhat  our  hypothesis,  so  far 
as  it  relates  to  the  other  two  members,  is  not  without  the  sup- 
port of  similar  facts. 

When  a  horseshoe  magnet  was  closed  by  an  armature,  all 
appearances  of  a  luminous  flame  would  immediately  cease, 
but  would  be  instantly  reproduced  on  the  removal  of  the 
armature.  This  establishes  the  probability  that  the  same  force 
which  in  the  open  magnet  generates  the  luminosity,  is,  by  the 
application  of  the  armature,  simply  rendered  latent,  so  far  as  its 
flame-generating  power  is  concerned,  but  that  it  nevertheless 
still  exists  in  the  closed  magnet,  and  acts  as  an  internal  prin- 
ciple, or  as  a  principle  corresponding  to  fire  or  heat.  This 
view  is  further  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  one  of  Reichenbach's 
subjects  saw  even  closed  magnets,  and.  indeed,  metals  of  all 
kinds,  luminous  in  the  dark,  as  though  they  had  been  heated 
to  incandesence — without,  however,  giving  forth  any  flame-like 
scintillations.  Such,  then,  are  the  evidences  of  a  Secondary 
Beat. 

But  still  more  conclusive  indications  were  obtained  of  an 


EFFECTS      OF     MAGNETS.  97 

electroid,  or  electricity -like  agent,  as  connected  with  the  identi- 
cal sources  of  these  other  phenomena.  It  was  found  that 
magnets,  crystals,  or  whatever  afforded  the  phenomena  of  this 
attenuated  light,  together  with  many  things  which  did  not, 
also  emitted  an  influence  or  aura  which  was  capable  of  acting 
decidedly  upon  the  nerves  of  a  certain  proportion  of  persons 
This  aura  was  described  as  warm  or  cold,  according  as  it  was 
received  from  either  pole  of  the  magnet  or  crystal,  or  accord- 
ing to  the  positive  or  negative  quality  of  any  other  source 
from  which  it  was  obtained.  It  was.  found  capable  of  acting 
at  a  distance,  and  of  being  transmitted  through  conducting 
media,  and  of  sometimes  acting  so  powerfully  upon  the  sensi 
tive  as  to  produce  catalepsy  and  dangerous  spasms.  Thus,  it 
one  time,  during  the  illness  of  one  of  Reichenbach's  employ  tes. 
he  held  a  large  magnet,  capable  of  supporting  ninety  pounds, 
at  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  her  feet,  as  she  lay  on  her 
bed,  with  her  physician  by  her  side.  While  the  armature 
was  attached  to  the  magnet  she  felt  no  peculiar  sensation,  but 
the  instant  it  was  removed  she  fell  into  tetanic  spasms  and 
complete  unconsciousness  from  its  action.  The  armature 
being  again  attached,  the  girl  slowly  recovered  her  senses, 
and  her  physician  advised  that  the  experiment  should  not  be 
repeated.  Another  lady,  subject  to  attacks  of  catalepsy, 
could  instantly  detect  the  approach  of  an  open  magnet, 
though  the  latter  was  brought,  without  her  knowledge  of  the 
intention,  near  the  head  of  her  bed,  on  the  opposite  side  of 
the  wall. 

Magnets,  crystals,  etc.,  were  also  found  to  powerfully  at- 
tract the  hands  of  cataleptic  patients,  even  during  the  un- 
consciousness  of  their  fits. 

It  was  also  ascertained  that  amorphous  b<  tdies,  in  common 
with  others,  sent  forth  this  ethereal  influence,  though,  as  before 

9 


9%  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

shown,  they  gave  forth  no  light.  And  here  it  was  more  fully 
ascertained,  that  the  ethereal  emanations  from  different  sub- 
stances, were  specifically  different  as  to  their  effects  upon  the 
human  nerve,  thus  affording  indications  of  the  distinctive 
characters  of  the  emanating  sources.  One  peculiarity  of 
amorphous  (that  is  to  say,  uncrystallized  and  unorganized) 
bodies  was,  that  their  exhalations  gave  a  nauseous,  accompa- 
nied by  either  a  cold  or  warm,  and  sometimes  also  a  prickly, 
sensation,  to  persons  whose  nerves  were  in  a  sufficiently 
sensitive  state  to  test  them ;  and  some  bodies  imparted  these 
sensations  in  a  greater  degree  than  others.  In  the  investi- 
gation of  this  point,  Reichenbach  took  the  trouble  to  try  more 
than  six  hundred  bodies  with  reference  to  their  nauseating 
<3rce.  The  young  lady  through  whose  aid  the  tests  were 
made,  could  easily  give  to  every  substance  its  proper  place  in 
ihe  scale  of  force,  and  this  she  could  repeat,  without  failure, 
after  intervals  of  several  days.  "  It  soon  appeared,"  says  our 
philosopher,  "  that  these  bodies  arranged  themselves  accord- 
ing to  their  electro-chemical  value,  and,  indeed,  in  suchwise 
that  the  highly  electric  stood  at  the  top,  and  the  indifferently 
so  at  the  bottom  of  the  scale,  without  regard  to  their  polar 
opposition." 

When  the  same  substances  were  tried  on  this  same  young 
lady  while  in  a  state  of  catalepsy,  "the  results  were  the  same 
in  kind,  but  in  degree  much  stronger.  The  substances  at  the 
top  of  the  scale,  laid  in  her  hand,  caused  violent  spasms, 
whereby  they  were  thrown  at  a  distance,  and  her  hand  then, 
as  usual  in  catalepsy,  retained  the  new  position.  .  .  It  was 
coon  observed  that  many  substances  began  to  act  before  they 
touched  the  hand,  and  it  was  enough  to  place  them  nenr  it." 

These  experiments  were  repeated,  not  only  with  other 
nervous  patients^  but  with  several  gentlemen  in  a  state  of  per« 


EMANATIONS     FROM     MEDICINES.  99 

feet  health,  with  results  differing  from  the  above  no  more 
than  what  might  easily  be  accounted  for  by  the  different  de- 
grees of  susceptibility  in  the  experimenters.  The  different 
substances  tried  are  enumerated  by  Reichenbach  according  to 
their  specific  effects  but  it  will  here  be  sufficient  to  say  that 
sulphur  was  found  to  be  the  general  representative  of  those 
which,  without  contact,  gave  the  sensation  of  cold,  and  gold 
of  those  which  gave  warmth ;  and  almost  every  one  whose 
hand  was  made  to  pass  over  small  plates,  coated  respectively 
with  these  substances,  felt,  in  some  degree,  these  correspond- 
ing sensations,  and  some  felt  them  quite  vividly. 

Without  any  knowledge  of  Reichenbach's  investigations, 
Dr.  J.  R.  Buchanan,  of  Cincinnati,  was  engaged,  about  the 
same  time,  in  a  similar  course  of  experiments  with  amorphous 
bodies,  and  developed  results  similar  in  character,  but  in  some 
respects  even  still  more  decisive.  Without  here  entering  into 
the  details  of  his  experiments  or  inquiries,  it  will  be  sufficient 
to  state  that  they  resulted  in  establishing  the  fact,  that 
medicines,  holden  in  the  hand  of  the  patient,  even  when 
wrapped  up  in  paper  and  concealed  from  view  so  as  to  guard 
against  the  effects  of  imagination,  will,  in  a  large  proportion  of 
cases,  have  all  the  effects  that  the  same  medicines  will  have, 
taken  internally.  Out  of  about  one  hundred  and  thirty 
medical  students  belonging  to  a  class  which  attended  the 
lectures  of  Dr.  Buchanan,  forty-three  declared  themselves 
fully  affected  by  this  experiment,  to  which  they  had  been  sub- 
jected during  the  delivery  of  one  lecture.* 

Similar  phenomena  have  been  observed  as  the  results  of 
similar  experiments  in  other  instances,  but  we  have  no  room 
for  further  details  on  this  branch  of  our  subject.     In  all  suck 

*  Sko  "Buchanan's  Journal  of  Man"  for  February,  1319,  Art  1. 


100  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

cases  the  action  of  the  medicines  is  doubtless  due  to  an  ab 
sorption  of  their  subtle  and  characteristic  emanat.ons,  through 
the  pores  of  the  skin,  whence  they  care  diffused  through  tie 
nervous  medium  of  the  system,  acting  upon  the  vital  forces 
which  control  all  the  functions  of  the  physical  organism. 

By  experiments  which  placed  deception  out  of  the  question, 
it  was  found  that  these  ethereal  influences  of  different  sub- 
stances, could  be  conducted  through  wires  to  a  distance  of 
from  three  to  one  hundred  and  thirty-two  feet,  so  as  to  be  dis- 
tinctly perceived  by  the  more  sensitive  of  Reichenbach's  ex- 
perimenters. 

But  a  fact  still  more  important  in  its  bearings  was,  that  differ- 
ent bodies  placed  in  contact  with,  or  in  close  proximity  to,  each 
other,  would  mutually  impart  their  influences  to  each  other,  so 
as  to  modify  or  totally  change  the  effects  which  they  would 
otherwise  produce  upon  sensitive  patients.  In  other  words, 
and  to  use  a  figure  of  speech  that  wTill  be  perfectly  understood, 
they  would  mutually  magnetize,  or  mesmerize,  each  other — 
would  enter  into  a  sort  of  rapport  or  reciprocal  sympathy,  by 
an  interdiffusion  of  their  spheres  or  ethereal  emanations.  Thus 
it  was  found  that  sulphur,  which  of  itself  would  impart  a  cold 
and  prickling  sensation  to  impressible  persons,  even  at  a  dis- 
tance of  several  feet,  and  without  a  conducting  wire,  would,  by 
contact  or  close  proximity  to  other  substances,  empower 
them,  for  a  time,  to  give  forth  a  similar  influence,  even  though 
their  own  proper  influences  might  be  of  an  opposite,  though 
}ess  powerful,  character;  and  so  of  other  substances,  and  their 
modifying  influences  upon  others.* 

The  general  reliability  of  the  foregoing  and  other  alleged 

*  For  further  details  of  these  interesting  experiments  and  their  results,  the  reader  ~w 
referred  to  Reichenbach's  '  Physico-rbysiological  Researches  on  the  Dynamics  of  Ma# 
petism."  etc..  New  York.    J.  S.  Redfleld. 


COMPLEXITY      OF      THE      FORCE.  101 

results  as  obtained  by  Reichenbach,  will  not  be  disputed  by 
those  who  know  the  character  of  the  experimenter,  or  who, 
fronya  careful  perusal  of  his  report,  have  noted  his  exceedingly 
cautious  mode  of  proceeding.  Reichenbach  is  known  through 
out  Europe  as  a  chemist  second  only  to  Liebig  himself,  and, 
speaking  of  this  same  course  of  investigation,  Professor 
Gregory  declares  that  "it  was  not  possible  for  any  experi- 
ments or  discoveries  to  be  presented  to  the  scientific  world  by 
one  more  entitled  to  confidence  in  every  point  of  view."  Be- 
sides this,  his  more  important  experiments  have  been  repeated 
by  others,  and  their  results  verified,  in  many  instances,  both 
in  this  country  and  in  Europe. 

Availing  himself  of  the  plasticity  of  the  German  language, 
Reichenbach  designates  the  new  force  (rather  forces)  which  he 
discovered,  by  the  German  suffix  "  oc/,"  and  indicates  the 
sources  whence  this  force  is  obtained,  by  their  names  prefixed 
to  that  syllable,  as  "  magnetod,"  "  crystailod,"  "  thermod," 
"photod,"  etc.,  as  respectively  indicating  a  connection  of  the 
force  with  magnets,  crystals,  heat,  light,  etc.  In  the  English 
language,  therefore,  this  new  imponderable  has  been  rather 
clumsily  designated  as  the  "  odic  force,"  or  "  odylic  force." 

But  the  various  phenomena  exhibited  by  this  so-called  force, 
show  that  it  is  not  simple  but  complex,  or  rather  that  it  in- 
volves a  number  of  distinct  forces.  Its  rudimental  existence 
in  the  closed  magnet,  as  also  in  various  unmagnetic  bodies, 
was  not  only  intimated  by  the  luminous  and  incandescent  ap- 
pearance of  the  bodies  of  metals,  before  spoken  of,  but  is  also 
implied  as  an  antecedent  of  the  luminous,  flame-like  appear- 
ance which  it  engenders  at  a  further  stage  of  development — ■ 
just  as  the  existence  of  common  caloric  is  implied  as  an  ante- 
cedent of  common  flame.  The  light  itself  is  a  second  devel- 
opment ;,  and  the  ethereal  aura  which,  without  any  luminous 


102  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

phenomena,  acts  upon  the  human  nerve,  is  a  third.  The  three, 
therefore,  may  be  variously  characterize!  as  "  odic  heat," 
"  odic  light,"  and  "  odic  electricity,"  or  "  odic  ether ;"  and  here 
we  have  our  previously  conjectured  Secondary  Trinity  of 
dynamic  agents,  corresponding  to  the  Primary  Trinity,  which 
consists  of  Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity,  as  these  terms  are 
ordinarily  understood. 

In  the  same  way  in  which  the  Primary  Trinity  of  dynamic 
agents  is  concerned  in  the  Primary  Trinity  of  each  system  of 
physical  developments,  the  Secondary  and  corresponding  Trin- 
ity (in  connection  with  the  Primary,  which  is  still  and  always 
in  force)  is  concerned  in  each  secondary  and  corresponding 
Trinity  of  developments,  with  their  peculiarities.* 

Thus  the  principle  which  we  have  called  "  Odic  Heat,"  may 
be  considered  as  the  internal  love-principle  by  which  particles 
associate  in  organic  forms,  and  therefore  is  the  fundamental 
dynamic  principle  connected  with  the  fourth  law — the  law  of 
Aggregation  or  Organization,  whether  relating  to  the  universe 
as  a  whole,  or  to  any  of  its  definitely  constituted  parts. 

The  "  odic  light"  appears  to  be  expressive  of  the  ethereally 
aspirative  operations  of  the  organic  structure  from  which  it 
proceeds.  It  was  before  mentioned  that  this  light  consisted 
of  the  seven  different  colors  of  the  iris,  which  seemed  to  sur- 
round the  center  of  luminosity  as  so  many  concentric  spheres 
of  light ;  and  that  when  Reichenbnch  caused  a  magnetic  bar 
to  revolve  lengthwise  on  horizontal  and  vertical  planes,  the 
light  exhibited  successively  all  the  different  colors  of  the  rain- 
bow, as  the  magnet  was  pointed  in  the  different  directions  in 
respect  to  the  earth  and  heavens,  which  lay  in  the  plane  of  the 

*  It  irt  not  claimed  that  these  dynamic  principles  apply  identicaUy  to  each  and 
every  sever:- fold  system  of  developments,  as  to  some  systems  they  apply  only  by  tbeij 
natural  representatives,  analogues,  or  correspondents 


rOLAKITY,      AFFINITIES,      ETC.  103 

eirolf .  I  can  not  bat  regard  these  results  as  exceedingly  inter- 
esting and  important,  as  showing  the  relative  degrees  and 
states  of  polarity  of  particular  points  and  directions  of  the 
earth's  surface,  and  of  the  surrounding  and  celesLal  spaces — 
thus,  as  suggesting  the  different  qualities  or  states  of  the  ma- 
terials of  which  the  earth  and  all  correlative  creations  are 
composed — thus,  as  suggesting  the  correlative  affinities  and 
forces  by  which  these  materials  became  associated  in  their 
present  structural  form — and  finally,  as  suggesting  something 
of  the  perpetually  repeated  round  of  changing  influences  and 
ethereal  forces  through  which  (in  analogy  to  the  revolving 
magnet)  the  earth  and  all  celestial  bodies  pass  in  performing 
their  rotary  and  orbitual  revolutions.  If  there  is  any  validity 
in  these  suggestions,  then  these  degrees  of  polarity,  states  and 
affinities  of  matter,  changing  ethereal  forces,  etc.,  all  exemplify 
the  seven-fold  series  as  corresponding  to  the  seven  colors  of  the 
iris,  which,  in  the  experiment  referred  to,  were  successively 
given  forth  by  the  revolving  magnet.  And,  applying  these 
"emarks  (as  analogy  would  justify  us  in  doing)  to  all  mundane 
organizations — to  the  solar  system,  the  sidereal  systems,  and 
to  the  whole  universe  as  one  Body — as  well  as  to  the  earth, 
we  have  in  the  "  odic  light"  a  universal  dynamic  correlative 
of  the  fifth  law — the  law  of  segregation,  or  the  law  by  which 
unity  is  divided  into  parts  of  different  and  connected  grada- 
tions. 

Concerning  the  third  member  of  this  trinity  of  agents — the 
"  odic,"  electroid,  or  ethereal  emanation  which  was  found  tc 
produce  such  marked  and  singular  effects  on  the  sensitive  hu- 
man nerve,  the  following  remarks  may  be  submitted  : 

1.  All  things  subjected  to  careful  experiment,  whether  in 
the  animal,  vegetable,  or  mineral  Kingdoms,  or  in  the 
celestial  spaces,  we"e  found  to  send  forth  this  subtile  email. 


104  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

ation,  which  in  each  case  may  be  called  the  »phtre,  t 
ethereal  atmospnere,  of  the  substance  or  form  from  whicv  Jt 
proceeds.  It  may  therefore  be  presumed,  on  analogical 
grounds,  that  things  also  not  available  for  experiment,  and 
that,  indeed,  absolutely  all  things,  from  atoms  to  worlds  and 
systems,  and  even  the  whole  universe,  considered  as  a  Unit, 
are  in  like  manner  characterized  by  a  surrounding  and  per 
vading  ethereal  sphere.* 

2.  The  emanating  spheres  of  smaller  bodies  associated  with 
larger  ones,  must  necessarily  be  included  in  the  emanating 
spheres  of  the  larger  bodies  on  which  they  rest  or  depend. 
The  sphere  of  a  single  particle  of  mineral  matter,  for  example, 
is  comprehended  and  encircled  in  the  general  sphere  of  the 
whole  crystal  of  which  it  forms  a  part ;  and  the  same  remark 
applies  to  particles  and  organisms  in  other  kingdoms  in 
nature.  The  spheres  of  all  minerals,  vegetables,  animals, 
etc.,  separately  and  collectively,  are  involved  and  compre- 
hended in  the  general  sphere  of  the  earth ;  the  sphere  of  the 
earth,  together  with  the  spheres  of  all  other  planets,  with 
the  satellites  and  comets,  is  involved  and  comprehended  in 
the  general  sphere  of  the  whole  solar  system ;  that  sphere  is 
comprehended  in  the  general  sphere  of  the  great  stellar  vortex 
in  which,  accompanied  by  myriads  of  like  systems,  it  moves; 
and  that  sphere  is  comprehended  in  the  general  sphere  of  the 
whole  Universe ;  and  that  sphere  is,  in  like  manner,  enveloped 
in,  and  pervaded  by,  the  great  sphere  of  the  infinite  Divine 
Being,  which  is  the  Essence  of  all  essences,  the  Force  of  all 
forces,  and  the  Vitalizer  of  all   vitalities !     Here,  then,  is  a 


*  This  doctrine  of  "spheres"  was  taught  by  Swedenborg,  and  by  others  since  h  r 
dny.  It  may  almost  be  said  that  it  has  a  sufficient  foundation  in  the  developed  intu- 
itions of  the  human  mind,  and  it  wouli  stand  even  independent  of  Eclchenbach'i 
W>et  conclusive  scientific  verifications. 


BOOTKINE     OF     SPHERES.  10.". 

progressive  gradation  from  tho  smallest  to  the  greatest,  from 
the  infinitesimal  to  the  Infinite,  from  the  atom  of  matter  to 
the  incomprehensible  fullness  of  a  Divine  Spiritual  Being. 

3.  The  spheres  of  all  bodies  in  the  universe,  from  smallest 
to  greatest,  while  they  are  genetically  similar,  are  specifically 
different,  and  the  sphere  of  each  body  corresponds  to  that 
body's  internal  character.  This  is  a  conclusion  which,  as  re- 
garded merely  by  the  reasoning  powers,  is  necessitated,  by  the 
obvious  differences  in  the  intrinsic  nature  of  things,  and  it  is 
confirmed  by  the  differences  in  the  effects  produced  by  the 
ethereal  emanations  of  medicines  and  other  substances,  and 
©yen  by  the  heavenly  bodies,  and  by  different  districts  of  the 
celestial  hemisphere  which  were  subjected  to  tests. 

4.  As  it  was  proved  that  the  spheres  of  sulphur,  gold, 
medicines,  etc.,  acted  and  reacted  upon,  and  mutually  modi- 
fied, each  other,  and  this,  too,  when  the  solid  bodies  were  a 
distance  apart ;  so,  carrying  out  this  principle,  it  may  be  pre- 
sumed that  the  spheres  of  all  bodies,  terrestrial  and  celestial, 
from  smallest  to  greatest,  from  atoms  to  worlds,  stellar  sys- 
tems, and  the  whole  universe,  in  like  manner,  act  and  react 
upon,  and  modify  each  other,  according  to  their  relative  degrees 
of  magnitude  and  power.  And  this  mutual  interdiffusion  of 
spheres,  and  their  harmonious  and  reciprocal  action  and  re- 
action upon  each  other,  while  each  particular  form  and  system 
preserves  its  own  identity,  constitute  an  important  part  of  the 
physiological  and  functional  operations  of  the  great  Anatomical 
Structure  of  Creation,  and  which,  as  before  intimated,  corre- 
sponds, in  principle,  to  a  single  human  body.  The  great 
ethereal  Sphere  of  all  spheres  may  be  considered  as  the 
sympathetic  nerve-essence  of  this  Anatomical  Structure,  viewed 
as  a  whole,  while  the  sphere  of  each  sun,  world,  and  atom, 
may  be  considered  as  it.i  own  particular  nerve-essence;  and  It 


106  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

is  through  these  nerve-essences  that  each  part  of  the  whole 
Body  sympathises  with  all  other  parts,  and  that  the  equili- 
brium and  harmonious  functional  operations  of  the  whole  sys- 
tem are  preserved. 

This  subtile  and  variously  qualified  electroid  or  magnetoid 
element,  therefore,  being  the  sixth  in  the  seven-fold  series  of 
dynamic  agents,  is  intimately  allied  to  the  sixth  general  law, 
which  we  have  seen  is  a  law  of  harmonial  and  sympathetic 
reciprocation. 

It  is  true  that  the  discoverer  of  these  previously  unknown 
subtile  agencies  did  not  exhibit,  and  perhaps  did  not,  to 
any  extent,  perceive?  their  cosmologkal  bearings,  especially 
as  these  are  attempted  to  be  set  forth  in  the  foregoing  re- 
marks. His  main  object  appears  to  have  been  to  develop 
facts,  leaving  the  more  comprehensive  conclusions  to  which 
these  might  naturally  conduce,  to  be  unfolded  by  subsequent 
investigations,  and  by  others  as  well  as  by  himself;  and  as 
his  facts,  by  their  publication,  and  their  verification  by  the 
parallel  experiments  of  others,  have  become  the  property  of 
the  world,  any  one  may  elaborate  and  synthesize  them  who 
has  thp  inclination  and  mental  qualifications  to  do  so. 

In  respect  to  this  ';  odic,"  or  magnetoid  element,  which  per- 
vades, and  emanates  from,  greatest  and  smallest  things,  the 
following  additional  and  important  remarks  may  be  sub- 
mitted :  As  this  influence,  proceeding  from  various  bodies, 
near  and  remote,  was  found  to  have  such  remarkable  effects 
upon  the.  sensitive  human  nerve,  it  may  be  considered  as 
being  closely  allied,  in  its  general  nature,  to  the  nervous  in- 
fluence pervading  the  human  body,  and  emanating  from  it  as 
an  "odic"  sphere.  Indeed,  Reichenbach  actually  proved  its 
identity,  in  the  general  sense,  with  the  medium  through  which 
one  human  being  produces  those  effects  upon  another  com- 


MODE     OF     DIVINE     ACTION.  107 

monly  known  as  "magnetic"  or  "mesmeric;"  and  the  world 
is  indebted  to  that  philosopher  for  physical  demonstrations  in 
this  department,  which  place  the  fundamental  doctrines  of 
Animal  Magnetism  beyond  all  possible  doubt. 

Now,  operations  called  "  magnetic"  as  performed  by  one 
human  being  upon  another,  are  known  to  depend  greatly,  for 
their  character  and  efficiency,  upon  the  exercise  of  the  will. 
If,  therefore,  the  medium  through  which  such  magnetic  oper- 
ations are  performed,  is  generically  the  same  with  the  "odic" 
spheres  given  forth  by  all  bodies  in  nature,  do  we  not  find  in 
this  "odic"  element  the  general  connecting  link  between  mind 
and  matter?  If,  upon  the  basis  of  this  certainly  plausible 
idea,  we  should  suggest  that  this  everywhere  present  "odic" 
element,  as  associated  with  the  different  bodies  in  nature,  and 
with  nature  as  a  Whole,  may  hereafter  prove  to  be  a  medium 
through  which  mind  can,  in  certain  conditions,  and  to  a  certain 
extent,  act  upon  and  move  outer  tangible  matter,  without  the 
contact  of  the  physical  organs,  the  suggestion  would  doubtless 
be  met  with  general  incredulity,  especially  by  those  who  are 
not  familiar  with  certain  strange  phenomena  of  our  day.  It 
could  not  be  esteemed  more  incredible,  however,  than  would 
have  been  an  assertion  made  fifty  years  ago,  that  by  a 
peculiar  mechanical  contrivance,  a  certain  subtile  agent  in 
nature  might  be  efficiently  employed  in  the  accurate  and 
instantaneous -transmission  of  thought  to  the  distance  of  a 
thousand  miles !  But  not  to  press  these  thoughts  for  the 
present,  if  our  foregoing  generalizations  are  correct,  then  we 
hazard  little  in  saying,  that  as  the  all-pervading  "odic" 
sphere  of  the  universe,  as  a  whole,  in  its  ultimate  degree,  con. 
nects  with  the  sphere  of  the  Deity,  so  the  Deity,  through  this 
medium,  acts  upon  the  universe,  in  the  same  way  as  any  two 
iuxtaposed  substances  or  forms  in  nature  act  upon  each  other 


108  DYNAMIC     AGENTS. 

through  their  "  odic "  spheres,  and  as  was  illustrated  by  ex- 
periments  before  related.  And  as  the  Deity,  moreover,  is  a 
personal  and  intelligent  Being,  he  may  through  this  medium 
act,  not  only  spontaneously,  but  volitionally  and  directly,  upon 
the  universe,  or  upon  either  of  its  corresponding  sub-creations, 
and  control  it  to  any  extent  which  may  comport  with  the 
integrity  of  his  general  plan. 

But  we  come  now  to  another  point :  As  each  previous  stage 
of  creation,  with  its  peculiar  law  of  developments,  from  the 
first  to  the  sixth,  was  thus  accompanied  with,  or  related  to,  a 
corresponding  dynamic  agent,  the  same  fact  may  be  supposed 
to  hold  with  reference  to  the  seventh  stage,  which,  in  the  cos- 
mical  creation,  as  before  shown,  consisted  in  the  development 
of  habitable  worlds.  And  as  this  is  the  final  development  of 
the  seven,  fold  cosmical  series — and  brings  the  physical  struc- 
ture of  the  universe  as  such,  to  a  completeness — so  we  may 
suppose  that  the  dynamic  principle  related  to  this  develop- 
ment, is  also  the  ultimate  and  completion  of  its  series.  And 
being  the  last  of  a  series  in  which  there  is  observed  a  progres- 
sive refinement  from  the  first,  at  least  to  the  sixth,  it  may  be 
supposed  to  unite  in  itself  the  principles  of  all  the  others  in  a 
still  superior  degree  of  refinement. 

Br*,  we  have  seen  that  the  series  of  universal  cosmical  de- 
velopments included  in  what  we  have  called  the  great  King- 
dom of  Materiality,  must  have  been  based  upon,  and  have 
sprung  from,  an  antecedent,  unoriginated,  and  infinite  Kingdom 
of  Spirituality,  which  we  call  God.  If  this  same  Principle, 
like  the  vital  elements  of  the  germ  of  a  tree,  lies  at  the  basis, 
and  is  reproduced  at  tne  completion,  of  the  unfolding,  then 
thir  seventh  dynamic  principle,  concerning  which  we  are  now 
inquiring,  can  be  nothing  less  than  a  degree  of  the  seven-fold 
elements  of  the  originally  generative  Divine  Spirit,   now  (m- 


DIVINE     EMBODIMENT.  109 

be  J  lea  in  cosmical  investiture.  Viewed  in  this  light,  this 
seventh  dynamic  principle  may  be  called  Soul  or  Vitality — the 
Soul  or  vital  Principle  of  the  cosmical  universe,  or  the  Princi- 
ple by  which  it,  as  a  universe,  lives  and  performs  all  its  normal 
movements  ! 

Let  me  not,  however,  be  understood  as  intimating  that  the 
all  of  God  was  thus  embodied  in  the  universal  cosmical  struc- 
ture. Neither  the  universe  of  material  worlds,  nor  of  heavens, 
nor  the  heaven  of  heavens,  can  contain  Him  who  is  absolutely 
Infinite,  and  it  must  have  been,  comparatively  speaking,  an 
exceedingly  small  ray  from  his  interior  and  ineffable  effulgence 
that  sufficed  to  give  birth  to,  and  move  and  regulate,  the  ma- 
terial structure  which  we  have  been  contemplating,  however 
sublime  and  inconceivable  to  human  intellect  this  may  be. 
Nor  was  the  Divine  embodiment  of  which  we  speak,  neces- 
sarily an  embodiment  which,  in  its  immediate  exterior  mani- 
festation, would  take  the  form  of  what  is  generally  understood 
by  intelligence ;  though  intelligence,  as  an  attribute  of  a  much 
higher  and  more  interior  degree  of  the  Divine  Spiritual  Con- 
stitution, was  the  projecting,  planning,' and  (acting  through  the 
ultimately  refined  "  odic"  spheres,  or  quasi  nerve-essences  of 
iiis  creations,  before  spoken  of)  is  the  constantly  supervising 
and  all  regulating  Principle.  The  Divine  qualities  as  intelli- 
gence were  subsequently  and,  at  a  much  higher  degree  of 
creative  progression,  finitely  expressed  in  the  human  micro- 
cosm, which  is  expressly  declared  to  be  an  "image  of  God." 

It  is,  however,  here  submitted  as  a  truth  which,  it  is  be- 
lieved, will  become  more  evident  in  proportion  as  its  founda- 
tion and  bearings  are  better  understood — that  the  identical 
■principles  of  what  we  know  as  intelligence,  are  embodied 
(though  not  as  intelligence)  in  each  kingdom  or  system  of 
creation  below  rran,  and  finally  in  the  universal  kingdom  of 

10 


110  DYNAMIC      AGENTS. 

•sosmical  forms  ;  these  various  descending  embodiments  bear 
ng  to  each  other  the  relations  of  descending  octaves.  Thus 
what  is  called  intelligence  in  man,  is  called  instinct  in  animals. 
But  plants  also,  have  a  kind  of  instinct ;  and  so  in  lower  degrees, 
have  minerals,  worlds — the  whole  universal  System  of  worlds 
— each  embodying  and  representing  a  lower  degree  of  what 
may  receive  the  general  designation  of  Love,  Wisdom,  and 
Volition;  or  Expansion,  Attraction,  and  Circulation;  the  lowest 
triune  degree  of  which  is  embraced  in  the  functions  of  Heat, 
Light,  and  Electricity. 

The  seventh  dynamic  principle  of  the  universe,  therefore, 
which  pervades  and  governs  all  other  principles,  is  only  an 
embodiment  of  that  degree  or  octave  of  the  principles  of  the 
Divine  soul  which  is  in  immediate  relation  with,  and  serves 
to  control  the  functional  operations  of,  the  universal  cosmical 
Body  ;  while  the  higher  degrees  of  the  seven-fold  Divine  har- 
monies, flowing  downward  from  the  infinite  sources  of  Divin- 
ity, are  left  to  be  embodied  and  represented  in  subsequent  and 
more  refined  creations,  or  remain  at  infinite  removes  above 
the  sphere  of  all  terrestrial  and  celestial  forms. 

Of  the  doctrine  intended  to  be  conveyed  in  these  remarks, 
a  more  distinct  and  enlarged  understanding  will  be  obtained 
as  we  proceed. 

But,  presuming  that  the  reader  already  sufficiently  compre- 
hends tha  fundamental  principles  herein  set  forth,  he  is  desired 
to  bear  constantly  in  mind,  that  the  dynamic  principles  of  the 
cosmical  creation,  were  not  developed  by  the  creation  itself, 
but  developed  it;  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  the  vitalizing 
and  moving  elements  of  all  degrees  of  material  unfolding. 
The  dynamic  principles  (constituting,  indeed,  what  may,  in  the 
aggregate,  be  called  the  general  Soul)  are  thus  the  immediate 
Cause  of  the  outer  development  (or  Body),  which  is  the  Effect 


LAWS.        NATX1I.        GOD.  Ill 

And  here  it  m  ay  be  remarked,  that  if  there  is  any  relation  be- 
tween Cause  and  Effect,  it  must  not  only  be  a  relation  of 
generals,  but  of  particulars;  and  thus  the  Cause  must  be  a 
precise  archetype  of  which  the  Effect  is  an  antitype,  or  em- 
bodied representative ;  and  hence  the  two  must,  throughout, 
precisely  correspond  to  each  other.  Every  degree  of  creation, 
therefore,  may  be  considered  as  a  precise  outer  expression  of 
the  corresponding  degree  of  Divine  Love,  Wisdom,  and 
Energy  which  vitalizes  and  governs  it,  and  in  which  it  was 
previously  contained  as  an  archetype. 

Moreover,  these  interior  Divine  dynamic  principles,  together 
with  their  prescribed  modes  of  action,  constitute  the  operative 
laws  of  nature.  According  to  this  view,  while  there  is  a  law 
for  every  class  of  natural  and  even  spiritual  phenomena,  and 
all  things  may  be  explained  without  a  resort  to  coftfra-natural 
or  confrarlegai  agencies,  laws,  on  the  other  hand,  are  not  those 
lifeless,  un intellectual  fatalities  which  they  are  represented  to 
be  in  prevalent  philosophies  of  the  day,  but  they  are  the  ex- 
press modes  of  perpetual  Divine  volition.  In  looking,  there- 
fore, upon  this  universe,  with  all  it  contains,  as  law-governed, 
we  may,  at  the  same  time,  look  upon  it  as  GW-governed.  But 
:>n  this  point,  more  in  its  proper  place. 

If  this  view  is  correct,  then  there  is,  in  reality,  no  necessary 
antagonism  between  materiality  and  spirituality,  nature  and 
heaven,  reason  and  revelation,  science  and  theology,  but  each 
may  be  regarded,  when  correctly  understood,  as  the  exponent 
of  the  other.  Quite  distinct,  however,  is  this  view  from  that 
grcss  speculation  which  makes  of  God  nothing  more  thai:  the 
ultimately  sublimated  and  self-moving  essences  of  the  natural 
universe — a  kind  of  universal  hyper-galvanic  battery  which, 
by  its  perpetual  and  self-generating  action,  produces  solar  and 
planetary  revolution,  terrestrial  changes,  and  those  movements 


112  UflAMIC     AGENTS. 

in  the  refined  essences  of  the  human  brain  which  constitute 
Thoughts.  In  our  philosophy,  God  is  God,  and  nature  is  na- 
ture— the  two  being  eternally  distinct,  though  intimately  ooa 
fcected  and  co -related  with  each  other. 


CHAPTER   IX. 

DEFECTS    OF    PREVAILING    COSMOLOGICAL    THEORIES 

If  the  foregoing  theory  of  the  origin,  structure,  dynamic 
agents,  and  laws,  of  tne  universe,  has  any  foundation  in  truth, 
it  can  scarcely  fail  to  throw  important  light  upon  some  still 
ulterior  questions  relating  to  the  prescribed  distances,  motions, 
reciprocal  attractions,  etc.,  of  planetary  and  sidereal  creations. 
it  may  even  show  that  some  time-honored  theories  upon  these 
subjects,  however  sanctioned  by  the  authority  of  great  names, 
are,  in  certain  particulars,  radically  defective;  and  this  it  will 
do,  if  at  all,  by  transcending  them  in  the  ease,  naturalness, 
and  completeness  with  which  it  accounts  for  certain  existing 
phenomena. 

It  was  supposed  by  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  that  all  rotatory  and 
orbitual  motion  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  originated  from  a  ])ri- 
mary  and  external  impulse  received  from  the  hand  of  the  Crea- 
tor, as  they  were  launched  into  space.  To  this  was  added  the 
philosophical  axiom,  that  any  body  put  in  motion  in  a  vacuum, 
will  continue  forever  to  move  in  a  straight  line,  unless  de- 
flected from  its  course  by  some  other  force.  This  deflecting 
foi'ce,  a*s  applied  to  the  motions  of  the  planets,  Newton  found 
in  the  law  of  gravitation,  which  was  by  him  proved  to  apply 
to  all  planetary  bodies.  By  the  precisely  counterbalancing 
action  of  these  two  forces,  called  the  centrifugal  and  centripetal 
forces,  the  motions  of  the  planets  were  supposed  to  be  regu- 
lated in  circular  or  elliptical  orbits  round  the  sun,  the  specific 


114  DEFECTS     OF     PREVAILING 

distances  of  these  being  greater  or  less  according  to  the  near- 
ness  or  remoteness  of  the  point  where  these  two  forces  were 
exactly  balanced  against  each  other. 

But  Newton  soon  found  this  theory,  seemingly  perfect  in 
other  respects,  encumbered  with  difficulties  in  respect  to  the 
stability  of  the  system.  He  found  that  the  different  planets 
vere  not  only  attracted  by  the  sun,  but  mutually  attracted  by 
each  other.  These  different  attractions,  varying  in  intensity  in 
the  inverse  ratio  of  the  squares  of  distances,  according  to  a 
law  discovered  by  Kepler,  were  accompanied  by  perturbations, 
producing  irregularities  in  orbitual  motions  which  were  sub- 
ject to  secular  increase.  The  system,  thus,  left  to  its  own  in- 
ternal provisions,  seemed  to  prophesy  its  own  progressive 
derangement,  and  its  ultimate  entire  disorganization;  and 
Newton  felt  impelled  to  call  upon  God  to  avert  such  a  catas- 
trophe, by  supplying  a  force  from  without,  which  he  supposed 
did  not  exist  within,  the  system. 

The  calculations  of  subsequent  mathematicians,  however, 
served,  in  a  good  degree,  to  dispel  these  gloomy  forebodings, 
and  led  to  the  conclusion  that  the  irregularities  and  apparent 
incipient  derangements  in  the  motions  of  the  system,  would 
finally  reach  their  maximum,  after  which  there  would  be  a 
gradual  return  to  the  condition  of  primeval  equilibrium  ;  that 
thence  there  would  be  a  progressive  tendency  to  irregularity 
in  the  opposite  direction,  to  be  succeeded  by  another  reaction; 
and  that  the  perpetual  vibrations  of  these  irregularities,  like 
the  oscillations  of  a  mighty  pendulum,  would  serve  to  mark 
the  hours  and  moments  of  eternity  ! 

This  conception  of  the  laws,  internal  arrangements,  and 
movements,  of  the  system,  together  with  the  apparent  mathe- 
matical evidences  which  have  been  arrayed  in  its  support, 
?an   not  otherwise  than  be  regarded  as  one  of  the  greatest 


COSMOLOGICAL     THEORIES.  1.1 5 

triumphs  of  human  genius.  Yet,  even  while  overwhelmed 
with  a  sense  of  its  sublimity,  one  can  not  well  suppress  a  sense 
of  sadness  as  he  contemplates  its  cold,  mechanical  lifelessness 
— I  had  almost  said  Godlessness !  Contemplated  in  this  light, 
the  universe  appears  somewhat  analogous  to  an  ingeniously 
constructed  machine,  which  is  w<?'md  up,  and  left  to  go  of 
itself,  while  its  maker  withholds  a  i  further  exercise  of  power 
from  it,  and  forever  withdraws  all  immediate  personal  care 
over  it,  as  being  unnecessary.  With  this  philosophy  impressed 
upon  our  minds,  we  look  up  into  the  heavens,  and,  though  we 
behold  incessant  motion  and  activity  in  every  direction,  we 
see  no  necessary  evidence  of  immanent  life  or  spirit — nothing 
with  which  our  souls  can  sympathize  as  the  present  pervading 
Animus  and  constantly  impelling  Cause  of  the  phenomena  we 
behold;  and  it  is  only  by  an  almost  painful  stretch  of  the 
powers  of  inductive  reasoning,  that  we  can  attain  to  any  sub- 
stantial conviction  of  a  spiritual  or  voluntative  Cause,  as  having 
been  connected  with  the  system  even  at  its  origin  ! 

It  may  be  added,  that  thousands  of  persons,  on  arriving  at 
a  full  comprehension  and  conviction  of  the  truth  of  the  Newto- 
nian theory  of  a  merely  mechanical  universe,  and  of  vacuity 
in  the  interplanetary  and  interstellar  spaces,  have  anxiously 
inquired,  "  Where  and  what,  then,  is  that  spiritual  loorld  to 
which  our  interior  natures  aspire,  and  for  which  Revelation 
encourages  us  to  hope?"  and  nature,  viewed  in  this  aspect, 
has  not  only  refused  to  respond  in  language  which  appeals  to 
the  conceptive  and  reasoning  powers,  but  has  interposed  a 
cloud  of  darkness  and  doubt  between  the  inquirer  and  the  sub- 
ject which  he  seeks  to  comprehend !  In  its  efforts  to  satisfy 
the  irrepressible  yearnings  of  the  spirit  within,  Fancy  has 
erected  a  formless,  unextended,  unsubstantial — even  unaerial 
--figment,  that  bears  no  relation  to  space  or  the  material  uni- 


1 16  DEFECTS      OF     PREVAILING 

verse,  or  to  any  of  the  rational  faculties  of  the  soul ;  and  in 
this  mankind  have  been  told  to  have  faith,  as  the  place  or  state 
of  future  human  destination  !  But  a  rational  faith  in  such  an 
utter  inconceivability  is  out  of  the  question,  and  an  extra' 
rational  and  mere  dogmatic  faith,  in  such  an  idea,  can  not 
generally,  if  ever,  be  kept  free  from  superstition,  and  hence, 
from  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  mental  degradation  and 
slavery.  Hence,  in  case  of  full  adoption  of  the  Newtonian 
system  of  cosmogony,  a  determination  to  follow  only  the  con- 
victions of  reason  will  necessarily  tend  to  skepticism  with 
reference  to  spiritual,  and  to  sjme  extent  even  with  reference 
to  Divine  things ;  and  there  is  no  latent  force  in  the  theory 
which,  by  any  developmen  ,  can  ever  correct  this  mental  ab- 
erration. In  the  spirit  and  tendency  of  this  merely  me- 
chanical mode  of  philosophizing  upon  the  universe,  may,  I 
apprehend,  be  found  the  main  cause  of  the  growing  materialism 
and  skepticism  of  these  modern  days,  especially  among  minds 
called  scientific. 

Subjected  to  the  test  of  rationality,  however,  the  Newtonian 
system,  in  at  least  one  of  its  features,  seems  to  be  almost  as 
bad  off  as  the  only  spiritual  and  theological  theories  that  can 
be  rationally  associated  with  it.  It  predicates  mutual  gravita- 
tion of  any  two  distant  bodies,  while  it  fails  to  recognize,  if  it 
does  not,  by  implication,  entirely  preclude  the  idea  of,  any 
intervening  gravitating  agent.  But  that  any  two  bodies  can 
in  any  way  act  upon  each  other,  either  without  immediate 
contact,  or  the  intervention  of  some  substantial  medium  by 
which  they  can  touch  each  other,  is  utterly  inconceivable,  and 
can  no  n  ore  b  supposed  than  any  effect  can  be  supposed  to  be 
disconnected  with  an  adequate  cause.  We  do  not,  however, 
charge  the  theory  with  absolutely  and  necessarily  precluding 
such  a  medium ;  but  by  manifesting,  at  its  very  starting  point, 


COSMOLCGICAL      THEORIES.  117 

such  a  strong  inclination  to  the  idea  of  absolute  vacuity  .a  the 
interplanetary  spaces,  it  not  only  fails  to  provide  such  a  me- 
dium, but,  in  effect,  discountenances  the  idea  that  such  exists. 
In  the  theory  which  we  have  maintained  in  the  preceding 
pages,  however,  the  medium  in  question  is  abundantly  pro- 
vided. 

Moreover,  the  system  as  conceived  by  Newton  can  not,  after 
all,  be  contemplated  without  some  degree  of  apprehension  in 
regard  to  its  safety.  For,  notwithstanding  the  figurings  of  sub- 
sequent mathematicians  respecting  the  reaction  which  tends  to 
restore  lost  equilibrium,  if  we  do  away  with  the  immediate 
immanence  of  Divine  Vitality — in  other  words,  with  the  im 
mediate  presence*and  agency  of  that  degree  of  the  Divine  Es- 
sence and  Power  of  which  the  universe  forms  a  suitable 
habitation,  and  which  is  necessary  to  the  life  and  functional 
operations  of  the  latter  as  of  one  Body — then  there  are  many 
chances  against  the  existence  of  an  absolute  equilibrium  in  the 
different  parts  and  forces  of  the  great  Whole :  and  if  there  is 
ever  a  disturbance  of  the  equilibrium  to  an  extent  which  can 
not  be  entirely  restored  by  a  counter  oscillation,  even  though 
this  be  only  the  fraction  of  the  weight  of  a  planet,  or  even  the 
amount  of  a  single  pound,  the  disturbance  will  progressively 
aggravate,  and  a  universal  catastrophe  will  be  the  final  and 
inevitable  result ! 

If,  therefore,  the  stability  of  the  universe  depends  merely 
upon  the  nice  counterpoise  of  the  centrifugal  and  centripetal 
forces,  as  independent  of  this  constant  Divine  Force,  and  of 
any  elastic,  active,  and  reactive  medium  to  keep  the  various 
celestial  bodies  within  prescribed  boundaries,  then  human  rea- 
son can  not  withhold  the  suspicion  of  clanger  as  it  contem- 
plates the  stupendous  Machine,  or  suppress  the  a-pprehension 
,hat  it  may  one  day  fly  to  pieces,  and  involve  us  all  in  the 


118  no    vacuity    in    space. 

common  wreck  !  This  apprehension  greatly  increases,  when 
it  is  considered  that  Newton's  hypothesis  of  absolute  vacuity 
in  the  spaces  through  which  the  celestial  bodies  move — an 
hypothesis  upon  which,  according  to  him,  the  equilibrium 
between  the  centrifugal  and  centripetal  forces  necessarily 
depends — has  proved  unfounded,  and  that  the  phenomena  of 
retardation  of  comets  in  their  orbits,  has  proved  that  the  in- 
terplanetary spaces  are  pervaded  by  an  attenuated  fluid  01 
ether,  capable  of  exerting  some  resistance  to  their  progress. 

It  is  here  submitted,  with  all  due  deference  to  the  superior 
intelligence  of  many  who  have  never  entertained  a  doubt  of 
the  entire  truthfulness  of  Newton's  theory,  that  that  theory, 
at  least  without  essential  modifications,  would'probably  never 
nave  been  propounded  by  Newton,  or  adopted  by  others,  had 
the  theory  of  the  nebular  origin  of  the  universe,  with  its  accom- 
panying evidences,  and  natural  corollaries,  been  previously 
subjected  to  familiar  contemplation. 

We  now  proceed  to  briefly  unfold  a  theory  respecting  the 
foregoing  subjects,  which,  whatever  may  be  its  imperfections, 
seems  to  the  writer,  at  least,  much  less  encumbered  with  diffi- 
culties than  the  merely  mechanical  theory  of  Newton,  while 
it  is  certainly  more  compatible  with  the  idea  cf  an  immediate 
and  universal  Divine  superintendence. 


CHAPTER    X. 

GBOTTNDS    OF    STABILITY    AND    GENERAL    ECONOMY    01 
THE    COSMICAL    STRUCTURE. 

As  a  preliminary  step  toward  a  due  comprehension  and 
appreciation  of  the  theory  now  to  he  offered  respecting  the  in- 
ternal forces,  movements,  grounds  of  stability,  and  general 
economy  of  the  universe,  the  reader  is  requested  to  bear  dis- 
tinctly in  mind  that  principles  operate  indifferently  upon  a 
large  and  a  small  scale — that  the  magnitudes  and  distances  of 
the  objects  to  which  they  apply,  are  absolutely  of  no  conse- 
quence as  affecting  the  essential  nature  of  their  operations. 

Now,  in  the  light  of  this  truism,  let  us  suppose  some  simple 
vegetable  form — say  an  apple — to  be  placed  under  a  micro- 
scope so  exceedingly  powerful  as  to  magnify  it  to  the  apparent 
size  of  that  immense  spheroid  of  stellar  orbs  with  their  planets, 
which  is  known  to  us  as  the  Milky  Way,  and  in  the  midst  of 
which  our  world  is  situated.  We  will  suppose  that  the  pores 
of  the  apple  would,  in  that  case,  appear  of  a  magnitude  equally 
great  with  the  interplanetary  and  interstellar  spaces,  and  that 
the  molecules  would  be  magnified  to  the  apparent  size  of 
worlds.  Moreover,  the  internal  motions  of  the  molecules,  ob- 
serving the  natural  order  of  vegetative  circulation  and  pro- 
gression, would  bear  a  certain  resemblance  to  the  rotatory  and 
j&rbitual  motions  of  suns  and  planets,  and  all,  obeying  the  law 
by  which  the  distinct  stratifications  and  compartments  of  the 
pple  are  formed,  would  give  an  appearance  somewhat  similar 


120  GENERAL     ECONOMY     OF. 

to  distinct  systems,  and  systems  of  systems  of  suns  and 
planets,  as  these  are  successively  brought  into  the  field  of  a 
telescope.  Suppose,  that  after  this  optical  arrangement  ia 
completed,  some  learned  Newtonian  astronomer,  who  is  en- 
tirely ignorant  of  its  nature,  is  invited,  on  some  clear  even- 
ing, to  look  through  the  instrument,  which  is  represented  to 
him  as  a  newly  invented  telescope,  instead  of  a  microscope. 
The  astronomer  gazes  with  wonder  and  astonishment,  and 
thinks  he  has  obtained  a  new  and  favorable  view  of  some 
stellar  and  planetary  creation  which  has  not  before  appeared 
to  him  exactly  in  the  same  aspect. 

"  Well,  Mr.  Astronomer,"  demands  an  inquirer,  "  what  ia 
your  opinion  respecting  the  origin  of  the  motions,  the  laws  of 
operation,  and  the  source  of  stability,  of  the  syr^em  which  you 
are  now  surveying  V 

"  Why,  undoubtedly,"  replies  the  astronomer,  "  the  same 
-principles  are  applicable  here  that  apply  to  all  planetary  and 
stellar  creations;"  and  if  he  added  no  more,  he  would  thus 
far  be  correct.  But  he  continues,  "  Undoubtedly  each  one  of 
those  bodies  received  a  certain  mechanical  impulse  as  it  was 
launched  into  space  from  the  hand  of  the  Creator.  Each  one 
moves  in  a  vacuum,  and  would  have  continued  its  primitive 
motion  in  a  direct  line  forever,  had  it  not  been  deflected  from 
its  course  by  an  equal  and  perpetually  operative  force  of  grav 
itation,  whence  its  present  motion  is  in  a  circular  or  elliptical 
orbit.  If  either  one  of  those  revolving  bodies,"  continues 
the  sage  astronomer,  "  were  arrested  in  its  orbit,  and  the  cen- 
trifugal force  were  thus  destroyed,  gravitation  would  immedi- 
ately draw  it  to  the  central  sun,  and  this  would  probably  so 
derange  the  equilibrium  of  the  system  as  to  ultimately  pro- 
duce a  universal  catastrophe !" 

If  the  astronomer  is  now  shown  a  direct  view  of  the  real 


THE     COSMICAL     sSTRTJCTUEE.  121 

subject  of  these  speculations- — is  shown  that  it  is  merely  an 
apple — he  will  consider  this  as  of  itself  a  sufficient  refutation 
of  his  speculations,  so  far  as  that  object  was  concerned ;  be- 
cause he  considers  the  internal  molecular  motions  of  the  apple 
as  being  governed  by  a  principle  of  life,  and  this  he  regards 
as  of  itself  amply  sufficient  to  keep  up  the  equilibrium  of  its 
particular  parts. 

But  each  cluster,  or  firmament,  of  suns,  with  its  planets,  is, 
in  principle,  but  an  apple  on  a  large  scale.  Some  of  the  more 
distant,  and  less  easily  resolvable,  nebulae,  indeed,  appear  to  a 
telescope  of  small  power,  almost  in  the  identical  form  and 
size  of  an  apple ;  and,  viewed  apart  from  all  other  considera- 
tions than  those  suggested  by  their  own  proper  aspects,  as  the 
white,  milky  spots,  which  they  present  to  telescopes  incapable 
of  resolving  them,  one  might  have  easily  conceived  that  they 
were  agitated  by  internal  motions;  but  the  conception  that 
these  internal  motions  were  referable  to  external  and  mechan- 
ical impulses,  and  that  the  moving  bodies  (which  the  distance 
of  view  reduces  to  molecules)  were  sustained  in  equilibrio  by 
counter  impulses,  according  to  the  Newtonian  theory  of  plan- 
etary motion,  would  have  been  as  unnatural  and  far-fetched, 
as  would  be  precisely  the  same  theory  applied  to  the  internal 
molecular  motions  of  an  apple. 

Indeed,  it  is  conceivable  that  one  might  be  miraculously 
elevated  above  the  whole  plane  of  sidereal  creations  to  a 
distance  so  great  that,  as  he  looked  down  upon  the  whole  uni- 
verse of  firmaments,  the  whole  might  present  one  unresolved 
mass  apparently,  from  that  distance,  no  larger  than  the  size 
of  an  apple.  Now,  when  we  remember  that  in  the  workings 
of  principles  there  is  absolutely  no  distinction  made  between 
great  and  small  bodies,  how  naturally  may  it  be  supposed  thai 
the  whole  universe,  with  all  its  included  sub-universes  is  per- 


122  GENERAL     ECONOMY     OF 

vaded,  like  the  apple,  by  an  internal  principle  of  Life,  tst.dk 
ihat  this  is  the  cause  of  all  its  internal  motions,  and  the  sus- 
tainer  of  equilibrium  among  all  its  constituent  orbs,  which,  to 
it,  are  in  reality  no  more  than  what  the  molecules  are  to  the 
apple ! 

But  let  us  endeavor  to  obtain  a  more  distinct  view  of  some 
of  the  constituent  elements  embraced  in  this  general  theory : 
Our  theory,  before  propounded,  of  constantly  emanative,  as 
well  as  constantly  gravitaftve,  forces  as  connected  with  planets, 
suns,  systems,  and  firmaments,  seems,  if  correct,  to  necessi- 
tate the  conclusion  that  universal  space  is  constantly  filled 
with  substance.  This  substance  is  in  the  solid,  fluid,  aeriform, 
and  ethereal  states.  In  its  densest  state,  it  may  be  supposed 
to  be  indefinitely  more  dense  than  the  heaviest  substances 
known  upon  earth,  and  in  its  rarest  state,  it  may  be  supposed 
to  be  indefinitely  more  rare  than  electricity,  and  between  these 
two  extremes,  there  are  probably  all  intermediates.  The  uni- 
verse may  thus  be  regarded  as  only  one  vast  ethereal  Body, 
having  in  its  general  mass  innumerable  points  of  condensation, 
which  are  suns,  planets,  etc. 

Now,  the  force  which  originally  induced  nebulous  circles, 
firmaments,  suns,  planets,  satellites,  etc.,  to  assume  their  re- 
spective orbits  at  specific  distances  from  their  primaries,  and 
which  perpetually  operates  (with  some  modifications,  accord- 
ing to  different  stages  of  progression)  to  keep  these  bodies  in 
those  general  orbits  after  they  are  assumed,  may,  in  a  degree, 
be  conceived  by  the  following  illustration  :  The  ponderable 
atmosphere  of  the  earth  at  a  level  with  the  sea,  is  relatively 
dense,  while  at  the  tops  of  the  highest  mountains  it  is  rela- 
tively rare ;  and  at  an  altitude  of  forty-five  or  fifty  miles,  ac- 
cording to  received  estimates,  its  existence  ceases  to  be  appre- 
ciable.    Hydrogen  gas  is  much  lighter  than  the  ponderable 


T3E  COSMICAL  STKUCTUEE.       123 

terrestrial  atmosphere  at  a  level  with  the  sea ;  and  when  con- 
fined in  a  balloon,  it  ascends,  with  its  envelope,  to  an  altitude 
iletermined  by  the  degree  of  buoyancy  of  gas  and  balloon 
united,  and  there  it  floats  until  dissipated.  Now,  each  solar 
and  planetary  body  in  space,  is  surrounded  by  a  caloriJi<\ 
luminous,  electric,  and  ethereal  atmosphere,  which,  in  like  man- 
ner, varies  in  density  and  power  with  the  distance  from  the 
center  of  condensation  ;  and,  by  virtue  of  the  respective 
super-aerial  atmospheres  of  any  two  bodies  sustaining  to  each 
other  the  relations  of  primary  and  secondary,  the  secondary 
body  assumes  an  orbitual  distance  from  the  primary,  which, 
as  in  the  case  of  the  balloon,  is  governed  by  the  law  of  equi- 
librium— which  distance,  however,  is  somewhat  modified  by 
centrifugal  force. 

This  illustration  of  the  balloon,  however,  is  very  imperfect, 
and  only  serves  to  enable  the  reader  to  approximate  to  a  con- 
ception of  the  true  idea;  for  we  are  not  to  consider  any  planet 
or  other  celestial  body,  as  having  the  same  degree  of  affinity 
for  its  primary  as  the  balloon  has  for  the  earth,  or  as  being 
attracted  to  it  in  exactly  the  same  way,  or  as  it  would  be,  if 
there  were  no  greater  dissimilarity  between  its  matter  and  the 
matter  of  the  primary,  than  there  is  between  the  matter  of 
the  balloon  and  that  of  the  earth.  But  each  celestial  body  is 
composed  of  materials,  and  possesses  calorific,  electric,  odic, 
and  other  forces  and  properties,  and  hence  affinities,  peculiar 
to  itself,  and  which,  in  general,  differ  from  those  of  any  other 
given  body  in  proportion  to  the  distance  of  its  natural  situ- 
ation. Moreover,  each  planet,  sun,  etc.,  as  before  intimated, 
is  only  the  condensed  center  of  a  general  ethereal  body  of  nc 
particularly  defined  circumference,  but  whose  refined  emana- 
tions, growing  more  rare  with  each  remove  from  their  centers, 
extend   indefinitely  into  space.     In  this  way,  each  body  inter* 


124  GENERAL     ECONOMY     OF 

communicate  with,  and  acts  upon,  all  kindred  bodies,  and  is 
acted  upon  by  them  in  return;  the  action  consisting  in  an  in 
terblending  of  the  forces  and  properties  of  the  different 
bodies.  When  this  interblending  is  harmonious,  the  action  is 
attractive ;  when  it  is  conflict'ng,  it  is  repulsive.  Beyond  cer 
tain  limits  of  distance,  the  interblending  actions  of  any  two 
bodies,  however  dissimilar  in  constitution,  is  always  harmoni- 
ous— and  hence  attractive ;  within  those  limits  of  distance, 
the  action  is  crowding  and  conflicting,  and  hence  repellant. 

Suppose,  then,  that"b}~  some  controlling  arm,  or  some  acci 
dental  impediment,  a  planet  were  suddenly  arrested  in  its 
orbit,  and  were  thus  relieved  from  the  influence  of  centrifugal 
force:  it  would  immediately  be  drawn  toward  its  primary 
with  a  force  which  would  uniformly  increase  as  the  square  of 
the  distance  decreased,  provided  no  counteracting  force  were 
developed  by  the  approach  to  the  central  body.  In  falling  in- 
ward, however,  although  the  attractive  force  would,  for  a  ti?nc, 
be  increased  (that  is,  until  the  previous  centrifugal  displace- 
ment was  overcome),  its  elastic  atmosphere  would  begin  to 
crowd  more  and  more  upon  the  elastic  atmosphere  of  the  sun, 
and  even  its  own  solidified  particles,  by  the  increased  calorific, 
photic,  electric,  odic,  and  vital  action  due  to  the  proximity  of 
the  two  bodies  as  centers  of  such  action,  would,  in  themselves, 
develop  an  emanative  or  repellent  force  in  respect  to  the  pri- 
mary; and,  owing  to  these  causes,  the  secondary  body  could 
not  approach  within  a  certain  distance  of  its  primary,  within 
which  distance  the  repellent  force  would  be  superior  to  the 
attractive. 

The  same  idea  is  involved  in  the  theory  (before  propounded) 
of  the  process  by  which  secondary  bodies  were  formed  from 
primaries — and  which  supposes  that  the  secondaries  are  com- 
posed of    n  equal  quantity  of  attracted  and  emanated  particles. 


THE     COSMICAL     STRUCTURE.  125 

As  each  individual  of  these,  acted  upen  by  centrifugal  force, 
finds  its  equilibrium  at  the  ['articular  point  where,  by  the  union 
-fall,  the  secondary  body  is  formed,  so  the  united  mass  of  par- 
ticles in  the  body  thus  funned,  has  no  more  tendency  to  draw 
Hearer  to  the  primary  than  it  has  to  emanate  further  from  it. 

Suppose,  then,  any  particular  secondary  body  should  be 
violently  arrested  in  its  orbit :  it  would  evidently  sink  into 
the  ethereal  atmosphere  of  its  primary  a  distance  measured 
by  its  previous  centrifugal  displacement,  which,  in  most  cases, 
would  be  considerable;  but  at  some  point  between  its  former 
orbit  and  the  primary,  it  would  attain  to  an  exact  equilibrium 
between  the  attractive  and  cmanative  or  repellent  influences, 
and  there  its  inward  motion  would  stop.  If  held  there  by 
violence,  and  prevented  from  partaking  of  the  general  vortical 
motion  of  the  system,  it  would  be  to  the  cosmkal  system  what 
a  mass  of  displaced  particles,  or  a  splinter  of  foreign  matter, 
would  be  to  the  human  system  ;  and  the  effect  would  be,  an 
inflammation,  suppuration,  and  dissolution,  of  the  part.  For, 
it  is  evident  that  in  such  a  case  the  body  would  accumulate 
beat  and  other  repellent  elements  from  the  primary,  more 
rapidly  than  it  could  relieve  itself  of  them,  and  sooner  or  later 
these  accumulations  would  be  beyond  its  powers  of  endurance. 
The  particles  in  that  case  would  separate  in  detail,  and  would 
either  be  digested  and  assimilated  with  the  general  mass  of 
the  primary  and  its  atmosphere,  or,  assuming  the  general  revo- 
lutionary motion  of  the  system,  would  be  again  thrown  out- 
ward by  the  resultant  centrifugal  force,  and  would  reaggregate 
themselves  at  their  original  distance,  and  the  planet  would  be 
formed  anew. 

For  an  explanation  of  the  principles  on  which  all  rotatory 
and  orbitual  motion  may  originate,  the  reader  is  referred  to  an 
earlier  stage  of  this  treatise,  in  which  we   spoke  of  the  first! 


1.28  GENERAL     ECONOMY      OF 

assumption  of  rotatory  motion  in  the  universal  mass  :  and,  by 
considering  the  universe  still  as  one  general  Body,  interiorly 
gravitating  and  emanating  as  in  the  beginning,  he  may  conceive 
how  these  motions,  not  only  of  the  great  general  Body,  but 
of  all  its  included  and  correspondent  sw6-bodies,  is  perpetually 
sustained  by  a  constant  supply  of  the  same  forces  which  ope- 
rated in  the  beginning,  and  which  constantly  inflow  from  the 
inexhaustible  sources  of  Divine  Spiritual  Heat  and  Light, 
which  mean  Love  and  Wisdom,  and  which  constituted  the 
Alpha  and  Omega,  the  first  and  the  last,  the  beginning  and  the 
ending  of  this  grand  creative,  operation  !  What  can  be  a  more 
natural  thought  than  that  the  universe  is  constructed,  and  that 
all  its  functional  operations  are  carried  on,  according  to  the 
foregoing  principles  !  and  what  hypothesis  relating  to  this 
grand  subject  is  so  free  from  difficulties ! 

If  the  universe  is  actually  constructed  on  these  principles, 
it  manifestly  possesses  (under  the  operations  of  its  pervading 
Divine  Life)  a  self-regulating  power  which  must  necessarily 
give  it  the  utmost  conceivable  stability — the  stability  of  an 
almost  infinite  living  Organism,  exempted  from  all  external 
causes  of  death  !  Let  planets  be  crowded  out  of  their  orbits, 
if  such  a  thing  were  possible  (which  it  is  not),  and  they  will 
either  spontaneously  return  again,  or  new  arrangements  will  be 
assumed  among  their  associate  bodies,  which  will  be  according 
to  the  law  of  equilibrium,  and  equally  harmonious  with  the 
previous  condition.  Let  planets,  or  even  whole  systems,  by 
any  imaginable  means,  be  stricken  out  of  existence :  there 
would  be  an  immediate  supplying  of  the  vacuum — a  healing 
up  of  the  part — and  scarcely  a  cicatrice  would  remain.  In  short, 
let  the  system,  by  some  imagined  foreign  force,  be  wounded 
and  deranged  in  almost  any  conceivable  way :  it  M-ould  still 
contain  an  internal  power  of  recuperation.     But  as  a  Divinely 


THE     COSMICAL      STRUCTURE.  127 

constituted  Fabric,  destined  to  unspeakably  noble  and  glorl 
ous  ends,  it  is  entirely  free  from  all  causes  of  material  dis- 
turbance, and  will  live  on  until  its  highest  purposes  are  fully 
attained,  when,  as  one  Grand  Man,  it  will  change  its  whole 
mode  of  being  for  one  which  is  more  spiritual,  more  Divine, 
and  inconceivably  more  glorious  ! 


CHAPTER   XI. 

PARrtCdLAR    CONSIDERATIONS    CONCERNING    THE   GENESIS    AND 
MODUS    OPERANDI    OF    THE    SOLAR  SYSTEM. 

Little  more  needs  to  be  said,  by  way  of  applying  the  fore, 
going  principles  to  the  genesis  and  modus  operandi  of  our  owe 
Solar  System.  It  has  been  before  intimated  that  the  identical 
principles  are  involved  here  that  were  concerned  in  the  origin 
and  government  of  the  universe,  as  a  whole,  with  some 
modifications  in  the  form  of  their  results,  as  owing  to  differ- 
ences of  conditions,  and  that  the  seven-fold  series  is  observed 
in  the  laws,  operations,  and  successive  stages  of  unfolding,  in 
both  instances.  In  both  instances  there  are  the  successive  and 
ascending  degrees  of  Chaos,  Nucleation,  Spheroidation,  Circu- 
lar Agregation,  Segregation,  Secondary  Spheroidation,  and  the 
complete  and  ultimate  cosmical  unfolding.  In  both  cases  the 
dynamic  agents  of  Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity,  with  their 
corresponding  triad  of  odic  elements  are  involved,  to  which, 
in  both  cases,  is  superadded  the  all-pervading  and  controlling 
Divine  Life  Principle. 

The  chief  differences  in  the  specific  forms  of  developments 
in  the  two  cases,  lies  between  their  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  and 
seventh  degrees.  In  the  series  of  developments  through  which 
we  have  supposed  the  universe,  as  one  whole  Body,  to  have 
passed,  we  have  supposed  the  fourth  development  to  be  that 
of  nebulous  rings,  surrounding  the  primary  spheroid — or,  at 
least,  segments  of  rings  so  large,  and  of  such  various  parts,  a» 


THE     SOLAK      SYSTEM.  129 

to  prod. id e  the  possibility  of  an  aggregation  of  the  materials 
of  either  ring  or  segment,  into  one  spheroidal  body;  while,  in 
the  Solar  System,  the  size  and  other  conditions  of  each  of  these 
eycloidal  nebulae  were,  with  apparently  one  exception,  such  as 
to  admit  of  an  aggregation  into  one  spheroidal  body.  The 
exception  here  referred  to  relates  to  the  mass  of  materials 
from  which  originated  the  asteroids.  The  fifth  or  segregative 
process  in  the  universal  development,  consists,  according  to 
our  hypothesis,  of  the  division  of  each  nebulous  ring  or  seg- 
ment, into  a  multitude  of  angular  and  indefinitely  formed 
masses;  whereas  the  fifth  and  corresponding  development  in 
the  Solar  System,  consisted  (in  every  case  except  that  of  the 
asteroids,  as  before  mentioned)  simply  of  the  breaking  up  of 
the  nebulous  ring,  and  the  assemblage  of  its  parts  into  one 
body.  The  processes  of  the  sixth  development,  both  of  the 
Universe  and  of  the  Solar  System,  were  perfectly  identical, 
except  that  in  the  former  case  solar  spheres,  and  in  the  latter, 
the  gaseous  and  incandescent  spheres  of  nascent  planets,  were 
the  result.  The  seventh  development  of  the  universe  con- 
sisted of  the  unfolding  of  the  identical  forms  which  were  the 
product  of  the  sixtli  development  of  the  solar  system,  viz., 
the  forms  of  nascent  planets,  as  aforesaid  ;  whereas  the  seventh 
development  of  the  solar  system,  consisted  of  the  superficial 
solidification  of  those  bodies,  and  such  other  changes  in  them 
as  prepared  them  for  the  introduction  of  the  first  and  lowest 
of  the  organic  forms,  by  which  they  were  subsequently 
tenanted. 

But  although  the  Universal  System  and  the  Solar  System 
thus  each  consists  of  a  complete  octave  of  developments,  each 
octave  has  its  own  particular  key-note,  which  differs  from  that 
of  the  other.  That  is  to  say,  they  do  not  begin  at  the  same 
place  in  the  staff,  nor  does  one  begin  where  the  other  ends. 


130  O  El  G I  IS     OF     COMETS. 

This,  however,  does  not  in  any  respect  destroy  the  corre- 
spondence of  the  principles  which  both  involve. 

After  the  sin:  and  planets  were  thus  formed  by  agglomer- 
ations and  condensations  of  the  originally  diffused  mass  of 
chaotic  materials,  there  would  naturally  still  remain  in  dif- 
fusion through  the  general  sphere  of  the  system,  a  quantity 
of  mundane  matter,  so  great  as  to  be  liable,  under  the  further 
action  of  the  law  of  condensation,  to  ultimately  assume  forms 
more  or  less  distinctly  visible.  This  consideration  hints  at 
the  origin  and  character  of  those  erratic,  and  in  some  cases 
apparently  almost  lawless  bodies,  called  comets.  These  are 
mere  excrescences  upon,  the  system — incidents  of  previous 
developments;  and  their  anomalas  of  constitution  and  motions 
are  probabty  the  results  of  their  borderings  upon  the  extreme 
confines  of  the  forces  and  laws  provided  for  the  government 
of  the  system.  Aside  from  some  illustrations  of  cosmical 
laws  which  they  afford,  they  probably  subserve  no  purpose 
which  is  much  more  important  than  that  of  the  amusement 
of  astronomers. 

This  idea  of  residual  nebular  matter  also  accounts  for  that 
singular  nebulous  and  oblately  spheroidal  envelope  of  the  sun, 
which  is  called  the  "  Zodiacal  Light."  Probably  neither  the  for- 
mation of  this  nor  of  the  comets,  was  specifically  contemplated 
in  the  original  plan  of  the  Creator,  but  the  development  of 
each  wras  incidental  to  the  uniform  operations  of  established 
laws. 

As  originated  our  own  solar  system,  so  we  may  suppose 
originated  all  other  solar  systems  in  space,  with  differences  in 
the  forms  of  the  operations  and  results  of  identical  principles, 
according  to  differences  in  material  conditions  and  local 
circumstances. 


CIIAPTEE    XII. 

SYNTHETICAL    VIEW    OF    THE    ORIGIN    OF    THE    EARTH 
AND    ITS    GEOLOGICAL   FORMATIONS 


The  last  developed  forms  of  the  universal  cosmical  struc- 
ture, viz.,  the  distinctly  segregated  masses  of  planetary  matter 
before  described,  may  be  viewed  in  the  light  of  Seed  of  the 
great  Tree  of  previous  Being,  and  Germs  of  a  future  and  cor- 
responding creation.  By  means  of  a  generative  influence 
constantly  descending  from  the  Divine  Spirit,  as  the  Source 
of  all  subordinate  existences,  a  corresponding  octave  of  un fold- 
ings now  ensue,  which  may  be  called  the  geognostic  unfold- 
ing*. The  successive  stages  of  these,  which,  like  other  systems 
of  creation,  form  a  seven-fold  scries,  seem,  both  in  the  light  of 
principles  and  facts,  to  observe  the  following  order  and 
relations : 

Primary  Trinity. 


1.  Chaotic    or    unformed    fiery 
vapor. 

2.  Spheroidal    nucleus    (liquid 
and  gaseous). 


Granito-aqueous,  or,  super- 
ficially solidified  and  oceanic. 


Secondary  Trinity. 

4.  The  "  Transition  Period,"  cha- 

racterized mainly   by   aerial 
developments  and  changes. 

5.  The  "  Secondary  Period,"  cha- 

racterized by  distinctions  of 
climates  and  seasons,  and 
their  corresponding  sediment- 
ary deposits. 
G.  The  "Tertiary,"  or,  the  vol- 
canic, lacustrine,  fluvatile* 
and  abrasive  Period. 


Ultimate. 
7    Po0.>nt  or  Alluvial  Period. 


132  ORIGIN      OF     THE     EARTH 

In  our  descending  or  analytical  view  of  creation,  we  spoke 
briefly  of  some  of  the  more  superficial  characteristics  of  these 
terrestrial  developments :  but  we  will  now  glance  at  the  as- 
pects in  which  they  will  appear  in  the  light  of  the  a  priori  and 
a  posteriori  processes  of  reasoning  combined. 

1.  The  Chaotic  Stage. — In  our  analytical  and  analogical 
view  of  the  terrestrial  system,  we  found  abundant  reason  to 
believe  that  our  earth  was  formed  from  a  mass  of  primeval 
fiery  vapor,  as  expressing  material  conditions  antecedent  to  the 
fiery  liquid  mass,  of  which,  facts  prove  that  our  globe  once 
consisted.  Following  the  further  and  obvious  teachings  of 
analogy,  as  well  as  the  intimations  of  certain  celestial  phe- 
nomena, we  were  led  to  the  conclusion  that  this  mass  must 
have  been  a  result  of  a  previous  aggregation  and  segregation 
of  the  materials  of  the  solar  atmosphere,  of  which  an  explana- 
tion is  involved  in  the  now  apparently  well-established  theory 
of  the  formation  of  the  nebulous  rings,  and  their  subsequent 
changes. 

It  seems  to  be  a  well-founded  opinion  of  believers  in  the 
nebular  theory,  that  the  gaseous  cycloid,  whose  condensation 
resulted  in  the  formation  of  the  earth,  must  have  originally 
been  nearly  of  the  same  shape  and  circumference  with  the 
present  orbit  of  the  earth.  Now,  the  earth's  orbit  is  not  an 
exact  circle,  but  an  ellipse,  with  the  sun  in  one  of  its  foci. 
Consequently,  at  the  separation  of  the  materials  of  this  ring 
or  cycloid  at  one  part  of  its  rim,  and  their  aggregation  at  the 
opposite  part,  whether  this  occurred  at  the  perihelion  or 
aphelion  point — the  common  mass  thus  formed  must  have 
taken  the  elongated  or  ellipsoidal  shape,  and  preserved  super- 
ficially all  the  general  geometrical  properties  of  the  previous 
eircumsolar  zone,  on  a  reduced  scale. 

The  first  distinct  form  assumed  by  the  materials  of  our 


AND     MOON.  133 

nascent  planet,  theiefore,  must  have  been  that  of  an  ellipsoid, 
or,  perhaps,  more  properly  speaking,  that  of  an  egg  somewhat 
flattened  in  the  direction  of  its  shorter  diameter.  The  two 
ends  of  this  ellipsoidal  body,  preserving,  respectively,  the 
general  qualities  of  what  were  its  aphelion  and  perihelion 
points  when,  during  its  previous  and  higher  state  of  diffusion, 
it  encircled  the  sun,  must  now  sustain  toward  each  other  the 
relations  of  positive  and  negative*  The  atoms  having  the 
strongest  affinity  for  the  positive  influence,  therefore,  would 
naturally  flow  toward  the  positive  end ;  and  those  having  the 
strongest  affinity  for  the  negative  influence  would  flow  toward 
the  negative  end.  There  would,  therefore,  be  a  tendency  of 
the  particles  to  agglomerate  and  condense  in  the  form  of  a 
separate  nucleus  near  either  end  of  the  general  body,  or,  more 
accurately  speaking,  probably  in  either  focus  of  the  ellipse.  If 
the  particles  are  sufficiently  diverse  from  each  other  as  to  their 
extreme  degrees  of  positiveness  or  negativeness,  and  other 
circumstances  are  favorable,  the  tendencies  to  agglomeration 
and  condensation  at  these  two  points,  may  result  in  the  forma- 
tion of  a  primary  planet  and  a  satellite ;  or,  if  there  are 
several  degrees  of  matter  widely  distinguished  by  their  rela- 
tively positive  and  negative  qualities,  a  correspondingly  com- 
plicated operation  of  the  same  principles  and  forces,  may  re- 
sult in  the  formation  of  several  satellites. 

The  idea  of  a  tendency  to,  and  condensation  in,  the  foci  of 
the  egg-shaped  nebulous  mass,  thus  forming  a  primary  and  a 
satellite,  and  that  this  tendency  indicates  a  law,  is  in  precise 

*  In  employing  Ihe  terms  "positive"  and  "  negative,"  as  above,  it  is  not  intended  to 
restrict  Hie  idea  of  the  polar  relations  which  they  express,  to  a  connection  with  elec- 
tricity or  magnetism.  These  relations  may  be  supposed,  in  some  sense,  to  subsist  be- 
tween the  two  extremes  in  the  development  of  eacTi  of  the  imponderables.  Eeiohen- 
bach,  as  we  have  seen,  found  unmistakable  indications  of  these  polar  relations  existing 
in  the  "  odic"  element,  with  its  different  varieties,  by  him  discovered. 

12 


134  ORIGIN     OF     THE     EARTH. 

accordance  with,  and  explains,  the  fact,  universal  in  the  sola/ 
system,  and  doubtless  in  other  departments  of  the  cosmica7, 
creation,  that  when  bodies  (whether  planets  or  satellites)  re- 
volve \x\.  elliptical  orbits,  their  primaries,  or  centers  of  gravity 
,are  invariably  situated  in  one  of  the  foci  of  the  ellipse,  pre- 
cisely where,  according  to  our  theory,  such  bodies  must,  in  all 
probability,  have  been  originally  formed.  It  may  be  added 
that,  of  the  fact  of  this  focality  in  the  situation  of  primaries 
with  reference  to  the  elliptic  orbits  of  their  secondaries,  no 
other  hypothesis  than  the  general  one  now  under  consideration 
affords  the  slightest  explanation. 

Considering  the  earth  and  the  moon  as  having,  in  this  way, 
been  formed  respectively  by  condensations  in  the  foci  of  the 
same  original  nebulous  mass,  their  origin  and  relations  may 
be  considered  as  hinting  at,  if  not  exactly  representing,  the 
origin  and  relations  of  the  two  bodies  of  what  are  called 
double  stars,  or  binary  systems.  The  diversity  of  colors  gene- 
rally observed  as  characterizing  the  two  constituents  of  such 
systems — the  larger  body  being,  in  most  cases,  relatively  red, 
and  the  smaller  relatively  blue,  as  though  they  had  divided 
the  prismatic  colors  between  them — strongly  intimates,  of  it- 
self, something  like  a  polar  opposition  in  the  materials  of  which 
they  are  respectively  composed,  and  gives  additional  weight 
to  the  hypothesis  of  their  original  and  nebulous  connection. 

The  hypothesis  of  an  original  union  in  one  nebulous  body 
of  the  materials  of  the  earth  and  moon,  seems,  indeed,  to  be 
necessary,  if  there  is  admitted  to  be  any  truth  in  the  nebular 
theory.  But,  if  this  hypothesis  is  true,  it  suggests  a  connec- 
tion of  a  nature  heretofore  little  suspected,  as  even  now  sub- 
sisting between  the  earth  and  moon.  Taken  in  connection 
with  our  doctrine  of  constant  emanation,  as  well  as  constant 
gravitation,  of  particles  governed  by  the  laws  of  assimilation, 


ETHEREAL     EXVELOTE.  1 35 

elimination,  and  polarization,  it  encourages,  if  possible,  even 
more  than  a  suspicion,  that  the  earth  and  moon  are  but  con- 
densed and  oppositely  polarized  points  in  one  common  mass 
of  ethereal,  m&gnetoid,  or  "odic''  substance.  Such  an  ethereal 
mass,  considered  as  the  common  calorific,  photic,  electric,  odic, 
nervoid,  and  vital  sphere  or  atmosphere  of  the  earth  and  moon. 
would  seem  to  be  a  necessary  existence,  according  to  princi- 
ples involved  in  the  discoveries  of  Reichenbach  ;  while,  on  the 
other  hand,  and  in  a  still  more  emphatic  sense,  the  earth  and 
moon  in  their  present  state,  may  be  supposed  to  consist  of 
precipitated  particles  originally  held  in  solution  in  their  now 
enveloping  ethereal  and  imponderable  menstruum.* 

This  field  or  realm  of  segregated  ether  supporting  these 
new  condensed  points,  may,  in  its  present  state,  be  considered 
as  tvi  ultimate  refinement  of  the  primeval  nebulous  mass  from 
which  our  world  and  its  satellite  had  their  common  origin. 
Though  its  ultimate  attenuations,  intercommingling  with  those 
of  kindred  bodies  (yet  still  preserving  their  identity)  may  be 
supposed  to  extend  indefinitely  into  space,  the  relatively  dense, 


*  It  is  well  fcnown  that  particular  positions  of  the  moon  in  respect  to  the  earth,  are 
accompanied  with  marked  effects  upon  somnambulists,  cataleptics,  and  persons  dis- 
posed to  insanity ;  and  it  has  from  time  immemorial  been  believed  that  certain  lunar 
positions  have  also  a  decided  influence  upon  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms. 
During  Eclipses  of  the  sun,  when  the  moon  has  been  directly  between  that  luminarj 
and  the  earth,  hungry  animals  have  been  observed  to  suddenly  cease  eating,  and  become 
apparently  sad  and  dejected  ;  and  when  eclipses  have  been  total,  birds  have  sometimes 
been  known  to  fall  dead  from  their  perches.  Now,  neither  of  these  effects  can  be  sup- 
posed to  resu  t  from  any  modification  of  the  force  of  gravitation  as  owing  to  the  rela- 
tive positions  in  such  cases,  of  the  earth,  moon,  and  sun.  But  if  we  suppose,  as  is  snp- 
above,  that  the  earth  and  moon  are  enveloped  in  a  common  "odic"  Bphere  of  a 
nervoid  and  semi-vital  character,  and  that  this  changes  in  its  polar  relations  and  e< in- 
sequent  qualities  of  influence  upon  living  organisms,  with  every  change  of  relative 
position  of  the  earth,  moon,  and  sun,  we  have  an  easy  solution  of  the  phenomena  in 
question.  The  supposition  of  such  a  change  of  influence  would  seem  to  be  counte- 
nanced by  the  results  of  Eeichenbach's  experiment  with  the  revolving  magnet,  before 
ipoken  of. 


136  ORIGIN     OF     THE     EARTH. 

or  trie  rationally  more  obvious,  portion  of  the  body,  still  re- 
tains, in  all  probability,  the  general  shape  and  size  of  the 
original  nebula.  If  we  suppose  this  spheroid  of  imponderable 
matter  to  be  rotating  on  its  own  proper  axis  once  in  twenty- 
seven  days,  seven  hours,  and  forty-three  minutes,  carrying.the 
earth  and  moon  with  it  as  its  condensed  foci,  we  have,  in  such 
supposition,  an  explanation  of  the  motion  of  the  moon  round 
the  earth  as  it  appears  to  us,  and  of  the  motion  of  the  earth 
around  the  moon  as  it  would  be  mathematically  evident  to  an 
inhabitant  of  the  latter  body.  If  this  supposition  is  correct, 
then  neither  body  ought  to  move  round  the  other  as  an  abso- 
lutely fixed  point  in  the  system,  but  both  ought  to  revolve 
around  a  common  center — the  axis  of  their  common  ethereal 
and  enveloping  mass.  But,  considering  the  superior  attractive 
force  of  the  earth  over  the  moon,  together  with  the  superior 
density  of  that  whole  end  of  the  ethereal  mass  in  which  the 
earth  is  situated,  to  that  of  the  end  in  which  the  moon  is 
situated,  this  center  of  common  revolution  can  probably  vary 
at  most  but  a  few  hundred  miles  from  the  center  of  the  earth, 
and  may  be  very  nearly  coincident  with  it. 

I  believe  that  astronomers  are  now  pretty  generally  con- 
vinced that  in  binary  stellar  systems,  one  body  not  only 
revolves  around  the  other,  but  that  the  two  bodies  revolve 
round  a  common  center,  situated  somewhere  between  the 
centers  of  the  two,  and  nearest  to  the  center  of  the  larger  one ; 
and  to  these  motions,  those  of  the  binary  system  of  the  earth 
and  moon  would,  according  to  the  foregoing  hypothesis,  pre- 
sent an  exact  analogy. 

The  earth,  being  the  major  or  positive  focal  condensation  of 
the  general  ethereal  and  enveloping  spheroid,  has  asumed 
sufficient  independence  to  admit  of  a  diurnal  revolution  on  its 
own  proper  axes;  but  the  moon,  being  the  minor  and  nega 


HINT      3ON0EENING     TIDE  3.  137 

f.ve  focus,  still  cont'nues  in  subjection  to  the  force  of  the 
general  ethereal  mass  which  is  positive  over  it;  and  therefore^ 
keeping  the  same  side  always  to  the  earth,  it  rotates  only  with 
the  rotation  of  the  general  mass. 

If  our  hypothesis  is  correct,  then  not  only  ought  the  sides 
of  the  moon  turned  to  and  from  the  earth,  to  be  in  opposite 
polar  relations,  but  there  should  be  a  slight  elongation  of  the 
moon  in  the  same  direction,  presenting,  in  fact,  the  dwindled 
and  miniature  form  of  the  original  nebulous  or  present 
ethereal  spheroid.  On  the  same  principle  there  raus  have 
been  a  tendency  to  elongation  in  the  form  of  the  earth,  while 
the  particles  which  compose  it  were  in  process  of  aggregation. 
This  tendency,  however,  so  far  as  the  solid,  or  less  mobile  ma- 
terials of  the  earth  are  concerned,  was  corrected  by  its  ro- 
tation on  its  axis,  by  the  perpetual  action  of  which,  during 
the  period  in  which  the  earth  passed  from  a  fluid  to  a  super- 
ficially solid  state,  the  surface  of  the  earth  was  rolled  into 
general  rotundity.  But  the  mobility  of  the  watery  portions 
of  the  earth's  surface,  was  such  as  to  preserve,  in  a  degree, 
l heir  freedom  to  observe,  the  original  tendency  to  ellipticity, 
which  tendency  is  now  manifested  in  the  form  of  tides.  For 
tides  are  only  elongations  of  the  mobile  portions  of  the  earth's 
substance,  in  what  we  have  supposed  to  be  the  direction  of 
the  longer  axis  of  the  ethereal  spheroid,  which  axis  would 
necessarily  be  in  the  direction  of  the  earth  and  moon,  admit- 
ting these  bodies,  as  points  cf  condensation  in  the  general 
body,  to  occupy  generally  the  two  foci  of  the  latter.  There 
are,  doubtless,  for  the  same  reasons,  atmosjiheric  tides  which 
are  greater  than  the  oceanic  tides  in  proportion  to  the  greater 
mobility  of  the  atmospheric  particles ;  and  had  not  the  earth 
assumed  a  rotatory  motion  (from  causes  identical  with  those 
ulik h  produced  a  similar  motion  in  other  bodies,  and  which 


138  0JRIGO7     OF     THE     EARTH 

have  been  before  explained),  it  would  doubtless  have  eon 
densed  (as  we  have  supposed  the  moon  to  have  done),  in  a 
permanently  oval  form,  whose  opposite  ends  would,  if  the 
expression  may  be  allowed,  have  represented  solidified 
tides.* 

With  the  evolutions  and  condensations  above  supposed,  or, 
at  least,  with  something  not  essentially  differing  from  them, 
the  materials  of  which  our  earth  is  composed,  may  be  sup- 
posed to  have  passed  out  of  their  first  or  chaotic  state. 

2.  The  second  stage  of  the  earth's  developments,  as  ob- 
viously the  next  orderly  stage  of  progression  from  the  first, 
was  that  of  a  spheroidal  igneous  nucleus.  This  stage,  indeed, 
commenced  the  moment  the  nucleus  began  to  appear;  for 
then  the  general  body,  by  the  distinction  developed  in  its 
parts,  began  to  pass  out  of  the  state  of  absolute  chaos.  It 
may  be  considered  that  this  development  closed  when  the 
outer  limits  of  this  igneous  nucleus  became  distinctly  defined, 
and  when  its  merely  molten  and  fluid  substance  became  fully 
distinguished  from  its  gaseous  envelope.f 

3.  The  third  stage  may  be  denominated  the  granito-aqueous^ 
it  being  the  stage  characterized  by  the  formation  of  the  first 
granite  crust,  and  by  the  development  of  the  oceans  by  which 
the  latter  was  generally  covered.  This,  completing  as  it  did 
the  first  Trinity  of  terrestrial  developments,  brought  the  earth 
from  a  previously  elastic  and  yielding,  to  a  solid  and  perma- 

*  These  suggestions,  tending,  as  they  do,  to  an  essential  modification  of  the  New- 
tonian  theory  of  tides,  might  be  greatly  fortified  hy  additional  considerations:  but  to 
present  these  in  their  proper  force,  discussions  would  be  required  which  would  be  too 
occult  for  a  popular  treatise. 

+  The  foregoing  considerations  in  respect  to  the  first  and  second  stages  of  the  earth's 
formation,  are  admitted  to  be  mainly  a  priori,  but  to  tho'se  who  can  perceive  effects 
as  involved  in  tueir  causes,  they  will  not  be  without  weight.  In  respect  to  the  remain- 
mg  stages  of  development,  we  will  not  only  have  the  evidence  of  causes,  but  of  taeil 
effects^  us  still  observaile  in  the  earth's  crust  - 


EARLY     ATMOSPIIESTC     CONDITIONS.       139 

nent  state,  and  thus  completed  its  constitution  merely  us  a 
planetary  body. 

4.  The  fourth  stage  was  characterized  mainly  by  aerial  de- 
velopments and  changes.  It  embraces  that  vast  period  dining 
which  the  rocks  of  the  Cambrian,  Silurian,  Old  Red  Sandstone, 
ftnd  Carboniferous  systems  were  formed.  At  the  commence- 
ment of  this  period,  the  atmosphere  must  of  necessity  have 
been  in  an  exceedingly  crude  and  impure  state.  Besides  other 
gross  and  noxious  elements,  it  must  have  borne  in  its  bosom 
all,  or  nearly  all, "of  the  carbonic  acid  gas  which  subsequently 
became  condensed  in  the  mountain  limestone  and  various 
other  limestone  deposits,  and  the  carbon  of  which,  parting  with 
its  oxygen,  became  embodied  in  the  immense  oe/ls  of  mineral 
f-oal,  found,  more  or  less,  in  almost  every  quarter  of  the  earth. 
Am  atmosphere  thus  surcharged  with  this  noxious  vapor,  must 
nave  been  incompatible  with  the  existence  of  any  forms  of 
organic  life,  except  those  of  a  low  order;  and  accordingly  we 
:'ind  that  the  plants  and  animals  of  this  vast  period  were,  as 
shown  by  their  fossil  remains,  exclusively  such  as  inhabited 
the  ocean  and  the  marshy  and  frequently  submerged  places  in 
its  vicinity — situations  intermediate  between  the  properly 
marine  and  the  properly  terrestrial. 

It  was,  doubtless,  owing  mainly,  if  not  wholly,  to  atmos 
pheric  causes  that  the  solar  rays  during  this  period  had  but 
little  influence  upon  the  surface  of  the  earth,  and  that  a  nearly 
uniform  temperature  prevailed  at  all  latitudes  and  at  all  sea- 
sons. Geologists  have  usually  attempted  to  account  for  the 
high  degree  and  general  uniformity  of  this  temperature,  as 
indicated  by  the  universally  tropical  nature  of  the  plants  and 
animals  of  this  period,  by  referring  it  to  a  radiation  of  the 
internal  heat  of  the  earth,  which  it  is  supposed  must,  at  that 
early  period,  have  been  much  more  intense  than  in  subsequent 


140  ORIGIN     OF     THE     EARTH. 

times,  But  the  mystery  seems  to  be  quite  as  well,  if  not  bet 
ter,  accounted  for  in  the  consideration  that  while  the  atmos- 
phere was  so  excessively  dense  as  it  must  have  been  while 
loaded  with  so  much  carbon  and  carbonic  acid,  its  pressure 
must  have  been  correspondingly  great ;  and  it  is  well  known 
that  every  increase  of  atmospheric  pressure  is  attended  with  an 
increase  of  heat.  It  is  not  improbable,  however,  that  both 
of  these  causes  had  something  to  do  in  the  production  of  the 
superior  heat  of  these  times. 

The  scene  which  would  have  been  presented  to  a  human 
spectator,  could  such  an  one  have  been  placed  upon  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth  at  this  time,  would  have  been  gloomy  and 
cheerless  in  the  extreme.  He  would  probably  at  no  time  have 
beheld  either  clouds  or  decided  sunshine,  but  a  dim  and  unde- 
fined luminescence,  caused  by  the  sunbeams  in  passing  athwart 
the  thick  and  stagnant  atmosphere.  No  star-beam  could  have, 
penetrated  the  dense  aerial  envelope  to  relieve  the  gloom  of 
night ;  and,  for  the  same  reason,  the  range  of  horizontal  vision, 
even  at  noonday,  must  have  been  confined  within  narrow 
limits.  All  diversity  of  landscape  must,  in  the  earlier  part 
of  this  period,  have  been  merged  in  one  wide  waste  of  waters. 
This,  however,  was,  in  later  times,  partially  relieved  by  exten- 
sive districts  of  low,  marsh)-  land,  on  which  the  soft  and  suc- 
culent vegetation  grew  with  the  rankest  luxuriance.  No  bird 
yet  winged  the  air,  or  gladdened  the  forest  with  its  song;  no 
beast  prowled  through  the  thick  jungles  of  fern  and  sigillaria, 
and  no  herds  lowed  upon  the  fields  of  moss  and  equiseta;  and, 
except  the  rolling  of  the  ocean  waves,  the  plashing  of  the  finny 
tribe,  and  the  occasional  rumblings  of  subterranean  fires,  the 
most  profound  and  gloomy  silence  reigned  over  the  face  of  thi 
globe ! 

li)  therefore,  in  the  first  stage  of  the  first  Trinity  of  devel 


N  E  W      RED     S  A  N  D  S  T  ()  N  E  .  1-ii 

opments,  the  whole  m/iss  of  terrestrial  materials  was  in  a  state 
chat  may  be  designated  as  chaotic,  vve   find  here,  in  the  first 

stage  of  the  second  Trinity,  a  corresponding  condition  as  re- 
lating to  the  whole  mass  of  atmospheric  materials,  and  of  its 
accompanying  developments  as  the  initial  steps  of  terrestrial 
organic  creation.  Taken  as  a  whole,  however,  the  changes  of 
this  period  brought  conditions  on  the  earth's  surface  into 
something  like  a  systematic,  or  what  may  be  called  rudiment- 
ally  organized,  form. 

5.  The  fifth  development  was  characterized  by  distinction 
of  climates  as  prevailing  in  different  latitudes,  and  by  warm 
and  cold  seasons,  as  owing  to  the  revolution  of  our  planet 
around  the  sun;  hence,  also,  by  new  kinds  of  geological  de- 
posits, and  higher  degrees  of  organic  life.  This  development 
was  comprised  in  the  period  commencing  with  the  New  Red 
Sandstone,  and  ending  with  the  close  of  the  Chalk  formation. 

The  records  of  the  general  conditions  of  this  period  are  very 
distinctly  preserved  upon  the  leaves  of  the  rocky  book.  On 
the  laminae  of  the  New  Red  Sandstone  rocks  in  various 
localities  (and  especially  in  the  valley  of  the  Connecticut 
River),  are  found  the  distinct  footprints  of  birds  of  various 
species.  These  appear  to  have  been  impressed  upon  the  sandy 
and  clayey  margin  of  an  ocean  at  low  tide,  and  to  have  been 
covered  up  by  successive  thin  layers  of  sand  and  clay  drifted 
in  by  the  swelling  tide.  On  the  same  rocks  occur  marks  whose 
angles  and  other  characteristics  clearly  prove  them  to  have 
been  made  by  frost.  They  are  in  form  exactly  identical  with 
those  which  are  now  produced  by  frost  in  the  mud  upon  the 
oorders  of  a  stream.  These  appear  to  have  been  covered  over 
and  preserved,  in  like  manner  with  the  tracks,  by  the  detritus 
swept  In  by  the  returning  tide.  But  it  is  noteworthy  that, 
although  these  track?    and    frost  maiks  occur  in   abundmoe 


1 42  O  BIG  IN     OF     THE     EAETII. 

above  and  below  each  other  in  the  same  system  of  rocks.  tki 
two  are  never  found  upon  the  same  lamina — as  though  the 
birds,  during  the  frosty  season,  were  entirely  absent,  having 
migrated  to  a  warmer  climate,  to  return  again  with  the  return 
of  summer. 

On  the  same  strata  are  also  sometimes  found  impressions 
which  could  only  have  been  made  by  the  pattering  of  rain- 
drops during  the  passage  of  a  small  shower-cloud;  and  the 
forms  of  these  sometimes  even  infallibly  indicate  the  course 
in  which  the  wind  was  blowing  at  the  time ! 

Here,  then,  is  the  earliest  distinct  indication  of  the  preva- 
lence of  atmospheric  conditions  somewhat  similar  to  those 
which  now  obtain  upon  the  earth's  surface.  We  find,  here, 
unmistakable  evidences  of  summer  and  winter,  warm  and  cold 
latitudes,  rain,  winds,  clouds,  and  sunshine — conditions  which 
clearly  could  not  have  existed  to  any  great  extent,  during  any 
previous  period. 

Concerning  the  relics  of  the  olden  time,  from  which  these 
atmospheric  and  terrestrial  conditions  are  inferred,  Professor 
Hitchcock  (to  whom  the  scientific  world  is  much  indebted  for 
bringing  them  to  light)  remarks:  "It  is  a  most  interesting 
thought,  that  while  millions  of  men,  who  have  striven  hard  to 
transmit  some  trace  of  their  existence  to  future  generations, 
have  sunk  into  utter  oblivion,  the  simple  footsteps  of  animals 
that  existed  thousands,  nay,  tens  of  thousands,  of  years  ago, 
should  remain  as  fresh  and  distinct  as  if  yesterday  impressed, 
even  though  nearly  every  other  vestige  of  their  existence  has 
vanished.  Nay.  still  more  strange  is  it,  that  even  the  patter- 
ing of  a  shower  at  that  distant  period,  should  have  left  marks 
equally  distinct,  and  registered  with  infallible  certainty  the 
direction  of  the  wind."* 

*  I'itchcock'9  Geology,  p.  155 


F  I  E  S  T     MAMMALIA.  113 

The  terrestrial  animals  of  this  period  were  almost  exclu 
sively  oviparous,  partaking  largely  of  the  sauroidal,  or  lizard 
like  type,  which  latter  remark  is  even  applicable  to  the  birds, 
Toward  the  close  of  the  period,  however,  an  animal  appeared 
which  may  be  regarded  as  a  transition  link  between  the 
oviparous  and  viviparous.  It  was  an  animal  of  the  class  Mar- 
su  pi  alia;  in  other  words,  an  animal  with  a  pouch,  like  that  of 
the  opossum,  or  kangaroo,  in  which  it  sheltered  and  nour- 
islicd  its  young  for  a  season  after  their  birth,  the  same 
being  yet  too  feeble  and  imperfectly  developed  to  endure 
exposure  to  the  outer  elements.  It  lias  hence  been  remarked 
that,  ''though  the  young  of  this  animal  were  born  alive,  they 
were  only  half  born,  as  it  were,"  and  needed  a  kind  of  sup- 
plementary gestation  to  fit  them  for  life  in  the  external 
world. 

Like  the  fifth  development  or  member  of  every  other  seven- 
fold series,  therefore,  this  is  characterized  by  the  assumption  of 
distinctness,  or  partition,  in  forms  and  gradations  of  forms, 
from  a  state  of  previous  and  comparative  indistinctness.  The 
princ'qUe  of  segregation  is  here  distinctly  observed,  the  same 
as  it  was  in  the  fifth  stage  of  the  universal  creation.  Each 
one  of  these  forms,  being  yet  transitional  and  incomplete,  is, 
as  it  were,  a  nucleated  point  in  the  previously  chaotic  materials 
and  their  involved  principles;  and  therefore  the  whole  devel- 
opment, being  the  second  of  the  Secondary  Trinity,  has  a  cer- 
tain correspondence  to  the  second  of  the  Primary  Trinity, 
which  was  characterized  by  a  nucleation  of  the  materials  of 
the  earth  as  a  whole. 

6.  The  sixth  stage  of  the  earth's  formation  was  comprised 
in  the  whole  period  commonly  termed  the  Tertiary  and  Dilu- 
vial periods.  It  commenced  immediately  after  that  remark- 
able marine,  terrestrial,  and  atmospheric  change  which  mus* 


144:  ORIGIN     OF     THE     EARTH. 

necessarily  have  accompanied  the  great  Chalk  formation,  a  -a 
closed  immediately  prior  to  the  commencement  of  the  present 
or  Alluvial  period.  It  was  distinguished  from  the  previous 
stage  of  terrestrial  developments,  mainly  by  its  lacustrine, 
volcanic,  and  fluvatile  conditions,  and  by  the  erosive,  leveling, 
and  harmonizing  operations  which,  especially  near  the  close  of 
the  period,  occurred  on  the  earth's  surface.  These  conditions 
were  evidently  an  improvement  upon  previous  ones.  The 
earth  became  more  extensively  diversified  by  mountains  and 
valleys,  forests,  fields,  and  running  streams.  The  quantity  of 
upland  and  fertile  soil  was  greatly  increased  ;  the  atmosphere 
was  freed  from  previous  pestilential  vapors ;  the  climates  were 
rendered  more  salubrious,  and  all  things  were  more  compat- 
ible with  the  existence  of  higher  species  in  the  organic  king 
doms.  Accordingly,  even  in  the  lower  strata  of  this  formatioi, 
there  are  found  the  remains  of  animals  of  decidedly  mam- 
miferous  species.  These  are  of  the  order  Pachydsrmata 
(thick-skinned),  and  of  comparatively  low  organization.  But  as 
conditions  advanced  and  new  strata  were  deposited,  higher 
species  successively  made  their  appearance,  organic  life  all  the 
while  assuming  more  analogy  to  existing  types,  until,  toward 
the  close  of  the  period,  there  was,  in  many  instances,  an  actual 
shading  off  into  species  which  now  inhabit  the  earth.  This 
latter  remark  is  equally  applicable  to  the  vegetable,  as  it  is  to 
the  animal,  kingdom. 

About  the  close  of  this  period,  there  appears  to  have  been 
a  remarkable  fall  of  atmospheric  temperature,  accompanied 
by  a  submergence  of  the  greater  portion  of  land  in  the 
northern  and  temperate  regions,  in  seas  filled  with  floating 
icebergs.  These  icebergs,  frequently  reaching  to  the  bottom 
of  the  ocean,  have  scraped  along  over  the  earth's  surface, 
clashed  violently  aga'nst  its  prominences,  torn  fragments  of 


DILUVIAL     AGENCY.  145 

rock  from  their  original  beds,  pushed  them  along  before  them, 
the  friction  rounding  off  their  angles,  and  reducing  many  of 
them  to  sand  and  pebbles.  Sometimes  large  masses  of  rock 
would  get  wedged  in  between,  or  thrown  upon  the  tops  of, 
blocks  or  projections  of  ice,  and  would  be  floated  to  great  dis- 
tances and  scattered  over  the  country.  Boulder  rocks  which 
must  have  been  transported  in  some  such  way,  have  been 
identified  with  rocks  "in  place*'  to  which  they  must  have  orig- 
inally belonged,  from  a  few  hundred  yards  to  several  hundred 
miles  to  the  north  of  where  they  were  found.  Sometimes 
boulders  of  great  magnitude  have  been  carried  over  steep  and 
high  mountains,  and  are  not  unfrequently  found  lodged  upor. 
their  summits  and  scattered  over  their  southern  declivities ; 
and  the  long-continued  passage  of  rocky  fragments  and  detri- 
tus transported  in  this  way,  has  worn  scratches,  and  sometimes 
deep  groves  in  the  mountain  rock,  all  of  which  have  the  same 
general  direction,  which  is  nearly  north  and  south — proving 
that  such  was  the  general  direction  cf  the  current.  By  this 
operation,  which  was  evidently  long-continued,  rugged  mount. 
ain  escarpments  were  reduced;  deep  hollows  were  filled  up, 
and  the  face  of  Nature  was  made  to  assume  fairer  proportions. 
In  short,  the  terrestrial  structure  being  generally  completed, 
this  final  operation  (to  illustrate  a  great  thing  by  a  diminutive 
comparison)  seems  to  have  been  the  smoothing  and  sand- 
papering process  to  which  it  was  subjected,  before  being 
applied  to  its  ultimate  and  principal  use  as  the  habitation  of 
its  future  tenant,  man. 

This  superficiar  smootmng  and  rounding  of  the  earth,  and 
its  completion  as  a  habitable  globe,  oemg  tne  third  member  of 
the  Secondary  Trinity  of  terrestrial  developments,  manifestly 
bears  a  certain  correspondence  to  the  third  member  of  the 
Primary  Trinity,  or  the  granito-aqueous  development,  which 

13 


14:6  ORIGIN     OF     THE     F.UTH. 

brought  the  earth  to  completeness,  considered   merely  as  a 
planetary  sphere. 

7.  The  seventh  terrestrial  development,  which  now  ensues, 
is  that  which  is  going  on  at  the  present  time.  It  is  character- 
ized by  sedimentary  deposits  from  existing  waters,  and  by 
the  oceanic,  terrestrial,  and  atmospheric  changes  which  are  now 
imperceptibly  going  on;  and  its  ushering  in  was  accompanied 
by  the  introduction  of  man,  together  with  most  of  the  animals 
and  plants  of  existing  species.  This,  therefore,  is  the  grand 
culminating  point  of  all  terrestrial  creations,  and  brings  the 
seven-fold  progressive  series  to  a  completion.  It  is  the  grand 
point  that  was  aimed  at  in  the  beginning  of  beginnings,  and 
the  great  object  the  accomplishment  of  which  each  inter 
mediate  movement  was  intended  to  subserve ;  and  now  that 
\t  is  attained,  the  previous  conflicts  of  elements — the  clashings 
of  an  impetuous  nature,  as  if  reaching  forward  and  striving 
impatiently  for  the  attainment  of  its  final  destiny,  are  lulled 
into  repose.  The  heavings  of  the  earthquake  and  the  spout- 
ings  of  subterranean  fire  through  the  broken  strata  which  were 
so  devastating  in  previous  ages,  have  now  in  a  great  measure 
subsided,  or  occur  only  in  limited  districts  and  at  long  inter- 
vals. Mountain  and  plain,  forest  and  field,  ocean  and  atmos- 
phere now  testify  their  common  satisfaction  with  the  end 
which  has  been  gloriously  achieved ;  and  man,  undisturbed, 
proceeds  to  beautify  and  adorn  the  earth,  and,  with  no  other 
interruptions  than  such  as  are  due  to  his  own  folly,  pursues  his 
rounds  of  progress  toward  a  destiny  still  more  glorious  and 
sublime ! 

Of  course  the  foregoing  remarks  in  reference  to  the  genesis 
of  the  earth,  are  to  be  considered  only  in  the  light  of  a 
gcneml  survey  of  the  subject  to  which  they  relate,  and  as 
being   intended    merely  t<    establish  general    principles   and 


OI/E     METHOD     AND     CONCLtJSIONS.         147 

analogies  to  be  used  as  aids  in  discovering  or  confirming  ul- 
terior and  corresponding  truths.  Such  being  our  main  object, 
we  have  abstained  from  descriptions  of  non-essential  minutiae 
which  may  be  found  in  the  geological  books.  We  have,  how 
ever,  recognized  all  facts  which  have  any  essential  bearing  on 
the  subject  of  our  speculations,  and  by  the  aid  of  these  facts, 
and  of  the  general  laws  of  causation  and  analogy  which  govern 
them,  and  necessarily  connect  them  with  corresponding  ante- 
cedents and  sequences,  we  have  inferred  the  general  nature  of 
those  necessary  links  of  the  system  which  are  lost  to  sensuous 
perception.  Hence  we  have  commenced  with  descriptions  of 
conditions  far  more  primitive  than  those  from  wThich  geological 
writers  in  general  have  started,  and  by  the  aid  of  the  corre- 
spondences existing  between  one  system  of  developments  and 
another,  as  exhibited  in  the  law  of  the  seven-fold  series,  we 
have  endeavored  to  exhibit  the  roots  of  the  tree  of  Geology 
as  growing  upon  the  soil  of  Astronomy. 

If  the  whole  subject,  as  thus  unfolded,  exhibits  a  self-sup- 
porting and  self-proving  consistency,  it  in  no  small  degree 
tends  to  establish  the  correctness  and  importance  of  the  method 
of  reasoning  from  which  it  rece'ves  its  support. 


CHAPTEE    XIII. 

THE   GEOLOGICAL   AND   MOSAIC   REVELATIONS. 

One  of  the  first  thoughts  which  strikes  the  mind  as  it  con- 
templates the  foregoing  view  of  the  natural  history  of  our 
planet  is,  that  the  developments  spoken  of  could  have  been 
accomplished  only  in  periods  too  vast  for  human  conception. 
Admitting  that  the  process  of  unfolding  which  finally  resulted 
in  bringing  our  globe  to  its  present  habitable  and  mature 
state,  commenced  when  its  materials  were  all  in  a  state  of  dif- 
fused igneous  gas,  it  is  utterly  beyond  the  power  of  man  to 
conceive  the  period  which  must  thence  have  elapsed  before 
these  materials  were  so  far  contracted  as  to  admit  of  the  first 
superficial  granitic  incrustation.  But  after  these  untold 
myriads  of  ages  had  quietly  rolled  into  the  depths  of  the  past, 
sedimentary  materials,  which,  according  to  statements  of  Dr. 
John  Pye  Smith,  as  the  results  of  careful  measurements,  must 
have  had  an  aggregate  thickness  of  not  less  than  twenty  miles, 
took  place,  for  the  most  part  quietly,  at  the  bottom  of  the 
ocean.  These  materials,  including  the  remains  of  plants  and 
animals  of  now  extinct  species,  and  whole  races  of  which  were 
successively  brought  into  being  and  swept  away,  were  after- 
ward slowly  consolidated  into  the  form  of  the  existing  fossillif 
erous  rocks. 

As  to  the  number  of  years  or  centuries  which  must  have 
elapsed  during  this  mighty  operation,  we  have  the  means  of 


ANTIQUITY     OF     OTTR     GLOBE.  149 

making,  in  our  calculations,  only  a  remote  and  indefinite  ap- 
proximation. During  comparatively  short  periods  of  violent 
physical  revolution,  conglomerates  and  other  coarse  and  indis- 
tinctly stratified  rocks  may,  in  some  instances,  have  been  de- 
posited with  comparative  rapidity.  Older  rocks  were  prob- 
ably disintegrated  by  the  combined  agency  of  heat  and  water, 
and  ground  to  fragments  by  volcanic  and  marine  agitation ; 
and,  by  violent  currents,  probably  thus  generated,  they  may 
have  been  carried  to  lower  levels,  and  sometimes  formed  thick 
deposits  in  comparatively  short  periods.  But  these  instances 
are  only  exceptions  to  the  general  rule,  while  far  the  greater 
proportion  of  the  stratified  rocks  present  unmistakable  evi- 
dence of  having  been  deposited  in  quiet  waters.  And  these 
deposits  could  not,  in  general,  have  accumulated  much  more 
rapidly  than  similar  ones  which  are  going  on  at  the  present 
time.  Now,  it  is  said  that  the  lakes  of  Scotland  shoal,  by 
sedimentary  depositions,  only  at  the  rate  of  about  six  inches 
in  a  century.*  Making  all  reasonable  allowance  for  the  su- 
perior activity  of  early  disintegrating  and  depositing  forces, 
the  period  which  must  have  been  consumed  during  the  depo- 
sition of  materials  which  have  formed  rocks  of  twenty  miles 
in  perpendicular  thickness,  can  be  estimated  only  by  millions 
of  years,  especially  when  we  take  into  account  the  long 
periods  of  super-marine  elevation  and  repose  which  sometimes 
must  have  intervened  between  the  close  of  one  formation  and 
me  commencement  of  the  succeeding  one. 

Oar  conception  of  the  immensity  of  the  periods  of  these  de- 
posits is  augmented  when  we  consider  that  beds  of  rocks 
of  great  thickness,  and  sometimes  whole  mountains,  many 
thousand  feet  high,  are  made  up  almost  entirely  of  sea-shells 
and  other  organic  matter — these  mountains  having  originally 

*  Ilitchcock".}  Geology,  p.  168. 


150  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

constituted  the  sea-beds,  from  which  position  they  were  sub 
sequently  elevated  by  subterranean  forces.  The  animals  and 
plants,  whose  remains  are  thus  preserved,  "  must  have  lived 
and  died  "  (says  Professor  Hitchcock)  "  on  or  near  the  spot 
where  they  are  found ;  while  it  was  only  now  and  then  that 
there  was  current  enough  to  drift  them  any  considerable 
distance,  or  break  them  into  fragments ;  *  *  *  and  frequently 
all  the  shells  found  in  a  layer  of  rock,  lie  in  the  same  position 
which  similar  shells  now  assume  upon  the  bottom  of  ponds, 
lakes,  and  the  ocean ;  that  is,  with  a  particular  part  of  the 
shell  uppermost. "* 

Nor  will  we  be  astonished  at  these  evidences  of  the  high 
antiquity  of  our  globe,  when  we  consider  the  immense  periods 
which  seem  to  be  consumed  in  its  appointed  movements  in 
space.  For  if  there  is  any  dependence  to  be  placed  upon  the 
observations  and  mathematical  reasonings  of  Maedler  and 
others,  the  whole  solar  system  is  rapidly  moving  around  a  re- 
mote center,  in  an  orbit  so  vast,  that  a  single  revolution  can 
not  be  accomplished  in  less  than  eighteen  millions  of  years ! 
Considering  this  period  as  the  annus  magnus,  or  great  year  of 
our  planet  and  the  family  of  orbs  to  which  it  belongs,  it  may 
have  accomplished  several  of  these  grand  revolutions  since  it 
assumed  an  individual  existence,  and  still  be  only  in  the  first 
years  of  its  existence — an  existence  which  may  continue 
through  as  many  such  revolutions  as  there  are  days  or  hours 
in  the  ordinary  life  of  man !  In  fact,  in  the  development  of 
the  plans  of  an  infinite  God,  who  has  a  whole  eternity  as  his 
working  period,  it  may  emphatically  be  said,  that  "a  thousand 
years  are  but  as  one  day." 

But  these  wonderful  deductions  from  scientific  facts  have 

*  Hitchcock's  Geology,  p.  SS,  90 ;  also,  Silliman's  Appendix  to  Bakewell'8  Geology, 
».  544. 


TRUTHS     MUST     HARMONIZE.  151 

given  alarm  to  many  theologians,  who  have  considered  them 
as  conflicting  with  the  Mosaic  account  of  creation,  as  recorded 
in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis.  This  account  has  by  them 
been  considered  as  circumscribing  the  period  of  creation  to  six 
literal  days,  during  which  it  is  supposed,  that  not  only  the 
earth  and  all  it  contains,  but  the  sun  and  planets,  if  not  even 
the  fixed  stars,  were  brought  into  being.  They  have  hence 
looked  upon  the  statements  and  speculations  of  geologists 
with  disfavor,  supposing  that  their  tendency  was  to  under- 
mine the  authority  of  the  Bible.  The  present  treatise,  there- 
fore, would  be  incomplete  were  I  pass  over  entirely  unnoticed 
the  question  pending  between  geologists  and  theologians. 
This  question,  however,  I  can  now  only  consider  in  brief,  ex- 
hibiting merely  the  general  aspects  of  the  controversy  as  they 
appear  to  me. 

But  before  entering  directly  into  the  merits  of  the  question, 
I  would  premise  that  all  truths  must  be  consistent  with  each 
other,  whether  found  in  the  Bible  or  in  Nature.  If,  therefore, 
there  is  any  conflict  unmistakably  manifest  between  the  teach- 
ings of  these  two  authorities,  it  inevitably  follows  that  one  or 
the  other  must  be  untrue;  and  the  untruth  is  most  rationally 
predicable  of  that  which  is  most  liable  to  be  tinctured  by 
human  invention. 

Now,  the  system  of  creation,  though  subjective  and  phe- 
nomenal when  considered  in  relation  to  God,  is  positive  and 
independent  when  considered  in  relation  to  man.  The  pages 
of  the  rocky  book  were  inscribed  by  no  human  amanuensis, 
and  contain  none  of  the  whims  and  errors  of  perverted  human 
thought.  When  correctly  interpreted,  therefore,  they  are  to 
be  relied  on  as  infallible,  and  no  theological  teachings  which 
contradict  them  can  be  considered  as  the  teachings  of  the 
same  God  who  wrote  those  imperishable  pages  with  his  own 


L52  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES, 

hand.  This  consideration  forces  the  conclusion,  however  re- 
luctant we  may  be  to  admit  it,  that  that  system  of  theology 
which  can  be  thrown  into  a  trepidation  by  the  unfolding  of  a 
fact  in  nature,  and  which,  in  any  case,  treats  with  hostility,  or 
even  with  disrespect,  the  positive  deductions  of  science,  cai» 
not,  thus  far,  have  any  counterpart  in  the  mind  of  that  Being 
who  is  the  Author  alike  of  nature  and  of  heaven,  and  of  the 
one  harmonious  system  of  truth  which,  in  various  and  cor- 
responding degrees,  pervades  and  constitutes  the  life  and 
law  of  all  things. 

True  theology,  therefore,  has  no  more  favors  to  ask  of  true 
science,  than  the  latter  has  to  ask  of  the  former.  Neither  one 
of  these,  in  any  case,  is  alarmed  by,  but  always  rejoices  in, 
any  additional  development  in  the  other,  because  the  two  are 
brothers  in  affectionate  unity,  and  each  one- contributes  to  the 
other  of  its  own  riches  and  strength,  and  neither  can  languish 
without  weakening  the  other  in  a  corresponding  degree. 

Some  theologians,  desirous  of  maintaining  their  preconceiv- 
ed interpretations  of  the  first  chapter  in  Genesis,  have  argued, 
that  since  it  is  possible  for  God  to  do  all  things,  it  was 
possible  for  him,  with  a  single  stroke  of  his  omnipotent 
power,  to  create  the  myriads  of  sea-shells,  the  impressions  of 
plants,  and  the  skeletons  of  the  higher  animals,  in  their  pro- 
gressive order  of  superposition,  in  the  rocks,  just  as  we  now 
find  them  !  This  might  be  admitted,  if  it  could  first  be  con 
ceived  as  possible  for  God  to  have  had  a  previous  will  and 
purpose  in  the  generation  of  forms  which,  in  such  a  case, 
would  have  been,  to  human  conceptions,  so  evidently  useless  ; 
• — and  so,  with  the  same  qualification,  it  may  be  admitted 
that  God  might  have  created  Herculaneum  under  the  beds  of 
lava,  and  the  Egyptian  mummies  in  their  tombs,  just  as  we 
uow  find  them : — but  to  consider  it  in  the  least  degree  probable 


PRINCIPLES     OF     INTERPRETATION.        153 

that  God  actually  did  do  either  of  these  things,  would  be  to 
set  all  analogy  at  defiance,  and  to  take  an  everlasting  leave 
of  those  guides  to  truth  to  which  the  human  mind  is  largely 
indebted  for  all  of  its  substantial  progress.  If,  however,  we 
abstain  from  such  a  violation  of  the  God-established  laws  of 
our  rational  nature,  we  must  admit  in  their  full  force  the 
manifest  indications  of  fossilology  and  lithology,  in  reference 
to  the  immense  periods  which  must  have  elapsed  during  the 
genesis  of  our  globe,  and  of  tr*1  various  and  successive  races 
of  living  organisms  by  which  it  was  tenanted  prior  to  the 
introduction  of  man. 

Having  the  utmost  confidence  in  the  inherent  strength  and 
invulnerability  of  true  theology,  therefore,  we  affirm,  without 
any  delicacy  or  evasion,  that  if  the  six  days  of  creation, 
spoken  of  by  Moses,  mean  only  six  times  twenty-four  hours 
of  our  time,  then  the  chronology  of  the  stages  of  creation,  as 
given  by  him,  is  manifestly  untrue.  But  with  a  perfect 
willingness  to  find  the  account,  true  or  untrue,  as  the  case 
may  be,  let  us  examine  the  account  fearlessly  and  without 
reserve,  and  endeavor  to  discover  its  real  import. 

In  order  to  do  justice  in  our  interpretation  of  any  writer's 
language,  we  must,  of  course,  have  a  due  regard  to  the  mean- 
ing which  context,  the  nature  of  the  subject,  the  circumstances, 
objects,  and  personal  condition,  of  the  writer,  and  the  modes 
of  speech  prevalent  among  the  class  of  writers  to  which  he 
belongs,  conspire  to  fix  upon  his  language.  This  rule  is  so 
obviously  true,  that  no  candid  mind  will  fail  to  recognize  its 
propriety  at  once.  Now,  the  book  of  Genesis  (as  is  the  case 
with  other  books  of  the  Bible)  w\is  written  in  an  age  and  a 
country  in  which  symbolical  language  was  much  in  vogue.  Ifc 
also  cla'ms,  like  other  sacred  books,  to  have  been  written  by 
a  spiritually  illuminated  person,  and  for  spiritual  purposes; 


154:  GEOLOGY      AND     MOSES. 

end,  admitting  these  claims,  its  peculiar  forms  of  thought  and 
expression  must  be  admitted  to  have  been  governed,  to  some 
extent,  by  spiritual  laws ;  and  according  to  these  same  laws, 
therefore,  they  must  be  interpreted.  Now,  one  way,  and,  in 
tome  instances,  the  only  feasible  way,  of  conveying  in  human 
language  a  deep  interior  idea  is,  by  presenting  it  in  the  verbal 
imagery  of  some  familiar  exterior  fact,  which  embraces  within 
itself  the  identical  principle  which  is  involved  in  such  interior 
idea.  That  this  rule  was  observed  in  all  the  parabolic,  and 
much  of  the  prophetic  and  descriptive  language  of  the  Bible, 
no  one  who  is  familiar  with  the  contents  of  that  book  can 
deny. 

Now,  let  it  be  observed,  that  if  Moses  himself,  through 
spiritual  or  Divine  impressions,  or  any  other  means,  had  pos- 
sessed any  adequate  idea  of  the  immense  periods  which  Ge 
ology  proves  to  have  elapsed  between  the  commencement  of 
the  creation  of  our  globe  and  the  introduction  of  man  upon  its 
surface,  it  would  have  been  impossible  for  him  to  have  con- 
veyed to  the  unenlightened  minds  of  the  semi-barbarians  of  his 
age  and  nation  any  adequate  idea  of  the  actual  truth  of  the 
case ;  and  any  attempt  to  do  this,  would  only  have  been  pro- 
ductive of  misapprehension,  and  would  probably  have  gene- 
rated some  of  the  wildest  forms  of  superstition.  The  probability 
is,  however,  that  Moses  himself  had  no  adequate  conception 
of  the  immensity  of  the  actual  periods  of  creation ;  and  con- 
sidering him,  according  to  his  claims,  as  a  revelator  merely, 
of  what  was  revealed  to  him,  this  admission  may"  be  made 
without  affecting  the  truthfulness  of  the  representations  which 
were  by  him  recorded  as  he  himself  received  them. 

These  considerations  strongly  favor  the  belief,  even  a  priori^ 
that  any  truthful  record  of  the  natural  history  of  creation 
made  in  those«days,  and  especially  for  spiritual  purposes,  and 


155 

by  a  spiritual  teacher,  would  have  been  couched  in  correspon 
dential  and  spiritual  language,  by  which  the  principles  and 
spirit;  of  the  immense  truths  more  interiorly  involved,  were 
brought  into  a  diminished  form  of  embodiment,  and  thug 
adapted  to  the  rudimentary  intellects  to  which  they  were  ad 
dressed.  Now,  a  "  day"  involves  the  principle  of,  and  hence 
spiritually  means,  one  complete  revolution.  But  as  each  com- 
plete revolution,  whether  requiring  a  long  or  short  period,  only 
involves  the  same  principle  or  spirit,  why  may  not  the  great 
revolutions  or  cycles  of  operation  which  comprise  the  different 
periods  in  our  earth's  physical  history  be,  in  spiritual  language, 
called  so  many  days  1 

That  the  word  "  day"  is,  in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis,  used 
in  this  spiritual  sense,  without  necessarily  signifying  any  thing 
but  the  principle  or  spirit  of  a  day  (or  a  complete  revolution 
of  indefinite  duration),  is  further  evident  from  the  manner  in 
which  the  word  is  used  in  many  other  passages,  not  only  by 
Moses,  but  by  other  sacred  writers.  Thus  we  read  m  Genesis 
ii.  4,  5,  "  These  are  the  generations  of  the  heavens  and  the 
earth  when  they  were  created,  in  the  day  that  the  Lord  God 
made  the  earth  and  the  heavens,  and  every  plant  of  the  field," 
etc.  Here  the  six  minor  revolutions  or  days  are  comprised  in 
one  grand  revolution  or  day,  in  the  same  way  as  several  small 
circles  or  periods  may  be  comprehended  in  one  large  one. 
The  occurrence  of  the  word  "  day"  in  this  enlarged  sense  here, 
effectually  precludes  the  right  of  every  one  to  circumscribe  its 
meaning  necessarily  to  a  period  of  twenty-four  hours,  as  it  oc- 
curs in  the  previous  chapter  in  reference  to  the  same  subject. 

Among  the  numerous  other  examples  of  a  similar  usage  of 
the  term  "  day,"  which  may  be  found  in  other  portions  of  the 
sacred  writings,  let  the  following  suffice  for  our  present  pur- 
pose :  "  And  in   that  day  there  shall  be  a  root  of  Jesse  which 


156  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

shall  stand  as  an  ensign  of  the  people;  to  it  shall  the  Gentiles 
seek  :  and  his  rest  shall  be  glorious.  And  it  shal]  come  to 
pass  in  that  day,  that  the  Lord  shall  set  His  hand  again  a 
second  time  to  recover  the  remnant  of  His  people."  (Isa.  xl. 
10,  11.)  "And  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  that  day,  that  the 
mountains  shall  drop  down  new  wine,  and  the  hills  shall  flow 
with  milk."  (Joel  iii.  18.)  And  Jesus  says,  "Abraham  re- 
joiced to  see  my  day  ;  and  he  saw  it,  and  was  glad."  (John 
viii.  56.)  In  neither  of  these  passages  is  it  possible  to  restrict 
the  meaning  of  the  word  "  day"  to  the  period  of  the  diurnal 
revolution  of  the  earth.  In  candor,  therefore,  it  must  be 
acknowledged  to  be  at  least  extremely  probable  that  the  word 
"  day"  is  used  in  an  equally  enlarged  and  spiritual  sense  in  the 
equally  spiritual  language  of  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis — 
especially  as  there  are  so  many  other  facts  and  circumstances 
to  corroborate  such  an  interpretation. 

Considering  the  six  days  of  creation,  then,  as  expressing  six 
periods  of  very  long  duration,  let  us  inquire  whether  the  inci- 
dents and  characteristics  of  these  periods  as  described  by  Moses, 
bear  any  similarity  to  the  incidents  in  the  physical  history  of 
our  globe,  as  revealed  by  geological  science ;  and  whether  the 
Mosaic  classification  of  periods  and  operations  possesses  that 
evidence  of  truthfulness  which  consists  in  a  conformity  to  the 
law  of  the  three-fold  and  seven-fold  correspondential  series. 

In  a  previous  general  survey,  ranging  from  the  origin  to  the 
full  maturity  of  our  globe,  we  have  seen  that  there  were  seven 
grand  periods  or  stages  in  its  development,  as  there  are  seven 
stages  in  the  development  and  compartments  in  the  constitu- 
tion of  all  perfect  systems.  These  periods,  however,  are  not 
throughout  exactly  coincident  with  the  periods  described  by 
Moses,  inasmuch  as  the  two  descriptions  embrace  subjects 
wmewhat  different.    Is  our  general  geological  survey  we  have 


MOEK     OF     FIRST     DAT,  157 

endeavored  to  unfold  the  history  of  the  developments  of  the 
earth  as  such,  speaking  of  the  vegetable  and  animal  creations 
only  incidentally ;  while  the  object  of  Moses  appears  to  have 
been  to  speak  of  the  successive  organization  of  those  outer 
forms  and  conditions  with  which  man  is  immediately,  either 
sensibly  or  spiritually,  connected.  Hence,  Moses  passes  over 
the  first  two  stages  of  creation,  or  the  chaotic-gaseous  and  the 
nucleated  stages,  mentioned  in  Our  generalization,  with  the 
simple  and  comprehensive  remark,  that  "  In  the  beginning  God 
created  the  heaven  and  the  earth,"  and  commences  his  main 
description  at  an  epoch  when  the  earth  was  probably  in  a 
state  of  imperfect  superficial  consolidation,  and  when  much  of 
the  water  of  the  ocean  was  still  diffused,  as  vapor,  in  the  thick 
and  turbid  atmosphere.  The  earth  is  hence  described  as  at 
that  period  "  without  form  and  void" — that  is,  without  arrange- 
ment, and  vacant — "  and  darkness  was  upon  the  face  of  the 
deep."  This  "  darkness"  may  be  conceived  to  have  been  a 
natural  consequence  of  the  state  of  the  atmosphere,  which  was 
probably  still  so  thick  as  not  to  be  easily  distinguishable  from 
the  fluid  portions  of  the  earth,  and  from  the  water  which  rested 
upon  its  surface,  in  which  condition  it  would,  of  course,  have 
been  completely  impervious  to  the  solar  rays.  The  first  Di- 
vine operation  naturally  required,  therefore,  was  to  produce 
changes  in,  and  precipitations  from,  the  aqueous  portions  of 
the  atmosphere,  such  as  would  admit  of  the  descent  of  some 
degree  of  solar  light  to  the  earth's  surface.  This  operation 
is  described  by  Moses,  in  saying,  "The  Spirit  of  God  moved 
upon  the  face  of  the  waters  :  and  God  said,  Let  there  be  light : 
and  there  was  light."  This,  according  to  the  account,  consti- 
tuted the  work  of  the  first  day.  And  here  it  may  be  remarked, 
once  for  all,  that  th3  phrase,  "the  evening  and  the  morning," 
which  is    used  as  the    standing   synonym   of  the   different 

14 


158  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

"  days"  in  this  account,  seems  to  stand  simply  for  the  begin 
ning  and  close  of  the  different  periods — a  use  of  language 
similar  to  that  employed  by  us  when  we  speak  of  the  "  eve"  or 
"morn"  of  a  "new  era.5' 

It  is  said,  that  "  God  called  the  light  Day,  and  the  darkness 
He  called  Night."  In  this  passage,  the  words  "day"  and 
"night"  are  probably  (though  not  necessarily)  used  in  their 
ordinary  acceptation,  and  point  to  a  revolution  of  the  earth  on 
its  axis,  and  a  successive  illumination  of  its  sides  by  the  sun. 
But  owing  to  the  thick  atmospheric  vapors  which  still  con- 
tinued to  prevail  to  a  great  extent,  the  sun  would  doubtless 
have  still  been  invisible  to  a  spectator,  could  such  have  been 
placed  upon  the  earth's  surface,  and  the  amount  of  solar  light 
that  could  have  penetrated  to  the  earth,  was  probably  much 
less  than  is  now  received,  even  through  the  thickest  and  dark- 
est clouds. 

The  next  work  seems  to  have  consisted  in  producing  further 
changes  and  regulations  in  the  atmosphere,  by  which  a  more 
distinct  line  of  demarcation  was  established  between  the  waters 
intended  to  be  suspended  in  the  air,  and  those  designed  to 
preserve  a  more  condensed  form  upon  the  earth's  surface. 
Moses,  being  obliged  to  make  the  most  of  the  few  words  which 
his  primitive  and  meager  language  afforded,  describes  this 
work  by  saying,  "And  God  said,  Let  there  be  a  firmament  in 
the  midst  of  the  waters,  and  let  it  divide  the  waters  from  the 
waters,"  Hebraists  tell  us  that  the  word  "firmament"  is  a 
very  improper  rendering  of  the  original  word,  which  signifies 
simply  an  expanse  or  sjxice ;  "Consequently,"  (says  Dr. 
Clarke)  "  that  circumbient  space  or  expansion,  separating  the 
clouds,  which  are  in  the  higher  regions  of  it,  from  the  seas, 
etc.,  which  are  below  it."  During  the  high  temperature  of 
the  earth's  surface,  whi  :h  Geology  proves  to  have  prevailed  in 


SECOND     AND     TIIIKD     DAYS.  159 

those  early  times,  there  was  probably  every  intermediate  gra- 
dation between  the  most  dense  fluid  and  the  most  expanded 
vapor,  the  fluid  and  aeriform  substances  having  no  very 
marked  line  of  distinction.  While  such  was  the  case,  the  "  cir- 
cumambient space'5  supposed,  could  have  had  no  distinct  exist- 
ence. A  physical  change  which  established  the  water,  at. 
mosphere,  and  aqueous  vapor  and  clouds  respectively  as 
such,  was  of  course  the  next  necessary  step  in  creation's  pro- 
gress ;  and  this  is  all  that  appears  to  be  alluded  to  in  the  passage 
before  us  as  constituting  the  work  of  the  second  period  or 
"day." 

It  was  probably  during  the  period  comprised  within  this 
day,  that  the  transition  rocks  beneath  the  coal  measures  were 
deposited.  These  contain  the  remains  of  animals  and  plants 
of  low  types,  which  are  almost  exclusively  marine.  But  to 
the  creation  of  these,  Moses  seems  to  make  no  allusion,  which 
fact  will  not  excite  particular  surprise,  when  we  consider  their 
comparative  unimportance  to  the  grand  object  which  he  had  in 
view,  which  was  simply  to  describe  how  the  physical  structure 
and  conditions  by  which  man  is  more  obviously  surrounded, 
2am  e  to  exist. 

The  next  work  consisted  in  the  partition  of  land  and  water 
(or  the  elevation  of  the  former),  and  the  development  of  ter- 
restrial vegetation.  "And  God  said,  Let  the  waters  under 
the  heaven  be  gathered  together,  and  let  the  dry  land  ap- 
pear :  and  it  was  so.  .  .  .  And  God  said,  Let  the  earth  bring 
forth  grass,  the  herb  yielding  seed,  and  the  fruit  tree  yield- 
ing fruit  after  his  kind,  whose  seed  is  in  itself  upon  the  earth : 
and  it  was  so."  This  was  the  work  of  the  third  great  period 
or  day,  and  manifests  a  surprising  agreement  with  the  events 
of  the  period  of  the  great  Coal  Formation.  The  universal 
preyaience  of  almost  exclusively  mtrine,  and  the  almost  total 


160  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

absence  of  terrestrial,  fossils  in  the  previously  deposited  rocks, 
proves  that  the  ocean,  up  to  this  time,  covered  nearly  the 
whole  surface  ol  the  earth — which  is  in  exact  agreement  with 
the  Mosaic  record,  which  implies  that  the  partition  of  land  and 
water  was  not  made  until  that  period.  But  large  areas  of  land 
being  then  slightly  elevated  above  the  level  of  the  waters, 
these,  as  another  strong  corroboration  of  the  record,  were 
covered  by  a  profuse  vegetation,  which  subsequently  became 
converted  into  the  immense  beds  of  mineral  coal  now  found 
to  be  so  essential  to  the  physical  comfort  and  social  progress 
of  the  human  race. 

The  next  work  is  spoken  of  by  the  sacred  cosmogonist  in 
the  following  terms :  "  And  God  said,  Let  there  be  lights  in 
the  firmament  of  heaven,  to  divide  the  day  from  the  night ; 
and  let  them  be  for  signs  and  for  seasons,  and  for  days  and 
years.  And  let  them  be  for  lights  in  the  firmament  of  the 
heaven  to  give  light  upon  the  earth :  and  it  was  so.  And 
God  made  two  great  lights:  the  greater  light  to  rule  the  day, 
and  the  lesser  light  to  rule  the  night:  he  made  the  stars 
also." 

To  superficial  readers,  this  passage  has  seemed  exceedingly 
paradoxical.  The  supposition  that  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars, 
had  no  existence  until  the  comparative  atom  which  forms  this 
earth,  had  attained  to  the  advanced  stage  of  its  development, 
previously  described,  is,  with  any  interpretation  of  the  word 
"  day,"  so  unphilosophical  and  unreasonable  as  to  utterly 
defy  intelligent  belief.  Criticism,  however,  has  shown  that 
the  translation  of  the  passage  before  us,  does  injustice  to  the 
original,  which  does  not  necessarily  mean  that  the  heavenly 
bodies  were  not  created  until  the  fourth  day.  Professoi 
Hitchcock,  who  is  a  learned  theologian  as  well  as  geologist. 
says,  upon  this  point :  "  If  it  be  objected  that,  according  to 


WORK      OF     FOURTH     DA*T.  161 

Moses,  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars  were  not  created  till  the 
fourth  day,  it  may  be  replied,  that  a  more  just  interpretation 
of  his  language  shows  his  meaning  to  be,  not  that  the  heavenly 
bodies  were  created  on  the  fourth  day,  but  that  they  were 
then  first  appointed  to  serve  their  present  offices ;  and  that 
tliey  might  have  been  in  existence  through  countless  ages." 

Admitting  such  to  be  the  true  meaning  of  the  passage,  we 
find,  again,  that  the  record  marvelously  coincides  with  the 
indication  of  geological  facts.  In  our  previous  survey  of  the 
natural  history  of  the  globe,  we  saw  conclusive  evidence  that 
up  to  the  close  of  the  Coal  Period,  a  nearly  uniform  tempera- 
ture prevailed  upon  the  surface  of  the  earth  in  all  latitudes, 
and  that  there  could  have  been  no  distinction  of  warm  and 
cold  seasons.  This  is  evident  from  the  fact,  that  the  rocks 
of  that  period,  in  all  latitudes,  contain  the  fossils  of  plants  and 
animals  analogous  only  to  those  which  now  flourish  between 
the  tropics.  It  is  manifest  that  such  a  state  of  climate  could 
not  have  been  governed,  in  any  great  degree,  by  the  rays  of 
the  sun,  which  vary  so  much  as  to  their  intensity,  in  the  dif- 
ferent latitudes ;  and  hence,  as  remarked  in  our  previous 
generalization,  the  sun's  rays,  during  the  Coal  and  previous 
periods,  could  not  yet  have  penetrated  the  atmosphere,  thick 
and  heavy  as  it  probably  was,  in  such  a  way  as  would  have 
rendered  that  luminary  visible  to  a  human  spectator,  had  such 
an  one  been  then  placed  upon  the  earth's  surface.  For  the 
same  reason  the  moon  and  stars  must  also,  during  those 
periods,  have  been  invisible.  Up  to  that  period,  therefore, 
the  heavenly  bodies  could  not  have  ruled  the  seasons, 
either  as  to  their  temperature  or  their  distinct  periodica] 
revolutions;  and  all  the  light  which  could  have  descended 
from  them  to  the  earth  must  have  been  but  dim  and  in- 
distinct. 


162  GEOLOGY      AND     MOSES. 

But  in  preceding  pages  it  was  shown,  from  the  peculiar  man 
ner  in  which  the  impressions  of  frost-marks,  the  tracks  c( 
migratory  birds,  etc.,  occurred,  during  the  geological  formation 
immediately  succeeding  the  Carboniferous  Period  (viz.,  the 
New  Eed  Sandstone  formation),  that  distinctions  of  seasons 
and  climates  must  then  clearly  have  existed,  and  hence  that 
the  sun  must  then  have  exerted  his  direct  power  upon  the  earth, 
which  then,  as  now,  varied  in  its  intensity  with  the  different 
positions  assumed  by  the  earth  during  its  orbitual  revolution. 
An  atmospheric  condition  which  could  thus  have  admitted  of  a 
direct  descent  of  the  solar  rays,  must  also  have  rendered  the 
moon  and  stars  distinctly  visible  to  such  of  the  earth's  tenants 
as  had  eyes  to  perceive  them ;  and  in  these  facts  we  have  an 
abundant  verification  of  the  Mosaic  record,  as  to  the  work  of 
the  fourth  day.  It  consisted  simply  in  those  atmospheric 
clarifications  by  which  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars  were  appoint- 
ed, or  allowed  to  exercise  the  office  of,  ruling  the  seasons,  and 
dividing  time  into  distinct  periods. 

The  direct  rays  of  the  sun  being  thus  admitted  to  the 
earth's  surface,  the  latter  consequently  became  habitable  to 
higher  orders  of  living  creatures.  Accordingly,  the  next  stage 
of  creation's  progress  is  thus  desciibed:  "And  God  said,  Let 
the  waters  bring  forth  abundantly  the  moving  creature  that 
hath  life,  and  fowl  that  may  fly  above  the  earth  in  the  open 
firmament  of  heaven.  And  God  created  great  whales,  and 
every  living  creature  that  moveth,  which  the  waters  brought 
forth  after  their  kind,  and  every  winged  fowl  after  his  kind.*' 
Some  of  the  "  moving  creatures  "  here  spoken  of  as  introduced 
into  being,  were  probably  wholly  aquatic,  and  others  were  of 
the  lower  orders  of  air-breathing  animals.  It  is  remarkable 
that  the  remains  of  classes  of  animals  here  spoken  of,  first 
begin  to  appear  in  the  New  Red  Sandstone  strata,  which  is 


WORK      CF      FIFTH      DAY.  163 

the  formation  r.ext  above  the  carboniferous  system,  and  which 
must  have  been  succeeded,  and  measurably  accompanied  by 
the  clarification  of  the  atmosphere,  spoken  of  as  the  work  of 
the  previous  day.  For  it  is  in  the  Red  Sandstone  stratifi- 
cation that  we  find  the  footprints  of  frogs,  tortoises,  and  birds. 
The  latter  were  mainly,  as  Professor  Hitchcock  intimates,  of 
the  Gralloe  family,  or  the  family  of  loaders,  and  were  therefore, 
with  the  former,  intimately  connected  with  the  water,  as  the 
Mosaic  account  implies.  There  can  be  but  little  doubt,  there- 
fore, that  these  birds  were  the  very  "fowl"  of  which  Moses 
speaks. 

The  other  part  of  the  work  of  this  period,  according  to  the 
common  translation,  consisted  in  the  creation  of  "  great  whales" 
etc.  This,  admitting  our  definition  of  the  word  "day,"  forms 
the  only  apparent  discrepancy  between  geology  and  the 
sacred  cosmogony ;  fin-  whales  do  not-  appear  to  have  existed 
before  a  somewhat  advanced  stage  of  the  so-called  Tertiary 
Formation,  and  a  very  long  period  after  this  time.  But 
criticism  resolves  even  this  apparent  discrepancy  into  a  sur- 
prising harmony.  Dr.  Adam  Clarke,  who  wrote  before 
geology  was  much  cultivated,  and  hence  without  the  slightest 
idea  of  making  out  a  harmony  between  its  teachings  and  the 
declarations  of  Moses,  remarks  upon  the  expression  in  the 
passage  before  us:  "Though  this  is  generally  understood  by 
the  different  versions  as  signifying  whales,  yet  the  original 
must  be  understood,  rather  as  a  general  than  a  particular 
term,  comprising  all  great  aquatic  animals."  Now  the 
marine  saurians  were  "  great  aquatic  animals."  These,  with 
amphibious  and  terrestrial  reptiles  of  enormous  size,  came  in 
during  the  deposition  of  the  New  Red  Sandstone,  and  ex- 
tensively characterized  the  whole  so-called  Secondary  For- 
mation.    Thus  the  Mosaic  account  of  the  work  of  the  fifth 


16i  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

day,  or  grand  period,  is  also  admirably  verified  by  geologic* 
facts. 

Animals  of  the  classes  just  described,  both  according  to 
Geology  and  Moses,  preceded  the  more  perfect  land  animals, 
the  mammalia,  upon  the  stage  of  existence.  The  creation  of 
these  latter  is  said  to  have  constituted  the  first  part  of  the 
work  of  the  following,  being  the  sixth  day,  or  period,  which  is 
thus  spoken  of:  u  And  God  said,  Let  the  earth  bring  forth  the 
living  creature  after  his  kind,  cattle,  and  creeping  thing,  and 
beast  of  the  earth  after  his  kind :  and  it  was  so.  And  God 
made  the  beast  of  the  earth,  and  the  cattle  after  their  kind," 
etc.  The  proof  of  the  truth  of  this  portion  of  the  account  is 
found  in  the  remains  of  the  mammalial  quadrupeds  of  the 
Tertiary  Period,  in  the  more  recent  portions  of  which  we  have 
shown  that  there  was  an  actual  shading  off  of  the  animated 
tribes  into  the  existing  species.  Moreover,  the  work  of  this 
day,  or  period,  both  according  to  Geology  and  Moses,  was 
completed  by  the  introduction  of  Man  into  being,  as  the 
grand  ultimatum  of  all  the  creative  efforts.  Thence,  so  far  as 
that  great  series  of  unfoldings  was  concerned,  ensued  a  period 
of  rest,  and  the  present  is  that  sabattic  period. 

The  candid  reader  who  has  attentively  followed  me  through 
this  investigation,  will  bear  witness  that  I  have  made  no  efforl 
to  explain  away,  or  to  change  the  true  aspect  of  properly 
understood  facts,  in  order  to  make  out  a  correspondence 
between  the  teaching  of  science  and  those  of  Moses,  but  that 
I  have  labored  to  simply  set  forth  the  facts  of  the  two  reve- 
lations in  their  true  aspect,  leaving  them  to  confirm  or  refute 
each  other  as  they  might.  The  coincidence  between  the  two 
revelations,  therefore,  which,  from  generals  to  particulars,  has 
here  appeared  so  striking,  is  one  for  which  no  human  collator 
is  responsible,  as  it  exists  independently  and  unalterably  in 


DIVINE      ENLIGHTENMENT.  165 

the  absolute  facts  of  the  case.  All  that  is  required  to  exhibit 
one  revelation  as  a  substantial  transcript  of  the  other,  is  an  ad- 
mission that  the  word  "  day  "  is  used  by  Moses  in  the  sense 
of  an  indefinite  period — a  sense  in  which  it  is  used  in  scores 
of  instances  in  the  Bible,  and  a  sense  in  which  Moses  unques- 
ticnably  used  it  in  Gen.  ii.  4,  where,  in  a  more  summary 
allusion  to  these  same  works  of  creation,  he  speaks  of  "  the 
day  that  the  Lord  God  made  the  earth  and  the  heavens." 

As  it  is  next  to  an  impossibility  to  suppose  that  all  these 
surprising  coincidences  could  have  been  a  mere  work  of 
chance,  the  conclusion  is  scarcely  avoidable,  that  the  account 
in  the  first  chapter  of  Genesis,  by  whomsoever  written,  must 
have  originated  in  a  source  of  intelligence  in  which  a  general 
knowledge  of  the  whole  history  of  the  creation  was  familiarly 
embraced. 

It  is  quite  certain,  however,  that  Moses  Knew  nothing,  at 
least  in  an  exterior  way,  about  Geology  ;  for  of  this  science 
the  whole  human  race  has  been  ignorant  until  within  the  last 
century.  I  apprehend  that  nothing  short  of  an  hypothesis  of 
a  spiritual  or  Divine  enlightenment,  will  be  found  adequate  to 
explain  the  origin  of  this  biblical  and  wonderfully  accurate 
account  of  creation.  Concerning  the  laws  of  such  enlighten 
ment,  some  explanations  may  be  submitted  in  a  future  work. 

I  have  deemed  it  useful  to  show,  in  this  summary  manner, 
the  true  bearings  of  geological  science  upon  the  initial  revela- 
tion of  the  Bible,  partly  to  correct  a  tendency  which,  strange 
to  say,  has  been  manifested  in  the  modern  spiritual  mode  of 
philosophizing,  to  treat  lightly  this  and  other  revelations  of 
the  Bible,  on  account  of  the  supposed  "  unprogressed"  state  of 
their  writers;  partly  for  the  purpose  of  further  illustrating  the 
fact,  that  all  true  tneology  and  other  species  of  dcctrine, 
whether  found  in  the  Bible  or  elsewhere,  must  conform  to  the 


106  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

unavoidable  deductions  of  scientific  facts ;  and  partly  for  ths 
purpose  of  further  unfolding  that  remarkable  law  of  the  three- 
fold and  seven-fold  correspondential  series,  which  runs  through 
all  complete  systems  of  truth,  and  of  which  the  Mosaic  gene- 
ralization, properly  understood,  affords  a  conspicuous  example. 
That  the  seven-fold  series  of  creative  operations  here  spoken 
of  by  the  sacred  writer,  exactly  conforms  to  the  natural  and 
Divine  law  of  sereal  arrangement  which  we  have  heretofore 
.infolded,  is  obvious  from  the  correspondences  between  the 
respective  members  of  its  Primary  and  Secondary  Trinities, 
which  will  be  perceived  by  an  inspection  of  the  following 
juxtaposed  columns,  and  from  the  characteristics  of  the  rela- 
tions which  each  member  of  the  series,  from  first  to  last,  ex- 
hibits toward  the  others,  which  will  be  found  to  be  the  same 
tvhich  the  same  members  in  other  serieses  respectively  bear 
r.oward  their  associates. 


Pkimary  Trinity.  Secondary  Trinity. 

U st  Day.  Diffused  and  rudimental  \  4th  Day.  Definite  solar  Light  (by 
Light:  ("God  said,  Let  there  I       the  sun  becoming  visible.) 
be  light.") 

2nd  Day.  Atmospneric  and  terres- 
trial distinctions,  or  more  defin- 
ite line  of  demarcation  between 
condensed  and  vapory  wakr. 
("  Firmament.")       ' 


5th  Day.  Higher  and  first  impor- 
tant forms  of  oceanic,  terres- 
trial, and  atmospheric  life. 
("  Great  -whales"  or  aquat- 
ic monsters  —  saurians  —  and 
"  fowls.") 

6th  Day.  Ultimate  Tenants  of 
dry  land.  (Mammalial  quadru- 
peds and  Man.) 

7th  Day.  Rest,  and  Divine  habitation  in  the  Ultimate  of  the  creative 

labor. 


3rd  Day.   Appearance  of  dry  land  ; 
terrestrial  vegetation. 


Here  the  correspondence  between  the  works  of  the  Jirst  and 
fourth  days,  or  periods,  is  perceptible  at  a  glance,  in  that  thej 
consisted  of  different  degrees  of   illumination   of  the   earth'* 


CORRESPONDENCES.  107 

surface.  The  correspondence  between  the  works  of  the  secona 
and  fifth  days  is  obvious,  but  becomes  still  more  marked  by 
the  addition  of  a  few  facts  which  Moses,  in  his  brief  survey, 
left  out,  but  which  are  supplied  by  geological  science.  The 
second  day.  according  to  Moses,  was  characterized  by  the  de- 
velopment of  more  marked  distinctions  between  earth,  water, 
and  atmosphere,  expressed  by  the  creation  of  the  "  firma- 
ment," or  the  super-terrestrial  expanse  ;  while  geology  shows 
that  the  fifth  day  was  characterized  by  the  development  of  a 
/  degree  of  similar  distinctions,  whereby  alternations  of 
climates  and  seasons,  cold  and  heat,  rains,  winds,  etc.,  super- 
vened. Moreover,  the  fifth  day,  according  to  the  biblical 
account,  was  characterized  by  the  development  of  rudimentat, 
land  and  aerial  animals  ;  while,  according  to  geology,  the 
second  day,  after  the  incipient  creation  of  light,  was  further  oc- 
cupied by  the  creation  of  the  rudhnental  marine  animals,  or 
the  radiata,  articulata,  mollusca,  and  fishes  of  the  so-called 
Transition  Formation.  The  creation  of  these,  Moses  passes 
over  in  silence,  the  reason  of  which  may  be  conceived  to  con- 
sist in  their  comparative  non-importance,  and  in  the  fact  that 
in  that  unintellectual  age,  they  were  not,  as  facts  in  nature, 
sufficiently  conspicuous  to  excite  general  inquiry  as  to  their 
origin. 

Further  correspondences  are  also  developed,  by  the  aid  of 
geological  science,  between  the  third  and  sixth  days,  but  con 
cerning  these  I  need  not  particularize. 

If  the  reader  will  now  take  the  trouble  to  compare  the  mem- 
bers of  this  series  of  creations  as  described  by  Moses,  with  the 
members  of  any  seven-fold  series  of  creations  or  operations 
which  we  have  heretofore  described,  or  which  we  may  describe 
hereafter,  he  will  find  that  each  member  is  to  its  series  lohai 
the  same  member  of  any  other  natural  seven-fold  series  is  to  tJi' 


168  GEOLOGY     AND     MOSES. 

other  members  with  which  it  is  associated,  and  that  between  this 
and  all  other  serieses  there  is  the  same  correspondence  as  there 
is  between  any  two  octaves  in  music.  It  is,  be  it  remembered, 
upon  the  fact  of  this  correspondence  between  the  serieses, 
whether  generally  or  minutely  inspected,  that  we  base  our 
conclusion  as  to  the  unity  of  plan  which  runs  through  nature, 
pointing  to  an  origin  in  the  seven-fold  and  corresponding 
harmonies  of  the  one  Infinite  God,  who,  from  His  own  Es- 
sence, has  projected,  from  His  own  Life  animates,  and,  from 
His  own  Wisdom,  directs,  all  things.  It  is  in  perfect  harmony 
with  this  supposition  of  a  Divine  originative  and  controlling 
Power,  that  Moses,  in  the  simple  and  untechnical  language  of 
his  times,  refers  the  work  of  each  of  the  successive  periods  of 
creation  to  a  Divine  agency,  and  not  to  any  force  of  develop- 
ment inhering  in  nature  as  independent  of  God. 

I  may  add,  that  if  there  actually  is  a  perfect  conformity 
from  generals  to  particulars,  between  the  principles  involved 
in  this  seven-fold  series  of  operations  mentioned  by  Moses, 
and  those  involved  in  every  other  seven-fold  natural  or 
spiritual  series,  whether  it  be  found  in  science  or  in  the  Bible, 
this  fact  must  be  considered  as  strongly  confirming,  not  to 
say  absolutely  demonstrating,  our  conclusion  that  there  is  a 
mighty  lavj  here  involved,  and  must  go  far  to  convince 
reasonable  skeptics  of  the  truth  of,  at  least,  those  portions  of 
the  Biblical  revelation  which  are  found  to  clearly  recognize 
that  law.  Yet,  from  a  close  inspection  of  the  sacred  writings, 
it  will  be  found  that  this  law  is  not  only  expressly  recognized 
in  numerous  instances,  but  that  it  runs  through  the  whola 
Divine  plans  of  operation,  in  reference  to  the  human  race, 
a>f  which  the  Bible  gives  an  historical  and  prophetic  reflex. 


CHAPTER    XIV. 

1HE    VINEKAL    KINGDOM;    OK,   KINGDOM    OF    CHEMICAL 

FORMS. 

From  the  terrestrial  creation,  as  a  whole,  we  proceed  to  a 
brief  consideration  of  the  general  sub-creations  which  it 
involves.     The  first  of  these  is  the  Mineral  Kingdom. 

The  Mineral  Kingdom,  in  its  most  enlarged  sense,  em- 
braces all  physical  or  terrestrial  substances,  with  their  various 
forms  and  compounds.  Being  thus  general  in  its  range,  it  is 
hence  a  comparatively  indefinite  Kingdom ;  and  it  is  for  this 
reason,  I  suppose,  that  I  have  experienced  more  embarrass- 
ment in  reducing  it  to  distinct  classifications,  than  I  have  in 
respect  to  any  other  system  of  being  or  operation ;  and,  after 
all,  I  can  only  pretend  to  a  comparatively  close  approximation 
to  correctness  in  my  conclusions.  Such  an  approximation, 
embracing  the  most  comprehensive  serial  arrangement  of  phy- 
sical substances,  is  that  exhibited  in  the  following  table : 


Primary  Trinity. 
2.  Primeval  gaseous  or  mundane 

chaos. 
2.  Igneous  liquid. 


S.  Solidified  amorphous 


Secondary  Trinity. 

4.  Secondary  gaseous  or  terres- 
trial atmosphere. 

5.  Segregated,  embracing  rudi- 
mental  crystalline  forms ,  both 
solid  and  atmospheric. 

6.  Complete  material  arrange- 
ments and  ultimate  crygtal- 
line  forms. 

7.  Governing  imponderable! 
15 


170      THE  MINERAL  KINGDOM;  OB, 

If  the  reader  will  carefully  inspect  this  table,  he  will  here 
find  the  same  harmony  of  parts,  the  same  correspondence  be- 
tween Primary  and  Secondary  Trinities,  the  same  order  of 
relations,  and  the  same  principles  of  serial  association,  which 
he  will  find  in  all  other  natural  seven- fold  serieses  heretofore 
exhibited,  or  hereafter  to  be  exhibited. 

But  a  still  more  specific  classification  of  mineral  or  physical 
substances  embraces  all  the  simple  elements,  with  their 
natural  compound  forms,  as  known  to  chemistry — as  will  be 
seen  by  the  following  table : 

Secondary  Trinity 


4.  Lowest  combined  forms  (such 

as  alkalies,  acids,  oxides,  sul- 
phurets,  carburets,  etc.) 

5.  Binary   compounds   (such   as 
sulphates,  carbonates,  etc.) 

6.  Higher     and    ultimate    com- 
pounds. 


Primary  Trinity. 

1.  Alkali zable  and  oxidizable 
simples  (such  as  Potassium, 
sodium,  iron,  lead,  hydrogen, 
etc.) 

2.  Aci Sizable  simples  (such  as 
sulphur,  phosphorus,  carbon, 
etc.) 

3.  Flagrators ,  or  alkalizers,  acid- 
ifiers,  and  oxidizers  -(oxygen 
and  chlorine). 

7    Pervading  and  enveloping  electroid,  or  etheroid  unit,  as  a  homo- 
geneous involution  and  evolution  of  all  forms. 

But  the  Mineral  Kingdom,  as  commonly  contemplated,  is 
circumscribed  to  the  realm  of  crystallized  forms,  and  the 
amorphous  substances  from  which  these  immediately  proceed. 
A  theory  of  a  septinary  arrangement  of  the  Mineral  King 
dom,  as  viewed  in  this  aspect,  might  be  here  submitted,  but, 
from  not  having  made  crystalography  a  particular  branch  of 
study,  I  have  not  sufficient  confidence  in  its  conformity  to 
nature,  and  will  therefore  omit  it.  Enough,  however,  has 
been  said  to  show  that  the  Mineral  Kingdom,  in  its  more 
genera!  aspect,  conforms  to  the   seven-fold  serial  and  corre- 


KINGDOM     OF     CHEMICAL     FORMS.  171 

spondential  law  seen  to  apply  in  other  cases  and  nothing  is 
here  discovered  to  mar,  but  every  thing  illustrates,  the  har- 
mony and  unity  of  the  great  plan  of  creation.  With  these 
remarks,  then,  we  will  proceed  to  consider  the  Kingdom  of 
forms  immediately  succeeding  the  mineral,  in  the  order  of 
development. 


CHAPTER    XT. 

THE    VEGETABLE    KINGDOM. 

The  seven-fold  constitution  of  the  Vegetable  Kingdom  as  a 
whole,  is  illustrated  by  the  seven  progressive  developments  in 
the  growth  of  a  single  perfect  tree,  which  consist  of  1.  The 
root,  or  little  appendages  thrown  out  from  the  germ  before  the 
stem  appears ;  2.  The  simple  stem ;  3.  The  branches ;  4.  The 
leaves :  5.  The  flower-buds ;  6.  The  blossoms  ;  and  7.  The 
fruit.  The  seven  corresponding  divisions  of  vegetable  forms 
may  be  traced  as  follows  : 

The  first  and  lowest  of  these  consists  simply  of  confused 
radical  fibers,  which  do  not  necessarily  appear  above  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth.  In  constitution,  this  degree  of  vegetation  is 
but  little  superior  to  the  finest  forms  of  crystallization,  from 
which  it  differs  principally  in  respect  to  its  soft  and  succulent 
nature,  the  frequent  curvilinear  directions  of  its  fibers,  and  the 
circular  forms  of  their  transverse  sections.  Of  this  lowest- 
kind  of  vegetation,  we  have  examples  in  the  slimy  accretions 
which  occur  upon  the  surfaces  of  rocks,  logs,  etc.,  submerged 
in  water ;  and  of  which  the  fibrous  underground  mould  which 
occurs  in  warm  wet  soil,  impregnated  with  rapidly  decompos- 
ing matter,  constitutes  the  terrestrial  representative. 

The  second  division  of  vegetable  forms  is  represented  by- 
plants  that  have  a  simple  stem  or  shoot  projecting  above  the 
earth,  but  no  branches  nor  leaves.  Of  these,  some  of  the 
simplest  species  of  sea-weeds  afford  examples. 


THE     VEGETABLE     KINGDOM.  173 

The  third  division  consists  of  the  branching  forms  of  sea 
plants,  of  which  the  fit co ides  afford  an  example. 

The  fourth  division  consists  of  terrestrial  herbacea,  which 
are  characterized  by  fully  developed  leaves.  But  the  lower 
forms  of  this  general  division  also  embrace  lichens,  mosses, 
fungi,  etc. 

The  fifth  division  consists  of  arborescent  cryptogamia,  or 
of  those  perennial  plants  in  which  the  organs  of  fructification 
are  concealed. 

The  sixth  division  consists  of  the  arborescent  monocotyledon- 
ous,  or  of  those  flowering  trees  whose  seed  has  but  one  lobe ;  and 

The  seventh  division  consists  of  the  arborescent  dicotyledo- 
nous, or  of  those  flowering  trees  whose  seeds  have  two  lobes, 
and  which  are  the  most  perfect  forms  of  the  vegetable  king- 
dom. 

This  comprehensive  classification,  though  new,  is  in  accord- 
ance with  the  general  order  of  succession  in  vegetable  crea- 
tions as  indicated  in  fossilology,  and  is  therefore  natural. 
Each  one  of  these  divisions,  of  course,  is  subject  to  sub-classi- 
fications, which  sometimes  run  parallel  with  each  other  ;  but 
an  herbaceous  and  arborescent  plant  which  possess  the  same 
number  of  stamins,  pistils,  or  cotyledons,  evidently  should  not 
simply  on  that  account,  be  placed  in  absolutely  the  same  class 
or  order. 

That  it  may  the  more  clearly  be  perceived  that  this  classifi- 
cation conforms  to  the  serial  and  correspondential  law  hereto- 
fore unfolded,  we  will  reduce  it  to  the  following  form  : 

Primary  Trinity.  Secondary  Trinity 


(  Marine  forms.) 

1.  Radical  fiber 

2.  Simple  stem 

3.  Branching. 


(  Terrestrial  forms.) 

4.  Terrestrial  herbacea  (leafing* 

5.  Arborescent  cryptogamia. 

G.  Flowering  monocotyledonoue. 


7.  Flowering  dicotyledonous. 


174:  THE     VEGETABLE     KINGDOM. 

Here  it  is  seen  that  the  first  member  of  the  Primary  Trin- 
ity, the  radical  fiber  or  the  root  principle,  so  to  speak,  of 
vegetation,  has  its  counterpart  and  sub-correspondent  in  tha 
first  member  of  the  Secondary  Trinity,  in  the  leafing  plants — 
leaves  being  merely  aerial  roots.  The  second  member  of  the 
Primary  Trinity,  consisting  of  plants  with  a  simple  stem,  has 
its  counterpart  and  sub-correspondent  in  the  second  member 
of  the  Secondary  Trinity — the  organs  of  fructification  in  the 
cryptogamous  plants  being  connected  with  the  leaves,  and 
being  mere  shoots  from  them  as  from  a  root.  Considering 
the  cryptogamous  plants  in  the  Vegetable  Kingdom  as  a  whole, 
as  corresponding  to  the  flower-buds  of  a  single  tree,  the  third 
member  of  the  Secondary  Trinity,  showing  the  branchings 
from  the  flower-buds,  as  from  a  stem,  bears  a  certain  corre- 
spondence to  the  third  member  of  the  Primary  Trinity,  em- 
bracing merely  the  branching  forms  of  vegetation,  The  seventh 
member  is  not  only  of  a  more  perfect  organic  structure,  but 
it  embraces  all  the  more  perfect  fruit-bearing  trees  which  afford 
nourishment  to  higher  kingdoms,  and  therefore  it  may  be  con- 
sidered as  the  crown  of  the  whole  Vegetable  Kingdom.  It  is 
thus  seen  that  the  grand  and  natural  divisions  of  the  Vegeta* 
ble  World,  conform  to  the  septenary  and  ternary  serial  law ; 
and  its  complete  series  will  be  found,  on  comparison,  to  corre. 
spond  generally  and  particularly  with  all  other  complete  series; 


CHAPTEE    XYL 


THE    ANIMAL     KINGDOM. 

The  Animal  Kingdom  follows  as  next  in  the  order  of  pro- 
gression, after  the  Vegetable  Kingdom.  Its  divisions,  in  their 
regular  order  of  ascension  from  lowest  to  highest,  and  also, 
generally  speaking,  in  respect  to  their  successive  periods  of 
development  as  shown  by  fossilology,  are  as  follows : 


Primary  Trinity. 
(Marine  forms.) 
1.  Radiata  (coral  insects,  crinoi- 
dians,     star-fishes,      medusise, 
etc.) 


2.  Articulata  (sea- worms,  trilo- 
bites,  crabs,  lobsters,  etc.) 

3.  Vertebrated  Fishes. 


Secondary  Trinity. 
(Terrestrial  forms.) 

4.  Reptiles.  (The  lower  forma 
of  this  division  embrace  also  tho 
terrestrial  mollusca  and  articu- 
lata, snch  as  snails,  worms,  in- 
sects, etc.) 

5.  Birds. 

6.  Mammalia. 
7.  Man  as  a  terrestrial  being. 

In  this  table  are  represented  three  general  divisions  of  ma- 
rine forms,  and  three  general  divisions  of  terrestrial  forms. 
The  first  division  of  marine  forms  is  to  its  sphere  of  existence 
and  to  the  divisions  of  marine  forms  which  follow  it,  what  the 
first  division  of  terrestrial  forms  is  to  its  sphere  of  existence, 
and  to  the  divisions  which  follow  it ;  and  so  also  the  one  trine 
in  its  sphere  corresponds  to  the  other  trine  in  its  sphere,  both 
»n  the  complex  and  in  the  successive  divisions  of  each. 

It  may  bo  objected  to   the  foregoing  classification,  that  it 


176  THE     ANIMAL     KINGDOM. 

leaves  out  one  important  division  of  the  animal  kingdom,  viz., 
the  Mollusca.  To  this  it  may  be  replied,  that  the  Mollusca, 
especially  in  its  lower  forms,  seem,  to  be  but  a  higher  branch 
of  the  Radiata.  Some  of  the  lower  or  univalve  shell-fish 
grow  in  clusters,  or  united  compartments,  almost  as  one  ani- 
mal, and  in  this  essential  characteristic  are  somewhat  allied 
to  the  polipiaria,  which  comprises  one  class  of  the  Radiata. 
This  quality  of  growing  in  clusters  or  connected  compart- 
ments, is  preserved  even  by  some  o'  the  bivalves,  such  as 
muscles,  oysters,  etc.  The  detached  bivalves,  having  locomo- 
tive powers,  seem  to  be  an  ascension  from  these;  and  the  still 
higher  orders  of  mollusca,  viz.,  the  gastropoda  and  cephalo- 
poda, seem  to  be  but  higher  representations  of  the  same  sys- 
tem of  creative  design,  which,  as  its  lowest  expression,  evolved 
the  polipiaria  and  crinoids. 

I  have  personally  observed  that  the  whilk,  which  is  among 
the  higher  orders  of  shell-fish,  propagates  through  the  medium 
of  a  zoophitic,  or  vegetable-like,  form,  with  an  attached  stem, 
and  containing  leaf-like  appendages  or  pods,  in  which  the 
young  are  brought  to  foetal  maturity.  The  Radiata  and  Mol- 
lusca, therefore,  may  be  considered  as  comprehended  in  one 
general  division  of  the  Animal  Kingdom,  which  division,  how- 
ever, should  perhaps  be  designated  by  some  term  of  more 
comprehensive  significance. 

It  is  thus  seen,  that  the  Animal  Kingdom  conforms  to  the 
same  serial  and  correspondential  law  which  we  have  seen  run 
ning  through  all  systems  of  creation  previously  contemplated, 
and  which  we  will  hereafter  perceive  runs  equally  through  still 
higher  developments.  And  with  this,  as  the  highest  system 
of  material  creation,  our  more  specific  classifications  of  the 
^rand  departments  of  the  universe  without  us,  is  completed. 


CHAPTER    XVII. 

THE    WHOLE    AND    ITS    TARTS 

We  hare  thus  ascended,  through  progressive  stages  of  ob- 
servation and  induction,  from  the  basis  to  the  apex  of  the 
grand  pyramid  of  outer  creation.  From  the  commanding 
position  to  which  we  have  attained,  therefore,  it  is  proper  to 
take  a  general  survey  of  the  ground  over  which  we  have 
passed,  and  to  observe  any  general  or  particular  facts  which 
may  thence  present  themselves,  as  bearing,  favorably  or  other- 
wise, upon  the  conclusions  to  which  we  have  been  led,  or  as 
reflecting  light  upon  still  ulterior  truths. 

And  first,  a  remark  in  reference  to  the  method  and  order 
of  our  previous  investigations :  It  will  be  remembered  that 
we  commenced  with  the  observation  of  sensible  facts,  whicO 
lie  upon  the  exteriors  of  Nature,  and  proceeded  to  trace  them 
analytically  to  their  elements  and  originative  conditions,  and 
those  to  theirs,  until  we  arrived  at  the  primeval  and  com- 
mon chaotic  Germ  from  which  all  things,  by  different  ramifi- 
cations, sprang.  The  nature  and  propriety  of  the  reverse  pro- 
cess which  we  thence  pursued,  with  the  naturalness  of  the 
order  of  successive  results  to  which  it  led  us,  may  be  illustrated 
as  follows : 

The  astronomer  discerns  in  the  distant  heavens  a  faint  whitish 
spot,  which  he  calls  a  nebula.  To  the  naked  eye,  it  appears 
dim,  indistinct,  and  undefined.  He  applies  a  telescope  of 
moderate  power,  and  the  outlines  of  the  same  object  are  a 


178  *     THE     WHOLE      AND     ITS     PARTS. 

little  more  defined.  With  a  still  larger  telescope,  it  appears 
still  more  definite ;  and  so  he  goes  on  increasing  his  optical 
power,  until  the  same  object  is  resolved  into  myriads  of  mi- 
nute stars,  which  appear  like  particles  of  diamond  dust  sprinkled 
upon  the  blue  concave.  By  another  increase  of  power,  these 
stars  are  made  to  exhibit  appearances  of  internal  systematic 
arrangement.  This  is  as  far  as  the  most  powerful  telescopes 
will  go;  but  suppose  that  he  had  the  ability  to  augment  his 
optical  power  indefinitely ;  each  of  those  stars,  which  at  first 
appeared  only  as  a  shining  point,  may  soon  be  made  to  glow 
as  a  resplendent  sun,  revealing  a  multitude  of  planets  swim- 
ming in  the  sea  of  light  by  which  it  is  surrounded.  He  now 
singles  out  one  of  those  planetary  globes  as  the  special  object 
of  inspection  ;  and  as,  by  our  imagined  possibilities,  the  visual 
power  is  enhanced  through  other  successive  degrees,  the 
forests,  the  fields,  the  streams,  the  trees,  the  flowers,  and  even 
the  insects,  which  may  exist  upon  the  surface  of  that  planet, 
or  the  animalcules  which  sport  in  its  stagnant  waters,  would 
successively  come  into  view.  Now,  be  it  remarked,  that  all 
these  successive  particularizations,  even  down  to  ultimate  mi- 
nutiae, are  involved  in  that  faint  luminous^  spot,  which,  as  a 
most  comprehensive  general,  is  first  seen  by  the  naked  eye  in 
the  remote  heavens. 

Our  process  of  synthetical  investigation  has  been  similar  to 
that  just  supposed,  we  having  the  advantage  of  the  actual 
presence  and  personal  inspection  of  the  minutiae  included  in 
the  general  subject  of  our  thoughts.  With  a  mental  telescope 
we  have  penetrated,  not  into  the  distance  of  space,  but  into 
the  corresponding  distance  of  time,  and  beheld  the  universe  in 
the  aspect  of  one  common  nebulous  mass.  By  following  the 
natural  history  of  this  one  general  mass  through  its  sic- 
cessive  approximations  to  our  own  period,  we  have  seen  it 


GENERALS     INVOLVE     PARTICULARS.       179 

successively  unfolding  solar  systems,  geological  developments, 
mineral  kingdoms,  animal  kingdoms,  and  human  races,  with 
all  things  which  they  respectively  include.  It  is  to  be  ob- 
served that  each  of  these  successive  particularizations  is  based 
upon,  and  was  included  in,  the  next  preceding  general,  as  all 
are  based  upon,  and  included  in,  the  all-comprehensive  General. 

Moreover,  that  the  order  in  which  these  particularizations, 
Kingdoms,  or  sub-creations  have  been  brought  under  review, 
is  not  an  order  arbitrarily  adopted  for  our  own  convenience, 
but  clearly  one  observed  by  nature  herself,  is  evident  from 
the  fact,  that  no  two  systems  or  Kingdoms,  as  arranged  in  our 
series  of  inquiries,  can  be  transposed.  This  illustration  of  the 
relations  of  generals  and  particulars  also  clearly  shows,  that 
all  truths  are"  but  involutions  and  evolutions  of  one  funda 
mental  truth — hence  that  all  truths  must  bear  certain  relation* 
and  correspondences  to  each  other,  from  their  origins  through- 
out their  successive  ramifications,  even  to  their  ultimates; 
and  that  no  truth  can  be  fully  understood,  except  in  the 
general  and  particular  light  of  all  others. 

Moreover,  if  the  seiial  order  in  which  the  grand  divisions 
of  nature,  as  a  whole,  have  been  brought  under  review,  is  ac- 
cording to  the  order  of  progressive  development  observed  by 
nature  herself,  the  same  is  generally  true  of  the  serial  order 
of  the  seven  sub-divisions  which  have  been  applied  to  each  of 
these  grand  divisions.  By  a  particular  review  of  either  of 
these  classified  sub-divisions,  the  reader  will  find,  for  example, 
that  the  first  member  of  the  series  is  naturally  germinal,  and 
that  the  seventh  is  naturally  ultimate,  to  all  the  others ;  and 
that  no  two  members  of  the  series  can  be  transposed  without 
deranging  the  harmony  of  the  whole  series.  And  though  we, 
of  course,  claim  no  absolute  exemption  from  particular  errors 
and  imperfections  in  the  classifications  which  have  been  sub 


180  THE     WHOLE      AND     ITS     PAETS. 

mitted,  it  is  nevertheless  claimed  that  their  manifest  genera* 
conformity  to  nature,  together  with  their  ternary  relations 
and  correspondences,  involved,  after  identically  the  same 
general  method,  in  each  seven-fold  series,  clearly  reveals  the 
presence  of  a  grand  structural  or  associative  law  which,  in  a 
corresponding  manner,  and  in  different  degrees  of  develop 
ment,  governs  the  numbers,  relations,  and  succession  of  parts, 
in  every  complete  system  of  natural  unfolding.  Of  this  law, 
as  before  repeatedly  intimated,  the  diatonic  scale  in  music, 
with  its  seven  notes,  is  the  natural  and  oral  exponent. 

Having  thus  subjected  the  grand  divisions  of  nature  to  re- 
view, and  discovered  the  application  of  this  principle  of  serial 
and  correspondential  classification  to  them  all,  let  us  now  see 
whether  the  connected  and  successive  creations  thus  brought 
under  review,  will  naturally  fall  into  the  form  of  one  grand 
System,  in  which  our  principles  of  serial  arrangement  will  be 
exemplified.  This  may  be  best  exhibited  by  the  following 
table :  ^ 


Primary  Trinity. 
(Structural.) 

1.  Firmamental  and  sidereal  uni- 
verse. 

2.  Solar  systems. 

3.  Geological  developments. 


Secondary  Trinity 
(Organic.) 

4.  System  of  chemical  or  com- 
prehensive miner alogical  ar- 
rangements. 

5.  Vegetable  kingdoms 

6.  Animal  kingdoms. 


Ultimate. 

(Intellectual.) 

7.  Human    races,    as   to   their    merely   terrestrial    constitutions; 

affections,  and  thoughts. 

Not  only  do  we  observe  in  this  series  a  natural  order  of 
succession  of  parts,  which  will  not  admit  of  addition,  retrench- 
ment, or  transposition,  but  we  also  observe  the  same  ternary 


PRISMATIC     COLORS.  181 

relations  and  coirespondences  which  we  have  seen  are  in- 
volved in  all  the  series  previously  examined.  Thus  the  first 
member  of  the  series,  which  is  mdimental-structural,  corre- 
sponds to  the  fourth  member,  which  is  rudimental-organic  ;* 
the  second  member  is  the  transition-structural,  and  corresponds 
to  the  fifth  (the  Vegetable  Kingdom),  which  is  the  transitional- 
organic;  the  third  member  is  the  (physically)  perfect-structural, 
and  corresponds  to  the  sixth,  which  is  the  perfect  organic 
And  the  seventh  is  ultimate,  exhibiting  the  perfection  and 
united  sublimation  of  all — in  this  respect  corresponding  to  the 
seventh  member  of  every  other  series,  even  as  the  first  mem- 
ber in  each  series  corresponds  to  the  first  member  in  all 
others ;  the  second  to  the  second,  etc.  The  same  principles 
of  serial,  septinary,  and  correspondential  classification,  thus 
apply  equally  to  the  generals  and  the  particulars  of  nature,  at 
least  so  far  as  such  particulars  have  been  brought  under 
review. 

But  while  the  respective  members  of  each  seven-fold  series, 
whether  on  a  high  or  low  scale,  including  the  great  series  of 
all  serieses,  correspond  to  the  same  members,  as  numerically 
designated  in  all  other  serieses,  these  correspondences  are  of 
different  degrees  of  directness  and  intimacy,  according  to 
numerical  relations  more  complicated  than  those  which  have 
yet  been  brought  into  view.  This,  together  with  the  manner 
in  which  general  and  particular  serial  correspondences  are 
involved  in  one  complete  system,  may  be  illustrated  partially, 
but  sufficiently  for  our  present  purpose,  by  a  reference  to  the 
seven  prismatic  colors  and  their  involved  properties.  It  is 
found  that,  by  causing  each  of  the  seven  colors  of  decomposed 

*  A  crystal  possesses  a  kind  of  molecular  life,  and  has  different  parts,  angles,  and 
poles,  which  perform  different  functions,  as  shown  by  Reichenbach ;  it  may  therefor* 
be  considered  as  an  organ  'sm,  though  of  the  lowest  kind. 

1Q 


182  THE      WHOLE     AND     ITS     PAET8. 

light  to  pass  separately  through  a  second  prism,  they  may  b« 
still  further  decomposed,  and  form  a  secondary  iris,  in  which 
each  of  the  seven  colors  will  again  be  visible.  Now  the  first 
or  general  iris  represents  the  great  System  of  systems,  con 
sidered  as  one,  while  each  included  iris  represents  one  of  the 
sub-systems  involved  in  the  latter,  and  which  is  also  seven- 
fold. In  other  words,  the  grand  seven-fold  System  of  nature 
is  composed  of  all  its  included  and  subordinate  seven-fold 
systems,  in  the  same  way  as  the  grand  iris  is  composed  of 
all  the  elements  involved  in  its  included  irises,  there  being 
in  either  case  a  similar  interdependence  of  parts ;  and  hence 
there  is  the  same  unity  in  the  System  as  a  whole,  that  there 
is  in  each  one  of  its  analogous  and  component  sub-systems. 
The  grand  System  of  nature,  and  each  one  of  its  sub-systems, 
then,  correspond  to  each  other  in  the  same  way  as  the  grand 
iris,  and  each  of  its  included  sub-irises  correspond  to  each 
other,  according  to  their  similar  numerical  designations.  But 
while  this  is  the  case  with  the  iris  and  its  included  sub-irises, 
it  is  evident  that  one  of  these  latter,  based,  for  example,  upon 
the  general  red  ray,  would  bear  a  (liferent  degree  of  corre- 
spondence' to  other  seven-fold  divisions  of  color,  from  one 
that  is  based  generally  upon  the  yellow,  blue,  or  any  other 
ray  ;  and  the  same  is  true  of  the  great  System  of  nature  and 
its  sub-systems. 

It  was  before  shown  that  each  seven-fold  system  of  nature 
is  accompanied,  in  its  development  and  functional  operations, 
by  seven  corresponding  dynamic  agents,  and  also  seven 
corresponding  laws.  It  may  therefore  be  said  that  these 
dynamic  agents  and  laws  are  also,  either  identically  or  by 
their  natural  representatives  in  different  degrees  of  ascension, 
subject  to  the  same  comprehensive  and  involved  classifications 
which  nje  have  just    seen   to  apply  to   their   corresponding 


AGENTS,   LAWS,   DEVELDPMENTS.     I 

outer  developments,  as  presented  in  the  universal  Fabric  of 
Being  and  its  parts.  It  would,  indeed,  be  difficult  to  get  a 
set  of  terms  sufficiently  comprehensive,  and  yet  sufficiently 
definite,  to*  apply  equally  to  all  systems  and  sub-systems  in- 
volved in  a  universal  classification;  but  if  the  reader  will 
consider  the  terms  we  may  employ  as  being  themselves 
correspondential,  and  as  expressive  merely  of  general  prin- 
ciples, he  may  find  the  general  and  particular  systems  of 
nature,  in  their  three-fold  relations  of  Dynamic  Agents,  Laws, 
and  Developments,  represented,  with  approximate  truthful- 
ness, in  the  following  table : 


Dynamic    Age 

NTS. 

Laws. 

Developments. 

1.  Heat. 

Expansion. 

Chaos. 

2.  Light. 

Attraction. 

Nuclei. 

3.  Electricity. 

Circulation. 

Forms. 

4.  Organic,    or 

odic 

Aggregation. 

Incipient  organism 

heat. 

5.  Odic  light. 

Segregation. 

Ascended      organic 
forms. 

6.  Odic  aura. 

Sympathy. 

Universal  association. 

7.  Vitality. 

Life. 

Unity  of  totality. 

Applying  the  fundamental  principles  of  this  classification, 
in  different  degrees,  to  the  universal  system,  and  to  all  its 
sub-systems,  we  have  here  a  representation  of  the  connection 
and  harmonial  relations  of  the  Whole  with  the  parts,  and  the 
parts  with  the  Whole,  of  the  Macrocosm  or  the  universe 
without — corresponding  to  the  connect'uns  and  relations  of 
the  parts  and  the  whole,  of  the  Microcosm,  or  the  universe 
within.  Here  then,  is  erected,  "  without  the  noise  of  the 
hammer,"   that  universal  Temple  before   spoken   of.    whose 


184  THE     WHOLE     AND     ITS     PARTS. 

timbers,  hewn  by  God's  own  hand,  consist  of  all  those  facts 
and  principles  which  lie  in  the  Eealm  of  Being  without  us 
and  which  mere  analytical  science  necessarily  views  in  ever 
lasting  isolation  and  confusion. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

DUiLISM  OF  PRODUCTIVE  FORCES;  OR,  THE  DIASTOLH 
AND  SYSTOLE  OF  NATURE. 

Following  link  by  link  the  descending  chain  of  analogy, 
the  conclusion  waa  before  arrived  at,  that  in  the  beginning, 
the  materials  of  the  universe  consisted  of  one  diffuse,  chaotic, 
or  gaseous  mass,  without  distinction  of  parts,  or  definite  inter- 
nal motions.  Reasons  were  also  submitted  for  believing  that 
these  material  conditions  were  not  eternal,  but  that  they 
originated  as  emanations  or  projections  of  the  more  exterior 
essences  of  the  Divine  Personal  Constitution.  It  was  shown 
f.hat,  inasmuch  as  this  whole  mass  of  physical  substance  thus 
originated  from  Divine  spiritual  substance,  so  physical  Heat 
\n  this  substance  originated  from  Divine  spiritual  Heat^  which 
is  Love,  and  that  physical  Light  originated  from  Divine 
spiritual  Light,  which  is  Wisdom.  It  was  also  shown  that 
Heat  is  accompanied  with  a  force  or  law  of  Expansion ;  and 
that  from  Heat  and  Light  combined,  originated  the  force  or 
law  of  Attraction  or  Contraction.  As  Divine  Love  and  Wis- 
dom (forming  a  Duality,  or  productive  unity,  consisting  of 
positive  or  negative,  or  male  and  female  Principles)  constitute 
the  spiritual  Alpha  and  Omega  of  all  generative  forces,  so  it 
is  apprehended  that  their  physical  counterparts,  consisting  of 
the  forces  of  Expansion  and  Attraction,  may  be  found  to  main- 
tain an  equally  fundamental  relation  to  all  modifications  of 
force,  law,  and  operation,  existing  in  the  realm  of  created  Being. 


186  DUALISM     OF     FORCES. 

If  we  again  glance  at  the  systems  and  sub-systems  of  ope 
ration  which  nature  presents,  we  will  find  abundant  exemplifi. 
cations  of  this  fact.  Thus,  as  the  forces  of  Expansion  and 
Contraction  proceeded  in  their  operations  in  the  primeval 
chaotic  mass,  the  particles  which  were  by  nature  fitted  to  re- 
main in  an  aeriform  or  ethereal  state,  and  those  which  were 
naturally  fitted  for  aggregation  into  dense  forms,  were  sepa- 
rated. The  latter  class  of  particles,  by  a  general  assemblage, 
first  formed  the  universal  nucleus,  and  then,  successively  the 
nebulous  rings,  segregated  masses,  and  stellar  and  planetary 
systems.  The  telescope  now  reveals  these  masses  of  conden- 
sible  materials  apparently  in  all  stages  of  progress  in  the 
heavens,  from  the  indefinitely  formed  and  irresolvable  nebula 
to  the  globular  cluster  of  stars.  This  latter  is  the  form  pecu- 
liar to  the  highest  possible  degree  of  cosmical  perfection,  and, 
at  the  same  time,  the  highest  natural  degree  of  cosmical  conden- 
sation; and  it  may  hence  be  supposed  to  be  accompanied  with 
the  highest  naturally  attainable  degree  of  levity  and  purity  in 
the  circumambient  ether.  But  these  states  are  ultimate 
achievements  of  the  joint  and  constant  action  of  the  fundamen- 
tal laws  of  Expansion  and  Contraction. 

We  will  find,  on  due  consideration,  that  these  same  princi- 
ples apply  also  to  each  creation  included  in  the  cosmical, 
whether  it  be  organic  or  inorganic.  Thus,  in  the  Mineral 
World,  the  metallic  ore  that  is  now  segregated  into  distinct 
veins,  evidently  must  have  originally  existed  in  diffusion  in 
the  surrounding  rock.  The  particles  which  originally  occupied 
the  present  position  of  the  mineral  veins,  must  have  been  dis- 
persed by  a  force  of  expansion  (virtually  or  actually)  which  wa? 
precisely  equivalent  co  the  force  of  mutual  attraction  which 
brought  the  metalline  particles  together  in  their  place.  The 
came  tendency  of  kindred  and  originally  diffused  mineral  par 


EXPANSION     AND     ATTRACTION.  187 

fcicles  to  draw  together  into  the  form  of  dense  masses,  is,  per- 
haps, still  more  forcibly  illustrated  by  the  flint  nodules  found 
in  beds  of  chalk,  and  which  are  generally  of  a  more  or  less 
rounded  form,  evidently  indicating  an  original  state  of  solution 
in  the  surrounding  mass,  from  which  they  have  become  con- 
densed, as  they  are  now  found. 

The  first  forms  assumed  by  the  vegetable  materials  that  exist 
in  the  world,  were  also  diffuse  and  chaotic.  Such  were  the 
marine  accretions  of  germinal  slime,  with  their  radical  fibers, 
and  subsequent  efllorescent,  simple,  and  microscopic  stems. 
Several  gradations  of  plants  as  they  rise  above  these,  are  still 
of  imperfect  exterior  forms,  of  a  loose  and  succulent  nature, 
and  of  an  internal  structure  entirely  cellular — indicating,  as 
yet,  but  small  progress  in  the  condensive  principle.  In  these, 
nowever,  the  whole  Vegetable  Kingdom  as  one  creation,  has 
its  incipient  and  rudimental  development.  Further  segrega- 
tions and  condensations  of  the  vegetative  elements  are  decid- 
edly manifested  in  the  subsequently  formed  terrestrial  plants 
possessing  a  vascular  tissue  and  ligneous  fiber.  But  as  crea- 
tion proceeds,  still  higher  forms,  possessing  more  marked  and 
widely  diversified  characteristics,  are  gradually  developed, 
until  the  flowering  and  dicotyledonous  plants  of  the  present 
era  came  into  being ;  and  these  show  the  closest  possible  con- 
nection of  congenial,  and  the  most  perfect  elimination  of 
heterogeneal  vegetable  elements.  Hence,  they  exhibit  the 
ultimate  degree  of  the  Condensive  and  Expansive  principle 
which  can  be  naturally  applied  to  the  Vegetable  Kingdom. 

In  the  Animal  Kingdom,  including  the  human,  the  same 
principles  are  distinctly  operative ;  and  this,  too,  both  with 
reference  to  the  individual  organism,  and  the  whole  collection 
of  living  beings.  Professor  Agassiz,  who  has  investigated  the 
subject  of  embryology    perhaps  more  thoroughly  than  any 


188  DUALISM      'OF      FORCES. 

other  man,  tells  us,  that  aftei  the  fecundation  of  the  ovum  ol 
any  animal,  and  its  division  into  cells  and  layers,  the  organ 
of  circulation  proceeds  to  its  incipient  development  from  the 
middle  layer  of  the  germ.  u  first,"  the  blood  appears  by  a 
simple  process  of  liquefaction  of  the  cells.  It  can  be  seen 
under  the  microscope  how  the  particles,  or  the  cells  of  that 
layer,  begin  to  loose  at  the  outer  margin,  and  to  move  between 
themselves,  and  to  run  in  particular  directions,  and  to  combine 
into  currents,  and  those  currents  to  assume  particular  direc- 
tions, before  there  is  a  heart,  and  before  there  are  blood-vessels.  It 
can  be  seen  in  every  chicken  under  so  low  a  magnifying  power, 
that  no  one  should  lose  the  opportunity  of  seeing  this  wonder- 
ful sight.  When  blood  corpuscules  move  from  the  center  toward 
the  margin  of  the  germ  [Expansion],  the  other  cells,  which  be 
come  loose  in  the  periphery  of  the  germ,  begin  to  move  toward 
the  center  [Contraction].  In  the  beginning,  there  being  no  cur- 
rent circulating,  the  two  collections  of  fluid  meet,  and  finally 
become  regular  currents,  by  means  of  channels  through  which 
the  blood  runs  for  a  regular  circulation* 

These  fundamental,  expansive,  contractive,  and  circulatory 
motions  are  subsidiary  to  the  development  of  a  fourth  opera- 
tion, by  which  affinitized  particles  floating  in  the  circulating 
menstruum  are  brought  into  conjunction,  and  deposited  in  the 
form  of  solid  tissues.  They  are  at  first  aggregated  on  all 
sides  of  the  circulating  channels,  and  form  the  blood-vessels, 
the  ramifications  of  which  (says  Agassiz)  are  at  first  constantly 

*  Agassiz's  Lectures  on  Comparative  Embryology.  Here  we  have,  in  the  words  of 
one  who  wrote  without  any  Tiew  to  the  distinctive  philosophy  of  the  present  treatise,  an 
illustration  of  the  successive  origins  of  the  laws  of  Expansion,  Contraction,  and  Cireu* 
lation.  Considering  these  facts  and  principles  as  equally  applicable,  on  a  large  scale, 
to  the  great  fecundated  germ  or  ovum  of  the  cosmical  creation,  it  will  illustrate  per- 
fectly the  incipient  process  by  a  prolongation  of  wh:  :h  the  universe  received  its  presenl 
TOsture  form. 


PROGRESS    of    organization-.  1S9 

changing.  But  one  portion  of  the  central  vessel  soon  becomes 
enlarged,  and  assumes  the  form  of  a  simple  elongated  sack* 
This,  centralizing  and  expressing  in  itself  the  previously  diffused 
expansive  and  contractile  forces,  performs  a  constant  succession 
of  diastolic  and  systolic  motions,  and  constitutes  the  rudi 
ment  of  the  future  heart. 

Other  processions  from  the  blood-vessels  form,  in  like 
manner,  the  rudiments  of  the  alimentary  canal,  the  liver,  the 
lungs,  the  brain,  etc.  These,  by  a  constant  rejection  (through 
the  expansive  or  emanative  force)  of  particles  foreign  to  their 
respective  and  appropriate  composition,  and  as  constant  an 
attraction  and  appropriation  of  the  particles  which  they  need, 
finally  arrive  at  the  full  maturity  of  their  complex  structures, 
and  together,  form  the  complete  living  organism.  The  complet-3 
organism,  therefore,  manifests  the  perfection  of  elimination  of 
unsuitable  substances  from  each  particular  organ  (which  sub- 
stances, therefore,  go  to  form  other  organs  to  which  they  are 
suitable),  and  the  perfection  of  condensation  or  aggregation  in 
each  organ  of  those  substances  which  are  suitable  to  its  own 
composition. 

The  same  remarks  are,  in  principle,  applicable  to  the  whole 
animated  creation  as  to  one  grand  Form.  Its  first  and  lowest 
development,  as  shown  by  fossilology,  consisted  of  polypiaria 
and  other  radiated  forms.  Now,  the  polypi  of  a  coral  reef 
may  almost  be  considered  as  one  extended  animal,  with  little 
distinction  of  parts.  The  substances  and  functions  of  heart, 
stomach,  lungs,  brain,  etc.,  seem  to  be  interdiffused  and  con- 
founded with  each  other  in  such  a  way  that  one  portion  of  the 
structure  is  no  more  vital  than  another,  and  therefore,  into 
however  numerous  or  small  fragments  this  animal  substance 
may  become  divided  or  subdivided,  each  fragment,  still  chaot- 
ically embodying  in  i  ;elf  all  the  principles  of  vitality  and 


190  DUALISM      OF      FORCES. 

organization,  continues  to  live  and  grow  as  a  distinct  animal 
It,  therefore,  corresponds  to  the  primitive  cellular  structure  of 
the  impregnated  ova  of  the  higher  animals.  In  the  higher 
forms  of  the  Radiata,  the  organs,  with  their  functional  opera- 
tions, are  perceptibly  more  distinct  from  each  other.  In  the 
Articulata,  there  is  still  more  definite  association  of  the  ele- 
ments of  organs  into  their  distinct  and  appropriate  forms;  but 
this  association  is  still  so  imperfect,  that  if  the  lobster  or 
crab,  for  example,  loses  a  claw,  it  eliminates  from  other  por- 
tions of  its  system  elements  which  form  another  claw — thus 
showing  that  the  claw-principle,  so  to  speak,  previously  ex- 
isted undeveloped,  in  the  other  parts  of  the  organism,  by  a 
draft  upon  which  the  recuperation  is  now  produced.  And  so 
in  each  succeeding  class  in  the  ascending  scale  of  animal  crea- 
tions, heart  becomes  more  distinctly  heart,  brain  becomes 
more  distinctly  brain,  and  all  the  other  organs  become  corre- 
spondingly more  distinct  and  highly  developed,  and  more  free 
from  those  particles  which  properly  belong  to  other  organs, 
until  the  perfection  of  living  organization  is  attained  in  the 
perfected  human  form,  which  may  be  considered  as  the  whole 
Animal  Kingdom  in  the  aggregate,  with  something  more  be- 
sides. 

And  so,  reducing  these  specific  subjects  of  contemplation  to 
one  comprehensive  view,  it  may  be  said,  that  in  the  beginning 
\he  material  elements  of  man,  animal,  vegetable,  mineral, 
planet,  sun,  and  firmament,  existed  in  common  intei diffusion 
in  the  great,  universal,  and  undistinguishable  mass  of  nebu- 
lous matter,  in  such  a  way  that  each  part  was  lost  in  all  other 
parts.  The  great  mass,  then,  formed,  as  it  were,  one  grand 
Polypus,  or  one  grand  ovum,  corresponding  to  the  ovum  of  an 
animal,  and  from  it,  after  fecundation,  and  by  means  of  a  con- 
stant incubative  and  superior  influence,  the  ultimate  develop- 


S  I'll  E  RES      AXD     SYMPATHY.  101 

merit  of  the  complex  system  in  i'.s  mature  form,  was  to  ; 
Materials  in  the  primitive  and  lowest  degree  of  refinement, 
draw  together  according  to  rudimental  affinities,  at  the  same 
time  evolving  their  uncondensible  elements,  and  thus  form 
vast  and  indefinite  nebulous  aggregation,  with  their  circum- 
ambient ether.  Further  evolutions  and  condensations,  and 
consequent  refinements,  form,  successively,  firmaments,  suns, 
planets,  mineral  aggregations,  plants,  animals,  and  finally  the 
bodies  of  human  beings — all  of  which,  from  first  to  last,  have 
directly  or  indirectly  collected  and  selected  their  materials 
from  the  great  mass  of  all  materials,  even  as  the  nodules  of 
flint,  before  spoken  of  as  embodied  in  the  strata  of  chalk,  have 
collected  their  component  silicious  particles  from  the  mass  of 
surrounding  materials  in  which  they  must  have  been  originally 
diffused ! 

The  fact  that,  in  the  process  of  all  formations,  there  is  an 
expansion  and  evolution  of  uncondensible  elements  from  the 
centers  of  their  chaotic  materials,  as  well  as  a  clustering 
around  central  nuclei,  of  those  particles  capable  of  constitut- 
ing the  tangible  structure  with  its  various  parts,  more  fully 
illustrates  the  doctrine  heretofore  advanced,  that  all  forma 
and  organisms,  from  stellar  assemblages,  individual  suns,  and 
planets,  to  crystals,  vegetables,  animals,  and  human  beings, 
are  surrounded  by  an  aromal  counterpart  or  "  sphere."  It 
will  be  borne  in  mind,  that  it  is  by  the  inter-action  of  these 
aromal  counter  parts,  or  spheres  of  different  forms  and  organ- 
isms (and  which  are  always  expressive  of  the  specific  interior 
qualities  of  the  latter),  that  these  forms  and  organisms  are 
brought  into  what  may  be  called  "  magnetic  sympathy  "  with 
each  other ;  and  it  is  by  the  combined  aromal  spheres  of  all 
organisms,  forms,  and  systems,  that  the  great  inter-active 
nerve-aura  of  the  universe,  as  oni  Body,  is  made  up. 


192  DUALISM     OF     FORCES. 

The  expansions  and  emanations  from  centers  perpetually 
prevalent  throughout  the  whole  domain  of  forms  and  organ- 
isms,  may  be  considered  as  one  general  diastole ;  while  the 
contractions  and  precipitations  upon  centers,  likewise  univer- 
sally prevalent,  may  be  considered  as  one  general  systole ; 
and  these  motions,  in  their  more  progressed  and  periodically 
alternating  forms,  are  expressed  in  the  secular  expansions  and 
contractions  of  planetary  orbits ;  in  the  oscillations  of  hea- 
venly bodies  between  their  aphelion  and  perihelion  points;  in 
the  ebbing  and  flowing  of  tides;  in  the  inspirations  and  ex- 
pirations of  plants ;  in  the  dilations  and  contractions  of  the 
human  heart;  and  in  the  breathings  and  pulsations  of 
microscopic  forms  of  life,  which  spoit  in  a  single  drop  of 
water. 

In  attributing  thus  much  to  the  laws  of  Expansion  and 
Contraction  (or  Attraction),  it  is  not  by  any  means  intended 
to  supersede  the  septinary  divisions  of  laws,  as  presented  in 
preceding  pages.  Our  object  has  rather  been  to  show  that 
these  two  fundamental  laws,  being,  as  it  were,  male  and  fe- 
male in  conjugal  unity,  are  the  parents  and  grandparents  of 
all  other  laws.  Thus  it  is  from  a  combination  of  Expansive 
and  Contractive  movements  that  the  law  of  Circulation  im- 
mediately ensues  in  every  portion  of  the  creation,  even  as  the 
same  ensues  in  the  animal  and  human  systems,  from  the  ex- 
pansive and  contractile  motions  of  the  heart :  and  as  particles 
are  thus  made  to  flow  throughout  each  system,  and  are  placed 
in  general  intercommunication  with  other  particles,  there  is 
occasion  given  to  the  operation  of  the  fourth  law,  oy  whicfc 
mutually  affinitized  particles,  whether  in  organic  or  inorganic 
creations,  unite  together  and  form  the  tissues  of  the  perma 
nent  physical  structure.  Thence,  after  performing  their  ap- 
propriate offices,  and  undergoing  specific  refinements,  they  are 


DIVINE     LOYE     AND      WISDOM.  193 

taken  up  and  re-deposited  in  higher  and  more  complex  masses 
or  tissues,  or  excreted  entirely  from  the  system,  according  to 
the  fifth  law — the  law  of  segregation — the  same  being  also  ap- 
plicable, in  different  degrees,  to  each  creation ;  then  by  mu- 
tual impartations  of  essences  and  forces  between  these  masses 
or  tissues,  as  necessary  parts  or  organs  of  the  system,  a  sixth 
law  is  developed — the  law  of  universal  sympathy  and  har- 
monial  reciprocation.  Finally,  all  these  laws  and  operations, 
harmoniously  combined,  give  occasion  to  the  normal  manifes- 
tation of  the  seventh  and  highest  law — the  law  governing  the 
functions  of  the  complex  unity,  and  in  which  the  principles  of 
Love  and  Wisdom,  Heat  and  Light,  Expansion  and  Attrac- 
tion, with  all  their  modifications  and  subordinates,  are  em- 
braced in  unitary  form. 

As  these  Expansive  and  Attractive  operations  are  de- 
pendent upon  physical  Heat  and  Light,  and  these  are  ulti 
mately  dependent  for  their  generation  upon  spiritual  Heat 
and  Light,  which  are  conditions  of  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom,, 
so  it  follows  that  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom  pervade  nature 
co-extensively  with  Expansive  and  Attractive  forces,  and  are 
the  fundamental  and  essential  constituents  of  the  life-principle 
which  inheres  in  every  form  of  being.  Things  live,  therefore, 
only  in  proportion  to  the  degree  in  which  they  are  recipients 
of  the  essences  and  forms  of  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom ;  and 
without  these,  all  things  would  be  dead. 

17 


CHAPTEE    XIX. 

CIRCLES. 

It  was  before  shown  that  the  constant  Expansive  and 
Contractive  forces,  particularly  illustrated  in  the  previous 
chapter,  call  into  requisition  the  law  of  Circulation,  which 
gives  form  to  the  motion  of  particles  impelled  by  the 
previous  forces.  By  circulation  is  meant  a  proceeding  from 
u  given  point  or  condition,  and  finally  returning  to  the  same, 
whether  the  line  of  progression  described  by  the  movement 
is  mathematically  that  of  an  exact  circle  or  not ;  as  is  illus- 
trated by  the  flowing  of  blood  from  the  heart,  through  various 
channels  back  again  to  the  heart. 

But  it  is  here  to  be  particularly  observed  that  the  blood,  in 
passing  from  the  heart,  through  various  parts  of  the  system 
back  again  to  the  heart,  deposits  certain  portions  of  its  ele- 
ments in  various  fleshy  and  osseous  tissues  along  its  path. 
This  example,  taken  from  the  functional  operations  of  the 
Microcosm,  or  little  universe,  serves  as  a  sure  index  of  similar 
operations  which  occur  in  the  various  departments  of  the 
Macrocosm,  or  great  universe,  and  leads  to  the  remark, 
that  all  regularly  circulating  materials,  whether  in  the  human, 
the  animal,  the  vegetable,  the  mineral,  the  geognostic,  or  the 
astronomical  department  of  creation,  impart  certain  of  their 
elements  to  the  ambient  spaces  through  which  they  pass.  It 
is  by  the  aggregation  of  such  imparted  eitmients  that  all 
regularly  developed  forms  i;i  nature  have  their  being ;  and  as 


CIRCLES.  195 

it  was  heretofore  shown  that  all  natural  movements  and  de- 
velopments observe  a  regular  serial  order  of  successive  gra- 
dations, it  follows,  from  the  law  of  Circulation,  that  this  serial 
order,  as  applicable  to  each  system  or  degree  of  nature,  must 
exemplify  the  circle.  This  idea  of  the  universality  of  the  cir- 
cular constitution  and  movements  of  things,  shall  now  be 
more  particularly  illustrated  by  facts. 

Extending  our  observations  to  the  heavenly  bodies,  we 
see  circular  motion  everywhere  prevailing.  Satellites  move 
around  planets,  planets  around  suns,  suns  around  still  greater 
suns,  and  an  extension  of  the  analogical  chain  renders  it,  as 
before  shown,  extremely  probable,  not  to  say  certain,  that 
all  secondary  bodies  in  universal  space,  revolve  in  common, 
around  one  grand  primitive  Center  and  Source  of  attraction. 
If  this  be  the  case,  then,  whatever  particular  movements  the 
secondary  bodies  may  have  assumed  from  the  development 
of  forms  of  internal  forces  peculiar  to  themselves,  these  move- 
ments are  subordinate  to  the  great  material  Source  of  move- 
ment, and  the  forces  by  which  they  occur  are  only  repro- 
ductions or  ascensions,  in  specific  and  modified  forms,  of  the 
forces  which  primarily  appertain  to  it. 

But  as  the  forces  producing  these  primitive  rotatory  and 
orbitual  motions  in  the  universe,  are  the  final  source  of  all 
those  diversified  ramifications  of  circular  movement,  which 
are  manifested  by  subordinate  systems,  suns,  and  planets,  so 
the  orbitual  and  rotatory  motions  of  planets  are  the  more  im- 
mediate parents  and  dependencies  of  still  more  diversified  and 
minute  systems  of  circular  development.  From  the  orbitual 
motion  of  the  earth,  for  instance  (and  the  fact  also  applies  to 
other  planets),  results  a  continually  repeated  circle  of  thermal 
changes,  which  mark  the  various  seasons  of  the  year.  These 
give  rise  to  the  various  annual  series  of  vegetable  and  othei 


196  CIRCLES. 

developments.  In  the  genial  heat  of  spring,  the  seed  that  has 
sunk  into  the  moist  vegetable  mould,  expands  and  puts  forth 
successively  the  stem,  the  branches,  the  leaves,  the  flower- 
buds,  the  (lowers,  and  the  fruit  containing  seed  of  the  same 
species  of  that  from  which  the  plant  sprang.  Then,  as  the 
frosts  of  winter  begin  again  to  prevail,  the  life  of  the  plant 
becomes  extinct ;  its  ripened  seeds  are  scattered  upon  the 
ground,  to  become  the  progenitors  of  other  plants  of  the  same 
kind,  and  the  materials  of  the  plant  also  sink  to  the  earth  to 
replenish  the  vegetable  mould  from  which  they  sprang.  Thus 
the  same  general  condition  is  again  brought  about  with  that 
from  which  the  first  plant  sprang;  and  the  germination, 
growth,  maturity,  and  decay  of  the  plant,  with  the  scattering 
of  its  seed  upon  the  earth,  exemplifies  a  complete  circle.  So 
with  the  putting  forth  of  the  foliage,  the  development  of  the 
blossoms  and  fruit,  and  the  final  hibernation  of  arborescent 
vegetation. 

Coincident,  also,  with  the  changes  of  the  seasons,  are  the 
periodical  awakenings  of  certain  animal  instincts,  and  also  the 
occurrence  of  certain  conditions  in  the  human,  physical,  and 
mental  economy.  These  changes,  occurring,  as  they  do,  in 
regular  serial  succession,  and  always  returning  to  the  point 
from  which  they  started,  exempt  »fy,  also,  the  Circle. 

And  so,  from  the  alternations  of  day  and  night,  which,  with 
their  successive  hours  and  moments,  mark  a  diurnal  circle  of 
physical  changes,  still  more  minute  circles  of  change  ensue, 
in  the  economy  of  organic  beings.  Such  are  the  circles  of 
wakefulness  and  sleep ;  of  activity  and  repose ;  of  organic 
waste  and  recuperation,  with  all  their  intermediate  and 
transitional  stages,  whether  we  apply  the  remark  to  the 
vegetable,  the  animal,  or  the  human  creation.  And  it  may 
even  be  said  that  every  passage,  from  one  degree  or  stage  to 


C  I  R  C  L  E  S  .  197 

■mother,  in  the  progress  of  any  complete  circle  of  unfoldings, 
involves  a  circle  or  system  of  a  minuter  kind,  until  we  get 
down  to  the  physiological  functions  of  the  organism  of  an 
cphemeron,  to  the  circuit  of  blood  and  organic  deposits  in 
the  system  of  an  anamalcule,  or  to  the  orbitual  and  axial 
revolutions  of  an  atom. 

It  may  also  be  said  that  the  progression  from  the  origin  to 
the  dissolution  of  any  system,  or  to  its  passage  into  another 
form,  involves  the  circle;  and  this  is  equally  true  of  the 
universe  as  a  whole,  of  its  included  stellar  and  solar  systems 
and  individual  worlds,  and  of  the  further  ramifications  of  crea- 
tion, constituting  the  mineral,  vegetable,  animal,  and  human 
kingdoms,  together  with  their  various  genera^  species,  and  in- 
dividual forms,  respectively. 

The  minutest  of  these  circles  of  movement  and  develop 
ment,  are  included  in,  and  are,  in  some  sense,  dependent 
upon,  the  greater,  and  those  are  in  like  manner  included  in 
and  dependent  upon,  still  greater  (which,  therefore,  form 
circles  of  circles),  and  all  are  included  in  the  great  Circle 
which  comprehends  all  movements  and  developments  in  the 
universe,  from  its  periphery  to  its  center,  from  the  whole 
unimaginable  vortex  of  being  to  a  single  atom  of  matter, 
and  from  the  very  origin  to  the  very  end  of  all  material 
things. 

The  close  of  each  comprehensive  circle  of  operations  marks 
an  era,  not  only  in  its  own  history,  but  also  in  the  history  of 
its  included  circles,  which  are,  to  some  extent,  dependent  upon 
its  state  for  their  own  specific  states.  For  illustration,  the 
earth,  during  a  single  orbitual  revolution,  makes,  to  sense, 
three  hundred  and  sixty-five  revolutions  on  its  own  axis,  occa- 
sioning the  same  number  of  repetitions  of  the  phenomena  of 
day  and  night.     But  these  days  and  nights,  or  circles  of  diur- 


198  CIRCLES. 

nal  change,  vary  as  to  their  length,  temperature,  etc.,  with  the 
different  stages  of  progress  which  are  attained  in  the  annual 
circle  of  revolution.  But,  if  the  reasonings  of  Maedler  and 
others  are  to  be  relied  upon,  the  whole  Solar  System,  includ 
ing  the  earth,  is  sweeping  round  a  grand  common  center,  which 
is  so  distant,  that  a  single  orbitual  revolution  can  not  proba- 
bly be  accomplished  in  a  less  period  than  eighteen  millions 
of  years.  As  such  a  revolution  will  constitute  the  great  year 
of  the  solar  system,  it  is  extremely  probable  that  the  progress 
of  this  revolution  will  be  marked  with  changes  in  ethereal 
elements  which  affect  climate  and  the  various  circles  of  organic 
creation  upon  our  globe,  in  a  manner  analogous  to  the  influ- 
ence of  the  orbitual  revolution  of  the  earth,  upon  the  length 
and  other  characteristics  of  the  days  and  nights,  and  thence, 
also,  upon  the  annual  developments  in  the  vegetable  and  ani- 
mal kingdoms.  This  gradual  alteration  of  the  position  of  the 
Solar  System  in  the  sidereal  spaces,  and  the  elemental  changes 
consequent  thereupon,  may  of  itself  be  sufficient  in  the  course 
of  time  to  work  an  entire  change  in  the  character  of  organic 
life  upon  our  globe ;  and  still  mightier  changes  in  still  mightier 
periods  of  time,  may  be  wrought  in  the  whole  aspect  of  crea- 
tion, physical  and  moral,  by  those  inconceivably  more  stu- 
pendous revolutions  to  which  all  of  these  are  subordinate.*  It 
is  by  the  combined  influences  of  all  other  circles  of  movement 
and  creation,  that  each  particular  circle  is  precisely  what  it  is; 
and  whenever  there  is  any  change  in  the  functional  operations 
of  any  portion  of  the  grand  system  of  Being,  or  of  any  of  its 
sub-systems,  physical,  mental,  or  moral,  there  is,  according  U 

*  Professor  Nichol  has  suggested  the  idea  that  the  marked  changes  of  climate,  and 
nence  of  the  organic  and  other  productions  of  the  earth,  which  occurred  during  tho 
geological  periods,  may  not  have  been  entirely  disconnected  with  the  movements  of 
the  solar  system  through  the  stellar  spaces.  (See  Nicholas  "  Architecture  of  the 
tlwrcca.") 


CIRCLES.  199 

the  law  of  sympathy,  necessarily  some  co-related  change  in  all 
circles  of  operation  included  in  this,  however  inappreciable  to 
human  conceptions  that  change  may  be. 

Thus  do  we  see  that  the  great  system  of  universal  Nature, 
from  its  most  comprehensive  outlines  as  a  whole,  down  to  its 
infinitessimal  parts,  is  one  compact  system  of  co-related 
"  w  heels  within  wheels,"  which  play  harmoniously  together,  as 
the  various  and  mutually  dependent  parts  of  a  most  sublime 
and  magnificent  Machine !  It  is  a  machine,  however,  which, 
notwithstanding  its  perfection  as  a  machine,  is  neither  abso- 
lutely self-propelling,  nor  can  :t  evolve  its  appropriate  fabrics, 
and  thus  fulfill  the  designs  of  its  Maker,  without  the  constant 
and  intelligent  superintendence  of  a  superior  Power — even  the 
Power  from  which  it  received  its  origin — as  has  before  been 
intimated,  and  will  be  more  particularly  illustrated  hereafter. 

The  general  and  particular  numbers  of  progressive  grada- 
tions which  extend  from  beginnings  to  endings,  and  thus  con- 
stitute  each  known  circle  of  developments,  or  each  known 
form  of  a  perfect  series,  that  is  inwoven  with  all  others  in  the 
texture  of  nature,  have  heretofore  been  maintained  to  be 
three  and  seven.  The  reasons  for  considering  these  as  the 
numbers  of  perfection  applicable  to  every  complete  system  of 
being,  have  been  extensively  illustrated  in  foregoing  pages,  and 
need  not  be  repeated  in  this  place. 


CHAPTEE    XX. 

THE    DOCTRINE    OF    DEGREES. 

The  exposition  of  the  serial  and  circular  orde:/  of  nature's 
operations  and  constituent  parts,  as  given  in  the  foregoing 
chapter,  prepares  us  for  the  more  full  comprehension  of  another 
doctrine,  which  is  of  no  less  importance  than  the  previous  one. 
I  refer  to  the  truth  that  each  complete  system  of  creation  and 
operation,  from  greatest  to  smallest,  together  with  the  whole 
realm  of  being  as  one  System,  is  resolvable  into  distinct  Degrees, 
associated  with  each  other  according  to  a  certain  definite  order 
—and  that  each  complete  System  as  one  comprehensive  De- 
gree, is  connected,  after  the  same  general  order,  with  the  one 
immediately  beneath,  and  that  immediately  above  it,  in  the 
general  scale.  This  doctrine  of  Degrees  has  been  constantly 
intimated  in  foregoing  discussions;  but  its  importance  as  a 
general  guide  to  truth,  demands  for  it  a  more  direct  and  par- 
ticular illustration,  which  shall  now  be  given. 

The  writer's  theory  of  Degrees  was  formed  mainly  from  a 
direct  study  of  nature,  and  with  but  little  immediate  aid  from 
human  suggestions  beyond  what  was  contained  in  the  mere 
word  "  Degrees,"  as  applied  to  nature's  unfoldings  ;  but  when 
on  the  point  of  placing  the  present  work,  containing  a  chapter 
on  this  subject,  in  the  hands  of  the  printers,  my  attention  was 
called  by  a  friend  to  the  teachings  of  Emanuel  Swedenborg 
on  the  same  subject.  So  fir  as  I  understand  what  that  cele- 
brated philosopher  has  written  upon  this  theme,  I  am  delighted 


THE     DOCTRINE     CF     DEGREES.  201 

in  being  able  to  recognize  it  not  only  as  entirely  true,  but  highly 
interesting  and  important ;  at  the  same  time  that  I  find  in  it  a 
confirmation  of  the  principles  involved  in  my  previous  thoughts 
upon  the  same . subject.  This,  however,  is  said  without  the 
intention  to  intimate  any  opinion  as  to  the  truthfulness  or  un- 
truthfulness of  the  general  writings  of  Swedenborg,  concerning 
which,  indeed,  T  know  comparatively  little. 

The  doctrine  of  Swedenborg  concerning  Degrees,  is  essen- 
tially similar  to  that  which  I  had  conceived,  the  main  differ- 
ence, aside  from  his  peculiar  terminology,  consisting  in  his 
exclusive  use  of  the  ternary  division,  whereas  J,  as  a  general 
rule,  use  the  septinary,  as  involving  the  ternary.  In  Sweden- 
borg's  writings,  however,  I  find  many  features  and  applications 
of  this  doctrine  of  which  I  had  not  before  conceived  ;  while, 
.n  my  own  previously  embodied  thoughts  upon  this  subject, 
there  were  ideas  which  I  have  not  yet  found  in  Swedenborg.  I 
am,  therefore,  induced  to  so  far  modify  the  chapter  I  had 
written  on  this  subject,  as  to  give  a  general  reflex  of  what  is 
essential  and  fundamental  in  both  forms  of  the  conception,  in 
doing  which  I  shall  so  far  change  my  own  previously  adopted 
terminology,  as  to  avoid  a  confounding  of  ideas  essentially 
different,  as  originating  with  the  Swedish  philosopher  and  my- 
self. 

Swedenborg  makes  Degrees  of  two  kinds,  viz.,  continuous 
Degrees,  or  Degrees  of  latitude,  and  discreet  Degrees,  or  De 
grees  of  altitude.  Continuous  Degrees,  or  Degrees  of  latitude, 
are  described  as  being  "  like  degrees  from  light  to  shade,  from 
heat  to  cold,  from  hard  to  soft,  from  gross  to  subtle,  etc." 
But  Discreet  Degrees  are  described  as  "  entirely  different" 
from  these,  in  that  "  they  are  in  the  relation  of  prior,  posterior, 
and  postreme,  or  of  end,  cause,  and  effect.  They  are  called 
Discreet  Degrees,"  continues  'he  writer,  "  because  the  prior  is 


202  THE     DOCTRINE     OF     IEGEEES. 

by  itself,  the  posterior  by  itself,  and  the  postreme  by  itself; 
but  still,  taken  together,  they  make  a  one." 

Further  illustrations  of  the  same  subject  are  given  as  fol- 
lows:  "It  is  well  known  by  ocular  experience,  that  each 
muscle  in  the  human  body  consists  of  very  minute  fibers,  and 
that  these  fasciculated,  constitute  those  larger  ones,  called  mov- 
ing fibers,  and  that  bundles  of  these  produce  the  compound 
which  is  called  a  muscle.  It  is  the  same  with  the  nerves:  very 
small  nervous  fibers  are  put  together  into  larger  ones,  which 
appear  like  filaments,  and  by  a  collection  of  such  filaments  the 
nerve  is  produced.  It  is  also  the  same  in  the  other  compagi- 
nations,  confasciculations,  and  collections  of  which  the  organs 
and  viscera  consist ;  for  these  are  compounds  of  fibers  and 
vessels,  variously  fashioned  by  similar  degrees.  The  case  is 
the  same  also  with  all  and  every  thing  of  the  Vegetable  King- 
dom, and  with  all  and  every  thing  of  the  Mineral  Kingdom ; 
in  wood  there  is  a  compagination  of  filaments  in  three-fold 
order ;  in  metals  and  stones  there  is  a  conglobation  of  parts 
also  in  three-fold  order.  These  considerations  show  the  nature 
of  Discreet  Degrees,  namely,  that  one  is  formed  from  another, 
and  by  means  of  the  second,  a  third,  or  composite ;  and  that 
each  Degree  is  discreet  from  another." 

Inasmuch  as  the  second  Degree  in  any  trine,  proceeds  from 
the  first,  and  the  third  from  the  second,  it  was  also  taught  by 
Swedenborg,  that  "  the  first  Degree  is  all  in  all  in  the  subse- 
quent degrees ;"  and  that  "  the  ultimate  Degree  is  the  complex, 
continent,  and  basis,  of  the  prior  Degrees;"  by  which  latter 
phrase  I  understand  to  be  meant,  that  in  the  ultimate  Degree; 
all  the  Degrees  receive  permanent,  potential,  and  utilized  em 
bodiment. 

This  doctrine  of  Degrees  is  extended  by  Swedenborg  to 
ftvery  department  of  existence,  whether  in  the  physical,  moral, 


THE  DOCTRINE  OF  DEGREES.     203 

civil,  psychological  or  spiritual  worlds,  and  even  to  the  infinite 
Divine  Constitution  itself,  of  which  they  are  the  outbirths  and 
correspondences.  He,  indeed,  maintains  that  all  and  every 
thing  in  each  form  of  being,  from  greatest  to  smallest,  of 
which  triunity  may  be  predicated,  contains  Degrees  both  con- 
tinuous and  discreet.  He  maintains  that  the  knowledge  of 
Discreet  Degrees  is  of  the  greatest  philosophical  importance, 
and  that  one  who  adequately  possesses  it,  will  thereby  be 
enabled  to  see  causes  without  the  previous  indications  of  their 
effects,  and  may  even  form  accurate  conclusions  respecting 
things  invisible,  to  which  the  same  doctrine  of  degrees  must 
necessarily  apply.* 

Such,  then,  is  the  doctrine  of  Degrees  as  taught  by 
Swedenborg.  But,  though  it  is  true,  so  far  as  it  goes,  I  am 
not  aware  that  it  even  claims  to  be  perfect  in  such  a  sense 
as  not  to  admit  into  its  composition  some  additional  con- 
siderations. I  do  not  suppose  that  Swedenborg  himself 
meant  to  convey  the  idea  that  each  one  of  his  Discreet  De 
grees  was  itself  an  absolutely  simple  unity  ;  and  it  is  highly 
probable  that  if  he  had  been  questioned  directly  on  the  sub- 
ject,  he  would  have  admitted  that  each  one  of  these  was 
itself  of  a  three-fold  constitution,  especially  as  he  has  ap- 
parently carried  the  doctrine  of  the  trine  down  even  to  in- 
finitesimals. 

Let  Swedenborg's  first  Discreet  Degree,  then,  stand  for 
what,  in  the  septinary  classifications  given  in  the  preceding 
pages,  ha!s  been  called  the  "  Primary  Trinity ;"  let  his  second 
Degree  stand  for  our  "Secondary  Trinity;"  and  let  his  third^ 
or  ultimate  Degree,  which  he  says  is  the  "complex,  continent 
and  basis  of  the  prior  degrees,"  stand  for  our  seventh  division, 

*  See  Swedenborg's  "  Divine  Love  and  Divine  Wisdom,"  from  No.  179  to  S4L 


204:  THE     DOCTRINE     OF     DEGREES. 

which  we  have  constantly,  though  in  other  terms,  represented 
as  the  complex,  continent,  and  basis  of  all  previous  divisions 
• — and  this  view  without  the  slightest  violence  to  any  essential 
doctrine  of  Swedenborg,  will  bring  the  theory  of  Degrees  pre- 
cisely into  the  form  in  which  I  had  conceived  it.  I  believe 
that  while  Swedenborg  himself  maintained  that  triunity  was 
predicable  of  all  completeness,  he  also  distinctly  taught  that 
the  number  seven  was  the  common  number  of  completeness. 
Consistently  with  this,  then,  it  would  seem  that  he  could 
not  avoid  admitting  that  the  septinity  in  some  way  in- 
volved the  trine — of  the  truth  of  which  idea  a  very  small 
portion  of  the  existing  evidence  is  spread  through  the  fore- 
going pages. 

The  doctrine  of  Degrees  of  altitude,  then,  in  the  light  of 
principles  heretofore  established,  and  which  doubtless  Sweden- 
borg himself  would  have  admitted,  may  be  presented  in  the 
following  modified  form : 

Let  each  component  gradation  in  the  seven-fold  series  be 
called  an  Elemental  Degree. 

Let  each  Trinity  of  Elemental  Degrees  (the  Primary  and 
Secondary  Trinities,  as  distinguished  in  foregoing  pages)  be 
called  a  Discreet  Degree ;  and 

Let  each  seven-fold  series,  as  a  whole,  be  called  a  Complete 
Degree.  We  have  thus  Elemental  Degrees,  Discreet  De- 
grees, and  Complete  Degrees. 

For  example,  let  the  Mineral  Kingdom  be  considered  as 
one  Complete  Degree,  the  Vegetable  Kingdom  as  another, 
and  the  Animal  Kingdom  as  another;  while  each  Trinity  of 
developments  in  each  of  those  Kingdoms,  as  before  repre- 
sented, is  considered  as  a  Discreet  Degree,  and  each  member 
of  each  of  those  Trinities  is  considered  as  an  Elemental  De- 
grce;    and    the   whole    theory   of  Degrees   of  altitude    will 


THE      DOCTRINE     OF     DEGREES.  205 

appear  in  a  general  and  particular  form  of  embodiment  that 
will  be  intelligible  to  most  minds. 

Each    Complete  Degree,  viewed  in  this  light,  will  appear 

connected  with  the  contiguous  Complete  Degree,  in  the  same 
way  as  each  Discreet  Degree  is  connected  with  its  contiguous 
Discreet  Degree,  and  as  each  Elemental  Degree  is  connected 
with  its  contiguous  Elemental  Degree;  so  that  Nature,  as  a 
whole,  will  exhibit  the  same  ascending  order  of  Complete  De- 
grees (or  systems)  that  is  exhibited  by  the  Elemental  Degrees 
composing  any  seven-fold  series.  I  can  not  avoid  the  thought 
that  this  classification  of  Degrees,  duly  understood,  would 
present  a  new  and  important  aid  to  a  proper  comprehension 
of  the  ensemble,  as  well  as  the  particulars  of  nature,  with 
her  forces,  modes  of  operation,  and  mutual  relations  of 
parts. 

In  view  of  the  circular  constitution  and  order  of  procession 
of  each  system  of  being,  as  illustrated  in  the  chapter  im- 
mediately preceding  this,  we  are  prepared  to  further  remark, 
that  Degrees  of  altitude  of  each  of  these  kinds,  result  from  a 
sjiiral  iqirising,  so  to  speak,  of  the  circle  of  development,  by 
which  the  first  Elemental  Degree  ascends  to  the  altitude  of  the 
second,  the  second  to  the  third,  and  so  on ;  or  by  which  the  first 
Discreet  Degree  progressively  rises  to  the  altitude  of  the 
second,  and  the  second  to  the  third,  and  by  which  one  whole 
circle  of  developments,  in  being  completed,  thus  forming  a 
Complete  Degree,  passes  out  into  another  and  higher  circle  or 
Complete  Degree.  For  example,  one  octave  in  music,  which 
may  be  considered  as  a  series  of  Elemental  Degrees  of  sound, 
forms  one  Complete  Degree  of  sound,  and  each  other  octave 
forms  another  Complete  Degree,  superior  or  inferior  to  it,  ac- 
cording as  it  is  above  or  below  it;  and  a  similar,  remark  is 
applicable  to  the  Mineral,  Vegetable,  and  Animal  Kingdoms, 

18 


206  THE     HOC'IEINE     OF     DEGREES. 

before  referred  to  as  contiguous  and  Complete  Degrees  of 
creation,  the  higher  of  which  arise,  in  some  sense  of  the  term 
"progression,"  out  of  the  lower. 

Of  these  latter  Kingdoms  it  may  be  said,  that  they  are  all 
in  accord  with  each  other,  as  different  octaves  in  music  having 
the  same  key-note.  In  other  words,  each  Complete  Degree, 
Circle,  or  Kingdom,  seems  to  be,  member  by  member,  an  ex- 
act counterpart  of  the  others,  on  a  higher  or  lower  scale ;  and 
this  may  be  said  of  many  other  Complete  Degrees.  A  Com- 
plete Degree,  however,  may  take  its  rise  any  where  along  the 
circle  of  an  antecedent  Degree,  in  the  same  way  as  any  note 
in  an  octave  may  be  taken  as  the  initial  note  of  another  and 
independent  octave.  For  example,  it  was  shown  in  pre- 
ceding pages,  that  the  seven-fold  series  of  outer  terrestrial 
developments,  as  mentioned  by  Moses,  commenced  upon  tlie 
basis  of  the  third  development  in  the  comprehensive  geognos- 
tic  series,  which  had  been  before  described;  and  many 
more  examples  of  a  similar  kind  might  be  given  were  it 
necessary.  But  however  the  key-notes  of  different  octaves 
(or  Complete  Degrees)  of  natural  developments  may  differ, 
the  octaves  themselves  all  contain  the  same  number  of  parts, 
which  have  similar  relations  to  each  other,  and  occur  in  the 
same  order  of  succession;  and  therefore  all  are  governed  by 
the  same  serial  and  gradational  law. 

The  doctrine  of  Degrees  might  receive  a  much  more  ex- 
tended illustration  and  application  than  is  exhibited  above, 
but  as  our  object  should  first  be  to  establish  general  prin- 
ciples, the  foregoing  must  suffice  for  the  present.  Owing  to 
its  novelty  and  somewhat  abstruse  nature,  this  doctrine 
may,  to  the  ordinary  reader,  be  at  first  somewhat  difficult 
of  full  comprehension;  but  I  can  confidently  assure  him, 
that  if,  by  the  little  perseverance  of  mental  effort  that  wilJ 


THE     DOCTRINE     OF      DEGREES.  207 

be  required,  he  succeeds  in  mastering  it,  he  will  find  that 
it  will  greatly  simplify  and  facilitate  investigation  in  every 
other  department  of  thought,  whether  in  physics,  psychology, 
theology,  or  as  relating  to  ar.y  of  their  numerous  cognate 
subjects. 


OHAPTEK  XXI. 

THE  DOCTRINE  OF  CORRESPONDENCES, 

As  a  natural  sequence  of  the  doctrines  of  Serial  Cirjles,  and 
of  Degrees,  as  presented  in  the  foregoing  pages,  arises  that 
doctrine  of  Correspondences  which  has  been  the  guide  to  so 
many  important  conclusions  set  forth  in  this  work.  All  per- 
fect Series,  Circles,  or  complete  Degrees  involved  in  the  sys- 
tem of  creation,  must,  of  course,  proceed  from  the  same  final 
Cause ;  and  as  they  must  thus  correspond  to  the  common  final 
Cause,  they  must  hence,  in  some  way,  correspond  to  each 
other.  Moreover,  every  complete  Degree  in  the  character  of 
a  Circle,  necessarily  involves  the  same  principles  of  constitu- 
tion with  all  other  Circles,  and  therefore  must,  in  the  general 
sense,  correspond  to  all  others,  whether  they  be  on  a  higher  or 
lower  scale.  And  as  each  circle  consists  of  the  same  number 
of  parts,  which  occur  in  the  same  order  of  sequence  and  rela- 
tions, so  each  part  of  any  circle  corresponds,  in  the  general' 
sense,  to  the  similarly  disposed  parts  of  all  other  circles. 
Thus  it  is,  that  if  we  acquaint  ourselves  thoroughly  with  the 
characteristics  and  interior  principles  of  any  complete  circle 
or  Degree  in  nature,  we  may,  in  a  general  way,  make  it  the 
exponent  of  all  other  circles  or  complete  Degrees.  But  in 
order  to  pursue  this  correspond  en tial  method  of  investigation 
to  the  best  advantage,  and  with  the  most  accurate  results  in 
the  way  of  eliciting  truth,  we  must,  of  course,  have  a  due  re- 
gard to  the  relative  positions  in  the  whole  grand  scale  or 


CORRESPONDENCES.  209 

Circle  of  creation,  occupied  by  the  two  circles  which  are  the 
special  terms  of  comparison,  and  to  the  peculiarities  of  quality 
and  development  incident  to  their  respective  positions. 

The  comparison  exhibited  in  foregoing  pages,  between  Pri- 
mary and  Secondary  Trinities,  or  Discreet  Degrees,  as  they 
were  subsequently  called,  shows  that  there  exists  also  a  gene« 
ral  and  particular  correspondence  between  them ;  but  this  cor- 
respondence is  not  so  perfect  as  that  which  exists,  generally 
and  particularly,  between  the  Complete  Degrees  or  Octaves  of 
natural  unfolding. 

It  may,  moreover,  be  said  that  any  two  creations,  forms,  or 
developments,  which  involve  the  same  principles  of  constitu- 
tion and  operation,  correspond  to  each  other,  however  various 
may  be  the  specific  departments  of  existence  in  which  they 
may  be  found.  An  identity  of  principles,  indeed,  is  the  essen- 
tial-basis of  correspondence  between  higher  and  lower,  or  be- 
tween ulterior  and  prior  developments ;  and  in  the  light  of  this 
fact,  all  forms  and  developments  in  the  material  and  exterior 
world  may  be  seen  to  correspond  even  to  things  of  a  spiritual 
nature. ;  and  things  of  a  spiritual  nature  may,  on  the  other 
hand,  be  seen  to  correspond  to  them.  Indeed,  if  the  science 
of  Correspondences  were  duly  developed,  nature  would  ap- 
pear as  if  invested  with  ten  thousand  tongues,  which  would 
continually  be  vocal  with  instruction.  Every  kingdom  and 
form ;  every  shrub  and  tree ;  every  leaf  and  flower ;  every 
insect,  beast,  and  bird  ;  nay,  every  point  of  compass  and  angle 
of  direction  from  any  given  point,  and  every  curve,  circle, 
spiral,  or  other  mathematical  figure,  would  speak  a  distinct 
language,  and  discourse  of  a  separate  truth ;  and  the  whole 
grand  system  of  Nature  as  One,  would  continually  discourse 
of  its  Infinite  Divine  Author,  of  whose  creative  Wisdom  and 
Love  it  is  but  an  outer  expression  and  correspondent  I 


210  CORRESPONDENCES. 

The  doctrines  of  Series,  Circles,  Degrees,  and  correspond 
ences,  therefore,  if  properly  developed  and  understood,  H'ould 
be  the  must  efficient  of  all  possible  aids  to  the  discovery  of 
that  grand  system  of  general  truth  whose  millions  of  parts  are 
all  harmonious,  mutually  explanatory,  and  corroborative,  of 
each  other.  Let  the  leading  minds  of  the  age,  then,  bestow 
due  attention  upon  the  development  of  these  principles  of  in- 
vestigation ;  and  in  proportion  as  they  are  comprehended  and 
applied  in  the  world,  the  conflicts  of  the  various  parties  in 
philosophy,  theology,  and  even* politics,  will  be  swallowed  up 
in  one  grand  and  harmonious  system  of  thought,  the  creden- 
tials of  whose  truthfulness  will  be  borne  upon  its  very  face,  to 
be  seen  and  read  of  all  men.  With  the  aid  of  such  a  system, 
properly  unfolded,  even  the  child  might  set  out  on  its  course 
of  progression,  with  the  unadulterated  truth,  and  even  the 
whole  truth — which,  though  at  first  in  a  diminished  form  of 
representation,  and  involved  in  comprehensive  generals,  would, 
as  the  mind  expanded,  gradually  magnify,  and  regularly  and 
harmoniously  unfold  into  particulars,  for  ever  and  ever.  The 
harmony  of  thoughts  thus  brought  about  in  the  world,  would, 
in  proportion  to  its  degree,  be  necessarily  accompanied  with  a 
more  intimate  and  spiritual  conjunction  with  the  Divine 
Source  of  all  harmony,  from  the  perpetual  inflowings  of  whose 
Love  and  Wisdom,  all  the  movements  of  human  society,  in 
common  with  the  movements  of  those  planetary  and  celestial 
spheres  which  now,  without  reservation,  own  the  Divine  sway, 
would  proceed  without  a  jar,  or  a  single  note  of  discord.  This 
would  be  the  long-looked  for,  and  long-prayed  for,  reig  oi 
God  upon  earth  \ 


CHAPTER    XXII. 

THE    EOOTBINE    OF    PI.OGEESSIYE    DEVELOPMENT, 

One  important  object  of  this  treatise,  as  doubtless  has  been 
observed,  is  to  exhibit  the  connection  of  nature  with  her  in- 
terior, producing  Cause,  and  pervading  Life-force.  The  reader 
who  has  attentively  followed  us  in  the  previous  discussions 
having  a  bearing  upon  this  subject,  has  observed  that  our 
philosophy  has  uniformly  tended  to  the  idea  of  an  intelligent, 
voluntative  Divine  Agency,  as  concerned  in  the  origin  and 
government  of  the  outer  system  of  things.  But  as  our  object 
should  be  to  discover  truth  for  the  sake  of  truth,  irrespective 
of  its  character  or  consequences,  it  would  be  manifestly  in- 
consistent to  ignore  any  facts  or  manifest  principles  of  nature 
which  have  been  thought  by  any  party  in  philosophy  to 
militate  against  conclusions  such  as  those  exhibited  in  our 
previous  reasonings.  As  the  next  natural  step  beyond  the 
foregoing  investigations,  therefore,  we  proceed  to  briefly 
notice  the  merits  of  a  pending  controversy,  embracing,  sub- 
stantially, the  questions,  whether  the  system  of  nature  is  the 
result  of  the  operation  of  an  inherent  force  or  law  of  progressive 
development ?  or  whether  it  is  the  result  of  a  series  of  special 
and  independent  exertions  of  Divine  Power,  with  little  or  nn 
regard  to  law?  Though  these  questions  suggest  two  opposite 
views,  neither  of  which  we  are  able  to  adopt  without  some 
important  qualifications,  it  is  proper  that  they  should  here  be 
exhibited,  together  with  the  main  features  of  the  discussions 


212  PROGRESSIVE     DEVELOPMENT. 

they  have  engendered,  in  the  form  in  which  they  have  ex 
tensively  occupied  the  minds  of  philosophers  and  theo- 
logians of  late  years;  and  it  may  be,  that  in  the  light 
developed  by  their  conflicting  affirmative  and  negative 
arguments,  a  true  modified  theory  will  be  brought  into 
view. 

A  few  years  ago  there  was  published  an  anonymous  work, 
entitled,  "  Vestiges  of  the  Natural  History  of  Creation," 
in  which  the  idea  that  creation  is  the  natural  result  of  the 
operation  of  certain  fixed  laws,  is  ingeniously  maintained. 
Though  the  author  of  that  work  does  not  reject  the  idea  of  a 
remote,  he  rejects  that  of  an  immediate,  Divine  Agency,  as 
concerned  in  the  generation  and  government  of  the  outer 
forms  of  nature;  and  as  his  positions,  viewed  in  one  light, 
present,  unintentionally,  perhaps,  on  his  part,  a  condensed 
synopsis  of  the  whole  groundwork  of  the  pantheistic  and 
materialistic  philosophy,  it  is  proper  that  they  should  hero 
be  summarily  exhibited. 

Assuming  the  correctness  of  the  nebular  theory  of  cosmical 
creations  (after  epitomizing,  in  a  cogent  and  felicitous  manner, 
the  prominent  points  of  evidence  on  which  this  theory  is 
based),  the  author  urges  this  theory  as  exhibiting  a  succession 
of  laiv-governed  changes^  by  which  primordial  matter  was 
resolved  into  stellar  systems,  solar  systems,  and  planets,  with 
all  their  present  general  and  particular  movements  in  space. 
The  facts  in  Chemistry  and  Geology  are  then  considered,  as 
showing  that  the  present  structure  and  physical  arrangements 
of  our  globe  (together  with  all  similar  globes  in  space) 
originated,  probably,  from  laws  governing  solid,  fluid,  and 
vaporiform  substances. 

The  progressive  and  law-determined  development,  also,  of 
organic  beings,  both  in  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdoms, 


VESTIGES     OF     CREATION.  21S 

with  man  at  their  head,  is  then  maintained  by  arguments, 
of  the  more  important  of  which,  the  following  is  a  brief 
synopsis. 

1.  "We  have  seen  powerful  evidence,"  says  the  author, 
"  that  the  construction  of  this  globe  and  its  associates,  and 
inferentially  that  of  all  the  other  globes  of  space,  was  the 
result,  not  of  any  immediate  or  personal  exertion  on  the  part 
of  the  Deity,  but  of  natural  laws,  which  are  the  expressions 
of  his  will.  What  is  to  hinder  our  supposing  that  the  organic 
creation  is  also  the  result  of  natural  laws,  which  are  in  like 
manner  an  expression  of  his  will  %  More  than  this,  the  fact 
of  cosmical  arrangements  being  the  effect  of  natural  law,  is  z 
powerful  argument  for  the  organic  arrangements  being  so  like 
wise;  for  how  can  we  suppose  that  the  august  Being  who 
brought  all  these  countless  worlds  into  form  by  the  simplo 
establishment  of  a  natural  principle,  flowing  from  his  mind, 
was  to  interfere  personally  and  specially  on  every  occasion 
when  a  new  shell-fish  or  reptile  was  to  be  introduced  into 
existence  on  one  of  these  worlds]"  The  writer  further  arguen 
that,  "  to  a  reasonable  mind,  the  Divine  attributes  must  ap- 
pear, not  diminished  or  reduced  in  any  way,  but  infinitely 
exalted,  by  supposing  a  creation  by  law." 

2.  The  writer  submits  that  the  progressive  succession  of 
organic  beings,  as  revealed  in  fossilology,  by  which  the  lower 
and  more  simple  forms,  as  a  general  rule,  precede  the  higher 
and  more  complex,  is  in  perfect  harmony  with  the  hypothesis 
of  development  by  law;  whereas,  on  the  supposition  of 
special  Divine  exertions,  it  might  be  supposed  that  there 
would  have  been  many  specialities  of  Divine  creation,  as 
essentially  modifying  the  existing  order  of  things. 

3.  Particular  facts  and  analogies,  as  connected  with  the  or- 
ganic kingdoms,  seem  to  hint  that  forces  are  lodged  in  naK  re  • 


214  PROGRESSIVE     DEVELOPMENT. 

from  which  the  simpler  species  in  the  vegetable  and  animal 
world  may,  under  certain  circumstances,  derive  their  origin. 
Reference  is  made  to  the  vegetable-like  forms  of  frost  on  the 
window,  and  to  the  shrub-like  form  of  crystallization  known 
to  chemistry  as  the  Arbor  Dianas — also  to  the  vegetable-like 
forms  of  some  of  the  ordinary  appearances  of  the  electric 
fluid  ;  and  from  these  phenomena  the  writer  argues  the  prob 
ability  that  electricity  is  largely  concerned  in  the  origination 
and  growth,  not  only  of  crystals,  but  of  plants,  which  assume 
forms  according  to  specific  generative  and  other  condition?. 
Moreover,  the  growth  of  certain  plants  for  which  no  seeds 
were  sown,  and  in  situations  where  it  is  next  to  impossible 
that  such  seeds  could  have  existed,  is  thought  to  add  proba- 
bility to  the  theory  of  a  possible  spontaneous  germination  of 
regetable  forms  without  the  ordinary  seminal  mode  of  origi- 
nation— provided  such  changes  are  suddenly  made  in  the  in- 
gredients and  conditions  of  a  soil  as  are  favorable  to  the 
development  of  organic  from  inorganic  forms.  The  author 
also  mentions  the  singular  facts  that  oats  cropped  down  so  as 
i;o  prolong  the  period  of  their  growth,  have  been  known  to 
progress,  by  regular  transmutation,  into  the  form  of  rye  ;  and 
that  the  cabbage  is  known  to  be,  in  its  native  state,  a  trailing 
sea-side  plant,  totally  different  from  the  plant  in  its  cultivated 
form.  These  latter  facts,  with  others,  are  thought  to  strongly 
support  the  theory  of  a  transmutation  of  species  from  lower 
to  higher  forms. 

4.  The  formation  of  entozoa,  or  animals  within  animals, 
where  their  eggs  could  not  possibly  have  been  deposited,  is 
thought  to  argue  powerfully  for  the  independent  generation  of 
the  lower  animal  forms,  when  certain  conditions  obtain  that  are 
favorable.  This  argument  is  thought  to  be  strengthened  by 
the  fact  that  insects  of  a  low  species  (the  acarus)  were  repeat- 


KUDIMENTAEY     ORGANS.'  215 

edly  produced  in  abundance,  apparently  solely  by  galvanic 
processes  instituted  by  Messrs.  Crosse  and  Weekcs ;  and  in 
one  instance,  a  growth  of  fungi  of  a  beautiful  and  previously 
unknown  species,  was  produced  by  the  last  named  gentleman, 
by  the  same  process.*  * 

5.  Particular  features  of  animal  organization,  which  are  ap- 
parently useless  and  incidental,  are  also  adduced  in  support 
of  the  same  theory  of  law-development.  Thus  female  animals 
of  many  species  have  certain  organs  which  are  necessary  to 
their  sex  ;  while  the  same  organs  exist  rudlmentally  in  the 
males,  to  whom  they  are  not  necessary.  "  For  example,"  says 
the  writer,  "  the  mammae  of  the  human  female,  by  whom 
these  organs  are  obviously  required,  also  exist  in  the  male, 
who  has  no  occasion  for  them.  It  might  be  supposed  that  in 
this  case  there  was  a  regard  to  uniformity  for  mere  appear- 
ance sake  ;  but  that  no  such  principle  is  concerned,  appears 
from  a  much  more  remarkable  instance  connected  with  the 
marsupial  animals.  The  female  of  that  tribe  has  a  process  of 
bone  advancing  from  the  pubes,  for  the  support  of  her  pouch ; 
and  this  also  appears  in  the  male  marsupial,  who  has  no  pouch, 
and  requires  none."  Other  animals,  and  especially  among 
those  which  form  links  between  lower  and  higher  orders  in  the 
scale  of  development,  have  the  rudiments  of  organs,  to  them 
unnecessary,  but  which  were  necessary  to  animals  beneath 
them  in  the  scale  ;  but  of  facts  of  this  kind  I  need  not  give 
further  details.     These  abortive  and  rudimentary  organs,  ex- 


*  These  alleged  results  of  the  experiments  of  Messrs.  Crosse  and  Weekes,  were  at  first 
almost  universally  scouted  as  absurd  and  impossible  ;  but  subsequent  repeated  experi- 
ments, performed  duriug  several  years,  seem  to  leave  no  doubt  of  their  reality.  I 
perceive  by  a  late  communication,  published  in  the  newspapers,  from  Mr.  F.  F.  Ogden, 
United  Suites  Consul  at  Liverpool,  that  that  gentleman  has  recently  visited  the  labora- 
tory of  Mr.  Crosse,  and  became  entirely  convinced  of  the  truth  of  the  wonderful  repra* 
Bentations  concerning  this  newly  produced  insect 


216  PROGRESSIVE     IEVELOPMENT. 

isting  where  they  are  not  necessary,  must,  it  is  thought,  be 
regarded  as  blemishes  and  blunders,  on  the  supposition  that 
the  beings  who  possess  them  were  created  independently  and 
by  special  exertion ;  but  they  are  considered  as  precisely  what 
might  have  been  expected  on  the  supposition  that  creation  has 
proceeded  through  her  various  ramifications  and  transitional 
stages,  according  to  the  energizing  and  directing  influence  of  a 
uniform  law  of  development. 

In  further  illustration  and  sipport  of  the  theory  of  progres- 
sive development,  the  writer  quotes  the  following  startling 
passage  from  Fletcher's  Rudiments  of  Physiology,  in  which  it 
is  shown  that  the  general  forms,  and  the  order  of  succession, 
of  the  developments  in-  the  animal  kingdom,  are  represented 
by  the  general  forms,  and  the  order  of  succession,  of  the  de- 
velopments of  the  human  foetus.  "It  is  a  fact"  (says  Dr, 
Fletcher),  "  of  the  highest  interest  and  moment  that,  as  the 
brain  of  every  tribe  of  animals  appears  to  pass,  during  its  de- 
velopment, in  succession  through  the  types  of  all  those  below 
it,  so  the  brain  of  man  passes  through  the  types  of  those  of 
every  tribe  in  the  creation.  It  represents,  accordingly,  before 
the  second  month  of  uterogestation,  that  of  an  avertebrated 
animal ;  at  the  second  month,  that  of  an  osseous  fish  ;  at  the 
third,  that  of  a  turtle ;  at  the  fourth,  that  of  a  bird ;  at  the 
fifth,  that  of  0113  of  the  rodentia ;  at  the  sixth,  that  of  one  of 
the  ruminantia;  at  the  seventh,  that  of  one  of  the  digitagrada; 
at  the  eighth,  that  of  one  of  the  quadrumana ;  till,  at  length,  at 
the  ninth,  it  compasses  the  brain  of  man.  It  is  hardly  neces- 
sary to  say,"  continues  the  writer,  "  that  all  this  is  only  an 
approximation  to  the  truth ;  since  neither  is  the  brain  of  all 
osseous  fishes,  of  all  turtles,  of  all  birds,  nor  of  all  the  species 
of  any  of  the  above  order  of  mammals,  by  any  means  precisely 
the  same ;  nor  does  the  brain  of  the  human  foetus  at  any  time 


THEORY     OF       ORGANIC      ASCENSION.         217 

precisely  resemble,  perhaps,  that  of  any  individual  whatever 
among  the  lower  animals.  Nevertheless,  it  may  be  said  to 
represent,  at  each  of  the  above-mentioned  periods,  the  aggre* 
r/ate,  as  it  were,  of  the  brains  of  each  of  the  tribes  stated." 

Although  these  facts  were  stated  by  Dr.  Fletcher  without 
any  view  to  the  support  of  the  development-hypothesis  now 
under  consideration,  it  is  remarkable  that  the  series  of  animal 
forms  which  he  here  traces  as  representing  the  series  of  suc- 
cessive human  foetal  developments,  is  the  very  series  which,  in 
the  same  order  of  succession,  made  their  appearance  on  the 
globe  during  the  depositions  of  the  fossiliferous  rocks  from  the 
earliest  to  the  latest. 

The  foregoing  are  the  principal  arguments,  fortified  by  many 
minor  facts  and  considerations,  from  which  the  author  of  the 
"  Vestiges"  concludes  that  the  whole  system  of  creation,  with 
all  its  diversified  forms,  inanimate  and  animate,  from  its  first 
to  its  last  stage  of  unfolding,  was  brought  forth  under  thvt 
operation  of  one  grand  law  of  progressive  development,  by 
which  "  the  simjilest  and  most  primitive  type  gave  birth  to  the 
type  next  above  it,"  by  which  "  this,  again,  produced  the  nexi 
higher,  and  so  on  to  the  \ery  highest,  the  stages  of  advance 
being  in  all  cases  very  small — namely,  from  one  species  only 
to  another,  so  that  the  phenomenon  has  always  been  of 
simple  and  modest  character."  He  considers  that  after  the 
production  of  the  first  and  lowest  animal  form,  the  higher 
type  was,  in  all  cases,  produced  from  the  lower,  according  to 
the  ordinary  process  of  generation,  and  that  its  superiority  to 
its  parent  was,  in  each  instance,  owing  to  a  prolongation  of 
the  process  of  utero-gestation,  aided  by  new  and  favorable 
circumstances,  by  which  the  form  next  superior  to  the  parent, 
in  the  pre-ordained  animal  scale,  was  attained  A  similar 
principle  of  transmutation  was  applied  also  to  the  Vegetobla 

19 


218  PROGRESSIVE     DEVELOPMENT. 

Kingdom,  by  which  it  was  thought  that  higher  forms  ascended 
from  lower,  until  the  highest  were  attained. 

A  theory  so  novel  and  startling  as  the  foregoing,  did  not,  of 
course,  escape  the  most  vigorous  opposition  from  adherents 
of  prevailing  theories  in  philosophy  and  theology.  This  oppo- 
sition was  specially  inspirited  by  the  alarm  which  was  taken 
by  the  dominant  theology,  which  considered  the  theory  in 
question  as  a  bold  invasion  of  her  assumed  prerogative  as 
a  generally  unquestionable  guide  in  matters  of  religious  faith. 
The  main  features  of  this  opposition  (which,  we  think,  was 
partly  just  and  partly  unjust)  require  here  to  be  briefly  repre- 
sented, together  with  the  essential  points  of  argument  in  the 
rejoinder  which  the  opposition  called  forth  from  the  authoi 
of  the  "  Vestiges." 

The  book  in  question  was  charged  with  a  "  direct  tendency 
to  expel  the  Almighty  from  the  universe  which  He  has  made 
— to  degrade  the  god-like  race  to  whom  He  has  intrusted  tha 
development  and  appreciation  of  His  power,  and  to  render  the 
revelation  of  His  will  an  incredible  superstition ;"  and,  prob- 
ably with  quite  as  strong  a  desire  to  neutralize  this  alleged 
tendency  considered  in  the  abstract,  as  to  develop  truth 
regardless  of  its  consequences,  its  essential  idea  was  pro- 
nounced "  an  opinion  which  has  not  a  single  fact  in  its  favor — 
which  stands  in  direct  opposition  to  all  the  analogies  of  nature 
— which  is  repugnant  to  the  best  feelings  of  mankind,  and 
subversive  of  all  our  most  cherished  convictions — a  fraud  com. 
mitted  upon  the  reason,  and  an  insult  cast  upon  the  dignity  of 
our  species."* 

Tho  zeal  of  the  prominent  opposers  of  this  work,  aid  the;* 

*  Nirth  3ritish  Review  for  July,  1S45. 


NEBULAS     THEORY     OPPOSED.  219 

devotion  to  the  one  grand  object  of  putting  it  down,  as  indi 
cated  in  these  and  similar  denunciatory  expressions,  may,  in 
some  instances,  have  caused  them  to  unconsciously  magnify 
the  seeming  evidences  against  the  theory  it  propounded,  and 
as  unconsciously  to  underrate  any  real  evidence  which  may 
exist  in  its  favor.  Candor  requires,  therefore,  that  we  should 
look  at  the  merits  of  this,  as  well  as  of  all  controversies  of  a 
similar  nature,  aside  from  all  mere  denunciation  such  as  novel 
theories,  true  or  false,  are  ever  apt  to  provoke — and  in  the 
light  of  the  plain  facts  and  arguments  which  bear  upon  the 
case,  by  whichsoever  party  these  may  be  urged. 

The  nebular  hypothesis  of  cosmical  creations  urged  by  the 
author  of  the  "  Vestiges,"  as  the  initial  portion  of  the  univer- 
sal system  of  creation  supposed  by  him  to  be  unfolded  by 
law,  was  objected  to  mainly  on  the  ground  that  the  Earl  of 
Rosse's  telescope  had  succeeded  in  resolving  into  stars  certain 
nebula  which  were  before  considered  irresolvable,  and  in  con 
siderably  changing  the  apparent  form  and  outlines  of  others, 
which  had  previously  appeared  such  as  to  countenance  the  idea 
of  agglomerating  and  rotating  masses.  In  view  of  such 
"  unequivocal  facts,"  one  principal  reviewer  regards  it  as  a 
"  most  unwarrantable  assumption  to  suppose  that  there  are  in 
the  heavenly  spaces  any  masses  of  matter  different  from  solid 
bodies  composing  planetary  systems."  To  this  our  author 
replies  that  the  resolution  of  a  great  quantity  of  previously 
unresolved  nebulae,  by  Lord  Rosse's  telescope,  "  was,  of  course, 
to  be  expected,  and  it  is  a  fact,  though  in  itself  interesting,  of 
no  consequence  to  the  nebular  hypothesis."  There  are  still 
many  nebula  which  even  the  stupendous  powers  of  Lord 
Rosse's  instrument  do  not  sensibly  affect,  and  which  probably 
no  increase  of  optical  power  ever  to  be  attained  by  human 
science  or  art,  would  be  adequate  to  resolve.    But  the  preserJ 


220  PROGRESSIVE     DEVELOPMENT. 

position  of  the  nebular  theory  in  respect  to  its  philosophical 
credibility,  is  more  fully  represented  in  a  previous  portion  ol 
this  work. 

The  theory  of  progressive  succession  in  the  organic  king- 
doms,  as  advocated  by  the  "  Vestiges,"  is  disputed  mainly  on 
the  following  grounds:  First,  that  fishes  of  a  high  organization 
occur  (as  it  is  said)  in  the  oldest  of  the  fossiliferous  rocks ; 
secondly,  that  in  several  instances  the  passage  from  a  lower  tc 
a  higher  system  of  rocks,  is  accompanied  by  an  abrupt  and 
entire  transition  in  the  organic  kingdoms,  exhibiting  none  of 
the  links  of  progressive  gradation  which  the  theory  of  the 
"  Vestiges"  supposes  to  exist ;  and  thirdly,  that  in  some  in- 
stances several  widely  different  and  previously  unknown 
species  seem  to  have  been  introduced  at  about  the  same  epoch, 
with  apparently  no  links  of  connection  between  them. 

To  the  allegation  that  fishes  of  a  high  organization  occur  in 
the  oldest  of  the  fossiliferous  rocks,  the  author  of  the  "  Ves- 
tiges," in  his  sequel  to  that  work,  replies  by  quotations  from 
geologists,  showing  a  discrepancy  in  their  statements  upon  this 
point,  which,  however,  he  shows  may  be  explained  by  the  fact, 
that  since  the  statements  of  some  of  them  were  put  forth,  "  the 
lower  fossiliferous  rocks  have  been  divided  into  several  dis- 
tinct formations,  in  the  lowest  of  which  it  is  fully  admitted 
there  are  no  vertebrata.  He,  moreover,  argues  that  the 
cephalopoda  and  gasteropoda,  mollusks  of  a  high,  organization, 
whose  remains  are  found  in  the  oldest  series  of  fossiliferous 
rocks,  might,  as  transmuted  species,  have  come  in  soon  after 
the  commencement  of  the  formation  of  those  rocks,  as  owing 
to  a  "  rapidity  of  generation  "  and  "  rush  of  life/'  which  ig 
sometimes  characteristic  of  certain  of  the  lower  orders  of 
animals. 

In   answer  to  the  argument  which  negatives  the  idea  of 


OBSERVATIONS     GENERALIZED.  221 

co  inectii  g  links  between  lower  ai-d  higher  species,  and  be- 
tween widely  dissimilar  species  existing  in  the  same  system 
of  deposits,  he  generalizes  the  field  of  geological  observation, 
and  finds  particular  systems,  both  of  rocks  and  their  con- 
tained fossils,  more  fully  and  particularly  represented  in  some 
localities  than  others.  By  the  facts  which  he  develops  in  tnis 
branch  of  the  discussion,  he  succeeds  in  materially  weakening, 
though  perhaps  not  entirely  disproving,  the  assumptions  of  his 
opponents,  that  the  character  of  organic  life  has  been  subject 
to  frequent  abrupt  and  entire  changes.  He  considers  it  prob- 
able, moreover,  that  "  development  has  not  proceeded,  as 
usually  assumed,  upon  a  single  line,  which  would  require  all 
the  animals  to  be  placed  one  after  another,  but  in  a  'plurality 
of  lines,  in  which  the  orders,  and  even  minuter  subdivisions 
of  each  class  are  ranged  side  by  side ;"  and  he  argues  that 
"  the  development  of  these  various  lines  has  proceeded  inde- 
pendently in  various  regions  of  the  earth,  so  as  to  lead  to 
forms  not  everywhere  so  like  as  to  fall  within  our  ideas 
of  specific  character,  but  generally,  or  in  some  more  vague 
degree,  alike." 

Upon  the  whole,  the  author  reasserts  his  main  position  with 
so  much  force  and  ingenuity,  and  brings  to  it  such  an  accession 
of  evidence  from  the  testimonies  of  geologists  and  naturalists, 
as  apparently  to  render  the  general  onslaught  of  his  opponents, 
for  the  most  part,  a  failure;  and  perhaps  it  would  not  be 
unfair  to  consider  their  subsequent  silence  as,  in  some  degree, 
a  tacit  admission  of  this  fact. 

Though  the  author  of  the  "  Vestiges"  acknowledges  that 
God  is,  in  some  sense,  ever  present  with  his  creation,  and 
supports  and  rules  it  by  his  Providence,  he  admits  this  merely 
as  the  intimation  of  an  internal  sense  or  feeling,  for  which  he 
does  not  pretend  to  have  any  philosophy.    But  in  the  absence 


222  PEOGEESSrVE     DEVELOPMENT. 

of  such  a  philosophy,  those  who  have  not  this  internal  feeling 
of  the  presence  and  overruling  Providence  of  God  (as  many 
have  not),  very  naturally  employ  the  whole  force  of  facts  and 
arguments,  such  as  have  a  very  thorough  development  in  the 
book  referred  to,  in  support  of  the  idea  that  nature  develops 
all  her  forms  and  phenomena,  by  an  inherent  force  of  her  own, 
independent  of  any  superior  influence,  as  received-  from  a 
Source  without  herself.  Such  theories  can,  of  course,  be  suc- 
cessfully met  only  by  the  weapons  of  a  cogent  and  well 
grounded  philosophy,  as  relating  to  the  matters  in  dispute ; 
but  as  such  a  philosophy  does  not  yet  prevail,  to  any  extent, 
in  the  world,  it  hence  follows,  as  a  fact  much  to  be  lamented, 
that  faith  in  God  and  his  overruling  and  universal  Providences, 
is,  to  a  large  extent,  at  the  mercy  of  pantheistic  and  material- 
istic philosophies.  Such  philosophies  are  hence  continually 
growing  more  rife  and  rampant;  and  when  those  whc  know 
for  themselves,  from  intuition,  that  there  is  a  God  ever  present 
with,  and  ever  ruling,  the  affairs  of  creation,  find  themselves  in- 
competent to  meet  the  arguments  for  the  opposing  views,  they 
are  apt  to  grow  impatient,  and  to  descend  to  mere  ridicule 
and  denunciation,  and  sometimes  even  to  misrepresentation — 
a  mode  of  treatment  which  seldom  fails  to  excite  the  con- 
tempt of  those  toward  whom  it  is  aimed,  and  even  to  confirm 
them  in  their  anti-religious  theories. 

Common  sense  should  teach  every  one  that  it  is  worse  than 
useless — nay,  perverse  and  wicked — to  close  his  eyes  to  plain 
facts  in  nature,  whatever  may  be  their  apparent  theological  or 
philosophical  bearings;  and  whoever  would  do  such  an  act.  is 
plainly  not  so  much  devoted  to  the  furtherance  of  truth  as  he 
is  to  the  maintenance  of  his  own  opinions.  Looking  fully  in 
the  face,  therefore,  as  in  duty  bound  to  do,  all  the  clearly 
established  facts  exhibited  by  the  "  Vestiges  of  Creation,''  as» 


DISCREPANCIES     TO     BE     HARMONIZED.     223 

well  as  every  other  species  of  fact,  let  us  see  whether  the 
general  philosophy  of  this  work  will  afford  any  light  by  which 
outer  appearances,  reflecting  a  natural  law  or  force  of  develop- 
ment, and  the  interior  sense  of  the  human  soul,  respecting  the 
constant  presence  of  God,  and  the  exertion  of  his  upholding 
and  directing  power,  may  be  rationally  harmonized.  By  way 
pf  attempting  the  solution  of  all  apparent  discrepancies,  as 
involved  in  these  subjects,  we  will,  in  the  following  pages, 
er.deavor  to  unfold  the  true  throry  of  law  agency  and  Divin* 
fe£*ucy,  as  it  appears  to  us. 


CHAPTEK    XXIII. 

tftfRTHEK    VIEW    OF    THE    SYSTEM    OF    LIVING    FORMS,    AS    SUG- 
GESTING   ITS    MODE    OF    DEVELOPMENT 

Had  the  author  of  the  "Vestiges  of  Creation"  and  his 
opponents  both  understood  the  doctrine  of  Series,  Degrees, 
and  Correspondences,  as  unfolded  in  the  preceding  pages  of 
this  work,  and  had  they  duly  observed  the  indications  of  these 
doctrines  in  regard  to  the  origin,  constitution,  and  laws  of 
nature,  the  relations  of  visible  effects  to  invisible  and  spiritual 
causes,  and  the  relations  of  the  universe  and  all  its  sub-serial 
and  corresponding  parts,  to  the  Infinite  Divine  Spirit,  as  the 
Projector,  Originator,  and  Vitalizer  of  all,  they  might,  by  a 
mutual,  and  in  that  case  obviously  required,  modification  of 
their  views,  have  come  to  a  perfect  agreement  on  all  essential 
points,  without  compromising  any  true  principle  of  theological 
faith,  or  disregarding  any  real  fact  in  science  or  true  principle 
in  philosophy.  The  view  which,  as  it  appears  to  me,  recon- 
ciles all  real  scientific  facts,  and  all  true  philosophical  and 
theological  principles,  I  will  now  proceed  to  briefly  unfold. 

I  will  premise  by  saying  that  the  idea  of  progression,  as  a 
general  fact  connected  with  the  origin  and  movements  of 
creation,  as  a  whole,  and  with  the  origin  and  movements  of 
each  of  its  sub-serial  and  correspondent  parts,  seems  to  be 
necessarily  involved  in  the  idea  of  successive  movements  op 
unfoldings,  from  beginnings  toward  predetermined  ends. 
Every  successive  movement  or  effort  is  a  closer  approximation 


PROGRESSION     AND     RETROGRESSION.     225 

to  the  proposed  end  of  the  whole  series  of  movements,  and  is 
therefore  a  decided  progress  from  a  previous  and  more  rudi- 
mental  state  or  position.  Accordingly  all  philosophy  and  all 
revelation  concur  in  the  acknowledgment  that  creation,  from 
its  incipient  to  its  present  stage  of  development,  has  passed 
through  a  regular  series  of  progressive  unfoldings ;  and  this 
fact  is  recognized  as  applying  equally  to  the  cosmical  universe, 
to  the  geological  formations,  and  to  the  various  systems  of 
organic  forms,  beginning  with  the  lowest  and  ending  with  the 
highest,  whose  remains  have  been  successively  entombed  in 
the  rocks. 

It  is  true  there  are  occasional  and  apparent  exceptions  to 
this  rule — occasional  instances  of  particular  retrogression  on 
the  one  hand,  and  irregular  and  abnormal  advances  on  the 
other ;  but  these  are  owing  to  local  circumstances  and  isolated 
influences,  and  when  properly  understood,  they  prove,  rather 
than  disprove,  the  general  rule.  The  idea  may  be  illustrated 
by  the  following  simile:  Let  a  number  of  vessels,  of  different 
classes,  be  supposed  to  sail  from  the  same  port,  at  the  same 
time,  and  bound  to  the  same  place  of  destination.  Wafted  by 
the  same  breezes,  and  floated  by  the  same  tides,  they,  for  a 
time,  make  nearly  equal  progress,  sail  in  nearly  .parallel  paths, 
and  generally  keep  each  others  company.  But  owing  to 
slight  diversities  in  their  sailing  qualities,  and  incidental  dif- 
ferences in  their  modes  of  manoeuvring,  their  courses  grad- 
ually diverge  from  each  other,  and  they  get  into  different 
currents  of  ocean  and  of  atmosphere,  some  of  which  are  pro- 
pitious and  some  the  reverse.  They  are  then  farther  dispersed 
by  hurricanes;  some  of  them,  by  violent  gales  occurring 
only  in  tlrenr  own  localities,  may  be  driven  hundreds  of  miles 
out  of  their  coarse,  or  in  a  retrograde  direction;  a  few  of 
them  may  be  driven  upon  rocks  cr  quicksands,  ar.d  lost  out 


226  SYS1EM     OF     lit;ng    fobms. 

right ;  while  others  may  be  driven  forward  with  equal  vio- 
lence, and  reach  their  destined  haven  in  an  apparently  irreg< 
ularly  short  period  of  time.  Of  course  no  one  would  con- 
sider  the  diversities  in  the  fates  and  successes  of  these  different 
vessels,  or  the  fact  that  some  were  for  a  time  driven  back- 
ward, that  some  were  lost  outright,  and  that  others  were 
driven  forward  with  a  velocity  which  seemed  to  set  all  idoa 
of  a  regularly  graduated  motion  at  defiance,  as  any  proof 
against  a  general  law  of  progression,  as  applied  to  the  sailing 
of  ships  from  port  to  port,  but  the  proof  would,  upon  the 
whole,  be  the  reverse. 

Allow  these  ships,  then,  to  represent  an  equal  number  of 
Divine  archetypes,  or  pre-existing  ideal  forms  of  creation,  sc 
to  speak,  which  set  out,  at  one  and  the  same  time,  upon 
the  voyage  of  progressive  development,  all  being  bound  to 
one  haven,  viz.,  the  realization  of  the  clothing  of  an  exterior 
form ;  the  diversities  in  their  movements,  presented  in  the 
retardations  and  temporary  retrogressions  of  some,  and  the 
fitful  and  apparently  preternatural  accelerations  of  others,  as 
owing  to  the  various  currents  and  counter-currents  of  outer 
influences,  no  more  disprove  the  law  of  general  progression, 
with  reference  to  them,  than  similar  diversities  of  movement 
prove  the  same  thing  with  reference  to  the  ships.  When  we, 
therefore,  find  a  few  local  examples  of  vertebral  fishes  among 
some  of  the  strata  of  the  first  series  of  fossil iferous  rocks,  or 
when  we  find,  in  one  or  two  instances,  the  remains  of  a 
diminutive  air-breathing  reptile,  in  an  upper  member  of  the 
Old  Red  Sandstone  series,  where,  as  it  is  stated,  such  have 
recently  been  found;*  or  when,  in  human  history,  we  find 
examples  of  whole  nations  and  races  remaining  apparently 
stationary  for  thousands  of  years,  while  others  have,  at  early 

*  Sec  F^inburgh  Philosophical  Journal  for  April,  1S52,  pp  853-4. 


EMBRYONIC     FORMS.  227 

periods,  come  to  a  high  state  of  advancement  in  art,  govern- 
ment, and  social  refinement,  which  were  again  succeeded  by 
universal  ignorance  and  barbarism — we  are  not  to  consider 
these  examples  as  contradicting  the  doctrine  of  progression, 
as  a  general  principle,  but  as  only  the  particular  and  local  ex- 
ceptions to  the  direct  development  of  that  piinciple  in  outer 
forms. 

Keeping  in  view,  then,  the  doctrine  of  general  Progression 
as  an  undeniable  principle  applicable  to  the  universal  series 
of  creation  as  a  whole,  and  to  all  its  included  and  correspond- 
ing sub-series,  we  are  prepared  for  further  inquiries  respecting 
the  order  and  method  of  progression,  and  the  mutual  relations 
of  the  different  parts  or  degrees  of  each  series  of  creation  to 
which  this  principle  applies.  In  making  these  inquiries,  our 
attention  will  be  confined  for  the  present  to  the  Animal  King- 
dom, which  will  serve  as  a  representative  of  all  other  serial 
creations. 

The  fact  alluded  to  by  the  author  of  the  "Vestiges  of  Crea- 
tion," that  in  the  reproduction  of  the  higher  animals  and  of 
man,  the  embryo  passes  through  successive  stages  of  develop- 
ment, in  which  the  types  of  all  the  lower  animals,  beginning 
with  the  fish  (or,  as  some  say,  with  the  annalid  or  worm),  are 
represented  in  succession,  until  its  own  proper  type  is  attained, 
is  certainly  of  great  significance,  as  it  bears  upon  the  subject 
under  consideration.  But  Professor  Agassiz  has  made  some 
farther  discoveries  in  the  department  of  embryology,  which 
would  perhaps  go  to  emphasize  the  conclusions  to  which  this 
fact  would  seem  naturally  to  point.  I  would  refer  now  par- 
ticularly to  the  discovery  that  the  embryos  of  animals  of  cer- 
tain existing  families  bear,  at  a  certain  stage  of  their  fcetal 
progress,  a  distinct  resemblance  to  the  perfected  individuals 
of  now  extinct  species  of  the  same  families,  which  existed  in 


228  SYSTEM      OF     LIVING     FORMS. 

early  geological  periods.  From  his  remarks  on  this  subject, 
I  submit  the  following  quotations  : 

"  Embryology,"  says  he,  "  by  the  metamorphoses  which 
take  place  in  animals,  assigns  now  a  value  to  external  forms, 
and  not  only  assigns  them  a  value,  but  a  chronological  value, 
by  which  it  is  possible  to  consider  as  lower  those  animals 
which  agree  with  the  earlier  forms  of  the  germs." 

"  The*  class  of  fishes  which  I  have  studied  more  particularly, 
has  shown  me  that  the  first  types  appeared  under  forms,  and 
with  an  organization,  peculiar  to  embryos  of  that  very  class  in 
the  present  epoch,  proving  thereby,  with  perfect  evidence,  the 
inferiority  of  the  first  created  types,  as  well  in  their  peculiar 
class  as  in  their  department.  But  though  of  a  lower  order, 
these  types  of  ancient  ages  bore  in  themselves,  from  the  be- 
ginning, the  impression  of  the  plan  that  was  to  be  successively 
developed  in  the  different  epochs  which  have  preceded  the 
order  of  things  existing  at  present,  and  by  whose  realization 
have  been  brought  about  those  numerous  families  of  Fishes, 
Reptiles,  Birds,  and  Mammalia,  which  now  live  upon  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth."  Again:  "All  the  information  about  the 
fossils — all  the  information  of  former  ages,  will  have  to  be 
compared  with  those  embryonic  forms,  in  order  to  understand 
more  fully  the  analogy  which  exists  between  these  earlier 
types,  and  the  successive  changes  which  those  of  our  day  un- 
dergo to  assume  their  final  form.  If  I  am  not  mistaken,  we 
shall  obtain  from  sketches  of  those  embryonic  forms,  more 
correct  figures  of  fossil  animals  than  have  been  acquired  by 
actual  restoration."* 

These  extracts  from  one  who  is  an  advocate  of  the  idea  of 
creations  de  novo  at  different  geological  epochs,  certainly  argue 

♦  Agassiz's  "  Lectures  on  Comparative  Embryology,"  delivered  before  the  Lowell  In- 
itftota.    Boston.    Lee.  xii 


FACTS     IN     EMBRYOLOGY.  229 

much  for  a  connection  of  some  kind  between  the  lower  and 
higher,  or  extinct  and  living,  species  of  animals  of  the  same 
families,  and  pretty  clearly  show  that  the  higher  and  existing 
species  are,  in  many  instances,  the  result  of  an  extension  of  the 
identical  gestative  process  which,  in  its  lower  stages,  was  exem- 
plified in  the  ancient  species.  Such  being  the  existing  evidence 
of  a  connection  between  ancient  and  modern  species  of  the 
same  families  and  genera,  and  that  the  modern  species  exist, 
at  least  as  a  progressed  sequence  of  the  principles  involved  in 
the  ancient,  we  will  now  quote  from  the  same  author  some 
further  illustrations  of  the  analogies  and  connections  existing 
between  the  different  and  successively  created  divisions  of  the 
Animal  Kingdom  as  a  whole,  with  man  at  its  head : 

1  The  unity  of  structure  in  vertebrated  animals,"  says  he, 
"  has  been  understood,  and  well  understood,  long  before  Em- 
bryology had  added  any  thing  to  show  how  deep  this  unity  of 
plan  was  impressed  on  that  type.  By  the  investigations  of 
(Comparative  Anatomy,  it  had  been  ascertained  that  the  external 
differences  which  characterize  the  class  of  Fishes,  that  of  Rep- 
tiles, that  of  Birds,  and  that  of  Mammalia,  were  only  modifi 
cations  of  one  and  the  same  structure — that  the  head  of  Fishes, 
for  example,  though  apparently  so  different  from  that  of  Man, 
was  made  up  of  the  same  bones,  arranged  in  the  same  man- 
ner, only  sub-divided  into  more  distinct  points  of  ossifica- 
tion, with  modified  proportions,  most  of  them  remaining 
movable  for  life,  but,  after  all,  arranged  upon  the  same  uniform 
plan." 

In  a  pievious  paragraph,  the  same  author  says:  "It  was  in 
Physiology,  a  great  discovery,  when  it  was  ascertained  thai 
all  Vertebrata,  that  Fishes,  as  well  as  Reptiles,  as  well  as 
Birds,  as  well  as  Mammalia,  arose  from  eggs,  which  have  one 
and  the  same  uniform  structure  in  the  beginning,  and  proceed 

20 


230  SYSTEM     OF     LIVING     FORMS. 

to  produce  animals  as  widely  different  as  they  are  in  the  full 
grown  state,  simply  by  successive,  gradual  metamorphoses  \ 
and  these  metamorphoses  upon  one  and  the  same  plan,  accord 
ing  to  one  and  the  same  general  progress."  Again :  "  It  may 
therefore  be  said,  with  perfect  propriety,  that  the  higher  Ver- 
tebrates undergo  changes,  through  which,  in  different  periods 
of  their  life,  they  resemble  the  lower  ones ;  that  there  is  a 
period  when  the  young  bird  has  not  only  the  form,  but  the 
structure,  and  even  the  fins,  which  characterize  the  Fish.  And 
of  the  young  Mammals  the  same  may  be  said.  There  is  a 
period  in  the  structure  of  the  young  Rabbit  (in  which  the  in- 
vestigations have  been  traced  more  extensively  than  in  other 
species),  when  the  young  Rabbit  resembles  so  closely  the 
Fish,  that  it  even  has  gills,  living  in  a  sac  full  of  water,  breath- 
ing as  Fishes  do.  So  that  the  resemblance  is  as  complete  as 
it  can  be,  though  each  of  these  types  grows  to  a  complication 
of  structure,  by  which  the  young  Mammal,  for  instance,  leav- 
ing behind  this  low  organization  of  the  lower  types,  rises  to  a 
complication  of  structure,  to  higher  and  higher  degrees,  and  to 
that  eminence  even  which  characterizes  mankind."* 

These  facts  certainly  show  a  unity  of  plan  and  a  progressive 
succession  of,  in  some  sense,  mutually  dependent  forms,  in  the 
system  of  animated  nature,  which  countenances  the  idea  that 
the  whole  creation  of  lower  animals  is,  as  it  were,  the  foetus 
of  the  whole  human  creation,  and  that  the  latter  was  thus  de- 
veloped by  a  process  somewhat  resembling  that  which  the 
author  of  the  "  Vestiges  of  Creation"  supposed  to  have  taken 
place,  and  which  he  calls  "  the  universal  gestation  of  Nature  ;" 
yet  Ave  shall  soon  see  that,  so  far  from  this  theory  dispensing 
with  the  agency  of  a  God,  this  universal  gestative  process 
could  not  have  proceeded  even  through  its  first  stages,  without 

*  Lectures  on  Comparative  Embryology,  Lee.  xii. 


THE     GREAT     TEEE.  231 

ihe  constant  influx  of  a  vitalizing  and  energizing  Influence 
from  above  all  nature,  and  hence  from  a  source  absolutely 
Divine. 

It  may  here  be  remarked  that  these  facts,  developed  by  the 
researches  of  palaeontologists,  embryologists,  and  physiolo- 
gists, concerning  the  relations  and  order  of  succession  of  the 
different  divisions  of  the  animated  tribes,  are  in  perfect  agree- 
ment with  the  general  mode  of  philosophizing  presented  in  this 
work,  by  which  all  general  facts  in  each  system  of  creation, 
and  all  systems  of  creation  as  grand  facts,  are  arranged  in  a 
harmonious  serial  order  of  progression,  in  such  a  way  as  to 
show  a  thread  of  unity  and  correspondence  running  through  all 
systems,  and  through  the  grand  system  of  systems,  from  the 
very  origin  to  the  very  ultimates  of  all  things. 

This  scheme  of  creation  brings  the  Animal  Kingdom,  as  well 
as  the  Vegetable,  and  all  other  complete  systems  of  creation, 
together  with  the  grand  System  of  all  systems,  under  the 
analogy  of  a  Tree,  with  its  seven  serial  and  progressive  parts, 
consisting  of  Roots,  Trunk,  Branches ;  Leaves,  Flower-buds, 
Blossoms,  and  Fruit.  It  is  thus  strongly  hinted  that  the 
whole  universal  System  of  creation,  with  all  its  corresponding 
sub-systems,  including  the  Vegetable  and  Animal  Kingdoms, 
while  under  the  constant  vitalizing  and  voluntative  influx  of 
Divine  Love  and  Wisdom,  which  are  spiritual  Heat  and  Light, 
grew  up,  as  it  were,  from  Germ  to  ultimates,  in  the  same  pro- 
gressive and  sequential  order  in  which  the  tree  grows  from 
root  to  fruit,  under  the  constant  influx  of  solar  heat  and  light, 
which  are  the  natural  correspondents  of 'Divine  Love  and  Wis- 
dom. 

But  if  this  view  is  admitted,  it  will  not  of  itself  necessarily 
decide  the  question  as  to  whether  each  higher  creation  was  in 
all  cases  developed  from  the  parentage  of  the  one  immedi« 


232  SYSTEM     OF     LIVING     FOEMS. 

ately  below  it  in  the  series  to  which  it  belongs.  There  is,  ar> 
parently,  one  exception  to  this  order  of  parental  extraction  in 
the  developed  parts  of  the  superiorly  organized  tree  :  The 
flower-buds,  though  they  are  the  next  superior  development 
to  the  leaves,  are  not  an  outgrowth  from  the  leaves,  but,  in 
common  with  these,  they  are  the  next  superior  outgrowth  from 
the  branches;  and  the  leaves,  after  performing  their  specifics 
functions,  die  and  drop  off,  without  giving  rise  to  any  succeed- 
ing and  superior  form  of  developments.  The  flower-buds  are 
undoubtedly  an  ascension  of  the  same  essences  and  principles 
which,  stopping  one  step  short  of  them,  produce  the  leaves, 
and  which,  in  each  case,  ascencf  from  all  the  preceding  devel- 
opments of  the  tree  as  represented  in  roots,  trunk,  and 
branches. 

It  should  be  remarked,  however,  that  in  a  less  perfect  class 
of  vegetable  forms — the  cryptogamia — the  organs  of  fructifi- 
cation, involving,  of  course,  the  principles  of  the  bud,  are  de- 
veloped upon  the  leaves,  which,  in  this  instance,  shows  the 
relations  of  parent  and  offspring  between  the  two  develop- 
ments, and  preserves  the  succession  between  them  un- 
broken. 

Concerning  the  genesis  of  the  Animal  Kingdom,  then,  as 
well  as  that  of  all  other  Series  and  Degrees  of  creation,  it 
may,  so  far  as  the  known  analogies  of  nature  are  concerned, 
and  without  in  either  case  affecting  our  views  of  the  Divine 
agency,  be  consistently  believed,  either  that  the  higher  tribes 
in  the  Animal  Kingdom  (as  well  as  in  the  Vegetable  and 
other  Degrees  of  Creation),  at  certain  periods,  and  under  cer- 
tain revolutionary  conditions  or  Divine  impulsions  hereafter 
to  be  explained — proceeded  by  orderly  descent,  from  the  tribei 
next  below  them,  as  their  natural  parents — or  that  they  pro. 
ceeded,  at  the  same  periods  and  under  the  same  conditions 


GENESIS     OF     ANIMAL     KINGDOM.  233 

from  the  aggregate  of  all  preceding  developments  of  nature,  as 
constituting  their  general  material  germ,  while  they  had  no 
special  lineal  connection  with  the  form's  next  below  them  in 
the  series.  Either  of  these  suppositions  would  sufficiently 
comport  with  the  unity  of  the  general  plan  which  we  have 
before  observed  to  pervade  the  works  of  creation.  The 
probability  is,  however,  that  both  of  these  modes  of  pro- 
duction were,  to  some  extent,  observed  in  the  origination  of 
the  ensemble  of  the  Animal  and  other  Kingdoms;  but  in 
neither  case  is  it  probable  that  any  form  or  creation  was  un- 
folded, except  upon  the  basis  of  a  suitable  preceding  develop- 
ment, which,  in  some  sense,  served  as  its  material  germ,  or 
predisposing  condition  of  development. 

Unless  we  adopt  some  such  theory  as  here  propounded, 
many  natural  facts — facts  which  the  cause  of  true  theology 
and  religion  can  never  be  subserved  by  denying — will  remai3 
entirely  inexplicable. 


CHAPTER    XXIV. 

LAW   AGENCY   AND    DIVINE   AGENCY. 

In  the  light  of  the  foregoing  remarks  respecting  the  ordei, 
successive  developments,  and  relations  of  the  organic  tribes, 
let  us  now  press  to  a  final  and  more  specific  decision,  the 
question,  whether  the  system  of  Creation,  as  it  now  stands, 
came  to  exist,  in  any  sense,  through  the  operations  of  Law? — 
and  if  so,  in  what  sense,  and  with  what  accompanying  con- 
clusions relative  to  the  doctrine  of  Providences,  or  of  Divine 
interpositions  1 

But  that  we  may  pursue  this  inquiry  intelligibly,  we  must 
obviously  first  define  precisely  what  we  mean  by  the  term 
"  Law."  Law,  as  it  is  understood  by  the  best  authorities, 
means  simply  a  rule  of  action,  or  a  definite  mode  or  method 
in  which  force  and  motion  proceed  toward  the  accomplish- 
ment of  an  end.  It  is  not,  therefore,  of  itself,  either  force  or 
motion,  but  only  the  rule  of  action  which  these,  in  their 
operations,  are  made  to  observe. 

Now  it  may  be  safely  asserted  that  there  is  no  force  or 
motion,  either  in  the  universe  of  matter  or  the  universe  of 
mind,  which,  in  its  operations,  does  not  observe  some  rule, 
sojne  method,  and  hence  some  law.  If,  indeed,  there  could  be 
any  action  or  motion  without  method  or  law,  that  action  or 
motion  would  necessarily  be  chaotic,  and  would  tend  directly 
to  the  total  subversion  of  all  law  and  order,  and  thus  to  reduce 
all  things  to  chaos.     It  is  impossible  for  a  man  to  conceive  a 


UNIVERSALITY     OF     LAW.  235 

thought,  except  m  accordance  with  some  law  of  thought 
Nay,  it  is  sell-evidently  impossible  even  for  the  Infinite  Mind 
to  conceive  a  thought,  or  put  forth  an  action,  except  in  con 
nection  with  some  definite  mode  or  form,  and  hence  law,  of 
procedure  which  that  thought  or  action  spontaneously  assumes. 
In  the  Infinite  Mind,  therefore,  Law,  in  its  spiritual  sense,  is 
self-existent  and  eternal.  Thence  it  proceeds,  by  volition,  in 
outer  creations,  and  assumes  the  forms  of  what  are  termed  the 
"laws  of  nature.*'  These,  as  modes,  or  rules  of  material 
motion,  commence  at  the  lowest  and  most  chaotic  germs  of 
the  physical  universe,  and  (being  constantly  supplied  by 
voluntative  and  higher  inflowings  from  their  Infinite  Spiritual 
Source)  proceed  in  regular  order  of  ascending  development, 
through  all  subsequent  motions  and  creations,  until,  in  the 
heights  of  the  celestial  universe,  creation  again  merges  itself 
in  that  Infinite  Divine  Essence  from  which  it  originally 
sprang.  And  as  all  motions  are  in  accordance  with  some  de- 
finite rule,  method,  or  law,  hence  all  forms,  creations,  and  con- 
ditions,  from  lowest  material  to  the  highest  spiritual  and 
celestial,  which,  in  regular  serial  orders,  are  developed  bij 
means  of  those  motions,  are  necessarily  law-developed  and 
law-governed.  If  this  were  not  so,  then  creation,  indeed, 
would  not  exhibit  any  system  or  method  in  its  arrangements, 
such  as  is  now  apparent  throughout  its  whole  domains,  but 
the  "various  forms  of  which  it  is  composed,  would  necessarily 
be  totally  disconnected  and  confused. 

It  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  the  idea  of  law  as  governing 
the  processes  of  creation  obtains  predominance  in  proportion 
to  the  development  of  the  human  mind.  Thus  the  child  con- 
ceives that  the  grass  is  made  to  grow  by  an  abstract  interpo- 
sition of  the  power  of  God,  with  which  he  is  unable  to  connect 
any  idea  of  law.     But  as  his  mind  unfolds,  and  the  field  of 


236     LAW    AGENCY    AND     DIVINE    AGEJJCT. 

his  observation  extends,  he  discovers  that  grass  grows,  in  all 
cases,  under  certain  given  conditions,  and  hence  grows  accord- 
ing to  a  fixed  rule.  He  still,  perhaps,  believes  that  God,  by  a 
direct  and  isolated  f>at  of  His  will,  causes  the  rain  to  fall,  the 
thunder  to  peal,  am  the  lightning  to  flash  ;  but  a  further  de- 
velopment of  his  mind  corrects  this  impression,  and  shows 
him  that  the  rains,  the  thunders,  and  the  lightnings,  are  de- 
pendent upon  a  more  general  administration  of  the  Divine 
Power  through  atmospheric  and  electric  media  and  conditions. 
He  still,  perhaps,  imagines  that  the  sun,  moon,  and  planets 
are  made  to  pursue  their  courses  in  the  heavens  by  the  direct 
volitionary  effort  of  God  concentrated  specifically  and  ab- 
stractly upon  them ;  but  when  his  mind  is  introduced  to  the 
series  of  demonstrations  presented  in  the  science  of  Astrono- 
my, he  perceives  that  all  these  phenomena  are  in  accordance 
with  a  general  method  in  which  all  aggregations  of  matter  in 
free  space  act.  He  still  probably  believes  (according  to  a 
common,  and,  as  we  have  before  shown,  an  erroneous  inter 
p relation  of  Sacred  Scripture)  that  the  earth  on  which  he 
dwells  was  directly  spoken  into  existence  by  God,  in  the  space 
of  six  literal  days,  about  six  thousand  years  ago ;  but  when 
he  attains  a  more  enlarged  understanding  of  the  mechanical 
and  chemical  forces  which  God  has  incorporated  in  the  system 
of  nature,  and  reads  the  physical  history  of  our  planet  as 
written  upon  the  rocks,  he  perceives  that  our  globe  has  been 
brought  from,  a  primeval  chaotic,  to  its  present  perfected  state, 
by  means  of  fixed  methods  of  operation  of  matter,  expressed 
by  the  terms,  "condensation,"  "abrasion,"  "deposition,"  "se- 
gregation," etc.  And  if  the  hypothesis  (seemingly  supported 
by  all  analogy)  that  vegetable,  animal,  and  even  human  or- 
ganisms, came  to  exist  through  the  instrumentality  of  equally 
fixed  and  unvarying  laws,  is;  now  met  by  storms  of  opposi 


LAW      AND     FORCE.  237 

fcion  and  ridicule,  it  should  be  remembered  that  piecise1^ 
similar  opposition,  based  upon  precisely  the  same  grounds, 
attended  a  similar  announcement  when  first  made,  with  refer 
ence  to  the  origin  and  modus  operandi  of  many  forms  and  de- 
partments of  nature  concerning  which  the  announcement  is 
now  fully  admitted  to  have  been  true;  and  the  final  triumphs 
of  Astronomy  and  Geology  over  the  dragon  of  unscriplural, 
as  well  as  unphilosophical,  opposition,  which  stood  before  their 
parents  to  devour  them  as  soon  as  they  were  born,  should 
stand  as  a  warn'mg'against  a  too  hasty  decision  unfavorable  to 
law-developments,  as  applied  to  all  other  departments,  organic 
and  even  spiritual,  as  well  as  inorganic  and  material. 

Yet,  when  it  is  asserted  that  all  things,  as  to  their  creation 
and  functional  operations,  are  within  the  governing  influences 
of  law,  the  sense  in  which  we  have  defined  the  term  "law," 
should  be  distinctly  borne  in  mind ;  and  for  the  sake  of  more 
explicitness  on  this  point,  as  well  as  to  show  that  our  position 
involves  no  objectionable  theological  corrolaries,  we  will  here 
submit  a  few  more  considerations  respecting  it. 

I  have  said  that  Law  is  not  of  itself/orce  or  motion — hence, 
that  it  can  create  nothing  or  do  nothing  of  itself;  but  that  it 
is  simply  the  mode  or  rule  by  which  force  and  motion  act 
Hence,  when  we  speak  of  the  "  law  of  Expansion,"  for  instance, 
we  refer  only  to  a  mode  of  operation  among  particles  or 
substances,  which  is  expressed  by  the  term  "  Expansion  ;" 
when  we  speak  of  the  "law  of  Gravitation,"  we  only  refer  to 
that  particular  mode  of  action  among  materials  which  the  term 
"gravitation"  defines.  And  we  have  a  similar  meaning  when 
we  speak  of  any  other  law.  But  the  Force  by  which  the  ac- 
tion, proceeding  according  to  these  various  laws,  is  generated, 
remains  yet  to  be  accounted  for;  and  this  we  will  now  attempt 
to  do,  at  the  same  time  that  we  attempt  to  illustrate  ho\» 


238        LAW    AGENCY    AND    DIVINE    AGENCY. 

modes  or  laws  of  action  came  to  be  such  as  we  see  them.  The 
remarks  now  to  be  offered  will,  at  the  same  time,  illustrate 
the  direct  agency  which  God  has  in  the  process  of  creation,  and 
furnish  the  foundation  of  a  true  understanding  of  the  doctrine 
of  Providence. 

One  feature  of  the  present  subject  has  already  been  pre- 
sented, under  an  illustration  which  may  again  be  called  up,  and 
carried  out  into  further  particulars.  A  builder,  before  pro- 
ceeding to  the  outer  construction  of  an  edifice,  first  conceives 
the  general  plan,  and  ideally  perceives  the  general  appearance 
of  that  edifice  in  his  own  mind.  This  conception  is  the  arche- 
type or  pattern  according  to  which  the  edifice,  as  an  outer  ob- 
ject, is  to  be  erected  ;  and  its  erection  is  a  mere  clothing  of  the 
Archetype  or  pattern,  with  outer  material  investiture.  But  this 
clothing  of  the  archetype  can  not  be  accomplished  except  by 
the  voluntative  and  energizing  influence  of  the  soul,  spirit,  or 
mind  of  the  builder  acting  among  the  materials  to  be  wrought 
into  the  physical  structure,  which  action  may  be  either  through 
*,he  medium  of  the  builder's  own  muscles,  through  the  minds 
and  muscles  of  others,  to  whom  his  commands  may  be  given, 
or  through  a  suitable  machine  which  he  has  previously  de- 
signed and  prepared.  And  when  the  building  is  thus  erected, 
it  stands  as  an  exact  correspondent  and  embodiment  of  that 
particular  form  and  degree  of  intelligence  and  volition,  which 
were  requisite  to  the  conception  of  its  plan,  and  the  con- 
joining of  its  materials.  After  the  building  is  finished, 
however,  the  builder  withdraws  all  further  action  and  influ- 
ence from  it,  and  it  is  left  as  a  mass  of  perfectly  dead  and 
motionless  materials  ;  but  could  he  permanently  infix  in 
it  such  portions  or  degrees  of  his  own  energizing  spiritual 
essence  as  would  be  requisite  to  keep  it  in  repair,  and  to  con. 
stantly  refine  and   improve   it,  and  to  develop  its  ultimate 


fV  -iNG     OF     ARCHETYPES.  239 

purposes.  u\t  building  would  in  that  case  be  a  living  crea- 
tion. 

Now  it  was  logically  proved,  in  another  part  of  this  work, 
that  the  Universe,  or  the  whole  great  Kingdom  of  materiality 
which  it  comprises,  is  not  self-existent  and  eternal,  but  that  it 
as  necessarily  had  a  beginning  as  any  human  or  other  physical 
organism  had — that  it  is  therefore  necessarily  dependent  upon 
an  antecedent  and  correspondent  existence  as  its  Cause,  which 
must  have  been,  not  inferior,  but  superior,  to  itself,  even  as 
the  natural  sun  is  superior  to  the  plant  which  its  beams  cause 
to  grow.  Being  thus  superior  to,  and  the  cause  of,  the  whole 
of  material  existence,  we  were  forced  to  conceive  of  it  as  a 
ttiper-material,  frwper-universal,  and  hence  spiritual  Existence, 
of  which  intelligence,  personality,  and  hence  Divinity,  are 
predicable. 

This  spiritual,  intelligent,  personal  Divinity,  whom  we  call 
God,  then,  being  antecedent  to,  and  the  Cause  of,  the  univer. 
sal  system  of  creation,  and  sustaining  toward  it  the  same  re- 
lation which  an  earthly  builder  sustains  toward  a  house  pro- 
posed to  be  erected,  must,  in  like  manner,  with  the  latter, 
have  conceived  in  his  own  mind  the  archetypes  or  patterns 
of  the  universal  structure,  with  all  its  included  kingdoms, 
systems,  series,  degrees,  species,  and  essential  forms,  from 
lowest  to  highest,  before  proceeding  to  clothe  these  with  outer 
investiture.  And  as  in  the  mind  of  the  human  builder,  the 
archetypes  of  the  proposed  house  are,  as  it  were,  the  spiritual 
nuclei  around  which,  by  his  own  volitionary  effort,  the  ma- 
terials are  made  to  cluster,  and  thus  finally  establish  the 
structure  as  an  outer  creation,  so  in  the  mind  of  the  Deity, 
the  archetypes  of  the  Universal  Structure,  of  Solar  Systems, 
of  Geological  Developments,  of  Mineral  Kingdoms,  Vegetable 
Kingdoms,   Animal    Kingdoms,  and   the   universal    Human 


210      LAW    AGENCY    AND     DIVINE    AGENCY. 

creation, with  all  the  specific  and  essential  forms  which  these 
respectively  include,  were  the  spiritual  nuclei,  and  pre- 
existent,  interior  realities,  around  which,  by  the  force  of  con- 
stant Divine  volition,  the  requisite  particles  and  essences  are 
marie  to  cluster,  by  way  of  establishing  them  in  outer  and 
tangible  forms. 

Now,  both  with  the  human  builder  and  his  house,  and  the 
Divine  Builder  and  the  system  of  the  universe,  the  arche- 
types conceived  in  the  mind,  constituted  the  laws  or  rules  by 
which  outer  materials  acted  in  their  aggregations  into  outer 
forms;  while,  in  both  cases,  the  force  by  which  those  ma- 
terials were  impelled  to  act  at  all,  originated  in  the  volition 
of  the  Builder.  Here  is  the  difference  between  Law  and 
Force.  Law  of  itself  could  not  create  any  thing,  though  all 
things  were  created  according  to  Law.  Force  of  itself  could 
not  create  any  thing,  though  all  things  are  created  by  the 
application  of  Force.  It  is  by  means  of  Force,  as  an  im- 
pulsive principle,  and  Law,  as  a  director  of  its  impulsions,  that 
all  things  have  sprung  into  being. 

The  idea  may  perhaps  be  rendered  still  more  clear  to  some 
minds,  by  considering  the  whole  united  system  of  archetypes 
as  one  grand  Mould,  fashioned  in  the  wisdom  of  the  Builder, 
into  which,  by  the  direct  voluntative  effort  of  the  Builder, 
materials  are  poured,  by  way  of  forming  the  outer  structure. 
But  without  the  extra  proceedings  of  pouring  the  materials 
into  it,  the  mould  might  exist  for  ever  without  giving  rise  to 
the  casting,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  all  the  efforts  imagin- 
able could  not  give  rise  to  the  casting,  did  not  the  mould 
exist  to  receive  it. 

We  have  seen  that  if  thfc  human  builder,  in  clothing  his 
mental  archetypes  of  a  proposed  structure,  could  permanently 
infix  in  that  structure  that  portion  or  degree  of  the  energizing 


HUMAN    AND    DIVINE-BUILDER.  211 

influence  of  his  own  spirit,  which  would  be  requisite,  by  a 
spontaneous  internal  action,  to  keep  the  structure  in  repair, 
and  at  tne  same  time  to  refine  and  perfect  it,  the  structure 
would  be,  in  some  sense,  a  living  creation.  But  although  this 
is  not  the  case  with  tiie  human  builder  and  his  work,  it  is 
precisely  the  case  with  the  Divine  Builder  and  the  universal 
Edifice  which  he  has  established.  Not  only  does  the  system 
of  creation  as  a  Whole,  but  each  of  its  included  and  corre- 
sponding sub-systems,  contain  a  power  of  internal  motion  and 
sustentation,  infused  by  the  Creator  at  its  origin,  and  which  is 
now  perpetually  sustained  by  influx  from  Him,  and  is  ever 
acting  in  parallelism  with  the  original  archetype,  which  consti- 
tutes its  law.  It  was  in  view  of  this  fact  that  it  was  argued, 
in  another  part  of  this  work,  in  opposition  to  the  received 
philosophy,  that  if  the  cosmical  system  could,  by  any  foreign 
agency,  become  deranged  or  thrown  out  of  equilibrium  in  any 
way,  instead  of  the  derangement  progressing,  and  ultimating 
in  a  total  wreck  of  the  system,  the  internal  forces  of  recuper- 
ation would  be  such  as  to  soon  restore  the  wonted  equilibrium, 
and  all  things  would  go  on  as  before.  But  on  the  other  hand, 
were  the  Creator  to  withold  the  influx  of,  and  withdraw,  hia 
vital  energy  from  the  universe,  as  soon  as  the  momenta  of  ex- 
isting forces  and  motions  became  exhausted,  all  things  would 
necessarily  come  to  an  eternal  stagnation  ana",  death ! 

I  have  said  that  the  archetypes  or  pre-existent  ideal  patterns 
of  each  creation,  are  the  spiritual  nuclei  of  the  outer  forms  of 
which  that  creation  consists,  and  hence  that  they  constitute 
the  laws  by  which  Force  acts  in  the  aggregation  of  substances 
for  the  development  of  their  outer  forms.  Now,  as  it  was 
before  shown  that  each  creation,  both  as  to  its  exterior  and 
its  interior  and  vitalizing  constitution,  is  seven-fold,  so  each 
creation,  with  its  spiritual  nuclei,  life,  and  laws,  is,  in  some 

21 


242      LAW     AGENCY     AND     DIVINE    AGENCY. 

sense,  a  corespondent  and  representative  of  the  seven-folc 
constitution  of  the  Deity,  or  the  "seven  spirits  of  God' 
spoken  of  in  Revelation.  Each  seven-fold  creation,  therefore, 
is  the  same  with  all  others  as  to  correspondence,  but  is  differ- 
ent from  all  others  as  to  degree  ;  and  each  one  contains  within 
itself,  as  its  vitalizing  and  energizing  soul,  a  corres])onding  de- 
gree of  the  seven-fold  harmonies  of  Divine  Love  and  Wisdom. 

Let  this  latter  point  be  distinctly  understood ;  God  exists 
in  the  universal  cosmical  system  as  its  soul,  but  does  not  ex- 
ist there  as  God,  but  only  in  the  quality  and  capacity  of  those 
vitalizing  and  operative  forces  and  piiuGiples  of  form,  which 
were  necessary  to  the  creation,  and  are  now  necessary  to  the 
subsistence,  internal  motions,  and  constant  improvement  of 
the  general  creation,  as  such ;  in  Solar  Systems,  God  exists  in 
the  degree  of  those  vital  and  motive  forces  which  are  necessary 
to  them,  as  such;  in  planets  God  exists,  also,  in  his  seven- 
fold harmonies,  but  only  in  a  degree  necessary  to  constitute 
the  vitality,  and  to  originate  the  internal  motions  and  other 
functional  operations,  of  planets,  as  such  ;  in  the  Mineral  King- 
dom God  exists  as  mineral  and  chemical  Life ;  in  the  Veget- 
able Kingdom,  as  the  principle  of  vegetable  Life;  in  the 
Animal  Kingdom,  as  the  principle  of  animal,  instinctive,  and 
semi-intellectual  Life,  but  not  yet  as  God ;  in  the  Human 
World  he  exists  as  the  principle  of  human  Life ;  but  only  in 
a  perfectly  integral,  pure,  innocent,  and  harmoniously  consti- 
tuted Man,  does  He  exist  in  his  focalized  and  quantitatively 
diminished,  but  qualitatively  perfected  Selfhood,  as  God. 
But  in  a  discreet  degree  above  the  whole  universe  of  outer 
creations,  He  exists  in  his  August,  Infinite,  and  Ineffable  Self- 
hood, as  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  First  and  the  Last,  the 
Beginning  and  End  of  all  thirgs  I 

Though  these  investigations  have  been  pursued,  and  these 


DIVINE    DW  ELLIN  G-TLACES.  243 

conclusions  have  been  drawn,  independently  of  the  revelations 
of  the  Scriptures,  I  can  not  abstain  from  marking  their  perfect 
parallelism  with  the  language  of  Paul  in  the  following  pas- 
sages :  "  One  God,  who  is  above  all,  and  through  all,  and 
ix  you  all." — Eph.  iv.  G.  "And  he  is  before  all  things,  and 
Dy  him  all  things  consist." — Col.  i.  17.  "For  of  him,  and 
through  him,  and  to  him  are  all  things;  to  whom  be  glory 
for  ever." — Rom.  xi.  36.  Representing  the  Divine  vitalizing 
principle  flowing  into,  and  pervading  man,  as  taking  the  char- 
acter of  man,  the  same  as  when  flowing  into,  and  vitalizing 
animals,  vegetables,  minerals,  worlds,  it  always  takes  the 
specific  character  of  its  receptacle — David,  addressing  the 
Deity,  says,  "  With  the  merciful  thou  wilt  show  thyself  mer- 
ciful, and  with  the  upright  man  thou  wilt  show  thyself  up- 
right :  with  the  pure  thou  wilt  show  thyself  pure,  and  with 
the  froward  thou  wilt  show  thyself  froward." — Ps.  xviii. 
25,  26.  This  can  not  mean  that  God,  in  his  true  personal 
character,  is  any  other  than  merciful,  upright,  and  pure,  but 
that  his  vitalizing  and  energizing  inflowings  into  man  (without 
which  man  would  be  dead,  body  and  soul)  can  excite  the 
qualities  of  mercy,  uprightness,  purity,  etc.,  only  as  these 
comport  with  the  character  of  the  receptacle.  It  is  said,  more- 
over, that  God  dwells  "with  him  who  is  of  an  humble  and 
contrite  spirit ;"  that  is,  dwells,  not  as  a  mere  generator  of 
material  force  and  action,  as  he  dwells,  in  the  lower  creations, 
but  dwells  as  God  in  his  interior  soul,  as  in  a  temple;  while 
the  "fullness  of  the  Godhead"  dwelt  "bodily"  only  in  that 
ever-to-be-admired  personage,  who  was  absolutely  without  sin. 
who  expressly  declared  that  he  was  in  unity  with  the  Father 
— that  he  was  in  the  Father,  and  the  Father  in  him,  and  in 
whose  celestial  purity,  disinterested  and  unbounded  love,  and 
Ufe-long  labors  and  sacrifices  for  the  good  of  humanity,  we 


244      LAW    AGENCY    AND    DIVINE    AGENCY. 

have  the  only  full  and  true  manifestation  of  the  moral  attrl 
butes  of  the  Deity. 

The  foregoing  will  probably  serve  to  the  reader  as  a  suf- 
ficient illustration  of  the  various  degrees  of  the  Divine  Prin- 
ciple, as  now  embodied  in  the  different  and  corresponding 
Series  and  Degrees  of  the  creations  he  has  formed.  The 
method  of  the  successive  origination  of  these  various  Series 
and  Degrees  of  creation,  has  also  been  incidentally  implied  in 
what  has  been  said ;  but  as  this  is  a  point  which  bears  upon 
important  speculations  which  are  rife  in  these  days,  some 
further  illustration  upon  the  subject  may  be  useful. 

The  point  to  be  illustrated  and  insisted  upon  is,  that  creation 
did  not  develop  itself,  either  according  to  inherent  forces  of 
its  own,  nor  are  its  development  and  its  present  internal  oper- 
ations, owing  simply  to  the  momenta  generated  by  the  first 
impulses  impressed  upon  matter  by  the  Creator,  while  the 
Creator  himself  ^etired  for  eternity,  as  one  would  retire  from 
a  clock  that  was  oiee  wound  up  and  set  a-going.  In  case  of 
such  retirement  of  the  Deity,  after  the  first  impulse  had  been 
given  to  materials,  those  materials  would  have  moved  only  in 
the  direction  of  the  impulse,  and  only  until  the  momentum 
generated  became  exhausted,  and  creation  could  not  possibly 
have  passed  one  Elemental  Degree  beyond  a  first  develop- 
ment. Hence,  each  superior  degree  of  creation  must  neces- 
sarily have  been  accomplished  by  the  aid  of  forces  outside  of, 
superior  to,  and  altogether  independent  of,  itself,  which  gave 
the  physical  elements,  involved  in  the  previous  development, 
an  upward  attraction,  and  a  tendency  to  aggregate  in  the 
form  of  the  next  superior  series  of  archetypes  conceived  in 
the  Divine  Mind.  And  this  is  true  in  respect  to  the  develop* 
ment  of  creation,  as  one  Grand  Series,  and  also  in  respect  to 
the   development   of  each   of  its   corresponding   sub-series. 


L  A  13  Y  R  I JS  T  II     OF     CKEATION 


2U 


This  whole  subject,  with  other  points  in  our  general  philosophy, 
may  be  illustrated  by  the  accompanying  diagram. 


Let  the  seven-fold  triangular  figure  (one  angle  hem&witkin 
another)  which  descends  from  the  upper  part  of  the  diagram 
and  whose  most  exterior  angle  comes  to  a  point  at  the  center 
of  the  diagram,  represent  a  seven-fold  Ray  or  Glory  emanat- 
ing from  the  Divine  Being,  This  we  will  suppose  to  represent 
the  Complete  Degree  of  the  Divine  Soul,  and  Spirit,  and  Per- 
son, which  was  to  generate,  and  to  be  in  some  sense  embodied 
in  universal  creation  with  Man  at  its  head.  Resolved  into 
three  Discreet  Degrees,  we  will  suppose  that  this  Ray  or 
Glory  consisted  of  Divine  Spiritual  Heat,  which  is  Love,  of 
Divine  Spiritual  Light,  which  is  Wisdom,  and  of  Divine  Pa 


Z±Kj         LAW     A  GEN  CI      AND    DIVINE     AG 

tentializing  Essence,  which  is  the  "  complex,  contin 
basis"  of  the  preceding,  and  hence  the  medium  of  volitional 
operation.  We  will  suppose,  then  (what  can  not  be  essentially 
erroneous),  that  from  the  empyrean  heights  of  infinite  perfec- 
tion, where  God,  before  creation  began,  had  from  eternity 
dwelt  in  inconceivable  greatness  and  perfection,  this  seven-fold 
and  three-fold  Ray  emanating  from  his  own  Person,  descended 
by  volition,  and  at  its  lowest  extremity,  resolved  its  most  ex- 
terior essences  (represented  by  the  outer  triangle)  into  atomic 
particles,  which,  in  forms  and  constitutions,  corresponded  to 
archetypes  previously  existing  in  the  Divine  consciousness, 
and  which  were  designed  to  be  wrought  into  the  structure  of 
this  universe  and  all  it  contains.  Let  the  central  point  in  the 
diagram,  then,  represent  the  atomic  or  lowest  stage  of  creation, 
this  being  the  physical  Germ  from  which  the  great  Tree  of 
universal  Being  was  to  grow.  From  this  central  point,  it  will 
he  observed,  proceeds  a  spiral  line,  which,  while  constantly 
receding  from  the  center,  winds  around  through  six  radii,  and 
completes  the  circuit  of  the  diagram  on  the  center  of  the  de- 
scending Ray,  on  which  it  commenced.  This  spiral  line,  in 
passing  around,  represents  the  inception,  progress,  and  comple- 
tion, of  the  first  Circle,  Series,  or  Complete  Degree  of  Forms. 
From  the  center  of  the  descending  Ray,  and  the  apex  of  a 
second  and  more  interior  triangle,  the  same  spiral  line  thence 
continues,  and,  completing  another  circuit  while  perpetually 
receding  from  the  center,  represents  the  course  of  the  next 
higher  and  corresponding  Circle  of  creations.  And  so,  com- 
mencing every  time  at  the  point  representing  the  completion 
of  the  previous  Circle  (this,  at  the  same  time,  being  the  focus 
of  a  more  interior  Degree  of  the  Divine  generative  Principle), 
it  continues  its  corresponding  circuits  around  the  diagram,  all 
the  while  expanding  from  the  center,  and  thus  representing  the 


TEEE     OF     CEEATION.  247 

course  of  higher  and  still  higher  creations,  until  the  last  is  at- 
tained, which  is  Man. 

Now  the  descending  Di\  ine  creative  Ray  forms  the  seventh 
radius  of  the  circle,  which  represents  the  beginning  and  ending 
of  each  Series  or  complete  Degree  of  creations.  But  the  end 
of  each  is  represented  as  higher  than  its  beginning,  and  as  in 
conjunction  with,  and  subject  tc  the  operative  inflowings  of, 
the  next  higher  Degree  of  the  Divine  generative  Principle, 
which  is  represented  by  the  apex  of  the  next  more  interior 
triangle.  Each  Circle  of  developments  traced  directly,  or  from 
beginning  to  end,  may  be  called  a  "line  of  natural  ascent:''1 
each  circle  traced  inversely,  or  from  end  to  beginning,  may  be 
called  a  "line  of  spiritual  descent"  representing  the  descent 
or  operative  inflowings  of  the  Divine  vitalizing  and  formative 
Energy,  by  which  material  elements  involved  in  inferior 
forms  are  refined,  energized,  and  brought  by  an  upward  at- 
traction into  next  superior,  and  thence  still  superior,  and  finally 
into  highest  forms,  according  to  the  pre-existent  archetypes  of 
said  forms,  or  their  Divine  spiritual  patterns.  Thus  is  the 
great  Tree  of  universal  creation  brought  through  all  its  succes- 
sive  stages  of  development  unto  perfection,  by  constantly  de- 
scending influences  from  the  Divine  Spiritual  Sun — in  the  same 
way  as  the  vegetable  tree  is  made  to  grow  from  germ  to  ulti- 
mate, by  the  constantly  descending  influences  of  the  natural 
Sun,  which,  howrever,  is  interiorly  vitalized  by  the  Spiritual. 
But  we  think  it  ought  to  be  entirely  obvious  to  every  intelli- 
gent mind,  that  without  these  descending  and  vitalizing  influ- 
ences, neither  Tree  could  proceed  a  single  step  in  its  ascending 
development;  and,  moreover,  if  at  any  time  during  the  course 
of  their  development,  this  superior  and  independent  influence 
should  be  withholden,  the  development  would  necessarily  and. 
immediately  cease,  ard  stagnation  and  decay  would  ensue. 


2-18        LAW    AGENCY    AND    DIVINE    AGENCY. 

If  the  tree  can  not  grow  without  the  sun,  it  may  be  consid- 
ered equally  certain  that  nature  as  a  whole,  and  hence,  also,  as 
to  its  component  parts,  from  greatest  to  most  minute,  has  no 
power  of  development  or  motion  in  and  of  itself.  Hence  all 
power,  as  well  as  its  directive  influence,  must  be  from  above 
nature,  and  hence  from  God ;  and  hence  all  stellar  systems, 
solar  systems,  worlds,  minerals,  vegetables,  animals,  and  even 
animalcules,  were  created  and  are  governed,  not  only  by  the 
remote  and  indirect,  but  by  the  immediate  and  direct,  agency  of 
God! 

These  are  among  the  considerations  which  we  think  com- 
pletely overthrow  the  pantheistic  speculations  with  which 
much  of  the  philosophy  of  the  day  is  more  or  less  impreg- 
nated. 

The  diagram,  also,  by  presenting  a  succession  of  continually 
expanding  circles,  all  having  one  center,  and  being  constituted 
after  one  principle,  presents  a  clear  and  concise  illustration  of 
the  doctrines  of  Series,  Degrees,  and  Correspondences,  and  will 
serve  thus  to  fix  permanently  in  the  mind  a  true  idea  of  the 
complexly-unitary  constitution,  and  harmoniously  interblend- 
ing  movements  of  the  universe,  as  expressive  of  the  Love, 
Wisdom,  and  infinite  internal  harmonies  of  its  Divink 
Author. 


CHAPTEK    XX7. 

PROVIDENCE. 

Though  it  is  shown  in  the.  foregoing  pages,  that  creation 
must  have  been  developed,  and  must  now  be  governed  in 
its  operations,  according  to  directive  Wisdom  existing  in 
the  forms  of  fixed  laws,  there  is  nothing  in  the  theory  pre- 
sented which  contradicts,  but  every  thing  which  confirms,  those 
deep  intuitions  of  every  well-regulated  mind,  respecting  the  con- 
stant Providence  of  God  as  concerned  in  the  unfolding  and  gov- 
ernment of  his  creation.  If,  as  we  have  seen,  law  of  itself  has 
no  creative  force,  but  is  simply  a  mode  of  action  prescribed  and 
predetermined  by  the  archetypes  and  intentions  conceived  in 
the  Divine  Mind;  and  if  to  the  realization  of  each  succeeding 
stage  of  creation,  however  great  or  minute,  an  additional  and 
voluntative  influx  of  Divine  formative  Energy,  was  absolutely 
necessary ;  and,  moreover,  if  the  same  constant  influx  is  ne- 
cessary to  sustain  the  life  and  motions  of  the  system  after  it 
is  in  being — then  it  follows  that  every  event,  from  the  birth 
of  a  world  to  the  falling  of  a  sparrow,  or  the  rustling  of  a  leaf 
in  the  summer  breeze,  is,  in  some  sense,  a  Providence — that 
is,  it  was  provided  for  in  the  pre-determined  course  of  Divine 
intelligent  volition  and  causation.  But  to  prevent  involving 
creation  in  inextricable  confusion,  and  to  establish  and  preserve 
an  orderly  relationship  and  affectionate  interblending  of  all 
forms,  and  a  just  and  harmonious  reciprocation  in  all  their 
offices  and  movements,  God  orders  even  his  providences  accord- 


250  PROVIDENCE. 

ing  to  laws,  or,  it  may  almost  be  said,  he  has  made  them 
synonymous  with  laws. 

It  may  safely  be  believed  that  the  present  order  and  plan 
of  creation  is  the  best  that  could  have  been  devised  by  the 
Divine  Mind  ;  for  otherwise,  the  present  plan  would  not  have 
been  adopted.  Bat  if  it  is  the  best,  then  it  requires  no  funda- 
mental change,  and  not  even  any  modifications,  except  such  as 
may  comport  with  a  constant  general  progression  on  the  basis 
of  the  original  plan.  But  while  all  progression  in  each  de- 
partment is  dependent  upon  an  influx  or  inhalation  (hence 
free  bestoivment  by  the  Divine  Being),  of  additional  degrees  of 
that  Divine  vitalizing  influence  which  is  specifically  suitable 
to  itself,  and  while  all  progression  is  in  this  sense  providential, 
God  can  not,  either  in  causing  a  progressional  or  any  other 
change,  and  without  deranging  the  established,  and  hence  besi 
possible  order  of  things,  act  providentially  and  directly  upon 
any  department  of  creation,  except  through  the  medium  of 
that  particular  land  of  force  or  vitality  of  which  the  thing  acted 
upon  is  a  suitable  receptacle. 

Thus,  considering  the  universe  in  its  most  general  aspect  as 
one  grand  Whole,  God  can  not  act  directly  upon  it,  or  modify 
its  existing  activities  and  tendencies,  except  through  the  me- 
dium of  those  forces  and  laws  of  Expansion,  Contraction,  Cir- 
culation, Aggregation,  etc.,  in  the  degree  in  which  they  apply 
to  the  universe  as  a  whole.  He  can  not  act  directly  upon 
solar  systems  and  worlds,  except  through  the  medium  of  the 
same  laws  and  forces  in  their  higher  degrees  of  unfolding  as 
applicable  to  solar  systems  and  worlds  ;  God  can  not  act 
directly  upon  Mineral  creations,  except  through  the  forces  and 
laws  of  chemical  affinities  ;  He  can  not  act  directly  upon  Vege- 
table Kingdoms,  except  through  the  forces  and  laws  of  vegeta- 
ble life  \  He  can  not  act  directly  on  the  Animal  Kingdom,  of 


PROVIDENCE.  251 

an/  of  its  forms,  except  through  the  forces  and  Uws  of  animal, 
sensational,  and  semi-intellectual  life;  He  can  act  directly  on 
selfish  and  sinful  human  nature,  only  by  those  isolated  and 
disjointed  motive  forces  which  are  adapted  to  reach  and  affect 
the  disjointed  mental  and  moral  constitutions  of  selfish  and 
sinful  human  beings  ;  while  God  can  act  directly  and  fully  as 
God,  in  all  his  affectional,  intellectual,  and  moral  nature,  only 
upon  a  perfectly  pure  and  sinless  intelligence — a  being  fitted 
for  the  harmonious  influx  of  all  the  affectional,  intellectual,  and 
voluntative  principles  of  the  Divine  Soul — a  being,  hence, 
who  stands  in  the  perfect  image  of  God,  and  who,  in  principle, 
is  one  with  Him.  Hence,  when  such  a  being  acts  (and  there 
never  was  but  one  such  a  being),  it  may  be  said  that  God  acts 
with  him,  in  him,  and  through  him,  and  that  his  every  act  is  in 
the  fullest  and  most  Divine  sense,  a  'providence. 

But  as  the  infinite  Divine,  personal,  and  volitional  Intelli- 
gence is  above  all  things,  and  over  all  things,  and  is  the  inex- 
haustible Source  of  all  streams  of  vitality  and  motive  force 
which  flow  into  the  various  departments  of  His  creation,  it  may 
be  rationally  conceived,  that  by  withholding  his  inflowings 
into  the  universal  system  as  a  whole,  he  could  cause  univer- 
sal stagnation  and  dissolution  to  ensue;  or  that  by  increasing 
those  inflowings,  he  could  stimulate  all  firmamental  develop- 
ments and  solar  and  planetary  motions,  to  unwonted  activity  ; 
or  that  by  diminishing  his  influence  in  one  portion  of  space, 
and  increasing  it  in  another,  He  could  cause  the  dissolution  of 
some  worlds,  and  the  absorption  of  their  materials  by  others ; 
or  that  by  modifying  his  influences  upon  the  electric,  aerial, 
and  subterranean  forces  of  a  particular  planet  (such  as  our 
own),  he  can  cause  floods  to  deluge  the  earth,  or  subterranean 
fires  to  overwhelm  cities,  and  destroy  such  human  beings  as 
must  otherwise  stand  as  obstructions  to  true  progress  ;  or  that 


252  PROVIDENCE. 

in  a  similar  way,  he  might  cause  a  rarefaction  of  the  atmo» 
sphere  in  one  locality,  and  a  condensation  in  another,  and  thus 
cause  a  current  of  wind  sufficiently  violent  to  cleave  the  waters 
of  a  gulf,  and  afford  a  dry  passage  for  a  particular  people 
through  whom  he  designed  to  affect  great  purposes. 

It  will  doubtless  still  be  argued  that  such  occurrences,  if 
they  ever  do  take  place,  are  results  simply  of  the  forces  and 
laws  of  nature.  In  a  qualified  sense,  this  is  granted,  as  we 
have  shown  before  that  all  action,  whether  physical  or 
spiritual,  is  according  to  some  laws  ;  but  we  insist  that  it  is 
an  exceedingly  superficial  view  of  the  laws  of  nature,  which 
supposes  that  they  are  self-generative  and  self-active,  or  that 
they  can  exist  for  a  moment  as  separate  from  that  Divine 
vitalizing  and  spiritual  Principle  which,  in  an  earlier  stage 
of  this  work,  we  showed  was  necessarily  self-existent  and 
eternal. 

But  if  this  self-existent,  and  all  generative,  and  vitalizing 
Divine  Principle  may  operate  upon  mundane  forces  and  de- 
velopments in  the  way  just  described,  he  may,  in  a  similar 
way,  control,  modify,  and  direct  chemical  and  mineral,  or 
vegetable,  or  animal,  or  spiritual  forces  and  developments,  by 
a  voluntary  graduation  of  those  influences,  proceeding  from 
himself,  as  adapted  to  either  of  these  departments  of  his 
creation.  And  all  such  operations  would  be  instances  of 
direct  providences. 

But  while  it  would  be  impossible  for  God,  consistently 
with  the  fundamental,  which  we  have  presumed  to  be  the 
best  possible  plan  of  creation,  to  act  directly  upon  any  one 
department  of  being,  by  forces  specifically  adapted  only  to 
another  (as,  for  instance,  to  act  directly  upon  mind,  by  that 
Degree  of  attractive  force  known  as  "  gravitation,"  or  to  di- 
rectly control   planets  by  the  motive  forces  of  moral   and 


PKOVIDENCE.  253 

rational  convictions),  it  is  none  the  less  conceivable  that  each 
department  of  existence  may  be  indirectly  influenced  through 
the  medium  of  some  other  department,  which  is  made  the 
receptacle  of  direct  influence.  Thus  it  may  be  conceived  as 
possible  for  God,  by  special  and  designed  action  upon  a  par- 
ticular planet,  to  change  the  orbit  of  such  planet,  and  thus 
mediately  change  the  orbits  of  all  the  planets  with  which  it 
may  be  associated,  and  thus  to  change  their  seasons,  and  thus 
their  inhabitants,  if  they  have  any,  and  thus  even  to  produce 
an  endless  concatenation  of  spiritual  changes ;  or,  that  by 
action  upon  one  particular  department  *f  the  Mineral,  Veget- 
able, or  Animal  Kingdom,  He  might  change  other  depart- 
ments of  the  same  Kingdom,  and  thus  indefinitely  change  the 
relations  existing  between  them  all. 

Similar  remarks  are  especially  applicable  to  the  Divine 
government  of  the  Human  world.  Notwithstanding  every 
human  being,  and  the  whole  race,  as  one  grand  Man,  was 
designed  to  reflect  the  image  of  the  Creator,  human  nature, 
in  its  present  state,  is  undeniably  more  or  less  depraved, 
selfish,  and  inharmonious,  and  hence  is  not  receptive  of  the 
Divine  influence,  in  its  pure  and  harmonious  state.  The 
Divine  spiritual  influence,  directly  and  immediately  infused 
into  the  human  world,  therefore,  and  without  the  mediumship 
of  a  perfect  human  personage  to  harmoniously  reflect,  truly 
define,  and  correctly  apply,  its  principles,  would  necessarily 
take  a  form  of  manifestation  more  or  less  characterized  by  the 
imperfections  of  degenerate  humanity  as  its  receptacle — in  the 
same  way  as  the  Divine  operative  influence,  flowing  into 
animal  or  still  lower  creations,  takes  a  form  of  manifestation 
peculiar  to  those  creations.  On  this  principle,  and  this  prin- 
ciple alone,  it  is  conceived,  we  may  account  for  the  imper- 
fection of  the  impressions  which  the  Divine  inspiration  gava 

22 


254  PROVIDENCE. 

to  Moses,  and  David,  and  the  prophets,  and  the  impei  iectioiii 
of  the  code  of  ethics,  principles  of  government,  and  policy  in 
respect  to  other  nations,  which  grew  out  of  these  impressions ; 
for  all  these  were  evidently  imperfect  when  judged  by  a 
Christian  standard.  Still,  by  means  of  such  inflowings,  as 
the  psychical  and  mental  constitutions  of  these  mediums 
rendered  possible,  God,  without  immediately  obliterating 
existing  evils,  pressed  these  evils  into  the  service  of  ultimate 
good  :  and  by  arraying  one  nation  against  another,  subjecting 
some  to  utter  extermination,  humbling  others,  by  long  dis- 
ciplinary chastisements,  etc.,  so  directed  the  general  course  of 
human  events  as  provide  for  the  influx  of  more  and  more 
light,  and  for  the  final  coming  of  him  who  was  emphatically 
"  the  Light  of  the  world."  And  now  that  that  Light  has 
come,  a  similar  course  of  indirect  Divine  providences  is  con- 
tinued with  reference  to  nations  and  individuals,  evidently 
with  the  view  to  the  ultimate  bringing  of  ail  under  the  full 
influence  of  its  life-giving  Lvams,  and  to  the  establishment 
of  that  Divine  Kingdom  in  the  world  which  shall  "  break 
to  pieces  and  consume  all  other  kingdoms,  and  stand  for 
ever." 

But  if  in  this  disjointed  and  degenerate  state  of  the  human 
faculties,  God  can  discharge  the  highest  functions  of  his  Di- 
vine government  only  by  bringing  the  appropriate  forces  of 
one  human  faculty,  one  person,  one  society,  or  one  nation,  tc 
bear  upon  another,  it  is  equally  true  that  in  the  perfect  man, 
God  rules  directly,  2wsonally  and  absolutely  as  God,  in  all  his 
harmoniously  consociated  affectional,  moral,  and  intellectual 
attributes — in  the  same  way  as  he  rules  as  mechanical,  chemi- 
cal,  or  vegetative  Force,  in  different  departments  of  nature 
without.  Nay,  in  such  a  being,  as  the  ultimate  and  harmoniou? 
embodiment  of  all  the  principles  of  his  Love  and  Wisdom, 


PROVIDENCE.  255 

God  absolutely  diftells,  in  his  integral  and  personal  capacity,  as 
in  a  temple;  and  therefore  such  a  being  is  God  in  his  focalized 
capacity  as  adapted  to  a  direct  conjunction  with  humanity. 
All  that  authentic  history  informs  us  of  the  character,  actions, 
and  teachings  of  Jesus  goes  to  justify  the  belief  that  he  was 
such  a  divinely  human  and  humanly  divine  personage. 

It  should  be  observed,  that  a  perfectly  pure  and  sinless  in- 
telligence, such  as  is  here  conceived,  must,  as  viewed  in  a 
human  aspect,  stand  at  the  very  apex  of  visible  creation,  or  at 
that  point  in  a  grand  seven-fold  circle  of  existence  at  which 
endings  merge  into  beginnings.  Hence,  the  Divine  Soul, 
focalizing  in  all  its  harmoniously  combined  principles,  in  such 
a  being,  would  maintain  the  same  relations  to  inferior  physi- 
cal constitutions,  and  to  all  outer  physical  substances  which 
lie  within  his  sphere,  as  the  Divine  Being  in  his  whole  infini- 
tude, sustains  to  the  physical  universe  as  a  whole.  Hence  the 
Divinity,  in  this  focalized  capacity,  would  maintain  toward  all 
things  within  his  sphere,  the  relations  of  a  New  Beginning 
Principle  ;  and  if  God  in  his  infinitude,  as  the  Beginning  Prin- 
ciple of  the  universe  as  a  whole,  could,  from  his  free  volition, 
make  and  unmake  laws  to  govern  the  present  system  of  things, 
then  God,  in  the  condescended  form  of  his  personal  Being  as 
manifested  through  a  suitable  human  organism  at  the  end  of 
an  old,  and  the  beginning  of  a  new  creation,  may,  in  equal 
consistency  with  the  rules  of  Divine  order,  establish  new  laws, 
or  rather  enact  immensely  higher  degrees  of  old  ones,  as 
relating  to  such  existences  within  his  sphere  as  need  such  in- 
terference. There  is  nothing  irrational  in  the  supposition, 
therefore,  that  the  Divinely  human,  or  humanly  Divine  Prin- 
ciple (which  are  one  and  the  same),  could,  by  volition  through 
the  outer  organism  which  served  as  its  medium,  concentrate! 
Its  vital  energies  upon  the  diseased  bodies  of  man,  and  even 


256  PROVIDENCE. 

the  inorganic  elements  of  the  outer  world,  and  produce  sieh 
effects  as  are  commonly  designated  by  the  word  "  miraculous," 
and  that,  too,  simply  according  to  that  higher  degree  of  laws 
specifically  adapted  to  such  operations,  and  unfolded  for  such 
specific  purposes.  Such  would  be  instances  of  the  highest 
manifestations  of  indirect  providences. 

But  if  God  dwells  and  rules,  with  a  perfect  and  harmonious 
display  of  all  the  principles  of  his  nature  as  God,  in  a  being 
such  as  we  have  supposed,  then  it  follows  that  the  more  any 
man  is  like  such  a  being,  the  more  fully  God  "  works  within 
him  to  will  and  to  do  according  to  his  own  pleasure,"  the  more 
he  is  under  the  direct  operation  of  the  highest  order  of  Divine 
Providences,  the  more  he  is  raised,  as  it  were,  above  the 
sphere  of  mere  material  things  and  their  laws,  and  the  more 
he  becomes  a  medium  through  which  the  Divine  Being,  in  his 
affectional,  intellectual,  and  volitional  nature  as  such,  acts  upon 
beings  and  conditions  beloiu  him,  to  bring  them  up  to  the  true 
standard  of  healthfulness,  harmony,  and  perfection  !  And 
when  all  human  beings  shall  be  fully  united  to  God — shall 
fully  "dwell  in  him,  and  he  in  them,"  then  all  human  beings, 
with  their  outer  conditions,  and  even  the  whole  physical  world, 
divinely  acted  upon  through  their  mediation,  will  undoubtedly 
be  spiritualized,  and  elevated  one  Discreet  Degree,  and  peace 
and  plenty,  and  that  universal  harmony  and  love,  which  may 
be  considered  as  uncontaminated  and  unperverted  outflowings 
from  the  Divine  Fountain  of  Infinite  Harmony  and  Love, 
will  take  the  place  cf  the  corroding  selfishness,  the  distracting 
animosities,  and  the  physical,  as  well  as  moral,  diseases  and 
sufferings  which  now  roll  their  desolating  waves  over  the 
earth. 

Let  it  be  distinctly  understood  that  the  foregoing  theory  of 
Divine  Providences  is  presented  simply  as  a  rational  deduo 


PKOVIDENCE.  257 

tion  of  philosophy  aside  from  the  teachings  of  ScrirJure. 
The  few  scriptural  phrases  we  have  employed  in  this  dis- 
quisition, have  been  employed  incidentally,  solely  in  consider- 
ation of  their  appositeness,  as  expressing  certain  ideas  which 
have  lain  within  the  course  of  our  reasonings.  Being  actu- 
ated  by  the  sole  desire  of  developing  the  teachings  of  phil- 
osophy, with  reference  to  these  questions  of  theology,  it  is  not 
pretended  that  we  have  attained  to  a  full  unfolding  of  truth 
upon  the  subject  discussed,- or  even  to  so  clear  a  presentation 
of  that  measure  of  truth  which  has  been  found,  as  might  have 
been  attained  if  we  had  freely  availed  ourselves  of  scriptural 
aids.  But  while,  by  the  course  we  have  pursued,  our  con- 
clusions have  been  left  unprejudiced  in  the  view  of  such  of 
our  readers  as  may  be  disinclined  to  admit  the  authority  of 
the  Bible,  we  beg  such  readers,  in  candor,  to  observe,  that  so 
far  as  the  teachings  of  nature  and  philosophy  have,  in  these 
pages,  been  brought  into  view,  there  is  not  that  hostility  be- 
tween them  and  the  teachings  of  the  Bible,  which  unbeliever*' 
in  the  latter  have  generally  supposed  to  exist.  The  objec ; 
of  all  investigations  should  be,  not  to  establish  the  au- 
thority of  a  Book,  or  of  a  philosophical  creed,  but  to  dis- 
cover Truth ;  and  if  some  of  the  most  vitally  important  of 
all  truths  are  recorded  in  the  Bible,  it  must  be  acknow- 
ledged, even  by  all  candid  infidels,  that  while  these  are  no 
more,  they  are  no  less  sacred,  and  while  they  should  be 
received  with  no  more,  they  should  be  received  with  no 
less  avidity,  than  if  the  same  truths  were  found  any  where 
else. 

What  nas  been  said  respecting  Providences,  will  serve  to 
give  a  general  idea  of  a  subject  which  is  far  from  being 
exhausted  in  this  discussion.  Instances  of  apparently  still 
more    special    providences,    as    affecting   the    specific    con 


258  CONCLUSION. 

ditions  of  individuals,  can  be  intelligibly  illustrated  only 
in  view  of  certain  psychological  and  spiritual  laws,  which 
will  foam,  the  themes  of  appropriate  remark  when  we  pro 
ceed  to  the  consideration  of  the  Microcosm,  or  the  universe 
within. 

CONCLUSION  OF  THE  VOLUME. 

We  have  thus  endeavored  to  exhibit  a  general  view  of  the 
various  Series  and  Degrees  of  systematic  creation  which  com- 
pose the  aggregate  of  the  outer  realm  of  being — both  in  their 
separate  and  united  capacities,  together  with  their  relations  to 
each  other  and  to  their  common  Divine  Cause  and  Governor. 
We  close  this  first  part  of  our  treatise  with  the  following  re- 
marks : 

1.  If  our  Philosophy,  as  to  its  distinctive  features,  contains 
no  truth,  it  can  at  least  do  no  essential  evil,  as  it  must  be  that 
a  system  of  unmitigated  error,  of  so  bold  and  conspicuous  a 
kind,  and  put  forth  in  this  unguarded  manner,  wTould  exhibit 
so  many  vulnerable  points  as  to  meet  with  its  death  wound 
the  instant  it  is  exposed  to  the  shafts  of  criticism.  If  it  should 
be  entirely  overthrown,  however,  there  would  still  necessarily 
remain  some  possible  mode  of  systematizing  and  harmonizing 
Nature  and  Truth  in  one  general  philosophic  view,  if  it  so  be 
that  Nature  and  Truth  are  intrinsically  systematic  and  har- 
monious; and  the  discovery  of  this  mode  is  worthy  of  the 
highest  efforts  of  philosophic  minds.  I  would  respectfully  sub- 
mit, however,  that  promise  of  a  discovery  of  this  kind,  can 
only  be  given  by  some  such  process  of  serial,  gradational,  and 
correspondential  reasoning  from  interiors  to  exteriors,  as  has 
been  pursued  in  the  foregoing  pages ;  and  that  so  long  as 
men  confine  themselves  to  the  ordinary  processes  of  reason- 
ing merely  from  effects  to  causes,  so  long  their  conclusions 


CONCLUSION.  259 

will,  of  necessity,  be  more  or  less  divergent,  and  so  long  they 
will,  at  most,  be  able  to  attain  only  the  body  of  truth,  without 
its  soul. 

2.  If  our  Philosophy  contains  some  truth  and  some  error, 
then  its  truths,  bearing  as  they  do  upon  subjects  of  the  most 
striking  and  important  character,  may,  by  exciting  minds 
capable  of  elaborating  and  extending  them,  yet  form  the  nu- 
cleus of  a  grand  system  of  true  thought,  which  may  be  pro- 
gressively brought  to  a  state  as  near  perfect  as  may  comport 
with  the  fmiteness  of  the  human  mind. 

3.  If  it  contains  a  large  preponderance  of  truth,  and  but 
little  essential  error,  then  considerable  progress  has  already 
been  made  in  developing  the  means  of  reconciling  the  jargon 
of  conflicting  thought  upon  all  subjects  natural  and  spiritual, 
and  in  demolishing  the  partition  walls  between  the  Jew  of 
Theology  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  Gentile  of  Philosophy  on 
the  other,  and  making  of  the  twain  one  new  man,  thus  making 
peace. 

We  are  next,  therefore,  in  the  light  of  facts,  truths,  princi- 
ples, laws,  correspondences,  etc.,  developed  in  the  preceding 
pages,  to  proceed  to  consider  a  general  theme  of  perhaps  still 
more  interest,  viz.,  the  Microcosm,  or  corresponding  universe. 
within.  In  the  course  of  our  investigations  upon  this  subject, 
we  shall  probably  speak  of  man  physically,  psychologically,- 
individually,  and  socially,  with  a  view  of  exhibiting  his  rela- 
tions to  all  other  things,  his  susceptibility  to  their  influence, 
and  the  conditions  of  his  true  progress  and  happiness. 

Should  not  unforeseen  influences  prevent,  this  second  Trea- 
tise, or  rather  second  part  of  the  present  one,  will  be  re-ady  foi 
publication  in  the  course  of  a  few  months. 

END    OF    THE    "  MACROCOSM." 


CHIRON  FASCINATING  ESCULAPIUS     B.  C    928. 

Chiron  the  Centaur,  a  prince  of  Thessaly,  has  fascinated  his  pupil  Escr/r-APruft, 
brother,  prince,  for  the  purpose  of  discovering  a  remedy  to  cure  the  foot  of  Hercules, 
which  had  been  wounded  by  a  poisoned  arrow.  An  herb  was  prevised  which  saved 
the  hero  :  this  plant,  known  from  the  circumstance  as  the  Centaury,  (Centaur's  herb,) 
gave  name  to  a  genus,  one  species  of  which  is  our  common  blue-bottle.  Chiron  was 
the  great  physician  of  his  day,  and  derived  his  name  from  a  Greek  word,  meaning 
the  hand,  because  he  performed  most  of  his  cures  by  manipulating.  His  wonderful 
skill  in  horsemanship  has  made  the  poets  represent  him  as  a  centaur,  half  man.  half 
horse.  In  after  times,  the  medical  fame  of  Esculapius  far  eclipsed  that  of  his  master. 
Chiron,  and  he  was  early  invested  by  the  people  with  divine  honors.  His  mode  or 
practising,  called  by  his  descendant  Hippocrates,  the  secret  means  of  medicine,  can 
be  found  detailed  in  the  work- 


FASCINATION, 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    CHARMING 


ILLUSTRATING 


THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    LIFE 


IN   CONNECTION  WITH 


SPIRIT    AND    MATTER 


BY  JOHN  B.  NEWMAN,  M.  D. 

ATTTTLOR    0?    VARIOUS    WORKS    ON    NATURAL    HISTORY,    BTO 


TENTH    THOUSAND. 


NEW    YORK: 

S.   E     WELLS    &   CO.,    PUBLISHERS, 

No.     737     BROADWAY. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1847, 

By  FOWLERS  &  WELLS, 

In  the  Clerk's  office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Southern  District  of 

New  York. 


Re-Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1875, 

By  S.  R.  WELLS  &  CO., 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.C. 


PREFACE 

If  i»  related  of  Epimenides,  one  of  the  sages  if  antiquity,  that  he  fell 
asleep  in  a  cave,  and  remained  in  that  state  some  3  ears.  When  he  awoke, 
everything  was  altered  around  him,  and  he  scarcely  knew  where  he  was 
During  his  absence  he  affirmed  that  he  had  familiar  intercourse  with  spir- 
its, and  obtained  the  gift  of  prophecy,  etc.  He  was  reported  able  to  dis- 
miss his  soul  from  his  body,  and  recall  it  at  pleasure.  So  high  was  his 
reputation  for  sanctity,  that  during  a  plague  in  Attica,  596  B.  C,  the 
Athenians  sent  for  him  to  perform  a  lustration ;  in  consequence  of  which 
the  plague  ceased. 

Some  German  students  in  the  last  century,  wishing  to  raise  the  devil, 
carried  a  pan  of  burning  charcoal  into  a  close  room,  and  throwing  in  it 
various  prescribed  substances,  danced  around  it,  chanting  a  magic  formula. 
One  of  them  fell  dead,  and  the  rest,  upon  Beeing  his  fate,  fled  with  diffi. 
culty  ;  the  incantation,  they  thought,  had  evidently  been  too  powerful 
A  professor  in  the  same  university  accounted  for  the  facts  by  the  poison- 
ous influence  of  fixed  air  (carbonic  acid  gas)  generated  by  the  ignited 
carbon;  and  offered  to  produce  the  gas  at  pleasure.  He  was  instantly 
accused  from  this  of  having  intercourse  with  familiar  spirits. 

Science  has  long  since  endorsed  the  professor's  solution,  and  to  doubt  it 
at  the  present  day  would  betray  gross  ignorance.  Not  so  fortunate,  how- 
ever, was  Epimenides,  for  it  is  only  in  our  own  times  that  his  claims  have 
been  acknowledged ;  and  from  the  want  of  more  extended  information, 
many  are  even  now  incredulous.  Increasing  light  will  induce  belief,  and 
it  is  my  earnest  wish  that  the  following  pages  may  tend  to  that  result. 

Man,  besides  soul  and  matter,  possesses  an  intermediate  principle  dis-" 
tinct  from  and  between  both,  called  the  life  power  ;  or  in  the  words  of 
Bonard,  "  he  is  an  intelligence  served  by  organs" — these  organs  being  the 
servants  of  the  life  power,  by  which  it  operates  upon  the  material  world, 
and  is  in  turn  operated  upon  by  it.  A  proper  knowledge  of  the  life  power 
is  a  key  to  explain  all  the  phenomena  of  fascination  ;  and  this  it  is  the  ob 
•ect  of  the  present  work  to  communicate.  A  very  concise  but  perfectly 
lear  idea  of  physiology  is  given,  and  m  this  the  foundation  is  laid. 


VI 


PREFACE. 


The  Delphic  priestess  inhaled  fixed  air  to  act  ou  the  life  power  ia  sue 
b  manner  as  to  cause  the  spiritual  in  the  system  to  preponderate  ovei 
the  material,  that  she  might  the  better  give  her  responses.  In  some  cases 
bo  great  was  the  preponderance  as  to  cause  death ;  the  priestess  sharino 
the  fate  of  the  German  student  (who  accomplished  his  desire),  and  by  the 
same  means.  When  the  wished-for  change  is  induced,  new  powers  or 
instincts,  previously  dormant,  become  suddenly  developed ;  and  like  the 
lower  animals,  who,  when  sick,  run  and  devour  the  herb  suited  to  their 
case,  a  like  faculty  of  properly  prescribing  remedies  is  perceived— the 
spiritual  world  is  often  beheld,  and  its  denizens  sometimes  give  the  sleep, 
wakers  information  of  events  that  will  shortly  happen.  History  tells  ua 
that  the  coming  of  Cortez,  and  his  conquest  of  their  nation,  had  been 
told  the  Mexicans  long  before  a  Spaniard  was  ever  heard  of;  and. the 
journals  of  the  missionaries  stationed  at  the  Pacific  isles  will  present  suni. 
lar  facts. 

We  can  now  see  why  the  brazier  was  used  in  the  incantation  of  the 
student,  and  the  probability  of  Epimenides  undergoing  a  change  upon  en- 
tering a  certain  cavern  (likely  by  accident  the  first  time)  wherein  fixed 
air  was  generated.  His  powers  of  curing  disease,  having  intercourse  with 
spirits,  and  predicting  events,  are  thus  explained.  It  should  be  remark- 
ed here,  that  none  but  those  predisposed  to  the  change,  can  experience 
it;  all  artificial  efforts  to  induce  it,  except  in  such,  resulting  in  almost 
certain  insanity  or  death. 

Like  many  others  in  my  profession,  I  was  a  bitter  eaeray  to  fascination 
till  accidentally  led  to  examine  it:  bat  having  done  so,  found  the  phe- 
nomena it  presented,  though  new  and  startling,  in  strict  accordance  with 
the  laws  of  life.  In  explaining  my  views,  I  have  written  for  the  people, 
entirely  dispensing  with  technical  terms  except  in  one  or  two  instances. 
That  their  perusal  may  clear  up  in  the  minds  of  others  as  many  obscure 
and  mysterious  points  as  they  did  in  his  own,  and  thus  subserve  the  inter 
ests  of  trfith,  is  the  sincere  desire  of  the 

4JJTHOR. 

296  FlFT3  S'MEEl    NeW  YORK  ClTY. 


CONTENTS. 


CONVERSATION 


CHARMIN' 


lopular  views  on  fascination — Influence  of  the  imagination — Re- 
port of  Jussien  to  the  French  Academy — Records  of  the  existence 
of  fascination  for  three  thousand  years — Process  of  fascination- 
Choosing  the  name — Snake  charming — Anecdotes — Man  charming- 
Anecdotes — Rationale  of  fascination — Nervous  vapor — Charming  of 
men — Man  can  fascinate  man — Man  can  fascinate  the  lower  animals— 
The  lower  animals  can  fascinate  man — The  lower  animals  can  fasci- 
nate one  another — Young  persons  sleeping  with  old — King  David — 
School-masters — Savage  nations — Lower  animals — Poetry,       -         3  1-24 

CONVERSATION    II. 

DISCOVERY    OF    FASCINATION. 

Adam  acquainted  with  fascination — The  town  of  Mansoul  built  by 
King  Shaddai  in  the  country  of  Universe — Its  privileges,  and  their 
forfeiture — Locality  of  heaven — Material  world  contained  in  the  spir- 
itual— Encampment  of  angels — Stephen — Elisha  and  his  servant — 
Idolatry — Discovery  of  fascination  after  the  deluge — Worship  of  Sa- 
tan— Heathen  magi  the  first  fascinators,  and  their  apotheosis — Mer- 
cury and  his  caduceus — Priests  of  India — Our  Saviour  accused  of 
stealing  secrets  fiom  Egypt — Cases  of  cures — Priests  of  Egypt — 
Life  principle — Matter  governed  by  laws  of  its  own — Vegetable 
kingdom, .     2/5-38 

CONVERSATION    III. 

PHYSIOLOGY. 

That  mm  has  two  lives  may  be  deduced  from  the  narrative  of  his 
LTOtiticn— Seven  properties  of  the  living  principle  exphined — Defini- 


V'lll  CONTENTS. 

tion  of  instinct — Illustrations — Human  understanding —House  of  the 
soul — Modelling  of  bone — Anecdote — Men  taller  in  the  morning  than 
at  night — Two  hundred  and  forty-eight  bones,  and  five  huudred  disj- 
unct muscles  in  the  human  body — Caterpillars — Elephaut — Embryc 
— Digeslwe  process — Stomach  and  gastric  juice — Liver  and  bile— 
Pansreas  and  their  juice — Chyle,  and  its  passage  through  the  lacteals 
and  mesenteric  glands — Wheels  of  life  moving  on  iron  axles — Heart 
pumps  through  it  two  hogsheads  of  blood  per  hour — One  hundred 
and  forty  gallons  of  air  used  per  hour  in  respiration — Nervous  sys- 
tem— Gadfly  without  feeling — Transmigration  of  the  human  em 
Dryo,        -  .....        3S-452 

CONVERSATION    IV. 

DOUBLE    LIFE    OF    MAN. 

Nerves  of  animal  and  vegetable  life — Heart  insensible— -Separation 
of  the  two  lives — Anecdotes — John  Hunter — Colonel  Townshend — 
Wescloff — Ganglion  of  the  understanding — Phrenology — Seat  of  the 
soul — Two  brains — Organs  of  animal  life  double — Insanity — Sleep — 
Sight  without  the  eye — Hearing  without  the  ear — Nervous  vapor  the 
fluid  used  in  fascination — Physicians  should  in  all  cases  operate,  or 
superintend  the  operation — Six  stages  of  fascination — First  stage — 
Idiosyncrasy — Anecdotes — Danger  of  slighting  the  warnings  of  antip- 
athy— Second  and  third  stages — Mr.  Braid,  of  Manchester — Fourth, 
fifth,  and  sixth  stages — What  are  small  causes — Egyptian  priests — 
Drigen — Apollonius  Tyanneus — Pythagoras — Hippocrates,  -     63-79 

CONVERSATION  V. 

SPIRITUAL    STATES. 

Trance  of  William  Tennant — Delirium  tremens  a  kind  of  trauw 
Servant  of  Elisha — King  Saul  artd  the  witch  of  Endor — Naaman  and 
Elisha — Power  of  the  Jews  to  cast  out  devils — Solomon's  knowledge 
and  charms — Eleazar  casts  out  a  devil  in  the  presence  of  Vespasian 
and  Josephus — Sons  of  Sceva — Robert  Cochran's  method  of  imparl- 
ing the  Holy  Ghost — Mormonism  exposed — Pretended  miracles — 
Swedenborg  and  his  theory — Value  of  dead  physiology — Rejection 
of  the  Trinity — Epistles  not  to  be  maltreated — Clairvoyance  of  Swe- 
denborg, and  his  communication  with  the  spiritual  world — Shane  u 
the  life  power — Amputated  limbs — Calvin's  entrance  to  the  spiritual 
world—  Seeress  of  Prevorst — Remarkable  boy,    -  80-95 


CONTENTS.  IS 

CONVERSATION    VI. 

STAGES    IN    DYING. 

Dea.h  is  the  sixth  stage  of  fascination — No  pain  in  dying — Illus- 
trations—Dr.  Adam  Clarke — Account  of  hanging — Decomposition 
Che  only  sure  mark  of  death — Premature  interments — Resuscitation — 
Thespesios  of  Soli — Methodist  communion — Dr.  David  Nelson,  and 
his  Cause  and  Cure  of  Infidelity — Theories  in  regard  to  tne  brain — 
Materialism — Death-bed  scenes — Opening  of  the  spiritual  sight — 
Difference  between  really  dying  and  only  thinking  ourselves  dying — 
Illustrative  cases — The  Infidel — The  Christian — Different  classes  of 
fancies  belong  to  different  individuals  according  to  their  belief,       97-  109 

CONVERSATION    VII 

OPERATION  OF  MEDICINE. 

Worms  on  the  face — Purifying  the  blood — Constaoles  in  tne 
body — Briny  peaches — Self-moving  porter-houses — Spontaneous  com- 
bustion— Anatomy — Physiology — Pathology — Operation  of  medicine 
well  known — Vis  Medicatrix  Naturae — Natural  history  of  the  dor- 
mouse— Experiments  upon  it — Example  of  the  conservative  power 
on  the  human  system — Medicines — Arsenic — How  to  discover  aiter- 
utions  in  the  life  power — Illustration — Active  plan  of  treatment — 
Expectant  plan  of  treatment — Fascination  inducing  disease — Expla- 
nation of  the  water  cure — Homoeopathy — Hannehman  a  fascinator — 
Why  is  Homoeopathy  patronized — Action  of  salt  on  the  blood  in  yel- 
low fever— Transfusion  of  blood — Our  bodies  change  every  seven 
real's — Vaccination — True  church  of  physicians,  -         -     110-125 

CONVERSATION   VIII. 

PREVISION. 

Faculty  of  prevision — Organic  prevision — Revealed  prevision— 
Oiganic  prevision  shown  in  the  lower  animals — Anecdotes — Medi- 
cal practice  derived  from  brutes — Case  of  Pierre  Cazot — Case  of  Soc- 
rates— The  philosopher  Cazotte's  famous  prediction — Passages  in  the 
life  of  Joan  of  Arc  attesting  prevision — Experience  cf  the  statesman 
Heiurich  Zsch  )kke  iliustratiy?  of  revealed  prevision — Anecdoto,    126-140 


X  CONTENTS. 

CONVERSATION    IX. 

SOMNAMBULISM . 

Philosophy  of  mystery — Somnambulism — Anecdotes — Girl  in  Dres- 
den- Source  of  life — Pain  necessary  in  surgical  or  erations— Som- 
nambulism rescues  fascination  from  the  imputations  of  sorcery  and 
the  black  art  — Dendy  considers  mesmerism  true — Pixey  and  fairy — 
Taiior's  guardian  angel — Marcus — Anecdotes — Performing  dreams — 
Mr.  Koggenbach — Story  of  Professor  Upkam — Captain  Brotvn — Mr, 
John  Wise — Somnambulism  induced  by  disease — Anecdotes — Som- 
nambulism induced  by  medicinal  agents — Anecdotes — Dances  of 
witches  true,  and  nature  of  the  ingredients  thrown  by  them  in  the 
cauldron — Anecdotes —  Tovvnshend's  sleep-waking  —  Somnambulic 
music  for  the  flute — Cataleptic  phenomena,     -  -  144  — 156 

CONVERSATION    X. 

HISTORY    OF    FASCINATION. 

History  of  Fascination — St.  Martin — St.  Anthony — Royalty  of 
France — James  of  England — Charles  of  France — Battle  of  Jarnac — 
Van  Hehnont — Valentine  Greatraks — Gassuer — Mesmer — Puseygar 
— Perkins'  tractors — United  States — Fascination  a  key  to  the  various 
superstitions  of  the  world — George  Bush — Dilemma  of  Swedenborg 
--Directions  for  operating  in  fascination — Alarming  symptoms  should 
not  disconcert  the  operator — Illustrations — The  object  of  fascination 
curative  not  experimental — Newnham — Deleuze — Conclusion,    157 — 171 

APPENDIX. 

LETTER    FROM    REV.    W.    H.    BEECHER, 
Attesting,   by  his  own  experience,  without  any  previous  knowl- 
pdge  of  the  subject   the  reality  of  the  influence  of  fascination,  phe- 
iKmcca  of  previeic  r,  clairvoyance,  etc.,  -  .         -     172 — It  6 


FASCINATION 


CONVERSATION    I 


CHARMING. 


Ialv.  My  dear  doctor,  I  can  never  sufficiently  tlianli 
you  for  the  relief  you  have  afforded  me  by  your  treat 
ment.  I  had  been  for  years  on  the  verge  of  the  grave, 
and  without  the  expectation  of  ever  being,  even  for  one 
day,  free  from  pain.  The  first  time  you  fascinated  me, 
I  experienced  an  incredible  change — my  pains  ceased 
the  heart  beat  regularly,  and  my  appetite  returned,  and 
what  is  better  still,  my  improvement  lias  been  rapid 
and  thorough  since  then.  I  confess  this  freely,  as  it 
will  preface  what  I  am  afraid  will  give  you  some  pain, 
My  friends  attribute  my  recovery  to  imagination,  and 
seem  to  think  1  was  not  really  ill,  but  only  nervous ; 
and  they  suppose  that  a  sufficient  degree  of  irritation 
would  make  me  as  bad  as  I  was  at  first. 

Doctor.  They  mentioned,  no  doubt,  many  wonderful 
cases  of  the  effects  of  imagination  on  the  body. 

I. adv.  Yes,  and  some  as  strange  as  my  own  The 
cases  that  had  the  most  effect  on  my  mind  were  that  of 
Joe,  the  Scottish  drover,  who  was  persuaded  to  believe 
himself  sick,  and  in  consequence  really  became  so — 7and 
would  have  died  had  not  the  joke  been  discovered  to 
him — and   that   of   the  criminal  whom  ths  physicians 


12  IMAGINATION. 

pretended  to  bleed  to  death,  and  who  actually  died  from 
the  fancied  loss  of  blood. 

Doctor.  That  imagination  exercises  a  powerful  in- 
fluence upon  our  bodies,  is  an  undoubted  fact ;  but  it  is 
equally  a  fact  that  it  has  full  credit  for  all  it  performs. 
Jussieu,  one  of  the  commissioners  appointed  to  examine 
this  subject  by  the  French  Academy  in  1784,  states,  as 
the  result  of  a  series  of  assiduous  and  attentive  investi- 
gations, that  he  had  observed  some  facts  that  admitted 
of  physiological  explanations  ;  others  which  seemed  to 
militate  against  animal  magnetism  ;  a  third  series  of 
facts  which  he  attributed  to  the  imagination ;  and, 
lastly,  those  which  could  lead  to  no  other  conclusion 
than  that  of  admitting  a  particular  agent  in  their  pro- 
duction. 

Lady.  I  had  no  idea  the  subject  was  known  as  far 
back  as  1784;  I  thought  it  a  new  discovery  of  the 
present  day. 

Doctor.  We  have  authentic  records  showing  its 
existence  for  upward  of  three  thousand  years.  I  have 
been  examining  some  authorities,  and,  if  you  are  suf- 
ficiently interested  in  the  matter,  will  take  considerable 
pleasure  in  submitting  the  result  of  my  labors  to  you; 
and  also  explaining  the  connection  of  fascination  with 
the  laws  of  life. 

Lady.  I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you  for  the  offer, 
and  will  hold  you  to  your  promise.  To  tell  the  truth,  1 
was  on  the  point  many  times  of  asking  the  same  thing ; 
for  ]  find  it  to  be  the  universal  opinion  of  every  one  1 
am  acquainted  with,  that,  if  true,  it  is  something  allied  to 
witchcraft,  and  if  not  true,  the  greatest  humbug  of  the 
age :  and,  despite  my  own  experience,  I  often  feel  very 
uneasv  about  it. 


VARIOUS    NAMES.  13 

Doctor.  .  do  not  wonder  at  your  feelings ;  but,  in 
relation  to  its  effect  on  the  imagination,  I  would  ask  f 
you  believed  in  fascination  before  I  saw  you  1 

Lady.  I  had  never  heard  anything  abou  it.  Oi.e 
day,  when  you  came  in  and  found  the  medicine  had  as 
usual  produced  no  effect,  after  some  conversation  on 
ordinary  matters,  you  directed  me  to  sit  down  and  look 
attentively  in  your  eyes,  at  the  same  time  taking  hold  of 
my  hands.  In  a  little  time  a  rather  uneasy  feeling  stole 
over  me,  which  soon  became  pleasant  and  exhilarating  ; 
before  long  I  felt  sleepy,  a  dreamy  and  triumphant, 
sensation  succeeded,  and  my  eyelids  closed  without  the 
power  to  open  them.  My  pains  vanished,  and  when 
y7ou  opened  my  eyes,  I  felt  better  than  1  had  done  for 
vears  ;  and  to  the  surprise  of  all  my  acquaintances,  who 
predicted  a  speedy  relapse,  my  recovery  has  been  rapid 
and  permanent. 

Doctor.  Well,  then,  your  case  cannot  surely  be 
attributed  to  imagination. 

Lady.  I  never  thought  it  could  ;  but  why  do  you 
name  your  new  science  Fascination?  Others  call  it 
Mesmerism,  or  Animal  Magnetism. 

Doctor.  You  are  mistaken  in  supposing  it  to  be  a 
separate  science ;  it  is  only  a  part  of  medicine.  And 
besides  the  names  you  have  mentioned,  Mental  Elec- 
tricity, Neurology,  Pathetism,  Sychodunamy,  and  many 
others,  are  in  turn  used  to  signify  it.  The  forces  of 
life,  as  I  shall  explain  in  another  place,  brook  no  inter- 
ference from  those  of  Chemistry  or  Mechanics,  so  that 
such  terms  as  Magnetism  and  Electricity  are  inapplicable, 
Mesnier  did  not  discover  anything  new.  Neurology 
treats  only  of  the  nerves.  Pathetism  is  a  term  derived 
from  the  Greek,  meaning  suffering  and  Sychodunamy 
2 


14  SNAKE     CHARMING. 

is  another  word  from  the  same  language,  meaning  the 
force  of  the  soul.  Now,  as  we  have  a  word  in  our 
language  already  expressive  o  the  power  in  the  lower 
animals,  I  saw  no  necessity  to  add  another,  especially 
as  Fascination  is  universally  acknowledged. 

Lady.  You  surely  do  not  mean  the  charming  of 
snakes  ? 

Doctor.  You  have  exactly  expressed  my  idea ;  for 
ihe  power  in  man  and  the  lower  animals  is  exerted 
through  the  same  medium,  and  produces,  to  a  certain 
extent,  the  same  results.  Do  you  remember  any  cases 
of  the  fascination  of  snakes? 

Lady.  Quite  a  number.  Professor  Silliman  mentions 
that  in  June,  1823,  he  crossed  the  Hudson  at  Cattskill,  in 
company  with  a  friend,  and  was  proceeding  in  a  car- 
riage by  the  river  along  the  road,  which  is  there  very 
narrow,  with  the  water  on  one  side,  and  a  steep  bank, 
covered  by  bushes,  on  the  other.  His  attention  at  that 
place  was  arrested  by  observing  the  number  of  small 
birds,  of  different  species,  flying  across  the  road  and 
then  back  again,  and  turning  and  wheeling  in  manifold 
gyrations,  and  with  much  chirping,  yet  making  no 
progress  from  the  particular  place  over  which  they 
fluttered.  His  own  and  his  friend's  curiosity  was  much 
excited,  but  was  soon  satisfied  by  observing  a  black 
snake  of  considerable  size,  partly  coiled  and  partly  erect 
from  the  ground,  with  the  appearance  of  great  anima- 
tion, his  eyes  brilliant,  and  his  tongue  rapidly  and  inces- 
santly brandishing.  This  reptile  they  perceived  to  be 
the  cause  and  centre  of  the  wild  motions  of  the  birds. 
The  excitement,  however,  ceased  as  soon  as  the  snake, 
alarmed  by  the  approach  of  the  carriage,  retired  into 
the  bushes  ;  the  birds  did  not  escape,  but,  alighting  upon 


SNAKE    CHARMING.  Ifl 

the  neighboring  branches,  probably  awaited  the  re-ap- 
pearance of  their  cruel  tormentor  and  enemy. 

I  have  read  of  a  man  residing  in  Pennsylvania,  who 
returning  from  a  ride  in  warm  weather,  espied  a  black- 
bird, and  a  large  blacksnake  viewing  the  bird.  The 
latter  was  describing  circles,  gradually  growing  smaller 
around  the  snake,  and  uttering  cries  of  distress.  The 
bird  had  almost  reached  the  jaws  of  its  enemy,  when 
the  man  with  his  whip  drove  off  the  snake,  and  the  bird 
changed  his  note  to  a  song  of  joy. 

A  gentleman  himself  told  me  that  while  travelling 
one  day,  by  the  side  of  a  creek,  he  saw  a  ground-squir- 
rel running  to  and  fro  between  the  creek  and  a  great 
tree  a  few  yards  distant.  The  squirrel's  hair  looked 
very  rough,  which  showed  he  was  much  frightened; 
and  his  returns  being  shorter  and  shorter,  my  friend 
stood  to  observe  the  cause,  and  soon  discovered  the 
head  and  neck  of  a  rattlesnake  pointing  directly  at  the 
squirrel  through  a  hole  of  the  great  tree,  which  was 
hollow.  The  squirrel  at  length  gave  over  running,  and  . 
laid  himself  quietly  down,  with  his  head  close  to  the 
snake's.  The  snake  then  opened  his  mouth  wide,  and 
took  in  the  squirrel's  head,  when  a  cut  of  the  whip 
across  his  neck  caused  him  to  draw  in  his  head,  which 
action,  of  course,  released  the  squirrel,  who  quickly  ran 
into  the  creek. 

Doctor.  Dr.  Good  mentions  the  curious  fascinating 
powei  the  rattlesnake,  in  particular,  has  over  various 
small  animals,  as  birds,  squirrels,  and  leverets,  which, 
incapable  of  turning  off  their  own  eyes  from  those  of 
the  serpent-enchanter,  and  overpowered  with  terror  ana 
arnazement,  seem  to  struggle  to  get  away,  and  yet  pio 
grressively  approach  him,  as  though  urged  forward  01 


16  SNAKE    CHARMING. 

attracted  by  a  power  superior  to  that  of  natura  instinct 
till  at  length  they  enter,  apparently  without  foreign 
force,  into  the  serpent's  mouth,  which  had  all  along  been 
open  to  receive  them,  and  are  instantly  devoured.  The 
larger  kinds  of  various  snakes  have  undoubtedly  a  simi- 
lar power.  Dr.  Barrow,  in  his  Travels  into  the  interior 
of  South  America,  asserts  this  to  be  a  fact,  well  known 
to  almost  every  peasant  in  that  quarter  of  the  world ; 
and  Vaillant,  in  his  Travels  into  Africa,  affirms  that,  at 
a  place  called  Swortland,  beholding  a  shrike  in  the  very 
act  of  fascination  by  a  large  serpent  at  a  distance,  the 
fiery  eyes  and  open  mouth  of  which  it  was  gradually 
approaching,  with  convulsive  tremblings,  and  the  most 
piteous  shrieks  of  distress,  he  shot  the  serpent  before 
the  bird  had  reached  it ;  still,  however,  the  bird  did  not 
lly,  and  on  taking  it  up,  it  was  already  dead,  being  killed 
either  by  fear  or  the  fascinating  influence  of  the  ser- 
pent, although,  upon  measuring  the  ground,  he  found 
the  space  between  them  to  be  no  less  than  three  feet 
and  a  half.  There  is  a  case,  much  in  point,  inserted  in 
one  of  the  early  volumes  of  the  Philosophical  Transac- 
tions, which  states  that  a  mouse,  put  by  way  of  experi- 
ment into  a  cage  in  which  a  female  viper  was  confined, 
appeared  at  first  greatly  agitated,  and  was  afterward 
seen  to  draw  near  to  the  viper  gradually,  which  con- 
tinued motionless,  but  with  fixed  eyes  and  distended 
mouth,  and  at  length  entered  into  its  jaws,  and  was 
devoured. 

Lady.  If  any  of  the  lower  animals  could  be  fasci- 
nated by  man,  I  should  think  that  would  be  a  certain 
proof,  not  only  of  the  reality  of  the  power,  but  that  it 
did  not  exert  its  influence  through  the  imagination. 

Doctor.    Animals  of    ate  days  have  been  frequently 


Men  ciiarmeng.  11 

fascinated  for  purposes  of  experiment,  and  a  universal 
rigidity  of  the  muscles  produced  to  such  an  extent  as  to 
cause  them  to  resemble  pieces  of  statuary,  so  that  the 
animal  could  be  taken  up  and  its  whole  weight  supported 
by  one  foot- -and  this  state  produced^  and  continued  at 
pleasure.  Mr.  Bruce,  the  great  African  traveller,  dis- 
tinctly states,  from  minute  personal  observation,  that  ?.ll 
the  blacks  in  the  kingdom  of  Sennaar,  whether  Funge 
or  Nuba,  are  perfectly  armed  by  nature  against  the  bite 
of  either  scorpion  or  viper.  They  take  the  horned  ser- 
pents in  their  hands  at  all  times,  put  them  into  their 
bosoms,  and  throw  them  at  one  another,  as  children  do 
apples  or  bells  ;  during  which  sport  the  serpents  are  se.1 
dom  irritated  to  bite,  and  when  they  do  bite,  no  mischief 
ensues  from  the  wound.  The  influence  exerted  upon 
thnni  is  so  great  that  they  are  scarcely  ever  able  to 
attempt  any  resistance,  even  when  eaten  up  alive,  as 
Bruce  assures  us  he  has  seen  them,  from  tail  to  head, 
like  a  carrot.  He  also  positively  affirms  that  they  con- 
stantly sicken  the  moment  they  are  laid  hold  of,  and  are 
sometimes  so  exhausted  by  this  invisible  power  or  fasci- 
nation, as  to  perish  as  effectually,  though  not  as  quickly, 
as  though  struck  by  lightning.  "  I  constantly  observed," 
says  he,  "that,  however  lively  the  viper  was  before, 
upon  being  seized  by  any  of  these  barbarians,  he  seemed 
as  if  taken  with  sickness  and  feebleness,  frequently  shut 
his  eyes,  and  never  turned  his  mouth  toward  the  arm  of 
the  person  that  held  him." 

This  power  is  often  used  by  man  to  disarm  the  fury 
of  the  most  enraged  or  vicious  quadrupeds.  This  13 
peculiarly  seen  at  times  in  the  case  of  watchdogs  over 
whom  some  house-breakers  have  found  out  the  secret  of 
exercising  so  seductive  and  quieting  a  power  as  to  keep 
2* 


18  MEN    CHARM  INC. 

'hem  n  a  profound  silence  while  the  burglary  is  com 
nittea.  Linde^rantz,  of  Sweden,  tells  as  that  the  na- 
tives of  Lapland  and  Dalarne  are  in  possession  of  this 
secret  generally,  insomuch  that  they  can  instantly  dis- 
arm the  most  furious  dog,  and  oblige  him  to  fly  from 
them,  with  all  his  usual  signs  of  fear,  such  as  dropping 
the  tail,  and  becoming  suddenly  silent. 

Grooms  are  sometimes  found  possessed  of  a  similar 
power  over  horses.  Mr.  Townsend  gives  a  striking 
anecdote  to  this  effect  in  his  account  of  James  Sullivan. 
The  man — an  awkward,  ignorant  rustic  of  the  lowest 
class — was  by  profession  a  horse-breaker,  and  generally 
nicknamed  the  ivhisperer,  from  its  being  vulgarly  sup- 
posed that  he  obtained  his  influence  over  unruly  horses 
by  whispering  to  them.  The  actual  secret  of  his  fasci- 
nating power,  it  is  very  likely,  was  unknown  to  himself, 
for  it  died  with  him,  his  son,  who  was  in  the  same  occu- 
pation, knowing  nothing  of  it.  It  was  well  known  to 
every  one  that,  however  unbroken  or  vicious  a  horse  or 
even  a  mule  might  be  when  brought  to  him,  in  the  short 
space  of  half  an  hour  he  became  altogether  passive 
under  his  influence,  and  was  not  only  entirely  gentle 
and  tractable,  but  in  a  very  considerable  degree  contin- 
ued so,  though  somewhat  more  submissive  to  himself 
ihan  to  others.  There  was  a  little  mystery  in  his  plan, 
but  unquestionably  no  deceit.  When  sent  for  to  tame  an 
unruly  horse,  he  ordered  the  stable-door  to  be  shut  upon 
himself  and  the  animal  aione,  and  not  to  be  opened 
until  a  given  signal.  This  singular  intercourse  usually 
lasted  for  about  half  an  hour ;  no  bustle  was  heard,  or 
violence  seemingly  had  recourse  to  ;  but  when  the  door 
was  opened,  on  the  proper  sign  being  given,  the  horse 
was  always  seen  lying  down,  and  the  fascinator  by  his 


NERVOUS    VAPOR.  19 

side,  playing  with  him  familiarly  as  a  child  with  a 
puppy.  Mr.  Townsend  once  saw  nis  skiII  tried  on  a 
horse  that  could  never  be  brought  to  stand  for  a  smith 
to  shoe  him.  The  day  after  Sullivan's  half-hour  lecture, 
he  went,  not  without  some  incredulity,  to  the  smith's 
shop  with  many  other  curious  spectators,  who  were  eye- 
witnesses of  the  complete  success  of  his  art.  This,  too, 
had  been  a  troop  horse,  and  it  was  supposed,  not  with- 
out reason,  that  after  regimental  discipline  had  failed,  no 
other  would  be  found  availing.  He  observed  the  ani- 
mal seemed  afraid  whenever  Sullivan  either  spoke  to 
or  looked  at  him.  In  common  cases,  the  mysterious 
preparation  of  a  private  interview  was  not  necessary, 
the  animal  becoming  tame  at  once. 

Lady.  Has  no  person  ever  attempted  to  explain  this 
wonderful  influence  ?  for  the  facts  seem  to  have  been 
known  a  considerable  time. 

Doctor.  Yes,  though  some  have  doubted  the  facts , 
for,  as  Dr.  Good  remarks,  in  the  marvellous  it  is  always 
far  more  easy  to  doubt  than  to  determine.  By  far  the 
best  explanation,  and  one  with  which  I  entirely  coincide, 
is  that  of  Major  A.  Gordon,  of  South  Carolina,  the 
rationale  of  which  I  will  enter  upon  after  a  little  time. 
In  a  paper  of  his,  he  attributes  the  fascinating  power 
supposed  to  be  possessed  by  serpents,  to  a  vapor  which 
they  secrete,  and  can  throw  around  them  to  a  certain 
distance  at  "pleasure.  He  advances  various  facts  in 
support  of  this  opinion,  and  observes  that  the  vapor 
produces  a  sickening  and  stupefying  effect;  and  t.lludes 
to  a  negro  who,  from  a  peculiar  acuteness  of  smell, 
could  discover  a  rattlesnake  at  a  distance  of  two  hun- 
dred feet,  when  in  the  exercise  of  this  power,  from  his 
smell  being  effected  by  it,  and  who,  on  Mowing  such 


20  MEN    CHARMED. 

indication,  a. ways  found  some  animal  drawn  within  its 
vortex,  and  struggling  with  its  influence. 

Lady.  Does  man  possess  the  power  of  throwing  ofF 
a  similar  vapor  ? 

Doctor.  Undoubtedly ;  the  instruments  in  both  are 
the  same,  and  these  instruments  I  will  take  occasion  to 
describe  to  you,  and  explain  their  mode  of  operation. 

Lady.  I  should  think  it  possible,  in  that  case,  for 
animals,  in  some  instances,  to  fascinate  man. 

Doctor.  We  have  well-attested  instances  of  their  do- 
ing so.  I  remember  reading,  some  time  since,  of  a  man 
walking  out  in  his  garden,  who  accidentally  saw  a  snake 
in  the  bushes,  and,  observing  the  eyes  gleam  in  a  pecu- 
liar manner,  watched  it  closely,  but  soon  found  himself 
unable  to  draw  his  own  eyes  off.  The  snake,  it  appeared 
to  him,  soon  began  to  increase  immensely  in  size,  and 
assume,  in  rapid  succession,  a  mixture  of  brilliant  colors 
He  grew  dizzy,  and  would  have  fallen  in  the  direction 
of  the  snake,  to  which  he  felt  himself  irresistibly  im- 
pelled, had  not  his  wife  come  up,  and,  throwing  her  arms 
around  him,  dispelled  the  charm,  thus  saving  him  from 
certain  destruction.  There  are  too  many  of  these  sto- 
ries to  mention  a  tithe  of  them ;  so  I  will  conclude  with 
but  one  more  that  is  very  generally  known.  Two  men 
in  Maryland  were  walking  together,  when  one  found 
fault  with  his  companion  because  he  stopped  to  look  at 
something  by  the  road-side.  Perceiving  he  did  not  heed 
him,  he  returned  to  draw  him  along,  when  he  perceived 
the  other's  eyes  were  fixed  upon  a  rattlesnake,  which 
had  its  head  raised  and  eyes  glaring  at  him.  The  poor 
fellow  was  leaning  toward  the  snake,  and  crying  pite- 
ously,  in  a  feeble  t^.ne,  "He  will  .bite  me!  he  will  bite 
me."     "Sure  enough  he  will,"  said  his  friend,  "if  you 


KING    DAVID.  21 

dc  not  run  off.  What  are  you  staying  here  for  ?"  Find* 
ing  him  dumb  to  all  entreaties,  he  struck  down  the 
snake  with  a  limb  of  a  tree,  and  pulled  his  companion 
violently  away.  The  man,  whose  life  was  thus  provi- 
dentially saved,  found  himself  very  sick  for  some  hours 
after  his  enchantment. 

Lady.  I  must  express  my  astonishment  at  the  new 
light  in  which  you  have  presented  the  whole  subject  to 
my  mind.  There  can  possibly  be  no  cavilling  at  any  of 
the  positions  you  have  assumed. 

Doctor.  I  give  you  the  result  of  my  own  conclu- 
sions, after  considerable  study,  and,  from  what  has  been 
shown,  I  think  we  may  prove  four  things : — 

First :  That  man  can  fascinate  man. 

Second :  That  man  can  fascinate  the  lower  animals. 

Third :  That  the  lower  animals  can  fascinate  one 
another. 

Fourth:  That  the  lower  animals  can  fascinate  man. 

Townsend  remarks,  that  if  we  wish  to  seek  for  a 
general  instance  of  the  power  one  human  being  possesses 
over  another,  with  regard  to  the  influence  of  fascination, 
we  have  only  to  look  at  the  effects  produced  when 
young  persons  sleep  with  old.  It  is  recorded  of  the 
Psalmist,  King  David,  that,  when  he  became  very  old, 
he  got  a  young  damsel  to  sleep  with  him,  that,  from  her 
vigorous  life,  he  might  obtain  a  supply  to  lengthen  out 
his  days.  Some  painful  instances  of  this  kind  came  un- 
der his  own  observation — one  in  which  the  future  well- 
being  of  a  person  very  dear  to  him  was  compromised ; 
and  he  was  acquainted  with  an  infirm  old  lady,  who  was 
so  perfectly  aware  of  the  benefit  she  derived  from  sleep- 
ing with  young  persons,  that,  with  a  sort  of  hoi  rid  vam 
pireisrn,  she  a/wiys  obliged  her  maid  to  share  the  same 


22  SAVAGE    MAGICIANS. 

bed  with  ler ;  thus  successively  destroying  the  health 
of  several  attendants. 

The  celebrated  German  physiologist,  Hufeland,  has 
remarked  the  longevity  of  schoolmasters,  and  attributes 
it  to  their  living  so  constantly  amid  the  healthy  emana- 
tions of  young  persons. 

It  may  be  well  to  mention,  in  this  connection,  the  fact 
that  savage  nations,  generally,  practice  fascination. 
They  rub  or  pat  one  another  when  fatigued,  and  it 
refreshes.  The  wife  of  one  of  the  Sandwich  Island 
missionaries,  on  a  visit  to  this  country,  some  years  since, 
exclaimed,  on  returning  from  a  long  and  tiresome  walk, 
that  had  completely  exhausted  ner  strength :  "  If  I  was 
home,  the  native  women,  by  patting  me,  would  soon 
give  me  complete  relief  from  this  weariness,  and  make 
me  feel  as  lively  as  ever."  The  rites  and  gestures  of 
savage  magicians,  the  medicine-men  of  the  wilds,  over 
their  patients,  which  so  much  alarm  travellers,  are 
nothing  more  than  fascinating  passes  to  cure  disease — a 
method,  too,  that  very  generally  succeeds. 

Even  among  animals,  it  has  been  found  that  the 
young  cannot  be  too  closely  associated  with  the  old 
without  suffering  detriment.  Young  horses,  standing  in 
a  stable  beside  old  ones,  become  less  healthy,  and,  in 
time,  weak  and  sicklv. 

Lady.  And  you  say  these  wonders  can  all  be  ex- 
plained, in  accordance  with  what  is  already  known  of 
the  laws  of  life  ? 

Doctor.    With  the  utmost  certainty. 

Lady.  But  do  you  really  think  it  possible  that  I  can 
ever  understand  them  ?  I  am  fearful  that  I  have  not 
strength  enough  of  mind  to  pry  into  such  mysteries. 

Doctor.    The  subject  is  not  difficult,  by  any  means. 


SUBJECT    EASY.  23 

and  a  moderate  degree  of  perseverance  is  only  neees 
sary  to  master  the  whole.  If  you  like,  we  will  spend  a 
little  time  to-morrow  in  its  examination,  and,  in  the 
meanwhile,  I  will  leave  you  Mrs.  Abdy's  lines  on  fasci- 
nation, which  prove,  in  a  pleasing  enough  manner,  that 
there  can  be  some  poetry  in  the  subject :— * 


He  stands  before  a  gathered  throng,  strange  knowledge  to  unfold, 
Charming  the  dazzled  fancy  like  the  fairy-tales  of  old  ; 
Yet  mast  he  brook  the  idle  jest,  the  culd  and  doubting  sneer, 
Ka  hath  no  beaten  patn  to  tread,  no  practised  course  to  steer. 

The  wondrous  science  that  he  strives  to  bring  to  life  and  light, 
Is  softly,  faintly  breaking  from  the  misty  shades  of  night ; 
And  scoffing  prejudice  upbraids  the  pure  and  genial  ray, 
Because  it  doth  not  burst  at  once  to  bright  and  beaming  day. 

He  tells  the  healing  benefits  that  through  this  power  arise ; 
How  sweet  and  soothing  sleep  may  seal  the  weary  mourner's  eyes  : 
How  raging  madness  may  be  checked  ;  how  sufferers  may  obtain 
The  boon  of  deep  oblivion  from  the  keenest  throbs  of  pain. 

Anon  he  dwells  on  loftier  themes,  and  shows  how  mind  may  claim 
An  empire  independent  of  the  still  and  slumbering  frame. 
Can  ye  doubt  the  proofs,  ye  careless  throng,  submitted  to  your  view 
Can  ye  hold  them  in  derision,  because  yet  untried  and  new  ? 

Know  that  improvements  ever  wend  a  tardy  course  on  earth ; 
And  though  Wisdom's  mighty  goddess  gained  perfection  at  her  birtfe 
Her  children  reach  by  slow  degrees  the  vigor  of  their  prime, 
For  the  wisdom  of  this  lower  world  require*  the  growth  of  time. 

None  wish  ye  on  the  statements  of  a  single  voice  to  rest; 
The  marvels  ye  have  witnessed  ye  are  urged  to  prove  and  test ; 
Survey  them  in  their  varied  forms — inquire — observe — inspect— 
Watch — meditate — compare — delay — do  all  things  but  neglect! 

If  ye  bear  in  mind  the  lessons  that  to-day  ye  have  been  taught, 
Ye  need  not  lack  materials  for  intense  and  stirring  thought ; 
And  my  simple  lay  can  little  aid  an  orator's  discourse, 
So  gifted  with  the  energy  ;f  intellectual  force. 


24  POETRY. 

But  I  ask  ye  if  your  cherished  ones  sharp  anguish  should  endure. 
Which  the  stated  arts  of  medicine  had  in  vain  essayed  to  cure ; 
Would  it  not  grieve  ye  to  reflect  ye  might  those  pangs  allay, 
But  that,  jestingly  and  mockingly,  ye  cast  that  means  away? 

Mistake  me  not — I  prize  not  aught,  however  great  or  wise. 
If  held  not  in  subjection  to  the  God  who  rules  the  skies ; 
To  me  all  knowledge  would  be  poor,  all  splendor  would  be  di 
All  boons  unsafe,  all  joys  untrue,  unless  derived  from  Him. 

And  if  eagerly  this  wondrous  power  I  witness  and  approve, 
It  is  because  I  know  no  bounds  to  Heaven's  amazing  love. 
And  1  cannot,  by  the  pedant  rules  of  critic  caution,  scan 
The  depths  of  those  eshaustless  gifts  Hia  mercy  pours  on  man 


CONVERSATION    II. 


DISCOVERY    OF    FASCINATION. 


Doctor.  I  wish  to  prove,  in  our  conversation  to-day 
that  Adam  was  perfectly  aware  of  the  power  of  fasci- 
nation, together  with  clairvoyance,  and  those  other  mys- 
teries that  astonish  so  much  the  people  of  the  present 
day. 

Lady.  Why  did  he  not  communicate  tnis  knowledge 
to  his  descendants,  so  that  the  matfer  might  become 
universal  and  undoubted  ? 

Doctor.  I  cannot  answer  better  than  in  the  words 
of  that  veritable  historian,  John  Bunyan,  who  tells  us 
that  King  Shaddai,  in  the  sixth  day  of  the  year  one,  built 
in  the  country  of  Universe  a  fair  and  uejicate  town, 
called  Mansoul,  and  endowed  it  with  corporate  privi- 
leges— a  town  for  building  so  curious,  for  situation  so 
advantageous,  that  there  was  not  its  equal  on  the  face 
of  the  whole  world.  Yea,  it  was  so  goodly,  when  first 
built,  that  the  gods,  at  the  setting  up  of  it,  came  down 
to  sing  for  joy.  It  was  so  mighty  as  to  have  dominion 
over  all  the  country  round  about  it;  for  all  were  required 
to  acknowledge  it  for  their  metropolitan,  and  do  it 
homage.  It  had  commission  and  power  from  the  king 
to  demand  service  of  all,  and  also  subdue  those  who  in 
any  way  opposed  it. 

There  were  certain  gates  in  Mansoul,  by  which  access 
could  be  gained  to  the  celestial  country  round  about  it, 
^nd  communion  held  with  the  messengers  who  were 
3 


26  TOWN    til    MANSOTJL. 

constantly  coming  and  going  from  the  court  of  Shaddai 
The  inhabitants  took  full  advantage  of  all  their  glorious 
privileges,  and  conversed  with  the  gods  freely,  so  that, 
all  the  time  they  continued  under  the  dominion  of  its 
builder,  nothing  but  sounds  of  joy  and  praise  were 
heard ;  but  wThen,  as  is  well  known,  they  rebelled 
against  his  government,  and  swore  allegiance  to  Diabo- 
lus,  his  enemy,  a  dreadful  change  came  over  them,  and, 
among  the  other  enjoyments  of  which  they  were  bereft, 
the  gates  were  closed  that  opened  to  the  celestial  coun- 
try, and  no  communication  through  them,  unless  under 
extraordinary  circumstances,  ever  allowed.  As  the 
gates  became  disused,  they  were  gradually  forgotten  by 
the  many,  and,  for  thousands  of  years,  all  remembrance 
of  them  lost. 

Lady.  Why,  you  do  not  surely  think  that  heaven  is 
around  us,  and  thai,  if  we  could  see  through  those  gates, 
we  would  behold  its  glories  at  once?  I  have  always 
entertained  the  idea  that  the  celestial  country  was  an 
immense  distance  off,  and,  when  we  died,  there  was  a 
long  journey  to  travel  before  it  could  be  reached. 

Doctor.  That  the  material  world  is  contained  in  the 
spiritual,  admits  of  direct  proof,  and  a  little  reflection 
will  convince  us  at  once  of  the  fact.  You  know  we  are 
told,  that  the  angels  thai  encamp  round  about  them  that 
fear  the  Lord,  do  alwrays  behold  the  face  of  our  Father 
which  is  in  heaven.  And  were  our  senses  not  holden 
until  the  time  when  we  shall  be  caught  up  to  meet  the 
Lord  in  the  air,  we  might  see  the  cloud  of  witnesses 
surveying  our  heavenward  race,  and  behold,  as  Stephen 
did  when  he  was  martyred,  heaven  opened,  ana  Jesus 
sitting  at  the  right  hand  of  God. 

Lady.    I  must  confess  it  would  please  me  better  to 


CELESTIAL    GATES.  27 

And  some  certain  proof  of  this  in  the  Bible,  and  also  of 
some  one  who  had  seen  it,  that  would  be  immediately 
convincing. 

Doctor.  You  will  be  surprised,  then,  by  an  attentive 
examination  of  the  sixth  chapter  of  2  Kings.  When 
f  Uisha's  servant  perceived  his  master's  house  surround- 
el  by  the  warriors  of  the  king  of  Syria,  who  evidently 
came  with  a  hostile  intent,  he  was  extremely  frightened, 
and  cried,  "Alas,  my  master  !  how  shall  we  do?"  And 
Elisha  answered  and  said,  "Fear  not;  for  they  that  be 
with  us  are  more  than  they  that  be  with  them."  But  as 
this  did  not  quiet  him,  Elisha  prayed,  and  said,  "  Lord.  I 
pray  thee,  open  his  eyes,  that  he  may  see."  And  the 
Lord  opened  the  eyes  of  the  young  man,  and  he  saw ; 
and,  behold,  the  mountain  was  full  of  horses  and  chariots 
of  fire  round  about  Elisha. 

Lady.  I  am  satisfied,  but  cannot  help  expressing  my 
astonishment  at  the  clearness  of  all  the  proofs  you  bring 
forward  to  sustain  your  positions.  Do  you  suppose  they 
practised  fascination  before  the  deluge  ? 

Doctor.  Though  they  might  be  aware  of  the  exist- 
ence of  the  celestial  gates,  yet  that  the  mode  of  opening 
them,  and  also  producing  curative  influence,  was  known 
before  the  flood,  it  is,  of  course,  out  of  our  power  to 
determine ;  but  that  it  was  soon  manifest  after  that  pe 
riod,  is  undoubted. 

Though  the  immediate  descendants  of  Noah  were 
aware  of  the  being,  and  some  of  the  attributes,  of 
Jehovah,  yet  their  knowledge,  handed  down  to  posterity 
only  by  tradition,  becams  corrupt,  and  the  invisible  and 
eternal  One  was  lost  sight  of  in  the  homage  paid  to 
tilings  of  wood  and  stone;  the  charge  of  which,  involv- 
ing, as  it  did  in  their  eyes,  communion  with  superio* 


28  HEATHEN    WORSHIP. 

powers,  was  the  most  important  office  in  the  nation,  and 
one,  too,  which  it  was  the  earnest  endeavor  of  all  to 
obtain.  Now,  who  so  likely  to  obtain  it  as  those  who 
pretended  to  be  especial  favorites  of  the  gods  them- 
selves, proving  their  assertions  in  the  most  satisfactory 
manner  by  the  cure  of  diseases.  Accordingly,  we  lina 
the  heathen  priests  were  the  first  fascinators. 

Lady.  But  how  did  they  discover  the  mode  of  doing 
it? 

Doctor.  An  attentive  examination  of  the  subject  has 
brought  me  to  a  conclusion  that,  most  likely,  will  very 
much  surprise  you.  I  think  the  requisite  knowledge  was 
imparted  by  Satan  himself,  either  in  a  direct  manner,  or 
by  prompting  the  mind  to  a  series  of-  experiments  that 
led  to  the  discovery.  He  did  this  to  increase  his  influ- 
ence, so  that  a  chosen  few,  on  whom  he  could  depend, 
might  guide  the  many  in  the  ways  of  destruction 
Proof  of  this,  I  think,  can  be  found  in  the  fact,  naturally 
abhorrent  to  humanity — for  man  has  been  defined  to  be  a 
religious  animal — that  all  barbarous  nations  pay  more 
homage  to  the  Spirit  of  Evil  than  they  do  to  the  Spirit 
of  Good.  And,  as  a  matter  of  course,  their  rites  of  wor- 
ship are  of  the  most  revolting  and  blood-thirsty  descrip 
tion  ;  extreme  licentiousness  characterizing  their  devo 
tions,  as  well  as  suspension  by  hooks,  etc.,  and  the  mur 
der  of  infants  and  adults. 

Lady.  If  fascination  is  a  power  imparted  by  Satan 
why  is  it  not  sinful  to  have  recourse  to  it  ? 

Doctor.  He  did   not  impart  the  pow7er,  but  merely 

showed  the  fact  of  its  existence.     It  is  a  gift  from  Jeho 

vah,  and,  as  such,  w7ith  all  thankfulness,  we  make  use  of 

it  to  subserve  his  honor  and  glory      The  Lord  makes 

he  wrath  of  man  to  praise  him  as  wel   as  the  wrath  of 


GODS    OF    INDIA.  2H 

Satan,  who  will  no  doubt  find  it  in  the  end,  like  many 
other  of  his  projects,  one  of  the  most  efficient  means  of 
his  overthrow. 

Uniting,  as  the  heathen  magi  did,  tl  e  offices  of  priest 
and  physician,  as  well  as  king,  (which  last  office  they 
afterwards  voluntarily  separated,  though  they  kept  it. 
subordinate  to  their  own,)  and  the  number  of  known 
"emedies  being  then  very  few,  they  were  mostly  com- 
pelled to  rely  on  fascination  forgiving  relief  in  sickness. 
Some  of  them  possessed  this  power  in  so  extraordina- 
ry a  'degree,  and  had  their  fame  so  widely  extended, 
as  to  be  deified  after  death ;  having  idol  statues  shaped 
in  their  likenesses,  to  which  divine  honors  were  paid, 
the  qualities  for  which  they  were  thus  honored  being 
symbolized  by  an  additional  number  of  arms.  Proofs 
of  this  may  be  seen  at  the  present  day  in  the  images  of 
the  gods  of  India  ;  Vichenow,  Chiven,  Parachiven,  Ra- 
venna, and  many  others,  have  four,  six,  and  twelve 
arms,  all  presenting  the  hands  open,  with  the  palms 
inclining  downwards,  the  fingers  being  in  the  most  ap- 
proved fascinating  positions  of  the  present  day. 

It  is  probable  that  the  immediate  application  of  the 
hands  was  reserved  for  special  purposes,  curiously- 
shaped  rods  of  various  kinds  being  mostly  used  to  direct 
the  influences  ;  thus  the  caduceus  of  Mercury,  it  was 
supposed,  had  the  power  of  putting  any  one  whom  it 
touched  to  sleep ;  with  it  he  deepened  the  slumbers  of 
Argus,  after  lulling  him  to  a  gentle  repose  by  the  sound 
of  his  lyre,  preparatory  to  cutting  ofF  his  head.  That 
he  sometimes  dispensed  with  its  use  is  evident  from  a 
passage  in  Plautus,  which  makes  him  say  of  Sosia  • 
"What  if  1  stroke  him  gently  with  the  hand  so  as  to  put 
him  to  sleep  ?"  May  no  the  regal  sceptre  have  be^p 
3*' 


30  EGYPTIAN    MAGI. 

used,  before  the  separation  of  priest  and  king,  for  the 
Bame  purposes  as  the  caduceus  of  Mercury,  and  be, 
as  well  as  the  royal  touch  for  the  cure  of  scrofula,  the 
lasi  remains  of  the  former  union  of  offices? 

Lady.  Nothing  can  be  more  probable  in  this  view  o-c 
the  subject. 

Doctor.  The  magi,  or  wise  men  of  India,  the  most 
ancient  fascinators  of  whom  profane  history  gives  any 
account,  practised  mostly  gestures  and  manipulations  in 
curing  disease,  though  they  often  prescribed  herbs. 

L;  dy.  Is  any  particular  account  given  of  their  curing 
by  fa  tcination  ? 

Dc  ;tor.  Philostratus  mentions  the  case  of  a  young 
man,  A'hom  a  lion  had  injured  in  the  knee  to  such  an 
extern  as  to  keep  him  in  constant  agony,  and  who  went 
to  the  magi  to  obtain  relief.  They  rubbed  him  gently 
with  their  hands  at  intervals  during  a  few  days,  when 
he  returned  home  perfectly  cured. 

Next  come  the  priests  of  Egypt,  who  took  the  great 
est  possible  advantage  of  the  secret,  and  made  the 
knowledge  of  it  the  last  and  holiest  rite  of  their  ancient 
magic,  in  the  initiation  of  candidates.  So  celebrated 
were  they,  that  many  persons,  taking  advantage  of  our 
Saviour's  temporary  residence  in  Egypt,  professed  to 
account  for  his  miracles,  by  accusing  him,  according  to 
Arnobius,  of  being  a  magician ;  of  making  things  by 
secret  means  ;  and  of  stealing,  from  the  sanctuary  of  the 
Egyptian  priests,  the  names  of  the  powerful  angels,  and 
their  occult  disciplines. 

Patients  flocked  to  these  Egyptians  from  all  parts  of 
the  world.  Their  mode  of  proceeding  was  to  previously 
prepare  them  by  means  of  fasting  and  prayer,  and  then 
wrap  then:   up  in    goat  skins.      After  the  process  o/ 


CURATIVE    REVELATIONS.  31 

fascination  hey  were  left  to  wait  for  sleep  and  pro 
phetic  visions  ;  in  some  instances  these  did  not  occur, 
but  to  provide  for  the  emergency,  there  was  a  company  ot 
priests  who  slept  for  them,  and  revealed  the  dreams.  A 
record  of  each  case,  telling  the  name  of  the  person,  the 
iiscase  and  the  remedy,  was  engraved  on  the  temple ; 
and  these  inscriptions,  we  are  told,  were,  for  a  long  while, 
the  sole  record  of  practical  medicine.  Five  of  these 
have  been  translated,  the  following  two  of  which  will 
give  an  idea  of  what  they  were  : 

The  god,  in  a  nocturnal  apparition,  ordered  the  son  of 
Lucius,  who  was  attacked  with  a  hopeless  pleurisy,  to 
take  from  the  altar  some  cinders,  and,  mixing  them  with 
wine,  make  an  application  to  the  affected  side.  He  was 
saved  ;  he  thanked  the  god,  and  the  people  wished  him 
happiness. 

A  blind  soldier  named  Valerius,  after  consulting  the 
god,  received  for  .answer  :  "  Go  in  the  temple,  mix  the 
blood  of  a  white  fowl  with  honey,  and  wa'sh  your  eyes 
with  it  during  three  days."  He  recovered  his  sight,  and 
thanked  the  god  before  the  people. 

Lady.  What  does  it  mean  when  it  says  they  waited 
for  visions  ? 

Doctor.  I  must  take  a  rather  circuitous  mode  of 
answering  your  question.  We  must  now  study  a  little 
physiology,  and,  as  I  will  avoid  all  hard  names,  and  en- 
deavor to  simplify  as  much  as  possible,  you  will  not  find 
it  difficult  to  follow  me  in  the  explanations. 

Man  has  three  perfectly  distinct  elements  in  his  com 
position — Matter,  the  Life  Principle,  and  the  Soul  cj 
Immortal  part. 

Lady.  I  thought  life  resulted  from  the  union  of  all 
the   different   organs,  and   that  their  being   placed    in 


32  LIFE    WITHOUT    SOUL, 

pist  such  relations  made  the   machine  work   harmoni 
onsly. 

Doctor.  That  has  been,  and  even  now  is,  the  opinion 
of  a  great  many,  but  when  the  system  is  growing,  and 
also  in  disease,  some  parts  are  always  out  of  relation  to 
the  rest,  and  the  proportion  and  balance  thus  utterly 
destroyed  ;  and  did  life  only  result  from  the  union  of  all, 
it  must  cease  in  such  cases  at  once  to  exist.  The  in- 
ductive and  only  true  method  of  reasoning  refers  the 
various  operations  going  on  within  the  body  to  a  com- 
mon cause,  which  source  of  action  is  called  the  life  or 
vital  principle. 

Lady.    But  how  is  this  cause  discovered  ? 

Doctor.  By  the  phenomena  it  presents  to  us ;  we 
can  perceive  these  phenomena  only  through  the  agency 
of  Matter,  for  which  purpose  alone,  it  would  seem,  mat- 
ter was  created. 

Lady.  Asjnatter  is  governed  by  laws  of  its  own,  it 
appears  to  me  that,  in  experimenting  upon  it,  you  would 
only  be  finding  out  those  laws. 

Doctor.  The  laws  of  matter,  which  are  known  as 
the  chemical  and  mechanical  forces,  differ  entirely  from 
those  manifested  by  it  when  organized. 

Lady.  Still  I  have  not  a  clear  idea  of  the  vital  prin- 
ciple. When  I  would  separate  it  from  the  soul  and  mat- 
ter, the  two  las-t  continually  force  themselves  upon  my 
mind,  and  make  the  whole  subject  very  confused.  If  it 
was  only  possible  to  observe  the  vital  principle  acting 
with  matter  alone,  without  the  soul's  interference,  I 
could  easily  understand  it. 

Doctor.  Your  wish  can  at  once  be  gratified,  by 
looking  at  the  geranium  on  your  window  sill.  Veget- 
ables   have   only  the   vital  principle  and  matter  ;   but 


LIFE    IN    PLANTS.  33 

perhaps  1  cannot  do  better  than  refer  you  to  an  article 
on  this  subject  prepared  by  myself  for  a  literary  maga- 
zine some  years  ago.     Will  you  read  it  aloud  ? 

Lady.  It  was  remarked  by  a  philosopher,  some  years 
ago,  that  it  was  scarcely  possible  to  tell  the  differ- 
ence between  a  dog  and  a  rose.  This  statement,  to  the 
greater  number  of  my  readers  who  have  not  reflected 
on  the  subject,  will  appear  hardly  probable.  Anecdotes 
of  the  sagacity  and  faithfulness  of  dogs  are  known  to 
all ;  and  I  doubt  not  many  of  them  in  our  city  are  pos- 
sessed of  more  knowledge  and  practical  information, 
and  are  better  members  of  society,  than  the  swarms  of 
idle  and  vicious  youth  who  crowd  our  streets.  How 
then,  with  such  facts  before  him,  could  Bonnet  make 
such  an  assertion?  I  will  tell  you.  Our  ideas  ol  the 
intelligence  of  animals  are  derived  from  the  proofs  of 
design  we  see  them  exhibit.  Having  a  certain  end  in 
view,  they  will  choose,  with  the  most  astonishing  dis- 
crimination, out  of  a  number  of  means,  the  ones  best 
adapted  to  their  purposes,  and  contrive  to  use  these  in 
such  a  way  as  to  be  almost  uniformly  successful.  Nat- 
ural history  is  made  up  of  facts  in  support  of  this  po- 
sition. Our  next  inquiry  will  be  to  find  out  whethei 
plants  ever  show  such  instances  of  choice  and  foresight 
and  a  little  examination  will  prove  that  most  unquestion- 
ably they  do. 

Strawberries,  planted  on  moist  ground,  give  out  no 
runners  ;  but,  on  placing  them  in  a  dry  soil  with  water 
at  some  distance,  we  find  runners  travelling  around  un- 
til they  discover  it,  and  then  remaining — a  living  aque- 
duct—to supply  the  p'ant.  If  these  runners  are  moved 
round  to  the  other  side,  they  will  soon  regain  theii 
original  position  with  unerring  certainty.     If  you  turn 


34  INSTINCT    OF    PLANi-S. 

the  under  surface  of  a  rose-leaf  upward,  it  will,  in  a 
little  while,  commence  a  return  movement,  gently  twist- 
ing, with  a  ki^d  of  effort,  on  its  peduncle,  as  on  a  sort 
of  pivot.  The  Abbe  Martin  transplanted  a  rose-tree 
from  one  part  of  his  garden  to  another,  for  the  purpose 
of  experiment.  To  the  right  of  the  new  position,  the 
soil  was  hard,  dry,  and  sterile ;  to  the  left,  moist,  rich, 
and  tender.  The  roots,  at  first,  radiated  alike  to  the 
right  and  left.  But  he  soon  discovered  that  the  roots, 
which  had  advanced  to  the  right,  bent  backward  toward 
the  fertile  and  mellow  earth,  as  if  divining  that  their 
companions  at  the  left  had  found  better  pasture.  To  pre- 
vent their  intercepting  nourishment  intended  for  other 
plants,  he  dug  a  ditch  to  stop  the  farther  advancement 
of  the  roots.  Arrived  at  the  ditch,  they  plunged  per- 
pendicularly below  its  bottom,  ran  around  and  advanced 
anew  toward  the  point  whence  they  had  discovered 
the  rich  soil. 

Instances  of  their  foresight  in  guarding  against  ex 
cessive  heat,  wind,  and  rain,  are  equally  numerous 
In  France,  the  peasants  train  the  carlina  by  their  doors, 
to  serve  as  a  barometer ;  its  open  flowers  show  clear 
weather — but  closed,  an  abundance  of  rain.  The  shep- 
herd's weather-glass  has  the  same  property.  If  it  does 
not  show  its  face  to  greet  the  sun  on  his  ascension,  the 
sheep  remain  in  the  fold  on  that  day.  The  four-o'clock 
opens  its  flowers  regularly  every  afternoon  at  that  hour, 
to  show  the  laborer  that,  if  he  cannot  afford  a  watch, 
nature  will  provide  him  with  the  means  of  knowing  the 
hour  without  expense.  Such  examples  certainly  prove 
a  faculty  of  judging  according  to  the  sense  in  plants. 

And  now  the  inquirer  asks,  "  What  is  the  nature 
of  this  nrmcLDle,  and  in  what  does  it  differ  from  chem 


VEGETABLE    LIFE.  35 

ical  affinity  or  attraction?"     A  perfect  exemplification 

of  this  difference  is  given  in  the  history  of  its  creation. 
And  God  made  every  plant  of  the  field  before  it  was  in 
the  earth,  and  every  herb  of  the  field  before  it  grew. 
DrV  land  and  seas,  by  this  time,  were  divided,  and  the 
forces  of  the  inorganic  world  in  operation.  These  forces 
are  called  pullers-down  of  nature.  Exposed  to  their 
influence,  mountain  and  hill  crumble  to  dust ;  and  it  is 
owing  to  their  agency  that  volcanoes  and  earthquakes  de- 
stroy cities  and  swallow  up  nations.  This  is  due,  proba- 
bly, to  the  shape  of  the  ultimate  atoms,  which,  fitting  into 
each  other  in  different  ways,  occasion  perpetual  change. 

But  on  the  third  day,  a  controlling  influence,  a  new 
set  of  powers,  the  builders-up  of  nature,  appear — cre- 
ated, in  kind  and  degree,  different  from  matter,  yet 
only  manifesting  their  presence  to  us  in  connection 
with  it.  So  far  from  allowing  these  atoms  to  unite 
according  to  their  affinities,  which  would  soon  destroy 
nature,  they  exercise  the  most  despotic  sway,  controll- 
ing them  to  the  last.  The  chemical  forces  are  in  per- 
fect subjection  while  life  remains  ;  but  the  moment  it 
departs,  dust  returns  to  dust,  the  work  of  destruction 
begins,  and  the  body  vanishes  into  air 

A  beautiful  example  of  this  opposition  is  shown  by 
seeds,  which  are  the  simplest  independent  forms  of  the 
union  of  the  life  power  with  matter.  Take  two  of  these, 
and,  having  destroyed  the  vitality  of  one  of  them  by  pass- 
ing an  electric  spark  through  it,  place  both  in  warm  and 
moist  eailh.  The  d£ad  seed,  surrounded  by  all  the  con- 
ditions favorable  to  its  decomposition,  is  speedily  resolved 
into  its  native  elements,  while  the  living  one  makes  slaves 
of  its  enemies,  rapidly  sprouts  up  amid  the  surrounding 
desolation  and  hangs  out  its  flowery  banners  as  tokens 


3l>  3ERMINATI0N. 

of  victory.  Seeds  etain  life,  almost  any  length  of 
time,  I  noticed,  this  week,  an  account  of  an  abundant 
harvest  reaped  from  the  growth  of  seeds  found  in  an 
Egyptian  mummy,  over  two  thousand  years  old. 

A  seed,  finding  itself  in  a  warm  moist  place,  suddenly 
becomes  aware  that  it  has  work  to  do,  and  sets  about  it 
without  delay.  The  seed-case  bursts,  a  stalk  and  leaves 
appear  above,  while  the  root,  sending  off  filaments, 
remains  below  ;  at  the  end  of  each  of  these  little  fila- 
ments is  a  spongiole,  or  bundle  of  leech-like  mouths. 
These  suck  from  the  soil  whatever  they  require,  and 
then  act  the  part  of  a  stomach  in  instantly  digesting  it. 
A  series  of  ascending  vessels,  or  veins,  are  ready  to 
carry  it  to  the  leaves,  to  be  further  elaborated  ;  when  it 
arrives  there,  its  oxygen  is  given  off,  and  a  supply  of 
carbonic  acid,  obtained  from  the  air,  is  combined  with 
it ;  and  the  pure  blood,  or  sap,  is  carried  by  the  arteries 
to  every  part,  to  supply  its  necessities  and  form  com- 
pounds. 

Plants  are  manufacturing  establishments  ;  some  make 
the  essential  oils — as  the  cinnamon,  sassafras,  and  rose  ; 
others  salts — as  the  sorrel,  oxalic  acid  ;  the  Peruvian 
\  irk-tree,  quinine  ;  and  the  willow,  salacine.  Many  a 
d\  lised  shrub  has  powers  more  deadly  and  dangerous 
thai,  a  powder  magazine  ;  the  laurel  and  peach  yield 
prusb  '  acid,  one  drop  of  which  will  destroy  life ;  and 
IravelU  s  tell  us  that  the  atmosphere  of  the  upas-tree  is 
fatal  for  miles  around  it. 

The  vital  principle  of  each  plant,  being  separate  and 
independent  in  itself,  explains  the  reason  why  two  of 
ihem — the  one  a  virulent  poison,  the  other  a  table  vege* 
table — will  grow  side  by  side,  and  draw  their  nourish 
ment  from  the  same  source.     It  also  shows  the  error  oi 


USES    OF    PLANTS.  31 

our  modern  agriculturists,  who  treat  these  living  exist 
ences,  endowed  with  a  power  of  choice  and  foresight, 
as  if  they  were  tubes,  imbibing  whatever  was  placed 
near  them  by  capillary  attraction. 

Man  resembles  a  torch,  in  requiring  oxygen  to  keep 
him  burning  or  alive ;  in  return  for  this  he  throws  out 
carbonic  acid,  which  to  him  is  a  virulent  poisor.  Now, 
what  prevents  this  gas  accumulating  in  the  air,  and  des- 
troying the  animal  kingdom  ;  and  from  what  source 
shall  the  supply  of  oxygen  be  derived  to  answer  our 
continual  demand  ?  Only  from  the  respiration  of  plants  ; 
which  we  may  now  see  not  only  supply  us  with  food, 
but  are  absolutely  necessary  for  our  daily  existence. 

When  the  new  Custom  House  and  Merchant's  Ex 
change  were  erecting,  they  were  the  daily  resort  of 
thousands  who  flocked  to  witness  their  gradual  progress  ; 
yet  how  much  more  wonderful  is  the  building  of  a 
vegetable  palace  !  Unseen  workmen  are  urging  it  for- 
ward with  untiring  industry  ;  column  after  column 
forms  ;  story  after  story  rises  ;  staircase  and  hall  and 
gallery  are  soon  fixed  in  their  positions.  We  think  it  a 
great  thing  to  have  the  Croton  water  brought  into  our 
houses  ;  yet  in  every  one  of  these  little  chambers,  there 
are  pipes  to  carry  food  and  water  and  take  awray  the 
residue.  The  vegetable  house  is  made  of  the  finest 
wood,  is  elastic,  and  capable  of  bending  to  the  breeze ; 
and,  to  defend  it  from  the  rain,  covered  either  with  wa- 
ter-proof varnish,  or  stuccoed  over  with  the  rares  por- 
celain. And  all  this  time  the  spectator  is  not  disi  urbed 
by  noise  or  dust,  the  greater  part  of  the  work  being  car- 
ried on  under  ground. 

When  all  is  completed,  no  monarch  on  earth  could  ob- 
tain such  a  residence.    The  very  paint  of  its  walls,  though 
4 


38  ROSICRUCIAN. 

exposed  to  all  kinds  of  impurity,  is  of  such  rare  quality 
that  the  king's  stateliest  robes  cannot  match  it.  M  Con- 
sider the  lilies  of  the  field  ;  they  toil  not,  neither  do  they 
spin  ;  yet  Solomon,  in  all  his  glory,  was  not  arrayed  like 
unto  one  of  these.5''  Nay,  kings  are  even  glad  to  obtain 
"ts  essences  at  second  hand,  to  perfume  themselves. 

The  name  of  the  inhabitant  who  owns  the  house  is 
written  on  a  broad  door-plate  of  surpassing  beauty,  so 
that  we  can  tell  one  from  another.  Books  have  been 
written  on  the  language  of  these  door-plates  or  flowers, 
and  it  is  said  that  angels,  by  their  means,  write  myste- 
rious truths  on  hill  and  field.  The  poet,  from  the  ear- 
nest ages,  has  held  the  most  sweet  and  loving  converse 
with  them.  But  to  the  physician,  the  priest  of  nature, 
they  speak  in  a  higher  and  more  exalted  strain.  In 
them  he  reads  the  success  of  his  mission.  By  their 
means  he  can  conquer  the  most  obstinate  diseases. 
That  nothing  has  ever  been  formed  for  show  alone,  the 
truly  useful  will  always  be  the  truly  beautiful.  That 
when  their  uses  are  perfectly  understood,  the  fond  dream 
of  the  Rosicrucian  shall  not  want  verification :  the 
bone  shall  continue  firm  and  the  muscle  strong ;  the  eye 
of  youth  retain  its  lustre  ;  and  as  century  after  century 
passes  away,  the  lapse  of  time  shall  but  witness  our 
triumph  over  the  pullers-down  of  nature,  and  our  in- 
crease in  wisdom  and  love.  These  happy  children  of 
Flora,  that  have  retained  undimmed  the  influence  of 
their  Creator's  smile,  when  first  he  pronounced  his  work 
good  in  Eden,  shall  receive  added  radiance  and  more 
dazzling  glory  as  they  again  behold  His  face  in  the 
dawning  morn  of  the  millenium 


HOUSE    OF    THE    SOUL. 


'JONVERSATION    III. 

PHSYIOLOGY. 

Doctor  The  body  is  the  house  of  the  soul:  in  an 
iipper  story,  confined  to  an  inner  chamber,  close.y  im- 
prisoned, and  having  no  communication  with  the  exter- 
nal world,  except  through  the  medium  of  the  life  prin- 
ciple, resides  our  immortal  being. 

Lady.  But  there  is  no  mention  of  a  double  life  in  the 
account  of  man's  creation.  Genesis  ii,  7,  says  that  the 
Lord  God  formed  man  out  of  the  dust  of  the  ground, 
and  breathed  into  his  nostrils  the  breath  of  life ;  and 
man  become  a  living  soul. 

Doctor.  The  Hebrew  word,  in  that  passage,  for  life, 
is  used  in  the  plural ;  so  that  your  objection  but  con- 
firms  the  physiological  view.  It  should  read,  breathed 
into  his  nostrils  the  breath  of  lives. 

Lady.  Is  the  life  principle  immortal  as  well  as  the 
soul  ? 

Doctor.  I  believe  it  is,  but  only  in  consequence  of 
its  connection  with  the  soul,  to  which  it  is  subservient. 
It  is  an  intermediate  between  spirit  and  matter,  present- 
ing to  us  certain  phenomena,  by  which  we  are  enabled 
t:  recognize  its  possession  of  seven  distinct  properties ; 
these  are : — 

Vital  Affinity 

VlVIFICATION. 

Mobility. 
Irrttability. 


40  ns»nct 

Instinct. 

Sympathy. 

Sensibility. 

The  first  five  are  common  to  all  animated  natuie — 
plants  as  well  as  animals  ;  the  last  two,  in  consequence 
of  requiring  a  nervous  system  for  their  development, 
be'ong  only  to  animals. 

Vital  affinity  and  vivification  are  used  in  the  organiza 
tion  of  matter.  Mobility  is  the  power  of  originating 
motion,  as  shown  in  the  circulation  of  the  sap  and 
shrinking  of  the  mimosa.  Irritability,  or  excitability,  is 
the  power  of  giving  and  receiving  impressions — of  act- 
ing upon  matter,  and  of  being,  in  turn,  acted  upon  by 
it — and  is  one  of  the  most  important  of  all.  The  instinct- 
ive property  of  plants  has  been  already  mentioned  ;  that 
of  animals  needs  no  illustration.  Sympathy  and  sensi- 
bility possess  names  sufficiently  explanatory  of  their 
powers. 

Lady.  But  have  not  animals  a  separate  principle  of 
instinct  besides  a  life  power? 

Doctor.  They  have  not.  Coleridge,  who  is  the  best 
authority  on  this  subject,  remarks  that  instinct  is  the 
power  of  selecting  and  adapting  means  to  proximate 
ends;  and  illustrates  the  point  by  taking  the  stomach  of 
a  caterpillar,  which,  he  observes,  has  the  power  of 
selecting  the  appropriate  means  (that  is,  the  assimilable 
part  of  the  vegetable  congesta)  to  the  proximate  end — 
which  is,  the  growth  or  reproduction  of  the  insect's 
body.     It  does  this  by  the  vital  power  of  the  stomach. 

From  the  power  of  the  stomach,  he  passes  to  the 
powTer  exerted  by  the  whole  animal ;  traces  it,  wander- 
ing from  spot  to  spot,  and  plant  to  plant,  till  it  finds  the 
appropriate  vegetable ;   and  again,  on  this  chosen  vege- 


INSTINCTIVE      NTELLIGENCE.  41 

table  he  marks  it  seeking  out  and  fixing  on  the  part  of 
the  r:  ant,  bark,  leaf,  or  petal,  suited  to  its  nourishment — < 
or  (should  the  animal  have  assumed  the  butterfly  form) 
to  the  proper  place  of  depositing  its  eggs,  and  making 
provision  for  the  sustenance  of  the  little  animals  that 
shall  emerge  from  them.  The  power,  thus  exhibited,  of 
selecting  and  adapting  means  to  proximate  ends,  accord- 
ing to  circumstances,  he  considers  as  a  higher  species 
of  adaptive  power,  and  calls  it  Instinct. 

Then,  citing  anecdotes  from  the  writings  of  zoolo- 
gists, he  proves  in  the  lower  animals  a  power  of  select- 
ing and  adapting  the  proper  means  to  the  proximate 
ends,  according  to  varying  circumstances  ;  and  this  yet 
higher  species  of  adaptive  power  he  calls  Instinctive 
Intelligence. 

In  addition  to  these,  he  says  that  he  finds  one  other 
character  common  to  the  highest  and  lowest ;  namely, 
that  the  purposes  are  all  manifestly  predetermined  by 
the  peculiar  organization  of  the  animals,  and  both  actions 
and  purposes  are  in  a  necessitated  reference  to  the 
preservation  and  continuance  of  the  particular  animal, 
or  the  progeny.  There  is  selection,  but  not  choice ; 
volition,  rather  than  will. 

Lady.  I  suppose  wild  men  have  their  instinctive 
faculties  best  developed,  and  that  man,  in  proportion  as 
he  becomes  civilized,  or  under  the  dominion  of  reason, 
loses  those  powers. 

Doctor.  You  must  remember  that  tke  manifestations 
of  instinct  depend  on  the  peculiar  organization  of  the 
animal.  Man  is  not  fitted  to  live  in  a  wild  state,  for 
then  he  is,  of  all  animals,  the  most  helpless.  But  Cole- 
ridge speaks  directly  on  this  point,  and  I  will  give  you 
his  words,  premising  that  he  defines  understanding  as 
4* 


42  UNDERSTANDING. 

the  acuity  that  judges  by  the  senses.  He  says,  hat  if 
we  suppose  the  adaptive  power,  in  its  highest  sta.ej 
(instinctive  intelligence)  to  co-exist  with  reason,  free-will 
and  self-consciousness,  it  instantly  becomes  understand 
ing  ;  in  other  words,  that  understanding  differs,  indeed 
from  the  noblest  form  of  instinct — not  in  itself,  o?  in  its 
own  essential  properties,  but  in  consequence  of  its  co- 
existence with  far  higher  powers,  of  a  diverse  kind,  in 
one  and  the  same  subject.  Instinct,  in  a  rational,  re- 
sponsible, and  self-conscious  animal,  is  understanding. 

Having  now  reviewed  the  characters  of  the  servants 
n  the  house  of  the  soul,  we  will  glance  at  their  offices 
in  the  building,  and  at  the  building  itself.  In  comparing 
the  human  frame  to  a  self-moving  house,  the  bones  and 
muscles  should  be  represented  as  beams  and  pillars  ;  the 
stomach  as  the  kitchen  ;  the  lungs  as  the  ventilator,  etc. 
etc.  The  house  must  be  furnished  with  bells  and  wires 
to  convey  news,  receive  messages,  and  connect  all  the 
parts  together  into  a  common  whole  ;  such  offices  are 
performed  by  the  senses. 

The  skeleton  of  the  human  body  is  composed  of  two 
hundred  and  forty-eight  bones  ;  each  of  which  is  mod 
elled  with  the  utmost  care  for  the  various  offices  it  has 
to  perform  ;  and  so  close  a  relation  does  one  bone  bear  to 
another,  that  an  anatomist  can  tell  from  seeing  one,  or 
in  some  cases,  even  a  part  of  one,  with  the  utmost  cer 
tainty,  the  general  form  and  habits  of  the  animal  to 
which  it  belonged.  A  happy  illustration  of  this  fact 
was  shown  some  years  since  in  England,  by  Mr.  Con- 
nybear,  a  philosopher  of  considerable  eminence.  Hav- 
ing found  a  few  bones  of  an  extinct  species  of  animal, 
he  set  himself  to  work  to  construct  the  perfect  skeleton 
Little  attention  was  paid  to  his  performance  at  the  time, 


BONES. 


43 


but  some  years  afterward,  a  complete  skeleton  of  that 
singular  animal,  the  Plesiosaurius,  was  discovered,  and 
(bund  almost  exactly  to  correspond  with  Mr.  Conny- 
oear's  drawing  ! 


[a  a,  spina1,  column 
capped  by  the  skull ;  r 
r,  ribs  connected  by  gris- 
lle  (cartilage,)  to  the 
breast  bone,  x;  y  y,  col- 
lar bones  (clavicles)  ;  b, 
the  arm  bone  fhumer- 
us)  ;  c,  the  elbow;  d, 
the  radius  ;  e,  the  ulna  "> 
/,  the  wrist  joint  (com- 
posed of  8  small  bones, 
in  two  rows ) ;  g,  the 
finger  bones  (phalanges, 
19  bones) ;  s  s,  hips  or 
pelvic  bones,  joining  w, 
the  sacrum  ;  i,  the  thigh 
bone  united  to  the  trunks 
of  the  body  by  the  joint 
k;  I,  the  knee-pan  (pa- 
tella) ;  k,  the  knee ;  m, 
the  tibia,  and  n.  the  fib- 
ula, both  small  bones  of 
the  leg ;  o,  ancle,  com- 
posed of  7  bones  ;  p, 
toe  bones  (phalanges,  19 
bones)  ] 


BONY  SKELETON. 


The  back  bone  and  skull  are  by  far  the  most  import 


ant  among  the  bones  ;  the~ 


the  caskets  in  w 


liich 


are  deposited  the  spinal  marrow  and  brain — indeed,  to 


BACK    BONE, 

protect  the  nervous  system  from  injury  seems,  in  every 
instance,  the  first  intention  of  the  formation  of  a  skele- 
ton. 

The  spine,  or  back  bone,  is  composed  of  twenty-four 
smaller  bones,  between  the  most  of  which  is  a  layer  of 
gristle,  so  that  while  the  indispensable  condition  of  great 
strength  is  preserved,  a  degree  of  motion  is  allowed. 
The  weight  of  the  upper  parts  cf  the  body,  presses 
down  this  gristle  during  the  day,  thus  accounting  for 
the  singular  fact  that  persons  are  always  shorter  at 
night  than  in  the  morning  soon  after  getting  up.  The 
loss  in  height  in  different  individuals  varies  from  half  an 
inch  to  one  or  two  inches. 

Lady.  I  know  a  gentleman  who  habitually  loses  in 
height  from  one-half  to  three-quarters  of  an  inch  every 
day  ;  and,  while  speaking  on  the  subject,  told  me  an 
anecdote  relative  to  the  practice  pursued  by  British  re- 
cruiting sergeants,  who,  when  they  found  a  man  willing 
io  enlist,  not  more  than  half  an  inch  under  the  requisite 
height,  made  him  lie  in  bed  and  fed  him  well  for  two  or 
three  days,  by  which  time  his  gristle  became  well  swelled 
out,  and  he  was  almost  invariably  sure  to  pass  muster 
when  immediately  presented  at  the  station  house. 

Doctor.  Every  little  protuberance  and  ridge  we  see  on 
bones  give  origin  or  hold  to  muscles,  which  attach  them- 
selves to  them  by  means  of  strings  or  tendons.  There  are 
nearly  five  hundred  distinct  muscles  named  by  anato- 
mists in  the  human  body.  This  is  probably  underrating 
the  real  number,  for  a  caterpillar  has  over  four  thousand 
muscles,  and  there  are  one  thousand  in  the  proboscis  of 
an  elephant.  Muscles  are  composed  of  layers  of  cellu- 
lar tissue,  the  compression  of  which  at  the  ends  forms  ten* 
dons  ;  while  the  cells  in  the  middle  are  filled  with  fibrin. 


MUSCLES. 


*5 


MUSCULAR    SKELETON. 

[f  g  is  the  stenio  mastoid ;  its  contraction  makes  the  head  approach  Sie 
chest;  i  i  i,  abdominal' muscles,  to  retain  the  parts  in  their  places,  assist 
respiration,  etc. ;  k,  muscles  on  the  chest,  to  move  the  arm  toward  it;  ' 
extends  the  arm  on  a  level  with  the  shoulder;  k  is  the  muscle  to  raise  the 
Sbre-arm;  a  moves  the  fingers;  b,  the  fore-leg;  and  c  is  the  tailor's  mus- 
cle, by  which  he  is  enabled  to  cross  his  legs.] 

The  mode  in  which  the  nerves  act  on  the  mobility 
of  muscles,  so  as  to  cause  them  to  thicken  or  contract, 
is  Well  shown  in  this  cut.  One  part  of  the  muscle  is  at- 
tached to  the  fore-arm,  and  the  othei  to  the  head  of  the 


1Tj  digestion. 


arm  ;  as  it  gradually  contracts  and  shortens  on  '.self,  the 
hand  approaches  the  head 


[The  figure  represents  the  bones  of  the  arm  and  hand,  having  ail  the 
soft  parts  dissected  off,  except  one  muscle,  O  B  I  of  which  the  function 
is  to  bend  the  arm ;  O,  the  origin  of  the  muscle  ;  B,  the  belly ;  I,  the 
insertion  ;  T  T,  the  tendons  ;  S,  the  shoulder-joint ;  E,  the  elbow.  When 
the  belly  contracts,  the  lower  extremity  of  the  muscle  I  is  brought  nearer 
to  the  origin  or  fixed  point,  O,  and  by  thus  bending  the  arm  at  the  elbow 
joint,  raises  up  the  weight,  W,  placed  in  the  hand.] 

When  the  human  germ  or  embryo  is  first  excited  to 
action,  it  is  not  as  large  as  a  pin's  head,  yet,  even  small 
as  it  is,  the  life  power  is  in  vigorous  exercise  ;  it  stations 
deputations  of  its  properties  in  the  proper  places  to  form 
their  own  instruments  of  action  out  of  the  minute  pulp. 
In  a  short  time  the  heart  and  blood-vessels  are  formed 
to  carry  nutriment  to  every  part,  and  the  bones,  mus- 
cles, and  other  organs  appear  in  succession.  Its  first 
care  is  to  perfect  all  the  arrangements  that  are  necessary 
for  purposes  of  nutrition,  which  arrangements  you  will 
understand  better  in  the  adult  than  in  the  infant,  in  whom 
the  parts  are  out  of  proportion. 

When  food  is  taken  in  the  mouth,  the  saliva  is  poured 
out  from  manufactories  of  that  substance  ;  it  mixes  with 
the  food,  not  only  softening  it,  but  also  affecting  on  it  an 
actual  change,  which  is  the  first  real  act  of  digestion, 
When  this  f.uid  is  deficient,  its  want  is  imperfectly  sup« 


STOMACH. 


47 


plied  in  the  other  processes  of  assimilation.  This  cause 
alone  would  account  for  the  dyspepsia,  so  prevalent 
among  tobacco  chewers  and  smokers,  who  wantonly 
exhaust  a  supply  intended  for  other  purposes  than  the 
filthy  use  to  which  they  apply  it. 

The  second  act  is  performed  by  the  stomach,  into  which 
the  food  descends  from  the  mouth  by  means  of  a  long  tube 
i oesophagus)  composed  of  a  series  of  muscular  rings 


THE    STOIiACH. 


[The  stomach  is  capable  of  containing,  generally,  from  one  to  two  quarts 
of  liquid:  cases  occur,  however — by  want  on  the  one  side,  and  gluttony 
cm  the  other — in  which  this  proportion  is  either  much  diminished  or 
increased.  It  has  two  openings — the  cardiac,  C,  (from  cardium,  the  heart, 
!t  being  near  that  organ)  and  the  pyloric,  P,  from  the  Greek  for  gate- 
keeper, because  it  will  not  let  anything  but  chyme  pass  it.  S  S,  and  B, 
are  arteries  surrounding  it,  to  give  it  a  good  supply  of  blood  for  making 
the  gastric  juice.] 

which,  by  contracting  constantly  above,  push  it  before 
(hem.  When  there,  the  gastric  fluid  is  poured  out  on  it, 
completely  dissolving  the  whole,  and  changing  it  into 
a  greyish-looking  fluid  called  chyme.  The  stomach  then 
contracts,  closing  up  the  opening  by  which  it  entered  C, 


48 


INTESTINES. 


INTESTINAL  TUBE. 


tie  intestinal  tube,  from  the  mouth  to  its  final  termination,  is  ovei 
thirty  feet  long.  After  leaving  the  stomach,  it  is  divided  into  larcre  and 
Huall  intestines.  R  S  S  S  S  T,  are  the  latter,  which  end  at  T  into  th« 
mrge,  which  are  marked  U  U  U  W;  and  the  termination  X  y  is  called 
the  rectum,  clasping  which  last  are  the  strong  muscle,  Z  Z,  joining  in  n 
continuous  circular  hand  below.  M  M  M,  shows  the  stomach;  AAA 
ifce  liver,  and  its  depository  of  bile,  B?  the  gall-bladder.  1 


VISCERA. 


TSS  LTTSB,    SJLLL-BL^DDER,   PANCREAS,    AND  KIDNEYS. 

[I,  is  the  liver,  turned  up  to  show  its  under  surface ;  G,  the  gall-blad. 
der;  P,  the  pancreas;  K,  the  kidneys,  which  secrete  urine  from  the  blood; 
which  they  empty  into  the  bladder,  B,  by  means  of  the  tubes  called 
ureters'  U  ;  S  is  the  spleen,  an  organ  at  the  present  day  considered  merely 
a  reservoir  of  blond  for  the  stomach.  The  rectum,  R,  runs  behind  the 
bladder  toward  its  terminating  print ;  V  is  the  great  vein  carrying  up  the 
refuse  blood  to  be  purified;  A  is  ihe  artery  returning  the  same  blood 
purified,  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  system.] 


50 


MESENTERIC    GLANDS. 


and  thus  forcing  it  out  through  the  other  orifice  P.  Soon 
after  entering  the  intestines,  a  fluid  is  poured  out  through 
a  tube.  This  fluid  is  composed  of  the  secretion  of  the 
liver  (bile),  and  another  secretion  from  the  pancreaa 
(sweet  breads) ;  each  sending  a  tube  from  itself,  the 
tubes  uniting  into  a  common  duct  before  opening  into  the 
intestines.  The  liver  has  a  repository  for  bile,  called 
the  gall-bladder,  so  that  it  is  capable  of  performing  its 
part  in  digestion  at  any  moment.  It  is  supposedly 
many  that  the  juice  from  the  pancreas  merely  dilutes 
the  bile,  but  this  is  not  very  probable.     This  juice,  when 


ss 


MESENTERIC    GLANDS. 


[I  I  1  I,  portions  of  intestine ;  L;  lacteals,  which  empty  into  the  mesen 
tery  glands  M  G ;  T  D,  thoracic  duct,  which  conveys  the  elaborated  fluid 
(which  is,  at  this  point,  of  a  pale  pinkish  color)  into  the  reservoir  in  the 
neck  The  spine,  S.  is  shown  in  the  back-ground.  The  mesentery 
glands  exercise  a  very  important  part  in  digestion ;  they  are  sometimos 
diseased  in  children,  a  fact  which  may  be  known  by  feeling  on  their  bel- 
lies a  number  of  little  hard  knots;  in  such  cases,  the  child,  if  not  cured— 
no  mattor  what  the  nourishment  is — rapidly  wastes  away  and  dies.  Dr. 
Edson,  the  living  skeleton  lately  exhibited  at  the  American  museum,  died 
in  consequence  of  disease  closing  the  thoracic  duct,  and  thus  preventing 
eny  access  of  nourishment  to  his  system,'] 


HEART. 


51 


poured  on  tl  3  chyme,  separates  it  ir  o  two  parts  .he 
chyle  and  excrement.  The  chyle,  a  this  stage,  so  much 
resembles  'milk,  as  to  take  its  name  from  a  Greek  word 
meaning  that  article  :  it  is  instantly  sucked  up  by  mil- 
lions o£  little  leech-like  vessels,  called  milk  carriers, 
(1  act  sals  from  lactus,  milk,)  which  convey  it  to  the  mes- 
enteric glands  to  be  further  elaborated  ;  leaving  them, 
it  is  carried  to  a  duct  and  finally  mixed  with  a  reservoir 
of  venous  blood  in  the  neck,  from  whence  it  enters  the 
upper  cavity  of  the  right  heart,  is  thrown  into  the  lower 
cavity,  and  then  taken  to  the  lungs  to  receive  the  last 
stage  of  purification. 


THE    HEART. 


[Man  possesses  two  hearts,  which  are  only  placed  together  for  the  eoJjo 
of  convenience.  Each  heart  has  two  cavities,  an  upper  and  a  lower  one ; 
the  upper  cavity  is  called  an  auricle,  from  it3  resembling,  in  shape,  an 
animal's  ear;  the  lower  cavity  is  called  a  ventricle,  from  its  shape,  resem- 
bling a  belly.     The  sudden  expansion  of  the  receiving  chamber,  or  auricio 


62  WHEELS    OF    LIFE. 

of  the  right  heart,  n,  produces  a  vacuum,  which  is  directly  filled  by  tha 
mixture  ol  elaborated  food  and  veinous  blood  from  various  sources,  o,  p  q; 
it  instantly  contracts  and  empties  this  blood  into  the  distributing  chamber, 
or  ventricle  below ;  the  ventricle  b  contracts  upon  itself,  and  sends  the 
blood  into  the  pulmonary  artery,  k,  to  be  carried  to  the  lungs,  1 1;  after 
receiving  a  supply  of  oxygen,  and  throwing  off  its  carbonic  acid,  it 
returns  to  the  left  heart  by  four  pulmonary  veins,  two  of  which  are  shown 
at  m  m;  the  left  auricle,  r,  expands,  produces  a  vacuum,  becomes  filled, 
contracts,  and  sends  the  blood  into  the  left  ventricle,  a,  which  also  con- 
tracts in  turn,  and  throws  the  fluid  into  the  aorta,  c  e,  from  whence  it  is 
carried  through  all  parts  of  the  system.  If  the  time  that  elapses  between 
the  contractions  of  the  heart  be  divided  into  four  parts,  three  of  these 
parts  will  represent  the  period  of  the  heart's  activity,  and  one  that  of  its 
repose ;  it  thus  rests  one-quarter  of  the  time,  or  six  hours  in  every  twenty- 
four;  it  does  this  (in  common  with  every  part  of  the  body  that  has 
been  exhausting  its  strength  in  working)  to  recruit.  The  artery  that 
supplies  the  heart  with  blood  is  called  the  coronal,  s.  Each  cavity  of  the 
heart  holds  two  ounces ;  it  commonly  contracts  seventy  times  a  minute, 
so  that  over  two  hogsheads  of  blood  are  pumped  through  our  hearts 
every  hour !  That  the  irritation  of  the  blood  does  not  cause  the  heart  to 
contract,  and  that  it  possesses  an  inherent  power  of  action  in  itself,  are 
shown  by  the  fact  that,  when  taken  out  of  the  body  (of  course,  a  very 
short  time  after  apparent  death)  and  pricked,  its  first  motion  is  to  expand 
The  heart  of  a  sturgeon  was  hung  up  to  dry,  and  continued  in  motion  s< 
Song  that  its  rustling  could  be  heard  in  any  part  of  the  house.] 

Arrived  at  the  lungs,  it  throws  out  carbonic  acid  and 
lakes  in  a  supply  of  oxygen;  it  is  then  thrown  into  the 
upper  cavity  of  the  left  heart,  which  contracts,  sends 
it  into  the  lower  cavity,  from  whence  the  aorta  receives 
it,  and  it  then  makes  its  rounds  in  the  system  to  supply 
the  wants  of  every  part.  Chemists  tell  us  that  an  atom 
of  pure  blood  is  composed  of  eighteen  different  elements  ; 
and  also  that  the  atoms  resemble  a  spangle  in  shape, 
being  thin  and  circular  with  a  dot  of  iron  in  the  middle, 
occasioning  Dr.  Good's  remark  that  the  wheels  of  life 
ran  on  "ron  axles. 

The  .arteries  subdivide  to  an  excessively  minute  de- 
gree, and  the  extreme  branches  terminate  in  little  blad 
ders.     Each  of  these  little  bladders  or  globular  cells  has 


LUNGS. 


53 


THE   LUNGS. 

[  The  windpipe,  a,  gives  passage  to  the  air ;  it  ramifies  into  exceedingly 
minute  branches,  e  e  e,  which  terminate  in  little  cells,  the  masses  of 
which,  in  three  distinct  lobes,  are  shown  at  c  c  c;  this  is  only  on  the 
right  side  of  the  body ;  on  the  left  side  there  are  but  two  lobes,  the  space 
required  for  the  third  being  filled  by  the  heart.  By  means  of  the  muscles 
surrounding  the  chest,  the  lungs  are  alternately  expanded  and  contracted. 
It  has  been  found  that  we  require  one  hundred  and  forty  gallons  per  hour 
of  pure  air  for  respiration.  It  is  an  error  that  the  carbonic  acid  given  out 
from  the  lungs  poisons  the  atmosphere  in  crowded  assemblies.  Such 
oir  has  been  analyzed,  and  found  to  contain  as  much  oxygen  as  that  in  a 
forest;  the  ill  effects  are  produced  from  pent-up  human  exhalations.] 


(hree  openings,  one  for  the  artery,  one  for  a  vein,  and 
one  for  an  absorbent.  When  an  atom  of  blood  arrives 
in  one  of  them,  the  absorbent  takes  from  it  what  is  re- 
quired, and  works  it  up  to  suit  its  own  purposes  ;  what  is 
,<eft  is  immediately  sucked  up  by  the  vein  and  carried  ofli 


54 


ARTERIAL    SYSTEM. 


to  be  a^ain  mixed  with  the  elaborated  fooi,  and  passed 


through  the  lungs. 


ARTEHIAL  SYSTEM. 


You  will  remember  my  mentioning,  when  speaking  o 
the  development  of  the  embryo,  the  fact  of  deputations 
of  the  life  power  being  stationed  in  different  places  to 
form  their  own  instruments  of  action  ;  these  instruments 
are  called  elands  and  their  office  is  to  secrete  from  the 


GLANDS. 


55 


blood  the  different  fluids  required  in  the  system;  .hey 
are  merely  a  greater  or  less  number  of  bundles  of  i  ttle 
bladders,  acting  in  the  mode  I  have  just  mentioned,  and 
endowed  with  specific  properties  to  make  certain  sub* 
stances.  Thus  the  liver  secretes  bile ;  the  lachrymal 
gland,  tears ;  and  the  salivary  gland,  spittle  ;  and  the 
inside  coat  of  the  stomach,  the  gastric  juice.  Here  is  a 
cut  showing  the  mode  in  which  the  blood-vessels  ramify. 


1  wish  you  to  carefully  examine  these  cuts  and  the  **; 
companying  descriptions,  as   too   much    minuteness  in 
describing  the  anatomy  of  the  organs,  while  explaining 
the  functions,  would  have  made  the  subject  very  difficult 
of  comprehension. 

Lady.  I  think  I  understand  the  nutritive  functions 
now,  and  I  am  glad  to  think  that  nothing  but  the  nervous 
system  remains  between  us  and  the  sleepers  in  the 
Egyptian  temples,  to  whom  I  am  impatient  to  return ; 
but  I  should  like  to  know,  if  anything  injurious  should 
enter  in  the  channels  of  the  circulation,  how  the  blood 
would  get  rid  of  it. 


56 


NERVES. 


Doctor.  By  means  jf  the  skin,  kidneys,  and  lungs 
which  are  all  excreting  glands,  or  organs,  that  throw 
olF  offending  matters.     But,  to  pursue  our  subject,  we 


NEHVOUS    SYSTEM. 


must  examine  the  nervous  system.  This  cut  of  it  will 
give  you  an  idea  of  the  ramifications  of  the  nerves  over 
the  surface  of  the  system.     The  nerves,  like  every  other 


CEREBROSPINAL     AXIS. 


57 


part  of  our  system  when  forming,  begin  at  tne  circum 
ference,  and  grow  toward  the  centre,  as  shown  here  :— 


CEkjIHRO-SPINAI,  axis. 


1  View  of  the  base  of  the  brain,  front  portion  of  the  spinal  marrow,  and 
several  attached  nerves:  a,  cerebrum  (large  brain)  ;  b,  cerebellum  (little 
bn._  which  is  lower  and  posterior  than  the  other)  ;  c,  spinal  marrow  ;  j 
medulla  oblongata,  the  so-called  bulging  spinal  marrow  which  swells  out 
as  it  enters  the  brain;  1,  the  nerves  of  smell;  2,  nerves  of  sight;  3,  4,  5. 
6,  nerves  going  to  different  parts  of  the  head,  of  no  particular  interest  in 
this  place  ;  7  is  related  to  the  nerves  of  hearing ;  8,  9,  nerves  going  to  th« 
tongue  and  gullet,  etc.} 


58  MOTION    AND    SENSATION. 

Those  of  the  lower  extremities,  k  k,  unite  in  distinc\ 
bundles  before  entering  the  spine ;  proceeding  upward, 
we  find  nerve  after  nerve  running  into  the  back-bone, 
through  holes  bored  for  their  reception,  as  n,  c,  /,  g,  z, 
show  the  nerves  as  they  come  from  the  superior  extrem- 
ities, or  arms  ;  ?n,  those  of  the  neck,  etc.  The  spinal 
canal  is  already  filled  when  the  nerves  enter  it  by  two 
kinds  of  nervous  matter,  the  white  and  the  grey;  the 
latter  is  supposed  to  be  the  origin  of  sensation  and  mo- 
tion, as  we  invariably  find,  by  tracing  the  nerves  to 
their  terminations,  that  they  end  in  it ;  and  we  know  the 
nerves  are  nothing  more  than  communicating  media. 

Lady.  By  your  course  of  reason,  I  would  conclude 
that  cutting  the  nerve  of  a  part,  before  it  entered 
the  grey  matter,  would  destroy  all  sensibility  in  that 
part. 

Doctor.  And  motion  as  well.  All  distinct  masses 
of  the  grey  matter  in  the  body  are  termed  ganglia  ; 
the  spinal  cord,  from  its  lowest  part  till  some  distance 
upward  in  the  neck,  is  composed  of  two  ganglia,  sensa- 
tion and  motion.  With  regard  to  cutting  the  nerves, 
that  has  been  done  so  often,  and  so  invariably  with  the 
same  result,  that  it  has  become  an  established  point  in 
science,  of  no  sensation  of  any  kind  existing,  except  as 
connected  with  a  superior  essence.  Sensation  in  the 
lower  animal  seems  even  on  a  par  with  their  intelli- 
gence. The  gadfly,  Dr.  Good  remarks,  wThen  it  fastens 
on  the  hand,  can  be  cut  to  pieces  without  its  experiencing 
any  appaient  pain ;  and  the  idea  of  Shakespeare  has 
been  long  ago  exploded — that 

the  poor  worm  thou  tread'st  on, 


In  corporeal  suffering,  feels  a  pang  as  groat 
As  when  a  giant  dies. 


si'Ixal   conn. 


59 


The  nerve  of  sensation,  and  that  of  motion,  are  bound 
in  the  same  sheath,  till  within  a  short  distance  of  the 
spinal  cord ;  they  then  separate,  and  each  enters  its 
own  ganglion.  This  cut  shows  a  front  section  of  the 
spinal  cord  and  nerves  : — 


SPINAL  CORD  AND  NERVES. 


A  represents  the  spinal  cord  ;  B,  the  united  nerves ; 
C,  the  branch  for  motion,  travelling  alone ;  D,  that  of 
sensation,  which  always  thickens  into  a  knot  in  its 
progress  before  entering  its  ganglion. 

At  the  upper  part  of  the  spinal  marrow,  we  find  a 
series  of  ganglia  in  pairs,  one  set  behind  the  other,  in 
regular  order,  and  always  found  in  the  same  relations  to 
their  parts  ;  these  are  the  ganglia  of  the  special  senses. 
So  much  has  observation  been  directed  to  these  points, 
and  so  true  and  unvarying  is  nature,  that,  by  examining 
the  size  of  the  ganglia  of  the  animal,  we  can  tell  the 
degree  of  perfection  the  several  senses  have  attained. 
In  the  eagle,  we  find  the  optic  ganglion  large  ;  in  the 
hound,  the  olfactory  ;  in  the  rabbit,  the  auditory;  and  in 
all  instances,  the  same  re?u  t  lolds. 


80 


SIDE    VIEW    OF    THE    BRAIN. 


The  nerves  supplying  the  teeth  come  from  the  ihira 
Dranch  of  the  five  pair  marked  in  the  side  view  5  '. 


SIDE   VIEW   OF   TTCE   BRAIN. 


[The  numerals  correspond  to  those  in  the  cut  of  the  cerebro-spinal 
axis.  The  tree-like  and  branchy  appearance  of  the  cerebellum,  or  lesser 
brain,  is  well  shown.] 

Many  of  the  lower  animals  'have  only  two  ganglia, 
sensation  and  motion  ;  as  we  ascend  the  scale,  and  find 
animals  possessed  of  special  senses,  so  do  we  find  the 
corresponding  ganglia  present ;  still  ascending,  we  find 
a  new  pair  of  ganglia,  which  I  will  denominate  those  of 
instinctive  intelligence  ;  for,  in  proportion  as  the 
animal  exhibits  marks  of  intelligence,  do  these  ganglia 
increase  in  size,  and  the  enlargement  gives  shape  to  the 
skull.  So  small  is  this  in  some  animals,  that  they  have 
a  perfectly  fiat  skull  on  a  line  with  the  spine.  As  we 
stiU  ascend  the  scale,  it  continually  enlarges,  and  the 


TRANSMIGRATION. 


skuli  protrudes  above  the  spina]  column, as  maybe  seen 
in  the  dog  and  horse. 

In  man,  the  ganglia  of  instinctive  intelligence — or, 
according  to  Coleridge,  of  understanding — is  out  of  all 
proportion,  as  regards  size,  to  the  others  ;  it  covers 
them  all,  its  bulging  in  front  forming  the  forehead. 

Lady.  One  might  find  some  excuse,  in  what  you  are 
saying,  for  the  eastern  ideas  of  transmigration ;  a  con- 
stant and  perfect  ascent  from  the  very  lowest  germ  of 
life  to  man  would  give  rise  to  some  ideas  of  its  being 
one  identical  spirit — an  immortal  being  undergoing  its 
education  for  eternity,  and,  in  the  highest  and  last  stage 
of  material  maturity,  preparing  for  its  future  spiritual 
existence. 

Doctor.  You  will  be  much  surprised  to  find  that  the 
brain  of  the  child  before  birth  is  not  the  miniature  brain 
of  the  man  ;  but,  on  the  contrary,  rises,  as  you  have  just 
guessed,  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest,  passing  through 
the  grades  of  animated  existence  till  it  arrives  at  its 
present  state  in  man,  and  even  then  continues  growing, 
if  cultivated,  as  many  well-attested  cases  have  fully 
demonstrated.  The  head  of  Napoleon,  after  he  became 
emperor,  was  much  larger  than  it  was  some  years  pre- 
vious ;  a  fact  shown  by  two  busts  of  him,  now  at  Paris, 
taken  at  different  periods. 

A  Scotch  gentleman  once  informed  me  that  the  eldest, 
son  among  the  aristocracy  of  Great  Britain  is  titled 
from  birth,  and,  at  the  death  of  his  father,  receives  the 
lienors  of  the  deceased  without  any  delay ;  but  tha* 
with  the  heir  to  the  throne  it  was  entirely  different — he 
must  be  made  a  knight,  a  baron,  an  earl,  etc. ;  gradual 
and  successive  steps  giving  him  rank — the  laws,  unless 
these  preliminaries  are  observed,  ieclaring  him  without 
6 


(52  TKAN3MIGRAT  ON 

any.  I  ha\e  never  made  inquiry  to  know  whether  thi* 
matter  was  so  or  not,  but,  at  any  rate,  it  illustrates 
the  stages  of  the  lords  of  creation,  as  they  style  tnem- 
selves. 

Lady.  You  have  destroyed  transmigration,  as  there 
could  be  no  occasion  of  letracing  the  steps  if  on  »,e  gone 
s?er. 


CONVERSATION    IV 


DOrjBLE   LIFE    OF    MAN. 


Doci  >«.,  You  will  remember  the  care  of  the  life 
power,  when  first  excited,  to  complete  ail  the  arrange- 
ments required  in  nutrition.  These  arrangements  are 
called  by  anatomists  the  organs  of  vegetable  or  organic 
life :  such  are  the  stomach,  liver,  heart,  arteries,  veins, 
kidneys,  etc.  Another  set  is  required  for  the  soul :  the 
organs  composing  it  are  called  the  organs  of  animal 
life  :  such  are  the  brain  and  voluntary  muscles. 

Lady.  To  recall  your  former  comparison,  every  thing 
that  relates  to  keeping  the  house  in  good  order,  and  feed- 
ing its  inmates,  would  belong  to  the  vegetable  organs, 
while  the  animal  are  devoted  to  obeying  the  commands 
of  the  soul. 

Doctor.  You  comprehend  my  meaning.  The  appa- 
ratus in  animals  that  pertains  to  nutrition,  though  indi- 
rectly influenced  by  the  brain,  is  a  system  within  itself, 
having  its  own  set  of  nerves  and  ganglia.  Its  ganglia 
differ  from  those  of  animal  life,  in  being  of  a  reddish 
grey  color,  and  lying  among  the  soft  parts  ;  they  are 
distributed  from  the  orbit  of  the  eye  to  the  lower  part 
of  the  back  bone,  and  have  a  grand  centre  or  brain, 
called  the  semi-lunar  ganglion,  which  lies  behind  the 
stomach. 

So  sparsely  are  the  nerves  of  sensation  given  to  the 
organs  of  vegetable  life,  that,  in  surgical  operations 
there  is  little  or  no  pain  felt  after  the  skin  is  cut.     Har 


64  SEPARATION    OF    LIVES. 

vey,  tne  demonstrator  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood 
was  acquainted  with  a  young  nobleman  who,  from  dis- 
ease, had  the  heart  so  exposed  that  it  could  even  be 
handled  while  beating:  he  found,  to  his  astonishment, 
that  unless  his  fingers  came  in  contact  with  the  outer 
skin,  the  young  man  was  altogether  unconscious  of  the 
heart  being  touched. 

The  cut  on  page  65  shows  the  ganglionic  system  of 
organic  life.  A  A  A  A  is  the  semi-lunar  ganglion,  or 
brain  of  the  system  ;  the  letters  and  numerals  name  the 
different  ganglia  from  the  organs  they  superintend, 
need  not  mention  all  these,  my  object  being  only  to  give 
a  general  idea  of  the  two  lives,  vegetable  (organic) 
and  animal,  that  belong  to  our  system. 

Lady.  Has  a  distinct  separation  ever  taken  place  be- 
tween the  two  sets  of  organs,  so  that  one  acted  while 
the  other  was  quiescent? 

Doctor.  Yes;  and  quite  enough  to  prove  that  the 
body  and  the  mind  can  exist  independently  of  each 
other.  In  concussion  of  the  brain,  sensation,  thought, 
and  locomotion,  the  functions  of  animal  life,  are  entirely 
passive,  while  the  organic  continue  with  the  usual  ac- 
tivity and  regularity.  Sleep,  which  I  will  refer  to  again 
in  a  short  time,  affords  a  less  striking  instance. 

Dr.  Good  remarks  that  in  cases  of  suspended  anima- 
tion, by  hanging,  drowning,  or  catalepsy  the  vital  prin- 
ciple continues  attached  to  the  body  after  all  the  vital 
functions  cease  to  act,  often  for  half  an  hour,  and  some- 
times for  hours.  In  the  year  1769,  Mr.  John  Hunter 
being  then  forty-one  years  of  age,  of  a  sound  constitu- 
tion, and  subject  to  no  disease  except  a  casual  fit  of  the 
gout,  was  suddenly  attacked  with  a  pain  in  the  stomach, 
which  was  shortly  succeeded  by  a  total  suspension  of 


GANGLIONIC    SYSTEM. 


65 


GANGLIONIC   SYSTEM   OF  VEGETABLE    LIFE. 


86  VOLUNTARY    TRANCE. 

the  action  of  the  heart  and  lungs.  By  the  power  of  tha 
will,  or  rather  by  violent  striving,  he  occasionally  in 
flated  the  lungs,  but  over  the  heart  he  had  no  control 
whatever ;  nor,  though  he  was  attended  by  four  of  the 
chief  physicians  of  London  from  the  first,  could  the  a3- 
tion  of  either  be  restored  by  medicine.  In  about  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour,  however,  the  vital  actions  began  to 
return  of  their  own  accord,  and  in  two  hours  he  was 
perfectly  recovered.  Sir  Everard  Home  observed  that 
in  the  attack  there  was  a  suspension  of  the  most  mate- 
rial involuntary  actions  ;  even  involuntary  breathing 
was  stopped,  while  sensation,  with  its  consequences,  as 
thinking  and  acting,  with  the  will,  were  perfect,  and  all 
the  voluntary  actions  were  as  strong  as  ever. 

Dendy  mentions  cases  in  which  this  power  of  discon- 
nection was  voluntary.  Colonel  Townsend's  case  was 
one  of  undoubted  authority.  That  officer  was  able  to 
suspend  the  action  of  both  his  heart  and  lungs,  after 
which  he  became  motionless,  icy  cold,  and  rigid,  a  glassy 
film  overspreading  his  eyes.  As  there  was  no  breathing, 
the  glass  held  over  his  mouth  showed  no  apparent  mois- 
ture. Though  all  consciousness  would  pass  away,  yet 
the  colonel  could  re-animate  himself  when  he  chose. 
Dr.  Cleghorn  relates  the  case  of' a  man  who  could  stop 
the  pulse  at  his  wrist,  and  reduce  himself  to  the  condi- 
tion of  fainting  by  his  will. 

Though  it  is  only  in  rare  cases  that  the  will  has  any 
power  over  the  nutritive  organism,  yet  the  emotions 
always  exercise  a  very  considerable  influence.  Every 
one  has  experienced  the  manner  in  which  ill  news  spoils 
the  appetite.  Some  cases  of  the  effects  of  imagination, 
in  producing  fear,  and  thus  exciting  disease,  we  have 
already  reviewed,  but  a  few  more  will  not   be  out  of 


FATAL    EFFECTS    OF    JOY.  6*J 

place  here.  Platerus  tells  us  of  seme  girls  p.aying  neai 
a  gibbet,  when  one  of  them  threw  stones  at  a  criir  inai 
suspended  on  it.  Being  violently  struck,  the  body 
swung,  and  the  girl,  believing  it  was  alive,  and  was  de- 
scending from  the  gibbet,  fell  into  violent  convulsions 
and  died. 

Wescloff  was  detained  as  a  hostage  by  the  Kalmucs, 
and  was  carried  along  with  them  in  the  memorable 
flight  to  China.  His  widowed  mother  had  mourned  him 
as  dead,  and  on  his  sudden  return,  the  excess  of  joy  was 
fatal  instantaneously.  In  the  year  1544,  the  Jewish 
pirate,  Sinamus  Taffurus,  was  lying  in  a  port  of  the  Red 
Sea  called  Orsenoe,  and  was  preparing  for  war,  being 
then  at  variance  with  the  Portuguese.  While  he  was 
there,  he  received  the  unexpected  intelligence  that  his 
son  (who,  in  the  seige  of  Tunis,  had  been  made  prisoner 
by  Barbarossa,  and  by  him  doomed  to  slavery,)  was 
suddenly  ransomed  and  coming  to  his  aid  with  seven 
ships  well  armed.*  He  was  immediately  struck  as  if 
with  apoplexy,  and  expired  on  the  spot.  The  same 
effect  was  produced  upon  the  door-keeper  of  Congress 
during  the  revolution,  who,  on  hearing  the  news  of  a  vic- 
tory won  by  his  countrymen,  fell  back  and  expired  in 
ecstacy. 

Lady.  I  suppose  it  is  in  the  ganglion  of  the  under- 
standing that  phrenologists  map  the  seats  of  the  various 
properties  of  the  mind. 

Doctor.  It  is :  they  say  that  if  there  are  separate 
ganglia  for  the  special  senses,  which  are,  after  all,  but 
mere  modifications  of  general  sensibility,  -why  should 
not  the  same  plan  hold  good  in  locating  the  different 
properties  of  the  mind,  which  may  be  called  the  special 
senses  of  the  understanding ;  and  the  anatomical  analo* 


68  THE    BRAIN. 

gies  favor  this  view.  It  had  been  said,  be  fore  phrenol- 
ogy was  known,  that  the  faculty  by  which  the  astrono- 
mer calculated  eclipses  was  as  distinct  in  his  mind,  and 
preserved  its  individuality  as  much,  as  the  eye  in  his 
body. 

Lady.  It  would  also  account  for  the  influence  of 
habit,  our  constant  pursuit  of  one  object  fostering  the 
germ  of  an  organ  to  maturity.  What  is  the  brain 
made  of? 

Doctor.  Its  chemical  constitution  is  principally  al- 
bumen. It  is  formed  of  an  immense  number  of  arteries, 
veins,  and  nerves.  Dr.  Gall  was  the  first  to  completely 
unravel  its  complex  web,  which  he  was  enables  to  do 
after  hardening  its  substance  by  long-continued  boiling 
in  oil. 

Lady.  The  ancients  must  have  been  aware,  as  well 
as  ourselves,  that  the  height  and  prominence  of  the 
forehead  were  the  distinguishing  traits  of  a  high  degree 
of  intelligence,  when  they  made  tne  foreheads  of  the 
gods  bulge  out  beyond  an  angle  of  ninety  degrees. 

Doctor.  They  were  as  close  observers  as  ourselves, 
and  I  am  inclined  to  think  knew  almost  as  much. 
Nearly  in  the  centre  of  the  brain  is  a  substance,  com- 
monly about  the  size  of  a  pea,  called  the  pineal  body 
which  Galen  considered  to  be  the  seat  of  the  soul :  an 
idea  that  has  been  much  ridiculed.  But  an  attentive 
study  of  the  brain  has  convinced  me  of  the  truth  of 
Galen's  supposition  ;  for  it  has  communication,  by  means 
of  nerves,  with  the  most  important  ganglia.  And  3 
think  it  reasonable  to  suppose  the  soul  occupying  a 
superior  and  independent  position,  overlooking  and  gov- 
erning the  inferior  powers ;  and  precisely  such  a  posi- 
tion would  be  obtained   jy  a  residence  in  the  pine  a 


SEAT    OF    THE    SOUL.  69 

body ;  this  opinion  is  confirmed  by  the  fact,  that  in  idiots 
its  means  of  communication  are  mostly  cut  ofF  and 
injured. 

Lady.       Can  disease  of  the  body  injure  the  soul? 

Doctor.  OiJy  by  acting  on  its  means  of  communica 
tion  with  the  external  world.  We  have  considered  the 
soul  to  resemble  a  man  shut  up  in  a  dark  and  central 
chamber  of  his  house ;  he  has  servants  stationed  at  the 
windows  who  tell  him  what  they  see  ;  an  apparatus, 
also  superintended  by  servants,  is  fixed  on  each  side  of 
his  house,  to  collect  sounds,  which  are  then  reported ; 
and  the  other  senses  communicate  in  the  same  manner. 
Cut  off  from  all  personal  observation,  he  can  only  judge 
of  the  outward  world  from  his  messengers  ;  when  these 
are  true  to  their  office,  and  the  full  growth  of  the  brain 
is  attained,  man  is  in  complete  possession  of  all  his  fac- 
ulties ;  if  he  does  not  become  eminent  then,  he  never 
will.  For  many  years  his  messengers  have  been  im- 
parting news,  and  the  time  has  come  when  they  should, 
work  up  and  mentally  digest  all  this  material.  Knowl- 
edge digested  becomes  wisdom.  For  this  purpose,  the 
avenues  gradually  close ;  the  servants  become  old  and 
inactive  ;  and  at  last — "  sans  hearing,  sight,  and  taste" — 
his  communications  with  the  external  world  are  at 
an  end  ;  he  then  moves  around — a  walking  vegetable. 
Where  nature's  laws  are  allowed  free  operation,  we 
never  find  abrupt  transitions  ;  all  rises  by  a  gradually 
ascending  scale ;  and  as  man  bids  adieu  to  this  world, 
another  begins  opening  to  his  view,  and  the  soul  be- 
comes gradually  accustomed  to  its  future  mode  of 
existence. 

Lady.    While  on  this  subject,  I  would  like  to  know  if 
We  have   wo  brains  ? 


70  THECftY    OF    INSANITY. 

Doctor.  Yes.  Dr.  Wigans  has  lately  wr'tten  a  very 
interesting  book  on  the  subject :  he  argues  that  as  we 
nave  duplicates  of  all  the  organs  of  animal  life — such 
as  the  eyes,  ears,  etc. — and  as  each  of  these  produces  a 
distinct  and  separate  impression  on  the  brain,  and  were 
so  made  the  better  to  render  us  able  to  judge  of,  and 
correct,  erroneous  impressions,  by  comparing  the  effect 
of  each,  so  the  duality  of  the  brain  was  intended  for  the 
same  purpose. 

Lady.  I  can  easily  conceive  why  the  senses  shoulc 
be  double,  as  I  have  seen  persons  who  were  deaf  in  one 
ear,  and  from  that  cause  could  not  tell  the  direction 
from  whence  the  sounds  they  heard  proceeded.  The 
experiment,  cited  by  Abercrombie,  of  placing  a  cent  on 
the  edge  of  a  table,  and  standing  at  the  extreme  distance 
rom  the  table  to  be  enabled  to  knock  it  off  with  ease, 
with  both  eyes  open,  by  means  of  the  finger  when  the 
arm  is  stretched  out — and  the  certain  failure  attending 
:he  effort  when  one  eye  is  closed — would  prove  the  ne- 
cessity of  two  optical  organs. 

Doctor.  DivWigans  argues,  in  relation  to  the  brain, 
in  a  similar  manner,  and  thus  accounts  very  ingeniously 
for  all  stages  of  insanity.  He  says,  that  as  there  are 
two  brains,  and  each  receives  from  its  nerves  a  distinct 
impression,  both,  provided  they  are  healtliy,  will  convey 
a  correct  and  single  report  to  the  soul ;  but  if  diseased, 
a  very  different  and  conflicting  account  reaches  it,  and 
acting  first  on  one,  and  then  on  the  other,  produces 
insanity,  more  or  less  complete  in  accordance  with 
the  amount  of  disease.  He  makes  a  madman,  in  this 
sense,  most  truly,  a  "  man  beside  himself" — who  holds 
series  of  conversations  with  himself,  which,  if  the  sep- 
arate trains  we:e  followed  out,  we  should  find  consistent 


SLEEP.  71 

m  themselves.  Let  us  ailow  the  seat  of  the  soul  to  ba 
the  pineal  body,  and  the  theory  of  Dr.  Wigans  will  be 
verified. 

Lady.  Insanity,  then,  might  be  considered,  in  this 
light,  as  a  squinting  of  the  brains  ! 

Doctor.  I  am  glad  to  perceive  you  understand  the 
llustrations.  We  are  now  very  near  to  our  sick  devo- 
ees  in  the  Egyptian  temples.  But  I  must  first  make  a 
few  remarks  on  the  functions  of  the  brain.  The  office 
of  this  organ  is  to  secrete  the  nervous  Jluid,by  means  of 
which  the  mind  holds  communication  with,  and  directs, 
rail  the  parts  to  which  it  is  connected  by  nerves.  Though 
the  organs  of  vegetable  life  have  a  ganglionic  and  ner- 
vous system  of  their  own,  still  many  fibres  from  the 
Drain  and  spinal  marrow  are  sent  to  them,  and,  as  in 
he  case  of  the  emotions,  a  powerful  though  indirect 
nfluence  is  exerted  upon  them.  So  long  as  we  have 
a  supply  of  the  nervous  fluid,  sensation,  thought,  and 
locomotion  (the  functions  of  animal  life),  are  in  vigorous 
exercise  ;  but  the  moment  the  supply  becomes  deficient 
or  ceases,  a  partial  or  total  failure  of  these  powers, 
depending  on  the  quantity,  is  the  direct  result,  and 
slumber  succeeds,  to  allow  more  of  the  necessary  arti- 
cle to  be  secreted.  Whatever  acts  on  the  irritability 
of  the  brain,  so  as  to  change  or  alter  the  nervous  se- 
cretion, acts  in  a  corresponding  manner  on  all  the 
parts  to  which  the  changed  fluid  is  carried  by  the 
nerves. 

The  optic  and  auditory  nerves  are  the  principal  ser- 
vants that  wrait  on  the  mind  in  conveying  news.  The 
eye  and  ear  resemble  each  other  in  being  instruments 
for  the  purpose  of  condensing  vibrations,  to  make  them 
sufficiently  intense  to  produce  impressions  on  their  sep» 


72  SPECIAL    SENSES    DISPENSED    WITH. 

arate  nerves,  so  that  messages  can  be  carried  to  the 
inner  chamber. 

Lady.  Is  light  produced  by  vibrations,  as  well  as 
sound?  I  have  always  considered  it  to  be  composed 
of  particles  of  matter. 

Doctor.  It  is  now  proved  to  be  merely  the  vibra- 
tions of  an  ether  existing  throughout  all  space,  and 
capable  of  being  excited  by  luminous  bodies. 

Lady.  If  the  optic  nerve  were  uncovered,  then  we 
might  do  without  the  eye,  as  the  vibrations  of  light 
would  alone  suffice  to  produce  distinct  images. 

Doctor.  We  need  not  have  recourse  to  so  violent  a 
mode  of  reaching  the  special  senses,  which  even  then 
would  require  something  more  to  insure  success.  The 
material  in  ordinary  life  has  the  preponderance  ;  but  we 
are  so  formed  that  the  spiritual  in  certain  cases  may  ob- 
tain the  balance  of  power ;  in  proportion  as  the  latter 
gains  the  ascendency  do  the  servants  become  more 
active  and  easily  impressible,  till  at  length  a  point  is 
reached  where  the  apparatus  for  condensation  can  be  en- 
tirely dispensed  with.  In  this  state,  the  vibrations  of 
light  that  strike  on  the  bony  covering  of  the  head  will 
find  the  nervous  matter  behind  it  sensitive  enough  to 
convey  impressions  to  the  sensorium.  This  slate  is  com* 
momy  termed  that  of  clairvoyance. 

Lady.  Can  we,  in  any  case,  ever  hear  sounds  without 
the  ear  ? 

DodTOR.  Easily  ;  and  it  does  not  require  any  prepa- 
ration to  produce  that  effect.  Hold  your  watch  in  such 
a  manner  inside  the  mouth  that  nothing  is  touched,  and 
no  sound  will  be  heard  ;  but  by  closing  the  teeth  on  it  a 
loud  ticking  can  be  instantly  perceived.  The  sounc1 
travels  thiough  the  bony  structure  to  the  auiitory  nerves 


NERVOUS    FLUID.  73 

Lad.y.  You.  certainly  present  proof  sufficient ;  it  is  as 
fou  say.  This  reminds  me  of  a  story  I  lead  some  years 
ago  about  a  merchant  in  Holland,  who  had  not  heard  a 
sound  for  years,  till  once,  while  smoking,  the  end  of  his 
pipe  accidentally  touched  a  harpsichord,  on  which  his 
daughter  was  playing  ;  to  his  astonishment,  he  was  con- 
scious of  the  music  even  to  the  lowest  tones,  and  he 
afterwards  found  that  he  could  converse  with  any  of  his 
family  through  the  medium  of  a  stick  supported  by  the 
teeth  of  each. 

Doctor.  As  nature  does  nothing  abruptly,  the  ascen- 
sion of  the  spiritual  over  the  material  is  gradual.  The 
influence  that  produces  it  in  fascination  is  the  nervous 
fluid  or  vapor  thrown  off  from  the  person  operating. 
This  vapor  acts  upon  the  irritability  of  the  patient;  by 
sympathy  it  is  transmitted  to  the  brain;  the  secretion  of 
that  organ  is  changed  ;  and  the  altered  nervous  fluid  it  is 
making  when  sent  to  the  various  parts  over  which  it  has 
influence  by  the  nerves,  produces  a  series  of  results 
called  fascinating  phenomena. 

Lady.  Does  not  the  loss  of  this  fluid  injure  the  fasci- 
nator ? 

Doctor.  In  some  cases  it  does,  but  there  are  many 
so  gifted  as  to  impart  it  without  danger.  A  sensation 
of  weakness  ensues,  which  soon  vanishes  by  a  new  sup- 
ply of  fluid  from  the  continued  secretion  of  the  brain. 
It  is  the  patient  that  runs  the  greatest  risk,  for  many  per- 
sons take  the  office  upon  themselves  without  any  ability 
to  discharge  its  duties  properly,  and  much  trouble  often 
ensues  in  consequence.  So  well  is  -this  understood,  that 
in  Prussia  it  is  a  criminal  offence  for  any  but  physicians 
to  operate.  Cases  have  occurred,  under  my  notice,  in 
which  the  chest  has  been  paralyzed  ;  in  others,  incessant 


14  FIRST    STAGE. 

vomiting  produced,  and  convulsions  ha\e  been  very 
common.  Its  true  mode  of  action  should  be  thoroughly 
understood  before  it  is  practised,  and  then  only  by  the 
order  and  in  the  presence  of  the  physician  himself. 

Lady.  It  is  divided  into  stages,  is  it  not  ? 

Doctor.  Yes,  into  six.  each  of  which  are  again  sub- 
divided into  six  others,  making  thirty-six  in  all. 

The  first  stage  seems  a  mere  quickening  of  the  senses  ; 
it  is  characterized  by  a  sensation  of  coolness,  and  a  feel- 
ing of  more  wakefulness  than  before.  In  your  own  case, 
at  this  point,  you  felt,  I  remember,  rather  more  uneasy 
than  before  I  commenced  ;  but,  in  another  instance,  I 
was  told  by* the  patient  that  it  was  impossible  to  operate 
on  him,  so  much  was  his  mind  filled  with  the  idea  of  a 
necessity  of  going  to  sleep  in  being  fascinated.  I  had 
doubted  his  susceptibility  up  to  the  moment  he  spoke, 
but  I  was  then  convinced  I  was  affecting  hir*.  ;  and,  in 
fact,  he  was  soon  insensible.  The  quickening  of  the 
senses  is  often  shown  without  the  agency  of  fascination, 
as  in  fever,  when  the  slightest  noise  will  disturb  a  man, 
whom,  in  health,  the  explosion  of  a  cannon  would  not 
move. 

Lady.  I  have  often  felt  so.  Last  wreek  I  had  a  severe 
headache,  and  could  not  endure  any  motion  whatever 
around  me,  and,  if  I  was  touched  by  accident,  was  in 
absolute  pain. 

Doctor.  An  extraordinary  class  of  phenomena  owes  its 
existence  to  a  peculiar  development  of  this  susceptibility 
1  mean  what  is  commonly  called  idiosyncracies,  or  pecu- 
liarities. I  have  heard  Professor  Revere  speak  of  a 
iadv  who  lived  in  a  state  of  agony  during  the  flowering 
season  of  plants  ;  the  pollen  floating  in  the  atmosphere 
acted  upon  her  irritability  in  such  a  manner  as  to  pro- 


IDIOSYNCRASY.  75 

duce  serious  disease,  realizing  in  her  own  experience. 
Pope's  idea  of 

'Quick  effluvia  darting  through  the  brain, 
Die  of  a  rose  iu  aromatic  pain  ;" 

and.  strange  to  say,  his  lines  on  more  refined  sensibility 
and  its  consequences,  have  all  been  verified  in  this  stage. 
Some  men  cannot  endure  the  presence,  or  even  proxi 
mity,  of  a  cat ;  others  abhor  cheese.  Stepping  into  a 
friend's  store  one  evening,  while  his  clerk  was  absent,  to 
procure  some  ipecac,  I  was  requested  to  weigh  it  out 
myself,  and  replace  the  bottle  on  the  shelf;  should  he  do 
it,  he  said,  it  would  cause  him  a  week's  illness.  And 
this  seems,  too,  an  instinctive  precaution,  warning  the 
system  against  unseen  evil,  and  to  disregard  which 
would  be  dangerous.  The  friends  of  a  young  lady  hav- 
ing tried  in  vain  to  induce  her  to  eat  cheese,  enclosed  a 
very  small  quantity  in  some  cake,  which  she  swallowed 
without  suspicion  ;  an  alarming  and  long  continued  ill- 
ness was  the  result. 

The  sense  of  chnlness,  felt  in  the  first,  stage  in- 
creases, and  the  pulse  begins  to  rise  rapidly ;  the 
second  stage  continues  but  a  short  time,  and  finally 
ushers  in  the  third,  which  is  denoted  by  a  dreamy  and 
triumphant  state  of  feeling.  If  any  pain  exists  it  now 
ceases,  and  the  eyes  close  beyond  the  power  of  the  will 
to  open.  The  closure  of  the  eyelids  's,  beyond  doubt, 
caused  by  fixing  the  eyes  so  steadily  on  an  object  as  to 
exhaust  their  nervous  power.  Mr.  Braid,  of  Manches- 
ter, England,  has  proved  this  fact;  he  considersrthat  it 
wiii  account  for  all  the  phenomena  of  fascination.  His 
writings,  however,  demonstrate  exhaustion  in  a  most 
ineomestible  manner,  but  they  most  assuredly  do  nothing 
else  :  it  was  labor  lost,  the  facts  being  well  known  long 


76  FOURTH    AND     FIFTH    STAGES. 

before,  and  never  doubted.     Your  personal  experience 
onlv  reaches  this  stage. 

Lady.  Is  it  possible  to  produce  curative  effects  with 
out  reaching  the  third  stage  ? 

Doctor.  The  second  and  even  first,  when  thus  artifi- 
cially induced,  will  often  have  a  beneficial  influence 
But  it  is  a  difficult  matter  to  mark  out  and  separate  these 
stages,  closure  of  the  eye  not  being  sufficient  evidence, 
for  it  may  not  occur  at  all.  I  heard  this  morning  of  a 
man  who  had  three  teeth  drawn  while  in  one  of  these 
stages,  and  was  shown  the  teeth.  The  fascinator,  after 
trying  several  times  to  close  his  eyes  without  success, 
undertook  to  draw  the  teeth.  Though  at  other  times 
exceedingly  sensitive,  the  man  from  whom  they  were 
drawn  did  not  experience  the  slightest  pain. 

As  the  fourth  stage  is  approached,  rigidity  of  the  mus- 
cles  can  be  induced ;  the  body  and  limbs  may  be  fixed 
in  the  most  strange  and  painful  attitudes  without  causing 
any  pain,  and  thus  continue  any  length  of  time.  Ar- 
rived at  the  fourth,  sensation  totally  ceases  ;  and  a  cata- 
leptic state  intervenes.  Surgical  operations  can  now  be 
performed  without  pain,  or  the  knowledge  of  the  patient. 
The  nervous  system  undergoes  a  remarkable  change  ; 
either  the  white  matter  is  not  capable  of  carrying,  or  the 
grey  of  receiving,  ordinary  impressions. 

The  fourth  is  the  highest  state  that  man  can  induce 
by  artificial  means  ;  but  some  persons  are  so  peculiarly 
constituted  as  to  continue  ascending.  As  they  near 
the  fifth,  clairvoyance  becomes  fully  manifest.  Pass- 
ing the  fifth,  the  spiritual  obtains  the  entire  predomi- 
nance, and  the  things  of  the  invisible  world  are  displayed 
with  more  or  less  clearness,  in  proportion  as  they  verge 
fti)  the  sixth  which  is  death, 


ANGEL     OF     DEATH.  7? 

Lady.  Fascination  seems  to  me  to  be  a  separation 
between  our  animal  and  vegetable  lives.  As  the  ties 
that  bind  the  animal  to  earth  are  loosening,  it  gains 
vigor  and  power ;  and  qualities,  the  germ  of  which  we 
have  only  been  enabled  faintly  to  discern  below,  ex- 
pand to  their  full  proportion,  giving  rich  promise  of 
future  capability. 

Doctor.  True  ?  and  at  the  sixth,  the  separation  of 
soul  and  body  is  completed,  and  the  corruptible  puts  or 
incorruption,  and  the  mortal  immortality. 

Lady.  Then  perhaps  the  final  separation  of  soul  and 
body  is  accomplished  by  an  angel  fascinating  us,  and 
death's  cold  dart  be,  after  all,  a  pass  from  a  superior 
being.  As  I  review  the  wonders  I  have  just  heard,  it 
appears  to  me  exceeding  strange  that  so  minute  a  cause 
as  a  pass  in  fascination  should  produce  such  astonishing 
results. 

Doctor.  It  is  a  very  difficult  matter  to  tell  what  small 
causes  are.  A  little  yeast,  mixed  with  a  thousand  gal- 
lons of  malt  infusion,  will  make  the  whole  ferment.  A 
grain  of  calomel  will  sometimes  alter  the  irritability  of 
the  whole  system.  Why,  then,  should  not  the  most 
highly  organized  product  in  our  bodies,  acting,  too,  with 
every  advantage  on  the  most  sensitive  powers  of  anoth- 
er, produce  a  strange  effect  1 

But  to  return  to  our  patients  in  the  goat  skins ;  you 
will  have  no  trouble  now,  I  presume,  in  understanding 
how  it  was  that  they  had  peculiar  visions  ;  for,  if  my 
supposition  of  Satan  first  moving  men  to  the  discovery 
of  fascination  be  true,  nothing  can  be  more  rational  than 
to  suppose  he  also  appeared,  or  some  of  his  demons, 
assuming  the  form  of  Esculapius,  and  prescribing  the 
proper  remedies  for  diseases.  Though  it  must  have 
7* 


?8  EMPEROR    JULIAN. 

caused  him  considerable  chagrin  to  relieve  ^ain,  and  in 
any  way  promote  human  happiness,  still  it  had  the  ad* 
vantage  of  increasing  the  faith  of  his  devotees,  and  the 
number  of  his  followers.  That  Satan  exercised  a  direct 
influence  on  the  mind  of  the  emperor  Julian  is  evident, 
by  his  deadly  hatred  of  all  that  pertained  to  our  Saviour, 
and  his  mad  attempt  to  refute  his  prediction  in  relation 
to  the  Jewish  temple.  Indeed,  Julian  himself  tells  us 
that,  when  sick,  he  had  often  been  cured  by  Esculapius 
pointing  out  the  proper  remedies  as  he  slept  in  that  god's 
temple. 

It  would  be  an  easy  matter  to  fill  volumes  with  proofs 
taken  from  the  early  history  of  the  ancient  nations ; 
proofs,  too,  which  show,  in  the  most  convincing  mannei 
that  fascination  was  universally  known  and  practised  by 
the  priests  of  the  temples  ;  and  that  it  was  principally 
in  this  way  they  were  enabled  to  retain  their  power  and 
influence  over  the  people.  Even  Origen  tells  us  that  in 
his  day  vast  multitudes  flocked  to  the  temples  of  Escu- 
lapius for  relief  from  infirmities  ;  and  distinctly  intimates 
that  many  remarkable  cures  were  really  performed.  A 
few  instances  from  these  early  times  are  all  we  can  con- 
sider at  present. 

Charles  Radclyffe  Hall  gives  to  Apollonius  Tyanneus 
the  palm  as  a  mesmerizer.  He  seems  to  have  been  a 
man  of  prodigious  fascinating  power,  and  was  not  only 
famous  for  curing  diseases,  and  his  powers  of  clairvoy- 
ance, but  also  in  foretelling  events.  While  delivering  a 
public  lecture  at  Ephesus,  in  the  midst  of  a  large  assem- 
bly, he  saw  the  emperor  Domitian  being  murdered  at 
Rome;  and  it  was  proved,  to  the  saisfaction  of  all,  that 
while  the  murder  was  performing,  he  described  every 
circumstance  attending  it  to  the  crowd,  and  announced 


HIPPOCRATES.  71) 

ihe  veiy  instant  in  which  the  tyrant  was  shin.     It  i 
recorded,  that  so  great  was  his  nervous  influence,  that 
his  mere  presence,  without  uttering  a  single  word,  was 
sufficient  to  quell  popular  tumults. 

Pythagoras,  also,  ranks  high,  and  not  undeservedly. 
After  receiving  his  education  in  Egypt,  he  ever  after 
assumed  the  dress  of  a  priest  of  Isis.  It  is  related  of 
him  that  he  could  give  relief  from  any  pain  or  disease ; 
his  method  consisted  in  passing  the  hands  slowly  over 
the  body,  beginning  with  the  head,  retaining  them  for 
some  time  at  a  little  distance  from  the  place  of  disease. 
In  common  with  the  philosophers  of  his  day,  he  veiled 
the  real  means  of  relief  under  the  form  of  an  incanta- 
tion ;  for,  while  fascinating,  he  kept  continually  uttering 
magical  words.  His  power  over  the  lower  animals 
must  also  have  been  considerable ;  he  is  said  to  have 
tamed  a  furious  bear,  prevented  an  ox  from  eating 
beans,  and  stopped  an  eagle  in  its  flight. 

Hippocrates,  the  father  of  medicine,  was  not  himself 
entirely  free  from  the  wish  to  keep  this  means  of  cure 
secret.  He  informs  us  that  there  are  two  distinct 
parts  in  the  pragtice  of  medicine — the  common,  such 
as  young  herbs,  and  the  secret ;  which  latter  must  only 
be  divulged  to  particular  persons,  who  are  in  favor 
with  superior  powers.  He  mentions,  that  when  the 
eyes  are  closed,  there  are  times  in  which  the  soul  can 
discern  diseases  in  the  body ;  and  also  (hat  the  light  we 
derive  from  dreams  is  a  gieat  help  in  our  progress  to 
wisdom 


iONVERSATION   V. 


SPIRITUAL    STATES. 


Lady.  1  am  glad  to  see  you  this  n  on  ing,  Doctor 
I  wanted  to  ask  you  if  cases  ever  occui  red,  in  our  day 
of  persons  seeing  the  spiritual  world  I  remember 
vour  remark  of  the  celestial  gates,  in  Mansoul,  being 
closed,  but  they  were  not  taken  away;  why,  then, 
should  they  not  be  occasionally  opened  in  the  nineteenth 
century,  as  well  as  the  first? 

Doctor.  A  little  research  will  convince  you  that 
such  cases  are  anything  but  uncommon  :  that  of  William 
Tennant,  a  Presbyterian  clergyman,  of  Brunswick,  New 
Jersey,  is  well  known,  and  of  undoubted  truth. 

He  tells  us,  that  while  conversing  with  his  brother  on 
the  state  of  his  soul,  and  the  fears  he  entertained  for  his 
future  welfare,  he  found  himself,  in  an  instant,  in  another 
state  of  existence,  under  the  direction  of  a  superior 
Being,  who  ordered  him  to  follow.  He  was  imme- 
diately wafted  along,  he  knew  not  how,  till  he  beheld, 
at  a  distance,  an  ineffable  glory,  the  impression  of 
which  he  found  it  impossible  to  communicate  to  mortal 
man.  "I  immediately  reflected  on  my  happy  change, 
and  thought,  Well,  blessed  be  God  !  I  am  safe  at  last, 
notwithstanding  all  my  fears.  I  saw  an  innumerable 
host  of  happy  beings,  surrounding  the  inexpressible 
glory,  in  acts  of  adoration  and  joyous  worship ;  but  I 
did  not  see  any  bodily  shape  or  representation  in  the 
glorious   appearance.      I   heard  things  unutterable.      I 


TRANCE    OF    TENNANT.  8l 

neard  their  songs  and  hallelujahs  of  thanksgiving  and 
praise,  with  unspeakable  rapture.  I  felt  joy  unutterable 
and  full  of  glory.  I  then  applied  to  my  conductor,  and 
requested  leave  to  join  the  happy  throng ;  on  which  he 
tapped  me  on  the  shoulder,  and  said,  '  You  must  return 
lo  earth.'  This  seemed  like  a  sword  through  my  heart. 
In  an  instant,  I  recollect  to  have  seen  my  brother  dis- 
puting with  the  doctor.  The  three  days  during  which 
1  had  appeared  lifeless,  seemed  to  be  of  not  more  than 
ten  or  twenty  minutes.  The  idea  of  returning  to  this 
world  of  sorrow  and  trouble  gave  me  such  a  shock  that 
I  fainted  repeatedly.  Such  was  the  effect  on  my  mind 
of  what  I  had  seen  and  heard,  that  if  it  be  possible  for 
?.  human  being  to  live  entirely  above  the  world  and  the 
things  of  it,  for  some  time  afterward  I  was  that  person. 
The  ravishing  sound  of  the  songs  and  hallelujahs  that  I 
heard,  and  the  very  words  that  were  uttered,  were  not 
out  of  my  ears  for  at  least  three  years.  All  the  king- 
doms of  the  earth  were,  in  my  sight,  as  nothing  and 
vanity ;  and  so  great  were  my  ideas  of  heavenly  glory, 
that  nothing  which  did  not,  in  some  measure,  relate  to 
it,  could  command  my  serious  attention." 

So  numerous  are  the  cases  of  this  kind  of  experience, 
that  time  would  not  be  profitably  occupied  in  consider- 
ing them  ;  but  it  will  be  well  to  dwell  a  moment  on 
another  class,  of  opposite  character,  which  is  not  less 
frequent. 

I  have  often  seen  men  who,  after  a  prolonged  indul- 
gence in  every  species  of  wickedness  and  blasphemy, 
have  suddenly  experienced  a  change,  which  gave  the 
spiritual,  in  their  system,  the  predominating  influence. 
At  such  times  they  become  aware  of  the  presence  of 
Mm  devils,  who  lry  acting  upon  the  corruptions  of  then 


82  DELIRIUM    TREMENS. 

hearts,  have    been   successfully   engaged    m   tempting 
them  to  sin. 

More  heart-rending  pictures  than  these,  of  agony  and 
distress,  are  seldom  or  never  witnessed.  They  have 
many  times  described  to  me  the  shapes  and  gestures  of 
their  tormentors,  and  the  unholy  thoughts  they  were 
endeavoring  to  instil  into  their  minds.  While  speaking 
to  me,  they  would  often  be  seized  with  a  frenzy  of  fear, 
and  would  close  the  eyelids,  and  cover  them  with  their 
hands,  in  a  vain  attempt  to  shut  out  the  horrible  spec- 
tacle. An  urgent  desire  to  commit  suicide  in  some 
violent  manner  is  generally  felt,  and  rmny  find  it  im 
possible  to  resist  the  temptation.  Multitudes,  in  this 
way,  are  lost  every  year.  I  should  remark,  here,  tha 
delirium  tremens  can  be  produced  in  many  ways  with- 
out the  use  of  alcohol,  as  by  tobacco  and  opium. 

We  are  thus  enabled  to  trace,  in  a  measure,  the  deal 
ings  of  heaven  with  our  fallen  race.  The  good  man 
worn  down  by  disease  and  grief,  as  was  Tennant,  is  not 
allowed  to  despair  ;  his  heart  is  cheered,  and  he  is  en- 
couraged to  persevere  by  a  view  of  the  mansions  pre- 
pared for  him  when  his  toils  and  troubles  are  ended 
below.  The  bad  man  is  suddenly  arrested  in  his  career 
of  wickedness,  by  withdrawing  the  veil  that  covers 
invisible  things,  and  is  thus  shown  his  prompters  in 
vice,  and.  the  future  companions  he  must  assoc  !ate  with 
in  eternity  whose  torments  he  must  share  if  he  continues 
in  the  way  of  destruction.  Happily,  in  some  a  change 
is  produced.  I  know  one  to  whom  the  warning  sufficed, 
and  who,  at  the  present  time,  is  serving  under  the  ban- 
ners of  the  Prince  of  Peace. 

Lady.    And  this  accounts  exactly  for  the  manner  in 
which  Elisha's  servant,  t.iat  you.  mentioned  some  time 


HEATHEN    FASCINATORS.  Nd 

gince,  liad  his  eyes  opened.  When  Elisha  prayed 
"Lord,  I  pray  thee,  open  his  eyes,"  he  must  La\e  meant 
the  spiritual  ones  ;  for  the  others  could  discerc  the  sur- 
rounding danger.  I  suppose  the  Saviour  and  lis  apos- 
tles and  prophets  performed  the  miracles  recorded  in 
Scripture  by  means  of  great  endowments  of  lascinating 
power. 

Doctor.  On  the  contrary,  there  is  so  broad  a  line 
of  distinction  drawn  between  the  power  of  performing 
miracles,  and  that  of  fascinating,  that  it  seDins  impious 
to  confound  the  two. 

The  difference  between  the  heathen  fascinators  anc. 
the  priests  of  Jehovah  was  well  shown  when  they  finally 
failed  to  compete  with  Moses  in  showing  wonders,  and 
were  forced  at  the  last  to  exclaim,  "  This  I2  the  finger 
of  God." 

Passing  Balaam  and  the  prophets  cf  £a?>,  who  com- 
peted with  Elijah,  let  us  examine  the  witch  of  Endor. 
Artificially  inducing  clairvoyance,  and  thus  holding  in- 
tercourse with  familiar  spirits,  was  piuiisiiaMe  by  death 
in  Israel. 

Lady.  I  would  ask  if  you  think  the  wow-i.z  fascinated 
Saul  ? 

Doctor.  By  no  means  ;  the  whole  seen?  in  the  19th 
chapter  of  Samuel  has  its  counterpart  in  roarjy  a  similar 
transaction  of  the  present  day.  A  friend  ot  mine  once 
wishing  to  obtain  intelligence  of  a  son  who  had  been 
dead  about  three  years,  went  to  the  house  of  a  clairvoy- 
ant. At  his  request  I  wras  present.  The  husband  of 
the  clairvoyant  put  her  to  sleep,  and,  iri  a  H'+le  time  sne 
announced  the  fact  of  her  spiritual  state,  ani  soon  after- 
wards found  the  gentleman's  son.  Messages  were  givers 
and  received  by  both  parent  and  chile,  through  the  me- 


84  WITCH    OF    ENDOR. 

dium  of  the  clairvoyant,  and  my  friend  departed  satis- 
fied :  although  I  still  felt  incredulous. 

When  Saul  entered  the  woman  of  Endor's  house,  the 
latter  was  evidently  unaware  of  his  character  ;  and  it  wa? 
only  upon  a  strong  pledge  she  consented  to  employ  her 
art.  The  moment  she  entered  the  clairvoyant  state; 
however,  she  was  at  once  aware  of  the  rank  of  her 
guest,  and  exceedingly  frightened  at  the  consequences. 
Our  translation  reads  as  if  she  was  scared  at  Samuel,  but 
this  was  evidently  not  the  case — witness  the  cry,  "  Why 
hast  thou  deceived  me  ?  for  thou  art  Saul."  When, 
after  he  had  succeeded  in  tranquilizing  her  personal 
fears,  she  gave  the  description  of  her  spiritual  visitant, 
Saul  perceived  that  it  was  Samuel,  and  bowed  himself 
to  the  ground.  The  conversation  occurred  through  the 
woman,  who,  on  being  awakened  when  it  was  finished, 
had  so  little  recollection  of  all  the  occurrences  as  to  be 
totally  unaware  of  his  rank,  and  persuade  him  to  eat  in 
her  house  and  recover  his  exhausted  strength. 

The  mariner  in  which  the  magicians  were  enabled 
0  foretell  events  is  graphically  shown  in  the  22nd 
chapter  of  the  first  book  of  Kings :  "  I  saw  the  Lord 
sitting  on  his  throne,  and  all  the  host  of  heaven  standing 
by  him  on  his  right  hand  and  on  his  left.  And  the  Lord 
said,  Who  shall  persuade  Ahab,  that  he  may  go  up  and 
fall  at  Ramoth-Gilead  ?  And  one  said  in  this  manner, 
and  another  said  in  that  manner.  And  there  came  forth 
a  spirit  and  stood  before  the  Lord,  and  said,  I  will  per- 
suade him.  And  the  Lord  said  unto  him,  Wherewith  ? 
And  he  said,  I  will  go  forth,  and  I  will  be  a  lying  spirit 
in  the  mouth  of  all  his  prophets.  And  he  said,  Thou 
shalt  persuade  him,  and  prevail  also :  go  forth  and 
do  «o." 


N  A  AM  AN     AND    ELISHA.  83 

Of  course,  then,  when  the  king,  rejecting  the  adv  ce  of 
Jehovah's  minister,  sought  counsel  of  his  own  seers, 
they  gave  him  the  revelations  of  the  false  familiar. 
And  it  was  not  the  only  time  evil  befell  man,  when,  "  a3 
the  sons  of  God  came  to  present  themselves  before  the 
Loud,  Satan  came  also  amongst  them." 

When  Naaman  came  to  Elisha  to  be  healed  from  his 
leprosy,  it  was  evidently  with  the  expectation  of  visiting 
a  more  powerful  fascinator  than  any  in  his  own  country. 
Elisha,  to  render  him  aware  of  his  error,  would  not  let 
him  enter  the  house,  but  as  soon  as  the  horses  and  cha- 
riot stopped  at  his  door,  sent  out  a  messenger,  saying : 
"  Go  and  wash  in  Jordan  seven  times,  and  thy  flesh 
shall  come  again  to  thee,  and  thou  shalt  be  clean."  But 
Naaman  was  wroth,  and  went  away  and  said  :  "  Behold, 
I  thought,  he  will  surely  come  out  to  me,  and  stand  and 
call  on  the  name  of  the  Lord  his  God,  and  strike  his 
hand  over  the  place,  (in  the  context  it  reads,  move  his 
I  ind  up  and  down  over  the  place),  and  recover  the 
leper." 

Lady.  I  have  always  been  struck  with  the  narrative 
myself,  but  your  view  explains  the  whole  matter  to  my 
entire  satisfaction,  and  I  do  not  wonder  at  the  effect  it 
produced  on  Naaman's  mind,  to  cause  him  to  renounce 
his  idolatry,  when  he  returned  cured  out  of  the  river, 
after  his  servants  persuaded  him  to  obey  the  prophet's 
injunction. 

3)octor.  These  instances  will  show  how  totally  out  oi 
the  power  of  all  physiological  explanations  were  the  mir- 
acles I  have  before  mentioned  the  accusation  brought 
against  our  Saviour  of  having  gained  his  wonderful 
powers  by  stealing  magic  secrets  from  the  Egyptian 
tempi es      Had  those  who  preferred  the  charge  been  ag 


86  CASTING    OUT    DEVILS. 

open  to  conviction  as  the  idolator  Naainan,  but  little 
observation  would  have  convinced  them  of  its  ground- 
lessness. 

Lady.  Did  the  magicians  ever  pretend   to  cast  out 
devils? 

Doctor.  Oar  Saviour  presumes  that  power  in  com- 
mon use  amongst  them  when  he  says,  (Matt,  xii.,  27,) 
in  answer  to  their  remark  of  his  casting  out  devils  by 
the  power  of  Beelzebub  :  "And  if  I  by  Beelzebub  cast 
ou.  devils,  by  whom  do  your  children  cast  them  out  ?" 
Josephus  accounts  for  this  power  in  speaking  of  Solo- 
mon, whose  sagacity  and  wisdom  he  pronounces  to  ex- 
ceed those  of  the  ancients  ;  "  insomuch  that  he  was  in 
no  way  inferior  to  the  Egyptians,  who  are  said  to  have 
been  beyond  all  men  in  understanding  ;  nay,  indeed  it 
was  very  evident  that  their  sagacity  was  very  much 
inferior  to  that  of  the  king's."  "  God  also  enabled  him 
to  learn  that  skill  which  expels  demons,  which  is  a  use- 
ful science  to  men.  He  composed  such  incantations, 
also,  by  which  distempers  are  alleviated  ;  and  left  be- 
hind him  the  manner  of  using  exorcisms,  by  which  they 
drive  away  demons,  so  that  they  never  return  ;  and 
this  method  of  cure  is  of  great  force  until  this  day. 
For  I  have  seen  a  certain  man  of  my  own  country, 
whose  name  was  Eleazar,  releasing  the  people  that  were 
demoniacal  in  the  presence  of  Vespasian,  and  his  sons, 
and  his  captains,  and  the  multitude  of  his  soldiers  ;  and 
the  manner  of  the  cure  was  this  :  he  put  a  ring,  that  had 
a  root  of  one  of  those  sorts  mentioned  by  Solomon,  to 
the  nostrils  of  the  demoniac,  after  which  he  drew  out 
the  demon  through  his  nostrils  ;  and  when  the  man  fell 
down,  he  adjured  him  to  return  unto  him  no  more,  mak- 
ing still  mention  of  Solomon,  and  reciting  the  ir.canta 


FASCINATION    LAWFUL.  &*> 

tions  wliich  he  composed  And  when  Eleazar  would 
demonstrate  to  the  spectators  that  he  had  such  a  power, 
lie  set  a  little  way  off  a  cup  or  basin  full  of  water,  and 
commanded  the  demon  as  he  went  out  of  the  man  to 
overturn  it ;  and  thereby  let  the  spectators  know  that 
he  had  left  the  man.  And,  when  this  was  done,  the  skill 
and  wisdom  of  Solomon  were  shown  very  clearly." 

Lady.  After  all,  the  practice  of  divination  was  forbid- 
den  by  the  Jewish  law,  and  the  penalty  was  death.  If 
it  deserved  so  severe  a  punishment  in  those  days,  how 
can  it  be  harmless  in  our  own  ? 

Doctor.  In  former  times,  the  higher  powers  of  fas- 
cination were  universally  abused,  and  made  to  subserve 
idolatry.  Those  who  practised  it,  sedulously  kept  the 
people  in  perfect  ignorance  as  to  its  real  nature.  Even 
when  fascinating,  the  priests  continually  chanted  magic 
verses,  to  w7hich  all  the  curative  powers  were  ascribed. 
Still  it  appears  to  have  been  lawful  to  use  it  for  benevo- 
lent purposes,  as  the  physicians  did  not  scruple  to  em- 
ploy its  influence  for  king  David. 

Lady.  Casting  out  devils,  from  an  account  given  in 
Acts  xix,  13,  was  not  always  attended  with  safety: 
"  Then  certain  of  the  vagabond  Jews,  exorcists,  took 
upon  themselves  to  call  over  them  which  had  evil  spi- 
rits the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  saying,  We  adjure  you 
by  Jesus,  whom  Paul  preacheth.  And  there  were  seven 
sons  of  one  Sceva,  a  JewT,  and  chief  of  the  priests,  which 
did  so  ;  and  the  evil  spirit  answered  and  said,  Jesus  I 
know,  and  Paul  I  know,  but  who  are  ye  ?  And  the  man 
in  whom  the  evil  spirit  was,  leaped  on  thorn  and  over- 
came them,  and  prevailed  against  them,  so  that  they 
fled  out  of  that  house  naked  and  wounded." 

Doctor.    Tt  wTas  not  only  among  the   ancients  thai 


88  ROBERT    COCHRAN. 

false  religions,  based  on  assumptions  and  supported  by 
the  pretended  miracles  of  fascination,  existed;  there  is 
quite  as  much  of  this  kind  of  imposture  prevalent  in 
modern  times. 

Some  years  ago,  in  the  town  of  Saco,  in  Maine,  lived 
Robert  Cochran,  a  man  who,  by  pretending  to  a  more 
than  ordinary  share  of  inspiration — working  wonders, 
curing  diseases  by  the  laying  on  of  hands,  and  other 
apparent  miracles — created  a  schism  in  the  church  tc 
which  he  belonged,  drawing  after  him  a  ciowd  of 
zealous  followers.  Upon  his  death,  as  his  mantle  did 
not  descend  to  another,  the  society  declined  in  numbers, 
until,  finally,  nothing  more  was  heard  of  the  schismatics 
for  a  long  period.  Some  time  afterward,  when  the  sect 
had  nearly  been  forgotten,  a  man — who,  it  was  known, 
had  many  years  before  embraced  Cochran's  tenets,  and 
had,  since  then,  lived  a  life  of  perfect  seclusion — entered 
the  town  on  business.  Passing  by  a  lawyer's  office,  his 
attention  was  attracted  by  a  gentleman  in  it  fascinating 
ihe  lawyer's  son.  He  stood,  transfixed  with  astonish- 
ment, before  the  door,  until  the  process  was  completed 
and  the  boy  asleep ;  when  he  exclaimed  aloud,  "  My 
God  !  that  is  the  way  in  which  Robert  Cochran  used  to 
give  the  Holy  Ghost." 

The  Mormons  rest  their  claims  of  being  the  true 
church  on  the  same  basis :  "  Is  any  sick  among  you,  let 
him  send  for  the  elders  of  the  church,  and  let  them  pray 
over  him,  anointing  hi'  i  with  oil  in  the  name  of  the 
Lord,  and  the  praye7-  of  faith  shall  save  the  sick  man." 
It  is  a  notorious  fact  that  the  exhibition  of  this  proof,  as 
they  wish  it  to  be  supposed,  of  apostolic  power,  has  been 
the  means  of  converting  the  majority  of  that  deluded 
sect.     Some  three  vears  since,  I   attended  a  Mormor 


MORMONISM  89 

lady,  who  had  disease  of  the  heart,  with  marked  sue* 
cess,  One  day,  while  operating,  an  elder  of  the  faith, 
who  stood  by,  remarked  that  I  possessed  the  gift  of  lay- 
ing on  of  hands.  I  paid  very  little  attention  to  his 
remark  at  the  time  ;  bat  some  weeks  afterward,  while 
visiting  a  friend  one  evening,  I  heard  a  lady  explaining 
the  tenets  of  Mormonism,  and  triumphantly  quoting  her 
own  case  as  an  illustration  of  the  fact  of  their  possess- 
ing apostolic  power,  more  especially  the  gift  of  healing 
by  laying  on  of  hands  ;  she  had  frequent  attacks  of 
tic  doloreux,  and  nothing  except  that  rite  of  the  Mormon 
church  had  ever  sufficed,  for  one  moment,  to  alleviate 
the  pain. 

She  was  speaking  with  considerable  animation,  and 
had  produced  a  powerful  impression  on  the  minds  of 
those  present,  but  was  suddenly  arrested,  in  the  midst 
of  her  interesting  and  enthusiastic  discourse,  by  an 
attack  of  that  horrid  disease.  Finding  that  she  was 
suffering  the  most  exquisite  agony,  I  rose  rather  hesi- 
tatingly— for  I  dislike  scenes — and  offered  to  relieve 
her,  giving  her  the  assurance  that  one  of  the  Mormon 
elders  had  pronounced  me  in  possession  of  the  gift.  The 
drowning  will  catch  at  a  straw  ;  and  my  proposition 
was  assented  to,  but  evidently  without  any  hope  of 
success  on  the  part  of  the  sufferer.  In  less  than  a 
minute — for  her  system  had  been  prepared  by  repeated 
fascinations — she  was  powerfully  under  my  influence, 
and  *he  relief  was  immeasurably  greater  than  it  had 
ever  been  before.  After  awaking  the  lady,  I  explained 
the  whole  matter  to  those  present ;  and  it  is  very  prob- 
able that  but  few  of  my  hearers  ever  undertook  a  pil« 
grimage  to  the  holy  city  of  Nauvoo. 

In  classifying  the  fanatical  sects,  the  Swedenborgian,* 
8* 


SO  3WEDENBORG. 

follow  i he  Mormons  Their  name  is  derived  from 
Emmanuel  Swedenborg,  a  Swedish  philosopher  who 
became  clairvoyant  in  the  fifty-third  year  of  his  age,  in 
1743.  The  ascendancy  of  the  spiritual  over  the  mate- 
rial occurred  naturally  in  him,  probably  owing  to  some 
defect  in  the  constitution ;  for  intense  study  and  a 
sedentary  life  paved  the  way  for  this  change.  Sweden- 
borg rejected  faith — that  is,  would  not  believe  any- 
thing which  could  not  be  demonstrated  to  the  under 
standing — the  faculty  that  judges  according  to  the 
senses — and  of  course  would  not  receive  any  religion, 
the  doctrines  of  which  he  could  not  perfectly  compre- 
hend. 

He  ardently  desired  a  knowledge  of  the  soul,  and  the 
method  he  took  to  procure  this  knowledge  gives  a  good 
illustration  of  his  character.  He  tried  to  obtain  hie 
wish  by  confining  his  experiments  to  the  dead  body. 
To  give  his  own  words  :  "  The  body  being  her  (the 
soul's)  resemblance,  image,  and  type,  for  this  purpose  I 
am  resolved  to  study  her  whole  anatomy,  from  top  to 
toe."  Had  he  but  studied  the  laws  of  life  in  their  living 
operation,  he  would  have  escaped  the  errors  he  after- 
ward blundered  into.  . 

Lady.  Such  a  mode  of  operation  seems  to  me  about 
as  rational  as  going  into  a  printer's  office  when  he  is 
out,  and  trying  to  form  an  idea  of  his  countenance  from 
an  examination  of  the  type  lying  around  ;  or  inspecting 
a  worn-out  and  cast-off  steam-engine,  with  an  idea  to 
investigate  the  properties  of  steam  :  life  ir.  the  one  case, 
and  vapor  in  the  other,  (the  only  things  that  can  give 
the  required  information.)  being  equally  absent. 

Doctor.  Swedenborg,  not  finding  his  own  observa- 
tions very  satisfactory,  calls  t?  his  aid  the  observations 


MATERIALISM.  9J 

of  others,  and  professes,  on  this  subject,  to  have  ob- 
tained the  greater  part  of  his  knowledge  from  books, 
and  those  written  by  men  who,  like  himself,  from  the 
shape  of  fibre  and  spiracle,  endeavored  to  diagnose  the 
functions  and  mode  of  operation  of  each  organ.  His 
philosophical  works  are  filled  with  such  nonsense  as 
this,*and,  as  he  proceeds,  there  is  a  gradual  and  legiti- 
mate degeneration  into  downright  materialism  of  a 
modified  character ;  he  proclaimed  all  life  to  consist  in 
an  influx  from  Deity,  and  that  a  plant,  a  dog,  and  a  man, 
differ,  in  reality,  or.ly  in  the  shape  of  their  receptacles. 
You  will  easily  understand  how  he  gained  this  idea,  by 
considering  the  brains  of  different  animals,  and  consid- 
ering that  of  man  as  only  a  little  more  powerful  and 
complicated  than  his  inferiors  in  the  animated  scale. 
The  study  of  living  nature  would  have  taught  him  the 
difference  between  the  faculty,  judging  by  sense,  and 
that  in  which  reason,  free-will,  and  self-consciousness 
existed.  Knowledge,  on  such  a  subject,  gained  from 
the  dead  body,  is  only  such 

"  as  putrefaction  breeds 

In  fly-blown  flesh,  whereon  the  maggot  feeds, 
Shines  in  the  dark ;  but,  ushered  into  day, 
The  stench  remains — the  lustre  dies  away." 

Swedenborg  was  a  moralist.  His  pride  dispensed 
with  a  crucified  Saviour,  and  consequently  a  Trinity. 
"  The  ti  uth  is,  that  the  division  of  God,  or  of  the  Divine 
essence,  into  three  persons,  each  of  which  by  himself,  or 
singly,  is  God,  leads  to  the  denial  of  God."  "It  is  as  if 
there  should  be  Unity  and  Trinity  painted  as  a  man 
with  three  heads  upon  one  body,  or  with  three  bodies 
under  one  head,  which  is  the  form  of  a  monster.  If 
any  one  should  enter  heaven  with  such  an  idea,  he  would 


LAST    JUDGMENT 


certainly  be  cast  out  headlong,  although  he  should  say 
that  the  head  or  heads  signified  essence,  and  the  body  o? 
bodies  distinct  properties." 

Lady.  Do  you  not  think  that  a  person  who  is  really 
nonest  in  an  erroneous  opinion  will  be  saved  ? 

Doctor.  I  do  not  believe  that  erroneous  opinions  of 
the  doctrines  of  salvation  can  be  honestly  entertained, 
Our  Saviour  tells  us :  "  He  that  doeth  the  will  of  my 
Father  shall  know  him  that  sent  me."  He  has  promised 
his  Spirit  to  guide  us  into  all  truth.  Consequently,  if 
we  really  want  instruction,  by  the  perusal  of  the  Scrip- 
tures, and  prayer,  with  an  active,  watchful  life,  we  can 
obtain  all  we  wish  from  Him  who  giveth  wisdom  to  all 
men  liberally,  and  upbraideth  not. 

Following  the  example  of  many  others  who  preceded 
him,  Swedenborg  allegorized  the  Scriptures,  with  the 
exception  of  the  Epistles,  which,  sturdily  resisting  all 
such  attempts,  he  pronounced  wanting  in  an  internal 
sense.  He  fortifies  the  dogmas  of  his  system  by  direct 
consultation  with,  and  advice  from,  the  celestial  powers. 
Finally,  buoyed  up  beyond  measure,  he  declared  that 
the  second  coming  of  Christ  was  manifested  in  his  per- 
son, and  that  his  illumination  (clairvoyance)  ushered  in 
the  last  judgment,  which  took  place,  not  on  earth,  but 
in  the  spiritual  world.  Among  other  interesting  mat- 
ters, we  are  informed,  by  him,  that  in  the  interior  of 
Africa  exists  a  race  of  spiritual  believers  (the  term  he 
applied  to  his  disciples)  :  that  marriages  take  place  in 
heaven  as  well  as  upon  earth,  our  Saviour's  words  on 
that  subject  being  figurative  ;  that  God  resembles  a  man 
in  shape,  his  body  forming  the  universe,  each  atom  be- 
ing a  solar  system ;  that  a  man  consists  of  five  spirits* 
one  contained  within  the  other,  like  a  nest  of  apothe- 


q;een  of  sweden.  93 

cary's  pill-boxes  ;  man  is  not  naturall}  aware  of  his- 
only  he  (Swedenborg)  being  permitted  to  see  and 
reveal  the  mystery  ;  that  there  is  a  purgatory  of  thirty 
years  ;  that  in  heaven  there  are  separate  places  for  dif- 
ferent nations ;  that,  in  heaven,  God  is  seen  by  the 
angels,  with  the  right  eye  as  a  sun,  with  the  left  eye  as 
a  moon ;  that  there  are  lower  animals  in  the  spiritual 
world ;  sickness  exists  there,  etc.,  etc. 

Several  well-attested  cases  of  Swedenborg's  clairvoy- 
ant powers  are  recorded.  Once,  while  dining  with  a 
friend,  at  a  place  many  miles  distant  from  his  own  town, 
he  suddenly  rose  and  walked  out  in  the  open  air,  seem- 
ingly in  great  agitation.  At  length  he  entered  the  house, 
apparently  composed,  and  informed  the  company  present 
that  there  was  a  great  conflagration  near  his  own  resi- 
dence, and  that  he  had  been  fearful  for  its  safety  ;  but  it 
had  just  been  quenched  within  one  door  of  his  house. 
The  next  post  brought  a  full  and  perfect  confirmation  of 
all  he  had  said. 

At  another  time,  when  the  queen  of  Sweden  was  jest- 
ing with  Swedenborg  on  account  of  his  pretensions  to 
intercourse  with  the  spiritual  world,  he  offered  to  con 
vince  her  of  the  fact  by  any  proof  she  could  propose 
She  told  him  that  the  late  king,  her  husband,  at  the  mo- 
ment of  death,  when  she  was  alone  with  him,  had  whis- 
pered something  important  to  her,  and  if  he  (Sweden- 
borg) could  tell  her  what  it  was,  she  would  be  satisfied 
that  he  had  spiritual  communication.  The  next  after- 
noon. Swedenborg  called  on  her,  mentioned  that  he  had 
seen  her  husband,  and  had  been  informed  by  him  what 
were  his  last  words,  which  he  then  told  the  queen.  Her 
majesty  immediately  swooned  away,  and,  on  recover- 
ing,  expressed    her   astonishment :    declaring  that    she 


94  SPIRITUAL    SHAPE. 

had  no  longer  any  doubt  relative  to  the  philosopher's 
power. 

Swedenborg  taught  that  the  spirit  gives  shape  to  the 
Dody,  and  if  any  member  (as  a  leg)  is  lost,  still  the  per 
feet  spiritual  shape  is  preserved.  Some  persons  confirm 
this  view  by  instancing  cases  where  pain  remains  in  the 
toes  after  the  limb  to  which  those  toes  belonged  has  been 
cut  off. 

Lady.  Do  such  cases  ever  occur  7 

Doctor.  Very  frequently.  The  next  day,  and  some- 
times for  months  after  amputation,  considerable  pain  is 
felt  in  the  excised  member.  After  the  nerves  have  ha- 
bituated themselves  to  their  new  relations,  it  ceases. 
Physiologists  account  for  this  singular  matter  in  various 
ways  ;  but  many  consider  the  spiritual  solution  the  best. 
He  also  taught  that  after  death,  as  the  body  remained  in 
exactly  the  same  shape,  it  was  very  difficult,  from  the 
preconceived  notions  of  that  state,  for  the  deceased  to 
really  believe  they  were  in  another  world.  He  seems 
to  entertain  much  dislike  to  Calvin,  whose  entrance  to 
the  spiritual  world  he  thus  describes :  "  I  have  heard 
(from  the  angels)  that  when  he  first  came  into  the  spi- 
ritual world,  he  believed  no  otherwise  than  that  he  was 
still  in  the  world  where  he  was  born  ;  and,  although  he 
heard  from  the  angels  who  were  associated  with  him  at 
his  first  entrance,  that  he  was  now  in  their  world,  and 
not  in  his  former  world,  he  said,  *  I  have  the  same  body, 
the  same  hands,  and  the  like  senses.'  But  the  angels 
instructed  him  that  he  was  now  in  a  substantial  body, 
and  that  before  he  was  not  only  in  the  same,  but  in  a 
material  body,  which  invested  the  substantial  ;  and  that 
the  material  body  had  been  cast  off  and  the  substantia] 
remained,  which  is  man.     This,  a-1,  first,  he  understood 


SEERESS    OF    PREVOR9T.  95 

but  the  next  day,  etc."  As  we  have  spent  sufficient 
time  on  Swedenborg,  I  must  conclude  by  mentioning 
Liiat  his  religion  was  evidently  formed  before  his  illu- 
mination, and  that,  clairvoyant  only  in  a  low  degree, 
his  philosophy  every  where  chimes  in  with  his  revela- 
tions. 

Lady.  Have  others  ever  given  to  the  world  any 
similar  experience  ?* 

Doctor.  Many  have  done  so;  of  whom  the  seeress 
of  Prevorst  is  an  instance.  In  183-,  in  the  upper  part 
of  our  city,  a  boy  resided  in  whom  this  anomaly  ex- 
isted. A  Methodist  minister  lived  in  the  same  house, 
and  being  much  interested  in  the  boy,  would  often  take 
him  as  a  companion  while  visiting  his  charge.  The  bo^ 
would  often  cross  the  street  to  avoid  the  proximity  of 
some  one  passing  ;  and,  upon  being  asked  the  reasons 
ior  his  conduct,  would  reply,  "that  the  person  was 
wicked,  and  had  given  evil  spirits  power  over  him,  and 
he  could  see  them  flocking  round,  filling  his  mind  with 
evil  suggestions."  Some  time  after  this,  two  young 
ladies  passed  a  night  in  attendance  upon  a  poor  woman 
who  was  dying  ;  her  children,  a  boy  and  two  girls,  wore 
in  the  room.  Just  before  her  death,  she  called  the  boj 
to  her,  and,  after  a  little  conversation,  they  heard  hei 
remark,  "  Is  that  all  ?"  While  his  mother  was  dying, 
the  boy  fell  upon  the  floor  in  a  convulsive  lit,  in  which 
lie  continued,  despite  of  all  assistance,  some  ten  minutes  ; 
but  at  last  rose,  exclaiming,  "  Mother  is  happy,  and  I  am 
satisfied !"  and  was  perfectly  calm  afterwards.  The 
^adies  seized  a  chance,  afforded  by  the  temporary  ab- 
sence of  the  boy,  to  ask  the  girls  what  all  this  meant  ; 
they  replied,  that  their  brother  could  see  spirits,  and  their 
mother,  wishing  to    find    out   what   some   dark    forms 


£J8  PROPHETS    IN    ISRAEL. 

around  her  bed  were  saying,  he  told  her  they  mereh 
came  to  carry  her  off,  when  she  replied,  "  Is  that  all  V 
On  inquiry,  they  found  it  was  the  same  boy  with  wfooir 
the  Methodist  minister  was  acquainted. 

It  is  probable  that  the  prophets  in  Israel,  in  ancient 
times,  had  the  powers  of  the  inner  man  developed. 
This  change  in  the  system  seems  to  have  been  the  test 
Elijah  gave  Elisha,  whether  his  request  would  be  granted. 
"  And  it  came  to  pass,  when  the  Lord  would  take  up 
Elijah  into  heaven  by  a  whirlwind,  that  Elijah  went 
with  Elisha  from  Gilgal,"  etc.  "  And  it  came  to  pass, 
when  they  were  gone  over,  that  Elijah  said  unto  Elisha, 
\sk  what  I  shall  do  for  thee  before  I  am  taken  from 
thee.  And  Elisha  said,  I  pray  thee,  let  a  double  portion 
of  thy  spirit  be  upon  me.  And  he  said,  Thou  hast  asked 
a  hard  thing ;  nevertheless,  if  thou  see  me  when  I  am 
taken  from  thee,  it  shall  be  so  unto  thee,"  etc.  "  And  it 
came  to  pass,  as  they  still  went  on  and  talked,  that  behold 
there  came  a  chariot  of  fire,  and  horses  of  fire,  and 
parted  them  both  asunder  ;  and  Elijah  went  up  by  a 
whirlwind  into  heaven,  and  Elisha  saw  it?  etc. 


CON  VERSATION    VI. 

STAGES    IN     DYING. 

Doctor.  As  we  have  considered  the  various  stages 
of  fascination,  from  a  mere  quickening  of  the  senses  to 
death,  it  will  be  well  to  consider  this  last  a  little  more  in 
detail;  as,  in  doing  so,  we  shall  in  a  measure  review  the 
others. 

Lady.  Does  the  dying  person  pass  through  the  six 
stages  in  regular  succession  ? 

Doctor.    I  believe  that  is  generally  the  case. 

Lady.  But  laow  then  do  you  account  for  the  extreme 
pain  that  is  often  felt  in  dying  ?  The  stages  of  fascina- 
tion soothe  pain — they  do  not  cause  it. 

Doctor.  That  is  very  true  ;  and  when  these  stages 
really  commence  there  is  no  longer  any  pain  ;  but  up 
o  the  first  stage  the  fatal  disease  exerts  unlimited  sway 
After  the  fourth  commences,  bodily  insensibility  is  ait 
nevitable  consequence  ;  the  violent  convulsions  of  the 
muscles  do  not  cause  suffering  in  the  mind.  Dr.  Adam 
Clarke,  when  relating  his  recovering  from  drowning, 
stated  to  Dr.  Lettsom  that,  during  the  period  of  his  ap- 
parent unconsciousness,  he  felt  a  new  kind  of  life.  He 
says,  "  Now  I  aver,  1st.  That,  in  being  drowned,  I  felt 
no  pain.  2d.  That  I  did  not,  for  a  single  moment,  lose 
my  consciousness.  3d.  I  felt  indescribably  happy  ;  and 
though  dead,  as  to  the  total  suspension  of  all  the  func- 
tions of  life,  yet  I  felt  no  pain  in  dying  ;  apd  I  take  i'  foi 
granted,  fiom  this  circm^ptanc*  iboe^  who  die  by 
9 


98  NO    PAIN    IN    DYING. 

drowning  feel  no  pain,  and  that  probably  it  is  the  easiest 
of  all  deaths.  4th.  That  I  felt  no  pain  till  once  more 
exposed  to  the  action  of  the  atmospheric  air  ;  and  then 
I  felt  great  anguish  and  pain  in  returning  to  life,  which 
anguish,  had  I  continued  under  water,  I  never  should 
have  experienced,"  etc. 

Dr.  Moore  cites  Mr.  Green,  who,  in  his  diary,  men- 
lK>hs  a  person  who  had  been  hung  and  cut.  down  on  a 
reprieve,  who,  being  asked  what  were  his  sensations, 
stated  that  the  preparations  were  dreadful  beyond  ex- 
pression, but  that,  on  being  dropped,  he  instantly  found 
himself  amidst  fields  and  rivers  of  blood,  which  gradu- 
ally acquired  a  greenish  tinge.  Imagining  that  if  he 
could  reach  a  certain  spot  he  should  be  easy,  he  seemed 
to  himself  to  struggle  forcibly  to  attain  it,  and  then  he 
relt  no  more.  Schiller,  when  dying,  was  asked  how  he 
felt.  "Calmer  and  calmer,"  he  replied.  Dr.  Moore 
nays  that  when  the  vital  flame  flickered,  almost  extin- 
guished, the  heart  faltering  with  every  pulse,  and  every 
breath  a  convulsion,  he  said  to  a  dying  believer,  who 
had  not  long  before  been  talking  of  undying  love,  ""Are 
you  in  pain?"  and  the  reply,  with  apparently  the  last 
breath,  was,  "It  is  delightful!"  In  another  person,  in 
whom  a  gradual  disease  had  so  nearly  exhausted  the 
physical  powers  that  the  darkness  of  death  had  already 
produced  blindness,  the  sense  of  God's  love  was  so 
overpowering,  that  every  expression,  for  many  hou:B, 
referred  to  it  in  rapturous  words,  such  as.  "  This  is  life — 
ibis  is  heaven — God  is  life — I  need  not  faith — I  have  the 
promise  /" 

Lady.  I  would  ask  if  there  is  any  certain  sign  by 
which  we  may  recognize  death  go  as  to  prevent  bury- 
ing alive  ? 


TEST    OF    DEATH.  99 

Doctor.  Only  one,  and  that  is  putrefactio.i.  Dendy 
cites  seveial  cases  of  prematuie  interment,  some  of 
which  I  will  mention: 

On  the  exhumation  of  the  Cimetiere  des  Innocents  at 
Paris,  during  the  Napoleon  dynasty,  the  skeletons  were 
many  of  them  discovered  in  attitudes  struggling  to  get 
free  ;  indeed  some,  we  are  assured,  were  partly  out  of 
their  coffins.  So  noted  was  this  matter  in  Germany,  as 
to  give  rise  to  a  custom  of  placing  a  bell-rope  in  the 
hand  of  a  corpse  for  twenty-four  hours  before  burial. 

Miss  C.  and  her  brother  were  the  subjects  of  typhoid 
fever.  She  seemed  to  die,  and  her  bier  was  placed  in 
the  family  vault.  In  a  week  her  brother  died  also,  and 
when  he  was  taken  to  the  tomb,  the  lady  was  found 
sitting  in  Iter  grave-clothes  on  the  steps  of  the  vault, 
having,  after  her  waking  from  the  trance,  died  of  terror 
or  exhaustion. 

A  girl,  after  repeated  faintings,  was  apparently  dead, 
and  taken  as  a  subject  into  a  dissecting  room  in  Paris. 
During  the  night,  faint  groans  were  heard  in  the  room  ; 
but  no  search  was  made.  In  the  morning  it  was  appa 
rent  that  the  girl  had  attempted  to  disengage  herself  from 
the  winding-sheet,  one  leg  being  thrust  off  from  the  tres 
sels,  and  an  arm  resting  on  an  adjoining  table. 

The  emperor  Zeno  was  prematurely  buried  ;  ana 
when  the  body  was  soon  after  casually  discovered,  it 
was  found  that  he  had,  to  satisfy  acute  hunger,  eaten 
some  flesh  from  off  his  arm. 

Lady.  Have  there  not  been  cases  in  which  recovery 
has  taken  place? 

Doctor.  None  that  bear  any  proportion  to  the  pre- 
mature interments.  A  romantic  story  is  told  of  a  young 
French  lody  at  Paris,  who  was  condemned  by  her  fathei 


100 


BURYING    ALIVE. 


to  a  hated  marriage,  while  her  heart  was  devoted  to 
another.  She  fell  into  a  trance  and  was  buried.  Under 
some  strange  influence  her  lover  opened  her  grave,  and 
she  was  revived  and  married.  Dendy  tells  a  story  of 
another  strange  lady,  who  was  actually  the  subject  of 
an  anatomist.  On  the  existence  of  some  faint  signs  of 
vitality,  he  not  only  restored  the  lady  to  life,  but  united 
himself  to  her  in  marriage. 

Bourgeois  tells  that  a  medical  man,  in  1833,  from  the 
sudden  influence  of  grief  upon  the  organic  system,  sunk 
into  a  cataleptic  state,  but  his  consciousness  never  left 
him.  The  lamentations  of  his  wife,  the  condolence  of 
friends,  and  the  arrangements  regarding  his  funeral, 
were  all  distinctly  heard.  Perfectly  aware  of  all  that 
was  going  on  around  him,  he  was  placed  in  the  coffin, 
and  carried  in  solemn  procession  to  the  grave.  -As  the 
solemn  words,  "  Earth  to  earth,"  were  uttered,  and  the 
first  clod  fell  upon  his  coffin  lid,  so  sudden  an  influence 
was  produced  upon  his  organic  system  by  terror,  as  to 
neutralize  the  effect  of  grief — he  shrieked  aloud,  and  was 
saved. 

A  story  is  related  of  a  lady  who  fell  into  a  cataleptic 
state  after  a  violent  nervous  disorder.  It  seemed  to  her, 
as  if  in  a  dream,  that  she  was  really  dead  ;  yet  she  was 
perfectly  conscious  of  all  that  happened  around  her  in 
his  dreadful  state.  She  distinctly  heard  her  friends 
speaking  and  lamenting  her  death  at  the  side  of  her  cof- 
fin :  she  felt  them  pull  on  her  dead  clothes,  and  lay  her 
in  it.  This  feeling  produced  a  mental  anxiety  which 
was  indescribable.  She  tried  to  cry,  but  her  soul  was 
without  power,  and  could  not  act  on  her  body.  She 
had  the  contradictory  feeling  as  if  she  were  in  her  own 
body,  and  yet  not  in  it  at  the  same  time.     It  was  aa 


RESUSCITATION.  lOi 

equally  impossible  for  her  to  stretch  cut  her  arm  or  to 
open  her  eyes  as  to  cry,  although  she  continually  endea- 
vored to  do  so.  The  internal  anguish  of  her  mind  was, 
however,  at  its  utmost  height  when  the  funeral  hymns 
were  sang,  and  when  the  lid  of  the  coffin  was  about  to 
be  nailed  on.  The  thought  that  she  was  to  be  buried 
alive  was  the  first  one  which  gave  activity  to  her  soul, 
and  caused  it  to  operate  on  ner  corporeal  frame. 

Abbe  Menon  tells  of  a  cataleptic  girl,  who  was 
doomed  to  dissection  ;  when  laid  on  the  table,  the  first 
cut  of  the  knife  awoke  her  and  she  lived.  Less  fortu- 
nate, says  Dendy,  was  Cardinal  Somaglia,  who,  falling 
into  syncope  from  intense  grief,  it  was  decided  that  he 
should  be  opened  and  embalmed.  As  the  surgeon's 
knife  punctured  the  lungs,  the  heart  throbbed,  and  the 
cardinal  attempted  to  avert  the  knife  with  his  hand  ;  but 
the  die  was  cast,  and  he  died. 

A  gentleman  was  apparently  seized  with  apoplexy 
while  at  cards.  A  vein  was  opened  in  both  arms,  but 
no  blood  flowed.  He  was  placed  in  a  room  with  two 
watchers,  who  slept,  alas  !  too  long ;  for,  in  the  morn- 
ing, the  room  was  deluged  with  blood  from  the  punc 
tures,  and  his  life  was  gone. 

Lady.  Did  the  persons  who  recovered  relate  any 
spiritual  views  ? 

Doctor.  In  some  cases  ;  but  the  most  of  them  expe- 
rienced nothing  more  than  a  separation  between  organic 
and  animal  life,  so  complete,  indeed,  as  to  deprive  them 
of  the  use  of  the  voluntary  muscles  for  a  time.  A  re- 
view o{  these  facts  will  justify  the  conclusion  that  inter- 
ment is  wrong  until  putrefaction  commences. 

Wonderful  stories  have  been  related  in  all  ages  about 
the  winders  of  trance,  or  the  fifth  degree.     Moore  gives 


l02  THKSPESIOS    OF    SOLI. 

the  substance  of  one  from  Plutarch  :  Thespesios  of  Sol 
fell  violently  on  his  neck,  and  was  supposed  to  be  dead. 
Three  days  after,  however,  when  about  to  be  interred; 
he  recovered.  From  this  time,  a  wonderful  change  was 
apparent  in  his  conduct ;  for  he  had  been  licentious  and 
prodigal,  but  ever  after  was  devout,  noble,  and  con- 
scientious. On  his  friends  requiring  the  reason  of  this 
strange  conversion,  he  stated  that  during  his  apparent 
death,  his  rational  soul  had  experienced  marvellous 
vicissitudes  ;  his  whole  being  seemed  at  first  on  a  sudden 
to  breathe,  and  to  look  about  it  on  every  side,  as  if  the 
soul  had  been  all  eye,  while,  at  the  same  time,  he  felt  as 
if  gliding  gently  along,  borne  upon  a  stream  of  light. 
Then  he  seemed  to  meet  a  spiritual  person  of  unuttera- 
ble loveliness,  who  conducted  him  to  various  parts  of 
the  unseen  world,  and  explained  to  him  the  mysteries 
of  divine  government,  and  showed  him  the  manner  in 
which  wickedness  meets  its  reward.  This  vision  ex- 
erted all  the  influence  of  truth  upon  his  mind,  and  en- 
tirely altered  his  character  and  conduct. 

The  Methodist  denomination  afford  many  strange 
instances  of  singular  experience,  so  well  known  that  it 
would  be  useless  to  repeat  them.  We  will  conclude 
the  degrees  by  a  chapter  from  Dr.  Nelson,  who,  in  his 
Cause  and  Cure  of  Infidelity,  (a  work  published  by 
the  American  Tract  Society,  and  which  ought  to  lay  on 
the  shelf  of  every  family  in  the  land,  with  the  Bibie 
and  Bunyan's  Pilgrim's  Progress;  a  work,  too,  which 
no  child  of  mine,  able  to  tell  the  letters,  should  ever  fail 
o  peruse  and  commit  to  memory,)  mentions  several 
cases  of  the  opening  of  the  spiritual  eye.  The  unbe- 
liever, at  the  point  of  death,  sees  the  reality  of  those 
things  at  wh'ch  he  formerly  scoffed  ;  he  commences  the 


APPROACHING    DEATH.  103 

passage  of  the  river  (a  transition  of  the  stages)  with 
stoical  indifference,  but  before  reaching  the  other  side, 
evinces  the<  most  terrible  despair,  and  the  parting  spirit 
bids  adieu  in  a  wail  of  agony.  The  follower  of  the 
Man  of  Calvary  approaches  the  brink  with  fear,  but 
ere  long,  the  choral  music  of  the  seraphim  proves  a  cor- 
dial to  his  fainting  spirit,  he  pants  to  enter  the  blessed 
abodes  he  sees  opening  before  him,  and  the  rapturous 
exclamation,  "  Lord,  receive  my  spirit !"  announces  that 
he  sleeps  in  Jesus.  You  are  sufficiently  prepared  to  ap- 
preciate the  physiological  state  he  describes  without  fur- 
ther explanation. 

OBSERVATIONS    ON    MAN'S    DEPARTURE. 

"While  attending  medical  lectures  at  Philadelphia,  I  heard,  from  the 
lady  with  whom  I  boarded,  an  account  of  certain  individuals  who  were 
dead  to  all  appearance,  during  the  prevalence  of  the  yellow  fever  in  that 
city,  and  yet  recovered.  The  fact  that  they  saw,  or  fancied  they  saw, 
things  in  the  world  of  spirits,  awakened  my  curiosity. 

"  She  told  me  of  one,  with  whom  she  was  acquainted,  who  was  so 
confident  of  his  discoveries  that  he  had  seemingly  thought  of  little  else 
afterward,  and  it  had  then  been  twenty-four  years.  These  things  ap- 
peared philosophically  strange  to  me,  for  the  following  reasons : — 

"First:  Those  who,  from  bleeding  or  from  any  other  cause,  reach  a 
6tate  of  syncope,  or  the  ordinary  fainting  condition,  think  not  at  all,  or  are 
unable  to  remember  any  mental  action.  When  they  recover,  it  appears 
either  that  the  mind  was  suspended,  or  they  were  unable  to  recollect  its 
operations.  There  are  those  who  believe  on  either  side  of  this  question. 
Some  contend  for  suspension ;  others  deny  it,  but  say  we  never  can  recall 
thoughts  formed  while  the  mind  is  in  that  state,  for  reasons  not  yet 
understood. 

"  Secondly:  Those  who,  in  approaching  death,  reach  the  first  state  cf 
insensibility,  and  recover  from  it,  are  unconscious  of  any  mental  activity 
and  have  no  thoughts  which  they  can  recall. 

"  Thirdly :  If  this  is  so,  why,  then,  should  those  who  had  travelled  fur- 
ther into  the  land  of  death,  and  had  sunk  deeper  into  the  condition  cf 
oodily  inaction,  when  recovered,  be  conscious  of  mental  action  and 
remember  thoughts  more  vivid  than  ever  had  flashed  across  their  souls 
in  the  health  of  boyhood,  under  a  vernal  sun,  and  on  a  plain  of  flowers  1 

"  After  this,  I  felt  somewhat  inclined  to  watch,  when  it  became  my 

tsiness  year  after  year,  to  stand  by  the  bed  of  death.     That  which  I  saw 


104  STAGES    IN    TRANCE. 

was  not  calculated  to  protract  and  deepen  the  slumbers  of  inudeli;y,  but 
rather  to  dispose  toward  a  degree  of  restlessness;  or,  at  least,  to  further 
observation.  I  knew  that  the  circle  of  stupor,  or  insensibility,  drawn 
around  life,  and  through  which  all  either  pass,  or  seem  to  pass,  who  go 
out  of  life,  was  urged  by  some  to  prove  that  the  mind  could  not  exist 
unless  it  be  in  connection  with  organized  matter.  For  the  same  reasou, 
others  have  contended  that  our  souls  must  sleep  until  the  morning  of  the 
resurrection,  when  we  shall  regain  our  bodies.  That  which  I  witnessed 
for  myself,  pushed  me  (willing  or  unwilling)  in  a  different  direction. 
Before  I  relate  these  facts,  I  must  offer  something  which  may  illustrate,, 
to  a  certain  extent,  the  thoughts  toward  which  they  pointed. 

"  If  we  were  to  stand  on  the  edge  of  a  very  deep  ditch  or  gulf,  on  the 
distant  verge  of  which  a  curtain  hangs  which  obstructs  the  view,  we 
might  feel  a  wish  to  know  what  is  beyond  it,  or  whether  there  is  any 
light  in  that  unseen  land.  Suppose  we  were  to  let  down  a  ladder,  pro- 
tracted greatly  in  its  length,  and  ask  a  bold  adventurer  to  descend  and 
make  discoveries.  He  goes  to  the  bottom,  and  then  returns,  telling  us 
that  there  he  could  see  nothing — that  all  was  total  darkness.  We  might 
very  naturally  infer  the  absence  of  light  there ;  but  if  we  concluded  that 
his  powers  of  vision  had  been  annihilated,  or  that  there  could  surely  be 
no  light  in  the  land  beyond  the  curtain,  because,  to  reach  that  land,  a 
very  dark  ravine  must  be  crossed,  it  would  have  been  weak  reasoning; 
so  much  so,  that,  if  it  contented  us,  we  must  be  easily  satisfied.  It  gave 
me  pain  to  notice  many — nay,  many  physicians — who  on  these  very 
premises,  or  on  something  equally  weak,  were  quieting  themselves  in  the 
deduction  that  the  soul  sees  no  more  after  death.  Suppose  this  adven- 
turer descends  again,  and  then  ascends  the  other  side,  so  near  the  top  that 
he  can  reach  the  curtain  and  slightly  lift  it.  When  he  returns,  he  tells  us 
that  his  vision  had  been  suspended  totally  as  before,  but  that  he  went 
nearer  the  distant  laud,  and  it  was  revived  again ;  that,  as  the  curtain 
was  lifted,  he  saw  brighter  light  than  he  had  ever  seen  before.  We 
would  say  to  him  :  '  A  certain  distance  does  suspend ;  but  inaction  is  not 
loss  of  sight :  only  travel  on  further,  and  you  will  see  again.'  We  can 
understand  that  any  one  might  go  to  the  bottom  of  that  ravine  a  thousand 
times ;  he  might  remain  there  for  days,  and,  if  he  went  no  further,  he 
could  tell,  on  his  return,  nothing  of  the  unseen  regions. 

"  Something  like  this  was  illustrated  by  the  facts  noted  during  many 
years'  employment  in  the  medical  profession.  A  few  cases  must  be 
taken  is  examples  from  the  list. 

"  I  was  called  to  see  a  female,  who  departed  under  an  influence  which 
causes  the  patient  to  faint  again  aid  again,  more  and  still  more  profoundly, 
until  life  is  extinct  For  the  information  of  physicians,  I  mention,  it  was 
uterine  hemorrhage  from  inseparably-attached  placenta.  When  recov- 
ered from  the  first  condition  of  syncope,  she  appeared  as  unconscious,  or  as 
destitute  of  activity  of  spirit,  as  others  usually  do.  She  sank  again  anc 
revived :  it  was  still  the  same.     She  fainted  more  profoundly  still ;  and 


ANECDOTES.  105 

when  a.vake  again,  she  appeared  as  others  usually  io  who  have  co 
►houghts  which  they  can  recall.  At  length  she  appeared  entirely  gone. 
Ft  did  seem  as  though  the  struggle  was  forever  past.  Her  weeping  rela- 
tives clasped  their  hands  and  exclaimed  :  '  She  is  dead !'  but,  unexpect  . 
edly,  she  waked  once  morer  and,  glancing  her  eyes  on  one  who  sat  near, 
^claimed :  '  Oh,  Sarah,  I  was  at  an  entirely  new  place  !'  and  then  sunk 
to  remain  insensible  to  the  things  of  the  place  we  l'ive  in. 

"  Why  she,  like  others  in  fainting,  should  have  no  thoughts  which  she 
could  recall,  when  not  so  near  death  as  she  afterward  was  when  she 
had  thought,  I  could  not  clearly  explain.  Why  her  greatest  activity  of 
mind  appeared  to  happen  during  her  nearest  approach  to  the  future 
world,  and  while  so  near  that,  from  that  stage,  scarcely  any  ever  return 
wdio  once  reach  it,  seemed  somewhat  perplexing  to  me.  I  remembered, 
that  in  the  case  recorded  by  Dr.  Rush,  where  the  man  recovered  who 
was,  to  all  appearance,  entirely  dead,  his  activity  of  mind  was  unusual. 
He  thought  he  heard  and  saw  things  unutterable.  He  did  not  know 
whether  he  was  altogether  dead  or  not.  St.  Paul  says  he  was  in  a  con- 
dition so  near  to  death,  that  he  could  not  tell  whether  he  was  out  of  the 
body  or  not,  but  that  he  heard  things  unutterable.  I  remembered  that 
Tennant,  of  New  Jersey,  and  his  friends,  could  not  decide  whether  or  not 
he  had  been  out  of  the  body;  but  he  appeared  to  be  so  some  days,  and 
thought  his  discoveries  unutterable.  The  man  who  cuts  his  finger  and 
faints,  recovering  speedily,  has  no  thoughts,  or  remembers  none:  he  does 
not  approach  the  distant  edge  of  the  ravine.  These  facts  appeared  to 
me  poorly  calculated  to  advance  the  philosophical  importance  of  one 
who  has  discovered  from  sleep,  or  from  syncope,  that  there  is  no  other 
existence,  because  this  is  all  which  we  have  seen.  They  appeared  to  me 
rather  poorly  calculated  to  promote  the  tranquility  of  one  seeking  the 
comforts  of  atheism.  For  my  own  part,  I  never  did  desire  the  consola- 
tions of  everlasting  nothingness;  I  never  could  covet  a  plunge  beneath 
the  black  wave  of  eternal  forgetfulness,  and  cannot  say  that  these  obser- 
vations, in  and  of  themselves,  gave  me  pain;  but  it  was  evident  that 
thousands  of  the  scientific  were  influenced  by  the  weight  of  a  small  peb- 
ble to  adopt  a  creed — provided  that  creed  contradit  ted  Holy  Writ.  I 
had  read  and  heard  too  much  of  man's  depravity,  and  of  his  love  for  dark- 
ness, not  to  see  that  it  militated  against  my  system  of  deism,  if  it  should 
appear  that  the  otherwise  learned  should  neglect  to  observe,  or  if 
observant,  should  be  satisfied  with  the  most  superficial  view,  and,  seiziug 
some  shallow  and  cpiestiouable  facts,  build  hastily  upon  them  a  fabric 
for  eternity. 

'•  In  the  cases  of  those  who,  recovering  from  yellow  fever,  thought 
they  had  enjoyed  intercourse  with  the  world  of  spirits,  they  wrere  indi- 
viduals who  had  appeared  to  be  dead. 

"The  following  fact  took  place  in  recent  days.  Similar  occurrences 
impressed  me  during  years  of  observation.  In  the  city  of  St.  Louis,  a 
finale  departed,  who  had  a  rich  portion  of  the  comforts  of  Christianity 


106  ANECDOTES. 

It  was  afte;  some  kind  of  spasm,  that  was  strong  enougn  to  have  been 
the  death-struggle,  that  she  said — in  a  whisper,  being  unable  to  speak 
aloud — to  her  young  pastor:  'I  had  a  sight  of  home,  and  I  saw  my 
Saviour !' 

"  There  were  others,  who,  after  wading  as  far  as  that  which  seemed  to 
be  the  middle  of  the  river,  and,  returning,  thought  they  had  seen  a  dif 
ferent  world,  and  that  they  had  au  antepast  of  hell.  But  these  cases  we 
pass  over,  and  look  at  facts  which  point  along  the  same  road  we  have 
been  travelling. 

"  I  was  surprised  to  find  that  the  condition  of  mind  in  the  case  of  those 
<vho  were  dying,  and  of  those  who  only  thought  themselves  dying,  dif- 
fered very  widely.  I  had  supposed  that  the  joy  or  the  grief  of  death 
originated  from  the  fancy  of  the  patient,  (one  supposing  himself  very  near 
to  great  happiness,  and  the  other  expecting  speedy  suffering,)  and  resulted 
in  pleasure  or  apprehension.  My  discoveries  seemed  to  overturn  this 
theory.  Why  should  not  the  professor  of  religion  who  believes  himself 
dying,  when  he  really  is  not,  rejoice  as  readily  as  when  he  is  departing 
if  his  joy  is  the  offspring  of  expectation  ?  Why  should  not  the  alarm  of 
the  scoffer,  who  believes  himself  dying  and  is  not,  be  as  uniform  and  as 
decisive  as  when  he  is  in  the  river,  if  it  comes  of  fancied  evil  or  cow- 
ardly terrors  ?  The  same  questions  I  asked  myself  again  and  again.  I 
have  no  doubt  that  there  is  some  strange  reason  connected  with  our  nat- 
ural disrelish  for  truth,  which  causes  so  many  physicians,  alter  seeing  such 
facts  so  often,  never  to  observe  them.  During  twenty  years  of  observa- 
tion, I  found  the  state  of  the  soul  belonging  to  the  dying  was,  uniformly 
and  materially,  unlike  that  of  those  who  only  supposed  themselves  depart- 
ing.    This  is  best  made  plain  by  noting  cases  which  occurred. 

"  1.  There  was  a  man  who  believed  himself  converted,  and  his  friends, 
judging  from  his  walk,  hoped  with  him.  He  was  seized  with  disease, 
and  believed  himself  within  a  few  paces  of  the  gate  of  futurity.  He  felt 
no  joy;  his  mind  was  dark,  and  hi3  soul  clouded.  His  exercises  were 
painful,  and  the  opposite  of  every  enjoyment.  He  was  not  dying.  He 
recovered.  He  had  not  been  in  the  death-stream.  After  this  he  was 
taken  again.  He  believed  himself  dying,  and  he  was  not  mistaken.  All 
vvas  peace,  serenity,  hope,  triumph. 

"  2.  There  was  a  man  who  mocked  at  holy  things.  He  became 
seriously  diseased,  and  supposed  himself  sinking  into  the  death-slumber. 
He  was  not  frightened.  His  fortitude  and  composure  were  his  pride, 
and  the  boast  of  his  friends.  The  undaunted  firmness  with  which  ho 
could  enter  futurity  was  spoken  of  exultingly.  It  was  a  mistake.  He 
was  not  in  the  condition  of  dissolution.  His  soul  never  had  been  on  the 
line  between  two  worlds.  After  this  he  was  taken  ill  again.  He  sup- 
posed, as  before,  that  he  was  entering  the  next  state,  and  he  really 
fc'as;  but  his  soul  seemed  to  feel  a  different  atmosphere.  The  horrors  of 
Inese  scenes  have  been  often  described,  and  are  often  seen.     I  need  ncrt 


CASE    OF    ILLUSTRATION  J 01 

endeavor  to  picture  such  a  departure  here.  The  only  difficul.y  in  which 
I  was  thrown  by  such  cases  was,  '  Why  was  he  not  thus  agonized  when 
he  thought  himself  departing  ?  Can  it  be  possible  that  we  can  stand  su 
precisely  on  the  dividing  line,  that  the  gale  from  both  this  and  the  coming 
world  may  blow  upon  our  cheek  ?  Can  we  have  a  taste  of  the  exorcises 
of  the  next  territory  before  we  enter  it?'  When  I  attempted  to  account 
for  this  on  the  simple  ground  of  bravery  and  cowardice,  I  was  met  by 
the  two  following  facts  : — 

"  First,  I  have  known  those  (the  cases  are  not  unfrequent)  who  were 
brave,  who  had  stood  unflinching  in  battle's  whirlpool.  They  had 
resolved  never  to  disgrace  their  system  of  unbe.ief  by  a  trembling  death. 
They  had  called  to  Christians  in  the  tone  of  resolve,  saying:  'I  can  die 
as  coolly  as  you  can.'  I  had  seen  those  die  from  whom  entire  firmness 
might  fairly  be  expected.  I  had  heard  groans,  even  if  the  teeth  were 
clenched  for  fear  of  complaint,  such  as  I  never  wish  to  hear  again ;  and  1 
had  looked  into  countenances,  such  as  I  hope  never  to  see  again. 

"  Again,  I  had  seen  cowards  die.  I  had  seen  those  depart  who  were 
naturally  timid,  who  expected  themselves  to  meet  death  with  fright 
and  alarm.  I  had  heard  such,  as  it  were,  sing  before  Jordan  wTas  half 
folded.  I  had  seen  faces  where,  pallid  as  they  were,  I  beheld  more 
celestial  triumph  than  I  had  ever  witnessed  anywhere  else.  In  that  voice 
there  was  a  sweetness,  and  in  that  eye  there  was  a  glory,  which  I  never 
could  have  fancied  in  the  death-spasms,  if  I  had  not  been  near. 

"  The  condition  of  the  soul,  when  the  death-stream  is  entered,  is  no; 
the  same  with  that  which  it  becomes  (oftentimes)  when  it  is  almost 
passed.  The  brave  man  who  steps  upon  the  ladder  across  the  dark 
ravine,  with  eye  undaunted  and  haughty  spirit,  changes  fearfully,  in  many 
cases,  when  he  comes  near  enough  to  the  curtain  to  lift  it.  The  Christian 
who  goes  down  the  ladder,  pale  and  disconsolate,  oftentimes  starts  with 
exultation,  and  tries  to  burst  into  a  song  when  almost  across. 

"  Case  of  illustration. — A  revolutionary  officer,  wounded  at  the 
battle  of  Germantown,  was  praised  for  his  patriotism.  The  war  ended , 
but  he  continued  still  to  fight,  in  a  different  way,  under  the  banner  of 
one  whom  he  called  the  Captain  of  his  salvation.  The  applause  of  men 
never  made  him  too  proud  to  talk  of  the  Man  of  Calvary.  The  hurry  of 
life's  driving  pursuits  could  not  consume  all  his  time,  or  make  him  forget 
to  kneel  by  the  side  of  his  consort,  in  the  circle  of  his  children,  and 
anticipate  a  happy  meeting  in  a  more  quiet  clime. 

"  To  abbreviate  this  histoiy,  his  life  was  such  that  those  who  knew 
him  believed,  if  any  one  ever  did  die  happily,  this  man  would  be  one 
of  that  class.  1  saw  him  when  the  time  arrived.  He  said  to  those 
around  him :  '  I  am  not  as  happy  as  I  could  wish,  or  as  I  had  expected. 
I  rami  jt  say  that  I  distrust  my  Saviour,  for  I  know  in  whom  I  have  be- 
lieved ;  but  I  have  not  that  pleasing  readiness  to  depart  which  I  had 
looked   for  '     This    distressed    his   relatives,   beyond    expression.      H-3 


106  DYINa    FANCIES. 

friends  rreve  greatly  pained,  for  they  had  looked  for  triumph.  His  do 
parture  was  very  slow,  and  still  his  language  was :  '  I  have  no  exhilara 
tion  and  delightful  readiness  in  my  travel.'  The  weeping  circle  pressed 
arour.d  him.  Another  hour  passed.  His  hands  and  his  feet  became 
entirely  cold.  The  feeling  of  heart  remained  the  same.  Another 
hour  passes,  and  his  vision  has  grown  dim,  but  the  state  of  his  soul  ia 
unchanged.  His  daughter  seemed  as  though  her  body  could  not  sustain 
her  anguish  of  spirit,  if  her  father  should  cross  the  valley  before  the 
cloud  passed  from  his  sun.  She  (before  his  hearing  vanished)  made  an 
agreement  with  him,  that,  at  any  stage  as  he  travelled  on,  if  he  had  a 
discovery  of  advancing  glory,  or  a  foretaste  of  heavenly  delight,  he 
should  give  her  a  certain  token  with  his  hand.  His  hands  he  could  still 
move,  cold  as  they  were.  She  sat  holding  his  hand,  hour  after  hour.  In 
addition  to  his  sight,  his  hearing  at  length  failed.  After  a  time  he  ap- 
peared almost  unconscious  of  anything,  and  the  obstructed  breathing 
peculiar  to  death  was  advanced  near  its  termination,  when  he  gave  the 
„oken  to  his  pale  but  now  joyous  daughter,  and  the  expressive  flash  of 
exultation  was  seen  to  spread  itself  through  the  stiffening  muscles  of  his 
face.  When  his  child  asked  him  to  give  a  signal  if  he  had  any  happy 
view  of  heavenly  light,  with  the  feelings  and  opinions  I  once  owned,  1 
could  have  asked :  '  Do  you  suppose  that  the  increase  of  the  death-chill 
will  add  to  his  happiness  ?  Are  you  to  expect,  that  as  his  eyesight 
leaves,  and  as  his  hearing  becomes  confused,  and  his  breathing  convulsed, 
and  as  he  sinks  into  that  cold,  fainting,  sickening  condition  of  pallid 
death,  that  liis  exultation  is  to  commence?' 

"  It  did  then  commence.  Then  is  the  time  when  many,  who  enter  the 
dark  valley  cheerless,  begin  to  see  something  that  transports ;  but  some 
are  too  low  to  tell  of  it,  and  their  friends  think  they  departed  under  a 
cloud,  when  they  really  did  not.  It  is  at  this  stage  of  the  journey  that 
the  enemy  of  God,  who  started  with  look  of  defiance  and  words  of  pride, 
eeems  to  meet  with  that  which  alters  his  views  and  expectations;  but  he 
cannot  tell  it,  for  his  tongue  can  no  longer  move. 

"  Those  who  inquire  after  and  read  the  death  of  the  wife  of  the  cel- 
ebrated John  Newton,  will  find  a  very  plain  and  very  interesting  in- 
stance, where  the  Saviour  seemed  to  meet  with  a  smiling  countenance 
his  dying  servant,  when  she  had  advanced  too  far  to  call  back  to  her  sor- 
rowful friends,  and  tell  them  of  the  pleasing  news. 

"  My  attention  was  awakened  very  much  by  observing  the  dying  fart' 
cies  of  the  servants  of  this  world,  differing  with  such  characteristic 
Mngularity  from  the  fancies  of  the  departing  Christian.  It  is  no  uncom- 
mon thing  for  those  who  die,  to  believe  they  see,  or  hear,  or  feel,  that 
which  appears  only  fancy  to  by-standers.  Their  friends  believe  that  it  ia 
the  overturning  of  their  intellect.  I  am  not  about  to  enter  into  the  dis- 
cussion of  the  question,  whether  it  is,  or  is  not,  always  fancy.  Some 
Bttr'bute  it  to  wore  than  fancy;  but  inasmuch  a?,  in  many  instances,  th« 


TEST    OF    DEATH.  l09 

mind  is  deranged  while  its  habitation  is  falling  into  ruins  around  it,  and 
inasmuch  as  it  is  the  common  belief  that  it  is  only  imagination  of  which 
I  am  writing,  we  will  look  at  it  under  the  name  of  fancy. 

"  The  fanciful  views  of  the  dying  servants  of  sin,  and  the  devoted 
friends  of  Christ,  were  strangely  different,  as  far  as  my  observation 
extended.  One  who  had  been  an  entire  sensualist  and  a  mocker  at  re- 
ligion, while  dying,  appeared  in  his  senses  in  all  but  one  thing.  '  Take 
that  black  man  from  the  room,'  said  he.  He  was  answered  that  there 
was  none  in  the  room.  He  replied:  '  There  he  is,  standing  near  the 
window.  His  presence  is  very  irksome  to  me — take  him  out.'  After  a 
time,  again  ami  again,  his  .-nil  was :  '  Will  no  one  remove  him  ?  There 
he  is — surely  some  one  will  take  him  away  !: 

"I  was  mentioning  to  another  physician  my  surprise  that  he  shoidd 
have  been  so  much  distressed  if  there  had  been  many  blacks  in  the  room, 
for  he  had  been  waited  on  by  them,  day  and  night,  for  many  years;  also 
that  the  mind  had  not  been  diseased  in  some  other  respect:  when  he 
told  me  the  names  of  two  others  (his  patients) — men  of  similar  lives — 
who  were  tormented  with  the  same  fancy,  and  in  the  same  way,  while 
dying. 

"  A  young  female,  who  called  the  Man  of  Calvary  her  greatest  friend,- 
was,  when  dying,  in  her  senses,  in  all  but  one  particular.  '  Mother,'  she 
would  say,  pointing  in  a  certain  direction,  'do  you  see  those  beautiful 
creatures?'  Her  mother  would  answer:  '  No,  there  is  no  one  there,  my 
dear.'  She  would  reply :  '  Well,  that  is  strange.  1  never  saw  such 
countenances  and  such  attire.  My  eye  never  rested  on  anything  so 
lovely.'  Oh,  says  one,  this  is  all  imagination,  and  the  notions  of  a  mind 
collapsing ;  wherefore  tell  of  it  ?  My  answer  is,  that  I  am  not  about  to 
dispute  or  to  deny  that  it  is  fancy;  but  the  fancies  differ  in  features  and 
in  texture.  Some  in  their  derangement  call  out:  '  Catch  me,  I  am  sink 
ing — hold  me,  1  am  falling.'  Others  say:  '  Do  you  hear  that  music  ?  O, 
were  ever  notes  so  celestial !'  This  kind  of  notes,  and  these  classes  of 
fancies,  belonged  to  different  classes  of  individuals  ;  and  who  they  were, 
was  the  item  which  attracted  my  wonder.  Such  things  are  noticed  by 
few,  and  remembered  by  almost  none ;  but  J.  am  inclined  to  believe  that, 
if  notes  were  kept  of  such  cases,  volumes  of  intei-est  might  be  formed. 

"  My  last  remark  here,  reader,  is,  that  we  necessarily  speak  somewhat 
in  the  dark  of  such  matters ;  but  you  and  I  will  know  more  shortly 
Beth  of  us  will  see  and  feel  for  ourselves,  where  we  cannot  be  mistaken, 
hi  the  course  of  a  very  few  months  or  years." 

| ;■*  Cnuse  and  Cure  of  Infidelity,'  by  Rev.  David  Nelson— American  Trftc* 
Society.     Pages  264-276.] 


CONVERSATION    \  II. 

OPERATION    OF    MEDICINE. 

eL\or.  Here  is  a  box  of  pills,  sent  me,  this  morning 
by  a  neighbor,  who  was  in  last  evening  when  my  son 
entered,  and  having  noticed  a  number  of  little  black 
spots  on  his  face,  said  his  blood  was  in  a  bad  state,  and 
that  these  pills  would  purify  it. 

Doctor.  Frequently  washing  the  face  will  remove 
the  black  spots,  or  worms,  as  they  are  commonly  called. 
You  have,  no  doubt,  often  noticed  an  oily  matter  on  the 
face ;  the  oil  is  made  by  minute  glands  lying  under  the 
external  skin ;  these  glands  send  out  a  tube  to  carry  the 
oil  to  the  surface ;  sometimes  dust  will  collect  on  the 
orifice  of  the  tube,  and  form  the  black  spots  your  neigh- 
bor observed  on  George  ;  the  oil  thus  prevented  egress, 
becomes  hardened,  and,  when  squeezed  out,  resembles  a 
worm  from  the  shape  of  the  tube. 

"Lady.    What  is  the  use  of  this  oil  ? 

Doctor.  To  grease  or  lubricate  the  external  skin,  SO 
as  to  prevent  irritation  either  from  atmospheric  causes^ 
or  the  motion  of  the  muscles  under  it.  To  return  to  the 
pills,  can  you  tell  me  of  any  mode  by  which  they  could 
gain  access  to  the  blood,  to  effect  such  an  important 
object  as  purifying  it  ? 

Lady.  I  have  always  considered  that  medicines  opei- 
ated  by  changing  the  nature  of  the  blood  ;  but  I  now 
gee  that  they  cannot  approach  it ;  to  do  so  requires  a 


SALT    PEACHES.  Ill 

passage  through  the  lacteals,  mesenteric  glands,  and 
thoracic  duct ;  and  you  have  informed  me  that  even  the 
pyloric  orifice  of  the  stomach  will  not  allow  anything  to 
pass  it,  except  properly-prepared  chyme. 

Doctor.  Allowing,  for  a  moment,  the  pills  entered 
the  blood,  what  would  ensue  ? 

Lady.  They  would  be  instantly  taken  out  of  the  cir- 
culation either  by  the  lungs  or  kidneys,  which  are  excre- 
ting glands,  acting,  I  suppose,  as  constables  to  -emove 
everything  offending  and  unnecessary. 

Doctor.  There  is  a  complete  system  of  guards  sta- 
tioned in  our  bodies,  to  prevent  the  entrance  of  improper 
substances,  beginning  with  the  warnings  of  taste  ;  but 
unhealthy  agents,  by  presenting  themselves  too  fre- 
quently, will  at  last  accustom  the  sentinels  to  their  ap- 
pearance, and  can  then  enter  with  impunity,  and  without 
(1  anger  of  being  ejected  by  the  excretory  organs. 

This  fact  may  sometimes  be  witnessed  in  the  vegeta- 
ble kingdom.  The  late  Dr.  Mitchell,  of  this  city,  had 
once  sent  to  him  a  basket  of  saline-tasting  peaches 
Around  the  base  of  the  tree  upon  which  they  grew,  a 
quantity  of  brine  had  been  thrown.  The  spongioles  or 
leech-suckers  at  the  roots,  at  first,  refused  the  salty  mat- 
ter admittance,  but,  their  excitability  (irritability)  being 
altered  by  continued  contact,  at  last  sucked  them  up, 
and  thus  a  strange  phenomenon  was  the  result. 

Alcohol  has  produced  the  same  elfect  on  the  human 
system.  A  surgeon  mentions  a  case  of  setting  fire  to 
the  blood  of  a  confirmed  drunkard,  which  he  had  just 
drawn,  its  strong  odor  tempting  the  experiment. 

Lady.  That  drunkard  was  not  much  remo^  ed.  1 
uliould  think,  from  a  state  of  spontaneous  combustion. 

Doctor.    Probably  not ;   saturating  the  system  with 


12  SPONTANEOUS    COMBUSTION. 

alcohol  is  perhaps  one  of  the  first  steps  in  that  process 
Bone  is  composed  of  a  mixture  of  phosphoric  acid  and 
lime  {phosphate  of  lime) ;  as  an  acid  is  the  union  of  a  base 
with  a  certain  amount  of  oxygen,  phosphoric  acid  is  made 
of  phosphorus  and  oxygen.  When  the  chemist  wishes  to 
exhibit  intense  combustion  to  his  audience,  he  throws  a 
piece  of  phosphorus  into  a  jar  of  oxygen  gas,  and  pro- 
duces a  blaze  rivalling  that  of  the  sun.  In  a  healthy 
state  of  the  system,  the  life  power  controls  all  the  ele- 
ments, and,  as  shown  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  only 
allows  them  to  unite  in  a  manner  that  subserves  its  own 
purposes  ;  but  when  lowered  and  debilitated  by  excess- 
ive stimulus,  the  power  becomes  weakened,  and  finally 
lost  in  death ;  the  elements  then  obey  their  natural 
affinities,  and  a  virulent  internal  combustion  ensues. 

Lady.  The  drunkard,  in  a  double  sense,  then,  is  a 
self-moving  porter-house.  Is  it  not  very  strange,  that, 
with  all  the  clear  and  accurate  information  known  rela- 
tive to  the  organs  and  their  functions,  such  profound 
ignorance  on  the  subject  of  the  operation  of  medicine 
should  exist  ? 

Doctor.  You  have  quoted,  almost  verbatim,  the  com* 
mon  jargon  of  the  day  ;  it  is  used  by  those  noted  for 
vague  and  confused  notions  on  physiology.  I  do  not 
think  any  man,  who  cannot  give  the  rationale  of  the 
medicine  he  prescribes,  should  be  trusted  to  practice. 
So  far  from  being  dark  and  in  any  way  incomprehen 
3ible,  it  is  easily  explained,  and  the  effects  of  medicine 
capable  of  being  predicted  with  almost  mathematical 
certainty. 

The  study  of  the  different  organs  in  the  system,  attei 
ihe  life  power  has  departed,  is  called  Anatomy.  When 
living  and  proper  agents  stimulate  irritability,  so- as  tc 


CONSERVATIVE    POWER  113 

produce  a  healthy  action  of  these  organs,  the  study  is 
called  Physiology  When  improper  agents  or  stimuli 
act  on  irritability,  an  alteration  of  the  vital  powers  en- 
sues, with  a  corresponding  alteration  of  function,  disease 
results,  and  its  study  is  called  Pathology.  In  the  latter 
case,  how  do  you  imagine  the  system  can  become  right 
again  1 

Ladv.  Only,  1  should  think,  by  the  direct  interposition 
»f  the  Almighty  ? 

Doctor.  After  the  Croton  aqueduct  was  finished,  the 
pipes  laid  down,  and  the  whole  in  successful  operation, 
do  you  suppose  anything  more  was  required  ? 

Lady.  Yes,  a  company  of  superintendents  and  labor- 
ers, to  constantly  inspect  every  part  with  the  greatest 
care,  and  instantly  repair  whatever  breaks  in  the  line,  or 
otheT  damages  might  occur.  The  water-works  would 
not  even  be  safe  without  such  a  precaution. 

Doctor.  The  life  power  has  an  exactly  similar  re- 
serve— a  distinct  and  powerful  conservative  principle, 
called  by  the  older  physicians,  who  were  well  acquaint- 
ed with  it,  the  Vis  Medicatrix  Natures.  Whenever  a 
part  is  injured,  it  is  the  office  of  this  principle  to  come 
forward  and  repair  it ;  so  very  intelligent  appears  its 
operation,  that  some  have  attributed  the  effects  to  a 
special  interference  of  the  Creator,  and  others  supposed 
t  was  the  rational  soul. 

Lady.  The  two  seeds  cited  in  your  article  on  the 
Vegetable  Kingdom,  to  show  the  difference  between  the 
forces  of  life  and  those  of  chemistry,  brought  instant 
conviction  to  my  mind,  and  the  clear  conceptions  I  then 
acquired  have  proved  serviceable  since  in  pursuing  this 
subject.  Can  you  not  illustrate  the  conservative  ">rin 
eiple  in  a  similar  manner? 
10* 


114  DORMOUSE. 

I>octor.  Have  ycu  ever  read  the  natural  history  of 
the  dormouse  ? 

Lady.  It  is  one  of  the  hybernating  or  winter-sleep* 
ing  animals ;  in  summer  it  is  very  lively  and  frolic- 
some ;  as  autumn  approaches,  it  becomes  very  fat ;  and 
when  cold  weather  sets  in,  retires  to  a  concealed  nook 
to  sleep  out  the  winter,  but  comes  forth  in  the  spring 
almost  fleshless.  While  in  the  hybernating  state,  its 
breathing  is  very  slow,  and  its  temperature  the  same  as 
that  of  the  surrounding  atmosphere. 

Doctor.  If  a  dormouse  is  taken  from  its  sheltered 
hole,  in  the  midst,  of  winter,  and  placed  in  a  receiver 
surrounded  with  a  freezing  mixture,  some  very  curious 
phenomena  will  be  evolved.  As  the  cold  increases, 
and  the  little  portion  it  had  is  becoming  absorbed,  its 
breathing  will  be  proportionally  slower,  and  the  heart 
pulsate  more  feebly;  this  state  of  things  continues — the 
animal  constantly  failing — until  a  point  is  reached  where 
remaining  another  moment  would  destroy  life.  At  this 
very  point  an  unseen  power  presents  its  workings,  a 
hidden  spring  is  touched,  and  an  evident  change  takes 
place  with  extreme  rapidity  ;  the  pulse  becomes  fuller 
and  faster;  a  warmth  diffuses  itself  over  the  surface; 
the  eyes  brighten  and  limbs  contract ;  finally,  in  less 
than  three  minutes,  the  little  animal  is  as  hot,  and  his 
pulse  as  rapid,  as  in  the  midst  of  summer.  Take  the 
dormouse  now  out  of  the  receiver,  and  expose  him  to 
the  open  air,  and  his  torpidity  gradually  returns  ;  it  \s 
'.hen  best  to  restore  him  to  his  former  nook.  The  con- 
servative power  that  preserved  the  dormouse  from 
leath,  we  name  the  Vis  Medicatrix  Nature. 

Lad  v.  How  is  this  power  developed  in  the  human 
fcody  ? 


TRUE    PHYSICIAN.  lit 

Doctor.  Let  us  suppose  a  combination  of  peculiar 
circumstances,  as  the  poisonous  air  of  a  marsh  (marsh 
miasmata),  to  act  on  our  excitability,  an  injurious  influ- 
ence is  immediately  exerted  upon  the  system  ;  it  sinks 
quickly,  a  chill  is  felt,  and  this  chill  increases,  lowering 
and  depressing  us,  till  a  point  is  gained  (as  in  the  dor- 
mouse experiment),  from  which  we  cannot  descend  with 
life  ;  at  this  point  the  conservative  power  awakes  ;  it  acts 
on  the  other  powers,  more  especially  on  the  brain ;  the 
nervous  secretion  becomes  altered  and  radiated  to  every 
part ;  a  change  is  induced,  fever  ensues,  and  with  it  a 
long  .rain  of  other  symptoms  which  finally  terminate 
in  pioiuse  perspiration,  and  a  restoration  to  health. 

Lady.  Then  fever,  and  the  symptoms  which  are 
commonly  considered  the  disease  itself,  are  nothing 
more  than  signals  of  battle  going  on  within  for  the  pur- 
pose of  liberating  us  from  injurious  influences.  If  such 
be  the  case,  why  does  the  physician  interfere  in  the  mat- 
ter at  all,  and  of  what  use  are  doctors  ? 

Doctor.  The  true  physician  remains  a  spectator,  or 
rather  general,  watching  the  battle's  progress  with  a 
careful  eye  ;  knowing  each  separate  stage  and  crisis{ 
and  how  far  nature  can  be  trusted,  he  often  does  nothing 
more  than  to  clear  the  battle-field,  (remove  injurious  in- 
fluences,) and  allow  her  to  combat  alone. 

Lady.  Suppose  it  becomes  necessary  for  him  to 
interfere  ? 

Doctor.  If  nature  cannot  cope  successfully  with  the 
existing  form  of  disease,  it  is  his  business  to  substitute 
aholher  form  which  she  can  conquer.  It  is  a  pathologi- 
cal law  that  there  can  be  but  one  disease  at  a  time  in 
.he  system  ;  and,  acting  oil  that  law,  he  brings  some 
nfluence  stronger  than  the  original  cue  to  bear  on  ex« 


116  ARSENIC. 

citability  ;  in  other  words,  he  must  produce  a  different 
alteration  of  the  vital  powers,  which  he  is  certain  the 
conservative  principle  can  rectify. 

Lady.  If  it  is  stronger  than  the  original  one,  why 
should  it  not  be  still  worse  for  the  vis  medicatrix  to 
combat  ? 

Doctor.  Each  thing  produces  an  influence  peculiar 
to  itself;  and  our  ideas  of  strength  are  only  compara- 
tive. What  will  powerfully  depress  excitability  may 
give  the  vis  medicatrix  little  effort  to  overcome,  and 
vice  versa. 

There  is  a  class  of  bodies,  which,  properly  pre- 
scribed, produce  a  decided  and  powerful  effect  on  exci- 
tability ;  an  effect  which  experience  has  taught  us  it  is 
always  in -the  power  of  the  vis  medicatrix  to  subaue, 
and  restore  the  system  when  laboring  under  their  influ- 
ence to  health.  Such  are  the  medicines,  as  opium,  cam- 
phor, arsenic,  and  quinine. 

Lady.    Is  arsenic  a  medicine  ? 

Doctor.  A  very  useful  one.  You  must  not  suppose 
that  its  only  use  was  to  make  stearine  candles  and  Ger- 
man silver  spoons.  Nothing  in  nature  was  ever  created 
for  murderous  purposes  ;  it  is  man  who  perverts  them. 

Lady.-  After  the  effect  is  produced  on  excitability  by 
the  medicine,  the  original  malady  disappears  ;  the  phy- 
sician is  then  treating  sickness  he  has  himself  induced, 
and  curing  diseases  of  his  own  infliction. 

Doctor.  Exactly  so  ;  and  this  shows  you  what  cans 
and  judgment  should  be  exercised  in  selecting  the  right 
medicine.  Cases  occur  in  which,  out  of  a  list  of  twenty 
purgatives,  one  alone  is  suited  to  the  existing  nature  of 
.he  complaint. 

Lady.    But,  doctor,  how   can  you  discover  all  these 


CASE    OF    DISEASE.  117 

separate  modifications  of  disease  ;  how  can  you  possi- 
blv  tell  what  is  ^oinsr  on  within  the  system  ? 

Doctor.  In  the  same  manner  as  we  discover  the  ex- 
istence of  a  life  principle  and  its  properties — that  is,  by 
observing  the  phenomena  they  exhibit. 

You  will  remember  that  every  part  of  the  body  has  a 
separate  office  to  fulfil,  that  there  are  two  lives,  an  ani- 
mal and  vegetable,  in  action,  developing  distinct  series 
of  phenomena,  and  that  the  study  of  all  the  functions  in 
health  is  physiology. 

When  pernicious  influences  act,  and  the  whole  train 
becomes  disordered,  the  physician,  previously  well  ac- 
quainted with  the  results  produced  by  healthy  actions, 
observes  the  changed  appearances  disease  presents  to 
his  view,  and  from  these  deduces  his  opinion  relative  to 
the  amount  of  injury,  and  acts  accordingly. 

Lady.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  apply  this  to  a 
particular  case  ? 

Doctor.  I  was  sent  for,  yesterday,  to  see  a  man,  who 
I  was  told  had  been  ill  for  two  or  three  days.  On 
entering  the  room,  and  observing  his  countenance 
(often  a  sufficient  index  by  itself  to  the  experienced),  its 
wild  and  haggard  aspect  led  me  to  look  for  abdominal 
disease. 

Sitting  down  by  his  bed,  I  inquired  the  history  of  the 
case,  and  then  proceeded  (without  his  suspecting  it)  to 
a  regular  examination. 

The  functions  of  animal  life  are  sensation,  thought, 
and  locomotion.  Everything  had  acquired  a  bitter 
taste  to  him,  and  noise  of  any  kind  was  agonizing ;  his 
rmnu  was  wandering ;  and,  to  conclude  with  anima. 
life,  he  was  feeble  as  a  child. 

Turning  to  the  vegetable  system,  I  found  respiration 


118  SYMPTOMS. 

more  frequent  than  in  health,  but  perfectly  full,  and  no 
pain  about  the  chest ;  the  pulse  fast  and  rather  weak, 
but  steady ;  this  absolved  the  heart  and  lungs.  Upon 
examining  the  tongue,  I  found  it  covered  with  a  thick 
yellowish-brown  fur,  characterizing  trouble  in  the  liver; 
and  as  the  lining  membrane  for  nostrils,  mouth,  stomach, 
liver-tube,  etc.,  is  one  continuous  sheet,  disease  of  one 
part  would  soon  extend  along  the  whole  surface  by 
sympathy,  and,  reaching  the  tongue,  paint  on  .ts  surface 
the  cause  of  trouble  for  the  information  of  the  phy- 
sician ;  the  skin  had  a  yellowish  tinge,  was  at  times  cold 
and  moist,  and  at  others  hot  and  dry  ;  the  bowels  and 
liver,  more  especially  the  stomach,  were  very  sensitive 
to  pressure,  and  vomiting  came  on  every  ten  or  fifteen 
minutes,  at  which  times  he  ejected  a  greenish  watery 
fluid,  etc.,  etc. 

The  day  of  his  attack,  he  had  been  eating  a  very 
hearty  dinner,  with  some  unripe  fruit  as  dessert,  and 
then  quickly  returned  to  work  (he  was  a  stone-cutter) 
beneath  a  hot  sun  ;  soon  getting  sick,  he  went  home, 
where  an  old  woman,  a  great  doctress  of  the  neigh- 
borhood, had  been  summoned  to  attend  him  ;  she  called 
his  disease  janders,  and  every  hour  or  two,  during  the 
day,  poufed  down  his  stomach  strong  tansy  tea. 

I  concluded  that  his  unwholesome  dinner  had  been 
imperfectly  digested,  and  when  the  chyme  wished  to 
pass  the  pyloric  orifice,  the  sentinel  tightly  contracted 
his  muscular  ring,  and  refused  admittance  by  blocking 
up  the  passage.  The  hot  sun,  acting  on  the  brain, 
altered  the  nervous  secretion,  a  share  of  wmich,  beins; 
radiated  to  the  stomach,  made  matters  worse  ;  and  the 
stomach,  finding  itself  utterly  incapable,  in  such  cir- 
cumstances, of  re-digesting  the  food,  cast  it  off  entirely  by 


VIS    MEDICATRIX    NATURAE.  l]fi 

thf  Esophagus  ;  the  bile  that  was  preparer,  o  act  on  the 
chyme  being  poured  out  about  the  time  it  ought  to  be 
there,  and  finding  nothing  to  act  on,  altered  the  excita- 
bility of  the  sentinel  at  the  pyloric  orifice,  and  gained 
admission  into  the  stomach,  from  whence  it  was  immc 
d iately  thrown  out,  sharing  the  fate  of  the  food.  Tc 
crown  all,  the  tansy  tea,  by  producing  irritation,  kept 
lp  the  morbid  action,  involving  all  the  parts  connected 
vvith  the  lining  membrane,  as  the  liver,  etc. 

I  caused  him  to  be  removed  into  a  cool  and  quiet 
room ;  had  his  feet  bathed  with  mustard  and  warm 
water,  to  assist  the  action  of  a  mustard  plaster  on  his 
stomach ;  and  then  caused  a  strong  injection  to  be  ad- 
ministered, leaving  a  powder  to  be  taken  at  a  certain 
time  afterward.  The  vomiting  ceased,  the  bowels 
moved,  a  terrible  headache  (which  I  forgot  to  mention 
in  my  notice  of  sensation)  disappeared,  etc.,  etc.,  and 
the  next  morning  found  him  free  from  all  pain,  but 
very  weak.  This  is  called  the  active  plan  of  treat- 
ment. 

Very  frequently,  a  mere  removal  of  injurious  influ- 
ences, by  allowing  the  vis  medicatrix  free  scope,  will  be 
sufficient  to  cure.  This  is  called  the  expectant  plan  of 
treatment. 

Lady.  Nature,  after  all,  has  to  fight  her  own  battles, 
the  physician  generally  do;ng  nothing,  except,  by  re* 
moving  injurious  influences,  to  show  fair  play  ;  the  ut- 
most he  can  perform  is  to  substitute  one  morbific  cause 
for  another.  If  it  were  not  for  the  vis  medicatrix,  there 
would  be  no  science  of  medicine — we  should  all  die  off 
as  soon  as  injured. 

Doctor.  I  am  glad  that  you  understand  so  well 
what  I  have  been  endeavoring  to  teach ;  you  have  now 


t20  WATER    CURE. 

learned  enough  of  the  principles  of  medicine  lo  pursue 
the  study  as  much  as  you  choose. 

Lady.  Does  fascination  act  by  inducing  a  new  diy- 
ease  ? 

Doctor.  Most  assuredly ;  it  forms  no  exception  to 
the  mode  of  operation  of  the  others,  from  all  of  which  il 
differs,  however,  by  giving  the  vis  medicatrix  less  effort 
to  displace  its  effects.  I  suppose  this  fact  will  make  no 
advice  needed  with  regard  to  fascinating  healthy  per- 
sons, as  direct  disease  is  thereby  induced. 

Lady.  Why  did  I  not  get  well  directly  after  the  first 
fascination  ? 

Doctor.  From  the  influence  of  habit,  and  the  same 
causes  still  acting  that  produced  your  disease  in  the  first 
instance.  Directly  after  the  effect  of  each  operation 
was  over,  and  before  the  disease  again  seized  upon  you, 
the  system  had  time  to  gain  strength  ;  as  the  intervals 
increased,  more  strength  was  acquired,  until,  at  length, 
your  frame  was  strong  enough  to  resist  the  injurious 
influence,  and  then  your  recovery  was  complete. 

Lady.  In  what  manner  does  the  water  cure  operate  ? 
A  friend  of  mine  was  very  anxious  that  I  should  try  it  \ 
he  thought  every  case  of  chronic  disease  in  the  conti- 
nent of  Europe  would  soon  be  cured  at  Graefenberg. 

Doctor.  I  have  very  little  doubt  but  that  it  would 
have  killed  you.  You  can  no  more  expect  one  particu- 
lar medicine,  or  plan  of  treatment,  to  cure  all  diseases, 
than  to  find  one  book  which  would  suit  all  readers  ;  or 
one  coat  capable  of  fitting  all  men.  Wherever  life  is 
present,  variety  is  certain  to  be  found,  as  well  in  dis- 
ease as  in  health.  In  certain  cases,  fascination,  as  a 
curative  agent,  is  invaluable  ;  but,  recommend  it  as  a 
suecedaneum,  and  it  is  certain  to  do  much  mischief. 


(iOMtEOJPATflVi  121 

Hydropathy,  as  a  curative  agent,  acts  exactly  on  the 
dormouse  principle  ;  it  depresses  until  the  vis  medicatm 
rises  to  the  rescue.  The  process  you  will  observe, 
lias  alreadv  been  £one  through  with  at  the  first  time  of 
liie  attack  :  it  says  to  nature,  "  You  have  failed  in  your 
attempt,  try  again."  In  many  chronic  cases  of  long 
standing  it  is  certainly  a  valuable  remedy  ;  that  it  is  a 
new  discovery,  or  that  it  will  supercede  all  other  reme- 
dies, are  both  ridiculous  ideas. 

Lady.  I  am  aware,  doctor,  that  you  have  attentively 
examined  homoeopathy  ;  and  since  such  a  golden  oppor- 
tunity presents  itself  for  inquiry,  I  should  be  much 
obliged  if  you  would  tell  me  what  it  really  is  worth ; 
many  of  my  friends  think  its  cures  are  almost  miraculous  ? 

Doctor.  Cases  of  medical  treatment  under  such  cir- 
cumstances, stand  in  the  same  relation  to  truth  as  the 
tricks  of  a  juggler  to  the  deductions  of  science  ;  such 
reports,  in  fact,  have  elicited  the  remark  that  "medics' 
facts  are  medical  lies."  ^Vhatever  militates  agains: 
common  sense  and  exot^itnce  cannot  be  received  ar 
evidence. 

Lady.  Their  infinitessimjl  3oce&  leaa  me  to  concludt 
that  their  object  is  to  let  native,  L  a.1!  cases,  take  care 
of  herself.  Much  harm  cannot  be  dene  except  by 
inducing  delay. 

Doctor.  That  alone  should  condemn  ihe  wiiole  mat- 
ter, as  no  where  are  "  delays  so  dangerou.:*'  es  in  med* 
cine,  a  life  often  turning  on  an  hour  of  time.  My  stud> 
of  Hannehman  has  led  me  to  consider  him  possessed 
of  remarkable  talent,  and  that  the  whole  system  of  ho 
mreopathy  is  nothing  more  than  a  disguised  recommenda- 
tion of  fascination.  Do  you  remember  how  he  tests  the 
strength  of  his  medicines  ? 
11 


122  FASCINATION 

Lady.  By  the  number  of  dilutions  ;  t  le  greater  the 
number,  the  more  powerful  the  medicine. 

Doctor.  That  simple  fact  should  have  led  to  the  dis- 
covery of  his  meaning,  the  solution  of  his  enigma.  Ha 
directs  his  medicines  to  be  prepared  by  hand,  and  consi- 
ders them  increased  in  strength  proportionally  as  the 
hand  is  laid  upon  them :  this  is  nothing  more  than  a 
practice,  long  known,  of  mesmerizing  medicine  for  pa- 
tients. 

Lady.  Still  I  should  have  thought  that  where  so 
much  was  at  stake,  he  would  have  given  some  intima- 
tion of  his  secret  more  plainly  than  that ;  that  he  would 
even  in  some  cases  direct  them  to  fascinate. 

Doctor.  He  has  done  so :  where  nature  alone  will 
oure,  or  the  expectant  plan  will  suffice,  he  directs  the 
minimum  doses  ;  in  more  serious  cases,  you  must,  to  use 
his  own  words,  "  stroke  the  patient  down  with  the  palm 
of  the  hand  till  relief  be  obtained." 

His  object,  in  concealing  his  real  sentiments,  was 
doubtless  to  escape  the  ridicule  of  the  age  in  which  he 
lived.  If  he  possessed  an  acute  sense  of  mirthfulness, 
great  must  have  been  his  merriment  to  have  known  that 
glass  factories,  in  many  countries,  were  solely  employed 
blowing  his  little  vials  ;  thousands  of  apothecaries  en- 
gaged in  manufacturing  medicines  to  fill  those  vials; 
machines  inventing  to  prepare  nis  triturations  and  dilu- 
tions ;  and,  finally,  hosts  of  the  sons  of  Esculapius, 
equipped  with  whole  pharmaceutical  establishments  in 
ihcir  coat  pockets,  visiting  their  patients,  and  who,  ever 
and  anon,  were  drawing  forth  the  organcn  of  him  upon 
whom  they  looked  as  more  than  mortal,  to  seek  fresh 
instructions  regarding  the  best  nethod  of  dispensing 
sugar  plums. 


SOMMON    SALT  123 

It  is  rarely  that  persons  will  take  pains  to  examine 
mto  any  system  of  medicine  ;  the  small  amount  of  medi- 
cal knowledge  out  of  the  pale  of  the  profession,  owing 
most  likely  to  the  small  amount  within,  has  given  an 
idea  that  the  whole  subject  is  nothing  more  than  a  sys- 
tem of  guessing  ;  and  those  entertaining  this  view  are 
rather  pleased  with  homoeopathy,  as  being  a  practice  in 
which  wrong  guessing  cannot  produce  much  detriment. 

Another  source  of  injury  to  the  science  of  medicine 
has  been  various  hypotheses  started  by  men  who  were 
not  properly  versed  in  the  laws  of  life.  During  the 
prevalence  of  a  certain  deadly  pestilence  in  the  West 
Indies,  the  blood  was,  in  all  cases  in  those  affected,  dark, 
almost  black.  A  physician,  who  had  been  bleeding  a 
patient,  found  the  dark  blood,  as  soon  as  it  gained  the 
bowl,  become  of  a  bright  healthy-looking  red;  and,  upon 
examining  the  matter,  found  the  florid  appearance  was 
owing  to  some  table  salt  which  had  been  accidentallv  left 
in  the  bowl  ;  his  sapient  brain  instantly  conceived  the 
idea  that  it  was  the  loss  of  muriate  of  soda  (common 
salt)  in  the  blood  that  caused  the  fever.  This  fancied 
discovery  changed  his  whole  plan  of  treatment,  and  his 
after  practice  consisted  in  injecting  solutions  of  salt 
into  the  veins,  and  giving  it  by  the  stomach.  His  fellow" 
physicians  followed  his  example  as  soon  as  the  matter 
was  published.  The  uniformly  fatal  termination  of  all 
cases  treated  in  this  absurd  manner  at  length  obliged 
ihe  doctors  to  relinquish  the  practice  ;  but  the  hypothe- 
sis, like  the  bodies  of  ancient  heroes,  was  accompanied 
to  the  grave  by  thousands  of  victims  slaughtered  to  its 
honor. 

Laby.     What  is  the  meaning  of  transfusion  of  blood  ? 

Doctor.     It  was  discovered  that  where  death  would 


124  VACCINATION. 

ensue  from  the  loss  of  olood,  taking  a  supply  from  the 
veins  of  another  and  directly  introducing  it  into  that  of 
the  patient,  would  preserve  life  in  many  instances. 
The  French  received  it  w  th  open  arms,  and  were  eager 
to  embrace  the  advantages  it  offered.  Supposing  the 
secret  of  perpetual  youth  was  made  known,  old  age 
hastened  to  fill  its  veins  with  the  blood  of  juvenescence. 
Though  the  majority  who  tried  the  plan  fell  victims  to 
its  fatal  influence,  it  still  continued  to  be  the  enthusiasm 
of  the  day  till  a  prince  of  the  blood  royal  was  added  to 
the  list  of  victims.  The  laws  immediately  made  it  a 
penal  offence,  and  it  fell  into  disuse. 

A  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  life  would  have  prevented 
all  this  victimizing,  as  it  would  also  correct  many  popu- 
lar prejudices,  You  wished  me,  some  time  since,  to 
vaccinate  your  son  George,  because  more  than  seven 
years  had  elapsed  since  he  had  taken  the  cow-pox,  and 
I  could  not  then  explain  the  reason  why  I  did  not  think 
it  was  necessary. 

Our  bodies  are  perpetually  changing ;  they  are  not 
tne  same  to-morrow  as  to-day.  This  fact,  which  they 
could  perceive  but  not  explain,  puzzled  the  ancients : 
"  To  be  another,  yet  the  same  !"  was  the  astonished  ex- 
clamation of  an  old  philosopher.  By  the  constant  ab- 
sorption and  deposition  of  matter,  it  has  been  computed 
that  we  undergo  a  total  change  every  seven  years  ;  and 
persons  informed  of  this,  think  the  effect  of  vaccination 
worn  off,  when  every  particle  of  matter  that  was 
present  in  the  body  at  the  time  of  the  operation  is  de- 
parted. The  life  piinciple  is  entirely  forgotten  in  this 
estimate ;  impressions  made  on  it  are  indelible  ;  every 
particle  of  matter  it  directs  to  be  removed,  is  replaced 
by  an  exactly  similar  particle  ;  thus  a  depression  in  the 


priests  of  nature.  i25 

skin,  or  mark  of  any  kind,  often  remains  for  life.  When 
perfectly  vaccinated,  the  system  is  forever  surely  guard- 
ed against  the  attacks  of  small-pox;  but  when  an} 
doubt  exists  relative  to  the  former  effect,  it  is  well  to 
repeat  the  operation. 

You  must  not  be  surprised  to  find  doctors  often  disa- 
greeing with  this  explanation  ;  for  there  are  as  many  sects 
in  medicine  as  in  theology.  Many  of  them,  perhaps  a 
majority,  consider  the  human  body  a  vast  chemical  la- 
boratory, and  scoff  at  the  notion  of  a  life  power.  Some 
of  these  affirm,  and  others  deny,  the  existence  of  an  im- 
mortal soul,  by  which  last,  when  allowed  to  remain, 
those  who  believe  in  it  solve  all  the  living  problems 
chemistry  cannot  explain. 

Since  the  days  of  Hippocrates,  or  rather  his  ancestor 
Esculapius,  there  has  always  been  a  church  of  faithful 
priests  of  nature,  who  closely  observed  her  laws  and 
obeyed  her  dictates.  One  after  another  of  these  hatf 
added  his  quota  to  the  general  amount  of  information, 
till,  being  fully  prepared  for  generalizing,  the  great  prin- 
ciples of  health  and  disease  have  been  established,  which 
no  doubt  will  continue  in  force  till  this  mortal  puts  on 
immortality.  These  true  physicians  are  known  under 
the  name  of  vitalists,  or  observers  of  life. 

Our  opponents,  when  they  talk  of  uncertainty  and 
confusion,  but  proclaim  the  chaos  existing  in  their  own 
minds,  on  which  the  spirit  of  truth  had  never  moved  to 
correct  disorder,  and  impart  life  and  light. 


CONVERSATION    VIII. 

PREVISION. 

Doctor.  The  patient,  while  under  the  influence  of 
fascination,  will,  in  some  cases,  often  materially  assist 
the  treatment  by  prescribing  remedies  for  himself,  his 
instinctive  laculties  undergoing  remarkable  develop- 
ments. 

This- power  has  been  named  prevision  ;  but  I  think  it 
is  susceptible  of  a  two-fold  distinction — that  which  re 
lates  1o  the  organism,  and  by  perceiving  "«  series  of 
organic  movements,  consequent  one  upon  the  other"  and 
thence  foretelling  results  ;  and  that  which  is  probably  the 
communication  of  a  superior  being,  in  attendance  upon 
us,  and  whose  revelations  are  made  only  for  special 
purposes. 

We  will  name  the  first  organic,  and  the  second 
revealed,  prevision. 

Lady.  This  organic  prevision  seems  to  me  nothing 
more  than  a  development  of  the  vis  medicatrix  naturae. 

Doctor.  It  certainly  resembles  it  in  many  particu- 
lars, and  the  fact  of  its  being  possessed  by  the  lower 
animals  to  a  considerable  extent  favors  your  view. 

Bruce  tells  us  that  the  African  Arabs  secure  them- 
se.ves  from  the  mortal  consequences  attending  the  bite 
of  serpents,  by  chewing  a  particular  root,  and  washing 
themselves  with  an  infusion  of  certain  plants  in  water ; 
he  gives  a  particular  account  of  several  of  these  plants, 
some  of  which  seem  only  capable  of  acting  against  the 


CURATIVE    INSTINCTS.  127 

power  of  the  serpent ;  others,  only  against  that  of  the 
scorpion  ;  anbl  a  third  sort,  against  both ;  and  all  wil 
operate  both  as  an  antidote  and  preventive.  Vargus 
throws  considerable  light  on  the  manner  in  which  the 
Arabs  acquired  the  knowledge  of  these  plants  ;  he  was 
a  gentleman  residing  at  Santa  Fe,  (S.  A.,)  who  was 
accustomed  to  venture  into  the  open  fields  and  .seize  the 
largest  and  most  venomous  serpents,  from  whose  bite 
he  was  perfectly  protected  by  drinking  a  small  portion 
of  the  juice  of  the  quaco-wilhy,  and  inserting  some  in 
punctures  made  in  his  hands,  breast,  and  feet.  The 
name  of  the  plant  is  derived  from  the  Indian  term  for 
the  serpent  hawk,  who  was  observed,  before  attacking 
poisonous  serpents,  to  suck  its  juice,  which,  when  tried 
for  the  same  purpose  by  mankind,  proved  equally  effi 
cacious. 

An  old  writer  long  since  remarked  that  no  fact  ap- 
peared better  attested,  in  the  history  of  human  know- 
ledge, than  that  of  a  proficiency  in  the  art  of  practical 
physic,  far  beyond  the  scope  of  their  other  attainments  j 
forming  a  curious  but  unfailing  trait  in  the  character  of 
savages.  Now,  whether  that  proficiency  was  attained 
b)  observations  made  on  the  instincts  of  the  lower 
animals,  or  the  result  of  their  own  organic  prevision  in 
a  fascinated  state,  it  is  hard  to  discover  ;  perhaps  it  was 
compounded  of  both. 

The  apes  of  Abyssinia  are  reported  to  have,  by  trials 
on  themselves,  first  exhibited  to  men  the  laxative  pro- 
per  ties  of  the  cassia  fistula.  A  dog  having  had  some 
sheep's  blood  injected  into  his  veins,  was  observed  to 
immediately  Degin  eating  grass  ;  and  this  w7as  consid- 
ered by  the  transfusers  sufficient  evidence  that  the  na- 
fure  of  each  animal  resided  in  the  blood,  and  that  the 


128  TOAD    AND    3PIDER. 

dog  wou.d  in  future  partake  of  the  qualities  of  the 
sheep.  A  gross  error  ;  the  organic  prevision  of  the 
dog  warned  him  that  to  produce  vomiting  was  to  ob- 
tain relief  from  the  pain  caused  by  his  cruel  tormentors  , 
hence  his  conduct ;  for  he  is  commonly  observed,  when 
sick,  to  eat  a  quantity  of  prickly  grass,  an  expedient 
that  seldom  fails  to  answer  the  purposes  of  an  emetic. 

Lady.  I  was  once  called,  while  in  the  country,  to 
witness  something  of  this  kind.  It  was  a  toad  fighting 
with  a  large  spider ;  every  time  the  toad  was  bitten,  it 
ran  off,  and,  having  eaten  some  plantain  leaves,  would 
return  to  the  fight.  A  person  present,  while  the  frog 
was  trying  to  reach  the  plantain,  covered  it  up  ;  he 
swelled  up  immediately,  and  died  in  consequence. 

I  am  aware  that  hogs,  after  being  kept  for  some  time 
without  salt,  refuse  food,  and  greedily  devour  ashes  or 
cinders  in  great  quantities.  Some  time  ago,  I  met  with 
an  anecdote  of  a  gentleman  who,  when  sick,  never  used 
medicine  ;  giving,  as  reason,  the  example  of  a  monkey 
in  his  possession,  that,  if  ill,  would  abstain  from  food 
a  few  days,  when  he  was  always  sure  to  recover  health 
and  spirits. 

Doctor.  But  that  the  fascinated  patients  of  the  Egyp- 
tian temples  remembered  their  visions,  I  should  have 
classed  such  cases  in  organic  prevision :  as  an  instance 
of  the  latter  faculty,  I  will  quote  a  case  from  the  report 
of  the  commission  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Medicine, 
and  vouched  for  by  them. 

"  Pierre  Cazot,  twenty  years  of  age,  a  working  hatter.,  bora  of  an 
epileptic  mother,  has  been  subject,  from  ten  years  of  age,  to  attacks  of 
epilepsy,  which  have  recurred  five  or  six  times  a  week  up  to  the  time 
when  he  entered  the  H'opital  de  la  Charite,  in  the  early  part  of  the 
month  of  August,  1827.  He  was  at  once  magnetized  by  M.  Foissac,  wa.s 
olaced  in  the  magnetic  sleep  at  the  third  sitting,  and  became  somnamba- 


ORGANIC    PREV  SION.  l29 

dc  at  the  tenth,  which  took  place  on  the  19th  of  August.  It  was  on 
that  day,  at  nine  "o'clock  in  the  morning,  that  he  announced,  that  on  tha 
same  day,  at  four  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  he  should  have  an  attack  of 
epilepsy ;  but  that  it  might  be  prevented,  if  he  was  magnetized  a  littla 
Defore  that  period.  The  verification  of  his  prediction  was  preferred— 
and,  therefore,  no  precaution  was  taken  to  prevent  the  paroxysm ;  we 
contented  ourselves  with  observing  him,  without  his  having  any  suspicion 
that  we  were  doing  so.  At  one  o'clock  he  was  seized  with  a  violent 
headache ; — at  three  he  was  obliged  to  go  to  bed, — and  at  four  o'clock 
precisely  the  paroxysm  attacked  him,  and  lasted  about  five  minutes. 
Two  days  afterwards,  Cazot  being  in  somnambulism,  M.  Fouquier  sud 
denly  thrust  a  pin,  of  an  inch  long,  between  the  thumb  and  the  forefin- 
ger of  the  right  hand  ;  with  the  same  pin,  he  also  pierced  the  lobe  of  the 
ear; — and  the  eyelids  being  "separated,  the  white  of  the  eye  itself  was 
repeatedly  struck  with  the  head  of  the  pin  without  occasioning  the 
smallest  indication  of  sensibility. 

"  The  commission  met  at  the  Hopital  de  la  Charite  on  the  24th  of  August, 
at  nine  in  the  morning,  in  order  to  observe  the  experiments  which  M. 
Fouquier,  one  of  its  members,  proposed  continuing  upon  this  in.valid. 

"  At  this  seance,  M.  Fouquier  took  his  station  about  six  feet  in  front  of 
Cazot:  he  looked  at  him  firmly — made  use  of  no  passes  with  the  hands,— 
observed  the  most  perfect  silence,  and  Cazot  was  asleep  in  eight  minutes. 
At  three  different  times,  a  bottle  of  ammonia  was  held  under  his  nose- 
he  countenance  became  flushed — the  breathing  quickened,  but  he  did 
iot  awaken.  M.  Fouquier  thrust  a  pin  an  inch  long  into  the  fore-arm; 
fterwards,  another  pin  was  thrust  to  the  depth  of  two  lines,  obliquely 
tnder  the  chest ; — a  third  was  similarly  inserted  into  the  pit  of  the  sto- 
nach ;  and  a  fourth  was  thrust  perpendicularly  into  the  sole  of  the  foot. 
11.  Guersent  pinched  him  in  the  fore-arm  so  severely  as  to  leave  a  bruise 
nark  ; — and  M.  Itard  leaned  the  whole  weight  of  his  body  upon  hia 
thigh. 

"  We  endeavored  to  tickle  him  by  lightly  passing  a  little  piece  of 
paper  under  the  nose,  upon  the  lips,  upon  the  eyebrows,  the  eyelashes, 
the  neck,  and  the  soles  of  the  feet — but  nothing  could  awaken  him.  We 
then  urged  him  with  questions.  '  How  many  more  attacks  will  you 
have  ?'  '  During  a  year.'  '  Do  you  know  whether  these  attacks  will  be 
near  to  each  other  ?'  '  No.'  '  Will  you  have  one  this  month  V  'I  shall 
have  a  fit  on  Monday  the  27th,  at  twenty  minutes  before  three  o'clock. 
'  Wi  I  it  be  a  strong  one  ?'  'It  will  not  be  half  so  strong  as  the  last.'  '  On 
what  other  day  will  you  have  an  attack  V  After  an  expression  of  impa- 
tience, he  answered, — '  A  fortnight  hence,  that  is  to  say,  on  the  7th  of 
September.'   '  At  what  hour  ?'    '  At  ten  minutes  before  six  in  the  morning.' 

il  The  illness  of  one  of  his  children  obliged  Cazot  to  leave  la  Charite 
on  that  very  day,  the  24th  of  August.  But  it  was  agreed  that  he  should 
return  on  Monday  the  27  th,  early  in  the  morning,  in  order  that  the  fit 


130  CASE    OF    CAZOT. 

which  he  had  declared  to  be  impending  in  the  afternoon  :>{  that  day,  ai 
twenty  minutes  before  three,  might  be  accurately  observed 

"  The  steward,  having  refused  to  take  him  in  when  he  presented  him- 
self for  admittance,  Cazot  repaired  to  the  house  of  M.  Foissac  in  order  to 
complain  of  this  refusal.  M.  Foissac,  as  he  afterwards  told  us,  preferred 
dissipating  this  attack  by  magnetism,  to  being  a  solitary  witness  to  the 
occurrence, — and  consequently  we  were  unable  to  establish  the  exacti- 
tude of  this  prevision.  But  it  still  remained  for  us  to  observe  the  parox 
ysm  which  he  had  announced  for  the  7th  of  September.  M.  Fouquier 
having  caused  Cazot  to  re-enter  the  hospital  on  the  6th,  under  the  pre- 
text of  paying  him  some  attentions,  which  he  could  not  pay  out  of  that 
establishment,  had  him  magnetized  in  the  course  of  the  day  of  the  6th 
by  M.  Foissac,  who  put  him  to  sleep  by  the  simple  act  of  his  will,  and 
by  steadfastly  looking  at  him.  In  this  sleep,  Cazot  repeated,  that  the  next 
day  he  should  have  an  attack  at  ten  minutes  before  six  in  the  morning, 
and  that  it  might  be  prevented  if  he  was  magnetized  a  little  before.  At 
a  signal  agreed  upon,  and  given  by  M.  Fouquier,  M.  Foissac,  of  whose 
presence  Cazot  was  ignorant,  awakened  him  in  the  same  way  as  he  had 
put  him  to  sleep,  by  the  sule  act  of  his  will,  notwithstanding  the  ques- 
tions which  were  addressed  to  the  somnambulist,  and  which  had  no 
other  object  than  to  conceal  from  him  the  moment  in  which  he  ought  to 
waken. 

"  In  order  to  be  witnesses  of  this  second  attack,  the  commission  met 
on  the  7th  of  September,  at  a  quarter  before  six  in  the  morning,  in  the 
ward  St.  Michel,  at  la  Charite.  There  they  were  informed,  that  the 
evening  before,  at  eight  o'clock,  Cazot  had  been  seized  with  headache, 
which  had  tormented  him  all  night, — that  this  pain  had  occasioned  the 
sensation  of  beating  in  his  head,  and  that  he  had  had  some  darting  sensa- 
tions in  his  ears.  Ten  minutes  before  six  o'clock  we  witnessed  the  epileptic 
attack,  characterized  by  contraction  and  stiffness  of  the  limbs, — by  the 
repeated  and  forcible  tossing  of  the  head  backwards, — by  the  convulsive 
closing  of  the  eyelids, — by  the  retraction  of  the  globe  of  the  eye  towards 
the  roof  of  the  orbit, — by  sighs, — by  screams, — by  insensibility  to  severe 
pinching, — and  by  the  biting  of  the  tongue  between  the  teeth.  This  set 
of  symptoms  lasted  for  about  five  minutes,  during  which,  he  had  two 
remissions  of  some  seconds  each,  and  then  a  painful  relaxation  of  the 
Limbs,  and  sense  of  general  exhaustion. 

"On  the  10th  of  September,  at  ten  o'clock  at  night,  the  commission 
met  again  at  the  house  of  M.  Itard,  in  order  to  continue  its  inquiries 
Upon  Cazot :  the  latter  was  in  the  library,  where  conversation  had  been 
tarried  on  with  him  till  half-past  seven,  at  which  time,  M.  Foissac,  who 
had  arrived  since  Cazot.  and  had  waited  in  an  ante-chamber  separated 
from  the  library  by  two  closed  doors,  and  a  distance  of  twelve  feet,  began 
to  magnetize  him.  Three  minutes  afterwards  Cazot  said,  Ithitk  thai 
Fot8$ac  is  there,  for  I  feel  myself  oppressed   and   enfeebled.      At  the 


CASE    OF    CAZOT.  131 

sxpiration  of  eight  minutes  he  was  completely  asleep.  He  was  again 
questioned,  and  assured  us,  that  in  three  weeks  from  that  day,  that  is, 
on  the  first  ot  October  he  should  have  an  epi.feptic  paroxysm  at  ten 
minutes  before  noon. 

"  It  was  desirable  to  ooserve  with  equal  care,  as  on  the  7th  of  Septem- 
ber, the  epileptic  attack  which  he  had  predicted  for  the  1st  of  October. 
With   this   view,  the  commission  met  together  en  that  day  at  half-past 
eleven,  at  the  house  of  M.  Georges,  manufacturer  of  hats,  No.  17,  Rue 
des  Menetriers,  where  Cazot  lived  and  worked.     We  learned  from  M 
Georges,  that  he  was  a  very  regular  workman,  whose  conduct  was  ex- 
cellent,— and  that  he  was,  both  by  the  simplicity  of  his  mind,  and  by  his 
moral  principles,  absolutely  incapable  of  lending  himself  to  any  decep- 
tion :  that  he  had  had  no  attack  of  epilepsy  since  the  one  which  the  com- 
mission had  witnessed  at  la  Charitc  ; — that  not  feeling  himself  well  that 
morning,  he  hud  remained  in  his  own  chamber,  and  was  not  at  work  ; — 
that  at  this  moment,  there  was  with  him  an  intelligent  man,  whose  vera- 
city and  discretion  might  be  relied  upon ;  that  this  man  had  not  told  him 
he  had  predicted  an  attack  for  that  day  ; — that  it  appeared  that  since  the 
7th  of  September,  M.  Foissac  had  had  some  communication  with  Cazot, 
but  without  permitting  the  inference  that  he  had  in  any  way  recalled  to 
him  his  prediction,  since,  on  the  contrary,  M.  Foissac  attached  the  highest 
importance  to  the  circumstance,  that  no  one  should  speak  to  the  patient 
on  the  subject  of  what  he  had  announced.     At  five  minutes  before  twelve 
M.  Georges  went  up  into  a  room  situated  immediately  under  that  occu- 
pied by  Cazot,  and  in  one  minute  afterwards  he  came  to  inform  us   that 
the  attack  had   supervened.     We  hastily  ran  to  the  sixth  story,  that  is, 
MM.  Guersent,  Thillaye,  Marc,  Gueneau  de  Mussy,  Itard,  and   the   Re- 
porter, where,  on  our  arrival,  the  watch  pointed  at  one  minute  to  twelve 
by  the  true  time.     Assembled  around  the  bed  of  Cazot,  we  distinguished 
the  epileptic  paroxysm  characterized  by  the  following  symptoms :  tetanic 
stiffness  of  the  body  and  of  the  limbs — tossing  of  the  head,  and  occasion- 
ally of  the  trunk  ot  the  body  backwards, — a  convulsive  retraction,  and 
up-turning  of  the  eye,  so  that  the   white  of  the  eye  only  is  visible, — a 
very  remarkable  fullness  of  the  face  and  neck, — contraction  of  the  jaws,— 
partial  convulsive  movements  of  the  fibres  of  the  muscles  of  the  right  arm 
and  fore-arm; — soon  afterwards  so  decided  a  tetanic  attack,  that  the  trunk 
of  the  body  was  so  raised  as  to  form  the  segment  of  a  circle,  of  which  the 
only  bases  were  formed  by  the  head  and  the  feet ;  which  movements 
terminated  by  a  sudden  collapse.     A  few  moments  after  this  attack,  that 
is,  after  one  minute  of  relaxation,  a  new  paroxysm,  similar  to  the  preced- 
ing one,  took  place  ;  theie  were  uttered  inarticulate  sounds — his  respira- 
tion  very  frequent  and  interrupted, — the  larynx  being  rapidly  and  vio 
lently  raised  and  depressed;  and  the  pulse  beating  from  132  to  160  in  *■ 
minute : — there  was  no  frothing  at  the  mouth,  nor  contraction  of  th« 
thumbs  to  th*  inside  of  the  palm  of  the  hand.     At  the  end  of  six  minute* 


132  7ASE    OF    CAZCT. 

the  paroxysm  terminated  by  deep  sighs,  by  relaxation  of  the  limbs,  audi 
opening  of  the  eyelids. 

"  The  invalid  fixed  an  astonished  look  upon  the  persons  present,  and 
complained  of  being  painfully  stiff,  especially  in  the  right  arm. 

"  Although  the  commission  could  not  doubt  the  veritable  action  pro- 
duced by  magnetism  upon  Cazot,  even  without  his  knowledge,  and  at  a 
certain  distance  from  him,  yet  they  desired  to  acquire  a  new  proof  of  this 
state ; — and  as  it  had  been  proved  at  the  last  seance,  that  M.  Foissac  had 
had  some  communication  with  him,  and  therefore  might  have  told  him 
that  he  bad  announced  an  attack  for  the  1st  of  October,  the  commission 
wrere  also  desirous,  wbile  submitting  Cazot  to  some  new  trials,  to  lead  M. 
Foissac  himself  into  error  as  to  the  day  on  which  his  epileptic  should 
have  announced  as  the  next  for  the  return  of  the  paroxysm.  By  this 
plan  we  should  shelter  ourselves  from  every  species  of  connivance,  even 
supposing  ihat  a  man,  whom  we  had  always  seen  honest  and  upright, 
•  could  possibly  have  any  secret  or  collusive  understanding  with  a  man 
without  education,  without  intelligence, — and  that  in  order  to  deceive 
us.  We  will  confess  that  we  did  not  ourselves  do  this  injustice,  even  in 
thought,  to  either  the  one  or  the  other;  and  we  feel  bound  to  render  the 
tame  testimony  to  MM.  Dupotet  and  Chapelain,  of  whom  we  have  rnore 
than  once  had  occasion  to  speak  to  you. 

'  The  commission  met  again  on  the  6th  of  October  at  noon,  in  the 
library  of  M.  Bourdois,  at  which  hour  Cazot  arrived  there  with  his  child, 
M.  Foissac  having  been  invited  to  come  at  half-past  twelve:  he  was  exact 
to  his  appointment,  and  remained  in  the  ante-room,  without  the  cogni- 
zance of  Cazot,  and  without  any  communication  with  us.  We  sent  to 
inform  him,  however,  by  a  side  door,  that  Cazot  was  seated  on  a  sofa, 
placed  ten  feet  from  the  door,  which  was  closed,  and  that  the  commission 
requested  he  would  magnetize,  and  awaken  him  also  at  that  distance,  he, 
M.  Foissac.  remaining  in  the  ante-room,  and  Cazot  in  the  library. 

"  At  twenty-three  minutes  before  one,  while  Cazot  was  occupied  with 
the  conversation  which  we  carried  on  among  ourselves,  or  examining  the 
pictures  which  adorn  the  library,  M.  Foissac,  placed  in  the  next  room, 
began  to  magnetize  him :  we  remarked  that  in  four  minutes  Cazot  began 
slightly  to  droop  the  eyelids — that  he  had  a  restless  unquiet  air — and  that 
in  nine  minutes  he  was  asleep.  M.  Guersent,  who  had  attended  him  for 
his  epileptic  attacks  at  the  Hopital  des  Eufants,  asked  him  if  he  remem- 
bered him: — he  answered  affirmatively.  M.  Itard  inquired,  when  he 
ehould  have  a  paroxysm.  He  replied  that  it  would  be  this  day  four 
weeks,  (the  3rd  of  November,)  at  five  minutesafter  four  in  the  afternoon. 
He  was  then  asked  when  he  should  have  another,  to  which  he  answered, 
after  apparent  reflection  and  hesitation,  that  it  would  be  five  weeks  aftef 
the  one  which  he  had  just  indicated — the  9th  of  December  at  half  past 
trine  in  the  morning. 

"  The  proces  verbal  of  this  seance  having  been  read  in  the  presence  of 


CASE    OF    CAZOT.  liid 

M  Foissac  in  order  that  he  might  sign  it  with  us,  we  wished,  as  it  ha* 
Deen  above  remarked,  to  lead  him  into  error:  and  in  reading  it  to  him., 
before  presenting  it  for  signature  to  the  members  of  the  commission,  the 
reporter  read,  that  the  first  attack  of  Cazot  would  take  place  on  Sunday 
the  4th  of  November,  whereas  the  somnambulist  had  fixed  Saturday  tho 
3rd.  He  practised  the  same  deceit  with  regard  to  the  second;  and  M 
Foissac  took  a  memorandum  of  these  erroneous  indications  as  if  they  had 
been  exact;  but  having  some  days  afterwards  put  Cazot  into  somnambu- 
lism, as  he  was  accustomed  to  do,  in  order  to  dispel  his  headaches,  he 
learned  from  him,  that  it  was  the  3rd  and  not  the  4th  of  November,  that 
he  ought  to  have  a  return  of  the  fit,  and  he  informed  M.  Itard  of  this  on 
the  1st  of  November,  believing  that  there  had  been  an  error  in  the  pro- 
ces  verbal,  of  which,  nevertheless,  M.  Itard  maintained  the  assumed  cor- 
rectness. 

'•  The  commission  again  took  all  ihe  necessary  precautions  to  enable 
them  to  observe  the  attack  of  the  3rd  of  November; — they  met  at  four 
o'clock  in  the  afternoon  at  the  house  of  M.  Georges;  they  learned  from 
him, — from  his  wife, — and  from  one  of  the  work-people,  that  Cazot  had 
gone  through  his  customary  labor  all  the  morning,  till  two  o'clook  in  the 
afternoon,  and  that  during  his  dinner,  he  had  complained  of  headache; 
that  nevertheless  he  had  returned  to  his  work,  but  that  the  headache 
increasing,  and  having  felt  giddy,  he  had  retired  to  his  own  room — had 
gone  to  bed,  and  to  sleep,  MM.  Bourdois,  Fouquier,  and  the  reporter, 
preceded  by  M.  Georges,  then  went  up  stairs  to  Cazo't's  room:  M.  Geor- 
ges alone  went  in,  and  found  him  in  a  profound  sleep,  which  he  begged 
of  us  to  observe  through  the  door,  which  was  partially  open  to  the  stair- 
^ase.  M.  Georges  spoke  loudly  to  him — shook  him  rather  rudely,  pulled 
him  by  the  arm  without  awakening  him.  Cazot  was  then  seized  with 
the  painful  symptoms  which  constitute  an  attack  of  epilepsy,  and  precisely 
similar  to  that  which  we  had  formerly  observed  upon  him. 

"  The  second  attack  announced  at  the  seance  of  the  6th  of  October,  for 
the  9th  of  December,  that  is,  two  months  beforehand,  took  place  at  half 
past  nine,  or  a  quarter  of  an  hour  later  than  had  been  predicted,  and  waa 
characterized  by  the  same  precursory  phenomena,  and  by  the  same 
symptoms  as  those  of  the  7th  of  September,  ist  of  October,  and  the  3rd  of 
November. 

*'  Lastly,  on  the  11th  of  February,  1828,  Cazot  fixed  the  period  of  a 
new  attack  for  the  22nd  of  the  following  April,  at  five  minutes  before 
noon  •.  and  this  announcement,  like  the  preceding  ones,  was  verified 
within  five  minutes,  that  is,  at  ten  minutes  before  twelve.  This  attack 
was  remarkable  for  its  violence,  for  the  species  of  madness  with  which 
Cazot  bit  his  hand  and  fore-arm,— for  the  violent  and  repeated  shocks 
with  which  the  body  was  distorted  and  for  its  having  lasted  thirty-five 
minutes,  when  M.  Foissac,  who  was  present,  magnetized  him.  Very 
won,  this  convulsive  sta*e  yielded  to  the  state  of  magnetic  somnambnlitr'. 

12 


. 34  CASE    OF    CAZOTc 

during  which  Cazot  got  out  of  bed,  sat  down  upon  a  chair,,  and  said  th.^U 
he  was  very  much  fatigued ; — that  he  shtnld  have  two  more  attacks  one 
of  which  should  be  nine  weeks  from  to-morrow  (June  23rd,)  at  three 
minutes  after  six.  He  would  not  fix  the  second  attack,  because  he  muss 
think  of  what  would  take  place  beforehand,  (at  this  moment  he  sent  away 
his  wife,  who  was  present,)  and  added,  that  in  about  three  weeks  after 
the  attack  of  the  23rd  of  June,  he  should  go  mad  ;  that  his  madness  would 
last  three  days,  during  which  ha  should  be  so  mischievous,  that  he  should 
attack  every  body ; — -that  he  should  even  ill-treat  his  wife  and  his  child  j 
that  he  ought  not  to  be  left  alone  with  them ; — and  that  he  did  not  know, 
that  he  should  not  kill  an  individual  without  intending  it.  It  would  be 
necessary  to  bleed  him  from  both  feet ;  '  then'  said  he,  '  I  shall  be  well  for 
the  month  of  August ;  and  once  cured,  the  disorder  leill  not  return,  what- 
ever circumstances  may  happen  to  me  afterwards.7 

"  It  was  on  the  22nd  of  April,  that  all  these  previsions  were  announced 
to  us,  and  two  days  afterwards,  the  24th,  Cazot  wishing  to  stop  a  run- 
away horse  which  had  got  the  bit  between  his  teeth,  was  violently  thrown 
down  against  the  wheel  of  a  cabriolet,  which  occasioned  a  fracture  of  the 
left  supra-orbitary  ridge,  and  bruised  him  horribly.  He  was  conveyed  to 
the  Hopital  Beaujon,  where  he  died  on  the  13th  of  May.  On  inspecting 
the  body,  and  opening  the  head,  there  were  found  traces  of  recent  mem- 
branous inflammation, — purulent  collections  under  the  integuments  of  the 
skull,  and  at  the  extremity  of  the  choroid  plexus,  a  substance  externally 
white,  but  yellowish  internally,  and  which  contained  some  small  hydatids. 

"  We  see  in  this  history  a  young  man.  subject  for  years  to  attacks  of 
epilepsy,  for  which  he  had  been  treated  successively  ac  the  Hopital  des 
Eafants,  and  at  Saint  Louis,  and  in  consequence  of  which  he  had  been 
exempted  from  military  service.  Magnetism  acted  upon  him,  although 
he  was  perfectly  ignorant  of  what  was  going  on, — and  he  became  som- 
nambulist. The  symptoms  of  his  disorder  were  ameliorated ;  the  par- 
oxysms diminished  in  frequency; — his  headaches,  his  oppression  disap- 
peared under  the  influence  of  magnetism  ; — he  prescribed  for  himself  a 
treatment  appropriate  to  the  nature  of  his  malady,  and  from  which  he 
promised  his  restoration.  Magnetized  rcithout  his  knowledge,  and  from  a 
distance,  he  fell  into  somnambulism,  and  was  aroused  from  it  with  the 
same  promptitude,  as  if  he  had  been  magnetized  close  at  hand.  Finally, 
he  indicated  with  extraordinary  precision,  one  or  two  mouths  beforehand, 
the  day  and  the  hour  of  the  return  of  the  epileptic  attack.  Yet  nottoith 
standing  he  was  thus  endowed  with  prevision  for  attacks  at  so  great  a  din 
tance  of  time,  and  even  for  attacks  which  would  never  take  place,  he  did 
not  foresee,  that  in  two  days  he  should,  meet  with  a  fatal  accident. 

•'  Without  attempting  to  reconcile  all  which  at  first  sight  is  apparently 
contradictory  in  such  a  history,  the  commission  would  draw  your  atton 
lion  to  the  fact  that  the  px-evisions  of  Cazot  related  only  to  his  attacks  ;-* 
tfaaf  they  are  reducible  to  the  knowledge  of  organic  modifications  ui  him 


PREVISION    OF    SOCRATES.  135 

»eif,  which  were  preparing,  and  which  would  arrive  as  the  necessary 
result  of  the  interior  functions;  that  these  previsions,  although  of  greater 
extent,  are  really  precisely  similar  to  those  of  certain  other  epileptics,  who 
recognize  by  divers  premonitory  symptoms,  such  as  headache,  giddiness, 
irritability,  the  aura  epileptica,  that  they  shall  soon  have  an  attack.  Is  it 
then  surprising,  that  these  somnambulists,  whose  sensations,  as  you  have 
seen,  are  extremely  acute,  should  be  able  to  foresee  their  attacks  a  long 
time  previously,  according  to  some  symptoms,  or  interior  impressions, 
which  escape  the  notice  of  waking  men  ?  It  is  in  this  way,  gentlemen, 
that  we  may  understand  the  prevision  attested  by  Areta?us  in  two  parts 
of  his  immortal  works, — by  Sauvages,  who  also  records  an  example, — and 
by  Cabanis.  Let  us  also  add,  that  the  prevision  of  Cazot,  was  not  abso- 
lute, and  unalterable,  but  conditional;  since  in  predicting  an  attack,  he 
announced  that  it  would  not  take  place,  if  he  was  magnetized,  and  that 
in  point  of  fact,  it  did  not  take  place: — the  prevision  is  wholly  organic, 
wholly  interior.  Thus  we  easily  understand,  why  he  did  not  foresee  an 
event  wholly  exterior, — that  is  to  say,  that  accident  led  him  to  meet,  a  run- 
away horse, — that  he  was  imprudent  enough  to  try  to  stop  him,  and  that 
he  received  a  mortal  injury.  Thus  he  might  foresee  an  attack  which  was 
not  to  happen.  It  is  the  hand  of  a  watch,  which  in  a  given  time,  ought 
to  pass  over  a  certain  portion  of  its  facial  circle,  and  which  does  not  de- 
scribe that  portion,  because  the  watch  is  broken." 

Cases  of  revealed  prevision  are  quite  as  common  as 
those  of  organic,  and  have  been  known  a  much  longei 
period.  Socrates  presented  a  remarkable  instance  of 
"his  kind.  He  informed  his  disciples  that  he  possessed 
a  genius,  who  told  him  future  events  and  directed  his 
conduct,  and  whom  he  never  failed  to  obey.  He  often 
warned  his  friends  (by  the  advice  he  told  them  of  his 
genius.)  against  certain  courses  of  action.,  and,  in  every 
case  where  they  refused  to  profit  by  his  counsel,  disas- 
trous results  followed. 

He  predicted  all  the  events  of  any  importance  in  his 
own  life,  and  lastly,  his  death  and  its  mode.  After  sen- 
tence was  passed  on  him,  his  enemies  waited  but  tiie 
return  of  a  ship  to  put  it  into  execution.  The  night  be- 
fore the  vessel  was  expected  in,  his  disciples  were 
grieving  bittei/y  to  think  that  before  another  evening 


136  PREVISION    OF    CAZOTTE. 

the  philosopher  would  be  taken  from  them  ;  he  informea 
the  sorrowful  group  around  him  that  the  ship  had  been 
injured  at  sea,  and  would  not  return  for  thiee  days  ;  and 
the  event  happened  as  he  predicted. 

Cazotte's  famous  prediction  was  verified,  even  to  the 
minutest  point,  in  the  history  of  the  French  revolution. 
Newnham  takes  it  from  La  Harpe  ;  you  cannot  fail  to  oe 
intensely  interested  in  its  perusal — its  truth  is  undoubted. 

"  It  appears  but  as  yesterday,  and  yet,  nevertheless,  it  was  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  year  1788.  We  were  dining  with  one  of  our  brethren  at  the 
Academy — a  man  of  considerable  wealth  and  genius.  The  company  was 
numerous  and  diversified — courtiers,  lawyers,  academicians,  etc.,  and, 
according  to  custom,  there  had  been  a  magnificent  dinner.  At  dessert, 
the  wines  of  Malvoisin  and  Constautia  added  to  the  gayety  of  the  guests 
that  sort  of  liberty  which  is  sometimes  forgetful  of  bon  ton : — we  had 
arrived  in  the  world,  just  at  that  time  when  anything  was  permitted  that 
would  raise  a  laugh.  Chamfort  had  read  to  us  some  of  his  impious  and 
libertine  tales,  and  even  the  great  ladies  had  listened  without  having 
recourse  to  their  fans.  From  this  arose  a  deluge  of  jests  against  religion. 
One  quoted  a  tirade  from  the  Pucelle ;  another  recalled  the  philosophic 
lines  of  Diderot — 

'  Et  des  boyaux  du  dernier  pretre, 
Serrez  le  cou  du  dernier  roi' — 

for  the  sake  of  applauding  them.  A  third  rose,  and,  holding  his  glass  in 
his  hand,  exclaimed  :  '  Yes,  gentlemen,  I  am  as  sure  that  there  is  no  God, 
.is  I  am  sure  that  Homer  is  a  fool;"1  and,  in  truth,  he  was  as  sure  of  the 
one  as  of  the  other.  The  conversation  became  more  serious ;  much  ad- 
miration was  expressed  on  the  revolution  which  Voltaire  had  effected, 
and  it  was  agreed  that  it  was  his  first  claim  to  the  reputation  he  enjoyed. 
He  had  given  the  prevailing  tone  to  his  age,  and  had  been  read  in  tht 
ante-chamber  as  well  as  in  the  drawing-room.  One  of  the  guests  told  us, 
while  bursting  with  laughter,  that  his  hairdresser,  while  powdering  his 
hair,  had  said  to  him:  'Do  you  observe,  sir,  that  although  lam  but 
poor  miserable  barber,  I  have  no  more  religion  than  any  other?''  \V 
concluded  that  the  revolution  must  soon  be  consummated  ;  that  it  waj 
indispensable  that  superstition  and  fanaticism  should  give  place  to  philos 
ophy,  and  we  began  to  calculate  the  probability  of  the  period  when  this 
should  be,  and  which  of  the  present  company  should  live  to  see  the  rcigl 
of  reason.  The  oldest  complained  that  they  could  scarcely  Salter  them* 
selves  with  the  hope ;  the  younger  rejoiced  that  they  might  entertain 
&is  very  pnbable  expectation;   and  they  congratulated  the    Academy 


CAE3TTE.  137 

especially  for  having  prepared  this  great  worlc,  and  for  having  been  the 
great  rallying  point,  the  centre,  and  the  prime  mover  of  the  liberty  *». 
thought. 

"  One  only  of  the  guests  had  not  taken  part  in  all  the  joyousness  of  this 
conversation,  and  had  even  gently  and  cheerfully  checked  our  splendid 
enthusiasm.  This  was  Cazotte,  an  amiable  and  original  man,  but  unhap- 
pily infatuated  with  the  reveries  of  the  illuminati.  He  spoke,  and  with 
the  most  serious  tone.  '  Gentlemen,'  said  he,  '  be  satisfied  ;  you  will  all 
Bee  this  great  and  sublime  revolution,  which  you  so  much  desire.  You 
know  that  I  am  a  little  inclined  to  prophesy  ;  I  repeat,  you  will  see  it.' 
He  was  answered  by  the  common  rejoinder:  '  One  need  not  be  a  conjuror 
to  see  that.''  '  Be  it  so ;  but  perhaps  one  must  be  a  little  more  than  con- 
juror for  what  remains  for  me  to  tell  you.  Do  you  know  what  will  be 
the  consequence  of  this  revolution — what  will  be  the  consequence  to  all 
of  you,  and  what  will  be  the  immediate  result — the  well-established 
effect— -tile  thoroughly-recognized  consequence  to  all  of  you  who  are 
here  present?'  'Ah!'  said  Condorcet,  with  his  insolent  and  half-sup- 
pressed smile,  '  let  us  hear — a  philosopher  is  not  sorry  to  encounter  a 
prophet.'  'You.  Monsieur  de  Condorcet — you  will  yield  up  your  last 
breath  on  the  floor  of  a  dungeon ;  you  will  die  from  poison,  which  you 
will  have  taken,  in  order  to  escape  from  execution — from  poison  which 
the  kappinexs  of  that  time  will  oblige  you  to  carry  about  your  person.' 

"  At  first,  astonishment  was  most  marked  ;  but  it  was  soon  recollected 
that  the  good  Cazotte  is  liable  to  dreaming,  though  apparently  wide 
awake,  and  a  hearty  laugh  is  the  consequence.  '  Monsieur  Cazotte,  the 
relation  which  you  give  us  is  not  so  agreeable  as  your  Diable  Amoureux,' 
:  a  novel  of  Cazolte's.) 

"  '  But  what  diable  has  put  into  your  head  this  prison,  and  this  poison, 
and  these  executioners  1  What  can  all  these  have  in  common  with  phi- 
losophy and  the  reign  of  reason?  'This  is  exactly  what  I  say  to  you;  it 
is  in  the  name  of  philosophy — of  humanity — of  liberty ;  it  is  under  the 
reign  of  reason  that  it  will  happen  to  you  thus  to  end  your  career;  and  it 
will  indeed  be  the  reign  of  reason,  for  then  she  will  have  her  temples, 
and  indeed,  at  that  time,  there  will  be  no  other  temples  in  France  than 
the  temples  of  reason.'  '  By  my  truth,'  said  Chamfort,  with  a  sarcastic 
smile,  '  you  will  not  be  ane  of  the  priests  of  those  temples.'  '  I  do  not 
hope  it ;  but  you,  Monsieur  de  Chamfort,  who  will  be  one,  and  most 
worthy  to  be  so,  you  will  open  your  veins  with  twenty-two  cuts  of  a 
razor,  and  yet  you  will  not  die  till  some  months  afterward.'  They 
looked  at  each  other,  and  laughed  again.  '  You,  Monsieur  Vicq  d'Azir, 
you  will  not  open  your  own  veins,  but  you  will  cause  yourself  to  be 
bled  six  times  in  one  day,  during  a  paroxysm  of  the  gout,  in  order 
to  make  more  sure  of  your  end,  and  you  will  die  in  the  night.  You, 
Monsieur  de  Nicolai,  you  will  die  upon  the  scaffold  ;  you,  Monsieur  Bailly 
9n  the  scaffold ;  you,  Monsieur  de  Malesherbes,  on  tho  scaffold.'     '  Ah 

12* 


138  CAZOTTE. 

God  be  thanked,'  exclaimed  Roucher,    '  it  seems  that  Monsieur  has  nc 
eye  but  for  the  Academy;  of  it  he  has  just  made  a  terrible  execution,  and 

,  thank  heaven '     'You!  you  also  will  die  upon  the  scaffold.' 

Oh,  what  an  admirable  guesser,'  was  uttered  on  all  side?  ;  '  he  has  sworn 
io  exterminate  us  all.'  '  No,  it  is  not  I  who  have  sworn  it.'  '  But  shall 
we,  then,  be  conquered  by  the  Turks  or  the  Tartars  ?  Yet  again  .  .  .' 
'  Not  at  all ;  I  have  already  told  you,  you  will  then  be  governed  only  by 
philosophy — only  by  reason.  They  who  will  thus  treat  you  will  be  all 
philosophers — will  always  have  upon  their  lips  the  self-same  phrases 
which  you  have  been  putting  forth  for  the  last  hour — will  repeat  all  your 
maxims — and  will  quote,  as  you  have  done,  the  verses  of  Diderot,  and 
from  La  Pucelle.'  They  then  whispered  among  themselves:  '  You  see 
that  he  is  gone  mad ;'  for  he  preserved,  all  this  time,  the  most  serious  and 
solemn  manner.  '  Do  you  not  see  that  he  is  joking,  and  you  know  that, 
in  the  character  of  his  jokes,  there  is  always  much  of  the  marvellous.' 
'  Yes,'  replied  Chamfort,  '  but  his  marvellousness  is  not  cheerful ;  it  sa- 
vors too  much  of  the  gibbet:  and  when  will  all  this  happen?'  'Six 
years  will  not  pass  over,  before  all  that  I  have  said  to  you  shall  be 
accomplished.' 

"  '  Here  are  some  astonishing  miracles  (and,  this  time,  it  was  I  my.oelf 
who  spoke),  but  you  have  not  included  me  in  your  list.'  '  But  you 
will  be  there,  as  an  equally  extraordinary  miracle;  you  will  then  be  a 
Christian.' 

"  Vehement  exclamations  on  all  sides.  '  Ah,'  replied  Chamfort,  '  I  am 
comforted;  if  we  shall  perish  only  when  La  Harpe  shall  be  a  Christian, 
we  are  immortal.' 

"'As  for  that.'  then  observed  Madame  la  Duchesse  de  Giammont, 
'we  women,  we  are  happy  to  be  counted  for  nothing  in  these  revolu- 
tions: when  I  say  for  nothing,  it  is  not  that  we  do  not  always  mix  our- 
selves up  with  them  a  little;  but  it  is  a  received  maxim  that  they  take 
no  nolice  of  us,  and  of  our  sex.'  '  Your  sex,  ladies,  will  not  protect  you 
this  time;  and  you  had  far  better  meddle  with  nothing,  for  you  will  be 
treated  entirely  as  men,  without  any  difference  whatever.'  '  But  what, 
then,  are  you  really  telling  us  of.  Monsieur  Cazotte  ?  You  are  preaching 
to  us  the  end  of  the  world.'  '  I  know  nothing  on  this  subject ;  but  what 
I  do  know  is,  that  you,  Madame  la  Duchesse,  will  be  conducted  to  tho 
scaffold,  you  and  many  other  ladies  with  you,  in  the  cart  of  the  execu- 
tioner, and  with  your  hands  tied  behind  your  backs.'  '  Ah  !  I  hope 
that,  in  that  case,  I  shall  at  least  have  a  carriage  hung  in  black.'  '  No, 
madame;  higher  ladies  than  yourself  will  go,  like  you,  in  the  common 
car,  with  their  hands  tied  behind  them.'  'Higher  ladies!  what.'  the 
princesses  of  the  blood  ?'  '  Still  more  exalted  personages.'  Here  s 
sensible  emotion  pervaded  the  wlwie  company,  and  the  countenance  of 
the  host  was  dark  and  l?\?ering;  they  began  to  feel  that  the  joke  wai 
become  too  serious 


JOAN    OF    ARC.  13S 

"  Madame  de  Grammnnt,  in  order  to  dissipate  the  cloud,  took  no  notice 
of  the  reply,  and  contented  herself  with  saying  in  a  careless  tone:  '  You 
tee  that  he  will  not  leave  me  even  a  confessor.'  '  No,  madame,  you  wiL 
not  have   one — neither  you,  nor   any  one  besides.     The  last   victim   to 

whom  this  favor  will  be  afforded  will  be '     He  stopped  for  a 

moment.  '  Well !  who  then  will  be  the  happy  mortal  to  whom  this 
prerogative  will  be  given?'  '  Tis  the  only  one  which  he  will  have 
then  retained — and  that  will  be  the  king  of  France.' 

"  The  master  of  the  house  rose  hastily,  and  every  one  with  him.  Ho 
walked  up  to  M.  Cazotte,  and.  addressed  him  with  a  tone  of  deep  emo- 
tion :  '  My  dear  Monsieur  Cazotte,  this  mournful  joke  has  lasted  long 
enough  You  cany  it  too  far — even  so  far  as  to  derogate  from  the  soci- 
ety in  which  you  are,  and  from  your  own  character.'  Cazotte  answered 
not  a  word,  and  was  preparing  to  leave,  when  Madame  de  Grammont, 
who  always  sought  to  dissipate  serious  thought,  and  to  restore  the  lost 
gayety  of  the  party,  approached  him,  saying :  '  Monsieur  the  prophet, 
who  has  foretold  us  of  our  good  fortune,  you  have  told  us  nothing  of  your 
own.'  He  remained  silent  for  some  time,  with  downcast  eyes.  '  Mad- 
ame, have  you  ever  read  the  siege  of  Jerusalem  in  Josephus?'  'Yes! 
who  has  not  read  that !  But  answer  as  if  I  had  never  read  it.'  '  Well 
then,  madame,  during  the  siege,  a  man.  for  seven  days  in  succession, 
went  round  the  ramparts  of  the  city,  in  sight  of  the  besiegers  and  be- 
sieged, crying  unceasingly,  with  an  ominous  and  thundering  voice  :  Wo 
to  Jerusalem! — and  the  seventh  time  he  cried  :  Wo  to  Jerusalem — wo  to 
myself!  And  at  that  moment  an  enormous  stone  projected  from  one  of 
the  machines  of  the  besieging  army,  and  struck  him  and  destroyed  him.'  ' 

Joan  of  Arc's  case  will  appropriately  follow  that  of 
Cazotte  ;  it  is  also  a  matter  of  history,  and  may  be 
relied  on  without  the  slightest  hesitation.  Like  Socrates, 
she  openly  professed  herself  under  the  guidance  of  a 
familiar  genius,  whom  she  called  St.  Michael.  She  at 
length  fell  into  the  power  of  the  English,  by  whom  she 
was  (as  might  be  expected  from  the  ignorance  of  the 
age),  regarded  as  a  witch;  they  tried  her  as  a  heretic 
and  sorceress  by  an  ecclesiastical  tribunal,  and  after 
condemnation,  burnt  her  at  Rouen.  1  will  take  the  ac- 
count from  Newnham : 

"  On  the  12th  of  February,  1428,  on  which  the  disastrous  battle  of 
Souvray-Saint-Denis  was  fought,  Joan  said  to  M.  Robert  de  Baudricourt 


140  JOAN    OF    ARC. 

Governor  of  Vaucouleurs,  that  the  king  had  suffered  great  losses  beftr* 
Orleans,  and  would  experience  further  losses  unless  she  were  sent  to 
him.  The  exactitude  of  this  announcement  determined  Baudricourt  to 
send  her. 

"  The  next  day,  on  her  departure,  many  persons  asked  Joan  how  shv. 
could  possibly  undertake  this  journey,  since  the  whole  country  was  over 
run  with  soldiers  ;  she  answered  that  she  should  find  the  way  clear.  Nc 
accident  happened  to  her,  nor  to  those  who  accompanied  her,  and  eve 
very  few  difficulties  during  the  whole  journey,  which  lasted  eleven  days 
through  an  enemy's  country,  at  the  close  of  winter,  over  a  distance  of  one 
hundred  and  fifty  leagues,  and  intersected  by  several  deep  rivers. 

"  On  the  27th  of  Februaiy,  when  she  was  about  to  be  presented  to  the 
king,  a  man  on  horseback,  who  saw  her  passing,  employed  some  blas- 
phemous expressions.  Joan  heard  him,  and,  turning  her  head,  said,  •  Ha, 
dost  thou  blaspheme  the  name  of  God,  and  yet  so  near  to  death?'  In 
about  an  hour  afterwards,  this  man  fell  into  the  water  and  was  drowned. 

"  The  following  month,  Joan  informed  the  doctors,  who  were  commis- 
sioned to  examine  her  at  Poictiers, — 

"  1.  That  the  English  would  be  beaten ;  that  they  would  raise  the 
Beige  of  Orleans ;  and  that  this  city  would  be  delivered  from  the  saic 
English  ; 

"  2.  That  the  king  would  be  consecrated  at  Rheims; 

"  3.  That  the  city  of  Paris  would  be  restored  to  its  loyalty  ; 

"  4.  That  the  Duke  of  Orleans  would  return  from  England. 

"The  king,  in  couticil,  having  determined  to  send  Joan  to  Orleans, 
they  commissioned  her  to  conduct  a  convoy  of  provisions,  of  which  the 
j>lace  stood  in  the  greatest  need."  "  It  was  observed  to  her,  that  it  would 
lie  a  difficult  enterprise,  considering  its  fortifications,  and  the  English  be- 
fiegers,  who  were  strong  and  powerful.  '  By  the  help  of  my  God,'  an- 
swered she,  '  we  will  put  them  into  Orleans  easily,  and  without  any 
attempt  to  prevent  us  on  the  part  of  the  English.' " 

"  The  generals  of  Charles  VII.,  not  daring  to  take  the  route  which 
Joan  of  Arc  pointed  out  to  them,  the  convoy  was  obliged  to  halt  at  some 
leagues  from  Orleans,  from  the  want  of  water,  and  from  adverse  winds. 
Everybody  was  confounded  and  in  grief;  but  Joan  announced  that  the 
wind  would  soon  change,  and  that  the  provisions  would  be  easily  thrown 
into  the  town,  in  spite  of  the  English  ;  all  which  was  completely  verified. 

"  The  English  retained  one  of  the  heralds  whom  Joan  had  sent  to 
summon  them  to  surrender ; — they  even  wished  to  burn  him  alive: — and 
they  wrote  to  the  university  of  Paris  to  ccusult  upon  the  subject :  Joan 
assured  them,  that  they  would  do  him  no  harm. 

"  When  Joan  appeared  on  the  redoubt  called  the  boulevard  de  la 
Belle-Ooix,  to  summon  them  to  raise  the  siege,  these  loaded  her  with 
abuse,  especially  one  of  the  officers,  to  whom  Joan  replied,  that '  he  spoka 
falsely  and  in  spite  of  them  all,  they  would  soon  depart;  but  that  kt 


JOAN  OF  ARC.  141 

tpouhl  rteve^  see  it,  and  Mat  many  ofhis  people  would  be  killed.  In  fact 
when  the  fort  of  Tournelles  was  taken  this  officer  wished  to  make  hia 
escape  by  the  bridge  which  separated  the  fort  from  the  suburbs;  but  an 
arch  gave  way  beneath  his  feet,  and  he,  with  all  his  men,  were  drowned. 

"  Having  introduced  the  convoy  of  provisions  and  ammunition  into 
Orleans,  Joan  foretold  to  the  inhabitants,  that  in  five  days  not  an  English 
man  would  remain  before  their  walls. 

"  On  the  6th  of  May,  Joan  informed  her  confessor,  that  on  the  next 
day  she  should  be  wounded  above  the  bosom,  while  before  the  fort  at  the 
end  of  the  bridge.  And  in  fact  she  received  a  lance  between  the  neck 
and  the  shoulder,  which  passed  out  nearly  half  a  foot  behind  the  neck. 

"  On  the  morning  of  the  7th,  her  host  having  invited  her  to  partake  of 
some  fish  which  had  been  brought  him,  she  desired  him  to  keep  it  till 
night,  because  she  would  then  bring  him  a  stranger  who  would  do  his 
part  in  eating  it.  She  added,  that  after  having  taking  the  Tournelles,  she 
would  repass  the  bridge — a  promise  which  seemed  impossible  to  any 
body;  but  which  nevertheless  was  fulfilled,  like  all  the  other  impossibili- 
ties. 

"  The  irresolution  of  the  king  was  the  greatest  punishment  to  Joan: — 
'I  shall  only  continue  for  a  year,  and  a  very  little  more,'  said  she;  'I 
must  try  to  employ  that  year  well.' 

"  The  Duchesse  d'Alencon  was  greatly  alarmed,  on  seeing  her  husband 
at  the  head  of  the  army,  which  was  about  to  enforce  the  coronation  of 
ihs  king,  at  Rheims.  Joan  told  her  to  fear  nothing — that  she  would 
bring  him  back  safe  and  sound,  and  in  a  better  condition  than  he  was  at 
lhat  moment. 

"  At  the  attack  of  Jargean,  the  Due  d'Alencon  was  attentively  recon- 
noitering  the  outworks  of  the  town,  when  Joan  told  him  to  remove  from 
the  spot  on  which  he  was  standing,  or  that  he  would  be  killed  by  some 
warlike  missile.  The  duke  removed,  and  almost  immediately  afterwards, 
a  gentleman  of  Anjou,  by  the  name  of  M.  de  Lade,  was  struck  in  the  very 
place  which  the  duke  had  just  left. 

"  The  English  generals,  Talbot,  Searles,  and  FalstafF,  having  arrived, 
with  four  thousand  men,  to  the  relief  of  the  Castle  of  Beaugenie,  in  order 
to  raise  the  siege  of  that  place,  Joan  predicted  that  the  English  would 
not  defend  themselves — wonld  be  conquered,  and  that  this  triumph 
would  be  almost  bloodless  on  the  part  of  the  royal  army ;  and  that  there 
would  be  very  few — not  quite  to  say  no  one — killed  of  the  French  com- 
batants. In  truth,  they  lost  but  one  man,  and  almost  all  the  Engl'sh 
were  killed  or  taken. 

"Joan  had  told  the  king  not  to  fear  any  want  of  troops  for  the  expedi 
ti"n  to  Rheims,  for  that  there  would  be  plenty  of  persons,  and  many 
would  follow  him ;  in  truth,  the  army  increased  visibly  from  day  to  day 
an  I  numbered  twelve  thousand  men  by  the  end  of  June,  1429. 

f  When  the  army  had  arrived  before  Troyes,  that  city  shut  its  gates. 


142  ,  JOAN    OF    ARC. 

and  refused  to  yield.  After  five  days  waiting,  and  useless  efforts  of  capit* 
lation,  the  majority  of  the  council  advised  to  return  to  Gien;  but  Joan 
declared  that  in  less  than  three  days  she  would  introduce  the  king  inti 
the  city,  by  favor  or  by  force.  The  chancellor  said  that  they  would  even 
wait  six  days,  if  they  could  be  sure  of  the  truth  of  her  promises.  '  Doubt 
nothing,'  said  she — 'you  will  be  master  of  the  city  to-morrow?  Imme- 
diately preparations  were  made  for  the  projected  assault,  which  sc 
alarmed  the  inhabitants  and  their  garrison,  that  they  capitulated  next  day. 

"  Charles  feared  that  the  city  of  Rheims  would  oppose  a  long  resist- 
ance  to  his  arms,  and  that  it  would  be  difficult  to  make  himself  master 
of  it,  because  he  was  deficient  in  artillery.  \  Have  no  doubt/  said  Joan 
1  for  the  citizens  of  the  town  of  Rheims  will  anticipate  you.  Before  yon 
are  close  to  the  city,  the  inhabitants  will  surrender.'  On  the  16th  of  July, 
the  principal  inhabitants  of  the  city  laid  its  keys  at  the  feet  of  the  king. 

"  Daring  her  captivity,  Joan  made  the  following  predictions,  on  the 
first  of  March,  1430,  in  the  presence  of  fifty-nine  witnesses,  whose  names 
are  given  faithfully  by  M.  le  Brun  de  Charmettes: — '  Before  seven  years 
are  past,  the  English  will  abandon  a  larger  prize  than  they  have  done  be- 
fore Orleans,  and  will  lose  everything  in  France.  They  will  experience 
the  severest  loss  they  have  ever  felt  in  France;  and  this  will  be  by  a 
great  victoiy  which  God  will  bestow  upon  the  French.' 

"  Paris  was  actually  retaken  by  the  French,  under  the  command  of  the 
Marshal  de  Richemont,  and  the  Count  de  Dunois,  on  the  14th  of  April, 
1436. 

"  As  to  the  great  victory  which  should  prove  so  fatal  to  the  English,  M, 
le  Brun  thinks  may  be  understood  either  the  battle  of  Tormigny,  gained 
by  the  French  in  1450.  and  which  resulted  in  the  conquest  of  Normandy, 
or  the  battle  of  Castillon,  fought  in  1452,  in  which  the  renowned  Gen. 
Talbot  perished,  and  which  completed  the  submission  of  la  Guienne  to 
France. 

"  In  order  to  explain  the  expression,  will  lose  everything  in  France,  the 
game  author  recalls  the  fact,  that  the  people  in  general  restricted  the  term 
France  to  what  had  originally  composed  the  immediate  dominion  of  Hugo 
Capet  and  his  successors,  as  l'lsle  de  France,  POrleannais,  le  Berri,  la 
Touraine,  etc.  Thus  Joan  of  ,\vc,  born  at  Domremy,  at  the  extremity  of 
la  Champagne,  said  that  St.  Michael  had  ordered  her  to  go  into  France.' 

Lady.  I  have  been  reading  a  somewhat  similar  ac. 
count,  belonging,  I  presume,  to  the  same  class,  in  the 
"  Use  of  the  Body  in  Relation  to  the  Mind,"  by  Moore ; 
he  says  : 

"  There  is  another  form  of  supersensuous  vision,  for  the  existence  of 
which  we  can  scarcely  discover  sufficient  reason  unless  to  intimate  ax 


HEIMLICH    ZSCHOKKE.  143 

ondeveloped  faculty,  which,  in  another  state,  may  be  proper  to  man 
fae  nature  and  character  of  this  strange  endowment  will  be  besi 
expressed  in  the  language  of  one  who  believed  himself  to  be  possessed 
of  it.  Heinrich  Zschokke,  a  man  remarkable  for  the  extent  of  his  honor- 
able labors  as  a  statesman  and  an  author,  solemnly  writes  the  following 
passage  in  his  autobiography :  '  It  has  happened  to  me  sometimes,  on 
my  first  meeting  with  strangers,  as  I  silently  listened  to  their  discourse, 
that  their  former  life,  with  many  trifling  circumstances  therewith  con- 
nected,  or  frequently  some  particular  scene  in  that  life,  has  passed  quite 
involuntarily,  and,  as  it  were,  dream-like,  yet  perfectly  distinct,  before 
me.  During  this  time  I  usually  feel  so  entirely  absorbed  in  the  contem- 
plation of  the  stranger's  life,  that  at  last  I  no  longer  see  clearly  the  face 
of  the  unknown  wherein  I  undesignedly  read,  nor  distinctly  hear  the 
voices  of  the  speakers,  which  before  served  in  some  measure  as  a  com- 
mentary on  the  text  of  their  features.  For  a  long  time  I  held  such 
visions  as  delusions  of  the  fancy,  and  the  more  so  as  they  showed  me 
even  the  dress  and  emotions  of  the  actors,  rooms,  furniture,  and  other  acces- 
sories.' He  was  at  length  astonished  to  find  his  dream-pictures  inva- 
riably confirmed  as  realities,  and  he  relates  this  instance  as  an  example 
of  his  visionary  gift :  '  One  day,  in  the  city  of  Waldshut,  I  entered  an  inn 
(the  Vine)  in  company  with  two  young  students.  We  sapped  with  a 
numerous  company  at  the  table  d'hole,  where  the  guests  were  making 
very  merry  with  the  peculiarities  of  the  Swiss,  with  Mesmer's  magnet- 
ism, Lavater's  physiognomy,  etc.  One  of  my  companions,  whose  national 
pride  was  wounded  by  their  mockery,  begged  me  to  make  some  reply, 
particularly  to  a  handsome  young  man  who  sat  opposite  to  us,  and  who 
had  allowed  himself  extraordinary  license.  This  man's  life  was  at  that 
moment  presented  to  my  mind.  I  turned  to  him,  and  asked  whether  he 
would  answer  me  candidly  if  I  related  to  him  some  of  the  most  secret 
passages  of  his  life,  I  knowing  as  little  of  him  personally  as  he  did  of  me. 
lie  promised,  if  I  were  correct,  to  admit  it  frankly.  I  then  related  what 
my  vision  had  shown  me,  and  the  whole  company  were  made  acquainted 
with  the  private  history  of  the  young  merchant — his  school  years,  his 
youthful  errors,  and,  lastly,  with  a  fault  committed  in  reference  to  the 
strong-box  of  his  principal.  I  described  the  uninhabited  room  with 
whitened  walls,  wdiere,  to  the  right  of  the  brown  door,  on  a  table,  stood 
a  black  money-box,  etc.  A  dead  silence  prevailed  during  the  whole 
narrative,  which  I  alone  occasionally  interrupted  by  inquiring  whether  I 
spoke  the  truth.  The  startled  young  man  confirmed  every  particular, 
and  even,  what  I  had  scarcely  expected,  the  last  mentioned.  Touched 
by  his  candor,  I  shook  hands  with  him,  and  said  no  mere.  He  is,  profr 
&bly,  still  tiring  * 


CONVERSATION    IX. 

SOMNAMBULISM. 

Lady.  I  have  been  reading  Dendy's  Philosophy  of 
Mystery,  and  have  marked  a  number  of  eases  which 
seem  to  bear  much  resemblance  to  some  of  the  stages 
of  fascination. 

He  says  that  somnambulism  is  the  most  perfect  para- 
dox among  the  phenomena  of  sleep,  as  it  exhibits  actions 
without  a  consciousness  of  them  ;  indeed  so  complete 
is  suspension  of  sensibility  that  contact,  nay,  intense 
inflictions,  do  not  produce  that  mental  consciousness 
which  is  calculated  to  excite  alarm  or  even  attention. 

He  says  that  in  London,  1833,  a  man  was  brought 
before  Alderman  Thorp,  who  had  a  parcel  cUt  from  his 
arm,  although  he  had  strapped  it  tightly  on  to  prevent 
this,  as  he  was  often  falling  asleep  during  his  walk. 
Yet,  even  then,  he  usually  took  the  parcels  xo  the  proper 
directions. 

The  crew  of  a  revenue  boat,  on  the  coast  of  Ireland, 
about  two  o'clock  in  the  morning,  picked  up  a  man 
swimming  in  the  water.  He  had,  it  appeared,  left  his 
house  about  twelve,  and  walked  two  miles  over  a  most 
dangerous  path,  and  had  swam  about  one  mile.  After 
he  was  taken  into  the  boat  he  could  not  be  persuaded 
that  he  was  not  still  in  his  warm  bed  at  home. 

In  1834,  Marie  Pan  was  admitted  into  the  hospital  at 
Boideaux,  France ;  her  left  arm  and  hand  covered  with 


NATURAL   SLEttl'YVAKl.NG.  14£ 

deep  and  bleeding  gashes,  its  tendons  projecting,  and  the 
bones  broken.  She  had,  in  her  sleep,  gone  into  a  loft  to 
cut  wood  with  a  hedging  bill ;  thinking  she  was  cutting 
the  wood,  she  had  hacked  her  forearm  and  hand  until 
she  fainted  away  and  fell,  bathed  in  her  own  blood. 
She  had  felt  no  pain,  but  merely  a  sensation,  as  if  the 
parts  were  pricked  with  pins. 

In  1832  some  fishermen  near  Brest,  in  France,  were 
surprised  at  finding,  at  two  o'clock  in  the  morning,  a 
boy  about  twelve  years  old,  up  to  his  waist  in  the  sea, 
fishing  for  flounders,  ot  which  he  drew  up  five  or  six. 
Their  surprise,  however,  was  increased  to  wonder 
when,  on  approaching  him,  they  found  he  was  fast 
asleep.  He  was  taken  home  and  put  to  bed,  but  was 
immediately  afterward  attacked  with  a  raging  fever. 

In  18 — ,  says  the  Augsburg  Gazette,  Dresden  was  the 
scene  of  a  melancholy  spectacle.  As  early  as  seven  ir 
the  morning  a  female  was  seen  walking  on  the  roof  of 
one  of  the  loftiest  houses  in  this  city,  apparently  occupied 
in  preparing  some  ornaments  as  a  Christmas  present 
The  house  stood  as  it'were  alone,  being  much  higher 
than  those  adjoining  it,  and  to  draw  her  from  her 
perilous  situation  was  impossible.  Thousands  of  spec- 
tators had  assembled  in  the  streets.  It  was  discovered 
to  be  a  handsome  girl,  nineteen  years  of  age,  the 
daughter  of  a  master  baker,  possessing  a  small  independ- 
ence, bequeathed  to  her  by  her  mother.  She  continued 
her  terrific  promenade  for  hours,  at  times  sitting  on  the 
parapet  and  dressing  her  hair.  The  police  came  to  the 
spot,  and  various  means  of  preservation  were  resorted 
to.  In  a  few  minutes  the  street  was  thickly  strewn 
with  s*t.;aw,  and  beds  were  called  for  from  the  house, 
but  the  heartless  father,  influenced  by  the  giiTs  step- 
13 


14(5  OPPOSITION 

mother,  refused  them.  Nets  were  suspended  from  the 
balcony  of  the  first  floor,  and  the  neighbors  fastened 
sheets  to  their  windows.  All  this  time  the  poor  girl 
was  walking  in  perfect  unconsciousness,  sometimes 
gazing  at  the  sky,  and  at  others  singing  or  talking  to 
herself.  Some  persons  succeeded  in  getting  on  the 
roof,  but  dared  not  approach  her  for  fear  of  the  conse- 
quences if  they  awoke  her.  Towards  eleven  o'clock 
she  approached  the  very  verge  of  the  parapet,  leaned 
forward  and  gazed  upon  the  multitude  beneath  ;  every 
one  felt  that  the  moment  of  the  catastrophe  had  arrived. 
She  rose  up,  however,  and  returned  calmly  to  the 
window  by  which  she  had  got  out.  When  she  saw 
there  were  lights  in  the  room,  she  uttered  a  piercing 
shriek,  which  was  re-echoed  by  thousands  below,  and 
fell  dead  into  the  street. 

Doctor.  You  have  extracted  all  that  is  worth 
noticing  in  the  Philosophy  of  Mystery  ;  for  a  man  is 
certainly  unfit  to  treat  on  physiology  who  believes,  like 
Dendy,  that  electricity  is  the  source  of  life,  and  who, 
driven  to  confess  the  fact  of  the  existence  of  several  cases 
of  apathetic  trance  produced  by  fascination,  which  he 
quotes,  says,  "It  is,  I  believe,  quite  true,  that  they  were 
unconscious  of  the  operation  ;  but  even  this  is  not  safe. 
Pain  is  given  us  as  warning  against  extreme  injury, 
that  by  our  complaint  or  suffering,  the  surgeon  s  mind 
may  be  on  its  guard." 

Newnham  says  that  the  phenomena  of  somnambulism 
are  established  and  recognized  by  the  antagonists  of 
fascination.  And  that  in  fact  the  knowledge  of  som- 
nambulism rescues  many  of  these  natura.  phenomena 
from  the  alledged  dominion  of  sorcery  and  of  the  black* 
nrt,  under  which  they  have  been  classed  by  the  ignorant 


FAIRY    STORIES.  117 

and  the  short-sighted,  and  restores  them  to  their  proper 
position  as  the  natural  effects  of  natural  causes. 

Dendy,  continually  rushing  into  dilemmas  from  which 
he  cannot  extricate  himself  without  overthrowing  his 
former  positions,  remarks,  "That  whatever  may  be  th6 
influence  imparted  by  tractions,  the  phenomena  of 
excited  somnambulism  are  similar  or  precisely  to  those 
spontaneously  occurring."  "  In  a  word,  mesmerism  is 
true  in  part :  it  may  induce  catalepsy,  somnambulism, 
exalted  sensation,  apathetic  sensibility,  suspended  circu- 
lation, even  death.  Clairvoyance  and  prophecy  alone 
are  the  impositions  as  regards  its  effects,"  etc. 

In  both  cases  the  parties  remember  nothing  whatever 
of  the  recurrences  experienced  in  sleep-waking.  The 
actions  of  many  natural  sleep-wakers  explain  the  origin 
of  many  stories  of  pixey  and  fairy,  who  would  enter,  in 
some  cases,  the  houses  of  their  friends  at  night,  and  do 
up  all  their  work  for  them,  and  in  others  cause  much 
trouble,  to  whom  they  bore  ill-will,  by  breaking  their 
crockery,  overturning  chairs,  etc.  A  tailor  in  this  city, 
who  worked  for  a  shop  which  furnished  suits  made  to 
order  at  twenty-four  hours  notice,  had  taken  a  coat  to 
finish  by  the  next  morning,  under  the  expectation  of  his 
wife  assisting  him.  Arrived  at  home,  his  wife  was  ill, 
and  unable  to  do  anything  to  help  him  beyond  sewing 
the  sleeves.  He  worked  steadily  at  his  task  during  the 
day,  but  so  much  did  his  unusual  efforts  exhaust  him, 
that  despite  himself  he  went  to  bed  with  a  heavy  heart, 
for  he  dreaded,  with  good  reason,  the  loss  of  his  situation 
from  the  disappointment  of  his  employers.  When 
roused  at  an  early  hour  the  next  morning,  he  hastily  pre- 
pared to  resume  his  work,  when,  to  his  utter  astonish- 
ment, he  found  the  coat  perfectly  finished,  and  done  too. 


148  PERFORMING    DREAMS. 

he  confessed,  in  a  much  better  manner  than  it  was  possi 
ble  for  him  to  do  it.  Immediately  perceiving  that  it 
was  the  deed  of  his  guardian  angel,  he  fell  on  his  knees 
and  gave  thanks.  He  told  me  that  it  was  the  only  wa\ 
in  wThich  the  coat  could  have  been  made ;  for,  on 
account  of  his  exertions  the  preceding  day,  he  way 
utterly  incapable  of  working,  and  the  next  morning  could 
do  little  more  than  stand.  He  had  evidently  risen  in  the 
night  and  finished  the  coat  himself,  and  must  have  done 
this  in  complete  darkness,  for  a  light  would  have,  in  all 
probability,  (owing  to  a  peculiar  state,)  awakened  his 
wife,  and  they  had  but  one  room. 

Marcus,  the  freedman  of  Pliny,  dreamed  that  a 
barber,  sitting  on  his  bed,  had  shaved  him,  and  awoke 
well  trimmed  ;  Marcus  had  unconsciously  shaved  him- 
self. Dendy  mentions  that  early  one  morning,  at  a 
farm-house  in  Sussex,  England,  an  immense  number  of 
foot-prints  were  observed  by  the  men  about  a  gate, 
which  were  not  there  over  night.  On  their  return  the 
servant  girl  was  relating  her  dream;  that  she  was  told 
the  cows  had  got  into  a  wrong  field,  and  that  she  had 
gone  out,  opened  the  gate,  and  driven  them  back.  She 
had  been  observed  by  one  of  the  family  performing  her 
dream.  A  young  gentleman  at  Brenstein  was  seen  to 
rise,  get  out  of  his  window  on  the  roof,  and  take  a 
brood  of  young  magpies  from  their  nest,  and  wrap  them 
in  his  cloak.  He  then  returned  quietly  to  his  bed,  and 
in  the  morning  related  his  dream  to  his  two  brothers, 
They  had  slept  with  him  and  witnessed  this  feat,  of 
which  he  would  not  be  persuaded  until  they  showed  him 
the  birds  in  his  cloak. 

Dr.  Gall  relates  a  case  of  a  Mr.  Roggenback,  whc 
informed  him,  in  the  presence  of  many  persons,  that  he 


NATURAL    SLEEP-WAKING.  149 

nad  beer,  a  somnambulist  from  infancy.  In  this  state 
his  tutor  had  made  him  read,  look  for  places  on  the 
map,  (and  which  he  found  more  readily  than  awake,) 
and  perform  many  other  actions,  all  of  which  he  per 
formed  more  readily  than  in  his  waking  moments.  All 
this  time  bis  eyes  would  be  open  and  fixed ;  he  did  not 
move  them  in  the  least,  but  would  turn  his  head  to  vary 
their  direction. 

A  story  is  credited  to  Professor  Upham  of  Bowdoin 
College,  relating  to  a  farmer  who  rose  in  his  sleeps  went 
to  his  barn,  and  thrashed  out  five  bushels  of  rye  in  the 
dark,  separating  the  grain  from  the  straw  with  great 
exactness.  Captain  Brown,  of  Portland,  Me.,  while  at 
sea,  became  very  ill  and  confined  to  his  berth.  Those 
on  board  noticed  a  peculiar  stiffness  and  rigidity  of  his 
limbs.  Though  encompassed  by  timber,  and  unable  to 
go  on  deck,  he  saw  distinctly  all  that  passed  arocnd 
him ;  describing  many  vessels  that  passed  his  own, 
together  with  several  at  a  great  distance,  at  anchor ; 
and  told  all  that  took  place  on  board  of  them.  H15 
descriptions  were  confirmed  in  every  instance  where  it 
wras  possible  to  make  inquiry. 

The  letter  of  Mr.  John  Wise,  of  Lancaster,  Pa.,  will 
aptly  conclude  our  cases  of  natural  somnambulism  : — 

"  From  the  age  of  ten  to  fifteen,  it  was  almost  a  nightly  habit  with  n^e 
to  get  up  from  my  bed  and  travel  through  the  whole  house,  unbarriug  the 
doors  and  walking  through  the  different  apartments  with  the  greatest  ease 
in  utter  darkness,  sometimes  unlocking  the  back  door,  and  travelling  into 
the  yard  and  out-houses,  stopping  at  different  places,  and  examining,  ap- 
parently with  the  nicest  precision,  such  articles  as  happened  to  fall  in  my 
way. 

"  Yet  after  being  awakened,  not  the  slightest  recollection  remained  of 
what  had  happened.  During  some  of  these  nocturna.  excursions,  I  open- 
ed a  dormar  window,  and  crawled  out  thence  to  the  very  apex  of  the 
roof?     On  one  of  these  occasion5!,  after  getting  on  the  top  of  the  house,  I 

13* 


150  CASE    OF    JOHN    WISE. 

was  awakened  by  a  slight  shower  of  rain,  and  it  was  with  difficulty  I 
made  a  safe  descent  by  way  of  the  next  neighbor's  house,  which  obliged 
toe  to  rouse  the  family  in  order  to  get  back  to  my  bed  again. 

"  The  most  singular  feat,  however,  tha;  I  performed  in  the  somnambu 
lie  state,  was  a  situation  that  I  got  into,  out  of  which  I  could  not  extricate 
myself  again  in  a  waking  state,  neither  could  I,  upon  trial,  without  the 
Assistance  of  something  to  step  on  first,  get  into  it  again.  The  room  in 
j/hich  1  slept  at  this  time,  had  in  it  an  old-fashioned  cradle  of  double 
3ngth,  made  for  twin  babes.  This  was  placed  upon  a  long  narrow  keg, 
which  stood  on  its  ends,  so  that  when  standing  alongside  of  it,  the  sides 
of  the  cradle  enme  within  two  inches  of  my  chin,  and  it  was  so  poised, 
that  a  slight  p  ponderance  either  way  would  capsize  it.  During  one  of 
ray  nocturnal  erambulations  in  the  middle  of  the  night,  by  some  means  I 
got  into  this  ,adle,  without  the  assistance  of  anything  that  would  enable 
me  to  step  i  /;  save  some  strange  inexplicable  cause.  It  was  a  cold  win- 
ter night,  and  I  became  awakened  while  in  the  act  of  pulling  books  from 
around  me.  which  were  in  the  cradle  at  the  time.  After  being  perfectly 
awakened,  it  required  a  great  deal  of  caution  to  support  my  centre  of 
gravity,  until  I  had  calied  the  assistance  of  some  of  the  family  to  enable 
tne  to  get  down. 

'•  In  the  somnambulic  state,  I  am  told  my  eyes  are  wide  open,  and 
have  a  glassy  appearance.  Although  I  would  answer  questions,  and  talk 
freebr  jn  subjects  that  were  indicated  by  my  conduct,  yet  it  was  next  to 
impossible  to  awaken  me  by  any  other  process  than  the  application  of  cold 
water.  After  a  more  advanced  age,  these  symptoms  have  taken  a  different 
form,  my  nightly  perambulations  being  confined  to  my  chamber,  and  they 
are  more  particularly  connected  with  the  organs  of  hearing  and  vision. 
It  does  appear,  that,  like  the  inner  vision  without  the  aid  of  the  external 
eye,  there  is  also  a  distinct  faculty  of  hearing,  independent  of  the  external 
ear.  This  has  been  experienced  by  persons  of  my  acquaintance.  I  have 
frequently  hastened  to  the  place  from  whence  sounds  appeared  to  come. 
Generally  it  appears  to  be  the  calling  of  my  name,  by  persons  whose 
voice  I  can  recognize ;  but  the  most  frequent  delusions  are  through  the 
eye.  These  symptoms,  from  their  frequency,  although  not  fearful  in  them- 
selves, have  been  of  late  a  source  of  annoyance,  and  they  always  occur  in 
a  half-waking  condition.  The  clearer  and  smoother  the  chamber  in 
which  I  sleep,  the  less  am  I  annoyed  with  these  delusions.  Of  these 
symptoms  and  their  operations,  I  have  a  tolerable  distinct  recollection 
afterwards.  I  generally  find  myself  sitting  up  in  bed,  in  the  act  of  getting 
up  and  moving  towards  the  objects,  which  mostly  appear  to  be  human 
beings,  and  often  persons  of  my  acquaintance.  Although  this  happens  t» 
me  in  a  half-waking  condition,  still,  I  possess  the  faculty  of  reasoning 
within  myself  upon  the  necessity  of  not  minding  these  delusions,  hut 
seldom  become  perfectly  satisfied  until  I  get  up  and  try  to  touch  the 
Dbject    but  invariably  get  awake  on  being  touched  by  another  person. 


DISEASED    SLEEP-WAKING.  151 

After  being  awakened,  it  has  often  appeared  to  me  that  a  conflict  had 
been  going  on  between  the  material  and  spiritual  functions." 

Lady.    Is  somnambulism  ever  induced  by  disease? 

Doctor.  There  have  been  a  great  number  of  cases 
recorded  by  the  medical  profession,  in  which  illness 
developed  the  faculty,  and  when  restored  to  health  it 
would  be  lost.  Many  of  these  cases  present  all  the  phe- 
nomena of  induced  prevision,  clairvoyance,  etc.  ;  and, 
what  will  seem  a  strange  fact  regarding  the  matter, 
none  ever  think  of  doubting  them,  not  even  the  most 
bitter  opponents  of  fascination  ;  yet  speak  of  them  in 
connection  with  fascination,  and  you  will  but  excite  their 
anger. 

We  find  a  case  published  by  two  French  gentlemen 
of  this  character.  The  patient  predicted  a  detail  of  the 
principal  events  that  should  happen  to  her  in  the  course 
of  the  following  years, — of  the  maladies  to  which  she 
would  be  subjected, — of  the  remedies  which  would  be 
necessary, — of  the  effect  of  these  remedies, — of  the 
crisis  which  she  would  experience, — and  of  the  precise 
period  of  her  cure  ;  all  of  which  were  substantially  cor 
rect  and  accomplished. 

Lady.  Do  medicines  ever  produce  symptoms  similar 
to  these  ? 

Doctor.  Quite  a  large  number  of  cases  produced  by 
medicinal  substance,  are  also  recorded  ;  the  cases  vary 
from  those  of  intense  mental  exaltation  and  development 
of  the  intellectual  powers,  to  catalepsy  and  trance. 

Dr.  O'Shaughnessy,  describing  the  effects  of  Indian 
iiemp,  tells  us  that  in  a  lad  of  excellent  habits,  ten  drops 
of  the  tincture  induced  the  most  amusing  effects.  A 
shout  of  laughter  ushered  in  the  symptoms,  and  a  transi- 
tion state  of  cataleptic  rigidity,  occurred    for  two  or 


152  WITCH    CAJLDHONS. 

three  minutes,  lie  enacted  the  part  of  a  rajah  giving 
orders  to  his  co  irtiers  ;  he  could  recognize  none  of  his 
fellow-students  or  acquaintances  ;  all  to  his  mind  seemed 
as  altered  as  his  own  condition ;  he  spoke  of  many 
years  having  passed  since  his  student  days  ;  described 
his  teachers  and  friends  with  a  piquancy  a  dramatist 
would  envy ;  detailed  the  adventures  of  an  imaginary 
series  of  years,  his  travels  and  his  attainments  of  wealth 
and  power ;  he  entered  on  discussions  of  religious,  sci- 
entific, and  political  topics  with  astonishing  eloquence, 
and  disclosed  an  extent  of  knowledge,  reading,  and  a 
ready  apposite  wit,  which  those  who  knew  him  best 
were  altogether  unprepared  for.  For  three  hours  and 
upwards  he  maintained  the  character  he  at  first  assumed, 
and  with  a  degree  of  ease  and  dignity  perfectly  becoming 
his  high  assumption. 

Similar  facts  were  known  in  ancient  times.  The 
Thracians  used  to  intoxicate  themselves  by  casting  the 
seeds  of  certain  poisonous  plants  into  a  fire  made  for 
the  purpose,  around  which  they  sat  and  inspired  the 
narcotic  fumes.  Moore  says  that  there  can  be  no 
doubt  that  the  incantations  of  witchcraft  and  magic 
were  generally  attended  with  the  practice  of  burning 
herbs  of  a  similar  kind.  The  ancients  deemed  certain 
temperaments  essential  to  the  reception  of  the  divine 
efflatus,  and  the  melancholic  was  considered  the  most 
suitable,  especially  when  aggravated  by  rigid  absti- 
nence and  the  use  of  narcotics,  (this  exactly  suits  Swe- 
denborg,  etc.)  Pliny  informs  us  that  the  soothsayers 
were  accustomed  to  chew  roots  supposed  to  be  of  a 
certain  species  of  henbane.  The  Hindoos  employ  the 
[ndian  hemp  for  the  same  purpose;  and  in  St.  Domingo 
,he  suppDsed  prophets  rhew  a  plant  called  cohaba,  that 


ORACLE    OF    DELPHOS.  153 

Jiey  may  be  the  better  able  to  look  int:>  the  unseen 
world  and  perceive  the  shadows  of  coming  events. 
Sophocles  called  the  priestesses  of  Delphos  laurel  eaterst 
because  they  were  in  the  habit  of  chewing  the  leaves 
of  that  shrub  before  they  mounted  the  tripod,  etc.,  etc. 

Townshend  tells  us  of  a  sleep-waker  who  played 
beautifully  on  the  flute,  and  was  accustomed  o  impro- 
vise upon  that  instrument  with  all  the  musical  genius 
he  possessed  ;  but  the  charming  strain,  once  uttered, 
was  lost  forever.  One  day,  in  sleep-waking,  being 
asked  to  write  down  a  composition,  he  instantly  seized 
music  paper  and  a  pen,  and  wrote  down  the  air  you 
observe  on  this  paper.  I  need  not  mention  that  he  was 
utterly  incapable  of  such  a  display  of  talenta  in  the 
waking  state. 


MUSIC 
POUR  LA  FLLTE. 


"# 


^  ^-f  ^    £ 


■6==^ 


t*ffi 


~i — r~r" 


~M. 


"i — r; 


/    ,^* 


/  > 

fin — roztr — i 


rr 


rr- ir* 


:iS3*-:F 


? — -j 1 


'FTpgF 


t:: 


r~ 


u — _r ■"»— I 1 — 1~    ' r-^-hKma> 1 — W~  f"i — 


ritenuto     c / 

— rr"i — 1 — 1 — r~ 


-■*-*4:#0. 


s 


ritenuto 


P 


CASE    FROM    SANDBY.  155 

The  following  case  of  diseased  somnambulism  is 
taken  from  Mr.  Sand  by.  It  is  related  with  singular 
truthfulness  and  accuracy. 

•It  is  perfectly  true,  that  our  poor  friend  who  has  now  been  some 
months  with  us,  presents  one  of  those  singular  and  almost  incredible 
cases  of  hysterical  or  nervous  affection,  which  are  at  distant  intervals, 
witnessed  under  the  dispensation  of  the  Almighty. 

(<  The  overthrow  of  the  regular  functions  of  the  nervous  system,  was 
occasioned  by  the  almost  sudden  death  of  her  father,  to  whom  she  was 
most  fondly  attached,  who  was  seized  with  illness,  during  her  absence 
from  him,  and  died  in  a  few  hours  after  she  returned  to  her  home.  I 
cannot  enter  into  any  longer  details  of  the  case,  which  has  been  attended 
with  all  those  varieties,  which  have  long  characterized  the  complaint, 
among  medical  men  as  the  Protean  disorder.  The  extraordinary  powers 
communicated  to  the  other  senses  by  the  temporary  suspension  of  one  or 
two  of  them,  are  beyond  credibility  to  all  those  who  do  not  witness  it;  and 
I  really  seldom  enter  into  any  of  the  details,  because  it  would  be  but 
reasonable,  that  those  who  have  not  seen,  should  doubt  the  reality  of 
them.  All  colors  she  can  distinguish  with  the  greatest  correctness  by 
night  or  by  day,  whether  presented  to  her  on  cloth,  silk,  muslin,  wax,  or 
even  glass — and  this  I  may  safely  say,  as  easily  on  any  part  of  the  body 
as  with  the  hands,  although,  of  course,  the  ordinary  routine  of  such  an 
exhibition  of  power,  takes  place  with  the  hands, — the  other  being  that 
of  mere  curiosity.  Her  delicacy  of  mind,  and  high  tone  of  religious 
feeling,  are  such,  that  she  has  the  greatest  objection  to  make  that  which 
she  regards  in  the  light  of  a  heavy  affliction  from  God  a  matter  of  show 
or  curiosity  to  others,  although  to  ourselves,  of  course,  all  these  unusual 
extravagances  of  nervoas  sensibility,  are  manifest,  for  at  least  twelve  out 
of  every  twenty-four  hours.  She  can  not  only  read  with  the  greatest 
rapidity  any  writing  that  is  legible  to  us,  music,  etc.,  with  the  mere 
passing  of  her  fingers  over  it,  whether  in  a  dark  or  light  room,  (for  her 
sight  is  for  the  most  part  suspended,  when  under  the  influence  of  the 
attack,  or  paroxysm,  although  she  is  perfectly  sensible, — nay,  more  acute 
and  clever  than  in  her  natural  state  J  but  within  this  month  past,  she  has 
been  able  to  collect  the  contents  of  any  printing  or  MS.,  by  merely  laying 
her  hand  on  the  page,  without  tracing  the  lines  or  letters ; — and  T  saw  her 
last  night  only,  declare  the  contents  of  a  note  just  brought  into  the  room, 
in  this  way.  (when  I  could  not  decipher  it  myself  without  a  candle,)  and 
with  a  rapidity  with  which  I  could  not  have  read  it  by  daylight.  I  have 
*een  her  develop  hand-writing  by  the  application  of  a  note  to  the  back 
of  her  hand,  neck,  or  foot ;  and  she  can  do  it  at  any  time.  There  ia 
nothing  unnatural  in  this,  for  of  course  the  nervous  susceptibility 
extends  all  over  the  surface  of  the  body,  but  use  and  habit  cause  u*  to 


156  CASE    FROM    SANDBY. 

limit  its  power  more  to  the  fingers.  Many,  even  medical  men,  take  upon 
themselves  to  declare,  that  we  are  all  (her  medical  attendants  as  well) 
under  a  mere  delusion.  We  ask  none  to  believe  anything,  il  they  pre- 
fer not  to  do  so,  and  only  reply — The  case  is  equally  marvellous  eithei 
way ; — either  that  this  our  poor  patient  should  be  thus  afflicted,  or  that 
eighteen  or  nineteen  persons  of  my  family  and  friends,  in  the  daily  habit 
of  seeing  her,  should  fancy  she  is  for  every  twelve  houi-s  out  of  the 
tweny-four,  doing  at  intervals,  that  which  she  is  not  doing.  There  are 
many  exhibitions  of  extravagant  powers  which  she  possesses,  that  we  talk 
of  to  no  one;  for  finding  it  difficult  to  acquire  credit  for  lesser  things,  we 
do  not  venture  on  the  greater.  Her  power  ceases  the  moment  the  attack 
passes  off.  A  considerable  swelling  has  at  times  been  visible  at  the  back 
of  the  head,  which  has  yielded  to  the  treatment. 

"  It  is  certainly  a  case  which  would  be  an  instructive  one,  in  the  con- 
sideration of  the  physiology  of  the  human  frame:  but  she,  poor  thing! 
«.s  most  averse  to  experiments  being  purposely  made  on  her ; — but  in  her 
every  day  life  among  us,  we  have  no  lack  of  proof  for  all  we  believe  and 
know. 

"  Between  the  attacks,  she  is  as  perfectly  in  a  natural  state,  as  ever  she 
was  in  her  life.  There  is  but  one  paradox  in  her  state ;  and  that  is,  that 
she  can  at  such  times,  hear  some  sounds  and  not  others,  though  very  much 
louder, — and  see  some  things,  and  not  others,  though  placed  before  her. 
She  could  hear  a  time  whistled,  when  she  could  not  hear  a  gun  hred  close 
to  her.  It  is  certainly  the  absorption  or  absence  of  mind  that  occasions 
this;  absent  to  some  things,  though  present  to  ethers,  Y\k*  a*,y  ab*erv! 
man  ;  and  thus  Dr.  Y accounts  for  it." 


CONVERSAI  ION    X. 

HISTORY    OF    FASCINATION. 

Doctor.  We  have  now  leviewed,  witli  a  rap  d 
glance,  the  six  stages,  curative  effects,  and  natural  con- 
ditions, simulating  the  phenomena  of  fascination.  To 
complete  our  plan,  I  have  compiled  a  brief  history  of 
the  matter,  which,  with  your  permission.  I  will  read. 

Lady.  I  am  anxious  to  hear  it.  It  certainly  appears 
strange  to  me  that  the  matter  should  have  been  forgot- 
ten through  the  middle  ages,  and,  until  very  lately, 
remain  unknown. 

Doctor.  That  it  was  known  and  practised  is  an  un- 
doubted fact,  but  it  was,  after  the  Christian  era,  confined 
to  convents  ;  and  many  a  miracle  at  the  tombs  and  othei 
depositories  of  the  relics  of  saints,  may  safely  be  referred 
to  this  agency  of  fascination.  In  some  instances,  the 
Escuiapean  visions,  prescriptions,  etc.,  were  repeated. 
St.  Gregory,  bishop  of  Tours,  tells  of  the  efficacy  of 
pilgrimages  to  the  tombs  of  saints.  Says  he:  "Any 
person  filled  with  faith,  coming  near  the  tombs  and 
praying,  will  be  speedily  cured  of  whatever  illness  may 
befall  them.  Some  affirm  that  the  saints  appear  to 
them  in  the  night  (of  course  while  sleeping  on  or  near 
the  tomb),  during  their  dreams,  and  reveal  the  proper 
remedies."  For  any  number  of  similar  instances,  see 
accounts  of  St.  Martin,  Protegene,  Moses  of  Lysbia 
Julianus  of  Edessa,  St.  Litard,  St.  Fortunatus,  etc.,  etc. 

Leger  quotes  George  Fabricius,  who,  in  his  Oommen 
14 


158  ROYAL    TOUCHING. 

tary  on  Poets,  1720,  p.  73,  says  that  he  saw,  in  Paduaj 
country  people  who  were  going  to  the  church  of  St. 
Anthony  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  salutary  visions 
during  their  sleep.  "This,"  says  Fabricius.  "exactly 
resembles  the  ancient  pagan  worship.  And  in  truth, 
even  at  the  present  day.  the  churches  of  saints  are 
resorted  to,  to  receive  the  same  kind  of  revelations  foi 
curing  disease." 

The  king  of  France,  from  the  time  of  Clovis,  was  the 
royal  fascinator  of  his  day.  Laurent  tells  us  that  one 
of  the  officers  of  Clovis  was  afflicted  with  scrofula  ;  the 
king  felt  much  concern  for  him,  as  the  resources  of 
medicine  had  been  tried  in  vain.  He  dreamed,  one 
night,  that  if  he  touched  the  officer's  neck,  it  would  be- 
come well  ;  he  arose  in  the  morning  and  did  so  ;  from 
that  time  the  power  remained  in  his  family. 

Marino  Cavalli,  ambassador  from  Venice  to  France 
in  1546,  thus  describes  the  operation  of  touching  for  the 
scrofula.  After  giving  a  description  of  the  reigning 
monarch,  Francis,  he  says :  "  Like  all  the  monarchs  of 
France,  he  has  received  from  heaven  the  singular  gift 
of  curing  the  evil.  Even  Spaniards  flock  hither  to 
profit  by  this  miraculous  properly.  The  ceremony 
takes  place  some  solemn  day,  like  Easter,  or  Christmas, 
or  the  festivals  of  the  Virgin ;  the  king  first  confesses 
and  receives  the  sacrament,  then  makes  the  sign  of  the 
cross  on  the  sick,  saying :  *  The  king  touches,  may  God 
cure  thee  !'  If  the  sick  were  not  restored,  they  would 
not,  doubtless,  flock  hither  so  far ;  and  since  the  num- 
ber 'augments  alwavs,  we  must  believe  that  God  takes 
this  method  to  deliver  the  infirm,  and  to  increase,  at  the 
same  time,  the  dignity  of  the  crown  of  France."  The 
power,  however,  it    seems  only  remained  with  them 


"*UEEN    OF    NAVARRE.  159 

while  virtuous  ;  for  the  abbot  of  Nogent  tells  us  that 
Philip  the  First,  who  at  first  possessed  the  gift  when  he 
ascended  the  throne  in  1GG0,  lost  it  by  indulgence  in 
vice. 

Many  other  monarchs,  determined  not  to  be  outdone, 
assumed  the  same  power,  not  curing  scrofula  alone,  but 
all  other  diseases;  in  one  instance  it  was  of  singular 
benefit  to  one  of  the  "  Lord's  anointed."  James,  the 
exiled  king  of  England,  engaged  himself  as  a  touchei 
for  scrofula  in  the  public  hospitals  of  France.  Fascina- 
tion was  also  useful,  in  some  cases,  to  the  royal  opera- 
tors themselves  :  Tytler,  speaking  of  Charles  VI.,  tells 
us  that  "  he  once  narrowly  escaped  being  burned  to 
death,  and  in  consequence  was  seized  with  a  dreadful 
fit  of  frenzy.  To  relieve  him,  they  sent  for  a  magician 
from  Montpellier,  and  he  became  somewhat  better" 

We  are  told  by  Beniveni,  a  Florentine  physician,  that 
he  had  a  young  man  under  his  care,  who  was  wounded 
in  the  chest  by  an  arrow,  which  surgical  skill  could  not 
extract.  After  a  time  of  great  pain,  this  faculty  of  pre- 
vision became  developed,  and  he  told  the  day  and  hour 
when  the  arrow-head  should  issue  from  the  wound,  and 
the  time  of  his  perfect  cure  ;  said  he  would  go  to  Rome, 
die  there,  etc.,  with  many  other  strange  particulars,  all 
of  which,  to  the  astonishment  of  the  narrator,  happened 
exactly  as  he  had  predicted  them. 

In  the  eighty-fourth  page  of  the  Life  of  the  Queen  of 
Navarre,  it  tells,  while  lying  at  Metz,  at  the  point  of 
death,  in  consequence  of  a  severe  fever,  she  described 
the  battle  of  Jarnac  in  every  minute  particular  ;  told 
the  victory  of  her  son  ;  his  falling  to  the  ground,  death 
of  the  prince  of  Conde,  and  flight  of  the  enemy ;  and 
the  information  was  confirmed  the  next  night..  \o  th# 


160  CHARLES    R.    HALL. 

astonishment  of  her  attendants,  who  had  thought  hei 
delirious  while  giving  it. 

Van  Helmont  tells  us,  that  "there  exists  in  man  a 
certain  energy  which  can  act  beyond  his  person,  accord- 
ing to  his  will  or  imagination,  and  impart  virtues,  and 
exercise  a  durable  influence,  even  on  distant  objects  " 

Cardanus  at  Naples,  in  1501,  performed  extraordinary 
cures  by  fascination.  He  declared  that  nature  had 
endowed  him  with  strange  faculties.  He  could  go  into 
sleep,  waking  at  will,  and  in  that  state  cure  himself  of 
an  occasional  attack  of  the  gout,  prescribe  remedies, 
see  at  a  distance,  and  correctly  predict  future  events. 
For  all  these  faculties  he  was  imprisoned,  as  a  sorcerer, 
at  Bologna. 

A  volume  might  easily  be  filled  with  facts  similar  to 
the  above.  But  it  is  unnecessary  to  recite  them  all ; 
when  once  attention  is  awakened  to  the  subject,  enough 
can  be  found  in  our  every-day  reading  and  observation. 
Suffice  it  to  say,  that  there  is  an  uninterrupted  chain  of 
evidence  from  the  earliest  times  to  the  present.  I  shall 
briefly,  then,  recount  a  few  of  the  most  remarkable, 
which  I  will  mainly  extract  from  Dr.  C.  R.  Hall,  a  bit- 
ter opponent  of  fascination,  but  who,  despite  himself, 
gives  such  evidence  in  its  favor — even  his  own  expe- 
rience proving  it — that  the  perusal  of  his  book,  "  The 
Rise,  Progress,  Mysteries,"  etc.,  etc.,  will  convince  any 
person  of  the  reality  of  the  subject  he  tries  to  injure, 
and  also  of  his  own  silliness  in  endeavoring  to  make 
ridicule  a  test  of  truth. 

In  the  seventeenth  century  there  appeared  in  England 
a  gardener,  Levret,  an  Irish  gentleman,  Valentine  Great- 
raks,  and  a  Dr.  Streper ;  and  in  Italy,  Francisco  Bag- 
none,  etc.,  all  of  whom  possessed  the  power  of  curing 


LIFE    OF    MESMER.  1G1 

diseases  by  touching  or  striking  with  the  hand.  The 
most  celebrated  of  these,  Greatraks  is  represented  by 
the  Lord  Bishop  of  Derry,  as  being  a  simple,  unpre- 
tending man,  and  sincerely  pious.  The  same  authority 
informs  us,  that  not  only  had  he  seen,  among  other 
cures,  "  dimness  cleared  and  deafness  cured  by  his 
-ouch,  etc.,  etc  ;  running  sores  of  the  king's  evil  dried 
ap ;  and  kernels  brought  to  a  suppuration  by  his  hand* 
grievous  sores,  of  many  months'  date,  in  a  few  days 
healed  ;  obstructions  and  stoppages  removed ;"  but 
"  even  cancerous  knots  in  the  breast  dissolved." 

Gassner,  in  1770,  excited  much  attention  in  Germany 
and  performed  several  miraculous  cures.  In  1794,  a 
Count  Thun  appeared  at  Leipsic,  professing  to  cure 
gout,  palsy,  and  other  complaints,  by  the  imposition  of 
his  hands  ;  he  was  of  a  weak  constitution,  and  his  suc- 
cess would  vary. 

Mesmer  was  born  in  1734.  He  was  a  severe  stu- 
dent, and  soon  became  a  proficient  and  able  physician. 
ft  has  been  truly  observed  that  from  time  immemorial 
the  mineral  magnet  was  employed  as  a  remedy  in  the 
cure  of  burns,  and  other  injuries,  but  it  was  not  until 
the  sixteenth  century,  when  alchemy  was  in  its  zenith, 
that  its  use  as  a  remedy  for  internal  diseases  became 
general.  At  this  time  there  was  the  earliest  specula- 
tions on  the  extensive  diffusion  of  the  magnetic  principle, 
which,  as  in  our  own  day,  was  made  to  explain  the 
motions  o.f  the  planets  and  the  laws  of  life. 

Mesmer  fell  into  the  universal  error,  and  commenced 
treating  the  sick  by  means  of  magnetized  rods,  which 
lie  obtained  from  Father  Hell  or  Holl,  a  Jesuit,  profes- 
sor of  Astronomy  at  Vienna.  His  great  success  aston* 
ished   himself,  and  very  much  chagrined  the  professor 


102  LIFE    OF    MESMER 

the  consequence  of  which  was  an  irreconcilable  quarre 
between  the  two.  The  acuteness  of  Mesmer  soon  led 
him  to  perceive  that  he  might  dispense  with  the  rods, 
and  that  he  could  produce  the  same  effects  by  merely 
drawing  his  own  hands  from  above  downwards  in  front 
of  his  patient. 

His  success  in  fascination  was  wonderful ;  for  a 
great  number  of  years  nothing  like  it  had  been  seen  in 
Europe,  and  the  fame  of  Mesmer  spread  rapidly.  He 
left  Vienna,  and  travelled  through  various  towns  and 
cities  in  Europe,  met  with  considerable  encouragement, 
finally  returned,  and  then  left  for  Paris,  where  we  find 
him  established  in  1778.  D'EsIon.  one  of  the  court 
physicians,  was  his  first  convert ;  others  soon  followed, 
and  the  majority  of  the  Parisians  declared  in  his  favor 
He  finally  surmounted  the  enmity  of  all  his  opponents 
and  retired  with  a  large  fortune,  the  result  of  his  bene- 
volent exertions,  after  founding  a  school  of  pupils, 
nearly  all  of  whom  became  celebrated.  The  facts  in 
his  experiments  were  allowed  by  the  French  Academy 
of  Medicine,  but  the  idea  of  a  fluid  denied. 

The  Marquis  de  Puseygar,  one  of  Mesmer's  pupils, 
having,  in  March,  1784,  fascinated  his  gardener,  found 
that  his  patient  was  capable  of  holding  a  conversation 
while  wrapped  in  induced  somnambulism.  He  found, 
moreover,  that  the  patient  not  only  understood  the 
words,  but  even  the  unexpressed  thoughts  of  his  mas- 
ter, and  would  answer  with  equal  clearness  the  intended 
question  while  it  was  yet  a  mere  suggestion  of  the 
mind,  as  after  it  had  been  conveyed  to  him  in  language 
This  was  the  origin  (wrongly  so  called)  of  induced 
somnambvlism. 

In  1778  Perkins,  an  American  surgeon  practising  ho 


TRACTORS    OF    PERKINS.  16a 

London,  invented  and  obtained  a  patent  for  his  "  metal- 
lic tractors."  The  tractors  were  merely  smail  pieces 
of  steel,  strongly  magnetized,  (nothing  more  than  a  dif- 
ferent form  of  the  magnetized  rod.)  They  were. applied 
over  the  affected  part,  and  gently  moved  about,  touch- 
ing the  skin.  Gout,  rheumatism,  toothache,  and  palsy, 
were  a  few  of  the  diseases  cured  by  the  tractors,  etc. 
Among  those  who  publicly  vouched  for  the  truth  of  the 
wonderful  cures  performed  by  means  of  the  tractors, 
were  eight  university  professors,  four  being  professors 
of  medicine  ;  twenty  clergymen,  ten  being  D.D.s  ; 
thirty-six  medical  men,  nineteen  being  M.  D.s. 

To  prove  the  error  of  these  doctors  of  divinity  and 
medicine,  two  men  in  Bath  had  precisely  similar  instru- 
ments made  of  wood,  painted  and  shaped  so  as  exactly 
to  resemble  the  real  ones.  These  were  publicly  tried 
with  all  due  solemnity,  at  first  upon  five  hospita. 
patients.  Of  these  four  were  affected  with  chronic 
rheumatism  in  the  ancle,  knee,  wrist,  and  hips.  The 
fifth  had  chronic  gout.  All  were  much  relieved.  One 
was  sure  that  his  knee  was  warmer,  and  thought  that 
he  could  walk  across  the  room.  He  did  so,  though  he 
had  previously  been  unable  to  stir.  The  following  day 
the  real  metallic  tractors  were  applied,  with  results  pre- 
cisely similar.  Mr.  Smith  applied  the  wooden  tractors 
to  a  patient  with  rheumatism  of  the  shoulder,  so  severe 
as  to  prevent  his  raising  his  hand  ;  in  four  minutes  tlu 
man  was  able  to  lift  his  hand.  In  another  patient  the 
fictitious  tractors  caused  so  much  increase  of  suffering, 
that  he  would  on  no  account  submit  to  a  repetition  of 
the  operation.  Had  these  sapient  individuals  but  half 
the  talent  of  Mesmer,  they  would  soon  have  discovered 
the  real  scurce  of  action. 


A  GENERAL     ""EELING. 

Fascination  has  beep,  known  and  practised  to  * 
greater  or  less  extent  in  the  United  States  since  the 
early  part  of  the  nineteenth  centur}  ;  at  the  presen- 
ting we  have  scores  of  lecturers  traversing  the  country. 
The  people  receive  it  rather  doubtingly ;  they  want 
some  show  of  reasoning  to  sustain  what  they  consider 
experiments  against  the  laws  of  nature.  To  show  the 
feeling  I  cannot  do  better  than  add  an  editorial  from 
one  of  mv  exchanges.  After  describing  the  scene, 
performers,  and  examining  committee,  to  the  latter  of 
which  he  belonged,  he  says  : — 

"  The  first  evening  the  lady's  eyes  were  bandaged  so  that  the  commit- 
tee were  satisfied  she  could  not  see.  On  Thursday  night  more  than 
usual  pains  were  taken.  Adhesive  plasters  were  put  over  her  eyes,  and 
they  did  positively  adhere  so  closely  to  her  skin  that  they  were  with  dif- 
ficulty removed.  Over  these,  soft  kid  gloves  were  spread,  over  these 
again,  a  handkerchief  was  tied,  secured  above  and  below  by  tape  strings. 

"  It  was  an  unusual  and  very  severe  test.  Her  eyes  were,  without 
doubt,  in  total  darkness — in  regard  to  that,  there  is  no  possible  mis- 
take ;  but  notwithstanding  all  our  precautions  in  bandaging,  she  did  see. 
She  read  the  names  of  a  score  of  uewspapers,  and  some  of  the  smaller 
print  on  them — she  read  writing  with  a  lead  pencil — told  the  time  by 
numerous  watches,  though  set  far  from  the  true  hour,  and  described  the 
watches.     She  also  read  several  bank  notes. 

"  She  held  the  papers,  etc.,  over  her  forehead,  at  the  lower  edge  of  her 
hair.  While  engaged  in  her  readings  she  was  very  sprightly,  and 
evinced  considerable  smartness — but  we  have  not  room  for  farther 
detail. 

"  In  regard  to  this  matter,  we  can  only  say  that  we  do  not  comprehend 
it.  If  it  be  trickery,  it  is  splendid  trickery.  The  jugglers  of  the  East 
astound  you,  but  they  prepare  all  the  machiuery — here  you  are  allowed 
to  prepare  the  subject  to  your  own  satisfaction.  In  regard  to  the  pre- 
sumption that  arises  in  the  mind,  as  soon  as  we  are  convinced  that  she 
cannot  see  with  her  eyes,  that  there  is  some  series  of  cunningly  devised 
and  secret  signs  by  which  communications  are  made  to  the  young  lady, 
we  have  to  say,  that  watches  and  papers  were  given  to  her  that  no  eye 
saw  but  our  own,  and  yet  she  told  as  usual 

•'Our  stubborn  skepticism  prompts  us  to  say,  that  though  witnessing 
such  bewildering  tests  a  thousand  times,  we  would  believe  we  were  a 
thousand  times  deceived;  before  we  woxi  grant  that  she  saw  with  he* 
ora-'n,  up  through  her  skull." 


surrRSTiTiONs.  lOfi 

L.xdy.  I  think  there  is  evidence  enough  on  the  sub- 
let of  fascination  to  convince  the  most  incredulous,  and 
were  the  matter  of  our  conversation  published,  no  one 
would  rise  from  its  perusal  without  being  a  thorough 
believer. 

Doctor.  In  advancing  the  various  arguments,  I  have 
merely  reviewed  the  substance  of  the  conclusions  that 
have  convinced  myself.  Some  curious  phenomena 
accidentally  observed,  led  me  to  examine  the  matter 
closely,  and  the  result  has  been,  not  3nly  an  entire  con- 
viction of  its  truth,  but  an  equal  conviction  that  that 
truth  may  be  made  so  plain  as  to  appeal  to  the  common 
sense  of  all. 

My  knowledge  of  the  subject  has  given  me  a  ;  iue  to 
unravel  much  of  the  history  of  superstition  in  this 
world.  I  have  found  fascination  to  be  a  most  terrible 
agent  of  imposture  in  all  ages,  as  we  have  before  seen 
Jehovah  punished  its  practice  among  the  JewTs  with 
death  ;  that  is,  its  practice  as  regarded  the  production 
of  spiritual  clairvoyance  for  purposes  of  divination  :  in 
other  respects  it  was  extensively  known  and  practised 
as  a  curative  agent.     Witness  the  case  of  David,  etc. 

In  our  own  day,  Robert  Cochrans,  Joseph  Smiths, 
Swedenborgs,  etc.,  etc.,  are  in  turn  gaining  hosts  of  fol- 
lowers, and  all  through  ignorance  on  this  subject. 
Fascination,  however,  will  most  assuredly  crush  them, 
and  so  wrell  is  this  fact  known,  that,  perceiving  its 
onwaid  progress,  many  of  them  are  even  now  endeav- 
oring to  wrest  its  phenomena  to  support  their  own 
views.  Professor  Bush  says  that  the  "  Clairvoyance 
of  Swedenborg  was  not  induced  by  human  agency." 
G/ante^,  "That,  unlike  the  magnetic  seers,  who  are 
n  a  state  of  internal,  but  not  at  the  same  time  of  extet- 


I  GO  swedenborg's  suiforters. 

nal  consciousness,  Swedenborg  was  in  both  at  once 
His  prerogative  was  the  opening  of  a  spiritual  sight 
whuh  left  him  still  in  the  enjoyment  of  his  natural 
sight.  Hence  he  could  know  and  distinctly  describe  in 
his  state  of  external  consciousness,  what  he  saw  with 
his  spiritual  eyes,  and  could  know  wTith  peifect  accu- 
racy, free  from  all  illusion,  what  w7as  going  on  around 
him  in  the  natural  world,  at  the  same  time  that  he  per- 
ceived what  was  transpiring  in  the  spiritual  world  ;  and 
so  perfectly  was  he  in  the  possession  of  external  con- 
sciousness while  in  the  exercise  of  his  spiritual  per- 
ceptions, that  on  one  occasion,  when  moving  in  a 
funeral  procession,  he  was  actually  engaged  in  con- 
versation with  the  spirit  of  the  person  whose  body  he 
was  following  to  the  grave." 

If  such  be  the  case,  and  Swedenborg's  supernatural 
claims  rest  on  the  fact  of  his  seeing  and  holding  com- 
munication with  both  worlds  at  once,  then  must  a  sin- 
gle well-authenticated  fact,  like  that  of  the  boy  who 
possessed  a  similar  power  mentioned  some  pages  back, 
overthrow  all  such  claims,  or  indefinitely  extend  them ; 
and  this,  too,  without  considering  that  Swedenborg's 
revelations  were  a  natural  sequence  to  his  former  philo- 
sophical speculations,  and  but  confirmed  them.  How- 
ever, as  my  object  in  these  conversations  was  more  to 
suggest  thought  than  enter  into  detail,  we  will  now  end 
them. 

Lady.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  give  me  some 
directions  with  regard  to  the  best  manner  of  fasci- 
nating V  As  you  think  ladies  as  well  as  gentlemen  can 
practise  it,  I  would  like  to  be  able  if  ever  called?  upon. 

Doctor.  With  pleasure  ;  and  I  do  it  the  mure  readily 
Decause  I  know  your  motives  in  such  cases  wou  d  bo 


MODE    OF    OPERATING.  167 

proper  ones.  It  is  certainly  one  of  the  mcst  remarka- 
ble facts  in  the  whole  matter,  that  the  moral  feelings 
exercise  an  extraordinary  influence.  Philippe  the  First 
of  France  has  not  been  the  only  one  who  lost  the 
power  by  ill  conduct ;  for  the  evil  disposed  often 
become  curbed  and  shorn  of  their  strength  in  a  sur- 
prising manner. 

Both  patient  and  operator  should  be  comfortably 
seated,  so  that  neither  will  experience  uneasiness  in  con- 
sequence of  position.  The  seat  of  the  operator  should 
be  higher  than  that  of  the  patient — the  apartment 
neither  too  hot  nor  too  cold,  and  as  few  witnesses  as 
possible,  but  one  person  always  present.  Never  begin 
the  process  if  agitated,  but  wait  until  perfectly  calm  and 
self-collected.  When  all  is  ready,  seat  yourself  oppo 
site  the  patient,  inclining  sideways,  and  taking  his  hand? 
so  that  the  inside  of  the  thumbs  of  each  press  against 
the  other,  the  hands  resting  on  a  knee  of  each  ;  keep 
them  in  that  position  a  few  minutes,  until  an  equal 
warmth  is  felt,  gazing,  after  the  first  minute,  steadily, 
but  not  with  an  effort,  into  his  eyes.  Still  gazing, 
release  his  hands,  and  unite  your  own  with  the  palms 
touching  each  other ;  then  separate  them  to  the  right 
and  left  transversely,  (remembering  that  while  commu- 
nicating the  influence,  the  hands,  when  passing  from  the 
patient,  must  always  have  the  back  turned  to  him,  and 
the  reverse  when  taking  him  out  of  the  state,)  raise  them 
to  the  head,  let  them  rest  on  it  a  few  moments,  slowly 
carry  them  down  the  side  and  lower  part  of  the  head  to 
the  shoulders  ;  allow  them  to  rest  a  few  moments  there 
also,  and  then  gradually  pass  down  the  arms  to  the  end 
of  the  fingers  which  should  be  resting  on  the  knees  ;  all 
.his  time  only  the  extremity  of  your  own  fingers  should 


168  FEEL    NO    ALARM. 

touch,  and  that  very  gently  ;  at  the  end  of  each  pass 
slightly  shake  your  fingers,  as  if  to  throw  something 
from  them.  You  had  better  continue  the  passes,  as  a 
general  rule,  until  the  eyes  of  the  patient  close.  Then 
allow  your  hands  to  rest  two  or  three  minutes  on  the 
head,  and  keeping  your  fingers  in  a  crooked  position,  so 
as  to  directly  point  to  but  not  touch  the  parts  you 
traverse,  pass  slowly  over  the  eyes  and  chest  to  the 
stomach,  where  the  thumbs  had  better  remain  about 
twice  as  long  as  they  did  on  the  head,  the  fingers  rest- 
ing on  the  sides  ;  thence  carry  them  down  to  the  hips, 
knees,  and  feet.  Do  this  a  few  times,  and  then  confine 
your  passes  to  the  arms  and  body,  without  the  head. 

The  sitting  may  continue  from  half  an  hour  to  two 
hours  ;  but  forty  minutes  I  have  found  a  good  average 
time.  Of  course,  it  depends,  in  a  great  measure,  on  the 
impressibility  of  the  patient,  and  the  degree  of  relief 
given.  When  it  is  desirous  to  terminate  it,  make  two 
or  three  passes  from  the  knees  to  the  feet ;  then  several 
transverse  passes  before  the  face  and  chest  in  a  brisk 
manner. 

Make  up  your  mind,  beforehand,  not  to  be  alarmed  at 
any  strange  and  unexpected  symptoms  that  present 
themselves  during  the  operation  ;  and  whatever  does 
occur,  keep  perfectly  cool,  and  betray  no  agitation  of 
manner;  if  you  let  any  signs  of  alarm  escape  you,  your 
patient  is  almost  certain  to  go  ofF  into  convulsions, 
Mrs.  W.  came  into  my  house,  one  day,  in  extreme  pain, 
arising  from  a  wrist  that  had  bee-;  twice  sprained  ,  at 
times  her  agony  was  dreadful,  nd  opiates,  etc.,  entirely 
failed  to  relieve  her.  A  few  passes  down  the  arm  and 
wrist  gave  ease,  and  final)/,  by  continuing  the  pre  cess 
the  pain  ceased  ;   at  the  end  of  twenty-four  hours  it.  re- 


KEEP    PERFECTLY    CALM.  1 Ofl 

lurried,  and  the  same  results  followed  the  operation 
The  third  time,  I  proposed  putting  her  to  sleep;  after  a 
while  her  eyes  closed ;  she  made  a  violent  effort  to 
open  them,  and,  failing,  became  much  frightened,  and 
a  cold  perspiration  broke  out  over  her.  I  instantly 
reversed  the  passes  ;  but  it  was  some  time,  after  awa- 
king, before  she  became  calm.  She  was  afterward 
courageous  enough,  went  to  sleep  without  trouble,  and 
became  finally  cured. 

One  of  the  first  cases  upon  whom  I  ever  operated 
was  a  Miss  L.  After  a  lapse  of  some  ten  minutes,  she 
declared  herself  incapable  of  breathing,  and  I  could  not 
discern  the  pulse  at  the  wrist.  Her  agitation  became 
extreme  ;  she  said  death  would  surely  ensue,  and  wished 
her  cousin,  who  was  present,  to  call  her  mother.  The 
cousin,  equally  with  herself,  was  frightened  ;  so  much 
so,  indeed,  that  she  was  incapable  of  obeying  her  re- 
quest, though  making  great  efforts  to  do  so,  seeming 
like  a  person  with  the  nightmare.  Though  dreadfully 
agitated,  I  continued  the  passes,  directing  them  alto- 
gether from  the  knees  to  the  feet,  and  making  some  in 
in  a  transverse  direction  over  the  chest.  She  soon 
breathed  and  the  heart  beat ;  but,  ere  both  actions  were 
regularly  established,  she  was  insensible.  I  have  rarely 
seen  a  person  more  benefited  by  the  effects  of  fascination. 

When  you  can  be  guided  to  the  seat  of  pain,  keep 
your  fingers  over  the  spot,  and  make  the  passes  in  that 
direction.  Toothache,  headache,  sore-throat,  rheumat- 
ism, etc.,  will  vanish  under  such  manipulation,  often 
with  a  rapidity  that  equally  astonishes  the  operator  and 
the  patient. 

In  operating,  husband  your  strength  as  much  as  pos- 
sible    use  no  more  exertion  than  just  enough  tc>  i*:?*j 
15 


170  TRY    NO    EXPERIMENTS. 

the  requisite  motion  to  the  hands  and  arms.  You.  will 
lose  enough  by  imparting  the  nervous  fluid,  without  un- 
necessarily increasing  the  debility.  This  is  a  common 
fault  with  young  fascinators. 

If  the  operator  succeeds  in  giving  relief  from  pain, 
ht,  has  produced  the  only  phenomena  he  ought  to  ex- 
pect. Do  not  allow  the  skepticism  of  those  about  you 
to  rashly  involve  you  in  the  mazes  of  experimenting  on 
your  patients.  Point  the  unbeliever  to  the  results ;  if 
he  attributes  them  to  imagination  or  anything  else, 
don't  dispute  the  matter — let  him  have  his  own  way, 
without  your  interference.  Have  patience — bide  youi 
time — and  your  turn  will  come,  and,  when  it  does,  will 
richly  recompense  the  delay,  and  satisfy  your  curiosity 
So  great  are  the  marvels,  that  our  minds  must  be  grad 
-lally  prepared  to  receive  them,  or  we  could  not  bea 
the  communication  with  safety. 

Newnham  remarks,  that  the  most  important  and  fun 
damental  characteristic  of  a  good  operator  is,  on  his 
part,  the  possession  of  sound  thought  and  firm  will ;  ho 
must  not  employ  his  processes  in  a  thoughtless  or  care 
less  manner,  or  the\  will  be  unsuccessful ;  but  he  must 
really  throw  his  mind  into  the  duty — must  be  attentive 
to  what  he  is  about — must  wish  to  do  good — not  allow- 
ing himself  to  wander  into  distant  or  discrepant  scenes, 
but  concentrating  his  will  upon  the  object  before  him. 
He  should  be  free  from  impertinent  curiosity — a  capital 
moral  blemish  in  ordinary  life,  but  still  more  so  in 
magnetic  pursuits — because  the  good  of  the  patient  is 
forgotten,  the  attention  of  the  operator  distracted,  and 
fixed  upon  any  object  rather  than  his  patient's  health  •, 
in  such  cases,  no  satisfactory  results  can  be  expected 

Delcuze  speaks  of  a  process  that  may  be  employed 


SOMNAMBULISM.  171 

w  th  great  advantage  in  loeal  pains;  this  is,  to  place  a 
piece  of  linen  several  times  folded,  or  a  fragment  oi 
woollen  or  cotton  cloth  upon  the  suffering  part ;  apply 
the  mouth  above  it  and  breathe  through  it ;  it  excites  a 
lively  sensation  of  heat,  and  the  breath,  which  is 
charged  with  the  nervous  fluid,  introduces  it  into  the 
system.     Then  expel  the  pain  by  passes. 

Somnambulism  (says  Deleuze)  demonstrates  the  two- 
fold existence  of  the  external  and  internal  man  in  a 
single  individual.  It  offers  a  direct  proof  of  the  spiritu- 
ality of  the  soul,  and  an  answer  to  all  objections  made 
against  its  immortality.  Jt  makes  evident  the  truth, 
known  to  the  ancient  sages,  that  man  is  an  intelligence, 
served  by  organs.  Never  seek  to  produce  it ;  but  when 
it  comes  naturally,  profit  by  it  as  much  as  possible.  It 
is  dangerous  to  try  to  produce  this  state  by  directing 
passes  to  the  head  ;  make  them  equally  over  the  bod}'. 
If  nature  is  disposed  to  this  crisis,  the  fluid  will,  of 
itself,  be  carried  to  the  brain,  and  the  tendency  be  man- 
Tested  by  the  extreme  tranquility  of  the  patient.  Then, 
after  passing  your  fingers,  five  or  six  times,  at  a  short 
distance  before  his  eyes,  ask  him  whether  he  sleeps, 
and  if  he  answers  in  the  affirmative,  you  may  ask  him 
regarding  the  treatment.  Don't  press  questions,  if  he 
shows  no  disposition  to  speak:  let  him  alone — it  is  of 
no  consequence  ;  it  is  not  your  object  to  render  him  a 
sleep-wTaker,  but  to  cure  him.  If  such  a  state  were 
necessary,  it  would  spontaneously  develop  itself. 

In  conclusion.  I  would  remark,  that  the  onlt 
object  of  the  operator  should  be  to  cure  his  pa- 
tient; this  cannot  be  too  strongly  insisted  upon. 
Try  no  experiments  ;  wait  patiently,  and  follow 
the  teachings  of  nature. 


APPENDIX 


COMMUNICATION    FROM    REV.    MR.    BEECHER;    C*     *»*rVS£TI£*< 

"In  October,  1842,  on  rny  way  to  the  synod  of  Genesee-  I  ?ner>t  t!>-» 

..ght  at  the  house   of  Mr.  Hall,  at  Byron.     In  the  evening  1   called  od 

dev.  Mr.  Childs.     On   entering  the  room,  I  found  his  son,  an  intelligent 

boy  aged  ten  years,  then  in  a  cataleptic  fit,  sitting  in  his  father's  arms 

and  his  feet  in  warm  water. 

"  In  a  few  moments  he  recovered.  He  frequently  had  from  three  to 
six  fits  a  day — had  received  the  best  medical  attendance  in  the  region, 
was  no  better — daily  worse.  He  had  lost  entirely  the  power  of  speech, 
for  several  days.  Great  fears  were  felt  that  he  would  never  recover 
There  was  a  sore  place  on  the  back  corner  of  his  head,  and  on  the  spine, 
occasioned  by  a  fall,  some  months  previous.  When  the  fits  passed  off 
he  became  hungry,  and  not  at  all  drowsy;  and  during  the  interval  ap- 
peared preternaturally  bright,  and  engaged  in  sports  with  companions,  as 
jsual. 

"  After  I  had  conversed  a  few  minutes,  I  said,  '  I  would  have  him 
magnetized ;'  to  which  his  father  replied.  '  I  don't  believe  in  it  at  all,' 
and  the  mother  added,  '  If  you'll  put  me  to  sleep,  I'll  believe,  and  nol 
without.'  I  replied,  'I  would  try  it:  it  may  do  good,  and  can  do  no 
harm.'  During  this  conversation,  I  made  a  few  passes  in  front  of  tho 
child,  chiefly  with  one  hand,  and  without  any  particular  concentration  of 
the  mind  or  will,  and  mostly  with  my  face  toward  the  mother.  In  less 
than  a  minute  the  father  said,  '  He  is  in  another  fit!  ISo,  he  isn't,  I  de- 
clare :  I  believe  he  is  asleep.'  Much  surprised,  (for  I  had  never  mag 
netized  one,)  I  said,  '  It  surely  cannot  be  what  I  have  done ;  but  if  so  1 
can  awaken  him.'  Then,  with  a  few  reversed  passes,  he  awoke.  '  Weil, 
this  is  strange,'  said  I ;  '  but  I  can  put  him  asleep  again,  if  it  is  real.''  I 
then  seriously  repeated  the  passes,  with  both  hands,  for  one  or  two 
minutes,  and  placed  him  in  the  perfect  mesmeric  sleep.  I  then  fixed  my 
eyes  on  a  lady  on  the  oppose  side  of  the  room,  the  boy  not  yet  having 
spoken  for  three  days,  and  said,  'Henry,  what  do  you  see?'  in  a  full, 
decided  voice.  He  replied,  '  Azubah.'  I  then  looked  his  mother  in  the 
face,  saying,  'What  do  you  see?'  He  gave  a  name  unknown  to  me  - 
I  looked  to  his  father,  who  replied,  '  It  is  her  maiden  name.'  I  then  took 
rinegar  into  my  mouth,  and  said,  '  What  do  you  taste  ?'  '  Vinegar,'  speak 
*ne  with  great  tartness,  and  at  the  same  time  making  many  contortions 


LETTER     FROM     REV.     MR.     I5EECHER.  173 

af  the  face.  The  mother  now  whispered  to  one  of  the  children,  who 
left  her  seat,  and  I  paid,  '  Henry,  what  is  she  going  for?'  '  Sugar,  and  1 
love  it,'  he  answered.  She  went  to  the  closet,  and  brought  the  sugar.  I 
put  some  into  my  mouth,  which  seemed  to  give  him  the  same  pleasure  aa 
if  I  had  put  it  in  his  own.  I  then  said,  'What  kind  of  sugar  is  it  1 
♦Muscovado.'  'What  is  its  color?'  'Well,  sir,  a  hind  of  light  brown.' 
A  small  glass  jar,  with  .a  large  cork,  was  now  placed  in  my  hand,  wheu 
immediately  I  observed  the  olfactory  nerves  affected,  and  the  muscles 
about  the  nose  contracted  at  the  same  moment.  I  said  to  the  girl.  '  What 
is  it?'  to  which  the  boy  answered,  '  Hartshorn.'  '  How  do  you  know?' 
'I  smell  it.'  I  myself  neither  knew  nor  smelt.  I  then  took  out  the  cork 
and  applied  it  to  my  own  nose,  when  he  instantly  placed  his  fingers  on 
that  part  of  the  nose  next  the  forehead,  and  said,  'I  feel  it  here,' — just 
where  I  myself  experienced  the  burning  sensation. 

"  During  all  these  experiments  he  sat  on  his  father's  knee,  with  his 
head  down  on  his  breast,  and  reclining  against  his  father. 

"I  now  asked  him,  'What  is  the  matter  with  you?'  '  My  brain  if 
sore.'  '  Where  V  'At  the  bottom  of  it.'  'Where  it  joins  the  spinal 
marrow,'  (medulla  oblongata! ')  'Yes.'  '  What  occasioned  it  ?'  '  I  fol. 
from  the  great  beam  in  the  barn.'  His  mother  here  asked  him,  '  Why 
did  you  not  tell  us  before  ?'     '  I  feared  you  would  not  let  me  play  there  ' 

1  Can  Doct.  A —  cure  you  ?'     '  A*t>.'     '  Why  not?'     '  He  don't  knoiV 

anything   about    it,'   (very   decidedly.)     'Can    Doct.    C V     'No.' 

'  Why?'  'He  don't  understand  it.'  'Will  the  medicine  you  now  iui 
do  you  good  V  '  No  '  '  Of  what  is  it  composed  '  '  There  is  turpentine 
in  it.'  '  Does  the  Doctor  give  it  you  for  tape- worm  ?'  'Yes.'  'Hav«* 
you  any?'  'No.'  'Would  you  like  to  walk  ?'  'Yes.'  'Well,  walk.' 
He  arose  promptly,  stepped  between  the  chairs,  and  said,  'Well,  sir, 
where  shall  I  go?'  'From  the  wall  to  the  door,  and  back.'  This  1  --. 
did,  avoiding  every  obstruction ;  aud,  at  my  direction,  returned  and  sat 
again  with  his  father.  I  now,  without  notice  to  any  one,  placed  my  fir.- 
fier  on  the  organ  of  Benevolence,  thinking  at  the  moment  it  performed 
the  office  of  Veneration,  aud  said.  '  Would  you  like  to  pray  ?'  With  soinj 
/ightness,  he  said  '  No.'  Some  questions  were  asked,  by  his  mother  and 
myself,  about  the  Bible,  etc. ;  but  no  Veneration  appeared.  I  then  recol- 
lected the  true  office  of  the  organ,  and  said,  '  Have  you  anything  in  your 
pocket  V  He  took  out  a  knife.  '  Give  it  to  me  for  my  little  boy,' — 
which  he  did  promptly.  I  removed  my  hand.  '  Have  you  anything 
else?'  '  I  have  a  pencil.'  '  Will  you  give  me  that  for  my  other  boy?' 
4  It  has  no  head  ?' '  '  Never  mind  ;  give  it — won't  you  ?'  '  I  shouldn't 
like  to.  'Well,  but  you  will !'  'I  couldn't  come  it!'  (with  peculiar 
emphasis. y  Azul^ah  said,  '  Ask  him  where  the  head  of  the  pencil  is.' 
Where  is  it,  Henry?'  '  Well,  sir,  in  the  parlor.'  'Where?'  'On  the 
window.'  Azubali  said,  '  Why,  I  picked  it  up  and  put  it  there  to-day  ! 
(He  certainly  did  nut  know  this.)  I  then  said  '  Henry,  can  you  get  it  ? 
15* 


174  ON    MAGNETISM 

He  arose,  and  went  into  the  parlor  in  the  dark,  and  took  the  head  of  tilt* 
pencil-case  from  the  window,  to  the  very  great  surprise  of  us  all.  In 
deed,  we  were  all  so  astonished,  that  it  seemed  a  dream.  During  these 
and  subsequent  proceedings,  he  spoke  with  a  promptness,  boldness, 
and  propriety,  in  advance  of  his  years,  and  beyond  himself  in  his  natural 
state ;  and  so  perfectly  evident  was  it  that  he  was  in  a  somnambulic  state 
that  no  skeptic,  I  verily  believe,  could  have  doubted. 

•'At  my  request  he  returned  to  his  seat.  I  touched  Benevolence,  and 
instantly  he  handed  me  the  pencil-case.  'For  my  boy?'  'Yes,  sir.'  I 
then  silently,  and  without  any  willing,  and  with  a  feeling  of  curiosity  to 
eee  and  test  the  matter,  touched  Reverence.  His  countenance  at  once 
assumed  a  softened  and  solemn  aspect.  '  Henry,  would  you  like  to  pray  V 
'Yes,  sir.'  '  You  may.'  He  then  commenced  praying  inaudibly.  'You 
may  pray  aloud.'  He  then  prayed  in  a  low,  audible  voice.  On  touching 
Tune,  he  sang  a  tune,  though  not  in  the  habit  of  singing.  On  touching 
Combativeness  and  Destructiveness,  he  raised  his  clenched  fist  to  strike 
me.  He  was  ignorant  of  Phrenology,  and  also  of  my  intention  to  touch 
any  particular  organ  ;  nor  did  I,  in  any  case,  will  the  activity  of  the  organ. 
I  now  took  out  my  watch,  and  holding  the  dial  towards  myself,  and  above 
the  line  of  his  vision,  his  eyes  being  closed,  and  his  head  bowed  forward, 
and  my  hartd  also  being  between  him  and  the  watch,  I  asked  him. 
'  Henry,  what  time  is  it  V  '  Eight  o'clock,  sir,' — which  was  exactly  tho 
time  by  the  watch,  though  by  the  clock  in  the  room  it  was  fifteen  minutes 
faster.  '  Henry,  how  long  ought  you  to  sleep  ?'  '  Well,  sir,  I  must  sleep 
two  hours  and  five  minutes.'  '  Will  you  then  awake  ?'  'Yes,  sir.'  'Very 
well.'  This  I  did  for  the  purpose  of  testing  his  knowledge  of  time,  as 
stated  by  Townshend,  an  English  clergyman,  whose  work  on  this  sub- 
ject I  had  read. 

"I  then  said,  'Will  you  go  with  me  to  Mr.  Hall's?'  'Yes.'  'Well, 
now  we  are  there — now  we  are  in  the  parlor:  who  is  here?'  '  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Hall;  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bardwell.'  'Who  else?'  He  did  not  give 
their  names,  but  intimated  that  they  were  strangers.  He  described  the 
room  and  position  of  things,  all  of  which  I  found  correct,  on  going  to  the 
house  shortly  after.  These  persons  were  not  in  the  habit  of  being  there 
in  the  evening,  but  company  having  come  in,  they  were  all  together  at 
that  moment.  As  this  was  in  his  own  town,  I  did  not  deem  it  proof,  and 
so  said,  'Will  you  go  to  Batavia?'  'Yes.'  'Well,  now  we  are  there — 
now  we  are  at  my  house — now  we  will  go  into  my  room :  what  do  yori 
seel'  '  1  see  a  large  table  covered  with  black  cloth,  and  with  books  and 
papers  scattered  over  it.'  '  How  large  is  it  ?'  '  It  is  about  five  feet  lcng.' 
'How  many  book -cases?'  'Three,  sir.'  'What  sort  of  a  stove?'  Ha 
could  not  or  did  not  describe  this,  for  it  was  so  queer  a  thing  as  not  to  bs 
easily  described.  Nor  did  I  press  him,  for  all  his  answers  had  been  per- 
fectly correct,  and  I  was  sufficiently  astonished;  for  he  had  never  seen 
my  study ;  and  no  other  minister,  I  am  sure.  b»s  such  a  table,  (five  fee! 


LETTER    FROM.    REV.   MR.    nEECIIEit.  175 

by  luree  and  a  half,)  or  has  left  it  in  such  confusion  as  mine  was  at  thai 
moment. 

•'  i  may  here  say  that,  during  the  whole  period  of  his  sleep,  he  could 
hear  the  questions  of  others  put  to  him,  and  would  answer  them,  if  J 
were  willing;  but  if  I  willed  otherwise,  or  forbade  him  to  speak,  as  I 
often  did,  he  then  would  answer  no  one  but  myself,  not  even  father  or 
mother;  nor  could  he  hear  their  conversation  with  me,  nor  with  each 
other. 

"  I  now  left  him  for  an  hour,  and  went  back  to  Mr.  Hall's,  giving  him 
leave  to  converse  only  with  his  father.  On  my  return,  I  found  him  in 
the  same  state.  He  utterly  refused  to  speak  to  any  one  but  his  father, 
and  told  him  that  he  should  not  have  another  fit  till  the  following  Sab- 
bath, (this  was  Monday  .evening,)  which  proved  true;  but  when  that  day 
came,  he  had  several. 

"  At  nine  o'clock  and  three  minutes,  holding  my  watch  as  before,  anj 
standing  eight  or  nine  feet  from  him,  I  asked  the  time.  He  gave  '  nine 
o'clock  and  five  minutes,'  '  Look  sharp,'  said  I.  'Oh!  three  minutes,' 
said  be.  We  were  now  curious  to  see  if  he  would  awake  himself  at  the 
two  hours  and  five  minutes,  and  as  he  did  not  awake  when  the  clock  in 
the  room  reached  that  time,  I  said,  '  Henry,  did  you  mean  by  my  watch, 
or  by  the  chick?'  '  By  your  watch,  sir.'  'Very  well.' „  At  the  exact 
moment  he  opened  his  eyes  and  looked  around,  and  this  without  any  act 
or  willing  of  mine  ;  and  what  was  very  affecting  and  convincing,  he  could 
no  longer  speak  at  all,  and  was  unconscious  of  all  that  he  had  said  or 
done. 

"  I  have  said  that  he  had  no  return  of  fits  till  the  following  Sabbath 
One  day  after  that  Sabbath,  he  came  in  to  his  mother,  much  agitated,  and 
apparently  going  into  a  fit;  and  making  the  passes,  he  solicited  hia 
mother  to  do  it, — who,  merely  to  pacify  him,  passed  her  fingers  over  him; 
and  soou  he  fell  into  the  mesmeric  sleep,  and  escaped  the  fit.  After  this 
he  was  so  highly  charged  by  his  sister,  that  when  she  was  in  the  next 
room,  in  the  closet,  he  would  instantly  taste  anything  she  tasted,  eat  what 
ehe  ate,  etc. 

"  In  ten  days  I  returned,  and  magnetized  him  again,  and  went  through 
several  of  the  above  experiments.  He  always,  while  in  the  mesmeric 
state,  declared  that  it  benefited  him,  relieved  all  pain,  and  would  cure 
him. 

"  After  I  left,  at  my  suggestion,  he  was  daily  magnetized:  his  fits  left 
him,  his  voice  returned,  the  sore  spots  on  his  head  and  back  were 
removed,  and  he  recovered  rapidly,  till  the  family  could  no  longer  mes- 
merize him.  A  man  in  the  village  was  found,  who  could  and  daily  did, 
till  he  appeared  entirely  well.  On  omitting  it  he  had  a  fit  or  two.  and  it 
was  resumed ;  and  when  I  last  saw  the  father,  he  informed  me  that  they 
considered  the  child  cured. 

u  I  may  add,  I  have  since  cured  toothache,  gi'eatly  relieved  tic  doloreur 


i?6  ON    MAGNETISM. 

and  removed  other  pains  and  swellings,  as  well  as  headache.  1  am  not. 
however,  a  full  believer  in  all  which  is  affirmed  of  clairvoyants — what  j 
see  and  know,  I  believe.  In  respect  to  many  well-authenticated  facts,  1 
neither  affirm  nor  deny.  That  there  are  many  cases  of  gross  deception 
and  imposition.  I  fully  believe.  On  such  a  subject,  it  can  hardly  be 
otherwise.  This,  however,  is  a  reason  why  men  of  character  and  intelli 
gence  should  investigate  it,  rather  than  otherwise.  '  But  it  is  deception. 
Well,  then,  let  us  expose  it  by  a  fair  trial.  '  But  it  is  the  work  of  the 
devil !'  How  do  you  know  ?  What  is  the  evidence  1  What  harm  has 
it  done  1  '  Oh,  bad  men  have  used  it  for  bad  ends  !'  And  what  is  there 
in  the  world  that  has  not  been  so  used  ?  If  it  is  the  work  of  the  devil, 
then  we  are  not  to  be  ignorant  of  his  devices,  and  should  make  the  exami- 
nation for  one's  self;  for  ignorant  and  bad  men  will  not  expose  his  de 
vices.  From  experiment  and  observation,  I  have  no  doubt  that,  as  a 
remedial  agent,  mesmerism  is  yet  to  accomplish  much  good;  and  no 
sarni  can  result  from  it,  except,  like  all  other  blessings,  it  be  abused. 

"WILLIAM  H.  BEECHES. 
'Button,  June  28    1843  " 

[Fowlers  aad  Wells'  American  Phrenoi  >gic?    Journal 


LIB  EAR  Y 


PSYCHOLOGY. 

IN    TWO    "VOI/CJMES. 

COMPILISTXG 

Philosophy  of  Mesmerism,     j       Electrical  Psychology, 
On  Fascination,  <       The  Macrocosm, 

Science  of  the  Soul. 


All  are  the  parts  of  one  stupendous  whole, 
Whose  Body  Nature  is,  and  God  the  Soul." 


VOL.   II. 


NEW   YORK: 

S.    R.    WELLS    &    CO.,    PUBLISHERS 

No.    737    Broadway. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY 


or 


ELECTRICAL  PSYCHOLOGY: 


Iflf  A   COURSE   OF 


TWELVE   LECTURES, 


BY    JOHN    BOVEE    DOD& 


STEREOTYPE   EDITION. 


NEW  YOKK  : 

PUBLISHED   BY   S.    R.   WELLS  "&   CO., 

No.    737     BROADWAY, 

1876. 


£z\emd;  according  u>  art  of  Conaxess.  id  the  jetr  1850,  oj 

C.     P  .     OUL'5 

as  &s  Clerk  aOfliceci  tie  District  Court  for  the  Southern  metric!  of  Nsw  i'mfc 


DEDICATION 


TO   G.  C.  MARCHANT,  M.D. 

My  Dear  Sir — For  twenty  years  past  t  have  been 
intimately  acquainted  with  you,  and  I  enjoy  the  pleasing 
reflection  that  we  have,  during  that  entire  period,  re- 
mained warm,  personal  friends.  Fully  sensible  of  your 
sterling  integrity  and  honor  as  a  man  and  a  distinguished 
American  citizen,  and  sensible  that  the  science  of  Elec- 
trical Psychology  will  prove  to  be  most  deeply  interest- 
ing to  your  discerning  and  gifted  mind,  and  that  you 
will  love,  honor,  and  cherish  it  as  you  do  the  other 
sciences  of  the  day  with  which  you  have  become  famil- 
iar ;  and  having  so  often  and  deeply  felt  your  friend- 
ship in  acts  of  kindness,  I  claim  the  favor,  as  an  ex- 
pression of  my  confidence  in  your  goodness,  and  also  in 
your  medical  skill,  to  dedicate  this  work  to  you.  You 
will  perceive  that  I  have  intentionally  written  it  in  a 
fanciful  style,  so  as  to  make  it  pleasing  to  readers  in 
general ;  and  surely  you,  as  a  critic,  will  overlook  this, 
as  I  have  also  endeavored  to  please  the  scholar  by 
throwing  out  before  him  a  fair  and  liberal  specimen 
of  original  thought.  As  such  it  is  most* respectfully 
inscribed  to  you  by  your  sincere  friend, 

J.  B.  DODS, 


CONTENTS 


FA8B8 

DEDICATION,  3 

INTRODUCTION, 9-13 

LECTURE    I. 

ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY  —  ITS    DEFINITION.  AND 
IMPORTANCE  IN  CURING  DISEASES 15-32 

Invitation  by  members  of  United  States  Senate  to  lecture  on  the 
Science  of  Electrical  Psychology — Man  should  use  his  reason 
— His  space  is  small,  yet  his  power  extends  to  other  worlds— 
Tne  greatness  and  majesty  of  Nature — Her  mysterious  opera- 
tions— Maiv  a  progressive  being — Author's  reference  to  his 
Mesmeric  Lectures — Has  for  twenty  years  argued  electricity 
to  be  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  matter — Letter 
from  Hon.  Richard  D.  Davis,  with  editorial  remarks  on  the 
mysterious  nature  of  the  experiments — Hiram  Bostwick,  Esq., 
cured  of  palsy — Two  girls  cured  of  deafness — Lady  restored 
to  speech  and  sight — Editorial  advice  to  physicians  to  learn 
this  Science — Resolutions  of  Dr.  Dods'  class  of  forty-five  per- 
sons in  favor  of  this  Science — A  lady  cured  who  had  not 
walked  for  eighteen  years — Distinction  between  Mesmerism 
and  Electrical  Psychology. 

LECTURE   II. 

BEAUTY  OF  INDEPENDENT  THOUGHT  AND  FEAR- 
LESS EXPRESSION, 3&4S 

Electrical  Psychology  has  claims  to  philosophy — Its  strangeness 
awakens  the  deepest  feelings  of  contempt  among  skeptics— 
Those  who  scoff  and  sneer  have  received  their  ideas  by  in- 
heritance, without  labor,  as  they  did  their  estate — Such, 
though  learned,  are  the  greatest  enemies  of  science — The 
inarch  of  intellect — Improvements  of  the  day — The  chariot 
of  science  commenced  its  career  at  the  morning  of  creation, 
with  but  few  on  board,  and  will  continue  to  roll  on  without 
end — Its  passengers  here  are  mortals  ;  in  eternity,  immortals — 
The  variety  and  richness  of  the  intellectual  and  moral  field- 
Use  of  the  school  and  college — Divines  should  not  fear  science 
— It  cannot  destroy  the  Bible — Creation  successive — Its  vast- 
ness — All  sciences  have  been  opposed,  and  their  discoverers 
persecuted  —  Harvey  —  Galileo —  Newton  —  Fulton  —  Gall  — 
Spurzheim — Combe  —  The  Fowlers,  of  New  York  —  Men 
should  seek  for  true  fame,  and  not  a  momentary  popularity- 
True  fame  defined — A  specimen  of  it  in  the  example  of 
Christ, 


0  CONTENTS. 

LECTURE   III. 

PA0H 

CONNECTING  LINK  BETWEEN  MIND  AND  MATTER, 
AND  CIRCULATION  OF  THE  BLOOD,       49-64 

Let  not  opposition  surprise — The  characters  from  whom  it  comes 
are  pointed  out — Immutability  of  truth — It  cannot  be  affected 
by  the  belief  or  unbelief  of  men — Electrical  theory  of  the  uni- 
verse— Electricity  eternal — The  agent  employed  by  the  Creator 
to  move  globes  and  carry  on  the  operations  of  nature — It  is  a 
universal  agent,  and  the  cause  of  light,  heat,  vegetation,  twi- 
light, evaporation,  storms,  earthquakes,  and  hurricanes — Man 
an  epitome  of  the  universe — All  substances  in  him — Mind  has 
both  voluntary  and  involuntary  powers — Brain  is  the  fountain 
of  the  nervous  system — Mind  the  cause  of  all  motion,  and  can 
touch  nothing  but  electricity — From  mind  to  dead  matter  is 
seven  links — Mind  holds  its  royal  throne  in  the  brain,  and  ex- 
ecutes its  commands  through  electricity,  its  prime  minister — 
Circulation  of  the  blood — Its  philosophy  is  new — Heart,  with 
its  ventricles  and  auricles — Why  nerves  attend  the  arteries 
and  not  the  veins — How  the  brain  is  supplied  with  electricity 
— Why  arterial  blood  is  cherry-red,  and  venous  blood  purple. 

LECTURE   IV. 

PHILOSOPHY  OF  DISEASE  AND  NERVOUS  FORCE,      65-81 

Circulation  of  the  blood  concluded — Circulating  system  is  two 
systems — Arterial  blood  is  positive,  venous  blood  is  negative — 
The  notion  refuted  that  the  heart  circulates  the  blood  and  ex- 
erts a  force  of  100,000  pounds — The  heart  is  moved  by  the 
involuntary  force  of  the  cerebellum — The  blood  is  moved  by 
the  positive  and  negative  forces  of  electricity  taken  in  at  the 
lungs  by  inspiration — Philosophy  of  disease — One  cause  only 
for  all  diseases — Diseases  do  not  originate  in  the  blood,  but  in 
the  electricity  of  the  nerves — They  begin  in  the  finest  invisible 
substance  in  the  body  and  end  in  the  grossest — All  convulsions 
in  nature  begin  and  end  thus — Blood  not  rendered  impure  by 
foreign  substances  carried  into  it,  but  by  being  thrown  out 
of  balance  in  its  circulation — Diseases  caused  by  mental  or 
physical  impressions — Disease  settles  upon  the  weakest  organ 
or  part  of  the  body — Nervous  fluid  thrown  out  of  balance  is 
disease,  and  when  equalized  is  health — Half  of  the  nervous 
fluid  is  under  the  voluntary  control  of  the  mind — The  other 
half  is  not 

LECTURE  V. 

CURE  OF  DISEASE  AND  BEING  ACCLIMATED,    .     .     82-91 

Philosophy  of  disease — Mental  and  physical  impressions — Ra- 
tionale of  its  cure — Man  riding — Head  aches — Meets  a  robber 
«~—  Headache  cured — The  healing  principle  is  in  us,  not  in  med- 
icine— Equalize  circulation  by  nervous  force — Emetics  do  not 


CONTENTS.  / 

possess  the  vomiting  principle — Vomiting  is  pK  duced  by  nerv- 
ous force — Examples  and  proof — Diseases  cured  by  mental 
impressions,  even  though  caused  by  physical  impression — 
Medicines  produce  physical  results — Example  of  a  peach-tree 
— Phjsicians  should  state  to  the  patients  what  medicines  they 
administer — How  to  preserve  health — Bathings — No  disease 
cured  by  an  opposite — Philosophy  of  becoming  acclimated — 
Mineral  and  vegetable  kingdoms — Man  a  vegetable  of  second 
growth — All  vegetables  and  animals  adapted  to  their  climates 
— Foreign  substances  shou'd  not  be  eaten — Change  of  our 
flesh  and  bones — Clothing  adapted  to  climate — God  has  not 
erred  in  disposing  the  vegetable  substances  over  the  globe — 
Truth  immutable. 

LECTURE  VI. 
EXISTENCE  OF  DEITY  PROVED  FROM  MOTION,  .  99.-118 
Reason  fearless  of  consequences — The  power  of  electricity — Its 
awful  manifestations — Nothing  compared  with  Deity — Spirit 
supposed  to  be  immaterial,  but  is  not — Supposed  to  be  the  re- 
sult of  mechanism,  but  is  not — Dr.  Priestly — Atheists — The 
resurrection — Spirit  is  a  substance — Electricity  is  universal  — 
Mind  is  the  opposite  of  dead  matter — Body  and  nature  com- 
pared— Each  organ  has  but  one  function — The  chain  of  ele- 
mentary substances  considered,  from  the  heaviest  up  to  the 
lightest — Only  one  substance  has  motion,  this  is  mind — The 
unseen  is  the  reality,  the  visible  is  not — The  tree  is  an  out- 
shoot  from  the  invisible  life  of  the  seed — All  powers  are  in  the 
unseen  substances — Earthquakes — Man  and  nature  alike — In- 
voluntary powers  of  mind — Involuntary  powers  of  God — His 
voluntary  powers  create — His  involuntary  govern  through 
established  laws — God's  voluntary  powers  cannot  be  thwarted, 
his  involuntary  can — First  human  pair — Difference  between 
being  born  and  created — The  acorn  and  the  oak,  which  was 
first — Geology — Creation  and  government  of  the  globe — Pre- 
mature deaths  argued — Two  brains — Voluntary  and  involun- 
tary powers — The  office  of  each  proved  by  preparing  food 
and  eating  it. 

LECTURE  VII. 
SUBJECT  OF  CREATION  CONSIDERED,      ....     119-147 

K\\  motion  originates  in  mind — Thought  is  not  mind — Creation 
is  avast  subject — Man's  right  to  reason  on  any  subject — Worlds 
made  out  of  electricity — Nothing  cannot  be  made  into  some- 
thing— Apostle  Paul — Bible  sense  of  create — Something  must 
be  eternal — God,  space,  and  duration  considered  —  Philosophi- 
cal necessity — Electricity  is  the  body  of  God — Each  animated 
body  is  an  outshoot  from  mind — God's  mind  is  not  omnipresent, 
his  body  is — Mind  is  form — The  serpent — The  lobster — All 
f&aling  in  mind--Amputations  —How  mind  moves  the  body— 


8  CONTENTS. 

FAQJe* 

One  hundred  elements — Mode  of  creation— Gradually  frum 
the  invisible  to  the  visible  forms — Boyle — Bishop  Watson— 
Requires  electricity,  out  of  which  the  globe  was  made,  to  gov 
ern  it — One  hundred  cords  fastened  on  one  hundred  elements 
in  electricity — Positive  and  negative  forces — Ultimates  and 
primates — Gold  and  phosphate  of  lime — Sun  is  electricity — 
Philosophy  of  twilight — The  globe  not  yet  finished — Newton — 
Comets — Elliptical  orbits — Volcanoes — Philosophy  of  variation 
of  the  compass — The  globe  yet  in  its  embryo — When  finished 
— What  future  generations  will  say  of  us. 

LECTURE  VIII. 
DOCTRINE  OF  IMPRESSIONS, 136-151 

Creation  and  Electrical  Psychology— All  substances  in  man — It 
requires  electricity,  out  of  which  he  was  made,  to  govern  him— 
Philosophy  of  digestion — Chyle,  serum,  blood,  flesh,  tendons, 
bones — Positive  and  negative  forces — Blood  the  universal  sol- 
vent of  the  body  as  water  is  of  the  globe — The  brain — Stomach 
— One  hundred  elements — Law  of  equilibrium- — Nature  like 
man  is  thrown  out  of  balance  and  becomes  sick — Hurricane  and 
tornado — Rheumatisms  and  broken  bones  preceding  a  storm — 
Thunder  storms — Cause  of  hail — Earthquakes — Earth  may 
have  a  bowel  complaint — Volcanoes — Eruptions — Nature  is 
cured  by  her  own  impressions,  and  so  is  man — Sleeping  in  un- 
healthy climates — Keep  positive  to  surrounding  impressions — 
Citizens  of  Charleston,  S.C. — Country  fever — Dr.  Mason  Good 
— Fear — Cholera — Salem  witchcraft — Pleading  guilty — Dan- 
ger of  executing  persons  on  their  own  confessions — Judges 
and  jurors. 

LECTURE  IX. 
CONNECTION    BETWEEN    THE   VOLUNTARY   AND   IN- 
VOLUNTARY NERVES, 152-1 5! 

Electricity  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  inert  matter — 
G  «x>se  pimples  on  the  arm — Insulated  stool — Nerves  are  mag- 
netic— Electrometer — Why  mind  removes  warts,  king's-evil,  or 
tumors — Dr.  Warren,  of  Boston — Electro-nervous  fluid  heals— 
Why  it  heals — The  voluntary  and  involuntary  powers — Throne 
of  the  mind — Each  person  has  two  distinct  brains  through  which 
the  mind  acts — Connection  between  the  voluntary  and  involun- 
tary nerves — How  one  may  affect  the  other — Death  occasioned 
by  the  want  of  sleep — Death  is  the  sleep  of  the  involuntary 
powers — Suspended  animation  in  alligators,  toads,  serpents, 
raccoons,  etc. — Suspended  animation  in  some  human  beings 
for  several  days — Its  philosophy  or  cause — Danger  of  prema- 
ture interments — A  man  in  New  Jersey,  his  case  stated — The 
circulating  and  nervous  systems  compared — The  mind's  throne 
in  the  medulla  oblongata — Philosophy  of  natural  sleep — Con- 
elusion — Poetry  on  Hope. 


CONTENTS.  9 

PAGER 

Wealthy  climates — Keep  positive  to  scjrour.ding  impressions — 
Citizens  of  Charleston,  S.  C — Country  fever — Dr.  Mason  Good 
— Fear — Cholera — Salem  witchcraft — Pleading  guilty — Dan- 
ger of  executing  persons  on  their  own  confessions—- Judges 
and  jurors. 

LECTURE  IX. 

CONNECTION    BETWEEN    THE    VOLUNTARY   AND    IN 
VOLUNTARY    NERVES 164-HJ 

Electricity  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  inert  matter — 
Goose  pimples  on  the  arm — Insulated  stool— Nerves  are  mag- 
netic— Electrometer — Why  mind  removes  warts,  king's  evil, 
or  tumors — Dr.  Warren,  of  Boston — Electro-nervous  fluid  heala 
— Why  it  heals — The  voluntary  and  involuntary  powers — 
Throne  of  ths  mind — Each  person  has  two  distinct  brains 
through  which  the  mind  acts — Connection  between  the  volun- 
tary and  involuntary  nerves — How  one  may  affect  the  other — 
Death  occasioned  by  the  want  of  sleep — Death  is  the  sleep  of 
the  involuntary  powers — Suspended  animation  in  alligators, 
toads,  serpents,  raccoons,  etc. — Suspended  animation  in  some 
human  beings  for  s»  veral  days — Its  philosophy  or  cause — Dan- 
ger of  premature  h.terments — A  man  in  New  Jersey,  his  case 
stated — The  circulating  and  nervous  systems  compared — The 
mind's  throne  in  the  medulla  oblongata — Philosophy  of  natural 
sleep — Conclusion. 

LECTURE  X. 

ELECTRO-CURAPATHY  IS  THE  BEST  MEDICAL  SYS- 
TEM IN  BEING,  AS  IT  INVOLVES  THE  EXCEL- 
LENCES  OF   ALL   OTHER   SYSTEMS,.     .     ■.     .     .     181-193 

Electrical  Psychology  is  in  its  infancy — The  power  it  is  destined 
to  exert  over  disease  in  coming  ages— It  is  the  most  sublime 
6ystem  of  philosophy  in  existence — Excels  astronomy  and  geol- 
ogy, which  are  great — Its  importance  not  realized — It  uses 
safe  remedies — Discards  poisons — It  takes  its  medicines  from 
the  fields  of  nature  where  the  patient  lives — Animals  do  the 
same — The  different  medical  systems  noticed — They  should  all 
be  combined  in  one  system  of  Curapathy — Hydropathy  con 
sidered — Aeriapathy  considered — Electricity,  galvanism,  and 
magnetism  are  useful — Called  Electropathy — Terrapathy  con- 
sidered, or  earth  cures — Earths  should  be  applied  to  the  system 
in  various  forms,  particularly  in  inflammations — Man  needs  but 
little  medicine — Attention  to  food  as  to  quantity  and  quality  is 
about  all  he  needs — Why  Terrapathy  cures  is  argued — Difficult 
to  solve — Can  physicians  tell  why  any  medicine  cures  ? — In- 
stinct of  the  rattlesnake  to  cure  himself  when  bitten — A  negro, 
on  being  bitten,  ate  the  same  plant  and  was  cured — Most  of 
the  valuable  medicines  were  discovered  by  old  country  women, 
sld  hunters,  and  Indians  and  mt  by  doctors — With  much  op- 
1* 


10  CONTENTS. 


Ft 

position  they  were  forced  to  adopt  them — Their  opposition  to 
Peruvian  bark,  the  virtues  of  which  were  discovered  by  monks 
— The  clergy  opposed  it — A  state  of  health  and  disease  consid- 
ered— Negative  and  positive  forces  considered — Positive  elec- 
tricity belongs  to  the  air,  negative  to  the  earth — There  are  pos- 
itive and  negative  diseases — How  cured — Herbs  are  the  eldest 
born  children  of  molher  earth — They  always  hang  upon  her 
breast — Clay  poultices — The  body  buried  in  soils — Instances 
where  Terrapathy  has  cured — The  Master  and  the  blind  man 
—The  clay  and  spittle — Absorbent  power  of  earths — Sting  of 
a  bee  cured — Grease  spots,  how  removed  from  silks  or  wool- 
ens— The  scent  of  a  skunk  removed  from  clothes  by  earth — 
The  cause  of  this  considered,  and  the  supremacy  of  Electro- 
Psychological  Curapathy  shown  ever  all  medical  systems  in 
being. 

LECTURE  XI. 

THE  SECRET  REVEALED,  SO  THAT  ALL  MAY  KNOW 
HOW  TO  EXPERIMENT  WITHOUT  AN  INSTRUCT- 
OR,        .....     199« 

k»  this  science  involves  all  medical  systems,  an  1  embraces  other 
agents  besides,  so  it  should  be  understood  by  all — Doctors 
should  understand  it — It  often  saves  life  when  medicines  fail — 
It  can  be  thoroughly  learned  and  practically  understood  in  ten 
hours — Dr.  Dods  will  teach  it  if  preferred — He  is  located  in 
New  York — Will  attend  to  imparting  instruction  aud  lecturing 
abroad,  if  invited — Ignorant  persons  have  gone  abroad  pretend- 
ing to  teach  it  for  ten  dollars,  for  two  dollars,  and  some  for 
twenty-five  cents — Some  have  changed  its  name  to  that  of 
Electro-Biology — To  prevent  imposition  the  secret  is  revealed 
— How  can  those  teach  its  philosophy  and  its  application  to 
disease  who  are  ignorant  of  the  human  system  ? — More  is  here 
taught  than  by  any  lecturers — God  has  stamped  simplicity  on 
his  works — Each  organ  of  the  body  performs  but  one  function 
— There  is  but  one  nerve  through  which  ideas  are  transmitted 
to  the  mind — Ideas  are  successive,  not  simultaneous — We  can 
not  attend  to  two  public  speakers  at  once — The  mind  has  a 
spiritual  brain  and  spiritual  organs — The  nerve  through  which 
impressions  are  communicated  to  the  mind  is  located  in  thu 
organ  of  Individuality — All  the  organs  are  double — This  nerve 
has  infinite  branches  to  all  the  voluntary  parts  of  the  body  to 
communicate  motion — A  pebble  thrown  into  Lake  Superior- 
Its  illustration — Philosophy  of  sympathy — Personal  identity— 
The  brain  is  the  earthly  house — To  control  a  person,  a  commu- 
nication must  first  be  established;-either  by  or  without  contact 
—The  philosophy  of  communication  in  general — Positive  and 
negative  forces  of  male  and  female  electricity — Every  one  has 
his  electric  circle — One  in  twenty-five  is  naturally  in  the  pay 
chological  6tate — The  various  modes  of  taking  communication 
—  But  one  way  after  all — Directions  given — Tho  giine^Tbe 


CONTENTS.  11 

PiOll 
Dinar,  or  Cubital  Nerve — The  Median  Nerve — Both  are  com- 
pound nerves — The  Median  Nerve  is  the  best  for  communica- 
tion— Its  branches  connect  with  the  five  senses — Various  direc- 
tions given  how  to  experiment — Effects  produced  upen  the 
subject — The  coin  described,  and  how  to  use  it — The  number 
of  sittings — Other  substances  may  be  used — The  science  di- 
vided into  five  plans — Mesmerism  is  No.  1 — The  gripe  No.  2— 
The  coin  No.  3 — The  experiments  No.  4 — And  its  application 
to  curing  the  diseases  of  those  not  in  the  state  is  No.  5 — Each 
'A  these  plans  explained — Directions  how  to  mesmerize  fully 
given — How  to  awake  him  by  an  impression — Can  not  experi- 
ment without  a  communication — All  philosophy  requires  cause, 
medium,  and  effect — God  could  not  affect  the  globe,  nor  its  in- 
habitants, if  he  were  isolated — Why  the  experiments  are  con- 
ducive to  health — Philosophy  of  a  surgical  operation  without 
pain  while  the  patient  is  awake  and  rational — Connection  be- 
tween the  mind  aud  nerves  of  sensation — Case  of  Henry  Clay 
in  an  exciting  speech  in  Congress — He  felt  not  the  insertion  of 
a  pin  into  his  flesh — Dr.  Channing's  remarks  on  no  pain  being 
felt  by  the  martyrs — None  is  felt  from  a  wound  in  the  heat  of 
battle — Inference. 

LECTURE  XII. 

SENETOLOGY,  OR  HUMAN  BEAUTY  PHILOSOPHICAL- 
LY    CONSIDERED, 233>*'« 

Human  beauty  founded  on  the  doctrine  of  impressions — Our  spe- 
eies  gradually  improved — Born  into  existence  with  such  forma 
as  we  desire — Beauty  loved,  desired,  and  praised  by  all — The 
mother  by  mental  impressions  variously  affects  the  foetus — Has 
produced  abortion — Was  frightened  at  a  cub  and  produced  an 
idiot  who  acted  like  a  bear — A  lady  frightened  by  a  parrot— 
Her  child  boru  a  mediocre — A  son  born  with  compressed  tem- 
ples, caused  by  the  mother  seeing  a  lamb's  head  crushed — A 
child  born  with  one  arm  and  leg — Effects  produced  by  long- 
ings— Color  of  wine  transferred  to  the  foetus — Strawberry, 
blackberry,  etc.,  transferred — Objections  of  medical  writers 
are  groundless — It  is  no  new  truth — Old  as  human  records— 
Laban  deceived  Jacob — Rachael  and  Leah — Jacob's  cattle 
speckled — He  used  speckled  rods — Its  philosophy — Aqua  regia 
dissolves  gold — Galvanizing  metals — Making  a  bank  plate- 
Identity  of  letters,  marks,  and  engravings  preserved  on  metals 
— Application  of  this  to  the  subject — Menses  are  the  raw  ma- 
terial to  form  tht  child — How  it  is  formed — How  to  produce  it 
in  her  own  image — How  to  make  it  resemble  her  husband,  or 
any  one  else — Influence  of  her  love  or  hatred  on  the  foetus- 
Effects  of  jealousy — Every  object  she  sees  has  a  tendency  to 
produce  a  favorable  or  unfavorable  result  on  the  child — Mind 
has  spiritual  organism — Philosophy  of  effects  produced  upon 
the  foetus — The  mother's  responsibility — Importance  of  gov- 


12  CONTENTS. 


TAOK* 

erning  her  passions,  feelings,  and  emoti.  ins — Importance  of 
Phrenology — How  the  highest  specimens  of  human  beauty 
may  be  produced — A  talented  lady  considered — Pictures, 
countenances,  forms,  landscapes — Under  what  impressions  to 
conceive — Her  room,  its  furniture — Her  mind,  how  employed 
in  contemplating  the  beautiful  in  nature  and  art — Her  food, 
and  how  to  proceed  till  the  time  of  delivery — All  great  men 
produced  by  talented  mothers — Talent  depends  more  on  the 
mother  than  father — But  few  are  now  qualified  to  produce 
beauty — Improvement  gradual  till  the  work  shall  be  universally 
consummated — Those  in  the  psychological  state  considered,  and 
the  husband's  influence  on  such — Importance  of  educating 
woman  in  all  the  sciences,  and  in  political  economy  and  his- 
tory, equal  to  man — The  responsibility  of  her  station  in  rearing 
her  child — The  inconsistency  of  committing  her  child  to  the 
care  of  ignorant  or  base  servants — The  pulpit — Its  moral  power 
— It  ueglects  this  great  subject  and  must  be  aroused  to  nobler 
action — The  gospel  of  Christ — The  millennium — Agricultural 
associations  are  improviug  both  vegetables  and  animals — Re- 
wards offered  for  the  most  beautiful  specimens — But  nothing 
dene  to  improve  and  beautify  the  human  form — We  will  begin 
&—  Future  generations  will  consummate  it — Poetry  on  hope. 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  author  received  the  following  invitation  from  the  under* 
signed  honorable  gentlemen,  members  of  the  United  States  Senat6t 
to  lecture  in  Washington  city,  District  of  Columbia : 

"  Washington,  Feb.  12th,  1850. 
"  To  Dr.  Dods  : 

"  Dear  Sir — Having  received  highly  favorable  accounts  of  the 
addresses  delivered  by  you,  in  different  sections  of  the  Union,  on 
1  Electrical  Psychology,'  a  department  of  science  said  to  treat  of 
the  philosophy  of  disease,  and  the  reciprocal  action  of  mind  and 
matter  upon  each  other,  we  would  be  gratified  if  you  would  deliver 
a  lecture  on  the  subject  in  this  city,  at  the  earliest  time  consistent 
with  your  convenience.  With  a  view  to  the  accommodation  of 
members  of  Congress  and  the  community  generally,  the  Hall  of 
Representatives,  if  it  can  be  procured,  would  be  a  suitable  placa 
for  the  delivery  of  your  discourse. 

"  Yours,  truly, 
"  Geo.  W.  Jones,  Tho.  J.  Rusk, 

"  John  P.  Hale.  Sam  Houston, 

«  H.  Clay,  H.  S.  Foots, 

Dan.  Webster." 

To  the  above  the  following  answer  was  returned  : 

"To  the  Hon.  Tho.  J.  Rusk,  Sam  Houston,  H.  S.  Foote,  Geo.  W 
Jones,  John  P.  Hale,  Henry  Clay,  and  Daniel  Webster,  all  of 
the  United  States  Senate  : 

"  Gentlemen  : 

"  Lq  reply  to  yours  of  Feb.  12th,  I  would  respectfully  say,  that 
I  feel  myself  highly  honored  to  receive  an  invitation  from  you,  to 
lecture  upon  the  philosophy  of  Electrical  Psychology  in  the  United 
States  Capitol.  With  this  invitation  I  comply,  and  it  affords  me 
much  pleasure  to  do  so.  Owing,  however,  to  circumstances  and 
previous  engagements,  my  earliest  and  only  time  during  my  pres- 
ent visit  in  Washington,  will  be  on  Saturday  evening,  Feb.  16th 
I  will  therefore  appoint  that  time  as  most  suitable  to  my  conveni 
ince.  and  commence  my  lecture  at  half-past  seven  o'clock. 
u  With  sentiments  of  high  consideration,  I  am 

"  Fours,  truly, 

"J.  B.  Dods  * 


]-*-  INTRODUCTION. 

The  science  of  Electrical  Psychology  1  have  taught  to  more  that 
a  thousand  individuals,  and  in  all  cp.ses  I  have  uniformly  charged 
gentlemen  ten  dollars  for  tuition,  and  ladies  five.  I  have  also  made 
it  a  uniform  practice  to  lay  them  indiscriminately  under  written 
obligations,  pledging  most  solemnly  their  sacred  honor,  as  ladiea 
and  gentlemen,  that  they  would  never  teach  it  to  any  persons  but 
of  good  moral  character,  nor,  in  any  instance,  for  a  less  price  than 
above  stated,  and  that  they  would  lay  all  those  whom  they  taught 
under  the  same  written  obligations  and  pledges.  But  it  so  hap- 
pens, that  unprincipled  individuals,  regardless  of  their  pledges  of 
gacred  honor,  have,  in  numerous  instances,  violated  them,  and 
taught,  or  at  least  pretended  to  teach,  this  science  to  others  for  any 
price  they  could  obtain.  There  are,  however,  many  honorable  ex- 
ceptions to  this  course  of  conduct  among  my  students,  and  I  am 
proud  to  bear  this  testimony  to  their  faithfulness. 

The  substance  of  the  first  nine  of  these  Lectures  was  deliv- 
ered, by  request,  in  Washington  city,  last  February,  and  immedi 
ately  published.  The  sale  of  the  work  has  exceeded  my  expecta- 
tions, and,  in  this  Fourth  Edition,  I  have  fully  revealed  the  secret, 
so  that  the  reader,  by  the  faithful  perusal  of  my  Lectures  XI.  and 
XII.,  will  be  as  well  qualified  to  experiment  as  those  unprincipled 
pretenders,  above  noticed,  who  go  about  as  teachers.  They  have 
even  made  their  pupils  believe,  that  nothing  was  necessary  for 
them  to  know  only  the  nerve  or  gripe  to  get  a  communication  and 
to  speak  in  a  positive  manner  and  full  tone  of  voice  to  the  sub- 
ject .'  But  you  will  perceive,  on  reading  this  work,  that  they  have 
not  taught  you  the  A,  B,  C  of  this  science.  Its  philosophy  has 
cost  me  seven  years  of  intense  study,  and  it  can  not  be  revealed 
in  a  moment,  not  taught  but  by  a  workman.  Honor  and  justice, 
under  all  these  circumstances,  require  me  to  publish  the  mode  of 
experimenting,  so  that  those  who  shrll  teach  it  hereafter,  will  be 
compelled  to  study  and  prepare  ihtmselves  for  the  work,  as  quali- 
fied Instructors,  because  something  more  ihan  the  secret,  which 
Lecture  XL  rsveals,  will  now  be  required. 

J  B  1)008. 

Hew  York ,  September  26th,  1860. 


electrical  psychology. 


LECTURE  I 


Ladies  and  Gentlemen  : 

I  have  received  an  invitation  from  several  eminent 
members  of  the  United  States  Senate,  to  deliver  a 
Lecture  on  the  Science  of  Electrical  Psychology — -the 
philosophy  of  disease — the  connecting  link  between 
mind  and  matter — their  reciprocal  action  upon  each 
other,  and  the  grand  operations  of  nature  that  this 
science  may  involve.  In  compliance  with  this  invita- 
tion, I  now  stand  before  you  for  this  purpose,  and  will 
endeavor  faithfully  to  discharge  my  duty.  In  order  to 
do  my  subject  justice,  I  shall  be  under  the  necessity  of 
making  a  very  liberal  draft  on  your  time  and  patience. 
Sensible  that  I  stand  here  by  the  invitation  of  those 
distinguished  orators,  statesmen,  and  generals,  whose 
eloquence,  in  defence  of  Liberty,  has  been  felt  by 
thrones — whose  wisdom  has  given  laws  that  are  re- 
spected by  all  nations  on  earth,  and  make  millions  oi 


16  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

freemen  happy — and  whose  heroism  has  breasted  the 
battle  storm  in  defence  of  human  rights — it  may  well 
be  expected  that  I  should,  in  some  measure  at  least, 
feel  the  embarrassment  that  tne  occasion  itself  must 
naturally  inspire. 

As  the  Creator  of  the  universe  has  endowed  man 
with  reason,  and  assigned  him  a  noble  and  intelligent 
rank  in  the  scale  of  intellectual  and  moral  being — and 
as  he  has  commanded  him  to  use  this  faculty — so  I 
may  with  justice  remark,  that  he  who  cannot  reason  is 
a  fool ;  he  who  dare  not  reason,,  is  a  coward  ;  he  who 
will  not  reason,  is  a  bigot ;  but  he  who  can  and  dare 
reason,  is  a  man. 

The  realms  of  nature  lie  open  in  boundless  prospect, 
above,  beneath,  and  around  us.  As  inhabitants  of 
this  globe,  we  occupy  but  a  small  spot — the  centre,  as 
it  were,  of  the  immense  universe  that  swarms  with  a 
countless  variety  of  animated  beings,  and  contains  end- 
less sources  of  mental  and  moral  delights.  Order, 
harmony,  and  beauty  are  so  perfectly  woven  together 
slid  blended  throughout  nature,  as  to  form  the  mag- 
nificent robe  she  wears,  and  with  which  she  not  only 
charms  and  even  dazzles  the  eyes  of  the  beholder,  but 
conceals  the  overwhelming  power  and  majesty  of  her 
person.  As  she  moves,  the  most  grand  and  awful 
Impressions  mark  her  footsteps  on  the  globe's  surface 
or  centre — in  air  or  ocean.  She  smiles  in  the  gentle- 
ness of  the  calm,  and  frowns  in  the  fury  of  the  storm. 


LECTURE    I.  17 

But  whether  silence  reigns,  earthquakes  rumble,  or 
thunders  roll,  she  keeps  her  mighty  course  unaffected 
by  the  revolutions  of  ages. 

At  the  same  time  that  there  is  confessedly  something 
most  grand  in  the  operations  of  nature,  and  even  while 
the  most  gifted  minds  are  reveling  with  delight  amidst 
her  magnificence,  and  feasting  upon  her  splendors, 
there  is  still  something  humiliating  in  the  thought,  that 
incomprehensibility  continues  to  hold  its  dark  and  sul- 
len empire  over  the  causes  of  many  of  her  most  sub- 
lime manifestations.  For  a  period  of  twice  three 
thousand  years,  she  has  concealed  beneath  the  shadow 
of  her  hand,  not  only  the  cause  of  worlds  rolling  in 
their  ceaseless  course  through  the  illimitable  fields  of 
space,  but  also  the  rise  and  fall  of  vegetation,  and  the 
phenomena  of  life  and  death. 

Man  is  intellectually  a  progressive  being.  Though 
confined  to  a  narrow  circumference  of  space,  and 
chained  to  this  earth,  which  is  but  a  small  part  of  the 
unbounded  universe,  yet  as  his  mind  wears  the  stamp 
:f  original  greatness,  he  is  nevertheless  capable  of  ex- 
tending his  researches  far  beyond  the  boundaries  of 
this  globe.  His  mind  is  capable  of  a  ceaseless  devel- 
opment of  its  powers.  From  the  faint  glimmerings  of 
infantile  reason,  he  passes  on  to  that  intellectual 
strength  and  grandeur  when  he  can  take  a  survey  of 
the  planets,  the  dimensions  of  the  sun,  trace  the  comet 
in  its  erratic  course,  analyze  the  works  of  God,  and 


18  ELECTltlCAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

comprehend  the  vast  *ud  complicated  operations  of  his 
own  mind.  How  sublime  is  the  contemplation,  that  he 
can  invade  the  territory  of  other  worlds,  bring  thei: 
within  field-view  of  the  ken  of  his  telescope,  and  see 
them  play  their  aerial  gambols  under  the  superintend- 
ence of  attraction  and  repulsion. 

But  before  I  proceed  any  further,  it  becomes  neces- 
sary that  I  clearly  state  the  subject  of  my  present 
course  of  Lectures,  so  that  we  may  enter  upon  it  under- 
standingly,  and,  if  possible,  with  a  clear  conception  of 
its  nature  and  importance  to  the  human  race.  The 
subject,  upon  which  I  am  entering,  is  that  to  which  I 
have  given  the  name  of  Electrical  Psychology,  as  the 
one  which  is,  in  my  estimation,  the  most  appropriate. 
Psychology  is  a  compound  of  two  Greek  words,  viz., 
psuche,  which  means  soul,  and  logos,  which  meann 
word,  discourse,  or  wisdom.  Hence  by  Psychology 
we  are  to  understand  the  Science  of  the  Soul. 
And  as  all  impressions  are  made  upon  the  soul  through 
the  medium  of  electricity,  as  the  only  agent  by  which 
it  holds  communication  with  the  external  world,  so  you 
readily  perceive  not  only  the  propriety  but  the  entire 
aptitude  of  the  name  Electrical  Psychology. 

Twenty  years  ago,  I  discovered  electricity  to  be  the 
connecting  link  between  mind  and  inert  matter,  and  on 
this  discovery  the  philosophy  of  the  present  science  ia 
based.  Ever  since  1830,  I  have  contended,  that  elec- 
tricity is  not  only  the  connecting  link  between  mind 


LECTUBE    I.  19 

Mid  inert  matter,  but  is  the  grand  agent  employed  by 
the  Creator  to  move  and  govern  the  universe.  These 
views,  in  opposition  to  the  doctrine  of  inherent  attrac- 
tion in  matter,  I  advocated  in  Taunton,  Massachusetts, 
in  two  Lectures  I  delivered  before  the  Lycc  am  in  1832. 
The  substance  of  these  is  embodied  in  six  Lectures  I 
delivered  at  the  Marlboro  Chapel,  in  Boston,  Janu- 
ary 1843,  by  request  of  members  of  both  branches  of 
the  Massachusetts  Legislature  then  in  session  in  that 
city  ;  and  they  have  been  most  extensively  published  in 
this  country,  and  republished  in  England.  In  that 
work  they  are  applied  to  the  philosophy  of  Mesmerism. 
I  make  these  remarks  so  that  ladies  and  gentlemen 
present  on  this  occasion  may  know,  that  my  views  of 
the  electrical  theory  of  the  universe,  and  the  con- 
necting link  between  mind  and  inert  matter,  are  not 
the  breathings  of  a  momentary  impulse,  but  of  long 
and  matured  deliberation. 

Electrical  Psychology  takes  a  most  extensive  range; 
and  embraces  a  field  rich  in  variety  of  thought.  It  is 
so  startling  to  human  credulity,  that  its  truth  cannot 
be  believed,  only  by  passing  it  through  the  ordeal  of 
the  severest  scrutiny  by  oft-repeated  experiments.  As 
to  the  character  and  force  of  these  experiments,  I  can- 
not better  express  them  than  in  the  following  editorial 
notice  from  the  "  Saratoga  Republican." 

The  editor  of  the  Saratoga  Republican  having  re- 
ceived a  letter  from  the  Hon.  Richard  D.  Davis,  for- 


20  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

merry  a  member  of  Congress,  in  relation  to  this  science 
writes  as  follows  : 

"  Dr.  Dods,  who  professes  to  have  discovered  a  new 
science,  to  which  he  applies  the  name  of  Electrical 
Psychology,  is  at  present  giving  a  series  of  remarka- 
ble experiments,  in  our  village,  by  way  of  illustrating 
its  truth  and  undoubted  reality.  By  it  he  professes  to 
be  able  to  perform  the  most  startling  and  cunning  ex- 
periments, upon  persons  fully  awake,  and  in  the  most 
perfect  possession  of  all  their  faculties.  Controlling 
their  motions — standing  up,  they  find  it  impossible  to 
sit,  down ;  if  in  a  sitting  posture,  tkey  are  unable  to 
rise  till  the  operator  allows  them  to  do  so.  He  claims 
to  have  the  power  to  take  away  the  powers  of  hearing, 
speech,  sight,  and  the  memory,  etc.,  whenever  he 
pleases,  and  to  return  again  these  faculties  instantly ; 
that  he  can  change  the  personal  identity  of  certain 
individuals,  making  them  imagine  for  the  time  being 
that  they  are  persons  of  color,  that  they  belong  to  the 
opposite  sex,  or  that  they  are  some  renowned  general, 
orator,  statesman,  or  what-not.  He  professes  to  be 
able  to  change  the  appearance  and  taste  of  water  in 
rapid  succession  to  that  of  lemonade,  honey,  vinegar, 
molasses,  wormwood,  coffee,  milk,  brandy ;  the  latter 
producing  all  the  intoxicating  effects  of  alcohol.  He 
brings  before  his  subjects  the  threatening  thunder- 
cloud. They  see  the  lightnings  flash  and  hear  the 
thunders  roll ;  the  storm  bursts  over  their  heads,  and 


LECTURE    I.  21 

they  fiee  tc  a  plaje  of  shelter,  under  a  table,  behch, 
or  any  thing  that  offers  protection.  All  this  while  the 
individuals  experimented  upon  are  'perfectly  awake  and 
in  possession  of  their  reasoning  faculties. 

"  We  are  well  aware,  that  the  first  impression  upon 
the  mind  of  the  reader  will  be,  that  all  this  is  absurd, 
ridiculous,  and  utterly  impossible.  This  would  be  the 
natural  conclusion  of  every  one  who  had  never  wit- 
nessed any  of  these  surprising  phenomena ;  but  the 
reality  of  all  this  is  maintained  by  some  of  the  most 
respectable  and  talented  men  in  the  country.  We 
have  permission  to  refer  to  several  individuals  of  the 
highest  standing  and  character,  who  are  believers  in 
this  science,  and  have  been  pupils  of  Dr.  Dods.  We 
have  before  us  a  letter  written  by  Hon.  Richard  D, 
Davis,  from  which  we  make  the  following  extract. 
Mr.  Davis  says  : 

"  The  science  which  Dr.  Dods  teaches,  is  to  my  mind 
alike  novel,  instructive,  and  useful — full  of  speculation 
fit  for  the  loftiest  intellect,  and  replete  with  rich  in- 
structions for  every  condition  of  human  life.  So  far 
as  I  am  able  to  judge,  I  can  safely  say,  that  no  person 
of  ordinary  capacity  and  intelligence  can  take  the  usual 
course  of  lessons  from  the  doctor,  who  will  not  at  its  end 
sincerely  acknowledge  himself  more  than  tenfold  repaid 
for  its  cost  of  time,  trouble,  and  expense  ;  and  the  more 
the  ability  and  information  of  the  individual  may  DCj 
*he  more  ready  will  be  the  acknowledgment.     I  am  un- 


22  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY, 

willing  to  express  more  than  half  the  gratification  an  d 
instruction  which  I  have  received,  and  if  my  recom- 
mendation can  prevail  with  any  one  to  become  his  pu- 
pil, it  is  most  cheerfully  and  earnestly  given." 

What  I  have  now  read  in  your  hearing,  will  give  you 
some  idea  of  the  nature  of  the  experiments,  and  also 
what  claims  Electrical  Psychology  has,  in  the  opinion 
of  distinguished  men,  in  relation  to  its  pretensions  to 
science  and  usefulness.  But  there  is  no  question,  that 
ladies  and  gentlemen,  after  admitting  that  these  exper- 
iments are  truly  wonderful,  and  to  them  incomprehens- 
ible, will  yet  ask,  of  what  use  are  they  to  the  humar 
race  1  The  great  usefulness  and  transcendent  import 
ance  of  this  science  to  the  human  race  consist  in  it 
curative  powers  over  those  diseases  that  medicine  can 
not  remove.  As  facts  come  home  to  men's  bosoms, 
and  rebuke  the  skeptic  in  a  voice  of  thunder,  so  I  can- 
not give  a  better  answer  to  the  question,  nor  render  you 
a  better  service,  than  to  read  a  few  extracts  from  the 
city  papers  of  Auburn,  New  York,  where  I  last  lectur- 
ed and  experimented.     It  is  as  follows  : 

"  Hiram  Bostwick,  Esq.,  so  long  and  so  well  known 
in  this  city  [Auburn]  and  county,  during  more  than  two 
years  before  he  saw  Dr.  Dods,  did  not  take  a  natural 
step.  For  a  year  and  a  half  last  past,  could  only 
slowly  drag  his  feet  along,  as  though  they  were  attached 
to  wooden  legs,  and,  at  that,  did  not  attempt  to  drag 
binisclf  about   the    streets.     Besides    an    attack   last 


LECTURE    I.  22 

spring  (which  was  the  fifth  stroke  of  palsy  he  had  re- 
ceived), lie  could  not  even  distinguish  light  from  dark- 
ness, with  his  right  eye.  In  a  word,  he  was  dead  to 
happiness  and  usefulness.  He  met  Dr.  Dods,  and  in 
less  than  a  week  he  was  taking  walks  of  a  mile  in 
length.  With  his  right  eye  he  distinguishes  persons* 
and  is  constantly  improving,  while  he  is  daily  prome- 
nading our  streets  with  the  perfect  control  and  use  of 
every  muscle,  and  is  quite  as  happy  as  any  man  we 
meet." 

I  will  read  again  from  another  Auburn  paper.  It  is 
us  follows  : 

a  Do  the  dumb  speak  and  the  deaf  hear?  In  Au^ 
burn,  in  October,  1849,  they  do.  This  forenoon,  two 
girls  went  to  the  City  Hall,  neither  of  whom  could  hear 
a  conversation  in  an  ordinary  tone.  They  were  •ope- 
rated upon  some  five  or  six  minutes  each,  upon  the 
principles  of  Electrical  Psychology  as  taught  by  Dr 
Dods,  and  when  they  left,  one  of  them  could  distinctly 
hear  an  ordinary  conversation,  and  the  other  could  as 
distinctly  hear  a  whisper." 

"  Yesterday  noon,  a  lady  from  Massachusetts  called 
upon  Dr.  Dods,  at  the  Western  Exchange.  Her  eye- 
lids were  so  drawn  down  over  her  eyes  that  she  could 
not  see,  and  she  could  not  talk.  In  twenty  minutes 
she  could  both  see  and  converse.  If  any  one  discredits 
this  statement,  let  him  ask  Gen  Wood,  the  gentle- 
manly proprietor  of  the  Exchange      When  this  blind 


g4  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

and  dumb  lady  came,  her  femak  attendant  stated  tc 
Gen.  Wood,  that  her  friend  had  not  opened  her  eyes 
for  three  years,  and  for  the  last  year  had  not  uttered 
a  syllable.  The  afflicted  lady  made  the  same  state- 
ment, after  the  doctor  had  restored  her  wonted  powers 
of  speech.  During  the  three  years,  she  was  for  one  of 
them  confined  in  a  dark  room,  to  avoid  the  supposed 
injurious  effects  of  light.  She  could  not  raise  the  up- 
per lids  of  the  eyes. 

"  Such  was  her  situation  when  she  called  upon  Dr. 
Dods  at  the  Exchange  yesterday  ;  and  in  half  an  hour 
she  left  again,  drinking  in  with  delight  the  prospect 
about  her,  and  from  which  for  years  she  had  been  en- 
tirely shut  out,  and  while  at  the  same  time  she  poured 
forth  her  joy  in  words  which  it  may  be  well  imagined 
were  those  of  the  purest  ecstasy.  Her  friends  tried 
to  prevail  upon  her,  when  she  reached  the  carriage  at 
the  door,  to  shield  her  eyes,  lest  the  sudden  change 
from  darkness  to  glare  should  have  a  deleterious  in- 
fluence upon  those  sensitive  and  delicate  organs ;  but 
a  gaze  about  the  city  was  ,too  rich  a  treat  to  be 
lost,  and  she  availed  herself  of  the  opportunity  tc 
enjoy  it. 

"As  this  lady  had  been  so  long  and  so  severely 
afflicted,  had  availed  herself  of  the  knowledge  and  skil] 
afforded  by  the  medical  profession,  and  was  at  the  time 
traveling  in  search  of  health,  I  thought  the  case  wor- 
thy of  mention. 


LECTURE    ].,  2*5 

*•  f)o  not  understand  me  to  be  one  who,  even  if  in 
his  power,  would  do  any  thing  to  depreciate  the  high 
estimation  in  which  the  medical  profession  is  so  justly 
held.  Not  at  all.  I  regard  it  as  one  of  the  noblest 
of  all  pursuits,  and  believe  that  its  practitioners,' as  a 
class,  are  not  excelled,  if  equaled,  by  any  other  in 
kindness,  self-denial,  and  humanity.  But  I  will  say, 
that  every  physician  ought  to  understand  Dr.  Dods' 
system  of  Electrical  Psychology.  There  is  no  room  to 
doubt  that  it  will  not  only  give  him  a  knowledge  of  laws 
and  phenomena  of  the  human  economy  he  does  not  now 
know  or  comprehend,  but  will  enable  him  to  afford  re- 
lief and  restoration  in  cases  where  before  it  was  out  of 
his  power. 

"  Granting  this  to  be  so — and  the  appeal  here  is  to 
facts  which  cannot  lie^what  is  the  duty  of  the  honest 
physician'?  Is  it  to  sneer  at  a  system  or  science 
which,  with  a  respectable  face,  makes  even  these  pre- 
tensions ? — which  professes  to  unfold  laws  and  powers 
of  mind  and  body  which  they  do  not  understand,  and 
backed  up  by  actual,  tangible  results,  which  utterly 
dumbfound  the  whole  of  them  ?  Is  sneering  his  duty, 
when  his  hands  hold  the  scales  in  which  are  deposited 
life  and  death  1  Is  it  not  rather  his  duty  to  investi- 
gate the  matter — to  probe  it  to  the  bottom — to  know 
all  that  can  be  known  about  it  ? 

"  1  he  community  will  answer  these  questions,  be- 
tause  they  are  deeply  interested  in  the  answer.     In 


26  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

this  city,  cures  will  be  performed  within  one  year,  by 
the  pupils  of  Dr.  Dods,  in  cases  where  the  present 
medical  system  has  been  exhausted  in  vain.  This  will 
test  the  question.  And  by  this  test,  every  physician 
who  sneers  at  Electrical  Psychology  will  be  compelled 
to  abide.  From  it  he  cannot,  and  will  not  escape. 
I  will  refer  now  to  only  one  beauty  of  the  electro- 
psychological  treatment  of  pain  and  disease.  Its 
pharmacy  is  always  perfect — it  is  of  God." 

From  the  extracts  which  I  have  now  read  in  your 
hearing,  from  the  Auburn  papers,  you  will  at  once 
perceive  the  power  and  glory  that  hover  around  this 
science,  and  the  importance  which  is  claimed  in  its 
behalf  as  one  of  the  greatest  blessings  ever  vouchsafed 
to  the  human  race.  So  that  you  may  see  the  high 
estimation  in  which  this  science  is  held  by  the  citizens 
of  Auburn,  generally,  where  these  cures  were  per- 
formed, I  will  trouble  my  audience  but  once  more,  and 
ask  their  indulgence  while  I  read  the  resolutions  they 
unanimously  passed  in  behalf  of  Electrical  Psychology 
as  a  great  and  important  science,  which  resolutions 
were  published  in  the  Auburn  papers.  I  will  also 
read  the  prefaced  remarks  of  the  editor  They  are  as 
follows  : 

"  Electrical  Psychology. — Dr.  Dods  closed  his 
Lectures,  in  Auburn,  on  Saturday  evening.  It  will  be 
seen  by  our  columns  this  afternoon,  that  the  gentlemen 
composing  his  Class,  availed  themselves  of  the  occa- 


LECTURE    I  27 

sion  to  express  their  views  of  Electrical  Psychology, 
and  of  the  manner  in  which  the  Doctor  sustained  his 
relations  as  their  Instructor  in  his  system.  It'  13 
enough  to  sa}^  that  the  Class  numbered  gentlemen  of 
undoubted  intelligence. " 


"  Proceedings  adopted  by  the  Auburn  Psychological 
Class. 

M  At  a  meeting  of  the  Class  of  forty-five  persons, 
who  had  taken  private  lessons  of  Dr.  J.  B.  Dons  in 
the  science  of  Electrical  Psychology,  held  at  the  City 
Hall,  in  the  city  of  Auburn,  on  the  27th  day  of  Octo- 
ber, 1849,  John  P.  Hulbert  was  called  to  the  chair, 
and  Dr.  S.  N.  Smith  appointed  secretary. 

"  On  motion,  a  committee  of  three  was  appointed 
by  the  chairman  to  draft  and  report  to  the  meeting 
resolutions  expressive  of  the  views  and  feelings  of  Dr. 
Dods'  pupils,  in  the  city  of  Auburn,  in  respect  to  the 
lessons  and  lectures  given  them  by  him." 

"  On  motion,  the  chairman  and  secretary  were 
added  to  the  committee. 

"  The  committee  reported  the  following  resolutions, 
which  were  unanimously  adopted  by  the  meeting. 

"  Resolved,  That  the  science  of  Electrical  Psy- 
chology, as  taught  to  this  class,  by  Dr.  J.  B.  Dods, 
in  a  series  of  private  instructions  and  lectures,  we  be- 
lieve to  be  founded  in  immutable  truth,  and  that  i* 


28  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

wiL"   accomplish  for  the  human  race  an  inappreciable 
amount  of  good. 

"  Resolved,  That  we  believe  Electrical  Psycho- 
Loci  has  been,  and  will  be  eminently  useful  in  allevi 
a  ting  the  pains  of  the  suffering,  and  in  the  cure  of  dis 
eases ;  that  it  is  as  comprehensive  as  it  is  beautiful 
and  beneficent ;  and  that  it  is  not  only  eminently  cal- 
culated to  enlarge  and  elevate  the  mind,  but  to  impress 
upon  it  more  exalted  ideas  of  the  infinite  wisdom  and 
goodness  of  the  Deity. 

"  Resolved,  That  we  tender  to  Dr.  Dods  our-  thanks 
for  the  courteous  and  gentlemanly  manner  in  which  he 
lias  discharged  his  duties  to  us  as  his  pupils.  That 
he  has,  in  all  respects,  redeemed  every  pledge  or  as- 
surance that  he  gave  us  when  we  became  his  pupils, 
and  that  in  parting  from  him  we  give  him  our  warmest 
wishes  for  his  prosperity  and  happiness. 

"  On  motion,  resolved,  That  the  proceedings  of  this 
meeting  be  signed  by  the  chairman  and  secretary,  and 
delivered  to  Dr.  Dods,  and  that  they  be  published  in 
the  newspapers  of  the  city. 

"  John  P.  Hulbert,  Chairman. 

"  S.  N.  Smith,  Secretary." 

The  subject  of  these  Lectures  is  now  fairly  opefc 

fore  us.     I  have  explained  what  I  mean  by  the  term 

Electrical  Psychology,  and  why  I  saw  fit  to  give 

the  science  this  name.     The  wonderful  and  startling 


LECTURE    I.  29 

phenomena  that  hover  around  it,  like  so  rnanj  invisi- 
ble angels,  and  which  are  made  manifest  in  the  cxperi 
ments  produced,  I  have  also  candidly  stated.  They 
consist  in  the  fact,  that  one  human  being  can,  through 
a  certain  nervous  influence,  obtain  and  exercise  a 
power  over  another,  so  as  to  perfectly  control  his  vol- 
untary motions  and  muscular  force ;  and  also  produce 
various  impressions  on  his  mind,  however  extravagant, 
ludicrous,  or  wild — and  that  too  while  he  is  in  a  per- 
fectly wakeful  state.  I  have  stated,  that  it  is  one  of 
the  most  powerful  remedial  agents  to  alleviate  the 
pains  of  the  suffering,  and  to  cure  those  diseases  that 
set  the  power  of  medicine,  and  the  skill  of  the  ablest 
practitioner,  at  defiance.  And  from  the  published 
newspaper  articles,  letters,  and  resolutions  of  most 
highly  reputable,  and  even  distinguished  men,  which  J 
have  just  read  in  your  hearing,  you  can  form  an  opin- 
ion of  the  effects  produced,  of  the  cures  performed,  of 
the  high  estimation  in  which  this  science  is  held  by 
those  who  have  acquainted  themselves  with  its  secret 
powers,  and  of  their  high  estimate  of  its  incalculable 
importance  to  the  human  race,  and  the  future  amount 
cf  good  it  is  ultimately  destined  to  achieve. 

I  have  only  read  to  you  the  testimony  of  the  citizens 
of  Auburn,  but  could  produce  the  testimony  of  thou- 
sands more,  from  the  various  portions  of  the  United 
States  where  I  have  lectured — of  the  importance  of 
this  science  in  the  cure  of  diseases  ;  and  those,  too,  of 


JJU  ELECTBICAL    PS^  CH0L0GY. 

a  more  startling  character  than  any  I  have  named.  1 
can  produce  the  testimony  of  hundreds,  that  this  sci- 
ence has,  in  fifty  minutes,  restored  to  Lucy  Ann  Allen, 
of  Lynchburg,  Virginia,  the  use  of  her  limbs  ;  who 
had  not  walked  a  step  in  eighteen  years,  nor  had  she 
even  been  able  to  raise  herself  up  from  her  pillow  so  as 
to  sit  in  her  bed  for  more  than  fourteen  years.  Such 
is  the  nature  and  intrinsic  grandeur  of  this  Science  ; 
such  are  the  experiments  and  facts  connected  with  it ; 
such  are  its  results  that  stamp  it  with  the  high  im- 
press of  its  sterling  importance  to  mankind ;  and 
such  are  its  lofty  end  and  aim  ;  and  as  such  it  must 
stand  when  the  pillars  of  strength  and  beauty  that 
support  our  Capitol  shall  •  fall  and  be  crumbled  to 
dust. 

Some  have  the  impression,  that  Electrical  Psychology 
is,  after  all,  but  Mesmerism.  In  answer  to  such  I  will 
say,  that  there  is  a  very  marked  difference  between  the 
two  sciences,  and  this  difference  is  easily  pointed  out. 
Mesmerism  is  the  doctrine  of  sympathy ;  Elec- 
trical Psychology  is  the  doctrine  of  impressions. 
In  Mesmerism  there  is  a  sympathy  so  perfect  between 
the  magnetizer  and  subject,  that  what  he  sees,  the  sub- 
ject sees — what  he  hears,  the  subject  hears — what  he 
feels,  the  subject  feels — what  he  tastes,  the  subject 
tastes — and  what  he  smells,  the  subject  also  smells  ; 
and  lastly,  what  the  magnetizer  wills,  is  likewise  the 
will  of  his   subject.     But  the  person  in  the  electro- 


LECTURE    I.  31 

psychological  state  lias  no  such  sympathies  with  his 
operator.  His  sight ,  hearing ',  feeling,  taste,  and 
smell  are  entirely  independent  of  the  operator,  and  he 
continually  exerts  his  will  against  him,  and  resists  him 
with  all  his  muscular  force.  The  person  who  is 
aroused  from  the  mesmeric  slumber,  has  no  remem- 
brance of  what  transpired  in  it ;  while  the  person  in 
the  electro-psychological  state,  is  a  witness  of  his  own 
actions,  and  knows  all  that  transpired.  The  person  in 
the  mesmeric  state  can  hear  no  voice  but  that  of  his 
magnetizer,  or  the  voices  of  those  with  whom  he  is  put 
in  communication.  But  the  person  in  the  electro- 
psychological  state,  can  hear  and  converse  with  all  as 
usual. 

If  these  distinctions  are  not  sufficiently  marked  to 
settle  the  points  of  difference,  then  I  will  mention  two 
more.  I  have  found  persons  entirely  and  naturally  in 
the  electro-psychological  state,  who  never  could  be 
mesmerized  at  all,  nor  in  the  least  affected,  under  re- 
peated trials.  The  other  point  is,  that  no  person  is 
naturally  in  the  mesmeric  state,  but  thousands  are 
naturally  in  the  electro-psychological  state,  and  live 
and  die  in  it.  Mesmerism  and  Somnambulism  are 
identical ;  the}7  are  one  and  the  same  state.  And  as 
no  person  is  naturally  in  the  somnambulic  state,  so  na 
one  is  naturally  in  the  mesmeric  state.  Though  the 
experiments  of  both  these  states  are  performed  by  the 
same  nervous  fluid,  yet  this  does  not  rerder  the  two 


gg  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

sciences  identical,  any  more  than  that  they  are  reu 
dered  identical  with  fits,  or  insanity,  which  are  caused 
by  the  same  nervous  force.     These  observations  being 
sufficient  for  my  purpose,  are  respectfully  submittei  tc 
fom  for  ^our  candid  consideration. 


LECTURE    II.  33 


LECTURE  IL 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 

As  the  subject  of  Electrical  Psychology  is  now  fairly 
introduced,  its  phenomena  stated,  and  its  importance 
to  the  human  race  clearly  pointed  out,  we  are  now  pre- 
pared to  enter  the  diversified  fields  of  nature ;  to 
glance  at  the  operations  of  mental  and  material  exist- 
ences ;  and  to  proceed  understandingly  to  the  consid- 
eration of  its  claims  to  philosophy,  as  the  foundatioi) 
on  which  it  rests,  and  the  power  by  which  its  existence 
must  be  sustained.  But  as  I  am  fully  sensible  tha.^ 
such  strange  facts  as  I  have  stated  are  most  trying  t( 
human  credulity — sensible  that  they  are  calculated  to 
awaken  the  deepest  feelings  of  contempt  in  the  bosoms 
of  the  skeptical,  and  to  draw  forth  the  sneers  of  man- 
kind— so  I  must  be  indulged  to  speak,  in  the  first 
place,  of  the  march  of  science,  the  beauty  of  the  inde- 
pendent expression  of  our  thoughts,  and  to  notice  the 
fate  of  the  opponents  of  science  in  all  ages  of  the 
world. 

Entering,  as  I  do,  upon,  a  theme  entirely  new,  I  am 
by  no  means  insensible  of  the  embarrassments  th&t 
2* 


84  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

surround  me.  Were  I  called  to  address  you  upon  any 
other  subject  than  that  of  Electrical  Psychology, 
I  should  stand  before  you  with  other  feelings  than 
those  that  now  pervade  my  breast.  It  is  by  no  means 
an  enviable  task  to  step  aside  from  the  long  beaten 
path  of  science  into  the  unexplored  and  trackless  re- 
gions of  solitude  and  silence.  By  sc  doing,  and  daring 
to  think  for  myself,  I  am  well  aware  that  I  assume  no 
very  enviable  position  as  it  regards  popularity.  Inde- 
pendent thought  and  fearless  expression  have  ever 
drawn  forth  the  scoffs  and  sneers  of  that  portion  of  our 
race  who  have  adopted,  without  investigation,  the  sci- 
entific opinions  of  others.  I  refer  to  those  only  who 
have  received  their  ideas  from  others  by  inheritance,  as 
they  did  their  real  estate.  For  the  one  they  never 
labored,  and  for  the  other  they  never  thought. 

Such  persons,  though  professing  to  be  learned,  and 
perchance  even  claiming  to  be  the  guardians  of  science, 
are  nevertheless  its  greatest  enemies  ;  and  by  exerting 
their  influence  in  favor  of  old  opinions,  however  absurd, 
and  against  any  innovations,  however  true,  useful,  or 
grand,  are  checking  the  mighty  march  of  mind.  They 
are  clogs  of  more  than  leaden  weight  hanging  upon  the 
chariot  wheels  of  science  that  are  rolling  through  our 
world.  It  commenced  its  career  at  the  breaking  morn 
of  creation,  with  but  few  passengers  on  board,  and  has 
continued  its  course  with  increasing  speed  and  growing 
glory  down    to  the  present  moment.     It  now  travels 


LECTURE    II.  85 

-fritl.  the  brilliancy  and  rapidity  of  the  lightning's  Haze, 
and  even  compels  the  very  lightnings  to  speak  in  a 
familiar  voice  to  man  !  Yes  ;  they  even  write,  not 
only  their  forky  gambols  on  the  bosom  of  the  dark 
cloud,  but  they  write  on  paper,  and  transmit  human 
thought  as  swift  as  thought  can  move. 

The  chariot  of  science  is  destined  to  continue  its 
majestic  course,  in  duration  coeval  with  our  globe  ! 
Still  more  !  it  is  destined  to- outlive  the  dark  and  sullen 
catastrophe  of  worlds  !  The  chariot  of  science,  with 
ever  increasing  power,  magnificence,  and  glory,  is  des- 
tined to  pass  the  boundaries  of  the  mouldering  tomb — 
to  snatch  immortality  from  the  iron  grasp  of  death,  and 
roll  on  in  living  grandeur  through  the  eternal  world, 
gathering  new  accessions  of  intellectual  beauty  and 
unending  delight.  Its  passengers  here  are  mortal  men. 
There  they  will  be  angel,  archangel,  cherubim,  sera- 
phim, and  the  glorified  millions  of  our  race  !  The 
mind  of  man  wears  the  impression  of  divinity,  the 
stamp  of  original  greatness  ;  and  is  destined  to  ripen 
in  mental  vigor  as  the  wasteless  ages  of  eternity  roll. 
Hence  the  very  principles  of  our  nature  as  an  impres- 
sion from  the  hand  of  God,  forbid  us  to  stand  still. 
Their  command  is  onward. 

If  no  human  being  had  dared  to*  hazard  the  expres- 
sion of  an  original  thought,  then  nothing  in  the  realms 
of  science  would  have  been  disclosed  by  speech,  noi 
penned  in  books.     A   dreary,  barren  waste,  wrapped 


ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY 


in  solitude  and  night,  would  have  reigned  for  numan 
contemplation.  But  instead  of  this  frightful  picture 
of  desolation,  we  see  those  fruitful  fields  of  mental  and 
moral  beauty,  so  rich  in  the  scenery  of  thought,  and  in 
endless  variety,  present  themselves  to  our  view.  A 
secret  rapture  of  thrilling  delight  fills  the  heart  as  we 
glance  over  this  lovely  scene,  on  which  human  research 
has  thrown  a  splendor  surpassing  that  of  the  noontide 
blaze. 

Had  not  some  master  spirits  dared  to  freely  speak 
and  write  their  thoughts,  then  those  pretended  friends 
of  science,  who  now  oppose  every  tiling  that  may  ap- 
pear to  them  both  new  and  strange,  would  have  been 
destitute  of  that  knowledge  they  obtained  from  books  ; 
and  not  daring  to  think  for  themselves,  they  would  have 
remained  in  mental  night.  It  is  by  daring  to  step  aside 
from  the  beaten  track  of  books,  and  bringing  forth  from 
the  dark  arcana  of  nature  into  the  light  of  day  some 
new  truth,  that  we  add  our  mite  to  the  common  stock 
of  knowledge  already  accumulated.  He  who  denies  us 
this  grand  right  of  our  nature  is  a  scientific  bigot,  and 
has  yet  to  learn,  that  even  the  school  and  college  were 
only  established  to  discipline  the  mind  for  action. 
There  the  student,  through  books  and  instructors,  ia 
only  made  to  see  how  other  men  have  dared  to  think, 
and  speak,  and  write,  and  thus  his  mind,  being  made 
to  feel  its  innate  freedom;  power,  and  greatness,  be- 
comes inspired  with  a   self-determinaticn   to   do   the 


LECIURE    II.  37 

same.  This  makes  the  man,  and  answers  the  lofty 
end  of  human  existence.  On  the  other  hand,  he  "who 
goes  through  life,  leaning  entirely  upon  books  and  the 
opinions  of  others,  without  thinking  for  himself,  ren 
ders  his  present  existence  a  blank,  inasmuch  as  he  lays 
his  head  in  the  dust,  without  its  having  bequeathed  one 
original  thought  to  the  world,  for  the  benefit  of  after 
generations. 

The  truths  that  God  has  established  inherent  in  na- 
ture, are  not  only  infinitely  diversified,  but  are  at  the 
same  time  immutable  and  eternal.  No  possible  addi- 
tion can  be  made  to  their  number,  nor  is  it  in  the  power 
of  man  to  create  or  annihilate  a  single  truth  in  the  em- 
pire of  nature.  They  exist  independent  of  his  be- 
lief or  unbelief ;  and  all  he  can  do  is  to  search  them 
out,  and  bring  them  forth  from  darkness  into  the  light 
of  day.  And  he  who  has  the  magnanimity  to  do  this, 
so  far  from  being  opposed  and  persecuted,  should  be 
sustained  and  encouraged  as  the  benefactor  of  his  race. 

The  Creator  of  the  universe  is  the  Author  and  Pro- 
prietor of  the  great  volumes  of  nature  and  revelation. 
Hence  divines,  at  least  those  who  are  men  of  letters, 
should  not  start  at  any  new  scientific  revelations,  and 
exclaim-  "  If  this  be  true  we  must  give  up  our  Bibles  !" 
As  men  of  science,  they  have  nothing  to  fear  from  new 
discoveries  in  the  shoeless  ocean  of  truth.  The  vol- 
umes of  nature  and  revelation  both  claim  the  same 
perfect  Author,  who  had  every  thing  open  and  naked 


38  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY- 

fco  his  omniscient  inspection,  and  exercised  infinite  ma* 
dom  in  producing  and  establishing  the  order  and  hai  • 
mony  of  the  universe. 

Though  this  globe,  and  perhaps  the  whole  of  out 
planetary  system,  was  finished  six  thousand  years  ago, 
yet  we  have  no  reason  to  suppose  that  this  was  the  first 
effort  of  his  creating  energy.  We  are  floating  in  an 
immensity  of  space  that  knows  no  bounds,  like  the 
mote  in  the  sunbeam.  This  is  peopled  with  rolling 
worlds,  in  number  beyond  an  angel's  computation. 
And  the  residue,  which  has  not  yet  become  the  abodes 
of  light,  life,  order,  and  beauty,  is  filled  up  with  mat- 
ter still  in  its  uncreated  state.  Hence  the  work  of 
creation  has  been  going  on  from  eternity,  and  will  con- 
tinue to  progress,  so  long  as  the  throne  of  the  self-ex- 
istent Jehovah  endures,  without  ever  arriving  at  an  end 
in  the  sublime  career  of  creation  !  New  brother  crea- 
tions are  every  moment  rolling  from  his  omnific  hand, 
and  that  creating  fiat  will  never,  never  cease. 

These  ideas  of  the  wonder-working  Jehovah,  from 
whose  all-forming  hand  worlds  and  systems  of  worlds 
are  continually  rolling,  and  have  been,  for  millions  on 
millions  of  ages,  force  upon  us  those  amazing  concep- 
tions of  the  oppressive  grandeur  of  his  works  under 
which  the  mind  labors  and  struggles  in  its  contempla- 
tions, but  is  borne  down,  and  lost  and  bewildered  in 
the  immensity  of  the  theme.  Order,  variety,  and 
beauty,  m  endless  succession   meet  us  on  everv  hand. 


LECTURE    II.  31 

All  this  has  been  accomplished  by  the  Infinite  Mind, 
through  electrical  action,  and  bespeaks  the  vastness 
and  sublimity  of  the  subject.  It  is  the  science  of  the 
living  mind,  its  silent,  mysterious  workings,  and  ener- 
getic powers.  It  is  a  science  that  involves  the  majes- 
tic movement  of  rolling  worlds,  the  failing  leaf,  and 
claims  the  Great  Law  of  the  universe  as  its  own. 
The  vastness,  as  well  as  the  transcendent  importance 
of  the  subject,  clearly  evince  that  it  is  worthy  to  be 
embraced  by  every  independent,  noble,  and  generous 
mind.  You  will  pardon  me,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen, 
for  having,  by  a  momentary  digression  from  the  pres- 
ent chain  of  my  subject,  anticipated  a  few  ideas  in 
relation  to  the  creation  and  its  vastness.  These  more 
properly  belong  to  a  future  Lecture,  when  I  shall  come 
to  show  what  connection  this  science  has  with  the  uni- 
verse— with  rolling  worlds — yes,  with  a  falling  leaf. 
The  fall  of  a  single  leaf  is  a  catastrophe  as  dreadful  to 
the  thousands  of  inhabitants  of  its  surface  as  the  de- 
struction of  this  globe  would  be  to  us.  And  the  blot- 
ting out  of  our  globe  from  the  catalogue  of  worlds, 
would  no  more  be  missed  amid  the  immensity  of  crea- 
tion than  the  fall  of  a  leaf  compared  to  the  sublime 
magnificence  of  the  countless  forests  on  this  globe. 
From  this  digression  I  return  to  my  subject. 

That  Electrical  Psychology  should  meet  with  oppo 
Hi  tic  n  from  men  of  a  peculiar  constitution  of  mind,  and 
%  certain  degree  of  scientific  attainments,  is  nothing 


iO  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

strange.  Nor  is  it  at  all  miraculous,  that  a  few  who 
are  deemed  men  of  talents,  should  oppose,  and  even 
deride  it  as  a  humbug.  But  as  genius  is  supremely 
higher  than  talents,  so  1  boldly  and  safely  make  the 
declaration  that  no  man  of  genius  has  ever  opposed 
Electrical  Psych  Dlogy ;  nor  in  any  age  of  the  world 
has  genius  ever  been  enlisted  in  opposing  the  dawning 
light  of  any  of  the  sciences  that  have  arisen  on  earth 
from  the  morning  of  creation  to  the  present  day.  But 
as  before  remarked,  that  this  science  should  meet  with 
opposition  from  that  class  of  scientific  men,  who  al- 
ways stand  watching  the  direction  in  which  the  breeze 
of  popularity  may  chance  to  blow  with  the  strongest 
force,  and  who  are  anxious,  through  these  means,  to 
bring  themselves  into  notice,  and  thus  gain  a  mo- 
mentary fame  from  the  passing  crowd,  is  nothing 
strange.  It  only  proves  the  fact  that  Electrical 
Psychology  is,  in  the  infancy  of  its  being,  destined 
to  share  the  fate  of.  all  great  and  useful  sciences,  that 
now  stand  unshaken  in  the  republic  of  letters.  All, 
in  their  infancy,  received  from  such  men  a  like  opposi- 
tion, and  upon  their  founders  they  freely  breathed  out 
their  derision,  scorn,  and  sneers. 

Harvc)  discovered  the  circulation  of  the  blood, 
and  disclosed  it  to  the  world.  He  was  opposed  and 
derided,  and  much  of  that  talent,  learning,  and  cun- 
ning we  have  referred  to,  was  enlisted  against  him. 
Thej  sought    to   paralyze    the   towering  wing  of   hia 


LECTURE    II.  41 

sen  ii/s  ;  to  blast  bis  reputation  ;  to  wither  tbe  fairest 
flowers  of  bis  domestic  love,  hope,  and  joy  ;  and  to 
hurl  his  brilliant  discovery  from  tbe  light  of  day  to  the 
darkness  of  night.  But  Harvey's  name  stands  immor- 
tal on  the  records  of  true  fame,  and  the  blood  still 
continues  to  frolic  in  crimson  streams  through  its  liv- 
ing channels,  while  his  learned  opposers  are  forgotten. 
Galileo  discovered  the  rotation  of  this  globe  on  its  axis. 
So  great  was  the  opposition  of  the  learned  powers  com- 
bined against  him,  that  they  arraigned  him  and  his 
theory  at  the  august  and  awful  bar  of  humbug.  There 
they  fairly  tried  him  and  his  discovery  under  the  splen- 
did and  majestic  witnesses  of  derision,  sneer,  and 
scorn  ;  and  the  court  very  gravely  decided,  that  his 
discovery  was  a  heresy,  and  that  he  must  openly  ac- 
knowledge it  to  be  so  to  the  world.  To  this  sentence 
he  submitted — acknowledged  his  theory  to  be  a  heresy, 
but  remarked,  that  he  nevertheless  believed  it  true. 
Galileo  lives  in  the  bright  page  of  history.  That  sen- 
tence did  not  arrest  the  globe  in  its  mighty  course.  It 
still  continues  to  roll  on  its  axis  as  he  discovered  and 
proclaimed,  while  the  learned  opposers  of  his  theory, 
who  courted  popular  favor  at  the  expense  of  honor,  are 
sunk  into  merited  oblivion. 

Newton's  genius,  when  he  was  but  a  boy,  intui- 
tively drove  him  to  study  gravitatkn  by  piling  up 
small  heaps  of  sand,  and  to  notice  more  strictly  this 
power  in  the  falling  apple.     It  drove  him  to  fitwb? 


£2  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

adhesion  by  watching  the  union  of  the  pai  tided  watei 
at  the  side  of  some  favorite  stream  ;  and  to  perfect 
this  science  he  is  next  at  the  centre  of  the  globe. 
From  gathering  pebbles  in  boyish  sport  on  the  ocean's 
shore,  he  is  next  among  the  stars,  and  at  length  pro- 
claims  to  the  world  his  system  of  philosophy  and 
astronomy.  He  was  derided  and  mocked  as  a  silly- 
headed  fool,  and  his  whole  magnificent  system  was 
spurned  with  sneering  contempt  and  pronounced  a 
humbug  by  the  old  school  of  philosophers  and  astrono- 
mers. But  substances  continue  to  respect  the  law  of 
gravitation,  and  rolling  worlds  to  obey  the  law  of 
attraction  and  repulsion.  Newton  lives  in  the 
brightest  blaze  of  fame  ;  for  his  name  is  written  m 
starry  coronals  on  the  deep  bosom  of  night,  and  from 
thence  is  reflected  to  the  centre  of  the  globe ;  while 
the  opposers  of  his  magnificent  discovery  are  sunk  to 
the  shades  of  unremembered  nothingness.  The  clouds 
and  mists  of  their  own  evanescent  fame  have  become 
their  winding  sheet. 

Fulton  was  derided,  and  even  men  of  science  pointed 
at  him  the  finger  of  indignant  scorn,  because  he  de- 
clared that  steam — a  light  and  bland  vapor,  which 
could  be  blown  away  by  human  breath — could  move  an 
engine  of  tremendous  power,  and  propel  vessels  of 
thousands  of  tons  burthen  against  wind  and  waves  and 
tides.  They  declared  it  to  be  the  greatest  of  humbugs, 
ind  the  most  silly  idea  that  ever  entered  a  silly  brain ; 


LECTURE    II.  43 

t>r  else  the  trick  of  a  knave  to  make  men  invest  capi- 
tal in  order  to  effect  their  ruin.  His  friends,  even 
though  not  over-sanguine  of  success,  yet  defended  him 
as  a  man  of  honor.  But  Fulton  "  stood  firm  amidst 
the  varying  tides  of  party  like  the  rock  far  from  land, 
that  lifts  its  majestic  head  above  the  waves,  and  re- 
mains unshaken  by  the  storms  that  agitate  the  ocean.'' 
So  stern  was  the  opposition,  that  some  of  the  commit- 
ted skeptics,  who  sailed  from  New  York  to  Albany  in 
the  steamboat  that  first  tried  the  experiment,  declared, 
that  it  was  impossible  they  had  been  conveyed  a  dis- 
tance of  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  by  steam  power  ' 
and  that  it  must,  after  all,  have  been  some  power  aside 
from  steam,  by  which  they  had  been  enabled  to  reach 
Albany!  The  impression  of  Fulton's  genius  is 
seen  on  all  the  machinery  moved  in  our  happy  country 
by  this  subtile  power.  It  is  seen  in  railroad  and 
steamboat  communications,  that  bring  the  distant  por- 
tions of  the  United  States  in  conjunction.  It  is  seen 
in  the  majestic  steamships  of  England,  that  bring 
her  and  the  transatlantic  world  into  neigborhood  with 
us,  by  a  power  that  triumphs  over  all  the  stormy  ele- 
ments of  nature.  Fulton,  as  a  man  of  genius,  is 
remembered  as  one  of  the  great  men  of  the  universe, 
while  his  opposers  are  silent  and  forgotten. 

Thus  far,  I  have  spoken  of  the  physical  and  me- 
chanical sciences  only,  involving  the  chemical  proper- 
ties of  material  substances,  and  the  general  operations 


44  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

of  nature.  I  now  come  to  those  that  relate  to  the  im- 
provement of  the  mind.  I  come  still  nearer  hvme. 
The  science  of  Phrenology,  so  beautiful,  elevating, 
and  useful  in  its  nature,  and  having  so  strong  a  bearing 
upon  the  character  and  destiny  of  man,  as  an  intellec- 
tual, social,  and  moral  "being,  and  even  involving  the 
dearest  interest  of  our  race — has  been,  and  by  some 
still  is,  most  shamefully  abused.  Gall,  its  discov- 
erer, was  persecuted;  and  Spurzheim,  Combe,  and 
Fowler  have  received  unmerited  abuse.  The  two 
Fowlers,  of  New  York,  have  for  years  withstood  the 
storm  of  opposition.  Thus  far,  they  have  most  suc- 
cessfully met  and  repulsed  the  assaults  of  men — won 
the  victory — gathered  new  accessions  of  strength,  and 
still  hold  the  field.  They  are  business  men,  who  never 
slumber  at  the  post  of  duty.  They  have  made  new 
discoveries  and  improvements  3  gathered  an  immense 
variety  of  cabinet  specimens  of  skulls  and  busts,  from 
the  idiot  up  to  the  most  brilliant  intellect — from  the 
cold-blooded  murderer  up  to  the  melting  soul  of  a  be- 
nevolent and  philanthropic  Howard.  They  have  made 
a  righteous  development  of  true  character  in  the  phre- 
nological examinations  of  thousands  of  human  heads  ' 
have  directed  the  anxious  parent  how  to  train  up  the 
child  of  his  affections  ;  have  pointed  out  to  the  sighing 
lover  how  to  choose  a  congenial  spirit  of  companionship 
for  life  ;  and  have  poured  the  light  of  mental  and  moral 
hi prcvement  in  silvery  streams  on  the  crand  empire 


LECTURE    II.  46 

of  mind.  Yet  such  a  science  as  this  haa  been  called 
a  humbug;  !  and  such  men  as  these  have  been  assailed. 
Their  bones  are  worthy  to  repose  with  the  great  men 
of  the  universe,  and  their  names  shall  live  on  the 
bright  scroll  of  fame  down  to  the  last  vibrating  pendu- 
lum of  time — shall  live  when  the  opposers  of  phreno- 
logical science  shall  have  sunk  from  human  remem- 
brance. 

Such  has  been  the  fate  of  all  sciences  in  the  infancy 
of  their  existence.  The  moment  they  were  born  into 
life,  the  battle-axe  was  raised  against  them,  and  each 
in  succession  has  fought  its  way  up  to  manhood.  The 
victory  in  favor  of  truth  has  always  been  sure,  and 
millions  of  sycophants  in  the  contest  have  perished. 

How  lamentable  is  the  consideration,  that  there  are 
those  in  this  day  of  light,  who,  regardless  of  the  warn- 
ing voice  of  past  generations,  coming  up  from  ten  thou- 
sand graves,  still  shut  their  ears  and  close  their  eyes — 
and  even  sacrifice  principle,  to  keep  popular  with  those 
on  whom  they  depend  for  a  momentary  fame.  But 
they  are  not  the  men  whose  names  will  stand  imperish- 
able in  the  annals  of  history,  to  be  handed  down  to 
future  generations.  They  are  destined  to  perish  from 
human  remembrance,  and  not  a  trace  of  them  be  left 
on  earth. 

I  would  not  be  understood  as  dissuading  you  from 
the  pursuit  of  true  fame.  I  do  not  despise  its  noble 
glory ;  but  am  fully  sensible,  that  of  all  characters  ever 


i6  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

formed  and  sustained  by  human  beings,  tliat  of  tiue 
fame  stands  unrivaled  and  supreme  on  the  page  of  his- 
tory. 

Though  man  is  mortal,  and  his  present  existence 
ephemeral,  yet  during  the  short  span  of  three-score 
years  and  ten,  to  what  a  transcendent  height  in  the  cul- 
tivation of  his  powers  is  he  capable  of  soaring !  True, 
his  station  is  humble,  yet  he  who,  with  an  unstained 
hand,  has  honorably  grasped  the  meed  of  righteous 
fame,  has  clothed  himself  with  power,  has  wreathed  his 
brow  with  undying  laurels,  and  invested  himself  with 
the  true  majesty  of  his  nature.  Fame  has  been  alter- 
nately assigned  to  the  hero,  the  statesman,  the  philoso- 
pher, astronomer,  theologian.  But  fame  is  not  confined 
to  any  rank  or  pursuit  in  life.  It  can  only  exist  in  the 
breathings  of  righteousness.  The  philosopher  and  as- 
tronomer, though  chained  down  to  earth  by  the  law  of 
gravitation,  and  tabernacled  with  the  worm,  may  feel 
within  a  stirring  greatness  that  allies  them  to  higher 
intelligences  in  future  worlds,  and  that  bids  them  bear 
their  brow  aloft.  They  may  station  themselves  on  a 
mental  elevation  above  the  world,  and  lift  their  tower- 
ing heads  to  the  stars.  From  this  pinnacle  of  glory, 
they  may  range  in  loftiest  thought  the  universe  sf  God 
and  even  struggle  to  grasp  the  unbounded  empire  over 
which  Jehovah  reigns,  with  all  its  moving  worlds,  and 
yet,  if  this  be  all,  true  fame  does  not  lie  here.  It  is 
uot  the  birthright  of  the  philosopher  or  astronomer,  ui>^ 


LECTURE    II.  4*2 

less  they  are  m  possession  of  something  more  than  in- 
tellectual power. 

True  fame  is  not  the  birthright  of  the  hero.  The 
blaze  of  glory  that  has  for  ages  encircled  his  head,  and 
with  its  brilliancy  so  long  dazzled  the  world,  is  begin- 
ning to  grow  dim.  The  laurels  that  decorate  his  sullen 
brow  have  been  gathered  at  the  cannon's  mouth,  from 
a  soil  enriched  with  human  gore,  and  watered  by  the 
tears  of  bereavement.  That  fancied  pinnacle  of  glory 
on  which  he  proudly  stands,  has  been  gained  by  con- 
quest and  slaughter.  His  way  to  it  lay  over  thousands 
of  his  fellow-creatures,  whose  warm  hearts  had  cease d 
to  throb  ;  and  the  music  that  followed  his  march,  was 
the  widow's  moan  and  the  orphan's  wail.  True  famo 
does  not  lie  here.  It  sounds  not  in  the  cannon's  roar, 
the  clashing  steel,  the  rattling  drum,  nor  in  the  fright 
ful  crash  of  resounding  arms  !  It  is  not  heard  in  mar- 
tial thunder.  It  is  not  seen  in  villages  on  fire,  nor  in 
Moscow's  conflagration — that  ocean  of  flame !  True 
fame  breathes  not  in  the  deep-heaving  sigh  of  despair- 
ing love,  nor  draws  its  immortality  from  dying  groans 
on  fields  of  war.  It  has  a  higher  origin — a  nobler 
birth — a  more  elevated  aim.     True  fame  consists  in 

the    LOFTY     ASPIRATIONS     AFTER    INTELLECTUAL    AND 

moral  truth  •  and  when  these  are  found  and  cherish- 
ed, that  so  deep  will  be  the  convictions  of  duty,  sus- 
tained by  sterling  honor,  that  no  popularity  —no  bribes 
of  wealth  and  splendor — no  fear  of  frowns,  nor  even 


48  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

the  hazard  of  life  exposed  to  wasting  tortures  shall 
deter  that  man  from  expressing  and  maintaining  such 
truth.  He  who  does  this,  possesses  true  and  righteous 
fame. 

Should  the  scoffers  of  rising  science  challenge  me  tc 
produce  such  an  example  of  true  fame  ever  being  set 
on  earth,  I  would  point  them  to  one  perfect  specimen 
on  the  sacred  page.  I  would  point  them  to  the  Son  of 
Man,  in  the  majesty  of  whose  virtues,  honor,  and  firm- 
ness in  proclaiming  truth,  language  is  impoverished,  all 
banian  description  foils,  and  the  living  light  cf  aio 
r&eacc  is  darkened  forever 


LECTUKE    IIJ.  49 


LECTURE    III. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 

Perhaps  I  have  dwelt  sufficiently  long  upcn  the  pre- 
liminaries of  my  subject.  I  have  done  so  to  bring  dis- 
tinctly before  you  its  nature,  and  clearly  state  its  incal- 
culable importance  to  the  human  family.  I  have  done 
so  to  remind  you  of  the  opposition,  sneers,  and  scorne 
that  the  noblest  sciences  have  encountered  in  the  infan- 
cy of  their  being,  and  in  all  ages  of  the  world.  I  havr 
reminded  you  that  this  has  been  done,  not  by  men  of 
genius,  whose  names  are  registered  on  the  scroll  of 
true  fume,  and  have  come  down  to  future  generations, 
•but  it  has  been  done  by  that  particular  class  of  the 
learned  who  have  so  large  a  share  of  the  love  of  appro- 
bation as  to  study  public  opinion,  and  follow  it,  right 
or  wrong,  and  thus  beg  a  momentary  fame  from  the 
passing  crowd,  which  is  destined  to  expire  in  darkness, 
and  vanish  from  human  remembrance,  before  the  break- 
ing light  of  truth.  I  have  dwelt  thus  long  upon  these 
points  so  that  opposition  to  this  science  may  not  sur- 
prise you,  ror  the  real  character  of  the  opponent  l!  a 
mistaken. 

a 


50  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Haying  removed  every  obstacle  that  might  embarrass 
my  course,  and  having  plenty  of  sea-room,  I  am  now 
ready  to  embark  in  defence  of  one  of  the  greatest  of 
causes.  I  stand  before  you  to  lecture  upon  the  won- 
derful and  mysterious  science  of  Electrical  Psychology 
I  stand  here  to  exhibit  by  tangible  experiments  those 
wonderful  phenomena  that  cluster  around  it,  and  philo- 
sophically to  defend  its  paramount  claims  to  immutable 
truth.  The  successful  discharge  of  this  incumbent 
duty,  forces  upon  us  the  necessity  of  ranging  the  uni- 
verse, and  summoning  the  vast  works  of  earth  and 
heaven  to  the  b:tr  of  reason,  in  order  to  investigate  their 
effects,  and  trace  them  back  to  their  correspondent 
causes.  You  are  the  empanneled  jury  to  try  this  cause, 
and  I  rejoice  that  I  have  the  honor  to  argue  so  interest- 
ing a  point  before  the  congregated  talent  and  wis- 
dom of  my  country.  However  skeptical  men  may  be 
in  relation  to  any  thing  new,  yet  so  far  as  stern  reality 
is  in  its  nature  concerned,  we  have  this  pleasing  con- 
sideration, that  the  unbelief  of  men  cannot  frown  truth 
into  falsehood,  nor  can  the  belief  o£  men  smile  false- 
hood into  truth.  Hence  the  belief  or  unbelief  of  mor- 
tals cannot  in  the  least  affect  those  truths  that  God  has 
established  inherent  in  nature,  and  with  which  his  un- 
bounded universe  swarms. 

I  stand  here  to  defend  the  electrical  theory  of  the 
universe  against  the  assaults  of  men,  to  notice  the  im- 
mense variety  of  material  existences,  to  glance  at  th« 


^fiCIURE    III.  51 

animated  forms  of  living  beauty,  to  scrutinize  Jie  chem- 
ical properties  of  created  substances,  and  to  pour,  if 
possible,  the  light  of  truth  on  rolling  worlds.  Let  us 
even  venture  to  step  back  beyond  the  threshold  of  crea- 
tion— venture  to  lift  the  dark  curtains  of  primeval 
night,  and  muse  upon  that  original,  eternal  material, 
that  slumbered  in  the  deep  bosom  of  chaos,  and  out  of 
which  all  the  tangible  substances  we  see  and  admire 
were  made.  That  eternal  substance  is  electricity,  and 
contains  all  the  original  properties  of  all  things  in  be- 
ing. Hence  all  worlds  and  their  splendid  appendages 
were  made  out  of  electricity,  and  by  that  powerful,  all- 
pervading  agent,  under  Deity,  they  are  kept  in  motion 
from  age  to. age.  Electricity  actuates  the  whole  frame 
of  nature,  and  produces  all  the  phenomena  that  trans- 
pire throughout  the  realms  of  unbounded  space.  It  is 
the  most  powerful  and  subtile  agent  employed  by  the 
Creator  in  the  government  of  the  universe,  and  in  car- 
rying on  the  multifarious  operations  of  nature.  Mak- 
ing a  slight  variation  in  the  language  of  the  poet,  1  ma^ 
with  propriety  say — 

'  It  warms  in  the  sun,  reneshes  in  the  breeze, 
Glows  in  the  stars,  and  blossoms  in  the  trees; 
Lives  through  all  life,  extends  through  all  extent, 
Spreads  undivided,  operates  unspent; 
Breathee  in  our  souls,  informs  our  mortal  part 
As  full,  as  perfect,  in  a  hair  as  heart ; 
As  full,  as  perfect,  in  vile  man  that  mourns, 
&e  the  rapt  s-s-aph,  that  adores  and  burns: 


52  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY^. 

It  liiims  all  high  and  low,  all  great  and  small ; 
It  fills,  it  bounds,  connects,  and  equals  all." 

It  is  immaterial  to  what  department  of  this  globe 
and  its  surrounding  elements  we  turn  our  attention, 
electricity  is  there.  Wherever  we  witness  convulsions 
in  nature,  the  workings  of  this  mighty,  unseen  power 
are  there.  It  writes  its  path  in  lightning  on  the  sul- 
len brow  of  .the  dark  cloud,  and  breathes  cut  rolling 
thunder.  Though  cold  and  invisible  in  its  equalized 
and  slumbering  state,  yet  it  is  the  cause  of  light  and 
heat,  which  it  creates  by  the  inconceivable  rapidity  of 
its  motion  and  friction  on  other  particles  of  matter. 
It  is  the  cause  of  evaporation  from  basined  oceans  and 
silvery  lakes — from  majestic  rivers  and  rolling  streams, 
and  from  the  common  humidity  of  the  earth.  It  forms 
aerial  conductors  in  the  heavens,  through  which  this 
moisture  in  vapory  oceans  is  borne  to  the  highest  por- 
tions of  our  globe,  and  stored  up  in  magazines  of  rain, 
and  snow,  and  hail !  It  is  electricity  that,  by  its  cold- 
ness, condenses  the  storm,  and  opens  these  various 
magazines  in  mild  beauty  or  awful  terror  on  the  world. 
It  is  electricity  that,  by  the  production  of  heat,  rare- 
fies the  air,  gives  wings  to  the  wind,  and  directs  their 
course.  It  is  this  unseen  agent,  that  causes  the  gen- 
tle zephyrs  of  heaven  to  fan  the  human  brow  with  a 
touch  of  delight — that  moves  the  stirring  gale^that 
arms  the  sweeping  hurricane  with  power — that  gives 
fc©  the  rearing   torr-ado  all  its   dreadful  eloquence  of 


LECTURE    III.  53 

vengeance  and  terror,  and  clothes  the  mid  ilay  sun  in 
light.  It  give.5  us  the  soft,  pleasing  touches  of  the 
evening  twilight,  and  the  crimson  blushes  of  the  rising 
morn.  It  is  electricity  that,  by  its  effects  of  light  and 
heat,  produces  the  blossoms  of  spring,  the  fruits  of 
summer,  the  laden  bounties  of  autumn,  and  moves  on 
the  vast  mass  of  vegetation  in  all  the  varieties  and 
blended  beauties  of  creation.  It  bids  winter  close  the 
varied  scene.  It  is  electricity  that,  by  its  most  awful 
impressions,  causes  the  earthquake  to  awake  from  its 
Tartarean  den,  to  speak  its  rumbling  thunder,  convulse 
the  globe,  and  mark  out  its  path  of  ruin. 

If  we  turn  to  man,  and  investigate  the  secret  stir- 
rings of  his  nature,  we  shall  find,  that  he  is  but  an 
epitome  of  the  universe.  The  chemical  properties  of 
all  the  various  substances  in  existence,  and  in  the 
most  exact  proportions,  are  congregated  and  concen 
fcrated  in  him,  and  form  and  constitute  the  very  ele- 
ments of  his  being.  In  the  composition  of  his  body 
are  involved  all  the  mineral  and  vegetable  substances 
of  the  globe,  even  from  the  grossest  matter,  step  by 
step,  up  to  the  most  rarefied  and  fine.  And,  lastly , 
to  finish  this  masterpiece  of  creation,  the  brain  is  in- 
vested with  a  living  spirit.  This  incomprehensible 
spirit,  like  an  enthroned  deity,  presides  over,  and  gov- 
erns through  electricity,  as  its  agent,  all  the  voluntary 
motions  of  this  organized,  corporeal  universe ;  while 
its  living  presence,   and  its  involuntary,   self- moving 


54  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

powers  cause  all  the  involuntary  functions  of  life  to 
proceed  in  their  destined  course.  Hence  human  be- 
ings and  all  animated  existences  are  subject  to  the 
same  grand  electrical  law  that  pervades  the  universe, 
and  moves  all  worlds  under  the  superintendence  of  the 
involuntary  powers  of  the  infinite  Spirit. 

On  this  principle,  it  will  be  plainly  perceived,  that 
as  man  is  subjected  to  the  same  common  law  that  per- 
vades the  universe,  so  electricity  is  the  connecting 
link  between  mind  and  matter.  As  it  is  co-eternal 
with  spirit  or  mind,  so  it  is  the  only  substance  in  be- 
ing that  mind  can  directly  touch,  or  through  which 
it  can  manifest  its  powers.  It  is  the  servant  of  the 
mind  to  obey  its  will  and  execute  its  commands.  It 
is  through  electricity,  that  the  mind  conveys  its  vari- 
ous impressions  and  emotions  to  others,  and  through 
this  same  medium  receives  all  its  impressions  from  the 
external  world.  It  is  by  electricity  that  the  mind 
contracts  the  muscles,  raises  the  arm,  and  performs 
all  the  voluntary  motions  of  this  organized  body.  This 
I  will  now  proceed  to  prove. 

It  will  be  readily  perceived  by  every  one  acquainted 
with  electrical  science,  that  if  I  can  find  an  individual 
standing  in  a  negative  relationship  to  myself,  or  by 
any  process  render  him  so,  then  I,  being  the  positive 
power,  can,  by  producing  electrical  impressions  from 
my  own  mind  upon  his,  control  his  muscles  with  the 
mofit  perfect  ease.     This  is  evident,  because  the  prsi- 


LECTUEE    III.  55 

tive  and  negative  forces  electrically  and  magnetically 
blend,  are  equal  in  power,  and  paralyze  each  other : 
or,  on  the  contrary,  produce  motion.  This  great  and 
interesting  truth  I  will  prove  to  a  demonstration,  by 
experiments  upon  ladies  and  gentlemen  in  this  audi- 
ence, while  they  are  entirely  awake,  and  in  perfect 
possession  of  all  their  reasoning  faculties.  Before  I 
proceed  to  produce  these  astonishing  and  even  startling 
results,  I  will,  in  the  first  place,  prove  that  electri- 
city is  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  inert 
matter,  and  is  the  agent  that  the  mind  employs  to 
contract  and  relax  the  muscles,  and  to  produce  all  the 
voluntary  and  involuntary  motions  of  the  body. 

To  bring  this  before  you  in  the  most  plain  and  intel- 
ligible manner,  I  would  first  remark  that  the  brain  is 
the  fountain  of  the  nervous  system,  from  whence  it 
sends  out  its  millions  of  branches  to  every  part  of  the 
body.  Indeed,  the  brain  is  but  a  congeries  of  nerves, 
and  is  the  immediate  residence  of  the  living  spirit. 
This  spirit  or  mind  is  the  cause  of  ail  motion,  whether 
that  motion  be  voluntary  or  involuntary.  It  wills  the 
arm  to  rise,  and  immediately  the  arm  obeys  the  man- 
date ;  while  the  very  presence  of  this  mind  in  the 
brain,  even  though  wrapped  in  the  insensibility  of 
sleep,  produces  all  the  involuntary  motions  of  the 
vitals,  and  executes  the  functions  of  life. 

To  establish  the  fact  that  electricity  is,  indeed,  the 
Cf-nneiiing  link  between  the  mind  and  the  nony,  I 


56  ELECTRICAL    PS;  CHOLOGY. 

would  in  the  first  place  distinctly  remark,  that  mind 
cannot  come  in  direct  contact  with  gross  matter.  My 
mind  can  no  more  directly  touch  my  hand',  than  it  can 
the  mountain  rock.  My  mind  cannot  touch  the  bones 
of  my  arm,  nor  the  sinews,  the  muscles,  the  blood-ves- 
sels, nor  the  blood  that  rolls  in  them.  In  proof  of  this 
position,  let  one  hemisphere  of  the  brain  receive  what 
is  called  a  stroke  of  the  palsy.  Let  the  paralysis  be 
complete,  and  one  half  of  the  system  will  be  rendered 
motionless.  In  this  case,  the  mind  may  will  with  all 
its  energies — may  exert  all  its  mental  powers — yet  the 
arm  will  not  rise,  nor  the  foot  stir.  Yet  the  bones, 
sinews,  muscles,  and  blood-vessels  are  all  there,  and 
the  blood  as  usual  continues  to  Sow.  Here  then  we 
have  proof  the  most  irresistible,  that  mind  can  touch 
none  of  these ;  for  what  the  mind  can  touch  it  can 
move,  as  easily  as  what  the  hand  can  physically  touch 
it  can  move.  Our  proof  is  so  far  philosophically  con- 
clusive. 

I  would  now  remark,  that  it  is  equally  certain  my 
mind  can  touch  some  matter  in  my  body,  otherwise  I 
could  never  raise  my  arm  at  all-  The  question,  then, 
arises,  What  is  that  mysterious  substance  which  the 
mind  can  touch,  as  its  prime  agent,  by  which  it  pro- 
duces muscular  motion  ?  In  the  light  our  subject  now 
stands,  the  answer  is  most  simple.  It  is  that  very 
substance  which  was  disturbed  in  this  paralysis,  and 
that  is  the  nervous  fluid,  which  is  animal  electricity, 


LS3TURE    III.  51 

and  forms  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  mat- 
ter. Mind  is  the  only  substance  in  the  universe  that 
possesses  inherent  rnotion  and  living  power  as  its  two 
primeval  efficients.  These  two  seem  to  be  insepa- 
rable, because  there  can  be  no  manifestation  of  power 
except  through  motion.  Hence  mind  is  the  first  grand 
moving  cause.  It  is  the  first  link  in  the  magnificent 
chain  of  existing  substances.  This  mind  wills.  This 
mental  energy,  as  the  creative  force,  is  the  second  link, 
and  stirs  the  nervous  force,  which  is  electricity.  This 
is  the  third  link.  This  electricity  causes  the  nerve  to 
vibrate.  This  is  the  fourth  link.  The  vibration  of 
the  nerve  contracts  the  fibre  of  the  muscle.  This  ii3 
the  fifth  link.  The  contraction  of  the  muscle  raises 
the  bone  or  the  arm.  This  is  the  sixth  link.  And 
the  arm  raises  dead  matter.  This  is  the  seventh  link 
So  it  is  through  a  chain  of  seven  links  that  mind  coins* 
in  contact  with  dead  matter ;  that  is,  if  we  allow  the 
creative  force — the  will — to  be  one  link.  This  will$ 
however,  is  not  a  substance,  but  a  mere  energy,  or  re- 
sult of  mind.  To  be  plain,  it  is  mind  that  touches 
electricity — electricity  touches  nerve — nerve  touches 
muscle — muscle  touches  bone — and  bone  raises  dead 
matter.  It  is,  therefore,  through  this  concatenation  or 
chain,  link  by  link,  that  the  mind  gives  motion  to  and 
controls  living  or  dead  matter,  and  not  by  direct  con- 
tact with  all  substances.  Hence  the  proof  is  clear  and 
positive,  that  the  mind  can  come  in  contact  with,  and 
8* 


58  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

by  its  volition  control,  the  electricity  of  the  body,  and 
collect  this  subtile  agent  with  fearful  power  upon  any 
part  of  the  system. 

It  is  evident  that  the  mind  holds  its  residence  in  the 
brain,  and  that  it  is  not  diffused  over  the  whole  system. 
Were  it  so,  then  our  hands  and  feet  would  think,  and 
in  case  they  were  amputated,  we  should  lose  part  of 
our  minds.  If,  then,  the  mind,  invested  with  royal- 
ty, is  enthroned  in  the  brain — and  if  the  mind  com- 
mand the  foot  to  move,  or  the  hand  to  rise,  then  it 
must  send  forth  from  its  presence  an  agent,  as  its 
prime  minister,  to  execute  this  command.  This 
prime  minister  is  electricity,  which  passes  from  the 
brain  through  the  nerves,  as  so  many  telegraphic  wires, 
to  give  motion  to  the  extremities.  On  this  principle. 
how  easy  it  is  to  understand  the  philosophy  of  a  paral- 
ysis. The  nerve,  as  the  grand  conductor  of  the  motive 
power,  is  obstructed  by  some  spasmodic  collapse,  and 
the  prime  minister  cannot  pass  the  barrier  that  ob- 
structs its  path.  In  this  case,  the  mind,  as  the  en- 
throned monarch,  may  will  the  arm  to  rise,  but  the 
arm  remains  motionless.  But  remove  that  barrier,  the 
agent  passes,  and  the  arm  must  rise.  Hence  it  is 
easily  seen,  that  all  motion  and  power  originate  in 
mind. 

I  have  now  brought  before  you  the  connecting  link 
between  mind  and  matter,  and  through  this  have  shown 
you   the  philosophy  of  the  contraction  of  the  human 


LECTURE    III.  58 

Huffed  .h  rough  mental  energy.  This  has  ever  bten. 
and  still  3,  sonsidered  an  inscrutable  mystery  in  Phys- 
iology. Whether  it  is  now  revealed  or  not,  is  submit- 
ted to  your  decision.  To  my  mind,  the  argument  in  its 
defence  is  irresistible. 

Having  clearly  and  philosophically  established  the 
truth,  that  electricity,  in  the  form  of  nervous  fluid,  is 
indeed  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  inert 
matter,  the  question  now  presents  itself — If  the  mind 
continually  throws  oif  electricity  from  the  brain  by  its 
mental  operations,  arid  by  muscular  motion,  then  how 
is  the  supply  kept  up  in  the  brain — through  what 
source  is  it  introduced  into  the  system,  and  how  con- 
veyed to  the  brain?  I  answer,  through  the  respira- 
tory organs  electricity  is  taken  into  the  blood  at  the 
lungs,  and  from  the  blood  it  is  thrown  to  nerves  and 
conducted  to  the  brain,  and  is  there  secreted  and  pre- 
pared for  the  use  of  the  mind.  It  will  be  impossible 
for  me  to  argue  this  point  fully  unless  I  explain  at  the 
same  instant  the  philosophy  of  the  circulation  of  the 
blood.  As  I  differ  also  with  physiologists  on  this 
point,  and  as  I  do  not  believe  that  the  heart  circulates 
the  blood  at  all,  either  on  the  hydraulic,  or  any  other 
principle,  so  I  will  turn  your  attention  to  this  subject. 

The  philosophy  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  is  one 
of  the  grandest  themes  that  can  be  presented  for  hu- 
man contemplation.  While  discussing  this  matter,  it 
•rill  be  clearly  mad}  to  appear  how  electricity  is  gath- 


60  ELECTRICAL    PSYCIIOLCGY. 

ereJ  from  the  surrounding  elements,  carried  into  the 
system  and  stored  up  in  the  brain  to  feed  the  mind 
with  impressions.  I  desire  it  to  be  distinctly  under- 
stood, that  when  I  speak  of  the  electricity,  galvanism, 
and  magnetism  of  the  human  system,  or  of  the  nerv- 
ous  fluid,  I  mean  one  and  the  same  thing.  But  before 
I  proceed  to  notice  the  philosophy  of  the  circulation  of 
the  blood,  and  the  secretion  of  the  nervous  fluid,  I  wiL 
first  make  a  few  observations  hi  relation  to  the  nerves 
and  blood-vessels,  so  that  I  may  be  distinctly  under- 
stood. 

I  have  already  stated,  that  the  brain  is  the  fountain 
of  the  nervous  system,  and  that  both  its  hemispheres 
are  made  up  of  a  congeries  of  nerves.  They  both  pass 
to  the  cerebellum ;  and  the  spinal  marrow,  continued 
to  the  bottom  of  the  trunk,  is  but  the  brain  continued. 
In  the  spinal  marrow,  which  is  the #  grand  conductor 
from  the  brain,  is  lodged  the  whole  strength  of  the 
system.  From  this  spinal  marrow,  branch  out  thirty- 
two  pairs  of  nerves,  embracing  the  nerves  of  motion 
and  those  of  sensation.  From  these  branch  out  others,- 
and  others  again  from  these  •  and  so  on  till  they  are 
spread  out  over  the  human  system  in  network  so  infi- 
nitely fine  that  we  cannot  put  down  the  point  of  a  nee- 
dle without  feeling  it — and  we  cannot  f?el,  unless  wo 
touch  a  nerve.  We  see,  therefore,  how  inconceivably 
fine  the  nervous  system  is.  In  all  these  millions  of 
nerves  there  is  no  blood.     They  contain  the  clectrid 


LECTURE    III.  61 

fluid  only,  while  the  blood  is  confined  to  the  veins  and 
arteries.  I  am  well  aware  that  the  bloo  1-vessels  pasa 
round  among  the  convolutions  of  the  brain,  and  through 
them  the  blood  freely  flows  to  give  that  mighty  organ 
action ;  but  in  the  nerves  themselves  there  is  no  blood. 
They  arc  the  residence  of  the  living  mind,  and  its 
prime  agent,  the  electric  fluid. 

Though  I  have  frequently,  in  my  public  lectures, 
touched  upon  the  philosophy  of  the  circulation  of  the 
blood,  and  hence  those  remarks  were  reported  and 
published  in  my  "  Lectures  on  the  Philosophy  of  Ani- 
mal Magnetism,  in  1843,"  in  connection  with  my 
views  of  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  matter, 
yet  I  have  never  taken  up  the  subject  in  an  exact,  full, 
and  connected  detail  of  argument.  This  I  will  now 
proceed  to  do  in  connection  with  the  secretion  of  the 
nervous  fluid. 

I  would,  then,  in  the  first  instance  remark,  that  the 
air  we  breathe,  as  to  its  component  parts,  is  computed 
to  consist  of  twenty-one  parts  oxygen,  and  seventy- 
nine  parts  nitrogen.  Electricity,  as  a  universal 
agent,  pervades  the  entire  atmosphere.  We  cannot 
turn  the  electric  machine  in  any  dry  spot  on  earth 
without  collecting  it.  Oxygen  is  that  element  which 
sustains  flame  and  animal  life.  Neither  can  exist  a 
moment  without  it,  while  nitrogen,  on  the  cont-rary5 
just  as  suddenly  extinguishes  both.  The  atmosphere, 
in  this  compound  state,  is  taken  into  the  lungs,     The 


62  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

oxygen  and  electricity,  having  a  strong  affinity  foi 
moisture,  instantly  rush  to  the  blood,  while  the  nitro- 
gen is  disengaged  and  expired.  The  blood,  being  oxy 
genized  and  electrified,  instantly  assumes  a  bright 
cherry-red  appearance,  and  by  this  energizing  process 
has  become  purified  and  prepared  for  circulation.  The 
lungs,  and  the  blood  th^y  contain,  are  both  rendered 
electrically  positive  ;  and  we  know  that  in  electrical 
science  two  positives  resist  each  other  and  fly  apart. 
Hence  the  lungs  resist  the  blood  and  force  it  into  the 
left  ventricle  of  the  heart.  The  valve  closes  and  the 
blood  passes  into  the  arteries.  Hence  arterial  blood  is 
of  a  bright  cherry-red  hue.  It  is  by  the  positive  force 
of  electric  action,  propelled  through  every  possible 
ramification  of  the  arterial  system  till  all  its  thousands 
of  minute  capillary  vessels  are  charged.  Along  these 
arteries  and  all  their  thousands  of  capillary  branches 
are  laid  nerves  of  involuntary  motion,  but  no  nerves 
whatever  attend  the  veins.  Why  is  this  so  ?  Why  is 
it,  that  nerves,  like  so  many  telegraphic  wires,  are  laid 
along  the  whole  arterial  system  in  all  its  minute  rami- 
fications, but  that  none  are  laid  along  the  venous  sys- 
tem? I  press  this  question — Why  do  nerves  attend 
the  arteries,  while  none  attend  the  veins  ?  I  answer, 
that  nerves  are  laid  along  the  arteries  to  receive  the 
electric  charge  from  the  positive  blood  that  rolls  in 
them,  waich  charge  the  blood  received  from  the  air  in- 
epired  by  the  lungs.     But  as  the  venous  blood  is  nega- 


LECTURE    III.  68 

live,  it  has  no  electricity  to  throw  off,  and  hence  needa 
no  attendant  nerves  to  receive  a  charge — because  that 
very  electric  charge,  which  the  blood  receives  from 
each  inspiration  at  the  lungs,  is  thrown  off  into  the 
nerves  by  friction,  as  it  rolls  through  its  destined  chan- 
nels in  crimson  streams.  At  the  extremities  of  the 
arterial  system — at  the  very  terminus  of  its  thousands 
of  capillaries,  the  last  item  of  the  electric  charge  takes 
its  departure  from  the  positive  blood,  escapes  into  the 
attendant  nerves,  through  them  is  instantly  conducted 
to  the  brain,  and  is  there  basined  up  for  the  use  of  the 
mind. 

The  arterial  blood,  having  thrown  off  its  electricity 
as  above  described,  assumes  a  dark — a  purplish  hue. 
It  enters  the  capillaries  of  the  veins,  which  are  as  nu- 
merous as  those  of  the  arteries.  The  blood  is  now 
negative,  and  as  the  lungs,  by  new  inspirations,  are 
kept  in  a  positive  state,  so  the  venous  blood  returns 
through  the  right  ventricle  of  the  heart  to  the ,  lungs, 
on  the  same  principle  that  the  negative  and  positive 
forces  rush  together.  There  it  is  again  electrified  and 
oxygenized,  changed  to  a  bright  cherry-red  color,  is 
again  rendered  positive,  and  is  thus  purified  and  pre- 
pared once  more  for  arterial  circulation.  We  now 
clearly  perceive  that  it  is  electrically  the  blood  circu- 
lates, and  electrically  it  recedes  from,  and  returns  to, 
the  lungs  through  the  two  ventricles  of  the  heart. 
The  heart  does  not  circulate  the  blood  at  all,  as  phys- 


64  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

iologists  contend.  The  heart  is  the  supreme  regu- 
lator of  this  sublime  and  constantly  ebbing  and  flow- 
ing ocean  of  crimson  life,  with  all  its  majestic  rivers 
and  frolicking  streams,,  and  determines  with  exactness 
how  rapidly  the  whole  shall  flow. 


S.EC1URE    tv  66 


LECTURE    IV. 

LaDILS  and  Gentlemen  • 

T  have  in  my  last  Lecture  touched  upon  the  philoso- 
phy of  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  the  nervous  sys- 
tem, and  the  secretion  of  electricity  upon  the  brain, 
which  I  call  the  nervous  fluid.  As  this  part  of  my 
subject  must,  on  account  of  its  importance,  possess 
peculiar  interest  to  us  all,  I  desire  to  dwell  upon  it  a 
few  moments  longer. 

From  the  arguments  already  offered,  it  will  be  clearly 
perceived  by  every  philosophic  mind,  that  the  circula- 
ting system  is  in  reality  two  distinct  systems.  The 
first  is  the  arterial  system,  that  carries  the  posi- 
tive blood,  which  is,  as  before  stated,  of  a  bright 
cherry-red  color,  and  is  ever  flowing  from  the  heart  to 
the  extremities.  The  second  is  the  venous  system, 
that  carries  the  negative  elood,  which  is  of  a  purple 
color,  and  is  ever  flowing  from  the  extremities  to  the 
heart.  To  these  two  circulating  systems,  the  heart, 
with  its  two  auricles,  two  ventricles,  and  valves,  is 
exactly  adapted,  so  as  to  keep  the  positive  and  nega 
five  blood  apart,  and  to  regulate  the  motion  of  bnib 


66  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

And  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  nervous  system  mosl 
perfectly  corresponds  with  what  I  have  said  of  the 
circulating  system,  t  mean  that  nerves  of  involuntary 
motion  are  laid  along  the  arteries  to  receive  the  chargo 
of  electricity  from  the  positive  blood  that  flows  in  them. 
These  views  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  are  strength- 
ened by  the  fact,  that  the  blood  contains  a  certain  por- 
tion of  iron  ;  and  we  well  know  that  iron  becomes  a 
magnet  only  by  induction,  and  loses  its  magnetic  power 
the  moment  the  electric  current  passes  from  it.  Hence 
the  blood,  through  the  agency  of  the  iron  it  contains, 
can  easily  assume  a  positive  state  at  the  instant  it  re- 
ceives the  electric  charge  from  the  air  at  the  lungs. 
It  can  then  pass  into  the  arteries,  and  by  friction  throw 
off  its  electricity  into  the  nerves,  and  again  assume  a 
negative  state  as  it  enters  the  veins. 

I  now  consider  the  electric  or  magnetic  circula- 
lation  of  the  blood  philosophically  and  irresistibly 
proved.  Hence  the  position  which  many  assume,  that 
the  heart  circulates  the  blood  on  the  hydraulic  or 
vacuum  principle,  is  utterly  unfounded  in  truth.  And 
that  the  heart,  in  accomplishing  this,  exerts  a  force,  as 
they  contend,  of  more  than  one  hundred  thousand 
pounds,  is  too  preposterous  to  be  believed.  I  grant 
that  the  heart  is  the  strongest  muscle  in  the  human 
system ;  but  who  can  for  one  moment  believe  that  its 
motive  power  is  equal  to  fifty  tons  1  The  heart,  as  I 
have  alreaiy  observed,  does  not  circulate  the  blood  at 


LECTURE    IV.  67 

all  ]  ncr  on  the  contrary  does  the  blood  cause  the  heart 
to  throb.  The  heart  and  lungs  both  receive  their  mo- 
tions from  the  cerebellum,  which  is  the  fountain  and 
origin  of  organic  life  and  involuntary  motion.  Hence 
the  involuntary  nerves  from  the  cerebellum  throb  the 
heart  and  heave  the  lungs,  and  the  electricity  contained 
in  the  air  they  inspire,  circulates  the  blood  and  sup- 
plies the  brain  with  nervous  fluid,  as  I  have  already 
explained. 

Perhaps,  however,  the  inquiry  may  here  arise,  What 
proof  is  there  that  the  involuntary  nerves  from  the 
cerebellum  throb  the  heart  and  heave  the  lungs,  and 
that  the  blood  13  not  made  to  circulate  from  the  same 


cause 


This  double  interrogatory  is  easily  answered.  In- 
sert, for  instance,  a  surgical  knife  between  the  joints  of 
the  vertebrae,  and  cut  off  the  spinal  marrow  below  the 
lungs  and  heart — all  the  parts  below  this  incision  will 
be  so  completely  paralyzed,  and  voluntary  motion  and 
sensation  so  entirely  destroyed,  that  we  have  no  power 
to  move  the  limbs  by  any  volition  we  may  exert ;  nor 
have  we  any  power  to  feel,  even  though  the  paralyzed 
limbs  should  be  broken^  to  pieces  by  a  hammer,  or 
burned  with  fire.  Yet  in  these  immovable  and  un- 
feeling parts  the  blood  continues  to  circulate  as  usual 
through  the  veins  and  arteries.  This  is  proof  positive 
that  the  blood  is  not  made  to  flow  by  any  power  what- 
ever invested  in  the  cerebellum^  but,  as  before  proved. 


DO  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

by  the  positive  and  negative  forces  of  that  electricity 
contained  in  the  air  inspired  by  the  lungs.  But  let 
the  spinal  marrow  be  severed  above  the  lungs  and 
heart,  and  both  will  be  instantly  paralyzed  and  ceass 
their  motions  ;  yet  the  last  inspiration  taken  in  by  the 
lungs  will  cause  the  blood  to  circulate  till  it  floods  the 
right  ventricle  of  the  heart  with  venous  blood,  and 
empties  the  left  ventricle  of  its  arterial  blood.  This  is 
proof  the  most  irresistible,  that  the  heart  and  lungs 

ARE  MOVED  BY  AN  INVOLUNTARY  NERVOUS  FORCE 
ORIGINATING  IN  THE  CEREBELLUM,  while    the    blood    IS 

circulated  by  the  positive  and  negative  forces  of  that 
electricity  which  is  taken  in  wfth  the  air  at  the  lungs. 
The  lungs  merely  act  as  a  double  force-pump  to  bring 
in  the  surrounding  atmosphere,  extract  from  it  a 
proper  supply  of  the  vital  principle  to  feed  the  bright 
and  burning  flame  of  life,  and  to  reject  and  expire  the 
dregs  unfit  for  that  end.  This  is  perhaps  as  much  as 
it  is  necessary  to  say  in  relation  to  the  circulation  of 
the  blood,  and  the  constant  secretion  of  the  nervous 
fluid  from  the  arterial  blood  to  the  brain.  I  now  turn 
to  the  philosophy  of  disease,  and  will  be  brief  as  pos- 
sible. 

It  is  generally  supposed  by  medical  men,  that  there 
are  innumerable  causes  for  the  various  diseases  in  ex- 
istence, and  that  even  one  disease  may  have  man; 
causes  in  nature  to  produce  it.  But  I  contend^  that 
tber<*  is  but  one  grand  cause  for  all  diseases,  and  this 


LECTURE    IV.  69 

is  the  disturbing  of  the  vital  force  of  the  body.  There 
is  in  every  human  being  a  certain  amount  of  electricity. 
This  is,  as  I  have  said,  the  most  subtile  and  fine  mate- 
rial in  the  body  ;  is  the  power,  as  has  been  shown,  that 
moves  the  blood  ;  and  is  the  agent  by  which  the  mind, 
through  the  nerves,  contracts  the  muscles  and  produces 
motion.  And  as  all  the  convulsions  and  operations  in 
nature  and  in  man  invariably  begin  in  the  invisible  and 
finest  substances  in  being,  and  end  in  the  most  gross, 
so  electricity,  in  the  human  system,  is  the  cause  of  all 
the  effects  there  produced,  whether  salutary  or  other- 
wise. When  this  electricity  is  equalized  throughout 
the  nervous  system,  the  blood  will  also  be  equalized  in 
its  circulation,  and  the  natural  result  is  health.  But 
when  it  is  thrown  out  of  balance,  the  blood  will,  in  like 
manner,  be  also  disturbed,  and  the  natural  result  is 
disease  ;  and  the  disease  will  be  severe  or  mild  in 
the  same  ratio  as  the  vital  force  is  more  or  less  dis- 
turbed. 

I  am  well  aware  that  medical  men  are  much  inclined 
to  examine  the  patient's  pulse,  and  watch  the  move- 
ments of  the  blood.  They  seem  to  think  that  nearly 
all  diseases  originate  in  the  blood,  and  hence,  under  this 
impression,  hundreds  of  specifics,  or  nostrums,  have 
arisen  to  purify  the  blood,  as  though  it  contained  some 
foreign  properties  that  rendered  it  impure,  and  that 
these,  by  some  medical  treatment,  must  be  extracted  or 
removed  from  the  system.     But  all  this  is  fallacious, 


JQ  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

as  the  blood  contains  no  foreign  properties  to  render  it 
impure.  The  blood  becomes  impure  only  through  a 
disturbed  circulation.  It  can  be  purified  by  no  other 
substances  in  being,  except  what  are  contained  in  the 
air  at  the  lungs.  These  are  oxygen  and  electricity. 
The  whole  blood  in  the  body  must,  every  few  moments, 
be  passed  through  the  lungs  to  be  purified  and  preserved 
from  putrefaction.  If  the  circulation,  in  any  part  of 
the  body,  be  obstructed,  or  thrown  out  of  balance,  so 
that  the  blood  cannot  pay  its  timely  visit  to  the  lungs, 
it  must  become  extravasated  and  impure.  If,  in  any 
part  of  the  body,  there  is  a  complete  obstruction,  so 
that  the  blood  is  entirely  retained,  then  inflammation, 
ulceration,  and  corruption  must  ensue. 

I  now  turn  directly  to  the  subject,  and  call  your  un- 
divided attention  to  the  philosophy  of  disease.  The 
operations  of  the  mind,  and  the  nervous  system  of 
man,  have  been  too  much  overlooked  by  medical  men, 
who  have  paid  great  attention  to  the  blood,  and  to  the 
more  gross  and  solid  parts  of  the  body.  But  it  is  evi- 
dent that  disease  begins  in  the  electricity  of  the  nerves, 
and  not  in  the  blood.  Electricity  is  the  starting  point. 
From  thence  it  is  communicated  to  the  blood,  from  the 
blood  to  the  flesh,  and  from  the  flesh  to  the  bones, 
which  are  the  last  effected.  It  begins  in  the  finest,  and 
ends  in  the  grossest  particles  of  the  system.  The  un- 
seen are  the  starting  powers. 

1  have  already  remarked  that  the  brain  is  the  foun- 


LECTURE    IV.  71 

tarn  ci  sag  nervous  system,  and  sends  forth  its  millions 
of  branches  to  every  possible  part  and  extremity  of  the 
body.  This  nervous  system  is  filled  with  electricity, 
which  is  the  agent  or  servant  of  the  royal  mind,  who, 
as  monarch,  holds  his  throne  in  the  bram.  From 
thence  the  mind,  by  its  volitions,  controls  one  half  of 
the  electricity  of  the  system.  It  controls  all  that  is 
contained  in  the  voluntary  nerves,  but  has  no  such 
control  over  the  other  half,  which  is  confined  to  the  in- 
voluntary nerves. 

Though  there  is  but  one  grand  cause  of  disease, 
which  is  the  electricity  of  the  system  thrown  out  of 
balance,  yet  there  are,  nevertheless,  two  modes  by 
which  this  may  be  done.  It  may  be  done  by  mental 
impressions.  And  so  it  may  be  done  by  physical  im- 
pressions from  external  nature.  I  will  first  notice  how 
diseases   are  produced  by  mental  impressions. 

Millions  of  our  race  have  been  swept  from  the  light 
of  life  to  the  darkness  of  death  by  various  diseases 
caused  by  mental  impressions.  Misfortune  and  dis- 
tress have  fallen  upon  many  a  father,  a  mother,  and 
many  a  child.  They  have  shut  up  in  their  bosoms  all 
these  mental  woes,  and  brooded  over  their  misfortunes 
in  secret,  concealed  grief.  Melancholy  took  possession 
of  the  heart,  the  vital  force  was  disturbed,  the  system 
was  thrown  out  of  balance,  disease  wTas  engendered, 
and  the)-  went  to  their  graves. 

I  am  now  addressing  this  audience.     The  action  of 


72  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

my  mini  has  called  the  electricity  of  the  system  frois 
the  extremities  to  the  brain.  The  blood  has  followed 
it.  My  feet  being  robbed  of  their  due  proportion  of 
the  vital  force,  are,  in  the  same  ratio,  cold,  and  hence, 
this  is,  so  far,  disease.  And  unless  I  cease.d  speaking, 
and  suffered  a  reaction  to  take  place,  it  would  bring  me 
to  my  grave. 

A  man  accumalates  a  fortune  of  two  hundred  thou- 
sand dollars.  He  loses  one  half  of  it,  and  is  hurled 
in  distress.  He  broods  over  his  misfortune.  The 
mind  is  in  trouble  ;  it  shrinks  back  on  itself.  The 
electricity  of  the  system,  this  servant  of  the  mind, 
leaves  the  extremities  and  approaches  the  brain,  the 
throne  of  the  master.  The  blood  follows  on ;  the  ex- 
citement becomes  great,  and  he  believes  he  shall  die  in 
an  almshouse.  He  is  a  monomaniac.  Suppose  he 
now  loses  the  other  half  of  his  fortune,  and  his  mind 
will  become  involved  in  still  greater  distress.  This 
mental  action  calls  an  increased  quantity  of  electricity, 
that  is,  of  nervous  fluid,  to  the  brain,  and  an  equal 
amount  of  blood  follows  on.  He  is  now  entirely  de- 
ranged, and  his  feet  are  incessantly  cold,  because  tha 
brain  has  robbed  them  of  their  due  proportion  of  the  vital 
force.  Now  do  you  not  perceive,  that  if  these  forces 
are  dispersed  from  the  brain,  and  the  circulation  equal- 
ized, that  his  reason  will  be  restored  1  There  is  not 
too  much  of  blood  and  electricity  in  the  system,  but 
there  may  be  toe  much  in  any  one  department  of  the 


LECTURE    IV.  73 

system.  I  will  now  suppose  him  once  more  in  posses- 
sion of  his  reason.  Now  bring  him  intelligence  that 
his  larling  child  is  crushed  to  atoms.  The  mind  sud- 
denly shrinks  back  on  itself ;  the  electric,  or  nervous 
fluid,  instantly  darts  to  the  brain,  like  a  faithful  serv- 
ant to  see  what  distresses  the  master.  The  blood  as 
suddenly  follows  the  servant.  The  storm  rages,  and  a 
fit  ensues.  Let  the  news  be  still  more  startling,  and 
the  congregated  forces  will,  in  the  same  ratio,  be  in- 
creased upon  the  brain,  and  he  drops  a  corpse !  So  we 
perceive  that,  in  all  these  instances,  there  is  but  one 
cause  of  disease.  The  only  difference  we  have  wit- 
nessed in  the  effects  produced,  was  a  gradually  increas- 
ed action,  occasioned  by  an  increased  power  of  the 
same  cause,  even  from  the  slightest  excitement,  grad- 
ually up  to  that  fearful  point  where  it  produced  instant 
death.  An  instance  analagous  to  this,  transpired  here 
among  you,  in  the  case  of  the  distinguished  statesman, 
John  Quincy  Adams.  Perhaps  too  much  anxiety  and 
thought  for  the  welfare  of  his  country,  at  his  advanced 
age,  called  the  forces  to  the  brain,  and  the  brilliant 
lamp  of  reason  and  life  was  extinguished  !  He  has  en- 
tered on  other  scenes ! 

I  have  thus  far  confined  my  remarks  to  effects  pro- 
duced upon  the  brain  by  the  electro-nervous  fluid  and 
blood,  which  were  called  there  by  the  various  emotions, 
passions,  and  sensations  of  the  mind.  But  that  these 
forces  slnuld  invade  the  territory  of  the  brain,  and 
4 


74  ELECTRICAL    JrSYCHOLSG  f . 

prod  ace  such  results,  depends,  however,  upon  the  con- 
dition of  the  brain  as  to  its  comparative  plrysica. 
strength  with  the  other  parts  of  the  system.  In  this 
view  of  the  subject,  had  the  same  misfortunes  as  tc 
loss  of  property  above  stated  been  visited  upon  this 
same  individual  when  his  brain  was  firm,  a  different 
disease  would  have  been  the  result.  Suppose  that  his 
brain,  as  to  its  physical  structure,  had  been  strong  and 
firm,  but  that  his  lungs  had  been  weak.  Now  let  the 
same  misfortunes  befall  him.  His  mind  again  shrinks 
back  on  itself;  the  electro-nervous  force,  as  before, 
starts  for  the  brain,  but  is  not  allowed  to  enter  this 
palace  of  the  distressed  monarch,  and  it  stops  at  the 
lungs,  the  weakest  and  nearest  post.  The  blood  next 
follows  on  in  pursuit  of  the  servant,  and  takes  up  its 
abode  with  him.  Inflammation  sets  in,  and,  if  the 
trouble  of  the  monarch  continues,  tubercles  form,  ulcer- 
ation takes  place  and  death  ensues.  It  was  consump- 
tion. 

But  suppose  th^  lungs  had  been  strong,  and  that  the 
stomach  had  been,  by  some  trivial  circumstance,  ren- 
dered the  weakest  part.  The  electro-nervous  fluid  and 
blood  would,  in  this  case,  have  gone  time,  and  taken 
possession  of  that  post.  Inflammation,  canker,  with 
morbid  secretions  would  have  ensued,  and  even  ulcers 
might  have  beea  formed.  The  digestive  organs  would 
have  been  weakenr  1,  and  dyspepsia,  with  all  its  horror 
of  horrors,  would  nave  been  tne  result.     If  the  liver 


LECTURE    IV.  75 

had  been  tl  e  weaker  spot,  the  same  forces,  under  the 
same  mental  impressions,  would  have  congregated  there, 
and  produced  the  liver  complaint.  K  the  stomach  and 
liver  had  both  been  strong,  and  the  spine  weak,  it  would 
have  been  a  spinal  complaint.  If  all  these  had  been 
physically  firm,  and  the  kidneys  weak,  the  same  forces 
would  have  produced  a  disease  of  the  kidneys.  And 
if  all  in  the  regions  of  the  brain  and  trunk  had  been 
firm,  and  a  mere  blow  had  been  inflicted  upon  the  hip, 
knee,  or  any  part  of  the  lower  limbs,  the  electro-nerv- 
ous force  and  the  attendant  blood  would  have  gone 
there,  and  produced  the  white  swelling,  or  any  other 
species  of  inflammation  and  distress.  So  we  perceive, 
that  the  same  cause,  under  mental  impressions,  may 
produce  any  of  these  diseases.  As  to  the  character 
of  the  disease,  it  merely  takes  its  name  from  the  organ 
or  place  in  the  body  where  it  may  locate  itself.  Hence 
diseases  diner  one  from  another  only  as  the  various  dis- 
eased organs,  their  motions,  secretions,  and  functions 
may  differ — or  as  the  various  located  parts  of  the  body 
invaded  by  disease  may  differ  from  each  other.  But 
the  producing  cause  of  all  these  diseases  is  one  and  the 
same.  It  is  the  electro-nervous  fluid  of  the  body0 
Having  said  all  that  I  at  present  deem  necessary  iu 
relation  to  the  disturbing  of  the  nervous  force  by  men- 
tal impressions,  I  will  now  turn  your  attention  to 
the  disturbing  of  the  nervous  force  by  physical  ik 

PRESSIIOffS- 


76  ELECTS ICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

As  the  mind  in  distress — in  secret  melancholy  an  j 
grief — has  disturbed  the  nervous  force,  which  has  en- 
gendered disease  by  calling  the  blood  and  other  fluids 
of  the  body  to  its  presence,  and  thus  sent  millions  to 
their  graves — as  it  has  produced  all  the  diseases  we 
have  mentioned  and  even  hundreds  more — so  the  same 
diseases  and  hundreds  more  are  also  produced  by  the 
nervous  force  when  it  is  disturbed  by  physical  impres- 
sions from  external  nature. 

I  am  well  aware  that  mental  and  physical  impres- 
sions may  be  termed  causes  of  disease ;  but  it  will  be 
remembered,  that  medical  men  contend  that  there  are 
remote  and  proximate  causes  of  disease.  I  am  on  the 
latter,  and  contend  that  there  are  not  thousands  of 
proximate  causes,  but  only  one  grand  proximate 
cause  of  disease,  and  this  is  the  disturbing  of  the 
nervous  fluid,  or  throwing  the  electricity  of  the  system 
out  of  balance ;  and  that  diseases  begin  in  the  electric 
force  of  the  nerves,  and  not  in  the  blood.  They  begin 
in  the  invisible  and  finest  substance  of  the  body,  and 
end  in  the  gross.  Hence  the  same  cause  that  produces 
monomania,  produces  entire  derangement,  fits,  head- 
ache, and  even  the  common  excitement  of  the  brain  in 
a  public  speaker.  The  same  cause  produces  consump- 
tion, dyspepsia,  liver  complaint,  spinal  affections,  pleu- 
risy, cholera,  dysentery,  inflammations,  fevers,  etc. 
This  subtile,  disease-causing  principle,  is  the  elec- 
ntc-NERVCus  FLUir,     When  equalized  tliroughout  the 


LECTURE    IV.  77 

system,  it  is  the  cause  of  health,  for  it  controls  the 
blood  and  other  fluids,  and  when  thrown  out  of  balance, 
it  is  the  cause  of  disease.  Hence  the  minister  of  health 
and  sickness — of  life  and  death — is  within  us,  and  is 
or.e  and  the  same  principle.  As  electricity  is  the  effi- 
cient cause  of  all  convulsions,  calms,  and  storms  in  na- 
ture, and  of  all  the  pleasing  or  awful  phenomena  that 
transpire  in  earth,  air,  or  ocean,  or  in  the  vegetable  or 
mineral  kingdom,  so,  as  man  is  but  an  epitome  of  the 
universe,  it  is  electricity  in  the  form  of  nervous  fluid 
that  produces  all  the  convulsions,  calms,  and  storms  in 
his  own  system. 

We  have  seen  the  various  secret  stirrings  of  electri- 
city in  the  human  nerves  under  mental  impressions,  in 
producing  insanity,  fits,  consumptions,  etc.  We  wit- 
ness the  same  mournful  results  when  that  subtile  power 
is  moved  by  physical  impressions.  A  wet  foot,  for 
instance,  may  throw  the  electro-nervous  fluid  out  of 
balance,  and  this  subtile  force  may  suddenly  check  the 
lacteal  or  other  secretions,  and  also  produce  insanity, 
or  fits,  or  by  locating  itself  upon  the  lungs,-  it  may  pro- 
duce consumption.  The  fact  is,  that  the  electro-nerv- 
ous fluid,  when  disturbed  at  the  extremities,  or  on  the 
surface  of  the  body,  always  retires  inward,  and  locates 
itself  upon  the  weakest  organ,  or  upon  some  weak  por- 
tion of  the  vitals — the  blood  follows,  and  disease  is  the 
result.  As  I  have  fully  explained  this  when  noticing 
insntal  impressions,  so  there  is  no  occasion  of  my  par 


78  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGT. 

ticularising .  I  will  merely  say,  that  a  sudden  exposure 
to  a  damp  air,  sitting  upon  a  cold  rock,  lying  upon  the 
ground  and  suddenly  falling  asleep,  or  sitting  with  the 
back  to  a  current  of  air  while  in  a  perspiration — all,  or 
any  of  these,  may  at  times  disturb  the  electro-nervous 
force,  and  arouse  this  disease-causing  power  from  its 
slumberings.  This  may  throw  the  blood  out  of  balance, 
and  by  locating  themselves  upon  the  weakest  organ  or 
weakest  part  of  the  system,  engender  disease.  Or  the 
nervous  force  may  be  disturbed  by  eating  or  drinking 
too  much  or  too  little  of  wholesome  substances,  or  by 
eating  and  drinking  unwholesome  or  poisonous  sub- 
stances, and  all  these  correspondent  diseases  produced. 
It  is  now  clearly  seen  how  mental  and  physical  im- 
pressions disturb  the  electricity  of  the  system,  which 
locates  itself  upon  the  weakest  organ,  calls  the  blood 
to  its  aid,  and  brings  disease,  pain,  and  death.  So  we 
perceive,  that  the  same  nervous  fluid  which,  when 
equalized,  produces  health,  is,  when  thrown  out  of  bal- 
ance, the  cause  of  disease.  The  whole  electricity  of 
the  nerves  is,  of  course,  one  hundred  per  cent.  Fifty 
per  cent,  is  under  the  voluntary  control  of  the  mind, 
and  belongs  to  the  voluntary  nerves,  and  the  other  fifty 
per  cent,  is  under  the  control  of  the  involuntary  powers 
of  the  mind,  and  belongs  to  the  involuntary  nerves. 
Now  if  the  whole  fifty  per  cent,  of  either  of  these 
forces,  which  when  equalized  is  health,  should  be  sud- 
denly collected  upm  any  one  organ,  it  would  be  the 


LECTURE    IV.  79 

destruction  of  that  organ.  If  the  mind,  on  hearing 
bad  news,  or  by  some  sudden  distress,  should  call  the 
whole  fifty  per  cent,  of  electricity  under  its  control  to 
the  brain,  apoplexy  and  death  must  ensue.  This  would 
be  done  by  a  mental  impression  on  the  voluntary  nerv- 
ous force,  causing  the  mind  to  shrink  back  on  itself  and 
become  passive.  But  the  same  melancholy  result  could 
be  produced  by  eating,  drinking,  or  some  other  physical 
impression  on  the  involuntary  force  over  which  the 
mind  has  no  such  control.  Hence  it  will  be  understood, 
that  all  diseases,  originating  under  mental  impressions, 
are  produced  by  the  fifty  per  cent,  of  voluntary  nerv 
ous  force.  But  those  diseases,  originating  under  physi- 
cal impressions,  are  produced  by  the  fifty  per  cent,  of 
involuntary  nervous  force,  and  over  which  the  mind  has 
no  control = 

If  either  of  these  electro-nervous  forces,  to  a  certain 
amount,  should  be  called  to  a  muscle,  it  would  be  pain. 
If  called  to  a  still  greater  extent,  it  would  be  inflam- 
mation ;  and  if  the  whole  fifty  per  cent,  were  called 
there,  it  would  be  mortification,  and  the  ultimate  and 
absolute  destruction  of  the  muscle.  The  same  result 
would  follow  in  case  either  of  these  forces  were  called 
to  any  organ  in  the  system.  It  would  be  the  destruc- 
tion of  that  organ. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  pain :  First,  a  pain  pro- 
duced by  negative  electricity,  which  attracts  the  blood 
to  the  spot,  and  is  ever  attended  with  inflammation 


80  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Second,  a  pain  produced  by  positive  electricity,  which 
repels  the  blood,  and,  though  equally  severe,  is  never 
attended  with  inflammation.  Third,  a  pain  produced 
by  the  confused  mixture  of  the  two  forces,  and  consists 
in  a  burning,  itching,  or  prickly  sensation,  and  is  often 
very  distressing. 

I  have  now  given  you  a  few  hints  on  the  philosophy 
of  disease,  which  are  of  course  novel  to  you  all ;  but 
they  are,  nevertheless,  as  interesting  and  important  to 
the  welfare  of  our  race,  as  they  are  novel  and  strange. 
Medical  men  have  ever  noticed  the  great  effect  that  the 
mind  has  upon  the  body,  both  as'  it  regards  a  disastrous 
or  salutary  result.  Hence  they  keep  up  the  brightest 
hopes  of  their  patients  as  to  recovery,  and  carefully 
guard  every  one  against  uttering  to  them  a  word  of  dis- 
couragement. These  effects  they  have  seen,  but  not 
understanding  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and 
matter,  the  true  philosophy  of  disease  has  been  by  them 
entirely  overlooked,  and  in  relation  to  this  science  they 
may  after  all  cry  "  humbug."  But  this  will  avail  them 
nothing,  for  truth5  after  all,  will  stand  unshaken,  and 
be  appreciated  by  after  generations,  when  opposition 
shall  have  been  interred,  with  no  hope  of  its  resurrec- 
tion. In  view  of  our  subject,  so  far  as  it  regards  men- 
tal  impressions,  we  see  the  supreme  importance  of 
maintaining  a  reconciled  state  of  mind.  Equanimity 
>f  mind  is  the  parent  of  health,  peace,  and  happiness 
and  the  noblest  test  of  the  true  Christian.     When  Wi 


LECTURE    IV.  81 

boo  thousands  always  restless,  complaining  of  cold  and 
heat,  and  wet  and  dry — complaining  of  their  own  con- 
dition, and  finding  fault  with  others,  and  dissatisfied 
with  the  events  of  Providence — we  need  not  marvel 
that  so  many  complain  of  indisposition  and  disease. 
This  state  of  mind  produces  them.     So  beware. 


82  i  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 


LECTURE    V. 

Ladies  am   CL.  tlemen  : 

When  we  reflect  how  extensive  a  field  the  phUVtso- 
phy  of  disease  naturally  occupies,  and  how  vast  a 
range  we  must  take  in  order  to  inspect  minutely  its 
several  parts,  it  will  tlion  be  seen  that  my  remarks, 
in  my  last  Lecture,  have  been  brief  in  comparison  with 
the  vastness  of  the  subject.  I  flatter  myself,  however, 
that  my  views  are  understood,  and  that  the  importance 
of  the  doctrine  of  mental  and  physical  impressions,  in 
relation  to  disease,  is  clearly  seen,  and  fully  appre- 
ciated by  you  all,  I  believe  it  to  be  founded  in  im- 
mutable truth,  and  that  it  will  survive  the  crush  of 
empires  and  the  revolution  of  ages. 

Having  brought  forward  the  philosophy  of  dis- 
ease in  my  last  Lecture,  I  now  turn  to  the  ration- 
ale of  its  cure  in  this. 

In  discussing  the  doctrine  of  mental  impressions,  I 
have  clearly  and  irresistibly  proved  that  the  mind  by 
shrinking  back  on  itself  in  fear,  melancholy,  and  grief, 
in  the  day  of  adversity,  misfortune,  and  distress,  can 
disturb  the  electro-nervous  fluid,  and  allow  it  to  con- 


LECTURE    V.  83 

eentrate  itself  upon  any  organ  of  the  body  and  engen- 
der disease.  If,  then,  the  mind  can  disturb  the  equili- 
brium of  the  nervo-eleetric  force  and  call  it  to  some 
organ  so  as  to  produce  disease,  then  the  mind  can  also 
disperse  it,  equalize  the  circulation,  and  restore  health. 
This  it  can  do  by  a  mental  impression,  admitting  the 
arpression  to  be  sufficiently  great.  For  example :  A 
aan  in  possession  of  five  thousand  dollars  is  riding 
homeward  on  horseback  in  the  evening.  He  is  within 
a  mile  of  his  house.  He  is  weary  and  his  head  aches 
so  severely  that  he  is  obliged  to  walk  his  horse.  He 
is  so  indisposed  and  faint  that  he  can  but  just  keep  his 
saddle.  From  a  lonely  dismal  spot  at  the  road  side, 
a  robber  springs  and  seizes  his  horse's  bridle — pre- 
sents a  pistol,  and  exclaims,  "  Your  money,  or  your 
life !"  The  rider,  with  a  loaded  whip,  and  at  the  im- 
pulse of  the  moment,  suddenly  strikes  the  robber's 
Arm.  This  causes  the  pistol  to  discharge,  and  adds  to 
the  confusion  of  the  moment.  The  rider,  scarcely 
knowing  what  he  is  about,  puts  spurs  to  his  horse. 
He  darts  off  at  the  top  of  his  speed.  Before  he  is 
aware,  he  is  at  his  own  door.  He  dismounts  and  finds 
himself  safe.  The  vital  force  is  driven  to  the  extrem- 
ities, and  his  hands  and  feet  are  warm.  Where  is  his 
headache  now  q.  It  is  gone.  The  supreme  impression 
of  his  mind  drove  the  electro-nervous  fluid  from  his 
brain — the  blood  followed  it — a  reaction  took  place, 
and  he  was  well.     Is  there  any  thing  strange  in  this  * 


84  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

No .  Then  there  is  nothing  strange  in  this  science^ 
for  it  is  the  curing  of  diseases  "by  the  doctrine  of  im- 
pressions. 

I  desire  it  to  tte  distinctly  understood  how  this  power 
operates.  Remember  mind  touches  the  electro-nervous 
fluid,  moves  it — and  this  fluid  moves  the  blood.  Elec- 
trical Psychology  is  the  doctrine  of  impressions,  and 
the  same  disease  that  mind,  or  even  physical  impres- 
sions can  cause,  the  mind  can  remove,  if  the  patient 
be  in  the  psychological  state.  Because  mental  impres- 
sions to  any  extent  we  please  can  be  produced  upon 
him.  It  is  therefore  immaterial  from  what  source  a 
disease  may  arise,  or  what  kind  of  a  disease  it  may  be, 
the  mind  can,  by  its  impressions,  cause  the  nervous 
fluid  to  cure  it,  or  at  least  to  produce  upon  it  a  salu- 
tary influence.  If  exposure  to  heat  or  cold,  dampness 
or  dryness,  or  to  any  of  the  changing  elements,  should 
call  the  nervous  fluid  to  the  lungs,  and  disturb  the  cir- 
culation of  the  blood,  so  as  to  produce  inflammation, 
the  mind  could  disperse  and  equalize  it,  and  thus  effect 
a  cure  as  readily  as  though  this  inflammation  of  the 
lungs  had  been  brought  on  by  melancholy  and  grief, 
or  by  any  other  mental  distress.  Or  if  these  exposures 
had  caused  any  other  disease  or  pain  in  the  system, 
the  mind  could  have  had  the  same  power  to  remc  ve  it, 
as  though  it  had  been  caused  by  mental  distress.  Or 
if  by  eating,  drinking,  or  by  sedentary  habits,  dyspep- 
sia had  been  produced,  the  mind  could  have  had  the 


LECTJRE     *\  85 

gam i  power  to  produce  a  salutary  result,  or  even  to 
cure  it  as  though  it  had  been  caused  by  mental  dis- 
tress. I  do  not  mean  that  a  cure  cai?  be  effected  by 
the  electro-nervous  force,  through  mental  impressions 
if  there  be  any  organic  destruction  of  the  parts  dis- 
eased. The  consumption,  for  instance,  could  not  be 
cured  if  the  lungs  were  ulcerated  ;  sight  could  not  be 
restored  if  the  optic  nerve  were  destroyed ;  nor  could 
deafness  be  removed  if  the  auditory  nerve  were  de- 
stroyed. In  these  cases,  even,  medical  remedies,  it 
must  be  granted,  would  be  of  no  avail,  because  there 
is  no  foundation  on  which  to  build.  In  all  I  have 
said,  or  may  say  in  regard  to  cures,  I  have  reference 
only  to  curable  cases.  I  mean,  that  the  fifty  per  cent, 
of  electro-nervous  force,  under  the  control  of  the  mind, 
could  effect  a  cure  where  there  is  no  organic  destruc- 
tion, and  where  there  is,  at  the  same  time,  a  suffi- 
ciency of  vital  force  left  to  build  upon,  so  as  to  be  able 
to  produce  a  sanative  result.  Nor  do  I  mean  to  be 
understood  that  this  science  alone  can  at  all  times 
cure.  It  may  require  medicines  to  co-operate  with  it. 
As  diseases  are  produced  through  mental  and  physical 
impressions,  so  through  mental  and  physical  impres- 
sions they  must  be  cured. 

Medicine  produces  a  physical  impression  on  the  sys- 
tem, but  never  heals  a  disease.  "  If  a  disease  were 
ever  healed  through  medicines,  it  was  healed  by  the 
same  sanative  power  as  though  it  had  been  done  by  a 


86  ELECTRICAL.    PSYCHOLOGY. 

mental  impression  in  accordance  with  the  teachings  ci 
Electrical  Psychology.  This  is  evident ;  because  th« 
sanative  power  is  in  the  individual,  and  not  in  the- 
medicine.  Medicines  and  mental  impressions  only  call 
that  sanative  principle  to  the  right  spot  in  the  system 
so  as  to  enable  it  to  do  its  work.  The  following  ex- 
ample will  explain  my  meaning  on  this  particular 
point : 

You  enter  a  garden  and  see  a  peach-tree  with  its 
fruit  not  fully  grown,  but  so  heavily  laden,  that  one  of 
its  limbs  is  partially  split  from  the  trunk.  The  gar-' 
dener  is  aware  that  if  it  be  neglected  till  the  fruit 
grows  to  maturity,  the  limb  will  be  entirely  parted 
from  the  tree  and  die.  He  carefully  raises  the  limb 
till  the  split  closes,  and  puts  under  it  a  prop  to  keep  it 
to  its  place.  He  winds  canvas  around  the  wounded 
part,  and  over  this  he  puts  tar.  Now  there  is  cer- 
tainly no  healing  principle  in  the  prop — there  is  none 
m  the  canvas — nor  is  there  any  in  the  tar.  The  prop 
merely  sustains  the  weight  of  the  limb,  and  keeps  the 
split  together  ;  the  canvas  is  wound  around  it  to  pre- 
vent the  tar  from  entering  the  split ;  and  the  tar  was 
applied  to  protect  the  whole  from  the  air,  rains,  and 
external  elements  ;  while  the  tree  is  left  to  the  inhe- 
rent operations  of  its  oven  sanative  principles.  The 
sanative  principle  being  in  the  tree,  it  must  heal  itself. 
So  the  healing  principle  is  in  man,  as  much  so  as  it  is 
in  the  tree.     The  healing  principle  in  the  tree  is  the 


LECTURE    V.  87 

invisible  da tro -vegetative  fluid.  This  moves  and 
equalizes  the  sap,  and  the  sap  affects  the  wood.  It  is 
the  electricity  of  the  tree  that  does  the  work  ;  and  this 
electricity  is  under  the  control  of  its  vegetable  life. 
So  the  healing  principle  in  man  is  the  invisible  electro- 
nervous  fluid.  This  moves  and  equalizes  the  blood, 
and  the  blood  affects  the  flesh.  It  is  the  electricity  of 
the  system,  under  the  control  of  the  mind. 

The  position  is  incontrovertible,  that  the  healing 
principle  is  in  man.  Admitting  it  to  be  electricity,  or 
what  I  call  the  electro-nervous  fluid  of  the  system,  it 
is  then  easily  seen  that  there  is  no  healing  principle  in 
medicine,  and  it  is  also  understood  what  effect  medicine 
must  have  upon  the  system  in  order  to  produce  a  salu- 
tary influence.  It  must  equalize  the  electricity,  as 
before  remarked,  and  call  it  to  the  proper  spot,  so  as 
to  enable  it  to  do  its  healing  work.  Hence,  if  the 
mind  can  so  operate  upon  the  fifty  per  cent,  of  the 
electro-nervous  force  under  its  control,  as  to  equalize 
it,  then  it  follows,  as  a  matter  of  course,  that  the  same 
healing  result  will  be  obtained  as  is  effected  by  medi 
cine.  In  either  case  there  is  no  difference  in  the  heal- 
ing power.  In  both  instances  it  is  the  same.  The 
only  difference  is,  that  in  the  one  case  the  healing 
power  was  made  to  act  by  the  mind,  which  produced 
its  mental  impression,  and  in  the  other  case  by  the 
medicine,  which  produced  its  'physical  impression. 

It  may  now  be  asked,  If  med;cine  has  no  healing 


88  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

property  in  it.  then  how  can  an  emetic  remove  impuri- 
ties from  the  stomach  by  vomiting  the  patient  1  In 
reply  I  would  state,  that  it  has  never  done  so.  In 
this  I  desire  to  be  distinctly  understood.  I  mean  that 
an  emetic  is  not  the  vomiting  principle.  The  vomiting 
principle  is  in  the  man.  It  is  the  electricity  of  the 
system.  The  electro-nervous  fluid  of  the  brain  is  the 
vomiting  principle.  Let  us  understand  the  philosophy 
of  this.  Emetics,  whether  mineral  or  vegetable,  pos- 
sess those  peculiar  chemical  properties  that  cause  im- 
mense secretions.  This  effect  is  the  whole  secret  of 
their  power.  An  emetic,  taken  into  the  stomach,  pro- 
duces secretions  most  freely  from  the  glands  of  the 
stomach,  from  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  lungs, 
from  the  glands  of  the  trachse,  and  from  the  glands  of 
the  mouth  and  tongue.  It  robs  them  of  their  moisture 
which  is  continually  accumulating  upon  the  stomach. 
The  parts  being  robbed  of  their  moisture  by  this  arti- 
ficial action,  the  electricity  from  the  nerves  follows  it, 
because  electricity  has  a  strong  affinity  for  moisture. 
When  a  sufficiency  of  the  electric  force  is  drawn  from 
the  brain,  and  the  blood  havi-g  in  the  same  ratio  fol- 
lowed it,  the  countenance  becomes  pale — an  expansion 
and  collapse  of  the  stomach  takes  place,  and  vomiting 
is  the  result.  This  is  its  philosophy.  In  proof  of  the 
fact,  electricity  sannot  be  gathered  in  damp  weather. 
The  moisture,  for  which  it  has  a  strong  affinity  3 
holds  it, 


LECTURE    V.  8§ 

After  all  I  have  said  of  medicine  and  its  operations t 
it  may  yet  be  supposed  that  it  possesses  some  healing 
principle,  and  that  the  emetic  does  vomit  the  patient, 
Why  then  will  it  not  vomit  a  dead  man?  The  answer 
is,  because  the  vital  force  is  gone,  and  the  emetic  is 
powerless.  But  why  will  it  not  vomit  the  man  when 
he  is  worn  out  with  disease  and  near  his  end?  ] 
answer,  because  the  vital  force  in  the  man,  on  which 
vomiting  depends,  is  wasted  ;  and  as  it  does  not  exist 
in  the  medicine,  so  the  emetic,  in  its  chemical  action 
having  no  material  to  work  upon,  or  to  call  to  its  aid, 
is  powerless. 

If  this  is  not  satisfactory  to  your  minds  in  the  settle- 
ment of  the  question  whether  the  vomiting  principle  is 
in  the  medicine  or  in  the  patient,  I  will  pursue  the 
subject  still  farther.  Suppose  while  eating  strawber- 
ries and  cream,  you  tell  a  sensitive  lady  that  she  has 
taken  into  the  stomach  a  worm,  or  even  a  fly — she 
stops  eating,  and  in  a  minute  she  vomits  freely.  How 
is  this,  when  she  has  swallowed,  in  fact,  neither  worm 
nor  fly  %  I  answer,  that  the  vomiting  principle  is  in 
the  brain.  She  believed  that  she  had  taken  into  the 
stomach  what  was  stated ;  she  kept  her  attention 
steadily  and  most  intently  upon  it — and  the  mind 
threw  the  electro-nervous  force  from  the  brain  to  the 
stomach,  until  there  was  a  sufiicient  quantity  to  pro- 
duce an  expansion  and  collapse  of  the  stomach,  and  cause 
vomiting.     Now  the  vomiting  'in  this  case  and  in  the 


90  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

case  of  the  emetic  was  occasioned  by  one  and  the  same 
thing,  and  that  is  the  electro-nervous  fluid.  The  only 
difference  in  the  two  cases  is,  that  the  emetic  called  it 
from  the  brain  by  a  physical  impression,  and  the  mind 
forced  it  from  the  brain  by  a  mental  impression. 

If  the  vomiting  principle  is  not  in  us,  why  then  does 
it  turn  the  stomach  to  see  an  animal  eating  any  thing 
very  filthy,  like  the  dog  returning  to  his  vomit  ?  If 
this  principle  is  not  in  us,  how  can  it  produce  nausea  ? 
How  can  the  motion  of  a  vessel,  and  sometimes  even 
the  motion  of  a  carriage,  produce  vomiting,  unless  it 
exists  in  the  nervous  force  of  the  brain  ?  Why  will  a 
fall,  or  blow  upon  the  head,  produce  it. 

The  same  is  true  in  relation  to  cathartics,  which 
excite  the  secretions  of  the  glands,  but  of  other  glands 
than  those  affected  by  an  emetic.  A  cathartic  excites 
the  secretions  of  the  mucous  glands  of  the  alimentary 
canal.  This  draws  the  electric  action  from  the  brain, 
but  mostly  from  the  nerves  on  the  surface  of  the  body 
there,  and  produces  its  results.  I  have  been  thus  par- 
ticular upon  the  action  and  operation  of  emetics,  as 
this  one  hint  is  sufficient  to  lead  any  reflecting  mind  to 
a  correct  impression  of  the  relation  in  which  medicines 
stand  to  the  human  system.  They  are  the  mere  props 
and  supports  of  some  weak  part,  to  aid  nature  in  re- 
storing  herself  to  health  and  vigor.  A  cathartic,  taken 
into  the  stomach  of  a  very  sensitive  individual,  wi?l 
produce  the  result  of  an'  emetic  ;  and  an  emetic,  too 


LECTURE    V.  91 

iOhg  in  effecting  its  end  in  the  first  stomach,  will,  aftei 
passing  the  duodenum,  r  roduce  the  result  of  a  cathartic 
in  the  second  stomach. 

I  have  now  said  all  that  is  necessary  in  relation  tc 
the  curing  of  diseases  by  the  electro-nervous  force, 
and  have  clearly  shown  how  this  force  can  be  made  to 
act  by  mind,  or  by  medicine.  I  will  now  give  advice 
in  relation  to  avoiding  disease  and  preserving  health, 
which  it  will  be  well  for  every  one  to  observe  who  is 
desirous  of  securing  this  inestimable  blessing.  As  life 
is  dear  to  all,  I  shall  be  pardoned  when  I  say  that 
medical  gentlemen  are  mad  who  administer  medicine  in 
silence  to  the  patient  without  candidly  informing  him 
what  the  medicine  is,  and  what  effect  or  effects  he  in- 
tends it  to  produce.  If  the  patient  were  thus  instruct- 
ed by  a  physician  in  whom  he  had  full  confidence,  then 
he  would  be  in  constant  expectation  of  the  anticipated 
effect ;  and  the  mind,  by  its  mental  impressions,  acting 
in  concert  with  the  physical  impressions  of  the  medi- 
cine, would  produce  a  salutary  and  happy  result.  I 
grant  that  this  information  cannot  be  given  to  infants, 
nor  to  deranged  persons  ;  but  it  should  be  done  in  all 
possible  cases. 

In  order  to  preserve  health,  the  body  should  be  kept 
clean,  and  the  mind  pure  and  calm.  There  are  ex- 
tremes in  every  thing,  and  these  should  te  carefully 
avoided.  The  body  should  be  carefully  washed  all 
over,  or  bathed,  except  the  head,  in  water  moderately 


h2  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

cool.  No  soap  should  be  used  in  either  case,  ami  tha 
process  should  not  occupy  more  than  three  or  four 
minutes.  It  should  be  briskly  rubbed  with  a  coarse 
towel,  and  mostly  downward,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the 
minute  scales  that  cover  the  pores.  In  cold  weather, 
colder  water  should  be  used  than  in  moderate  weather. 
Indeed,  the  water  should  be  about  the  temperature  of 
the  elements.  But  in  freezing  weather  the  body  should 
be  merely  immersed,  and  almost  immediately  extri- 
cated, and  the  washing  process  should  not  occupy  more 
than  a  moment  of  time.  In  cold  weather,  twice  per 
week  is  sufficient ;  and  in  warm  weather,  every  alter- 
nate day  is  abundant,  in  ordinary  cases.  Too  frequent 
washings  and  bathings,  and  of  too  long  continuance,  to 
persons  in  ordinary  health,  is  deleterious,  as  it  destroys 
too  much  of  the  natural  oil  of  the  skin,  which  the 
Creator  has  supplied  to  give  it  a  soft  and  silky  texture. 
The  system  of  hydropathy  has  great  force,  if  rightly 
managed.  In  cases  of  heat,  or  inflammation,  warm 
water  should  be  applied,  and  the  reaction  would  be 
coolness  ;  and  in  cases  of  cold  feet,  they  should  be 
washed  on  going  to  bed  each  night  in  cold  water,  till 
they  remain  continually  warm.  The  coldest  water 
will  extract  the  frost  from  a  frozen  hand,  whereas  if  it 
were  immersed  in  the  warmest  water  that  could  be 
borne,  it  would  perhaps  destroy  it,  so  as  to  render  even 
amputation  necessary.  But  if  the  hand  be  burned  or 
scalded,  immersing  it  in  the  warmest  water  that  can  b« 


LECTURE    V.  98 

borne,  or  holding  it  to  the  fire,  will  produce  a  salutary 
result,  even  though  ike  remedy  be  a  harsh  one.  On 
this  principle,  you  see  the  inconsistency  of  cold  water 
applications,  and  even  of  ice  to  the  head  in  brain 
fevers,  or  where  there  is  a  severe  inflammation  of  the 
brain,  occasioned  by  a  .fall,  a  blow,  or  any  concussion. 

I  now  turn  the  attention  of  ladies  and  gentlemen  to 
eating,  drinking,  and  wearing  apparel,  and  will  en- 
deavor, in  few  words  as  possible,  to  show  the  bearing 
of  these  upon  the  human  constitution. 

Our  bodies  are  made  up  of  the  elements,  and,  as  I 
have  already  observed,  are  an  epitome  of  the  universe. 
In  order  to  insure  perfect  health,  we  should  subsist  en- 
tirely upon  the  provisions,  whether  vegetable  or  animal, 
that  are  produced  in  that  part  of  the  earth  where  we 
were  born  and  reared,  or  in  that  part  of  the  earth  where 
we  intend  to  spend  our  days.  And,  moreover,  our 
wearing  appai  el  should  also  be  the  product  of  the  same 
section  where  we  live.  Cotton  should  never  be  worn 
where  the  snow  covers  the  earth,  or  in  that  part  of  the 
earth's  latitude  where  it  cannot  be  raised.  Hemp,  flax, 
cotton,  wool,  and  silk  may  be  worn  with  perfect  safety 
in  those  latitudes  of  the  earth's  surface  where  they  can 
be  cultivated.  The  Creator's  works  are  perfect.  He 
has  established  complete  harmony  between  the  vegeta- 
bles, and  the  soil  where  they  grow,  and  the  climate  that 
fostered  their  existence  and  warmed  them  into  life. 
He,  tl/erefore,  who  eats  the  food  belonging  to  his  owd 


94  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

latitude,  who  drinks  the  water  that  gushes  from  his 
Dwn  springs,  and  wears  the  clothing  produced  in  his 
own  climate,  establishes  a  perfect  harmony  and  apti 
tude  between  his  own  body  and  the  surrounding  ele- 
ments. I  mean  that  he  does  this  in  case  he  uses  these 
blessings  temperately,  as  not  abusing  them. 

The  truth  of  this  will  appear  perfectly  clear,  if  we 
have  a  correct  understanding  of  inuring  ourselves  to 
another  climate,  entirely  different  from  the  one  to  which 
we  have  been  accustomed.  I  will  therefore  call  your 
attention   to    the   philosophy    of    becoming   accit- 

HATED. 

The  mineral  kingdom  lays  a  foundation  for  the  vege 
table,  and  the  vegetable  for  the  animal  kingdom.  It  is 
therefore  perfectly  clear  that  no  animals  could  have 
had  an  existence  till  there  were  vegetables,  because  an 
animal  is  but  a  vegetable  of  the  second  growth.  Each 
latitude  of  the  globe  has  vegetables  peculiar  to  itself, 
and  these  make  up  all  the  varieties  that  exist  on  earth. 
But  the  same  species  of  vegetables  differ  from  each 
other  in  different  latitudes,  as  far  as  the  climates  and 
elements  or  soils  may  differ  from  each  other.  An 
apple,  pear,  or  peach,  grown  in  forty  degrees  north 
latitude,  differs  considerably  from  the  same  fruit  raise*! 
in  thirty  degrees  north  latitude.  This  is  certain,  be- 
cause it  is  the  result  of  surrounding  elements  that  gave 
it  being.  The  same  may  be  said  of  corn,  wheat,  and 
rye  in  different  latitudes.     And  as  animals   are  but 


LECTURE    T.  95 

vegetables  of  the  second  growth,  hence  the  same  ani- 
mals vary  in  accordance  with  their  latitudes.  The 
beef,  mutton,  and  pork,  raised  in  thirty  and  forty  de- 
grees north  latitude,  are  therefore  unlike,  each  being 
adapted  to  its  own  climate  and  the  vegetables  that  sus- 
tained them. 

I  have  already  stated,  that  our  bodies  are  made  of 
the  water,  the  vegetables,  and  animals  upon  which  we 
subsist,  and  arc  adapted  to  the  climate  and  surrounding 
elements  where  we  were  born  and  reared.  Our  bodies 
are  continually  wasting  away,  and  by  food  and  drink 
are  continually  repaired.  We  lose,  the  fleshy  particles 
of  our  bodies  about  once  a  year,  and  the  bones  in  about 
seven  years.  Hence  in  seven  years  we  have  possessed 
seven  bodies  of  flesh  and  blood,  and  one  frame  of  bones. 
We  have  not  now,  in  all  probability,  a  particle  of  flesh 
and  bones  we  had  seven  years  ago.  The  water,  we 
have  drank,  and  the  flesh  and  vegetables  we  have  eaten, 
having  made  up  the  component  parts  of  our  bodies, 
cause  us  to  hanker  and  long  for  the  same  substances  of 
which  our  bodies  are  composed.  Like  substance  in  us 
calls  for  like  substance  without,  to  supply  the  waste 
of  the  system.     This  is  habitude. 

Now  suppose  we  suddenly  change  our  climate  from 
forty  to  thirty  degrees  north  latitude.  The  air,  watert 
fruits,  vegetables,  and  flesh  all  differ.  The  old  parti- 
cles composing  our  bodies,  and  brought  from  forty  de- 
grees north  latitude,  fly  off  as  usual.     This  produces 


96  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Lunger  and  thirst,  and  we  supply  our  wants  by  the 
water  and  food  of  thirty  degrees  north  latitude,  and 
continue  for  weeks  to  do  so.  This  creates  a  coLflict 
between  the  old  substances  of  our  bodies  and  the  new 
flesh  and  blood  continually  forming,  throws  the  electro- 
nervous  force  out  of  balance,  and  engenders  disease. 
If  we  live  and  struggle  on,  for  about  seven  years,  we 
become  acclimated,  because  our  old  flesh  and  bones, 
formed  by  the  substances  of  one  latitude,  have  disap- 
peared, and  our  entire  systems  are  made  up  of  the 
substances  of  another  latitude.  Hence  we  see  the 
danger  of  changing,  our  positions  on  the  globe  to  any 
great  extent,  which  may,  however,  in  some  instances, 
prove  beneficial  to  the  constitution.  Such  is  the  phi- 
losophy of  being  acclimated. 

In  view  of  what  I  have  now  brought  forward,  it  will 
be  clearly  perceived,  by  ladies  and  gentlemen,  that  we 
should  confine  ourselves  to  the  water,  fruits,  grains, 
and  animal  food,  and  even  to  the  medicines  produced 
in  that  climate  where  we  live,  and  reject  those  of  dis- 
tant latitudes  and  foreign  climates.  To  drink  tea  and 
coffee,  and  eat  oranges,  lemons,  citrons,  pineapples, 
r.nd  the  productions  of  all  parts  of  the  globe,  is  like 
changing,  in  some  measure,  our  climate  for  another,  ot 
for  several  others,  and  thus  keeping  up  a  continual 
conflict  between  the  elementary  particles  that  are  con- 
stantly entering  the  composition  of  our  bodies.  There 
is  an  incessant  war  waged  between  the  climate  where 


LECTURE    V.  97 

we  live,  and  the  productions  of  another  region,  and 
those  of  our  own.  To  all  this,  add  the  clc  thing  of 
other  distant  climes  to  he  worn  hy  us,  and  who  can 
marvel  that  almost  every  man,  woman,  and  child  is 
complaining  of  some  indisposition,  or  else  groaning 
under  disease  and  pain  ?  Abandon  luxuries  of  foreign 
growth ;  avoid  dissipation ;  keep  your  bodies  clean ; 
your  minds  calm  and  contented ;  eat  the  productions  of 
your  own  climate  ;  drink  the  clear  crystal  water  of  your 
own  spring  ;  wear  the  flax,  hemp,  cotton,  or  wool  that  is 
raised  in  your  own  latitude  ;  take  all  the  rest  of  sleep 
that  your  nature  and  temperament  require ;  have  your 
hours  of  study,  labor,  exercise,  and  serious  contempla- 
tion all  regulated ;  and  be  temperate  in  all  things. 
Follow  these  directions,  and  no  doctor  will  enter  your 
house.  If  you  must  have  tea,  use  sage,  pennyroyal, 
and  hemlock.  These  are  wholesome,  and  habit  will 
transform  them  into  luxuries  far  transcending  the 
nerve-destroying  plant  of  China. 

It  is  impossible  that  the  Creator  could  have  erred  in 
adapting  all  the  fruits,  grains,  -and  other  vegetable  sub- 
stances to  each  latitude  of  the  earth,  so  that  man  and 
other  creatures  can  subsist  there  in  health,  peace,  and 
happiness.  And  man  no  more  requires  the  products 
of  other  climes  to  increase  these  blessings,  than  the 
animals  around  him,  who  find  not  only  their  food 
and  drink,  but  even  their  medicines  produced  by  the 
•oil  on  which  they  tread,  Avithout  resorting  to  foreign 
5 


98  ELECTRICAL  PSYCHOLOGY. 

importations.  At  the  novelty  of  these  ideas  you  maj 
smile,  but  they  are  based  upon  immutable  truth,  and 
established,  constituted,  and  sustained  by  Him  whc 
founded  the  pillars  of  strength  and  beauty  that  sup- 
port the  fabric  of  nature,  and  must  stand  till  they 
shall  fdl. 


LECTUBE    Vt.  §9 


LECTURE    VI. 

LAr/iss  and  Gentlemen: 

The  nature  and  importance  of  Electrical  Psych  >lo- 
gy  I  have  clearly  and  philosophically  argued,  in  a  free, 
unchained,  and  fearless  expression  of  my  thoughts. 
For  this,  even  if  I  have  erred,  I  am  entitled  to  your 
approbation,  rather  than  your  condemnation.  For 
what  is  man,  when  he  makes  himself  a  cowering, 
cringing  slave  to  the  opinions  of  others,  and  tamely 
bows  to  win  the  momentary  smiles  of  popular  applause 
from  the  passing  crowd  %  What  I  have  said  in  relation 
to  this  science,  has  been  the  sincere  breathings  of  my 
own  convictions.  I  have,  therefore,  reasoned  fearless 
of  consequences  ;  and  if  I  have  in  so  doing  met  your 
approbation,  I  rejoice  at  it ;  if  I  have  met  your  disap- 
probation, I  regret  it — yet  you  will  pardon  me  when  I 
say  that  I  cannot  alter  my  course  and  accommodate 
myself  to  the  opinions  of  others,  however  elevated  may 
be  their  stations.  Fully  sensible  of  the  duty  I  owe  to 
my  fellow-men,  and  to  the  Supreme  Ruler  of  the  uni- 
verse, and  when  I  discharge  this  to  the  best  of  my  ability, 
T  little  earn  what  men  may  think  or  even  say  of  moa 


100  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

If,  however,  what  I  have  argued  of  the  human  system 
— the  electro-nervous  force — the  connecting  link  be- 
tween mind  and  matter — the  circulation  of  the  blood — 
the  philosophy  of  disease — the  rationale  of  its  cure — 
the  laws  of  health,  and  the  philosophy  of  being  accli- 
mated— if  these  excite  your  surprise,  ladies  and 'gen- 
tlemen may  then  prepare  themselves  for  still  greater 
surprise  in  the  arguments  now  to  be  offered  on  spirit, 
and  the  creation  and  government  of  the  universe. 
Being  myself  perfectly  unshackled  and  free,  I  shall 
exert  myself  in  that  freedom  while  pursuing  this  de- 
partment of  my  subject. 

In  my  introductory  remarks  in  my  third  Lecture,  1 
took  a  general  survey  of  the  powers  and  operations  of 
electricity  throughout  the  empire  of  nature.  We  saw 
its  secret  workings,  and  its  alternately  sublime  or 
awful  manifestations.  But  all  these  operations  and 
convulsions,  however  magnificently  grand,  will  appear 
but  as  the  drop  of  the  bucket  to  the  fountain,  when 
compared  with  the  Unseen  Power  that  stirs  the  uni- 
verse. Electricity,  so  swift  in  its  movement  as  to  rival 
the  lightning  glance  of  thought,  and  so  inconceivably 
awful  in  its  rending  force  as  to  convulse  the  globe  to  ita 
centre,  is  yet  as  nothing,  and  less  than  nothing,  com- 
pared with  that  Eternal  One  who  arms  it  with  power — 
who  gives  it  all  its  expansive  force,  and  who  makes  it 
the  messenger  of  his  attributes  to  both  nature  and  man.. 
With  his  finger  he  has  wr'tten  the  truth  of  this  science 


LECTURE    VI.  101 

en  every  object  throughout  the  realms  of  nature.  It 
is  written  in  the  beams  of  the  mid-day  sun — in  the 
descending  rains  and  gentle  dews.  It  is  written  in  the 
flowery  field  and  shady  grove.  It  is  written  in  stars 
on  the  scroll  of  night.  It  is  written  in  lightning  or. 
the  bosom  of  the  dark  cloud.  It  is  written  deep  in 
sympathy  on  the  soul,  and  controls  the  most  powerful 
affections  and  stormy  passions  of  the  human  heart. 

In  this  Lecture  I  will  turn  your  attention  to  spirit. 
or  mind — by  which  I  mean  one  and  the  same  thing — 
and  will  endeavor  to  prove  the  existence  of  an  Infinite 
Spirit. 

Though  the  powers  of  mind  and  its  complicated 
operations  can  be  seen,  felt,  and  in  a  good  degree  com- 
prehended, yet,  after  all,  we  know  but  little  of  mind  as 
it  regards  its  properties,  or  substance.  Some  suppose 
it  to  be  absolutely  and  positively  immaterial,  because 
it  is  purely  spirit.  Others  believe  mind  to  be  the  re- 
sult of  organism,  and  contend  that  it  cannot  exist  with- 
out a  brain,  which  is  the  grand  organ  that  secretes 
thought,  even  as  the  liver  secretes  its  bile,  or  the  stom- 
ach its  gastric  juice  !  The  former  of  these  supposi- 
tions is  the  one  generally  adopted  by  the  Christian 
community  who  believe  spirit  to  be  an  immateriality. 
The  latter  supposition  is  embraced  by  those  Christians 
who  wholly  rely  upon  the  resurrection  of  the  body  for 
the  future  existence  of  the  spirit.  They  are  called 
Materialists,  because  they  make  out  the  spirit  to  be  no 


L02  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

substance  at  all,  but  merely  the  result  cf  organized 
matter.  Of  this  faith  was  the  celebrated  Dr.  Priestly. 
This  latter  position  is  also  adopted  by  the  Atheists, 
who  contend  that  spirit  cannot  exist  independent  of  an 
organized  brain  ;  and  as  they  reject  the  Christian  hope 
of  the  resurrection,  so  they  contend  that  mind  is  extin- 
guished in  the  night  of  the  grave,  and  sleeps  in  non- 
entity, to  wake  no  more.  Hence  the  idea  of  a  God, 
as  an  intelligent  Spirit,  they  regard  as  a  freak  of  fancy 
— a  mere  chimera  of  the  human  brain.  Both  of  these 
positions  as  it  regards  spirit  I  reject,  and  will  give  my 
reasons  for  doing  so. 

T  reject  the  immateriality  of  the  spirit,  because 
that  which  is  positively  and  absolutely  immaterial 
cannot  of  course  possess  either  length,  breadth,  thick- 
ness, nor  occup}T  any  space.  Indeed,  it  cannot,  in  this 
case,  possess  any  form  ;  and  that  which  possesses  no 
form,  cannot,  in  the  nature  of  things,  occupy  any  space. 
And  to  talk  of.  a  thing  having  an  existence,  which,  at 
the  same  time,  has  no  form,  nor  occupies  space,  is  the 
most  consummate  nonsense.  Hence  an  immateriality 
is  a  nonentity — a  blank  nothing.  On  the  other  hand, 
if  mind  is  merely  the  result  of  organism,  and  if  it  can- 
not exist  independent  of  an  organized  brain,  then  who 
made  the  first  brain  ?  Did  it  not  require  an  intelligent 
spirit  to  organize  its  several  parts,  and  adapt  the  eye 
to  light,  the  ear  to  sound,  and  make  these  organs  the 
inlets  of  sensation  to   the  inhabitant  in  that  brain  1 


LECTURE    TI.  103 

Surety  the  brain  did  not  make  itself,  for  this  would 
only  be  saying,  that  the  brain  acted  before  it  existed  ! 

Having  given  my  reasons  for  rejecting  both  these 
ideas  of  mind,  I  am  now  ready  to  introduce  the  ques- 
tion, What  is  mind  1  I  answer,  it  is  a  substance — an 
element — as  really  so  as  air  or  water,  but  differs  mate- 
rially from  all  inert  substances  in  being.  I  regard 
mind  as  living  and  embodied  form-  -as  that  incompre- 
hensible element  whose  nature  it  is  to  possess  life  and 
motion,  as  much  so  as  it  is  the  nature  of  other  sub- 
stances to  possess  inertia.  Hence,  mind  is,  in  these 
two  respects — namely,  life  and  motion — directly  the 
opposite  of  dead  matter. 

In  the  first  place  I  will  start  with  the  assertion  that 
there  must  be  in  the  universe  an  Infinite  Mind.  It  is 
impossible,  in  the  very  nature  and  constitution  of 
things,  that  an  absolute  perfection  of  substances  can 
be  philosophically  maintained  without  this  admission. 
For  the  truth  of  this  position  I  rely  upon  motion.  By 
motion,  then,  I  am  to  prove  the  existence  of  an  Eter- 
nal Mind. 

In  the  first  place  permit  me  to  remark,  that  inher- 
ent motion  is  not  an  attribute  common  to  all  sub- 
stances in  nature.  This  globe,  as  a  body,  is  moved 
by  the  positive  and  negative  forces  of  electrical  action-. 
And  all  the  operations  of  nature  in  the  earth  and  ele- 
ments are  carried  on  by  the  same  power.  Whether  it 
he  crystalizations,  or  petrifactions,  the  growth  of  vege- 


104  ELECTRICAL    PSICHOi.OGY. 

tation,  or  its  decomposition — motions  and  changes  in 
air  and  water — or  the  crumbling  particles  of  the  moun- 
tain rock — all  the  motions,  visible  and  invisible,  that 
transpire  in  the  mineral  and  vegetable  kingdoms,  and 
in  all  their  multifarious  operations,  are  produced  by 
electricity,  which  is  the  universal  agent  appointed  to 
keep  up  the  order  and  harmony  of  the  universe.  And 
yet  it  is  certain  that  electricity  does  not  possess  in- 
herent motion  as  its  attribute.  Motion  belongs  to  one 
substance  only,  and  that  is  mind. 

There  is  certainly  as  much  order  in  the  universe  as 
there  is  in  the  human  body.  Let  us,  then,  look  truth 
calmly  in  the  face.  Each  organ  of  the  body  performs 
but  one  function.  The  eye  sees — the  ear  hears — the 
olfactories  smell — the  glands  taste — the  heart  throbs 
to  regulate  the  blood — the  hands  handle — the  feet 
walk,  and  the  liver  secretes  its  bile.  The  eye  never 
hears,  and  the  ear  never  sees.  So  there  is  but  one 
substance  in  nature  whose  attribute  is  inherent  mo- 
tion, and  that  is  mind.  Not  one  single  part  of  the 
human  body  possesses  independent  motion.  Electri- 
city is  there  also  the  grand  agent  to  move  the  limbs 
and  vitals,  and  the  living  mind  is  the  only  moving 
power. 

The  point  upon  which  1  am  now  entering  is  one  of 
most  deep  and  thrilling  interest.  It  is  no  less  than  tc 
prove  the  existence  of  an  Eternal  Mind  from  motion 
ynd  the  absolute  perfection  of  the  chain  of  elementary 


LECTURE    VI.  105 

substances.  But  while  accomplishing  this,  I  must  call 
to  my  aid  the  relative  subtilties  of  different  portions  of 
matter  with  which  we  are  surrounded.  Let  us,  for  a 
moment,  turn  our  attention  to  a  few  of  the  most  obvi- 
ous substances  in  nature,  and  then  glance  at  her  abso- 
lute perfection  as  a  whole.  Let  us  carefully  notice 
the  gradation  these  substances  occupy  toward  each 
other  in  their  relation  to  motion,  and  then  the  intrin- 
sic beauty  of  the  subject  will  appear.  I  will  begin  at 
the  heaviest  matter  that  may  first  suggest  itself  to  my 
mind,  and  leisurely  pass  on,  rising  higher  and  still 
higher,  through  its  various  grades,  up  to  that  which  is 
more  and  more  rarefied,  subtile,  and  light,  till  we  ar- 
rive at  that  which  must  necessarily  possess  inherent 
motion,  and  therefore  living  power. 

The  heaviest  of  gross  substances  in  existence  is  the 
most  difficult  to  move,  and  hence  must  be  at  the  great- 
est possible  distance  from  motion.  Though  there  are 
several  solid  substances  heavier  than  lead,  yet  I  choose 
to  begin  at  this,  as  the  idea  I  wish  to  convey  is  all  that 
is  worthy  of  your  consideration  in  the  present  argu- 
ment. Lead,  then,  on  account  of  the  density  of  its 
particles,  is  difficult  to  move.  Were  it  the  heaviest 
substance  in  nature,  it  would  take  its  position  farther 
distant  from  motion  than  any  other  substance.  Rock 
being  more  easily  moved  than  lead,  takes  its  relative 
position  nearer  to  motion.  In  like  manner  earth  ia 
more  easily  moved  than  rock.  Water  is  more  easily 
5* 


106  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

movid  than  earth.  Air  is  more  easily  moved  thac 
Water.  The  gaseous  fluids  are  more  easily  moved  than 
air,  and  electricity  is  more  easily  moved  than  the  gase- 
ous fluids. 

It  will  now  be  perceived,  by  ladies  and  gentlemen, 
that  as  we  mount  the  rounds  of  the  ladder  in  the  mag- 
nificent scale  of  material  substances,  there  is  a  gradual 
approximation  toward  motion.  Each  substance  as  we 
rise,  being  more  rarefied  and  light  than  the  one  below 
it,  is  of  course  nearer  to  motion  than  its  grosser  neigh- 
bor. And  it  will  be  perceived  by  every  philosophic 
mind,  that  we  cannot  continually  approximate  motion 
without  at  last  reaching  motion,  or  that  substance  to 
which  motion  belongs. 

We  have  now  mounted  from  lead  up  to  electricity  ; 
and  though  as  we  rose  we  found  each  successive  sub- 
stance more  easily  moved  than  the  one  below  it,  still 
we  have  not  as  yet  found  a  single  material  that  pos- 
sesses inherent  motion  as  its  attribute.  Lead,  rock, 
earth,  and  water  are  moved  by  impulse.  Air  is  moved 
by  rarefication,  and  electricity  is  moved  by  the  positive 
and  negative  forces.  True  we  have  mounted  up,  as  be- 
fore remarked,  to  electricity,  but  even  this  cannot  move, 
unless  it  is  thrown  out  of  balance  in  relation  to  quan- 
tity as  to  its  positive  and  negative  forces.  In  such 
cases  it  flies,  equalizes  itself,  and  again  sinks  to  rest. 
I  am  fully  sensible  that  electricity  is  a  fluid  most  incon- 
ceivably subtile,  rarefied,  and  fine.     It  is  computed  tc 


LECTURE    VI.  107 

take  foui  million  particles  of  our  air  to  mate  a  speck 
B.s  large  as  the  smallest  visible  grain  of  sand,  and  yet 
electricity  is  more  than  seven  hundred  thousand  times 
finer  than  air  !  It  is  almost  unparticled  matter,  and  is 
not  only  invisible,  but,  sc  far  as  we  can  judge,  it  is  im- 
ponderable. It  cannot  be  seen — it  cannot  be  weighed  ! 
A  thousand  empty  Leyden  jars,  capable  of  containing 
a  gallon  each,  may  be  placed  upon  the  nicest  scale,  and 
most  accurately  weighed.  Then  let  these  be  filled  with 
electricity,  and,  so  far  as  human  sagacity  can  deter- 
mine, they  will  weigh  no  more.  Hence  to  our  percep- 
tion, a  thousand  gallons  weigh  nothing. 

As  electricity,  in  regard  to  motion,  stanu3  upon  the 
poise,  being  completely  balanced  by  the  positive  and 
negative  forces,  that  equalize  each  other,  so  it  is  easily 
perceived,  that  if  we  mount  one  step  higher,  we  must 
come  to  that  substance  whose  nature  it  is  to  more,  and 
the  result  of  that  motion  is  thought  and  power.  It  is 
mind.  Hence  it  will  be  distinctly  perceived,  m  view 
of  the  argument  now  offered,  that  we  cannot,  as  phi- 
losophers, stop  short  of  motion  in  the  highest  and  most 
sublime  substance  in  being.  This  conclusion,  as  the 
result  of  the  argument,  is  absolutely  and  positively 
irresistible.,  and  challenges  refutation. 

When  we  mount  up  in  our  contemplations  through 
the  various  grades  of  matter,  and  see  \i  cortinuaHy 
brightening  as  we  progress  onward  in  our  delightful 
career  of  rapture,  till  we  arrive   %t  that  sublimated 


10S  ELECTRICAL    PSYCEC  LOGY. 

substance  -which  can  neither  be  seen  nor  weighed— 
which  moves  with  a  velocity  of  twelve  million  miles 
per  minute,  and  can  travel  around  this  globe  in  the 
eighth  part  of  a  second,  we  are  struck  with  astonish- 
ment and  awe  !  But  as  this  is  not  the  last  link  in  the 
immeasurable  chain,  we  are  forced  to  proceed  onward 
till  we  arrive  at  the  finest,  most  sublime,  and  brilliant 
substance  in  being — a  substance  that  possesses  the 
attributes  of  inherent  or  self-motion  and  living  power, 
and  from  which  all  other  motion  and  power  throughout 
the  immeasurable  universe  are  derived.  This  -is  the 
Infinite  Mind,  and  possesses  embodied  form.  He  is 
a  living  being.  This  Infinite  Mind  comes  in  contact 
with  electricity,  gives  to  it  motion,  arms  it  with  power, 
and,  through  this  mighty  unseen  agent,  moves  the  uni- 
verse, and  carries  on  all  the  multifarious  operations  of 
nature,  whether  minute  or  grand.  Hence  there  is  not 
a  motion  that  transpires  amidst  the  immensity  of  his 
works,  from  rolling  globes  down  to  the  falling  leaf,  but 
what  originates  in  the  Eternal  Mind,  and  by  Him  is 
performed,  through  electricity  as  his  agent.  Mind  is, 
therefore,  the  absolute  perfection  of  all  substances  in 
being;  and  as  it  possesses  self-motion  as  its  grand 
attribute,  so  it  is,  in  this  respect,  exactly  the  reverse 
of  all  other  substances,  which  are,  of  themselves,  mo 
tionless.  Mind,  or  spirit,  is  above  all,  and  absolutely 
disposes  of  ani  controls  all.     Hence  mmd  and  its  agent, 


LECTURE    VI.  109 

electricity,  are  both  imponderable—  <jre  both  invisible, 
and  coeternal. 

As  the  Eternal  One  wraps  clouds  and  darkness 
round  about  him,  and  holds  back  the  face  of  his  throne, 
so  many  do  not  believe  in  his  existence,  because  he  is 
unseen,  while  all  the  visible  objects  of  creation  are  to 
them  so  many  realities.  But  the  very  position  here 
assumed  is  an  erroneous  one.  The  very  reverse  of 
this  is  true.  What  is  seen  is  not  the  reality,  but  is 
only  the  manifestation  of  the  unseen,  which  is  the  real 
ity.  Let  us  carefully  look  at  this  point.  There  is  an 
apple-tree  ;  it  is  plainly  seen  ;  but  is  that  tree  the  re- 
ality'? No;  but  it  is  the  result  of  an  invisible  cause, 
and  that  unseen  cause  is  the  reality.  But  what  was  it? 
I  reply,  that  it  was  not  even  the  seed,  but  the  life  of 
that  seed  was  the  reality ;  and  that  unseen  life  pos- 
sessed the  embodied  form  of  that  tree.  All  its  shapes 
and  colors  were  there.  By  coming  in  contact  with  the 
soil  and  moisture,  in  a  proper  temperature  of  climate, 
it  was  enabled  to  throw  out  its  own  invisible  and  living 
form.  First,  then,  the  life  ;  next  the  seed  in  which  it 
dwells ;  next  the  trunk  of  the  tree  appears.  Then  its 
limbs  and  branches — its  buds,  leaves,  blossoms,  and 
fruit  again  end  in  living  beauty.  It  began  in  life,  and 
in  seed  or  life  it  ended.  It  performed  an  electric  circle. 
The  tree,  then,  is  nothing  more  than  a  visible  outshoot 
—an  ultimate  of  an  invisible  substance,  ivhich  is  the 
reality. 


[10  ELECTRICAi     PSYCHOLOGY. 

All  the  powers  and  operations  of  nature  are  lodged 
in  the  unseen  and  finest  portions  of  matter — they  pass 
on  through  every  grade,  and  end  in  the  gross  and  heav- 
iest parts.  The  unseen  power  that  stirs  the  earth- 
quake and  convulses  the  globe  is  the  reality.  It 
passes  through  every  grade  of  matter,  and  ends  in  rend- 
ing the  solid  rocks  and  hurling  cities  in  the  vortex  of 
ruin.  The  power  that  moves  this  globe  in  its  orbit  at 
the  rate  of  sixty-eight  thousand  miles  per  hour,  is  an 
invisible  agent,  moved  by  omnipotent  Power — for  all 
operations  and  effects  begin  in  the  finest  substance  in 
being,  which  is  the  unseen  cause,  and  therefore  the 
reality.  Hence  it  is  the  same  in  nature  as  in  the  hu 
man  system,  as  I  have  already  shown  in  my  arguments 
on  the  philosophy  of  disease.  The  disease  begins  in 
the  finest  substance  of  the  body — in  the  electricity  of 
the  nerves— passes  on  to  the  blood  and  flesh,  and  ends 
in  the  bones.  There  is,  indeed,  but  one  common  mode 
of  operation  in  nature  and  in  man. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen — [  desire  now  to  turn  your 
attention  to  one  important  point  in  relation  to  mind, 
which  has  been  entirely  overlooked  by  philosophers.  I 
mean  its  involuntary  powers.  To  speak  of  the  invol- 
untary  powers  of  mind  wdl  certainly  produce  a  singu- 
lar impression  on  your  hearts ;  and  the  strangeness 
of  the  ilea  may,  perhaps,  fill  you  with  surprise.  But 
strange  as  it  may  appear,  it  is  nevertheless  true  that 
mind  possesses  the  two  grand  attributes  of  voluntary 


LECTURE    VI.  Ill 

end  ir.voluntary  power.  These  two  constitute  the 
mind  as  a  living  being  of  embodied  form.  If  mind 
make  use  of  electricity  as  its  agent,  then  it  must  pos- 
sess the  voluntary  and  involuntary  powers  to  meet  the 
positive  and  negative  forces  in  electricity.  If  this 
be  not  so,  then  the  Infinite  Mind  cannot  be  the  Cre- 
ator and  Governor  of  the  universe ;  because  it  is  by 
his  voluntary  power  that  he  creates  a  universe,  but  it 
is  by  his  involuntary  power  that  he  sustains  and  gov- 
erns it.  Each  of  these  powers,  from  a  philosophical 
necessity,  and  from  the  very  nature  of  his  being,  per- 
form their  own  peculiar  functions,  and  in  perfect  har- 
mony preside  over  their  own  respective  departments. 
It  is  the  peculiar  province  of  the  voluntary  power  of 
the  Infinite  Mind  to  plan,  arrange,  dispose,  and  create 
worlds  and  their  inhabitants,  and  it  is  the  peculiar 
province  of  his  involuntary  power  to  govern  and  con- 
trol these  worlds  and  their  inhabitants  through  the 
fixed  laws  of  nature.  Let  us  reason  this  point,  and  its 
consistency  will  appear. 

In  the  first  place-— if  the  voluntary  power  of  the  Cre- 
ator governed  the  universe,  then  no  possible  contingen- 
cies could  happen — and  nothing  once  commenced  could 
ever  perish  prematurely.  For  instance  :  if  God  deter- 
mined to  create  a  human  pair,  and  by  his  voluntary 
power  commenced  the  work,  they  could  not  perish 
when  his  work  was  but  partially  accomplished.  They 
are  destined  to  come  to  maturity,  invested  with  the 


112  ELECTRICAL  PSYCHOLOGY. 

true  lineaments  of  form — and  destined  to  gaze  apog 
each  other  as  perfect  specimens  of  living  beauty.  If 
not,  tlien  God  in  his  voluntary  and  absolute  determin- 
ations can  be  thwarted  and  disappointed. 

The  first  male  and  female,  at  least,  of  each  species, 
were  produced,  and  the  whole  living  chain  of  animated 
existence  was  placed  upon  this  globe  by  the  voluntary 
powers  of  God,  without  any  previous  parents  from 
whom  they  received"  their  being.  They  were  not  born, 
but  created,  for  there  is  philosophically  and  strictly  a 
very  wide  difference  between  being  created  and  born. 
The  former  we  call  miracle,  the  latter,  an  order  of 
nature.  To  produce  a  human  pair  without  a  previous 
father  and  mother,  is  not  in  the  order  or  power  of  na- 
ture, for  she  never  changes  her  mode  of  operation  in 
the  production  of  her  animated  existences. 

The  same  is  true  in  relation  to  the  vegetable  king- 
dom. The  whole  species  of  vegetable  life  was  pro- 
duced by  the  voluntary  powers  of  God.  In  the  order 
of  nature  there  never  was  an  acorn  but  what  grew  on 
an  oak  ;  and  there  never  was  an  oak  but  what  came 
from  an  acorn.  Geology  proves  that  there  has  been  a 
period  when  there  were  no  vegetables  or  animals  on 
this  globe.  Which  then  was  first — the  acorn  or  the 
oak  ?  If  you  reply  that  the  acorn  was  first,  then  there 
was  an  acorn  that  did  not  grow  on  an  oak.  If  you  say 
that  the  oak  was  first,  then  there  was  an  oak  that  did 
not  come  from  an  acorn.     Whence  then  is  the  starting 


LECTURE    VI.  118 

point  of  creation,  if  there  is  no  God  1  for  nature  cannot 
start  herself,  as  this  would  only  be  saying  that  she 
acted  before  she  existed.  Whether  the  Creator,  in 
the  first  place,  produced  by  his  voluntary  powers  the 
seeds  or  the  plants,  is  of  no  consequence  to  my  present 
purpose.  It  is  enough  to  sa}r,  that  they  were  brought 
into  existence  without  any  parent  stock,  and  in  per- 
forming this  work  there  could  be  no  uncertainty,  nor 
could  any  thing  perish  prematurely,  because  it  was 
under  the  voluntary  powers  of  the  Infinite  Mind. 

But  after  this  globe  was  created,  and  the  first  link 
of  every  species  of  vegetable  and  animal  life  was  moved 
into  existence  by  the  voluntary  powers  of  the  Creator, 
it  then  naturally  and  of  philosophical  necessity  passed 
from  the  control  of  the  voluntary  powers  to  the  control 
of  the  involuntary  powers  of  the  Infinite  Mind,  and  by 
them  to  be  governed  through  the  established  laws  of 
nature.  Here  then  casualties  may  naturally  arise,  but 
no  where  else  under  the  government  of  the  Supreme. 

This  view  of  mind  removes  the  many  difficulties  and 
perplexities  we  encounter,  when  we  contemplate  the 
unchangeable  character  of  the  Creator  in  the  govern- 
ment of  the  world.  Millions  of  our  race  are  continu- 
ally perishing  by  premature  birth  !  The  eye  was  most 
skillfully  organized  and  adapted  to  see  light,  but  saw  it 
not.  The  ear  was  formed — all  its  vocal  chambers 
were  arranged,  and  the  whole  adapted  to  the  reverber- 
ations of  sound,  but  it  never  heard.     It  had  hands, 


Hi  ELECTRICAL   PSYCHOLOGY. 

but  they  never  handled — feet,  but  they  never  walked— 
lungs,  but  they  never  breathed — and  a  mouth,  but  it 
never  spoke,  nor  tasted  food. 

Again — how  many  millions  of  our  race  die  under  ten 
years  of  age !  And  though  they  were  constituted,  and 
ripening  for  the  enjoyment  of  the  social  and  domestic 
affections,  and  the  multiplication  of  their  race,  yet  they 
were  prematurely  cut  off,  and  left  no  progeny  on  earth. 
Now  if  these  events  are  under  the  government  of  the 
voluntary  powers  of  the  Creator,  would  he  not,  I  ask. 
be  arrested  in  the  execution  of  his  voluntary  will,  and 
would  not  his  designs  fail  of  being  accomplished  1  The 
conclusion  is  absolutely  irresistible,  for  how  can  we 
judge  of  designs  only  as  we  see  the  adaptation  of 
means  to  ends  1  If  an  eye  and  ear  are  formed,  and 
adapted  to  light  and  sound,  does  not  this  prove  the 
will  and  design  of  God,  that  the  one  shall  see,  and  the 
other  sliall  hear?  It  does.  If  then  the  infant  pre- 
maturely dies  and  never  sees  an  object,  nor  hears  a 
sound,  are  not  those  two  organs  formed  in  vain,  and 
are  not  the  design  and  will  of  the  Creator  both  frus- 
trated 1  If  the  girl  that  died  at  ten  years  of  age,  and 
never  bore  nor  nursed  children — if  it  is  admitted  that 
she  did  not  answer  the  full  measure  and  end  of  her  ex- 
istence, in  common  with  her  sex,  is  not  then  the  will 
of  God  rendered  abortive,  and  do  not  his  designs  in 
this  case  fail]     It  must  be  so,  if  the  government  of 


LECTURE    VI.  116 

the  wDrld  is  under  the  voluntary  powers  of  the  Infinite 
Mind. 

That  this  part  of  my  subject  may  be  understood, 
and  its  consistency  clearly  seen,  I  will  endeavor  to  pre- 
sent it  before  you  in  a  very  plain  and  simple  form.  I 
will  take  for  illustration  the  human  mind  in  connection 
with  this  body.  We  have  two  distinct  brains — the 
cerebrum,  with  its  two  hemispheres  and  six  lobes,  com- 
mencing at  the  frontal  part  of  the  skull,  and  occupying 
the  greater  portion  of  the  cavity ;  and  the  cerebellum, 
which  occupies  the  back  portion  of  the  skull.  The 
spinal  marrow,  extending  through  the  vertebrae  to  the 
bottom  of  the  trunk,  is  but  the  continuation  of  these 
two  brains.  From  the  spinal  marrow  branch  out,  as  I 
have  before  stated,  thirty-two  pairs  of  nerves,  em* 
bracing  both  the  nerves  of  motion  and  those  of  sensa- 
tion. From  these  again  branch  out  others,  and  in 
thousands  of  ramifications  carry  out  the  full  power  of 
both  brains  into  every  part  of  the  system. 

The  cerebrum  is  the  great  fountain  of  the  voluntary 
nerves,  through  which  the  voluntary  powers  of  the 
mind  ever  act.  The  cerebellum  is  the  fountain  of  the 
involuntary  nerves,  through  which  the  involuntary 
powers  of  the  mind  ever  act.  Though  the  voluntary 
and  involuntary  nerves  from  these  two  brains  seem  to 
blend  in  the  spinal  marrow,  yet  they  preserve  their 
distinct  character,  even  to  their  final  termination  in 
the  system,  and  execute  the  functions  appertaining  to 


116  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY, 

their  own  office  in  producing  voluntary  and  involuntary 
motion.  Such  is  the  residence  of  the  living  mind; 
which  seems  to  hold  its  throne  in  the  medulla  ob- 
longata, at  the  fountain-head  of  the  voluntary  and  in- 
voluntary nerves.  From  thence  my  mind,  by  its  voli- 
tions, controls  all  the  voluntary  motions  of  my  body, 
through  the  cerebrum.  At  will  I  move  my  hands  in 
any  possible  direction  I  please  to  handle  substances, 
and  at  will  I  move  my  feet  to  walk. 

But  over  the  throbbings  of  my  heart,  the  ultimate 
heaving  of  my  lungs,  the  circulation  of  my  blood,  and 
the  digestion  of  food  by  the  stomach,  I  have  no  volun- 
tary control.  Awake,  asleep,  at  home,  abroadj  the 
heart  continues  its  motions,  and  the  functions  of  life 
are  executed,  whether  I  will  it  or  not.  These  then 
receive  their  motions  from  the  involuntary  powers  of 
my  mind,  acting  through  the  cerebellum.  That  these 
are  all  moved  by  mind  is  certain — because,  take  the 
mind  or  spirit  from  the  body,  and  all  motions,  whether 
voluntary  or  involuntary,  instantly  cease. 

I  will  now  make  an  application  of  this  to  the  Infi- 
nite Mind,  in  creating  and  governing  the  universe.  If, 
for  instance,  you  make  machinery  of  various  kinds, 
these  are  your  OA\n  creations,  for  they  are  made  by 
the  voluntary  powers  of  your  mind.  If  you  cultivate 
the  earth,  and  raise  grain  an'd  the  various  vegetables, 
to  sustain  your  existence,  these  again  are  your  own 
creations,  for  they  are   produced  by  your  voluntary 


LECTURE    VI.  117 

powers,  You  prepare  them,  by  various  processes,  fol 
your  use — you  cook  and  place  them  on  the  table.  You 
eat  them,  and  thus  far  they  are  under  your  voluntary 
action.  But  the  moment  they  are  eaten,  your  crea- 
tions are  finished,  and  the  whole,  naturally  and  of 
philosophical  necessity,  passes  beyond  your  direct  voli- 
tion, and  is  subjected  to  the  involuntary  powers  of 
your  mind.  These  now  take  charge  of  this  new  crea- 
tion, and  govern  it  in  all  its  involuntary  motions  and 
revolutions,  according  to  the  fixed  laws  of  the  organ- 
ized system. 

In  like  manner  the  voluntary  powers  of  Deity  are 
unchangeably  employed  in  planning,  arranging,  and 
creating  new  worlds,  and  systems  of  worlds,  and  peo- 
pling them  with  inhabitants.  When  the  whole  e-f  any 
such  system  is  finished,  and  all  its  laws  established  for 
the  rolling  of  worlds,  and  for  the  operations  of  the 
mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms,  the  whole 
naturally  passes,  according  to  the  principles  of  philo- 
sophical necessity,  from  the  action  and  control  of  his 
voluntary,  miraculous  power,  and  submits  itself  to  be 
governed  through  the  fixed  laws  of  the  universe,  by  the ' 
involuntary  powers  of  the  same  Infinite  Mind.  As 
the  bare  presence  of  the  human  mind  in  the  braiD 
causes  the  heart  to  throb  and  the  functions  of  life  to 
proceed,  even  when  that  mind  is  wrapped  in  sleep  so 
profound,  that  not  a  thought  is  stirring  in  its  voluntary 
department,  so  the  bare  presence  and  majesty  of  tha 


118  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Infinite  Mind,  even  if  he  should  not  exercise  a  thought, 
would  cause  all  worlds  to  roll  through  immensity,  and 
cause  all  the  operations  of  nature  in  the  mineral,  vege- 
table, and  animal  kingdoms  to  proceed  on  in  their 
ceaseless  changes  ;  for  these  are  under  the  control  oi 
the  involuntary  powers  ef  the  Deity,  acting  through 
the  laws  of  the  universe. 


LECTURE    VII.  119 


LECTURE    VII. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 

In  my  last  Lecture  the  momentous  question  was 
presented  for  our  consideration — Where  is  the  starting 
point  of  all  motion  and  power,  whether  voluntary  or 
involuntary,  in  both  nature  and  man  1  The  transcend- 
ent importance  of  this  question  clothes  it  with  the  elo- 
quence of  its  own  splendor.  I  have  humbly  endea- 
vored to  answer  it  by  showing  that  all  motion  and 
power  originate  in  mind.  And  surely  the  idea  that 
mind  possesses  the  attribute  of  innate  motion  and  liv- 
ing power,  is  both  majestic  and  sublime.  I  have 
shown  that  mind  has  two  grand  forces.  I  mean  its 
voluntary  and  involuntary  powers,  by  which  the  world 
was  created  and  is  governed.  I  have  proved  the  exist- 
ence of  the  Infinite  Mind  from,  motion  and  the  absolute 
perfection  of  material  existences.  I  have  shown  that 
mind  must  be  some  substance,  and  not  the  result  of 
organism,  nor  an  absolute  immateriality ',  which  is  but 
a  nonentity. 

I  am  well  aware  that  thought,  reason,  and  under- 
standing are  considered  to  be  mind,  and  that  these  ara 


120  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

immaterial.  But  they  are  not  mind,  as  I  ha  ye  clearlj 
proved  in  my  Lectures  on  the  Philosophy  of  Mesmer- 
ism. Thought  and  reason  are  but  the  results  of  mind. 
What  is  it  that  thinks  and  reasons  1  It  is  the  mind. 
Then  mind  is  something  distinct  from  these  mental 
operations,  -which  are  only  its  effects.  When  'the  vol- 
untary powers  of  the  mind  are  stilled  in  sleep,  reason 
and  thought  are  gone.  Hence  if  these  are  mind,  then 
the  mind  is  annihilated  in  sleep.  But  if  we  admit 
mind  to  be  a  substance,  a  living  and  spiritually  organ- 
ized being,  then  all  is  plain.  Sleep  stops  its  motion, 
and  thought  is  gone.  Remove  that  pressure,  and  re- 
lease the  mind,  and  instantly  it  resumes  its  inherent 
motion,  and  the  result  of  that  motion  is  thought  and 
power.  On  this  poi.it  I  add  no  more,  but  refer  you  to 
my  Lectures  on  Mesmerism  to  learn  my  views  moro 

fully- 

I  now  turn  your  attention  to  the  subject  of  creation. 
Entering  upon  this,  I  feel  the  incompetency  of  my  fee- 
ble  powers  to  do  it  justice.  Like  a  drop  to  an  ocean, 
or  an  atom  to  a  universe,  any  possible  representation 
of  the  intrinsic  grandeur  of  this  subject  must  fall  so 
far  short  of  its  reality,  as  to  render  any  attempt  at  an 
adequate  description  the  unpardonable  presumption  of 
impotent  folly.  Yet,  as  we  are  endowed  with  reason, 
and  as  the  inspiration  of  the  Almighty  hath  given  us 
understanding,  so  we  are  bound,  by  the  very  laws  of 
our  being,  to  extend   our   researches  to   the   utmost 


LECfURE    VII.  121 

verge  of  our  mental  capacity.  He  who  would  curb  the 
human  intellect  and  say  this  or  that  is  a  subject  with 
which  we  have  no  right  to  meddle,  and  into  which  we 
have  no  right  to  inquire,  is  not  only  recreant  to  duty 
as  an  intellectual  and  moral  being,  but  betrays  his  own 
ignorance,  and  proves  himself  a  scientific  bigot.  Give 
the  mind  full  scope  and  sea-room — let  it  feel  the  deep 
stirrings  of  its  own  powers,  and  soar,  if  it  can,  into 
the  light  of  eternity,  and  survey  the  very  throne  of 
God,  and  him  who  sitteth  thereon ;  and,  if  possible, 
let  it  scan  the  secret  energies  of  his  creating  fiat,  and 
even  examine  the  raw  material  out  of  which  worlds 
were  manufactured. 

It  is  the  most  commonly  received  opinion  in  the 
Christian  world,  that  God  made  all  things  out  of  no- 
thing. It  is  true  the  inspired  book  does  not  say,  or 
even  hint  this.  It  simply  says — "  In  the  beginning 
God' created  the  heavens  and  the  earth;"  but  it  does 
not  add  the  words — out  of  nothing.  It  is  absolutely 
and  philosophically  impossible,  in  the  very  nature  and 
constitution  of  things,  that  something  can  be  made  out 
of  nothing.  It  implies,  at  the  same  time,  a  contradic- 
tion in  terms.  We  cannot  form  even  a  notion  in  our 
imaginations  how  much  of  nothing  it  would  take  to 
make  the  least  imaginable  something.  I  am  speaking 
of  nothing  in  the  strictest  sense  of  the  word.  But 
using  the  word  nothing  in  its  common  acceptation,  we 
can  easily  perceive  how  all  things  could  have  been 
6 


122  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHuLCGY. 

mado  out  of  nothing.  When  all  visible  objects  are 
removed  from  a  room,  we  say  there  is  nothing  in  it — 
it  is  empty.  Yet  we  know  that  it  is  filled  with  air, 
because  we  continue  to  breathe.  But  if  the  air,  by  a 
force-pump,  were  removed  from  an  air-tight  room,  we 
might,  with  much  more  propriety,  say  there  is  nothing 
in  it;  yet  electricity  would  be  there.  If  solid  sub- 
stances were  therefore  made  out  of  air,  in  an  empty 
room,  we  could  say  that  they  were  made  out  of  nothing, 
for  the  room,  according  to  the  usual  mode  of  expression, 
had  nothing  in  it.  But  admitting  the  air  to  have  been 
extracted  from  the  room,  and  nothing  but  electricity 
left,  and  if  solid  substances  were  produced  from  this 
ethereal  and  invisible  fluid,  we  could  with  much  moro 
apparent  consistency  say,  that  they  were  made  out  of 
nothing.  In  this  sense,  I  grant  that  all  things  were 
made  out  of  nothing.  Paul  says — "  The  things'  that 
are  seen  were  not  made  of  things  that  do  appear.'' 
Here  he  plainly  states,  that  the  substances  seen  were 
made  of  invisible  substances,  or  such  as  did  not  ap- 
pear— for  by  things  he  only  means  substances. 

If,  however,  it  be  said,  to  create  must  mean  to  bring 
mto  existence  something  from  nothing,  I  have  only  to 
say,  that  this  is  not  so ;  for  it  says,  "  God  created  man 
out  of  the  dust  of  the  earth."  Here  he  created  him 
out  of  something — it  was  out  of  dust,  and  yet  it  was 
creation.  The  Hebrew  word  rendered  create,  more 
itiictly  means  to  gather  together  by  concretion,  or  to 


LECTURE    VII.  123 

form  by  consolidation — but  never  can  it  mean  to  bring 
something  into  existence  from  absolute!}*  and  positively 
nothing.  I  therefore  contend  that  all  things  were 
made  out  of  electricity,  which  is  not  only  an  invisible 
and  imponderable  substance,  but  is  primeval  and  eter- 
nal matter.  It  contains  the  invisible  and  impondera- 
ble properties  of  all  things  in  being.  That  this  is 
electricity  is  certain,  because  there  is  no  other  sub- 
stance with  which  the  Infinite  Mind  could  have  come 
in  direct  contact,  so  as  to  have  produced  by  his  creat- 
ing power  the  solid  and  visible  substances  that  compose 
the  globe.  It  is,  as  I  have  already  proved,  in  my  third 
and  fourth  Lectures,  philosophically  impossible  for  mind 
to  come  in  direct  contact  with  any  substance  in  nature 
except  electricity.  Hence  electricity  contains  the  ele- 
mentary principles  of  all  things  in  being,  and  contains 
them  in  their  original,  invisible,  and  imponderable 
state. 

There  must  be  something  eternal.  God,  duration, 
and  space  exist  of  philosophical  necessity,  and  that 
space  was  eternally  filled  with  primeval  matter.  When 
I  say  that  they  exist  of  necessity,  I  mean  that  the  con- 
trary of  space  and  duration  cannot  possibly  be  con- 
ceived. If  infinite  space  were  filled  with  an  infinite 
globe,  it  would  be  space  filled.  If  that  globe  were 
struck  out  of  existence,  it  would  be  space  empty.  Fill- 
ed or  empty,  it  would  still  be  space.  As  space  exists 
of  necessity,  it  is  absolutely  and  positively  eternal,  and 


4.24  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

hence  could  never  have  been  created  nor  changed.  The 
same  is  true  in  relation  to  duration.  Duration  must 
have  rolled  on,  even  if  there  had  been  no  revolutions 
of  suns  and  worlds  to  mark  its  periods.  The  contrary 
cannot  possibly  be  conceived.  Hence  duration  and 
space  both  exist  of  philosophical  necessity,  and  are  ab- 
solutely eternal.  Endless  duration  is  the  age  of  Jeho- 
vah, and  space  is  the  empire  in  which  he  dwells  and 
reigns.  This  space  was  eternally  filled  with  mind  and 
invisible  matter  in  its  original  state.  They  both  exist 
of  philosophical  necessity. 

Hence  matter  is  eternal,  because  if  there  ever  had 
been  a  period  when  there  was  nothing  in  existence  as  it 
regards  matter,  then  nothing  would  now  have  been,  for 
nothing  cannot  create  itself  into  something.  The  same 
is  true  in  relation  to  mind.  If  there  ever  had  been  a 
period  when  there  was  no  mind  in  existence,  then  no 
mind  could  now  have  been,  for  mind  could  not  have 
created  itself,  as  this  would  be  admitting  mind  to  have 
acted  before  it  existed.  Hence  mind  and  primeval 
matter  are  both  coexistent  and  coeternal.  Indeed,  the 
one  could  not  exist  without  the  other,  because  that 
electricity,  which  is  original  and  eternal  matter,  is  the 
body  of  God.  All  other  bodies  are  therefore  emana- 
tions from  his  body,  and  all  other  spirits  are  emana- 
tions from  his  spirit.  Hence  all  things  are  of  God. 
He  has  poured  himself  throughout  all  his  works.  Ho 
has  poured  spirit  from  spirit's  awful  fountain,  and  kin- 


LECTURE    VII-  125 

.He?i  into  existence  a  world  of  rational       jh  this  prin 
cipie  it  win  oe  seen,  mat  the  Eternai  Mind  is  not  ab 
Bolutely  omnipresent,  while  his  electrical  body  is,  be 
cause  it  pervades  immensity  of  space.     Mind  must  be 
enthroned,  and  not  diffused  over  the  whole  body.     And 
as  the  mind  of  Jehovah  actuates  his  body,  so  he  pro- 
duces   impressions    throughout    the    boundlessness    of 
space,  and  makes  himself  instantly  felt  throughout  the 
immensity  of  his  works,  even  as  the  human  mind,  which 
is  located  in  the  brain,  still  makes  its  presence  felt 
throughout  the  body,  even  to  every  possible  extremity, 
and  produces  the  impressions  of  its  existence  on  others. 

Mind  or  spirit  is  of  itself  embodied  and  living  form. 
It  is  spiritual  organism  in  absolute  perfection,  and  from 
mind  itself  all  form  and  beauty  emanate.  The  body 
of  man  is  but  an  outshoot  or  manifestation  of  his  mind. 
If  I  may  be  indulged  the  expression,  it  is  the  ultimate 
of  his  mind.  Hence  every  creature  in  existence  has  a 
body  which  is  the  shape  of  its  mind,  admitting  that  the 
physical  laws  of  the  system  were  not  interrupted  in 
producing  the  natural  form  of  the  body  from  mind. 
The  serpent  is  all  length — is  all  concentration,  and  no 
wonder  that  he  can  charm  the  bird  and  other  creatures 
around  him.  What  a  singular  mind  the  lobster  must 
have,  for  he  has  a  singular  body  ! 

We  touch  the  finger  to  any  substance,  and  in  the  fin- 
ger we  appear  to  feel  it.  But  this  is  not  so,  because 
all  feeling  is  in  the  mind,     If  wo  amputate  the  arm  cr 


126  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

leg,  ye ;  the  fingers  and  toes  as  usual  can  "be  felt-  For 
instance,  we  move  a  finger  or  wield  the  arm.  How  is 
/jliis  done  1  I  answer  this  question  by  saying,  that  the 
mind  has  its  spiritual  fingers,  arms,  limbs,  and  all  its 
lineaments  of  form  corresponding  to  those  of  the  body. 
The  mind  holds  its  throne  in  the  brain,  and  possessing 
in  itself  the  power  of  feeling  and  motion,  it  merely  stirs 
its  spiritual  fingers,  or  wields  its  spiritual  arm,  and 
through  the  electric  action  of  the  nerves,  which  are 
laid,  like  so  many  telegraphic  wires,  between  the  two, 
the  natural  finger  and  the  natural  arm  are  compelled  to 
make  an  exactly  correspondent  motion.  This  solves 
the  mystery  why  the  man  who  has  his  arm  amputated, 
even  up  to  the  shoulder,  yet  feels  his  arm  and  his  fin- 
gers as  long  as  he  lives,  and  often  feels  in  them  an  itch- 
ing sensation,  or  even  pain,  and  that,  too,  at  the  same 
distance  from  his  body  which  the  fingers  and  arm  occu- 
pied before  amputation  took  place.  All  operations, 
convulsions,  and  motions  begin  in  the  unseen  substance 
of  the  body,  and  end  in  its  gross  and  solid  parts. 
These  are  last  moved,  and  last  affected.  This  is  not 
only  so  in  muscular  motion,  but  throughout  nature. 

Having  the  great  principles  of  mind  and  matter  be- 
fore us,  I  will  now  proceed  to  notice  the  creation  of 
worlds.  1  have  already  remarked,  that  all  the  chemi- 
cal properties  of  all  substances  in  existence,  belonging 
bo  our  globe  and  its  surro  Hiding  elements,  were  iwkIc 
r-ut  of  electricity.     Hence  electricity  contains  al)   tha 


LECTURE  VII.  127 

elementary  principles  of  all  things  in  being.  The  an- 
cients supposed  there  to  be  but  four  elements — namely, 
earthy  air,  fire,  and  water.  It  so  happens,  however, 
that  heat  is  no  element  at  all,  any  more  than  cold.  It 
is  merely  an  effect  of  substances  in  motion,  produced 
by  their  friction.  Though  the  ancients  supposed  there 
to  be  but  four  elements,  yet  as  the  science  of  chemistry 
advances  onward  toward  perfection,  more  elements  are 
detected.  I  believe  that  about  forty  have  been  already 
discovered,  yet  wc  have  no  reason  to  believe  that  even 
these  are  all.  I  will  suppose,  however,  that  there  are 
one  hundred  elements  belonging  to  this  globe.  Then 
chere  are  one  hundred  elements  in  electricity,  out  of 
which  this  globe  was  created.  We  will  step  back  in 
our  imaginations  to  that  period  when  this  globe,  as 
such,  had  no  existence.  For  the  sake  of  perspicuity, 
we  will  suppose  one  hundred  cords  to  be  fastened  on 
those  one  hundred  elements  in  electricity.  Please  to 
bear  this  fact  in  mind. 

Now,  as  the  Eternal  Mind  can  come  in  direct  con- 
tact with  electricity  only,  so  he  exerted  his  voluntary 
powers  that  constitute  his  creative  energy,  and  con- 
densed those  one  hundred  elements  that  constitute 
electricity,  down  to  a  more  gross  and  dense  state,  each 
element  sliding  down  its  own  cord  in  its  progress  toward 
creation.  Though  mind  can  directly  touch  nothing  but 
electricity,  yet  electricity,  as  the  universal  agent  unde? 
Vteity,  can  touch  all  substances  in  being.     The  Creator 


128  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY 

again  ac;s,  through  another  volume  of  electricity  apQ9 
those  one  hundred  partially  condensed  elements,  and 
moves  them  down  a  grade  farther  onward  toward  their 
ultimate,  or  created  state.  And  thus  the  work  pro- 
gresses ;  wave  successively  following  wave  down  its 
own  cord,  till  they  all  become  air.  ,  Hence  air  contains 
the  one  hundred  elements ;  and  all  the  chemical  prop- 
erties of  all  things  in  being  are  involved  in  it.  And 
so  the  work  of  creation  progresses,  under  the  never 
^easing  action  of  the  Infinite  Mind,  from  whom  all  mo- 
tion and  power  emanate,  till  those  one  hundred  elements 
are  made  into  water.  Hence  water  contains  all  the 
chemical  properties  of  all  things  in  being.  Matter, 
from  its  invisible  electric  state,  has  now  become  visible 
in  the  crystal,  volatile,  and  colorless  state  called  water. 
The  whole  one  hundred  elements  are  here  in  solution ; 
and  from  water,  which  is  the  universal  solvent  of  na- 
ture, earth,  and  all  mineral  and  crystalized  substances 
were  made.  Boyle  has  proved,  that  by  transmutation, 
as  he  terms  it,  nature  turns  water  into  earth ;  and 
Bishop  Watson,  in  his  "  Chemical  Essays,"  admits 
the  same,  and  says,  "  it  has  never  been  disproved  by 
any  writer."  Boyle  should  not  have  said  that  nature, 
by  transmutation,  does  this ;  but  that  the  Creator, 
by  his  own  power  of  inherent  motion,  turns  water  inco 
earth.     I  resume  this  interesting  subject. 

The  one  hundred  elements,  having  reached  the  lowe* 
extremity  of  the  one  hundred  cords,  have  now  attained 


lecture    ni.  12S 

their  ultimate  created  condition  and  form,  and  the  fin- 
ished  globe,  in  all  its  youth,  beauty,  and  variety,  ap- 
pears. At  the  top  of  those  cords  are  the  one  hundred 
elements  in  their  original  electrical  state,  resting  in 
their  own  invisibility ;  and  as  we  descend  we  see  the 
continual  change  each  successive  wave  passed  through, 
as  the  whole  one  hundred  substances  were,  under  the 
action  of  the  Creator,  gradually  approaching  their  cre- 
ated state,  till  at  length  they  emerged  from  invisibility 
and  chaotic  night  into  the  light  of  day,  and  rendered 
the  variegated  beauties  of  their  created  forms  visible 
to  the  eye  of  the  beholder. 

The  globe  being  finished,  it  required  electricity,  the 
original  substance  out  of  which  it  was  made,  to  be 
brought  upon  it  by  the  Creator,  so  that  his  infinite 
mind,  through  this  agent,  might  come  in  contact  with 
it,  in  order  to  move  and  govern  it,  not  only  in  its  revo- 
lutions by  the  attractive  and  repulsive  forces,  but  in 
producing  all  the  changes  and  operations  in  its  mineral* 
vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms.  As  this  great  work 
is  submitted  to  the  involuntary  powers  of  the  Infinite 
Mind,  and  as  mind  cannot  come  in  direct  contact  with 
gross  matter,  so  the  beauty  and  simplicity  of  the  sub- 
ject appear  in  the  grandeur  of  the  idea,  that  electricity, 
being  uncreated  and  eternal  matter,  is  the  only  sub- 
stance that  mind  can  touch,  and  hence  is  the  great 
physical  agent  the  Creator  employs  in  the  government 
of  all  worMs.  The  unchanging  laws  of  the  universe 
6* 


130  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

arc  Ibut  the  unchanging  thoughts  of  God.  Ladies  and 
gentlemen,  I  desire  you  to  bear  in  mind  that  it  re- 
quires electricity,  the  very  substance  out  of  which  the 
globe  was  made,  to  govern  it  by  its  positive  and  nega- 
tive forces  under  the  energy  of  Infinite  Power. 

As  this  subject  is  somewhat  intricate,  permit  me  tc 
be  very  explicit  in  making  myself  understood.  When 
I  say  that  it  requires  electricity  to  govern  the  globe,  I 
mean  as  follows  :  Electricity,  being  the  uncreated  sub- 
stance, is  the  positive  force,  and  the  globe,  being  the 
created  substance,  is  the  negative  force.  In  the  next 
place  it  will  be  clearly  perceived,  that  all  the  sub- 
stances existing  in  the  globe  as  so  many  ultimates, 
exist  in  electricity  as  so  many  frimates.  For  in- 
stance :  If  there  is  gold  in  the  globe,  then  there  is  gold 
in  electricity,  out  of  which  it  was  made.  If  there  is 
phosphate  of  lime  in  the  globe,  out  of  which  the  shells 
of  the  ocean  and  bones  are  formed,  then  there  is  phos- 
phate of  lime  in  electricity,  out  of  which  it  was  made. 
The  gold  in  electricity  is  in  a  gaseous  and  invisible 
state,  and  is  the  positive  force,  and  the  gold  in  tho. 
globe  is  in  a  solid  and  visible  state,  and  is  the  nega- 
tive force.  As  the  positive  and  negative  forces  always 
come  together,  so  the  gold  in  electricity  entirely  con 
trols  and  mineralizes  the  gold  in  the  globe,  but  lets  its 
ninety-nine  kindred  elements  alone.  Each  one  keeps 
its  own  cord  of  oDmmunication  from  top  to  bottom — ■ 
from  primute  to  idtim  n+9  —from  positive  to  negative. 


LECTURE    VII.  131 

The  same  is  true,  not  only  of  the  gold,  and  of  the 
[-  hosphate  of  lime,  but  also  of  the  ninety-eight  remain- 
ing elements.  The  whole  one  hundred  elements  in 
electricity,  as  the  positive  forces,  are  brought  to  act 
upon  the  one  hundred  corresponding  elements  of  the 
globe,  as  the  negative  forces,  and  thus  not  only  move 
it  on  its  axis,  and  in  its  revolutions  around  the  sun, 
but  produce  all  the  changes  and  operations  in  these 
elementary  substances  of  which  the  globe  is  composed. 

These  ideas  of  the  creation  and  government  of  the 
world  are  in  reality  sublime.  And  when  we  reflect 
that  the  Infinite  Mind  comes  in  contact  with  electri- 
city, and,  through  that  eternal,  invisible  agent,  governs 
all  worlds  by  his  involuntary  powers,  sublimity  rises 
into  infinite  magnificence,  and  overwhelms  the  soul 
with  awe  ! 

The  sun  being  pure  electricity  is,  of  course,  a  cold, 
invisible  body.  He  is  placed,  as  is  supposed,  in  the 
centre  of  a  retinue  of  worlds  composing  our  planetary 
system,  and  that  to  these  worlds  he  gives  light,  heat, 
and  vegetation.  But  to  my  mind  it  is  evident  that 
there  can  be  no  light  above  our  atmosphere  which  sur- 
rounds the  globe  to  the  height  of  about  fifty  miles.  As 
electricity  travels  from  the  sun  to  the  globe  in  never- 
ceasing  streams,  so  when  it  strikes  the  top  of  our  at- 
mosphere it  becomes  faintly  visible,  and  not  before. 
This  is  proved  by  the  morning  and  evening  twilight, 
when  the  sun  is  so  far  below  the  eastern  hills  as  to 


132  ELECTRICAL    /SYCEDLOGF. 

strike  the  very  top  of  our  atmosphere,  apparent .y  05 
a  level  with  our  fields,  and  affords  a  feeble  light  on 
account  of  the  thinness  of  our  air  at  that  height.  But 
as  it  rises  higher,  its  rays  shoot  deeper,  and  the  ah 
tg  denser  as  they  approach  the  earth  where  we 
stand,  till  they  touch  it,  the  friction  on  the  particles 
of  air  is  of  course  greater,  and  the  light  and  heat  are 
rendered  more  intense  by  this  density  of  atmosphere, 
and  by  their  final  reflection  and  reaction  from  the 
globe.  Hence  could  we  rise  to  the  top  of  our  atmo- 
sphere, the  sun  would  disappear,  and  we  should  there 
be  shrouded  in  total  darkness.  Electricity  is  cold  and 
invisible,  and  as  it  travels  from  the  sun  to  the  globe  at 
the  rate  of  twelve  million  miles  per  minute,  so  it  sets 
the  particles  of  the  air  on  fire  by  the  rapidity  of  its 
motion  and  friction.  Such  is  the  philosophy  of  the 
morning  and  evening  twilight,  which  never  has  been, 
and  cannot  be  explained  on  any  other  principle  than 
the  electrical  invisibility  of  our  sun,  and  the  absence 
of  all  light  above  our  atmosphere.  And  electricity, 
thrown  from  the  sun  to  the  globe,  is  the  mode  em- 
ployed by  the  Creator  to  bring  it  to  its  full  growth  and 
perfection,  as  a  meet  habitation  for  man. 

As  electricity  is,  in  its  one  hundred  elements,  con- 
tinually pouring  from  the  sun  upon  the  globe,  why  does 
it  not. continue  to  increase  it  in  bulk?  I  reply  that  it 
does,  and  hence  its  entire  creation,  as  to  its  size,  vege- 
tables, and  animals,  is  not  yet  perfected,  but  will  be  ic 


LECTTRE    VII.  1SB 

future  ages,  Its  distance  from  tLa  sun,  and  its  exact 
relation  to  surrounding  worlds,  will  then  forbid  its  ku 
crease  in  bulk.  The  human  body,  when  completely 
developed  by  food  and  drink,  ceases  its  growth,  even 
though  the  same  sustenance,  both  in  quality  and  quan- 
tity, is  continued.  This  I  will  more  fully  explain,  and 
hence  the  cause  of  the  variation  of  the  compass,  which 
in  philosophy  yet  remains  inscrutable,  will  be  made  to 
appear. 

Comets  are  declared  by  Newton  and  others  to  be 
melted  globes,  and  he  computed  the  heat  of  one  to  be 
several  thousand  times  hotter  than  that  of  red-hot  iron, 
and  that  it  would  take  a  comet  the  size  of  this  globe, 
fifty  thousand  years  to  cool  to  its  centre.  Comets  move 
in  very  elliptical  orbits,  and  are  deemed,  on  this  account, 
to  be  very  eccentric  bodies.  The  cause  of  this  is,  that 
while  they  are  chained  by  the  attractive  and  repulsive 
forces  to  keep  a  circle,  yet  as  they  are  propelled  in  a 
straight  line,  sky-rocket-like,  by  their  own  internal 
gaseous  flames  that  stream  in  their  course,  so  their 
orbits  are  elliptical.  As  they  cool,  their  own  internal 
force  is  lessened,  and  their  orbits  become  more  circular, 
because  there  is  less  trespassing  on  the  attractive  and 
repulsive  forces,  which  if  left  to  their  own  operation, 
independent  of  foreign  influences,  would  move  all  worlds 
in  perfect  circles.  Immensity  of  space  is  not  square, 
for  then  worlds  would  move  in  a  square,  hue  it  is  round, 
if  I  may  be  indulged  in  the  expression  in  regard  to  that 


134  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

boundless  field,  "  whose  centre  is  everywhere,  and  its 
circumference  nowhere. M  Electricity,  uninfluenced , 
always  moves  in  circles. 

The  globe  yet  moves  in  an  elliptical  orbit,  because 
its  bowels  are  melted  lava,  and  perhaps  not  more  than 
one  hundred  miles  in  depth  of  its  crust  are  as  yet  cool- 
ed. And  the  two  hundred  volcanoes  now  in  existence, 
are  so  many  spiracles  to  the  subterranean  furnace,  and 
continually  throw  off  the  gaseous  substances  generated 
in  its  bosom,  and  cause  it  to  transgress  in  some  meas- 
ure the  attractive  and  repulsive  forces  that  move  it. 
As  it  cools,  it  continually  approximates,  in  its  orbit, 
nearer  to  a  circle.  This  will  cause  the  variation  of  the 
compass  to  continue,  till  its  own  internal  forces  cease 
to  affect  its  motion,  and  allow  the  law  of  attraction  and 
repulsion  to  move  it  in  a  perfect  circle  around  the  sun. 
And  when  it  shall  perform  an  exact  circle  in  its  annual 
revolution,  it  will  be  perfectly  finished  as  to  its  size, 
and  yet  the  quantity  of  electricity  thrown  upon  it  from 
the  sun,  will  be  the  same  as  it  now  is,  and  ever  has 
been.  But  this  redundancy  will  be  thrown  off  at  its 
north  and  south  poles,  and  in  such  increased  quantities 
as  to  warm  and  enlighten  those  extremities  of  the  globe, 
and  bring  them  into  the  fruitfulness  and  bloom  of  the 
garden  of  Eden.  Then  the  variation  of  the  compass 
1  will  cease,  inasmuch  as  the  cause  will  be  removed  that 
produces  it.  The  cause  of  its  variation  is  the  elliptical 
whit  in  whhh  cur  globe  mcves,  and  its  continual  and 


LECTURE    VII.  185 

unceasing  approach  to  a  circle.  And  when  that  circle 
shall  be  obtained,  the  globe  will  be  finished,  and  the 
variation  of  the  compass  will  disappear. 

The  globe  is  yet  in  its  infancy — yes,  in  the  embryo 
of  its  being — and  it  will  require  many  thousand  years 
to  finish  it.  And  this  must  be  done,  because  under 
the  voluntary  powers  of  the  Creator,  nothing  can  per- 
ish prematurely.  Many  species  of  vegetables  and  ani- 
mals now  in  existence,  will  become  extinct,  and  disap- 
pear from  the  page  of  the  naturalist,  and  others  of  a 
more  improved  and  superior  character  will  be  awakened 
into  being.  They  will  be  perfectly  adapted  to  the  fu- 
ture and  ultimate  perfection  that  this  globe,  under  the 
energies  of  the  Infinite  Mind,  is  destined  to  attain.  Its 
creation  will  then  be  perfected.  The  soil  upon  which 
we  now  stand,  will  then  be  some  deep  stratum  in  its 
crust,  containing  our  present  vegetables  and  animals  in 
a  state  of  petrifaction.  These  will  be  pronounced,  by 
coming  generations,  the  strange  nondescript  remains  of 
past  centuries,  and  afford  to  the  future  geologist  and 
naturalist  abundant  materials  for  their  loftiest  specu- 
lations. This  subject,  in  connection  wTith  the  bound- 
lessness of  the  universe,  and  the  successive  creation  of 
worlds,  I  should  like  to  pursue  to  a  greater  extent,  but 
lest  I  weary  your  patience,  I  now  turn  your  attention 
to  the  creation  of  the  vegetable  and  animal  species. 

As  globes  were  successively  produced,  so  vegetables 
and  animals  were  no*  created  at  once,  but  successively 


186  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

through  a  long  series  of  intervening  ages.  Does  nci 
the  Creator  act  through  the  established  laws  of  gene- 
ration in  producing  the  human  species  1  He  does. 
While  I  freely  admit  that  God  originally  produced 
man  by  what  we  call  miracle,  yet  by  miracle  I  only 
mean,  that  the  first  human  beings  were  produced  with- 
out any  parent  stock  from  whom  they  received  their 
existence  through  ordinary  generation,  as  we  witness 
in  the  present  day.  And  they  were  evidently  pro- 
duced full-grown,  otherwise  they  could  not  have  sus- 
tained their  existence  by  procuring  their  own  food. 
because  the  infant  is  helpless.  But  the  miracle  by 
which  existence  was  thus  conferred  was  not  contrary 
to  the  laws  of  nature,  but  was  effected  by  the  volun- 
tary powers  of  Deity  exerted  through  the  laws  of 
nature.  It  was  thus  he  established  both  the  vegetable 
and  animal  kingdoms,  not  simultaneously,  but  success- 
ively and  progressively  through  various  ages,  from  the 
"lowest  vegetable  life  up  to  man,  wTho  is  the  glory  of 
this  lower  world. 

While  I  contend  that  the  Creator  produced  the 
whole  vegetable  and  animal  creation  at  first,  without 
any  parent  stock  or  the  ordinary  mode  of  generation. 
yet  I  would  not  be  understood  to  say  that  there  were 
no  germs  of  life  existing  as  a  primordial  cause  adequate 
t3  the  effect  produced.  But  while  I  contend  that  there 
Were,  for  instance,  no  acorns,  nor  other  seeds  in  being, 
yet  it  is  evident  that  the  germ  necessary  to  produce  au 


LECTURE    VII.  187 

acorn  or  an  oak  2ternall}T  existed  in  God,  Hence  the 
spirit  of  all  life,  whether  vegetable  or  ammai,  even 
from  the  highest  reasoning  powers,  through  every  link 
of  the  animal  chain  down  to  the  lowest  creature,  and 
through  every  link  of  the  vegetable  chain,  eternally 
existed  in  God,  and  is  absolutely  immortal.  The 
whole  of  this  immense  variety  combined  in  Deity  con- 
stitutes the  fullness  and  perfection  of  the  Eternal 
Mind.  Hence  the  lowest  animal  or  vegetable  life  is 
but  a  part  of  the  lowest  life  in  God's  spirit,  which  is 
the  correspondent  germ  from  whence  it  emanated. 
And  the  matter  that  forms  the  visible  substance  of 
all  animal  and  vegetable  bodies  eternally  existed 
in  electricity,  which  is  the  original,  invisible,  and  im- 
mortal condition  of  inert  matter,  and  constitutes  the 
body  of  God.  Hence  God  and  electricity  are  both 
immortal  and  eternal.  From  electricity,  which  is  the 
invisible  body  of  God,  have  emanated  all  the  visible 
substances  that  constitute  globes,  and  from  the  full- 
ness of  his  spirit  have  emanated  all  life,  form,  and 
motion.  And  as  all  organism  exists  in  spirit,  so  each 
animal  and  vegetable  have  developed  a  physical  body 
corresponding  in  form  to  the  germ  of  life  they  received 
from  the  inexhaustible  fountain  of  the  Infinite  Mind. 

If  God  does  not  create  througt  the  laws  of  nature,  but 
by  miracle,  in  the  arbitrary  sense  it  is  generally  under- 
Btcd  by  Christians,  he  would  in  this  case  have  finished 
thf*  globe  before  he  produced  the  vegetable  and  aninisJ 


138  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

kingdoms,  and  then  moved  them  both  into  existence  at 
the  same  time.  But  hf  can  not,  from  the  very  nature 
of  his  perfections,  suspend  the  production  of  life  while 
forming  a  globe  of  dead  matter,  because  he  pours  forth 
simultaneously  and  unchangeably  all  his  perfections 
which  are  transmitted  through  correspondent  laws  for 
the  production  of  life,  so  far  as  a  globe  may  be  finish- 
ed. And  as  this  globe  was  progressively  forming 
through  successive  ages,  and  one  elementary  depart- 
ment finished  before  another,  so  the  successive  creation 
of  plants  and  animals,  as  geology  proves,  is  easily  and 
rationally  accounted  for. 

God  could  not  create  a  fish  until  there  was  water 
adapted  to  its  existence.  And  the  moment  the  water 
was  perfected,  it  stood  in  a  philosophical  aptitude  to 
the  marine  laws  of  the  universe,  and  through  these 
emanated  from  the  Creator  that  portion  only  of  his 
spirit  which  stood  in  aptitude  to  the  aqueous  depart 
ment,  and  this  spirit  became  the  living  germ  or  life  of 
that  fish,  and  produced  its  body  through  the  positive 
and  negative  forces  of  electric  action.  Hence  the  body 
of  this  fish  was  but  the  developed  and  visible  shape  of 
its  mind.  But  as  the  water  was  progressively  created, 
and  for  many  ages  covered  the  earth  before  dry  land 
appeared,  therefore,  while  in  its  turbid  and  unfinished 
state,  many  of  the  inferior  species,  from  the  lowest 
life  up  to  shell-fish,  and  from  thence  up  through  every 
grade,  existed  before  the  most  highly  organized  and 


LECTURE    VII.  139 

perfect  fish  was  created.  And  each  of  these  grades, 
in  like  manner,  through  the  laws  of  nature  received 
their  life  from  the  infinite  fountain  of  spirit,  which  be- 
came the  germ  of  their  being.  The  various  shapes  of 
their  organic  structures  were  but  visible  manifestations 
of  the  various  shapes  of  their  minds,  and  the  most 
perfectly  organized  fish  in  the  ocean  involves  in  his 
body  the  organism  of  all  below  him,  and  his  intelligence 
is  equal  in  amount  to  the  intelligence  in  all. 

It  is  evident  that  vegetables,  in  some  form,  must 
have  preceded  animals,  for  an  animal  is  but  a  vegeta- 
ble of  the  second  growth.  May  there  not  be  a  marine 
vegetation  of  as  great  variety  and  abundance  in  the 
caverned  vales  of  the  ocean  as  there  is  on  earth  1  Of 
this,  however,  we  are  certain,  that  terrestrial  plants 
and  trees  could  not  have  been  created  till  the  dry  land 
appeared,  because  the  Deity  does  not  create  by  any 
arbitrary  mode  of  procedure,  but  through  the  immuta- 
ble laws  of  nature.  As  soon  as  the  dry  land  stood  in 
a  philosophical  aptitude  to  the  laws  of  the  universe, 
and  as  the  Spirit  of  the  Creator  gives  out,  like  the  sun, 
its  unchangeable  and  never-ceasing  emanations,  so  it 
communicated  a  portion  of  itself  as  the  germinating 
principle  of  life,  and  vegetation  appeared,  commencing 
at  the  humblest  and  most  imperfect  formation  of  plants, 
and  rising  higher  and  still  higher  in  the  beauty  of  or- 
ganic perfection,  till  the  noblest  fruit-trees  and  most 
powerful  sons  of  the  forest  stood  erect,  and  the  finest 


140  ELECTRICAL  ISYCHOLOGY. 

srganued  plants  and  mcst  beautiful  flowers  gibced 
creation,  and  robed  the  new-born  earth  in  smiles. 

As  each  of  these  vegetable  tribes  rose  in  succession, 
one  above  another  with  increasing  splendor,  so  each 
superior  tribe  involved  in  its  own  perfection  the  per- 
fection and  organism  of  all  below  it.  For  instance, 
the  first  species  of  plants  on  the  yet  marshy  earth  was 
ordinary ;  the  second,  more  perfect,  retained  its  own, 
and  involved  all  contained  in  the  first ;  the  third,  still 
advancing,  retained  its  own  perfection,  and  involved  all 
contained  in  the  one  below  it ;  the  fourth  makes  its 
appearance  one  grade  higher,  and  involves  all  the  or- 
ganic perfections*  of  the  three  below  it.  And  should 
we  be  able,  in  this  vast  range,  to  find  the  thousandth 
different  species,  that  thousandth  one  would  retain  its 
own,  and  involve  all  the  complicated  beauties  of  or- 
ganic structure  and  life  contained  in  the  999  below  it :, 
because,  as  the  form  of  the  earth,  in  its  progressive 
creation,  became  more  and  more  perfect  and  dense, 
each  rising  vegetable  species,  standing  in  a  full  and 
exact  aptitude  to  *all  the  laws  of  nature  then  in  action, 
so  far  as  the  globe  was  finished,  would  avail  itself  of 
all  the  life  from  the  Creator  which  thus  far  acted 
through,  and  filled  these  laws. 

It  was  the"  same,  as  we  have  already  noticed,  with 
all  animal  life  in  the  ocean.  Each  higher  involved  is 
itself  the  perfections  of  all  below  it;  It  was  the 
game  with  all  animated  beings  in  earth  and  air.  -   The 


LECTURE    VII.  Ml 

umphibious  animal  is,  of  course,  the  connecting  link 
between  the  aqueous  and  terrestrial  race.  From  the 
humblest  land  animal  up  to  man,  the  same  grand  law 
obtains.  Each  higher  involves  in  its  constitution  the 
perfections  of  all  below  it,  even  up  to  man.  When 
the  earth  was  finished,  man  was  produced.  And  all 
the  laws  of  nature  in  relation  to  this  globe  being  in 
action,  so  in  man's  organism  was  involved  the  organ- 
ism of  the  whole  animal  and  vegetable  creation,  and  in 
his  spirit  was  involved  the  spirit  of  all  life  and  intelli- 
gence in  universal  nature  below  him.  And,  standing 
in  a  complete  relationship  to  the  finished  globe  and  all 
its  perfect  laws,  he,  of  course,  drank  in  a  portion  of 
all  the  perfections  contained  in  the  Infinite  Spirit,  and 
hence  he  was  strictly  in  the  image  of  God.  Man  is, 
therefore,  in  every  sense,  a  perfect  and  grand  epitome 
of  the  universe.  As  he  is  in  the  image  of  his  God,  he 
stands  at  the  fountain-head  of  creation,  and  drinks  in 
all  the  powers  of  universal  nature,  and  is  sustained  by 
being  fed  with  a  due  portion  of  both  spiritual  and 
physical  sustenance.  His  mind  is  fed  and  developed 
with  impressions  as  his  body  is  with  food. 

God  is  a  spirit,  and  in  his  spirit  are  involved  all 
life,  all  form,  and  the  germinating  principle  of  all  ani- 
mal and  vegetable  spirit.  And  in  his  body,  which  is 
electricity,  are  involved  the  invisible  and  ethereal  sub- 
stances of  all  inert  matter,  out  of  which  all  globes  and 
the  bodies  of  all  creatures  were  produced.     In  God  is, 


f.42  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

therefore,  involved  the  invisible  and  primal  essence  of 
all  matter  and  spirit  existing  in  all  globes  and  theii 
inhabitants. 

But,  after  all,  what  is  spirit?  It  is  that  sub- 
stance which  possesses  self-motion,  intelligence,  sen- 
sation, and  power.  Spirit  is  a  union  of  two  grand 
forces.  The  first  is  voluntary  ;  the  second  is  involun- 
tary. The  first  is  the  grand  magazine  in  which  are 
stored  up  all  the  voluntary  powers  of  Infinite  Intelli- 
gence. All  the  schemes,  plans,  and  arrangements  that 
appertain  to  all  worlds  and  their  countless  inhabitants 
are  there.  The  second  contains  all  the  involuntary 
powers  of  the  Infinite  Mind  by  which  all  worlds  and 
their  inhabitants,  after  having  been  created,  are  con- 
trolled through  the  fixed  laws  of  nature.  The  first 
plans,  arranges,  and  creates  through  the  laws  of  its 
own  omniscient  being,  which  become  the  laws  of  the 
universe ;  and  the  second  controls,  moves,  and  gov- 
erns all  worlds  and  their  inhabitants  through  the  fixed 
laws  of  nature.  The  first  is  the  positive  force ;  the 
second  is  the  negative  force.  The  first  is  male ;  the 
second  is  female.  Hence  of  the  male  and  female  we 
may  say,  that  the  one  begins  in  the  voluntary,  and  the 
other  in  the  involuntary  power  of  the  Infinite  Spirit, 
They  both  run  through  every  department  of  the  uni 
*   verse,  and  thread  universal  nature. 

There  are  likewise  two  electricities,  called  the  posi- 
tive and  negative.     The  positive  is  male*  the  negative 


LECTURE    VII.  143 

is  female.  The  male  electricity  belongs  to  the  heav* 
ens  ;  the  female  electricity  belongs  to  the  earth.  The 
male  and  female  also  extend  through  every  possible 
link  of  the  immense  vegetable  chain,  as  well  as  through 
every  link  of  the  animal  chain,  and  retain  their  sepa- 
rate existence  and  equal  powers  in  the  positive  am] 
negative  electricities,  which  are  the  primeval,  eternal5 
and  invisible  efficients  of  all  visible  matter. 

Nature,  as  a  whole,  is  one  entire  and  absolute  per- 
fection, and  stands  in  this  beautiful  relationship  to  the 
Creator,  from  whom  she  emanated.  All  the  objects 
of  creation,  upon  which  we  gaze  with  so  much  admira- 
tion— all  the  diversified  glories  of  the  landscape — the 
mineral,  vegetable,  and  animal  kingdoms,  taken  in  one 
grand  whole — are  an  exact  and  visible  impression  of 
the  eternal" perfections  of  his  own  character  and  in- 
visible being,  even  as  the  stamp  impresses  the  wax 
and  leaves  its  perfect  image.  Nature  is  the  visible 
daguerreotype  shadow  of  his  own  invisible  being.  She 
is  the  offspring  of  God.    The  poet  breathes  out, 

"  Man,  bear  my  brow  aloft !  view  every  grace 
In  God's  great  offspring,  beauteous  Nature's  face." 

Creation  is  therefore  no  arbitrary  act  in  God,  but,  like 
the  ever-streaming  rays  of  light  from  the  sun,  it  is  the 
natural  result,  the  visible  emanation  and  outshoot  of 
liis  own  invisible  existence,  and  was  progressively  cre- 
ated through  the  laws  of  the  universe,  and  as  soon  as 
that  part  of  the  globe  in  which  life  was  to  be  produced 


J44  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOCF. 

gtood  in  a  finished  relationship  to  those  laws.  Hence 
the  laws  of  nature  are  but  the  result  of  the  unchanging 
thoughts  of  God.  One  part  of  the  globe  was  finished 
before  another,  and  the  creation  of  life,  both  vegetable 
~nd  animal,  was  in  like  manner  progressive,  from  the 
lowest  grade  and  most  imperfect  organism,  step  by  step, 
up  to  man,  who  is  the  perfection  of  all,  and  is  in  the 
image  of  God. 

In  this  view  of  our  subject  it  will  be  perceived  that 
spirit  is  a  substance  eternal  in  its  nature,  and  not  the 
result  of  an  organized  brain,  and  that  man  has  not  re- 
ceived his  existence  by  climbing  gradually  from  the 
lowest  link  of  the  vegetable  or  animal  chain  up  to  his 
present  perfection  and  grandeur.  He  was  never  in  his 
:reation  a  vegetable,  or  even  a  lower  animal;  was  never 
a  mushroom  or  a  plant,  a  tadpole  or  a  horse,  as  some 
writers  contend.  His  existence  was  never  ingermed  and 
involved  in  any  one  or  all  of  the  six  grand  links  of  the 
living  chain  below  him,  which  naturalists  divide  into  the 
vegetable,  the  pisces,  the  saurian,  the  aves,  the  mar- 
supial, and  mammalia  kingdoms,  making  man  the 
seventh  link.  Throwing  aside  the  useless  technicalities 
of  foreign  language,  these  seven  links  of  the  living  chain 
embraced  in  the  seven  grand  kingdoms  of  nature  can 
be  expressed  in  plain  English.  Their  rising  order  is  as 
follows  :  First — The  vegetable  kingdom.  Second — 
The  fish  kingdom.  Third — The  reptile  kingdom,  em- 
bracing lizards,  turtles,  crocodiles,  etc.    Fourth — The 


LECTURE     VIJ.  145 

bird  kingdom.  Fifth — The  pouch  kingdom,  embrac- 
ing all  who  protect  their  young  by  carrying  them  in 
pouches.  Sixth — The  breast  kingdom,  cr  those  that 
suckle  their  young ;  and  Seventh — Man. 

It  will  also  be  perceived,  in  view  of  my  position,  that 
gross,  inert  matter  cannot  be  transmuted  into  mind — 
cannot  possibly  secrete  mind — nor  can  it,  in  iny  sense 
whatever,  become  spirit  through  any  refining  process, 
as  is  contended  for  by  some.  In  this  case  it  must  have 
preceded  God,  and  hence  on  this  principle  God  is  not 
eternal.  In  the  face  of  this  theory,  there  must  have 
been  a  period  when  there  was  nothing  but  inert  matter 
in  being,  and  if  all  motion  originates  in  mind,  how  then 
was  dead  matter  set  in  motion  so  as  to  produce  spirit  or 
mind  through  a  successive  series  of  elementary  trans- 
mutations? 

The  same  is  in  like  manner  equally  true  of  each  and 
every  link  of  the  animal  chain  below  man.  The  monkey 
was  never  a  bird  nor  a  fish,  and  the  horse  was  never  a 
snake  nor  an  oyster.  The  horse-kind,  for  instance, 
however  much  they  may  have  been  improved  by  amalga- 
mation, have  ever  retained  their  circle,  and  have  never 
broken  from  their  link  in  the  chain,  and  emerged  into  any 
other  link  above  them.  The  same  remarks  are  equally 
applicable  to  the  vegetable  chain.  The  rose-bush  can 
never  become  an  oak,  nor  the  oak  a  peach-tree.  The 
family  involved  in  each  link,  however  much  they  mav 
be  improved  by  amalgamation  or  culture,  can  neve* 
7 


146  ELECTRICAL  PSYCHOLOGY. 

break  their  circle,  nor  emerge  into  another  link  above 
them.  The  individual  life  of  every  link  of  the  whole 
animal  and  vegetable  chain  is  an  emanation  from  tne 
Infinite  Mind,  and  each  acting  through  its  correspondent 
law,  and  through  that  elementary  department  of  the 
globe  to  which  this  law  is  unerringly  adapted,  has  man- 
ifested its  own  invisible  form  in  the  visible  body  it  pro- 
duced. What  the  life  of  the  seed  is  to  the  production 
and  shape  of  the  plant,  the  mind  of  each  creature  is  to 
the  production  and  shape  of  its  body.  Hence  the  brain 
does  not  produce  mind,  as  the  atheist  contends,  but 
mind  was  the  original  germ  that  produced  and  developed 
the  brain.  All  vegetable  life,  as  well  as  animal,  is 
therefore  a  species  of  mind.  They  are  both  emanations 
from  the  Creator,  are  both  immortal,  and  will  retain 
their  separate  existence  and  identity  without  end. 

Substances,  in  their  infinite  variety,  pay  a  visit  to 
time,  assume  visible  forms,  so  as  to  manifest  their  in  - 
trinsic  beauties  for  a  moment  to  the  eye  of  the  beholder, 
and  then  step  back  into  eternity,  and  reassume  their 
native  invisibility  in  their  own  immortality.  As  man 
is  now  constituted,  were  there  but  one  object  presented 
for  his  contemplation,  the  mind  would  soon  become 
wearied  and  disgusted  with  sameness.  But  the  infinite 
variety  and  beauty  of  the  animal  and  vegetable  creation 
here  presented  by  the  Deity,  open  to  the  mind  sources 
of  inexpressible  and  never-ceasing  delight.  It  seems 
irrational,  therefore,  to  conclude  that  the  whole  chain 


r,F,CTURE    VII.  147 

of  being,  which  is  perfect  on  earth,  will  be  struck  out 
of  existence  (except  man,  who  is  the  highest  link),  and 
leave  a  cheerless  blank  in  the  realms  of  glory.  For 
one,  I  expect  to  meet  the  whole  animated  chain,  and  to 
witness  immortal  groves,  unwithering  plants,  and  never- 
fading  flowers  in  that  world  whore  death,  and  pain,  aad 
change  shall  be  no  more. 


148 


ELECIHICAlv   PSYCHOLOGY., 


LECTURE    Vffl, 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 

The  query  may  perhaps  now  arise  in  your  minds. 
What  bearing  has  the  subject  of  the  creation  of  this 
globe,  and  the  original  materials  out  of  which  it  was 
made,  advanced  in  the  last  Lecture,  upon  the  science 
of  Electrical  Psychology?  The  answer  to  this  query 
will  be  fully  made  to  appear  in  the  arguments  I  have  to 
offer  on  the  present  occasion.  I  have  already  stated  in 
my  third  Lecture,  that  man  is  an  epitome  of  the  uni- 
verse, and  that  the  chemical  properties  of  all  the  vari- 
ous substances  in  existence  are  congregated  in  him,  and 
form  and  constitute  the  very  elements  of  his  being.  I 
have  stated,  that  in  the  composition  of  this  body  are 
involved  all  the  mineral  and  vegetable  substances  of 
this  globe,  even  from  the  grossest  and  heaviest  matter 
up  to  the  most  rarefied  and  light.  And  lastly,  to  finish 
this  masterpiece  of  creation,  I  stated  that  the  brain 
was  invested  with  a  living  spirit,  that,  like  an  enthroned 
deity,  presides  over,  and  governs,  through  electricity 
as  its  agent,  all  the  voluntary  motions  of  this  little,  or- 
ganized, corporeal  universe ;  while  its  living  presence, 


LECTURE    VIII.  149 

and  involuntary  se'if-moving  powers,  cause  all  the  invol- 
untary functions  of  life  to  proceed  in  their  destined 
course.  Hence  human  beings,  and  all  animated  exist- 
ences, are  subject  to  the  same  common  electrical  law 
that  pervades  the  universe,  and  moves  all  worlds  under 
the  superintendence  of  the  involuntary  powers  of  the 
Infinite  Spirit. 

That  all  substances  are  incorporated  in  the  body  of 
man  is  irresistibly  true,  otherwise  he  could  not  inure 
himself  to  all,  even  to  the  most  deadly  poisons,  and  ren- 
der them,  in  a  good  degree,  harmless  in  his  system. 
He  may  so  accustom  himself  to  the  use  of  tobacco, 
rum,  or  even  opium,  that  ho  can  take  into  the  stomach 
a  quantity  sufficient  to  produce  the  death  of  several 
individuals,  while  he  himself  will  experience  from  it 
but  a  slight  effect.  He  may  even  commence  the  use 
of  arsenic  in  small  quantities,  gradually  increasing  the 
dose,  till  he  gets  incorporated  into  his  system  a  suffi- 
cient quantity  to  kill,  for  instance,  five  men.  As  in 
this  case  it  forms  a  part  of  his  body,  so  it  causes  a 
longing  for  it  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  in  the  sys- 
tem. Should  he  now  take  a  portion  sufficient  to  kill 
five  men,  it  would  only  produce  a  balance  of  power 
with  that  already  in  his  system.  It  would  meet  the 
demand.  This  is  habitude.  But  should  he  take  one 
n  more,  sufficient  to  kill  any  other  man,  he  would 
'lie.  Now  it  would  be  impossible  for  a  man  to  inure 
himself  to  any  such  substances,  unless  there  were  soma 


150  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Email  particle  in  the  composition  of  his  body  on  which 
to  build.  Hence  it  is  philosophically  true,  that  man  is 
an  epitome  of  the  universe,  and  that  all  the  elements, 
in  exact  proportions,  are  most  skillfully  combined  in 
his  system,  by  the  hand  of  the  Creator ;  and  these  pro- 
portions should  never  be  disturbed  and  thrown  out  of 
balance  by  dissipation. 

Having  these  facts  distinctly  before  us,  I  would  now 
state,  that  if  there  are  one  hundred  elements  in  the 
globe  which  was  made  out  of  the  same  number  in  elec- 
tricity, then  there  are  one  hundred  in  the  composition 
of  man's  body,  for  he  is  but  an  epitome  of  the  universe. 
As  his  body  was  created  out  of  the  dust  of  the  earth, 
and  is  but  a  vegetable  of  the  second  growth,  so  it  is  the 
same  as  though  it  had  been  originally  made  out  of  elec- 
tricity. And  as  the  globe,  after  its  creation,  required 
electricity,  the  original  substance  from  whence,  under 
Deity,  it  sprung,  to  move,  control,  and  govern  it,  so, 
after  man  was  organized,  and  his  brain  invested  with  a 
living  spirit,  it  required  electricity,  the  primeval  sub- 
stance out  of  which  he  was  made,  to  be  inhaled  with 
the  air  into  his  lungs,  and  carried  to  every  part  of  his 
system,  and  by  which,  under  the  impulse  of  mind,  it 
must  be  moved,  controlled,  and  governed  by  the  posi- 
tive and  negative  forces  that  move  all  worlds.  Yon 
nor  perceive  what  connection  Electrical  Psychology  has 
with  the  creation  of  our  globe.     It  is  a  science  that  in- 


LECTURE    VHI.  151 

solves  the  electrical  theory  of  the  universe,  and  all  the 
multii  xrious  operations  of  nature. 

We  know  not,  as  yet,  how  many  elements  there  may 
be  in  existence.  I  desire  it,  however,  to  be  distinctly 
borne  in  mind,  that  if  there  are  one  hundred  in  elec- 
tricity, which  is  primal  and  eternal  matter,  then  there 
are  one  hundred  in  the  globe,  one  hundred  in  the  vege- 
tables that  the  globe  produces,  and  one  hundred  in  the 
human  body,  which  is  sustained  by,  and,  therefore, 
made  up  of  vegetables.  The  stomach  is  the  great 
workshop  of  the  system,  to  manufacture  new  materials 
to  supply  the  demand  occasioned  by  its  constant  wastes. 
The  food  and  water  taken  into  the  stomach  contain  the 
one  hundred  elements  to  meet  the  supply  of  the  one 
hundred  that  are  contained  in  the  composition  of  the 
body.  Electricity,  containing  also  one  hundred,  is  in- 
spired by  the  lungs,  communicated  to  the  blood,  from 
the  blood  to  the  nerves,  and  conducted  to  the  brain, 
and  there  laid  up  for  the  use  of  the  mind,  as  I  have 
explained  in  my  third  Lecture.  This  electricity  is 
sent  by  the  involuntary  powers  of  the  mind  from  the 
cerebellum  through  the  pneumagastric  and  other  invol- 
untary nerves  to  the  stomach,  to  produce  digestion. 
The  one  hundred  elements  in  electricity  meet  the  one 
hundred  corresponding  elements  in  the  food,  and  con- 
vert the  whole  mass  into  one  homogeneous  chyle.  This 
is  done  by  the  positive  and  negative  forces,  without  the 
least  confusion  or  interference  of  one  element  with  ita 


152 


ELECTRICAL     PSYCHOLOGY . 


kindred  elements.  The  nutritious  parts  of  this  chyld 
are  taken  up  by  the  absorbents,  and,  in  the  form  of  se- 
rum, are  thrown  into  the  circulating  system,  and  trans- 
muted into  blood.  The  blood  is  the  universal  solvent 
of  the  system,  containing,  in  solution,  all  the  chemical 
properties  that  are  to  constitute  the  body,  even  from 
its  finest  particles  down  to  the  solid  bones — the  same 
as  water  is  the  universal  solvent  of  nature,  out  of 
which  all  the  constituent  principles  of  this  globe  are 
formed,  through  electrical  action. 

The  finest  particles  of  the  blood  are  taken  up,  and. 
by  the  positive  and  negative  forces  of  electricity,  are 
transmuted  into  flesh,  tendons,  bones,  and  all  the  sub- 
stances that  constitute  the  animal  economy,  and  by  the 
same  forces  the  old  particles  of  the  body  are  thrown 
off,  to  mingle  again  with  those  of  the  globe.  "When  T 
say  that  all  this  is  effected  by  the  one  hundred  electri- 
cal elements,  each  acting  upon  its  own  element  in  the 
food,  without  interfering  with  any  of  its  ninety-nine 
kindred  elements,  I  desire  to  be  distinctly  understood. 
In  order  to  express  clearly  so  intricate  an  idea,  I  will 
take  one  of  these  elements,  and  carry  it  through  in  all 
its  principal  bearings. 

Phosphate  of  lime  is  the  substance  that  forms  our 
bones.  It  may  not  be  a  simple  element,  but  in  ordei 
to  convey  my  ideas  on  this  point,  I  will  consider  it  so. 
As  our  bones  are  continually  wasting  away,  so  this 
Waste  must  be  supplied ;  and  as  they  are  often  frac- 


LECTURE    VIII.  153 

tared,  so  they  require  new  partioies  to  reunite  them 
by  ossification.  Hence  there  must  be  phosphate  of 
lime  in  our  food  as  well  as  in  electricity.  This  is  cer- 
tain, because  that  hard,  bony-like  substance  collected 
on  the  teeth  in  the  act  of  mastication,  is  from  the  phos- 
phate of  lime  in  our  food  and  water.  Having  these 
facts  before  us,  I  now  turn  to  the  point  under  consid- 
eration, and  ask  your  undivided  attention. 

The  food  is  taken  into  the  stomach.  The  phosphate 
of  lime  in  electricity  being  the  positive  force,  moves 
from  the  brain — from  the  cerebellum — through  the  in- 
voluntary nerves  to  the  stomach.  It  takes  hold  of  the 
phosphate  of  lime  in  the  food,  which  is  the  negative 
force,  and  leaves  the  other  ninety-nine  elements  of  the 
food  unmolested.  This  is  perfectly  philosophical,  for 
the  positive  and  negative  invariably  rush  together.  It 
converts  this  phosphate  of  lime  into  chyle,  and  takes  it 
up  through  the  absorbents,  and  transmutes  it  into  se- 
rum and  blood.  This  phosphate  of  lime  from  the  food 
now  forms  a  constituent  part  of  the  blood.  In  the  next 
place,  the  phosphate  of  lime  in  electricity  takes  hold  of 
the  phosphate  of  lime  ir  the  blood,  and  moves  it  on 
through  all  its  destined  avenues  till  it  reaches  the  liver, 
which,  while  it  secretes  the  bile,  seems  to  act  as  the 
bolter  of  the  system,  to  separate  these  one  hundred  ele- 
ments to  be  distributed  to  their  destined,  ^orrespondeni 
parts  of  the  body.  The  phosphate  of  lime  in  electricity 
extract?  the  like  substance  from  the  blood  at  the  liyer. 


154  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY 

conveys  it  to  the  various  bones  of  the  body,  transmutes! 
it  into  an  osseous  substance,  and  lays  it  down,  particlo 
after  particle,  and  thus  forms  anew  the  solid  frame- 
work of  the  system,  while  the  dregs  are  passed  off 
through  the  urinary  secretions.  But  before  it  lays 
down  the  new,  it  removes  the  old  particle  by  its  re- 
pulsive force,  and  compels  it  to  fly  off  by  insensible  per- 
spiration. Fully  sensible  that  I  am  now  understood  in 
reference  to  the  operation  of  this  one  element,  I  am 
satisfied  that  you  understand  me  also  in  relation  to  the 
operations  of  the  other  ninety-and-nine,  in  carrying  on 
the  work  of  digestion  to  keep  up  the  repairs  of  the 
body. 

These  ideas,  though  somewhat  intricate,  are  never- 
theless interesting  and  sublime,  as  they  unfold  the 
relation  in  which  man  stands  to  the  globe,  to  surround  - 
ing  worlds  and  his  Creator,  as  an  epitome  of  the  uni- 
verse.  If  their  novelty  produce  surprise  in  any  breast, 
yet  this  is  no  reason  that  they  should  awaken  resent- 
ment, or  kindle  indignation  against  the  speaker.  We 
are  finite  beings,  can  know  but  little,  and  we  should 
ever  be  ready  and  willing  to  freely  express  our 
thoughts  reciprocally  to  each  other,  independent  of  the 
opposition  of  men.  By  this  mutual  interchange  of  sen- 
timent and  feeling  we  should  increase  in  knowledge, 
and  grow  wiser  and  better.  Indeed,  we  need  not  go, 
in  our  contemplations,  out  of  ourselves  to  learn  the 
great  principles  and  operations  of  both  mind  and  mat- 


LECTURE    VIII.  J5£ 

ter,  of  God  and  his  works.  As  it  regards  human 
research,  the  words  of  the  poet  are  unchangeably  true, 
and  must  stand  unshaken  when  thrones  and  kingdoms 
fall.     He  immortalized  his  verse  when  he  breathed  out3 

"  The  proper  study  of  mankind  is  man." 

I  now  turn  to  another  department  of  my  subject, 
equally  interesting.  I  mean  the  Doctrine  of  Im- 
dressions,  by  which  both  nature  and  man  are  thrown 
lit  of  balance,  made  sick  and  cured.  In  this  also  we 
I:all  see  the  relation  between  man  and  nature. 

The  philosophy  of  disease  I  have  briefly,  but  faith- 
fully argued  in  my  fourth  Lecture,  and  shown  how 
it  ni^y  be  produced  by  both  mental  and  physical  im- 
pressions- Hence  there  is  no  occasion  that  I  should 
weary  your  attention  by  ranging  that  field  of  pestilence 
and  death.  I  shall  confine  my  observations  principally 
tD  nature,  and  even  in  these  I  shall  be  brief.  The 
law  of  equilibrium  is  the  grand  central  law  of  the 
universe.  It  holds  over  nature  the  reins  of  govern- 
ment, and  allows  her,  in  her  operations  and  changes, 
to  stray,  but  not  too  far,  from  the  central  track.  She 
may  rise  above,  or  fall  below  this  law,  but  to  its  man- 
date she  must  ever  bow,  and  at  stated  periods  resume 
her  medium  course. 

Electricity,  being  a  universal  agent,  produces  all  the 
phenomena  and  changes  that  transpire  in  our  globe 
and  its  surrounding  elements.     By  heat,  which  is  &d 


156  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

electrical  effect,  the  air  is  rarefied  and  water  is  ev&pa 
rated.  When  the  rarefication  of  the  air  is  carried  to 
an  extreme,  then  that  portion  of  the  earth  and  its  in- 
habitants suffer.  Nature  is  diseased,  and  the  denser 
portion  of  the  atmosphere  is,  at  length,  aroused  from 
its  slumberings  and  armed  with  force.  The  sweeping 
hurricane  rushes,  or  the  dreadful  tornado  roars  in  its 
awful  movement  to  fill  up,  and  rescue  that  rarefied  and 
diseased  portion  of  the  air,  and  continues  its  force  till 
an  equilibrium  is  attained  in  her  aerial  realms.  At 
this  point  all  action  ceases,  and  nature  is  well.  She 
was  cured  by  her  own  impressions. 

In  like  manner  evaporation  may  continue  till  the 
air  is  filled,  in  its  upper  regions,  with  vapors.  As 
electricity  has  a  strong  affinity  for  moisture,  it  leaves 
the  drier  portions  of  the  atmosphere  near  the  earth, 
and  ascends  to  the  moist  and  vapory  regions  above. 
By  this  process  electricity  is  thrown  out  of  balance. 
The  man  who  has  had  a  broken  bone,  even  years  ago. 
or  who  is  subject  to  rheumatism,  will  feel  an  inconve- 
nience  in  that  spot,  or  in  his  system,  as  harbingers  of 
che  approaching  storm.  The  cause  of  this  is,  that  he 
does  not  inspire  as  much  electricity  as  usual  with  the 
air  into  the  lungs,  and  feels  the  inconvenience.  And 
the  storm  will  surely  burst,  if  there  are  no  upper  cur- 
rents of  air  to  disperse  the  vapor.  The  electricity 
being  thrown  out  of  balance  condenses  the  vapors  into 
thick    clouds   by  its  coldness,   and   thus  darkens   the 


LECTURE    VIII.  157 

hear  ens.  The  lightnings  flash,  the  thunders  roll,  tho 
rains  descend,  and  the  war  of  elements  will  continue 
till  that  subtile  fluid  is  equally  dispersed  throughout 
the  atmosphere.  Nature  having  gained  her  equili- 
brium, in  her  electrical  realms,  is  at  rest.  By  these 
awful  impressions  of  her  voice  she  is  cured.  Here  it 
is  distinctly  perceived  that  electricity  is  a  cold  body, 
because  it  condenses  the  storm,  and  when  its  quantity 
is  sufficiently  great  it  produces  hail,  even  in  the  warm- 
est weather  in  our  southern  climates.  In  these  few 
ideas  we  see  also  the  philosophy  of  storms. 

Even  the  globe  may  be  sick.  She  may  have  a  bowel 
complaint.  By  the  confined  air  and  continually  gen- 
erating gases  in  the  lava  contained  in  her  bowels  she 
is  thrown  out  of  balance.  The  earthquake  awakes 
from  slumber,  and  springs  from  its  dreadful  couch. 
It  starts  to  discharge  its  force  at  the  nearest  volcano. 
In  its  fearful  march  it  sounds  its  rumbling  thunders 
and  convulses  the  globe.  Flames  start  up  through 
fissures  of  the  opening  earth,  and  from  the  bottom  of 
the  ocean  burning  islands  arise !  Volcanoes  bellow 
and  disembogue.  Their  lava  overwhelms  devoted  cit- 
ies, and  their  shock  hurls  others  in  crumbling  ruins ! 
A  reaction  takes  place,  an  equilibrium  is  produced  in 
her  subterranean  realms,  and  she  is  wTell.  By  these 
awful  impressions  of  her  own  power  she  is  cured. 

I  might  extend  my  observations  to  every  visible  de- 
partment of  nature,  and  notice  her  more  minute  opera- 


158  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Lions,  bat  these  few  remarks,  in  reference  to  her  mosh 
stupendous  and  obvious  convulsions,  are  sufficient  to 
give  you  nry  ideas  how  she  becomes  diseased  by  being 
thrown  out  of  her  equilibrium,  and  how  she  is  cured 
by  the  inherent  force  of  her  own  impressions.  As 
man,  then,  is  an  epitome  of  the  universe,  the  full  force 
of  my  arguments  on  the  philosophy  of  disease  and  the 
rationale  of  its  cure,  advanced  in  my  fourth  and 
fifth  Lectures,  will  be  clearly  seen,  and  the  rela- 
tion in  which  man  stands  to  the  unn  erse  will  be  more 
distinctly  understood. 

As  I  am  now  on  the  doctrine  of  impressions,  I  take 
the  liberty  to  say,  that  we  should  endeavor,  at  all  times, 
to  keep  ourselves  positive  to  the  surrounding  impres- 
sions of  nature.  We  take  disease  much  more  easily  to 
fall  asleep  in  an  unhealthy  spot  than  to  keep  awake. 
While  traveling  in  stages  through  some  low,  damp,  and 
unhealthy  places  in  the  southern  states,  and  where  the 
mail  stage  runs  both  night  and  day,  the  traveler  unused 
to  that  climate  should  be  careful  to  take  short  naps 
during  the  day,  so  as  iu,t  to  fall  asleep  in  the  night 
stage.  It  renders  him  passive  and  negative  to  the  sur- 
rounding impressions  of  nature,  when  she  receives  no 
salutary  influence  from  the  beams  of  the  sun.  These 
impressions  become  the  positive  force,  and  the  electri- 
city of  the  air  inspired  by  the  lungs  enters  the  system^ 
disturbs  the  nervous  force  and  the  circulation,  throws 
the  -whole  out  of  balance,  and  disease  ensues. 


l  :cture  vm.  150 

A  .ji'izen  of  Charleston,  South  Carolina,  may  ride 
out,  in  warm  weather,  three  or  four  miles  into  the 
country,  and,  returning  the  same  day,  will  experience 
no  inconvenience  from  the  change.  But  should  he  re- 
main over  night  and  sleep  there,  he  would,  in  all  prob- 
ability, have  an  attack  of  what  is  there  called  "  the 
country  fever"  and  in  a  few  hours  he  might  be  a 
corpse,  as  it  is  considered  to  be  even  more  fatal  than 
the  yellow  fever.  On  the  contrary,  a  person  from  the 
country  visiting  Charleston  and  returning  the  same  day, 
receives  no  harm.  But  should  he  remain  over  night, 
and  sleep  there,  the  same  mournful  results  might  ensue. 
My  views  on  the  philosophy  of  becoming  acclimated, 
in  my  sixth  Lecture,  will  throw  some  light  on  this 
point.  And  when  we  reflect  that  a  person,  while  awake, 
is  active  and  positive  to  surrounding  impressions,  we 
can  easily  perceive  that  he  resists  them,  and  conse- 
quently avoids  disease. 

In  view  of  the  above,  it  will  be  readily  perceived 
why  one  person,  even  in  the  wakeful  state,  will  take 
disease  much  more  easily  than  another.  Those  who 
are  firm  in  mind  as  a  rock,  are  immovably  calm,  and 
have  no  fear  of  disease,  even  when  some  startling  mala- 
dy visits  their  neighborhood.  These  will  not  take  it; 
*ven  if  they  visit  the  bedside  of  the  sick.  This  de- 
termined action  of  their  minds  throws  a  constant  and 
powerful  current  of  the  electro-nervous  force  from  their 
brains  and  systems,  keeps  them  positive  to  surrounding 


160  ELECTRICAL  5  SYCHOLOGY. 

impressions,  md  enables  them  to  resist  their  force., 
But  those  who  are  in  constant  fear  of  some  disease, 
who  are  always  complaining  of  their  feelings,  pains, 
and  aches,  keop  themselves  constantly  unwell  by  thus 
concentrating  their  thoughts  upon  their  own  systems, 
and  watching  each  movement.  When  fever  or  cholera 
visits  their  neighborhood,  these  are  the  very  persons 
who  are  in  danger  of  an  attack.  Even  fleeing  to  an- 
other section  will  not  save  them,  unless  this  circum- 
stance should  be  the  means  of  changing  their  thoughts 
and  removing  their  fears.  The  difficulty  is,  that  fear, 
as  Dr.  Mason  Good  remarks,  depresses  the  vital  energy 
of  the  muscles,  and  slackens  the  motions  of  life.  It 
causes  the  mind  to  shrink  back  on  itself,  and  to  render 
the  system  negative  to  the  surrounding  impressions  of 
the  elements,  and  thus  engenders  disease.  More  than 
one  half  the  cases  of  cholera  that  have  occurred  during 
the  past  year,  owe  their  existence  to  the  fears  and  ex- 
citements of  such  persons,  who,  if  they  had  not  heard 
that  it  was  in  their  midst,  would  not  have  been  afflicted 
with  it 

Tl  e  cholera  is  a  sudden  colkpse  of  the  whole  cuti- 
tle,  occasioned  by  the  electricity  of  the  nerves  at  the 
surface  suddenly  retiring  to  the  stomach  and  bowels, 
^lie  pores  of  the  skin  being  closed,  the  blood  and  other 
fluids  follow  the  electricity,  and  retire  internally.  The 
venous  circulation  is  obstructed  and  weakened,  and  the 
fluids  seem  to  rash  to  the  stomach  and  bowels,  and  isa- 


LECTURE    Till.  161 

tnense  secretions  ensue.  Intense  fever  and  inflaming 
tion  in  the  entire  alimentary  canal  aggravate  the  ctliei 
difficulties,  and  the  storm  bursts  in  fearful  terror.  The 
external  and  internal  parts  of  the  system  being  thrown 
out  of  balance  in  their  electrical  action,  and  the  arterial 
and  venous  circulation  having  lost  their  equilibrium,  the 
most  dreadful  cramps  and  convulsions  ensue.  All  that 
is  necessary  to  effect  a  cure  is,  to  procure  a  reaction 
from  the  centre  to  the  surface,  and  thus  restore  the 
usual  equilibrium  between  the  arterial  and  venous  cir- 
culation, by  equalizing  the  electricity  of  the  system. 

What  I  have  now  argued  in  relation  to  keeping  the 
mind  positive  to  surrounding  impressions,  will  account 
for  the  well-known  fact,  that  an  individual  sitting  with 
his  back  to  a  current  of  air,  while  in  a  state  of  perspi- 
ration, will  take  cold  much  sooner  than  if  he  faced  it. 
The  cause  is  obvious.  The  front  part  of  the  brain 
contains  tic  positive  electro-nervous  forces,  under  the 
control  of  tAe  voluntary  powers  of  the  mind,  and  the 
back  part  contains  the  negative  electro-nervous  forces, 
under  the  control  of  the  involuntary  powers  of  the 
mind.  As  the  positive  forces,  under  an  absolute  voli- 
tion of  mind,  resist  all  external  impression,  so  the  fact 
is  readily  seen  wLy  they  have  more  power  than  the  neg- 
ative forces  to  resist  disease,  or  any  erc^eaohmen  fcs  that 
may  be  made  upon  the  system. 

I  would  now  remark,  that  the  science  of  Electrical 
Psychology,  being  the  doctrine  of  imprescWu^  throws 


.    162  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

an  immense  flood  of  liglit  on  the  human  mind,  and  its 
susceptibility  to  the  most  strange  and  unreasonable  im- 
pressions in  the  power  of  man  to  conceive.  There  aro 
some  minds  so  constituted,  that  it  is  absolutely  impos- 
sible for  them  to  resist  the  impressions  that  others  may 
make  upon  them.  This  science  unfolds  what  was  con- 
sidered an  inscrutable  mystery  in  relation  to  the  con- 
duct of  several  individuals  wdio  perished  in  the  excite- 
ment of  the  Salem  witchcraft.  Persons  of  well-known 
character — yes,  of  a  stainless  moral  reputation — were 
executed  on  their  own  confession  !  They  were  charged 
with  being  bewitched,  and  wTith  having  bewitched 
others.  They  plead  guilty  to  the  charge,  firmly  be- 
lieved it  to  be  true,  and,  on  their  own  confession,  were 
sentenced  to  die,  and  were  cut  off  from  the  land  of  the 
living.  They  were  in  the  psychological  state.  In  my 
public  experiments,  I  have  taken  persons  who  aro 
naturally  in  the  psychological  state,  and  have  produced 
such  impressions  upon  them.  I  have  made  them  con- 
fess that  they  were  bewitched,  and  that  they  had  rode 
on  broomsticks  through  the  air  to  bewitch  others,  and 
deserved  to  die. 

Hundreds  of  instances  have  occurred  in  our  world, 
where  persons  have  been  charged  with  murder,  have 
confessed  themselves  guilty  of  the  deed,  and,  on  that 
confession,  have  been  solemnly  sentenced  to  d'e.  And 
yet,  before  the  day  of  execution  arrived,  the  supposed 
murdered  man  was  found  alive  in  some  distant  section. 


LECTURE    VIII.  163 

Mid  hurried  home  just  in  time  to  save  an  innocent  fel- 
low- creature  from  an  ignominious  death.  Turn  to  the 
criminal  calendar,  and  you  will  find  some  most  striking 
instances  of  this  character,  and  that,  too,  in  our  own 
country,  and  even  in  New  England,  the;  boasted  land 
of  light  and  morals.  All  such  persons  were  naturally 
in  the  'psychological  state,  and  really  believed  what 
they  confessed.  How  many  may  have,  through  such 
means,  innocently  lost  their  lives,  the  opening  scenes 
of  eternity  alone  can  disclose.  Judges  and  jurors  have 
yet  to  learn  that  no  man  should  be  hung  on  his  own 
confession.  If  he  must  die,  let  it  be  in  the  face  of  the 
most  indubitable  evidence,  and,  even  then,  let  him  be 
recommended  to  mercy,  for  often  murder,  as  well  as 
suicide,  is  committed  under  some  strange  hallucination 
of  mind. 


ill  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 


LECTURE  IX. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 

Much  has  been  advanced  in  relation  to  mjuxd  &hd 
matter,  their  various  operations,  powers,  and  manifes- 
tations, and  the  countless  mental  and  plrysical  impres- 
sions of  which  they  are  susceptible.  I  have  also  said 
not  a  little  of  the  electro-nervous  force,  as  the  agent  of 
the  mind,  and  how  the  functions  of  every  part  of  the 
system  are  executed  under  its  energy.  I  have  proved 
it  to  be  the  connecting  link  between  mind  and  inert 
matter,  and  the  agent  by  which  the  Creator  moves  all 
worlds  through  the  boundless  fields  of  space.  I  have 
shown  the  connection  existing  between  man  and  nature, 
and  the  relationship  he  sustains  to  her  as  an  epitome 
of  the  universe.  As  I  have  made  electricity  the  grand 
agent  that,  under  mind,  moves  on  all  the  multifarious 
operations  appertaining  to  the  human  system,  it  may  be 
asked,  what  proof  is  there  to  establish  this  truth,  inde- 
pendent of  what  has  already  been  offered  ?  If  the  ar- 
guments already  advanced  to  proTe  that  mind  touches 
a^id  moves  electricity  as  its  prime  agent,  are  not  suffi- 


LECTURE    IX.  165 

sient  and  entirely  satisfactory,  I  will  then  refer  you  to 
a  visible  and  tangible  experiment,  the  result  of  which 
you  can  witness,  and  thus  test  the  truth  of  my  position. 
Let  any  gentleman  of  eloquence,  feeling,  and  pathos 
strip  up  his  sleeve,  and  lay  his  bare  arm  on  a  table 
where  it  shall  be  perfectly  at  rest ;  let  him  then  repeat 
some  impressive  poetry,  or  any  prose  sentences  of  stir- 
ring eloquence,  paying  no  attention  to  his  arm  till  his 
feelings  are  moved,  and  at  that  instant  he  will  see  his 
arm  covered  with  what  are  catted  goose-pimples.  If 
he  cease  speaking,  they  will  gradually  disappear,  as  hia 
mind  sinks  into  calmness.  Indeed,  he  can  see  them 
sise  and  fall  with  his  feelings  and  emotions.  These  are 
jccasioned  by  the  redundant  electricity  which  is  thrown 
to  the  surface  by  the  strong  emotions  and  positive  im- 
pulses of  the  excited  mind.  These  pimples  rise  up  at 
the  root  of  each  hair,  and  as  hair  is  a  non-conductor, 
and  resists  electricity,  so  the  internal  pressure  of  the 
electro-nervous  force,  propelled  to  the  surface  by  the 
mind,  causes  these  minute  eminences  to  arise.  Elec- 
tricity is,  in  its  nature,  a  cold  substance.  Hence, 
when  the  weather  is  cold,  the  air,  being  dense,  contains 
an  excess  of  electricity  and  oxygen.  These,  being  in- 
spired by  the  lungs  in  greater  quantities  than  usual, 
brace  the  system,  and  render  these  pimples  in  the  same 
rati?  more  prominent  and  visible  than  in  warm  weather. 
This  sircumstance  confirms  the  proof  that  it  is  elec. 
tricity  moved  by  mind,  that  causes  these  to  rise  when 


16G  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

the  feelings  are  excited  by  an  eloquence  that  causes 
ei  n  cold  chills  to  pass  over  the  bod}7. 

The  proof  now  produced  I  consider  to  be  absolutely 
and  positively  irresistible,  and  abundant  to  satisfy  any 
philosophic  mind,  that  electricity  is  the  connecting  link 
between  mind  and  inert  matter,  and  is,  therefore,  the 
agent  through  which  the  mind  manifests  its  motions  and 
powers.  But  should  this  not  be  sufficient  to  send  a 
bold  and  firm  conviction  to  the  mind  of  the  greatest 
skeptic,  then  I  will  endeavor  to  carry  the  proof  still 
farther,  and  firmly  nail  the  matter  beyond  his  power  to 
remove  it.  I  will  show  him  how  abundant  the  proof 
is  by  which  this  position  is  sustained.  Let  the  skeptic 
place  himself  on  an  insulated  stool,  with  his  arm  en- 
tirely bare,  and  charge  his  body  from  a  powerful  elec- 
tric machine.  The  hairs  and  pimples  will  rise  up  even 
as  they  do  under  an  intense  action  of  the  mind.  When 
the  body  is  electrically  charged  on  an  insulated  stool, 
even  the  hairs  of  the  head  rise  up  erect,  and  the  same 
result  follows  when  the  mind  is  greatly  excited  by  fear 
or  moved  by  strong  and  stormy  emotions. 

If  these  evidences  are  not  sufficient  to  strike  the 
skeptic  speechless  in  his  opposition,  then  let  him  take 
a  needle,  and,  after  satisfying  himself  that  it  has  no 
magnetic  power  to  attract  the  smallest  atom,  let  him 
insert  it  in  the  nerve  of  an  animal,  and  it  will  become 
sufficiently  magnetic  to  take  up  fine  iron  filings.  In- 
deed, ladies  and  gentlemen,  I  have  no  doubt  that  the 


LECTURE    IX.  167 

nak<*l  arm,  under  sufficiently  strong  and  stirring  emo- 
tions of  mind  to  raise  those  pimples,  would,  while  in 
that  condition,  produce  an  effect  upon  the  electrometer. 

We  now  perceive  why  the  mind,  when  involved  in 
trouble  and  distress,  has  so  powerfully  affected  the 
body,  not  only  in  bringing  upon  it  various  diseases,  but 
often  sudden,  or  even  instant  death.  And  we  more- 
over see  why  the  mind,  when  calm,  serene,  and  happy, 
when  buoyant  with  hope,  and  animated  with  confidence, 
faith,  and  joy,  has  produced  such  powerful  and  salutary 
results  in  removing  pains  and  diseases.  We  see  why,' 
under  the  energy  of  such  a  favorable  state  of  mind, 
warts,  and  even  king's-evil,  cancers,  and  various  tu- 
mors have  been  made  to  disappear. 

Dr.  John  C.  Warren,  of  Boston,  Massachusetts,, 
states,  in  his  work  on  tumors,  that  a  lady  called  upon 
him  to  ask  his  advice  in  relation  to  an  experiment  she 
thought  of  trying  on  a  tumor  with  which  she  was 
afflicted.  It  was  to  rub  it  with  the* hand  of  a  dead 
person  ;  and,  as  she  had  a  good  opportunity,  she  asked 
Dr.  Warren  whether  she  had  not  better  improve  it. 
He  states,  that  he  at  first  thought  of  dissuading  her 
from  it,  but- sensible  of  the  power  of  the  imagination, 
he  advised  her  to  try  the  experiment.  She  did  so,  and 
in  a  few  weeks  the  tumor  disappeared ! 

Dr.  Warren  calls  it  the  imagination ;  but  it  is  the 
effect  of  a  mental  impression,  as  I  have  just  stated, 
producing  the  result  by  the  action  of  electricity  through 


1.68  ELECTRICAL    I  SYCHOLOGY. 

the  voluntary  nerves.     The  philosophy  of  this  is  sim« 
pie,  and  in  a  few  words  I  will  notice  it. 

The  old  particles  of  our  flesh  are  thrown  off  through 
the  electro-nervous  force  of  the  involuntary  nerves,  and 
by  the  same  force  the  new  particles  from  the  blood  are 
laid  down  in  their  stead.  Hence  the  wastes  and  re- 
pairs of  the  system  are  about  balanced  We  change, 
as  I  have  stated,  the  fleshy  particles  of  our  bodies 
about  once  per  year,  and  the  bones  in  seven  years. 
While,  therefore,  the  involuntary  nerves  are  keeping 
up  this  balance  of  power  between  the  wastes  and  re- 
pairs of  the  flesh,  so  the  same  tumor  that  is  thrown  off 
once  per  year  with  the  other  particles  of  the  body,  is 
gradually  replaced  each  year  by  the  same  involuntary 
electro-nervous  force  from  the  new  particles  of  the 
blood.  Over  this  the  mind  has  no  direct  control,  be- 
cause it  acts  through  the  voluntary  nerves.  Hence 
when  the  mind  is  under  the  influence  of  confidence, 
faith,  hope,  and  joy,  organic  activity  is  heightened, 
and  by  keeping  the  mind  upon  the  tumor  while  in  thi3 
happy  state,  and  believing  it  will  disappear,  creates  a 
surplus  of  action  at  that  spot  through  the  voluntary 
nerves,  and  this  surplus  action  throws  off  this  surplus 
protuberance  to  return  no  more.  Such  is  the  philoso- 
phy of  what  is  called  imagination. 

Tli3  point  being  understood  how  the  electro-nervous 
fluid  removes  a  tumor,  the  query  may  now  arise  in 
your  minds,  Why  does  it  heal  a  wound  or  cure  a  <iis< 


LECTURE    IX. 

ease'?  In  answer  to  this  question  I  would  first  re- 
mark, that  I  am  well  aware  that  the  healing  proper- 
tics  are  in  the  individual,  or  in  the  electricity  of  the 
system,  and  not  in  the  medicine.  And  the  question. 
Why  does  the  electro-nervous  fluid  heal,  has  been  in- 
directly considered  in  my  last  Lecture,  when  explain- 
ing the  process  of  digestion.  Because  if  all  things 
were  made  out  of  electricity,  then  it  is  certain  that 
electricity  contains  all  the  elementary  principles,  and 
therefore  all  the  healing  properties  of  all  things  in 
being.  All  the  balms,  oils,  and  minerals  in  existence 
are  contained  in  electricity,  and  in  their  most  skillfully 
combined  proportions.  This  electricity  is  inspired 
with  the  air  into  the  lungs,  and  passed  through  the 
blood  into  the  nerves  of  the  brain,  and  becomes  the 
electro-nervous  fluid.  It  is  the  positive,  moving  pow- 
er, in  all  its  one  hundred  elements,  and  meets  the  same 
one  hundred  kindred  elements  that  compose  the  body, 
and  are  the  negative  power.  And  the  positive  and 
negative  forces  coming  together,  and  the  one  hundred 
elements  in  electricity  meeting  the  one  hundred  of  the 
same  kind  in  the  body,  each  tending  to  its  own,  pro- 
duce the  healing  result,  on  the  same  principle  that 
they  produce  digestion,  repair  the  system,  and  equal- 
ize circulation.  For  a  full  explanation  of  this  point 
you  will  please  call  to  mind  my  remarks  on  the  dig3S- 
tive  process  in  my  last  Lecture,  and  the  whcle  will  ba 
easily  comprehended. 
8 


170  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHO^OGF. 

I  now  leave  this  point  and  call  your  attention  to  the 
brain,  which  is  the  palace  and  throne  of  the  mind> 
where  it  dwells  and  reigns.  I  shall  briefly  notice  its 
operations  in  its  earthly  house,  point  out  the  connec- 
tion between  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  nerves 
through  which  the  mind  acts,  and  conclude  by  noticing 
the  philosophy  of  sleep. 

I  have  stated  in  a  former  Lecture,  that  each  indi- 
vidual has  two  distinct  brains — namely,  the  cerebrum, 
which  occupies  the  frontal  part  of  the  cranium,  filling 
the  principal  part  of  its  cavity,  and  the  cerebellum, 
which  occupies  the  back  portion  of  the  cranium.  The 
voluntary  nerves  belong  to  the  cerebrum,  through 
which  the  voluntary  powers  of  the  mind  act,  and  the 
involuntary  nerves  belong  to  the  cerebellum,  through 
which  the  involuntary  powers  of  the  mind  act.  And 
though  in  their  intricate  convolutions  through  every 
part  of  the  cranium,  they  seem  to  interweave  and 
blend  in  ten  thousand  ways,  and  both  dive  into  the 
spine,  and  there  combine  to  form  the  spinal  marrow, 
}et  by  some  secret  charm  they  preserve  their  entirely 
distinct  character  as  to  their  voluntary  and  involun- 
tary powers,  and  thus  carry  out  the  separate  forces  of 
both  brains  into  every  part  of  the  entire  system. 

Our  voluntary  powers  by  which  wTe  reason,  and  by 
which  we  move  our  limbs  and  bodies,  being  the  posi- 
tive force  during  our  wTakeful  moments,  soon  tire,  and 
require  the  refreshment  of  sleep  to  restore  them.     Etet 


LECTURE    IX.    .  171 

oui  mTcluntary  powers,  by  which  the  heait  and  lungs 
are  moved,  and  the  functions  of  life  performed,  com- 
mence their  career  of  action  at  birth,  and  often  con- 
tinue it,  without  any  apparent  weariness,  for  seventy, 
eighty,  or  even  a  hundred  years.  They,  however, 
tire  at  last,  and  also  require  sleep.  But  when  they 
sleep,  it  is  death.  Natural  sleep,  which  involves  the 
sleep  of  the  voluntary  powers  only  in  a  state  of  entire 
insensibility,  is  so  far  on  the  road  to  death.  It  is  the 
half-way  house  to  the  land  of  silence.  By  natural 
sleep  our  exhausted  voluntary  powers  are  restored,  we 
wake  up  refreshed,  our  weariness  has  disappeared,  and 
we  are  prepared  for  renewed  action.  There  is  at  the 
same  time  another  important  end  gained  by  our  insen- 
sibility in  sleep.  The  involuntary  powers,  being  left 
free  from  the  exciting  action  of  the  voluntary  powers, 
were  allowed  to  gradually  slacken  their  movements^ 
and  regain  their  true  and  healthful  equilibrium. 

In  order  that  this  part  of  my  subject  may  be  dis- 
tinctly understood,  I  must  point  out  the  connection 
between  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  powers,  and  the 
manner  in  which  they  may  reciprocally  affect  each 
other.  Our  pulsations  are  more  frequent  in  the  eve- 
ning than  in  the  morning.  This  is  owing  to  the  men- 
tal and  physical  action  of  our  voluntary  powers  during 
our  wakeful  moments.  They,  being  the  positive  force, 
trespass  upon  the  involuntary  powers,  which  are  the 
negative  force,  and  hence  one  grand  object  of  sleep  in 


H2  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

to  allow  the  heart  to  come  down  to  its  due  natural 
slowness  of  pulsation.  The  voluntary  powers,  being 
the  positive  force,  can  of  course  trespass  upon  the  in- 
voluntary, till  they  become  tired  out  and  sink  to  rest 
in  the  sleep  of  death.  This  I  will  endeavor  to  make 
plain  by  the  following  circumstances. 

In  the  barbarous  ages  of  the  world,  criminals  have 
been,  in  some  instances,  doomed  to  die  through  depri- 
vation of  sleep.  Guards,  who  took  charge  of  them  by 
turns,  both  night  and  day,  were  ordered  to  keep  them 
incessantly  awake.  This  they  did  do  by  touching 
them  with  some  instrument  of  torture,  and  sometimes 
with  fire,  whenever  exhausted  nature  would  yield  to 
repose.  Tn  such  instances  the  pulsations  of  the  heart 
are  gradually  increased  above  their  usual  throb,  be- 
coming more  and  more  frequent,  till  between  the  third 
and  fourth  day,  when  they  rise  to  about  one  hundred 
and  twenty  per  minute,  which  is  a  fever  heat.  And 
so  on,  gradually  increasing,  till  the  seventh  or  eighth 
day,  when  the  pulse  is  only  perceived  by  a  tremulous 
motion,  inconsistent  with  the  continuance  of  life,  and 
the  sufferer  expires.  You  now  perceive  that  the  vol- 
untary powers,  by  being  kept  awake,  trespass  upon  the 
involuntary  powers  till  they  too  are  tired,  and  fall 
asleep  ;  but  that  sleep  is  death. 

I  have  already  remarked,  that  when  our  voluntary 
powers  are  exhausted  they  fall  asleep  at  night,  and  in 
the  morning  we  wake  up  restored.     This  brought  us 


LECTURE     IX.  17| 


i  d 


half  way  on  our  journey  to  the  door  of  death,  and  well 
may  sleep,  in  all  ages,  have  been  considered  its  em- 
blem. But  when  the  involuntary  powers  are  entirely 
exhausted  by  pain,  by  fevers,  or  by  sickness  in  gen- 
eral, they  also  require  rest,  and  therefore  fall  asleep. 
This  is  death.  Now,  if  there  were  no  positive  organic 
destruction,  and  could  the  laws  of  chemistry  that  de- 
compose our  bodies  be  suspended,  and  could  the  entire 
system,  blood  and  all,  be  kept  precisely  in  the  same 
condition  as  it  was  when  we  expired,  we  should  wake 
up  after  a  few  days  in'  perfect  health.  This  is  no 
revery  of  fancy,  no  chimera  of  the  speaker's  brain,  but 
absolutely  and  positively  true,  and  in  perfect  accord- 
ance with  the  principles  of  philosophy.  As  this  sub- 
ject is  new,  I  will  take  it  into  consideration,  as  it  must 
be  not  only  interesting,  but  vastly  important  to  us  all. 
In  the  first  place,  we  know  that  the  serpent  and 
toad  species,  the  alligator  tribe,  and  nearly  all  insects, 
fall  into  torpidity  in  winter,  and  in  the  spring  they  are 
aroused  from  this  state  in  perfect  health,  and  with 
regenerated  vigor.  Not  only  their  voluntary,  but  also 
their  involuntary  powers  were  asleep.  The  breathing 
lungs  and  throbbing  heart  were  motionless,  and  the 
circulating  blood  was  stilled.  The  raccoon  and  seve- 
ral other  species  of  animals  burrow,  and  fall  into  a 
torpid  state  as  winter  approaches,  and  remain  till 
spring  without  any  sustenance  whatever,  and  then 
make  their  appearance  without  any  loss  of  flesh.     *sa 


U4  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

all  these  creatures  the  foramen  ovale,  an  opening  be* 
swoen  the  auricles  of  the  heart,  never  closes,  and  hence 
they  can  live  without  breathing. 

It  may,  however,  be  said,  that  this  is  by  no  means 
applicable  to  human  beings,  for  they  cannot  live  with- 
out breathing.  How  then  do  we  live  without  breath- 
ing, or  even  without  the  throbbing  of  the  heart,  or  the 
circulation  of  the  blood,  till  we  were  born  into  exist- 
ance  ?  I  answer  by  saying,  that  the  foramen  ovale  was 
not  closed,  but  generally  closes  soon  after  our  birth  takes 
place.  We  know  that  the  new-born  infant  requires  but 
little  air,  and  can  live  where  we  should  be  smothered 
and  perish.  Again,  there  is  occasionally  an  individual 
in  whom  this  never  closes.  It  is  true,  that  these  in- 
stances are  exceedingly  rare,  and  such  persons  are 
liable,  when  disease  or  pain  exhausts  the  involuntary 
powers,  to  sink  into  a  torpid  state,  which  has  been 
mistaken  for  death.  The  lungs  and  heart  suspended 
their  motions,  the  blood  ceased  to  circulate,  and  the 
limbs  grew  stiff  and  cold.  Thousands  in  this  condition 
have  been  prematurely  buried,  came  to  life,  struggled, 
turned  over  in  their  coffins,  and  perished.  On  being 
disinterred  they  have  been  found  with  the  face  down- 
ward. Some,  placed  in  tombs,  have  revived,  been 
accidentally  heard,  and  fortunately  rescued.  And 
though  they  expired  with  a  distressing  disease,  yet  they 
awoke  to  life  in  health. 

An  instance  of  this  kind  occurred  in  New  Jersey. 


LECTURE    IX.  175  ■ 

where  an  individual  was  apparently  in  a  state  of  death. 
He  was  cold  and  motionless.  The  lungs  heaved  not : 
the  heart  in  its  pulsations  was  stilled ;  the  blood  was 
stagnated  in  its  channels,  and  had  ceased  to  flow.  His 
funeral  was  two  or  three  times  appointed,  the  friends 
asd  neighbors  assembled,  and  through  the  entreaties 
of  the  physician  it  was  postponed  to  another  time.  He 
at  length  awoke  from  this  state  to  life,  and  awoke  in 
health.  Some  call  this  singular  condition,  where  circu- 
lation is  suspended,  a  trance  ;  but  it  is  the  sleep  of  the 
involuntary  powers  in  those  individuals  only  where  the 
foramen  ovale  is  not  closed.  In  all  other  persons  it 
would  be  death. 

In  view  of  these  facts  we  should  be  warned  not  to 
inter  our  friends  too  soon  after  we  suppose  they  are 
dead.  And  as  death  is  only  the  sleep  of  the  involun- 
tary powers,  so  dying  cannot  be  a  painful  process,  but 
one  that  must  afford  the  greatest  pleasure  and  delight 
of  which  we  can  conceive.  It  must  certainly  afford  as 
much  real  enjoyment  to  die  as  to  lie  down  upon  our 
beds  and  sink  into  natural  sleep.  All  sufferings  arise 
from  the  nature  of  the  disease  that  tires  out  the  invol- 
untary powers,  and  not  from  the  gasping  struggles  of 
the  dying.  The  fatigues,  toils,  and  sufferings  of  the 
day,  that  prepare  our  voluntary  powers  for  a  night's 
repose,  are  not  to  be  taxed  upon  the  process  of  our 
dropping  into  natural  sleep.  This  is  of  itself  pleas- 
urable, and  sc  is  also  the  process  of  dropping  into  the 


176  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

sleep  of  death.  In  this  respect  it  is  not  "  the  ting  of 
terrors,"  but  the  welcome  angel  of  soothing  smiles  and 
crowning  joys. 

You  now  perceive  that  though  the  voluntary  and  in- 
voluntary powers  of  the  mind  are  entirely  distinct,  and 
seem  to  act  independently  of  each  other  through  two 
distinct  sets  of  nerves,  yet  there  must  be  some  secret 
link  between  the  two  that  unites  them  in  one  bond  of 
everlasting  and  indissoluble  union.  That  this  point 
may  be  settled  as  accurately  as  possible,  I  must  call 
your  attention  to  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  nerves, 
to  determine  the  connection  between  them,  and  also  to 
ascertain  the  throne  of  the  mind,  or  in  what  particular 
part  of  the  brain  it  may  be  located. 

Though  I  have  faithfully  explained  the  philosophy 
of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  in  my  third  Lecture,  yet 
I  am  compelled  to  glance  at  the  position  in  which  the 
arterial  and  venous  circulation  stand  in  relation  to  each 
other,  and  notice  the  connection  between  them,  and 
then  see  if  this  will  not  throw  some  light  on  the  volun- 
tary and  involuntary  nervous  forces  of  the  brain. 

The  circulating  system  is  in  reality  two  distinct 
systems.  The  arterial  carries  the  cherry-red  blood, 
which  is  positive ,  and  ever  flows  from  the  lungs  and 
heart  to  the  extremities,  and  the  venous  carries  the 
dark  blood,  which  is  negative,  and  ever  flows  from  tha 
extremities  to  the  heart  and  lungs.  The  arterial  sys- 
tem, commencing  at  the  lungs  and  heart,  divides  intc 


LECTURE    IX.  1'p 

farious  brandies,  and  these  again  into  others,  and  sc 
on,  till  they  spread  out  in  thousands  of  small  blood- 
vessels called  capillaries,  too  minute  for  the  dissecting 
knife  k  trace,  or  the  naked  eye  to  see.  Indeed,  they 
run  out  and  seem  to  end,  if  I  may  so  speak,  in  millions 
of  nothings.  At  their  terminations,  and  in  just  as 
many  millions  of  nothings,  the  venous  system  begins. 
Though  there  is  no  visible  connection,  that  the  dis- 
sector can  trace  between  the  two,  yet  we  know  that 
such  a  connection  must  exist,  otherwise  the  blood  could 
never  pass  from  the  capillaries  of  the  arteries  into  those 
of  the  veins. 

As  the  nervous  system  must  correspond  with  the 
circulating  system,  so  these  remarks  will  prepare  your 
minds  for  a  correct  understanding  of  my  views  in  re 
lation  to  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  nerves  and 
the  throne  of  the  mind.  The  involuntary  nerves  have 
their  origin  in  the  cerebellum,  which  is  the  organ  of 
involuntary  motion,  wind  round  in  intricate  mazes,  and 
form  its  convolutions.  They  pass  into  the  spine,  and 
form  the  spinal  marrow,  a  part  of  which  is  but  the 
cerebellum  continued,  and  from  thence  they  branch  out 
to  the  heart,  lungs,  and  to  all  the  involuntary  parts  of 
the  system,  so  that  motion  may  be  communicated  to 
them  by  the  involuntary  powers  of  the  mind.  They 
return  through  another  department  of  the  spinal  mar- 
row to  the  brain,  and  terminate  in  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata in  thousand?  of  nothings,  by  which  I  only  mean 
8* 


178  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

invisible  fibres.  In  just  as  many  thousands  of  no  tilings, 
the  voluntary  nerves  begin — wind  round  in  like  in- 
tricate mazes,  and  form  the  convolutions  of  the  cere- 
brum, -which  is  the  great  organ  of  voluntary  motion. 
They  pass  into  the  spine  and  form  the  spinal  marrow, 
which  is  but  the  continuation  of  the  two  brains,  and 
from  thence  they  branch  out  to  all  the  voluntary  parts 
of  the  system,  so  that  motion  may  be  communicated 
to  them  at  pleasure  by  the  voluntary  powers  of  the 
mind. 

It  is  evident  that  the  same  secret  and  invisible  con- 
nection exists  between  the  voluntary  and  involuntary 
nerves  of  the  two  brains  that  exists  between  the  arte- 
ries and  veins  of  the  two  circulating  systems  which 
carry  the  positive  and  negative  blood.  If  this  connec 
tion  between  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  nerves  of 
the  two  brains  does  not  exist,  then  the  voluntary  pow- 
ers could  not,  by  their  wakefulness,  produce  the  least 
possible  effect  upon  the  involuntary  powers,  so  as  to 
tire  them  out  and  produce  death,  nor  could  they  even 
cause  the  least  disease.  And  on  the  other  hand,  the 
involuntary  could  not  produce  the  least  possible  effect 
upon  the  voluntary  powers. 

The  mind  is  certainly  not  diffused  throughout  both 
brains,  because  a  part  of  the  brain  may  be  destroyed, 
and  the  mind  still  retain  all  its  powers  and  faculties. 
If  it  were  thus  diffused,  being  an  active  principle,  it 
would  keep  every  organ  of  the  brain  uniformly  excited. 


LECTURE    IX.  170 

Hence  it  appears  most  reasonable,  that  the  mind  holds 
its  throne  between  the  termination  of  the  involun- 
tary nerves  of  the  cerebellum  and  the  commencemeni 
of  the  voluntary  nerves  of  the  cerebrum.  This  will 
appear  rational,  if  we  reflect  that  any  sudden,  irregu  - 
lar  motion  of  the  heart  for  instance,  or  of  any  other 
involuntary  organ,  will  instantly  convey  the  warning  to 
the  mind,  and  bid  it  beware.  But  this  sensation  could 
not  be  communicated  to  the  mind  unless  it  held  its 
throne  between  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  nerves. 
This,  though  difficult  to  determine,  seems  to  be  in  the 
Medulla  oblongata.  There  the  royal  monarch  sits 
enthroned.  From  the  external  world,  through  one 
common  nerve,  he  receives  all  his  impressions,  and 
from  thence  he  transmits  them  by  electric  telegraph  to 
the  various  departments  of  his  palace — or,  to  speak 
more  phrenologically,  to  the  different  organs  of  the 
brain,  and  thus  manifests  the  true  impression  of  his 
character  to  the  world. 

In  the  light  our  subject  now  stands,  the  philosophy 
of  natural  sleep  can  be  stated  in  very  few  words 
Heat  expands,  and  cold  shrinks  the  nerves  of  the 
brain.  As  the  mind  is  that  sublimated  substance  we 
call  spirit,  and  is  a  living  being  of  embodied  form,  and 
being  the  reverse  of  dead  matter,  it  is  its  nature  to 
move,  and  the  result  of  that  motion  is  thought  and 
power.     By  the  shrinking  of  the  nerves  of  the  cere. 


180  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

brum  its  motions   are    stilled,    and  thought  is   gone. 
This  is  sleep. 

I  am  done,  and  though  errors  may  be  detected,  I 
care  not.  I  have  spoken  freely,  and  meant  to  do  so. 
And  though  skeptics  may  sneer,  yet  I  see  and  feel  the 
full  weight,  importance,  and  majesty  of  my  subject.  I 
have  every  thing  to  hope  for  in  its  favor,  as  a  powerful 
agent  to  remove  disease,  and  pain,  and  to  succor  the 
distressed. 


LECTURE    X.  181 


LECTURE  X. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 

The  science  of  Electrical  Psychology  is  yet  in  the 
infancy  of  its  existence,  and  as  so  many  astonishing 
cures  have  been  already  effected  under  its  energy  while 
yet  in  the  very  dawn  of  its  being,  so  we  can  at  pres- 
ent form  but  a  faint  conception  of  that  supreme  em- 
pire over  disease  which  it  is  ultimately  destined  in 
some  future  age  to  attain,  or  of  that  magnificence  and 
power  with  which  coming  generations  will  see  it  in- 
vested. The  time  will  come  when  it  shall  stand  forth 
in  the  full  vigor  and  beauty  of  its  manhood,  clothed  in 
its  meridian  splendor,  and  shedding  the  pure  light  and 
heat  of  its  own  healing  power  over  the  millions  of  our 
race.  In  the  great  field  of  sciences  already  known  to 
the  philosopher,  that  of  Electrical  Psychology  stands 
pre-eminent.  In  making  this  declaration  I  do  not  de- 
tract one  iota  from  their  value  or  greatness,  but  on  the 
contrary  yield  to  them  all  their  grandeur.  They  are 
worthy  of  the  Creator  who  established  them  when  he 
founded  the  empire  of  nature,  and  worthy  of  the  mas- 
ter spirits  who  revealed  them  to  the  world.     They  are 


182  ELECTBICAL    PSYCHOLOGY, 

g?  eat,  and  the  various  ranks  of  greatness  they  occupy 
in  the  scale  of  sciences  were  assigned  them  by  that 
unerring  Being  who  arranged  the  order  and  harmony 
of  the  universe,  and  not  by  erring  man.  Then  cen- 
sure me  not  for  the  declaration  I  make  as  it  regards 
their  relative  importance. 

I  am  not  insensible  of  the  fact  that  astronomy  is  a 
science  of  that  peculiar  and  lofty  character  that  knocks 
at  the  door  of  the  heart,  calls  aloud  for  the  most  bold 
and  daring  thought,  and  bids  it  soar  into  the  regions 
of  unbounded  space  to  survey,  measure,  weigh,  and 
balance  suns  and  worlds.  The  bare  sublimity  of  the 
conception  that  man,  who  is  but  "  an  atom  of  an  atom- 
world,"  can  enter  those  vast  dominions  of  the  Creator 
and  take  cognizance  of  the  grandeur  of  their  expan- 
siveness,  the  wisdom  of  their  arrangements,  the  beauty 
of  their  variety,  and  the  order  and  harmony  of  their 
motions,  bespeaks  the  high  origin  of  his  nature  and 
destiny  as  an  intellectual  and  moral  being.  But 
astronomy,  however  vast  may  be  its  fields  of  brilliant 
suns  and  blooming  worlds,  and  however  strong  may  be 
its  claims  upon  the  human  intellect  for  the  exercise  of 
its  highest  powers  and  most  deep-stirring  energies  is, 
after  all,  but  a  physical  science,  and  therefore  inferior 
to  the  science  of  mind. 

if,  from  this  lofty  and  daring  flight  among  countless 
guns  and  worlds,  we  descend  and  dive  into  the  depths 
of  the  globe  on  which  we  tread,  and  should  we  be  able 


LECTURE    X.  18$ 

U>  explore  its  dark  subterranean  dens  and  deepest  cav- 
erns, even  down  to  its  centre — or  should  we  only  range 
its  known  geological  departments  and  survey  the  vari- 
ous strata  of  its  crust,  and  scrutinize  the  marine,  veg- 
etable, and  animal  remains  they  contain  as  so  many 
deposits  and  mementoes  marking  the  footsteps  of  na- 
ture in  former  ages,  we  shall  also  find  a  call  for  the 
deepest  thought  to  scan  the  mysteries  of  geological  sci- 
ence, and  to  search  out  and  explain  the  operations  and 
convulsions  of  nature  in  these  subterranean  regions. 

These  contemplations  on  the  heavens  above,  or  on  the 

» 
structure  of  the  earth  beneath,  are  certainly  sublime, 

and  challenge  the  noblest  powers  of  the  human  soul. 
But  high  as  the  science  of  astronomy  may  call  the 
mind  to  soar,  or  deep  as  the  science  of  geology  may 
urge  it  to  descend,  yet  these,  after  all,  are  only  physical 
in  their  character,  end,  and  aim. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  the  science  of  Electrical  Psy- 
chology being  the  science  of  the  living  mind,  its  silent 
energetic  workings  and  mysterious  powers  are  as  far 
above  these  and  all  others  of  a  like  character  as  mind 
is  supreme  over  senseless  matter.  And  as  the  object 
of  this  science  is  to  produce  such  mental  and  moral 
impressions  upon  the  sick  and  afflicted  as  shall  restore 
theo  to  health  and  happiness,  and  as  this  can  posi- 
tively be  accomplished  upon  all  who  are  in  the  electro- 
psychological  state,  so  the  vast  importance  and  utility 
of  this  science  are  but  faintly  realized  by  the  public  a* 


184  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

largo— are  but  dimly  seen.  Even  when  these  mental 
impressions  can  not  be  made  upon  an  individual  so  as 
even  to  paralyze  a  muscle,  still  I  can,  in  the  great  ma- 
jority of  cases,  either  cure  or  greatly  benefit  the  suf- 
ferer by  physical  impressions  upon  his  body,  provided 
that  he  will  faithfully  follow  my  directions. 

The  remedies  this  science  prescribes  are  always  safe 
because  its  pharmacy  is  of  God,  and  rests  on  the  bo- 
som of  nature.  Even  in  those  cases  where  they  can 
do  no  good  they  will  do  no  harm.  It  discards  those 
powerful,  poisonous,  and  dangerous  medicines  of  the 
old-school  practice  which,  in  their  experiments,  have 
proved  so  fatal  to  the  lives  of  millions  of  our  race.  It 
selects  those  only  from  the  fields  of  nature  which 
grow  in  that  part  of  the  earth's  latitude  where  we  live., 
and  such  must  be  adapted  to  our  constitution  and  con- 
dition by  the  wisdom  of  the  Creator,  who  has  provided 
both  food  and  medicine  to  all  animals  and  creatures  in 
that  part  of  the  globe  where  he  awakened  them  into 
existence.  If  we  watch  the  actions  of  the  animal  cre- 
ation we  shall  learn  that  there  is,  and  indeed  must  be, 
as  much  simplicity  in  our  medicine  as  there  is  in  our 
food.  Allopathy,  Thompsonianism,  Homeopathy,  Hy- 
dropathy, Electropathy,  and  I  will  add,  Aeripathy  and 
Terrapathy,  should  never  be  made  to  exist  as  so  many 
separate  medical  schools,  but  the  excellences  of  them 
all,  so  far  as  they  are  applicable  to  the  relief  of  human 
sufferings    in    any   corresponding    latitude   on  earth, 


LECTURE    X.  185 

should  be  combined  into  one  grand   system  to  cl'REj 
and  call  it  Curapathy. 

Water  is  nature's  universal  solvent,  and  when  prop 
erly  applied,  in  its  various  degrees  of  heat  and  cold,  to 
the  different  parts  of  the  system,  either  externally  or 
internally  as  the  case  may  require,  it  is  a  most  power- 
ful agent  to  restore  the  equilibrium  of  the  circulating 
forces  and  remove  disease.  But  water  alone  is  not 
sufficient  in  every  case.  The  air  in  its  application 
and  various  temperatures  should  not  be  overlooked, 
nor  the  quality  and  temperature  of  that  which  is  in- 
haled into  the  lungs.  We  can  live  longer  without  food 
or  water  than  we  can  without  air.  In  very  warm 
weather,  when  the  air  is  greatly  rarefied  by  heat,  let 
the  invalid,  and  even  the  well  person,  descend  into  a 
dry  cellar,  entirely  under  ground,  undress,  and  there 
not  only  breathe  the  pure,  cool,  and  earth -impregnated 
air  for  half  an  hour  or  more  each  day,  but  let  the 
body  at  the  same  time  be  exposed  to  its  action.  This 
will  brace  the  feeble  system  of  the  invalid,  gradually 
raising  it  up  to  soundness,  and  impart  vigor  and  en- 
ergy to  the  healthy.  Call  this  Aeripathy.  B^it  this 
is  not  sufficient  to  remove  every  case  of  disease.  Elec- 
tricity, galvanism,  and  magnetism,  m  all  their  forms/ 
should  not  be  forgotten.  Electricity  is  the  agent  of 
mind  and  the  invisible  power  of  matter.  These  three 
should  be  passed  through  different  parts  of  the  human 
system  to  ease  pain,  and  renicve  nervous  obstructions 


188  LLECTRJCAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

and  nrrvous  diseases  by  thus  equalizing  the  nervous 
force.  This  is  Electropathy,  and  requires  not  only  a 
familiar  acquaintance  with  electrical  science,  but  also 
great  skill  ir  its  correct  application  to  the  diseased. 

But  this  alone  is  not  sufficient.  We  must  not  be 
unmindful  of  our  mother  earth,  nor  wholly  forget  to 
lean  upon  her  bosom.  Our  bodies  take  into  their  com- 
position, not  only  due  portions  of  electricity ',  air,  and 
water,  these  three  grand  divisions  of  nature,  but  they 
also  claim  a  large  portion  of  earth,  out  of  which  they 
are  said  to  have  been  formed*.  We  are,  indeed,  an 
epitome  of  the  universe,  and  stand  in  an  exact  apti- 
tude and  relationship  to  nature.  This  being  so,  per- 
mit me  to  remark,  that  diseased  persons,  during  the 
summer  season  or  warm  months,  should  seek  some 
farmer's  secluded  plough-field  or  garden,  expose  their 
naked  bodies,  except  the  covered  head,  for  several 
minutes  to  the  rays  of  the  sun.  When  well  heated 
and  rubbed,  cover  them  up  in  the  fresh  earth  for  half 
an  hour  or  more,  then  wash  and  rub  briskly  with  a 
towel,  dry  well  in  the  sun,  and  dress.  At  other  times, 
and  as  often  as  convenient,  let  the  invalid  follow  tha 
ploughman,  and  as  he  turns  up  the  fresh  earth  let  him 
breathe  the  air  while  charged  with  the  invisible  life- 
giving  substances  that  rise  from  the  ground. 

As  the  above  advantages  can  only  be  enjoyed  by 
those  in  the  country,  what  shall  be  done  for  those  in 
cities  1     In  order  to  bo  more  explicit  on  this  interest- 


LECTURE    X.  187 

ing  point,  when  you  build  you  a  house  make  provisions 
for  a  room  that  can  admit  the  sun  through  its  win- 
dows. It  might  be  connected  with  your  bathing 
establishment,  and  in  the  same  room.  Have  at  least 
three  articles  permanently  constructed  like  the  tub  in 
which  you  lie  down  to  bathe  the  body.  Let  one  be 
filled  with  a  pure,  rich,  fertile  earth — another  with  a 
light,  sandy  soil,  and  a  third  with  clay.  Here  let  the 
invalid  each  day  bury  his  body  in  one  of  the  first  tw^, 
and  remain  at  least  half  an  hour,  after  first  having 
exposed  it  to  the  action  of  the  sun.  Then  let  him 
wash,  rub  well  with  a  towel,  and  dry  thoroughly  in 
the  sun  before  dressing.  But  in  case  of  severe  chron- 
ic diseases,  apply  pure  water  to  the  clay  till  it  be- 
comes a  mortar  in  which  the  body  will  sink,  and  let 
the  patient  bathe  his  body  in  this.  If  the  disease  is 
attended  with  inflammation,  let  the  mortar  be  warm 
as  can  be  conveniently  borne,  and  then  wash  the  body 
in  water  of  the  same  temperature.  If  there  is  no  in- 
flammation, let  the  water  be  cold  as  its  usual  summer 
temperature,  and  wash  the  body  in  water  of  the  same, 
rub  briskly  with  a  towel,  and  always  dry  thoroughly 
in  the  sun,  if  possible,  before  dressing.  By  this  mode 
of  treatment  an  empire  over  many  diseases  will  be  ob- 
tained, when  all  other  modes  have  failed.  This  I  will 
name  Terrapathy.  Simple  internal  medicines,  of 
an  animal  or  vegetable  nature,  may  at  times  be  taken 
into  the  stomach,  but  nothing  of  a  poisonous  charac* 


188  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

ter.  I  therefore  repeat,  that  Electrical  Psychology 
is  the  doctrine  of  mental  and  physical  impressions 
to  cure  the  sick.  This  can  often  be  done  -without 
any  medicine  at  all,  by  simply  a  mental  impression, 
which  this  science  involves.  But  when  I  use  phys- 
ical impressions,  I  can  not  restrict  my  action  to  the 
narrow  sectarian  "  medical  schools"  set  up  by  men, 
but  avail  myself  of  a  free  and  untrammeled  range 
in  the  extensive  fields  of  nature.  Hence  I  sum 
up  the  whole  matter  by  re-affirming,  that  Allopathy, 
Thompsonianism,  Homeopathy,  Hydropathy,  Electro- 
pathy, to  which  I  add  Aeripathy  and  Ten-apathy, 
should  never  be  established  as  so  many  separate  med- 
ical schools.  In  the  splendid  science  of  Electrical 
Psychology  I  embrace  the  excellences  of  them  all  so 
far  as  they  are  applicable  to  the  relief  of  human  suffer 
"ngs,  and  combine  them  in  one  grand  system  to  cure, 
and  call  it  Cukapathy. 

I  presume  the  question  will  arise  in  some  minds,  wh} 
should  Terrapathy,  or  the  various  applications  of  differ- 
ent kinds  of  earth  to  the  body,  have  a  tendency  to  cure7 
This  question  is  somewhat  difficult  of  solution,  but  no 
more  so  than  to  solve  why  water,  air,  or  any  medicine 
has  a  tendency  to  produce  a  sanative  result  upon  the 
human  system.  If,  however,  you  will  recall  my  argu 
ments  on  the  philosophy  of  digestion  in  my  eighth  lec- 
ture, and  what  I  said  on  the  philosophy  of  cure  in  my 
ninth,  you  will  have  my  answer  to  the  question,  Why 


LECTURE    i.  189 

should  Terr  apathy  huve  a  tendency  to  cure?  No  phyv 
sician  pretends  to  explain  ichy  his  medicines  produce 
certain  effects  upon  the  system.  He  merely  knows  the 
fact,  and  acts  accordingly.  These  facts,  as  tc  the 
medicinal  virtues  of  certain  substances,  have  in  man^ 
cases,  at  least,  been  learned  from  the  animal  creation 
or  been  discovered  by  accident.  When  one  rattlesnake 
bites  another,  the  wounded  one  will  invariably  eat  a 
certain  plant  and  live.  A  negro,  laboring  in  the  Dismal 
Swamp,  in  North  Carolina,  observing  this,  ate  the  same 
on  being  bitten  by  a  rattlesnake,  and  was  cured.  Others 
laboring  there  have  practiced  it  with  the  same  success. 
Indeed,  nearly  every  useful  vegetable  medicine  now  in 
possession  of  doctors,  has  been  discovered  by  some  old 
woman  in  the  country,  or  by  old  hunters  and  Indians^ 
and,  after  much  learned  opposition  and  medical  sneer- 
ing, it  has  been  at  length  received  as  their  adopted  child, 
and  one  after  another  has  been,  after  passing  through 
a  like  ordeal,  introduced  into  the  medical  family,  and 
claimed  as  their  lawful  paternity.  Even  Peruvian  bark 
was  discovered  by  the  Jesuits  to  be  an  excellent  specific 
for  ague  and  fever.  For  this  they  were  persecuted  by 
the  medical  profession,  who  sneered  at  the  remedy, 
laughed  its  discoverers  to  scorn,  and  moved  the  clergy 
to  fulminate  their  thunders  against  them  and  their 
medicine.  But  they  have  long  ago  adopted  this  perse 
suted  child  into  the  medical  family  and  school.  Now, 
they  can  not  treat  an  intermittent  fever  without  this 


iUO  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

darling.  You  know  that  quinine,  which  is  nianufac* 
tured  from  Peruvian  bark,  is  in  our  day  uall  the  rage,; 
in  treating  ague  and  fever.  But  setting  aside  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  medical  properties  of  substances  wero 
first  discovered,  let  us  come  directly  to  the  subject 
under  consideration. 

What  evidence,  we  may  now  ask,  is  there  that  Teno- 
pathy possesses  any  power  to  cure  1  l£  will  be  remem- 
bered that  I  have  contended  throughout  these  Lectures 
that  electricity  is  the  power  that  controls  matter,  even 
from  the  smallest  particle  up  to  the  most  ponderous 
globes,  and  that  mind  is  a  self-moving  substance  that 
controls  electricity,  and  that  hence  all  power  and  motion 
consubstantially  dwell  in,  and  emanate  from  mind.  I 
have  contended  that  the  sanative  principle  is  in  the 
man,  and  is  involved  in  the  electro-nervous  fluid,  which 
is  the  positive  force  breathed  in  from  the  atmosphere, 
and  the  food  taken  into  the  stomach  is  the  negative 
force  abstracted  from  the  earth,  and  answering  to  it. 
These  two  forces  in  man,  being  the  positive  and  nega 
tive,  meet  together  and  embrace  each  other.  All  the 
elements  of  the  positive  electro-nervous  force  of  the 
brain  blend  with  all  the  corresponding  elements  of  the 
negative  electro-vegetative  force  of  the  food  in  the 
stomach,  and  digestion,  which  is  but  the  transmutation 
of  food  into  the  elements  of  the  system,  proceeds. 
The  body,  being  the  medium  between  these  two  forces, 
is  gradually  and  incessantly  changing,  by  the  old  par- 


LECTURE    X.  191 

ticks  being  dismissed  from  its  service  and  new  ones 
enlisted  to  supply  the  waste  of  this  unceasing  war. 
But  the  electricity  inspired  with  the  air  into  the  lungs, 
in  being  secreted  by  the  brain,  undergoes  a  change  from 
what  it  was  in  the  atmosphere  equal  in  degree  and  cor- 
responding to  that  of  earth  transmuted  into  vegetables 
This  is  evidently  so,  because  in  order  to  enable  it  to 
act  upon  the  negative  electric  for  a  of  the  food  in  the 
stomach,  it  must  stand  in  the  same  positive  relationship 
to  this  that  the  positive  electricity  of  the  atmosphere 
does  to  the  negative  electricity  of  the  globe  in  order  to 
transmute  its  earthy  particles  into  vegetable  substances. 
Should  the  electricity  of  the  atmosphere,  when  taken 
into  the  lungs,  remain  in  its  unchanged  state,  it  could 
never  carry  on  a  perfect  digestion,  so  as  to  transmute 
food  into  flesh  and  bones,  because  a  perfect  aptitude 
between  this  electricity,  the  food,  and  the  living  body 
does  not  exist.  This  can  only  be  done  by  electricity, 
after  having  been  secreted  and  changed  by  the  brain 
into  an  electro-nervous  fluid.  But,  on  the  other  hand, 
this  electro-nervous  fluid  can  not  possibly  transmute 
earthy  particles  into  vegetables,  because  a  perfect 
aptitude  between  these  three  changing  properties 
does  not  exist.  This  can  only  be  done  by  the  elec- 
tricities of  the  atmosphere  and  globe  acting  in  conjunc- 
tion. 

Having  these  general  facts  distinctly  before  us,  wc 
fchall  now  be  able  to  discover  and  appreciate  the  fact, 


192  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

that  Terrapathy  possesses  also,  and  that  too  in  an 
eminent  degree,  its  distinct  powers  to  cure.  To  a 
candid  consideration  of  this  point  I  now  invite  your 
particular  attention. 

In  my  Fourth  Lecture  I  have  argued  the  philosophy 
of  health  and  disease,  and  trust  that  the  ideas  there 
advanced  are  retained  by  you  all.  When  the  mind  is 
serene,  and  its  mental  and  moral  attributes  are  so  bal- 
anced as  to  act  in  perfect  unison;  when  all  the  inter- 
nal circulating  forces  of  the  body  are  equalized  so  as 
to  move  on  in  one  harmonious  and  beautiful  round  in 
their  destined  channels ;  and  when  the  body  externally 
stands  in  the  same  well-balanced  and  beautiful  relation  to 
the  air,  water,  vegetables,  and  earth,  then  health  must 
be  the  natural  result  of  this  state  of  things,  on  the 
principle  of  the  common  law  of  equilibrium,  in  which 
all  other  laws  are  involved.  But  when  any  or  all  of 
these  are  thrown  out  of  balance,  disease  ensues.  How, 
then,  are  these  difficulties  to  be  overcome,  the  circu- 
lating forces  equalized,  the  mind  restored  to  its  wonted 
serenity,  and  health  and  happiness  regained  1  In  re- 
ply to  these  important  and  interesting  queries,  I  would 
in  the  first  place  observe,  that  it  is  admitted  by  all 
who  are  acquainted  with  the  principles  of  electrical 
science,  that  the  atmosphere  is  charged  with  positive. 
electricity,  and  the  earth  with  negative  electrieity. 
Each  of  these  electricities  possess,  of  course,  the  at 
tractive  and  repulsive  forces, 


LECTT&E    X.  193 

Now,  as  all  diseases  are  either  of  a  positive  or  nega- 
tive character,  so  they  must  be  cared  by  the  positive 
or  negative  electricities,  or  by  the  application  of  sub- 
stances that  contain  them.  We  should  first  attempt 
a  cure  by  the  science  of  Electrical  Psychology  alone* 
Whether  this,  of  itself,  would  prove  successful  or  not, 
could  be  tested  in  a  few  moments,  by  an  immediate 
trial  of  mental  impressions  upon  the  patient.  If  these 
were  successful,  the  mind  would  resume  the  balance 
of  its  powers.  Its  peace  and  contentment  would  be 
restored,  and  by  its  mental  energies  the  nervous,  and 
other  circulating  forces  of  the  body  would  be  equalized, 
and  health  and  happiness  ensue.  But  if  the  disease 
can  not  be  psychologically  cured  by  direct  mental  im- 
pressions, then  we  are  compelled  to  resort  to  physical 
remedies,  and  make  what  I  call  physical  impressions 
upon  the  body,  and  through  these  to  reach  the  mind, 
because  the  mind  and  body  intermutually  and  recipro 
cally  affect  each  other. 

Suppose,  then,  the  disease  to  be  a  positive  one,  oc  • 
casioned  by  the  positive  electricity  of  the  system  being 
thrown  out  of  balance.  In  all  diseases  of  this  charac- 
ter, even  though  they  may  be  attended  with  severe 
pain,  yet  there  is  never  any  inflammation.  To  these 
make  cold  applications,  or  the  positive  electric  forces. 
Opposites  should  seldom  be  used,  for  they  can  not  act 
as  permanent  alteratives.  Or  suppose  the  disease  tq 
bv,  a  negatwe  one,  occasioned  by  the  negative  electric- 


194  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

ity  of  the  system  being  thrown  out  of  balance.  All 
diseases  of  this  character  will  be  attended,  not  only 
with  pain,  but  inflammation.  To  these  we  should  ap- 
ply the  negative  forces,  which  belong  in  a  peculiar 
sense  to  the  earth. 

Here  permit  me  to  exhibit  this  interesting  subject  in 
a  more  definite  and  orderly  arrangement,  so  as  to  be 
readily  understood.  Now,  do  }7ou  not  perceive  that, 
according  to  the  peculiar  nature  of  the  disease,  we 
should  apply  electricity,  galvanism,  or  magnetism,  or 
else  air  in  its  various  temperatures,  from  the  coldest 
to  the  warmest  that  can  be  borne  ?  Do  you  not  per- 
ceive that  when  the  disease  requires  it,  that  water,  in 
its  various  temperatures,  should  be  applied,  either  ex- 
ternally or  internally'?  And  do  you  not  perceive  that 
herbs,  in  their  various  decocted  combinations,  or  other- 
wise, should  also,  wnen  the  disease  requires  it,  be  taken 
internally  or  applied  externally,  and  of  such  tempera- 
tures as  to  produce  a  salutary  result  1  We  have  no^ 
descended  from  electricity,  the  finest  known  inert  sub- 
stance in  being,  through  all  the  grand  elementary  de- 
partments of  nature,  down  to  the  vegetable  kingdom. 
Now,  shall  we  stop  here,  or  proceed  down  to  Earth, 
the  Mother  of  us  all,  and  draw  relief  from  her  gener- 
ous bosom?  Shall  we  stop  at  herbs,  earth's  eldest- 
born  children,,  who  torever  hang  upon  her  breast,  of 
shall  we  approach  the  maternal  germinating  and  gen- 
erating power  and  source  from  whence  they  draw  their 


LECTURE    X.  195 

vital  being  ?  As  the  earth  is  electrically  negative*  arii 
peculiar]}7  so,  how  supreme  must  her  powers  he  over  all 
diseases  attended  with  inflammation !  Earthy  sub- 
stances, in  various  clayey  or  other  combinations,  and  in 
the  form  of  poultices,  either  cold  or  warm,  as  the  case 
may  require,  can  be  applied  to  the  diseased  part,  and 
with  the  same  convenience  that  we  do  any  other  sub- 
stance. Or,  when  necessary,  let  the  whole  body  be 
buried  in  soils  of  various  kinds,  in  their  natural  vege- 
tating temperature.  Or  should  the  disease  require  it, 
let  the  body  be  immersed  in  various  mortars  made  of 
one  or  several  kinds  of  clay,  or  other  earthy  compounds. 
The  only  thing  requisite  is  a  good  knowledge  of  their 
chemical  properties,  and  good  judgment  and  skill  how, 
and  wherty  and  in  what  manner  to  apply  them  to  any 
given  disease. 

Consistent  and  oven  irresistible  as  all  this  may  ap- 
pear, yet  the  question  comes  up — Can  any  facts  bo 
produced  as  evidence  of  the  sanative  results  of  Teno- 
pathy 1  Certainly;  there  are  thousands  of  instances 
of  its  power.  But  as  it  has  never  occurred  to  any 
mind  to  bring  it  into  practice  as  a  system,  so  the' in- 
stances of  its  power  are  merely  incidental.  I  have  made 
it  my  study  occasionally  for  five  years,  and  yet  I  am 
now  only  ready  to  introduce  it  into  the  service  of  my 
grand  system  of  Electro-Psychological  Curapathy,  and 
eonmence  its  practice.     But  to  the  point. 

I  might  refer,  with  more  force  than  many  are  aware* 


196  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

to  the  spittle  and  clay  prepared  by  the  Master,  and 
put  on  the  eye's  of  a  blind  man,  whoid  he  then  ordered 
to  go  and  wash  in  the  Pool  of  Siloarn,  and  on  doing  of 
which  he  received  his  sight.  Most  of  Christians  sup- 
pose that  all  this  was  useless,  and  that  he  employed 
some  other  agent  to  restore  his  sight  besides  the  means 
he  manifestly  employed.  But  it  is  in  vain  for  any  one 
to  contend  that  Christ  practiced  a  fraud,  by  putting 
clay  upon  his  eyes  to  produce  no  possible  effect,  and 
then  secretly  and  deceptively  restored  his  sight  by  some 
other  power.  It  was  done  by  the  very  means  that  he 
thus  openly  employed,  and  by  which  he  pretended  it 
was  done,  and  without  a  shade  of  deception  through 
fear  of  men.  It  was  accomplished  by  the  combined 
forces  of  Terrapathy,  Hydropathy,  and  the  faith  and 
confidence  inspired  in  the  blind  man's  mind  by  a  strong 
psychological  impression. 

But  without  any  reference  whatever  to  the  Master,  I 
will,  in  as  few  words  as  possible,  show  that  the  various 
earths  possess  a  most  powerful  electro-absorbent  force 
to  draw  out  inflammation  from  the  human  system, 
and  with  which  no  other  known  substances  in  existence 
can  compare.  The  smallest  effect  we  witness  on  earth 
is  often  pregnant  with  the  greatest  power,  and  portends 
the  most  salutary  or  awful  results.  A  straw  shows  the 
direction  of  the  current,  however  deep  its  waters,  or 
secret  its  irresistible  movement. 

Take  then,  for  example,  the  sting  of  the  bee,  or  thfr 


LECTURE    X.  197 

bite  of  any  poisonous  insect,  where  the  pain,  swelling, 
and  inflammation  would  be  great.  TLe  moment  the 
circumstance  occurs  take  almost  any  kind  of  earth  at 
hand  oapable  of  producing  vegetation,  moisten  it  with 
spittle  or  blood-warm  water,  apply  it  to  the  wound,  and 
in  a  few  moments  the  poison  will  be  extracted,  and 
every  painful  result  arrested.  But  a  blue  or  white  clay 
soij,  moistened  with  warm  water  or  spittle,  is  prefera- 
ble, if  it  can  be  obtained  without  delay. 

As  to  the  drawing  and  absorbent  powers  of  clay  and 
other  earths,  I  might  bring  a  few  simple  facts.  For 
instance,  let  oil  or  grease  be  spilled  upon  the  floor,  and 
remain  till  the  board  be  saturated.  No  soap  and  water 
can  remove  it — no  washings  can  make  it  disappear ;  yet 
clay,  rightly  prepared,  will  extract  it.  Or  suppose 
there  are  oil  or  grease  spots  upon  a  silk  dress.  Rub 
pulverized  magnesia  on  the  opposite  or  wrong  side  of 
the  dress,  then  press  a  hot  iron  to  the  grease  spot  on  the 
right  side,  and  the  whole  will  instantly  disappear,  and 
leave  the  silk  as  bright  and  fair  as  ever.  The  same 
result  may  be  obtained  by  using  pulverized  French 
chalk  on  any  beautiful  woolen  dresses  or  shawls.  Now 
it  is  utterly  impossible  that  these  effects  could  be  pro- 
cluced  unless  these  substances  possessed  a  supreme 
electro-absorbent  power.  Or  let  clothing  be  saturated 
with  any  substance  producing  the  strongest  possible  and 
the  most  pungent  and  enduring  scent,  even  that  of  the 
skunk,  and  when  no  washing,  no  airing  can  remove  it 


£98  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY 

let  it  be  buried  in  any  soil  capable  of  producing  a  fre* 
vegetation,  and  in  three  or  four  days  the  whole  will 
entirely  disappear. 

The  question  arises — What  is  the  cause  of  this?  I 
answer  by  saying,  that  the  human  stomach  can  not, 
neither  can  that  of  any  other  animal,  digest  any  crea- 
ture swallowed  alive,  so  long  as  it  possesses  animal  life. 
It  must  die  before  the  stomach  can  digest  and  appro- 
priate it  to  the  elements  that  compose  the  body,  and 
until  then  the  creature  must  sustain  its  existence  by 
drawing  its  sustenance  from  the  vital  force  of  the  body. 
So  the  earth  can  not  digest,  that  is,  decompose,  any 
substance  while  that  substance  has  either  animal  or 
vegetable  life.  These  both  draw  strength  and  substance 
from  her.  But  the  moment  they  are  dead  she  can  di- 
gest and  appropriate  them  to  her  own  use,  and  thus  in- 
vigorate and  fructify  herself.  Hence  it  is  seen  why 
Terrapathy  can  cure.  It  is  because  all  substances  in 
the  human  system  that  are  adverse  to  animal  life  and 
healthy  the  earth  can  appropriate  to  herself,  and  so  she 
can  all  essences  of  the  most  pungent  smell.  She  digests 
the  whole,  and  manufactures  and  re-absorbs  them  again 
into  the  elements  that  compose  her  maternal  body. 
She  removes  every  substance  from  the  human  system 
adverse  to  the  laws  of  animal  life,  and  leaves  perfect 
health.  Hence  the  supremacy  of  Electro-Psychological 
Curapathy  over  all  medical  systems  in  being  is  clearly 
.manifest,  and  I  add  no  more. 


LECTURE    XI  199 


LECTURE   XL 

PRIVATE  INSTRUCTIONS  TO   THE  CLASS. 

the    secret    revealed. 

Gentlemen  : 

In  my  last  Lecture  I  have  argued  the  supremacy  :f 
Curapathy  over  all  medical  systems  in  existence,  for  in 
it  are  combined  the  excellences  of  them  all ;  and,  in 
addition  to  these,  it  contains  modes  of  treatment  that 
no  medical  science  as  yet  involves.  In  this  peculiar 
position  of  my  subject  it  will  be  perceived  by  all  those 
who  have  paid  any  attention  to  the  science  of  Electrical 
Psychology,  that  it  is  of  most  paramount  importance 
to  the  human  race,  as  a  curative  agent,  and  should, 
therefore,  be  understood  by  all,  so  far,  at  least,  as  to 
apply  it  successfully  to  "the  removal  of  disease  and 
pain.  It  should  be  practically  understood  by  all  med- 
ical men.  This  will  cost  them  only  the  trifling  sum  of 
ten  dollars,  and  in  the  course  of  their  practice  it  would 
be  worth  thousands  to  them,  and  at  the  same  time 
afford  them  the  supreme  pleasure  of  having  saved  many 
a  life,  where  medicine  must  have  failed.  To  obtain  a 
good  knowledge  of  this  science  will  require  about  rrvs 


200  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

lessons  of  two  hours  each  ;  and  as  I  am  now  per- 
manently settled  in  New  York  city,  I  am  ready  to  im- 
part these  instructions  to  all  persons  of  good  moral 
character  who  may  call.  If  persons  at  a  distance  will 
form  a  class  sufficiently  large  to  warrant  the  expense, 
and  address  me  a  letter  at  New  York,  I  will  visit  them 
one  week,  and  not  only  give  private  instructions  to  the 
class,  but  will  deliver,  in  the  mean  time,  five  public 
evening  lectures  besides,  and  perform  most  interesting 
experiments,  of  which  the  class  may  have  the  profit  of 
the  admission  fee.  This  would  generally  pay  their  tui- 
tion, and  in  many  instances  exceed  it. 

I  make  this  proposal,  because  hundreds  of  ignorant 
individuals  have  undertaken  to  lecture  upon,  and  even 
to  teach  this  science,  who  have  never  received  any  in- 
struction from  me,  either  verbal  or  written.  Theso 
persons  pretend  to  teach  it,  and  that,  too,  for  any  price 
they  can  obtain,  from  five  dollars  down  to  twenty-five 
cents  !  They  had  better  receive  "  a  penny  for  their 
thoughts"  so  as  to  adapt  the  price  of  tuition  to  the 
amount  of  information  they  impart.  All  the  regular 
students  to  whom  I  have  taught  the  science  of  Elec- 
trical Psychology  have  been  laid  under  written  obliga- 
tions, and  have  seriously  pledged  their  sacred  honor 
never  to  teach  it  under  ten  dollars.  Those,  therefore, 
who  are  qualified  teachers  and  honorable  men  do  still 
continue  to  adhere  to  the  obligations  they  signed,  ami 
charge  the  original  fee,     Those  who  vary  from  it  have 


LECTURE    XL  201 

either  forfeited  their  obligatk ns,  01  else  never  learned 
the  science  as  they  ought ;  and  hence  the  public  will 
know  who  and  what  they  are. 

It  is  due  to  myself  to  state,  that  some  have  changed 
the  name  of  this  science  to  that  of  "  Electro  Biol 
ogy,"  and  have  claimed  authorship  as  to  its  discovery, 
and  have  even  stated  that  Electro  Biology  has  no  con- 
nection whatever  with  Electrical  Psychology,  but  is  an 
entirely  distinct  science.  This  I  am  compelled  to  give 
a  most  decided  and  unqualified  denial.  I  have  visited 
some  of  the  principal  places  where  the  Biologists  have 
lectured,  and  have  gathered  all  the  facts  in  relation  to 
their  proceedings  and  the  character  of  their  experi- 
ments. I  am  acquainted  with  its  whole  history,  an<? 
the  circumstances  under  which  it  received  its  name, 
and  why  Electrical  Psychology  was  first  called  "  Elec 
*ro  Biology."  Should  I,  in  a  future  day,  be  compelled 
m  self-defense  to  take  this  subject  in  hand,  I  shall 
make  all  the  necessary  disclosures,  which  the  interest 
and  advancement  of  this  science  may  require,  or  just- 
ice and  duty  demand.  Fox  the  present  they  must  rest 
in  my  bosom  till  circumstances  shall  call  them  forth. 
I  would  now  only  say,  that  the  science  of  Electrical 
Psychology  is  identical  ivith  that  of  Bkctro  Biology, 
and  that  the  latter  has  no  existent  only  what  it 
draws  from  the  former ',  unless  it  Is  the  mere  half 
vf  its  name. 

I  have  already  stated^that  there  are  certain  indi- 
9* 


202  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY* 

riduais  who  have  gone  through  the  country  lecturing, 
and  pretending  to  teach  this  science  for  one  or  two  dol- 
lars, and  even  for  twenty-five  cents,  when  they  could 
get  no  more,  who  are  utterly  ignorant  of  the  human 
system — ignorant  of  those  diseases  that  assail  it,  and 
ignorant  of  the  common  principles  involved  in  any  of  the 
sciences.  Such  may  he  able  to  inform  you  how  to  close 
a  man's  eyes — how  to  paralyze  or  move  his  limbs,  and 
how  to  make  a  psychological  impression  on  his  mind* 
But  how  can  they  teach  any  one  its  philosophical  ap- 
plication to  disease,  or  to  any  useful  medical  purpose  ? 
Every  man  of  common  sense  must  perceive  that  this  is 
impossible  without  the  knowledge  of  science  in  general. 
Such  incompetent  individuals  have  done  Electrical 
Psychology  a  serious  injury,  and  in  several  places  have 
brought  it  into  disrepute. 

Under  all  these  circumstances,  I  feel  it  my  duty  to 
put  an  end  to  the  worse  than  useless  labors  of  such 
individuals,  by  fully  explaining  the  secret  mode  of 
operation — how  an  individual  may  be  controlled  by 
mental  and  physical  impressions.  I  would  not  be  un- 
derstood that  this  can  be  wholly  done  by  language.  It 
requires  a  visible  and  personal  application  of  what  the 
theory  involves — a  practical  illustration  as  to  perform- 
ing experiments,  and  Low  to  apply  it  successfully  tG 
disease.  I  will,  however,  do  it  faithfully,  so  far  aa 
language  can  accomplish  it,  and  far  beyond  what  any 
lecturer  now  in  tlw  field  attempts  to  explain  to  his  class 


LECTURE    XI,  203 

of  pupil  3.  The  most  have  failed  to  give  satisfaction 
to  those  whom  they  have  undertaken  to  instruct,  and 
m  many  cases  serious  difficulties  have  occurred  in  rels«> 
tion  to  the  sum  paid  for  instruction.  I  have  therefore 
come  to  the  conclusion  not  to  suffer  odium  in  future  to 
be  brought  upon  this  science,  if  in  my  power  to  prevent 
it.  I  proceed,  therefore,  to  give  the  instructions  to  all, 
so  that  they  may  know  how  to  experiment  upon  their 
fellow-men,  as  well  as  those  generally  who  go  about  as 
lecturers  and  teachers  of  this  science.  In  the  accom- 
plishment of  this  I  shall  be  brief  as  possible.  What 
requires  ten  hours  of  instruction  can  not,  by  any  means, 
he  communicated  fully  in  two  lectures  of  half  an  hour 
each.  Yet  I  will  embody  all,  and  even  more  than  is 
generally  given  to  any  class  of  pupils  by  those  claiming 
to  be  teachers. 

I  would,  in  the  first  place,  remark,  that  the  Creator 
has  stamped  simplicity,  as  far  as  possible,  upon  each 
'separate  part  of  the  human  system.  As  I  remarked  in 
my  sixth  Lecture,  each  organ  of  the  body  performs  but 
one  function.  The  eye  sees,  the  ear  hears,  the  olfac- 
tories smell,  the  glands  taste,  the  heart  throbs  to  regu- 
late the  blood,  the  hands  handle,  the  feet  walk,  the 
liver  secretes  its  bile,  and  the  stomach  digests  its  food. 
The  eye  never  hears,  and  the  ear  never  sees.  So  there 
evidently  is  but  one  nerve  or  set  of  nerves  through 
nrhich  impressions  from  the  external  world  are  com- 
municated to  the  mind.     This  is  certain,  because  the 


£04  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

mind  can  leceive  but  one  idea  at  a  time.  It  is  innra* 
terial  ho^  rapidly  soever  ideas  may  be  transmitted  to 
the  mind,  they  are  nevertheless  successive,  and  two 
ideas  can  not  possibly  be  conceived,  at  the  same  in- 
stantj  by  the  mind.  One  must  succeed  the  other.  But 
as  there  are  millions  of  nerves  in  the  human  brain,  and 
if  it  were  alike  the  office  of  each  to  communicate  ideas 
to  the  mind,  then  as  many  millions  of  ideas  as  there 
are  nerves  might  be  transmitted  to  the  mind  at  the 
same  instant.  But  we  are  conscious  that  they  are  suc- 
cessively and  not  simultaneously  conceived.  We  can 
not  attend  to  two  public  speakers  at  once,  so  as  to  un- 
derstand their  ideas,  if  both  were  before  us,  and  each 
addressing  us  upon  a  different  subject.  With  the  same 
earnestness  that  we  give  heed  to  the  one,  we  must  neg- 
lect the  other.  Indeed,  there  can  be  no  doubt  in  rela- 
tion to  the  fact  of  ideas  being  successively  communi- 
cated to  the  mind,  if  we  reflect  that  even  one  public 
speaker  by  too  rapid  a  delivery  often  confuses  the 
hearer. 

The  mind,  as  a  living  being  of  embodied  form,  has 
its  spiritual  brain  and  spiritual  organs  answering  to 
the  correspondent  phrenological  organs  of  the  physical 
brain  through  which  it  manifests  itself.  The  latter 
aa*e,  indeed,  a  production  from  the  former,  as  much  so 
as  the  riant  and  its  form  are  a  production  from  the  life 
af  the  seed.  The  nerve,  or  family  of  nerves,  through 
which  imnression*  are  communicated  to  the  mind,  and 


LECTl  RE    XI.  205 

by  the  mind  to  the  oody,  to  move  its  various  parts,  is 
located  in  the  organ  of  Individuality.  All  the  organs 
of  the  brain,  and,  indeed,  of  the  whole  system,  are 
double,  and  so  are  the  senses  likewise.  The  brain  has 
its  two  hemispheres,  its  two  eyes,  two  ears,  two  glands 
of  taste,  and  two  olfactories  of  smell.  We  have  two 
hands,  two  feet,  and  the  heart  has  its  two  auricles  and 
two  ventricles.  The  organ  of  Individuality  is  also 
dcuble.  It  is  located  in  the  centre  of  the  lower  part 
of  the  forehead,  sends  off  branches  to  the  optic,  audi- 
tory, and  olfactory  nerves — extends  through  both  hem- 
ispheres of  the  brain,  passes  down  the  spinal  marrow, 
and  in  its  course  sends  oif  branches  to  the  arms  and 
lower  limbs,  and,  indeed,  to  all  the  voluntary  parts  of 
the  body.  Hence  all  voluntary  motion  originating  in 
mind  is  communicated  to  the  organ  of  Individuality, 
and  from  thence  is  transmitted  through  correspondent 
nerves  to  that  part  of  the  body  where  the  mind  directs 
motion  to  be  made.  Hence  the  organ  of  Individuality 
is  the  one  that  constitutes  our  individualism,  or  personal 
identity,  and  by  which  we  identify  all  individual  objects 
in  the  external  woild.  And  though  this  organ,  like  all 
the  other  phrenological  organs  of  the  brain,  is  made  up 
of  a  congeries  of  nerves,  yet  I  am  satisfied  that  it  has 
but  one  single  identical  nerve  that  is  moved  by  a  men- 
tal impression,  and  that  one  moves  by  sympathy  the 
whole  family  of  nerves  dwelling  in  that  organ ;  and 
thus  motion  is  communicated  to  every  voluntary  da- 


206  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

partment  of  the  body  -where  the  mind,  as  the  motive 
power,  directs. 

For  illustration  of  the  above,  suppose  a  pebble  were 
thrown  into  the  centre  of  Lake  Superior.  It  would 
displace  its  waters,  and  produce  a  circle.  That  circle 
would  produce  a  second,  and  that  second  would  procluco 
a  third  circle,  and  so  on,  each  continuing  to  lessen  in 
its  action  until  it  apparently  died  away.  But  though 
imperceptible  to  the  naked  eye,  yet  the  successive  ac- 
tion would  be  continued  even  to  the  distant  shores,  and 
move  every  drop  of  water  from  the  centre  to  the  cir- 
cumference. And  not  only  so,  but  that  pebble  would 
displace,  by  sympathy,  every  particle  of  water  in  the 
basined  lake,  even  to  its  greatest  depth.  This  is  evi- 
dent, because  if  a  rock,  half  the  size  of  that  mighty 
lake,  were  thrown  into  its  centre,  the  universal  disturb- 
ance of  every  particle  of  water  would  be  evident  and 
perceptible.  On  the  same  principle,  a  pebble — yes,  a 
single  grain  of  sand — wrould  produce  the  same  result, 
only  on  a  smaller  scale.  So  the  centre  nerve  (if  I  may 
bo  speak)  of  the  organ  of  Individuality  is  moved  by  a 
mental  impression,  and  this  movement  communicates 
motion  by  sympathetic  impulse  to  each  and  every  volun- 
tary part  of  the  body  where  the  mind  directs.  Is  not 
this  the  true  philosophy  of  what  we  call  sympathy  ex- 
isting between  the  different  parts  of  the  human  body 
and  the  various  attributes  of  the  soul,  and  between  one 
individual  and   another  1      And  is  not  this  the  true 


LECTURE    XI.  20? 

philosophy  of  perse  nal  identity,  on  the  mystery  of 
which  so  much  has  been  written  1  Did  not  the  mind 
of  man  possess  a  spiritual  organ  of  Individuality  cor- 
responding to  the  physical  one  of  the  brain,  how  then 
could  either  personal  identity  or  sympathy  be  recog- 
nized, or  even  exist  1  This  one  spiritual  organ  consti- 
tutes the  unity  of  all  the  attributes  of  the  mind,  spirit, 
soul,  or  whatever  you  please  to  call  that  part  of  man 
which  is  to  exist  immortal  in  a  future  world.  Tho 
phrenological  organs  of  the  human  brain  are  but  a 
daguerreotype  manifestation — a  result  of  the  corre- 
spondent spiritual  organs  of  the  living  mind.  They 
constitute  the  physical  apartments  of  the  earthly  house 
which  is  fitted  up  as  a  temporary  residence  for  the  in 
visible  inhabitant  within,  during  its  continuance  here. 

Having  clearly  placed  before  you  those  interesting 
points  that  involve  the  ever  sweet  and  pleasing  doctrine 
of  sympathy,  I  will  now  proceed  to  instruct  you  how  an 
individual  can  be  electrically  and  psychologically  con- 
trolled. This  is  a  subject  involving  vast  utility  as  a 
curative  power  to  the  sick  and  distressed,  and  is  there- 
fore full  of  deep  and  stirring  interest  to  every  feeling 
heart.  To  control  is  to  cure.  In  order  to  affect  an 
individual,  and  to  success!  ully  control  his  mind  and 
muscles,  it  is,  in  the  first  place,  necessary  that  he 
should  stand  in  a  negative  relation  to  the  operator 
us  to  the  doctrine  of  impressions.  Some  persons  are 
aaturall}  in  this  condition,  were  born  in  it,  live  in  it* 


203  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

and  will  die  in  it.  Others  are  not  in  this  state,  and 
hence  means  must  be  used  to  bring  them  there  before 
they  can  be  controlled.  In  order  to  determine  whether 
an  individual  stands  in  this  negative  relation  to  youi  - 
self,  as  the  operator,  you  must  first  proceed  to  take 
the  communication,  as  we  term  it.  This  is  inva- 
riably and  philosophically  done  through  the  medium  of 
two  points.  I  care  not  whether  it  be  effected  by  visible 
contact  or  otherwise,  it  is  still  done  through  the  me- 
dium of  two  points,  or  the  negative  and  positive  electric 
forces,  and  through  the  same  nerve,  or  family  of  nerves, 
that  constitutes,  phrenologically,  our  individualism  or 
personal  identity. 

Before  I  proceed  to  notice  the  most  easy,  sure,  and 
iirect  mode  by  which  an  electro-psychological  commu- 
nication may  be  established,  I  will,  in  the  first  place9 
speak  of  the  philosophy  of  communication  in  general. 
It  is  evident  that  the  positive  and  negative  forces  of 
the  two  electricities  pervade  all  nature.  These  I  call 
in  my  seventh  Lecture  the  male  and  female  electrici- 
ties. These  two  forces  not  only  permeate,  more  or 
less,  all  substances  in  nature,  but  they  also  unceasingly 
emanate  from  them  in  electric  circles.  Hence,  as  man 
is  a  part  of  the  universe,  he  constantly  takes  into  his 
system  large  portions  of  electricity  with  the  air  he  in- 
spires, with  the  water  he  drinks,  and  wTith  the  food  he 
eats.  And  by  mental  and  muscular  action,  and  the 
Common    operations   of  animal    life,   he    unceasingly 


LECTURE    XI.  209 

throws  it  off  through  the  nervous  foroe.  On  passing 
from  his  system  into  the  surrounding  elements,  it  forms 
around  him  his  electric  or  magnetic  circle.  How  large 
this  circle  may  be  is  as  yet  to  us  unknown.  Hence, 
when  two  individuals  come  within  a  certain  distance  of 
each  other,  their  circles  meet,  and  touch  each  other  at 
two  points.  And  if  one  of  these  individuals  is  in  the 
electro-psychological  state,  the  communication  will  bo 
taken  through  the  positive  and  negative  forces.  And 
though  this  communication  was  taken  without  personal 
contact,  yet  it  was  done  through  the  nerve  that  consti- 
tutes our  individualism  or  personal  identity.  A  com- 
munication in  this  manner  can  be  established  with  those 
persons  only  who  are  very  sensitive.  As  only  about- 
one  in  twenty-five  is  naturally  in  this  state,  so  I  can 
Etep  before  an  audience  of  a  thousand  persons,  state  to 
them  what  I  intend  to  do,  so  that  all  shall  understand 
me ;  then  request  them  all  to  close  their  eyes  firmly, 
and  say,  You  can  not  open  your  eyes  !  and  forty  out 
of  the  thousand  will  be  unable  to  do  so.  All  this  can 
be  performed  in  five  minutes  after  entering  the  hall. 

It  is,  however,  certain,  that  no  effect  can  be  produced 
till  you  establish  a  thorough  communication  between 
yourself  and  the  subject  through  the  nervous  force  of 
the  organ  of  Individuality  that  constitutes  his  persona] 
identity*  And  as  the  centre  or  moving  nerve  of  this 
organ  has  sympathy  with  all  the  voluntary  nerves  cf 
feLe  system^  and  as  they  reciprocally  affect  each  other 


210  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGT.        ' 

bo  you  can  establish  a  psychological  communication  by 
touching  any  part  of  the  system  where  voluntary  nerves 
are  located,  and  particularly  of  those  individuals  who 
are  very  sensitive  and  impressible.  But  the  most  nat- 
ural mode  to  get  a  good  communication,  and  the  one 
least  liable  to  be  detected  by  the  audience,  is  to  take 
the  individual  by  the  hand,  and  in  the  same  manner  as 
though  you  were  going  to  shake  hands.  Press  your 
thumb  with  moderate  force  upon  the  ulnar  nerve, 
which  spreads  its  branches  to  the  ring  and  little  finger 
of  the  hand.  The  pressure  should  be  nearly  an  inch 
above  the  knuckle,  and  in  range  of  the  ring  finger. 
Lay  the  ball  of  the  thumb  fiat  and  partially  crosswise, 
so  as  to  cover  the  minute  branches  of  this  nerve  of 
motion  and  sensation.  The  pressure,  though  firm, 
should  not  be  so  great  as  to  produce  pain  or  the  least 
uneasiness  to  the  subject.  When  you  first  take  him 
by  the  hand,  request  him  to  place  his  eyes  upon  yours, 
and  to  keep  them  fixed,  so  that  he  may  see  every  emo- 
tion of  your  mind  expressed  in  the  countenance.  Con- 
tinue this  position  and  also  the  pressure  upon  this  cu- 
bital nerve  for  half  a  minute  or  more.  Then  request 
nim  to  close  his  eyes,  and  with  your  fingers  gently 
brush  downward*  several  times  over  the  eyelids,  as 
though  fastening  them  firmly  together.  Throughout  the 
whole  process  feel  within  yourself  a  fixed  determina- 
tion to  close  them,  so  as  to  express  that  determination 
folly  in  your  countenance  and  manner.     Having  don* 


LECTURE    XI.  '211 

this,  place  your  hand  on  the  top  of  his  head  and  press 
your  thumb  firmly  on  the  organ  of  Individuality,  bear- 
ing partially  downward,  and  with  the  other  thumb  still 
pressing  the  ulnar  nerve,  tell  him — you  can  not 
open  your  eyes;  !  Remember,  that  your  manner,  ycur 
expression  of  countenance,  \our  motions,  and  your  Ian 
guage  must  all  be  of  the  most  positive  character.  If 
he  succeed  in  opening  his  eyes,  try  it  once  or  twice 
more,  because  impressions,  whether  physical  or  mental, 
continue  to  deepen  by  repetition.  In  case,  however, 
that  you  can  not  close  his  eyes,  nor  see  any  effect  pro- 
duced upon  them,  you  should  cease  making  any  further 
efforts,  because  you  have  now  fairly  tested  that  his 
mind  and  body  both  stand  in  a  positive  relation  to 
yours  as  it  regards  the  doctrine  of  impressions. 

There  is  yet  another  mode  of  communication  that  I 
have  discovered,  which  is  far  preferable  to  the  one  just 
noticed,  is  supreme  over  all  others,  and  will  remain  so 
till  Omnipotence  shall  see  fit  to  change  the  nervous 
system  of  man.  This  is  the  Median  Nerve,  which 
is  the  second  of  the  brachial  plexus.  It  is  a  compound 
nerve  having  the  power  of  both  motion  and  sensation.  It 
is  located  in  the  centre  of  the  upper  part  of  the  palm  of 
the  hand  near  where  it  joins  the  wrist.  In  order  to  take 
the  communication  through  this  medium,  you  must  take 
the  subject  by  the  hand  with  the  palm  upward,  and 
place  the  ball  of  your  thumb  in  the  centre  of  his  hand 
near  the  root  of  his  thumb,  and  give  a  moderate  but 


212  ELECTRICAL    PSYC7I0L0GY. 

firm  pressure.  The  astonishing  nature  of  the  iinpres* 
sion  can  only  be  equaled  by  the  result  produced.  It 
is  a  nerve  of  voluntary  motion  as  well  as  sensation, 
and  therefore  belongs  to,  and  has  its  origin  in,  the  cer- 
ebrum. True,  like  the  other  nerves,. it  can  be  traced 
directly  no  farther  than  the  spinal  cord,  yet  there  is  no 
difficulty  in  determining  its  origin  to  be  in  the  cere- 
brum, because  that  is  the  organ  of  all  voluntary  mo- 
tion, even  as  the  cerebellum  is  the  organ  of  all  invol- 
untary motion.  This  mode  of  communication  trans- 
cends all  others,  and  will  answer  in  all  possible' cases, 
even  upon  persons  the  most  difficult  to  control,  as  well 
as  upon  those  who  are  the  most  sensitive  and  impress- 
ible. I  care  not  how  you  obtain  the  communication 
with  -an  individual — whether  it  be  without  contact,  or 
by  touching  any  part  of  the  body,  yet  the  communi- 
cation must  ultimately  be  established  through  the  Me- 
dian Nerve  as  the  centre  telegraphic  force  from  the 
organ  of  Individuality,  through  which  organ  all  ideas 
and  all  impressions  are  transmitted  from  the  external 
world  to  the  mind,  and  through  that  same  organ  are 
transmitted  by  the  volitions  of  the  mind  to  the  different 
parts  of  the  body.  Even  if  the  communication  is 
taken  by  pressure  on  the  ulnar  nerve,  yet  it  is  neverthe- 
less communicated  by  sympathy  to  the  Median  Nerve, 
and  through  which  alone  the  communication  becomea 
perfect.  There  is  no  question,  in  my  mind,  that  tho 
optic,  the  auditory,  and  the  olfactory  nerves,  as  well 


LECTURE    XI.  213 

as  those  of  taste,  are  but  branches  of  the  same  com* 
mon  nerve  by  which  impressions  or  ideas  are  transmit- 
ted to  the  mind  through  the  organ  of  Individuality. 
Those  whom  I  have  instructed,  will  please  to  remember 
this.  I  desire  you,  and  all,  in  order  to  experiment 
with  power,  to  keep  up  a  perfect  uniformity  in  taking 
the  communication  through  the  Median  Nerve,  and 
through  this  to  transmit  the  electric  current  to  the 
brain  and  electrify  the  body. 

I  am  aware  that  the  exact  location  of  this  nerve  is 
somewhat  difficult  to  find,  unless  you  are  personally  in- 
Btructed.  If  you  succeed  in  closing  the  subject's  eyes 
by  the  above  mode,  you  may  then  request  him  to  put 
his  hands  on  his  head,  or  in  any  other  position  you 
choose,  and  tell  him,  You  can  not  stir  them  !  In  case 
you  succeed,  request  him  to  be  seated,  and  tell  him. 
You  can  not  rise  !  If  you  are  successful  in  this,  re- 
quest him  to  put  his  hands  in  motion,  and  tell  him, 
You  can  not  stop  them  !  If  you  succeed,  request  him 
to  walk  the  floor,  and  tell  him,  You  can  not  cease 
walking. !  And  so  you  may  continue  to  perform  ex- 
periments involving  muscular  motion  and  paralysis  of 
any  kind  that  may  occur  to  your  mmd,  till  you  can 
completely  control  him,  in  arresting  or  moving  all  tho 
voluntary  parts  of  his  system.  When  this  is  accom- 
plished, we  say,  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  he  i?  in 
the  electrical  state. 

You  may,  perhaps,  not  be  able  to  affect  him  any  fur* 


214  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

fcher ;  and  as  you  can  not  know  how  this  matter  stands 
without  the  trial,  so  you  will  next  proceed  to  produce 
montal  impressions  by  operating  upon  his  mind  only, 
If  he  is  entirely  in  the  state,  you  can  make  him  see  that 
a  cane  is  a  living  snake  or  eel ;  that  a  hat  is  a  halibut 
or  flounder  ;  a  handkerchief  is  a  bird,  child,  or  rabbit ; 
or  that  the  moon  or  a  star  falls  on  a  person  in  the 
audience,  and  sets  him  on  fire,  and  you  can  make  him 
hasten  to  extinguish  it.  You  can  make  him  see  a  river, 
and  on  it  a  steamboat  crowded  with  human  beings. 
You  can  make  him  see  the  boilei  burst,  and  the  boat 
blow  up,  with  his  father  or  mother,  brother  or  sister, 
or  wife  or  child  on  board.  You  can  lay  out  the  lifeless 
corpse  before  him  in  state,  cause  him  to  kneel  at  its 
side,  and  to  freely  shed  over  it  the  tears  of  affection 
and  bereavement.  You  can  suddenly  show  him  a  bo}r 
or  girl,  and  he  sees  in  them  the  lost  father  or  mother 
standing  before  him,  and  gives  the  warm  embrace. 
You  can  change  his  own  personal  identity,  and  make 
him  believe  that  he  is  a  child  two  or  three  years  old, 
and  inspire  him  with  the  artless  feelings  of  that  age ; 
or  that  he  is  an  aged  man,  or  even  a  woman,  or  a  negro, 
or  some  renowned  statesman  or  hero.  You  can  change 
the  taste  of  water  to  that  of  vinegar,  wormwood,  honey, 
or  of  any  liquors  you  please.  In  like  manner  you  can 
operate  on  his  hearing  and  smelling,  as  well  as  on  his 
sight,  feeling,  and  taste-  When  you  can  produce  such 
mental  hallucinations  as   these  on  all  his  senses,  or 


LECTURE    XI-  215 

thousands  of  others  that  may  suggest  themselves  to 
your  mind,  we  say,  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  that 
he  is  in  the  psychological  state. 

I  have  thus  far  confined  my  remarks  to  that  class  of 
individuals  who  are  naturally  in  the  electro-psycho- 
logical state,  and  shown  you  clearly  how  a  communica- 
tion in  its  various  modes  may  be  taken,  so  as  to  sue  - 
cessfully  control  them  both  physically  and  mentally. 
The  average  number  of  persons  in  the  United  States 
who  are  naturally  in  the  psychological  state  is  about 
one  in  twenty-five.  These  can  be  cured  of  any  func- 
tional diseases  with  which  they  may  be  assailed,  by 
simply  performing  upon  them  the  experiments  I  have 
just  named,  or  any  others  of  a  like  character.  And 
not  only  so,  but  upon  such  any  surgical  operation  may 
be  performed  without  the  slightest  degree  of  pain,  and 
that,  too,  while  they  are  wide  awake,  and  in  perfect 
possession  of  all  their  reasoning  faculties.  But  while 
only  one  in  twenty-five  is  entirely  in  this  state,  and  nat- 
urally so,  yet  there  is,  perhaps,  one  in  twelve  who  is 
partially  in  the  state,  and  on  whom  experiments  can  be 
performed  to  a  greater  or  less  extent.  All  these,  in 
connection  with  those  on  whom  you  can  produce  no 
effect  whatever,  are  to  be  subjected  to  a  process  to 
bring  them  into  the  electro-psychological  state,  and  we 
see,  too,  how  vastly  important  it  is  that  this,  if  possi- 
ble, should  he  done.  This,  indeed,  would  be  ti\Q  no- 
biest  triumph  ever  achieved  by  man.     It  would  be  o 


216  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

triumph  01  er  disease  and  pain,  and  prepare  the  huiuaa 
race  to  weur  out  with  age. 

In  order  to  bring  about  this  result,  I  know,  at  pres- 
ent, of  no  better  process  than  the  following :  Take 
pure  zinc  and  silver,  with  a  copper  wire,  as  a  conductor, 
passed  through  the  zinc,  so  as  to  come  in  contact  with 
the  silver.  For  convenience,  take  a  piece  of  zinc  the 
size  of  a  cent,  but  somewhat  thicker,  and  imbed  a  five- 
cent  piece  in  its  centre,  and  pass  a  small  copper  wire, 
as  a  rivet,  through  both.  Place  this  coin  in  the  palm 
of  the  hand,  with  the  silver  side  up,  and  request  him 
to  bring  it  within  about  a  foot  of  his  eyes.  Let  him 
take  a  position,  either  sitting  or  standing,  which  he  can 
retain  twenty  minutes  or  more,  without  any  motion  of 
his  feet,  hands,  lips,  head,  or  any  part  of  his  body. 
He  must  remain  motionless  as  a  statue,  except  the  nat- 
ural winking  of  the  eye.  His  mind  should  be  perfectly 
resigned  and  kept  entirely  passive  to  surrounding  im- 
pressions. The  eyes  should  be  placed  upon  the  coin 
as  though  they  were  riveted  there,  and  during  the  whole 
twenty  or  twenty-five  minutes  they  should,  on  no  con- 
sideration, be  raised  to  look  at  any  person  or  object 
whatever,  and  the  spectators  should  be  still  as  the 
grave.  If  the  eyes  have  a  tendency  to  close,  he  should 
not  strive  to  keep  them  open,  but  let  them  close.  Fol- 
low nature.  In  a  public  audience,  when  lecturing,  yon 
should  seat,  if  possible,  a  class  of  thirty  personsi 
When  the  time  has  expired,  collect  your  coin  so  as 


IECTE/RJE,    XI.  21? 

relieve  the  class  from  their  wearisome  position,  and 
then  try  each  individual,  always  taking  the  communi- 
cation in  the  manner  I  have  described,  and  proceed  to 
experiment  upon  them  the  same  as  you  do  upon  those 
who  are  naturally  in  the  state.  If  one  sitting  do  not 
bring  them  entirely  into  the  psychological  state,  then 
Let  it  be  repeated  on  the  next  evening,  and  so  continue 
on  till  the  work  is  consummated.  All,  with  few  ex- 
ceptions, can  be,  by  perseverance,  brought  into  thia 
state.  Some  are  naturally  in  it — some  are  brought 
into  it  by  one  sitting — some  by  two — some  by  three — 
and  some  may  require  a  hundred  sittings  of  half  an 
hour  each  before  they  can  be  brought  to  the  participa- 
tion of  this  inestimable  blessing.  No  two 'individuals 
are  alike  impressible  in  any  thing  whatever,  whether  it 
be  mental  effort,  moral  power  and  moral  suasion,  or 
physical  endurance.  «  Hence  we  should  not  be  sur- 
prised, that  they  all  differ  from  each  other  as  to  nervous 
impressibility  in  this  science,  and  that,  too,  in  the  same 
ratio  as  they  may  differ  in  their  phrenological  develop- 
ments and  cerebral  excitability.  It  is  enough  for  us  to 
know  an  this  point  that  no  two  individuals  are  in  any 
respect  exactly  alike. 

Having  described  the  electro-magnetic  coin  which  1 
conceive  to  be  the  best,  under  all  circumstances,  to 
produce  the  result,  and  having  directed  you  how  to  use 
it,  I  would  now  apprise  you,  that  this  state  may  be  Ic- 
•luced  by  other  substances  as   agents  in  nature.     1 1 


218  ELECTlilCAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

may  be  induced  by  fixing  the  eyes  upon  a  piece  of  zinc 
alone,  and  observing  the  directions  already  given.  It 
may  be  induced  by  a  piece  of  silver,  era  piece  of  cop- 
per, iron,  lead,  or  any  other  metal.  It  may  be  induced 
by  a  piece  of  wood,  or  any  other  substance  in  natum 
Or  it  may  be  done  by  a  mere  mental  abstraction,  with 
no  substance,  only  the  surrounding  elements.  But 
when  no  substance  is  used,  the  process  to  the  state  is 
slow  and  tedious.  Then,  again,  there  is  every  possible 
grade  of  power  from  the  feeblest  substance  placed  in 
the  hand  up  to  the  galvanic  battery,  which  is  more 
powerful  than  the  coin  I  have  adopted  as  a  matter  of 
convenience  and  utility.  The  galvanic  battery  I  should 
prefer,  if  it  could  be  carried  in  the  pocket,  or  be  ac- 
cessible to  all.  If  thirty  persons  should  join  hands, 
and  the  two  individuals  at  the  extremes  of  the  line 
each  take  a  handle  of  a  galvanic  battery,  and  let  the 
current  be  so  graduated  as  to  be  but  faintly  felt,  and  a 
greater  number  would  be  affected  than  by  any  other 
agent  that  could  be  employed.  In  this  case,  as  in  all 
others,  it  is  to  be  understood,  that  the  same  stillness  of 
muscles,  the  same  fixed  position  of  the  eye  upon  some 
object  or  spot,  and  the  same  passivity  of  mind  are  to 
be  strictly  observed. 

The  query  may  now  arise  in  the  minds  of  some  of 
the  class — Why  should  all  substances  in  existence  hays 
a  greater  or  less  tendency  to  produce  this  state  1  I 
answer,   that   eleotr'city  is   the   great   and   universal 


LECTURE    XI.  210 

agert  ordained  by  the  Creator  to  form,  to  transmute, 
or  to  decompose  all  substances  that  swarm  in  the  em- 
pire of  nature.  Hence  ail  substances  in  existence 
throw  off  a  never-ceasing  electro-atmospheric  emana- 
tion in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  otherwise  they  could 
never  change.  And  these  emanations  by  their  impres- 
sions more  or  less  affect  all  human  beings  according  to 
the  relative  position  in  which  they  may  be  placed  to 
receive  and  feel  the  force  of  such  impressions.  There- 
fore sleep  and  wakefulness,  health  and  sickness,  pain 
and  ease,  and  all  the  various  sensations  and  changes  to 
which  the  human  system  is  subject,  are  experienced. 
Hence  when  we  fix  our  attention  upon  one  substance, 
and  become  mentally  and  physically  passive  to  surround- 
ing impressions,  we  render  ourselves,  by  this  volition, 
relatively  negative,  as  far  as  in  our  power,  to  the  pos- 
itive force  of  the  substance  with  which  we  are  engaged, 
and  drowsiness,  or  some  other  cerebral  change  or  phe- 
nomenon ensues,  because  by  passivity  the  electro-nerv- 
ous fluid  is  supplied  through  the  lungs  and  stomach  for 
the  brain  more  freely  than  it  is  thrown  off.  But  when 
we  resume  the  activity  of  our  mental  and  physical 
energies,  we,  by  this  volition  and  action,  become  rela- 
tively positive  to  the  surrounding  impressions  of  al] 
substances  in  nature,  and  wakefulness,  with  all  its  at- 
tendant delights,  is  the  result,  because  by  mental  and 
muscular  action  we  throw  off  from  the  brain  the  electro 


tf1 


220  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

nervous  fluid  more  rapidly  than  it  is  supplied  through 
the  lungs  and  stomach. 

In  order,  therefore,  to  render  the  subject  as  simple 
as  possible,  and  to  establish  and  perpetuate  a  uniform- 
ity of  procedure  in  the  use  of  a  substance  to  be  placed 
in  the  hand,  I  desire  you  to  insist  upon  the  electro- 
magnetic coin  as  being  alone  sufficient,  under  the  direc- 
tions given,  to  induce  the  state.  And  I  desire  you  to 
insist  that  the  pressure  on  the  Median  Nerve  is  alone 
sufficient  to  establish  a  communication  between  the 
operator  and  the  subject  to  perform  all  the  experiments, 
both  electrical  and  psychological,  that  this  science  may 
involve.  Indeed,  all  substances,  so  far  as  their  electro- 
emanating  power  extends,  produce  the  same  effect  in 
degree  as  the  coin  I  recommend.  Hence,  strictly  and 
philosophically  speaking,  the  electro-magnetic  coin,  as 
the  true  mode  of  inducing  the  state,  is  all  in  all.  And  as 
all  possible  modes  of  obtaining  communication,  whether 
by  contact  or  otherwise,  must  meet  in  the  organ  of  In- 
dividuality, through  which  all  impressions  are  trans- 
mitted to  the  mind,  and  from  the  mind,  through  that 
same  organ,  to  all  the  voluntary  parts  of  the  body,  so 
there  is  strictly  and  philosophically  speaking  but  one 
mode  of  taking  communication,  and  hence  the  Median 
Nerve  is  all  in  all.  If,  however,  you  could  remember 
the  exposition  1  have  given  you  on  this  intricate  and 
interesting  subject,  you  would  then  find  no  difficulty  in 
defer  ding   yourself  against  th  3  assaults  of   skeptical 


LECTURE    XI.  221 

men.  But  as  it  is,  I  must  leave  you  with  the  two  Bim 
pie  forms  I  recommend — the  Electro-magnetic  Coin 
and  the  Median  Nerve. 

As  the  genera!  points  of  the  subject  are  now  dis- 
tinctly before  you,  I  would  next  state,  that  we  divide 
this  science,  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  into  five 
plans.  The  first  three  regard  the  mediums  through 
which  persons  are  brought  into  the  electro-psycholog- 
ical state.  The  first  is  through  Mesmerism.  Hence 
you  will  call  Mesmerism  plan  number  one.  The  sec- 
ond is  the  pressure  on  the  nerve  by  which  we  detect 
those  who  are  naturally  in  the  electro-psychologica. 
state.  This  you  will  call  plan  number  two.  The 
third  is  the  coin  by  which  others  are  to  be  brought  into 
this  state.  The  coin  you  will  therefore  call  plan  num- 
ber three.  'The  fourth  involves  all  the  experiments, 
whether  electrical  or  psychological,  as  a  sanative 
agent,  by  which  those  who  are  already  in  this  state  are 
to  be  relieved  of  pain,  cured  of  disease,  or  prepared 
for  any  surgical  operation  without  suffering.  This  you 
will  call  plan  number  four.  And  the  fifth,  in  order 
to  cure  the  diseases  of  those  who  are  not  in  the  state, 
involves  the  application  of  physical  impressions  upon 
their  bodies,  and  the  administering  of  remedies,  whether 
externally  or  internally  applied.  This  you  wTill  call 
plan  number  five.  On  each  of  these  five  plans  I 
now  proceed  to  impart  all  the  necessary  informations 
and  in  as  clear  and  concise  a  manner  as  possible. 


222  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

In  regard  to  Mesmerism,  which  is  plan  number  one, 
t  would  say,  that  if  you  desire  to  mesmerize  a  person^ 
who  has  never  been  put  into  the  state,  nor  in  the  least 
affected,  I  know  of  no  better  mode  than  to  seat  him  in 
an  easy  posture,  and  request  him  to  be  calm  and  re- 
signed. Take  him  by  both  hands,  or  else  by  one  hand 
and  place  your  other  gently  on  his  forehead.  But  with 
whatever  part  of  his  body  you  may  choose  to  come  in 
contact,  be  sure  to  always  touch  two  points,  answering 
to  the  positive  and  negative  forces.  Having  taken  him 
by  both  hands,  fix  your  eyes  firmly  upon  his,  and,  if 
possible,  let  him  contentedly  and  steadily  look  you  in 
the  face.  Remain  in  this  position  till  his  eyes  close. 
Then  place  both  your  hands  on  his  head,  gently  pass 
chem  to  his  shoulders,  down  the  arms,  and  oft*  at  the  ends 
of  his  fingers.  Throw  your  hands  outward  as  you  re- 
turn them  to  his  head,  and  continue  these  passes  till 
he  can  hear  no  voice  but  yours.  He  is  then  entirely  in 
the  mesmeric  state. 

The  reason  why  I  desire  you  to  throw  your  hands 
outward  on  returning  them  to  his  head  when  making 
the  passes  is,  to  avoid  waking  him  by  passing  them  up- 
ward in  front  and  near  to  his  body.  It  is  a  well-known 
fact,  that  by  the  downward  passes  of  an  electro-magnet, 
attached  to  a  galvanic  battery,  the  steel  magnet  becomes 
instartly  charged  so  as  to  lift  a  pound  of  iron.  -But 
by  the  upward  passes  it  becomes  instantly  demagnet- 
ised so  that  it  will  lift  nothing.     By  the  dowr-ward 


LECTURE   k:»  228 

passes  I  mean  from  the  bow  or  centre  of  the  magnet  to 
the  extremities,  and  by  upward  passes  I  mean  tho 
reverse*  regardless  of  the  position  in  which  the  magnet 
ma)'  be  held.  The  same  applies  to  the  human  being 
when  his  mind  is  left  uninfluenced.  But  if  you  apprise 
the  subject  when  in  the  magnetic  state,  that  the  upward 
passes  will  not  awake  him,  then  by  the  force  of  his  own 
mind  he  can  retain  his  condition,  in  defiance  of  all  the 
passes  you  may  make.  The  mind,  when  in  the  mes« 
meric  state,  has  the  power  of  appropriating  electri- 
city or  magnetism  to  itself,  or  of  rejecting  it,  ac 
pleasure. 

In  case,  however,  that  the  person  whom  you  seat  to 
be  mesmerized  is  not  affected,  and  feels  no  inclination 
whatever  to  close  his  eyes  after  fifteen  or  twenty  min 
utes'  trial,  you  will  still  proceed,  as  directed,  to  make 
the  passes,  and  continue  them  also  for  fifteen  or  twenty 
minutes.  Then  take  him  again  by  the  hands,  as  at 
first,  and  continue  this  position  about  the  same  length 
of  time,  then  resume  the  passes,  as  before  directed, 
and  continue  these  two  modes  of  operation  alternately 
till  about  an  hour  is  consumed  at  a  sitting.  Before 
you  leave  him,  reverse  the  passes  for  the  space  of  a 
minute  or  so,  as  though  waking  him  up,  even  though 
you  see  no  visible  effect  produced.  On  the  next  day, 
give  him  another  sitting  of  an  hour ;  and  so  on.  day 
after  day,  till  you  get  him  into  the  mesmeric  state. 
Remember,  that  all  the  influence  you  produce  upon  hin; 


224  ELECTRICAL    PSiXHOLOGT 

at  one  sitting,  however  minute  or  imperceptible  it  mat 
be,  he  fully  retains  to  all  subsequent  daily  sittings. 

When  a  person  is  in  the  mesmeric  state,  whether 
put  there  by  yourself  or  by  some  other  one,  take  the 
eommunication  by  number  two  and  awake  him  by  the 
upward  passes ;  or  else  do  it  by  an  impression,  as  fol- 
lows :  Tell  him,  "  I  will  count  three,  and  at  the  same 
instant  I  say  three  I  will  slap  my  hands  together,  and 
you  will  be  wide  awake  and  in  your  perfect  senses. 
Are  you  ready]"  If  he  answer  in  the  affirmative, 
you  will  proceed  to  count — "  One,  two,  THREE  !51 
The  word  three  should  be  spoken  suddenly,  and  in  a 
very  loud  voice,  and  at  the  same  instant  the  palms  of 
the  hands  should  be  smitten  together.  This  will  in- 
stantly awake  him.  Those  who  are  thus  aroused  from 
mesmeric  slumber  to  wakefulness  are,  with  fev  excep- 
tions, in  the  electro-psychological  state,  and  you  can 
immediately  proceed  to  experiment  upon  them.  Here, 
then,  is  an  individual  who  was  brought  into  this  state 
through  number  one,  and  he  stands  in  a  negative  re- 
lation to  you  as  it  regards  the  doctrine  of  impressions, 
and  his  body  is  principally  charged  with  negative  elec- 
tricity, which  is  from  the  earth,  and  which  alone  is  sus- 
ceptible of  being  successfully  controlled. 

Having  given  you  all  the  necessary  directions  how  to 
mesmerize,  and  how  to  bring  a  person  into  the  electro 
psychological  state  through  number  one,  and  shown 
fche  relation  in  which  he  stands  to  you  as  the  operator. 


LECTURE    XI.  225 

t  now  proceed  to  instruct  you  in  relation  to  numbeb 
two.  This  can  be  done  in  a  very  few  words,  as  it  has 
been  already  pretty  fully  noticed.  In  the  first  place, 
you  may  go  into  a  public  audience,  or  among  your  social 
friends,  and  take  one  individual  after  another  by  the 
hand,  press  the  Median  Nerve,  as  I  have  directed,  and 
if  you  succeed  in  controlling  some  one,  both  physically 
and  mentally,  then  such  individual  is  recognized  as  in 
the  electro-psychological  state  through  number  two. 
Though  this  person  has  never  been  mesmerized,  nor 
operated  upon,  yet  he  is  found  to  be  naturally  in  the 
same  state,  through  number  two,  as  is  the  individual 
who  was  brought  into  it  through  number  one.  Seat 
them  side  by  side,  and  they  both  feel  the  same  nervous* 
sympathy  toward  each  other,  are  both  charged  with  the 
same  negative  electricity,  and  both  stand  in  a  negative; 
relation  to  you  as  it  regards  the  doctrine  of  impressions. 
Take  number  three,  which  is  the  electro-magnetic 
coin,  and  place  it  in  the  hand  of  an  individual  whom 
you  can  not  affect,  as  you  did  either  of  the  persons  men- 
tioned, and  subject  him  to  the  process  of  looking  at  it 
as  T  have  directed,  When  the  time  of  the  sitting  has 
expired,  take  the  usual  communication,  number  two, 
and  in  case  you  can  control  him,  both  physically  and 
mentally,  he  is  recognized  as  brought  into  the  electro- 
psychological  state  through  number  three.  Here, 
then,  are  three  individuals  in  the  same  state  of  nerv- 
ous impressibility,  charged  with  the  same  negative 
10* 


226  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

electricity,  stand  in  the  same  negative  relation  to  yoUj 
as  it  regards  the  doctrine  of  impressions,  and  by  the 
same  impression  they  can  all  be  controlled,  collectively 
or  separately.  They  are  all  in  the  electro-psychologi- 
cal state,  but  were  brought  there  through  three  differ- 
ent plans.  But  by  whatever  means  individuals  may  be 
brought  into  this  state,  yet  bear  in  mind,  that  through 
number  two,  either  with  or  without  contact,  you  take 
the  communication,  which  is  the  secret,  invisible,  and 
subtile  link  of  controlling  power,  and  without  which  no 
effect  whatever  can  be  produced.  Every  principle  of 
philosophy  is  based  upon  cause,  medium,  and  effect 
Even  the  Creator  himself,  were  he  completely  isolated 
from  this  globe,  could  produce  no  possible  effect  upon 
it,  nor  upon  the  inhabitants  of  its  surface,  because  there 
would  be,  in  such  case,  no  medium  of  communicatioi: 
by  which  he  could  come  in  contact  with  it,  or  in  the 
least  affect  its  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms.  Touch 
what  nerve  you  please,  or  obtain  the  communication 
with  or  without  contact,  as  you  may — I  care  not  how, 
yet  it  must  be  transmitted  to  the  brain  through  the 
Median  Nerve  to  the  organ  of  Individuality,  and  from 
thence  to  the  mind.  Even  if  you  press  the  ulnar  nerve 
yet  it  must  be  by  sympathy  communicated  from  this  tG 
the  Median  Nerve,  which  is  much  larger,  runs  paral- 
lel along  the  arm  with  it  to  the  spinal  cord,  and  from 
thence  th(  y  both  unquestionably  pass  to  the  organ  of 
Individual  ty  in  the  cerebrum.     They  are  both  coin- 


LECTURE    XI.  22" 

pound  nerves,  by  which  we  mean,  that  they  are  both 
susceptible  of  voluntary  motion  and  sensation,  being 
connected  with  the  mind  as  its  agents  to  transmit  the 
electro-nervous  fluid  to  and  from  it,  and  through  v)Llch 
it  holds  a  correspondence  with  the  external  world. 
Through  this  it  receives  by  impressions  its  messages, 
and  through  this  by  impressions  it  returns  its  answers. 
To  take  the  communication,  therefore,  by  acting  directly 
upon  the  Median  Nerve  is  far  preferable  to  any  other 
mode,  and  particularly  so  upon  persons  who  are  not 
very  sensitive  or  impressible.  The  more  remote  we 
take  our  communication  from  this  nerve,  the  longer  wre 
must  labor  to  get  control,  and  perhaps  often  fail,  and 
the  more  feeble  will  be  our  action  and  impression  in 
producing  any  interesting,  brilliant,  and  startling  ex- 
periments. The  next  best  mode  to  get  a  communica- 
tion is,  as  I  have  uniformly  taught,  through  the  ulnap 
nerve,  and  is  the  best  mode  to  conceal  the  secret  from 
others. 

I  have  now  briefly  noticed  the  first  three  plans, 
through  which  individuals  may  be  brought  into  the  psy- 
chological state,  and  the  subtile  medium  of  communica- 
tion through  which  they  may  be  controlled  by  mental 
impressions.  In  regard  to  plan  number  four  I  would 
remark,  that  as  it  involves  all  the  experiments,  both 
electrical  and  psychological,  and  as  I  have  already  suffi- 
ciently noticed  these  in  giving  directions  how  to  perform 
them,  so  this  part  of  my  subject  has  been  anticipated, 


228  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY* 

and  is  fully  before  you.  Permit  me,  however,  so  re- 
mark, that  it  may  be  well  for  you  to  know  why  these 
experiments  are  conducive  to  health,  and  how  it  is  pos- 
sible to  perform  an  operation  without  pain,  when  the 
patient  is  wide  awake  and  in  his  perfect  senses.  These 
£wo  points  I  will  now  philosophically  explain. 

Why  the  experiments,  when  properly  conducted,  are 
conducive  to  health,  is  because  the  mind,  by  coming  in 
contact  with  the  electricity  of  the  nerves,  moves  it  with 
a  force  equal  to  the  impression  which  the  operator 
makes  on  the  patient,  and  sends  it  to  that  part  of  the 
system  to  which  the  patient's  attention  is  directed. 
Under  its  energy  the  limbs  are  paralyzed,  so  that  the 
subject,  by  all  his  exertions,  is  unable  to  walk,  r.or 
when  walking  is  he  able  to  stop,  and  when  seated  it  is 
not  in  his  power  to  rise.  His  arms,  in  an  instant,  are 
paralyzed,  so  that  he  can  not  move  them,  or  they  are  set  in 
motion,  and  he  has  no  power  to  stop  them.  By  a  men- 
tal impression  he  is  made  to  see  his  clothes  on  fire, 
or  the  house  falling,  and  his  limbs  crushed  to  pieces. 
Or  he  is  made  to  see  a  lion,  a  tiger,  or  a  huge  serpent 
close  in  pursuit  to  devour  him.  Or,  at  pleasure,  he  may 
be  wrought  up  to  the  most  supreme  ecstasy  of  joy  ana 
delight,  or  be  made  to  feel,  in  the  extreme,  any  other 
emotion  or  passion  of  the  soul.  These  various  impres- 
sions throw  the  electricity  of  the  nerves  to  every  par, 
of  the  system  with  such  power  as  to  burst  through  all 
functional  obstructions,  equalize  the  nervous  force,  and 


LECTURE    At.  229 

also  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  thus  remove  dis- 
ease and  still  pain.  It  is  a  well-known  fact  in  medical 
jurisprudence,  that  such  supreme  and  sudden  excite- 
ments have  often  cured  rheumatism,  and  made  even  the 
lame  walk. 

On  plan  number  five,  which  involves  the  cure  of 
persons  who  arc  not  in  this  state,  I  can  say  but  little. 
It  embraces  physical  action  upon  their  bodies,  accord- 
ing to  the  nature  of  the  disease,  and  impressions  upon 
their  minds  so  far  as  it  is  possible  to  produce  them .  It 
involves  external  applications  or  internal  remedies,  as 
the  case  may  require.  In  a  word,  it  involves  the  excel- 
lences of  all  medical  systems  in  being,  and  sums  them 
all  up  in  the  supreme  beauties  of  one  bright  and  glo- 
rious system,  and  that  system  is  Electro-Curapathy, 
I  now  turn  to  the  consideration  of  the  last  point  I  prom* 
ised  to  notice. 

The  true  philosophical  cause,  why  a  tooth  can  be  ex- 
tracted, or  a  surgical  operation  performed,  without  pain, 
is,  that  all  feeling  or  sensation  is  in  the  mind,  which 
holds  its  residence  in  the  brain,  and  which,  as  a  living 
being  of  immortal  form,  has  its  spiritual  hands,  feet, 
and  organs  corresponding  to  those  of  the  body.  In- 
deed, the  body,  in  all  its  complicated  organism,  is  but 
a  visible  daguerreotype  picture  of  the  invisible  spirit 
in  the  brain,  and  from  which  it  has  drawn  all  its  linea 
ments  of  form.  Strictly  speaking,  the  body  itself  has 
no  feeling.     If  you  touch,  for  instance,  the  point  of  a 


2b*0  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY .- 

needle  to  the  forefinger,  it  irritates  some  minute  branch 
of  a  nerve  of  sensation.  This  irritation  disturbs  the 
electricity  of  the  nerve  that  serves  as  a  telegraph  wire 
along  which  the  disturbed  electricity  passes,  and  a 
shock  is  produced  upon  the  identical  correspondent  spot 
of  the  forefinger  of  the  spirit,  disturbs  the  harmony  of 
its  own  beautiful  movements  in  its  spiritual  sphere,  and 
this  impression  produces  pain. 

If,  then,  the  communication  between  the  mind  and 
the  electricity  of  the  nerve  to  which  you  touched  the 
needle  could  be  cut  off — if  the  telegraph  wire  should  be 
bo  impaired,  that  the  electricity  could  not  pass  to  the 
mind  to  shock  it,  then  no  pain  could  be  felt.  This  m 
always  the  case  in  palsy,  when  the  nerves  of  sensation 
are  paralyzed.  Amputation  could  then  be  performed 
without  pain.  Now,  excitement  will  cause  the  same 
insensibility  to  suffering  and  pain,  if  the  impression  be 
sufficiently  great  to  produce  it.  This  is  evident,  be- 
cause as  there  is,  in  the  human  system,  but  a  certain 
amount  of  feeling,  therefore  in  the  same  ratio  that  you 
excite  one  part  to  sensibility  the  other  parts  are  so  far 
robbed.  The  following  anecdote  related  to  me  of  Henry 
Clay  will  illustrate  this.     It. is  as  follows  : 

A  gentleman  on  the  floor  in  Congress,  in  his  speech; 
made  a  severe  personal  attack  on  Henry  Clay.  Mr.  Clay 
was,  at  the  time,  very  much  indisposed,  and  considered 
tmable  to  speak.  He  whispered  to  the  gentleman  who  sat 
uext  to  him,  and  said,  I  must  answer  him,  but  beg  of  yoq 


LECTURE    XI.  23i 

not  to  let  rne  speak  over  half  an  hour.  He  commenced, 
and  was  soon  on  wing — soaring,  and  uniting  the  lan- 
guage of  earth  and  heaven  in  his  defense,  till  every 
period  seemed  to  shake  the  universe.  He  was  aroused 
— was  excited — his  brain  stirred  proudly.  His  half 
hour  expired,  and  the  gentleman  pulled  his  coat,  but 
Clay  paid  no  attention  to  the  signal.  He  kicked  his 
limbs,  but  it  made  no  impression.  He  run  a  pin  sev- 
eral times  half  its  length  into  the  calf  of  his  leg.  Clay 
heeded  it  not,  spoke  two  hours,  sunk  exhausted  into  his 
seat,  and  upbraided  the  sentinel  for  not  stopping  him ! 
He  had  felt  nothing.  Excitement  called  the  electricity 
of  his  system  to  his  brain,  and  he  threw  it  off  by  men- 
tal effort.  In  the  same  degree  that  sensation  was  called 
to  his  brain  the  limbs  were  robbed. 

Dr.  Channing,  in  his  sermon  on  the  burning  of  the 
steamboat  Lexington,  when  so  many  lives  were  lost, 
most  eloquently  explains  this  very  point.     He  says  : 

"  We  are  created  with  a  susceptibility  of  pain,  and 
severe  pain.  This  is  a  part  of  our  nature,  as  truly  as 
our  susceptibility  of  enjoyment.  God  has  implanted  it, 
and  has  thus  opened  in  the  very  centre  of  our  being  a 
fountain  of  suffering,  We  carry  it  within  us,  and  can 
no  more  escape  it  than  we  can  our  power  of  thought. 
We  are  apt  to  throw  our  pains  on  outward  things  aa 
their  causes  It  is  the  fire,  the  sea,  the  sword,  or  hu- 
man enmity,  which  gives  us  pain.  But  there  is  no 
pain  in  the  nie  cr  the  sword,  which  passes  thence  ints 


282  ELECTRICAL    PSYCKOLOGf. 

our  soub.  The  pain  begins  and  ends  in  the  soul  itself, 
Outward  things  are  only  the  occasions.  Even  the  bodj 
has  no  pain  in  it,  which  it  infuses  into  the  mind.  Of 
itself  it  is  incapable  of  suffering.  This  hand  may  be 
cracked,  crushed  in  the  rack  of  the  inquisitor,  and  that 
burnt  in  a  slow  fire  ;  but  in  these  cases  it  is  not  tho 
fibres,  the  blood-vessels,  the  bones  of  the  hand  which 
endure  pain.  These  are  merely  connected,  by  the  will 
of  the  Creator,  with  the  springs  of  pain  in  the  soul. 
Here,  here  is  the  only  origin  and  seat  of  suffering.  If 
God  so  willed,  the  gashing  of  the  flesh  with  a  knife, 
the  piercing  of  the  heart  with  a  dagger,  might  be  the 
occasion  of  exquisite  delight.  We  know  that,  in  the 
heat  of  battle,  a  wound  is  not  felt,  and  that  men,  dying 
for  their  faith  by  instruments  of  torture,  have  expired 
with  triumph  on  their  lips.  In  these  cases,  the  spring 
of  suffering  in  the  mind  is  not  touched  by  the  lacera- 
tions of  the  body,  in  consequence  of  the  absorbing 
action  of  other  principles  of  the  soul.  All  suffering  is 
to  te  traced  to  the  susceptibility,  the  capacity  of  pain, 
which  belongs  to  our  nature,  and  which  the  Creator  has 
implanted  ineradicably  within  us." 

I  close  by  remarking,  that  p.s  the  science  of  Electri- 
cal Psychology  is  the  doctrine  of  supreme  impresshns, 
30  you  will  readily  perceive  why  a  sirgical  operation  <t«* 
be  perforated  without  pain. 


LECTURE   XII.  235 


LECTURE  XII. 

[The  following  Lecture  upon  the  science  of  Genetologv,  which 
I?  as  then  called  Natalology,  was  delivered,  by  request,  to  the  La- 
dies of  Troy,  N.  Y.,  in  the  Morris  Place  Hall,  in  February,  1844. 
And,  as  it  belongs  to  the  subject  of  Electrical  Psychology  and  the 
great  doctrine  of  impressions  that  this  science  involves,  it  is  here 
inserted  in  its  appropriate  place.  The  Author  has  generally  de- 
livered it  as  the  last  lecture  of  the  course,  to  his  private  classes, 
when  giving  them  instructions  in  Electrical  Psychology.] 

Ladies  : 

The  purpose  for  which  we  are  now  assembled  is  to 
take  into  consideration  the  science  of  Genetology  or 
Human  Beauty,  as  founded  upon  the  doctrine  of  im- 
pressions. I  contend  that  the  human  species  can  bo 
gradually  improved  through  the  harmonious  operation 
of  mental  impressions,  exercised  by  the  mother,  and  that 
the  time  will  come  when  they  will  be  born  into  existence 
with  just  such  lineaments  of  form  as  we  may  choose. 
This  is  no  idle  dream — no  infatuation  of  a  disturbed 
brain,  but  sober  reality.  Human  Beauty  has  been,  in 
all  ages,  admired,  praised,  loved,  and  desired  by  the 
millions  of  our  race.  Its  charms  have  been  sung  by 
the  poet  in  thoughts  that  burn ;  have  taxed  the  finest 
©inceptions  of  the  artist  and  the  sculptor,  and   havj 


234  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

been  made  to  breathe  upon  the  canvas,  and  to  speak 
in  the  marble.  The  charms  of  Beauty  have  been 
dwelt  upon,  anl  painted  by  the  eloquent  orator,  and 
have  moved  the  hearts  of  all  human  kind.  All  know 
and  feel  the  power  of  Beauty,  and  ardently  covet  the 
gem. 

The  subject  now  to  be  considered  is,  whether, 
through  the  power  of  the  mental  impressions  of  the 
mother,  her  unborn  child,  during  the  period  from  con- 
ception to  birth,  can  be  moulded  into  beauty,  and  born 
into  existence  with  those  admirable  lineaments  of  form 
that  so  much  delight  the  beholder.  To  the  candid 
consideration  of  this  interesting  subject  I  new  invite 
attention. 

That  the  mother  can  greatly  afiect  her  unborn  child 
is  unquestionably  true,  No  one  will  deny,  that  by 
some  sudden  impulse  of  mind — such  as  extreme  fear 
or  joy,  she  has  often  produced  abortion,  or  else  greatly 
injured  her  offspring  I  know  of  one  well-authenti- 
cated case,  where  the  mother  was  extremely  terrified 
at  a  young  cub  when  she  was  about  three  months  en- 
ciente.  It  was  her  twelfth  child,  and  was  born  an 
idiot,  while  her  other  eleven  children  were  intelligent 
and  active.  It  was  a  boy.  He  lived  to  fourteen 
years  of  age,  and  had  many  actions  peculiar  to  the 
bear.  There  are  instances,  too  numerous  to  mention, 
where  human  beings  have  not  only  acted  like,  but  even 
resembled,  some   species   of  the  brute  or  bird  racec 


LECTURE    XSt.  235 

And  as  the  uniform  testimony  of  mothers  is,  that  they 
were  frightened  during  pregnancy  by  the  creature  to 
which  the  offspring  was  likened,  so  no  other  satisfactory 
cause  ever  has  been  assigned  for  the  effect  produced. 

A  wealthy  lady,  in  Boston,  was  frightened  by  a  par- 
rot. Her  daughter,  now  ten  or  twelve  years  of  age,  is 
a  mediocre,  and  her  voice  and  manner  of  speaking  re- 
semble those  of  this  bird.  A  lady  of  my  acquaint- 
ance, on  seeing  the  head  of  her  cosset  lamb  suddenly 
crushed,  brought  forth  a  son3  about  six  months  after 
tins  occurrence,  whose  temples  were  much  pressed  in, 
and  the  forehead  protruded  as  did  that  of  the  injured 
lamb,  yet  his  intellect  was  not  in  the  least  impaired. 
A  singular  circumstance  occurred  a  few  years  ago  in 
Bunkum  County,  N.  C.  A  girl  was  there  exhibited, 
who  was  born  with  only  one  leg  and  one  arm.  A  lady 
who  was  about  two  months  advanced  in  her  time,  had 
a  strong  desire  to  see  this  girl.  Her  curiosity  being 
great,  she  examined  the  deformed  object  with  long  and 
unwearied  attention.  Her  friends  had  to  force  her, 
as  it  were,  from  the  exhibition.  She  went  home,  but 
*he  image  of  the  unfortunate  girl  was  but  too  deeply 
impressed  upon  her  mind  to  be  forgotten.  She  con- 
versed about  it  by  day,  and  it  was  the  subject  of  her 
dreams  by  night.  She  at  length  got  an  impression 
that  her  child  would  be  born  like  the  object  that 
haunted  her  brain.     Her  time  of  delivery  came,  and 


236  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

her  fears  were  realized.     She  brought  forth  *  daugL 
fcer  with  only  one  leg  and  one  arm ! 

How  often  it  has  occurred,  where  a  lady  has  had  a 
strong  desire,  or  longing  for  wine,  that  she  has  com- 
municated the  color  of  the  liquor  by  impression  to  her 
child.  In  like  manner,  through  strong  mental  impres- 
sions, she  has  stamped  upon  the  unborn  child  a  straw- 
berry, blackberry,  grape,  or  any  fruit  for  which  she 
had  an  ardent  longing,  and  made  it  perfect  both  as  it 
regards  its  color  and  shape.  Endless  instances  of  this 
character  can  be  produced,  and  also  the  uniform  testi- 
mony of  the  mother  that  she  had  a  longing  desire  for 
what  appears  upon  the  child.  Against  this,  the  argu- 
ments and  objections  of  some  medical  writers  and  their 
adherents  are  of  no  weight,  as  they  are  evidently  en- 
tirely ignorant  of  the  electrical  philosophy  of  this  sub- 
ject. The  mental  impression,  or  longing  of  the  moth- 
er must,  however,  far  exceed  her  usual  impressions  in 
order  to  produce  this  result  upon  her  offspring. 

I  am  not  arguing  any  new  truth,  nor  the  discovery  of 
any  new  principle  of  action,  but  what  has  been  known  from 
the  earliest  of  human  records.  The  Bible  history  admits 
the  principle  even  in  its  application  to  the  brute  race. 
Laban  deceived  Jacob  by  giving  to  him  Leah  for  a  wife 
instead  of  Rachel,  for  whom  he  had  served  him  seven 
years,  by  tending  his  flocks.  He  then  proposed,  that  he 
should  serve  him  seven  years  more  for  Rachel.  To 
pacify  Jacob,  Laban  offered  him  what  he  supposed  to  be 


LECTURE    XII.  237 

a  poor  chance  for  wages.  He  told  him,  that  all  the 
speckled  cattle  should  he  his.  But  Jacob  resorted  to 
b  plan  by  which  he  sufficiently  punished  the  selfish 
spirit  of  Laban.  He  put  speckled  rods  at  the  bottom 
of  the  watering  troughs.  He  kept  the  male  and  female 
cattle  apart.  There  is  no  question,  that  he  allowed  the 
males  to  have  free  access  to  water,  but  kept  the  fe- 
males away  till  they  were  very  thirsty,  even  bellowing 
and  bleating  for  water.  In  this  condition  he  allowed 
them  to  mingle  only  at  the  troughs.  And  as  water  is 
colorless,  nothing  but  the  speckled  rods  could  be  seen 
by  the  thirsty  and  drinking  females,  and  under  this 
strong  impression  they  conceived.  But  this  is  not  all- 
Jacob  understood  his  subject  sufficiently  well  to  go  over 
the  same  ground  again  the  next  day,  and  keep  up  the 
female  herd  till  the  same  great  thirst  returned.  This 
would  bring  to  their  minds  what  seemed  to  them  a 
speckled  fluid,  and  to  those  already  conceived  the  im- 
pression would  continue  to  deepen.  True,  Laban  re- 
peatedly changed  the  wages  even  up  to  ten  times  ;  but 
this  was  of  no  avail,  because  Jacob  as  often  changed 
the  scene  of  action  by  preparing  the  causes  that  must 
philosophically  produce  their  corresponding  results  in 
the  animal  economy.  Hence  I  again  assert  that  I  am 
not  arguing  any  new  principle  of  action.  I  claim  no 
such  discovery,  but  merely  claim  the  discovery  of  its 
philosophy,  and  of  having  reduced  it  to  a  system  capa- 
ble of  improving  and  ennobling  our  race. 


238  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

Such  are  its  facts,  and  I  now  turn  to  its  philosophy. 
Gold  can  be  dissolved  in  aqua  regia.  A  five-dollar 
gold  piece  thrown  into  this  liquid  dissolves  and  soon 
disappears,  only  as  the  whole  liquid  assumes  the  color 
of  the  gold.  Let  this  liquid  be  properly  prepared,  and 
dip  the  ends  of  the  two  wires  of  a  galvanic  battery  into 
it.  In  this  liquid  you  may  then  immerse  any  metallic 
article  you  please.  Take,  for  instance,  a  silver  watch- 
case  with  your  own  name  engraved  upon  it,  and  many 
curiously  wrought  characters  and  devices  ;  immerse 
this  in  the  liquid,  and  the  positive  and  negative  forces 
of  galvanic  action  passing  from  the  battery  through 
these  two  wires  into  the  solution  will  seize  the  incon- 
ceivably fine  particles  of  gold  and  lay  them  upon  the 
watch-case  as  solid  as  though  they  had  been  melted 
there.  You  may  continue  this  process  until  every  par- 
ticle of  the  half-eagle  shall  be  placed  upon  the  watch- 
case,  and  yet  the  perfect  identity  of  your  name,  and 
all  the  marks  and  characters  engraved  upon  it,  will  be 
retained.  This  is  called  galvanizing  metals.  A  second 
copper  bank-plate  can  be  made  from  the  original  by 
galvanism,  so  that  every  letter  and  mark  shall  be  exact, 
and  the  plate  be  a  perfect  fac  -simile  of  the  original. 
Hence  we  perceive  that  through  the  positive  and  nega- 
tive forces  of  galvanism,  which  is  but  one  form  of  elec- 
tricity, a  perfect  identity  is  preserved. 

We  will  now  apply  this  great  principle  to  the  argu- 
ment under   consideration.     The  monthly  evacuations 


..EOT  ORE    XII.  239 

of  the  female  are  a  universal  solvent  in  which  are  in- 
volved exact  proportions  of  all  the  constituent  elements 
of  her  body.  This  redundancy  is  given  her  by  the 
Creator  for  the  propagation  of  her  race.  As  soon  as 
she  conceives,  the  womb  closes  up,  and  this  same  re- 
dundant compound  of  her  being  is  secreted  in  the 
womb,  as  the  fluid  in  which  the  foetus  is  immersed  and 
swims,  and  is  the  raw  material  out  of  which  its  body 
is  to  be  manufactured.  And  while  I  am  upon  this 
point,  permit  me  to  remark,  that  as  soon  as  the  child 
is  born  this  same  redundant  substance  is  carried  through 
the  lacteal  secretions  and  manufactured  into  nourish- 
ment which  the  infant  draws  from  its  mother's  bosom. 
Hence  the  menses  are  the  prepared  substance  to  pro- 
duce the  child's  body  in  the  womb,  and  to  sustain  it  at, 
the  breast. 

Through  the  galvanic  action  of  the  positive  and  neg- 
ative forces  of  her  involuntary  nerves  the  foetus  is 
formed.  These  forces  seize  the  elementary  particles 
of  this  solution,  and  convey  them  to  the  conception, 
which  is  the  nebulo-centre  or  nucleus  to  which  they  all 
tend,  similar  to  the  particles  of  gold  in  solution  to  the 
watch-case.  Hence  if  a  woman  were  to  conceive  while 
wrapped  in  total  darkness,  and  never  see  the  man  by 
whom  she  conceived,  nor  get  the  most  distant  impres- 
sion of  his  'image,  and  could  she,  at  the  moment  of 
conception,  be  consigned  to  a  sleep  of  profound  insen- 
sibility till  the  time  of  her  delivery  came,  she  would 


240  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

unquestionably  bring  forth  an  offspring  exactly  in  he? 
own  image.  It  would  be  as  perfect  a  fac-simile  of  her 
own  organism,  form,  and  features  as  the  second  bank- 
plate  was  of  the  first  from  which  by  galvanic  action  it 
was  produced.  But  while  the  galvanic  powers  of  her 
involuntary  nerves,  through  the  positive  forces,  are  form- 
ing the  new  being  in  her  own  image,  the  voluntary 
nerves,  through  which  the  voluntary  powers  of  her 
mind  act,  are  also  producing  their  effects  by  moulding 
the  new  being  in  the  image  of  the  person  on  whom  her 
mind  is  most  powerfully  placed.  Hence  if  her  self- 
esteem  is  great,  and  she  fancies  herself  superior  to  her 
husband,  and  has  great  self-love,  and  but  little  regard 
for  him,  she  will  often  consult  her  mirror,  and  her  child 
will  most  resemble  herself  notwithstanding  the  im- 
pression of  her  husband's  countenance  and  the  features 
of  all  others  around  her. 

But  if  she,  on  the  contrary,  cherishes  a  warm  and 
generous  affection  to  her  husband,  and  if  he  be  far  dis- 
tant from  home  and  exposed  to  dangers  on  land  or 
ocean,  her  mind  goes  with  him  and  lingers  in  imagina- 
tion upon  his  image.  The  child  is  born,  but  it  is  in 
the  likeness  of  its  father.  If  her  love  and  esteem  to- 
ward herself  and  husband  are  about  equally  divided 
and  balanced,  the  child  will  be  a  blended  picture  of  the 
two.  The  opposite  passions  of  hatred  and  dislike  will 
produce  the  same  result  as  it  regards  form  of  features 
and  personal  appearance.     Or  if  the  mother  shoulj 


LECTURE    XXI.  241 

entertain  a  very  high  regard  for  her  minister,  doctor, 
or  any  friend,  and  circumstances  should  occur  to  bring 
him  frequently  to  her  mind,  her  child  would  resemble 
him.  Suppose  her  husband  should  be  jealous  of  any  of 
these,  or  of  some  boarder  in  the  family  whom  she  even 
hated,  and  charge  her  with  conjugal  infidelity,  she  would 
be  inclined,  under  such  circumstances,  to  keep  her  mind 
upon  him  in  detestation,  fear  that  her  child  might  re- 
semble him,  and  when  born  all  her  fears  would  be  real- 
ized. Such  circumstances  have  separated  many  a  hus- 
band and  wife,  and  broken  up  many  a  family  when  the 
wife  was  virtuous,  and  her  honor  unsullied  and  pure  as 
the  snowflake  ere  it  falls. 

In  this  view  of  the  subject  it  will  be  seen  that  every 
countenance  upon  which  the  enciente  mother  gazes,  and 
every  object,  whether  animate  or  inanimate,  presented 
to  her  view,  has  a  tendency  to  produce  an  impression, 
either  favorable  or  unfavorable,  upon  the  foetus.  And 
as  all  form,  motion,  and  power  belong  to,  and  exist  in, 
mind,  and  can  be  communicated  through  electric  actios, 
from  the  mother's  mind  to  the  foetus,  so  wThen  beautiful 
forms  and  pleasing  sights  are  presented  to  her  with  suf- 
ficient power,  she  transmits  them  by  a  mental  impres- 
sion to  the  embryo  being  as  a  part  of  its  future  beauty. 
So,  on  the  other  hand,  when  horrid  forms  and  fearful 
sights  are  presented  to  her  mind  with  sufficient  power, 
and  as  her  mind  *iow  contains  these  deformities  sh« 
It 


24:2  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

transmits  them  also  by  mental  impression  to  her  child 
and  perchance  effects  its  ruin. 

If  we  contemplate  all  form,  motion,  and  power  as 
existing  in  mind,  and  if  the  mind  has,  indeed,  its  spir- 
itual arms,  hands,  and  fingers,  and  limbs,  feet,  and 
toes,  and  of  which  the  natural  ones  are  only  correspond- 
ent manifestations,  may  not,  then,  the  withdrawing  of 
the  spiritual  arm  from  action  in  the  mother's  mind  be 
the  cause  of  preventing  the  natural  one  in  the  foetus 
from  being  developed  and  produced  ?  She  deeply  con- 
templates a  girl  without  an  arm,  and  hence  sends  no 
motion  from  her  spiritual  arm,  and  therefore  produces 
no  electric  action  through  the  corresponding  nerves  to 
organize  the  natural  arm  of  the  foetus,  and  hence  her 
child  is  born  without  an  arm.  The  voluntary  impres- 
sion of  her  mind  may  be  sufficiently  great  to  overpower 
all  involuntary  action  in  that  part.  This  would  ac- 
count for  the  crush  of  the  lamb's  head,  before  stated, 
and  for  all  mishaps  being  transmitted  by  a  deep  im- 
pression from  the  mother's  mind  to  the  corresponding 
part  of  the  foetus.  It  would  account  for  the  color  of 
Jacob's  cattle,  because  all  colors  exist  only  in  the  rays 
of  light  which  are  but  a  result  of  electric  action.  It 
would  account  philosophically  for  the  fact  how  the  col- 
or of  wine  and  the  colors  and  shapes  of  berries  are  in 
Eke  manner  stamped  upon  the  unborn  being.  It  would 
account  for  the  fact  how  even  the  mother's  disposition 
rjb.V  be  phrenologically  and  hereditarily  communicated 


LECTURE    XI.  243 

to  Ler  offspring.  By  exercising  too  much  her  acquisi- 
tiveness or  secretiveness — or  by  excising  too  deeply  her 
combativeness,  destructiveness,  or  revengeful  feelings, 
she  may  communicate  these  hereditarily  to  her  child, 
and  thus  sow,  in  the  embryo,  the  seeds  of  the  future 
robber,  liar,  or  even  murderer.  The  lady,  while  en- 
ceinte, walks  upon  enchanted  ground.  She  can  not 
stir  without  touching  some  string  that  may  vibrate 
either  harmony  or  discord  in  her  offspring's  soul  long 
after  her  head  shall  have  been  laid  in  the  dust.  Phre- 
nology must  take  one  step  farther  back.  She  must 
commence  her  instructions  at  the  commencement  of 
our  embryo  being.  She  must  there  take  her  stand  at 
the  fountain-  head  of  existence,  and  thunder  her  lessons 
of  eloquence  as  she  moves  down  the  stream  of  human 
life  to  the  silent  grave,  nor  cease  her  warning  voice  till 
the  finger  of  death  shall  touch  her  lip. 

The  subject,  Ladies,  of  Human  Beauty  is  now  fairly 
open  before  us,  and  its  vast  importance  seems  to 
awaken  in  your  minds,  as  we  proceed,  an  increasing 
interest.  I  am  now  ready  to  have  the  grand  question 
introduced — How  are  our  children  to  be  born  into 
existence  with  just  such  lineaments  of  form,  or  Human 
Beauty,  as  we  may  desire  1 

To  answer  this  question  understanding^,  I  will  take 
into  consideration  the  general  directions  to  be  pur- 
sued;, and  the  means  to  be  used  in  order  to  produce 
the  noblest  specimen  of  Human  Beauty,     i  desire,  at 


244  ELECTRICAL  PSYCHOLOGY. 

the  very  onset,  to  introduce  the  subject  to  you  in  its 
highest  perfection,  so  far  as  I  am  able.  To  this  end 
I  must  select  a  lady  of  brilliant  talents,  and  who  is 
highly  educated  and  accomplished  as  an  ornament  of 
her  sex,  but  whose  features  and  form  are  but  of  ordi- 
nary mould.  I  merely  desire  one  who  is  capable  of 
producing  the  strongest  possible  mental  impression. 
Let  this  lady  select,  before  she  conceives,  a  portrait, 
bust,  miniature,  or  picture  of  some  beautiful,  talented, 
and  distinguished  individual,  or  the  living  person,  she 
would  desire  her  child  to  be  like  both  in  appearance 
and  character.  Let  it  be  a  picture  that  she  greatly 
admires  for  its  fine  proportions  and  beauty  of  person. 
Let  her  keep  her  mind  upon  it  until  she  entirely  fa- 
miliarizes herself  with  its  features  and  form.  Let  her 
now  conceive  with  this  deep  impression  on  her  mind ; 
and  after  this,  let  her  still  continue  to  gaze  upon,  and 
daily  contemplate,  the  admirable  grace  of  its  form,  and 
the  charming  expression  of  its  countenance.  Let  her 
place  it  where  it  can  be  readily  seen.  Let  her  imbibe 
for  this  image  a  sentimental  passion,  indelibly  im- 
press it  upon  the  heart,  and  interweave  and  blend  it, 
as  it  were,  with  her  being.  Let  her  contemplate  it  by 
day  with  such  intense  interest  and  devotion  as  to 
transplant,  if  possible,  its  image  to  her  midnight 
dreams.  And  let  her  constantly  long  and  desire,  and 
ardently  hope  and  expect,  that  her  child  shall  be  like 


LECTURE    XII.  245 

this  in  form  and  soul.     These  are  to  be  her  constant 
feelings  and  impressions  till  the  day  of  delivery. 

In  addition  to  this,  let  the  most  admirable  order, 
arrangement,  and  comfort  pervade  her  house,  and  par- 
ticularly her  own  apartment.  Let  its  furniture  be 
beautiful.  Let  it  be  adorned  with  pictures  of  the 
most  pleasing  and  delightful  landscapes  embracing  all 
the  beauties  and  varieties  of  nature,  and  such  life-like 
scenery  as  sjiall  awaken  and  rouse  the  noblest  powers 
of  her  ideality,  sublimity,  and  imagination.  Let  her 
frequently  go  out  to  gaze  upon,  and  contemplate  nature 
as  she  is,  whether  on  the  earth  beneath,  or  in  the 
starry  fields  that  mantle  the  bosom  of  night.  By 
these  means  she  will  keep  her  mind  in  balance,  and 
bring  it  into  harmony  with  all  that  is  grand  and  beau- 
tiful in  the  works  of  the  Creator.  And  not  only  so, 
but  let  her  soul  be  kept  serene.  Let  her  passions  not 
be  excited.  Let  her  anger,  jealousy,  and  vengeance 
remain  in  slumber,  and  no  language  be  used  to  ruffle 
her  tranquillity.  I  am  speaking  of  a  highly  educated, 
accomplished,  and  talented  woman.  And,  lastly,  let 
her  food  be  wholesome,  plain,  and  prepared  to  her 
wishes,  and  adapted  to  her  appetite.  Let  these  direc- 
tions be  faithfully  observed  during  her  entire  period 
of  gestation,  and  her  child  will  be  moulded  in  the 
image  of  the  picture,  or  living  person  she  contemplated, 
and  be  born  into  existence  a  noble  specimen  of  Human 
Beauty  ;  and  under  prcper  phrenological  culture  it  cam 


246  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

be  borne  on  in  the  path  of  improvement,  and  finally 
elevated  to  the  highest  physical  beauty,  and  intellectual 
and  moral  perfection  of  our  nature. 

I  have  now  considered  what  I  call  a  perfect  case, 
the  noblest  specimen  of  man.  And  in  order  to  pro- 
duce this  happy  result,  we  perceive  that  the  mother 
must  be  highly  educated,  enlightened,  and  refined.  It 
depends  more  upon  her  than  the  father.  If  the  father 
should  possess  the  talents  of  an  angel,  and  the  mother 
be  deficient  in  intellect,  her  offspring,  particularly  the 
sons,  would  never  rise  above  mediocrity.  In .  such 
case  the  best  intellect  is  in  favor  of  the  daughters. 
But  reverse  it,  and  let  the  father  be  deficient,  and  tho 
mother  highly  talented,  and  she  will  produce  intelli- 
gent children  of  both  sexes,  but  this  intelligence  will 
be  far  more  strongly  developed  in  the  sons  than  in  the 
daughters.  An  instance  can  not  be  found  where  an 
imbecile  mother  ever  produced  a  man  of  sterling  tal- 
ents, even  though  the  father,  as  such,  were  most  emi 
ncntly  distinguished.  All  talented  and  great  men 
have  had  great  mothers  who,  even  if  they  were  unedu- 
cated, still  possessed  the  elements  of  original  great 
ness. 

Owing,  therefore,  to  this  great  diversity  of  intellec 
tual,    moral,  and    physical    beauty  and    deformity  in 
females,  it  can  not  be  expected,  that  the  grand  period 
will  soon  arrive  when  all  these  difficulties  will  be  sur- 
mounted, and  when  our  race  shall  attain  that  physical, 


LECTURE    XII.  24? 

mental,  and  moral  beauty  which  our  subject  involves, 
foreshadows,  and  insures.  Comparatively  but  few  fe- 
males are  as  yet  qualified  to  successfully  introduce 
their  offspring  into  existence  in  Human  Beauty,  yet 
the  most  deformed  and  ignorant  female  can  be  in- 
structed and  directed  how  to  improve  her  progeny. 
Her  children  again  can  be  still  farther  improved  and 
elevated,  and  so  on  to  succeeding  generations  till  the 
end,  we  contemplate,  shall  be  obtained,  and  the  highest 
hopes,  and  the  brightest  mid-day  dream  of  the  philan- 
thropist, as  to  the  perfection  of  humanity,  shall  be 
consummated. 

My  argument,  thus  far,  relates  to  those  of  the  fe- 
male race  who  are  not  yet  in  the  electro-psychologicaJ 
state,  but  who  are  still  capable  of  gradually  perfecting 
their  progeny  in  proportion  to  the  strength  and  powe?,' 
of  their  impressions,  and  thus  moving  them  onward  to 
the  fair  fields  of  Human  Beauty.  But  in  all  these 
cases  it  can  be  effected  by  the  wife  only,  independent 
of  her  husband.  But  there  are  many*  who  are  nat- 
urally in  the  psychological  state,  and  millions  more 
who,  by  a  slight  exertion,  can  be  brought  into  it. 
Upon  all  such  a  mental  and  moral  impression  can  be 
made  to  any  extent  we  choose.  In  all  these  instances 
it  would  be  in  the  power  of  the  husband  to  select  the 
portrait  or  picture  in  the  likeness  and  beauty  of  which 
he  would  desire  his  child  to  be  moulded.  And  by  pro- 
ducing the  impression  psychologically  upon  the  mind 


248  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

of  his  companion  once  or  twice  per  day,  the  end  would 
be  obtained,  and  in  all  such  cases  the  finest  specimens 
of  Human  Beauty  could  now  be  produced.  How  im- 
portant, then,  that  the  science  of  Electrical  Psychology 
should  be  thoroughly  learned  and  understood  by  all,  so 
that,  through  their  assistance,  as  many  as  possible 
may  be,  by  perseverance,  brought  into  the  state,  and 
that  the  great  work  of  producing  these  sublime  im- 
pressions may  now  be  understandingly  commenced, 
and  some  rare  specimens  of  Human  Beauty,  under  the 
energy  of  this  science,  be  presented  to  the  world, 

We  see  then,  Ladies,  the  supreme  importance  of 
woman  being  highly  educated  and  accomplished.  Col- 
leges should  be  dedicated  to  her,  and  all  the  great  and 
useful  sciences,  that  strengthen,  expand,  and  elevate 
the  mind,  should  be  laid  at  her  feet.  Her  mind  should 
be  early  imbued  with  political  science,  and  taught  the 
value  of  liberty,  and  the  deep-toned  love  of  country. 
She  should  be  taught  the  history  of  fallen  empires, 
kingdoms,  and  republics,  and  be  made  acquainted  with 
the  hardships,  toils,  and  sufferings  of  our  revolutionary 
heroes.  She  should  be  taught  the  lofty  dignity,  honor, 
and  heroism  of  George  Washington,  the  cradled  son 
of  Columbia.  She  should  be  educated  in  every  sense 
equal  to  the  man.  It  has  been  generally  supposed,  in 
by-gone  days,  that  if  woman  could  barely  read  and 
write,  it  was  abundant,  as  she  had  nothing  to  do  but 
attend  to  her  domestic  concerns,  and  to  take  care  of 


LECTl/RE    XI I.  2-13 

children.  Bat  the  arrest  of  her  progress  in  science 
has  but  proved  to  be  an  arrest  of  the  intellectual, 
moral,  and  social  advancement  of  the  world.  Her  sta- 
tion, so  far  from  being  insignificant,  is  indeed  a  mosfi 
responsible  one.  She  holds  in  her  silken  grasp  the 
destiny  of  empires,  and  the  weal  and  woe  of  our  race. 
She  has  not  only  a  moulding  power  over  her  unborn 
offspring,  but  during  the  first  ten  years  of  its  exist- 
ence, as  it  is  almost  exclusively  confined  to  her  soci- 
ety, so  from  her  it  still  continues  to  draw,  in  a  great 
measure,  its  cast  of  character.  Hence  she  should  be 
educated  and  qualified  to  breathe  to  her  child  the 
purest  thoughts  and  noblest  principles,  and  to  inspire 
itb  tender  bosom  with  the  deep-toned  love  of  country. 
She  should  be  qualified  to  impress  upon  it  a  high  sense 
of  honor  and  true  greatness,  and  the  most  patriotic 
and  exalted  sentiments.  And,  in  order  to  do  this  suc- 
cessfully, she  should  be  well  acquainted  with  phreno- 
logical science  and  human  nature,  so  as  to  make  her 
impressions  understandingly  and  forcibly  upon  the 
proper  organs  of  the  brain.  These  organs  would  then 
be  more  and  more  harmoniously  developed,  and  the  child 
would  continue  to  improve  in  beauty  of  person,  and  in 
intellectual  and  moral  greatness^  as  he  advanced  to 
maturity. 

In  the  light  our  subject  now  stands,  how  lamentably 
snd  how  awful  is  the  consideration,  that  our  children 
should  be  committed  to  the  care  of  ignirant,  degraded 


250  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

and  too  often  of  wicked  and  unprincipled  servants,  to 
be  almost  exclusively  reared  \j  them !  There  the 
seeds  of  ignorance,  if  not  of  vice,  arc  earl}7  sown. 
How  elevated  and  responsible  is  the  mother's  station i 
How  fatal  to  the  character  and  welfare  of  her  offspring 
are  ignorance  and  vice  !  How  dreadful,  how  alarming 
and  fearful,  to  see  her  resign  her  fond  charge,  and 
commit  its  destiny,  for  weal  or  woe,  to  such  unskilled 
hands  !  She  had  better  resign  her  child  to  the  silent 
grave,  where,  even  though  her  lids  are  filled  with 
tears,  she  can  yet  smile,  that  its  pains  are  o'er,  that 
its  beating  pulse  is  still,  its  spirit  unstained,  and  its 
burning  brow  is  cold  !  Yes,  Ladies,  the  contempla- 
tion of  this  subject  is  so  painful,  that  I  choose  to  leave 
you  to  draw  your  own  conclusions  rather  than  to  ex- 
press my  thoughts. 

True,  the  pulpit  insists  on  her  social  and  religious 
rights,  because  this  is  popular.  But  by  neglecting  to 
plead  in  behalf  of  her  civil,  her  political,  and  in- 
tellectual bights  it  has  forgotten  her  elevated  sta- 
tion and  high  destiny,  fallen  from  heaven  to  earth,  and. 
by  its  fall,  crushed  the  dearest  hopes  of  the  philan- 
thropist for  the  speedy,  intellectual,  and  moral  advance- 
ment of  our  race.  It  will  not,  and  dare  not  speak  in 
a  bold,  firm,  and  un trembling  voice  in  defense  of  th^se 
rising  sciences  and  improvements  of  the  age,  howevn 
useful,  against  which  the  current  of  popular  opinio* 
stnngly   sets.      It  has    ceased  to   breathe   the   pur<?, 


LECTURE    XII.  251 

healthful,  and  invigorating  breezes  of  Paradise,  that 
inspire  an  independent  and  godlike  heroism.  Woman 
is  thus,  in  a  voice  of  pretended  mercy,  oppressed,  and 
it  dare  not  even  rebuke  oppression  and  crime,  when 
clothed  in  gold  and  sustained  by  popular  impulse. 

The  pulpit  is  the  great  engine  of  moral  power  and 
moral  reform.  Bat  by  neglecting  the  science  of  Hu- 
man  Beauty,  and  the  general  and  extensive  education 
of  woman,  its  energies  are  in  a  great  degree  para- 
lyzed. But  it  is  destined,  by  the  decree  of  the  Ruling 
Heavens,  to  be  aroused  from  its  dreadful  slumberings 
upon  the  monster  Popularity,  whose  breath  is  con- 
suming it,  and  to  thunder  its  energizing  and  regenera- 
ting powers  for  the  accomplishment  of  this  great  end 
which  involves  the  moral  elevation  and  the  intellectual 
grandeur  of  man.  The  science  of  Genetology,  em- 
bracing the  doctrine  of  psychological  impressions,  in 
connection  with  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ,  is  destined 
to  renovate  the  world  and  usher  in  the  millennial 
morn.  Extensive  combinations  are  formed,  and  the 
most  untiring  exertions  are  constantly  made  to  improve, 
not  only  the  animal,  but  even  the  vegetable  race. 
Fruits  and  grains,  in  a  few  years,  have  been  brought 
to  great  perfection,  by  man  simply  co-operating  with 
nature  so  as  to  enable  her  to  make  the  most  favorable  im- 
pressions to  produce  what  is  beautiful  in  her  vegetable 
department.  So  also  in  the  animal  kingdom.  Horsesr 
sheep,  and  oxen,  and  even  the  race  of  swine,  are  annu 


252  .  ELECTRICAL    PSYCHOLOGY. 

ally  improving  in  form  and  beauty,  and  premiums  ar€ 
offered  for  the  finest  specimens,  both  as  to  symmetry 
and  size.  But  not  a  single  thought  is  bestowed  as  tc 
improving  and  beautifying  the  godlike  lineaments  of 
the  human  form.  To  improve  these  through  the  edu- 
cating of  woman,  and  enlightening  her  how  to  make  & 
psychological  impression  upon  her  embryo-child,  is  but 
to  improve  the  morals  of  our  race.  The  theme  is  a 
great  one,  and  it  will  require  future  generations  to 
move  it  on,  and  to  develop  and  present  it  perfect  to 
the  world.  It  will  be  the  scroll  of  Human  Beaut* 
anrolled.     This  is  indeed  a  sublime  hope. 

1 ■''  Eternal  hope  !  -when  yonder  spheres  sublime 
Peal'd  their  first  notes  to  sound  the  march  of  time, 
Thy  joyous  birth  began;  but  not  to  fade 
When  all  the  sister  planets  have  decayed. 
When  -wrapt  in  fire,  the  realms  of  ether  glov, 
And  heaven's  last  thunder  shakes  the  earth  beloiTa 
Thou,  undismayed,  shalt  o'er  the  ruin  smile, 
And  ligM  thy  torch  at  nature's  funeral  pito." 


SIX    LECTURES 


PHILOSOPHY   OF  MESMERISM. 


DELIVERED   IN  THI3 


fyntlhaxa'  (Sjjapjet,  gosiatt. 


By    JOHN    BOVEE    DODS. 


REPORTED    BY   A    HEARER 


TWELFTH    THOUSAND, 


NEW  YORK : 

S.     R.     WELL'S    &    CO.,    PUBLISHERS 

No.   737  Broadway. 

1876. 


RntcreTl  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1S73,  by 

SAMUEL  E.  WELLS, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington.  D.  C. 


ADVERTISEMENT 

TO    THE    IMPROVED    AND    STEREOTYPED    EDITION. 

Within  one  month  after  these  highly  popular 
lectures  were  first  delivered,  an  edition  of  three 
thousand  copies  was  published  and  sold,  and  a 
second  edition  called  for,  which  has  also  been 
exhausted,  and  the  demand  is  still  increasing.* 
Under  these  circumstances  the  author  was  pre- 
vailed   On    10    REVISE,   ENLARGE,  and    SO    IMPROVE 

the  work  as  to  render  it,  if  possible,  even  much 
more  desirable. 

The  merits  of  the  work  may  be  inferred  from 
this  fact :  an  audience  of  over  two  thousand 
people,  composed  of  the  most  intelligent  citizens 
of  New  England,  was  held  six  evenings  in  suc- 
cession, chained  m  the  most  profound  silence, 
listening  to  these  truly  philosophical  lectures,  and 

*  This  work  has  recently  been  re-published  in  England,  and  has 
seen  favorably  received  by  the  most  scientific  men  of  Europe. 


IV  ADVERT  3EMENT. 

witnessing  suigicai  operations  without  pain;  and 
other  experiments,  at  once  convincing,  and  full 
of  great  practical  utility  to  every  human  being. 

The  author,  Dr.  Dods,  is  a  man  of  extensho 
experience  and  general  information.  Fie  first 
qualified  himself  for  the  medical  profession,  then 
engaged  in  the  study  of  theology,  and  has  been 
in  the  ministry  for  more  than  twenty  years,  and 
is  favorably  known  as  a  lecturer  on  many  of  \\w 
natural  sciences. 


CONTENTS 


LECTURE  I. 

k.NIMAI.  MAG NETlfcM,  INTRODUCTORY  LECTURE  ON  ....  page  7-lt 
Invitation  by  Members  of  the  Legislature  to  leccure  on  the  Science  of  Animal  Mag-, 
netism — Wresting  the  Science  from  the  hands  of  ignorant  and  designing  Individ- 
uals— Skepticism — The  cry  of  Humbug  and  Collusion  supplies  the  place  of  sound 
ffnunppt — ris\Ki<>c  Hs'ypv  Fvjifrm — Tfae  Svipvce  of  Phrenology — Truth  car 
never  die — Denouncing  before  investigation — Mesmerism  embraced  by  men  whoso 
names  will  live  always — Animal  Magnetism  an  inappropriate  Name — Mind,  and 
its  powers — The  Law  of  Equilibrium — The  Earth  not  Eternal — Mountains — Wa- 
ter— Experiments — Electrical  Science — Causes  of  Thunder  and  Lightning — The 
Nerve -vital  Fluid  passing  from  one  Body  to  anothei — The  Nervous  System — 
Blood — Brain — Insensibility — Who  can  and  who  ought  to  be  Mesmerized — Phys- 
ica.  Vnergy-.  Troche.-  i-f  Magnetizing. 


LECTURE  II. 

MENTAL  ELECTRICITY,  OR  SPIRITUALISM 18-29 

The  Why  and  Wherefore  of  Mesmerism — Experiment— Fact — Physical,  Mental,  and 
Moral  Power — A  Lesser  Power  may  Mesmerize  a  Greater  Power — Galvanic  Bat- 
tery— Coloring  of  the  Blood — Voluntary  and  Involuntary  Motion — Power  of  tho 
Will — Execution  of  Criminals — Experiments  on  the  Body  after  death— Tho 
Corpse  made  to  move — Attraction  and  Repulsion — Insanity — Time  requisite  ta 
produce  Insensibility — A  Child  can  Mesmerize  its  Father — Importance  of  'jeing 
Mesmerized. 


LECTURE  III 

AN  APPEAL  IN  BEHALF  OF  THE  SCIENCE 50-11 

The  Power  of  the  Creator— The  Origin  of  Matter— John  Milton — The  World  not 
crested  out  of  Nothing — The  Eternal  Existence  of  Electricity — Spirit  and  Matter 
— The  Gradual  Creation  of  Plants — The  Sun  pure  Electricity— Worlds  Electrically 
and  Magnetically  suspended— Experiments  with  the  Electrifying  Machine— Tha 
Magnet— The  Beauty,  Order,  and  Harmony  of  all  the  Laws  of  Nature. 


CONTENTS. 


LECTURE  IV. 

TUP:  PHlLOSOPHI  OF  CLAIRVOYANCE ....     44.58 

Mind — Motion — The  Brain — The  Expansion  and  Contraction  ci'  Bodies  by  Heal 
and  Cold — Vision  without  the  Natural  Organs — Somnambulism — Dreaming — 
Catalepsy— Dr.  Patterson — Well-authenticated  facts — An  Appeal  to  Medical  Gen- 
tlemen— Great  Feats  of  Climbing  and  Walking  on  House-tops  in  the  Dark  while 
hi  a  State  of  Unconsciousness — Painting  in  the  Dark — A  Remarkable  Fact — Seeing, 
Hearing,  Tasting,  and  Smelling — The  Transparency  of  Objects — Magnetic  or  Gal- 
vanic Light — Distinguished  Clairvoyants  in  the  United  States — Additional  Ex- 
periments— Philosophy  of  Hearing — Amputated  Limb — Hon.  T.  G.  Greenwood 
—A  Fact. 


LECTURE  V. 

FEE  NUMBER  OF  DEGREES  IN  MESMERISM 60-71 

The  First  Degree — Attraction  by  the  Magnetizer — Second  Degree — Third  Degree — 
Fourth  Degree — Fifth  Degree  Clairvoyance — Communication — Experiment — 
Why  is  not  Magnetism  more  generally  understood — Objections  answered— 
Demosthenes—Cicero — The  Methodists— Muscular  Power — Concentration— Tho 
Dangers  and  Abuse  of  Mesmerism — Every  blessing  abused — Crime — Causes- 
Magnetizing  a  part,  and  not  the  whole  body— A  Surgical  Operation — A  Broken 
Arm — A  Tumor  extracted  without  Pain— Rev.  John  Pierpont  testifies  publicly  to 
the  Truth  and  Utility  of  Mesmerism — The  Wonderful  Power  to  Charm  all  Pain. 


LECTURE  VI. 

UCR  SAVIOUR  AND  THE  APOSTLES 72-82 

The  right  to  think  for  ourselves — Restrictions — The  Command  of  Christ  to  hia 
Apostles  to  Heal  the  Sick,  as  well  as  to  Preach— Miracles — Palsied  Arm — The 
8aviocr  and  the  Woman — The  Apostolic  Power— John  the  Revelator — Trans- 
ftgura  ion— Moses  and  Elias— The  Crucifixion  :f  Corist— His  Resurrection,  fcft 
—Dr.  Chann  ng  on  Dying  without  ?&ln. 


ANIMAL   MAGNETISM. 


LECTURE    I 


Ladies  and  Gentlemen:  It  is  with  much  pleasure 
that  I  present  myself  bsfore  you  this  evening,  to  lecture 
upon  the  science  of  Animal  Magnetism.  I  do  this  by 
special  invitation  from  several  distinguished  members 
of  both  branches  of  our  legislature,  now  in  session  in 
this  city ;  and  this  thronged  congregation  of  more  than 
two  thousand  hearers  speak  the  interest  which  is  awak- 
ened in  the  bosoms  of  our  citizens  in  relation  to  this 
subject.  This  dense  and  anxious  crowd  too  plainly 
manifest  the  high  expectations  which  are  entertainec 
of  the  feeble  abilities  of  the  speaker  to  do  it  justice — 
expectations  which  I  am  fully  sensible  I  shall  be  unable 
to  answer.  Leaning,  however,  upon  the  solid  grandeui 
of  truth,  and  believing  that  to  be  stirring  eloquence 
and  living  power,  I  have,  therefore,  even  as  things  now 
are,  with  all  your  roused  expectations  crowding  upon 
me,  but  little  to  hazard,  for  I  am  fully  sensible  that  I 
am  standing  before  a  learned  and  an  intelligent  congre- 
gation. And  when  I  inform  you  that  I  have  never 
writter.  any  thing  upon  this  subject,  and  am,  therefore, 
obliged  to  speak  from  the  fortuitous  suggestions  of  the 


8  LECTURES    ON 

moment,  I  am    »onscious  that  you  will  do  me  justice, 
by  making  every  reasonable  allowance. 

It  is  not  my  profession  to  lecture  upon  this  subject. 
I  have  other  means  for  my  subsistence,  and  for  that 
of  those  who  depend  upon  me.  Circumstances  have 
called  me  into  the  field.  Many,  very  many  ignorant 
individuals,  who  know  nothing  of  the  human  system, 
nor  of  the  common  principles  of  any  science,  have  gone 
into  the  field  as  lecturers  on  Animal  Magnetism,  and 
by  making  it  a  mere  puppet-show,  have  brought  it  into 
degradation  in  the  public  mind.  Such  persons  are 
doing  the  cause,  which  is  one  of  benevolence  and  mercy, 
an  irreparable  injury.  They  had  better  qualify  them- 
selves for  the  work,  or  else  retire  from  the  field.  In 
this  state  of  things,  I  was  urged,  by  several  scientific 
gentlemen,  to  step  forward  in  defence  of  the  cause  of 
righteousness  and  truth,  and  to  lend  my  aid  in  raising 
it  from  the  dust,  in  wiping  off  the  sneers  of  men,  and  in 
placing  it  on  a  foundation  where  it  should  command  not 
only  the  attention,  but  the  respect  and  admiration  which 
are  justly  due  to  it  from  men  of  science  and  talents 
In  this  city,  I  find  but  one  noble  spirit  laboring  and 
toiling,  who  is  well  qualified  for  the  work,  and  who  is 
deserving  a  better  patronage  than  he  receives.*  As 
these  are  the  circumstances  under  which  I  have  en- 
tered the  field,  so,  of  course,  I  vis"t  those  places  only 
where  I  am  invited  to  lecture  upon  this  science. 

I  have  had  the  subject  of  Mesmerism  under  consider- 
ation foi  about  seven  years,  reading  all  that  came  in 
my  way  for  and  against  it.  Five  of  these  years  I  re- 
mained   a    stubborn,   a   most   confirmed    sceptic,   and 

*   Dr  Gilbert 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM. 


refused  even  to  attend  a  lecture,  or  to  witness  an  ex- 
periment, until  I  was  persuade!  by  a  particular  friend 
of  mine  to  accompany  him,  and  see  and  hear  for  myself. 
I  am,  therefore,  prepared  to  make  a'l  due  allowance  for 
honest  sceptics  ;  and,  in  their  opposition  to  me  during 
this  course  of  lectures,  I  shall  maintain  an  entire  em- 
pire over  my  feelings ;  and  being  fully  sensible  of 
Iheir  condition,  I  wrell  know  how  to  sympathize  with 
them.  But  there  is  yet  another  class  of  sceptics,  who 
have  witnessed  experiments  which  ihey  cannot  resist, 
and  still  cry,  "  humbug  and  collusion  !"  Of  these, 
there  are  two  kinds.  First,  those  who  never  investi- 
gate anything  for  themselves,  and  who  do  not  know 
the  definitions  of  the  words,  "  humbug  and  collusion ;" 
but  who,  nevertheless,  use  them  very  freely,  because 
>,hey  have  heard  their  minister,  their  doctor,  or,  per- 
chance, their  schoolmaster,  use  them.  They  do  it  by 
imitation,  on  the  same  principle  that  the  parrot  imitates 
the  sound  of  the  human  voice,  and  they  do  it  just  about 
as  understandingly.  Second,  those  who  are  talented, 
and  desire  to  keep  on  the  wings  of  the  popular  breeze, 
and  catch  the  breath  of  fame.  These  may  be  known  by 
the  ridicule,  wit,  and  sarcasm  they  employ,  through  the 
press  and  otherwise.  But,  "humbug  and  collusion"  have 
become  stereotyped  words,  and  their  use  costs  but  little 
labor ;  and  they  answer  most  admirably  to  supply  the 
place  of  sound  argument  and  common  sense  in  the  most 
of  minds.  If  my  hearers  will  please  turn  their  atten- 
tion to  all  the  talented  writers,  who  have,y  in  various 
ages,  vehemently  opposed  those  now  well-established 
sciences  which,  in  their  infancy,  appeared  incredible, 
and  who  assailed  them  writh  the  bitterest  invective  and 
sarcasm,   hey  will  learn  that  they  were  men  who  were 


10  LECTURES    ON 

always  studying  what  was  popular,  and  who  hal  a 
large  share  of  self-esteem,  and  of  the  love  of  approba- 
tion. This  test  will  hold  good  from  the  opposers  of  the 
earth's  revolution  on  its  axis,  discovered  by  Galileo ; 
from  the  scoffers  at  the  science  of  the  circulation  of  the 
human  blood,  discovered  by  Harvey,  step  by  step, 
down  to  the  scoffers  at  Fulton's  application  of  steam- 
power, — yes,  even  down  to  the  opposers  of,  and  scoffers 
at,  the  brilliant  science  of  Phrenology,  which  is  now 
spreading  with  a  power  that  can  never  be  successfully 
resisted,  a  zeal  that  cannot  be  quenched,  and  a  liv- 
ing energy  that  can  never  die.  True,  a  candid  man,  as 
well  as  any  other,  may  doubt  a  new  science  ;  yet,  how- 
ever strange  or  incomprehensible  it  may  appear,  he  will 
uot  denounce  till  he  has  given  the  subject  a  candid  in- 
vestigation. I  am  speaking  of  those  only  who  denounce 
without  investigation,  and  who  can  assign  no  other 
reason  for  so  doing,  but  their  own  willing  ignorance, 
or  because  the  popular  voice  is  against  it. 

I  am,  however,  proud  in  the  reflection  that  the  science 
of  Mesmerism  is  embraced  by  men  of  the  first  talents 
and  science  in  both  continents,  and  whose  names  will 
live  in  the  republic  of  letters,  and  shine  with  lustre  long 
after  those  of  fawning  sycophants  shall  have  been  lost 
in  unremembered  nothingness.  It  is  embraced  here 
among  us  by  a  Pierpont,  the  Fowlers,  a  Gilbert,  a  Neal, 
and  a  Wayland.  It  is  embraced  by  men  who  have 
forgotten  more  than  those  who  cry  "  humbug  and  col- 
lusion" ever  knew. 

I  have  been  in  the  field  as  an  occasional  lecturer  ever 
since  October,  1841,  and  have  uniformly  advocated  the 
same  principles  which  I  am  now  about  to  advance  and 
sustain  in  the  course  d(  lectures  I  am  pledged  to  deliver 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  II 

.n  this  city.  This  fact,  many  now  present  well  know 
who  have  heard  me  in  other  sections,  or  who  have 
seen  the  substance  of  what  I  have  now  to  offer  on 
Mesmerism,  reported  by  the  editor  of  the  Yarmouth- 
uort  Register,  in  March,  1842.  I  shall  here  contend 
for  the  same  principles,  and  endeavor  to  sustain  them 
by  fair  experiments,  in  electricity,  galvanism,  and  com- 
mon magnetism. 

There  is  one  apology,  however,  to  be  offered  in  favor 
of  honest  sceptics.  It  is  this:  Those  who  have  lectured 
upon  Mesmerism  have  not  pretended  to  give  any 
cause  for  the  wonderful  phenomena  produced — have 
held  them  in  mystery,  and  perhaps  pronounced  them 
inscrutable  to  the  human  intellect.  Hence,  it  is  not 
strange  that  thousands,  under  such  an  impression, 
should  refuse  to  investigate  a  subject  which  its  advo- 
cates held  in  mystery.  That  there  are  mysteries  in 
Mesmerism  I  readily  admit ;  but  that  there  are  more 
than  in  any  other  science,  I  deny.  We  may,  for  in- 
stance, tell  the  chemical  properties  of  earth,  water,  and 
air,  and  the  degree  of  warmth  necessary  to  produce 
vegetation.  But  still  no  one  can  solve  the  mystery 
how  an  acorn  becomes  an  oak,  or  a  seed  becomes  a 
plant.  There  is  no  science  in  the  universe,  but  what  has 
some  incomprehensibilities  resting  upon  its  face  ;  but 
this  circumstance  is  considered  no  objection  to  the  truth 
of  any  science.  Hence  there  is  no  reason  why  Mes- 
merism should  be  rejected  on  this  ground.  Yet  thou- 
sands do  reject  it,  because  they  contend  that  it  is 
incomprehensibly  strange !  They  know  nothing  but 
what  is  strange,  and  yet  what  is  strange  they  cannot 
believe  !  All  the  operations  of  nature  going  on  around 
us  are  strange,  and  the  only  reason  we  have  ceased  to 


12  LECTURES    ON 

wonder  is,  because   they  are   common.     All  such  ob« 
iections  are  therefore  futile. 

Before  I  proceed  any  further,  I  would  remark  that  1 
consider  "  Animal  Magnetism"  a  very  inappropriate 
name.  It  should  be  called  Spiritualism,  or  Mental 
Electricity,  because  it  is  the  direct  impulse  of  mind 
upon  the  minds  and  bodies  of  others.  As  it  is  the  science 
of  mind  and  its  powers,  so  it  is  the  highest  and  most 
sublime  science  in  the  whole  realms  of  nature,  and  as 
far  transcends  all  others  as  godlike  mind  transcends 
matter. 

Having  made  these  introductory  remarks,  I  now 
proceed  more  directly  to  the  consideration  of  the  sub- 
ject before  me.  In  presenting  before  you  "the  why 
and  the  wherefore"  of  these  interesting  phenomena, 
and,  in  order  to  make  them  plain  to  the  humblest  ca- 
pacity, it  will  be  necessary  to  associate  the  subject  with 
other  principles  in  philosophy  which  are  well  under- 
stood by  all,  and  thus  rise  from  the  consideration  of  the 
more  gross  and  dense  particles  of  matter,  step  by  step, 
up  to  those  which  are  the  most  rarifled  and  subtil  of 
which  we  can  form  any  conception.  In  doing  this,  I 
shall  not  take  into  consideration  every  possible  grade 
or  species  of  matter,  but  those  substances  only  which 
belong  to  the  great  classifications  of  nature's  empire, 
and  which  are  the  most  obvious  to  every  observer. 

In  the  first  place,  then,  I  contend  that  there  is  but 
one  common  law  pervading  the  whole  universe  of  God 
which  is  the  law  of  equilibrium.  In  perfect  accord- 
ance with  this  law  there  is  kept  up  a  constant  action 
and  reaction  throughout  every  department  of  nature. 
It  is  true  there  has  been  much  written,  and  still  more 
•aid,  abou?  the  multiplicity  and  variety  «f  the  laws  of 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  15 

(ure  But  this  is,  at  least  to  me,  wholly  unintelligible. 
While,  however,  I  contend  for  but  one  commcn  law,  it 
is  still  conceded  that  this  law  is  so  varied  as  to  be 
perfectly  adapted  to  all  the  variety  of  substances  in 
being.  On  this  principle  the  earth  is  certainly  not 
eternal,  for  were  it  so,  the  hills  and  mountains  would 
long  ago  have  been  washed  to  a  level  by  the  storms  of 
heaven ;  yes,  it  would  have  been  done  by  the  gentle 
descending  dews.  Indeed,  I  hazard  nothing  in  saying, 
tl  at  even  the  mountains  of  solid  granite  would  have 
been  crumbled  into  atoms  ages  ago,  by  the  very  opera- 
tion of  the  particles  of  air — "  the  fingers  of  Time  ;" 
because  every  thing  in  nature  is  tending  to  an  equi- 
librium. 

Having  begun  at  the  grossest  particles  of  matter,  let 
us  now  rise  gradually  in  our  contemplations,  step  by- 
step,  up  to  those  that  are  the  most  rarified  and  subtil  of 
which  we  can  form  any  conception.  Water  is  a  bod} 
lighter  than  earth.  Let  a  canal  be  dug  of  one  hundred 
feet  in  depth,  one  hundred  in  width,  and  a  thousand 
feet  in  length.  Let  a  strong  lock  be  constructed  across 
its  centre,  and  one  half  filled  with  water.  Let  the  gate 
be  hoisted,  and  the  water  in  the  one  division  will  fall, 
and  in  the  other  rise,  until  an  equilibrium  of  height  is 
attained.  Nature,  having  gained  her  end,  is  then  at 
rest.  And  the  action  of  this  element  will  be  great  in 
proportion  as  it  was  thrown  out  of  balance.  The 
rush  wil.  be  at  firs'  tremendous,  but  continue  gradu- 
ally to  lessen  until  it  finds  its  perfect  slumber  in  equal 
height 

The  same  is  true  in  relation  to  our  atmosphere,  a  sub* 
Btance  lighter  than  water.     The  air  in  this  room  is  now 
arifieu  by  1  eat,  and  is  thus?  thrown  out  of  balance  with 
2 


I  i  le:tlres  on 

the  circumambient  air  which  is  more  cold  and  dense 
Hence,  through  ever}*  key-hole  and  crevice  theie  is  2 
rush  of  this  element  into  the  room,  which  will  continue 
until  the  equilibrium  of  density  is  attained.  Then,  and 
not  before,  nature,  having  gained  her  end,  will  be  at 
rest.  The  air  in  on 3  section  of  the  globe  is  more  rari- 
fied  by  heat  than  in  another ;  and  hence  the  gentle 
zephyrs  of  heaven  are  continually  fanning  the  human 
brow  with  a  touch  of  delight,  and  carrying  health  to 
human  habitations.  If  this  element  be  thrown  still 
farther  out  of  balance,  we  witness  the  stirring  gale ; 
and  if  carried,  in  this  respect,  to  its  extreme,  we  wit- 
ness the  sweeping  hurricane,  or  the  roaring  tornado, 
which  prostrates  human  habitations  in  its  mighty  course, 
and  bows  the  mountain  forest  to  the  earth. 

The  same  is  true  in  relation  to  electricity,  a  substance 
more  rarified  and  light  than  air.  If  two  clouds  are 
equally  charged  with  this  subtil  fluid,  they  may  pass 
and  repass  each  other,  or  mingle  into  one,  yet  not  a 
flash  of  lightning  will  be  seen.  But  if  they  are  une- 
qually charged,  or  what  is  called  in  electrical  science, 
"positively  and  negatively  charged,"  then  the  heavens 
will  stream  with  forked  lightning,  till  both  clouds  are 
equally  charged.  By  long  drought  and  heat,  electricity 
becomes  very  unequally  diffused  throughout  the  atmos- 
phere. One  portion  of  air  contains  a  much  greater 
quantity  than  another,  and  when  thus  thrown  out  of 
balance  to  a  certain  extreme,  nature  can  hold  out  no 
.onger.  A  reaction  must  take  place.  Convolving 
clouds  roll  the  heavens  in  darkness — the  lightnings 
flash,  the  thunders  roll,  and  the  war  of  elements  con- 
tinues unti.  the  electric  fluid  is  equally  diffused  through- 
out the  atmosphere,  and  also  equalized  with  the  earth. 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  15 

Nature,  having  thus  gained  her  end  in  he  equilibrium 
produced,  is  at  rest — all  is  calm. 

If  we  pass  on  from  inert  matter  to  animated  nature, 
we  shall  find  th  it  the  same  law  there  also  holds  its  em- 
pire. If,  for  instance,  a  healthy  child,  three  or  four 
years  of  age,  be  permitted  to  sleep  every  night  for  a 
year  or  two  between  two  very  old,  decrepit  grandparents, 
it  will  pine  away,  and  if  not  removed,  perchance  it  may 
die.  There  is,  perhaps,  not  one  under  the  sound  of  my 
voice,  but  what  has  heard  the  remark,  that  "  it  is  very 
unnealthy  for  young  children  to  sleep  with  very  old,  in- 
firm people."  It  is  even  so,  and  parents  should  beware. 
The  child  is  full  of  animal  life,  and  its  nervous  system 
is  charged  with  the  vital  fluid,  secreted  by  the  brain. 
This  gives  that  suppleness  to  the  limbs,  and  that  buoy- 
ancy to  the  heart  which  we  witness  in  the  young.  The 
grandparents  lack  the  proper  quantity  of  this  nervo- 
vital  fluid,  which  occasions  that  rigidity  of  the  limbs 
we  witness  in  the  aged.  The  same  common  law  of 
equilibrium  that  pervades  the  universe,  is  here  also  in 
operation.  The  nervo-vital  fluid  passes  from  this  child 
to  the  two  aged  persons  in  conjunction.  The  child 
loses,  and  they  continue  to  revive,  and  as  this  little  one 
can  never  bring  those  infirm  persons  up  to  an  equilib- 
rium with  itself,  so  it  must  go  dowm  to  them.  Nature 
will  have  her  equilibrium,  if  she  has  it  in  death. 

Once  more  :  there  is  in  the  nervous  system  no  blood. 
By  the  nebvous  system  1  mean  the  brain  and  all  its 
ramifications.  The  blood  belongs  exclusively  to  the 
circulating  system,  which  embraces  the  veins  and  arte- 
ries. I  grant  that  the  blood-vessels  pass  round  the 
convolutions  of  the  brain  ,  but  in  the  nerve  itself  there  is 
no  blood,  and  the  whole  mass  of  brain  is  but  a  congeries 


16  IECTURES  ON 

of  nerves.  These  a  fe  charged  with  a  nervo-vita1!  fluid 
which  is  manufactured  from  electricity.  Hence,  the 
circulating  system  containing  the  blood,  and  the  nervous 
system  containing  the  magnetic  fluid,  are  not  to  be 
blended,  but  distinctly  considered.  Now,  as  a  human 
being  may  lack  the  proper  quantity  of  blood  in  his  cir- 
culating system,  so  he  may  lack  the  proper  quantum  of 
the  nervo-vital  fluid  in  his  nervous  system.  This  is 
certainly  rational.  And,  moreover,  it  may  be  easily 
known  when  such  is  the  case.  When  we  see  persons 
who,  on  hearing  suddenly  some  good  or  bad  news, 
are  thrown  into  great  excitement,  tremor,  and  agitation, 
we  may  be  certain  that  their  nervous  systems  lack  the 
due  measure  of  the  nervo-vital  fluid.  Now  let  a  person 
whose  brain  is  fully  charged,  come  in  contact  with  one 
whose  brain  is  greatly  wanting  in  its  due  measure  of 
this  fluid,  and  let  the  person  possessing  the  full  brain 
gently  and  unchangeably  hold  his  mind  upon  the  other, 
and  by  the  action  of  the  will,  the  fluid  will  pass  from 
the  full  brain  to  the  other,  until  the  equilibrium  between 
the  fluids  in  the  two  brains  is  attained.  The  sudden 
change  in  the  receiving  brain  produces  a  coolness  and  a 
singular  state  of  insensibility.  This  is  magnetism;  and 
it  is  in  perfect  accordance-  with  all  the  principles  of 
philosophy  in  the  known  realms  of  nature.  If  any  one 
denies  the  operation  of  the  law  of  equilibrium  in  this  cage, 
then  he  here  makes  a  chasm,  amidst  the  immensity  of 
God's  works,  which  he  can  nowhere  else  discover 
I  have  clearly  shown  him  that,  from  the  grossest  matter 
in  the  universe,  step  by  step,  through  every  grade,  up  to 
electricity,  the  same  law  holds  its  empire,  and  matter  ia 
continually  equalizing  itself  with  matter. 

On  this  principle,  it  wiU  be  ^eadily  perceived  that,  if 


ANIMAL    .MAGNETISM.  11 

a  person  nas  a  great  deficiency  of  the  nervo-vital  fluid, 
he  can  be  mesmerized  the  first  sitting,  and  probably  in 
an  hour's  time,  or  a  much  less  period.  These  we  call 
easy  subjects.  But  if  the  deficiency  be  less,  it  will  take 
a  longer  period  in  proportion,  and  if  the  brain  have 
nearly  its  proper  quantity  of  fluid,  then  the  efFect  pro- 
duced, at  the  first  sitting,  will  be  small,  yet  still  it 
will  be  visible. 

From  the  premises  laid  down,  and  in  accordance  with 
the  law  of  equilibrium,  it  will  probably  be  said,  that,  only 
few  persons  can  be  mesmerized.  This,  however,  is  not 
correct.  I  contend  that  every  person  in  existence  can 
be,  and  indeed  ought  to  be  thrown  into  the  mesmeric 
state.  This,  I  am  well  aware,  is  contrary  to  the  opinion 
of  the  advocates  of  this  science.  The  most  liberal  cal- 
culation I  have  as  yet  heard,  is  that  about  one  in  nine  of 
the  human  family  can  be  mesmerized.  But  every  one 
can  be,  and  that,  too,  in  perfect  accordance  with  the 
principles  laid  down.  Let  two  persons  of  equal  brains, 
both  in  size  and  fluid,  sit  down.  Let  one  of  these  in- 
dividuals remain  perfectly  passive,  and  let  the  other  ex- 
ercise his  mental  and  physical  energies  according  to  the 
true  principles  of  mesmerizing,  and  he  will  displace 
some  of  the  nervo-vital  fluid  from  the  passive  brain  and 
deposit  his  own  in  its  stead.  The  next  day  let  them  sit 
another  hour,  and  so  on,  day  after  day,  until  the  acting 
brain  shall  have  displaced  the  major  part  of  the  nervo- 
sa fluid  from  the  passive  brain  and  filled  up  that  space 
with  his  own  nervous  force,  and  the  person  vvjII  yield  to 
rie  magnetic  power,  and  sweetly  slumber  in  its  inexrre*. 
i'hh  quietude. 

2' 


LECTURE    II 

Lades  and  Gentlemen:  On  the  last  evening,  1  naa 
the  pleasure  to  deliver  before  you  my  introductory  lee 
ture  on  the  science  of  Spiritualism,  and  to  expJain 
"the  why  and  the  wherefore"  of  the  effect  produced 
I  clearly  showed  that  Mesmerism  was  in  perfect  ac 
cordance  with  the  universal  law  of  nature,  which  I  ca!, 
the  law  of  Equilibrium  ;  and,  as  I,  in  concluding  my  lec- 
ture, contended  that  every  person  in  the  world  could 
je  mesmerized,  some,  as  I  suspected  would  be  the  case, 
nave  to-day  argued  that,  according  to  the  principle  laid 
down  by  the  speaker,  two  brains  of  equal  power  can  no 
more  mesmerize  each  other,  than  one  of  a  less  power 
can  mesmerize  a  greater ;  and  hence,  that  the  argu 
ments  of  the  lecturer  are  contradictory  and  irreconcila- 
ble. But  this  objection  is  by  no  means  valid.  It  is 
readily  conceded  that  two  brains  equally  full  and 
healthy  cannot  affect  each  other,  admitting  both  persons 
to  be  equal  in  muscular  energy,  and  to  make  at  the  same 
time  the  same  mental  and  physical  effort.  But,  if  one 
person  sit  down  and  passively  resign  himself,  and  an- 
other even  of  less  power  and  less  nervo-vital  fluid  exert 
a.l  his  energies,  then  the  law  of  equilibrium  requires 
that  t.iere  shall  be  an  effect  produced  in  the  passive 
object  equal  to  all  the  power  exerted  by  the  active 
agent.  Hence,  a  weaker  person  can  mesmerize  one  of 
superior  power,  and  the  same  persons  mav  alternately 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  19 

throw  each  other  into  the  mesmeric  state.  I  lave 
known  the  instance  where  a  small  girl,  only  nine  years 
of  age,  mesmenzed  a  young  man  twenty  years  old,  and 
of  uncommon   strength.     Though   it  is  a  well   known 

O  CD 

law,  that  two  bodies  of  water  will  seek  a  level  when  a 
communication  is  made  between  them,  yet  it  is  equally 
true  that,  by  a  pump,  water  may  be  thrown  from  a 
lower  to  a  higher  cistern  ;  and  who  will  deny  that  it  is 
in  perfect  accordance  with  the  law  of  equilibrium  ? 
Surely,  no  one.  It  is  by  physical  energy  that  the  air  is 
removed  from  the  pump,  and  the  circumambient  air 
pressing  upon  the  water  in  the  cistern,  causes  it  to  rise 
till  an  equilibrium  of  height  is  attained — exactly  equal 
to  all  the  powers  employed.  But  so  far  as  the  mes- 
meric "state  is  concerned,  it  will  be  remembered,  that 
man,  in  acting  on  his  fellow-man,  exerts  not  only  a 
physical,  but  a  mental,  and  moral  power.  These 
must  all  be  taken  into  consideration,  and  duly  weighed, 
in  order  to  form  a  correct  idea  of  the  law  of  equilib- 
rium in  the  employment  of  the  magnetic  forces.  If  this 
common  law  in  nature  extended  no  farther  than  merely 
to  bring  substances  that  are  out  of  balance  down  to  a 
common  level,  then  all  action  in  the  various  elements 
would  soon  cease. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  no  one  kindred  element  ever 
disturbs  itself,  or  ever  throws  itself  out  of  balance.  It 
requires  another  element  to  do  this.  The  water  would 
always  keep  on  a  perfect  level  with  itself,  throughout 
he  globe,  if  air  and  heat  never  disturbed  it.  By  heat 
it  is  rarified  into  vapors,  carried  over  the  globe  in 
aerial  conductors,  condensed  by  cold  into  drops,  and 
rained  upon  the  mountains  and  more  elevated  portions 
of  the  g'obe,  and  then  again  seeks  its  level  with  the 


20  LECTURES    ON 

parent  ocean.  So  there  is  a  power  that  rarifies  the  air 
and  the  denser  portions  rush  to  its  aid,  and  the  winds 
are  in  action  to  keep  up  a  perfect  balance  in  its  own 
empire,  while  air,  abstractly,  could  never  disturb  itself. 
Hence  it  is  even  the  law  of  equilibrium  by  which  one 
portion  of  water  is  thrown  out  of  balance  with  itself: 
and  the  same  is  also  true  in  relation  to  the  atmosphere. 
If  heat,  which  is  but  the  action  of  electricity,  rarifies  the 
water  so  as  to  cause  it  in  subtility  to  approximate  itself, 
then  surely  it  is  according  to  the  law  of  equilibrium 
that  water  is  thrown  out  of  balance  with  itself  by  for- 
cing it  into  a  partial  equilibrium  with  some  more  rarified 
substance.  Carrying  out  this  principle,  and  applying  it 
to  Mesmerism,  it  will  be  readily  understood  not  only 
how  two  persons  of  equal  power  may  mesmerize  each 
other,  but  even  how  one  of  less  physical  power  may 
mesmerize  a  greater,  and  yet  the  whole  be  effected  in 
perfect  accordance  with  the  law  of  equilibrium. 

Having  made  these  remarks,  which  the  occasion 
seems  to  demand,  I  will  now  proceed  to  a  direct  consi- 
deration of  the  nervo-vital  fluid  in  the  human  brain. 

It  is  admitted,  that  the  air  we  breathe  is  composed  of 
two  substances,  namely,  oxygen  and  nitrogen.  Their 
relative  qualities  are  about  one-fifth  oxygen  and  four- 
fifths  nitrogen.  But  these  are  not  all.  It  is  evident, 
.hat  hydrogen  and  electricity  are  also  component  parts 
of  air.  Oxygen  and  electricity  are  the  principles  of 
fiarne  and  of  animal  life,  while  nitrogen  extinguishes 
both.  There  is  not  a  single  square  inch  of  air  but  what 
contains  more  or  less  electricity.  The  air  in  its  com- 
pound state  is  drawn  into  the  lungs.  The  oxygen  and 
electricity  arc  communicated  to  the  blood,  which  is 
charged   w'th  iron,   while  the    nitrogen  is   disengaged 


ANIMAr.     MAGNETISM.  21 

and  expired.  This  iron,  which  gives  color  to  tie  Mood 
is  instantly  rendered  magnetic  under  the  influence  of 
electricity,  analogous  to  the  needles  in  the  galvanic  bat- 
tery which  become  magnets  merely  by  induction.  The 
blood  itself  is,  at  the  same  time,  oxydized  by  the  oxygen 
of  the  air,  and  instantly  becomes  cherry  red.  This 
oxygen  generates  an  acidity  in  the  blood,  in  some  de- 
gree answering  to  the  solution  of  the  sulphate  of  copper 
in  the  galvanic  battery  The  biood,  thus  magnetically 
prepared  at  the  lungs,  is  thrown  upon  the  heart,  ar.d 
forced  into  the  arteries.  Hence,  arterial  blood  is  red. 
It  is  propelled  to  the  extremities,  driven  into  every  pos- 
sible ramification,  and  is  collected  and  carried  back  in 
the  veins,  through  the  other  ventricle  of  the  heart,  to 
the  lungs,  for  a  fresh  supply  cf  the  electro-magnetic 
power.  Hence,  venous  blood  is  dark,  and  is  unfit  to 
be  thrown  into  the  arterial  system  a  second  time  till  it 
has  agavi  come  in  contact  with  the  oxygen  and  electri- 
city of  the  air.  The  blood,  thus  discharged,  is  pro- 
pelled through  its  living  channels,  and  this  friction 
causes  the  electro-magnetic  power  to  escape  from  the 
circulating  system  into  the  nervous  system,  for  which 
it  has  a  strong  affinity,  and,  being  secreted  by  the  brain, 
it  becomes  the  nervo-vital  fluid,  or  animal  galvanism. 
It  is  important  here  to  remark,  that  the  blood,  in  its 
friction  through  the  arteries,  has  given  off  its  electro- 
magnetic power  into  the  nervous  system.  The  blood, 
thus  freed,  assumes  a  dark  appearance  in  the  veins,  and 
becomes  entirely  negative.  The  lungs,  neing  charged 
with  a  fresh  supply  of  electricity,  become  tositive. 
Hence  the  blood  is  drawn  from  the  veins  to  the  lungs 
on  the  same  principle  that  the  negative  and  the  positive 
in  electricity  rush  together. 


£2  LECTURES    ON 

From  the  al  ove  observations,  it  will  be  perceived 
that  every  muscle  of  the  human  body,  every  organ  and 
gland,  is  polar,  and  by  the  negative  and  positive  prin- 
ciples, as  above  noticed,  animal  life  is  sustained  and 
perpetuated  through  the  action  of  the  lungs  and  blood. 

We  thus  perceive  thai  the  nervo-vital  fluid  is  manu- 
factured out  of  electricity,  taken  into  the  lungs  at  every 
inspiration.  It  completely  charges  the  whole  brain, 
when  that-  organ  is  in  a  healthy  state.  The  nerves 
composing  the  brain,  are  of  three  kinds,  namely :  the 
nerves  of  sensation,  the  nerves  of  voluntary  motion, 
and  the  nerves  of  involuntary  motion.  I  make  these 
three  divisions,  so  that  I  may  be  the  more  readily  under- 
stood when  speaking  of  nervous  action.  I  desire  you 
to  bear  in  mind  that  these  three  classes  of  nerves  are 
all  charged  with  the  nervo-vital  fluid,  which  is  exactly 
prepared  to  come  in  contact  with  mind. 

We  put  forth  a  will.  That  will  stirs  the  nervo- 
vital  fluid  in  the  voluntary  nerves.  This  fluid  causes 
the  voluntary  nerves  to  vibrate.  The  galvanic  vibra- 
tion of  these  nerves  contracts  the  muscles.  The  mus- 
cles, contracting,  raise  the  arm,  and  that  arm  raises 
foreign  matter.  So  we  perceive  that  it  is  through  this 
concatenation,  or  chain,  that  the  mind  comes  in  contact 
with  the  grossest  matter  in  the  universe. 

It  is  evident  that  there  is  no  direct  contact  between 
mind  and  gross  matter.  There  is  no  direct  contact 
between  the  length  of  a  thought  and  the  breadth  of  that 
door.  Nor  is  there  any  more  direct  contact  between 
my  mind  and  hand,  than  there  is  between  my  mini  and 
the  stage  upon  which  I  si  and.  Thought  cannot  touch 
my  hand;  yet  it  musi  be  true  thrt  mind  can  come 
in  contact  with  matter  :  othe   wise,  I  could  not  raise  mr 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  2'S 

nand  n£  all  by  the  energies  of  my  will.  Hence,  it  must 
be  true,  I  hat  the  highest  and  most  subtil  of  inert  mat- 
tei  in  the  universe,  being  the  next  step  to  spirit,  can 
come  in  contact  with  the  mind.  And  electricity 
changed  into  nervo-vital  fluid,  (which  is  living  galvan- 
ism,) is  certainly  the  highest  and  most  etherial  inert 
substnnce  of  which  we  can  form  any  conception. 
Hence,  as  before  remarked,  it  must  be  true,  that  we 
put  forth  a  will.  By  the  energies  of  that  will  this  gal- 
vanic substance,  or  nervous  fluid,  is  proudly  stirred  ; 
that  stirring  vibrates  the  nerves ;  this  vibrates  and 
contracts  the  muscles  ;  the  muscles  raise,  the  arm,  and 
that  arm  moves  dead  matter. 

Notwithstanding  the  plausibility  of  this  argument,  it 
will  yet  be  said  that,  as  physiologists  contend  that  no 
one  can  explain  through  what  medium  the  mind  comes 
in  contact  wTith  matter,  nor  even  how  a  muscle  is  made 
to  contract,  and  raise  the  arm,  and  as  the  lecturer  has 
undertaken  to  explain  it,  we  have  a  right  to  demand 
positive  proof.  This  demand  being  rational,  I  will  en- 
deavor to  meet  it.  I  am,  then,  to  prove  that  the  nervo- 
vital  fluid,  (which  is  perfect  galvanism,)  is  indeed  the 
agent  by  which  we  contract  the  muscles  and  raise  the 
arm.  That  being  done,  my  point  is  gained,  and  the 
medium  through  which  mind  comes  in  contact  with 
matter  is  established. 

I  would  first  remark,  that  it  is  common  when  crimi- 
nals are  executed,  that  their  bodies  are  delivered  over 
to  medical  men  for  dissection.  Now  take  a  human 
body,  and  let  it  be  conveyed  from  the  gallows  to  the 
marnel-house,  and  laid  upon  the  dissecting-table.  Let  a 
continuous  shock  from  a  strong  gdvanic  battery  be 
Efiven,  and  the  muscles  of  the  dead    nan  will  contract, 


24  II1CTURES    CN 

and  exhibit  many  frightful  contort' ons.  Many  interest 
ing  experiments  of  this  character  have  been  published 
The  dead  man  has  been  known  to  spring  upon  his  knees 
jolt  them  upon  the  floor,  make  violent  gesticulations 
with  his  hands,  move  his  head,  roll  his  eyes,  and  chatter 
his  teeth.  The  student,  unused  to  such  ghastly  exhibi- 
tions, has  left  the  room,  or  fainted  away ;  and  even  the 
experienced  physician  has  started  back  with  horror  at 
the  frightful  contortions  which  he  himself  had  made. 
Now,  what- was  it  that  contracted  the  muscles  of  this 
dead  man  ?  There  is  but  one  answer  to  the  question. 
It  was  galvanism.  And  what  is  galvanism,  but  electri- 
city in  a  changed  form  ;  so  that,  instead  of  giving  the 
system  a  sudden  shock,  like  electricity,  it  merely  pro- 
duces a  singular  vibrating  sensation  upon  the  nerves, 
which  causes  the  muscles  to  contract?  It  is  nothing 
else.  Electricity,  galvanism,  magnetism,  or  attraction 
and  repulsion,  are  but  different  dispositions  of  the  same 
common  fluid.  Now,  as  galvanism  contracts  the  mus- 
cles of  a  dead  man,  and  is  the  only  power  known  that, 
when  artificially  applied,  can  contract  the  muscles  of 
the  living,  so  it  must  be  the  agent  employed  by  the  will 
to  contract  the  muscles,  and  enable  us  to  perform  all 
the  voluntary  motions  of  life.  Whatever  may  be  the 
opinions  of  others,  I  consider  this  argument  irresistible, 
and  shall  hold  it  as  such,  until  it  be  fairly  refuted. 

It  must  now  appear  plain  to  every  candid  mind,  that 
by  the  action  of  the  will,  and  the  exercise  of  all  the  men- 
tal powers,  the  nervo-vital  fluid,  this  living  galvanism, 
is  continually  thrown  off  from  the  voluntary  nerves,  and 
through  the  respiratory  organs  is  again  supplied.  There 
s  still,  however,  a  greater  waste.  The  involuntary 
nerves  throw  off  another  large  portion  through  the  action 


ANJMAL    MAGNETISM  25 

of  the  heart  and  ]ungs.  and  the  digesti/e  apparatus, 
And  the  nerves  of  sensation,  also,  do  their  part  in  throw- 
ing off  this  fluid.  Let  me  here  particularize.  The 
nerves  of  sensation  are  those  by  which  feeling  is  con- 
veyed to  the  mind.  The  voluntary  nerves  are  those 
through  which  the  mind  gives  motion  to  those  parts  of 
the  body  that  are  under  the  control  of  the  will.  The 
involuntar)  nerves  are  those  that  give  motion  to  such 
parts  of  our  system  as  are  not  under  the  control  of  the 
will.  None  but  the  involuntary  nerves  pass  to  the  heart, 
stomach,  and  liver.  So  the  heart  will  throb,  the  stomach 
digest  its  food,  and  the  liver  secrete  its  gall,  when  we 
are  awake  or  asleep,  whether  we  will  it  or  not.  But  to 
the  lungs  go  both  the  voluntary  and  involuntary  nerves. 
The  involuntary  ones  are,  however,  the  most  numerous, 
so  that  though  a  man  may  hold  his  breath  and  keep  the 
lungs  in  suspension  till  he  faints,  yet  the  involuntary 
nerves  will  get  the  mastery,  and  restore  him.  Through 
these  three  sets  of  nerves  the  galvanic  fluid  is  contin  \- 
ally  wasting  and  passing  from  the  whole  system. 

That  I  am  correct,  as  to  the  nature  of  this  nervous 
fluid,  is  certain.  Take  an  animal,  and  tie  off  the  invol- 
untary nerves  that  lead  to  the  stomach,  and  digestion 
will  instantly  cease.  Then  pour  a  moderate  current  of 
galvanism  from  the  battery  into  the  stomach,  and  diges- 
tion will  immediately  commence.  Hence,  I  have  clearly 
proved  that  the  nervo-vital  fluid,  secreted  by  the  brain, 
is  of  a  galvanic  nature,  and  is  manufactured  from  elec- 
tricity which  we  breathe  into  the  lungs  every  inspira- 
tion we  take.  And  I  have,  moreover,  proved  that  this 
electro-magnetic  power  is  the  only  matter  that  can  come 
'n  contact  with  mind,  and  is  the  only  agent  by  which 
the  will  contacts  the  muscles.     Hence,  the  conclusion 


26  LECTURES    ON 

is  absolutely  unavoidable,  that,  by  the  concentration  of 
the  mind  upon  an  individual,  and  by  the  action  of  the 
will,  this  fluid  can  be  thrown  upon  another  person  tili 
nis  nervous  system  is  fullv  charged.  This  is  Mesmer 
ism. 

Having  these  important  facts  before  us,  we  perceive 
that  the  subject  is  one  of  momentous  interest.  The  ner- 
vous system,  embracing  the  brain  and  all  its  ramifica- 
tions, when  once  diseased,  seems  to  baffle  all  medical  aid 
and  skill.  Hence,  those  upon  whom  fits  of  derangement 
are  permanently  settled,  are  abandoned  as  hopeless  ;  and 
of  both  of  these  states,  we  are  all  more  or  less  in  danger. 
Those  persons,  particularly,  who,  on  hearing  the  least 
good  or  bad  news,  are  thrown  into  tremor  and  agitation, 
are  in  danger.  Their  brains  lack  the  proper  quantity 
of  the  nervo-vital  fluid.  It  will  be  remembered  that  in 
the  nerves  of  the  brain  there  is  no  blood.  The  blood  is 
exclusively  confined  to  the  veins  and  arteries,  while  the 
nerves  are  charged  with  this  nervo-vital  fluid — a  galvanic 
substance.  Now  if  the  veins  and  arteries  are  filled  with 
blood,  and  if  the  nerves  are  fully  charged  with  the  gal- 
vanic fluid  ;  in  one  word,  if  the  circulating  system  and 
the  nervous  system  are  in  perfect  balance,  health  and 
firmness  are  the  result.  But  if  the  circulating  system 
lack  its  prober  quantity  of  blood,  then  languor  and  de- 
bility of  body  are  the  result.  But  if,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  nervous  system  lack  its  proper  quantity  of  galvanic 
fluid,  then  nervous  excitability  is  the  result,  and  the  per- 
son is  in  danger  of  fits,  derangement,  and  all  the  nervous 
diseases  that  attend  the  human  race.  This  is  evident 
from  the  following  facts  :  Take  a  person  who  has  a  suf- 
ficiency of  bljod  in  the  circulating  system,  but  who.  at 
the  same -time,  has  not  enough  of  the  galvanic  fluid  in 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  21 

his  nervous  system.  By  some  circumstance  the  biood 
is  suddenly  thrown  to  his  head,  and  the  veins  and  arte- 
ries which  pass  round  among  the  convolutions  of  the 
brain  are  swelled  with  this  pressure.  The  nerves  com- 
posing the  brain  not  being  sufficiently  filled  and  braced 
with  the  galvanic  fluid,  spasmodically  collapse,  and  a  lit 
is  the  result.  How  often  do  persons,  who  suppose  they 
are  well,  suddenly  drop  down  dead  in  the  streets  !  How 
often  has  a  father  or  mother  retired  to  rest,  and  appa- 
rently in  health,  yet  in  the  morning  the  children  found 
one  or  the  other  a  corpse  !  Here,  through  eating  too 
much,  or  some  other  cause,  the  blood  was  suddenly  pro- 
pelted  to  the  brain,  and  the  nerves,  not  being  sufficiently 
braced  with  the  galvanic  fluid,  collapsed,  and  by  apo- 
plexy, instant  death  ensued.  Even  the  bosom  compan- 
ion, slumbering  upon  the  same  pillow,  never  felt  a  mo- 
tion. 

Now  if  these  persons  had  been  mesmerized,  no  such 
calamity  would  have  ensued.  Their  nervous  system, 
by  which  I  mean  the  whole  brain  and  all  its  ramifica- 
tions, would  have  been  charged  from  a  full  and  healthy 
brain,  and  having  been  thus  charged,  it  would  have 
stood 'the  war  of  internal  elements,  and  outrode  the  rush- 
ing storm. 

In  the  light  our  subject  now  stands,  we  perceive  how 
vastly  important  it  is  that  every  person  while  at  ease,  o* 
even  in  health,  should  be  operated  upon  until  the  brain 
is  magnetically  subdued.  As  stated  in  my  first  lecture, 
one  person  can  be  mesmerized  in  an  hour  or  less  anoth- 
er in  two  hours,  and  so  on  up  to  thirty  hours.  Let  a 
healthy  friend  of  yours  sit  down,  one  hour  each  day, 
until  he  suudues  your  brain.  No  person  should  mes- 
mer'ze  more  than  one  hour  in  twenty- four      The  exer- 


28  LECTUBE3    ON 

lioii  s  so  great,  he  will  injure  himself  if  ne  do.  Bu* 
here  is  the  glory  of  this  science.  Though  you  may  la- 
bor an  hour  each  day  for  twenty  or  thirty  days  in  suc- 
cession, yet  what  you  gain,  you  hold,  until  the  work  is 
accomplished.  And  not  only  so,  but  after  the  brain  is 
once  magnetically  subdued,  you  can  then  throw  the  per- 
son into  the  state  in  five  minutes.  Yes,  a  child  ten  years 
old  can  then  mesmerize  a  giant  father.  Your  brain  be- 
ing magnetically  subdued,  it  is  worth  hundreds  of  dollars 
to  you.  You  are  'then  ready  for  the  day  of  distress 
Come  what  may — toothache,  headache,  tic  doloreux, 
neuralgia,  or  any  }«nin  of  which  you  can  conceive ;  let 
some  one  mesmerize  you  and  then  wake  you  up,  and  the 
pain  is  gone.  The  whole  process  need  not  occupy  more 
than  ten  minutes.  Should  you  fall  and  break  your  arm, 
then  let  some  person  mesmerize  the  arm  only,  which  can 
be  done  in  one  minute.  You  are  free  from  pain,  and 
though  in  your  wakeful  state,  yet  you  can  look  quietly 
on,  and  see  the  bones  put  to  their  places.  Your  arm 
can  then  be  kept  in  the  mesmeric  state,  and  thoroughly 
and  rapidly  healed  without  having  ever  experienced  one 
single  throb  of  pain.  Or  by  simply  mesmerizing  your 
arm  or  leg,  you  can  sit  in  the  wakeful  state  and  see  them 
amputated,  and  feel  no  pain.  But  if  you  neglect  to  have 
your  brain  magnetically  subdued,  then  when  the  day  of 
distress  comes  upon  you,  as  it  might  require  several 
hours  to  put  you  into  this  state,  it  will  then  be  too  late 
to  avail  yourse.f  of  the  blessings  this  science  is  calcula- 
ted to  bestow. 

It  is  not  only  a  preventative  of  fits,  insanity,  and  of 
ine  most  frightful  nervous  dis3ases,  and  a  safeguard 
against  pain,  but  it  will  cure  fits,  if  no  congestion  of  the 
brain  has   taken   place.     It  never  fails  to  remove  the 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  29 

ague  and  fever,  however  long  it  may  have  been  upon 
the  indiv'dual,  and  will  prevent  any  fevers  prevalent  in 
northern  climates,  if  the  individual  be  mesmerized  ad 
soon  as  taken. 

Here,  then,  are  opening  before  us  new  fielas  of  ac.ion, 
where  those  who  have  hearts  of  benevolence  may  freely 
roam  at  large,  and  find  ample  scope  for  the  full  gratifi- 
cation of  all  their  sympathetic  and  Christian  feelings 
and  those  who  scoff  and  sneer  at  this  science,  do  scoff 
and  sneer  at  human  wo  and  human  pain,  and  know  nc*»; 
what  thev  do. 


3(3  LECTURES    ON 


LECTURE. Ill 

Lau:zs  an.i  Gentlemen  :  The  two  lectures  I  have 
had  the  pleasure  to  deln  er,  and  the  successful  experi- 
ments I  have,  during  the  last  two  evenings,  performed 
in  your  presence,  have  awakened  opposition,  and  the 
excitement  has  tru.y  become  tremendous.  Hundreds 
cannot  gain  admittance  into  this  capacious  chapel,  and 
the  breathless  anxiety  and  stillness  of  this  crowded 
congregation,  show  the  deep  and  stirring  interest  which 
yen  feel  in  the  science  of  Mesmerism,  which  is  the  sci- 
ence of  mind  and  its  godlike  powers.  For  many  ages 
men  have  turned  their  attention  to  matter,  and  confined 
all  their  investigations  to  the  realms  of  material  philoso- 
phy. It  is  true,'  that  here  and  there  a  noble  spirit  has 
turned  his  attention  to  scan  the  nature  and  powers  of 
the  human  mind  itself.  But  she  seemed  to  close  her 
laboratory  against  their  entrance,  and  forbid  them  to 
lay  their  hands  upon  her  sacred  shrine.  In  this  condi- 
tion, there  was  no  alternative  but  to  judge  of  mind  itself 
from  its  vast  and  complicated  operations,  both  mental 
and  moral.  But  that  the  mind  itself  could  directly  pro- 
duce a  physical  rsult  by  its  own  living  energies,  seems 
never  to  have  entered  their  hearts.  But  new  fields  of 
thought  are  opened  to  the  human  soul,  and  the  mysteri- 
ous and  wonderful  powers  of  the  living  mind  are  now 
seen  and  felt.  Circumstances  require  me  to  say  that  I 
regard  not  the  opposition  or  the  scepticism  of  men.  I 
challenge  investigation  both  as  to  the  experiments  I  per- 
form, or  the  arguments  1  3fFer.       stand  mailed  wTith  im- 


ANIMAL    iMAGNEHSM.  S\ 

mutable  truth  ;  and  hence,  on  this  subject,  am  inv  ulner- 
able  to  ever}'  attack.  Truth  is  immutable,  cannct  bene 
lo  circumstances,  and  must  stand  independent  oi'  the 
belief  or  unbelief  of  men.  It  must  soar  on  towering 
win o-  far  above  the  reach  of  scorn,  ana  sooner  or  later 
triumph  over  all  opposition. 

I  now  come  to  speak  of  mind  and  its  powers.  I  have 
clearly  shown  that  the  will  raises  the  arm  through  the 
agency  of  electricity.  Perhaps  I  should  not  call  it 
electricity,  but  nervo- vital  fluid,  or  galvanic  fluid, 
manufactured  from  electricity  taken  in  at  the  lungs 
The  will  is  not  an  attribute  of  the  mind,  but  the  result 
oi  all  the  attributes  brought  into  council  and  action. 
It  is  the  executive  of  the  mind.  The  question  now 
comes  up  in  proper  order  before  us  :  Is  there  any  power 
in  mind  to  produce  a  result  by  simply  willing  it  ?  I  con- 
tend that  there  is,  while  the  opposers  of  Mesmerism  con- 
tend that  there  is  not.  Mesmerism,  then,  must  stand  or 
fall  on  the  existence  or  non-existence  of  such  a  power 
And  first,  let  me  appeal  to  you  as  Christians.  If  you 
deny  that  mind,  or  spirit,  has  any  power  to  produce  a 
physical  result,  then  how  does  the  Creator  govern  the 
universe  ?  How  can  his  Spirit  come  in  contact  with 
.natter  s">  as  to  produce  any  physica"  results  ?  The 
creation  and  government  of  the  world  are  represented 
in  scripture  as  the  result  of  the  divine  will.  "  He  doeth 
according  to  his  will  in  the  army  of  heaven,  and  among 
the  inhabitants  of  earth."  The  creation  of  the  world 
and  all  its  appendages  is  represented  as  the  effect  of 
his  will.  "  He  said,  let  there  be  light,  and  there  was 
jitjht."  "He  spake,  and  it  was  done;  He  commanded 
and  it  stood  fast."  If,  then,  the  infinite  Spirit,  by  holding 
fois  will  unchangeably  upon  all  the  multifarious  objects 


32  LECTURES    ON 

of  creation,  moves  unnumbered  worlds,  ar.d  governs 
the  universe,  then  there  is  also  an  energy  and  power  in 
the  human  spirit  proportionate  to  its  greatness.  If  you 
grant  that  the  infinite  Spirit,  by  putting  forth  an  infinite 
w  11,  can  produce  infinite  results,  then  surely  a  feeble 
finite  spirit,  by  putting  forth  a  feeble  finite  will,  can  pro- 
duce a  feeble  finite  result.  I  only  ask  you,  as  Christian 
philosophers,  the  admission  that  the  same  cause  shall 
produce  the  same  effect. 

If,  however,  you  deny  the  correctness  of  this  conclu- 
sion, then  I  have  only  to  •  say,  that  you  furnish  the 
atheist  with  a  weapon  by  which  he  is  sure  to  defeat 
vou.  Ar^ue  as  Ions:  as  vou  please,  and  even  drive  the 
honest  atheist  from  any  other  ground,  he  will  at  last 
say:  "Well,  admit  there  is  a  God,  yet  he  can  do  nothing." 
Your  Bible  says,  "  God  is  a  spirit."  Hence,  he  has  no 
hands,  feet,  nor  physical  body,  as  we  have.  He  may 
therefore,  will  and  will  to  all  eternity  ;  yet  he  can  da 
nothing,  because  spirit,  by  its  mere  mental  action,  can- 
not come  in  contact  with,  nor  in  the  least  affect  matter 
We  know  this,  says  the  atheist,  from  observation  and 
experience.  '•  And  what  can  we  reason  but  from  whal 
we  know  ?"  A  human  being,  for  instance,  may  sit  down 
and  exercise  all  his  mental  energies.  He  may  will 
and  will  to  endless  ages,  yet  he  can  do  nothing — can- 
not produce  the  least  physical  result,  unless  he  uses  his 
hands  or  comes  in  bodily  contact.  I  now  ask  those 
Christians  who  den}"  that  the  mind  has  such  power  as 
we  are  contending  for,  how  can  they  answer  this  argu- 
ment of  the  atheist  ?  I  contend  that  they  are  not  able 
io  meet  it.  There  is  no  human  ingenuity  beneath  these 
heavens  thai  the  Christian  opposers  of  the  mesmeric 
power  can  summon  to  their  aid  adequate  to  the  task, 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  33 

Indeed,  it  implies  a  contradiction  in  terms,  and  involves 
them  in  the  following  compound  dilemma :  If  the  infi- 
nite Spirit,  by  the  energies  of  his  will,  can  produce 
infinite  results,  then  a  finite  spirit,  by  its  will,  can  pro- 
duce a  finite  result.  But  a  finite  spirit,  by  its  will,  can- 
not produce  any  result,  so  an  infinite  spirit,  by  its  will, 
cannot  produce  any  result !  Of  this  dilemma,  they  may 
take  either  horn.  Now  for  the  consistency  of  these 
sapient  opposers.  They  admit  that  the  infinite  Spirit, 
by  its  will,  governs  the  universe,  and  produces  infinite 
effects,  and  yet  deny  that  a  finite  spirit,  by  its  will,  can 
produce  the  least  physical  effect ;  which  is  most  philo- 
sophically absurd  !  But,  if  a  finite  spirit,  by  its  living 
energies,  can  produce  a  finite  result,  then  there  is  a  God. 
and  the  heavens  do  rule.  I  am  willing  to  meet  any  in- 
telligent clergyman  in  controversy  who  denies  the  truth 
of  Mesmerism  ;  and  before  this  enlightened  congrega- 
tion, who  shall  be  our  jurors,  I  will  either  make  him 
acknowledge  the  mesmeric  power,  or  drive  him  to 
atheism.     I  will  leave  him  no  other  alternative 

We  have,  thus  far,  confined  our  inquiries  to  the  fact, 
whether  there  was  any  power  at  all  in  mind  to  produce 
results  independent  of  bodily  contact.  I  now  take  a  still 
higher  stand,  and  deny,  in  total,  that  there  is  any  power 
or  motion  whatever,  in  the  whole  immeasurable  uni- 
verse, except  in  mind.  There  can  be  no  power  without 
motion,  nor  can  there  be  motion  except  it  originate  in 
mind.  I  care  not  through  how  many  concatenations 
of  cause  and  effect  you  may  trace  motion,  it  is  after  all 
but  secondary,  and  must  be  traced  back  to  mind  as  its 
stalling  point.  For  instance  :  suppose  a  ball  should  lie 
at  rest  upon  this  floor.  It  would  never  stir  unless  mo* 
tion  w7ere  commun'  "ated  to  it  by  some  extraneous  power. 


34  LECTURES    ON 

If  another  ball  entered  that  door,  anG  came  in  contact 
with  the  ball  at  rest,  it  would  communicate  motion  to  it 
by  impulse,  losing  iust  as  much  as  it  communicated, 
But  here  is  no  beginning  of  motion,  and  every, one  would 
ook  around  for  the  cause.  If,  while  gazing,  you  should 
see  another  ball  enter  the  door,  struck  by  a  bat,  you 
might  not  yet  be  satisfied  whether  that  bat  was  held  in 
a  man's  hand,  or  whether  it  was  fastened  in  some  ma- 
chinery prepared,  and  put  in  motion  by  human  ingenu- 
ity. But  you  see  a  third  ball  enter  the  door,  and  not 
only  discover  the  bat  but  the  hand  that  grasps  it.  You 
are  now  satisfied.  You  know  that  the  hand  is  connected 
with  a  body,  and  that  body  with  a  brain  and  mind. 
Now,  in  these  three  instances,  there  is  no  beginning  of 
motion.  The  man's  hand,  the  bat,  and  first  ball,  are 
but  the  three  instruments  through  which  motion  was 
communicated  to  the  ball  at  rest,  and  the  man's  mind 
was  sole  mover. 

As  the  subject  of  Mesmerism  is  directly  connected 
with  the  powers  of  mind,  and  as  this  is  the  pivot  on 
which  the  question  between  its  advocates  «nd  opposers 
must  eventually  turn,  you  will  permit  me  to  take  a  wider 
range  in  this  extensive  field.  There  must  be  some  me- 
dium through  which  the  eternal  mind  comes  in  contact 
with  gross  matter,  moves  unnumbered  worlds  accord- 
ing to  nature's  law,  and  sustains  and  governs  the  un- 
bounded universe.  That  medium  must  be  the  finest, 
tne  most  rarified,  and  subtil  of  inert  matter  in  being.  It 
must  be  the  last  link  in  the  material  chain  of  inert  sub- 
stances that  fastens  on  the  mind.  This  is  electricity. 
Hence,  it  is  through  electricity  that  the  Great  Spirit 
comes  in  contact  with  his  universe.  This  is  evident, 
because  it  is  electricity  as  it  exists  ii    the  human  sys- 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  33 

**n,  through  which  our  spirits  come  in  contact  with 
matter.  We  are  but  an  epitome  of  God's  universe,  and 
in  us  is  contained  every  variety  of  matter  and  substance 
in  being.  "  The  proper  study  of  mankind  is  man  ;"  and 
in  this  study,  the  most  unbounded  fields  are  opened  to 
the  range  of  human  thought. 

It  m?y  now  be  asked,  if  electricity  is  that  substance 
llnouffh  which  the  Creator  comes  in  contact  with  mat- 
ter,  how  then  could  he  act  when  that  splendid  substance 
had  no  existence?  or,  in  other  words,  how  could  he 
create  "  all  things  out  of  nothing?"  I  dony  the  asser- 
tion, that  God  created  all  things  out  of  nothing,  and 
challenge  the  proof.  Space  and  duration  exist  of  neces- 
sity, and  that  space  was  eternally  filled  with  primal 
matter,  which  I  contend  is  electricity.  The  scriptures 
do  not  inform  us  that  God  created  all  things  out  of 
nothing,  and  surely  philosophy  cannot  inform  us  howr 
many  nothings  it  will  take  to  make  the  least  conceiva 
ble  something  !  Though  it  is  the  commonly  received 
opinion  that  all  things  were  created  out  of  nothing,  yet 
in  all  ages  of  the  Christian  church,  there  have  been 
some  eminent  men  of  all  denominations,  who  have  re- 
ected  this  idea,  and  contended  that  all  things  were  cre- 
ated out  of  some  substance.  I  have  not  time  to  refer 
to  those  persons  this  evening,  yet  permit  me  to  name 
one.  A  more  orthodox  man  than  John  Milton  never 
lived,  as  all  know  who  have  ever  read  that  astonishing 
production  of  the  human  intellect,  his  "Paradise  Lost." 
He  was  at  war  with  the  idea  that  all  things  were  cre- 
ated out  of  nothing.  I  will  present  you  with  an  extract 
from  his  "  Treatise  on  Christian  Doctrine,"  volume  1 
pages  236  and  237.  As  I  quote  iom  memory,  I  ma) 
not  be  co  rect  in  every  word, 


SG  LECTURES    ON 

He  says :  "  It  :s  clear,  then,  that  the  world  was 
framed  out  of  maf.ter  of  some  kind  or  other.  For,  since 
action  and  passion  are  relative  terms,  and  since,  conse- 
quently, no  agent  can  act  externally,  unless  there  be 
some  patient  suck  as  matter,  it  appears  impossible  that 
God  could  have  created  this  world  out  of  nothing ;  not 
from  any  defect  of  power  on  his  part,  but  because  it 
was  necessary  that  something  should  previously  have 
existed  capable  of  receiving  passively  the  exertion  of 
the  divine  efficacy.  Since,  therefore,  both  scripture 
and  reason  concur  in  pronouncing  that  all  these  things 
were  made,  not  out  of  nothing,  but  out  of  matter,  it 
necessarily  follows  that  matter  must  always  have  ex- 
isted independent  of  God,  or  have  originated  from  God 
at  some  particular  point  of  time." 

So  you  perceive,  Milton  contends  that  both  scripture 
and  reason  teach  that  all  things  were  made  out  of  mat- 
ter. I  am  under  no  obligations  to  prove  that  all  things 
were  not  made  out  of  nothing,  for  no  man  is  bound  by 
the  rules  of  logic  to  prove  a  negative.  But  I  will,  for  a 
moment,  depart  from  this  established  rule  of  schoolmen, 
and  undertake  to  prove  that  all  things  were  not  made 
out  of  nothing.  To  this  end,  I  will  call  into  my  service 
the  following  argument : 

We  raise  an  axe,  and  at  a  single  blow  cut  in  two  a 
piece  of  wood  one  inch  in  diameter.  Now  it  is  certain 
that  this  wood  was  not  severed  instantly  in  all  its  parts. 
If  it  were,  then  the  lower  part  would  have  been  cut  a 
the  same  instant  that  the  upper  part  was,  which  is  pe" 
f'cclly  absurd,  and  therefore  impossible.  The  axe 
certainly  passed  gradually  through  that  wood,  and  pro- 
gressively separated  one  grain  after  another.  This  you 
ail   perceive.     By  instantly,  we    are   to   understand, 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  *  37 

that,  no  time  shall  elapse  between  the  accomplishment 
of  any  two  objects.  It  may,  however,  be  said,  that 
there  are  bodies  that  move  with  greater  velocity  than 
this  axe.  I  will,  then,  take  another.  There  is  nothing 
with  which  we  are  acquainted,  that  moves  with  greatei 
velocity  than  light ;  its  motion  being  about  twelve  mil- 
lion miles  in  a  minute.  Hence,  the  passage  of  a  ray  of 
light  from  the  sun  to  the  earth,  would  be  about  eight 
minutes.  It  is,  therefore,  absurd  to  say  that  a  ray  of 
light  could  be  at  the  sun  and  at  the  earth  at  the  same 
instant,  as  it  would  allow  no  time  for  its  passage.  1 
will  now  apply  the  above  argument  to  the  subject  be- 
fore us. 

If  something  were  created  out  of  nothing,  it  could 
not,  in  the  nature  of  things,  have  been  done  progres- 
sively or  gradually,  because  the  instant  it  became  the 
least  possible  remove  from  nothing  it  would  be  some- 
thing. It  must,  in  the  very  nature  of  things,  remain 
nothing  till  it  becomes  something,  because  there  is  no 
possible  process  by  which  it  can  be  gradually  brought 
forward  into  something,  for  there  is  no  existing  medium 
between  something  and  nothing.  Now,  if  nothing  were 
cieated  into  something,  it  must  have  been  done  instantly ; 
and  if  instantly,  then  it  must  have  been  something  and 
nothing  at  the  same  instant,  which  is  the  climax  of 
absurdity.  It  is  just  as  absurd  as  to  contend  that  the 
piece  of  wood  before  mentioned  was  severed  at  the 
oottom  at  the  same  time  that  it  was  at  the  top,  or  that 
a  ray  of  light  could  be  at  the  sun  and  the  earth  at  the 
same  instant.  I  shall  hold  this  argument  sound  until 
some  one  is  able  to  refute  it. 

Henre,  I  contend  for  the  eternal  existence  of  primal 
matter  wiich  is  electricity.  But  even  this  primal  mat« 
4 


33  LECTURE?    ON 

ter  does  not  exist  independent  of  Deity.     It  &  the  natu* 

ral  atmosphere  or  substance  emanating  from  Him.  It 
is  evident  that  every  substance  in  being  has  its  atmos- 
pheric emanation,  by  which  it  may  be  detected  before 
we  arrive  at  the  body.  I  say  atmospheric  emanation 
because  I  know  of  no  other  more  convenient  term,  by 
which  I  can  express  my  ideas.  For  instance,  the  rose, 
and  every  species  of  the  flower  tribe,  have  their  emana- 
tions, which  like  an  atmosphere  surround  them,  and  by 
which  we  detect  their  existence  before  we  come  in  con- 
tact with  them.  For  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  suffer  me 
to  call  it  atmospheric  emanation,  which  in  the  above 
cases  is  detected  by  smell.  The  same  is  true  of  every 
species  of  trees  and  plants  in  being.  The  same  is  true 
of  every  species  of  earth,  and  rock,  and  mineral,  in  exist- 
ence. Each  substance  has  an  atmospheric  emanation 
peculiar  to  itself,  and  by  which  it  can  be  discovered  by 
man,  or  by  some  other  living  creature.  The  camel  on 
the  desert  will  detect  water  twenty  miles  distant.  The 
same  is  true  in  relation  to  all  the  races  and  tribes  of  ani- 
mated beings.  Each  has  its  own  peculiar  atmospheric 
emanation,  by  which  it  may  be  detected  by  some  other 
creature,  by  some  instinctive  sense  of  which  we  have 
little  or  no  conception.  As,  then,  every  substance  in 
being  has  its  own  peculiar  emanation,  so  the  atmospheric 
emanation  of  the  self-existent  Spirit,  is  electricity,  which, 
proceeding  forth  from  Him,  does  not  therefore  exist  in 
dependent  of  him. 

It  will  now  be  said  that,  on  this  principle  of  reasoning 
the  speaker  wiL  make  it  out  that  spirit  itself  is  matter. 
If  by  spirit  vou  mean  that  which  has  neither  length, 
breadth,  nor  thickness,  nor  occupies  any  space,  then  1 
have  only  to  say  that  it  is  a  mere  chimera  of  the  hum-in 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  39 

brain,  a  nonentity,  a  nothing  !  Does  Deity  fill  all  space  ? 
Then  he  is  of  course  a  substance,  a  real,  living,  acting 
and  thinking  being  ;  otherwise,  as  Christians,  we  use 
words  without  knowledge,  when  we  say  that  he  fills  im- 
mensity with  his  presence.     But  it  may  be  said  that 

MIND    is    THOUGHT,  REASON,  Qlld  UNDERSTANDING,  and  then 

be  asked,  whether  thought,  reason,  understanding,  etc., 
occupy  any  space  ?  But  I  deny  that  these  are  mind. 
Thought,  reason,  and  understanding  are  not  mind,  but 
the  effects  of  mind.  Mind  is  something  supremely 
higher  than  all  these.  I  yet  ask  what  is  that  which 
thinks,  reasons,  and  understands  ?  It  is  the  mind.  Then 
mind  is  something  distinct  from  those  effects  by  which 
it  is  made  manifest.  What,  then,  it  may  be  asked,  is 
mind  ?  I  answer,  it  is  that  substance  which  has  innate 
or  living  motion ;  and  the  result  of  that  motion  is 
thought,  reason,  understanding,  and,  therefore,  power. 
As  electricity  is  the  highest  and  most  subtil  of  inert 
substances,  as  it  fastens  on  mind,  and  is,  therefore,  more 
easily  moved  than  any  other  inert  substance  in  being,  so 
mind  is  the  next  step  above  electricity,  is  the  crowning 
perfection  of  all  other  substances  in  immensity — is  liv- 
ing motion  ;  and  the  result  of  that  motion  is  thought  and 
power.  It  is  the  living  Spirit  from  whom  emanates 
electricity,  and  who,  out  of  that  electricity,  has  created 
all  worlds.  Hence,  the  Creator  is  a  real  substance  or 
oeing,  possessing  personal  identity,  and  is  infinite  in 
every  perfection  of  his  adorable  character. 

Electricity,  which  is  an  atmospheric  emanation  from 
God,  and  which  is  moved  by  his  will,  is  that  substance 
out  of  which  all  worlds  and  their  splendid  appendages 
were  made  Hence,  it  will  be  perceived,  that  electricity 
contains  all  the  original    properties  of  all  the  various 


40  LECTURES    ON 

substances  in  being.  All  the  varieties  of  tLe  universe 
around  us — all  the  beauties  and  glories  &f  creation  upon 
which  we  look  with  so  many  thrilling  emotions  of  de- 
light, were  produced  from  electricity,  which  is  the  inex 
haustible  fountain  of  primal  matter.  By  the  living  ener 
gies  of  the  Divine  Mind,  electricity  was  condensed  into 
globes  ;  not  instantly,  but  gradually.  The  heaviest  par- 
ticles took  the  lowest  point,  or  common  centre,  of  our 
globe,  and  so  on,  step  by  step,  lighter  and  lighter,  till  we 
reach  the  surface,  which  is  a  vegetable  mould.  On  this 
we  find  water,  a  substance  still  lighter  than  earth  ;  next 
air,  which  is  lighter  than  water,  and  so  on  till  we  reach 
the  sun,  which  is  the  highest  point  in  relation  to  our  sys- 
tem, because  it  is  the  common  centre.  The  sun  is, 
therefore,  pure  electricity.  Hence,  the  twenty-nine 
globes,  belonging  to  our  system,  are  electrically,  geolo- 
gically, and  magnetically  made.  They  are  but  twenty- 
nine  magnets  revolving  around  our  sun  as  a  common 
centre. 

The  sun,  being  pure  electricity  or  primal  matter,  is 
but  an  emanation  from  the  Deity.  It  is,  consequently, 
in  a  positive  state.  Hence,  electricity  is  continually 
passing  from  the  sun,  as  a  common  centre,  to  the  twen- 
tv-nine  surrounding  worlds  ;  on  the  same  principle  that 
it  passes  from  a  positive  to  a  negative  cloud.  Having 
done  its  duty  in  giving  light,  heat,  and  vegetation,  as 
well  as  magnetic  power  to  globes,  it  is  returned  by  re- 
action to  the  sun,  and  these  two  motions  form  the  vor- 
tices that  roll  worlds  around  him.  It  is  impossible  that 
there  can  be  any  inherent  attraction  and  repulsion  in 
matter.  Attraction  and  repulsion  are  but  different  dis- 
positions of  electricity.  The  best  magnets  are  now 
made   fron    the  galvanic  battery.     Hence    electricitv 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  41 

gal  ranism,  and  magnetism  are  but  in  substance  one  and 
the  same  fluid,  and  as  this  is  primal  matter,  an  en.ana 
tion  from  the  Eternal  Mind,  so  all  the  powers  of  attrac- 
tion and  repulsion  originate  in  Deity.  His  will  comes 
ill  contact  with  electricity,  and  through  that  subtil  agent 
he  moves  the  whole  immeasurable  universe  in  accor- 
dance with  nature's  law.  All  worlds  are  in  motion. 
They  roll  rapid  as  the  lightning's  blaze,  and  in  the  most 
apparent  confusion  ;  yet  all  is  calm,  regular,  and  harmo- 
nious. God  is,  therefore,  connected  with  his  universe, 
and  superintends  all  its  multifarious  operations.  Though 
he  is  thus  intimately  united  to  inert  matter,  yet  he  is  dis 
tinct  from  the  whole. 

"  Thou  apart, 
Above,  beyond;  O  tell  me,  mighty  Mind, 
Where  art  thou?  Shall  I  dive  into  the  deep  1 
Call  to  the  sun?  or  ask  the  roaring  winds 
For  their  Creator?  Shall  I  question  loud 
The  thunder,  if  in  that  the  Almighty  dwells  ? 
Or  holds  he  furious  storms  in  straitened  reins, 
And  bids  fierce  whirlwinds  wheel  his  rapid  car? 
The  nameless  He !  whose  nod  is  nature's  birth 
Aud  nature's  shield  the  shadow  of  his  hand; 
Her  dissolution  his  suspended  smile! 
The  great  First  Last!  pavilioned  high  he  sits 
In  darkness,  from  excessive  splendor  borne, 
By  gods  uuseen,  unless  through  lustre  lost. 
His  glory,  to  ci'eated  glory,  bright, 
As  that  to  central  horrors  ;  he  looks  down 
On  all  that  soars,  and  spans  immensity." 

Worlds  are  not  only  electrically,  geological!)  a^j 
magnetically  made,  but  they  are  electrically  and  mag- 
netically suspended  and  moved  by  the  immediate  ener- 
gies of  the  Divine  Mind.  Here  is  an  image  in  papei 
costume.  I  will  attach  it  to  this  electrizing  machine  and 
charge  it.  See!  those  papers  are  now  all  suspended. 
and  be'ug  equally  charged  '■.hey  repel  each  other.  ] 
4* 


42  LECTURES    ON 

will  now  put  my  fingers  near  them.  See !  how  the} 
are  attracted  by  my  hand.  They  touih  me,  give  off 
their  electricity,  become  equalized  with  my  fingers,  and 
then  fall.  Here,  then,  is  suspension,  attraction,  and  re- 
pulsion, by  electricity.  It  may,  however,  be  said,  that 
if  worlds  are  moved  by  electricity,  that  they  must  ne- 
cessarily move  as  quick  as  lightning.  This  does  not 
follow.  Here  is  an  orrery,  with  which  the  most  of  you 
are  acquainted.  I  attach  it  to  the  electrical  machine, 
and  charge.  You  see  it  is  moved  by  giving  off  electri- 
city at  its  points.  But  though  electrically  moved,  yet  it 
does  not  move  as  quick  as  lightning.  The  magnet  [ 
hold  in  my  hand  was  charged  from  the  galvanic  battery, 
and  by  one  single  stroke  of  the  battery  from  the  prongs 
of  this  magnet  towards  the  bow,  I  can  destroy  all  its 
magnetic  powers,  and  by  reversing  the  action,  I  can  just 
as  suddenly  restore  them. 

I  have  now  clearly  shown  that  all  motion  and  power 
originate  in  mind,  and  as  the  human  spirit,  through  an 
electro-magnetic  medium,  comes  in  contact  with  matter, 
so  the  infinite  Spirit  does  the  same,  and  through  this 
medium  he  governs  the  universe.  Hence,  those  who 
deny  the  mesmeric  powei»>  must,  to  be  consistent  with 
themselves,  deny  that  there  is  any  medium  through 
which  mind  can  come  in  contact  with  matter,  or  else 
deny  that  mind,  abstractly  considered,  has  any  power 
to  produce  results.  But  the  denial  of  either  of  these  is 
a  denial  of  an  all-powerful,  self-existent  Spirit,  the  Cre- 
ator and  Governor  of  the  universe.  But,  on  the  other 
hand,  how  sublime  the  idea,  that  God  is  electrically  and 
magnetically  connected  with  his  universe  ;  that,  by  the 
energies  of  his  own  will,  he  has  condensed  and  formed 
worlds  fom  electricity,  which  is  but  the  atmosphe  ic 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  48 

emanation  of  his  own  spirit,  and  that  by  electricity  he 
sustains,  rolls,  and  governs  them  from  age  to  age.  And 
how  sublime  the  idea,  that  he  has  "  poured  spirit  from 
spirit's  awful  fountain,  and  kindled  irito  existence  a 
world  of  rationals."  He  has  poured  himself  through  all 
his  works  and  stamped  upon  them  beauty,  order,  and 
uarmoni;  which  are  but  the  reflected  impressions  of  his 

OWn  SPL8NPOR 


44  LECTURES    ON 


LECTURE     IV.    . 

Ladies*  and  Gentlemen:  It  is  a  source  of  gratlfica 
lion  to  me  that  public  attention,  in  Boston  and  vicinity 
is  completely  awakened  to  the  interests  of  Spiritualism: 
and  that  they  are  giving  this  subject  that  investigation 
which  its  importance  demands.  We  live  emphatically 
in  an  age  of  investigation  and  improvement,  when  light 
seems  to  be  pouring  in  oceans  on  our  world  ;  and  he  who 
shuts  his  eyes,  and  then  scoffs  and  sneers  because  others 
open  theirs  and  see,  is  not  only  recreant  to  duty,  but  does 
society  an  irreparable  wrong.  But  those  who  remain  in 
scepticism  much  longer  on  the  subject  of  Mesmerism, 
will  be  suspected  either  of  ignorance  or  dishonesty.  1 
make  this  remark,  because  there  is  no  possible  apology 
that  any  man  of  common  sense  should  remain  in  scepti- 
cism another  day.  He  can  go  home  and  try  it  upon  his 
children  or  friends,  and  test  its  power,  and  know  its 
truth,  and  this  every  man  is  bound  to  do  who  desires  to 
mitigate  human  pain,  and  assuage  human  woes.  The 
subject  is  one  of  paramount  consideration,  and  is  wor- 
thy of  your  best  affections,  your  most  ardent  zeal,  and 
your  warmest  hopes. 

In  my  last  lecture,  I  took  into  consideration  mind  and 
its  powers,  and  the  medium  through  which  it  comes  in 
contact  with  matter.  This  medium  is  electricity,  and  is 
that  eternal,  primal  matter  out  of  which  all  other  sub- 
Btances  were  mad^,      It  fills  immensity  of  space:  and 


AN.MAL    MAGAETISM.  4ft 

worlds  are  successively  and  continually  formed  by  the 
condensation  of  electricity  under  the  living  and  ever-act- 
ing energies  of  the  Eternal  Mind.  We  are  floating  in 
an  immensity  of  space  that  knows  no  bounds,  like  the 
mote  in  the  sunbeam.  This  is  peopled  with  swarming 
worlds,  in  number  beyond  an  angel's  computation  ;  and 
the  residue,  which  has  not  yet  become  the  abodes  of  life, 
order,  and  beauty,  is  filled  up  with  primal  matter  still  in 
its  electrical  state.  Hence,  the  work  of  creation  has 
been  going  on  from  eternity,  and  will  continue  to  pro- 
gress so  long  as  the  throne  of  the  self-existent  Jehovah 
endures,  without  ever  arriving  at  an  end  in  the  sublime 
career  of  creation.  New  brother  creations  are,  there- 
fore, every  moment  rolling  from  his  omnific  hand,  and 
that  creating  fiat  will  never,  never  cease.  All  this  is 
effected  by  the  energies  of  mind. 

In  my  last  lecture,  I  slated,  and,  as  I  thought,  conclu- 
sively proved,  that  thought,  reason,  understanding,  etc., 
were  not  mind,  but  merely  the  results  of  mind,  and  gave 
what  I  considered  conclusive  evidence.  I,  moreover, 
stated  that  mind  was  a  substance  that  occupied  space, 
that  it  possessed  living  motion,  and  that  the  result  of 
that  motion  was  thought,  reason,  and  power,  and  gave 
what  I  considered  proof.  But  it  seems  that  both  of 
these  positions  have  been  disputed,  and  hence  I  will 
once  more  touch  these  two  points. 

If  thought,  reason,  and  understanding  are  mind,  then 
our  minds  are  annihilated  every  night  in  sleep.  Be- 
cause, if  all  the  organs  of  the  brain  are  wrapped  in 
profound  slumber,  then  there  is  not  a  single  thought 
stirring  in  the  whole  intellectual  realm.  It  will  not  am 
swer  to  parry  the  force  of  this  argument,  bv  saying  that 
t\  e  action  of  blood  upon  the   brain  produces  thought, 


4.C)  LECTURES    ON 

and  that  this  action  is  suspended  .'.n  slumber,  because 
the  blood  flows  and  acts  upon  the  brain  in  sleep  as  well 
as  when  we  are  awake  ;  and  hence  we  should,  on  this 
principle,  think  and  reason  when  asleep  nearly  as  well 
as  when  awake.  This,  however,  is  not  the  case.  If 
then,  thought  and  reason  are  mind,  I  must  insist  that,  in 
profound  slumber,  the  mind  is  annihilated,  for  thought 
is  gone.  Hence  it  is  plain,  that  thought,  reason,  and 
understanding  are  not  mind,  but  the  effects  of  mind. 

I  will  now  take  a  different  argument  from  the  one 
offered  in  my  last  lecture,  to  prove  that  mind  is  a  sub- 
stance that  has  innate  motion,  and  that  this  motion 
produces  thought.  It  is  admitted  on  all  hands,  that  \'*4 
mind  resides  in  the  brain,  not  in  the  blood-vessels,  bul 
in  the  nerves  themselves.  Now,  if  the  nerves  are  ver\ 
much  expanded  by  heat,  it  is  impossible  to  sleep.  By 
lying  perfectly  still  upon  our  beds,  there  is  a  coolness 
steals  over  the  brain.  The  nerves,  by  coolness,  are 
made  to  contract.  They  continue  gently  to  shrink  until 
they  press  upon  the  living  substance  that  they  contain, 
and  stop  its  motion.  That  moment  all  thought  ceases. 
Recollect,  mind  is  that  substance  whose  nature  is  motion, 
and  the  result  of  that  motion  is  thought.  By  pressure, 
by  force,  it  is  stopped,  and  thought  is  gone.  The  mo- 
ment our  rest  is  complete,  a  nervous  warmth  comes 
over  the  brain.  The  nerves  expand,  leave  the  mind 
disengaged,  it  resumes  its  motion,  and  thought  is  the 
result.  As  cold  shrinks,  and  heat  expands  the  nervous 
system,  so  that  we  alternately  sleep  and  wake  under 
this  double  action,  so  the  mind  is  a  living,  self-moving, 
and  invisible  substance,  which  is  capable  of  being  com- 
pressed sufficient,  at  least,  to  prevent  its  motion. 

Having  made  .hese  remarks,  which  the  circumstances 


ANIMAL     MVoXETlSM.  4"r 

<.(  the  occasion  seemed  to  require,  at  my  hands,  I  now 
invite  your  attention  to  what  is  called  by  sceptics  the  in 
comprehensibility  and  marvellousness  of  magnetic  sleep 
and  who,  on  this  account,  openly  avow  the  impossibility 
d.nd  inconsistency  of  any  one  being  thrown  into  such  a 
state  ;  and  who,  whenever  they  witness  experiments  to 
test  it,  freely  use  the  stereotyped  words,  "humbug  and 
eoLLusion,"  and  that,  too,  with  great  emphasis,  without 
being  able,  however,  to  detect  this  great,  this  wonderful 
imposition  on  public  credulity  ! 

The  greatest  objection  to  the  truth  of  the  science 
of  Mesmerism  arises  from  the  circumstance,  that  the  sub- 
ject can  see  in  a  manner  different  from  the  ordinary 
mode  of  vision.  That  any  person  can  see  out  of  the 
templar  region,  or  out  of  the  top,  or  back  part  of  the 
skull,  and  through  solid  walls,  and  in  the  darkest  night 
ley  contend  is  too  preposterous  to  be  believed.  I  deeply 
egret  to  say  that  medical  men  not  only  give  counte- 
nance to  such  declarations  made  by  the  common  mass, 
but  are  engaged  in  making  the  same  themselves.  But  I 
seriously  appeal  to  them  whether  they  have  never  seen 
any  patients  in  a  certain  state  of  the  nervous  system,  in- 
duced by  disease,  where  they  could  thus  see,  and  when 
sensation  was  so  perfectly  extinct  that  amputation  might 
have  taken  place  without  pain?  Have  they  never  seen  a 
case  of  catalepsy  ?  If  not,  have  they  never  seen  in  med- 
ical works  well-authenticated  cases  of  this  disease  report- 
ed ?  Surely  they  will  not  deny  these  things.  I  further  in- 
quire, have  they  never  seen  a  case  nor  heard  one  reported, 
where  patients  in  a  state  of  catalepsy  have  been  entirely 
c.Viir  /oyant?  where  they  have  seen,  as  no  person  in  the 
ordinary  way  of  vision  can  see  ?  I  am  conscious  chat 
Jiey  will  not  hazard  their  medica    reputation  by  gj»  i«e 


iS  LECTURES    ON 

these  interrogatories  an  unqualified  denial.  Of  a.l  per- 
sons beneath  these  heavens,  medical  gentlemen  shomd  be 
he  last  to  sneer  at  ihe  idea  of  clairvoyance,  or  even  to- 
,a!  insensibility  of  a  person  in  the  magnetic  state. 

Catalepsy  is  a  sudden  suppression  of  motion  and  sen- 
sation; a  kind  of  apoplex  %  in  which  the  patient  is  in  a 
fixed  posture.  If  the  case  be  an  aggravated  one,  the  pa- 
tient is  sometimes  senseless  and  even  speechless.  To 
bring  this  subject  directly  and  plainly  before  you,  I  will 
relate  to  you  an  incident  which  was  stated  to  me  about 
six  months  auo  by  Dr.  Patterson,  an  eminent  physician 
of  Lynchburg,  Virginia.  A  young  lady  was  taken  sick. 
Her  physician,  who  lived  some  eight  or  ten  miles  distant, 
was  sent  for.  He  found  her  in  a  state  of  catalepsy 
Though  there  was  no  sensation  in  her  body,  yet  she  had 
uecasional  fits  of  talking.  He  prescribed,  stated  that  he 
should  be  there  the  next  evening,  and  left.  The  evening 
came,  and  a  most  tremendous  storm  of  rain,  with  high 
winds,  set  in.  The  darkness  was  profoun  1.  As  the  fam- 
ily were  sealed  in  silence  and  anxiety  in  the  same  room 
where  the  patient  lay,  some  one  said,  "  Well,  our  doctor 
will  not  be  here  to-night."  The  sick  lady  answered  ■; 
"  Yes  he  will ;  he  is  coming  now  ;  he  is  riding  on  horse- 
back, and  is  all  drenched  with  rain."  the  family  suppos- 
ing this  to  be  a  mere  reverie  of  the  brain,  a  touch  of  de- 
lirium, made  no  reply.  Nearly  an  hour  passed  on  ;  and 
the  storm  continuing  with  unabating  violence,  one  of  the 
pensive  group  again  broke  the  silence,  and  exclaimed 
with  a  feeling  of  regret,  "Well,  it  is  certain  our  doctor 
will  not  be  here  this  dark  stormy  night  !"  The  sufferer 
again  answered,  "Yes  he  will;  he  is  most  here  now; 
there  he  is  hitching  his  horse  ;  he  is  coming  to  the  door/ 
The)  heard  the  raps  :  the  door  was  opened,  and  in  came 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  49 

the  doctor  Inuw  ask,  how  did  this  lady  in  a  state  cf  cat- 
alepsy see  the  physician  several  miles  distant,  through 
the  walls  of  her  house,  and  in  so  dark  a  night  ? 

This  report  was  given  in  a  medical  journal  and  well 
authenticated.  And  moreover,  there  are  many  of  a  sim- 
ilar character  ;  and  of  these  facts  medical  men  are  well 
aware.  Now  I  appeal  to  them,  who  are  present  on  this 
occasion,  that  if  it  is  possible  to  throw  the  nervous  system 
into  a  condition  by  disease,  so  that  the  patient  can  see  in 
a  manner  entirely  distinct  from  the  ordinary  mode  of  vis- 
ion, then,  how  can  they,  without  presumption,  affirm 
that  a  person  cannot  be  thrown  into  a  similar  state  by 
Mesmerism  ?  It  is  proved  by  medical  works  that  such  a 
state  of  the  brain  is  possible  ;  and  who  will  take  upon 
himself  to  affirm,  that  it  can  be  induced  by  no  other 
means  than  disease  ?  As  a  state  of  catalepsy  is  thus  fre- 
quently attended  with  clairvoyance,  and  with  total  insen- 
sibility, so  that  amputation  could  be  performed  without 
pain,  then  why  should  we  marvel  when  we  see  the  same 
identical  phenomena  clustering  around  Mesmerism  ?  I 
have  only  to  say  that  our  surprise  is  wholly  gratuitous. 

1  appeal  to  medical   gentlemen   present.     Have  you 

never    seen  a  case  of  natural  somnambulism.?     There 

are  hundreds  of  them  occur  in  this  city ;  and,  in  every 

town  there  are  those  who  rise  in  their  sleep,  perform 

labors,  and  return  to  their  beds  without  knowing  it.     In 

this  state  they  have  gone  to  the  top  of  house-frames, 

walked  on  the  ridgepoles,  and  safely  descended.     They 

have,  in  the  darkest  nights,  walked  over  dangerous  and 

""apid  streams  on  a  mere  scantling  in  safety,  where  a 

slight   loss    of   balance   would    have   been    death,    and 

where  it  would  be  impossible  for  them  to  have  crossed 

in  their  wakeful   state       Women  have  arisen,  and  in 
5 


50  LECTURES    ON 

this  state  have  done  the  nicest  needle-work.  And  how 
did  these  see  ?  Surely  not  with  the  natural  organ  oi 
vision.  A  young  lady  at  boarding-school,  learning  to 
paint  miniatures,  and  on  preparing  one  for  examination- 
day,  found  that  she  could  be  excelled  by  the  other 
pupils.  It  worried  her  much,  and  to  her  suprise  she 
found  in  the  morning,  that  her  picture  had  greatly  ad- 
vanced under  the  delicate  touch  of  some  experienced 
hand.  She  charged  the  deed  upon  her  teacher,  who 
disclaimed  all  knowledge  of  the  fact.  But  on  the  next 
morning  the  picture  was  nearly  finished,  but  the  trans- 
gressor could  not  be  foun^.  The  Preceptress  being 
strongly  suspected,  secretly  sat  up  and  watched.  In 
the  dead  of  night,  when  all  was  still,  the  young  lady 
arose,  and  in  a  dark  room  arranged  her  work,  mixed  her 
colors,  and  began  to  paint.  Her  Preceptress  lit  a  lamp, 
entered  the  room,  and  saw  that  lady  finish  her  picture. 
She  then  awakened  her.  How  did  she  see  how  to  mix 
her  colors,  and  to  give  the  nicest  touch  with  her  pencil 
where  no  human  eye  in  the  wakeful  state  could  discern 
an  object?  Such  facts  as  these,  and  even  more. won- 
derful, are  well  known  to  medical  gentlemen.  Now,  ii 
persons  can  by  some  cause  be  thrown  into  somnambu- 
lism upon  their  beds,  then  reason  teaches  that  they  may 
be  thrown  into  the  same  state  and  even  a  much  deeper 
sleep  by  the  magnetic  power. 

We  will  now  take  into  consideration  the  philosophy 
of  Clairvoyance.  It  is  evident  that  seeing,  hearing, 
feelixg,  tasting,  and  smelling,  belong  exclusively  to 
the  mind.  And  as  we  have  already  clearly  proved  that 
electricity  is  the  only  substance  that  can  come  in  con- 
tact with  mind,  so  it  is  through  the  agency  of  this  fluid 
that  sensations  are  transmitted  to  the  mind       Hence,  it 


AXIMAL    MAGNETISM,  51 

U  through  the  nr.edium   of  electricity  that  we  see  hear 
feel,  taste,  and  smell. 

The  power  of  sight  being  in  the  mind,  it  is  evident 
that  we  never  saw  anything  out  of  our  eyes.  The  whole 
of  this  congregation,  with  all  their  different  costumes, 
their  various  complexions  and  different  appearances,  and 
all  their  relative  distances  from  each  other,  are  struck 
upon  the  retina  of  the  speaker's  eye,  on  about  the  bigness 
of  a  quarter  of  an  inch.  By  the  agency  of  electricity, 
it  is  conveyed  through  the  optic  nerve  to  the  mind 
where  it  is  seen.  Hence,  we  never  saw  a  piece  of  mat- 
ter, but  only  its  shadow,  the  same  as  when  you  look  in- 
to a  mirror,  it  is  not  yourself,  but  your  image  that  you 
see.  Electricity  is  that  substance  that  passes  through 
all  other  substances.  Air  cannot  pass  through  your 
cranium,  nor  through  these  walls,  nor  metallic  substan- 
ces. But  as  all  these  have  countless  millions  of  pores, 
electricity  can  pass  through  them.  Now  if  our  nervous 
system  could  be  charged  with  the  nervo-vital  fluid,  so 
as  to  render  the  brain  positive,  and  thus  bring  it  into  an 
exact  equilibrium  or  balance  with  external  electricity, 
then  we  should  be  clairvoyant.  Because  the  nervous 
system  being  duly  charged,  and  even  surcharged,  the 
great  quantity  of  this  fluid  passing  in  right  lines  from 
the  mind,  as  a  common  centre,  and  in  every  direction 
through  the  pores  of  the  skull,  renders  it  transpaient 
Uniting  with  external  electricity  which  passes  through 
these  walls  and  all  substances,  which  are  also  trans- 
parent, the  image  of  the  whole  universe,  as  it  were,  in 
this  transparent  form,  is  thrown  upon  the  mind,  and  is 
there  seen,  and  seen,  too,  independent  of  the  retina.  On 
this  principle  the  whole  of  those  objects  which  are 
opaque  to  natural  vision,  are  rendered  transparent  to 


52  LECTURES    ON 

the  clairvoyant,  and  he  sees  through  wa..s  m  success 
sion,  and  takes  cognizance  of  their  relative  distances,  on 
the  same  principle  that  we  in  a  wakeful  state  could  look 
through  said  walls  if  they  were  thin,  transparent  glass. 
On  this  principle,  if  the  subject  be  charged  too  much  or 
too  little,  he  cannot  see  clearly.  Or  if  the  night  be 
rainy,  or  even  damp,  and  unfavorable  to  electricity,  then 
experiments  in  clairvoyanee  must  fail,  or  be  very  im- 
perfect. The  subject  must  be  magnetically  charged 
exactly  to  that  degree  which  will  bring  him  into  mag- 
netic equilibrium  with  external  electricity.  Then,  if  the 
night  be  favorable,  the  experiments  will  most  likely 
prove  successful. 

For  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  I  will  take  another  posi- 
tion. Why  can  you  see  through  that  window  ?  You 
answer,  because  the  glass  is  transparent.  But  why  is  it 
transparent  ?  You  again  answer,  because  upon  every 
square  inch  of  its  surface  there  are  several  thousand 
pores,  and  the  glass  is  of  that  chemical  property  that  it 
will  admit  the  rays  of  atmospheric  light  to  pass  through 
them.  This  is  philosophically  correct.  But  remember, 
it  is  not  the  window  that  sees,  but  it  is  the  inhabitant 
in  the  house  that  looks  out  of  the  window.  The  ques- 
tion now  arises,  why  can  you  not  see  through  that  wall  ? 
If  you  answer,  because  it  is  opaque,  yet  the  query  arises, 
why  is  it  opaque  ?  The  wall  has  certainly  as  many 
pores  upon  the  square  inch  as  that  glass.  The  answer 
"«.  because  the  wall  is  of  that  chemical  property  that 
resists  the  rays  of  atmospheric  light ;  and  where  no  light 
passes  through  the  pores  of  a  substance,  that  substance 
must  be  opaque.     This  is  so  far  philosophically  correct 

We  are  now  ready  tD  ask,  why  can  you  see  through 
he  eye  ?     Because  it  i $  formed  on  the  transparent  pr  in- 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  53 

?.iple,  has  a  certain  number  of  pores  upon  'he  square 
inch,  and.  by  the  skill  of  the  Creator,  it  is  so  constituted 
as  to  chemically  receive  the  rays  of  atmospheric  light. 
But  you  will  please  to  bear  in  mind  that  it  is  not  those 
translucent  orbs  that  see,  but  it  is  the  inhabitant  in  the 
earthly  house  that  looks  out  of  those  windows  of  the 
soul.  Even  the  good  book  says,  when  speaking  of  the 
faded  vision  of  the  aged, — "  and  those  that  look  out 

OF     THE     WINDOWS     SHALL     BE     DARKENED" tllUS     Calling 

these  eyes  but  the  windows  of  the  soul.  It  is  the  spirit 
only  that  sees — that  alone  possesses  the  inward  living 
eye  ;  for  take  the  spirit  from  its  earthly  house,  and  what 
pan  these  eyes — these  windows  of  the  fleshly  tabernacle 
— see  ?  They  can  see  just  as  much  as  the  hands  or 
feet,  but  no  more.  Let  another  question  be  here  pro- 
posed. Why  can  you  not  see  through  the  skull  ?  You 
will  again  answer — because  it  is  opaque.  But  I  again 
ask,  why  is  it  opaque  ?  You  reply — because  it  chemi- 
cally resists  the  rays  of  atmospheric  light,  and  will  not 
allow  them  to  pass  through  its  pores,  even  though  they 
are  as  numerous  as  the  pores  of  the  eye.  This  answer 
is  also  philosophically  correct  ;  and  in  this  wonderful 
constitution  of  the  human  cranium  is  made  manifest  the 
wisdom  of  the  Creator.  For  were  light  admitted  through 
it  upon  every  portion  of  the  brain,  it  would  stimulate  its 
organs  to  such  an  unnatural  degree  as  to  render  the 
mind  incapable  of  manifesting  itself  through  them  in  a 
harmonious  and  rational  manner.  Indeed,  it  would  be 
Inconsistent  with  the  continuance  of  life  itself. 

As  the  remarks  now  made  are  perfectly  simple,  and 
can  be  comprehended  by  all,  I  will  now  ask — if  there 
were  a  light  so  much  finer  than  atmospheric  light,  ana 
of  tru  t  peeu.iar  property  that  it  could  be  made  to  past 


54  LECTURES    ON 

through  all  substances  in  existence,  could  you  not  then 
see  through  that  wall  as  easily  as  through  that  glass  ? 
Certainly  ;  because  the  wall  would  be  rendered  trans- 
parent through  the  action  of  that  light,  and  wherever 
light  passes,  there  must  exist  the  possibility  to  see  ob- 
jects. The  question  then  naturally  presents  itself  to  the 
mind — is  there  such  a  light  ?  I  answer — there  is,  and 
it  is  magnetic,  or  galvanic  light.  It  exists  not  on'v 
around,  but  within  us.  Go  into  a  dungeon  of  total  dark- 
ness, and  strike  your  head  a  sudden  blow,  and  you  will 
see  a  flash  of  light.  From  whence  comes  that  light  ? 
It  is  within  you  :  it  is  the  nervous  fluid — the  living  li^ht 
of  the  brain,  which  is  of  a  galvanic  nature.  By  this 
concussion  it  was  thrown  into  confusion,  forced  from  its 
accustomed  channels,  and  laid  suddenly  at  the  footstool 
of  the  living  mind  ;  and  the  mind  saw  the  flash.  Hence, 
it  is  electrically  that  we  see,  and  hear,  and  feel,  and 
taste,  and  smell.  All  mesmeric  subjects  cannot,  how- 
ever, see  with  the  same  brilliancy  in  clairvoyance,  when 
the  brain  is  surcharged  with  this  light.  The  most  dis- 
tinguished clairvoyants  now  in  the  United  States,  are 
Jackson  Davis,  Lucius  E.  Burkmar,  and  Walter  S.  Tar- 
box,  who  have  astonished  thousands  ;  and  by  their  ex- 
aminations of  the  diseased,  and  saving  the  lives  of  many, 
have  rendered  themselves  the  benefactors  of  suffering 
humanity  This  galvanic  light  can  be  conveyed  to  the 
brain  independent  of  the  natural  eye — the  outward 
organ  of  vision. 

That  the  above  principles  are  correct,  and  that  taste, 
seeing,  etc.,  are  electrically  conveyed  to  the  mind,  try 
the  following  experiments.  Take  a  half  dollar,  and  a 
piece  of  zinc  of  the  same  size  :  touch  them  separately  to 
the  tongue,  and  you  will  not  perceive  any  taste  ;  but 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  ££ 

put  the  tongue  between  them,  and,  in  this  position,  touch 
the  edges  of  the  two  pieces  together  over  the  end  of  the 
tongue,  and  you  will  taste  a  pungent  acid.  This  taste 
is  produced  electrically.  Zinc  contains  a  greater  por- 
tion of  electricity  than  the  silver,  and  when  they  com© 
in  contact  it  gives  it  off  to  the  silver,  and  conveys  the 
lensation  of  taste  through  the  glands  to  the  mind.  In 
further  proof  of  this  being  electricity,  put  the  half  dol- 
lar against  the  gums  under  the  upper  lip  ;  open  the 
mouth,  and  lay  the  zinc  upon  the  tongue  .  by  moving 
the  tongue  up  and  down,  you  will  touch  the  pieces  to- 
gether, and  every  time  they  come  in  contact  you  will 
not  only  perceive  the  same  taste  before  described,  but 
you  will  see  a  flash  bf  lightning.  Now  that  this  light- 
ning is  seen  directly  by  the  mind,  and  independent  oi 
the  natural  organ  of  the  eye,  you  may  enter  a  dark 
room,  and  in  the  darkest  night — close  your  eyes,  and 
even  bandage  them, — and  yet  when  you  touch  those 
pieces,  as  described,  you  will  see  the  flash,  even  when 
one  from  the  heavens  could  not  be  seen.  This  flash  is 
conveyed  through  the  nervous  system  directly  to  the 
mind,  where  alone  exists  the  power  of  vision.  This  is 
not  only  proof  that  taste  and  sight  are  electrically  con- 
veyed to  the  mind,  but  also  that  electricity  is  that  sub- 
stance which  alone  comes  in  contact  with  mind. 

It  is  the  same  in  relation  to  the  other  senses.  Even 
hearing  is  not  produced  by  the  concussion  of  the  par- 
ticles of  o  ir  air,  bui,  by  the  vibration  of  the  particles  of 
electricity  conveyed  to  the  mind,  and  in  that  tremulous 
manner  through  the  organ  of  the  ear  coming  in  direct 
contact  with  mind.  It  is  impossible,  in  the  nature  of 
thing?,  hat  so  gross  a  substance  as  air  can  pass  the 
barriers  of  the  ear  and  enter  the  brain  to  produce  anv 


56  LECTURES    01V 

sound.  But  it  may  be  said,  that  though  the  particles  oi 
air  do  not  enter  the  brain,  yet  with  a  vibrating  motion 
they  strike  the  drum  of  the  ear  and  convey  sound  to  the 
mind.  This  cannot  be,  because  there  is  no  air  in  the 
brain  itself;  and  hence,  there  is  no  internal  aerial  me- 
dium through  which  souna  sould  be  transmitted  to  the 
mind,  even  if  we  admit  that  the  concussion  of  the  par- 
ticles of  external  air  com  eyed  it  to  the  drum.  I  yet  ask, 
what  is  the  internal  medium  beyond,  through  which  that 
sound  is  conveyed  to  the  mind  ?  There  is  no  air  there  ; 
and  if  it  be  a  vacuum,  then  no  sound  whatever  can  be 
conveyed.  The  truth  is,  that  the  same  substance  in 
tremulous  motion,  which  conveys  sound  to  the  drum  of 
the  ear,  also  passes  through  it  into  the  nervous  system, 
and  conveys  its  oracle  to  the  very  throne  of  the  living 
mind.  This  is  electricity,  which  is  the  only  correspond- 
ent or  mediator  between  mind  and  matter,  laying' its 
brilliant  hand  upon  both  parties,  and  bringing  them  into 
communication. 

The  sense  of  smell  exists  in  the  mind,  and  from  sur- 
rounding substances  the  sensation  is  electrically  con- 
veyed to  it.  But  as  smell  is  so  nearly  related  to  taste, 
the  same  argument  may  be  applied  to  both.  I  will 
therefore  proceed  to  notice  the  sense  of  feeling. 

It  is  generally  said  that  the  sense  of  feeling  is  in  the 
nerves.  But  I  contend  that  it  belongs  exclusively  to 
the  mind,  the  nerves  being  the  mere  medium  through 
which  it  is  electrically  conveyed  to  the  mind.  Indeed, 
all  our  sensations,  whether  of  seeing,  hearing,  feeling, 
tasting,  or  smelling,  are  conveyed  to  the  mind,  through 
the  nervous  system,  from  their  correspondent  organs, 
which  are  but  the  mere  starting  points,  or  inlets  of  sen- 
sation     And    as  the   nervo-vita'    fluid,   which  is  of  an 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  5i 

electi  ic  nature,  is  the  only  substance  that  acts  through 
the  nerves,  so  electricity  is  the  agent  which  conveys  al) 
our  sensations  to  the  mind.  Though  it  is  said  that  feei 
ing  is  diffused  over  the  whole  system,  yet,  strictlj 
speaking,  this  is  not  true.  All  feeling  is  in  the  mind 
It  is  evident  that  the  mind  resides  in  the  brain.  It  ia 
not  diffused  over  the  whole  nervous  system,  for  when 
we  might  be  as  sensible  that  thought  proceeded  from 
the  hand  or  foot,  as  from  the  head.  In  this  case,  the 
dss  of  a  hand  or  foot  would  be  the  loss  of  some  portion 
of  our  minds.  The  spinal  marrow  is  but  a  continuation 
of  the  brain.  Branches  shoot  out,  and  from  these,  oth- 
er branches  in  infinite  variety,  until  they  are  spread  out 
over  the  whole  system  ten  thousand  times  finer  than  the 
finest  hair-sieve, — so  fine  that  you  cannot  put  down  the 
Doint  of  a  cambric  needle  without  feeling  it,  and  you 
cannot  feel  unless  you  touch  a  nerve.  Hence  you  per- 
ceive how  very  fine  the  nervous  system  must  be  !  Of 
this  system,  the  brain  is  the  fountain,  and  is  the  local 
habitation  of  the  mind. 

Now  touch  the  finger  to  any  object,  and  that  touch 
produces  a  corresponding  action  upon  the  brain,  and 
through  the  agency  of  the  electro-magnetic  fluid,  that 
sensation  is  conveyed  to  the  mind.  It  is  the  mind  that 
feels  it,  and  by  habit  we  associate  the  feeling  with  the 
end  of  the  finger.  But  amputate  the  arm,  and  then 
touch  the  correspondent  nerve  at  the  end  of  the  stump 
and  he  will  yet  associate  the  feeling  with  the  end  of  the 
finger.  But  the  feeling  is  not  even  in  the  end  of  the 
stump,  It  is  in  the  mind  which  has  its  residence  in  the 
brain. 

I  knew  a  I  a:ksmith  who  had  his  leg  amputated 
above  the  knes      When  healed,  ne  put  on  a  wooden  leg 


58  LECTURES    ON 

and  resumed  his  labors  in  the  shop.  He  could  feel  his 
leg  and  toes  as  usual,  and  many  times  in  a  lay,  he 
would,  without  reflection,  put  down  his  hand  to  scratch 
his  wooden  leg.  Being  unlearned  and  superstitious,  he 
supposed  that  his  leg  was  buried  in  an  uncomfortable 
position,  and  therefore,  haunted  its  wooden  substitute. 
He  dug  it  up,  placed  under  it  a  soft  cotton  bed,  and  re- 
buried  it ;  but  all  to  no  purpose.  He  made  the  circum- 
stance known  to  his  physician,  who  told  him  to  find  the 
corresponding  nerve  on  the  stump,  and  he  could  cause 
the  itching  sensation  to  ceatee.  He  did  so,  and  the  diffi- 
culties were  at  once  overcome. 

A  gentleman  called  upon  me,  in  October,  1842,  at  the 
aouse  of  the  Hon.  T.  J.  Greenwood,  in  Marlboro'.  He 
stated,  that  he  injured  his  arm,  the  cords  contracted 
and  drew  up  his  fingers,  so  as  perfectly  to  clench  the 
hand.  It  gave  him  great  pain,  and  the  arm  was  ampu- 
tated just  above  the  elbow.  And  though  three  years 
had  passed  away,  he  said  there  was  yet  a  constant  pain 
as  though  the  fingers  were  drawn  up  ;  and  from  that 
contraction  the  pain  seemed  to  proceed.  Now  -the 
whole  of  this  difficulty  was  felt  in  the  brain.  If  I  may 
be  allowed  the  expression,  the  brain  has  its  legs  and 
arms,  and  toes,  and  fingers.  Or  allow  me  to  go  entire- 
ly back.  It  is  the  mind  which  has  its  limbs  and  all  its 
lineaments  of  form,  and  from  which  ail  form,  proportion, 
and  beauty  emanate. 

I  observed  a  moment  ago,  that  the  spinal  cord  was 
but  the  brain  continued.  Now  let  a  knife  be  inserted 
between  the  joints  of  the  spine,  and  let  this  cord  be  sev- 
ered, and  all  the  parts  of  the  body,  below  the  incision, 
will  be  paralyzed.  You  may  now  cut  or  burn  the  legs, 
but  all  feeling  is  gone  ;  neither  can  they  be  moved  by  the 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  59 

will,  The  will  cannot  come  in  contact  with  flesh  ana 
blood,  only  through  the  electro-magnetic  fluid.  The 
mind  is  in  the  brain,  and  as  the  spinal  marrow  is  severed, 
so  the  lower  parts  are  separated  from  the  fountain  of  feel- 
ing. The  communication  of  the  electrical  influence  is 
destroyed  between  the  extremities  and  the  mind,  and 
hence,  the  extremities  can  convey  sensations  to  the  mind 
no  more. 

I  might  continue  the  argument  to  an  indefinite  extent 
to  prove  that  all  our  senses  (seeing,  hearing,  feeling,  tast 
ing,  and  smelling)  are  in  the  mind,  and  that  these  sensa 
tions,  through  their  corresponding  organs,  are  electrical 
ly  conveyed  to  the  mind,  through  the  nervous  system,  but 
I  forbear,  aud  proceed,  as  usual,  to  the  anticipated  ei[>er« 
iments  of  the  evening. 


60  LECTURES    (M* 


LECTURE    V. 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen  :  We  are  again  assemble  I  to 
take  into  consideration  the  subject  of  Mesmerism.  Its 
growing  interest  in  the  public  mind  is  manifest,  by  the 
increasing  throngs  that  assemble  in  this  chapel,  to  inves- 
tigate its  claims  to  truth  and  science,  and  the  multitudes 
that  are  obliged  to  retire,  unable  to  gain  admittance. 
As  several  notes,  since  my  entrance  into  this  house, 
have  been  handed  me,  I  shall  be  obliged  to  omit  intro- 
ductory remarks,  and  attend  to  two  or  three  imporianU 
requests. 

An  inquiry  is  made  as  to  the  number  of  degrees  or 
states  into  which  a  subject  may  be  thrown.  In  reply  to 
this,  I  would  say,  that  there  are  but  five  degrees  which 
have,  as  yet,  come  under  my  observation.  The  first 
degree  is,  when  the  hands  or  even  the  whole  body  of  the 
subject  can  be  attracted  by  the  conjoint  action  of  the 
mental  and  physical  energies  of  the  magnetizer.  The 
second  degree  is,  when  the  hands,  or  body  of  the  subject, 
can  be  attracted  by  the  mental  energies  alone,  or  by  the 
physical  energies  independent  of  any  mental  effort.  The 
third  degree  is,  when  the  subject  can  neither  hear  nor 
answer  any  person  but  the  magnetizer  and  those  who 
are  in  communication.  The  fourth  degree  is,  when  tho 
subject  can  taste  what  the  magnetizer  tastes,  and  smell 
what  he  smells.  The  fifth  degree  is  clairvoyance.  I 
would  not  be  understood  that  these  five  degrees  always 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  61 

oci  ur  in  the  order  I  have  now  stated  them  ;  but  I  mean 
that  there  are  these  five  different  degrees.  Some  never 
seem  to  go  further  than  the  third  degree,  and  no  surgical 
operation  should  be  performed,  unless  the  subject  be  put 
completely  into  this  third  state,  so  that  no  voice  but  the 
magnetizer's  can  be  heard.  It  can  then  be  performed 
without  any  pain. 

Another  inquiry  is  made,  whether  any  person  can  put 
himself  into  communication  with  the  subject  without  the 
magnetizer's  consent  ?  I  answer,  yes.  Any  person  may 
put  himself  into  communication  by  ardently  fixing  his 
attention  upon  the  subject  while  another  is  magnetizing 
him,  especially  if  he  sits  near  him.  Or  he  may  do  it 
by  touching,  or  too  freely  handling  him.  He  may  do 
it  by  violently  throwing  his  hands  towards  him,  and 
within  a  foot  of  his  body.  Or,  lastly,  he  may  take  two 
or  three  electric  shocks  from  a  charged  Leyden  jar. 
within  eight  or  ten  feet  of  the  subject,  being  careful  to 
fix  his  eyes  firmly  upon  him  while  taking  the  shock. 
The  second  or  third  shock,  the  subject  will  start  with 
him  who  receives  it — and  when  he  starts  he  is  in  com 
munication. 

A  third  inquiry  is  made,  whether  any  one  but  the 
magnetizer  can  awaken  the  subject  ?  Certainly,  any  per- 
son who  is  put  in  communication  with  him  can  take  him 
out  of  the  state.  Or  by  a  firm  determination,  he  can 
aw^aken  himself.  In  fact,  he  may  be  put  in  bed,  and  in 
a  few  hours,  say  from  eight  to  fourteen,  he  will  come 
out  of  it  the  natural  way. 

A  fourth,  and  last  inquiry  is  made,  if  magnetism  be 
true,  why  has  not  more  oft  been  seen,  at  least  in  some 
small  degree,  in  different  ages  ?  I  answer,  that  its  his- 
tory dates  back  to  a  very  early  age  which  I  cannot  now 


62  LECTURES    ON 

pursue,  but  woald  refer  to  "Fascination,  or  the  Philos- 
ophy of  Charming,  illustrating  the  principles  of  life  in 
connection  with  spirit  and  matter,"  published  in  New 
York  city  by  Fowlers  &  Wells  ;  also  to  the  American 
Phrenological  Journal.  They  are  conducted  with 
great  ability,  and  should  be  in  possession  of  every  family 
But  the  inquirer  asks,  "  why  has  not  more  of  it  been 
seen,  at  least  in  some  small  degree,  in  different  ages  ?" 
I  answer,  it  has  been  seen  and  felt.  Have  you  nevei 
read  the  bold,  lofty,  and  full-gushing  eloquence  of  De- 
mosthenes, whose  thunders  roused  Greece  into  action, 
and  moved  her  sons  as  the  wind  in  its  rushing  majesty 
moves  the  sublime  magnificence  often  thousand  forests  ? 
This  was  but  the  magnetic  principle,  the  lightning  of 
the  mind,  by  which  they  were  electrified,  and  made  to 
act  as  one  man  against  the  powers  of  Philip.  The  same 
fs  true  of  Cicero,  who  shook  the  Roman  senate  with  his 
voice,  and  beneath  the  electric  glance  of  whose  awful 
eye,  even  Cataline  quailed.  I  am  well  aware  that  you 
will  call  this  sympathy.  But  what  is  sympathy  1  It  is 
the  nervo-vital  fluid  thrown  from  a  full,  energetic  brain, 
upon  another  of  kindred  feeling.  That  brain  being 
roused  affects  another,  and  that  still  another,  till  the  whole 
assembly  are  brought  into  magnetic  sympathy  with  the 
speaker,  and  by  him  are  moved  as  the  soul  of  one  man. 
As  a  further  answer  to  this  question,  I  will  notice  one 
fact  more;  and  in  doing  this,  I  shall  remove  what  has 
long  been  considered  as  a  stigma  on  a  large  and  respect- 
able denomination.  I  mean  the  Methodists.  Ever  since 
that  class  of  Christians  had  a  religious  existence  in  the 
United  States,  persons  have  fallen  down  into  a  species 
of  trance.  Other  denominations  call  this  delusion,  and 
m-3ny  call  it  deception,  because  such  things  never  occur 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  63 

in  their  meetings.  But  there  is  no  deception  in  this--!', 
is  really  the  magnetic  state — or  more  properly  the  spi- 
ritual state.  Every  preacher  cannot  do  it,  and  as  it  is 
done  without  contact,  comparatively  few  are  subjects 
of  it- 

But  take  a  preacher  of  strong  muscular  powers  ;  one 
who  has  large  concentrativeness,  and  eye  of  lightning, 
and  a  warm,  a  sincere,  and  ardent  soul.  He  enters  a 
tent  at  camp-meeting,  where  there  are  fifteen  or  twenty 
persons.  He  kneels  down  and  prays  most  fervently ; 
he  rises  and  sings  most  devotionally.  He  is  in  close 
contact  with  his  little  group.  He  begins  to  exhort  most 
sincerely ;  and  soon  the  deep  fountains  of  his  soul  are 
broken  up.  A  female,  perchance,  is  moved  to  tears. 
His  concentration  being  large,  he  keeps  his  eye  steadily 
fixed  upon  her,  and  he  wills  and  desires,  that  she  shall 
feel  as  he  feels,  and  be  converted  to  God.  At  length 
she  falls  into  this  singular  state.  She  has  gone  there  in 
the  preacher's  feelings,  and  in  his  feelings  she  will  come 
out  of  it.  Now,  if  he  would  fjliow  my  directions,  he 
could  restore  her  in  two  minutes.  I  will  pledge  myself 
to  arouse  any  one  from  this  magnetic  state  in  five 
minutes.  Dr.  Cannon,  of  this  city,  took  a  lady  out  of 
this  state  a  few  weeks  ago,  in  Provincetown,  who  was 
thrown  into  it  in  a  religious  meeting,  and  who  appeared 
nearly  lifeless.  A  report  of  this  was  published  in  the 
"  Christian  Freeman."  Now  all  these  are  really  mag- 
netic effects  that  we  have  seen,  and  for  many  years  in 
succession.  So  the  inquiries  are  all  answered,  and  I 
hope,  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  inquirers  and  the  congre- 
gation. 

I  must  now  proceed  to  notice  the  dangers  and  abuses 
of  Mesmerism.     It  is  often  said  by  its  opposers,  thgt 


t»4  LECTURES    ON 

Dven  if  it  be  ticie  yet  it  is  dangerous,  because  it  can  be 
abused,  and  therefore  ought  not  to  be  practised.  But 
Co  you  know  of  any  blessing  beneath  these  heavens  but 
what  has  been,  and  still  continues  to  be  abused?  No 
you  do  not.  Do  you  know  of  a  more  common  blessing 
than  taste  ?  yet  to  gratify  their  taste,  millions  on  millions 
have  gone  down  to  a  drunkard's  tomb  !  Mothers  have 
been  more  than  widowed,  and  children  more  than  or- 
phanized.  They  have  been  beaten  and  abused,  and 
suffered  cold,  and  hunger,  and  nakedness.  Under  it, 
crimes  have  been  committed,  and  the  state  prisons  filled 
with  wretched  men.  Human  beings  have  also  by  mil- 
lions gone  down  to  their  graves  through  excess  in  eating. 
But  is  taste  a  curse  because  men  abase  it?  and  must  it, 
therefore,  be  struck  from  the  catalogue  of  Heaven's 
mercies  ?  All  answer,  no.  Acquisitiveness,  benevo- 
lence, and  com');  tiveijess  can  be  abused,  and  so  can  all 
the  organs  of  the  human  brain.  But  ought  they  not  on 
that  account  to  be  indulged? 

Once  more  :  there  is  not  a  greater  blessing  than  the 
Gospel  of  Christ.  It  teaches  us  to  love  and  forgive  our 
enemies  ;  to  resist  not  evil,  and  to  do  unto  others  as  we 
would  that  they  should  do  unto  us.  It  is  calculated  to 
moderate  our  feelings  in  prosperity — to  comfort  us  in 
the  day  of  adversity — and  to  sustain  us  under  all  the 
troubles  and  disappointments  incident  to  mortal  life. 
When  our  parents,  friends  and  children  are  on  their 
dying  bed,  we  can  shake  the  farewell  hand  of  mortal 
separation,  with  the  hope  of  meeting  them  again  in  future 
realms.  And  not  only  so,  but  when  we  lie  down  upon 
the  bed  of  death,  and  the  embers  of  life  feebly  glimmer 
in  the  socket  of  existence,  then  the  Gospel  of  Christ 
points  us  to  brighter  scenes — scenes  beyond  the  tomb. 


ANIMAL     MAGNETISM.  f>5 

Yet  men  have  abused  that  gospel,  and  one  denomination 
has  risen  up  against  another,  and  doomed  each  other  to 
the  stake.  Rivers  of  human  blood  have  flowed  in  the 
holy  wars.  But  is  the  gospel  a  curse,  and  should  it  be 
struck  from  existence  merely  because  men  abuse  it  ? 
No,  is  the  answer  of  every  Christian  heart.  Then  thb 
objection  fails.  One  thing  must  settle  this  point.  There 
is  nothing  that  God  has  established  as  a  law  in  our  na- 
ture, but  what  was  designed  to  be  a  blessing  to  his 
creatures.  The  magnetic  principle  is  not  of  man,  but 
one  the  Creator  has  established,  and  is,  therefore,  a 
blessing.  And  if  it  could  not  be  abused,  it  would  diffei 
from  all  other  blessings  he  has  bestowed  on  man. 

But  it  is  said,  that  a  man  upon  the  high-way  may  be 
thrown  into  the  state  and  robbed.  But  I  deny  that  any 
person  can  be  thrown  into  the  state  against  his  will,  if 
he  will  at  the  same  time  use  physical  resistance.  And 
when  in  the  magnetic  state,  he  has  twice  the  strength  to 
resist,  and  defend  himself,  that  he  has  when  out  of  it. 
We  generally  know  with  whom  we  have  to  deal,  and 
surely  we  would  not  suffer  an  enemy,  nor  the  unprinci- 
pled, to  put  us  into  the  mesmeric  slumber.  But  if  you 
wish  to  be  safe,  and  are  really  fearful  of  consequences, 
I  will  give  you  a  rule  of  action.  It  is  this  :  never  allow 
any  one  to  magnetize  you  unless  it  be  in  the  presence  of 
a  third  person.  Observe  this  rule,  and  no  danger  arising 
from  this  source  will  ever  cross  your  path. 

Having  answered  these  objections,  I  will  now  show 
you  where  there  are  real  dangers  In  the  first  place, 
(hough  every  person  can  bo  mesmerized,  yet  there  are 
but  few  who  can  be  easily  thrown  into  this  state.  The 
greatei  proportion,  by  far,  would  require  several  hours 
of  hard  labor  Hence,  when  one  is  found  who  is  easy 
6* 


#6  LECTURES    ON 

to  mesmerize,  curiosity  is  awakened,  and  every  one 
wishes  to  make  the  trial  of  his  power  and  skill.  One 
mesmerizes  this  individual  in  the  morning,  another  in  the 
evening  and  a  new  set  of  operators  perform  the  same 
task  on  the  next  day,  and  so  on.  Now,  in  such  cases, 
ihere  is  that  mixing  and  crossing  of  ail  these  difFerent 
fluids  in  the  subject's  brain,  which,  if  persisted  in  toe 
long,  will  prove  injurious,  even  if  all  these  magnetizers 
are  healthy  persons.  If  you  mesmerize  a  person,  and 
thoroughly  wake  him,  yet  the  whole  of  that  fluid  does 
not  completely  pass  from  his  brain  short  of  a  week. 
Select  one  healthy  magnetizer,  and  continue  him.  If 
you  change  to  another,  then  wait  a  fortnight  before  you 
allow  him  to  operate.  Too  much  care  in  this  respect 
cannot  be  taken.  But  I  point  out  to  you  a  still  more  se- 
rious danger. 

There  are  persons  who  undertake  to  mesmerize  others, 
who  have  some  local  disease,  or  are  in  feeble  health. 
By  so  doing,  they  injure  themselves,  and  also  the  sub- 
ject. Such  persons  have  no  nervo- vital  fluid  to  spare, 
and  what  little  they  have  is  in  a  diseased  state,  and  unfit 
to  be  thrown  upon  the  nervous  system  of  another.  I 
care  not  what  the  disease  may  be,  by  long  persisting  in 
mesmerizing  a  person,  that  disease  will  be,  at  length; 
communicated  to  the  subject.  Great  caution,  in  this  re- 
spect, should  be  observed  by  both  parties,  if  they  would 
not  impair  their  health.  Weakness  of  lungs,  and  even 
consumption,  may  be,  by  thirty  or  forty  magnetizings, 
brought  upon  an  individual,  and  send  him  to  his  grave 
!  therefore  seriously  admonish  you  to  beware  of  this 
common  danger.  Never  allow  any  person  of  a  poor 
constitution  to  put  you  into  this  state ;  and  1  also  warn 
those  who  are  diseased,  or  even  in  delicate  health,  never 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  67 

to  mesmerize  others,  for  they  will,  by  so  doing,  inflict 
upon  themsel  /es  a  serious  injury 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  no  danger  in  a  healthy 
person  magnetizing  those  who  are  diseased.  As  the 
operator  imparts  the  nervo-vital  fluid,  and  dees  not  re- 
ceive any  in  return,  he  is  in  no  danger  of  taking  the  dis- 
ease of  his  patient.  Caution  is,  however,  to  be  observed 
in  taking  the  patient  out  of  this  state.  He  should  not 
make  the  upward  passes  in  such  a  manner  as  to  throw 
the  fluid  on  himself.  If  he  do,  he  is  in  some  danger  of 
contracting  the  disease.  An  experienced  magnetizei 
will  understand  how  to  avail  himself  of  this  caution. 

Once  more  :  there  are  persons  who  undertake  to  mag 
netize  others  who  are  entirely  ignorant  as  to  the  mode 
of  operation,  and  frequently  bring  persons  into  serious 
difficulty  by  getting  alarmed,  or  otherwise  thrown  out 
of  bias  in  their  feelings.  Several  cases  of  this  kind  1 
have  been  called  to  attend  to,  in  various  sections,  and 
some  of  a  very  serious  character.  No  persons  should 
undertake  to  mesmerize  others  until  they  shall  have 
learned  of  some  experienced  magnetizer  how  to  perform 
it,  and  made  themselves  acquainted  with  all  the  difficul- 
ties that  may  cluster  around  it. 

Having  attended  to  these  important  points,  I  will  now 
turn  your  attention  to  local  magnetism.  By  local  mag- 
netism, 1  mean  the  magnetizing  of  some  part  of  the 
human  body  without  charging  the  whole  brain.  Hence, 
the  finger,  the  hand,  the  arm,  the  leg,  yes,  even  the  eye- 
lid, the  lip,  or  the  tongue,  may  be  mesmerized  while  the 
person  is  in  the  wakeful  state,  and  so  may  be  any  of  the 
phrenological  organs.  It  is  true,  that  this  cannot  be  so 
easily  done  on  persons  who  have  never  been  mesmerized 
at  all,  as  on  those  who  have  been  thrown  into  the  stPte. 


68  LECTURES    ON 

If  the  brain  has  leen  once  magnetically  suodued,  men 
there  is  no  occasion,  even  if  the  amputation  of  a  iimb  is 
to  be  performed,  to  magnetize  any  other  part  than  the 
one  to  be  subjected  to  the  operation.  If  a  person  be 
very  hard  to  mesmerize,  then  it  will  be  proportionally 
difficult  to  mesmerize  any  limb.  But  it  will  be  borne  in 
mind,  that  however  long  it  may  take  in  successive  sit- 
tings to  magnetically  subdue  the  brain,  yet  after  that  is 
once  accomplished,  then  the  person  can,  in  future,  be 
wholly  mesmerized  at  any  time  in  five  -minutes,  and 
locally  so  in  a  much  less  period.  Hence,  should  an  arm 
be  broken  or  mutilated,  it  will  only  be  necessary  to  put 
that  limb  into  the  magnetic  state,  and  it  can  be  set  or 
amputated  without  pain ;  and  thus,  by  occasionally  re  - 
newing  the  mesmeric  action,  it  can  be  kept  in  this  state 
and  healed,  without  ever  experiencing  any  suffering 
whatever. 

I  perceive  that  some  smile  in  view  of  these  state- 
ments. They  are  truly  so  wonderful,  that  incredulity 
adjures  us  to  reject  them.  But  they  are,  nevertheless, 
Heaven's  unchanging  truths,  which  cannot  bend  to  cir- 
cumstarces,  nor  shape  themselves  to  the  belie/  <  r  scep- 
ticism of  men.  They  stand  out  in  bold  relief,  and  bid 
defiance  to  the  sneers  and  scorns  of  mankind.  A  surgi- 
cal operation  has  just  been  performed  in  Lowell  on  a 
lady  while  in  the  mesmeric  state.  A  tumor  was  ex- 
tracted from  the  shoulder,  where  it  was  necessary  to 
cut  to  the  depth  of  two  inches.  Dr.  Shattuck  wns  the 
magnetizer  ;  and  in  the  presence  of  several  medical  men 
of  Lowell,  one  of  whom  was  the  operator,  this  tumor 
was  removed  without  the  slightest  sensation  of  pain. 
This  was  not  done  in  a  corner,  but  publicly,  and  in  the 
presence  of  several  hundred  spectators.     It  is  loo  late 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  G9 

in  the  day  to  cry  "humbug  and  collusion,"  for  the  bat- 
tle is  fought,  and  the  victory  is  won,  and  the  scale  has 
turned  in  favor  of  truth,  and  turned  with  most  prepon- 
derating   weight,    and    on    the    stereotyped    argument 

"  HUMBUG  AND  COLLUSION,"  is  Written  "  TEKEL." 

Well  authenticated  facts,  and  medical  reports  of  ope- 
rations  in  surgery  and  dentistry,  performed  under  the 
energies  of  Mesmerism,  in  both  continents,  and  without 
pain,  are  continually  reaching  us.  And  w  ith  this  flood 
of  light  pouring  upon  the  world,  and  when  men  of  the 
first  talents  and  science  in  the  republic  of  letters,  and 
out  of  all  the  various  professions  and  denominations,  are 
among  its  advocates,  scepticism  is  not  only  waning,  but 
justly  losing  its  popularity.  Those  men  have  seriously 
investigated  and  weighed  the  matter,  and  they  severally 
declare,  as  did  the  Rev.  Mr.  Pierpont,  on  the  last  eve- 
ning, before  two  thousand  hearers,  in  this  house,  "  I  have 
no  belief  nor  unbelief  on  this  subject.  I  know,  I 
KNOW  it  to  be  so  !"  And  now  I  ask,  what  ought  the 
mere  opinion,  or  the  expressed  unbeliet  of  even  an 
honest  sceptic,  to  weigh  against  the  absolute  and  certain 
knowledge  of  an  equally  honest,  intelligent,  and  scienti- 
fic man.  whose  character  is  above  suspicion  ?  I  leave 
the  candid  to  judge,  and  have  only  to  say,  that  in  the 
face  of  modesty,  they  have  no  right  to  call  this  science 
"  humbug  and  collusion."    • 

Others  pretend  that  the  science  of  Animal  Magnetism 
was  condemned  by  the  French  Committee  in  Paris, 
among  whom  our  illustrious  Franklin  was  numbered. 
x\nd  as  it  received  its  condemnation  under  the  scrutiny 
of  such  minds,  therefore  they  conclude  that  it  has  no 
foundation  m  truth  There  always  have  been,  and  still 
are,  men  who  dare  i.ot  think  for  themselves,  but  wholly 


70  LECTURES  ON 

lean  upon  the  opinio ns  of  others.  Their  father,  their 
doctor,  their  lawyer,  and  their  minster,  thought  thus  and 
so,  and  they  think  just  so,  too.  Their  fathers  put  down 
a  central  stake,  gave  them  their  length  of  line,  and  bid 
them  travel  round  in  that  circle  of  revolving  thought 
till  the  day  of  their  death !  All  beyond  that  circle  is 
darkness  !  Their  field  of  thought  is  as  exactly  measured 
oflfto  them,  and  just  as  legally  bequeathed  to  them,  as 
their  farms.  They  received  them  both  by  inheritance. 
For  the  one  they  never  labored,  and  for  the  other  they 
never  thought  !  And  they  never  questioned  the  truth 
of  the  one,  any  more  than  they  did  their  title  to  the 
other ! 

But  surely  the  French  Committee  did  not  deny  the 
truth  of  the  experiments  produced,  nor  pronounce  them 
"  humbug  and  collusion."  They  simply  decided  that  the 
evidence  adduced  was  not  sufficient  to  prove  that  the 
magnetic  state  was  caused  by  a  fluid  proceeding  from 
the  magnetizer.  They  attributed  the  singular  effects 
they  witnessed  to  the  power  of  the  imagination.  But  it 
will  also  be  remembered,  that  this  committee  were  not 
all  agreed,  and  hence  appeared  the  remonstrance  of  the 
minority,  which  it  would  be  well  for  modern  sceptics  to 
read,  side  by  side  with  the  report. 

Many  sceptics  have  been  obliged,  like  the  French 
Committee,  to  admit  certain  results  as  being  truly  won- 
derful, and,  like  them,  attribute  it  to  the  force  of  the 
imagination.  But  to  believe  that  the  imagination  can 
bring  human  beings  into  a  state  where  limbs  can  be  am- 
putated, tumors  cut  out,  teeth  extracted,  and  broken 
bones  set,  and  the  whole  healed  without  experiencing 
one  throb  of  pain — to  believe,  I  say,  that  the  imagina- 
tion can  do  all  these  wonders,  in  giving  such  boundless 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  71 

tniHh  "  pain,  requires  a  far  greater  stietch  of  ere* 

dulity  v  o  believe  in  the  magnetic  power '  And 
surely  if  t\>t  pagination  possesses  the  wonderful  charm 
to  bring  the  ;»irvous  system  into  a  condition  where  we 
can  bid  defiance  to  pain,  and  gain  a  complete  victory 
over-  the  whole  frightful  army  of  human  woes,  then  surely 
the  science  is  equally  important,  possesses  the  same 
transcendent  claims  upon  our  benevolence,  and  the  man 
who  discovered  that  the  imagination  possessed  this 
charm  is  worthy  of  the  united  thanks  .of  all  human-kind  : 
and  being  dead,  his  bones  are  worthy  to  repose  with  the 
great  men  of  the  universe.  In  this  case  it  will  only  be 
necessary  to  change  its  name,  and  call  ii — The  science 

OF  THE  WONDERFUL  POWER  OF  THE  HUMAN  IMAGINATION 
TO  CHASM  ALL  FAIN. 


1-SUTUEES   Oft 


LECTURE    VI. 

La.x>iE3  and  Gentlemen:  In  the  first  four  lectures  I 
delivered  of  the  present  course,  I  brought  forward  the 
philosophy  of  Mesmerism,  and  flatter  myself  that  I  have 
not  only  succeeded  in  establishing  it  as  a  science,  but 
have  shown  it  to  be  one  of  transcendent  interest  to  the 
human  race.  Here  love  and  benevolence  stretch  out  a 
healing  hand  over  a  worid  groaning  and  travailing  in 
pain.  Those  groans,  by  that  silken  hand,  shall  be 
hushed,  and  these  pains  be  removed.  There  is  a  powei 
basined  up  in  the  fountains  of  the  soul,  that  has  long 
been  dormant.  But  it  is  rousing  up  and  stirring  itself  for 
some  mighty  action,  and  is  already  beginning  to  gush 
forth  in  healing  streams  on  the  world.  This  science  is 
in  its  infancy,  is  imperfectly  understood,  but  yet  it 
breathes  the  breath  of  mercy  as  a  sovereign  cure  for 
nil  human  woes. 

In  my  last  lecture,  I  answered  several  notes  of 
inquiry,  pointed  out  the  dangers  of  Magnetism,  refuted 
several  common  objections  in  re  ation  to  its  abuses, 
noticed  the  utility  of  the  science  in  performing  painful 
surgical  operations,  and  took  a  friendly  glance  at  the 
conduct  of  men  in  justifying  their  scepticism  by  pleading 
the  general  issue  of  the  Report  of  the  French  Com- 
mittee, and  concluded  by  touching  lightly  upon  the 
power  of  the  human  imagination. 

I  now  stand  before  you  in  the  confident  conviction 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  73 

that  much  good  will  result  from  my  labors  to  the  cause 
of  benevolence  and  mercy.  I  am  urged  to  repeat  my 
course  of  lectures  next  week,  but  it  will  be  out  of  my 
power  to  comply  with  this  request  at  tha*  time,  but  have 
consented  to  do  so,  week  after  next.  As  this  will  be 
my  closing  lecture  for  the  present,  I  can  render  you  no 
greater  service  than  to  show  what  connection  this  sub- 
ject has  with  divine  revelation.  I  am  well  aware  that 
many  will  call  me  an  enthusiast,  and  sneer  at,  and  con- 
demn me  for  thinking  independently.  But  when  the 
path  of  duty  is  plain,  and  when  I  am  once  satisfied  of 
truth,  I  then  go  on,  and  reason,  fearless  of  all  conse- 
quences. Under  such  circumstances,  I  have  nothing  to 
do  with  the  inquiry,  what  will  men  think  of  me  1  I  care 
not  what  they  think,  and  much  less  do  I  care  what  they 
say.  I  suffer  no  man  to  invade  the  sanctuary  of  my 
civil  and  roligious  rights,  and  dictate  to  me  how  I  shall 
think,  or  what  I  shall  believe,  or  what  I  shall  proclaim. 
[  therefore  hold  no  one  responsible  for  what  I  shall 
advance  in  this  lecture,  nor  do  I  know  as  there  is  one, 
with  whom  I  am  connected,  who  will  endorse  my  ideas. 
J  believe  the  doctrine  of  our  Saviour  to  be  a  perfect 
doctrine,  and  exactly  adapted  to  the  bodies  as  well  as 
to  the  souls  of  men.  I  believe  that  he  is  our  example  to 
follow,  and  as  he  went  about  doing  good,  healing  sick- 
ness, and  relieving  distress  of  body,  as  well  as  preaching 
the  gospel  to  heal  the  moral  maladies  of  the  soul,  so  it 
is  our  duty  to  do  the  same.  It  is,  moreover,  most  evi 
dent  that  his  doctrine,  to  the  full  extent  he  commanded 
his  apostles  to  preach  it,  was  to  go  down  to  all  subse- 
quent ages,  so  long  as  human  beings  should  have  a 
habitation  on  earth.  And  our  Saviour  just  as  much  com- 
manded his  apostles  to  heal  the  sick,  as  he  did  to  preach 
7 


74  LECTURES    ON 

the  gospel.  Now  I  cannot  believe  thai  one  half  of  the 
power  and  mercy  of  his  doctrine  should  cease  with  the 
ministry  of  his  apostles,  and  the  other  half  continue.  I 
cannot  believe  that  its  healing  efficacy,  so  far  as  the 
body  is  concerned,  should  cease,  and  what  was  applica- 
ble to  the  soul  should  continue.  If  this  be  so,  then  what 
a  favored  generation  of  Christians  existed  in  that  day, 
so  far,  at  least,  as  healing  the  body  was  concerned.  It 
was  said,  in  the  apostolic  age, "  Is  any  man  sick,  let  him 
send  for  the  elders  of  the  church,  and  let  them  lay  their 
hands  upon  him  and  pray,  and  the  sick  shall  recover." 
I  believe  this  now,  and  so  far  as  we  have  power  and 
faith,  it  can  be  accomplished  now  as  well  as  ever. 

There  is  a  difference  between  a  miracle  and  a.  gift  of 
healing.  If  an  arm  be  palsied,  we  know  that  the  diffi- 
culty exists  in  the  brain,  and  that  nothing  more  is  neces- 
sary than  to  throw  upon  it  a  sufficient  quantity  of  the 
nervous  fluid  to  bring  it  into  healthy  action.  The 
moment  this  is  accomplished,  the  difficulty  existing  in 
the  arm,  which  is  but  secondary,  will  be  relieved.  To 
restore  this,  would  be  a  gift  of  healing,  but  not  a 
miracle.  What,  then,  would  be  a  miracle  ?  Answei  i 
amputate  an  arm,  and  then  cause  a  new  one  to  grow- 
out.  Though  healing  diseases  is  sometimes  called  a 
miracle,  yet  when  speaking  of  them  specifically,  they 
are  not  so  denominated.  Paul  says,  "  God  hath  set  some 
in  the  church  ;  first,  apostles  ;  secondarily,  prophets  ; 
thirdly,  teachers  ;  after  that,  miracles,  then  gifts  of  heal- 
ings, helps,  governments/'  etc.  And  there  is  not  a 
scrap  of  evidence  that  these  things  were  ever  to  cease 
while  the  generations  of  men  endured. 

Now  if  our  Saviour  restored  a  palsied  arm,  then  there 
must   something  have  passed  from  him  to  the  person 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  75 

healed,  in  perfect  accordance  with  the  principles  i  ani- 
mal life  It  must,  therefore,  in  this  case,  have  been  the 
nervous  fluid,  as  this  was  the  only  substance  that  could 
have  restored  this  arm. 

It  is  undeniably  true,  that  there  was  always  some- 
thing  passed  i'rom  our  Saviour,  when  he  exercised  the 
gift  of  healing,  to  the  person  whom  h®  restored.  In 
evidence  of  this,  you  will  recollect,  that  on  one  occasion, 
when  he  was  called  to  visit  a  sick  person,  a  multitude 
followed  after,  and  thronged  him.  As  he  passed  by,  a 
woman,  who  had  been  afflicted  with  an  issue  of  blood 
for  twelve  years,  touched  the  hem  of  his  garment,  and 
was  made  whole.  He  turned  himself  around,  and  said, 
"  Who  touched  me  V  His  disciples  exclaimed,  "  Master 
the  multitude  throng  thee,  and  sayest  thou,  'Who 
touched  me  V  But  he  perceived  that  virtue  had  gone 
out  of  him."  The  word  virtue,  in  this  instance,  does 
not  mean  moral  goodness.  It  means  force,  power, 
efficacy  ;  the  same  as  when  we  say  a  medicine  has 
great  virtue  in  it. 

Our  Saviour  so  lived,  and  breathed,  and  moved  in  the 
divine  Being,  that  he  became  one  in  communication 
with  him  ;  so  that  when  the  Father  willed,  he  felt  that 
will — He  himself  then  willed,  and  it  wTas  accomplished. 
So,  if  any  one  bowed  in  reconciliation  to  God,  he 
became  one  with  the  Saviour,  so  that  the  Redeemer 
also,  felt  that  one's  will.  Such  was  the  case  of  this 
woman.  She  willed  in  faith  to  be  healed.  The  Saviour 
felt  that  will — He  willed,  and  it  was  done.  Now  every 
being  has  power  in  proportion  to  the  energy  of  his  own 
will ;  but  the  energy  of  the  will,  depends  upon  the 
intrinsic  greatness  of  that  being's  mind.  And  as  a 
miracle  is  a  thing  performed  by  the  energy  of  the  will 


LECTURES    ON 


go  that  mind  must  be  great  in  power  ana.  goodness, 
that  is  capable  of  performing  a  miracle.  We  sit  down, 
and  put  forth  the  energy  of  a  thousand  wills,  and  at  last 
produce  but  a  small  result. 

The  apostolic  power  was  far  greater,  and  in  the  same 
ratio,  their  results  were  more  splendid  and  glorious. 
But  still  they  had  not  the  power  of  Christ.  The  leper 
said,  "  Lord,  if  thou  wilt,  thou  canst  make  me  clean. 
Jesus  stretched  forth  his  hand,  and  touched  him,  and 
said,  I  will,  be  thou  clean,  and  his  leprosy  was 
cleansed."  By  a  word,  he  put  to  right  disabled  limbs, 
and  drew  back  life  and  warm  gushing  health  to  their 
abode.  He  put  forth  a  greater  energy — and  said  to  the 
winds  and  waves,  Peace  !  be  still !  His  will  fastened 
upon  electricity  in  the  heavens,  equalized  that  fluid 
hushed  the  winds,  and  calmed  the  waves.  He  opened 
the  blind  eye  to  the  splendor  of  the  noon-tide  blaze,  and 
instantly  penciled  on  its  retina,  the  universe.  He 
opened  the  deaf  ear,  and  poured  into  its  once  silent,  but 
now  vocal  chambers,  the  harmony  of  rejoicing  nature. 
He  spoke,  and  the  dead  stirred  in  their  graves,  and  rose 
up  from  their  icy  beds  before  him,  and  walked.  That 
same  dread  voice  shall  speak  with  a  living  energy,  that 
the  very  heavens  shall  hear,  and  the  dead  shall  rise  to 
die  no  more,  and  turn  their  eyes  from  the  dark,  ruinable 
tomb  on  the  scenes  of  eternity !  Mind  and  will  in  the 
Creator,  still  more  increased,  move  unnumbered  worlds, 
That  same  will,  now  infinite  and  immutable,  puts  forth 
creative  energy.  He  spake,  &nd  it  was  done  ;  He  com- 
manded, and  it  stood  fast;  laid  the  measures  thereof, 
and  stretched  the  line  upon  it  when  the  morning  star? 
sang  together,  and  all  the  sons  of  God  shouted  for  joy. 
Hence,  everv  grade  of  mind,  from  the  humblest  up  to 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  7". 

apostolic  great.iess ;  up  to  angel  and  archangel,  chjru- 

bim  and  seraphim  ;  up  to  Jesus  Christ,  till  it  reach  the 
infinite  Jehovah,  has  power  proportionate  to  its  great- 
ness and  goodness.  Hence,  it  will  be  readily  under- 
stood, that  a  miracle  is  nothing  more  than  a  result  pro- 
duced by  mind  itself,  independent  of  all  physical  energy, 
except  that  one  substance  which  is  put  into  motion  by 
the  living  mind. 

It  may  perhaps  be  said,  that  the  apostles  were  inspired 
to  heal,  and  as  we  are  not  inspired,  therefore  we  do  not 
possess  the  gift  to  heal.  On  this  principle  I  might 
reply,  that  the  apostles  were  inspired  to  preach,  and  as 
vvc  are  not  inspired,  therefore,  we  have  no  gift  to 
preach !  I  grant  that  the  apostles  were  inspired  to 
preach  and  to  heal,  because  it  was  not  possible,  that  at 
the  starting  point,  they  had  any  other  means  for  pre- 
paration. But  now  men  preach,  not  by  inspiration,  but 
because  they  feel  it  to  be  their  duty.  So  men  must  now 
titixl  because  they  feel  it  to  be  their  duty. 

It  is  by  no  means  to  be  expected  that  we  can  come 
up,  at  once,  to  apostolic  power.  No  ;  our  faith  is  too 
weak.  But  let  us  bring  up  our  children  in  the  faith  as 
we  ought,  and  they  will  learn  to  mesmerize  as  naturally 
as  they  learn  to  walk.  Their  concentrativeness  will 
become  largely  developed.  Their  children  will  be  bora 
with  more  favorably  developed  heads,  and  become 
greater  in  goodness,  until  at  length  the  whole  apostolic 
power  will  return  to  the  earth  in  all  its  primitive  splen- 
dor. It  is  Spiritualism,  because  it  is  the  innate  power 
of  tne  living  mind,  executed  through  the  agency  of  the 
will.  It  is  that  power  which  created  worlds,  for  this 
was  done  by  the  wrill  of  God.  It  is  that  power  by  which 
worlds  are  governed,  and  creatures  ruled,  for  this  is 
7* 


78 


I ECTURES    ON 


also  done  by  the  will  of  God.  It  is  that  pow^r  b^ 
which  we  make  impressions  reciprocally  upon  each 
other,  for  this  is  done  by  the  will  of  man.  And  lastly, 
it  is  "that  power  which  shall  awake  the  dead  from 
dreamless  slumber  into  thoughts  of  heaven,"  for  this  will 
be  done  by  the  will  of  God,  and  there  is  no  medium, 
only  electricity,  through  which  he  can  come  in  contac; 
with  his  creatures. 

I  will  now  bring  forward  a  few  cases  from  Scripture, 
to  show  that  the  living  have  been  thrown  into  a  singular 
slumber  by  the  very  presence  of  immortal  beings.  In- 
deed, there  is  scarcely  an  instance  where  angels  have 
appeared  to  men,  but  what  it  has  had  this  effect.  I  will 
bring  forward  those  that  first  strike  my  mind,  regardless 
of  their  arrangement. 

It  will  be  remembered,  that  when  John  the  Revelator 
was  in  the  isle  of  Patmos,  he  had  this  vision:  "And 
being  turned,  I  saw  seven  golden  candlesticks,  and  in 
the  midst  of  the  seven  candlesticks,  one  like  unto  the 
Son  of  man,  clothed  with  a  garment  down  to  the  foe 
and  girt  about  the  paps  with  a  golden  girdle.  His  heaa 
and  his  hair  were  white  like  wool ;  as  white  as  snow, 
and  his  eyes  were  as  a  flame  of  fire ;  and  his  feet  like 
unto  fine  brass  as  if  they  had  been  burned  in  a  furnace, 
and  his  voice  as  the  sound  of  many  waters.  And  he 
had  in  his  right  hand  seven  stars,  and  out  of  his  mouth 
went  a  sharp  two-edged  sword,  and  his  countenance 
was  as  the  sun  shineth  in  his  strength.  And  when  I 
saw  him  I  fell  down  at  his  feet  as  one  that  is  dead." 
Here  then,  is  a  singular  slumber  approximating  death. 

Our  Saviour,  wThen  he  wras  transfigured  on  Mount 
Tabor,  took  Peter,  James,  and  John  with  him.  For  a 
moment  he  was  changed  into  his  resurrection  splendor 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  79 

and  met  Moses  and  Elias  in  glory.  The  sacred  his« 
torian,  in  describing  the  scene,  says,  "  And  his  face  did 
shine  as  the  sun,  and  his  raiment  became  shining,  ex* 
needing  white  as  snow,  white  as  the  light,  so  as  no  fuller 
on  earth  can  white  them,  and  there  appeared  unto  them 
Moses  and  Elias  talking  with  him.  And  Peter  and  them 
that  were  with  him  were  heavy  with  sleep  ;  and  Peter 
said,  Lord,  it  is  good  for  us  to  be  here.  Let  us  build 
he>e  three  tabernacles  ;  one  for  thee,  one  for  Moses, 
and  one  for  Elias;  not  knowing  what  he  said."  That  is, 
when  he  came  out  of  this  sleep  he  did  not  recollect 
what  he  had  said.  They  were  thrown  into  this  state  by 
the  very  presence  of  these  minds. 

Do  you  remember  that  after  our  Lord  had  eaten  his 
valedidory  supper  with  his  disciples,  he  went  into  the 
garden  of  Gethsemane,  and  commanded  them  to  watch '•' 
He  went  a  few  steps  from  them  and  prayed  in  agony, 
and  sweat  as  it  were  drops  of  blood  falling  to  the 
ground.  The  guardian  angel  of  Jesus  Christ  appeared 
from  heaven  strengthening  him.  The  apostles  fell  into 
a  deep  sleep.  Though  this  wTas  a  scene  of  great  interest 
to  them,  yet  it  seems  that  the  presence  of  this  ange 
thus  affected  them. 

He  was  nailed  to  the  cross  between  two  malefactors, 
to  darken  his  glory  and  blot  his  name.  The  Jews  were 
nis  accusers,  and  the  Romans  his  executioners.  Hence, 
the  world  wTas  combined  against  him,  while  his  own 
disciples  forsook  him  in  that  dark  hour  of  peril.  The 
universe  thus  combined  against  him,  mocking  and  de- 
riding him,  and  covering  him  with  disgrace,  even  nature 
herself  stepped  forward  as  it  were,  and  with  a  mighty 
hand  wiped  off  that  disgrace,  and  sustained  him  in  his 
majesty.     The  sun  w  thdrew  his  light,  rolled  back  his 


60  LECTURES    ON 

chariot,  midnight  darkness  spread  her  robe  of  sacK 
cloth  upon  his  brilliant  disc,  and  hung  the  world  in  the 
dark  shroud  of  mourning.  Earthquakes  awoke  from 
their  tartarean  dens  and  thundered.  The  earth  shook, 
the  rocks  rent,  the  graves  opened,  all  nature  reused  up 
and  there  brought  to  a  centre  all  that  is  grand,  awful,  and 
sublime  in  her  realms,  as  the  magnanimous  sufferer  ex- 
pired !  He  was  conveyed  to  his  tomb,  and  Roman  sol- 
diers were  there  stationed  to  guard  it.  Soldiers  whose 
business  it  was  to  die, — who  had  been  brought  up  in 
tented  fields  of  war,  and  who  had  from  childhood  en- 
countered hardships  and  toils,  fatigues  and  dangers. 
They  were  men,  who  had  often  bared  their  bosoms  to 
the  shafts  of  battle,  and  undismayed  listened  to  its  stormy 
voice,  and  who  knew  not  what  it  was  to  quail  beneath 
the  glance  of  a  mortal  eye.  Such  men  as  these,  were 
stationed  to  guard  that  tomb,  and  hold  the  Prince  of  Lifa 
in  death.     But — 

"  An  angel's  arm  can't  snatch  him  from  the  grave; 
Legions  of  angels  can't  confine  him  there." 

On  the  morning  of  the  third  day,  the  last  grand  scene 
m  this  interesting  drama  was  opened.  The  guardian 
angel  of  Jesus  Christ  was  once  more  dispatched  from 
the  eternal  throne.  He  descended  from  heaven,  and  nn 
earthquake  shook  creation.  He  approached  the  tomb 
of  the  Holy  Sleeper,  and  stood  before  it.  "  He  rolled 
back  the  stone  from  the  door  of  the  sepulchre  and  saf 
upon  it.  His  countenance  was  like  the  lightning,  and 
his  raiment  white  as  snow;  and  for  fear  of  him.  the 
keepers  did  shake,  and  become  as  dead  men  !" 

What,  I  ask,  was  it  that  threw  them  into  this  slumber 
with  feelings  of  a  cold  shuddering  fear,  so  nigh  ap- 
proaching the  dead  (     I  answer,  rt  was  the  will  of  this 


ANIMAL    MAGNETISM.  81 

angel,  whose  countenance  was  like  the  lightning,  that 
sunk  them  into  a  motionless  sleep.  It  was  his  will 
which  struck  the  vibrations  of  terror  through  the  dark 
chambers  of  their  souls,  and  withered  them  to  the  earth. 
I  should  like  to  notice  the  circumstance  of  Paul  bein<* 

o 

caught  up  into  the  third  heavens — whether  out  of  the 
body  or  in  the  body,  he  could  not  tell — of  Peter  falling 
into  a  trance  when  he  went  upon  the  house-top  to  pray, 
and  of  Zacharias  being  struck  dumb  in  the  temple ;  but 
time  will  not  permit. 

I  close,  by  returning  my  sincere  thanks  to  the  Modera- 
tors, for  the  good  order  they  have  preserved  ;  to  the 
various  Committees,  for  their  patient  examinations  and 
impartial  reports  of  the  experiments  performed  ;  and  to 
the  ladies  and  gentlemen,  for  their  faithful  attendance 
and  respectful  attention,  and  also  for  the  good  feelings 
they  have  uniformly  manifested  towards  the  lecturer 
during  the  entire  course,  which  is  now  brought  to  a 
termination 


R2              THE  SOUL  THE  SEAT  OF  PAIN. 
NOTE. FROM  CHANGING. 

•'We  are  created  with  a  susceptibility  of  pain,  ana 
severe  pain.  This  is  a  part  of  our  nature,  as  truly  as 
our  susceptibility  of  enjoyment.  God  has  implanted  it, 
and  nas  thus  opened  in  the  very  centre  of  our  being  a 
fountain  of  suffering.  We  carry  it  within  us,  and  can 
no  more  escape  it  than  we  can  our  power  of  thought. 
We  are  apt  to  throw  our  pains  on  outward  things  as 
their  causes.  It  is  the  fire,  the  sea,  the  sword,  or  human 
enmity,  which  gives  us  pain.  But  there  is  no  pain  in  the 
fire  or  the  sword,  which  passes  thence  into  our  souls. 
The  pain  begins  and  ends  in  the  soul  itself.  Outward 
tilings  are  only  the  occasions.  Even  the  body  has  no 
pain  in  it,  which  it  infuses  into  the  mind.  Of  itself,  it  is 
incapable  of  suffering.  This  hand  may  be  cracked, 
crushed  in  the  rack  of  the  inquisitor,  and  that  burnt  in  a 
slow  fire ;  but  in  these  cases  it  is  not  the  fibres,  the 
blood-vessels,  the  bones  of  the  hand  which  endure  pain. 
These  are  merely  connected,  by  the  will  of  the  Creator, 
with  the  springs  of  pain  in  the  soul.  Here,  here  is  the 
only  origin  and  seat  of  suffering.  If  God  so  willed,  the 
gashing  of  the  flesh  with  a  knife,  the  piercing  of  the 
heart  with  a  dagger,  might  be  the  occasion  of  exquisite 
delight.  We  know  that,  in  the  heat  of  battle,  a  wound 
is  not  felt,  and  that  men,  dying  for  their  faith  by  instru- 
ments of  torture,  have  expired  with  triumph  on  their  lips. 
In  these  cases,  the  spring  of  suffering  in  the  mind  is  not 
torched  by  the  lacerations  of  the  body,  in  consequence 
of  the  absorbing  action  of  other  principles  of  the  souL 
All  suffering  is  to  be  traced  to  the  susceptibility,  the  ca- 
pacity of  pain,  which  belongs  to  our  nature,  and  which 
\ht  Creator  has  implanted   neradicab'y  within  us." 


PSYCHOLOGY; 


SCIENCE  OF   THE    SOUL, 


CONSIDERED 


PHYSIOLOGICALLY  AND  PHILOSOPHICALLY. 


WITH    AN    APPENDIX,    CONTAINING    NOTES    OF    MESMERIC     ANTJ 
PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE. 


tit  JOSEPH   HADDOCK,  M.D. 


WITH  ENGRAVINGS  OF  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 


NEW  YORK : 

S.     R.    WELLS    &    CO.,    PUBLISHERS 

No.    737  Broadway. 

1876. 


Ksifit^i,  according  to  act  of  Congress,  in  tfce  year  io«9,  by 

FOWLERS   AND  WELLS, 

*i  &9  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Soutnern  District  of  Ne  <r  Vcsft 


PREFACE 


This  work  was  recently  published  in  Lgjjdon  under 
the  following  title :  "  Somnolism  and  Psycheism5 
otherwise  Vital  Magnetism  or  Mesmerism  :  consid- 
ered Physiologically  and  Philosophically  :  being  the 
substance  of  lectures  delivered  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Bolton  Mechanics'  Institution  ;  with  an  Appendix, 
containing  notes  of  Mesmeric  and  Psychical  experi- 
ence." 

We  have  taken  the  liberty  to  omit,  in  our  title,  such 
terms  as  may  not  be  fully  understood  by  all  readers  ; 
taking  care,  however,  to  make  it  equally  appropriate. 

The  subject  on  which  this  work  treats,  is  fast  be- 
coming of  the  most  absorbing  interest  to  our  people, 
and  it  gives  us  pleasure  to  place  before  the  American 
public  the  conclusions  of  those  who  have  penetrated 
most  deeply  into  these  supposed  mysteries  of  nature. 

We  look  forward,  hopefully,  for  the  time  when  we 
may  know  those  things  which  the  world  have  always 
"  believed"  to  be  truths.  Nor  is  it  possible  for  any 
influence  to  limjt  the  desires  of  the  human  mind  to  in- 


PREFACE. 

vestigate,  until  it  has  penetrated  every  subject  which 
comes  within  the  range  of  its  comprehension. 

May  this  work  go  forth  to  "  open  the  eyes  of  the 
(spiritually)  blind,"  and  excite  to  further  investigation 
and  reflection  those  minds  best  capacitated  to  evolve 
"  new  light"  on  intellectual  and  spiritual  vision. 

This  is  a  progressive  age,  not  only  in  moral  and 
physical  development,  but  in  spiritual  science. 

American  Publishers). 

Clinton  Hall, 
181  Nassau  St., New  Yo&k. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 


FADE. 

INTRODUCTION  TO  PSYCHOLOGY 8-12 

Characteristics  of  the  age. — Chemistry  a  new  science. — Geology. — A  new  world 
without  and  a  new  world  within  man. — Knowledge  not  confined  to  supersti- 
tions, assumptions,  barren  negations,  nor  skeptical  philosophy,  but  something 
real — the  nature,  powers,  and  capabilities  of  his  being. — Assistance  afforded  ua 
by  a  knowledge  of  magnetism,  or  psycheism — Discoveries  and  doctrines  of 
an  enlightened  physiology. — Laws  and  developments  of  the  world  of  mind 
capable  of  being  displayed  before  our  physical  sight. — The  curious  and  inter- 
esting phenomena  displayed  by  mesmerism  too  often  neglected. — Authority  too 
often  nu  aid  in  eliciting  truth.  The  most  astounding  statements  of  mesmeric 
experiments  not  more  wonderful  than  universally  admitted  facts. — Wonder- 
working telegraph. — A  dreaming  theory  or  enthusiastic  vision  a  reality.— Mes- 
merism the  discovery  of  a  new  method  of  working  an  old  medium. — A  spirit- 
ual and  a  natural  body. — The  blessing  of  sight  a  fact  that  all  philosophers  havo 
been  heretofore  unable  to  explain. — Our  present  standard  of  knowledge  should 
not  be  the  measure  of  future  acquirements. — Psycheism  a  means  of  acquaint- 
ing ourselves  with  the  distinctive  qualities  of  mind. 

ORIGIN  OF  MESMERISM,        .  ....     12-17 

In  records  of  past  ages  extraordinary  cures  ascribed  to  miracle,  or  magic- 
Magnetism  discovered  toward  the  close  of  the  last  century. — Brief  history  of 
Mesmer  and  his  discovery,  and  method  of  applying  it. 

PHENOMENA  AND  PHYSIOLOGY  OF  MESMERISM,  .     17-60 

Stages  or  degrees  of  mesmeric  influence. — How  they  are  to  be  understood  and 
accounted  for. — The  brain  and  nervous  system  the  medium  through  which  the 
mind  acts  upon  the  body. — Illustrations  and  descriptions  of  the  brain,  etc.  (sec 
list  cf  illustrations). — Methods  of  inducing  the  somnolent  state. — Remarkabla 
facts. — Catalepsy.  — Phantasy. — Transfer  of  Feeling. — Phreno-mesmerism. — 
Cerebral  lucidity,  or  clairvoyance. 

PHILOSOPHY  AND  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  MESMERISM,      60-78 

Clairvoyance  the  internal  sight  of  the  soul. — Sight  without  the  aid  of  the  eye  not 
more  difficult  of  explanation,  when  thoroughly  examined,  than  ordinary  vis- 
ion.— Description  of  the  human  eye. — Clairvoyance  and  ordinary  vision  as> 
sume  the  same  basis.— Mind  ind  matter,  soul  and  body,  psyche  or  animus.— 
The  external  of  the  spirit. — Psycheism,  or  the  science  of  the  soul  as  manifest- 
ed in  nature. — Psychological  change  induced  by  mesmerism. — The  superior 
state. — Independent  clairvoyance. — The  general  power  of  the  sensorium  to 
form  images  within  itself  of  object*  that  are  without  itself. — Are  all  persona 
subject  to  mesmeric  influence  ?  and  why  all  cannot  be  made  clairvoyant- 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

APPENDIX. 

PAGE. 

MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE,  .  .  78-95 
Case  of  E.  L. — Injury  of  the  knee.— Treatment. — The  vapor  ot  ether. — Its  effects. 
— Hypnotism.  —  l'hreno  magnetic  developments. — Catalepsy. — Rigidity.  —  At»> 
traction. — Delusion. — Susceptibility  without  the  mesmeric  sleep. — Personal  in- 
flueuce. — Mesmerism  without  contact. — Tooth  extraction. — Discovery  of  lucid- 
ity and  clairvoyance. — Reading  in  a  mesmeric  state. — Pictures  a  reality. — De- 
scriptioii  of  absent  persons  and  objects. — Picture  of  the  cat. — Emma's  visit  to 
the  queen. — To  the  plaaets. — Omnipresent  vision. — The  cash-box  stolen. — Suc- 
cessful clairvoyant  search  for  it,  and  interview  with  the  thief. — Tracing  the 
route  and  circumstances  of  a  traveler. 

CLAIRVOYANCE  AS  APPLIED  TO  PHYSIOLOGY  AND 

MEDICINE, 95-100 

Description  of  man's  internal  structure. — The  application  of  this  power  one  of 
the  most  legitimate  uses  of  clairvoyance. — Discovery  of  disease  by  the  hand- 
writing of  a  person  at  a  distance,  also  by  a  lock  of  hair. — Remarkable  cure  of 
insanity  by  the  aid  of  clairvoyant  prescriptions. — Tasting  medicines  through 
bottles — The  exalted  sense. 

SPONTANEOUS  EXTASIS,  OR  TRANCE,  .  .  .  101-lOfl 
A  higher  and  more  interior  character. — Scenery  and  nature  of  the  spirit-world.— 
Recollections,  predictions,  and  verifications. — Rigidity  and  insensibility  to  parti 
during  a  trance. — Communications  with  the  spirits  of  the  dead. — Finding  » 
Bible  and  a  particular  place  in  it. — Man  represented  as  a  spiritual  being  after 
death,  and  his  sensational  perception. — The  male  and  female  sexe3  retained  — 
Growth  of  infants. — The  living  influenced  by  the  spirits  of  the  dead. — Spirits 
not  subject  to  the  laws  of  time  or  space.— The  body  only  the  "i'/iell"  of  th^ 
spirit. 

PRACTICE  AND  USE  OF  MESMERISM,     .        .         .     106-109 
A  simple  process. — Depends  more  on  peculiar  constitution  of  the  subject  thas 
power  of  the  operator. — Modes  of  operating. — Curative  influence  of  mesmer- 
ism.— Necessity  of  Mesmerisers. — Mesmeric  institutions. 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


1    Cerebro-Spinal  Axis. 

2.  The  Nerves  of  the  Brain. 

3.  View  of  the  Top  of  the  Brain. 

4.  Side  View  of  the  Brain. 

5.  Front  View  of   a   Section  of   the 

Spinal  Cord  and  Nerve. 
3.  View  of  the  Structure  of  the  Brain 
7.  The  Right  Hemisphere  of  the  Brain 
B.  The  Cerebellum. 


9.  Horizontal  Section  ot  the  Brain. 

10.  The  Cerebellum,  etc. 

1 1.  Parts  about  the  Base  of  the  Brain. 

12.  Right  Hemisphere  of  the  Brain. 

13.  Vertical  Section  of  the  Brain. 

14.  Perpendicular  Section  of  the  Brain 

15.  Right  Hemisphere  of  the  Brain. 

16.  Ganglionic  System  of  Vegetable  L  if  a 

17.  Spinal  Cord,  etc. 


INTRODUCTION. 


1.  One  of  the  striking  characteristics  of  the  present 
age.  is  the  vast  amount  of  knowledge  respecting  ex- 
ternal objects,  which  has  been  accumulated  in  a  com- 
paratively short  period.  For  within  the  compass  of 
human  life,  so  extensive  has  been  the  discovery  of 
the  physical  properties  of  natural  substances,  that 
Chemistry,  although  of  ancient  date,  may  be  consider- 
ed as  a  new  science ;  and  Geology  has  opened  a  new 
world  to  human  enquiry.  While  man  has  thus  been 
permitted  to  increase  his  knowledge  of  the  world  with- 
out him,  we  might  reasonably  expect  that  some  ad- 
ditional knowledge  would  be  acquired  of  the  world 
within  him.  That  his  knowledge  would  not  be  con- 
fined to  the  superstitions  of  the  dark  ages,  or  to  the 
assumptions  of  self-constituted  authority  on  the  one 
hand  ;  nor  to  the  barren  negations  of  a  sceptical  philo- 
sophy on  the  other  hand  ;  but  that  something  real, 
positive,  and  satisfactory,  should  be  learnt  respecting 
his  own  constitution.  For  what  knowledge  can  be  so 
interesting  to  man,  as  a  knowledge  of  himself?  of  the 
nature,  powers,  and  capabilities  of  his  own  being. 

2.  To  every  calm,  and  well-informed  enquirer,  it 
will,  I  think,  be  evident,  that  the  remarkable  pheno 
mena  of  what  if  called  Mesmerism- 


5  INTRODUCTION. 

sidered  that  it  may  more  properly  be  called — Psyche- 
ism,  rightly  interpreted,  do  afford  us  the  means  of 
acquiring  a  knowledge  of  the  laws  and  nature  of  the 
psychical,  or  mental  part  of  our  being,  as  much  tran- 
scending what  is  commonly  known,  as  the  recent  dis- 
coveries in  magnetism  and  electricity  exceed  the  ancient 
ideas  of  those  natural  powers ;  and  at  the  same  time, 
they  afford  us  the  means  of  becoming  better  acquainted 
with  the  more  abstruse  points  in  our  bodily  organiza- 
tion also. 

3.  The  discoveries  and  doctrines  of  an  enlightened 
physiology,  teach  us,  that  all  the  forms  and  forces  of 
the  entire  universe  are  found  in  their  highest  perfec- 
tion in  the  bodily  form  of  man ;  and  that  in  him,  as 
the  Microcosm,  or  little  world,  is  to  be  found  all  that 
exists  in  the  Macrocosm,  or  great  world  of  the  uni- 
verse. And  as  in  the  great  world  without  us,  the 
most  astonishing  and  transforming  powers  are  displayed 
by  those  subtle,  imponderable,  and  invisible  elements, 
which  elude  the  most  acute  physical  senses,  even  when 
aided  by  the  highest  artificial  means  ;  so  in  the  world 
within  us,  the  most  wonderful  and  unexpected  powers 
are  manifested  by  those  psychical  or  mental  operations, 
by  which  the  laws  and  developments  of  the  world  of 
mind  are  capable  of  openly  being  displayed  before  our 
physical  sight. 

4.  But  the  curious  and  interesting  phenomena  dis- 
played by  Mesmerism,  instead  of  being  calmly  and 
carefully  investigated  by  all  enquiring  minds,  especially 
by  those  whose  profession  or  pursuits  ought  to  havo 
interested  them  in  the  enquiry,  have,  in  too  many  in- 
stances,  been  scornfully  and  contemptuously  neglected. 


INTRODUCTION.  S 

Authority,  instead  of  lending  its  aid  to  elicit  the  truth, 
has  rather  scowled  upon  the  attempt  which  has  been 
made  to  lift  the  veil  under  which  truth  has  been  con 
cealed ;  and  in  some  cases,  has  misrepresented  the 
character  and  intentions  of  those,  who,  at  any  cost, 
were  determined  to  seek  her  for  themselves.  It  is 
possible  indeed,  that  the  very  remarkable  results  said 
to  flow  from  the  enquiry — results,  so  different  to  the 
expectations  and  ideas  of  a  materializing  age,  and  in 
some  respects,  disclosing  matters  which  seem  to  clash 
with  established  opinions — may  have  been  the  reason, 
for  this  unfair,  and  certainly  unphilosophical  mode  of 
proceeding.  But,  granting  that  the  most  astounding 
statements  made  by  mesmeric  experiments  are  true, 
they  are  not,  when  properly  considered,  more  wonderful 
than  things  now  universally  admitted  as  facts.  Look 
at  the  wonder-working  electric  telegraph !  The  ele- 
ments on  which  that  invention  rests,  must  be  as  old  as 
the  present  order  of  things  ;  yet  if  any  one  in  the  mid- 
dle of  the  last  century  had  ventured  to  assert  that,  by 
human  ingenuity,  electricity  or  magnetism  could  be 
made  to  transmit  human  thought  with  mathematical 
precision,  and  yet  with  the  velocity  of  light,  he  would 
have  been  set  down  by  the  practical  authorities  of  that 
age  as  a  dreaming  theorist,  or  an  enthusiastic  visionary. 
To  us,  however,  the  visionary  theory  has  become  a 
reality ;  and  yet  what  magnetism  or  electricity  really 
are,  is  no  more  known  to  us  than  it  was  to  our  great- 
grandfathers. The  truth  is,  the  mode  has  been  elicited, 
by  which  certain  comparative  unknown  mediums  may 
be  practically  applied  to  subserve  the  purposes  of  So- 
fia! life  ;  and  herein,  and  for  all  practical  purposes, 
1* 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

consists  the  ixeful  discovery.  If  we  shall  never  knoT* 
what  magnetism  and  electricity  m  themselves  really 
are,  we  certainly  do  know  much  of  the  mode  by  which 
their  laws  and  powers  may  be  developed  and  manifest- 
ed :  we  have  discovered  a  mode  of  working  mediums 
altogether  unknown  to  our  ancestors. 

5.  Just  so,  I  apprehend,  it  is  with  the  discoveries 
of  Mesmerism.  Here  is,  in  fact,  a  discovery  of  a  new 
mode  of  working  an  old  medium.  That  mind  and  mat- 
ter are  both  necessary  to  form  the  peculiar  organism 
we  call  man,  is  no  new  doctrine ;  but  the  true  nature 
of  the  body,  as  the  mind's  medium  or  instrument,  and 
of  the  necessary  organization  of  that  superior  in- 
dwelling power — the  soul  or  mind,  which  directs  and 
controls  the  outward  form,  has  been  somewhat  over- 
looked. Metaphysicians  have  studied  mind  irrespec- 
tive of  form  or  matter ;  and  some  .philosophers  would 
resolve  all  things  into  material  operation,  irrespective 
of  mind,  I  believe  that  fact  and  demonstrative  evi- 
dence will  prove  both  classes  of  philosophers  to  be 
wrong.  From  Divine  Revelation  we  know  that  there 
is  both  spirit  or  mind,  and  matter ;  both  a  spiritual 
body  and  a  natural  body.  These  cardinal  truths  will 
be  found  to  lie  at  the  bottom  of  all  mesmeric  expe- 
rience, and  from  that  experience,  the  a  priori  statements 
of  the  Scriptures  will  receive  abundant  confirmation. 
And  we  shall  see  that  in  our  present  state  of  existence, 
if  we  wish  to  study  mind  or  spirit,  we  must  study  it  as 
manifest:!  in  its  divinely  appointed,  and  true  corres 
pondent  instrument,  the  material  bodily  organization. 

6.  With   some   of  the  mind's  operations,   and   the 
bodily  functions  anil  sensations  thence  ensuing,  we  have 


INTRODUCTION.  1} 

become  so  familiar,  that  we  scarcely  ever  stop  to  thiols 
of  the  perpetual  miracles  involved  in  our  daily  expe- 
rience. Thus  the  great  blessing  of  sight  involves,  as 
we  shall  point  out  presently,  a  fact  which  all  the 
philosophers  that  have  ever  lived  have  been  unable  tc 
explain !  Yet  when  some  manifestation  of  mind  or 
spirit,  which  has  hitherto  eluded  general  notice,  is 
brought  before  us,  although  it  may  not  be  more  inex- 
plicable than  natural  sight,  yet  we  are  apt  to  deny 
the  possibility  of  the  declared  manifestation,  simply 
because  we  were  not  previously  acquainted  with  it — 
apt  to  make  our  present  standard  of  knowledge .  the 
measure  by  which  all  future  acquisitions  are  to  be 
estimated.  Sometimes  too,  we  are  told  authoritatively, 
that  it  is  impossible  for  us  to  know  any  thing  of  mind 
or  spirit.  What,  I  ask,  do  we  know  of  matter  1 
Simply  some  of  its  laws  and  properties ;  and  from 
these  we  predicate  its  qualities.  So  it  is  with  mind 
or  spirit ;  Mesmerism,  or  more  truly  Psycheism,  fur 
nishes  us  with  a  means  of  acquiring  an  experimental 
acquaintance  with  some  of  its  most  distinctive  qualities 
— distinctive  I  mean  with  respect  to  the  qualities  of 
inert  matter.  Whether  we  shall  ever  know  what  spirit 
or  what  matter  really  is,  remains  for  a  higher  stage  of 
existence  to  determine.  It  is  privilege  enough  to  be 
enabled  to  know  something  of  the  laws  and  propertiea 
of  that  higher  and  imperishable  organism,  to  which  oui 
outward  bodily  organism  is  subservient. 


SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM 


ORIGIN  OF  MESMERISM. 

7.  In  the  records  of  past  ages,  we  have  many  state.. 
merits  of  remarkable  mental  or  psychical  manifesta- 
tions, and  also  of  the  performance  of  extraordinary 
cures,  by  mental  or  moral  agency,  which  ignorance  and 
superstition  have  ascribed  to  miracle  or  magic.  And 
hence,  cases  resting  on  the  best  historical  authority, 
have  been  doubted,  and  even  denied  in  later  times. 
Toward  the  close  of  the  last  century,  the  existence  of 
some  of  these  powers  was  discovered,  partly  from  acci- 
dent and  partly  from  research  ;  and  to  the  agency  by 
which  they  were  accomplished,  the  name  of  Animal 
Magnetism  was  applied  by  its  modern  discoverer — 
Mesmer.  This  individual  has  been  represented  in 
works  of  authority  as  an  impostor  and  cheat,  and  as 
owing  his  celebrity  entirely  to  the  silly  credulity  of 
imaginative  people.  Few  persons  who  have  really 
taken  the  trouble  to  enquire  into  the  matter,  would 
now  hazard  such  an  assertion ;  yet,  whether  from 
ignorance  of  the  true  cause  of  the  phenomena  he  wit- 
nessed, or  from  a  desire  to  mystify  the  subject,  it  must 
be  admitted  that  he  both  did  and  said  many  things 
tthieh  justified  suspicion 


ORIGIN    OJb     MESMERISM.  13 

8.  Anton  Mesmer  was  born  in  1734,  at  Mersburg, 
jn  the  shores  of  the  Lake  of  Constance;  and  died  in 
nis  native  place  in  1815,  at  the  advanced  age  of  eighty- 
one.  At  the  age  of  forty-two  he  took  the  degree  of 
Doctor  of  Medicine,  in  the  University  of  Vienna.  He 
appears  to  have  been  a  man  of  an  imaginative  cast  of 
mind  ;  for  the  inaugural  Thesis  he  published  on  ob- 
taining his  degree,  was  "On  the  influence  of  the 
Planets  on  the  Human  Body."  Such  a  mind,  if  likely 
to  fall  into  many  errors,  was  still  open  for  the  recep- 
tion of  any  new  ideas  which  might  present  themselves ; 
and  was  not  prone,  as  men  of  a  more  sceptical  cast,  to 
reject  any  new  truth,  because  it  did  not  harmonize 
with  preconceived  opinions.  The  then  Professor  of 
Astronomy,  at  Vienna,  believed  in  the  efficacy  of  the 
loadstone  as  a  remedy  in  human  disease  ;  and  he  had 
invented  a  peculiar  form  of  magnetized  steel  plates, 
which,  it  is  said,  he  applied  to  the  cure  of  disease  with 
much  success.  Mesmer  obtained  from  the  Astronomer, 
who  was  his  personal  friend,  these  magnets,  and  ap- 
plied them  in  his  own  way ;  and  it  is  said,  with  such 
striking  results,  that  he  communicated  them  to  the 
Astronomer,  who  published  an  account  of  them,  but 
attributed  the  cures  performed  to  the  form  of  the 
plates,  and  merely  represented  Mesmer  as  a  physician 
employed  by  him  to  use  them.  Mesmer,  who  had  dis- 
covered the  peculiar  mode  of  using  them  to  insure  suc- 
cess—that  was,  in  fact,  by  manipulations,  now  called 
Passes — was  indignant  at  this,  and  accused  his  friend 
of  a  violation  of  the  confidence  placed  in  him.  The 
result  was  a  controversy  between  the  parties  ;  each 
accusing   the   oth^r.      Notwithstanding   this   quairel, 


14  SOMN07.ISM    AND    PSYCUEISM* 

Mesmer  proceeded  in  his  own  way,  and  acquired  con- 
siderable popularity.  But,  whether  from  indiscretion 
on  his  part,  or  jealousy  on  the  part  of  others,  he  wag 
opposed  by  the  scientific  authorities  of  Vienna,  and 
was  ultimately  obliged  to  quit  that  city. 

9.  In  the  year  1778,  two  years  after  obtaining  his 
degree,  he  arrived  at  Paris,  whither  his  popularity  ap- 
pears to  have  preceded  him ;  for  we  are  told,  even  by 
his  enemies,  that  upon  his  opening  public  apartments 
in  that  gay  metropolis,  for  the  reception  of  patients, 
they  were  speedily  crowded  by  the  numbers  who  daily 
resorted  to  them,  including  all  classes,  from  the  peer 
to  the  peasant ;  and  that  hundreds  were  ready  to  tes- 
tify to  the  cures  wrought  upon  their  own  persons  by 
the  Great  jyagnetizer.  Now,  making  every  allowance 
for  imagination  or  fancy,  striking  results  must  have 
followed  his  treatment,  or  no  such  enthusiasm  could 
have  been  raised  in  his  behalf.  A  French  physician 
became  a  disciple  of  Mesmer,  and  is  said  speedily  to 
have  acquired  the  best  practice  in  Paris.  So  great,  in 
fact,  was  Mesmer's  success,  that  the  French  Govern- 
ment took  up  the  matter,  and  offered  him  a  large  an- 
nual income,  if  he  would  communicate  his  secret,  and 
they  appear  to  have  thought  so  highly  of  the  use  to 
which  this  new  agent  might  be  applied,  that  they  ac- 
tually proposed  to  guarantee  him  a  large  sum,  even  if 
a  commission  appointed  to  examine  the  subject  should 
make  an  unfavorable  report !  Mesmer,  however,  did 
not  accede  to  the  government  proposal.  After  some 
time,  and  divers  vicissitudes,  the  sum  of  c£14,000  was 
raised  by  his  disciples,  whom  he  had  instructed  in  his 
art,  but  whom  he  did  not  consider  entitled  to  practice 


ORIGIN    OF    MESMERISM.  15 

it  publicly — a  right  which  they  considered  themselves 
to  possess.  Mesmer  then  returned  to  his  native  place  • 
and  this  has  been  represented  as  "  running  away  from 
his  dupes  f*  but  it  appears  that  he  retained  faith  in 
KJs  views,  and  in  his  last  illness  sought  relief  from  his 
?wn  discovery. 

10.  As  Mesmer's  discoveries  arose  out  of  the  use 
of  magnets,  it  is  not  surprising  that  he  should  consider 
Magnetism  as  the  agent  by  which  the  effects  he  wit- 
nessed were  produced.  He  therefore  taught  that  there 
was  a  fluid,  or  gas,  universally  diffused,  which  influenced 
the  earth,  and  planets,  and  all  animated  bodies,  and 
this  fluid  he  called  "  Animal  Magnetism."  He  con- 
sidered that  it  was  capable  of  healing  diseases  of  the 
nerves  immediately,  and  other  diseases  mediately  ;  that 
it  perfected  the  action  of  medicines,  and  tended  to  pro- 
mote favorable  crises  in  disease  ;  and  that  in  Animal 
Magnetism,  nature  presented  a  universal  method  of 
healing  the  diseases,  and  preserving  the  health  of  man- 
kind. The  great  end  of  Mesmer's  proceedings,  ap- 
pears, therefore,  to  have  been  Use — the  application  of 
a  remedy  for  human  suffering  ;  and  he  does  not  appear 
to  have  been  aware  of  the  more  curious,  and  distinctly 
psychical  phenomena  elicited  by  later  enquirers.  To 
the  Marquis  de  Puysegur,  a  French  nobleman,  one  of 
Mesmer's  disciples,  is  attributed  the  discovery  of  the 
faculty  called  Clairvoyance,  in  the  year  1784. 

11.  For  the  sake  of  brevity,  I  omit  describing  Mes- 
mer's mode  of  operating,  save  that  among  other  means 
for  acting  on  his  patients,  he  had  a  sort  of  box,  filled 
with  iron  filings  and  pounded  glass,  placed  in  the  centre 
of  the  room  where  thev  assembled  ;  and  that  they  each 


16  somn3l:sm  and  psycheism. 

were  placed  in  connection  with  it,  by  means  of  polished 
metal  rods,  which  they  held  in  their  hands ;  and  the 
patients  were  further  united  and  connected  by  means 
of  a  chain  encircling  them.  When  the  French  Com- 
missioners applied  to  this  box  the  usual  tests  for  ter* 
restrial  magnetism,  and  found  no  indication  of  ordj- 
nary  magnetic  influence,  they  reported  that  the  whole 
was  the  work  of  imagination,  meaning  fancy;  yet  ad- 
mitting that  cures  were  effected.  This  Commission 
seems  to  have  been  both  a  prejudiced  and  unfair  one. 
The  name  of  Dr.  Franklin  occurs  among  the  Commis- 
sioners, but  he  was  at  the  time  unwell,  and  incapable 
of  attending  to  the  enquiry ;  and  while  the  public  re- 
port condemned  Mesmer  and  his  proceedings,  one  of 
the  Commissioners,  who  had  paid  the  greatest  atten- 
tion to  the  proceedings,  published  a  private  or  individ- 
ual report  favorable  to  him.  But  in  the  year  1826, 
the  French  Government  appointed  a  second  Commis- 
sion, and  their  Report,  published  in  1831,  fully  admits 
the  truth  of  all  the  phenomena  usually  ascribed  to  An- 
imal Magnetism.  However,  our  business  is  not  so 
much  with  the  opinions  of  Mesmer,  or  that  of  his 
friends  or  enemies,  as  with  that  of  the  facts  and  phe- 
nomena associated  with  his  name.  It  was  soon  dis- 
covered that  the  steel  rods  had  but  little  if  any  thing 
to  do  with  the  phenomena  produced  ;  but  the  name  of 
Animal  Magnetism  continued  to  be  used,  and  is  still 
used  on  the  Continent,  and  by  this  name  the  practice 
was  introduced  into  England  a  few  years  ago.  But 
the  English  enquirers  into  this  remarkable  human  fac- 
ulty, finding  that  the  use  of  a  name,  which  implied 
the  existence  of  a  fluid  which  could  not  be  demon- 


PHENOMENA,  LTC.  OF  MESMERISM.  11 

Btrated  to  the  senses,  was  frequently  turned  into  an 
argument  against  facts  which  admitted  of  complete 
demonstration,  adopted  out  of  respect  to  the  memory 
of  Mesmer,  and  to  avoid  the  appearance  of  the  adop- 
tion of  any  theory  of  their  own,  the  name  of  Mesmer- 
ism ;  just  as  Magnetism  is  applied  to  the  properties 
of  the  loadstone,  from  Magnes,  the  ancient  reputed 
discoverer  of  its  powers,  or  Galvanism,  to  the  dis- 
coveries of  Galvani.  We  therefore  proceed  to  notice 
the  facts  and. phenomena  associated  with  the  names  of 
Mesmerism,  or  Animal  Magnetism,  and  shall  endeavor 
to  ascertain  the  Laws  and  Causes  to  which  these  phe- 
nomena may  be  referred. 


PHENOMENA  AND  PHYSIOLOGY  OF 
MESMERISM. 

12.  There  are  several  stages  or  degrees  of  what  is 
called  Mesmeric  Influence  ;  or,  in  other  words,  the 
Mesmeric  or  Psychic  State,  involves  a  variety  of  states, 
having  one  common  character,  but  presenting  widely 
differing  phenomena.  Thus,  there  is  simple  Mesmeric 
Drowsiness  or  Sleep  ;  Coma,  or  more  profound 
sleep  ;  Insensibility  to  Pain  ;  this,  I  believe,  only 
occurs  when  the  Mesmeric  Coma  is  fully  established, 
and  most  of  the  external  senses,  together  with  the 
proper  consciousness  of  external  objects  is  rendered  dor- 
mant ;  and  the  internal  faculty  of  imagination  is  called, 
into  activity,  without  the  guidance  of  true  reason. 
Phantasy,  nr  that  state  in  which   the    Mesmerised 


18  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHE!  SM. 

person  takes  the  mere  suggestions  of  the  mind  of  the 
operator  to  be  realities.  Phreno-Mesmerism,  or  the 
manifestation  of  the  Phrenological  sentiments  and  feel- 
ings, which  is  but  another  form  of  simple  imaginative 
action  ;  Transfer  of  State  and  Feeling,  or  that 
Imaginative  action  which  causes  the  patient  to  feel 
what  is  done  to  the  Mesmeriser,  as  if  it  were  done  to 
him;  Mental  Attraction,  or  apparent  Magnetic 
drawing  of  the  person  of  the  patient,  even  contrary  to 
his  inclination.  Cerebral  Lucidity,*  or  apparent 
illumination  of  the  Brain  ;  with  other  forms  of  what 
is  called  Clairvoyance  ;  but  which  I  think  would  be 
Detter  called  Inner  Vision,  or  Internal,  or  Spirit- 
ual Sight.  Assuming,  therefore,  for  the  present, 
that  these  phenomena  exhibit  a  series  of  great  and  im- 
portant facts,  which  cannot  be  set  aside,  neither  by 
reason  nor  ridicule,  I  proceed  at  once  to  enquire — 
How  we  are  to  understand  them  1  In  what  way  to 
account  for  the  curious  and  interesting  manifestations 
thus  cast  upon  our  notice  1 

13.  We  must  now  therefore  examine  the  medium 
by  which  the  mind  acts  upon  the  bodily  organization — 
namely,  the  Brain  and  Nervous  System.  It  is 
common  to  speak  of  the  nervous  system,  as  consist- 
ing of  the  brain,  the  spinal  marrow,  and  the  nerves 
springing  from  them.  This  arrangement  is  true  enough 
as  far  as  it  goes  ;  but  it  is  not  sufficiently  particular 
for  our  purpose.  For  upon  examining  the  interior  of 
a  human  head,  it  will  be  found  that  every  individual 
has  tvw  distinct  brains.  These  two  brains  are  very 
different  in  size  as  well  as  form  and  couvolutk  n.  The 
upper  and  very  much  larger  portion,  and  which  in  fact 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 
3&REBRO-S  PINAL   AXIS. 


19 


%  the  brain. 

&b  Cerebellum. 

Z,  Medulla  oblongata. 

gj,  Nerves  distributed  to  the  arms. 

it  k,  Great  sciatic  nerve  distributed  to  toe  towv  ' 

J,  Dorsal,  and  n,  Lumber  nerves. 

n,  Plexus  of  cervical  nerves. 

1,  Olfactory  nerve. 

5,  Optic  nerve. 

5,4,  6,  6,  The  third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  »atii  am?*» 
7,  Portio  dura  of  the  seventh  nerve 

6,  Auditory  nerve  acd  par  vagunsj 
fr,  Hypoglossal  nerve. 

58,  Pub  occipital  aerv» 


20 


SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM, 


THE    WERYfcS    OF    THE    BRAIN. 


a  a  a,  Convolutions  oftbe  brain. 

b,  Cerebellum  and  arbor  vitae,  or  tree  of  lifc. 

c,  Medulla  oblongata. 

d,  Upper  part  of  the  spinal  cord. 

e,  Eye. 

f,  Lateral  ventricle. 

0,  Corpus  callosum 
n,  Pineal  gland. 

»,  Quadrigemmal  bodies. 

1 ,  Olfactory  nerve. 

2,  Optic  nerve. 

3,  4,  5,  6,  Third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  l 
6',  5",  Branches  of  the  fifth  nerve, 

7,  Portio  dura  of  the  seventh  nerve. 
7',  Auditory  nerve. 

8,  Glossopharyngeal  nerve. 
8',  Par  vagum. 
8",  Spinal  accessory'  nerve. 

9,  Hypoglossal  nerve. 

10,  Sub-occipital  nerve. 
I|,  12,  First  and  second  e*rrir»l  o**tsq 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


21 


VIEW    OF    THE    TOF    OF    THE    BRA13T. 

A  A 


From  i  art  of  the  brota. 
BB,    3ight  1  VJ  H$  »w»H 


22 


SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 


SIDE    VIEW    OF    THE    BRAIN. 


C — Cerebrum.     D — Cerebellum.    E — Medulla  oblongata 


FRONT    VIEW    OF    A  SECTION    OF    THE    SPINAL    CORD    AND    NERVK3 


A— Spina,  cor  J.     B— Spinal  Nerve.     C— Motor  tram  li  cf  episa]  nerve. 
D — Ganglion  of  j.ostecor  brand:  of  e^iua    iGrv*. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


23 


VIEW    OF    THE    STRUCTURE    OF    TEZ    BRA1W 
A  A 


AB,  AB,  Are  the  right  and  left  hemispheres  of  the  brain. 
FF,  The  cerebellum. 
AA.  The  anterior  lobe. 

e  e.    The  line  which  denotes  the  separation  between  the  anterior  lobe  and  the  middla  lobe 
TJD,  The  middle  lobe. 
BB.   The  posterior  lobe. 

e,  Thepons  Varolii,  which  brings  the  t  vo  sides  of  the  cerebellum  into  communication.     It 
*amed  the  Tuber  annulare, 
i,  The  Medulla  oblongata. 
r  r,  The  Corpora  pyramidalia. 
a  8,  The  Corpora  olivaria. 
1 1,  The  Corpora'restiformia  are  -  j  the  oppos  te  ft'.de  of  Sac  corpora  pyramidalia. 


21 


SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 


1  Firs:  pa.r,  or  olfactory  nenres,  arise  by  tl.iee  origins.  These  unite  and  pro.  eed  forwai-  and 
•reward  in  *  groove  in  the  inferior  sur&ce  of  the  anterior  lobes  of  the  brain,  and  form  a  »w\jll 
»wel!ing  or  ganglion.  From  this  ganglion  a  great  number  of  filaments  proceed  through  the  cribri- 
fcrrs  plate  of  the  ethmoid  bone,  and  are  distributed  upon  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  1  ose.  It  if 
iie  nerve  of  the  sense  of  s.nell. 

2.  Secoml  pair,  or  optic,  arise  principal^-  from  the  anterior  corpora  quadrigemina.  Each  nerTS 
passes  outward  through  the  optic  foramen  Li  the  sphenoid  bone,  and  is  expanded  upon  the  retina. 
It  is  the  nerve  of  the  sense  of  sight. 

3.  Third  pair,  or  motores  oculorum,  originate  from  the  motor  tract  of  the  spinal  cord,  immediately 
•Jler  they  have  passed  through  the  pons  Varolii.  Each  nerve  escapes  through  the  sphenoidal 
fissure,  and  supplies  five  of  the  muscles  within  the  orbit  with  motor  filaments. 

4.  Fourth  pair,  or  trochleares,  originate  from  the  processus  t  cerebello  ad  testes  and  valvuia  of 
f  ieussens.  Each  r.erve  passes  out  from  the  cranium  at  the  sphenoidal  fissure,  and  is  entirely  dis- 
ributed  upon  the  superior  oblique  rt  .acles  of  the  eyeball.     It  is  a  motor  nerve. 

5.  Fifth  pair.  Thete  nerves  issue  from  the  surface  of  the  brain,  near  the  junction  of  the  pons 
Varolii  and  cms  cerebelli,  but  actually  arise  from  the  restiform  oodies.  Each  nerve  escapes  from 
»he  cranium  by  three  separate  openings,  and  is  extensively  distributed  upon  the  orbit  and  other 
parts  of  the  face.     Part  of  the  filameuts  of  this  nerve  are  sensitive,  and  part  motor. 

6.  Sixth  pair  originate  from  the  pyramidal  bodies,  as  they  are  about  to  enter  the  pons  Varolii 
Each  nerve  escapes  through  the  sphenoidal  fissure,  and  is  entirely  distributed  upon  the  external 
rectus  muscle  of  the  eyeball.     It  is  a  motor  nerve. 

7.  Portio  dura  oi  the  seventh  pair  originate  from  the  restiform  bodies.  Each  nerve  is  extensively 
distributed  in  the  muscles  of  the  face  and  external  ear.  It  is  the  motor  nerve  of  the  muscles  of  ex- 
pression of  the  face. 

8.  Portio  mollis  of  the  seventh  pair,  or  auditory  nerves,  (eighth  pair  of  some  authors),  arise  priu- 
cipaJly  from  a  small  grey  swelling  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  restiform  bodies  at  the  side  of  tha 
iburth  ventricle.  Ear!]  nerve  is  distributed  upon  the  internal  ear,  and  is  the  nerve  of  the  sensa 
of  hearing. 

9.  Glossopharyngeal  nerves,  or  upper  division  of  the  eighth  pair,  (ninth  pair  of  some  authors), 
arise  from  the  restiform  bodies  near  the  sulcus  which  separates  them  from  the  olivary,  and  ar« 
distributed  upon  the  pharynx  and  mucous  membrane  at  the  back  part  of  the  tongue.  It  is  a 
sensitive  nerve. 

10.  Par  vaaum,  or  pneurnogastric  nerves,  or  principal  division  of  the  eighth  pair,  (tenth  pair  ot 
some  authors),  originate  in  the  same  line  with,  and  close  upon,  the  glossopharyngeal.  These  nerve* 
are  extensively  distributed  upon  the  larynx,  pharynx,  trachea,  oesophagus,  heart,  lunjs,  and 
Btomach.     Tart  of  the  filaments  of  this  nerve  are  sensitive,  and  part  are  motor. 

11.  Spinal  accessory  nerves,  or  lower  division  of  the  eighth  pair,  (eleventh  pair  of  some  authors), 
originate  from  the  upppr  part  of  the  spinal  cord,  in  the  same  line  with  the  two  preceding  nerves. 
They  enter  the  cranium  by  the  foramen  magnum,  and  pass  out  again  from  the  cranium  through 
the  foramen  lacerum,  along  with  the  c'her  two  divisions  of  the  eighth  pair.  It  is  principally,  if  not 
entirely,  a  motor  nerve. 

12.  Hypoglossal  or  ninth  pair,  (twel.th  pair  of  some  authors).  Each  originates  frcm  the  aulcan 
between  the  pyramidal  ar.d  olivary  bodies,  ani  escapes  from  the  ba9e  of  the  cranium  through  th« 
»nteri>r  condyloid  foramen,  and  is  distributed  «pjn  the  musclec.  of  the  tangue  It  *  the  motot 
Mrre  of  the  trcgne. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


25 


ME    RIGHT    HEMISPHERE    OF    THE    BRAIN. 


MM,  Conventions,  flat — color,  reddish  grey. 

A,  Medulla  oblongata  cut  through  the  medium  lir.<;.     Color— outer  portion,  bluish  wh  to  ;  tTW 
•ortiDn,  reddish  grey, 
p,  Pyramidal  body. 

6,    Pons  Varolii,  or  tuber  ann.ilare.     Color— wiute  outside  ;  inside,  redjish  gr«*y. 
«•.  Tubercula  quadrigemina. 
D,   Crus  cerebri. 

<",  Hie  great  inferior  ganglion— posterior  striated  body  (thalamu »)— color,  bluish  whit«. 
f,  Tlie  great  superior  ganglion — anterior  striated  body — color,  reddish  grey. 
8.  Annular  ganglion. 

A,  Corpus  callosura  —color,  bluish  white. 
K,   Fissura  Silvii. 
L,   The  cerebellum. 

e,  The  arbor  Tits— cslor,  white,  in  the  reddisn  f,iey  ground  of  the  incised  cerebeilam. 
T,  The  tentorum,  separating  the  cerebellura  from  the  b  ain. 
a,   Locua  niger 


26 


SOMXOLISM  ANC  PSYCHEIS21 


THE    CEREBELLUM. 


AA,  Hie  cervbelluin — color,  reddish  grey 

B,  Processus  vermiculares. 

i.    Processus  e  cerebello  ad  testes — semi-transparent — color,  bluish  white. 

»  a   The  poste/ior  corpora  quadrige-nina — color,  bluish  white. 

oc.  The  anterior  corpora  quadngen  ina — color,  bluish  white. 

A  d,  Th*  gitat  inferior  ganglions — pc-iterior  striated  bodies  (tr  ilamua) — color,  bluish  white. 

0  in,  Posterior  part  of  the  great  suyerior  ganglions — anterio:  itriated  bodies— color,  reddish 

t.  Pineal  gland — color,  re^dis    giey 

L  Thxrt  *  nitric'* 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


21 


HORIZONTAL    SECTION    OF    THE    BRAlff. 


l«,  CVnv  .lutiorj,  or  cortical  part  of  the  brain;  eo.or,  reddish  grey 

a.   Fourth  ventricle. 

r,  Posterior  commissure  ;  color,  white. 

»,  Third  ventricle,  ci  separation  between  the  great  ganglions. 

d  d,  Great  inferior  gh.iglions  ;  color.  >>luis!i  white. 

x,  Mi-Idle  commissure. 

A,  Anterior  commissure. 

f  p,  Great  superior  ganglions — striated  ;  color,  reddian  grey. 

t    Anterior  opecing  into  th  i  lateral  ventricles. 


SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 


•SfHE    CEREBELLUM,    ETC. 
M  M 


MM,  Tlie  anterior  part  of  tlie  brait, 

NN,  Posterior  part  of  the  brain. 

ee,  Vertical  sections  of  the  great  inferior  ganglions  ;  color,  bluish  white. 

S  c,  The  black  substance  in  the  centre  of  the  great  inferior  ganglions. 

o  o,  The  cords  of  the  mammary  bodies  which  plunge  into  the  jnteri.-r  of  the  peat  infoner 

t,  Mammary  body  of  the  right  side,  the  left  being  cvt  away. 

r  r,  Optic  nerves. 

D  n,  Olfactor}'  nerves. 

*  «f  Great  superior  °»  lg1  uns  ;  color,  reddish  grey. 


ILLUSTRATIONS.  29 


VARIOUS    PARTS    ABOUT    THE    BASK    OF    THE    BRAIff 


fc,  Medulla  cbloigata. 

tv,  Decussation  or  the  fibres  of  the  pyramidal  bodies,  which  explains  the  influence  of  the  lateral 
Cerebral  parts  of  the  brain  upon  the  opposite  cides  of  the  body.  These  fibres  cross  tne  mesia.  .in* 
»f  the  bo.ly  one  above  another  from  below,  upward,  like  plaited  straw.  Those  vf  the  right  sid« 
come  from  the  left  pyramidal  body,  aad  those  of  the  left  side  from  the  right  pyramidal  body,  ai.d  is 
ft  constant  peculiarity,  modified  only  by  the  number  of  decussating  fibres.  They  are  contracted  in 
their  course  in  passing  the  <  iivary  bodies  a  a,  and  then  diverge  as  seen  in  the  figure. 

m,  Auditory  nerve. 

o.  Facial  nerve.  The  primary  bundle  of  fibres  of  the  cerebellum  a.J  here  seen  to  plunga  hrto  H 
fcatvreen  these  nerves. 

\,  Part  of  the  annular  protut«rance,  or  pens  Varo/ii,  plunging  into  the  retebttfuin. 

«  C«rtf  elar  pviglion. 


30 


SOMJfOLISM    ANL     ?SYCHEISM. 


p,"Mammary  bodit «,  wi.h  the  diverging  cords  to  which  they  are  attached. 

«,  Optic  nerve.     '*  The  Dptic  nerves  decussate  partially,  and  is  the  cause  why  th*  eye  is  frerjneoS.  f 
deranged  on  the  same  side  as  that  on  which  the  brain  is  diseased." — Spurzheim. 

h  h,    "  Nervous  fibres  that  expand  in  the  convolutions  and  contribute  to  their  foraatioa." 
Spurzheim. 

i  i,  CM  factory  nerves. 

t,  £ide  of  the  great  lateral  ventricle. 

34,  35,  30,  37,  38,  The  fibres  which  pass  0  rough  the  great  jerebraJ  ganglions,  and  ultfaMtrij  «B- 
f«nd  into  the  convolutions  of  the  brain. 

DD,   Converging  convolution*. 


KIGOT    HEMISPHERE    OF    THE    BRAIN. 


e,    Internal  structure  of  the  convolutions. 

•.  Fib-es  of  the  convolutions  aggultinated  by  a  very  delicate  neurilema. 

fliis  engraving  represents  the  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain,  in  which  the  convolutions  ar»  cut 
away  to  the  depth  of  about  three  quarters  of  an  inch,  to  show  the  fibres  radiating  from  the  centra 
of  the  outer  surface  of  the  great  inferior  ganghan  into  the  cor  rolutions. 

Tk;  white  spot  in  the  >entre  of  the  figure  represents  tie  outer  surface  of  the  (jreat  interior 
irMijlioa,  over  wbi>:h  tie  £   res  are  drawn  with  great  accuru'  r.*ctn  the  original 


ILLUSTRATION* 


31 


VKRTICAL    SECTION    OF    THE    BRAlfC 


A  fine  view  of  a  vertical  section  of  tlie  train  through  the  convolutions,  the  white  substatti  e,  i 
great  inferior  ganglion,  and  the  cerebellum. 

This  section  is  made  through  the  ganglion  to  the  depth  of  about  the  quarter  of  an  null  f»* 
its  later  surface,  and  through  the  middle  of  the  cerebellar  ganglion. 

0,  Great  inferior  ganglion. 

m,  Fibres  radiating  from  the  surface  of  the  ganglion. 

1,  Cerebellar  ganglion  (corpus  dentatum). 
n,  AiborvitiE. 

.S.nie  of  the  principal  organs  formed  by  the  convolutions  of  the  brain  are  mutbvnd  tUa. 

-..  Arnativene.<s,  or  sey-jal  love. 

a,  Philoprogeiiitiveness,  or  love  of  off.-pring. 

'-.  I'ihabitivene-s,  or  attachment  to  home. 

i,  Concentrr.tiveness,  or  power  of  mental  concentration 

f>,   Approbativene*5,  or  love  of  auprobation. 

&,  Self  sat-se-n. 


82  SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 


T,  Finunfcbs. 

8,  Reverence. 

9,  Benevolence 

10,  Imitation. 

11,  Comparison,  or  power  of  comparing  one  thing  with 
12;  Eventuality,  or  power  of  observing  action. 

13,  Individuality,  or  power  of  observing  existence. 

U,  Language,  or  power  of  learning  or  Using  verbal  sign* 


PERPENDICULAR    SECTION    OF    THE    BRAlN. 


The  fibres  of  the  white  or  medullary  substance  radiate,  as  seen  in  the  figure,  from  the  base  of  th» 
train  into  the  convolutions,  the  folds  of  which  are  plunged  into  the  white  substance,  generilly  fronc 
a  line  to  an  inch  deep. 

e  e,  is  a  section  of  one  of  the  corpora  restiforma. 

c,   Is  a  section  of  one  of  the  corpora  pyramidalia. 

b,  Is  the  pons  Varolii. 

g,  Is  on?  of  the  crura  of  the  brain. 

e    Is  the  cerebellar  ganglion,  surrounded  by  the  arbor  vitie. 

34,  35,  37,  38,  and  II,  Are  the  cerebraJ  Aires,  which,  originating  in  ti.e  medulla  oblongata,  past 
under  the  pom  Varolii,  thrc  Jgh  the  cn.ira,  and  corpora  ttriata,  and  great  inferior  gangliani,  and 
afeiir.alely  expand  intotl  e  c involutions  o^tut  brain. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


33 


41,  48,  Situat.on  of  the  cerebellum  within  the  skull. 

These  crura  contain  cineriterous  matter  in  their  interior,  from  which  addiUcnal  fibres  are  con- 
Snually  sent  off  as  they  advance  to  join  and  strengthen  tl^se  that  have  come  from  below. 

The  cerebral  crura  are  bes'ides  divided  into  two  parts,  viz. :  an  anterior  and  external,  and  a  pos- 
terior and  internal  mass,  the  limiu  of  which  are  marked  by  two  superficial  furrows.  They  are  the 
roots  of  the  primary  b-:r.dle.-i  of  fibres  of  the  brain,  which  diverge  as  they  advance  to  form  the  im- 
mense mass  of  fheheinispheres. 

A  great  portion  of  tbeae  fibres  pass  to  and  through  the  ganglions  in  their  course  to  the  conro- 
iutiona,  from  which  another  set  of  fibres  converge  through  the  white  substance,  and  corpus  callo»na 
to  the  same  ganglions  in  the  centre  of  the  brain. 


RIGHT    HEMISPHERE    OF    THE    BRAIN. 


A,  Front  part  of  the  right  hemisphere  of  the  I 
II,  Great  inferior  ganglion. 
t\  Great  superior  ganglion. 


2» 


84 


SOMNOLISM   AND  PSYCHEISM. 


GANGLIONIC    SYSTEM    OF    VEGETABLE    LIFE. 


ILLUSTRATIONS.  86 


GANGLIONIC    13YSTEM    OF    VEGETATIVE    LIFE. 


A  Tie*  of  the  ganglions  of  the  organs  of  the  hojy,  ami  other  structures,  connected  with  thegrea) 
Sympathetic  nerve,  reduced  from  Manec's  grand  plate,  by  John  Harrison  Curtis,  Esq.,  London. 

AAAA,  Semilunar  eanglion  and  6olar  plexus.  The  ganglion  is  placed  upon  the  base  of  thfi  twe 
pillars  of  the  diaptiragm,  one  being  on  each  side,  and  the  right  generally  larger  than  the  left. 

B,  Small  splanchnic  nerve.  Consists  in  the  union  of  two  or  three  twigs,  furnished  by  the  :*»! 
thoracic  ganglia. 

C,  Great  splanchnic  nerve.  Formed  by  the  junction  of  t  .ree,  four,  five,  or  eight  twigs,  com.'nj 
from  as  many  thoracic  ganglia. 

DDD,  Thoracic  ganglia.  Ten  or  eleven  in  number,  corresponding  with  the  posterior  part  of  tha 
lateral  side  of  the  body  of  the  dorsal  vertebra;  most  of  them  rest  on  the  head  of  the  ribs:  others 
correspond  with  the  level  of  the  intercostal  space. 

E,  Internal  branches.  All  of  them  are  attached  upon  the  body  of  the  vertebra,  and  advance, 
ramifying  and  communicating  with  each  other,  toward  the  medium  line,  where  they  are  distributed 
over  the  (Esophagus  and  the  aorta. 

F,  External  branches.  Two  for  each  ganglion,  very  different  from  each  other;  one  large,  red, 
pulpous,  and  going  to  the  intercostal  nerve;  the  other  much  smaller,  white,  giving  off  no  twigs,  ana 
passing  from  the  intercostal  to  the  ganglion. 

G,  Right  coronary  plexus.  Passes  between  the  pulmonary  artery  and  the  aorta,  and  accompanies 
the  anterior  coronary  artery. 

H,  Left  coronary  plexus.  Passes  before  tlie  left  branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery,  goes  to  the 
posterior  side  of  the  heart,  and  accompanies  the  left  coronary  artery. 

I,  Inferior  cervical  ganglion.     Placed  behind  the  vertebral  artery. 

J,  Inferior  twigs.     Commonly  a  single  branch  communicating  with  the  first  thoracic  ganglion. 

K,  F.xtemal  threads.  Very  slender,  and  communicating  with  the  last  cervical  and  the  last  t»c 
dorsal  pairs  ;  some  filaments  pass  round  tbe  subclavian  artery. 

L,  Internal  twigs.  Very  minute,  and  distributed  to  the  longus  colli,  upon  tlie  anterior  part  of  th# 
6p»ie  ;  some  of  them  descend  to  the  pulmonary  plexus. 

M,  Anterior  threads.     Two  or  three  in  number,  constituting  the  inferior  cardiac  nerves. 

N,  .Middle  cervical  ganglion,  Placed  on  a  level  with  the  body  of  the  fifth  or  eixth  cervical  vei 
tebra",  and  covered  by  the  internal  jugular  vein. 

O,  Interior  twigs.     Three  or  four  in  number,  all  passing  over  the  inferior  cervical  ganglion. 

P,  External  twigs.  Vary  much  in  number,  and  give  off  ramifications  communicating  with  tl.« 
cervical  pairs  and  the  phrenic  nerve. 

Q,  Superior  cervical  ganglion,  Situated  on  the  anterior  and  lateral  part  of  the  second,  *  wd,  and 
fourth  cervical  verteorje. 

R,  Superior  tranches.     Two  in  number,  and  placed  behind  the  internal  carotid  artery. 

S,  Inferior  branch.  Rarely  double,  and  descends  upon  the  great  rectus  muscle  as  for  as  lh« 
niiddie  cervica.  ganglion. 

T,  External  branches.  Their  number  very  variable;  they  communicate  with  the  first,  second, 
*nd  third  cervical  pair. 

U,  Submaxillary  ganglion.  Situated  upon  the  internal  side  of  the  submaxillary  gland,  a  littla 
below  the  styloglossal  muscle. 

V,  Vidian  nerve.     A  branch  springing  from  the  posterior  side  of  the  sphenopalatine  ganglion. 

W,  Naso  palatine  branch  One  of  tha  internal  branches  of  tlie  sphenopalatine  ganglion,  entenn* 
the  nasal  fossa?  by  the  spheno  palatine  foramen. 

X,  Spheno  palatine  ganglion.     Placed  in  the  summit  of  the  zygomatic  fossa. 

Y,  Opthaimic  ganglion.  Situated  in  the  orbit,  and  occupies  the  external  side  o'  the  opti« 
asrre. 

Z,  Audit!  ry  nerve  and  membrane  of  the  tympanum,  containing,  within  its  cavity,  .bur  email 
lone^  »ii  •  the  stapes,  the  incus,  the  malleus,  and  the  os  orbiculare. 


36 


S0MN0L1SM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 


1,  Renal  plexuses.  Furnished  by  threads  coming  from  the  solar  and  coeliac  plexuses,  an<2  fron 
the  last  dorsal  ganglion,  the  first  lumbar,  and  the  small  splanchnic  nerve. 

22,  Lumbar  ganglia.  Commonly  four  or  five;  the  first  corresponds  with  the  body  of  tks  first 
lumbar  vertebra,  the  last  with  the  fifth. 

3,  Internal  branches.  Numerous  ;  go  downward  aid  inward,  to  'is  axta,  where  they  are  lost  ia 
fte  aortic  plexus. 

4,  External  branches.  Two  of  these,  at  least,  arise  from  eaci  gugEatj  tbey  ibftjw  a  courat 
more  or  less  flexuous  toward  tie  anterior  brushes  of  thd  -amc-a.'  2ir?ss. 

6,  Aortic  fiajaj.    Jtraaod  by  threads  frosa  'its  solar  jUroe,  superior 
J^iaact  uc  aarrs  mi  inWsal  £raccb*s»  of  'ta»  ■»*>»?  5*-V?J*- 


87 


1.  Spinal  cord. 

EC,  Spinal  nerves  connected  with  the  right  and  left  arms. 

»G,  Lungs.     HH,  Stomach.     I,  Liver.    J,  Spleen. 

K,  Small  intestines  and  mesentary.     L,  Kidneys.     MM    UMTOa 

KN,  Spinal  nerv-es  connected  with  the  sacrum. 

OPO,  Spinal  nerves  distributed  to  the  lswer  limba 


38  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 

occupies  the  greater  part  of  the  cranium,  or  skull,  is 
called  the  Cerebrum.  The  smaller  portion  is  situated 
in  the  hinder  part  of  the  head,  just  above  the  spinal 
marrow,  and  is^called  the  Cerebellum — a  word  mean- 
ing "  the  little  brain."  The  cerebrum  is  laterally 
divided  into  halves,  called  hemispheres,  and  also  into 
smaller  divisions,  called  lobes.  The  interior  portion  is 
made  up  of  various  cavities,  and  delicately-arranged 
minute  fibres ,  which  commence  in  extremely  minute 
bodies,  called  cortical  glands,  which  every  where  oc- 
cupy the  surface  of  the  Cerebrum  ;  some  of  these  fibres 
afterwards  converge  to  form  the  spinal  marrow..  The 
surface  of  the  cerebrum  is  also  every  where  disposed 
in  wavy  furrows,  not  unlike  the  folds  of  the  intestines. 
But  the  cerebellum,  not  only  diners  in  size  and  situa- 
tion, but  also,  in  exterior  and  interior  form;  for  the 
exterior,  instead  of  the  wavy  folds,  is  arranged  in  what 
are  called  lamina,  or  plates  ;  and  the  interior  has  an  ar- 
borescent or  tree-like  appearance — so  much  so,  that  it 
is  called  arbor  vitas,  the  tree  of  life.  Now,  viewing 
man  as  formed  according  to  the  Infinite  Wisdom  and 
perfect  order  of  a  Divine  Creator,  we  must  expect  to 
find  consummate  order  and  design  within  him,  and  that 
every  organ  of  his  body  should  be  formed  for  some  spe- 
cific and  determinate  Use  ;  for  Use  is  the  great  end 
of  all  the  Creator's  opei  ations.  Hence  we  may  conclude 
that  each  of  these  brains  has  its  own  specific  use,  and 
such  we  find  to  be  the  case ;  and  I  will  endeavor  to 
point  out  such  of  those  uses  as  bear  upon  the  subject 
we  are  now  considering — my  object  at  present  being, 
not  to  present  you  with  a  full  view  of  the  physiology  of 
the  human  brain,  but  onry  so  much  as  is  indispensably 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  31) 

necessary  to  be  known  in  order  to  comprehend  the  phe- 
nomena of  Mesmerism. 

14.  On  the  base,  or  lower  part  of  the  cerebrum,  are 
found  various  nerves,  which  may  be  easily  seen  in  any 
good  anatomical  engraving.  Thus  in  front  are  found 
the  bulbs  of  the  olfactory  nerves,  or  nerves  of  smell, 
which,  to  use  a  familiar  phrase,  grow  out  of  the  base 
of  the  cerebrum,  and  expand  towards  the  forehead,  and 
from  these  bulbs  a  multitude  of  filaments  depend,  which 
are  spread  out  on  the  delicate  membrane  in  the  upper 
part  of  the  nose.  The  optic  nerves,  or  nerves  of  sight, 
also  issue  from  the  under  part  of  the  cerebrum,  then 
approach  each  other  and  form  a  union,  called  the  com- 
missure ;  they  then  separate,  and  proceed  in  the  form 
of  a  round  white  cord  to  the  ball  of  each  eye,  which 
they  enter  behind,  and  then  spread  out  to  form  the 
delicate  nervous  expansion  called  the  retina.  The 
nerves  which  move  the  ejres  and  eyelids,  also  issue  from 
the  base  of  the  cerebrum.  There  are  also  other  nerves 
arising  from  different  portions  of  the  cerebrum ;  but 
except  those  by  which  sensation  is  experienced,  they 
have  no  particular  reference  to  the  phenomena  of  Mes- 
merism. There  are  other  important  nerves  which  arise 
within  the  cranium,  but  not  from  the  cerebrum,  and 
in  respect  to  mesmeric  phenomena,  the  chief  are  the 
seventh  and  eighth  pairs,  which  arise  from  the  cere- 
bellum, and  the  great  sympathetic  nerves,  which,  by 
means  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves,  are  also  connected 
with  the  lesser  brain.  It  is  also  worthy  of  notice,  that 
all  the  nerves  of  the  cerebrum  issue  from  its  base,  thus 
leaving  the  fibrous  and  cortical  portions  free;  and  by 
this  means  the  General  Ser.?orium  is  placed  in  ?*  re- 


iO  SoMNOLISM    vSD  PSYCHEISM. 

gion  above  the  ministering  nerves,  and  thus,  as  it  were, 
midway  between  the  mind  and  outward  nature. 

15.  Now  it  is  essentially  necessary  to  be  known,  in 
order  to  form  any  correct  idea  of  the  physiological 
phenomena  of  Mesmerism,  that  all  the  nerves  of  the 
body,  innumerable  as  they  may  appear  to  be,  arise 
either  directly  or  indirectly  from  the  cerebrum  or  cere- 
bellum ;  but  in  speaking  of  the  origin  of  the  nerves, 
my  remarks  have  no  reference  to  their  development  in 
the  embryo,  but  to  their  situation  and  use  in  the  per- 
fect organism.  And  also,  that  whatever  may  be  the 
parental  character,  so. to  speak,  of  any  nerve,  that 
character  it  preserves  to  its  termination,  however  cir- 
cuitous its  course  may  be,  and  however  its  filament 
may  be  mixed  up  with  filaments  of  nerves  of  another 
order,  so  as  to  form  a  compound  nerve.  This  is  one 
of  those  traits  of  Divine  simplicity  which  are  so  mani 
fest  in  the  Animal  Economy.  Now  all  the  nerves  by 
which  vrefeel  or  act — that  is,  all  what  are  called  the 
voluntary  and  sensory  nerves,  may  be  said  to  arise, 
either  directly  from  this  larger  portion  of  the  entire 
brain,  called  the  cerebrum,  or  indirectly  from  it,  by 
means  of  the  spinal  marrow — which  may  be  considered 
as  a  continuation  of  the  cerebrum  in  the  body.  The 
Spinal  Marrow  is  composed  of  three  distinct  col- 
umns— the  anterior,  or  front  column,  being  formed  of 
what  are  styled  motor  nerves  ;  that  is,  nerves  that  are 
concerned  in  voluntary  motion.  The  posterior  column, 
or  hinder  part,  of  nerves  of  sensation  ;  and  the  middle 
part  of  the  column  contains  the  roots  of  the  nerve?  of 
respiration.  If  the  brain  is  attentively  examined,  por- 
tions of  nervous  fibres  may  be  seen  passing  by  and 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  4l 

through  other  nervous  portions,  and  yet  having  no  con 
nection  with  them.  Thus,  portions  of  the  motor  fibres 
of  the  cerebrum,  may  be  traced  under  the  arch  of  the 
optic  nerves,  and  through  that  appendage  of  the  cere- 
bellum called  the  Bridge  of  Varolius  ;  and  yet  they  are 
uninfluenced  by  the  cerebellum,  but  preserve  their  cere- 
bral character,  and  pass  intact  and  directly  into  the 
fore  part  of  the  spinal  marrow ;  and  portions  of  sen- 
sory fibres  may  be  traced  in  the  same  manner  going  by 
and  through  nervous  substances  of  another  character 
without  losing  their  own  specific  character,  and  then 
passing  into  the  hinder  part  of  the  spinal  column. 
Now  it  is  by  this  mode  of  arrangement,  that  the  true 
character  of  the  nerves  at  their  origin  is  preserved  to 
their  extremities ;  and  so  carefully  is  this  distinction 
preserved,  that  even  if  filaments  of  motor  or  sensory 
nerves  appear  to  be  united  in  one  cord,  yet  each  ordei 
of  filaments  retains  its  original  character.  If  I  raise 
my  arm,  I  do  so  by  muscular  power,  communicated  by 
nerves  having  their  true  origin  in  the  cerebrum  ;  the 
same  may  be  said  of  walking,  or  of  any  other  action 
under  the  control  of  the  will.  All  these  voluntary  and 
external  actions,  are  done  by  and  through  the  medium 
of  the  cerebrum.  Thus  one  great  use  of  the  cerebrum, 
is  to  originate  and  control  the  voluntary  and  sensory 
nerves ;  it  is  thus  the  soul's  medium  for  external 
knowledge  and  voluntary  action — the  great  organ  of 
what  is  called  Animal  Life.  Hence  pressure  on  the 
cerebrum,  by  paralyzing  its  action,  instantly  suspends 
all  sensation  and  capability  of  motion. 

16.  But  the  office  of  the  Cerebellum,  the  smaller, 
and  curiously  organized  portion  of  the  entire  brain  is 


iki  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHE  ISM. 

of  another  kind.  This  is  the  great  organ  or  fountain 
of  organic  life  ;  that  is,  of  the  life  of  the  internal  or- 
gans of  the  body,  and  of  the  involuntary  motions  : 
the  pulsations  of  the  heart ;  the  circulation  of  the 
blood  ;  the  digestive  actions  of  the  stomach  and  bowels ; 
the  action  of  the  reproductive  organs;  in  a  word,  of 
the  thousand  functions  performing  within  us,  and  over 
which  our  will  has  no  control.  All  these  internal 
functions  are  under  the  direction  and  control  of  nerves 
proceeding  directly  or  indirectly  from  the  cerebellum 
or  its  appendages ;  and  this  chiefly,  by  the  aid  of  the 
great  sympathetic  nerves,  and  the  eighth  pair  already 
alluded  to. 

17.  The  eighth  pair  of  cranial  nerves,  called  also 
the  par  vagum,  arises  from  the  cerebellum,  and  its 
connections,  and  gives  oif  numerous  branches  which 
ramify  plentifully  on  the  stomach  and  lungs,  and  in 
fact  are  continued  to  nearly  all  the  viscera.  The  great 
sympathetic  nerves  differ  from  all  the  other  nerves  in 
the  body,  both  in  their  arrangement  and  form :  they 
are  studded  with  small  kernels  called  ganglia,  or 
knots,  into  winch,  and  out  of  which,  numberless  nerv- 
ous twigs  have  their  entrance  and  exit ;  and  in  the 
neck,  by  some  of  these  branches  they  are  connected 
with  the  par  vagum,  and  thus  with  the  cerebellum. 
These  two  pairs  of  important  nerves  may  be  considered 
as  forming  the  trunk  of  the  system  of  the  cerebellum, 
just  as  the  spinal  marrow  forms  the  trunk  of  the  sys- 
tem of  the  cerebrum.  And  to  perfect  the  operation  of 
the  animal  economy,  twigs  from  each  are  united  with 
each  other  ;  and  from  the  great  sympathetic  with  all 
the  nerves  of  tl.c  hody.     Now  the  existence,  and  dis- 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  43 

tinct  functions  of  these  two  brains,  and  the  systems  of 
nerves  depending  on  them,  must  be  carefully  remem- 
bered, if  we  would  understand  the  phenomena  of  Som- 
nolism,  or  ordinary  Mesmerism.  #hd  to  enable  you 
to  comprehend  the  physiology  of  this  wonderful  dis- 
covery, I  will,  as  the  first  step,  point  out  the  principal 
difference  between  a  state  of  wakefulness  and  sleep 
and  the  immediate  physical  cause  of  this  difference. 

18.  During  wakefulness,  both  brains  are  more  or 
less  in  a  state  of  activity ;  but  of  the  action  of  the 
larger  portion — that  is  of  the  cerebrum — we  are  con- 
scious, so  that  our  will  bears  rule  in  the  animal 
economy,  and  the  sensory  nerves  convey  to  the  sen- 
sorium  within  the  cerebrum,  the  various  impressions 
made  by  outward  objects.  But  when  sleep  seals  up 
the  eyelids  the  activity  of  the  cerebrum  ceases,  and 
hence  we  become  insensible  to  outward  things;  and 
then  nature,  or  the  involuntary  portion  of  our  nervous 
centre — that  is  the  Cerebellum,  with  its  derivatives — 
has  the  entire  control  and  direction  of  the  animal  king- 
dom. It  is  well  known  that  "balmy  sleep"  is  "  tired 
nature's  kind  restorer,"  but  it  is  not  so  generally  known, 
that  one  great  reason  for  the  refreshing  and  restorative 
nature  of  sleep  consists  in  the  complete  suspension  of 
the  faculties  of  the  cerebrum,  and  the  operations  of 
nature  being  carried  on  by  the  cerebellum,  without  any 
of  those  manifold  disturbing  causes  which  arise  from 
our  voluntary  and  conscious  activities.  The  cerebrum 
is  composed,  as  I  have  already  observed,  of  innumer- 
able fibres;  originating  in  little  lobules  or  glands.  In 
the  active  state  of  this  portion  of  the  entire  brain,  or  in 
9ther  words,  in  the  wakeful  state,  these  fibres  are  erect. 


44  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 

and,  with  their  lobules  or  glands,  point  towards  the  o*f  - 
cumference  of  the  cranium,  and  there  is  a  capability  of 
moving  them  either  singly,  or  in  greater  or  lesset 
groups  ;  and  herfee  arises  the  power  of  the  will  to  ex- 
ercise such  an  immense  variety  of  muscular  actions, 
and  the  rapidity  and  delicacy  with  which  the  behests 
of  the  will  are  transmitted  by  the  nerves.  In  a  state 
of  inactivity  or  sleep,  the  fibres  collapse,  or  fall  to- 
gether, and  hence  the  capability  of  this  individual  ac- 
tion ceases,  and  a  more  general  or  combined  action 
only  remains  possible.  This  general  or  combined 
acti#n  is  similar  to  the  true  natural  action  of  the  cere, 
bellum,  which,  from  its  peculiar  organization,  is  in- 
capable of  the  individual  action  which  distinguishes 
the  cerebrum.  But  with  the  cessation  of  individual 
or  separate  action  in  the  cerebrum,  all  ordinary  sen- 
sation ceases  ;  and  hence  the  unconsciousness  of  a  state 
of  sound  sleep. 

19.  Another  physical  cause  for  the  state  of  in- 
sensibility in  sleep  is,  that  by  the  collapse,  or  falling 
together  of  the  fibres  of  the  cerebrum,  the  blood  is  pre- 
vented from  entering  the -finer  channels  of  the  brain, 
but  courses  along  the  pia  mater,  or  membrane  invest- 
ing the  brain.  This  is  occasioned  by  a  law  generally 
overlooked,  namely,  that  the  brain  has  an  automatic 
movement  of  its  own,  synchronous,  not  with  the  action 
of  the  heart,  but  with  the  respiration  of  the  lungs  ; 
and  on  this  account  the  brain  has  the  control  of  the 
blood  circulating  within  its  substance,  independant  of 
the  action  of  the  heart.  Hence  the  vertebral  ami 
carotid  arteries  which  supply  the  blood  to  the  brain, 
have  a  peculiar  erratic  course,  more  so  than  any  other 


PHENOMENA,   ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  45 

arterial  trunks ;  and  every  mechanical  precaution  is 
taken  to  impede  the  propulsive  force  of  the  heart,  so 
that  the  brain  may  imbibe  or  reject  the  vital  and  stim- 
ulating fluid  just  according  to  the  state  induced  upon 
it.  Whatever,  therefore,  induces  a  change  in  the  state 
of  the  fibres  and  cortical  glands  of  the  cerebrum, 
changes  the  state  of  its  automatic  action,  and  thence 
produces  either  somnolency  or  wakefulness. 

20.  Now  let  us  apply  these  anatomical  and  physio- 
logical facts  to  the  illustration  of  mesmeric  phenomena, 
and  I  think  we  shall  be  able  to  understand  something 
of  the  mode  by  which  they  are  produced,  that  we  shall 
find  ourselves  in  possession  of  the  true  key  to  unlock 
these  generally  considered  mysteries.  But  first  I  will 
briefly  describe  the  most  usual  manifestations. 

21.  The  simplest  visible  state  is  that  called  mes- 
meric sleep.  This  I  have  induced  both  by  the  ordinary 
method,  and  also  by  Dr.  Braid's  mode  of  making  the 
patient  steadfastly  gaze  upon  some  small  fixed  object, 
called  by  him  Hypnotizing ;  but  I  consider  the  mes- 
meric mode  the  best  way,  where  the  patient  is  suscept- 
ible of  its  influence,  and  by  it,  and,  as  far  as  my  pre- 
sent experience  goes,  by  it  only,  can  the  higher 
developments  be  produced.  Whatever  the  mode  of 
operating  employed,  the  primary  effect  is  on  the  state 
of  the  cerebrum,  which,  by  modif}Ting  the  circulation 
of  its  blood,  collapses  in  various  degrees,  and  thus  as- 
sumes the  somnolent  state.  But  in  using  the  ordinary 
mesmeric  mode,  I  altogether  discard  those  formal  and 
mystic  modes  of  proceeding  sometimes  practised  and 
recommended  by  some  writers  on  Animal  Magnetism. 
I  have  reason  to  believe,  as  I  shall  point  out  in  the 


*(j  SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 

sequel,  that  mind  is  the  grand  agent  in  all  really 
mesmeric  phenomena,  and  the  manipulations  are  merely 
so  many  means  of  fixing  mental  action.  My  usual 
mode  of  proceeding  is  simply  to  place  the  subjects  or 
patients  in  a  sitting  posture,  and  take  both  their  hands 
in  my  left  hand,  and  then  place  my  right  hand  on  their 
head.  Where  there  is  any  degree  of  mesmeric  sen- 
sibility, this  is  the  best  and  most  gentle  mode  of  pro- 
ceeding ;  but  in  more  difficult  cases,  the  desired  effect 
may  be  sooner  produced  by  gentle  passes,  made  from 
the  crown  of  the  head  over  the  forehead  downwards, 
or,  in  some  cases,  by  making  the  passes  over  the  entire 
head  backicards.  In  this  simple  mesmeric  sleep,  just 
as  in  ordinary  sleep,  we  find  different  degrees  of  sound- 
ness. Some  persons  merely  feel  a  little  drowsiness ; 
others  find  it  impossible  to  open  the  eyelids,  and  yet 
are  perfectly  conscious,  and,  in  other  respects,  awake. 
Other  persons  of  greater  susceptibility,  either  the  result 
of  continued  experiment,  or  peculiar  nervous  tempera- 
ment, proceed  quickly  into  a  sound  sleep,  or,  as  I  pro- 
pose to  call  it,  Somnolism.  This  state  may  quickly 
pass  into  one  having  all  the  characteristics  of  som- 
nambulism^ or  what  is  commonly  called  sleep-walking  ; 
in  fact,  I  can  see  no  difference  between  this  state  an/1 
natural  somnambulism,  except  that  the  latter  is  the 
result  of  spontaneous  natural  causes,  while  the  former 
is  the  direct  result  of  human  agency.  I  have  also 
"eason  to  believe  that  natural  somnambulists  will  make 
i he  best  mesmeric  subjects. 

22.  The  induction  of  the  true  somnolent  state,  is  all 
that  is  required  to  produce  the  curious  and  manifold 
phenomena  of  mesmerism3  save  and  except  the  higher 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  47 

stages  of  cerebral  lucidity  and  clairvoyance.  Some  of 
these  states  I  will  now  proceed  to  notice ;  and,  first, 
Insensibility  to  Light  and  Pain.  If  the  eye  of  a 
patient  in  the  somnolent  state  is  examined,  it  will  te 
generally  found  drawn  upwards  and  inwards,  and  this, 
perhaps,  in  proportion  to  the  complete  development  of 
the  state  ;  but  it  will  exhibit  little,  if  any,  susceptibility 
to  the  influence  of  light.  In  fact,  I  have  satisfied  my- 
self, by  repeated  and  careful  observation,  that  all  ex- 
ternal vision  is  withdrawn.  There  is  the  perfect  visual 
organ,  but  the  party  sees  not.  There  is  also  the 
healthy  skin,  with  its  infinitude  of  nervous  papillae, 
but  it  exhibits  no  sign  of  feeling.  The  most  sensitive 
parts  may  be  pinched,  or  pricked  with  needles  or  pins, 
but  the  patient  will  exhibit  no  consciousness  of  suffer- 
ing, or,  in  fact,  of  any  kind  of  feeling,  but  will  continue 
to  converse  with  the  mesmeriser  or  the  experimenter 
without  noticing  in  the  least  degree  the  apparently 
painful  experiment  to  which  he  is  being  subjected. 
Nay,  more,  it  is  an  undoubted  fact,  that  the  most 
severe  surgical  operations  have  been  performed,  both 
in  this  country  and  on  the  continent,  without  the  patient 
evincing  any  susceptibility.  I  will  mention  one  only, 
recorded  in  the  French  medical  journals,  and  also  in 
the  Penny  Cyclopaedia,  under,  the  article  Somnambu- 
lism. An  elderly  French  lady  was  the  subject  of  cancer 
in  the  breast.  Her  physician  was  a  practiser  of  mes- 
merism, and  he  had  frequently  employed  that  agency, 
m  conjunction  with  other  means,  to  a.bate,  and,  if 
possible,  cure  that  dreadful  malady.  But  he  found 
that  although  he  could  always  allay  pain,  and  put  the 
!ady  into  a  state  of  complete  ease  by  mesmerising  her, 


48  SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 

yet  the  disease  continued  its  ravages,  and  the  only  hope 
was  in  an  operation — that  is,  by  amputating  the  breast. 
When  this  only  alternative  was  proposed  to  her  in  the 
wakeful  or  normal  state,  it  produced  the  most  intense 
anguish  and  apprehensi-en ;  but  in  the  abnormal  mes- 
meric state,  she  would  calmly  discuss  the  matter  with 
her  physician  and  friends.  At  last  the  operation  was 
determined  on,  and  Jules  Colquet,  the  eminent  Parisian 
surgeon,  was  chosen  for  the  operator.  The  surgeon, 
in  his  narrative  of  the  case,  says  that  he  found  the  ladj 
seated  in  a  chair,  her  eyes  closed  as  if  in  sleep,  yet 
conversing  with  her  physician,  who  had,  in  fact,  put 
her  into  the  mesmeric  or  somnolent  state  some  short 
time  before.  She  spoke  calmly  of  the  intended  pro- 
ceedings, removed  her  own  dress  to  expose  her  bosom 
to  the  surgeon's  knife,  and  during  the  operation,  which 
lasted  about  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  she  conversed  cheer- 
fully both  with  the  surgeon  and  physician  who  was 
seated  by  her,  and  supported  the  arm  on  the  diseased 
side,  without  exhibiting  the  slightest  pain  or  conscious- 
ness of  what  was  going  on.  The  lady  was  then  put  to 
bed  and  carefully  attended  to,  without  being  awaked 
from  the  mesmeric  state.  On  the  next  day  but  one 
the  first  dressings  were  removed — usually  a  most  pain- 
ful trial  to  the  patient — the  wound  dressed  again,  and 
then,  after  the  lapse  of  some  hours,  she  was  arouse*^ 
having  been  kept  for  more  than  two  days  in  the  som- 
nolent state.  When  awakened  she  was  unconscious 
of  all  that  had  transpired  since  she  was  put  into  the 
sleep,  more  than  two  days  before !  When  she  found 
that  her  breast  had  been  removed,  that  the  wound  had 
agftin  been  dressed,  and  found  herself  surrounded  by 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  49 

anxious  and  sympathising  relatives,  her  feelings  may 
be  better  imagined  than  described !  But  I  will  here 
make  a  cautionary  remark.  It  must  not.  be  supposed 
that  because  persons  in  a  state  of  somnolency  feel  no 
pain,  that,  therefore,  they  will  be  unconscious  of  any 
injury  inflicted  on  them  in  that  state  when  they  return 
to  the  normal  condition ;  on  the  contrary,  when  they 
are  aroused  they  will  feel  the  effect  of  any  injury  just 
in  proportion  to  its  severity.  Common  humanity  there- 
fore requires,  that  experiments  made  to  ascertain  the 
state  of  the  sensibility,  should  be  such  as  only  to  oc- 
casion transient  pain. 

23.  Catalepsy,  or  rigidity  of  the  muscles  ;  Phan- 
tasy ;  Transfer  of  Feeling  from  the  operator  to 
the  patient ;  and  what  is  called  Magnetic  Attrac- 
tion.— These  are  all  interesting  displays  of  mesmeric, 
or  rather  psychic  states,  and  will  be  better  understood 
when  we  come  to  the  consideration  of  the  psychological 
part  of  our  subject.  The  facility  with  which  these 
states  can  be  produced  depends  entirely  on  the  sus- 
ceptibility of  the  subject.  In  the  majority  of  cases, 
manipulations,  actual  contact,  or  audibly  spoken  words 
are  necessary  to  produce  the  desired  result ;  but  in 
some  cases  the  mere  volition  of  the  operator  is  sufficient. 
Thus  in  case  of  catalepsy,  by  merely  drawing  the  hand 
over  the  patient's  arm,  that  is,  in  mesmeric  language, 
mak  ing  passes  from  the  shoulder  towards  the  tips  of 
the  fingers,  the  muscles  of  the  arms  may  be  rendered 
perfectly  rigid,  so  that  by  no  effort  of  the  patient  could 
they  be  put  down,  nor  could  a  stranger  render  them  flex- 
ible ;  by  the  application  of  great  force  the  shoulder  joint 
may  be  moved,  but  as  soon  as  the  pressure  is  removed 
3 


00  S0MN0LISM    AND    PS  Y  CUE  ISM. 

the  arm  will  instantly  resume  the  position  in  which  it 
had  been  placed  by  the  operator.  If  the  hand  of  a 
person  of  about  the  same  physical  strength  as  the 
mesmerised  subject  is  placed  in  the  hand  of  the  subject, 
and  the  fingers  made  to  clasp  it,  it  will  be  found  almost 
impossible  to  withdraw  it,  so  tight  will  be  the  grasp ; 
and  yet,  notwithstanding  this  great  apparent  exertion 
of  muscular  power,  the  mesmerised  subjects  will  con- 
tinue to  converse  on  various  topics,  and  evince  neither 
mental  nor  physical  consciousness  of  the  power  they 
are  displaying  !  This  peculiar  characteristic  of  the 
somnolent  state  can  be  most  beneficially  employed  as  a 
curative  agent  in  the  restoration  to  strength  of  palsied 
or  weakened  limbs,  provided  the  somnolent  state  can 
be  induced  on  the  diseased  person. 

24.  But  the  phenomena  above  alluded  to  are  among 
the  simplest  of  these  displays.  By  a  single  touch  the 
mouth  of  the  patient  may  be  closed,  so  instantaneously, 
as  to  leave  a  word  half  pronounced ;  and  by  a  single 
pass,  as  speedily  set  at  liberty.  Even  the  nostrils  may, 
by  a  single  pinch,  be  partially  closed,  so  as  instantly 
to  produce  the  nasal  twang  common  upon  stoppage  of 
the  nasal  passages  by  cold  or  otherwise ;  and  then  as 
quickly,  by  a  wave  of  the  hand,  be  restored  to  perfect 
freedom.  Some  patients,  while  putting  themselves  into 
various  postures,  may  be  instantly  rendered  immovable 
and  statue-like  in  any  posture.  If  a  rod,  or  any  other 
suitable  article,  be  put  into  the  hand,  and  the  hand 
closed  by  the  operator,  by  no  effort  can  the  patient  let 
it  go,  although  he  may  be  so  far  demesmerised  as  to  be 
fully  conscious  of  his  state  and  of  all  around  him.  On 
the  other  hand,  by  a  mere  pass  of  the  hand  of  the  mes- 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  51 

tseriser,  or  it  may  be,  by  a  motion  of  his  will,  the 
mesmerised  party  finds  it  equally  impossible  to  retain 
his  hold.  By  a  single  pass  or  pressure,  an  individual 
may  be  rooted,  as  it  were,  by  his  feet  to  the  floor,  fixed 
immovable  in  his  chair,  or  his  hands  fixed  firmly  to  a 
wall  or  bench,  or  any  other  object.  Some  of  these  ex- 
periments are  highly  interesting  and  amusing,  but  the 
most  wonderful, -and  apparently  inexplicable,  are  but 
varied  manifestations  of  the  simplest  forms  of  catalepsy 
and  are,  as  we  shall  see,  explainable  Jby  the  same  sim 
pie  law  which  also  explains  other  phenomena. 

25.  Phantasy. — By  this  is  meant  such  an  action 
on  the  mind  of  the  mesmerised  party,  that  the  mere 
suggestions  of  the  mesmeriser — sometimes  not  audibh 
expressed,  but  merely  silently  willed — are  taken  for 
realities.  Thus  a  handkerchief  may  be  thrown  inta 
the  lap  and  silently  willed  to  be  a  rabbit,  a  guinea-pig, 
a  child,  or  even  any  disagreeable  object,  as  a  snake,  or 
other  reptile ;  e  nd  upon  directing  the  attention  to  the 
object,  as  by  simply  asking  "  What  have  }rou  got  in 
your  lap?"  the  action  and  language  soon  evince  that 
it  is  considered  to  be  just  the  object  the  operator  wills 
it  to  be  :  nor  can  the  subject  conceive  it  to  be  anything 
else,  or  divest  himself  of  the  Phantasy.  The  effects 
of  this  mere  imaginative  action  will  generally  be  more 
strikingly  displayed  b}^  touching  such  of  the  phreno- 
logical organs  as  have  an  affinity  with  the  sentiment  or 
feeling  intended  to  be  produced.  Thus  philoprogeni- 
tiveness  and  benevolence,  in  case  an  infant  or  an  in- 
offensive animal  is  suggested ;  and  cautiousness,  in 
suggesting  the  idea  of  a  snake,  or  other  disagreeable 
objects .      Again,  an  empty  glass  may  be  offered,  a.n& 


52  S0MN0LISM  AND  PSYCHEiSM. 

by  stating  it  to  contain  strong  hot  brandy  and  water, 
the  same  coughing  and  difficulty  of  swallow  ing  will  be 
produced  as  would  follow  the  attempt  to  swallow  such 
a  liquid  by  a  child,  or  a  person  wholly  unaccustomed  to 
it.  Then,  by  taking  the  glass  away  and  immediately 
presenting  it  again,  saying  that  it  contains  cold  water, 
but  care  must  be  taken  lest  it  cause  toothache,  im- 
mediately all  the  effects  of  an  intense  cold  draught  will 
be  manifested.  Once  a  mesmeric  subject  asked  me  for 
a  particular  drink ;  I  presented  an  empty  glass  and 
silently  willed  it  to  be  castor  oil.  No  sooner  had  the 
glass  touched  the  lips  than  it  was  dashed  away  and 
broken  to  atoms,  at  the  same  time  the  party  exclaim- 
ing, "  Ah,  it's  so  nasty !"  Many  more  striking  and 
interesting  experiments  may  be  exhibited,  but  they  may 
be  all  referred  to  the  same  primary  causes. 

26.  Transfer  of  State. — By  this  is  meant  that 
remarkable  phenomena  exhibited  by  good  mesmeric 
subjects,  in  feeling  whatever  may  be  done  to  the  mes- 
meriser  as  done  to  themselves.  This  I  have  witnessed 
so  often,  and  under  such  a  variety  of  circumstances  as 
to  admit  of  no  doubt  as  to  its  correctness.  Thus,  on 
one  occasion,  while  lecturing,  one  of  the  audience,  to 
test  the  matter,  came  unawares  and  pricked  my  leg. 
I  looked  round  for  a  moment  with  surprise  and  some 
little  indignation,  but  by  the  time  I  comprehended  the 
motive  of  the  seeming  offender,  the  mesmerised  subject; 
felt  it,  and  screamed  out  loudly  "  that  some  one  had 
pricked  her  leg,"  and  pointing  at  the  same  time  to  the 
corresponding  portion  on  her  own  leg  which  had  been 
pricked  in  mine.  At  the  same  time  a  pin  might  have 
been  thrust  really  into  her  leg  without  her  evir.cing 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OE  MESMERISM.  bi} 

any  consciousness.  I  have  got  individuals  to  tread  on 
my  toes,  pull  my  hair,  or  pinch  different  parts  of  the 
body,  and  I  have  invariably  found  that  with  this  sub- 
ject not  many  seconds  would  elapse  before  she  wculd 
3omplain  of  exactly  similar  treatment,  and  refer  the 
pain  to  the  exact  corresponding  part ;  and  sometimes  I 
have  experienced  considerable  difficulty  in  dispelling 
the  illusion.  These  undoubted  facts  shed  much  light 
wi  what  may  be  called  the  highly  spiritualized,  or  purely 
eaental  origin  of  some  diseases,  and  will  afford  some  clue 
ko  the  apparently  miraculous  manner  in  which  some 
peculiar  diseases  have  been  removed. 

27.  Phreno-Mesmerism. — This  is  the  name  usually 
applied  to  the  manifestation  of  the  phrenological  senti- 
aients  and  feelings  of  a  mesmeric  subject.  It  has  been 
sonsidered  as  affording  a  triumph  to  the  materializing 
class  of  phrenologists,  and  hence  has  been  decried  and 
attempted  to  be  set  aside  by  the  metaphysical  spirit- 
ualists. Possibly  both  classes  of  reasoners  may.be 
wrong.  Certainly  the  mere  placing  of  the  finger  of 
the  operator  on  any  part  of  the  head,  and  it  being  fol- 
lowed by  the  manifestation  of  a  sentiment  or  feeling 
proper  to  the  organ  said  to  be  situated  in  the  part 
touched,  is  no  proof  that  such  organ  is  really  there ; 
because  the  idea  of  the  feeling  or  sentiment  is  in  the 
operator's  mind,  and  the  fact  may  be  accounted  for  by 
mesmeric  imaginative  action  and  the  transfer  of  feelings. 
Again,  anatomy  reveals  nothing  within  the  cranium 
analogous  to  the  arbitrary  divisions  marked  on  phreno- 
logical busts.  Besides,  when  we  touch  the  head,  the 
skull  prevents  us  acting  directly  on  the  brain ;  we  only 


54  SOMXOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 

excite  the  extremities  of  those  cranial  nerves  whish 
ramify  in  the  scalp.  On  the  other  hand,  the  oppor- 
tunities I  have  had  for  acquiring  experience  enables  me 
positively  tc  assert,  that  contact  with  at  least  certain 
parts  of  the  head  will  produce  those  feelings  phreno- 
logically  ascribed  to  those  particular  portions.  Thus, 
for  example,  I  have  seen  alimentiveness  powerfully  ex- 
cited in  a  mesmerised  subject  who,  when  left  alone  for 
a  little  while,  accidentally  reclined,  so  that  a  portion 
of  the  head  where  "  alimentiveness"  is  situated  was 
brought  into  contact  with  the  edge  of  a  table.  Again, 
I  have  seen  philoprogenitiveness  excited  by  a  subject 
accidentally  rubbing  the  occipital  portion  of  the  head 
against  a  high-backed  chair — not  to  mention  other  in- 
stances. But  this  apparent  proof  of  the  material  view 
of  the  question  is  not  the  whole  one ;  for  I  have  seen 
some  of  the  phrenological  sentiments  excited  without 
touching  the  head !  Thus,  upon  simply  taking  the 
hand  and  silently  thinking  reverently  of  the  Deity,  the 
mesmerised  subject  has  fallen  down  on  the  knees  and 
manifested  the  most  profound  veneration.  On  other 
occasions,  when  more  than  one  subject  had  been  mes- 
merised, on  touching  the  "  organs"  on  the  head  of 
one,  the  other,  without  any  touch  or  connection,  or 
any  knowledge  of  any  action,  would  instantly  manifest 
the  sentiment.  Upon  the  whole,  I  think  the  real  evi- 
dence afforded  by  mesmerism  is  favorable  to  phrenology ; 
but  I  am  far  from  thinking  that  the  evidence  properly 
interpreted  necessarily  leads  to  that  sort  of  materialism 
which  is,  by  many  persons,  associated  with  phrenological 
doctrines ,     The  brair  is  undoubtedly  the  mind's  organ  j 


OF  MESMERISM.  55 

this  position  remains,  whether  we  suppose  the  mind 
uses  the  whole  brain  in  every  mental  action  or  only  an 
appropriate  part. 

28.  It  has  been  said  that  phreno-mesmerism  is  the 
result  of  electrical  acticn,  and  that,  in  fact,  all  mes- 
meric action  is  but  an  electrical  phenomena — the  oper- 
ator being  positively  electrified,  the  patient  negatively 
so.  For  this,  I  believe,  there  is  no  evidence  whatever, 
It  is  true  that  electricity  may  be  made  to  stimulate. 
certain  vital  actions,  but  it  is  admitted  by  the  best 
physiologists  that  there  is  no  identity  between  them. 
I  have  carefully  experimented,  and  cannot  find  that 
there  is  any  perceptible  difference  between  the  electrical 
and  magnetic  state  of  the  mesmerised  subject  and  that 
of  the  operator,  where,  according  to  electrical  theory, 
the  greatest  difference  ought  to  be  manifested.  What- 
ever name  or  cause  may  be  assigned  to  mesmeric  agency 
it  is  undoubtedly  a  vital  one.  It  is  true,  as  I  observed 
at  the  outset,  that  within  the  living  organism  are  col- 
lated all  the  powers  of  the  universe ;  but  they  are  in 
the  organism  in  its  own  peculiar  manner.  The  mag- 
netism and  chemistry,  the  attractions  and  repulsions, 
and  the  other  internal  operations  of  the  body,  are  nol 
the  magnetism  and  chemistry,  the  attractions  and  re- 
pulsions of  outward  nature  ;  but  they  are  living  actions , 
analogous  to  outward  cosmical  and  terrestrial  activities, 
but  perfectly  distinct  from  them,  and  existing  in  a  de- 
gree altogether  above  them.  They  are,  in  fact,  the 
antitypes  of  which  the  types  are  found  in  outward 
nature. 

29.  With  the  exception  of  Cerebral  Lttcidityj 
magnetic  vision,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  and  Olaje. 


56  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHE1SM. 

yoyANCE,  the  foregoing  classification  may  be  male  to 
embrace  all  ordinary  mesmeric  or  somnolent  pheno- 
mena ;  lucid  and  clairvoyant  manifestations  are  so 
evidently  of  a  psychical  nature,  that  before  noticing 
them,  let  us  apply  ourselves  to  the  solution  of  the 
'physiology  of  the  states  we  have  briefly  described. 

30.  We  have  seen  that  within  the  skull  there  are, 
in  reality,  two  distinct  brains,  although  popularly  called 
the  brain  ;  that  there  are  two  distinct  systems  of  nerves 
connected  with  these  two.  brains;  that  by  the  larger 
brain,  or  cerebrum,  and  its  nerves,  we  feel,  think,  and 
act ;  and  that  it  is  thus  the  soul's  medium  of  conscious 
intercourse  with  the  external  world.  That  by  the 
cerebellum,  or  little  brain  and  its  nerves,  are  directed 
and  controlled  all  the  involuntary  and  vegetative  func- 
tions of  our  bodies  ;  that  the  brain  has  an  automatic, 
or  in  other  words,  an  independent  action  of  its  own, 
by  which  it  has  the  control  of  the  blood  circulating 
within  it,  and  that  in  the  state  of  sleep  the  fibres  of 
the  cerebrum  collapse  or  fall  together,  and  the  blood  is 
prevented  entering  the  finer  channels  and  thereby 
stimulating  the  brain  to  activity,  and  that  from  this 
state  of  collapse  and  altered  circulation  of  the  blood 
arises  the  unconsciousness  and  insensibility  of  profound 
sleep. 

31.  The  true  mesmeric  action  is,  as  will  be  presently 
shown,  primarily  and  fundamentally  of  a  psychological 
character,  but  it  induces  a  peculiar  physiological  state. 
The  direct  effect  of  the  passes,  or  whatever  means 
are  employed,  is  to  produce  a  somnolent  state  of  the 
brain,  in  some  respects  resembling  common  sleep,  but 
in  others  widely  differing  from  it.      When   the  true 


PHENOMENA,  ETC..  OF  MESMERISM.  57 

snesmeric,  or  rather  psychical,  relation  between  the 
operator  and  his  subject  is  established,  the  cerebrum  of 
the  latter  is  rendered  dormant,  the  cerebellum  and  its 
dependencies  alone  preserving  their  normal  state.  In 
the  first  place  all  consciousness  appears  to  be  sus- 
pended, but  by  degrees  an  inner  consciousness,  similar 
to  the  consciousness  of  dreaming  is  awakened,  and  from 
this  inner  consciousness  the  somnolized  person  speaks 
and  acts.  The  optic  nerves  and  the  other  nerves  of 
the  eye  belong  to  the  cerebrum,  hence  one  of  the  first 
visible  effects  of  mesmeric  influence  is  an  inability  to 
open  the  eyelids,  although  the  eyeball  may  be  as  yet 
uninfluenced  ;  but  as  the  somnolent  state  continues,  the 
optic  nerves,  or  nerves  of  sight  contract,  and  the  ball 
of  the  eye  rolls  upwards,  and  all  power  and  perception 
of  vision  is  withdrawn.  Then,  as  observed,  with  the  in- 
crease of  the  somnolency  the  fountain-head  of  all  the  other 
sensory  nerves  becomes  dormant,  and  that  of  the  motory 
too,  in  a  partial  degree.  The  sensor  ium  being  by  this 
change  in  the  internal  state  of  the  cerebrum  removed 
from  its  connection  with  the  external  world,  all  sense 
of  pain  is  of  course  absent ;  and  hence  the  seeming 
mysterious  phenomenon  of  a  person  conversing  with  an- 
other and  yet  being  unconscious  of  feeling,  is  at  once 
solved  by  a  knowledge  of  the  simple  fact,  that  the  state, 
of  the  cerebrum  is  changed  by  the  somnolent  influence, 
and  an  inner  consciousness  awakened. 

32.  Another  physiological  stater,  arising  also  prim- 
arily from  a  psychological  cause,  is  now  perceptible ; 
for  although  the  operator  and  his  subject  or  subjects 
are  of  course  two  or  more  persons,  yet,  in  respect  to 
cerebral  action,  or  more  distinctly,  in  respect  to  ths 
3* 


58  S0MN0LISM  AND  FSYCHEISM. 

action  of  the  cerebrum ;  they  arc  one.  In  each  person 
the  cerebellum  and  its  system  of  nerves  is  in  the  normal 
condition,  but  there  is  only  one  normal  and  active  cere- 
brum, namely,  that  of  the  mesmeriser  or  operator. 
Hence,  however  many  may  be  the  subjects,  if  they  have 
all  been  mesmerised  by  the  same  operator,  and  are  all 
fully  susceptible  of  the  somnolent  influence,  they  are  all 
so  intimately,  interiorly  blended  with  him,  that  the  ab- 
sence of  their  own  external  cerebral  consciousness  causes 
them  to  feel  his  cerebral  consciousness  as  their  own. 
Here  then  we  discover  the  physiological  reason  for  the 
strange  and  anomalous  states  exhibited.  Thus,  in  ca3es 
of  phantasy,  the  idea  existing  externally  in  the  cere- 
brum of  the  mesmeriser  is,  when  willed  by  him,  per- 
ceived by  the  subject  as  if  existing  in  his  or  her  cere- 
brum. So  also  in  cases  of  catalepsy,  the  somnolency 
of  the  subject's  cerebrum  permits  those  muscles  which 
are  influenced  by  the  voluntary  nerves  to  be  actuated 
by  the  will  of  the  operator's  cerebrum.  Hence,  in  the 
best  cases,  the  silent  operation  of  the  mesmeriser's  will, 
that  is,  of  the  power  of  his  cerebrum,  is  sufficient  to 
throw  the  subject  into  a  state  of  statue-like  rigidity  ; 
but  generally  it  requires  the  aid  of  passes,  which  de- 
termine more  efficaciously  the  downward  nervous  cur- 
rents. Hence,  also,  any  pain  inflicted  on  the  operator, 
which,  of  course,  he  feels  in  the  sensorium  connected 
with  the  origin  of  the  sensory  nerves,  is  felt  as  if  the 
impression  was  made  on  the  cerebrum  of  the  subject. 

33.  But  we  shall  generally  find  that  although  sight 
and  feeling  are  withdrawn  the  subject  retains  a  perfect 
capability  of  Hearing.  He  may  sometimes  be  so  in- 
drawn as  to  evince  no  perception  of  sound,  similar,  in 


PHENOMENA,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  59 

this  respect,  to  a  person  engaged  in  deep  thought ;  but 
by  patiently  persevering  until  the  attention  is  excited, 
or  the  desire  of  the  operator  is  felt,  we  shall  generally 
be  able  to  demoDstrate  that  the  sense  of  hearing  re- 
mains. Yet  by  no  means  can  sight  and  feeling  be 
restored  except  by  partially  or  wholly  demesmerising 
the  subject.  This  fact  may  be  thought  to  militate 
against  the  theory  of  cerebral  action  I  am  endeavoring 
to  inculcate,  but  it  in  reality  tends  to  confirm  it — for 
the  nerve  of  hearing,  which  is  a  portion  of  the  seventh 
pair  of  cranial  nerves,  has  its  roots  in  what  is  called 
the  corpora  restiformia,  which  is  directly  connected 
with  the  cerebellum.  Sight  is  solely  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  cerebrum,  and  we  can  exert  that  faculty  or 
not  at  our  pleasure,  but  we  cannot  help  hearing  if  we 
are  within  the  influence  of  sound,  that  is,  by  no  organ- 
ism connected  with  our  ears  can  we  shut  out  sound. 
The  ears  of  a  person  in  deep  sleep  are  still  open  to  the 
modulations  of  the  air,  on  which  sound  depends  ;  but 
the  dormant  state  of  the  cerebrum  prevents  the  con- 
scious perception  of  sound,  unless  it  is  so  loud  as  to 
produce  that  state  of  partial  wakefulness  on  which 
dreaming  depends ;  and  the  mesmerised  party  is  con- 
scious of  sound,  because,  as  we  have  already  observed, 
the  state  of  inner  consciousness  is  in  some  respects 
analogous  to  the  state  of  dreaming.  But  hearing  is  not 
so  entirely  dependent  on  the  cerebellum  as  the  internal 
involuntary  functions,  but  is  somewhat  of  a  mixed 
nature,  like  the  functions  of  respiration. 

34.  Here  then  is  the  whole  physiology  of  the  mes 
meric  or  somnolent  state,  and  the  reason  for  the  seem- 
ing mystery  and  contrariety  to  our  usual  feelings  and 


60  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 

common  experience.  The  cerebrum  cf  the  subject  ia 
dormant,  the  cerebellum  continues  its  normal  state 
of  activity,  while,  from  the  peculiar  relationship  of  the 
parties,  to  which  we  shall  presently  allude,  the  cere- 
brum of  the  operator  dominates  over  his  subject,  and 
is,  in  a  degree,  the  common  cerebrum  of  both  parties. 


PHILOSOPHY  AND  PSYCHOLOGY  OF 
MESMERISM. 

35.  Clairvoyance. — Of  all  the  extraordinary  phe. 
nomena  of  mesmerism,  none  appear  to  stagger  tins 
general  belief  more  than  the  different  manifestations  of 
clairvoyance  or  magnetic  vision,  or  to  speak  more  truly 
and  plainly,  the  internal  sight  of  the  soul.  To  say 
that  a  person  can  see  without  the  aid  of  the  eye,  or  by 
any  other  means  than  light  entering  into  the  pupil  of 
the  eye  in  the  usual  manner,  seems  like  uttering  an 
absurdity,  or  declaring  the  possibility  of  an  impossi- 
bility. Yet,  strange  as  it  may  sound  to  those  who 
have  had  no  experience  in  this  matter,  there  is  no 
mesmeric  phenomena  more  capable  of  positive  proof 
provided  the  necessary  care  be  taken  in  making  the 
experiment,  and  the  subject  be  placed  in  proper  cir- 
cumstances; and  I  trust  this  evening  to  afford  you 
ocular  demonstration  of  the  fact. 

36.  But  before  proceeding  further,  I  wish  that  it  may 
be  distinctly  impressed  upon  you,  that  when  we  care- 
fully examine   the  eye  and  the   brain,   we  shall  see 


PHILOSOPHY,    fcrCV    OF  MESMERISM.  61 

reason   xc    acknowledge  that   an  internal  function  of 
sight,  altnougli  remarkable  and  unexpected,  and  gen- 
erally unknown,  is  not  more  difficult  to  explain  than 
ordinary  vision  when  thoroughly  examined.     On  re- 
ferring to  the  human  eye,  or  any  correct  representation 
of  it,  we  shall  find  that  it  is  a  hollow  ball,  filled  with 
three  different  kinds  of  fluids  arranged  in  a  determinate 
order.     In  front  is  a  horny  transparent  lens,  some- 
thing like  a  small  watch-glass,  to  admit  the  rays  of 
light ;   behind  it  is  the  small  chamber  containing  the 
aqueous  humor,  then  a  hole,  called  the  pupil,  through 
the  iris,  to  allow  the  rays  of  light  from  different  objects 
to  pass  into  the  interior  parts  of  the  eye,  first  passing 
through  the  crystalline  lens  and  through  the  vitreous 
humor,  and  then  forming  an  image  of  the  objects  on 
the  delicate  membrane  called  the  retina,  which  is  spread 
out  on  the  back  of  the  eye.     Now  up  to  this  point  or- 
dinary vision  may  be  explained  on  optical  principles, 
and  the  eye  shown  to  be  the  most  perfect  optical  in- 
strument.    But  the  moment  we  attempt  to  pass  beyond 
the  retina,  science  is  at  fault ;  no  natural  philosopher 
has  been  able  to  explain  how  the  optic  nerve  conveys 
the  image  to  the  brain  ;  we  know  that  the  mind  is  con- 
scious of  the  images  formed  on  the  retina — or,  in  more 
familiar  language,  of  the  things  seen  by  the  eyes — but 
in  what  manner  an  opaque  nervous  cord,  differing  in  no 
essential  particulars  from  other  nervous  cords,  conveys 
that  impression  to  the  mind,  we  are  entirely  ignorant, 
Ordinary  sight  has,  therefore,  a  psychological  bash — 
and  this  is  admitted  by  the  best  physiologists. 

37.   Clairvoyance,  or  internal  sight,  assumes  the  same 
Basis  necessary  to  perfect  ordinary  vision ;  but  a?-  *t 


62  SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 

acts  independently  of  the  external  visual  organs,  so  ii 
is  not  trammelled  by  those  natural  laws  to  which  they 
are  necessarily  subject.  Thus  by  this  internal  sight, 
and  by  light  issuing  from  within,  and  not  from  without, 
as  in  common  sight,  things  may  be  seen  which  are  out 
of  the  range  of  natural  sight,  and  altogether  above  its 
nature.  For  instance,  our  physical  sight  can  see  the 
remote  starry  orbs,  placed  at  the  distance  of  perhaps 
thousands  of  millions  of  miles,  because  the  undulations 
of  light  proceeding  from  them  in  straight  lines  can  im- 
oinge,  or  strike  upon  the  retina  of  our  eyes.  Yet  the 
ntervention  of  any  opaque  body  immediately  shuts  out 
the  vision  of-  the  object,  even  if  placed  in  close  con- 
nection with  us ;  so  that  if  our  penetrating  powers  of 
sight  were  immensely  increased,  whether  naturally  or 
artificially,  still  the  rotundity  and  opacity  of  the  earth 
would  prevent  us  seeing  beyond  a  certain  distance.  But 
opacity  is  no  barrier  to  internal  sight ;  objects  to  which 
the  mind  is  directed,  either  designedly  or  spontaneously, 
will  be  equally  visible  through  doors  and  walls  as  if 
placed  directly  before  the  face.  Nay,  to  the  higher 
stages  of  clairvoyance  there  seems,  comparatively  speak- 
ing, no  bounds  ;  for  whether  the  object  sought  be  in 
the  same  house,  or  town,  or  country,  or  across  the 
broad  Atlantic,  or  still  remoter  Pacific  oceans,  it  ap- 
pears to  be  found  and  seen  with  equal  facility,  and  to 
be  equally  near  to  the  internal  perception  of  the  truly 
clairvoyant  individual.  The  human  body  is  seen  as 
clearly,  and  its  living  actions  described  as  plainly,  as 
if  the  external  and  internal  parts  were  alike  as  trans- 
parent as  glass,  and  this  also,  without  any  bodily  con 
aection,  such  as  by  bringing  the  clairvoyant  and  tltf 


PHILOSOPHY,  ETC,  OF   MESMERISM.  63 

person  to  be  described  together,  but,  as  I  have  proved, 
when  more  than  one  hundred  miles  have  intervened  be- 
tween them. 

38.  But  we  have  now  arrived  at  a  stage  in  our  en- 
quiry where  physiology  ceases  to  afford  us  light ;  for 
physiology  as  such,  that  is,  as  the  science  of  our  outward 
Jiving  organism,  knows  nothing  of  an  internal  or  super- 
solar  light,  or  of  sight  that  can  penetrate  alike  through 
opaque  and  transparent  substances.  To  ps3Tcho"iogy 
and  philosophy  we  must  therefore  look  for  aid  in  our 
endeavor  to  investigate  the  apparent  mystery  of  this 
interesting  subject.  And  I  regret  that  the  abstruse 
nature  of  the  enquiry,  the  little  that  is  generally  known 
in  this  branch  of  knowledge,  together  with  the  neces- 
sary brevity  of  popular  lectures,  will  only  permit  me  to 
present  you  with  a  sketch  of  the  views  opened  to  the 
eye  of  rational  research. 

39.  It  is  usual  to  represent  man  as  composed  of 
mind  and  matter — Soul  and  body.  This  is  correct. 
And  as  we  find  that  the  body  is  not  a  mere  simple  -un- 
compounded  substance,  but  a  collection  of  innumerable 
parts  and  organs,  so,  by  parity  of  reasoning,  we  may 
conclude,  that  the  mind,  or  spiritual  body,  as  the  pa- 
rent and  director  of  the  natural  body,  cannot  be  that 
simple  entity,  that  abstract  nothingness  so  generally 
represented  by  metaphysical  writers ;  but  rather  that, 
the  controller  of  the  animal  organism  must  be  itself  or- 
ganized according  to  the  laws  of  its  own  peculiar  nature, 
and  capable  of  manifesting  those  laws,  under  certain 
circumstances,  through  those  organs  of  the  body,  that 
is,  of  the  brain  and  nervous  system,  which  are  united 
with  it  by  the  law  of  correspondent  activity  and  con- 


\yi  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSWHEISM. 

nection.  St.  Paul,  therefore,  spoke  the  language  of 
the  profoundest  philosophy,  when  he  declared  that  there 
were  spiritual  bodies  and  natural  bodies,  and  that  the 
natural  body  was  the  first  in  its  development,  anJ 
afterwards  the  spiritual  body;  and  when,  on  another 
occasion,  he  defined  the  entire  human  organism,  &g  exist 
ing  here,  to  be  a  compound  of  "  spirit,  soul,  and  body,' 
in  this  respect  giving  his  apostolic  sanction  to  the  doc 
trine  of  the  ancient  sages  of  Greece.  The  two  first 
terms  used  by  the  apostle  to  describe  the  spiritual  part 
of  man,  are,  in  the  original  Greek,  Pneuma  and 
Psyche,  and  the  latter  term,  which  in  our  version  of 
the  Scriptures  is,  in  the  passage  alluded  to,  translated 
soul,  is,  by  the  Latin  writers'  called  the  "  animus  ;" 
and  this  term  is  always  used  to  signify  the  animal  soul, 
as  distinguished  from  the  pneuma,  or  more  interior 
human  spirit. 

40.  And  here  it  will  be  as  well  to  observe,  tLit  nc 
truth  is  more  evident  to  sound  rational  enquiry  than 
that  the  Creator  has  given  to  every  department  of  his 
"  handy-work"  a  specific  character,  and  that  from  the 
Creator  to  the  lowest  inert  matter,  there  exists  a  chain 
of  degrees — and  that  each  object  of  creation  can  only 
be  well  and  truly  studied  by  viewing  it  in  its  own  de- 
gree, and  comparing  it  with  objects  in  another  degree. 
But  if  we  confound  this  distinction  of  degrees,  we  shall 
never  arrive  at  a  clear  and  satisfactory  solution  of  many 
important  facts.  Each  degree  will  be  found  to  have 
laws  or  properties  peculiar  to  itself,  and  if  we  transcend 
the  degree  of  the  object  of  our  enquiry,  by  applying  to 
it  qualities  or  properties  belonging  to  another  distinct 
iegree,  we  may  expect  nothing  but  confusion  and  inys 


PHILOSOPHY,  ETC.,   OF  MESMERISM.  65 

tery.  Now,  in  our  investigation  of  the  nature  of  man, 
it  is  especially  necessary  not  to  overlook  these  dis- 
tinctions. By  no  process  can  matter  be  sublimed  into 
spirit ;  and  spirit  having,  according  to  apostolic  author- 
ity, and  the  general  law  of  analogy  observable  in  all 
things,  its  distinctions  and  degrees,  the  properties  of 
the  lower  degree  may  not  apply  to 'a  higher  one.  True 
philosophy  also  teaches,  that  if  spirit  in  no  degree  is 
material,  that  is,  does  not  possess  those  properties  which 
we  apply  to  ponderable  matter,  still  it  is  no  less  on 
that  account  a  truly  real  and  substantial  existence — - 
more  truly  substantial  than  the  granite  rock,  because; 
more  unchanging  and  more  enduring. 

41.  Now  viewing  the  spiritual  organism  of  man  as 
consisting  of  two  distinct  degrees,  called  by  the  apostle 
the  pneuma  and  psyche,  or  as  possessing  both  a  spirit- 
ual internal  and  external,  together  forming,  while  in 
this  mortal  life,  the  common  internal  of  the  natural 
organism,  the  Psyche  or  Animus  will  be  the  connect- 
ing medium  between  the  pure  human  spirit  and  the 
nervous  system  of  the  natural  body.  By  its  connec- 
tion, through  correspondence  and  vital  affinity,  with  the 
body,  it  is  placed  in  relation  with  outward  nature,  while 
as  a  spiritual  entity,  and  by  its  indissoluble  union  Tvith 
the  higher  spiritual  principle,  it  has,  at  the  same  time, 
immediate  connection  with  the  spirit-world  ;  and  be- 
cause it  is  a  subject  of  the  laws,  and  possesses  the 
properties  of  that  world  which  have  nothing  in  common 
with  time,  space,  or  common  matter,  it  displays  those 
powers  which  can  be  explained  by  no  merely  natural 
or  physiological  knowledge,  but  which  receive  an  easy, 
rational^  and  satisfactory  solution,  when  man  is  r^allj 


Qft  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 

seen  to  be  that  which  revelation,  philosophy,  and  the 
statements  of  true  clairvoyants  declare  that  he  is — 
namely,  a  compound  of  spiritual  and  natural  organisms 
intimately  united  by  the  exactest  correspondence  or 
analogy.  And  that  altb  xigli  the  lower,  or  natural  or- 
ganism, cannot  act  without  the  continued  influence  of^ 
the  higher,  or  spiritual  organism,  nor  can  the  spiritual 
organism  be  developed  without  the  medium  of  the 
natural  one,  yet,  when  developed,  the  higher  organism 
can  act,  not  only  by  and  through  the  lower  organism, 
"but  even  independently  and  when  disconnected  from  it. 

42.  It  is  this  psyche  or  animus — the  external  of  the 
spirit — that,  from  all  that  I  have  yet  learned  on  the  sub- 
ject, I  take  to  be  the  true  seat  of  what  is  called  mes- 
meric influence  ;  the  psyche,  or  animal  soul  of  the 
operator,  influences  the  same  external  spiritual  organic 
principle  in  the  subject,  and  from  the  animus  the  in- 
fluence flows  downwards,  to  use  analogous  natural 
term?,  and  thence  affects  the  brain  and  nervous  system 
— and  hence  I  propose  to  call  that  part  of  mesmerism, 
which  manifests  mental  and  super-sensual  phenomena, 
by  the  name  of  Psycheism,  or,  the  Science  of  the  Soul 
as  manifested  in  nature — while  to  the  lower  and  phy&- 
ical  stages,  the  name  of  Somnolism  may  be  applied, 
as  indicative  of  its  sleep-like  and  dream-like  character. 

4o.  Now  as  to  the  psychological  change  induced  by 
mesmerism. — It  is  a  common  law  of  our  being  that 
conscious  perception  should  have  its  apparent  seat  in 
the  ultimate,  or  extreme,  of  every  development.  Thus, 
although  it  is  a  well-established  fact,  that  the  sensorium 
Ls  within  the  brain,  and  that  if  a  sensory  nerve  be  di- 
vided, no  sensation  will  be  experienced,  yet  it  is  as  ^ell 


PHILOSOPHY,   ETC.,   OF    MESMERISM.  67 

known  that  if  we  prick  a  finger,  the  pain  will  be  felt 
where  the  wound  is  inflicted.     So,  notwithstanding  the 
body  feels  and  acts  by  and  through  the  spirit,  our  con- 
scious  perception,  in  the  usual  normal  condition,  is 
confined  to  the  bodily  organization — because,  while  in 
the  present  state,  the  body  is  the  ultimate  development 
of  the  spirit.     When  death  severs  the  connection  be- 
tween mind  and  body,  the  ultimate  of  the  immortal 
man  is  the  psyche  or  animus,  and  to  it  is  transferred 
all  conscious  perceptions  and  sensations.     It  is  from 
this  differing  seat  of  the  conscious  perceptions  that,  in 
our  ordinary  state,  we  have  no  sensational  knowledge 
of  the  spirit-world,  or  of  its  laws.     But  psycheism,  or 
the  higher  stage  of  mesmerism,  may  aptly  be  compared 
to  partial  death — for  it  is  a  closing  of  the  common  ex- 
ternal of  our  being,  a  transfer  of  the  sensational  per- 
ceptions from  the  ultimate  of  the  body  to  the  ultimate 
of  the  spirit — and  thence,  and  simply  from  this  trans- 
fer of  ultimates,  arises  an  awakening  of  the  conscious 
sensational  perception  of  the  inner  man,  or  spirit.     All 
those  apparently  miraculous  powers  which  we  sometimes 
see  displayed  by  good  mesmeric  subjects,  are,  in  fact, 
but  the  result  of  the  psyche  or  animus  being  so  far  set 
free  from  the  bodily  ultimate  as  to  enable  the  spiritual 
body  to  act  nearly,  if  not  quite  independently  of  the 
sensual  organs,  and  by  perception,  and  in  light  from  an 
vnner  world ;  but  the  connection  of  the  mind  and  body 
is  yet  sufficient  to  enable  the  soul's  sight  and  feeling  tc 
be  manifested  to  our  physical  senses  by  and  through 
the  natural  organization  of  a  clairvoyant. 

44.  From  this  transfer  of  consciousness  and  sensa- 
tional perception,  we  may  also  account  for  the  anoma 


68  SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCHEISM. 

lous,  and  often  incongruous,  statements  and  descriptions 
of  clairvoyants.  They  forget  much  of  that  mode  of 
speaking  of  things  "which  is  common  to  our  external 
condition,  but  which,  in  itself,  is  often  purely  arbitrary 
and  conventional ;  and  they  speak  according  to  their 
newly-awakened  and  uninformed  consciousness.  As 
we  have  to  learn  to  talk,  and  even  to  see,  or  rather 
rightly  to  interpret  what  the  eye  reveals,  so  do  clair- 
voyants require  a  continued  exercise  of  their  peculiar 
power  to  familiarize  them  with  its  use. 

45.  We  now  proceed  to  explain  the  manner  by  which 
the  influence  of  the  operator  is  brought  to  bear  upon 
his  subject,  and  that  sometimes  too,  at  considerable  dis- 
tance ;  for  I  have  found  a  subject  affected  by  my  in 
fluence,  even  when  mesmerising  another  party,  at  the 
distance  of  a  mile — but  this  may  be  considered  an  un- 
usual case.  It  is  a  law  of  nature  that  all  things  should 
be  surrounded  by  an  effluvium  or  sphere  which  emanates 
from  them,  and  is  always  of  the  peculiar  nature  or 
quality  of  the  body  from  which  it  emanates ;  and  these 
effluvia  are  regulated  by  certain  definite  laws.  Thu? 
the  fragrance  which  surrounds  the  rose  is  the  effluvium; 
or  sphere  emanating  from  it ;  and  this  effluvium,  by 
being  dissolved  in  the  surrounding  serial  atmosphere, 
becomes  sensible  to  our  organs  of  smell,  and  an  idea  of 
its  existence  and  quality  is  then  transmitted  to  our 
general  sensorium.  But  there  are  effluvia  of  which  we 
should  for  ever  remain  ignorant,  did  we  not  perceive 
them  rationally  by  theii  effects.  Thus  around  mag- 
netized and  unmagnetized  iron,  an  effluvium  or  sphere 
prevails,  of  which,  in  their  separated  state  our  senses 
give  us  no  evidence.     But  we  have  only  to  bring  them 


PHILOSOPHY.   ETC.,    IF  MESMERISM.  69 

into  such  proximity  as  to  be  within  the  influence  of  the 
law  regulating  the  activity  of  their  respective  spheres, 
and  their  existence  may  then  be  instantly  perceived  in 
their  mutual  attraction  and  coherence.  For  it  has  been 
shown  by  one  of  the  profoundest  of  philosophers,  that 
these  single  spheres  have  the  property  of  blending  into 
one  larger  sphere,  and  that  hence  arises  what  is  called 
magnetic  attraction. 

46.  One  of  the  results  of  the  higher  stages  of  clair- 
voyance, or  independent  internal  sight,  is  the  know- 
ledge, that  an  effluvium  or  sphere  analogous  to  what  we 
have  alluded  to,  surrounds  the  mental  organism  or  spirit- 
ual body  of  every  individual.  Following  the  general 
law  of  nature,  this  sphere  possesses  the  peculiar  mental 
qualities  of  the  organism  from  which  it  emanates.  And 
hence  arises  the  repugnance  which  is  felt  to  the  society 
of  some  persons,  and  the  pleasure  which  is  experienced 
in  the  company  of  others  ;  and  to  it  are  referable  all 
the  remarkable  instances  of  Sympathy  and  Antip- 
athy so  frequently  observed.  But  in  these  ordinary 
cases  the  active  cause  is  latent  or  hidden ;  yet  in  the 
higher  mesmeric,  or  rather  psychic  state,  it  often  be- 
comes sufficiently  obvious  even  to  our  physical  senses, 
for  we  may  here  see  that,  similar  to  what  we  have  said 
of  terrestrial  magnetism,  there  is  an  actual  blending  of 
spheres.  The  magnet  induces  its  state  on  the  iron,  so 
that  it  becomes  magnetical ;  and  the  operator  induces  his 
sphere  on  his  patient  or  subject,  so  that  the  subject  be- 
comes, as  it  were,  one  bcdy  with  himself — the  egoism 
or  self-consciousness  of  the  one  being  blended  with  the 
vgoism  or  self-consciousness  of  the  other. 

47.  Here  then  is  the  psychological  cause  for  the 


70  SOMNOLISM  AN.}  PSYCIIEISM. 

physiological  state  already  mentioned.  The  change 
of  state  induced  upon  the  animus  of  the  subject  is  the 
primary  cause  of  the  change  in  the  condition  of  the 
cerebrum ;  the  collapse  of  the  cerebrum  closes  the  ex- 
ternal consciousness,  while  the  union  of  the  spheres 
emanating  from  the  animus  of  both  operator  and  sub- 
ject, causes  the  latter  to  perceive,  as  in  himself,  what 
really  is  felt  in  the  active  cerebrum  of  the  former. 
And  this  change  of  state  affords,  I  believe,  the  true 
psychological  solution  of  the  whole  apparent  mystery 
of  catalepsy,  phantasy,  and  many  other  curious  mes- 
meric phenomena.  As  regards  phreno-mesmerism,  the 
arousing  into  activity  one  particular  organ  of  the  brain, 
as  it  would  be  called  by  one  class  of  phrenologists,  or 
faculty  of  the  mind,  as  it  would  perhaps  be  called  by 
another  class,  without  the  guidance,  control,  or  balanc- 
ing powers  of  the  other  organs  or  faculties,  is  a  sufficient 
reason  for  the  effects  we  see  displayed. 

48.  But  although  the  transfer  of  consciousness,  and 
the  blending  of  the  spheres  of  the  operator  and  subject, 
will  account  for  many  curious  and  otherwise  inexpli- 
cable phenomena,  it  does  not  account  for  independent 
clairvoyance.  Nor  do  I  think  it  can  be  reasonably  ac- 
counted for,  but  on  the  grounds  already  intimated — 
namely,  the  awakening  of  the  sensational  consciousness 
of  the  external  of  the  immortal  body,  that  is,  of  the 
psyche  or  animus.  For  I  reject  as  purely  hypothetical, 
altogether  without  evidence,  and  contrary  to  established 
laws,  that  theory  which  would  attempt  to  solve  it  by 
an  imaginary  change  of  poles,  or  the  transfer  of  life 
from  the  animal  to  the  organic  system.  According  to 
the  latter  theory,  the  lowest  mollusk  ought  tc  possess  a 


PHILOSOPHY,   ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  71 

more  extended  and  spiritual  perception  than  man  ;  and 
man  is  to  be  spiritually  elevated  by  being  degraded  to 
B:  level  with  the  lowest  forms  of  organic  life. 

49.   The  great  difficulty  hitherto  experienced  in  ar- 
riving at  a  knowledge  of  the  reai  cause  of  clairvoyance, 
has  arisen  from  two  causes ;  first,  the  different  states 
of  the  clairvoyant  subject  and  the  observer,  and  the  im- 
possibility of  their  having  the  same  sensational  per- 
ceptions— so   that    the    observer   cannot   sensationally 
perceive  how  the  clairvoyant  sees,  nor  can  the  clair- 
voyant   adequately   describe    his    perceptions.     And, 
secondly,  the  necessit}^  for  the  opening  of  a  higher  de- 
gree of  consciousness  in  order  fully  to  comprehend  the 
lower.     For  instance,  an  animal  can  have  no  proper 
idea  of  its   own  nature  ;  but  man  is  enabled,  by  the 
possession  of  an  internal  spiritual  principle,  rationally 
and  sensationally  to  investigate  his  animal  body.     And 
the  mere  induction  of  the  faculty  of  clairvoyance  does 
not  enable  the  possessor  of  that  faculty  sensationally 
to "  perceive  the  cause  of  that  phenomenon;    this  re- 
quires the  awakening  of  a  higher  consciousness,  though 
still  probably  belonging  to  the  psyche,  or  animal  r^art 
of  the  spiritual  organism.     But  in  this  respect  I  have 
an  advantage  over  most  enquirers,  in  possessing  a  sub- 
ject, who  in  addition  to  the  ordinary  induced  mesmeric 
extasis  or  trance,  has  repeatedly  been  in  states  of  spon- 
taneous extasis  of  a  far  higher  and  more  interior  char- 
acter, and  the  reality  of  these  states  has  been  proved 
to  me  by  the  most  convincing  evidence.     One  striking 
diffeience  between  these  two  states  is,  that  whatever 
occurs  to,  or  is  seen  by,  the  ordinary  mesmeric  extatic, 
is  completely  forgotten,  or,  more  correctly,  is  altogether 


72  SOMNOLISM  AND  PSYCIIEISM. 

unknown  upon  the  return  to  the  normal  state,  while 
the  true  extatic,  or  subject  of  the  Superior  state,  aa 
Davis,  the  American  clairvoyant  styles  it,  upon  return- 
in  or  to  the  normal  condition,  recollects  all  that  has  been 
manifested  to  him  in  the  abnormal  condition.  This 
singular  fact  receives  an  easy  solution,  if  we  admit  the 
psychological  doctrine,  that  man'  possesses  both  an  in- 
ternal and  external  memory.  In  the  normal  wakeful 
condition  these  memories  act  as  a  one,  and  hence  we 
are  only  conscious  of  one  memory.  In  the  abnormal 
state  of  induced  mesmerism,  the  internal  memory  is 
active  while  the  external  is  dormant ;  and  from  this 
want  of  connection  between  the  two  memories  arises 
the  oblivion  invariably  witnessed.  But  in  the  superwt 
state,  or  true  spiritual  extasis,  both  memories  are  ac- 
tive, but  from  a  more  interior  degree  than  in  ordinary 
life ;  and  hence  the  extatic  subject  can  recollect  in  the 
normal  state  what  has  transpired  in  the  spontaneous 
abnormal  state,  and,  at  the  same  time,  possesses  a  full 
consciousness  of  the  great  difference  between  these 
states,  so  as  not  to  confound  the  perceptions  and  know- 
ledges of  one  with  those  of  the  other. 

50.  A  remarkable  revealment  of  this  superior  state, 
or  spontaneous  extasis  is,  that  every  man  while  in  this 
mortal  life,  is  by  the  very  laws  of  his  being,  and  hence, 
of  course,  by  the  design  of  the  Creator,  intimately, 
though  unconsciously,  associated  with  the  spirit-world, 
and  this  especially  by  what  may  be  styled  Ms  associate 
spirit,  and  that  in  the  memory  of  this  associated  spirit 
is,  as  it  were,  a  reflection  of  all  that  exists  in  the  me- 
mory of  the  associated  man  ;  so  that  distinctly  to  per- 
ceive the  associated  spirit  is  tantamount  to  a  full  per- 


PHILOSOPHY,  ETC.,  OF   MESMERISM.  73 

ception  of  the  character,  both  mentally  and  physically, 
of  the  associated  man,  as  well  as  of  the  information 
possessed  by  him.  There  is  also  a  reflection  pf  the 
natural  organism  of  the  man,  both  externally  and  in- 
ternally, and  also  of  the  scenery  perceivable  by  his 
natural  senses. 

51.  A  true  clairvoyant  is  one  who,  by  the  opening 
of  the  internal  consciousness,  has  a  sensational  per- 
ception of  the  objects  of  an  inner  or  spirit-world,  that 
is,  provided  the  clairvoyance  exists  in  a  sufficient  de- 
gree. If  the  attention  of  the  clairvoyant  is  directed  to 
any  individual,  the  effect  is  to  bring  the  clairvoyant 
into  a  sensational  connection  with  the  associate  spirit 
of  the  person  sought  for ;  and  from  the  normal  recol- 
lections being  treasured  up  in  the  internal  memory, 
while  the  external  memory,  and  all  immediately  con- 
nected with  it  is  quiescent,  this  associate  spirit  appears 
to  the  clairvoyant  to  be  the  real  individual  sought — - 
and  from  this  source,  and  the  reflection  of  memory 
above  alluded  to,  is  often  obtained  much  of  the  inform- 
ation the  clairvoyant  is  able  to  communicate  respecting 
persons  and  scenery.  But  as  man,  even  in  this  mortal 
life,  is  internally  a  true  spiritual  organism,  and  as  such 
is,  as  we  have  already  observed,  a  subject  of  the  laws 
of  the  spirit-world,  a  clairvoyant  may  have  a  sensa- 
tional perception  of  this  spiritual  organism,  and  thence 
of  the  natural  organism,  and  thus  of  the  entire  man 
himself,  however  distant  they  may  be  from  each  other 
as  to  their  natural  bodies.  Yet  still,  it  is  probable,  that 
this  direct  connection  is  mediately  effected  by  the  aid 
of  the  associate  spirit.  Here  then  is  the  simple  and 
rational,  though  deeply  interesting  solution  of  the  un- 
4 


74  SOMNOLISM  AND  PS  i'CHEISM. 

doubted  fact,  that  by  clairvoyance  the  actual  condition 
of  a  person  totally  unknown  to  the  mesmeriser  and  his 
subject,  and  across  the  broad  Atlantic,  has  been  cor- 
rectly told.  This  I  have  seen  extremely  useful  in  a 
medicinal  view — for  by  directing  the  attention  of  a 
sufficiently  lucid  clairvoyant  to  a  distant  patient,  the 
disease  under  which  the  patient  was  laboring  has  been 
discovered,  and  every  interior  organ  of  the  body  de- 
scribed, both  as  to  its  actual  condition  and  general 
action. 

52.  Most  clairvoyants,  strictly  so  called,  are  alsc 
lucid,  that  is,  they  can  see  natural  objects  by  an  in- 
terior perception,  independent  of  the  usual  visual  or- 
gans, and,  on  this  account,  even  when  opaque  sub- 
stances intervene.  How  the  impression  of  these  out- 
ward objects  is  conveyed  to  the  sensorium  is  difficult  to 
understand;  the  fact  that  such  is  the  case  cannot  be 
doubted  by  any  one  who  has  carefully  examined  the 
subject.  In  ordinary  vision  the  mind  does  not  actually 
contemplate  the  outward  visible  object,  but  the  per- 
ception of  that  object  as  existing  in  the  imagination, 
I  do  not  use  the  term  in  the  sense  of  mere  fancy  ^  as  is 
sometimes  done  ;  but  by  imagination  I  mean  the  general 
power  of  the  sensorium  to  form  images  within  itself 
of  objects  that  are  without  itself  I,  therefore,  con- 
sider it  a  true  and  proper  faculty  of  the  psyche,  or 
animal  mind,  and  thence  as  a  sense  above  the  ordinary 
senses  of  the  body,  and  to  which  they  are  subservient. 
For  it  is  by  the  outward  senses,  which  depend  on  nerv- 
ous influence,  and  their  connection  with  this  inward 
linage-forming  faculty,  that  mind  and  matter  are 
brought    into    mutual     relationship    and    connection* 


•HIL0S0PHY,  ETC.,  OF   MESMERISM.  75 

Whether,  therefore,  it  is  by  ordinary  sight,  by  ceiebra] 
lucidity,  or  by  the  suggestions  of  another's  mind,  that 
the  ideas  of  the  objects  are  transmitted  to  the  senso- 
rium,  they  are  equally  subjects  of  the  image-forming 
faculty  when  there,  and  equally  real.  I  have  partially 
demesmerised  a  lucid  subject,  so  as  to  restore  the 
normal  conscious  state,  without  demesmerising  the  eyes, 
and  by  that  means  produced  conscious  lucidity.  Every 
thing  was  then  stated  to  be  seen  in  a  most  brilliant 
light,  altogether  different  to  common  light,  whether 
solar  or  artificial ;  and  at  the  same  time  all  the  sur- 
rounding objects  were  seen  at  once,  and  yet  a  sense  of 
their  separate  identity  remained.  Generally  they 
seemed  greatly  magnified,  and  to  have  more  or  less  of 
brilliancy  about  them  ;  all  which  seems  to  indicate  that 
the  independent  action  of  the  sensorium  produces  more 
vivid  images  of  the  objects  impressed  upon  it ;  and  this 
might  be  expected  from  the  exaltation  of  the  senses  by 
the  opening  of  the  perceptions  of  a  higher  ultimate. 

53.  We  have  now  taken  a  brief  survey  of  the  prin- 
cipal mesmeric  phenomena,  and  endeavored  to  account 
for  them,  as  far  as  experience,  observation,  and  reason, 
and  necessary  brevity  will  permit.  Before  concluding, 
I  will  notice  two  questions  often  proposed,  though  not 
always  in  the  spirit  of  calm  enquiry,  but  rather  in  that 
of  querulous  objection.  It  is  asked,  "  Whether  all 
persons  are  subject  to  mesmeiic  influence?  and  why 
all  cannot  be  made  clairvoyant  ?"  In  reply  to  the  first, 
I  answer  unreservedly,  that  I  believe  all  persons  are 
susceptible  of  mesmeric  influence,  but  in  a  very  different 
degree  ;  and  this  difference  we  might  anticipate  froic 
the  widely  differing  nervous  temperaments  and  idiosyn- 


76  SOMNOLISM    AND    PSYCHEISM. 

crasies  of  individuals.  Some  will  scarcely  feel  the  in* 
fluence,  while  others  will  soon  fall  into  the  "  sleep." 
But  as  regards  the  curative  influence  of  mesmerism, 
experience  has  fully  proved  that  very  great  benefit  may 
be  derived  without  any  loss  of  consciousness,  or  even 
any  perceptible  change  of  state.  Yet  the  inducing  of 
the  coma,  or  mesmeric  sleep,  generally  gives  the  opera- 
tor more  power  over  the  patient.  Let  it  be  remem- 
bered, that  the  great  use  of  mesmeric  influence  is  as  a 
curative  agent,  auxiliary  or  supplemental  to  medicine, 
and  that  the  various  exhibitions  of  catalepsy,  phantasy, 
phreno-mesmerism,  etc.,  are  only  useful  as  manifesta- 
tions of  the  true  nature  and  capabilities  of  the  human 
organism.  With  respect  to  the  second  question  I  would 
observe,  that  I  have  been  enabled  to  learn,  that  lucidity 
and  clairvoyance  can  only  be  developed  in  individuals 
who  possess  a  peculiar  cerebral  organization.  This  pe- 
culiar organization  may  be  normal  in  some  few  cases, 
that  is,  it  may  consist  with  a  good  state  of  health  ;  but 
in  many  cases  it  may  be  traced  to  some  affection  of  the 
brain  consequent  on  disease,  and  the  possessor  of  the 
faculty  will  be  delicate  in  health,  and  less  fitted  for  the 
ordinary  avocations  of  life.  It  is  not,  therefore,  a 
faculty  to  be  generally  looked  for  or  desired  ;  but  where 
it  does  exist,  it  may  be  most  beneficially  employed; 
and,  on  the  other  hand,  it  may,  like  all  other  things,  be 
abused,  though  possibly,  not  without  ultimately  entail- 
ing punishment  on  the  offender.  In  proper  hands  it 
may  be  advantageously  used  to  ascertain  the  cause  of 
disease,  and  the  best  method  of  effecting  a  cure ;  and 
it  affords  us  a  means  tc  acquire  most  interesting  in- 


PHILOSOPHY,  ETC.,  OF  MESMERISM.  77 

formation  as  to  the  true  nature  of  our  indwelling  im- 
mortal spirit. 

54.  In  conclusion,  permit  me  to  observe,  that  a  calm 
nvestigation  of  the  psychical  phenomena  developed  by 
mesmerism,  may  become  of  great  use  in  furthering  the 
interests  of  religion  and  morality.  By  this  means  we 
may  demonstrate  that  there  is  an  internal  way  to  the 
mind,  as  well  as  the  usual  external  way  of  the  outward 
senses.  This,  although  admitted  by  believers  in  the 
authority  of  the  Holy  Scriptures,  has  been  generally 
denied  by  an  influential  class  of  writers.  It  also  tends 
to  illustrate  and  confirm  some  of  those  striking  and  in- 
teresting Scripture  narratives  which  have  been  so  often 
assailed  by  scepticism  and  infidelity;  and  it  presents 
man  to  us,  both  in  his  relation  to  the  spirit- world  and 
the  natural  world,  being,  even  while  tabernacling  in 
mortal  flesh,  as  to  his  interior,  mental,  or  spiritual  or- 
ganism, in  direct  communication  with  a  spiritual  world, 
and  thus  capable,  by  the  very  laws  of  his  being,  of  re- 
ceiving influences  from  God  and  spiritual  intelligences, 
while,  by  his  material  organism,  he  is  constituted  in 
direct  relation  with  all  outward  things.  Man  is  thus 
presented  to  us  just  in  the  light  we  might  expect,  con- 
sidering that  he  is  the  crowning  work  of  the  Great 
Creator's  skill.  For  we  may  see  that  he  is  really  and 
truly  that  link  in  the  great  chain  of  creation,  which 
God  has  made  to  join  heaven  to  earth  and  earth  fco 
heaven ! 


APPENDIX 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE. 

1.  E.  L.,  the  young  woman  who  is  the  chief  subject  of  the 
following  notes,  is  a  native  of  Worcestershire.  She  is  about 
five  feet  two  inches  in  height,  rather  sallow  complexion,  and  of 
a  nervous-bilious  temperament.  Her  health,  although  at  times 
tolerably  good,  is  not  robust,  nor  is  she  capable  of  much  con- 
tinued exertion.  Before  coming  into  my  house,  she  had  been 
the  subject  of  inflammatory  disease  of  the  chest,  and  of  fever, 
and  not  long  before  coming  to  Bolton,  she  had  been  an  inmate 
of  the  General  Hospital,  Birmingham,  on  account  of  an  injury 
received  in  the  knee.  The  treatment  there  had  reduced  her 
general  health,  but  improved  the  knee.  '  She  was  in  this  state 
when  I  first  saw  her.  Her  head  is  well  formed  and  fully  de- 
veloped. Before  the  time  about  to  be  referred  to,  she  was 
wholly  ignorant  that  she  possessed  any  peculiar  mesmeric  sus- 
ceptibilities. She  has  since  expressed  an  opinion,  that  the  ex- 
traordinary condition  of  her  brain  is  the  result  of  a  very  largo 
dose  of  opium,  which  she  once  took  by  mistake,  and  which,  for 
a  day  or  two,  occasioned  very  serious  symptoms.  But  this  may 
oe  considered  as  very  doubtful.  She  completed  her  twenty- 
second  year  in  December,  1848.  She  will  be  constantly  re- 
ferred to  by  the  name  of  Emma. 

2.  Towards  the  close  of  the  autumn  of  1 8 16,  my  attention  was 
directed  to  the  action  of  the  vapor  of  ether  in  obliterating  the  sense 
of  pain — it  having  been  recently  brought  into  public  notice  for 
that  purpose.  Before  this  time  I  had  seen  the  vapor  of  ether 
used  as  a  substitute  for  the  nitric  oxyde,  or  laughing  gas,  and  had 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  79 

noticed  the  intoxicating  and  exciting  effects  it  produced  ;  but  1 
was,  like  others,  ignorant  that  it  blunted,  and  in  some  cases, 
entirely  removed,  the  sense  of  pain.  Hearing  me  talk  of  the 
effects  of  ether,  Emma  said  that  a  cousin  of  hers  had  "mesmer- 
ised" her  and  another  young  woman  with  ether,  which  they 
"  sucked'1''  out  of  a  bottle — indeed,  she  called  it  "  The  mesmerise.'1 
Being  anxious  to  test  the  truth  of  the  reports  then  in  circula- 
tion, I  asked  her  if  she  had  any  objection  to  let  me  see  her  in- 
hale some  of  the  vapor?  She  replied,  "None  at  all,  for  she 
had  no  fear  of  its  hurting  her."  I,  therefore,  fitted  up  a  com- 
mon Winchester  quart  bottle,  merely  by  putting  a  piece  of 
brass  tubing  through  the  cork,  which  went  halfway  down  the 
bottle,  and  two  or  three  inches  above  it.  About  half  an  ounce 
of  sulphuric  ether  was  put  into  the  bottle,  and  the  bottle  well 
shaken,  to  mix  the  vapor  with  the  contained  air  ;  I  then  gave  it 
jer,  and  told  her  to  put  the  pipe  to  her  mouth  and  gently  draw 
in  the  air  in  the  bottle,  without  closing  the  nose,  or  using  any 
of  the  valvular  apparatus  then  in  use.  In  less  than  five  minutes 
I  observed  that  her  hands  began  to  loosen  their  hold  of  the  bottle, 
which  I  then  removed,  the  pupils  of  her  eyes  became  dilated, 
and  presently  the  eyelids  closed.  I  now  found  her  insensible 
to  pain,  or  rather  to  evince  no  feeling,  which  was  ascertained 
in  various  ways,  such  as  pinching  and  pricking  various  parts  of 
the  body,  endeavoring  to  excite  tittilation,  and  even  by  thrust- 
ing pins  under  the  finger  nails,  but  she  did  not  evince  the 
slightest  consciousness  of  these  experiments ;  on  the  contrary, 
she  was  soon  in  a  merry  mood,  and  believed  herself  to  be 
among  her  old  companions  in  her  native  place,  rambling  through 
fields,  and  performing,  as  she  supposed,  many  rural  and  do- 
mestic occupations.  She  would  laugh,  dance,  sing,  and  do 
many  things  which  were  suggested  to  her ;  but  when  awakened, 
she  had  scarcely  any,  if  any,  recollection  of  what  had  occurred. 
These  abnormal  states  were  continued  longer  than  intended, 
on  account  of  the  difficulty  experienced  in  arousing  her;  for 
on  one  or  two  occasions,  nearly  two  hours  were  expended  in 
fully  restoring  her. 

-3.    Other  individuals  were  i  rw  trvd,  but  only  one  was  found 


80  APPENDIX. 

at  that  time,  at  all  similar  to  her  in  susceptibility  to  the  ethereal 
influence,  and  that  was  a  youth  who  had  been  mesmerised  by 
Mr.  Spencer  Hall,  when  that  gentleman  was  lecturing  in 
Boiton.  The  same  bottle,  in  like  manner,  with  about  half  an 
ounce  of  ether  in  it,  was  given  to  him,  and  in  five  minutes 
he  became  insensible,  and  then  exhibited  similar  phenomena 
to  Emma,  but  not  so  striking.  He  talked  and  acted,  and. 
like  her,  imagined  himself  to  be  in  another  place  than 
where  he  really  was.  In  about  half  an  hour  he  spontaneously 
awakened. 

4.  The  very  small  quantity  of  ether  subsequently  found  suf- 
ficient, merely  enough  to  scent  the  bottle,  induced  an  opinion 
that,  in  Emma's  case,  the  ether  had  very  little  to  do  with  the 
strange  things  witnessed,  but  that  she  was,  in  a  manner,  mes- 
merised, or  rather  hypnotized,  by  looking  at  the  bottle  while 
inhaling  through  the  tube.  It  was  therefore  resolved  to  try 
another  experiment.  One  evening  I  told  her  to  sit  down,  and 
taking  a  small  pocket-comb  desired  her  to  look  steadfastly  at  it. 
She  did  so,  and  in  a  few  minutes  fell  into  the  simple  mesmeric 
or  hypnotic  sleep.  Afterwards  a  small  magnet  was  used  for 
the  same  purpose  and  with  the  same  results.  A  few  days 
further  on,  I  mesmerised  her  in  the  usual  mode,  that  is,  by 
looking  fixedly  at  her.  The  youth  mentioned  above  was  also 
submitted  to  a  similar  experiment,  by  causing  him  to  gaze 
steadfastly  on  a  small  magnet  held  a  few  inches  from  his  eyes. 
In  both  cases,  results  were  obtained  similar  to  those  following 
the  use  of  the  ether,  namely,  insensibility  to  pain,  and  a  sort  of 
somnambulic  wakeful  dreaming.  In  both  these  cases  the  only 
difference  yet  perceptible  between  the  effects  of  the  ether  and 
those  resulting  from  hypnotizing  or  mesmerising  was,  that  by 
the  latter  mode  the  limbs  could  be  made  rigid — cataleptic,  as  it 
is  called — while  no  such  rigidity  could  be  induced  after  the  in- 
halation of  the  ether.  Up  to  this  time,  dancing,  singing,  and 
doing  various  things  which  were  audibly  suggested,  as  if  they 
tvere  real,  and  rigidity  of  the  limbs,  after  downward  passes, 
Were  the  only  phenomena  noticed;  and  it  was  thought  that 
the  statements  made  by  some  writers,  of  the  personal  influence 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  81 

of  the  operator  over  the  subject,  were  merely  fanciful,  and  not 
Warranted  by  fact. 

5.  Some  time  in  the  summer  of  1847,  while  experimenting 
with  Emma,  I  accidently  placed  my  hand  on  the  part  of  the 
head  marked  on  busts  as  the  organ  of  veneration;  she  imme- 
diately began  repeating  the  Apostle's  creed;  when  my  hand 
was  removed  she  ceased,  and  when  it  was  replaced  she  com- 
menced repeating  where  she  left  off.  This  was  the  first  mani- 
festation I  got  of  the  phrenological  sentiments,  and  interested 
me  greatly  ;  but  it  was  some  weeks  before  I  succeeded  in  ex- 
citing the  other  sentiments  or  feelings.  Afterwards  benevo- 
lence, veneration,  firmness,  self-esteem,  philoprogenitiveness, 
acquisitiveness,  eombativeness,  etc.,  were  easily  excited,  and 
often  most  powerfully  manifested.  Up  to  this  time,  no  absolute 
proof  of  personal  influence  was  discovered,  but  she  became 
more  easily  and  quickly  mesmerised,  and  as  easily  awakened 
into  the  normal  state. 

6.  It  was  now  found  that  Emma  would  exhibit  all  the  usual 
mesmeric  phenomena,  such  as  catalepsy,  or  rigidity  of  the 
limbs — for  she  could  be  fixed  immovably  in  any  position  by  the 
action  of  a  few  passes  ;  she  could  be  so  far  demesmerised  as  to 
be  restored  to  outward  consciousness,  and  yet  be  unable  to  move 
the  mesmerised  arm  or  leg.  Attraction  she  could  also  manifest, 
even  in  the  same  conscious  state,  as  I  often  had  the  opportunity 
of  showing  to  friends  and  neighbors,  who  were  as  much  sur- 
prised as  amused.  For  example,  a  piece  of  money  would  be 
placed  on  a  table  at  a  distant  part  of  the  room,  and  it  was  told 
her  she  might  have  it  for  fetching  it.  She  frequently  essayed 
to  do  so,  and  would  sometimes  very  nearly  reach  the  money ;  but 
invariably,  my  will,  and  the  drawing  passes  I  made  towards  my- 
self, overcame  her  power,  and  notwithstanding  her  determined 
efforts,  would  draw  her  to  myself,  and  render  all  her  endeavors 
to  secure  the  money  ineffectual.  On  these  occasions,  she  de- 
scribed the  sensations  she  experienced  as  being  like  cords 
wound  round  her  and  drawing  her.  The  various  phenoment 
of  phantasy  could  also  be  most  readily  produced ;  but  when  she 
became  clairvoyant,  if  she  was  desired  ts  look  at  ,he  object  that 

4* 


82  APPENDIX. 

she  imagined  to  oe  so  widely  different  (o  what  it  realty  wmk 
si.-s  would  instantly  perceive  the  delusion^  and  dash  it  from  her; 
and  yet,  with.n  a  minute  or  two,  she  could  be  as  easily  deluded 
again.  But  the  investigation  of  these  ordinary  mesmeric  states 
was  not  confined  to  those  exhibited  by  Emma,  but  their  truth- 
fulness was  further  confirmed  in  the  case  of  several  youths,  who 
were  experiment^  upon,  both  privately  and  publicly,  and  who 
exhibited  the  san.  »■  phenomena,  but  modified  in  each  case  by 
the  general  character  of  the  individual.  Since  the  period  re- 
ferred to,  Emma's  susceptibility  has  considerably  increased, 
and  now  I  can  fasten  the  arms,  hands,  or  mouth,  or  fix  her  to 
the  spot  on  which  she  may  be  standing  or  sitting,  by  a  single 
movement  or  pressure  of  my  hand,  without  putting  her  into  the 
mesmeric  sleep. 

7.  It  was  not  long,  after  Emma  became  so  fully  susceptible, 
before  opportunities  occurred  for  proving  the  reality  of  per- 
sonal influence,  and  that  a  highly  mesmeric  subject  may  be 
acted  upon,  even  when  wholly  unaware  of  the  exertion  of  such 
influence.  Many  experiments  were  tried  to  ascertain  the  truth 
on  this  point;  but  I  will  only  mention  three  among  many  cases 
that  took  place  spontaneously,  or  rather,  which  occurred  with- 
out my  mind  being  directed  to  her.  Once  a  gentleman  asked 
me  unexpectedly,  in  a  neighbor's  house,  several  doors  from 
mine,  to  mesmerise  him.  I  tried,  but  did  not  succeed.  On 
returning  home,  I  found  Emma  in  the  mesmeric  state,  and, 
upon  enquiry,  found  that  she  had  gone  into  that  state  while  I 
was  endeavoring  to  mesmerise  the  gentleman.  On  another 
occasion,  I  was  wishful  to  induce  the  mesmeric  sleep  on  a  lady, 
for  the  relief  of  a  rheumatic  affection  from  which  she  was  suf- 
fering. Finding  the  continual  stare  very  fatiguing  to  my  eyes, 
and  also  expecting  to  be  called  away  by  patients,  it  occurred  to 
me,  that  if  I  directed  her  to  look  steadfastly  at  something,  it 
flight  answer  the  same  purpose,  and  allow  me  to  leave  her, 
without  interrupting  the  mesmeric  action.  I  therefore  arose 
and  took  a  small  magnet  and  suspended  t  by  a  wire  from  a 
hook  in  the  ceiling.  Emma  was  in  a  room  under  where  I 
was  operating,  and  knew  nothing  of  my  movements.     In  a  few 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  83 

■ 

minutes  the  smell  of  burning  linen  arrested  my  attention,  and 
I  desired  my  daughter  to  go  down  stairs  and  ascertain  the 
cause.  She  called  to  me  quickly  to  come  down  ;  I  did  so,  and 
found  Emma  mesmerised,  and  on  her  knees  before  the  fire, 
engaged  in  sweeping  the  hearth,  and  her  apron  on  fire,  from 
contact  with  a  burning  coal  that  had  fallen  from  the  grate — but 
of  this  she  was  unconscious,  and  her  attention  was  wholly 
directed  to  a  point  in  the  ceiling  of  the  room.  Having  asked 
"What  she  was  doing  or  looking  at?"  she  replied,  "I  want 
that  magnet.''''  Upon  enquiry,  I  found  that  she  had  been  en- 
gaged just  under  where  I  was  sitting;  the  influence  had  passed 
through  the  floor  and  ceiling  and  affected  her  unconsciously  in 
the  room  below,  and  being  now  clairvoyant,  she  immediately 
saw  the  magnet  through  the  ceiling,  etc.,  and  pointed  accu- 
rately to  its  situation.  But  from  the  locality  of  the  room,  and 
the  magnet  having  been  used  without  any  previous  intimation 
Df  my  intention — in  fact  it  did  not  occur  to  me  to  do  so  until 
the  patient  had  been  some  time  seated — she  could  not  possibly 
know  of  its  being  in  the  situation  in  which  I  had  placed  it,  by 
any  normal  means.  Here  then  was  one,  among  numerous 
spontaneous  instances,  of  the  transmission  and  reception  of  a 
personal  influence,  and  of  the  reality  of  clairvoyance.  On  an- 
other occasion,  I  was  called  to  see  a  patient  residing  more  than 
a  mile  and  a  half  from  my  residence ;  the  case  was  one  of 
delirium  tremens,  and  I  resolved  to  try  the  soothing  influence 
of  mesmerism,  and,  in  this  instance,  succeeded  in  a  few  minutes. 
On  returning  home,  I  found  that  Emma  had  gone  into  the 
mesmeric  state  at  the  time  I  was  operating  on  my  patient;  but, 
fortunately,  she  was  in  a  situation  where  no  harm  happened  to 
her.  By  way  of  experiment,  I  frequently  mesmerised  her 
when  in  another  room,  and  unknown  to  her ;  but  in  the  above- 
named,  and  other  cases,  I  did  not  think  of  her ;  and  the  circum- 
stance can  only  be  explained  from  her  known  susceptibility 
and  my  being  actually  engaged  in  exerting  a  mesmeric  influence 
and  intention.  This  extreme  susceptibility  to  my  personal  in- 
fluence, for  a  considerable  period,  prevented  my  using  mes- 
merism as  a  curative  agent,  inasmuch  as  [  feared  to  exercise 


84  APPENI  IX. 

* 
the  power,  unless  I  knew  that  Emma  was  in  a  place  of  safety, 
and  would  be  kept  from  danger,  in  case  she  should  becoms 
unawares  mesmerised. 

8.  In  the  early  part  of  1847,  Emma  wished  to  have  the 
vapor  of  ether  administered,  with  the  view  of  having  an  aching 
tooth  removed  without  pain  ;  but  the  striking  effects  I  had  seen 
follow  upon  mesmerising  her,  induced  me  to  refuse  the  ether, 
and,  in  the  evening,  to  mesmerise  her,  and  thus  further  test 
the  power  of  the  mesmeric  sleep  to  subdue  pain.  About 
9  o'clock  that  evening  I  desired  her  to  sit  down ;  induced  the 
mesmeric  sleep,  and  then  leisurely  got  the  necessaiy  instru- 
ments; lanced  her  gum;  extracted  the  tooth;  as  soon  as  the 
bleeding  was  arrested,  washed  her  mouth,  and  then  aroused 
her.  The  entire  time  from  sitting  down  until  fully  aroused, 
was  just  fifteen  minutes.  During  the  operation  she  did  not 
evince  the  slightest  sensibility ;  but  as  soon  as  the  removal  of 
the  instrument,  gave  liberty  to  her  mouth,  she  began  to  hum  a 
tune,  even  while  the  blood  was  flowing.  On  awakening,  she 
knew  nothing  of  what  had  taken  place  after  going  into  the  sleep, 
and  could  hardly  be  persuaded  that  the  tooth  on  the  table  be- 
fore her  had  been  extracted  from  her  jaw  !  Some  time  after- 
wards, Mr.  Patrick,  surgeon-dentist,  of  Bolton,  extracted  a 
large  decayed  molar  tooth  from  her  lower  jaw,  under  similar 
circumstances.  On  the  latter  occasion,  several  friends  were 
witnesses  of  the  operation. 

9.  Discovery  of  Lucibity  and  Clairvoyance. — In  the 
autumn  of  1847,  it  was  told  me,  that  there  was  a  young  woman 
in  Bolton,  who  had  travelled  the  country  with  a  mesmeric  lec- 
turer, and  who  had  been  for  a  long  time  Clairvoyant.  Hav- 
ing heard  much  of  this  wonderful  faculty,  I  was  desirous  to  see 
her.  She  was  soon  afterwards  introduced  to  me  for  examination. 
I  found  that  she  was  very  easily  mesmerised,  and  in  that  state 
she  knew  me  and  others  in  the  room ;  also,  that  she  was  fully 
susceptible  of  feeling;  in  these  respects  differing  widely  from 
Emma.  I  could  not,  therefore,  fully  satisfy  myself  as  to  tht 
reality  of  the  mesmeric  state.  The  young  woman  said,  that 
she  had  formerly  been  ia  the  same  state  as  Emma,  but  had 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  85 

passed  beyond  it;  aud,  from  subsequent  experience,  I  think 
this  may  be  correct.  She  told  tie  that  she  had  been  taken  by 
several  London  physicians  to  examine  the  interna!  organs  of 
patients  by  the  faculty  of  clairvoyance;  but  when  I  saw  her, 
her  powers  seemed  to  be  confined  to  reading  books  with  large 
print,  with  the  eyes  bandaged.  I  tried  the  experiment,  several 
times,  but  never  felt  satisfied  with  the  result;  as  from  the 
position  in  which  she  placed  the  book,  the  time  occupied  in  the 
endeavor,  and  the  occasional  wriggling,  I  could  never  be  certain 
that  she  did  not  see  under  the  bandages.  At  other  times,  I 
was  certainly  much  surprised  at  the  readiness  she  evinced  in 
describing  a  book  I  had  in  my  hand.  On  the  whole,  I  con- 
cluded, that  her  possession  of  the  faculty  of  clairvoyance  was, 
to  say  the  least,  doubtful.  But  it  soon  after  occurred  to  me, 
that  if  she  ever  could  see  in  the  manner  she  stated,  perhaps 
Emma  could  see  in  the  same  manner.  At  all  events,  1  had 
the  most  positive  assurance  that  she  went  into  the  mesmeric 
state,  and  that  in  that  state  she  could  not  see,  but  that  the 
power  of  visicn  was  wholly  withdrawn;  the  sense  of  hearing 
alone  connecting  her  consciously  with  the  external  world. 

10.  One  evening  I  determined  to  tiy  her.  But  at  this  period 
she  could  not  read,  and  was  ignorant  even  of  the  letters  of  the 
alphabet.  I  therefore  chose  pictorial  representations  for  the 
test,  as  being  a  universal  language,  understood  alike  both  by  the 
learned  and  the  unlearned.  1  took  a  school  book  belonging  to 
my  daughter,  which  contained  various  wood-cuts,  and  open- 
ing it  at  one,  I  placed  it  in  her  hand,  saying,  "  Emma,  what  is 
this  picture  ?"  She  took  the  book,  and  as  if  by  instinct,  placed 
it  open  over  her  forehead  and  upper  part  of  the  cranium,  with- 
out the  least  attempt  to  look  at  it  in  the  ordinary  way,  and  said, 
ilmost  directly,  "  Oh  yes,  it  is  a  naughty  boy  catching  flies  at 
'.he  window,  and  his  mother  is  looking  at  him."  This  was  the 
subject  of  the  picture  and  the  story  annexed.  There  was  a 
figure  of  a  boy  at  a  window,  endeavoring  to  catch  a  fly,  and 
another  figure  of  a  female  standing  in  the  room  observing  him. 
I  felt  most  exceedingly  surprised  and  astor  ished  at  the  correct- 
of  the  description,  being  assured  toat  she  could  not  see  if 


$6  APIENDIX. 

by  nny  ordinary  use  of  the  eye,  or,  in  fact,  by  the  eye  at  afli 
This  experiment  was  repeated  with  many  different  pictures, 
and  invariabl)  with  the  same  result;  colored  pictures  were  also 
tried,  and  it  was  found  that  she  knew  the  different  colors  ac- 
curately ;  but  on  no  occasion  did  she  attempt  to  use  the  eye — 
she  invariably  placed  the  object  over  her  head. 

11.  It  was  now  thought,  that  as  mesmerism  evidently  rested 
on  a  psychological  basis,  and  that  a  manifest  connection  was 
discoverable  between  the  mind  of  the  mesmeriser  and  the  mes- 
merised subject,  she  might  possibly  see  these  pictures  some- 
how in  my  memory,  and  not  from  any  independent  power  of 
vision.  I,  therefore,  requested  my  daughter  to  select  the  pie 
tures,  and  then  to  put  them  into  my  hand,  without  telling  uw 
the  subject,  or  letting  me  see  them.  This  was  repeatedly 
done,  and  the  pictures  as  accurately  described  as  when  I  knew 
the  subject.  Still  it  was  thought  that  my  giving  her  the  pic- 
tures might  have  some  effect  upon  her ;  others,  therefore 
gave  her  them,  or  she  was  allowed  to  take  them  herself  from  a 
number,  or  to  turn  over  the  pages  of  a  book,  without  any  one 
Knowing  what  she  had  taken,  or  had  turned  to,  until  she  had 
described  what  she  had  selected.  But  it  was  found  that  it 
made  no  difference,  and  demonstrated,  that  whatever  was  the 
power,  or  wherever  the  seat  of  vision,  it  vfas  her  own,  and  in- 
dependent of  any  one  else. 

12.  These,  and  similar  experiments,  have  been  successfully 
performed,  in  private,  before  a  select  company,  and  also  before 
large  public  audiences  ;  and  this  too,  with  her  eyes  covered 
with  plaisters,  and  a  bandage  tied  over  the  plaisters.  Not  that 
the  plaisters  or  bandages  made  any  difference;  but  they  were 
used  for  the  sake  of  convincing  sceptical  people.  At  this  time, 
in  ascertaining  the  subject  of  a  picture,  she  first  passed  the  tips 
of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  gently  over  it  (the  left  hand  did 
not  seem  to  possess  the  same  power),  and  then  placed  it  over 
that  part  of  the  head,  marked  on  phrenological  busts  as  the 
organ  of  Imitation.  If  a  book  with  prints  on  the  pages  was 
given  her,  she  would  pass  her  right  fingers  gently  over  the 
page,  and  if  it  was  letter-press  or  blank,  she  would  say,   "IS 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  87 

was  nothing."  But  when  she  had  thus  found  out  the  situa- 
tion of  the  print,  she  would  exclaim,  "  Oh  yes  !  here  it  is  ;"  o? 
"  I've  got  it."  But  whether  the  print  was  a  wood-cut,  or 
copper-plate,  did  not  appear  to  make  any  difference. 

13.  A  very  curious  phenomenon  was  now  observed.  Pic- 
tures of  things  did  not  appear  to  her  as  pictures,  but  as  the 
things  represented.  So  that  the  picture  of  a  rose  would  convey 
as  vivid  and  real  an  idea  to  her  sensorium,  as  the  rose  itself 
would  do  to  an  individual  in  the  ordinary  state.  Hence  it  was 
found,  that  if  a  picture  of  thistles,  teazels,  or  other  prickly  plants, 
or  of  bees,  was  given  into  her  hand,  the  moment  the  tips  of  her 
right  fingers  came  into  contact  with  the  picture,  she  would  ex- 
claim that,  she  was  pricked  or  stung,  and  throw  the  picture 
from  her  with  much  violence  and  passion  !  Evidently  proving, 
that  the  representations  of  things  were  to  her  real;  and  also 
suggesting,  that  she  had  a  perception  of  the  form  of  the  objects, 
before  placing  the  picture  on  her  head.  These  experiments 
were  performed  many  times,  both  publicly  and  privately.  And 
from  her  invariable  use  of  the  tips  of  the  right  fingers,  it  was 
supposed  that  there  existed  some  unknown  but  remarkable 
affinity,  between  the  senses  of  touch  and  sight. 

14.  By  the  commencement  of  1848,  her  power  of  internal 
sight  had  become  so  developed,  or  she  had  become  so  familiar- 
ized with  her  new  faculty,  that  it  was  evident,  from  many 
things  observed,  that  she  could  see  such  things  as  he.  mind  was 
directed  to,  without  any  contact.  As  an  experiment,  small 
pictures,  and  various  small  objects,  were  placed  singly,  first 
in  a  card  box,  and  afterwards  in  a  wooden  box  ;  and  these  she 
Oold,  at  times,  as  readily  as  when  out  of  the  box  and  in  her 
hands.  At  other  times,  more  difficulty  was  experienced  in 
satisfactorily  determining  that  she  could  see  them.  This  dif- 
ficulty arose  from  two  causes :  first,  from  the  manner  in  which 
she  would  describe  what  she  saw  ;  and,  secondly,  from  an 
obstinacy  of  temper  frequently  displayed,  when  removed  by 
mesmeric  influence  from  external  habit  and  control.  Her 
usual  manner  was  to  describe  things  as  they  appeared  to  her  in 
the  internal  state,  regardless  of  the  names  imposed  upon  the.v 


88  APPENDIX. 

by  custom ;  sometimes  she  refused  to  call  things  by  their  ac- 
customed name,  and  would  always  describe  them  in  her  ow» 
way,  before  she  called  them  by  the  common  name.  As  an  in 
stance,  the  following  may  be  given.  At  the  second  public 
iecture,  in  the  Temperance  Hall,  Bolton,  ol  the  9th  of  March, 
1848,  a  gentleman  in  front  of  the  platform  suggested  that  a 
picture,  from  among  others  lying  on  the  floor,  should  be  put 
into  a  box,  and  given  to  her — she  had  then  been  bandaged  for 
some  time.  A  print  of  a  cat  was  selected,  and  put  into  a  card 
box ;  she  put  the  box  over  her  head,  felt  it  carefully  with  her 
right  fingers,  and  then,  having  by  a  smile  and  ejaculation  evinc- 
ed that  she  saw  the  contents,  she  began — "  It  is  a  thing  ;  it  is 
a  dark  thing ;  it  has  four  legs,  a  tail,  a  head  and  two  eyes ; 
things  round  its  mouth,  and  it  sits  by  the  fire  and  says  ?new, 
and  it's  a  cat." 

15.  One  cause  of  difficult}-  in  attaining  clear  descriptions  of 
the  things  to  which  her  attention  was  directed,  and  sometimes 
even  in  getting  her  to  notice  them,  was  veiy  early  perceivable. 
In  the  exalted  condition  of  mesmerism,  her  mind  was  pecu- 
liarly susceptible  of  impressions  from  the  minds  of  surrounding 
persons ;  hence,  when  environed  by  a  knot  of  sceptics,  -as  was 
sometimes  the  case,  their  mental  influence,  unconsciously  to 
themselves,  would  seriously  impede  the  faculties  of  the  clair- 
voyant ;  and  then  the  feeling  that  something  was  preventing 
the  usual  development  of  her  powers,  caused  irritation  and 
obstinacy.  At  the  period  alluded  to,  when  Emma  was  asked 
"How  she  saw  things?"  she  would  say,  that  suddenly  "glasses" 
came  to  her,  and  also,  that  she  sees  every  thing  in  light  through 
these  "glasses;"  and  the  situation  of  these  "glasses"  she 
always  referred  to  the  organs  of  imitation.  When  this  doubting, 
opposing  influence  was  brought  to  bear  upon  her,  she  would  ex- 
claim, "They  are  darkening  my  glasses  ;"  or  "  They  have  taken 
away  my  glasses."  I  frequently  found  that  by  making  passes 
from  the  upper  part  of  the  head,  across  the  organs  of  imitation, 
3  could  produce  and  increase  the  clairvoyant  power,  which  she 
would  evince  by  exclaiming,  "  Oh,  its  so  light  now, ;"  while  by 
making  longitudinal  passes,  from  the  vortex,  over  the  forehead 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  88 

and  dcwn  to  the  face,  the  sight  could  be  immediately  closed,  and 
she  would  be  placed  in  a  state  of  darkness.  Bodily  fatigue,  or 
indisposition,  would,  at  that  time,  and  also  does  at  the  present 
time,  considerably  impair  the  powers,  not  only  of  clairvoyance, 
but  all  the  other  mesmeric  capabilities. 

16.  Besides  the  description  of  pictures,  etc.,  already  noticed, 
she  frequently  described  persons  in  another  room,  and  said  what 
they  were  doing;  frequently,  without  having  her  attention 
directed  to  the  inquiry.  At  other  times  she  would  unexpect- 
edly, and  unasked,  tell  individuals  what  they  had  in  their  pock- 
ets, or  what  sort  of  food  was  contained  in  their  stomach.  This 
often  afforded  matter  for  interesting  experiments  ;  and  has  been 
witnessed  by  many  respectable  persons  in  the  neighborhood. 

17.  For  a  considerable  time  after  she  exhibited  the  most  dis- 
tinct lucidity,  with  respect  to  objects  placed  near  her,  no  trace 
could  be  found  of  that  distant  clairvoyance  manifested  by  some 
mesmeric  subjects  :  but,  eventually,  this  faculty  became  as 
clearly  developed  as  the  other.  The  first  time  I  observed  this 
power,  was  in  the  case  of  some  near  relatives  in  London.  She 
described  minutely  the  dress  and  appearance  of  these  parties; 
their  occupation  at  a  certain  time,  and  many  other  particulars, 
which  were  subsequently  found  to  be  correct.  Once  I  directed 
her  attention  to  a  female  relative  in  London.  Emma  speedily 
found  her,  and  began  to  describe  her  residence,  etc.,  but  sud- 
denly her  attention  ceased  to  be  directed  to  my  relative,  and  she 
became  engrossed  with  the  description  of  a  magnificent  resi- 
dence, with  its  elegant  and  costly  furniture  ;  a  lady  lying  in  a 
superb  bed  ;  a  beautifully  dressed  baby  ;  well  dressed  ladies  in 
and  about  the  room  ;  and  another  room  in  which  were  older 
children,  also  beautifully  dressed,  and  attended  by  ladies.  From 
many  replies  to  my  inquiries,  I  considered  that  the  only  place 
to  which  her  impassioned  descriptions  could  refer,  was  Buck- 
ingham Palace,  for  the  accouchment  of  the  queen  had  then  re- 
cently occurred.  1  therefore  said,  "  Do  you  see  any  soldiers 
there  ?"  '  Yes  "  she  replied,  "  there  are  soldiers  at  the  door." 
I  then  saw  that  my  conjecture  was  correct;  but  why  she  should 
hswe  spontaneously  gone  there,  without  any  request  jn  my 


90  APPENDIX. 

part,  or,  indeed,  any  thought  or  desire  in  that  respect,  I  could 
not  understand.  But  after  I  had  informed  my  relative  of  this 
occurrence,  I  obtained  the  clue  to  this  singular  transition  from 
one  subject  to  another.  For  I  was  informed  that  she  had  been 
thinking  of  the  queen,  and  the  interesting  circumstances  in 
which  she  was  then  placed ;  and  had  felt  desirous  that  I  should, 
as  an  experiment,  try  whether  Emma  had  the  power  to  visit 
and  describe  the  interior  of  the  palace  at  that  time.  The  cause 
therefore,  of  Emma's  unexpected  visit  to  royalty  was  this :  my 
relative  had  wished  her  to  go  there ;  when  brought  into  mes- 
meric connection  with  her,  the  active  sentiment  of  her  mind, 
was  communicated  to  Emma's  mind;  and  by  this  means,  her 
attention  was  unconsciously  directed  to  the  royal  residence. 
But  there  was  further  confirmation  that  this  was  the  true. cause, 
and  of  the  possibility  of  a  mesmerised  subject  receiving  impres- 
sions from  the  parties  to  whom  their  attention  is  directed.  For 
when  I  knew,  from  my  relative's  letter,  what  had  been  the  sub- 
ject of  her  thoughts,  I  put  Emma  into  the  mesmeric  state,  and 
then  asked  her,  "  How  and  why  she  went  to  see  the  queen?" 

She  directly  replied,  "L took  me."     But  how  did  you  get 

in  if  there  were  soldiers  at  the  door  ?     "Oil  jumped  over  th 

soldiers ;  but  L could  not  jump  over  them,  and  therefore 

she  could  not  get  in." 

18.  At  this  time,  whenever  sent  on  these  distant  excursions, 
she  exhibited  great  fatigue  and  excitement;  panting,  and  suffer- 
ing from  violent  action  of  the  heart.  When  asked  why  she 
panted  so  ?  she  would  say,  "  I've  gone  su  fast," — and  "  It  is  such 
a  way  !"  She  would  also  take  my  right  hand  and  place  it  on  her 
bosom:  if  I  removed  it,  she  said,  "They  are  gone  away  now." 
But  latterly  she  has  not  required  any  personal  contact  to  enable 
her  to  exercise  this  faculty.  Very  many  expei'  nents  were 
made  to  test  this  faculty:  in  some  cases  she  was  strikingly  cor- 
rect ;  in  others  only  appioximately  so  ;  for  she  would  sometimes 
confound  the  recollection  of  bygone  transactions  existing  in  the 
minos  of  distant  individuals,  with  present  circumstances,  and  thus 
present  a  representation  which  required  some  explanation  to 
finravel. 


MESMERIC  AND  PSYCHICAL  EXPERIENCE.  91 

19.  Having  heard  of  clairvoyants  visiting  the  planets,  I  de- 
termined to  tiy  the  experiment  with  Emma.  I  therefore  pro- 
posed an  excuision  to  the  moon;  and  not  then  knowing  how  to 
direct  her  attention  to  such  distant  objects ;  and  she  herself 
being,  at  the  time  alluded  to,  wholly  ignorant  of  the  mode  by 
which  a  knowlege  of  distant  things  is  obtained  ;  and  fancying 
that  she  actuall)  traveled  by  some  mode,  I  suggested  the  elec- 
tric telegraph  as  an  expeditious  mode  of  conveyance.  The  sug 
gestion  answered  the  purpose,  and  she  was,  mentally,  soon  on 
our  satelite.  But  on  that  and  subsequent  occasions,  the  great 
excitement  produced  by  the  strangeness  of  what  she  saw,  and 
the  distance  traveled,  caused  such  a  palpitation  of  the  heart,  as 
to  render  it  necessaiy  to  shorten  the  visit,  by  de-mesmerising 
her;  being  fearful  that  the  great  physical  excitement  might 
produce  some  serious  effect  on  her  health,  if  not  immediate 
danger.  Her  description  of  what  she  saw  was  conveyed  in  very 
RJaculatory  language ;  from  the  surprise  and  pleasure  she  ex- 
perienced. Her  statements  were  to  the  effect,  that  the  moon 
is  inhabited  ;  that  the  inhabitants  she  saw  were  very  small — 
dwarfs — not  larger  than  children  on  our  earth ;  their  heads 
were  large  in  proportion  to  their  bodies,  and  the  mouth  vertical 
rather  than  horizontal ;  their  voices  harsh,  and  rough,  and  re- 
sembling the  sound  of  distant  thunder ;  and  when  they  spoke, 
the  speech  seemed  to  come  up  from  the  bowels.  Their  "  m- 
Bides"  were  not  quite  like  ours;  the  lungs  especially  were  dif 
ferent.  She  saw  some  food,  something  that  looked  somewhat 
like  bread,  but  they  did  not  call  it  by  that  name.  She  saw  only 
one  animal,  something  like  a  veiy  small  pig.  There  dwellings 
were  constructed  of  pieces  of  rocks,  covered  over  with  green 
ntuff  resembling  gorse :  they  were  veiy  low,  for  she  could  put  her 
Sand  to  the  top.  The  place  did  not  look  like  what  she  conceived 
the  moon  to  be  ;  but  a  large  place,  and  veiy  rocky,  with  immense 
precipices,  and  lofty  mountains.  The  "  little  folks,"  as  she  called 
the  inhabitants,  could  clamber  up  these  rocks  with  their  hands 
and  feet,  so  fast  that  she  could  not  catch  them.  "Is  there  any 
water  there?"  "Yes:  but  it  does  not  look  like  our  water,  bu> 
more  •ike  milk  and  water,  am.  yet  it  is  i.lear.     'Meaning  prob- 


92  APPENDIX. 

ably,  that  it  is  of  greater  density  than  our  water.)  [t  lies  m 
the  bottom  of  hollows,  and  down  the  steep  precipices.  The 
'  little  folks '  can  walk  upon  this  water  and  not  sink ;  they  are 
very  light.  They  wear  clothes ;  but  they  are  very  simple  and 
all  alike.  They  seem  good  sort  of  people.  They  have  a  curious 
way  of  jumping  on  the  back  of  each  other.  A  very  little  baby 
was  seen  in  a  sort  of  cradle  ;  it  died  :  they  said  what  signified 
that,  it  had  gone  to  sleep ;  but  they  did  not  meau  sleep,  but  that 
it  was  dead." 

20.  At  another  time  I  attempted  to  send  her  to  Jupiter  ; 
but  the  physical  excitement  was  so  great,  that  I  thought  it  pru- 
dent to  call  off  her  attention,  before  I  haa  obtained  any  definite 
remarks.  She  spoke  of  having  been  further  than  where  she 
had  before  seen  the  "little  folks;"  and  of  seeing  them  as  she 
came  back. 

21.  Besides  the  power  of  seeing,  by  an  internal  sight,  such 
things  as  were  put  into  her  hands,  or  to  which  her  attention 
was  directed,  Emma  would  sometimes  manifest  a  sort  of  appa- 
rently omnipresent  vision.  Thus  she  has  frequently  been  asked 
to  find  missing  or  lost  articles.  After  a  few  minutes  considera- 
tion, she  has  said  where  they  might  be  found ;  or,  in  other 
cases,  got  up  and  pointed  out  the  place  where  they  lay  con- 
cealed. And  this  she  has  repeatedly  done,  when  there  was 
the  most  undoubted  evidence,  that  neither  herself,  in  the  nor- 
mal condition,  nor  the  mesmeriser,  nor  any  other  individual, 
knew  the  situation  of  the  articles  she  was  desired  to  look  for 
Thus  proving,  that  not  only  can  an  unusual  mode  of  seeing  be 
developed  by  mesmerism,  but  also  an  exalted  degree  of  power, 
which  makes  all  things,  whatever  their  local  position,  appear 
directly  within  the  sphere  of  vision.  This  power  has  been,  on 
most  occasions,  called  into  exercise  chiefly  for  the  sake  of  ex- 
periment, and  to  test  its  reality ;  but  it  has  also  been  applied  to 
purposes  of  use.  The  following  is  a  remarkable  \nstance  ;  and 
also  valuable  as  placing  the  reality  and  powers  of  clairvoyance, 
or  internal  sight,  beyond  the  reach  of  cavil  or  contradiction. 

22.  On  Wednesday  evening,  December  20th,  1848,  Mr. 
Wood,  grocer,  of  Cheapside,  Bolton,  had  his  cash  box,  with  iW 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.  93 

contents,  stolen  from  his  counting  house.  After  applying  ta  the 
police,  and  taking  other  precautionary  steps,  and  having  no  clue 
to  the  thief,  although  he  suspected  what  was  proved  to  be  an 
innocent  party ;  and  having  heard  of  Emma's  powers  as  a  clair- 
;oyant,  he  applied  to  me,  to  ascertain  whether,  by  her  means, 
he  could  discover  the  party  who  had  taken  it,  or  recover  his 
property.  I  felt  considerable  hesitation  in  employing  Emma's 
powers  for  such  a  purpose;  fearing  that  both  the  motive  and 
agency  might  be  grossly  misrepresented.  But.  the  amount  at 
Stake,  the  opportunity  for  experiment,  and  Mr.  Wood  being  a 
neighbor,  induced  me  to  comply  with  his  request ;  and  nine 
o'clock,  next  morning,  was  appointed  for  the  trial.  At  that 
hour  Mr.  Wood  came  to  my  residence,  and  I  then  put  Emma, 
by  mesmerism,  into  the  internal  state,  and  then  told  her  that 
Mr.  Wood  (whom  I  put  en  rapport,  as  it  is  called,  with  her) 
had  lost  his  cash  box,  and  that  I  wished  her  to  tell  us,  if  she 
could,  where  the  box  was  taken  from,  what  was  in  it,  and  who 
took  it.  ■  She  remained  silent  a  few  minutes,  evidently  men- 
tally seeking  for  what  she  had  been  requested  to  discover 
Presentry  she  began  to  talk  with  an  imaginary  personage,  as  ii 
present  in  the  room  with  us ;  but  as  it  subsequently  proved, 
although  invisible  and  imaginary  to  us,  he  was  both  real  and 
visible  to  her ;  for  she  had  discovered  the  thief,  and  was  con- 
versing with  his  mine  on  the  robbery.  She  described,  in  the 
course  of  this  apparent  conversation,  and  afterward  to  us,  where 
the  box  was  placed ;  what  the  general  nature  of  its  contents 
was,  particularizing  some  documents  it  contained  ;  how  he  took 
it,  and  that  he  did  not  take  it  away  to  his  residence  at  once,  but 
hid  it  up  an  entry ;  and  her  description  of  his  person,  dress, 
associations,  etc.,  was  so  vivid,  "hat  Mr.  W.  immediately  recog- 
nized the  purloiner  of  his  property,  in  a  person  the  last  to  be 
suspected.  Feeling  satisfied,  from  the  general  accuracy  of  he? 
descriptions,  and  also  from  her  describing  the  contents  of  the 
box,  that  she  had  really  pointed  out  the  delinquent,  Mr.  W. 
went  directly  to  the  house  where  he  resided,  and  which  she 
had  pointed  out,  even  to  the  letters  on  the  door-plate  ;  and  in- 
sisted on  his  accompanying  him  to  my  house ;  or,  in  case  of 


94  APPENDIX. 

refusal,  to  tho  police  office.  When  brought,  and  placed  iu  con- 
nection with  Emma,  she  started  back  from  him,  as  if  he  had 
been  a  serpent ;  telling  him  that  he  was  a  bad  man,  and  observ- 
ing, also,  that  he  had  not  the  same  clothes  on  as  when  he  took 
the  box ;  which  was  the  fact.  He  denied  strenuously  all 
knowledge  of  the  robbery,  then,  and  up  to  a  late  hour  in  the 
afternoon ;  but  as  he  was  not  permitted  to  go  at  large,  and  thus 
had  no  opportunity  for  destroying,  or  effectually  concealing  the 
box ;  and  as  Mr.  Wood  had  promised,  for  the  sake  of  his  con- 
nections, not  to  prosecute,  if  confession  was  made,  and  the  box 
and  contents  recovered,  he,  at  last,  admitted  that  he  had  taken 
it,  and  in  the  manner  described  by  Emma ;  and  the  box  and 
contents  were  found  in  the  place  where  he  had  secreted  them  ; 
broken  open ;  but  the  property  safe.  It  should  be  observed, 
that  Emma  had  pointed  out  the  place  where  the  box  was  con- 
cealed, but  we  could  not  be  certain  of  the  place  she  meant, 
without  permitting  her,  while  in  the  internal  state,  to  lead  us 
to  it:  this  the  confession  rendered  unnecessary. 

23.  In  other  cases  Emma  has  described  articles  that  have 
been  lost  by  parties  placed  en  rapport  with  her,  without  her 
being  asked  to  do  so,  or,  indeed,  anything  being  said  respecting 
them.  In  some  instances  these  have  been  most  interesting  ex- 
periments, affording  evidence  of  her  being  able  to  trace  a  series 
of  events,  totally  unknown  to  her  in  the  normal  state,  back 
through  a  number  of  years. 

24.  Several  times  she  has  been  directed  to  seek  for  persons 
in  distant  regions  of  the  globe.  Whenever  she  has  found  them, 
her  statements  of  time  and  season,  invariably  coincided  witb 
the  latitude  and  longitude  of  the  places  to  which  she  has  been 
directed.  At  present,  one  complete  proof  only  has  been  ob- 
tained of  her  really  having  a  distinct  and  truthful  perception  oe 
such  distant  objects  A  young  man  had  sailed  from  Liverpool 
for  New  York,  without  apprising  his  parents  of  his  intention  of 
doing  so,  until  the  day  the  ship  sailed.  His  parents  immediately 
vemitted  him  a  sum  of  money  by  the  mail  steamer;  but  they 
Were  subsequently  informed,  that  he  had  not  applied  for  it ;  nor 
bad  any  thing  been  heard  of  him,  alrhough  the  ship  in  which  he 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.  95 

sailed  had  long  arrived.  In  a  state  cf  anxiety  the  young  man's 
mother  came  twenty  miles  to  Bolton,  to  see  whether,  by  Em  rna'a 
means,  she  could  learn  any  thing  of  him.  After  a  little  time, 
Emma  found  him ;  described  his  appearance  correctly ;  and 
entered  into  so  many  details,  as  to  induce  his  mother  to  rely  upon 
her  statements  ;  and  to  request  me  to  make  inquiries  at  intervale 
of  about  a  fortnight.  I  did  so,  and  traced  him  by  her  means  to 
several  places  ;  and  the  information  thus  acquired,  I  transmitted 
to  his  parents.  On  the  24th  of  January,  in  the  present  year,  I 
received  a  note  from  the  young  man's  father,  informing  me  that 
*  letter  had  arrived  from  his  son,  and  that  "  it  was  a  most  strik 
mg  confirmation  of  Emma's  testimony  from  first  to  last  " 


CLAIRVOYANCE    AS   APPLIED    TO   PHYSIOLOGY 
AND    MEDICINE. 

25.  For  more  than  eighteen  months,  Emma  has  been  able 
to  see  the  internal  organs  of  the  human  body.  At  first,  only 
when  placed  in  personal  connection  with  the  individual  to  be 
examined ;  but  subsequently,  when  the  parties  were  many 
miles  distant.  In  her  best  state,  the  human  body  seems  to  he? 
completely  transparent,  and  might  be  compared  to  a  watch, 
whose  case  and  works  were  all  of  the  most  transparent  chrys- 
tal.  I  discovered  this  power  from  her  remarks  on  myself 
One  evening  she  began  to  describe  my  lungs,  as  "pink  things,"' 
full  of  holes  like  a  sponge,  with  air  in  the  holes,  and  thousands 
of  little  veins  in  all  directions.  She  said  the  right  lung  was  not 
so  good  a  color  as  the  left,  and  that  it  stuck  at  the  middle  flap. 
This  I  knew  to  be  the  case,  and  thought  she  might  only  be 
giving  utterance  to  my  own  ideas.  But  I  soon  found  that  this 
was  not  the  case  ;  but,  as  in  the  case  of  the  pictures,  she  really 
3id  see  what  she  described.  I  asked  her  some  questions  about 
the  heart,  which  she  accurately  described,  as  to  the  auricles 
and  ventricles ;  the  contained   arterial  and  venous  blood,  etc  ? 


98  APPENDIX. 

but,  as?  might  be  expected,  in  very  homely  language.  I  thought 
her  at  fault  once;  but  found,  that  while  I  was  thinking  about 
the  heart,  she  had  wandered  to  the  windpipe,  with  its  ring?. 
It  was  some  time  after  the  discovery  of  this  faculty,  before  it 
could  be  used  without  inconvenience  ;  for  when  her  attention 
was  directed  to  the  internal  organs  of  the  body,  the  strangeness 
of  the  sight,  together  with  the  universal  motion,  and  circulating 
blood,  so  terrified  her,  that  she  would  tremble  from  head  to 
foot ;  and,  when  awakened,  complained  of  being  ill  and  fright- 
ened, without  knowing  the  cause.  But,  by  degrees,  she  be- 
came familiarized  with  these  investigations,  and  she  will  now 
calmly,  and  without  any  fear,  examine  and  describe  the  inter- 
nal organs.  Her  manner  on  these  occasions  is  always  serious 
and  kind  ;  her  language  soft,  but,  from  her  want  of  education, 
imperfect.  Had  she  received  an  anatomical  education,  her  gift 
would  be  more  valuable,  or  rather,  more  accurate  descriptions 
could  be  given ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  her  want  of  education 
proves  that  she  does  not  derive  the  knowledge  of  the  interna! 
organism  of  the  body  which  she  evinces,  from  her  previously 
stored  memory.  The  application  of  this  power,  appears  to  be 
one  of  the  most  legitimate  uses  of  clairvoyance,  and  perhaps 
the  most  beneficial  in  its  application.  By  it  an  accurate  diagno- 
sis may  be  formed  of  many  iaternal  diseases,  which  elude  the 
ordinary  mode  of  research.  But  to  make  a  clairvoyant  diagno- 
sis, truly  satisfactory,  it  often  requires  the  aid  of  the  medical 
practitioner,  or  the  professed  anatomist  and  physiologist,  rightly 
to  interpret  the  language  of  the  clairvoyant.  Many  curious 
points  in  physiology,  which,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  rested 
rather  upon  rational  induction  than  positive  demonstration, 
have,  to  my  mind,  been  satisfactorily  determined  by  the  reveal- 
ments  of  clairvoyance  ;  especially  as  regards  the  action  of  the 
brain  and  nervous  system,  and  the  action  of  the  heart;  and  the 
Knowledges  thus  obtained  have  an  important  bearing  on  the 
mode  by  which  diseases  of  these  important  organs  may  b© 
tured. 

26.   On  the  4th  of  August,   1848,  a  gentleman   of  Bolton 
orcught  a  letter,  written  by  a  lady  the  wife  of  a  physician  in 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.  97 

Gloucestershire,  and  this  lady,  who  had  heard  of  other  clair- 
voyants describing  the  diseases  of  distant  people,  merely  by 
using  their  handwriting  as  a  medium  of  communication,  desired 
that  it  should  be  given  to  Emma,  to  ascertain  whether  she  could 
discover  the  condition  of  the  writer.     It  must  be  remembered 
that  Emma  could  not  read  printing,  much  less  writing;  the  sub- 
ject matter  of  the  letter  was  of  no  consequence,  it  was  the 
handwriting,  as  a  medium  of  connection.     Emma  put  it  over 
her  head,  as  she  used  to  do  with  pictures,  and  carefully  felt  it 
with  her  right  fingers,  and  then  said  "  it  was  a  lady's  up  and 
down  stroke*,"  meaning  by  that  phrase,  the  handwriting  of  a 
lady.     Siie  described  the  lady,  as  to  her  personal  appearance, 
accurately,  even  to  a  small  blemish  occasioned  by  an  accident ; 
the  interna]  organs  of  the  body;  an  affection  of  the  spine  under 
which  she  was  laboring ;  the  situation  and  appearance  of  the 
place  where  she  resided,  and  many  more  particulars.     The 
accuracy  of  her  descriptions  was  admitted  by  the  doctor;  and, 
subsequently,  I  had  an  opportunity,  personally,  to  verify  gome 
of  her  statements.     The  envelope  of  the  letter  was  directed  by 
the  doctor ;  him  she  described  correctly,  both  as  to  his  personal 
character,  general  pursuits,  and  literary  tendencies.     This  was 
an  entirely  new  experiment;  and  finding  the  result  so  unex- 
pected and  striking,  it  led  to  many  more  ;  some  of  which  were, 
apparently,  more  remarkable.     Among  others,  I  may  mention 
the  case  of  a  letter  written  by  a  gentleman  at  Cairo,  which  was 
put  into  her  hand.     She   soon   said  it  was  written  by  a  gentle- 
man, and  described  him,  as  Jo  the  condition  of  his  health,  and 
the  place  where  he  was  residing,  together  with  the  climate  and 
appearance  of  the  people  there,  even  to  the  peculiar  veil  worn 
by  the  Egyptian  ladies.     The  correctness  of  her  statement,  as 
to  the  gentleman's  condition,  was  ascertained  from  a  subsequent 
letter.     Locks  of  hair  have  also  been  similarly  used  as  a  me- 
dium ;  hut  the  handwriting  appeared  to  be  the  easier  and  bettei 
mode  of  forming  the  connection. 

27.  On  the  29th  of  September,  184  S,  an  opportunity  was 
afforded  for  an  entirely  new  manifestation  of  Emma's  powers. 
k  highly  respectable  gentleman  of  Manchester,  having  at  that 
5 


98  APPENDIX. 

time,  a  daughter  seriously  ill  with  a  cerebral  disease,  which 
baffled  the  ordinary  medical  treatment,  and  which,  in  addition 
to  bodily  infirmity,  had  produced  a  state  of  insanity,  had  been 
recommended  to  try  whether  by  clairvoyance  a  mode  of  cure 
could  be  discovered.  He  came  on  the  previous  day ;  but  Emma 
then  being  in  the  state  of  trance,  to  be  presently  described,  he 
could  not  obtain  the  information  sought.  He  left  with  me  a 
few  pencil  marks  made  by  the  lady,  as  a  means  of  forming  a 
medium  of  connection.  On  the  date  above,  I  gave  this  piece  of 
paper  to  Emma,  and  asked  her  if  she  could  find  the  person  who 
made  the  marks,  and  tell  me  what  was  the  matter  with  her; 
for  at  that  time  I  had  no  idea  of  her  selecting  any  appropriate 
remedies.  She  soon  found  the  lady ;  described,  accurately,  the 
external  symptoms  of  her  complaint,  and  also  the  internal  con 
dition  of  her  brain ;  to  which  organ  she  referred  the  whole 
cause  of  illness.  After  recommending  various  mesmeric  passes, 
she  exclaimed,  pointing  at  the  same  time  toward  the  ceiling  of 
the  room — "  There  is  what  will  cure  that  lady,  along  with 
mesmerism  ;  Eh  !  what  little  bottles  !"  These  she  described  as 
containing  little  things  like  the  small  comfits,  generally  called 
"thousands."  I  said,  "Is  there  any  thing  like  them  in  my 
shop  or  surgery  ?"  "  No !  you  have  nothing  like  them." 
"Where  can  they  be  obtained  ?"  "There — in  that  big  town 
(pointing  toward  Manchester),  in  that  shop  with  a  head  in  the 
window  ;  they  are  kept  there  in  a  drawer."  It  would  not  have 
occurred  to  me  what  medicines  she  meant,  but  that  in  the  pre- 
vious month,  when  in  London,  I  had  been  shown,  by  a  lady, 
a  case  of  homeopathic  medicines.  I  do  not  recollect  ever  before 
seeing  any ;  and  I  was  quite  ignorant  at  that  time  as  to  the 
mode  of  preparing  and  using  them.  I  am  certain  also,  that  in 
her  normal  state  Emma  knew  nothing  about,  nor  had  ever  seen, 
any  of  these  medicines.  The  shop,  I  subsequently  found,  was 
Mr.  Turner's,  homeopathic  chemist,  Piccadilly,  Manchester, 
*nd  in  the  shop  window,  there  was  a  bust  of  Hahneman,  the 
founder  of  homeopathy.  But  I  was  ignorant  that  there  was 
Buch  a  shop  in  that  neighborhood,  having  seldom  occasion  to  go 
to  that  part  of  the  city      I  wrote  to  the  gentleman  in'orming 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.  99 

niiM  of  Emma's  remarks ;  and  he  directly  purchased  a  case  from 
Mr.  Turner,  and  came  over  to  Bolton  to  ascertain  the  particu- 
lars. The  sealed  box  was  put  into  Emma's  hand,  and  as  soon 
iis  she  had  put  it  over  her  head,  she  said  that  it  contained  the 
medicines  she  before  saw  :  and  pointed  especially  to  the  situation 
of  one  bottle  in  the  case.  When  the  case  was  opened,  she 
selected  a  bottle  from  the  place  she  had  pointed  out,  and  tasted 
the  globules  through  the  glass,  without  attempting  to  draw  the 
cork.  By  way  of  test,  the  bottle  was  put  into  another  part  of 
the  case,  and  other  bottles  slipped  into  her  hand ;  but  she  in- 
variably detected  the  change,  by  tasting  through  the  glass,  and 
putting  the  bottle  to  her  forehead.  From  that  time,  the  pre- 
scribed globules  were  daily  administered,  and  the  mesmeric 
passes  regularly  made ;  and  the  result  is,  the  restoration  of  the 
lady  to  health,  both  in  mind  and  body. 

28.  The  result  of  this  experiment  opened  a  new  field  for 
inquiry,  and  led  to  repeated  trials.  A  quantity  of  the  usual 
medicines  were  mixed  with  sugar,  and  put  into  small  vials,  and 
given  her  with  the  homeopathic  medicines,  and  these  she  would 
select  and  test  in  the  same  way;  namely,  by  tasting  them 
through  the  bottle.  Sometimes  she  would  select  homeopathic 
remedies  ;  at  other  times,  the  usual  ones.  She  invariably  calls 
those  which  she  considers  suitable  for  the  disease,  nice ;  the 
others  she  calls  nasty ;  but  I  sometimes  found,  that  the  "nice'' 
medicines  were  intensely  bitter ;  such,  for  instance,  as  the  sul- 
phate of  quinine.  How  she  obtains  this  intuitive  knowledge  of 
medicines  I  cannot  discover.  The  homeopathic  remedies  have 
generally  been  the  best  that  could  be  selected  according  to  that 
theory  of  therapeutics ;  and  the  usual  medicines  have  been  quite 
as  judiciously  prescribed,  as  to  their  qualities;  but  of  the  quan- 
tity, and  mode  of  preparation  she  was  unable  to  speak.  Some- 
times she  was  unable  to  point  out  any  remedies  for  the  disor- 
ders she  described  ;  and  hence  the  necessity  for  a  knowledge 
of  the  properties  of  medicine,  in  some  one,  in  order  to  profit  by 
her  revealments.  Her  powers  appear  to  be  chiefly  applicable 
to  nervous  diseases ,  and  diseases  of  the  lungs,  liver,  and  heart. 
Miny  cases  have  been  submitted  to  her,  from  different  pa**3 


100  1PPENDIX. 

»f  the  country;  and  some  of  these,  of  a  most  serious  character 
have  been  rapidly  cured  by  an  adoption  of  the  means  recom- 
mended. Since  the  period  when  this  faculty  for  examining  and 
prescribing  for  distant  patients  was  discovered,  a  change  has 
passed  over  her;  and  she  can  now  do  without  any  medium  of 
jonnection  ;  but  requires  the  name  and  address  of  the  party 
seeking  relief,  and  that  appears  to  be  sufficient  to  enable  her  to 
discover  them.  But  the  handwriting  of  the  patient,  or  the  in- 
tervention of  some  friend,  seems  to  insure  greater  accuracy. 
Upon  awakening  from  these  clairvoyant  examinations,  Emma 
has  no  recollection  of  any  thing  she  has  said  or  done  ;  they 
being,  in  this  respect,  like  all  other  mesmeric  trances.  But  of 
course,  the  information  thus  obtained  is  available  to  the  medical 
practitioner  in  all  similar  cases. 

29.  Her  statements  of  the  way  in  which  some  diseases  are 
removed,  and  of  the  permeability  of  the  solid  tissues  of  the  body, 
are  very  remarkable  ;  but  at  the  same  time  are  in  accordance 
with  the  suggestions  of  profound  physiologists ;  and,  moreover, 
they  seem  to  be  borne  out  by  the  facts  of  the  case. 

.30.  That  exalted  sense,  before  referred  to,  which  enables  her 
f.o  see  things  to  which  her  attention  is  directed,  as  apparently 
within  the  sphere  of  vision,  whatever  their  locality,  is  also  mani- 
fest, though  in  another  mode,  in  her  selection  of  medicines;  for 
by  tasting  through  the  bottle,  she  has  been  enabled  to  identify 
the  homeopathic  globules  with  the  tinctures  from  which  they 
are  prepared  !  This  may  be  considered  one  of  the  strongest 
proofs  that  a  medicinal  virtue  resides  in  them ;  for  so  highly 
attenuated  are  the  dilutions  with  which  they  are  saturated,  that 
to  the  ordinary  sense,  they  all  taste  alike,  and  merely  of  the 
sugar  of  milk,  of  which  the  body  of  the  globule  is  composed ; 
Mid  I  understand  that  tl:ey  are  not  cognizable,  even  by  chami- 
csl  test. 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.        101 


SPONTANEOUS  EXTASIS,  OR  TRANCE. 

3 1 .  The  foregoing  uotes  refer  to  the  phenomena  witnessed 
in  the  state  of  induced  extasis,  or  mesmeric  trance ;  the  ensuing, 
very  briefly  relate  states  of  a  much  higher,  or  more  interior 
character,  and  differing,  in  some  respects  essentially,  from  the 
observed  facts  of  ordinary  mesmerism. 

32.  Frequently  during  the  spring  and  summer,  Emma  would, 
in  the  mesmeric  state,  speak  of  the  scenery  and  nature  of  the 
spirit- world,  in  such  a  way  as  to  impress  the  beholder  with  a 
conviction  that  the  descriptions  she  gave  could  not  be  the  result 
of  any  previously  acquired  knowledge,  or  of  an  active  imagina- 
tion. She  also  occasionally  spoke  of  things  which  had  actually 
occurred,  but  which  it  was  impossible  for  her  to  know  by  any 
ordinary  means.  Her  ideas  of  religion  were  principally  de- 
rived from  the  teachings  of  a  village  schoolmistress,  in  connec- 
tion with  the  Church  of  England,  and  from  occasional  attend- 
ance at  the  public  services  of  the  church.  She  had  been  taught 
to  read  a  little  when  a  child,  but  had  lost  the  acquirement 
through  a  fever ;  and,  as  before  observed,  at  this  time  she  could 
not  read,  nor  even  correctly  tell  the  letters  of  the  alphabet ;  and 
yet  the  ideas  to  which  she  sometimes  gave  utterance  were  of 
an  elegant  and  exalted  description.  As  she  still  continued  to 
have  no  recollection  of  what  she  uttered  when  she  returned  to 
the  normal  state,  I  one  day  said  to  her,  "  Emma,  I  have  heard 
of  some  persons  having  seen  such  things  as  you  speak  of,  but; 
they  could  recollect  what  they  saw,  and  write  an  account  of  it 
in  book's."  She  replied,  "  Yes ;  because  it  was  permitted  them; 
and  she  should  also  be  permitted  by  and  by  to  lecollect  ivhat  she 
saw."  I  did  not  tell  her  this  when  she  awoke;  nor  did  I  expect 
then  that  her  prediction  would  be  verified.  But  subsequent 
events  proved  that  she  was  correct  in  making  this  assertion. 

33.  The  first  of  these  spontaneous  states  of  extasis,  or  spirit- 
ual trance,  occurred  on  the  3rd  of  July,  1848,  without  any  ex- 
pectation or  forewarning  on  her  part.  This  did  not  last  more 
thin  a  quarter  of  an  hour.     Afterward  she  had  several  which 


Itf2  APPENDIX. 

.asted  about  half  an  hour;  and  since  these,  some  wjich  Lave 
exten  led  from  four  to  tea  hours.  Of  most  of  these  states,  she 
had  a  presentiment  while  in  the  mesmeric  state;  and  in  one 
instance  foretold  the  occurrence  nearly  two  months  before  it 
happened.  But  she  knew  nothing  of  what  was  forthcoming 
while  in  her  ordinary  wakeful  state  ;  and  for  the  sake  of  experi 
ment,  and  to  test  the  truthfulness  of  her  predictions,  she  was 
never  informed  when  these  trances  were  to  occur;  yet  she  was 
found  correct,  even  to  the  exact  time.  They  have  usually  been 
preceded  by  a  feeling  of  quietness,  and  a  somewhat  confused 
sensation  in  the  head,  but  no  pain.  Several  gentlemen  whom 
I  had  apprised  of  her  statements,  have  been  witnesses  of  their 
accuracy,  and  of  the  genuineness  of  this  abnormal  condition. 

34.  In  these  states  she  preserved  a  recollection,  at  times,  of 
the  place  she  was  actually  in,  and  of  the  persons  by  whom  she 
was  surrounded,  and,  at  the  same  time,  she  had  a  distinct  and 
sensational  perception  of  a  higher  and  spiritual  state  of  exist- 
ence, and  of  a  class  of  beings  living  in  such  a  state.  She  would 
speak  of  these  things  while  in  the  trance,  and  on  her  return  to 
the  normal  state  she  could  recollect,  and  would  again  describe 
what  she  had  seen  and  heard.  During  the  first  trance,  of  four 
hours  duration,  which  occurred  on  the  28th  of  September,  1848, 
she  was  so  far  elevated  in  her  perceptions  that  she  spoke  of  this 
world,  as  the  other  world,  just  as  if  she  had  passed  from  this 
life  by  death.  She  said,  also,  that  the  perons  in  the  room  with 
her  appeared  only  like  shadows,  and  a  long  way  from  her. 
Upon  examination  she  was  found,  in  this  and  other  trances, 
insensible  to  pain,  and  her  eyes  upturned,  as  in  the  ordinary 
mesmeric  state,  and  her  limbs  continued  flexible.  At  times  she 
would  seem  wholly  indrawn,  and  then  she  would,  as  it  were, 
return  and  speak  of  what  was  passing  before  her  mental  vision. 
But  in  the  next  trance,  of  six  hours'  duration,  and  subsequently, 
she  became  for  a  part  of  it  quite  insensible  to  all  outward  things, 
und  perfectly  cataleptic  from  h^ad  to  foot.  A  gentleman  from 
Manchester,  who  was  present  with  me  on  this  occasion,  assisted 
me  to  raise  her  body,  anc  we  found  it  as  still  and  inflexible  ai 
a  log  of  w)od. 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPEDIENCE.        103 

35.  I  took  the  opportunity,  during  one  of  these  trances,  to 
ascertain 'whether  she  could  see  concealed  natural  substances, 
as  in  the  ordinary  mesmeric  state.  I  put  my  hand  in  my  pocket 
and  withdrew  it  with  a  shilling  concealed  in  the  closed  fist.  1 
inquired,  "What  have  I  in  my  hand?"  "  Only  a  shilling," 
was  the  immediate  reply.  It  must  be  remembered  that  the 
eyelids  were  closed,  and  the  eyeballs  up-turned,  so  as  totally  to 
prevent  ordinary  vision.  1  then  put  my  hand  into  my  pocket 
again,  and  withdrew  it  with  a  half-a-crown  and  a  shilling  en- 
closed, and  asked  her,  "  Can  j^ou  see  what  is  now  in  my  hand  ?" 
she  replied,  "  Stop  a  little,  till  I've  seen  these,"  alluding  to  the 
spiritual  objects  then  engrossing  her  attention  ;  but  when  I  again 
asked  her,  she  was  about  coming  out  of  the  trance,  and  could 
not.  then  see. 

36.  One  instance  of  her  sight  will  be  related,  because  it  is  a 
proof  that  there  is  a  reality  in  her  extatic  perceptions,  and  that 
she  then  eminently  possesses  a  super-sensual  gift.  On  the 
11th  of  July  she  told  me,  when  in  the  mesmeric  state,  Ihat  an 
individual  whom  I  well  knew,  but  who  had  been  dead  f<>r  some 
years,  had  told  her  that  on  the  following  night  they  should  come 
to  her,  and  show  her  a  book  with  some  writing  in,  w'aich  she 
was  to  take  and  show  to  me.  From  some  of  her  remarks,  I 
concluded  that  one  of  three  books  was  intended  : — on.>,  a  small 
bible,  not  then  in  the  house.  Former  experience  ht  ring  con- 
vinced me  of  the  reality  of  her  observations,  and  the  certainty 
of  her  predictions,  I  got  this  little  bible,  and  put  it  with  the 
other  books,  among  many  more.  In  the  night  she  a  »voke  in  a 
state  of  trance,  similar  to  somnambulism,  and  descending  two 
flights  of  stairs,  selected  this  book  from  all  the  others,  and  then 
brought  it  open  to  me.  Owing  to  the  darkness,  I  inadvertently 
knocked  the  book  out  of  her  hand,  while  seeking  a  light.  She 
speedily  found  the  place  again,  by  turning  over  the  pages  right 
and  left,  over  her  head,  in  her  usual  mesmeric  manner.  The 
passage  selected  wTas  Joshua,  chap.  1st,  verses  8,  9.  Frequently 
afterward,  by  way  of  test,  this  bible  was  given  to  her  to  point 
out  this  text;  and  this  she  invariably  did  before  many  persons, 
•vitb;  lit  attempting  to  look  at  it,  but  by  feeling  the   pages  and 


t04  _  APPENDIX. 

turning  tli&m  over  while  the  book  was  over  her  hiad.  She 
also  told  me  circumstances  connected  with  the  history  of  that 
book,  which  I  am  positive  she  could  not  know  by  any  of  the 
usual  means ;  for  some  were  :nly  known  to  myself.  She  was 
asked  to  tell  by  what  means  sha  found  the  passage,  as  she  couid 
not  read,  and  was  also  in  the  dark.  She  replied,  that  the  in- 
dividuals alluded  to,  whom  she  said  she  saw  in  their  spiritual 
body,  had  a  similar  book,  but  a  larger  one,  open  upon  the  left 
arm,  and  that  they  pointed  with  the  right  hand  to  the  pages, 
and  the  same  text;  that  her  hands  seemed  guided  in  their 
movements,  and  when  she  had  got  the  right  place,  she  could 
no  longer  tarn  the  pages,  either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left ! 
Another  instance  of  a  similar  kind  occurred  a  few  weeks  later. 
After  the  lapse  of  some  months,  she  was  again  tried  with  the 
small  bible  ;  but  having  then  lost  the  connecting  influence,  she 
could  no  longer  find  the  passage  as  she  had  previously  done. 

37.  The  subjects  of  these  trances  would  afford  matter  for 
many  pages ;  but  some  were  of  a  private  character,  and,  al- 
though highly  interesting  to  the  parties  concerned,  would  not 
ae  interesting  to  others,  except  as  illustrating  the  nature  of  the 
spirit's  home,  and  some  of  the  general  laws  by  which  spiritual 
associations  are  regulated.  All  that  she  has  said  tends  to  con- 
firm the  distinction  between  moral  good  and  moral  evil,  and  the 
impossibility  of  those  who  depart  this  life  in  a  state  of  moral 
evil,  attaining  hereafter,  to  a  state  of  moral  goodness ;  in  this 
respect,  being  strikingly  dissimilar  to  the  statements  of  Davis, 
the  American  clairvoyant;  but  who,  according  to  his  own  sub- 
sequent statements,  had  never  been  in  the  state  of  true  spiritual 
extasis,  when  he  delivered  his  lectures  in  the  mesmeric  state. 

38.  Her  general  statements  represent  man  as  a  spiritual 
being,  rising  from  the  shell  of  the  dead  body  immediately  after 
death,  a  perfectly  organized  existence,  and  having  a  complete 
sensational  perception  of  his  fellow  spiritual  beings,  and  of  the 
beautiful  scenery  of  the  spiritual  spheres;  that  is,  provided  he 
possessed  during  his  natural  life  a  moral  state,  in  harmony  with 
those  spheres.  The  male  and  female  sex  retaining  all  the 
characterises  necessary  to  a  s\  ritual  state  of  existeuce,  and 


MESMERIC    AND    PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.       105 

living  together  in  a  state  of  angelic  union,  'jfliose  who  have 
been  interiorly  united  here,  coming  again  into  a  state  of  union 
hereaftei.  She  represents  male  and  female  spiritual  beings, 
thus  united,  as  appearing  at  a  distance  as  one,  and  says  that 
they  are  not  called  two,  nor  the  married,  but  the  one.  Infanta 
and  young  children,  who  have  passed  from  this  world  by  death, 
are  stated  to  grow  to  a  state  of  adolescence,  but  more  speedily 
than  in  the  natural  world.  During  infancy  and  early  childhood, 
they  are  confided  to  the  care  of  good  female  spirits,  or  angels, 
whose  delight  it  is  to  instruct  them  by  various  methods,  espe- 
cially by  representatives  of  things.  These  spiritual  spheres, 
and  their  spiritual  inhabitants,  are  in  close  association  with  us, 
and  exercise  an  influence  over  us,  although  we  are  unconscious 
of  it.  All  that  is  wanted  to  have  a  sensational  knowledge  of 
their  existence,  is  the  closing  of  the  external  consciousness,  and 
a  full  awakening  of  the  internal  consciousness.  In  the  highest 
state  of  trance,  she  appeared  io  herself,  to  be  among  spiritual 
beings,  as  one  of  themselves ;  at  other  times  she  appeared  to 
them  more  shadowy.  The  first  receptacle  of  the  departed 
spirit  she  describes  as  a  sort  of  middle  place  or  state,  from 
which  the  good  gradually  ascend  to  higher  and  more  delightful 
places;  those  that  are  the  best  having  higher  abodes  than  the 
others.  All  are  welcomed  by  angelic  spirits,  on  their  arrival  in 
the  spirit-world ;  but  the  evil  will  not  associate  with  the  good, 
and  recede  of  their  own  accord,  more  or  less  rapidly,  to  darker 
places  below  and  to  the  left;  but  of  these  darker  places,  she 
had  not  been  permitted  to  know  so  much  as  of  the  abodes  of 
the  good. 

39.  Being  asked,  in  one  of  these  long  trances,  if  she  now 
tould  explain  how  she  saw  distant  individuals  in  the  mesmeric 
state ;  she  said,  "  Yes ;  I  can  see  how  it  is  now,  but  I  could  not 
before  ;"  and  then  stated  that  if  spirits  wished  to  see  each  other, 
distance  is  no  interruption ;  and  words  to  the  effect  that  spirits 
are  not  subject  to  our  laws  of  space  and  time  ;  and  that  man, 
as  to  his  spirit,  is  a  su  >jecfc  of  the  laws  of  the  spirit-wTorld,  even 
while  united  to  the  natural  body.  The  opening  of  her  spiritual 
Eonsn  msness,  gives  her  a  sensational  perception  of  the  spirit* 
5* 


106  APPENDIX. 

of  all  to  whom  ner  attention  is  directed ;  and  tlaus1  however  dis- 
tant the  individual,  he  can  be  mentally  present  with  her.  But 
this  she  further  repiesented,  as  being  accomplished  by  the  aid 
of  intermediate  associate  spirits,  by  whom  the  connection  is 
completed ;  and  she  further  represented  every  one,  as  having  a 
connection  with  the  spirit-world  generally  ;  and  a  more  par- 
ticular one,  by  means  of  this  associate  spirit.  Whenever  Emma 
speaks  of  going  into  a  trance,  she  always  represents  it  as  "going 
away"  and  "  going  a  very  long  way."  Of  any  one  that  is  dead, 
she  says,  "  They  have  left  their  shell  and  gone  away,"  and  will 
aever  admit  that  they  are  dead. 

40.  In  the  mesmeric  state,  Emma  represented  the  fibres  of 
her  brain  as  falling  forward,  and  the  hemispheres  separating  at 
the  top,  when  she  became  lucid ;  and  she  further  said,  that  a 
brain  capable  of  these  movements  was  necessary  in  order  to 
attain  a  state  of  lucidity.  In  one  of  the  spontaneous  trances, 
I  asked  her  if  she  could  see  me  in  the  same  manner  as  when 
mesmerised.  She  replied,  that  she  had  no  recollection  of 
the  state  of  her  brain  while  in  the  mesmeric  state ;  but  that  in 
the  state  she  then  was,  eveiy  thing  seemed  light,  or  rather  was 
seen  in  light.  She  knew  that  she  did  not  see  with  the  eye, 
and  yet  somehow  she  seemed  to  use  her  eyes.  She  saw  m« 
plainly ;  yet  I  did  not  appear  as  I  ordinarily  did ;  she  could  not 
explain  the  difference,  only  that  I  appeared  light.  It  appeared 
to  her,  that  light  issued  from  within,  outward.  During  a  sub- 
sequent long  trance,  I  inquired  whether  she  could  see  my  lunga 
then  as  she  had  done  when  mesmerised.  She  replied  in  the 
negative,  and  said,  "  I  can  only  see  ycu  as  a  cloud ;  yet  I  know 
it  is  you." 


PRACTICE  AND  USE   OF  MESMERISM. 

41.  The  induction  of  the  mesmeric  sleep,  or  the  practice  of 
mesmerism  as  a  curative  agent,  is  a  very  simple  process.  I  am 
inclined  to  jelieve,  that  the  result  depends  more  on  the  pecu- 


MESMERIC    AND   PSYCHICAL    EXPERIENCE.        107 

liar  constitution  of  the  subject,  than  the  power  of  the  mesmer^ 
iser  All  that  is  required,  is  patience,  and  a  proper  disposition 
in  botli  parties.  Let  the  subject  sit  down  in  the  easiest  and 
most  comfortable  posture.  The  operator  should  be  seated  in 
front,  and  take  both  hands  of  his  patient  in  his  left  hand,  placing 
his  right  hand  on  the  head.  Then  gently  and  slowly  continue 
to  make  passes  forward  o>  3r  the  face — the  operator  looking 
steadfastly  at  the  eyes  of  the  subject.  The  room  should  not  be 
too  light,  and  everything  kept  quiet.  The  subject  should  keep 
his  eyes  fixed  on  those  of  the  operator,  and  yield  himself  unre- 
servedly to  his  influence.  If  this  course  is  persevered  in  for 
twenty  or  thirty  minutes,  some  effect  will  generally  be  observ 
ed  ;  and  if  the  subject  is  susceptible,  probably  within  five  or  ten 
minutes  the  sleep  may  be  induced.  If  the  front  passes  do  not 
succeed,  then  it  will  be  well  to  try  backward  passes  from  the 
forehead,  over  the  head  and  partly  down  the  spine,  each  party 
steadfastly  regarding  each  other's  eyes  as  before. 

42.  As  a  general  rule,  more  striking  effects  may  be  expected, 
when  the  sleep  can  be  produced  ;  but  it,  must  not  be  forgotten 
that  good  may  be  done  where  the  patient  cannot  go  into  the 
state  of  coma.  Where  the  object  is  to  relieve  pain,  first  try 
to  produce  the  coma ;  but  if  not  practicable,  or  the  patient  ob- 
jects, then  simply  make  passes  with  both  hands  downwards, 
slowly  and  gently,  over  the  parts  affected,  allowing  the  fingers 
lightly  to  touch  the  person  of  the  patient,  and  well  shaking  the 
hands  after  each  pass.  This  may  be  smiled  at  by  the  incredu- 
lous and  inexperienced  in  these  matters  ;  but  I  have  had  proof 
that  disease  may  be  put  into  the  syslem,  and  transmitted  by 
passes  from  one  subject  to  another.  In  cases  of  what  are  called 
nervous  headaches,  the  passes  should  be  made  from  the  fore- 
head over  the  head  to  the  nape  of  the  neck ;  and  then  from  the 
forehead  along  the  base  of  the  brain  ;  that  is,  just  over,  and  be- 
hind the  ears  and  a  little  way  down  the  neck,  and  then  shake 
the  hands  after  each  pass,  as  before.  This  will  generally  relieve 
headache  in  five  or  ten  minutes,  if  properly  performed.  No 
fear  neer1  be  felt  as  to  the  arousing  of  the  patient.  Fresh  pa- 
tients will  geie  rally  awaken  spontaneously.     But  by  continued 


APPENDIX. 

back  and  upward  passes,  from  the  chest  over  the  face  and  head, 
or  by  upwardly  fanning  the  face,  the  patient  will  be  aroused. 

43.  The  curative  influence  of  mesmerism,  as  it  proceeds 
primarily  from  the  will  of  the  operator,  though  generally  re- 
quiring the  proper  manipulations  to  make  it  susceptible,  I  pro- 
pose to  call  Parapsycheism,  from  the  Greek  words  Parapsyche, 
to  soothe  or  comfort,  psyche,  the  animal  soul  or  mind. 

44.  The  diseases  to  which  parapsycheism,  or  the  curative 
influence  of  mesmerism,  may  be  most  beneficially  applied,  are 
those  of  the  brain,  and  nervous  and  functional  diseases.  Pain- 
ful affections  of  the  head,  incipient  and  partial  insanity,  deter- 
minations of  blood  to  the  brain,  giddiness  and  stupor,  delirium 
tremens,  and  other  affections  of  the  brain  maybe,  in  most  cases, 
speedily  relieved  by  the  application  of  the  parapsycheic,  or 
mesmeric  influence,  especially  if  combined  with  proper  medi- 
cal treatment,  and  due  management.  But  none  of  the  old  sys- 
tem of  treatment,  bleeding  and  blistering,  setoning  and  purging, 
must  be  allowed.  The  same  remark  applies  to  the  whole  range 
of  neuralgic,  and  what  are  called  rheumatic  affections ;  and 
organic,  as  well  as  functional  diseases  of  the  heart,  liver,  and 
lungs.  In  all  painful  cases,  it  would  be  well  to  endeavor  to 
bring  this  soothing  influence  into  operation.  No  harm  will 
ever  be  done,  if  the  passes  are  made  in  the  manner  direoted, 
and  with  a  proper  feeling  and  desire  to  do  good.  But  while 
censuring  the  old  practice  of  medicine,  in  the  cases  above 
alluded  to,  fairness  obliges  me  to  say  that  equal  blame  attaches 
to  some  enthusiastic  mesmerists,  who,  from  their  partial  know- 
ledge are  led  to  despise  and  misrepresent  all  medical  treat- 
ment. The  very  circumstance  of  true  clairvoyants  prescribing 
medicines,  proves  that  those  most  under  its  influence  perceive 
mesmerism  to  be  only  one  among  other  means  of  restoring  and 
preserving  health. 

45.  But  the  full  use  of  mesmerism,  as  a  curative  agent,  will 
never  be  thoroughly  known  until  there  are  better  opportunities 
for  its  practice  than  at  present  exist.  It  cannot  be  expected 
that  medical  men  should  generally  be  the  actual  mesmerisers, 
as  they  would  no'  be  able,  except  in  a  few  cases,  to  bestow  the 


A    STRANGE    STORY.  1    6 

necessary  time.  It,  therefore,  requires  a  class  of  trained  male 
and  female  mesmerisers  to  act  under  the  superintendence  of 
qualified  medical  practitioners,  and  perhaps  it  would  be  most 
successfully  carried  out  in  establishments  similar  to  Hydropa- 
thic Institutions,  but  more  universal  in  their  means  of  cure. 

46.  In  conclusion,  I -would  observe  to  those  who  may  read 
these  pages  doubtingly — experiment  for  yourselves,  not  confin- 
ing your  attention  to  one  or  two  cases,  but  patiently  investigat- 
ing wherever  opportunity  offers ;  and  the  probability  is,  that 
vou  will  speedily  be  convinced,  by  actual  observation,  of  the 
general  truths  of  mesmerism,  and  of  its  efficacy,  as  an  agent 
for  the  relief  of  human  affliction. 


The  following  appeared  in  the  London  Times  of  Septem 
ber  13, 1849,  and  has  been  kindly  sent  us  by  William  Turner. 
M  D.,  of  New  York. 

A.  STRANGE  STORY. 

[From  the  Bolton  Chronicle.] 

On  Saturday,  July  14,  a  letter  was  received  by  Messrs.  C. 
R.  Arrowsmith  &  Co.,  of  this  town,  from  Bradford,  Yorkshire, 
containing  a  Bank  of  England  note  for  c£500,  another  for  <£50, 
and  a  bill  of  exchange  for  dfilOO.  These  Mr.  Arrowsmith 
tianded  over,  in  the  regular  mode  of  business,  to  Mr.  William 
Lomax,  his  cashier,  who  took,  or  sent,  as  he  supposed,  the 
whole  to  the  bank  of  Bolton,  and  made  an  entry  accordingly 
in  his  cash-book.  The  bank-book  was  then  at  the  bank,  so  that 
no  memorandum  of  the  payment  was  received  or  expected. 
After  the  expiration  of  about  five  weeks,  upon  comparing  the 
bank-book  with  the  cash-book,  it.  was  found  that  no  entry  for 
these  sums  was  in  the  bank-book.  Inquiry  was  then  made  at 
the  bank,  but  noth  ag  was  known  of  the  monej\  nor  was  there 
any  entry  existing  in  any  book  or  paper  there ;  and,  after 
searching  no  trace  xmld  be  found  of  the  missing  money.     In 


110  APPENDIX. 

fact,  tne  parties  at  the  bank  denied  ever  having  rsteived  the 
sums,  or  knowing  any  thing  of  the  transaction.  Before  the 
discovery  of  the  loss  the  bill  had  become  due,  but  upon  inquir- 
ing after  the  loss  was  discovered,  it  was  found  that  it  had  not 
been  presented  for  payment.  It  was,  therefore,  concluded 
that  as  the  notes  and  bill  could  not  be  found  at  the  bank,  nor 
any  trace  or  entiy  connected  with  them,  the  probability  was 
that  they  were  lost  or  stolen,  and  that  the  bill  had  been  de- 
stroyed to  avoid  detection.  Mr.  Lomax  had  a  distinct  recollec- 
tion of  having  received  the  notes,  etc.,  from  Mr.  Arrowsmith, 
but  from  the  length  of  time  that  had  elapsed  when  the  loss  was 
discovered,  he  could  not  remember  what  he  had  done  with 
them — whether  lie  had  taken  them  to  the  bank,  or  sent  them 
by  the  accustomed  messenger — nor  could  the  messenger  recol- 
lect any  thing  about  them. 

As  might  be  expected,  this  unaccountable  loss  occasioned 
great  anxiety  tu  Mr.  Lomax,  and  in  this  emergency  he  applied 
to  a  friend,  to  whom  the  discovery  of  Mr.  Wood's  cash-box  was 
known,  to  ascertain  the  probability  of  the  notes,  etc.,  being 
found  by  the  aid  of  clairvoyance.  The  friend  replied  that  he 
saw  no  greater  difficulty  in  this  case  than  in  Wood's,  and  re- 
commended him  to  make  the  inquiry,  which  he  said  he  wouid 
do,  it"  only  for  his  own  satisfaction. 

On  Friday,  August  24,  Mr.  Lomax,  accompanied  by  Mr.  V 
Jones,  of  Ashbourne  street,  Bolton,  called  on  Mr.  Haddock  foi 
this  purpose.  The  clairvoyante  was  put  into  a  psychic  &tate. 
and  then  into  connection  with  Mr.  Lomax.  She  directly  usked 
for  "  the  paper,"  meaning  the  letter  in  which  the  notes  and  bill 
were  inclosed  ;  but  this  Mr.  Lomax  did  not  appear  to  have  in 
his  possession,  and  she  said  she  could  not  tell  anything  without 
it.  This  sitting,  therefore,  was  so  far  useless.  The  next  day 
Mr.  Lomax  brought  the  letter,  and  Mr.  Haduock  requested 
that  the  contents  might,  not  be  communicated  to  him,  lest  it 
should  be  supposed  that  he  had  suggested  any  thing  to  her. 
After  considerable  thought,  the  clairvoyante  said  that  there  had 
been  three  different  papers  for  money  in  that  letter — not  post- 
Dffice  orders,  but  papers  that  came  cut  of  a  place  where  people 


A    STRANGE    STORy.  Ill 

kopl  money  in  (a  bank),  and  were  to  be  taken  to  another  place 
of  a  similar  kind  ;  that  these  papers  came  in  the  letter  to  another 
gentleman  (Mr.  Arrowsmith),  who  gave  them  to  the  one  present 
(Mr.  Lomax),  who  put  them  in  a  paper,  and  put  them  in  a 
red  book  that  wrapped  round  (a  pocket-book).  Mr.  Lomax 
then,  to  the  surprise  of  Mr.  Haddock,  pulled  from  his  coat- 
pocket  a  deep,  red  pocket-book,  made  just  as  she  had  described 
it,  and  said  that  was  the  book  in  which  he  was  in  the  habit  of 
placing  similar  papers. 

Mr.  Lomax  said  the  clairvoyante  was  right ;  that  the  letter 
contained  two  Bank  of  England  notes  and  a  bill  of  exchange ; 
but  did  not  say  what  was  the  value  of  the  notes.  Mr.  Haddock 
then  put  a  c£lO  Bank  of  England  note  into  the  clairvoyante'shand. 
She  said  that  two  of  the  papers  were  like  that,  but  more  valu- 
able, and  that  the  black  and  white  word  at  the  corner  was 
longer.  She  further  said  that  these  notes,  etc.,  were  taken  to 
a  place  where  money  was  kept  (a  bank),  down  there  (pointing 
toward  Deansgate).  Beyond  this  no  further  inquiry  was  made 
at  that  sitting. 

On  Monday,  Mr.  Lomax  called  again.  The  clairvoyante 
went  over  the  case  again,  entering  more  minutely  into  particu- 
lars. She  persisted  in  her  former  statements,  that  she  could 
seethe  "marks"  of  the  notes  in  the  red  pocket-book,  and  could 
see  them  in  the  banking-house ;  that  they  were  in  paper,  and 
put  along  with  many  more  papers  in  a  part  of  the  bank;  that 
they  were  taken  by  a  man  at  the  bank,  who  put  them  aside 
without  making  any  entry,  or  taking  any  further  notice  of  them. 
She  said  that  the  people  at  the  bank  did  not  mean  to  do  wrong, 
but  that  it  arose  from  the  want  of  due  attention.  Upon  its 
being  stated  that  she  might  be  wrong,  and  requesting  her  to 
look  elsewhere,  she  said  that  it  was  no  use  ;  that  she  could  see 
they  were  in  the  bank,  and  no  where  else  ;  that  she  could  not 
say  any  thing  else,  without  saying  what  was  not  true  :  and  that 
if  search  were  made  at  the  bank,  there,  she  said,  they  would 
be  found.  In  the  evening,  Mr.  Arrowsmith,  Mr.  Makant,  and 
Mr.  Jones  came  again,  and  she  was  put  in  a  psychic  stare,  to 
repeat  these  particulars  in  theft  presence,  which  was  done. 


112  APPENDIX. 

Mr.  Haddock  then  said  to  Mr.  Arrowsmith,  that  he  was 
tolerably  confident  that  the  clairvoyante  was  right,,  and  that  he 
should  recommend  him  to  go  next  day  to  the  bank,  and  insist 
on  a  further  search,  stating  that  he  felt  convinced,  from  inqui- 
ries he  had  made,  that  his  cashier  had  brought  the  money 
there.  Mr.  Makant  also  urged  the  same  course  on  Mr.  Ar- 
rowsmith. 

T^he  following  morning  (Tuesday,  August  2S),  Mr.  Arrow- 
smith  went  to  the  bank,  and  insisted  on  further  search.  He 
was  told  that,  after  such  a  search  as  had  been  made,  it  was 
useless,  but  that,  to  satisfy  him,  it  should  be  made  again.  Mr. 
Arrowsmith  left  for  Manchester,  and  after  his  departure  a 
further  search  was  made  ;  and  among  a  lot  of  papers,  in  an  in- 
ner room  of  the  bank,  which  were  not  likely  to  have  been  med- 
dled with  again  probably  for  years,  or  which  might  never  have 
been  noticed  again,  were  found  the  notes  and  bill,  wrapped  ia 
paper,  just  as  the  clairvoyante  had  described  them. 


Works  on  Phrenology  and  Physiognomy. 


moral  Philosophy  ;  or,  the  Duties 
of  Man  considered  in  his  Individual, 
Domestic  and  Social  Capacities.  By 
George  Combk.    $1.50. 

Natural  Laws  of  Man,-  Questions 
with  Answers.  By  J.  G.  Spurzheim. 
Muslin.  50  cents. 

New  Physiognomy;  or,  Signs  of 
Character,  as  manifested  through  Tem- 
perament and  External  Forms,  and 
especially  in  the  "Human  Face  Di- 
vine." With  more  than  One  Thousand 
Illustrations.  By  S.  R.  Wells.  In  three 
styles  of  binding.  Price,  in  one  12mo 
volume,  768  pp.  Muslin,  $5;  heavy  calf, 
marbled  edges,  $8;  Turkey  morocco, 
full  gilt,  $10. 

Phrenology  and  the  Scriptures. 

By  Rev.  John  Pierpont.    25  cents. 

Phrenology  Proved,  Illustra- 

ted,  and  Applied.    $1.50. 

Phrenological  Busts. —  Showing 
the  latest  classification,  and  exact  loca- 
tion of  the  Organs  of  the  Brain,  fully 
developed,  designed  for  Learners.  It 
is  divided  so  as  to  show  each  individual 
Organ  on  one  side;  and  all  the  groups- 
Social,  Executive,  Intellectual,  and 
Moral— properly  classified  on  the  other 
side.  There  are  two  sizes.  The  largest 
is  sold  in  Box.  at  $2;  The  smaller  one, 
by  mail,  post-paid,  $1. 

Phrenological  Guide.  Designed 
for  the  Use  of  Students.    Paper,  25  cts. 

Self-Culture  and  Perfection  of 
Character,  with  Management  of 
Children.    $1.25. 

Self-Instructor  in  Phrenology 

and  Physiology.  With  over  One 
Hundred  Engravings.  Paper,  50  cents; 
muslin,  75  cents. 

Symbolical  Head  and  Phreno- 

logical  Map,  on  fine  tinted  paper.  10c. 

Wells'   New  Descriptive  Chart 

for  Use  of  Examiners,  giving  a  Delinea- 
tion of  Character.  Paper,  25  cents; 
Flexible  muslin,  50  cents. 
Your  Character  from  Tour 
Likeness.  For  particulars,  how  to 
have  pictures  taken  for  examination, 
inclose  stamp  for  a  copy  of  "  Mirror  of 
the  Mind." 


American  Phrenological  Jour- 
nal  and  Life  Illustrated.  Publish- 
ed monthly,  at  $3  a  year;  30  cts.  a  No. 

Annuals   of    Phrenology    and 

Physiognomy.  One  yearly  12mo  vol. 
Price  25  cents  for  the  current  year. 
For  1865,  '66,  '67,  '68,  '69,  '70,  '71,  '72, 
'73,  nine,  containing  over  350  Hlustra- 
tions.    In  one  volume.    $2.00. 

Constitution  of" Man.— Considered 
in  Relation  to  External  Objects.  By 
George  Combe.    Muslin,  $1.50. 

Combe's  System  ot  Phrenolo- 
gy.    100  Illustrations,  $1.50. 

Chart  for  Recording  various  Develop- 
ments. Designed  for  Phrenologists. 
Paper,  10  cents. 

Defence  of  Phrenology;  Contain- 
ing an  Essay  on  the  Nature  and  Value 
of  Phrenological  Evidence.  By  Dr. 
Boardman.    Muslin,  $1.25. 

Domestic  Iiife  ;  or,  Marriage  Vindi- 
cated and  Free  Love  Exposed.  By  N. 
Sizer.     25  cents. 

Education :    Its   elementary   Princi- 

Eles  founded  on  the  Nature  of  Man. 
iy  J.  G.  Spurzheim,  M.D.    $1.25. 

Education  and  Self-Improve- 
ment  Complete.  Comprising  Physi- 
ology—Animal and  Mental;  Self-culture 
and  Memory,  and  Intellectual  Improve- 
ment.   One  vol.    $3.50. 

Expression,  its  Anatomy  and  Phi- 
losophy. By  Sir  Charles  Bell,  K.H. 
With  numerous  Notes,  and  upward  of 
Seventy  Illustrations.    $1.25. 

How  to  Read  Character.— A  New 
Dlustrated  Hand-Book  of  Phrenology 
and  Physiognomy,  for  Students  and 
Examiners.  170  Engravings.  $1.00; 
Muslin,  $1.25. 

Lectures  on  Phrenology.  — By 
Geo.  Combe.    With  Notes.    $1.50. 

Marriage.  Its  History  and  Ceremo- 
nies, with  a  Phrenological  and  Physio- 
logical Exposition  of  the  Functions  and 
Qualifications  for  Happy  Marriages. 
12mo,  cloth,  $1.25. 

matrimony  :  or,  Phrenology  and 
Physiology  applied  to  the  Selection  of 
Congenial  Companions  for  Life.   50  cts. 

memory  and  Intellectual  Im- 
provement, applied  to  Self-Education 
and  Juvenile  Instruction.    $1.25. 

mental  Science,  according  to  the 
Philosophy  of  Phrenology.  By  G.  S. 
Weaver.    $1.25. 

All  works  pertaining  to  the  "  Science  op  Man,"  including  Phrenology,  Physiognomy, 
Ethnology,  Psychology,  Physiology,  Anatomy,  Hygiene,  Dietetics,  etc.,  supplied. 
Send  stamp  for  Dlustrated  and  Descriptivo  Catalogue  with  full  titles,  also  inclose  stamp 
for  Special  Terms  to  Agents. 

Address  S.  R.  WELLS  &  CO.,  Publishers,  737  Broadway,  N.  Y* 


New  and  Standard  Health  Books, 


Anatomical  and  Physio  logical 

Plates.  Arranged  expressly  for  Lec- 
tures on  Health,  Physiology,  etc.  By 
R.  T.  Trall,  M.D.  Six,  fully  colored, 
and  mounted  on  rollers.  Price,  $15,  net. 

Accidents  and  Emergencies.— 

A  Guide  for  Treatment  of  Wounds, 
Burns,  Sprains,  Bites,  Drowning,  etc. 
New  and  revised  edition.    25  cents. 

Alcoholic  Controversy. —A  Re- 
view of  the  Westminster  Review.    50  c. 
Chemistry,  and  Its  Application 

to  Physiology,  Agriculture,  and  Com- 
merce.   By  Leibig.    25  cents. 

Children  .—Their  Management  in 
Health  and  Disease.    By  Shew.    $1.50. 

Cnre  of  Consumption  by  the 
Swedish  Movements.  By  Dr.  Ware:. 
Paper,  25  cents. 

Digestion  and  Dyspepsia.— The 
Digestive  Process  explained,  and 
Treatment  of  Dyspepsia  given.    $1.00. 

Diseases  of  the  Throat  and 
Lungs.    Illustrated.    25  cents. 

Domestic  Practice  of  Hydro- 
pathy.    By  E.  Johnson,  M.D.    $1.50. 

Family  Gymnasium.— Methods  of 
applying  Gymnastic,  Calisthenic, 
and  Kinesipathic  Exercises.    $1.50. 

Food  and  Diet.— With  Observations 
on  the  Dietetical  Regimen,  suited  for 
Disordered  States  of  the  Digestive 
Organs.    By  Pereiba.    $1.50. 

Fruits  and  Farinacea,  the 
Proper  Food  of  Man.    $1.50. 

Health  Catechism  or  Questions 
and  Answers.    By  Dr.  Trall.    10  cts. 

Hydropathic  Cook -Book. —  A 
Philosophical  Exposition  of  the  Rela- 
tions of  Pood  to  Health.    $1.25. 

Hydropathic  Encyclopedia.— 
Embracing  Anatomy,  Physiology  of 
the  Human  Body;  and  the  Preservation 
of  Health,  including  the  Nature,  Causes, 
Symptoms,  and  Treatment  of  Disease. 
By  R.  T.  Trall,  M.D.    $4.00. 

Hygeian  Home  Cook-Book;  or, 
How  to  Cook  Healthful  and  Palatable 
Food  without  Condiments.    25  cents. 

Family  Physician.— A  Ready  Pre- 
scriber  and  Hygienic  Adviser.    $4.00. 

management  of  Infancy,  Physio- 
logical and  Moral  Treatment.    $1.25. 

Medical  Electricity,  showing  its 
most  scientific  application  to  all  forms 
of  Disease.    By  White.    $2. 

Midwifery  and  the  Diseases  of 
Women.  With  General  Management 
of  Child-birth,  the  Nursery,  etc.    $1.50, 


Movement -Cure. —An  Exposition 

of  the  Swedish  Movement-Cure.    1.50. 

Mother's  Hygienic  Hand- 

Book,  for  the  Normal  Development  and 
Training  of  Women  and  Children,  and 
the  Treatment  of  their  Diseases.    $:. 

Notes  on  Beauty,  Vigor,  and 
Development;  or,  How  to  Acquire 
Plumpness,  Strength,  and  Beauty.    10c. 

Philosophy  of  the  Water-Cure. 
A  Development  of  the  Principles  of 
Health  and  Longevity.    50  cents. 

Popular  Physiology.— A  work  for 
the  general  reader,  and  arranged  as  a 
Text-book  for  Schools,  Colleges,  and 
Families.    $1.25. 

Physiology  of  Digestion,  with 
relation  to  the  principles  of  Dietetics. 
By  Andrew  Combe,  M.D.    50  cents. 

Practice  of  the  Water-Cnre.— 
An  account  of  the  various  procescs.  50c. 

Physiology,  Animal  and  Men- 
tal.  Health  of  Body  and  of  Mi»d.  $1.25. 

Principles  of  Physiology  applied 
to  the  Preservation  of  Health  and  the 
Improvement  of  Physical  and  Mental 
Education.    By  Combe.    $1.50. 

The  Science  of  Human  Life.  By 
Sylvester  Graham.    $3.00. 

Sober  and  Temperate  Life,— 
Discourses  and  Letters  of  Louis  Cor- 
naro,  with  Biography.    50  cents. 

Tea  and  Coffee,  Their  Physical,  In- 
tellectual, and  Moral  Effects.    25  cts. 

The  Bath.— Its  History  and  Uses  in 
Health  and  Disease.    Paper,  25  cents. 

The  Human  Feet.— Their  Shape, 
Dress,  and  Care.    Musiin,  $1.00. 

The  True  Healing  Art;  or,  Hygi- 
enic vs.  Drug  Medication.     25  cents. 

The  Parents'  Guide;  or,  Human 
Development  through  Inherited  Ten- 
dencies.   $1.25. 

The  Hygienic  Hand-Book. — A 
Guide  for  the  Sick-Room.    $1.50. 

Tobacco.  Its  Physical,  Intelleclual, 
and  Moral  Effects.    25  cents. 

Water- Cure  in  Chronic  dis- 
eases.—Causes,  Progress  and  Termina- 
tion of  the  Diseases,  and  Treatmeut. 
By  J.  M.  Gully,  M.D.    $1.50. 

"Water-Cure  for  the  Million.— 
Process  of  Water-Cure  Explained.    25c. 

Special  List.— We  have  also  Private 
Medical  Works  and  Treatises,  which, 
although  not  adapted  to  general  circu- 
lation, arc  invaluable  to  those  who 
need  them.  This  Special  List  will  be 
sent  on  receipt  of  stamp. 


For  sale  by  Booksellers,  or  sent  by  mail,  post-paid,  on  receipt  of  price.  Agents  Wanted 

Address  S.  R.  WELLS  &  CO.,  Publishers,  737  Broadway,  N.  Y, 


Works  for  Home  Improvement. 


The  Indispensable  Hand-Book 

for  Home;  Improvement.  Comprising 
"  How  t®  Write,"  "  How  to  Talk,* 
"How  to  Behave."  and  "How  to  Do 
Business."    One  large  vol.,  $2.25. 

How  to  Write,  a  Manual  of  Compo- 
sition and  Letter-Writing.  Muslin,  75c. 

Ho iv  to  Talk,  a  Manual  of  Conversa- 
tion and  Debate,  with  Mistakes  in 
Speaking  Corrected.    75  cents. 

How  to  Behave,  a  Manual  of  Eti- 
quette and  Guide  to  Personal  Habits, 
with  Rules  for  Debating.    75  cents. 

How  to  Bo  Business,  a  Pocket 
Manual  of  Practical  Affairs,  and  a  Guide 
to  Success,  with  Legal  Forms.    75  cts. 

Right  Word  in  the  Right 
Place.  Dictionary  ol  Synonyms,  Tech- 
nical Terms,  Phrases,  etc.    75  cents. 

Weaver's  Works.- Comprising 
'•  Hopes  and  Helps,"  "  Aims  and  Aids," 
"  Ways  of  Life.'*    One  vol.,  $2.50. 

Hopes  and  Helps  for  the  Young 
Character,  Avocation,  Health,  Amuse- 
ment, Courtship  and  Marriage.    $1.25. 

Aims  and  Aids  for  Girls  and 
Young  Women,  on  Duties  of  Life.  $1.55. 

Ways  of  Life,  showing  the  Right 
Way  and  the  Wrong  Way;  the  Way  of 
Honor  and  the  Way  of  Dishonor.    $1. 

Life  at  Home;  or,  the  Family  and 
its  Members.  Husbands,  Wives,  Par- 
ents, Children,  Brothers.  Sisters,  Em- 
ployers and  Employed.    $1.50;  gilt,  $2. 

Wedlock;  or,  the  Right  Relations  of 
the  Sexes,  disclosing  the  Laws  of  Con- 
jugal Selection,  Showing  Wbo  May  and 
Who  May  Not  Marry.  By  S.  R.  Wells. 
$1.50;  fnll  gilt,  $2. 

Oratory— Sacred  and  Secular; 
or,  The  Extemporaneous  Speaker.  In- 
cluding a  Chairman's  Guide.    $1.25. 

The  Temperance  Reformation. 

From  the  first  Temperance  Society  in 
the  U.  S.  to  the  Maine  Law.    $1.25. 

How  to  Paint  .—Designed  for 
Tradesmen,  Mechanics,  and  Farmers. 
Plain  and  Fancy  Painting,  Graining, 
Varnishing,  Kalsomining,  and  Paper 
Hanging.    By  Gardner.    $1.00. 

The  Carriage  Painter's  Illus- 
trated  Manual.  A  Treatise  on  the 
Art,  Science,  and  Mystery  of  Coach, 
Carriage,  and  Car  Painting.    $1.00. 

Man  in  Genesis  and  in  Geology; 
or.  the  Biblical  account  of  Man's  Crea- 
tion tested  by  Scientific  Theories.    $1. 

Heart  Echoes*  a  Book  of  Poems- 
By  Helen  A.  Manville.    Cloth,  $1. 

The  Conversion  of  St.  Paul.— 
By  Geo.  Jarvis  Geer,  D.D.    75  cents. 

Address  S.  R.  WELLS  &  CO., 


The  Emphatic  Diaglott ;  or,  The 

New  Testament  in  Greek  and  English. 
Containing  the  Original  Greek  Text  of 
the  New  Testament,  with  an  Interline- 
ary  English  Translation.  By  Benj. 
Wilson.    Price  $4;  extra  fine,  $5. 

The    Culture    of   the    Human 

Voice.  — Its  Anatomy,  Physiology, 
Pathology,  Therapeutics,  and  Training. 
By  Trall.    50  cts. ;  cloth,  75  cts. 

JEsop's     Fables      Illustrated.— 

People's  Pictorial  Ed.  Tinted  paper,  $1. 
Gems  of  Goldsmith.— The  Travel- 
er, The  Deserted  Village,  and  the  Her- 
mit.  With  Illustrations.   Full  gilt.    $1. 

Pope's  Essay  on  Man.— With 
Notes.  Beautifully  illustrated.  Gilt,  $1. 

Library    of     Mesmerism      and 

Psychology.  Comprising  the  Philoso- 
hpy  of  Mesmerism— Fascination.— The 
Macrocosm.— Electrical  Pyschology.— 
The  Science  of  the  Soul.  One  vol.  $3.50. 

Fascination  :  or,  the  Power  of 
Charming.    By  J.  B    Newman.    $1.25. 

Salem  Witchcraft,  with  Planchette 
Mystery  and  Modern  Spiritualism,  and 
Dr.  Doddridge's  Dream.    $1. 

Fruit  Culture  lor  the  Million. 
A  Guide  to  the  Cultivation  and  Man 
agement  of  Fruit  Trees.    New  Ed.  75c. 

Saving  and  Wasting,  or  Economy 
illustrated  in  a  Tale  of  Real  Life.  $1.25. 

Footprints  of  Life;  or,  Faith  and 
Nature  Keconciled.    A  Poem.    $1.25. 

A  Self-Made  Woman;  or,  Mary 
Idyl's  Trials  and  Triumphs.    $1.50. 

Home  for  All,  or  the  Gravel  Wall. 
Showing  the  Superiority  of  Concrete 
over  Brick,  Stone,  or  Frame  Houses, . 
with  Octagon  Plans.    $1.25. 

Philosophy  of  Electrieal  Psy- 
chology.    In  Twelve  Lectures.    $1.25. 

Philosophy  of  Mesmerism  and 
Clairvoyance.  Six  Lectures,  with 
Instructions.    50  cents. 

Thoughts  for  the  Young  Men 
and  Young  Women  op  America.   75c. 

The  Christian  Household.— Em- 
bracing the  Husband,  Wife,  Father, 
Mother,  Brother,  and  Sister.    75  cents. 

Capital  Punishment,  or  the 
Proper  Treatment  of  Criminals.  10  cts. 
Education  of  the  Heart.  10  cts.  Father 
Matthew,  the  Temperance  Apostle.  10c. 
Good  Man's  Legacy.  10  cts.  Gospel 
among  Animals.  10  cts.  The  Planchette 
Mystery— how  to  work  it.  20c.  Alpha- 
bet for  Deaf  and  Dumb.  10c. 

Temperance  in  Congress.— 25c. 

Publishers,  7B7  Broadway,  N.  Y. 


Specially  Devoted  to  the  "Science  of  Man."  Contains  Phrenology 
and  Physiognomy,  with  all  the  "  Signs  of  Character,  and  how  to  read 
them  ;"  Ethnology,  or  the  Natural  History  of  Man  in  all  his  relations 
to  Life;  Practical  Articles  on  Physiology,  Diet,  Exercise  and  the 
Laws  of  Life  and  Health.  Portraits,  Sketches  and  Biographies  of  the 
leading  Men  and  Women  of  the  World,  are  important  features. 
Much  general  and  useful  information  on  the  leading  topics  of  the  day  ia 
given.  It  is  intended  to  be  the  most  interesting  and  instructive  Pictorial 
Family  Magazine  Published.     Subscriptions  may  commence  now. 

Few  works  will  better  repay  perusal  in  the  family  than  this  rich  storehouse  of  Instruc- 
tion and  entertainment— JV    T.  Tribune.    It  grows  in  Variety  and  Value.     Efre   Pngt. 


Terms.— A  New  Volume,  the  63d.  commence?  with  the  July  Number.  Pub- 
lished Monthly,  in  octavo  form,  at  $3  a  year,  in  advance.  Sample  numbers  sent  by  first 
post,  80  cents.    Clubs  of  ten  or  more,  $-2  each  per  copy,  and  an  extra  copy  to  agent. 

Ve  are  now  offering  the  most  liberal  oremiums  ever  ^iven  for  clubs,  for  1876.  Inclose 
stamps  for  list.    Address.  S.  K.  WELLS  &  CO.,  737  Broadway,  New  York. 


University  of 
Connecticut 

Libraries 


